Fy2016 17 Design Standards

FY 2016-17 Design Standards
Effective for Projects with Lettings in the Fiscal Year (FY) from
July 1, 2016 through June 30, 2017
State of Florida Department of Transportation
Office of Design
For Construction and Maintenance Operations
on the State Highway System
Topic No. 625-010-003
Mail Station 32
605 Suwannee Street
Tallahassee, Florida 32399-0450
F D O T
FY 2 0 1 6-17
D e s i g n
S t a n d a r d s
NOTICE
The Design Standards are intended to support the various engineering processes for construction and maintenance operations on
the State Highway System. They are established to ensure the application of uniform standards in the preparation of contract
plans for construction of roadways and structures. These Standards may be used for maintenance operations or adopted by
other authorities for use on projects under their jurisdiction.
It is the responsibility of the Engineer of Record using these Standards to determine the fitness for a particular use
of each standard in the design of a project. The inappropriate use of and adherence to these standards does not exempt the
engineer from the professional responsibility of developing an appropriate design.
PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS AND PROCESSES

The use of any design, method, process, material or device either expressed or implied by these standards that are covered by
patent, copyright, or proprietary privilege is the sole responsibility of the user. Any infringement on the rights of the inventor,
patentee, assignee or licensee shall be the sole responsibility of the user. For additional information refer to Subsection 7-3
of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
DISTRIBUTION OF EXEMPT PUBLIC DOCUMENTS:

It is the policy of the Department to protect the State Highway Systems infrastructure by defining the responsibilities for
disclosure and use of sensitive documents showing the structural elements used in the design and construction of Department
structures. Section 119.071(3)(b), Florida Statute (F.S.)
, provides that these sensitive documents are exempt from Chapter 119,
F.S., Floridas public records law. In accordance with Section 119.071(3)(b), F.S., the Department has adopted Procedure
050-020-026, Distribution of Exempt Public Documents Concerning Department Structures and Security System Plans, to define the
method and responsibilities for disclosure and use of these sensitive documents.
Structure is defined in Section 334.03(27), F.S., as a bridge, viaduct, tunnel, causeway, approach, ferry slip, culvert, toll plaza,
gate, or other similar facility used in connection with a transportation facility which would include related pipes and pipe
systems. However, for the purpose of the public records law and Procedure 050-020-026, the Department has determined that
the term structure includes bridges with an opening of more than 20 feet between undercopings of abutments or spring lines
of arches or extreme ends of openings for multiple boxes, and those other bridges subject to safety inspection under Section
335.074, F.S.
A roadway is not otherwise a structure for the purposes of Procedure 050-020-026.
Therefore, plans, blueprints, schematic drawings, and diagrams of structures owned by the Department are exempt from the
public records provisions of Chapter 119, F.S. This exemption includes draft, preliminary, and final formats as described in
Procedure 050-020-026 and includes paper, electronic, and other formats. The Department has provided for the limited release
of such documents in Procedure 050-020-026.
Entities or persons outside the Department requesting or receiving copies of any portion of plans or other documents
considered Exempt Documents under Procedure 050-020-026 must complete and submit a request form (
Form No. 050-020-26).
The form also advises the requestor that the entity or person receiving the documents shall maintain their exempt status. This
procedure applies to all Department internal or contracted staff who have access to such Exempt Documents in their
Department work. Refer to Procedure 050-020-026 for additional requirements.
The official version of the Design Standards is the PDF version and can be found at:
http://www.dot.state.fl.us/rddesign/DesignStandards/Standards.shtm
FY 2016-17 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Index
Number
Title
Revisions
Index
Number
Title
Curbs,Concrete Pavement and Sidewalks
Booklet Revisions
Abbreviationsand Symbols
1
Standard Abbreviations
Standard Symbols
Erosion Control and Water Quality
300
Curb & Curb and Gutter
301
Turn Lanes
302
Traffic Separators
303
Curb Return Profiles
304
Detectable Warnings and Sidewalk Curb Ramps
305
Concrete Pavement Joints
306
Bridge Approach Expansion Joint -Concrete Pavement
104
Permanent Erosion Control
307
Miscellaneous Utility Details
105
Shoulder Sodding and Turf on Existing Facilities
308
Concrete Slab Replacement
310
Concrete Sidewalk
Drainage
200
201
Structure Bottoms -Type J and P

Supplementary Details for Manholes and Inlets
Traffic Railings
400
Guardrail
Index
Number
Title
535
Tractor Crossings
540
Settlement Plate
544
Landscape Installation
546
Sight Distance at Intersections
560
Railroad Crossings
Traffic Control Through Work Zones

600
GeneralInformation for Traffic ControlThrough Work Zones
601
Two-Lane,Two-Way,Work Outside Shoulder
602
Two-Lane,Two-Way,Work On Shoulder
603
Two-Lane,Two-Way,Work Within The TravelWay
604
Two-Lane,Two-Way,Work in Intersection
605
Two-Lane,Two-Way,Work Near Intersection
606
Two-Lane,Two-Way,Work Within the TravelWay -SignalControl
607
Two-Lane,Two-Way,Mobile Operation,Work On Shoulder and
206
Trench Drain
402
GuardrailTransitions and Connections for Existing Bridges
210
Curb Inlet Tops -Types 1,2,3 and 4
404
GuardrailTransitions -Existing Post& Beam Bridge Railings
211
Curb Inlet Tops -Types 5 and 6
212
Curb Inlet -Type 7
213
Curb Inlet -Type 8
214
Curb Inlet Top -Type 9
410
215
Curb Inlet Top -Type 10
411
216
Closed Flume Inlet
412
217
Median Barrier Inlets Types 1,2,3,4 and 5
414
218
Barrier WallInlet
415
219
Concrete Barrier WallInlet
420
220
Gutter Inlet -Type S
421
Traffic Railing -(Median 32" F Shape)
221
Gutter Inlet -Type V
422
Traffic Railing -(42" VerticalShape)
230
Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type A
423
Traffic Railing -(32" VerticalShape)
231
Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type B
424
Traffic Railing -(CorralShape)
232
Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type C,D,E and H
425
Traffic Railing -(42" F Shape)
233
Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type F and G
430
Crash Cushion Details
234
Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type J
461
Opaque VisualBarrier
235
Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type K
470
Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit) GeneralNote & Details
240
Skimmer For Outlet ControlStructures
471
Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit)Narrow Curb
241
Skimmers For French-Drain Outlets
472
Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit)Wide Strong Curb Type 1
245
Underdrain Inspection Box
473
Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit)Wide Strong Curb Type 2
250
Straight Concrete Endwalls -Single And Multiple Pipe
474
Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit) Intermediate Curb
251
Straight Concrete Endwalls -Single And Double 60"Pipe
475
Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit)Wide Curb Type 1
252
476
Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit)Wide Curb Type 2
253
477
Thrie-Beam PanelRetrofit (Concrete Handrail)
650
Two-Lane Two-Way,RuralStructure Replacement
255
Straight Concrete Endwalls -Single 84"Pipe
480
Traffic Railing-(VerticalFace Retrofit) GeneralNotes & Details
651
Multilane Divided,Maintenance and Construction
258
Straight Sand-Cement Endwalls
481
Traffic Railing-(VerticalFace Retrofit)Narrow Curb
655
Traffic Pacing
260
U-Type Concrete Endwalls With Grates -15" to 30"Pipe
482
Traffic Railing-(VerticalFace Retrofit)Wide Curb
660
Pedestrian Controlfor Closure of Sidewalks
261
U-Type Concrete Endwalls-Baffles and Grate Optional - 15"
483
Traffic Railing-(VerticalFace Retrofit) Intermediate Curb
665
Limited Access,Temporary Opening
To 30" Pipe
484
Traffic Railing-(VerticalFace Retrofit) Spread Footing Approach
667
TollPlaza,Traffic ControlStandards
670
Motorist Awareness System
264
U-Type Concrete Endwall-Energy Dissipator -30" to 72"Pipe
266
Winged Concrete Endwalls -Single Round Pipe
268
U-Type Sand-Cement Endwalls
270
Flared End Section
272
Cross Drain Mitered End Section
273
Side Drain Mitered End Section
280
Miscellaneous Drainage Details
281
Ditch Pavement and Sodding
282
Back of Sidewalk Drainage
283
Median Opening Flume
405
GuardrailTransitions -Existing Post& Beam Bridge Railings
Multilane,Work On Shoulder
613
Multilane,Work Within TravelWay-Median or Outside Lane
614
Multilane,Work Within TravelWay-Center Lane
615
Multilane,Work in Intersection
616
Multilane,Work Near Intersection-Median or Outside Lane
617
Multilane,Work In Intersection -Center Lane
618
Multilane,Work In Intersection -Two Lanes Closed-45mph or Less
619
Multilane,Mobile Operations Work on Shoulder,Work Within
Pier Protection Barrier

Low Profile Barrier
Type K Temporary Concrete Barrier System
Temporary Concrete Barrier
Traffic Railing -(32" F Shape)
TravelWay
620
Multilane,Divided,Temporary Diversion Connection
621
Multilane Undivided,Temporary Diversion Connection
622
Multilane,Work Near Intersection-Temporary Diversion

Connection 35mph or Less
623
Multilane,Work Within the TravelWay Double Lane Closure
625
Temporary Road Closure- 5 Minutes or Less
628
Two Way Left Turn Lane Closure
630
Crossover for Paving Train Operations,Rural
631
Temporary Crossover
640
Converting Two-Lanes to Four-Lanes Divided,Rural
641
Converting Two-Lanes to Four-Lanes Divided,Urban
642
Transitions for Temporary Concrete Barrier Wallon Freeway

Facilities
General
500
Removalof Organic and Plastic Material
505
Embankment Utilization
506
Miscellaneous Earthwork Details
510
Superelevation -RuralHighways,Urban Freeways and High
Roadside Safety
700
Roadside Offsets
Fencing and Pedestrian Railings
Speed Urban Highways

511
514
515
Fence Location
801
Fence -Type A
802
Fence -Type B
803
Cantilever Slide Gate -Type B Fence
810
Bridge Fencing (Vertical)
811
Bridge Fencing (Curved Top)
812
Bridge Fencing (Enclosed)
820
27" Concrete Parapet With Pedestrian/Bicycle With Bullet Railing
821
Bridge Aluminum Pedestrian/Bicycle Bullet Railing for Traffic
OptionalBase Group and StructuralNumbers

Turnouts
517
Raised Rumble Strips
286
Underdrain
518
Shoulder Rumble Strips
287
Concrete Pavement Subdrainage
519
Rumble Striping
288
Deep WellInjection Box
521
Concrete Steps
289
Concrete Box Culvert Details (LRFD)
525
Ramp Terminals
291
SupplementalDetails for Precast Concrete Box Culverts
526
Roadway Transitions
292
Standard Precast Concrete Box Culverts
527
DirectionalMedian Opening
530
Rest Area Pavilion
532
Mailboxes
516
800
Superelevation -Urban Highways and Streets
French Drain
Safety Modifications for Endwalls
Multilane,Work Outside Shoulder
612
Concrete Barrier Wall
Concrete Shoulder Gutter Spillway
Safety Modifications for Inlets in Box Culverts
611
(Wide Curbs)
284
295
Two-Lane,Two-Way,Temporary Diversion Connection
(Narrow & Recessed Curbs)
285
293
Work Within the TravelWay

608
Turnouts -Resurfacing Projects
Railing (32" F Shape)

822
Bridge Aluminum Pedestrian/Bicycle Bullet Railing Details
825
42"Concrete Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing
851
Bridge Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing (Steel)
852
SteelPedestrian/Bicycle Railing
FY 2016-17 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Index
Number
Title
861
Bridge Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing (Aluminum)
862
Aluminum Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing
870
Aluminum Pipe Guiderail
880
SteelPipe Guiderail
Noise And Perimeter Wall Systems
Index
Number
Index
Number
Title
Traffic Signal and Equipment
Title
Square and Round Concrete Piles
17700
Pull& Splice Box
20600
Notes and Details For Square Prestressed Concrete Piles
17721
Conduit Installation Details
20601
Square Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices
17723
SteelStrain Pole
20602
EDC Instrumentation For Square Prestressed Concrete Piles
17725
Concrete Poles
20612
12"Square Prestressed Concrete Pile
17727
SignalCable & Span Wire Installation Details
20614
5200
Precast Noise Walls
17733
AerialInterconnect
20618
5210
Traffic Railing/Noise Wall(8'-0")
17736
ElectricalPower Service
20620
5211
Traffic Railing/Noise Wall(14'-0")
17743
Standard MastArm Assemblies
20624
5212
Traffic Railing/Noise Wall(8'-0")Junction Slab
17745
MastArm Assemblies
20630
5213
Traffic Railing/Noise WallT-Shaped Spread Footing
17748
Free-Swinging Internally-Illuminated Street Sign Assemblies
20631
High Moment Capacity 30"Square Prestressed Concrete Pile
5214
Traffic Railing/Noise WallL-Shaped Spread Footing
17764
Pedestrian ControlSignalInstallation Details
20654
54" Precast/Post-Tensioned Concrete Cylinder Pile
5215
Traffic Railing/Noise WallTrench Footing
17781
Vehicle Loop Installation Details
20660
60" Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pile
5250
Perimeter Walls
17784
Pedestrian Detector Assembly Installation Details
Wall Systems
Cabinet Installation Details

Standard Signal Operating Plans
20900
Approach Slabs (Flexible Pavement Approaches)
20910
Approach Slabs (Rigid Pavement Approaches)
6010
C-I-P Cantilever Retaining Wall
17881
Advance Warning For R/R Crossing
6011
Gravity Wall
17882
Railroad Grade Crossing Traffic ControlDevices
17890
Traffic ControlDevices For Movable Span Bridge Signals
6020
PermanentMSE Retaining WallSystems
6030
Temporary MSE Retaining WallSystems
6040
Precast Concrete Sheet Pile Wall
6100
MSE WallCoping (Precast or C-I-P)
6110
WallCoping With Traffic Railing/Junction Slab
6120
WallCoping With Traffic Railing/Raised Sidewalk
6130
WallCoping/Parapet With C-I-P Sidewalk
6200
Coping Mounted Light Pole Pedestal
6201
Junction Slab at Drainage Inlet Openings
Signing and Markings

11200
Multi-Column Ground Sign
Planning
17900
21200
Light Pole Pedestal
CCTV Pole Placement
21210
Conduit Details
18101
TypicalCCTV Site
21220
Navigation Light System Details (Fixed Bridges)
18102
Grounding And Lightning Protection
21240
Maintenance Lighting For Box Girders
18104
TypicalCCTV Cabinet Equipment Layout
21250
Access Hatch Assembly For SteelBox Sections
18105
CCTV Block Diagram
21251
Access Hatch Assembly For Concrete Box Sections
18107
Ground Mounted CCTV Cabinet
21252
Access Door Assembly For Concrete Box Sections
11310
Cantilever Sign Structure
18110
Camera Mounting Details
11320
Span Sign Structure
18111
SteelCCTV Pole
11860
Single Column Ground Signs
18113
Concrete CCTV Pole
11861
Single Column Cantilever Ground Mounted Sign
11862
Roadside Flashing Beacon Assembly
11870
Single Post Bridge Mounted Sign Support
11871
Single Post Median Barrier Mounted Sign Support
13417
Mounting Exit Number Panels To Highway Signs
17302
TypicalSections For Placement of Single & Multi-Column Signs
17328
TypicalSigning for Truck Weigh & Inspection Stations
17344
SchoolSigns & Markings
17345
Interchange Markings
20045
Welcome Center Signing

TypicalPlacement Of Reflective Pavement Markers
21600
Temporary Detour Bridge GeneralNotes and Details
21610
Temporary Detour Bridge Details - Timber Pile Foundations
21620
Florida-I 36 Beam
Temporary Detour Bridge Details - Steel H Pile Foundations
21630
Florida-I 45 Beam
Temporary Detour Bridge Details - Steel Pipe Pile Foundations
21640
Temporary Detour Bridge Thrie-Beam Guardrail
-Standard Details
-Standard Details
20054
Florida-I 54 Beam
-Standard Details
20063
Florida-I 63 Beam
-Standard Details
20072
Florida-I 72 Beam
-Standard Details
20078
Florida-I 78 Beam
-Standard Details
20084
Florida-I 84 Beam
-Standard Details
20096
Florida-I 96 Beam
-Standard Details
20120
AASHTO Type IIBeam
Post-Tension Details
21801
Post-Tensioning VerticalProfiles
21802
Post-Tensioning Anchorage Protection
21803
Post-Tensioning Anchorage and Grouting Details
20199
Build-Up & Deflection Data For Prestressed I-Beams
20210
TypicalFlorida-U Beam Details and Notes
20248
Florida-U 48 Beam
-Standard Details
Fender System Details

21930
Fender System - Prestressed Concrete Piles
Tourist Oriented DirectionalSigns
17355
SpecialSign Details
17356
Span Wire Mounted Sign Details
17359
Temporary Detour Bridges
Signing For Motorist Services
17351
17357
Standard Bar Bending Details
TypicalFlorida-IBeam Details and Notes
Traffic Controls For Street Terminations
17352
17354
Dynamic Message Sign Walk-In
Prestressed Concrete Beams
20036
17350
Standard Bar Bending Details

21300
18300
20010
17349
Poured Joint With Backer Rod Expansion Joint System
18100
Pole Mounted CCTV Cabinet
Bicycle Markings
Strip SealExpansion Joint
21110
StructuresAccessand Lighting
18108
17347
21100
Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS)
SteelOverhead Sign Structures
SpecialMarking Areas
Bridge Expansion Joints
Traffic Monitoring Site
11300
17346
Approach Slabs
17841
17870
20254
Florida-U 54 Beam
-Standard Details
20263
Florida-U 63 Beam
-Standard Details
20272
Florida-U 72 Beam
-Standard Details
20299
Build-Up and Deflection Data For Florida-U Beams
Bridge Weight Restrictions

RuralNarrow Bridge Treatment
Roadway Lighting
Bridge Bearings
Prestressed Concrete Pile System Details

22600
Notes and Details for Square CFRP & SS Prestressed
22601
Square CFRP and SS Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices
Concrete Piles
22612
12" Square CFRP and SS Prestressed Concrete Pile
22614
17500
ConventionalLighting
17501
Highway Lighting GeneralNotes
17502
High Mast Lighting
22630
17504
Service Point Details
20511
Bearing Plates (Type I) - Prestressed Florida-I & AASHTO Type II Beams
22654
17505
ExternalLighting For Signs
20512
Bearing Plates (Type 2) -Prestressed Florida-I& AASHTO Type II Beams
22660
17515
Standard Aluminum Lighting
20502
20510
Beveled Bearing Plate Details -Prestressed Florida-U Beams

Composite Elastomeric Bearing Pads-Prestressed Florida-I&
AASHTO Type II Beams
22618
22624
FY 2016-17 REVISIONS
Index
No.
Sheet
No.
Description
Standard Abbreviations
1
1 of 4
Index
No.
Sheet
No.
Fencing and Pedestrian Railings
Added CFRP = Carbon Fiber Reinforced Polymer.

851
1 of 3
Added 4-bolt option as dashed lines in Scheme 1.
852
1 of 8
Added "HSS1.500x0.125" Handrail Joint/Splice

Sleeve option to TABLE 1.
861
1 of 3
Added 4-bolt option as dashed lines in Scheme 1.
862
1 of 9

Sleeve option to TABLE 1.
870
1 of 5
Added "1.50 OD x 0.125 Wall" Handrail Joint/Splice

Sleeve option to RAILING MEMBER DIMENSIONS
TABLE.
Standard Symbols
2
3 of 4
Added/Changed line types to support Engineering

and CADD's release of SS4.
Drainage
201
4 of 5
Description
Added Note #5 for Fiber Reinforced Concrete to

the NOTES FOR PRECAST OPTIONS & EQUIVALENT
REINFORCEMENT SUBSTITUTION.
Index
No.
Sheet
No.
Traffic Signal and Equipment

1 of 1
Clarified that the Pearock/Crushed Stone to be

placed under the Pull Box only.
17727
2 of 2
Deleted the Pivotal Hanger Assembly; Changed the

Upper and Lower Reinforcement Plates to Tri-Stud
Wire Clamps; Changed the Message Cable Clamp;
Deleted Notes #1, 3-5 and Added new note;
Deleted the Vertical Clearance Information;
Changed Bottom Tether Clamp to a Tri-Stud
Clamp.
17745
2 of 6
Changed Note #1 and SECTION A-A to "Structural"

Grout Pad.
17781
1 of 2
Changed GENERAL NOTE #3.
17700
Curbs, Concrete Pavement and Sidewalks

305
1 of 4
Updated Sheet for clarification; Added detail

showing Longitudinal Joint and Transverse Joint
lines.
Traffic Railings
3 of 26 Changed Call Out for Clear Zone reference to PPM.
400
16 of 26
403
All
410
25 of 25
Changed Note for the LOCATION AT CURB & GUTTER

SECTIONS DETAIL L reference to PPM.
880
Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS)
5200
Changed the CLEAR ZONE WIDTHS FOR WORK

ZONES, reference to PPM.
430
1 of 2
Changed GENERAL NOTES #6, #8 and #9.
All
11200
Traffic Control Through Work Zones

3 of 12
600
603
612
613
All
1 of 1
1 of 2
Deleted all references to, and requirements for,

Class A RPMs.
Rearranged for clarification; Changed General
Note #3 to require Temporary Raised Rumble
Strips at 55mph and above; Changed spacing of
Temporary Raised Rumble Strips and the
associated additional signs; Deleted details and
notes for AFADs (information will now be in the
Specifications and APL Drawings).
Added Work Zone Sign callouts to signs located in
the median.
Corrected the Note for "Lateral Transitions..." in
Table II.
11300
1 of 2
Clarified GENERAL NOTE #5 is for non-emergency

conditions.
Roadside Safety
1 of 2
Changed ROADSIDE TERRAIN FIGURE 1 Note

reference to PPM.
2 of 2
Changed GENERAL NOTE #2 reference to PPM.
700
2 of 3
Changed Foundation Elevation Notes; Clarified the

Base Connections Details, Details B and Foundation
Elevation call outs; Changed the Assembly Of Base
Connection Notes.
Changed Pole Top Plate diameter and bolt circle

for 70' tall pole.
18113
3 of 4
Deleted the Dormant Strand, Changed the location

of the #4 and #5 Rebar and Deleted the Active
and Dormant text in the Strand spacing callouts
for STRAND PATTERN 1 AND 2.
Temporary Detour Bridges

1 of 4
2 of 4
21210
Clarified Notes 2, 3, 6 & 8; Revised Note 7.

Revised Conduit stub-out details.
3 of 4
4 of 4
Revised Conduit stub-out details.
21600
3 of 7
Remove 7 3/4" dimension and AB307 Transom DW

Heavy.
21610
1 of 3
Changed to triple bearing configuration.
Reorganized for clarification.
21620
1 of 2
Changed to triple bearing configuration.
Added Structural to the Grout Pad call out.
21630
Deleted the SHIM Column for the Table; Changed

the rotation of the Stiffener Plate; Changed Table.
1 of 1
Changed the U-Bolt call out in the Wind Beam

Connecting Detail to read 1/2" U-bolt With
Double Nuts and Flat Washer...; Changed the
GENERAL NOTES.
3-5 of 5 Removed Abbreviation Note.
2-3 of 3 Changed to triple bearing configuration.
Prestressed Concrete Piles
4 of 9
Deleted Note #1.B.
22600
All
New Index
22601
All
New Index
6 of 9
Changed the U-Bolt call out in the Wind Beam

Connecting Detail to read 1/2" U-bolt With nut,
Flat Washer and Lock Washer.
22612
All
New Index
11860
17346
4 of 4
Added Conduit stub-out detail. Clarified Notes 2, 3

& 4; Deleted Note 5.
3 of 3
2 of 5
18111
Reorganized for clarification.

Moved General Notes into the IDS; Changed Tables;
Clarified and Corrected all details.
All
11310
13-14 of
Changed the title of the drawing.
14
Roadway Lighting
17504
619
Added Notes 1.A and 1.B for approved Producer

prestressed post options.
1 of 3
Changed the CLEAR ZONE WIDTHS FOR WORK

ZONES note reference to the PPM.
Added new Note #1 to the TEMPORARY SIGN

5 of 12
SUPPORT NOTES.
12 of 12
1 of 16
Signing and Markings
Corrected the Bar 5C & 5D total height

measurement.
3 of 7

Sleeve option to RAILING MEMBER DIMENSION
TABLE.
Noise And Perimeter Wall Systems
Deleted Index.
415
1 of 5
Description
1 of 2
22614
All
New Index
22618
All
New Index
22624
All
New Index
Deleted "Service Conductors Shall" call out from

the AERIAL FEED DETAIL A.
22630
All
New Index
All
New Index
All
New Index
17505
2 of 2
Added DETAIL 'B' (Hanger Pipe Connection).
22654
17515
2 of 8
Added ASTM Alloy 6061-T6 to Note 3.A.
22660
Abbreviation
C
2-L
Meaning
Celsius (degree)
Micro
Two-Lane
Back
AASHTO
Annual Average Daily Traffic

American Association Of State Highway Officials
American Association Of State Highway And
Transportation Officials
ABC
Asphalt Base Course
Abd.
Abandoned
ABS
Acrylonitrite-Butadiene-Styrene Pipe
AC or Asph. Conc.
AC, Ac.
Accel.
Asphaltic Concrete
Acre
American Concrete Institute
Act.
Actuated
ADA
Americans With Disabilities Act, The
Adh.
Adhesive
Adj.
Adjust
ADT
Average Daily Traffic
Agg.
Ah.
Automated Flagger Assistance Device

Aggregate
Ahead
AISC
American Institute Of Steel Construction
AISI
American Iron and Steel Institute
Alt.
Alum., Al.
AM
ANSI
Alternate
Aluminum
12:00 Midnight Until 11:59 Noon
Apparent Opening Size
APL
Approved Products List
Appl.
Apprh.
Approx.
ARTBA
Artf.
Asph.
Assem.
Assn.
Assoc.
BCPPA
BCT
BCWE
Boulevard
BM
Cor.
Bench Mark
Bndry.
BO
Corr.
Boundary
Cov.
Basin Outlet
CP
Corner
Corrugated
Cover
Concrete Pipe
BOS
Beginning Of Survey
CPE
Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe
Bot.
Bottom
CPT
Cone Penetration Test
BP
Borrow Pit
Bq.
Becquerel
Br.
Bridge
Brg.
Brkwy.
BT
Btfly.
Btwn., B/W
CRA
Crs. or Cse.
Bearing
CS
Breakaway
CSIP
C & G
C.C.
C.I.P., C-I-P
CA
Control Radius or County Road

Clear Recovery Area
Course
Curve To Spiral
Cost Savings Initiative Proposal
Buried Telephone Cable or Duct
CSL
Cross-hole Sonic Logging
Butterfly
CSP
Corrugated Steel Pipe
Between
BW
-----------------
CR
CT
Clear Trunk
Barbed Wire, Bottom Width or Both Ways
Ctlvr.
Cantilever
-----------------
CTPB
Cement Treated Permeable Base
Cantilever Length, Cut, Colorless, Coulomb

or Cycle Length
Curb And Gutter
Ctr., Ctrs.
Center
CU or Cu
Copper
Cu. Yd., CY, or C.Y.
Crash Cushion
Culv.
Cast In Place
Cwt.
Coarse Aggregate
Cyl.
CAP
Corrugated Aluminum Pipe
Cap.
Capacity
Cubic Yard
Culvert
Hundredweight
Cylindrical
----------------- D ----------------D
Degree Of Curvature, Depth,

Density, Distance, Diameter
or Directional Distribution
D, Dia. or
Diameter
CBC
Concrete Box Culvert
Artificial
CBS
Concrete Box Structure
DBI
Ditch Bottom Inlet
Center to Center
Dbl.
Double
Center to Center Each Way
DCS
Degree Of Curvature (Spiral)
Asphalt
Assembly
Association
CB
CC, C/C or C to C
CCEW
CCTV
Associate, Association
Attention
Attenuator
Auxiliary
Azimuth
----------------- B -----------------
BCPCMP
Coordinate
Blvd.
American Road & Transportation Builders

Association
American Welding Society
BCPA
Coord.
Cable Television
AWS
BC
Begin Length Of Need
CATV
American Wire Gauge
BCCMP
Controller
BLON
Approximate
AWG
Basc.
Continuation
Contractor
Corrugated Aluminized Steel Pipe
Avenue
B/C, B.C.
Construct or Construction
Contrl.
CASP
Ave.
B to B
Concrete
Bulkhead
Approach
Asphalt Treated Permeable Base
Az
Connect or Connection
Contr.
Blkhd.
Building
Capital Letters
ATPB
Aux. or Auxil.
Cont.
Caps.
American Society For Testing And Materials
Attnuatr.
Const.
Applied, Application
ASTM
Attn.
Conc.
Base Line Control
Bldg.
American National Standards Institute
AOS
Con.
Base Line
BLC
Acceleration
ACI
AFAD
REVISIO N
Composite
Bk.
AASHO
6:
28:
52 AM
Committee or By Committee
Comp.
Bituminous
American Automobile Association
Commercial or Common
Begin
Bit.
BL or
Column
COMM
Two-Lane Two-Way
Area or Amperes
Com.
Meaning
Buried Electric
2L2W
AADT
12/8/2015
BE
Col.
Border
Beg.
AAA
07/01/15
Bdr.
Abbreviation
Bond or Bonded
Two-Lane One-Way
LAST
Meaning
Bd. or Bnd.
2L1W
----------------- A -----------------
REVISION
Abbreviation
cd
CD
Cem.
Cem'd.
CF, C.F.
CFR
CFRP
CFS
Ch.
Chchg.
Chg.
Back to Back
Back Of Curb
Bascule
Bottle Cap or Bolt Circle
Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Pipe
Culvert
Bituminous Coated Pipe Arch Culvert
Bituminous Coated And Paved Corrugated Metal
Pipe Culvert
Bituminous Coated And Paved Pipe Arch Culvert
Breakaway Cable Terminal
CI
Catch Basin
DA
DBH
Closed-Circuit Television
DD
Drainage Area or Deflection Angle

Diameter At Breast Height
Dry Density
Candela
DDHV
Directional Design Hour Traffic
Cross Drain, Cross Direction (Geotextiles)
Decel.
Deceleration
Cement or Cemetery
Deg.
Cemented
Delin.
Cubic Foot
Demobl.
Code of Federal Regulations
Dept.
Degree
Delineators
Demobilization
Department
Carbon Fiber Reinforced Polymer
Det.
Detour, Detection, Detectable
Cubic Feet Per Second
DFE
Design Flood Elevation
Channel
DGN or Dgn.
Design
Channel Change
DHV
Design Hourly Volume
Changeable
DHW
Design High Water
Cast Iron
CIP
Cast Iron Pipe
circ.
Circumference
DHWE
DI
Dim.
Design High Water Elevation

Drop Inlet
Dimension
CJP
Complete Joint Penetration weld
Disp.
Disposal
Ckt.
Circuit
Dist.
Distance
CL, C/L or
Cl. or Clear
CM
Center Line
DLS
Clearance
DMM
Concrete Monument
DOT
District Location Surveyor

Domestic Mail Manual
Department Of Transportation
CMB
Concrete Median Barrier
CMP
Corrugated Metal Pipe
DR
Design Review
Corrugated Metal Pipe Arch
Dr.
Drain, Drive
CMPA
Base Clearance Water Elevation
CO
Clean Out
Co.
County or Company
DPI or D.P.I.
Driv.
DESCRIPTION:
Driven
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
Ditch Point Intersection
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
NO.
001
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Abbreviation
Drwy.
DS
DSL
DT
DTOE
Dwg.
Meaning
Abbreviation
Driveway
FOC
Design Speed
Design Service Life
Ditch
District Traffic Operations Engineer
Drawing
----------------- E -----------------
Feet Per Second
Int.
Frame
Intchg. or Ichg.
Frangible
Inter.
Frequency
Inv.
Industry or Industrial
Installed
Interior
Interchange
Intermediate
Invert
Iron Pipe
Superelevation rate
Ft.
Foot or Feet
IR
Iron Rod
End to End
Edge Of Pavement
Each
EB
Eastbound
ED
Each Day
Elast.
Isl.
Island
Florida Traffic Plans
ITE
Institute Of Transportation Engineers
Furnish
ITS
Intelligent Transportation Systems
----------------- G -----------------
----------------- J -----------------
Giga, Gauss or Shear Modulus

Gram or Gravity
Elastomeric
Embedment
Embk.
Embankment
Emul.
Emulsified
Encl.
Enclosure
Eq.
Furn.
Ga.
Ga. or Gal.
Galv.
Gar.
Gauge or Gage
Jct.
Gallon
Jt.
Galvanized
Junction
Joint
Design Hour Factor
Gutter Drain
Kelvin
GFI
Ground Fault Interrupter
Kilo (prefix)
GIP
Galvanized Iron Pipe
kg
GM
Gas Main
End Of Survey or Equivalent Opening Size
GP
Grade Point
kg/m
Kilogram Per Square Meter
Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer
Gr.
Grade, Guardrail or Grate
kg/m
Kilogram Per Cubic Meter
Equation or Equal
Gr. or Gro.
Gross
Kilo
GRC
Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit
Establish or Established
Grd.
Ground
Estimate
Et Cetera (And So Forth)
Electronic Tough Pitch
Gr. Wt. or gr. wt.
kg/m
Kilogram
Engineer
Easement
ETP
Junction Box
Garage
GD
Esmt.
Etc. or etc.
Joule
----------------- K -----------------
Equipment
Est. or Estm.
J
JB
Equip.
Est.
Intersection
Florida Transportation Builder Association
Elliptical
EPDM
FTP
Isect.
Ellip.
EOS
FTBA
Floating Turbidity Barrier
Elevation
Electric
Engr.
FTB
Electronic Industries Alliance
Elec.
Embed.
GRI
gross km
Gttr.
Gross Weight
Kip
km
km/h
Kilogram Per Meter
One Thousand
1000 Pounds
Kilometer
Kilometer Per Hour
Geosynthetic Research Institute
kN
Kilonewton
Gross Kilometer
kn
Knot
Gutter
kPa
----------------- H -----------------
Endwall
Ex.
Except, Example
Hecto
kV
Excavation
Henry
kVA
Kilovolt Ampere
High Strength
kWh
Kilowatt-hour
Exist.
Existing
H.S., HS
Exp.
Expansion
ha
Ext.
Extension
HAR
Exwy.
F & I
F or Final
F to F
F.L., FL or
F.S.
FA
Hectare
Highway Advisory Radio
Hay Bales
HC
Horizontal Clearance
Fill, Farad
HD
High Density or Heavy Duty
Furnish & Install
Hd.
Head
Final Quantity
HDPE
High Density Polyethylene
Face to Face
Hdwl.
Headwall
Flow Line
Florida Statutes
Federal Aid or Fine Aggregate
HH
Hndrl.
HOA
Horiz. or Hor.
Kips Per Square Inch

Kilovolt
----------------- L -----------------
HB
Expressway
----------------- F ----------------F
ksi
Kilopascal
EW
Exc. or Excav.
Length, Length Of Curve, Liter, Left

or Taper Length, Buffer Length
or Taper Length plus Buffer Space
L/W
LA or L/A
Lat.
lb
Heavy Hex
lb/sy
Handrail
lbf
Hand/Off/Automatic
LBR
Horizontal
LC
Lightweight
Limited Access
Lateral or Latitude
Pound(s)
Pounds Per Square Yard
Pound force
Lime rock Bearing Ratio
FAC
Florida Administrative Code
FAP
Federal Aid Project
HOT
High Occupancy Tolls
LCD
Longitudinal Channelizing Device
FBT
Florida Bulb Tee
HOV
High Occupancy Vehicle
LEO
Law Enforcement With Flashing
FC
Friction Course
HP
High Pressure or Horsepower
FD
French Drain
Hr.
Hour
Fdn.
FDOT
FE
Fed.
Fert.
FES
FETS
FH
FHWA
Foundation
Florida Department Of Transportation
Floor Elevation
Federal
Hse.
HSHV
Ht.
HW or H.W.
Height
Lumen
Hydraulic
Lmrk.
Hertz
Loc.
----------------- I ----------------ID, I.D.
Linear
Lane Mile
Hyd.
Length
Lin.
lm
Flared End Section
Federal Highway Administration
Load Factor Design
Lgth.
LM
Highway
Fire Hydrant
Linear Foot (Feet)
High Water or Hot Water
Hwy.
Hz
LFD
High Strength Horizontal Vertical
Fertilizer
Flared End Terminal Section
Lights And Radar

LF
House
Long Chord
Long.
External Angle (Delta), Interstate
LOS
Inside Diameter or Identification
LRFD
Lime rock
Location
Longitude
Limit Of Clear Sight
FIB
Florida I Beam
Fig.
Figure
IES
Illuminating Engineering Society
Fin.
Finish
IMC
Intermediate Metal Conduit
LS
Length Of Spiral
Inch(es)
LS
Lump Sum
Incorporated or Including
LT
Left Turn
FL, Fl. or Fla.

Flex.
FNQ
REVISIO N
Freq.
Install.
Included
IP
EIA
6:
28:
52 AM
Frang.
Feet Per Minute
Ind.
Far Side
El. or Elev.
12/8/2015
FR or Fr.
Financial Project Identification Number
Meaning
FS
EA or Ea.
07/01/15
FPS or fps
Incl. or Inc.
East or External Distance
E.P. or EOP
LAST
FPM or fpm
Abbreviation
Fiber Optics Cable
E to E
REVISION
FPID
Meaning
Florida
Flexible
in.
Inc.
LRS
Load Resistance Factor Design

Low-Relaxation
Fuse (Type Slow Burn)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
001
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
Abbreviation
Lt.
Ltd.
LU, Lum.
lx
Meaning
Left
Abbreviation
Abbreviation
NCHRP
Lighted or Limited
Luminaire
NDCBU
Lux
----------------- M ----------------M
Mass, Middle Ordinate Length or Mega
Meter or Milli
Meter Square
m/s
m
m/m
Mach.
Maint.
MAS
MASH
NE
NEMA
net km
Meters Per Second
NGS
Meter Cubed or Cubic Meter
NGVD
Meter Cubed Per Meter

Machine
Maintenance
Hardware (AASHTO)
Matl.
Material
Max.
Maximum
MB
MBM
Thousand (Feet) Board Measure
MD
Machine Direction (Geotextiles)
Med.
Mega
Memb.
MES
Mess.
Mfg.
MG
MH, M.H.
MHW
Mi.
Micro
Mid.
Mil
Mil.
Milli
Min.
Misc.
mL
MLW
mm
Mobl.
Mod.
One Million
Member
1000 Gallons
Manhole or Mounting Height
Mean Low Water
Prov.
Provisions
No.
Number
PRS
PS & E
Nominal
PSF or psf
Normal
PSI or psi
NPS
Nominal Pipe Size
NPT
National Pipe Thread
NRCP
Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe
NRTL
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory

Non Stress, Not Suitable or Near Side
Non Traffic, Nail & Tin
Opass
Opt.
OT
Oz.
P or Plan
Pa
Out to Out
Optional Base Group
Overhead
Overpass
Option, Optional or Optically
Overhead Telephone
Passenger Car & Light Delivery Truck
Mounted
MUTS
PCE
PCF, pcf
Manual On Uniform Traffic Control Devices
PCMS
Manual On Uniform Traffic Studies
----------------- N -----------------
P.E. or PE
Precast Concrete Box Culvert

Point Of Compound Curvature or Plain
Cement Concrete
Reloc.
Req. or Reqd.
RHW
Rejuvenation
Relocated
Required
Insulation (Moisture & Heat Resistant Rubber)
Profile Grade
RM
Reference Monument
Profile Grade Line
RP
Reference Point
RPM
rpm or r/min
Point Of Intersection
Parking
RR
RSDU
Parkway
Raised Reflective Pavement Markers

Revolution Per Minute
Railroad
Radar Speed Display Unit
Rsf.
Resurface
Property Line or Plate
RU
Rack Unit
12:00 Noon Until 11:59 Midnight
RX
Receive
Point On Curve
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
Reinforced or Reinforcing
Rigid Galvanized Steel
Phase
POC
Rejuv.
Region, Regular, Registered or Regulation
Residence or Residential
Ph.
National Coarse or Normal Crown
Reinf.
RGS
Newtons Per Square Meter
NC
Reflective
Res.
Measure Of Acidity or Alkalinity
PM
Reference
Refl.
Professional Engineer
pH
Northbound
Reticuline or Rectangular
Ref.
Replace
Portable Changeable Message Sign
Newtons Per Meter
NB
Road or Round
Removal
N/m
PL or
Reinforced Concrete Pipe Arch
Repl.
PGL
National American Vertical Datum
Reinforced Concrete Pipe
Pounds per Cubic Foot
Non Plastic
NAVD
Rd.
Reverse Crown
Rem.
N.P.
Pkwy.
Rock Base Surface Treatment
RC
Permanent Construction Easement
PG
Not Available or Not Applicable
Rock Base Asphaltic Concrete
RBST
Reg.
Point Of Curvature
Nail & Disk
NA or N/A
Radian Per Second
RBAC
Recovery
N & D
Pkg.
Radian
rad/s
Rect.
Penetration
Newtons Per Cubic Meter
Right Of Way
Roadway
Pen.
N/m
Revolution Per Second
Rec.
Nail & Cap
PI
Right
Roadside
N & C
Newtons Per Square Millimeter
Peak Discharge or Flow Volume
Rdwy.
Pedestrian or Pedestal
N/mm
Pressure Water
Pascal
Ped
N/m
Polyvinyl Chloride
Rdsd.
North or Newton
Polytetrafluoroethylene
Plan Quantity
Pavement
Mtd.
Point Of Tangency or Pressure Treated
Range
RCPA
Pavt.
Mean Sea Level
Prestressed Slab Unit
Radius
RCP
Ounce
Maintenance Of Traffic Committee
MSL
Pounds Per Square Inch
R or Rng.
rad
Overhead Electric
Participation or Partition
PCC
Pounds Per Square Foot
R or Rad.
R/W, ROW
Outside Diameter
Part.
Miles Per Hour
PW
r/s
On Center
Maintenance Of Traffic
PCBC
PVC
R, Rt.
Overall
MOT
Megapascal
PTFE
Plans, Specifications And Estimates
----------------- R -----------------
Parallel
PC
PT
Northwest
----------------- P ----------------P
PSU
Portable Regulatory Sign
----------------- Q -----------------
Not To Scale
Par.
MUTCD
REVISIO N
Newton Meter
Monument
MPH or mph
6:
28:
53 AM
Proposed
Nm
Mon.
MPa
12/8/2015
Project or Projection
OH, OHD or Ohd.
Mile Post
Permanent Reference Monument
Prop.
OE
Modify or Modified
PRM
Net Mile
Pascal Second
MP
07/01/15
Prestressed
National Geodetic Vertical Datum of 1929
Pas
MOTC
LAST
Prest.
Mole
Mol
REVISION
Precast
National Geodetic Survey
NM
Millimeter
Mobilization
Prcst.
Program or Progression
OD or O.D.
Milliliter
Point Of Reverse Curvature
Net Kilometer
Proj.
OC or O.C.
Miscellaneous
Pair
New Jersey
OA
Minimum or Minute
PRC
Product, Production, Producer or Produced
O.B.G.
One-Thousandth
Pr.
Prog.
O to O, o to o or O.O.
One-Thousandth Of An Inch
Military
National Electrical Manufacturers

Association
Not In Contract
NW
Mile
Middle
Polypropylene pipe
Northeast
----------------- O -----------------
Mean High Water
One-Millionth
PPP
Power Pole
Probability
NTS
Manufactured or Manufacturer
PPB
Point On Tangent
Prod.
NT, N&T
Message
Neighborhood Delivery And Collection Box

Unit
PP
Normal High Water
NS
Mitered End Section
POT
NHW
Norm.
Median
Point On Semi-Tangent
National Cooperative Highway Research

Program
Prob.
Nom.
Median Barrier
Meaning
National Highway System
NJ
Manual for Assessing Safety
POST
NHS
NIC
Motorist Awareness System
Meaning
NO.
001
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
Abbreviation
Meaning
----------------- S ----------------S or s
SAHM
San.
SB
SCST
SD
Seal Coat
Spiral To Curve
Schedule
Sand-Clay Surface Treatment
Side Drain, Storm Drain
Storm Drain
SE
Southeast
Sec.
Second
Sect.
Section
Sed.
Sediment
Sep.
Separator
Serv.
Service
Adjustment Factor In Percent, Silt Fence
SG
Specific Gravity
Sh. or Sht.
Shldr.
SHW
SIP
SLEO
SP
Subgrade
Sheet
Shoulder
Stay In Place
Speed and Law Enforcement Officer
Superpave
Space(ing)(s)
Spec.
Specification
sq
Sq. Ft., SF, or S.F.
Square Foot
Sq. Yd., SY or S.Y.
Square Yard
SRASP
SRCP
SRD
SRSP
SS
SSMD
ST
St. or ST.
Sta.
Spiral Rib Aluminized Steel Pipe

Steel Reinforced Concrete Pipe
State Road Department
Spiral Rib Steel Pipe
Sanitary Sewer, Stainless Steel
Solid State Modular Design
Surface Treatment or Spiral To Tangent
Township
Tangent
Temporary Bench Mark
Tangent To Curve
Traffic Control Zone
WM
Water Main
Transportation Design For Livable Communities
WT
Water Table Or Weight
TDLC
Tel.
Temp.
Theo.
THRMPLSTC
THW or THWN
Tk
Tk or Thick.
TMA
Tn.
Traf.
WB67D
WWF
Welded Wire Fabric
Temperature or Temporary
WWR
Welded Wire Reinforcing
Theoretical
----------------- X ----------------X
Thermoplastic
Insulation (Flame Retardant, Moisture And Heat
Resistant Thermoplastic)
Crossing
Thickness
Xsec.
Cross Section
Truck/Trailer Mounted Attenuator
Traffic
Treatment
Length Of Tangent (Spiral Curve)
TTC
Temporary Traffic Control
Typical
UG
Underground
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
Ult.
Ultd.
Unddr.
Undrdwy.
Ultimate
Unlimited
Underdrain(s)
Under roadway
unld.
Unloaded
Untr.
Untreated
Upass.
UPS
USC & GS
Underpass
Uninterruptible Power Supply
US Coast and Geodetic Survey (now National Geodetic Survey)
USGS
US Geological Survey
USPS
United States Postal Service
Util.
UV
Utilities
Ultraviolet
----------------- V ----------------V
Var.
VC
Volt, Velocity, Volume or Hourly Volume

Varies, Variable or Variance
Vertical Curve
Str.
Structure
VF
Vertical Foot
Sty.
Story
Vh
Verified Horizontal Location
Sys. or Syst.
Ohm
----------------- U -----------------
Vehicle
Sym.
Year
Transmit
Steel
Vert.
Vol.
Subsoil
VP
Vertical
Volume
Vertical Panel
Substitute
VPD or Vpd.
Vehicles Per Day
Supports
VPH or Vph.
Vehicles Per Hour
VPHPL or Vphpl.
Surface
VRMS
Sievert
Vv
Sidewalk
Yard
Yr.
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression
Stl.
SW or Swk.
Coordinate Value (North-South Direction)
Yd.
Tangent To Spiral
TSC
Typ.
----------------- Y ----------------Y
Ton
Treat.
TX
Cross Road
Xing.
Transition, Transverse, Translate or Transportation
TVSS
X Rd.
Coordinate Value (East-West Direction) or

Extra
Truck
Trans.
TS
Semi Trailer, Tandem
Telephone
Vitrified Clay Pipe
Southwest
Semi Trailer, Interstate
TCZ
Veh.
SW
Semi Trailer, Large
Traffic Control Plan(s)
Storage
Sv
Semi Trailer, Intermediate
TCP
VCP
Surf.
Weber
WB40
WB62
Strong
Survey
Westbound
Wb.
Terra Cotta Pipe
Stg.
Sur.
Water-Cement Ratio
WB
Temporary Construction Easement
Standard
Suppts.
Work Program Item
W/C
TCP
Std.
Sub. or Subst.
Width, Wide, West or Watt
W.P.I.
TCE
Staked Turbidity Barrier
Single Unit Trucks
Meaning
WB50
Street
Station
Tangent, Length Of Curve, Percent Trucks, Tesla
Stability or Stabilization
Sub. or Subs.
REVISIO N
Spiral Rib Aluminum Pipe
Abbreviation
----------------- W -----------------
Metric Ton
STB
SU
6:
28:
54 AM
State Road
Meaning
Stab.
Stge.
12/8/2015
TC
TCB
Square
Square Inch
SRAP
TBM
Standard Penetration Test
sq. in.
SR or S.R.
tan.
Seasonal High Water
Spa., Spcg. or Sp.
SPT
T, TWP or Twp.
Sequential
SF
SG, Subgr.
07/01/15
Shell Base Surface Treatment
SD
Seq.
LAST
Southbound
Sand Bituminous Road Mix
Sch.
REVISION
Sanitary
SBRM
SC
Sand-Asphalt Hot Mix
Shell Base Asphaltic Concrete
SC
Speed, South, Siemens, Or Second
SBAC
SBST
Abbreviation
----------------- T -----------------
Vvh
VW
Vehicles Per Hour Per Lane

Volts Root Mean Square
Verified Vertical Elevation
Verified Vertical Elevation And Horizontal Location
Variable Width
Symmetrical
System
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
001
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
STANDARD SYMBOLS FOR KEY MAP
Highway With Full Control of Access
FF
Free Ferry
Highway With Frontage Roads
TF
Toll Ferry
Canal Or Drainage Ditch
Game Preserve
County Seat
Game Checking Station
Other City Or Village
Bird Sanctuary
Seminole Indian Village
Fire Control Headquarters
Welcome Station
Lookout Tower
Narrow Stream
Divided Highway
Wide Stream
Hard Surfaced Road
Dam
Soil, Gravel Or Shell Surfaced Road
Dam Or Spillway With Lock
Graded And Drained Road

Unimproved Road
Dam With Road
Primitive Road
Flood Control Structure
Private Road
Lake, Reservoir Or Pond
Streets In Inset Or Delimited Areas
Intermittent Pond
Meandered Lake
Farmers Market
State Capital
Intracoastal Waterway
Proposed Controlled Access Highway
Extension Of Local Roads Within Cities
FM
Lighthouse
Highway Interchange
Agricultural Inspection Station
Residential Area Under Development
Fire Station
FS
WP
Wayside Park Or Small Park
WP
Park With Boat Ramp
Patrol Or Police Station
Boat Ramp
Correctional Institution Or Road Camp
DOT
Museum
Department of Transportation Facility

Coast Guard Station
Recreational Area Or Historic Site
Armory
Scenic Site
A
FAI
FAU
FAP
FAS
NFR
SFR
Federal Aid Interstate Highway
Marsh Or Swamp
Federal Aid Urban Highway
Mangroves
Federal Aid Primary Highway
Levee Or Dike
Federal Aid Secondary Highway
Levee Or Dike With Road
National Forest Road
Highway Bridge
Junkyard
School
Sanitary Fill
Church
Sewage Disposal Plant
Cemetery
Incinerator
Church And Cemetery
Power Plant
Hospital, Health Center Or Rest Home
Power Substation
Toll House, Port Of Entry Or Weight Station
Communications Facility
Fair Grounds, Race Course Or Rodeo Arena
Locked Gate Or Fence
State Forest Road
Small Bridges Closely Spaced
State Park Road
Drawbridge
SPR
00
Post Office
Interstate Highway
Highway Grade Separation
00
US Numbered Highway
Tunnel
00
State Highway
State Boundary Line
00
County Road
County Boundary Line
WOOD
Mine Or Strip Mine
Triangulation Station
Governmental Research Station
Civil Township Boundary

Railroad
Extended Township Line
Double Track Railroad
Land Grant Line
Abandoned Railroad
Land Section Line
Railroad Station
State Survey Section Line
Grade Crossing
Survey By Others
Railroad Above
Location Of Inset Boundary Within Map
Railroad Below
Military Reservation Boundary
Military Field
College Or University Boundary
Commercial Or Municipal Airport
Corporate Limits
Landing Area Or Strip
Delimited Area, Population Est.
Runways
Reservation, Forest Or Park Boundary
GENERAL NOTE
1.
Symbols on this Index are intended for use on all Roadway, Signing
6:
32:
11 AM
And Marking, Signalization, and Lighting projects. For work zone

traffic control symbols refer to Index 600. When additional or similar
symbols are used, legends or notations may be required for clarity.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/8/2015
Wildlife Refuge Boundary
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STANDARD SYMBOLS
NO.
002
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
STANDARD SYMBOLS FOR PLAN SHEETS

GENERAL SYMBOLS
UTILITY ADJUSTMENT SYMBOLS
State Line
Curb
County Line
Curb And Gutter
Township Line
Water Well, Spring
Section Line
Levee
MP
City Line
327
EXISTING
Base Or Survey Line

Right-Of-Way
Railroad Switch
12'
QUALITY LEVEL B (VISUAL ONLY WILL NOT PLOT)
Storage Tank (Surface)

Storage Tank (Underground)
Valve (Type)
TH
VALVE COVER WATER
BACK FLOW
VALVE BACK FLOW PREVENTER
Pump Station
Sewage Pump Station
TEST HOLE QUALITY LEVEL A
VENT UNKNOWN
QUALITY LEVEL DELINEATION CHANGE
GAS
VENT GAS
MANHOLE COVER UNKNOWN
SAN
VENT SANITARY SEWER
Cable TV Service Box

Power Pole
Telephone Pole
Combination Pole
COMM
Barn
Valve Cover (Type)
WATER
Residence
RES
MANHOLE COVER CABLE TV
POWER POLE
Guy Wire And Anchor Pin
School
MANHOLE COVER STORM WATER
POWER POLE WITH TRANSFORMER
ELEC
MANHOLE COVER ELECTRIC
SHARED POLE
GAS
MANHOLE COVER GAS
SHARED POLE WITH TRANSFORMER
SAN
MANHOLE COVER SANITARY SEWER
TELEPHONE POLE
TEL
MANHOLE COVER TELEPHONE
GUY ANCHOR
WATER
MANHOLE COVER WATER
GUY POLE
FIRE HYDRANT
SERVICE CABINET CABLE TV
METER UNKNOWN
SERVICE CABINET TELEPHONE
METER ELECTRIC
GAS REGULATOR
METER GAS
TELEPHONE BOOTH
METER WATER
TRANSFORMER POWER
VALVE GAS
ELECTRICAL OUTLET
SD
Pipe Culvert-Straight Endwall
Sediment Barrier
Pipe Culvert-U-Type Endwall
Staked Turbidity Barrier
Pipe Culvert-Other End Treatments
Guy Pole Deadman

Tower
Floating Turbidity Barrier
Pipe Culvert-Median Drain
Light Pole
Transformer
Stream
18" SD
Storm Drain (Proposed)
18" SD
Storm Drain (Existing)
Marsh
Inlet
Wetland Boundary (Proposed)
Manhole
Wetland Boundary (Existing)
Tied Longitudinal Joint
Hedge
Keyed Longitudinal Joint
Trees
Doweled Transverse Expansion Joint
Edge Of Wooded Area
Doweled Transverse Contraction Joint
Shrubbery
Shore Line
Transverse Contraction Joint
Grove Or Orchard
Lt.
Survey Reference Point
Skew Rt.
C
L
Definition Of Skew For Cross Drains

ELEC
And Barrels Of Conrete Box Culverts
Triangulation Station
Bench Mark
Rt.
PAV'
T
QUALITY LEVEL D (VISUAL ONLY WILL NOT PLOT)
Cleanout
Store
Pipe Culvert-Mitered End Section
TYPE
VALVE COVER WATER NON POTABLE
Valve Box (Type)
Borrow Pit
Bridge
TYP.
Meter (Type)
Church
Box Culvert
North Arrow
VALVE COVER GAS
Mine Or Quarry
Fence (Limited Access)
Point Of Intersection
GAS
Vent (Type)
National Or State Park Or Forest
Railroad (Detail Plans)
Manhole
NPW
EOI END OF ELECTRONIC INFORMATION
Railroad (Drainage Maps)
B.M. NO. 112
VALVE COVER SANITARY SEWER
Pump Island
Grant Line
ALACHUA
SAN
QUALITY LEVEL C (VISUAL ONLY WILL NOT PLOT)
Fence Line
Without Dowels
B
C
Gate
Limited Access Line
QUALITY LEVEL A (VISUAL ONLY WILL NOT PLOT)
Fire Hydrant
Railroad Mile Post

Railroad Signal With Gate
Easement Line
PROPOSED
Skew Lt.
GAS
Concrete
WATER
Wood
Edges Of Existing Pavement

WALK
And Sidewalk
GAS
Guardrail
Crash Cushion
C. C.
VALVE UNKNOWN
SANITARY DUMP STATION
Piling Pier Column

SAN
Concrete Monument
Base Line
Centerline
WATER
Rate Of Superelevation
Property Line
Delta Angle
Approximate
Round Or Diameter
Flow Line
VALVE SANITARY SEWER
SANITARY CLEAN OUT
VALVE WATER
PUMP NON PETROLEUM
VALVE BOX UNKNOWN
PUMP PETROLEUM/FUEL
VALVE BOX GAS
PUMP STATION SANITARY SEWER
VALVE BOX WATER
WATER FAUCET
VALVE BOX SANITARY SEWER
SPRINKLER
VALVE COVER UNKNOWN
WELL
WATER
SAN
GAUGES (DESCRIBED)
See General Notes, Sheet 1
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/8/2015
6:
32:
12 AM
GAS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STANDARD SYMBOLS
NO.
002
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4

UTILITY ADJUSTMENT SYMBOLS
6:
32:
13 AM
EXISTING
EXISTING
PROPOSED
OVERHEAD CABLE TELEVISION
BURIED SANITARY SEWER (B)
OVERHEAD CABLE TELEVISION
BURIED CABLE TELEVISION (B)
BURIED SANITARY SEWER (C)
OVERHEAD FIBER OPTIC CABLE TELEVISION
BURIED CABLE TELEVISION (C)
BURIED SANITARY SEWER (D)
BURIED CABLE TELEVISION
BURIED CABLE TELEVISION (D)
BURIED SANITARY FORCE MAIN (B)
BURIED FIBER OPTIC CABLE TELEVISION
OVERHEAD FIBER OPTIC CABLE TELEVISION
BURIED SANITARY FORCE MAIN (C)
BURIED CASING
BURIED FIBER OPTIC CABLE TELEVISION (B)
BURIED SANITARY FORCE MAIN (D)
BURIED DUCT
BURIED FIBER OPTIC CABLE TELEVISION (C)
BURIED STEAM LINE (B)
OVERHEAD ELECTRIC
BURIED FIBER OPTIC CABLE TELEVISION (D)
BURIED STEAM LINE (C)
OVERHEAD FIBER OPTIC ELECTRIC
BURIED CABLE TV CONDUIT SYSTEM (B)
BURIED STEAM LINE (D)
BURIED ELECTRIC
BURIED CABLE TV CONDUIT SYSTEM (C)
OVERHEAD TELEPHONE
BURIED FIBER OPTIC ELECTRIC
BURIED CABLE TV CONDUIT SYSTEM (D)
BURIED TELEPHONE (B)
BURIED GAS
BURIED CONDUIT (B)
BURIED TELEPHONE (C)
BURIED PETROLEUM
BURIED CONDUIT (C)
BURIED TELEPHONE (D)
BURIED SANITARY SEWER
BURIED CONDUIT (D)
OVERHEAD FIBER OPTIC TELEPHONE
BURIED SANITARY FORCED MAIN
OVERHEAD ELECTRIC
BURIED FIBER OPTIC TELEPHONE (B)
BURIED STEAM
BURIED ELECTRIC (B)
BURIED FIBER OPTIC TELEPHONE (C)
OVERHEAD TELEPHONE
BURIED ELECTRIC (C)
BURIED FIBER OPTIC TELEPHONE (D)
OVERHEAD FIBER OPTIC TELEPHONE
BURIED ELECTRIC (D)
BURIED TELEPHONE DUCT (B)
BURIED TELEPHONE
OVERHEAD FIBER OPTIC ELECTRIC
BURIED TELEPHONE DUCT (C)
BURIED FIBER OPTIC TELEPHONE
BURIED FIBER OPTIC ELECTRIC (B)
BURIED TELEPHONE DUCT (D)
BURIED WATER
BURIED FIBER OPTIC ELECTRIC (C)
BURIED TELEPHONE TOLL (B)
BURIED NON-POTABLE WATER
BURIED FIBER OPTIC ELECTRIC (D)
BURIED TELEPHONE TOLL (C)
BURIED GAS (B)
BURIED TELEPHONE TOLL (D)
BURIED GAS (C)
BURIED WATER LINE (B)
BURIED GAS (D)
BURIED WATER LINE (C)
BURIED PETROLEUM (B)
BURIED WATER LINE (D)
BURIED PETROLEUM (C)
BURIED NON-POTABLE WATER LINE (B)
BURIED PETROLEUM (D)
BURIED NON-POTABLE WATER LINE (C)
BURIED PIPE ENCASEMENT (B)
BURIED NON-POTABLE WATER LINE (D)
BURIED PIPE ENCASEMENT (C)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/8/2015
BURIED PIPE ENCASEMENT (D)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STANDARD SYMBOLS
NO.
002
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
EXISTING
EXISTING
PROPOSED
W -
D W
SIGNING AND PAVEMENT MARKING SYMBOLS
LIGHTING SYMBOLS
TRAFFIC SIGNALS SYMBOLS
PROPOSED
Traffic Signal Head (Span Wire Mounted)
Pole & Luminaire
Pavement Arrow
Traffic Signal Head (Pedestal Mounted)
Existing Pole & Luminaire To Be Removed
Single Solid Line
Traffic Signal Head (Mast Arm Mounted)
Final Position Of Relocated Or Adjusted Pole & Luminaire
Double Solid Line
Traffic Signal Pole (Concrete, Wood, Metal)
High Mast Lighting Tower
Skip Line
Vehicle Detector (Loop)
City Or Utility Owned Luminaire & Pole
Stop Bar
Signal Cable (On Messenger Wire)
PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Lighting Conduit And Conductors
Traffic Sign (Post Mounted)
Conduit
Rigid Galvanized Lighting Conduit And Conductors
Traffic Sign (Overhead)
Vehicle Detector (Points)
Lighting Pull-Box
Pedestrian Detector
Light Distribution Point
Pedestrian Signal Head (Pole Or Pedestal Mounted)
Joint Use Pole
Controller Cabinet (Base Mounted)
Pier Cap Underdeck Luminaire
Controller Cabinet (Pole Mounted)
Pendant Hung Underdeck Luminaire
13
700-83
Sign Number
Sign Item Number
Traffic Flow Arrow
Walk - Dont Walk
FDW
Flashing Dont Walk
Signal Face Number
Signal Lens
Programmed Signal Head
Messenger Wire
3
Pole Tabulation Cross Reference
Pole Tabulation Cross Reference (Joint Use Pole)
Signal Phase
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/8/2015
6:
32:
14 AM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STANDARD SYMBOLS
NO.
002
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
Shoulder Pavement
Sod
For Flush Shoulder
Sod
Shoulder Pavement
Sod
Shoulder Pavement
Shoulder Pavement
Shoulder Pavement
CZ (Flush Shldr)
CZ
CZ
CZ
With Curb
CZ
CZ
CZ
CZ
CZ
SCG
CZ (Flush Shldr)
SCG
SCG
SCG
With Curb
2
2
1
R/W
G
R/W
SCG
SCG
SCG
1
R/W
R/W
DIVIDED NARROW MEDIAN WITH OR WITHOUT CURBED MEDIAN
SCG
DIVIDED WIDE MEDIAN WITH OR WITHOUT CURBED MEDIAN
Concrete Sidewalk
Concrete Sidewalk
Concrete Sidewalk
Concrete Sidewalk
Sod
Sod
Shoulder Pavement
Sod
Shoulder Pavement
Sod
Sod
Sod
CZ
LEGEND
CZ
LOC
LOC
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
Or Sod
R/W
R/W
Wildflower Group #2
Turf (To Limit of Construction)
SCG
Selective Clearing And Grubbing
LOC
Limits Of Construction
Wildflower Group #1
LOC
2
1
UNDIVIDED FLUSH SHOULDER
Turf
UNDIVIDED CURBED
DIVIDED CURBED
WILDFLOWER SEEDING RATES

Common Name (Botanical Name)
lbs/ac
#1 Group
Black-Eyed Susan (Rudbeckia hirta)
Lance-Leaf Tickseed (Coreopsis lanceolata)
10
Goldenmane Tickseed (Coreopsis basalis)
10
Leavenworth's Tickseed (Coreopsis leavenworthii)
10
Fire Wheel (Gaillardia pulchella)
10
Softhair Coneflower (Rudbeckia mollis)
15
#2 Group
9:
43:
44 AM
Zone I
2. Activities such as clearing, grading, and excavating that will disturb one or more acres of land require
coverage under the Generic Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large and Small Construction
Activities from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection, and implementation of appropriate
10
Moss Verbena (Verbena tenuisecta)
12/3/2015
1. All turf establishment shall be performed meeting the requirements of Section 570 of the Standard
pollution prevention measures to minimize erosion and sedimentation and properly manage stormwater.
Annual Phlox (Phlox drummondii)
Leavenworth's Tickseed (Coreopsis leavenworthii)
10
Fire Wheel (Gaillardia pulchella)
10
Crimson Clover (Trifolium incarnatum)
15
Note:
SEEDING ZONES
Specifications.
Crimson Clover (Trifolium incarnatum)
GENERAL NOTES
Zone II
3. Confirm compatibility of wildflower with Seeding Zones.
Wildflower seeding rates are for restoring
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
impacted wildflower areas.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERMANENT EROSION CONTROL
NO.
104
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Low Point Of Sag

Sod To Toe Of Front Slope When
Sodding (Overlapped) See
Algebraic Difference In Roadway
Overlapped Sod Flume (Below)
Grades Exceeds 4%
Shoulder Point
(Both Sides)
(Both Sides)
100' Min.
20'
100' Min.
20'
Shoulder Point
5' Shoulder Pavement
Shoulder Point
See Table Below

For Application
PC
'
180
Shoulder Point
20'
180
'
20'
RURAL UNDIVIDED
Use 5' Shoulder Pavement And 32" Sod
Sodding (Overlapped) See
Strip When Negative Grade Intersects
Overlapped Sod Flume
Shoulder Point
(Below) (Both Sides)
Roadway Grades Is 2% Or Greater; When
Of Sag
Sod To Toe Of Front Slope When
Shoulder Pavement
Positive Grade And Algebraic Difference In
Low Point
50'
Algebraic Difference In Roadway Grades Is
Algebraic Difference In Roadway
4' Shoulder Pavement-See Table Below For Application.

Between 1% & 2% Use 32" Sod Strip Only
Same Applies To Low Side On Outside Edge Of Pavement
Grades Exceeds 4%
(Both Sides)
PT
32" Sod Strip
100' Min.
For Facilities With Unpaved Shoulders.
100' Min.
Shoulder Point
Shoulder Pavement
(See Notation Above)
'
300
300
'
Shoulder Pavement
20'
20'
In Absence Of Shoulder Pavement On Existing
PC
Same As Above
RURAL DIVIDED
PT
Divided Roadways, Construct Shoulder Pavement
Shoulder Pavement
Shoulder Point
CRITERIA FOR PAVING SHOULDER ON DIVIDED AND UNDIVIDED FACILITIES
Shoulder Point
Design Speed
Degree Of Curve
(mph)
Note:
50'
5' Shoulder Pavement Or 32" Sod Strip (See Notation Above)
30
7 Or Greater
Shoulder Pavement is required on all curves
40
5 Or Greater
meeting the criteria tabulated. For curves
50
4 Or Greater
60
3 Or Greater
65
3 Or Greater
70
2 Or Greater
not meeting the criteria, shoulders are to

be paved where erosion of the shoulder is
evident or anticipated.
Roadway
Sod
Sodding (Overlapped)
SHOULDER AND SLOPE TREATMENT FOR SUPERELEVATED ROADWAYS

Shoulder Point
Temporary Berm
SECTION AA
(Symmetrical About )
25% Lap
10'
5' Shoulder Pavement Or 32"
0.5'
Turf
Sod Strip (See Notation Above)
Roadway
Sod
Sodding (Overlapped)
Staggered Joints Between

Upper And Lower Layers
TRANSVERSE SECTION
NOTES
1. These treatments are applicable to new construction, reconstruction and RRR
projects. Project requirements for shoulder pavement and sodding that exceed
LONGITUDINAL SECTION
the limits of this standard take precedence.
9:
43:
45 AM
Shoulder Point
OVERLAPPED SOD FLUME
SECTION BB
(Symmetrical About )
2. For sodding adjacent to ditches and at headwalls, see Index No. 281.
3.
All front slopes steeper than 1:3 are to be sodded.
12/3/2015
SHOULDER AND SLOPE TREATMENT IN SAG VERTICAL CURVES
LAST
REVISION
07/01/01
REVISIO N
TREATMENTS FOR PROTECTION FROM CONCENTRATED ROADWAY RUNOFF EROSION AND SHOULDER RAVELING
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERMANENT EROSION CONTROL
NO.
104
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
TREATMENT II
TREATMENT I
2'-8" See Pattern Detail
1" Drop-Off
Edge Of Any Existing
1" Drop-Off
Width Called For In The Plans (Shoulder Width Plus 2' Min.)
Or New Pavement
Less Than 3" Overlay
Backfill (Excavated Turf and Topsoil)

3" Or More Overlay
Turf (See Gen. Note No. 2D)

Sod (Avg. Depth
1
1 2")
Turf
1
2"
Sod (Avg. Depth 1
Varies, 2' Min.
(Depending on asphalt overlay depth may require

trenching or borrow under sod to attain the 1"
Salvaged Turf And Topsoil
Excavated Turf And Topsoil
Varies
drop at the edge of pavement.)
COMPL
ETED SHOUL
DER
(Gap For Drainage)
Existing Turf And Topsoil To Be

Excavated And Replaced With Borrow
CRI
T
ERI
A FO
R USI
NG T
REAT
MENT I
Project___
SHOUL
DER OPTI
ON I
is resurfacing, widening and resurfacing or construction

of shoulder pavement
is rural or is urban without curb and gutter
resurfacing build-up is less than 3"

Sod Blocks Shall Be
Placed With Staggered
Transverse Joints
1'-4"
2'
-8"
1" Drop-Off
Width Called For In The Plans (Shoulder Width Plus 2' Min.)
Edge Of Any Existing
Or New Pavement
Edge Of Pavement
Turf (See Gen. Note No. 2D)

PLAN VIEW
3" Or More Overlay

1
2")
Sod (Avg. Depth 1
PATTERN DETAIL
Turf
Borrow
GENERAL NOTES
1.
Varies, 2' Min.
Treatment I:
Mix To Depth Indicated
In Specifications Or Plans
A.If trenching under sod is necessary to achieve the required 1" drop-off, excavated turf and topsoil are to be
used for filling voids and low areas at the edge of pavement or for flushing along the edge of sod. Excess material to
be uniformly distributed over the shoulder.
B.Payment for sod, excavation of turf and topsoil and for back fill of this material under Treatment I is to be
included in the contract unit price for Performance Turf, SY. Finish Soil Layer not required.
SHOUL
DER OPTI
ON 2
2. Treatment II:
A.All borrow shall meet requirements for a "Select" material in accordance with Index 505 and Section 120 of the
CRI
T
ERI
A FO
R USI
NG T
REAT
MENT I
I
Standard Specifications.
Project___
is resurfacing or construction of shoulder pavement
shall meet the requirements of Section 162 "Prepared Soil Layer". There will be no additional payment for substituting
is rural or is urban without curb and gutter
borrow for excavated turf and topsoil.
resurfacing build-up is 3" or more
B.Borrow may be used in lieu of excavated turf and topsoil when economically feasible, however the upper 6"
C.When existing turf and topsoil do not meet the requirements of Section 162 "Prepared Soil Layer", provide
additive materials as necessary in the upper 6" to meet the requirements of Section 162. There will be no additional
payment for additives.
A SI
MI
L
AR T
REAT
MENT MAY BE USED FO
R PRO
J
ECT
ST
HAT REQ
UI
RE SHO
UL
DER WI
DENI
NG.
DET
AI
L
S ARE T
O BE SHO
WN I
NT
HE PL
ANS.
D.Payment for Treatment II will be under Prepared Soil Layer. Sod and other materials for turf establishment
shall be paid for as Performance Turf, SY.
3. Special attention is to be directed to the construction of the required 1" drop-off at the edge of pavement.
4. Activities such as clearing, grading, and excavating that will disturb one or more acres of land require coverage
9:
43:
45 AM
under the Generic Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large and Small Construction Activities from the Florida
Department of Environmental Protection, and implementation of appropriate pollution prevention measures to minimize
erosion and sedimentation and properly manage stormwater.
5. Turf Establishment:
A.Wildflowers destroyed by shoulder sodding and turf operations are to be reestablished under the seeding rates
12/3/2015
prescribed for permanent wildflower #2 Group shown by table on Index 104.

B.All turf establishment shall be performed meeting the requirements of Section 570 of the Standard
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
Specifications.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
SHOULDER SODDING AND TURF
DESIGN STANDARDS
ON EXISTING FACILITIES
NO.
105
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Type A Or B Riser
9-#4 Ties @ 12" Max. O.C.
Type A Or B Riser
Type A Or B Riser
Structure
(See Section)
2-#5 Hoop Bars

2 Additional Bars A
#5 Peripheral
(2 Lap Splices
@ 5" O.C.
Reinforcement
Permitted)
#5 Hoop Bar
Bars A Short Way

(See Section B-B)
Perpendicular Bars A
(See Section A-A)
Placed On Top Of
12"
Reference Axis
(Minimum #4 Bars)
Corner Fillet
#4 Hoop Bar
Max.
(1 Lap Splice Permitted)
Side Of Opening
(See Note 10)
Rotate #4 Bars
(Minimum #4 Bars)
Parallel Bars B
1'-6"
2 Additional Bars B
@ 5" Max. O. C. Each
#4 Hoop Bar
Structure Bottom
Structure Bottom
Bars A And B At 45
Reference Axis
3
'6
"
Side Of Opening
12"
3
'4
6
'"
0
O
"
r
D
ia
.
2-#7 Each Way
@ 5" Max. O. C. Each
3'-6"
Structure Bottom
ia
.
2 Additional Bars B
Reference Axis
As Required To
(See Section A-A)
Maintain Cover
2 Additional Bars
A @ 5" O.C.
@ 5" O.C.
(Minimum #4 Bars)
NOTE:
PLAN VIEW
2 Additional Bars A
Not Applicable For Type A, B, C, D & E Ditch
Bars B Long Way
Bars B Long Way
(See Section B-B)
(See Section B-B)
(Minimum #4 Bars)
#4 Ties @ 12" O.C.
Bottom Inlets Or Type S & V Gutter Inlets.

See Index Nos. 220, 221, 230, 231 & 232.
ROUND RISER OPENING
SQUARE OPENING WITH CORNER FILLETS
Construction Joint
TOP SLAB REINFORCING STEEL DIAGRAM
TOP SLAB REINFORCING STEEL DIAGRAM
Permitted. See Index

No. 201 for Optional
(ALTERNATE A)
(ALTERNATE B)
#5 Peripheral
Construction Joints.
Reinforcement
1'-6"
Max.
Wall Reinforcing
Reinforcing
At Opening
(See Note)
3" Cl. (Single Layer)

Or 2" Cl. (Double Layer)
to Horizontal Bars
not more than 1'-6" larger than the opening in the

riser or top slab, the top of the structure or riser shall
be constructed according to the "Special Top Slab"
and two extra #4 bars at 3" min. spacing above each opening.
Optional Shear Key
11:
30:
57 AM
(ALTERNATE A)
1
2"
1
. M in.
2" Cl
1
2"
Min.
Shear Key
Bottom Slab Reinforcing
SECTION B-B
At Shear Key
AT TOP SLAB
Rebar Straight End Embedment
SECTION A-A
(Typ.)
Optional Construction Joints.
details on this sheet.
Provide one extra #4 bar reinforcement each side of each opening
1
2"
Sheet 3 of 5 For
Bottom Slab
NOTE:
Min.
to 1
10 Draft
Slab
When the inside diameter of a round structure is
Bars B
2" Cl.
See Index No. 201
*NOTE:
Bars A
Thickness
Slab
Design
1
2"
NOTE:
Design
Bottom Slab
(
See Table 6)
Bars B
Slab Thickness
(
See Table 7)
Slab Thickness
Bars A
1
2"
1
3
4"
1
2"
(Typ. For Walls)
Wall Reinforcing
1
2"
(See Table 8)
Extra
Shear Key
Optional Shear Key
Horizontal Wall Reinf.
Precast & 10' Dia.
(See Table 8)
6"
3"
(Typ.)
1
. M in.
2" Cl
Vertical Wall Reinf.
2" Clear
Top Slab Reinforcing
At Shear Key
See Table 1 for
(Vertical Bars)
Bars B
to Maintain Cover
2" Cl.
(CIPL 10' Dia.)
#4 @ 12" Ctrs.
Bend Bars As Required
Thickness
#4 @ 12" BW
3'-6"
Bars A
SPECIAL TOP SLAB*
Inlets, M anholes Or Junction Boxes, EA.
6"
(See Table 8)
To Be Paid For Under The Contract Unit Price For
3"
Top Slab
(
Type B Riser Shown)
& 1 Each Side)
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
Riser, Inlet Or Inlet Top
@ 3" Min. Spacing
t (Type B)
3" Cl.
Structure Bottom
4'-0"
Reference Top
Opening (2 Above
t (Type A) or
Slab Depth
Extra #4's At
3'-6" Or
Reference Bottom Slab Depth
Bars A
Reference Bottom Slab Depth
Top Slab
Bars B
(
See Table 7)
for
Precast
(
See Table 6)
See Table 1
Slab Thickness
#4 @ 12" BW (CIPL)
(See Note 9)
Slab Depth
Reference Top
2" Cl.
Slab Thickness
(
Type A Riser Shown)
Riser Or Inlet Top
Structure Bottom
Inlets, M anholes Or Junction Boxes, EA.
To Be Paid For Under The Contract Unit Price For
SECTION C-C
AT BOTTOM SLAB
4" Min. Beyond Inside Face of

Structure Wall For All Bar Sizes
Extend Top and Bottom Slabs

To Achieve Minimum Rebar
(ALTERNATE B)
Embedment Beyond Inside Face
12/3/2015
TYPICAL SLAB TO WALL DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
FOR PRECAST STRUCTURES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STRUCTURE BOTTOMS TYPE J AND P
NO.
200
SHEET
NO.
1of 5
GENERAL NOTES
ROUND STRUCTURE BOTTOMS (ALTERNATE A)& ROUND RISERS- TABLE 1
1.
WallThickness (t1 & t2)and Vertical& HorizontalAreas of Reinforcement(AS)
Structure/Riser
Diameter (ft)
Type
t1
t2
standard structure bottoms are designated Type J.
PrecastItems
Cast-In-Place Items
Class II Concrete
Class II Concrete
AS
t1
t2
AS
Risers are permitted for all structures.
Round risers are
designated Type A, square risers are designated Type B.
ASTM C478
t1 or t2
2.
A2 ***
Riser
(in.)
Bottom
(in.)
(in./ft.)
Riser
(in.)
Bottom
(in.)
(in./ft.)
(in.)
(in./ft.)
Standard structure bottoms 4'-0" diameter and smaller (Alt. A) and 3'-6" square (Alt. B) are designated Type P. Larger
Walls of circular structures (Alt. A) constructed in place may be of brick or reinforced concrete. Precast and
rectangular structures (Alt. B) shall be constructed of reinforced concrete only.
3.
Wall thickness and reinforcement are for either reinforced cast-in-place or precast concrete units except that precast
circular units may be furnished with walls in accordance with ASTM C478 (see modified wall thicknesses in Table 1).
3'-6"
0.20
0.20
4**
0.105
4'-0"
0.20
0.20
5**
0.120
5'-0"
0.20
0.20
6**
0.150
6'-0"
0.20
0.20
0.180
7'-0"
0.20
0.20
0.210
8'-0"
0.20
0.20
0.240
10'-0"
10
0.40##
10
0.40##
10
0.300
12'-0"
10
0.40##
12
0.40##
12
0.360
4.
Top and bottom slab thickness and reinforcement are for precast and cast-in-place construction. All concrete shall be
of Class II concrete, except use Class IV concrete when shown in the Plans, for special applications of structures
located in extremely aggressive environments. Concrete as specified in ASTM C478 (4000 psi) may be used in lieu of
Class II concrete for precast items manufactured in accordance with Specifications Section 449.
5.
All reinforcement shown is Grade 60 steel, deformed bar. Equivalent area Grade 40 steel or equivalent area smooth or
deformed welded wire reinforcement in accordance with Specification Section 931 may be substituted according to
Index No. 201, unless otherwise noted.
6.
TABLE 1 NOTES:
Alt. A or Alt. B structure bottoms may be used in conjunction with curb inlet tops Types 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, and 10, and
any manhole or junction box unless otherwise shown in the plans or other standard drawings. Alt. B structure bottoms
##Provide 0.20 eq. in./ft. at each face, 12" max. bar spacing.
may be used in conjunction with curb inlet Types 7 & 8, or any ditch bottom inlet unless otherwise shown in the plans
**Modified minimum wall thickness.
or other standard drawings.
***Min. total circumferential reinforcement for continuous steel hoops:

A = 0.50 sq. in. for riser section height equal or less than 2'-0" (2 hoop min.)
7.
A = 0.75 sq. in. for riser section height more than 2'-0" up to 4'-0" (3 hoop min.)
Rectangular structures may be rotated as directed by the Engineer in order to facilitate connections between the
structure walls and storm sewer pipes.
Areas of reinforcing for precast items are based on Grade 60 reinforcing;

No reduction in the area of reinforcement is allowed for welded wire fabric in Table 1;
8.
Except when ACI hooks are specifically required, reinforcement in top and bottom slab shall be straight embedment.
9.
All reinforcement must have 2" minimum cover except for 3'-6" diameter precast circular units manufactured under
Area of vertical reinforcing may be reduced in accordance with ASTM C478.
ASTM C478, keyed construction otherwise shown. Additional bars used to restrain hole formers for precast structures
with grouted pipe connections,may be left flush with the hole surface. Cut or bend reinforcement at pipe openings to
maintain cover. Exposed ends of reinforcing at precast pipe openings and grouted joints must be removed to 1" below
SQUARE & RECTANGULAR STRUCTURES

(ALTERNATE B) - TABLE 2
Type
WallLength
(ft)
Max.
Depth
(ft)
rectangular structures shall be lapped a minimum of 30 bar diameters or by standard hooks at corners.
WallThickness (t3)
10. The corner fillets shown are necessary for rectangular structures used with circular risers and inlet throats and when
used on skew with rectangular risers, inlets and inlet throats. Fillets will be required in the top slab of the Alt. A
CIP
(in.)
6 Riser
Precast
(in.)
structure bottoms when used with the Alt. B risers. Each fillet shall be reinforced with two #5 bars.
11. Inlet walls, throats, risers or manhole tops shall be secured to structures as shown on Index No. 201 (Sheet 3 of 5)
3'-6"
40
4'-0"
40
5'-0"
22
6'-0"
15
5'-0"to 9'-0"
40
10'-0"
26
10'-0"to 12'-0"
40
10
16'-0"
35
16'-0"
40
10
10
20'-0"
25
20'-0"
30
10
10
the concrete surface and sealed with a Type F epoxy in accordance with Specification Section 926. Horizontal steel in
Optional Construction Joints.
8 Bottom
12. Structures with depths over 14' below the mean high water table are to be checked for flotation by the designer of the
11:
30:
58 AM
drainage project.
13. Units larger than specified standards may be substituted at the contractor's option when these units will not cause or
increase the severity of utility conflicts. Such larger units shall be furnished at no additional cost to the Department.
Larger Alt. A units cannot replace Alt. B units without approval of the Engineer. This note applies to this Index only.
14. For manhole and junction box tops, for frames and covers, and, for supplementary details and notes see Index No. 201.
15. Type J structure bottoms must have a minimum 6'-0" wall height when possible, for maintenance access.
TABLE 2 NOTES:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
See Table 8 for Reinforcing Schedule.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
200
SHEET
NO.
2 of 5
3" Clear
PER SIDE
Each Side Of Opening (See
RECTANGULAR
ROUND
Side Dimension (L)
Diameter (D)
2 to 4
=90
18"
3'-6"
3'-6"
4'-0"
24"
3'-6"
3'-6"
5'-0"
30"
3'-6"/4'-0"
4'-0"
6'-0"
36"
4'-0"/5'-0"
5'-0"
7'-0"
42"
5'-0"
6'-0"
7'-0"
48"
6'-0"
6'-0"
8'-0"
54"
6'-0"
7'-0"
10'-0"
7'-0"
10'-0"
8'-0"
12'-0"
60"
7'-0"
66"
7'-0"/8'-0"
72"
8'-0"
8'-0"
12'-0"
78"
9'-0"
10'-0"
12'-0"
84"
9'-0"
12'-0"
N/A
Horizontal Wall
Reinforcing (Vertical
Wall Reinforcing Not
Shown For Clarity)
Skew Angle
TABLE 5 - MAXIMUM PIPE SKEW FOR

PRECAST ROUND OPENINGS
WALL
PIPE SIZE
THICKNESS
18" 24"
30"
36"
42"
48"
54"
60"
66" 72"
78"
84"
MAXIMUM
8"
19 17
16
16
15
14
14
13 13
13
12 12
SKEW ANGLE
6"
21 20
18
17
17
16
15
15 14
14
13
13
TABLE 5 NOTES:
1" Clear
Pipes
=180
Pipe O.
D. + 6"
Number
or
Precast Opening
Note
(
Inside)
Per Side
Note Section B-B)
1" Clear
Single Pipe
Single Pipe
Provide Extra Reinforcing
Structure Wall
2" Clear
PIPE
SIZE
(
Inside)
TABLE 3-MINIMUM STRUCTURE

SIZES FOR SINGLE PIPE CONNECTION
2" Clear
These values are based on 2" clearance for precast structures.

Larger skews are possible for Cast-In-Place Structures or
elliptical pipe openings when approved by the Engineer.
(Outside)
TABLE 3 NOTES:
1. For Round Structures sizes with variable angles between
MAXIMUM PIPE SKEW FOR PRECAST ROUND OPENINGS
pipes and variable pipe sizes, refer to the FDOT Storm
PLAN VIEW
Drain Handbook.
2. For 3'-6" Precast Square Structure Bottoms, 30" Pipes

with similar invert elevations are not permitted in
adjacent walls. Use 4'-0" Side Dimensions when 30" pipe
openings are required on adjacent walls and the
difference in flow lines is less than 3'-0".
Not Shown For Clarity)
Structure Wall
Single Layer Horiz. Wall
(
Inside)
Reinf. (Vertical Wall Reinf.
3" Clear
Double Layer Horiz. Wall
(
Outside)
2" Clear
Reinf. (Vertical Wall Reinf.

Not Shown For Clarity)

(
Inside)
2" Clear

Typical Lap Splice (20 Bar Diameter For
L
Deformed Wire Or Bar, But Not Less Than
(Minimum Wall Length)
Vertical Wire Spacing Plus 2" For WWR

1
2"
1
S
TABLE 4-MINIMUM SIZES FOR MULTIPLE
Or 40 Bar Diameters For Smooth Wire)

Cl.
(Min.)
1-Extra #4 Bar
Structure Wall
(Pipe Spacing)
Each Side Of Opening
PARALLEL PIPE CONNECTIONS FOR
(See Section A-A)
2'-10"
6'-0"
8'-6"
11'-0"
24"
3'-5"
6'-6"
10'-0"
13'-6"
4'-3"
8'-0"
12'-6"
16'-6"
11:
30:
59 AM
30"
36"
5'-1'
9'-6"
14'-6"
19'-6"
42"
6'-0"
11'-0"
17'-0"
48"
6'-9"
12'-6"
19'-0"
54"
7'-8"
14'-0"
60"
8'-6"
15'-0"
66"
9'-0"
16'-6"
72"
10'-0"
18'-0"
78"
10'-9"
19'-0"
84"
11'-8"
20'-6"
Precast Structures
Ea. Side Of Opening
Pipes
(Typ.)
Horiz. Wall
(See Note Section B-B
Reinf. (Vert. Wall
Sheet 1 of 5)
Reinf. Not Shown
2" Min.
Pipe O.
D. + 6"
(S)
18"
Masonry Seal for

Provide Extra Reinf.
For Clarity)
Pipe
11
Partial Plan
Partial Plan
(Double Layer Wall Reinf.)
1
0
"
NUMBER OF PARALLEL PIPES
(T 2 "
C
y
l.
p
.
)
in
.
MINIMUM WALL LENGTH (L) FOR
PIPE
SPACING
PIPE
SIZE
Precast Opening
RECTANGULAR STRUCTURE BOTTOMS
(Single Layer Wall Reinf.)

Precast Opening
Pipe O.D. + 6"
MULTIPLE PARALLEL PIPE CONNECTIONS DETAIL
TABLE 4 NOTES:
PLAN VIEW
1. Minimum wall lengths based on precast structures, using
PRECAST ROUND STRUCTURES WITH

MULTIPLE PIPE CONNECTIONS
12/3/2015
concrete pipe with maximum skew angles per Table 5.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
2. Wall lengths exceeding 20'-0" require special designs.
STRUCTURE SIZES FOR PIPE CONNECTIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
200
SHEET
NO.
3 of 5
SLAB DESIGNS - SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR STRUCTURES (TABLE 6)
SLAB DESIGNS - ROUND
(ALL SLABS 8" THICK EXCEPT AS NOTED - REINFORCING PARALLEL TO SHORT WAY AND LONG WAY)
STRUCTURES (TABLE 7)
SHORT-WAY
LONG-WAY
SHORT-WAY
LONG-WAY
SHORT-WAY
LONG-WAY
REINF.
SLAB
SLAB
SCHEDULE
SLAB
SCHEDULE
SLAB
SCHEDULE
SLAB
SCHEDULE
SLAB
SCHEDULE
SLAB
SCHEDULE
DEPTH
(Bars A)
DEPTH
(Bars B)
DEPTH
(Bars A)
DEPTH
(Bars B)
DEPTH
(Bars A)
DEPTH
(Bars B)
SIZE: 3'-6" x UNLIMITED
SIZE: 6' x 6'
SLAB
(2-WAY)
DEPTH
THICKNESS
SCHEDULE
SIZE: 8' x 8'
SIZE: 3'-6" DIAMETER
0.5' < 8'
B10
0.5' < 24'
B10
0.5' < 13'
C6.5
0.5' < 10'
C3.5
0.5' < 10'
D7
0.5' < 9'
D4.5
2'-15'
6" Precast
8' < 13'
B5.5
24'-40'
B5.5
13' < 23'
D7
10' < 18'
D4.5
10' < 19'
E5
9' < 13'
E5
0.5' < 30'
8"
A6
13' < 31'
C6.5
23'-40'
E5
18' < 27'
E5
19'-30'
F5
13' < 18'
F5
30'-40'
8"
B5.5
31'-40'
D7
27' < 33'
E3
18' < 23'
F3.5
33'-40'
F5
23'-30'
G3.5
SIZE: 4' x UNLIMITED

0.5' < 7'
B5.5
0.5' < 15'
B10
7' < 19'
C6.5
15' < 29'
B5.5
19' < 31'
D7
29'-40'
C6.5
31'-40'
E5
SIZE: 6' x 7'

0.5' < 8'
C6.5
C6.5
0.5' < 3'
C6.5
3' < 7'
B5.5
3' < 13'
C6.5
7' < 22'
C6.5
13' < 22'
D7
22' < 29'
D7
29'-40'
E5
22' < 29'

29'-40'
D4.5
E5
SIZE: 5' x 6'

0.5' < 12'
C6.5
0.5' < 3'
C6.5
12' < 26'

26'-40'
D7
3' < 9'
B5.5
E5
9' < 23'
C3.5
8' < 12'
C3.5
8' < 14'
E5
7' < 9'
D4.5
D4.5
14' < 23'
F5
9' < 15'
E3
28'-40'
F5
21' < 28'
E5
23'-31'
G3.5
15' < 20'
F5
28' < 35'
E3
20' < 23'
F3.5
35'-40'
F5
23'-31'
G3.5
0.5' < 6'
C6.5
0.5' < 6'
B5.5
0.5' < 8'
D7
0.5' < 7'
D4
6' < 13'
D7
6' < 11'
C6.5
8' < 14'
E5
7' < 10'
E5
13' < 22'
E5
11' < 17'
C3.5
14' < 22'
F5
10' < 17'
F3.5
22' < 35'
F5
17' < 22'
D4.5
17' < 22'
G3.5
35'-40'
G5
22' < 32'
E5
32'-40'
0.5' < 8'
B5.5
E5
8' < 14'
C6.5
D7
10' < 31'
C3.5
E5
31'-40'
D4.5
14' < 24'
F5
14' < 21'
C3.5
24'-34'
G5
21' < 25'
D4.5
25'-34'
D7
0.5' < 8'
B5.5
8' < 14'
E5
8' < 14'
C6.5
F5
14' < 21'
C3.5
C6.5
0.5' < 8'
B10
14' < 24'
7' < 13'
D7
8' < 17'
B5.5
24'-34'
24'-40'
F5
17' < 25'

25'-40'
G5
C6.5
0.5' < 14'
21' < 25'
D4.5
25'-34'
E5
0.5' < 8'
C6.5
0.5' < 4'
B10
8' < 15'
D7
4' < 7'
C3.5
E5
7' < 11'
D4.5
F5
11' < 22'
E3
22' < 32'
F3.5
32'-40'
G3.5
< 14'
D7
14' < 24'
B5.5
15' < 26'
14' < 25'
E5
24' < 34'
C6.5
26'-40'
8'
25'-40'
F5
34'-40'
C3.5
C6.5
0.5' < 15'
8"
B5.5
15' < 26'
8"
C6.5
26' < 35'
8"
D7
35'-40'
8"
D4.5
22' < 36'
F5
22' < 31'
F3.5
36'-40'
G5
31'-40'
G3.5
SIZE: 10'x10'x10" SLAB THICKNESS

0.5' < 7'
C6.5
0.5' < 9'
8"
B5.5
9' < 15'
8"
C6.5
15' < 22'
8"
C3.5
22' < 30'
8"
D4.5
30'-40'
8"
E5
0.5' < 8'
8"
C3.5
8' < 16'
8"
D4.5
16' < 23'
8"
E5
0.5' < 6'
C6.5
23' < 27'
8"
E3
27'-40'
8"
F3.5
7' < 10'
D7
6' < 9'
D4.5
10' < 18'
E5
9' < 15'
E5
18' < 27'
F5
15' < 22'
F5
27'-32'
G5
22'-32'
G3.5

0.5' < 10'
8"
10' < 16'
8"
E5
16' < 19'
8"
E3
D4.5
0.5' < 10'
D7
0.5' < 8'
D7
19' < 29'
8"
F3.5
10' < 16'
E5
8' < 14'
E5
29'-40'
10"
F5
16' < 25'
F5
14' < 22'
F5
25'-35'
G5
22' < 30'
G5
0.5' < 12'
10"
D4.5
30'-35'
H4
12' < 20'
10"
E5
20' < 28'
10"
F5
28'-40'
10"
G3.5
C6.5
SLAB AND WALL DESIGN TABLE NOTES
SIZE: 7' x 8'

0.5' < 8'
C6.5
0.5' < 14'
B10
0.5' < 5'
C6.5
0.5' < 5'
C6.5
8' < 14'
D7
14' < 24'
B5.5
5' < 11'
D7
5' < 8'
C3.5
14' < 25'
E5
24' < 34'
C6.5
11' < 19'
E5
8' < 13'
D4.5
25'-40'
F5
34'-40'
C3.5
19' < 30'
F5
13' < 22'
E3
30'-40'
G5
22' < 30'
F3.5
30'-40'
G3.5
0.5' < 9'
D7
0.5' < 7'
1. Size is the inside dimension(s) of a structure.
7.
0.5' < 8'
10"
D4.5
8' < 13'
10"
E5
13' < 18'
10"
F5
18' < 26'
10"
G3.5
26'-40'
12"
G3.5
Wall lengths exceeding 6'-0" require two layers of reinforcing

(See Table 8) with 2" of cover from the horizontal bars to the
2. Slab reinforcement is appropriate for top, intermediate, and
inside and outside faces for each layer.
bottom slabs.
8.
3. Bottom Slabs for precast 3'-6" x 3'-6" rectangular structures
Wall lengths exceeding the dimensions or depths shown in

Table 8, or 12'-0" diameter require a special design.
at 15' depth or less, may be 6" thick.
SIZE: 7' x 9'
11:
31:
00 AM
8"
C3.5
SIZE: 5' x 9'

C6.5
30'-40'
SIZE: 7' x 7'
0.5' < 8'
B5.5
E5
0.5' < 8'
0.5' < 7'
E5
SIZE: 5' x 8'
A6
8"
F5
13' < 24'
E3
SIZE: 6' x 9'

D7
20' < 34'
8"
19' < 30'
SIZE: 9' x 9'
8' < 14'
10' < 20'
0.5' < 19'

SIZE: 6' x 8'
0.5' < 8'
B5.5
D7
12' < 21'
E5
0.5' < 10'
0.5' < 7'
E5
D4.5
SIZE: 5' x 7'
D7
D7
35'-40'
C6.5
0.5' < 8'
8' < 16'
23' < 35'
0.5' < 10'
34'-40'
SIZE: 8' x 9'

C6.5
16' < 28'
SIZE: 5' x 5'

0.5' < 3'
0.5' < 8'
C6.5
9.
C6.5
9' < 15'
E5
7' < 10'
C3.5
15' < 25'
F5
10' < 14'
D4.5
25' - 34'
G5
14' < 21'
E5
21' < 29'
F5
29'-34'
F3.5
4. Slab depth is measured from finished grade to top of slab.
5. Wall depth is measured to the top of the bottom slab for

boxes and to the top of the intermediate slab for risers.
the same for both long and short sides.
10. Reinforcing schedules with larger areas of steel may be

substituted for schedules with smaller bar or wire spacing,
except that Schedule B10 may not be substituted for Schedule
6. Wall height is the distance between top of lower slab to
12/3/2015
Wall thickness and reinforcing for rectangular structures is
bottom of upper slab. Maximum wall height is 12' for wall
A6. See Index 201, Sheet 4 for allowable bar spacing

adjustments when larger areas of reinforcing are substituted.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
lengths exceeding 5', or 10' for wall lengths exceeding 12'.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
200
SHEET
NO.
4 of 5
WALL
HORIZONTAL
REINFORCING
SCHEDULE
DEPTH
WALL
SCHEDULE
DEPTH
VERTICAL
REINFORCING
WALL
DEPTH
SIZE:3'-6'& RISERS
1.17' - 40'
A12
A12
B10
6"/8"
10'< 18'
B5.5
6"/8"
18'< 29'
C6.5
6"/8"
29'- 40'
C3.5
6"/8"
A12
26'- 40'
A12
A12
26'- 40'
B10
B10
20'- 40'
C6.5
C6.5
F5
9"
B10
Inside Outside
1.17' < 10' C6.5
A12
0.20
12
A6
0.20
4
7
10
B5.5
0.24
C6.5
0.37
C3.5
0.37
D7
0.53
D4.5
0.53
10"
25'- 40'
D7
D7
17'< 24'
E5
E5
10"
24'- 40'
F5
F5
10"
B5.5
6"/8"
C6.5
6"/8"
20'< 28'
C3.5
6"/8"
28'- 40'
D4.5
6"/8"
SIZE:12'-0"(PrecastOnly)
Inside Outside
1.17' < 12' B10
Inside Outside
B10
1.17' < 10'
D7
D7
9"
1.17' < 5'
B5.5
6"/8"
12'< 24'
C6.5
C6.5
10'< 17'
D4.5
D4.5
9"
5'< 9'
C6.5
6"/8"
24'- 40'
D7
D7
17'< 23'
E5
E5
9"
9'< 15'
C3.5
6"/8"
23'< 32'
F5
F5
9"
15'< 22'
D4.5
6"/8"
32'- 40'
G5
G5
9"
E3
8"
SIZE:16'-0"
Inside Outside
Inside Outside
1.17' < 9'
C3.5
6"/8"
C6.5
1.17' < 13'
D7
D7
10"
9'< 15'
D4.5
6"/8"
11'< 20'
D7
D7
13'< 20'
E5
E5
10"
15'< 26'
E3
8"
20'< 28'
E5
E5
20'< 28'
F5
F5
10"
28'- 40'
F5
F5
28'- 40'
G5
G5
10"
Inside Outside
D7
D7
1.17' < 11' C6.5
8"
Inside Outside
1.17' < 9'
D7
D7
9"
B10
B10
8"
10'< 18'
D7
D7
9'< 13'
D4.5
D4.5
9"
7'< 10'
B5.5
B5.5
8"
18'< 25'
E5
E5
13'< 19'
E5
E5
9"
10'< 20'
C6.5
C6.5
8"
25'- 35'
F5
F5
19'< 27'
F5
F5
9"
20'< 30'
D7
D7
8"
27'- 35'
G5
G5
9"
30'- 40'
E5
E5
8"
SIZE:20'-0"
Inside Outside
C6.5
0.73
F5
1.06
F3.5
1.06
G5
1.45
G.3.5
1.45
H4
1.75
*Equivalent Area Welded Wire Reinforcing may be substituted

in accordance with Index No. 201, Sheet 4.
1.17' < 10' C6.5
Option 1) Lap Splice:

At Quarter Point (30 Bar
Diameters Or Vertical Wire
With Standard 90
Spacing Plus 2" For WWR)
Hooks At Corners
(8" For #4's, 10" For
#5's, 12" #6's)
Inside Outside
C6.5
1.17' < 8'
D7
D7
10"
B5.5
8"
10'< 17'
D7
D7
8'< 12'
E5
E5
10"
C6.5
8"
17'- 30'
E5
E5
12'< 20'
F5
F5
10"
Inside Outside
0.73
Inside Outside
C6.5
1.17' < 7'
1.17' < 6' B5.5
E5
E3
1.17' < 10' C6.5
Inside Outside
70 KSI
(in.)
0.24
D7
6'< 10'
65 KSI
(in.)
B10
D7
6'< 13'
GR 60
BARS
(in.)
10"
10'< 17'
10'< 20'
WWR EQUIV.AREA*
(in./ft.)
C6.5
C6.5
Inside Outside
A12
F5
C6.5
SIZE:8'-0"
1.17' < 20' A12
26'- 40'
Inside Outside
SIZE:7'-0"
A12
D7
14'< 25'
Inside Outside
1.17' < 25' A12
D7
MAXIMUM SPACING
GRADE 60
AREA
Inside Outside
6"/8"
26'- 40'
SCHEDULE
B10
Inside Outside
26'- 40'
DEPTH
1.17' < 6'
22'- 40'
A12
SCHEDULE
GRADE 60 BARS OR 65 KSI& 70 KSI

WELDED WIRE REINFORCING
SIZE:12'-0"
SIZE:6'-0"
1.17' < 26'
WALL
Inside Outside
1.17' < 14' B10
SIZE:5'-0"
1.17' - 40'
SCHEDULE
REINFORCING SCHEDULE
1.17' < 10'
SIZE:4'-0"
1.17' - 40'
HORIZONTAL
REINFORCING
W ALL
TH ICKNESS
VERTICAL
REINFORCING
W ALL
TH ICKNESS
WALL DESIGNS - RECTANGULAR STRUCTURES (TABLE 8)
Structure Wall
L/4
Lap Splice
L
13'< 22'
D7
D7
8"
22'< 31'
E5
E5
8"
31'- 40'
F5
F5
8"
SIZE:9'-0"
Inside Outside
1.17' < 12' A12
A12
Inside Outside
1.17' < 8' C6.5
20'- 30'
C6.5
8"
12'< 28'
C6.5
C6.5
8'< 15'
D7
D7
8"
28'- 40'
D7
D7
15'< 23'
E5
E5
8"
23'- 40'
F5
F5
8"
G5
G5
10"
Inside Outside
1.17' < 8'
C6.5
C6.5
8'< 13'
D7
D7
13'- 25'
E5
E5
Inside Outside
1.17' < 8' D4.5
8'< 12'
E5
(Wall Length)
2" Clear
9"
E5
9"
12'< 19'
F5
F5
9"
19'- 25'
G5
G5
9"
Wall Reinforcing
(Typ.)
(Outside)
D4.5
Single Layer
3" Clear
2" Clear
(Inside)
Double Layer
Wall Reinforcing

Corner Spliced Bar (30 Bar
Diameters, But Not Less
Than Two Vertical Wire
Half Plan
11:
31:
01 AM
SIZE:10'-0"
Inside Outside
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1.17' < 10' B10
Inside Outside
Half Plan
(Double Layer Wall Reinf.)
B10
1.17' < 10'
D7
D7
8"
10'< 21'
C6.5
C6.5
10'< 17'
E5
E5
8"
21'< 26'
D7
D7
17'< 26'
F5
F5
8"
26'- 40'
C6.5
C6.5
26'- 40'
F5
F5
10"
Spaces Plus 2" For WWR)
(Single Layer Wall Reinf.)
WALL REINFORCING SPLICE DETAILS

(ALTERNATE B)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
200
SHEET
NO.
5 of 5
2" Raised Or Depressed
Raised Or
Identification Letter Type I
Depressed Logo
Adjustable Shall Include

"ADJUSTABLE" On Cover
Pick-Up Hole
FDOT
STORM
SEWER
Clips Permitted
1 1/4 "
On 3'-0" Frame
Surface
3/4 "
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
1 1/4 "
TOP VIEW
8
/
5
1"
1"
M
ax
.
"
Nonskid
TOP VIEW

Identification Letter
2'-0" Or 3'-0"
3/4 "
1/2 "
FDOT
"
7"
1 1/2 "
5 3/4 "
10"
7"
8 3/4 "
1/2 "
4 1/2 "
1"
3/4 "
3
/
4
3 1/4 "
1/2 "
1"
5/8 "
6"
1 1/4 "
1/2 "
7 1/2 "
2'-0" Or 3'-0"
3 3/8 "
5/8 "
10"
2'-0" Or 3'-0"
3"
5/8 "
SECTION
WALL SECTION
SECTION
WALL SECTION
SECTION
Identification Number
For Manholes
For Curb Inlets Types 1, 2, 3, & 4
For Curb Inlets Types 7 & 8
Covers With And Without Ribs

Shall Bear The Same Product
TYPE I
TYPE II
TYPE III
Ribs
Identification Number
(Optional)
6 3/4" M in.
To 8" M ax
1 1/4 "
00201-01.xlsx!Sheet1!R1C1:R8C7
117.465240797885
Sheet1!R1C1:R8C7
00201-01.xlsx
1319145411
8.14b
3
0
1
Cover, Nonskid Surface
2'-0"
WEIGHT OF CASTINGS
(lb)
1" M in.
3" Min.
5/8 "
Frame
Type
3'OPENING
2-Piece Cover
Frame
Cover (Std.)
Frame
Inside
Outside
Total
I*
155
190
220
190
220
410
II
145
190
255
190
220
410
III
90
190
180
190
220
410
3"
Varies
1'-11 3/4 "
2'OPENING
3"
Ribs (Optional)
1'-8 3/4 "
FDOT
* Includes Type I Adjustable
1'-9 3/4 "
STORM
Section
NOTES (FRAMES, AND COVER)
0 Mi
n-
Note 1
Varies
See General
BOTTOM VIEW
SEWER
1. The standard cover is to be used for all frames Types I, II, III
0
.
0
8
7 Ma
x(
f
t
/
f
t
)
1'-11 1/2 "

SECTION
and the
2-piece cover, and is the replacement cover for all previous frames with
1
2"
Standard
deep seats (traffic type). The 185 lb. cover (nontraffic type), 1984
Cover
COVER FOR ALL FRAMES
Roadway and Traffic Design Standards Index No. 201, is the

1
2"
deep seats.
Installation
deep seats is not permitted.
Pick-Up Holes
5/8 "
2. Use the 2'-0" cover, unless the 2-piece cover is called for in the plans,
except at inlets and manholes with sump bottoms use the 2-piece cover
when the sump depth exceeds 2', unless otherwise noted.
2'-11 3/4 "
1 1/4 "
11:
31:
01 AM
of frame with
2 1/4 "
replacement cover for existing frames
1
with 2"
2'-0"
1'-10 1/16 "
DESIGNER NOTE:
For Use With Types I, II And
12/3/2015
Consider using the 2-piece cover where depths exceed 5' and manual entry
Front View
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
TYPE I ADJUSTABLE
may be required for cleaning. Clearly note the requirement for a 2-piece
cover, on the Drainage Structure sheets in the plans.
III Frames With 3'-0" Opening
2-PIECE COVER
2-PIECE COVER
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SUPPLEMENTARY DETAILS FOR MANHOLES & INLETS
NO.
201
SHEET
NO.
1of 5
Brick Adjustment or
Cold Shuts.
Grade Ring Permitted
See Table For Lengths. When
1
2"
Cold Shut
5"
1
2"
10Draft
x 1" Dia. J-Type Or Threaded
3' Dia. (2-Piece Cover)
Tongue & Groove
3'-6" Or
Thickness Of
Optional
Joint To Match Riser
Riser
4' Dia.
Structure Wall
3'-6" Or
Key
Cold Shut
3'-6" Or
4' Dia.
SECTION
Adhesive Bonded Anchor Installed
Washer On Straight Bolt
Riser
4' Dia.
Straight Eyebolt (Thru-Bolted Or
Jam Nut, Nut And
1'M in.
2'
-3
See Note 3
1
2"
Per Specification Section 416 Using
BRICK OR CONCRETE PRECAST CONCENTRIC CONE
Note: See Slab Designs Index No. 200.
Type HV Adhesive) Or Precaster QCP
TYPE 7
PRECAST ECCENTRIC CONE
TYPE 8
Approved Connector
MANHOLE TOPS
Half To Two-Thirds Wall Thickness

NOTE:
8" Brick
Easy Handling.
Anchor Option
Concrete Or
3'M ax.
Provide Adequate Loop For
Grate(s)
(Min. 0"-Max. 12")
(Min. 0"- Max. 12")
Chaining Two Grates Together
1'M in.
4" Min. Embedment

For Adhesive Bonded
Brick Adjustment or Grade Ring Permitted

3'M ax.
1
2"
3
4"
5
16"
1
2" or
Chain &
2'
-11
5
16"
Chain Connection To Grate
When Alternate "G" grate is specified, the chain, bolt, nuts, washer and cold shuts
NOTES (TOPS)
shall be galvanized in accordance with Section 425 of the Standard Specifications.
1. Manhole top Type 7 slabs shall be of Class II concrete. Concrete as

specified in ASTM C478 may be used for precast units; see General
Cost of eyebolt and chain to be included in the contract unit price for inlets.
Typical Location
Note No. 3.
Inlet
Index
Eye-
Type
Bolts
Weep Hole
construction. The optional key is for precast tops and in lieu of
Of Chain
Dia. Varies (12" Std.)
dowels. Frame and slab openings are to be omitted when top is used
(MB) 1
4'-0"
Slide & Spin
(MB) 2
4'-0"
Slide & Spin
(MB) 3
2 @ 4'-0"
Slide & Spin
(MB) 4
2 @ 4'-0"
Slide & Spin
(MB) 5
2 @ 4'-0"
Slide & Spin
218
(BW)
3'-8"
Slide Or Slide & Spin
219
(BW, RGD)
4'-0"
Slide & Spin
220
4'-0"
Slide & Spin
221
4'-0"
Slide & Spin
(4' Std.)
Without Sump
2. Manhole top Type 7 slabs may be of cast-in-place or precast
Length
Handling & Remarks
Number
Sump Depth Varies
For Bottom Slab
EYEBOLT AND CHAIN REQUIREMENTS
over a junction box.
217
3. Manhole top Type 8 may be of cast-in-place or precast concrete

construction or brick construction. For concrete construction, the
concrete and steel reinforcement shall be the same as the supporting
1
4"
Galvanized Hardware Cloth
wall unit. An eccentric cone may be used.

No. 4 Coarse Aggregate 2' x 2' x 2'
Filter Fabric
4. Manhole tops shall be secured to structures by optional construction

NOTE:
joints as shown on Sheet 3.
Sump bottom appropriate for all manhole and inlet types. Sumps are to be
constructed in inlet and manholes connected to French Drains unless excluded in
5. Frames can be adjusted a maximum 12" height with brick or precast

230
3'-0"
Slide
231
5'-0"
Slide & Spin
2'-6"
Slide & Spin
the plans. At other locations, sump is to be constructed only where called for in
the plans. Weep holes to be constructed in sump bottom only where called for in
ASTM C478 grade rings.
the plans. Cost of sump bottom and weep hole to be included in the contract unit
6. Substitution of manhole top Type 8 for manhole top Type 7 is allowed
price for inlet or manhole.
SUMP BOTTOM
provided that minimum dimensions shown above are not reduced.
232
2'-6"
Slide & Spin
2 @ 2'-6"
Slide & Spin
2 @ 2'-6"
Flip Ctr. Grate and Slide & Spin Single Free Grate
minimum thickness (h) above pipe opening cannot be maintained with
Ctr. Grate(s) Chained To One End Grate
manhole top Type 8.
1 or 2 @ 1'-6"
F
3'-6"
Flip Or Slide & Spin
6'-0"
Slide
7. Substitution of Manhole top Type 7 for Type 8 is allowed if the
1
2"
Grout (3:1 Sand-Cement
Per Ft.
Mixture Or Any Class
DESIGN NOTES
233
Concrete)
1. Manhole top Type 8 should be specified in the plans when depths shown
234
2'-0"
Lifting Loop
4'-0"
Slide & Spin
above can be maintained.

12" (Min.)
EYEBOLT AND CHAIN FOR LOCKING GRATES TO INLETS
Bituminous Coating On Face Of
FOR ALL STRUCTURES UNLESS EXCLUDED BY SPECIAL DETAIL
Concrete And Around Pipe
ALL PIPE TYPES
Masonry Seal for

Capping Or Plugging Of Upper Stub Not Required (Friable
Base Material At Stub Opening Shall Be Removed To Permit
Covering Of Opening With Structural Course Material)
Prior To Placing Base Material

Precast Opening
Remove Riprap, Cement PVC Cap
DRAINAGE STRUCTURE INVERT
Filter Fabric Wrap
On Lower Stub And Place Compacted

Fill In Entrance.
See Inset A
Riprap Entrance
Pipe To Be Placed
Top Of Subgrade
Structure Wall
1
n.
4" M i
Bevel Cut Upper Stub To Match Forming For Apron Face
Mortar Per Specification Section 425

Brick Masonry Or Any Class Concrete
In Approximate Center
1
2"
Required For Gaps Greater Than 2
Grout Seal or Integral Cast
Soil Compacted To Density

Required In Specification
Section 125 Described
1
n.
4" M i
2"
(Min.)
12" (
M in.
)
4"
4" PVC Pipe, 45 Lateral And Stubs
(
M in.
)
11:
31:
02 AM
Of Opening.
Pipe Wall
1
2"
1
2"
As Bedding Zone.
12/3/2015
Note: Cost of pipe, fittings and sandbagging to be included in the contract

unit price for inlets.
FILTER FABRIC WRAP ON GROUTED
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
NS FOR SUBGRADE AND BASE

TEMPORARY DRAI
INSET A
PIPE TO STRUCTURE JOINT
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
201
SHEET
NO.
2 of 5
Top of Segment
h
H
H H (min.)
H
Minimum Value For H
h
H (min.) h 0.4H
(When Present)
1
2"
Segments may be inverted. Opening for pipe shall be the

pipe OD plus 6" ( 2" tolerance). If h can not be attained,
When
4"
M in.
Fill Keyway With Grout
Then (Reqd.)
6" h < 0.75H (min.)

h 0.75H (min.)
Cold
Dowel
Grout
Grout
Grout
h 0.4H
h H (min.)
then a top or bottom slab must be attached to the segment
H (min.)
Box Or Riser Diameter
1'-0"
3'-6" & 4'-0"
1'-6"
5'-0" & 6'-0"
2'-0"
>6'-0"
as shown below.
SEPARATE RISER SEGMENTS WITH CONSTRUCTION JOINTS OTHER THAN DOWEL OPTION
Cast
Joint
Riser Or Inlet Opening
TOP SLABS TO WALLS
(Location Varies)
Continuous Reinforcement
Face
Or Monolithically Cast Only
Face
h
1
2"
Face
Dowel Construction Joint
Or Dowels
1
2"
Inside
Inside
Outside
Grout
Grout
Grout
Cold Cast Joint
h
h zero and h 6"
WALL JOINTS
(H (min.) Tabulated Above Do Not Apply)
h 2" and h 6"
SEGMENTS FOR SLAB TO WALL DOWEL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS OR MONOLITHICALLY CAST SEGMENTS
Dowel
NOTE: h may be less than 6" when approved by the Engineer, but not for inlet segments at finish grade elevation.
M in.
4"
Top or Bottom Segment: h 2"
Slab
Grout
Thickness
COMPARATIVE SIDE VIEWS
MINIMUM DIMENSIONS FOR BOX AND RISER SEGMENTS
Cold Cast
Joint
BOTTOM SLABS TO WALLS

1. One or more types of joints may be used in a single structure, except brick wall
structure. Brick wall construction is permitted on circular units only.
2. All grouted joints are to have a maximum thickness of 1".
1
2"
3. Keyways are to be a minimum of 1
deep.
Option 1) Lap Splice: At Quarter Point
Option 2) Lap Splice: Standard 90
(30 Bar Diameters Or Vertical Wire
Hooks At Corners (8" For #4's,
Spacing Plus 2" For WWR)
10" For #5's, 12" for #6's)
4. Joint dowels are to be #4 bars, 12" long with a minimum of 6 bars per joint
2"
approximately evenly spaced for circular structures or at maximum 12" spacing for
rectangular structures. Bars may be either Adhesive Bonded Dowels in accordance
with Specification Section 416, or placed approximately 6" into fresh concrete leaving
1
2"
the remainder to extend into the secondary cast. Welded wire reinforcement may be
Sheet 4.
Min. (Typ.)
Top Slab
substituted for the dowel bar in accordance with the equivalent steel area table on
L/4
Lap Splice
Bottom Slab
Structure Wall
5. Minimum cover on dowel reinforcing bars is 2" to outside face of structure.
2"
6. Joints between wall segments and between wall segments and top or bottom slabs may
be sealed either by preformed plastic gasket material using the procedures given in
Section 430 of the Specifications or by non-shrink grout, in accordance with Section
934 of the Specifications.
7. Insert products approved by the Engineer may be used in lieu of dowel embedment.
REBAR STRAIGHT END EMBEDMENT

FOR TOP AND BOTTOM SLABS
11:
31:
03 AM
OPTIONAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
Wall Reinforcing
(NOTE: NOT APPLICABLE AROUND MANHOLE AND RISER OPENINGS)

Corner Spliced Bar (30 Bar Diameters, But Not Less
Than Two Vertical Wire Spacings Plus 2" For WWR)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
WALL REINFORCING SPLICE DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
201
SHEET
NO.
3 of 5
NOTES FOR PRECAST OPTIONS AND

EXAMPLE TABLE OF EQUIVALENT STEEL AREA
EQUIVALENT REINFORCEMENT SUBSTITUTION
GRADE 60
EQUIVALENT GRADE 40
EQUIVALENT 65 KSI SMOOTH
EQUIVALENT 70 KSI DEFORMED
REINFORCING BAR
REINFORCING BAR
WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT
1. Details for optional precast inlet construction up to depths of 15' are shown on the inlet indexes.
2. When precast units are used in conjunction with Alt. "B" Structure Bottoms, Index No. 200, the
SCHEDULE
Steel
Bar Size & Spacing
Min. Steel
Area
Bar Size & Spacing
(in/ft)
Area
Min. Steel
Style Designation
(in/ft)
Area
Min. Steel
Style Designation
(in/ft)
Area
interior dimensions of an Alt. "B" Bottom can be adjusted to reflect these inlet interior
dimensions.
(in/ft)
3. Concrete which meets the requirements of ASTM C478 or Class IV must be used for precast
1
2"
#3 @ 6
A
1
2"
#3 @ 4
Ctrs.
#4 @ 12" Ctrs.
0.20
Ctrs.
3"x3"-W4.6xW4.6
0.30
#4 @ 8" Ctrs.
4"x4"-W6.2xW6.2
3"x3"-D4.3xD4.3
0.1846
4"x4"-D5.7xD5.7
#5 @ 12" Ctrs.
6"x6"-W9.2xW9.2
6"x6"-D8.6xD8.6
1
3 2"
Ctrs.
3"x3"-W5.5xW5.5
3"x3"-D5.1xD5.1
1
2"
Ctrs.
structures constructed with 6" wall or slab thickness.

0.1714
4. Reinforcement can be either deformed bar reinforcement or welded wire reinforcement. Bar
reinforcement other than 60 ksi may be used, however only two grades are recognized; Grade 40
1
2"
#3 @ 5
#3 @
Ctrs.
0.24
#4 @ 6
#4 @ 10" Ctrs.
0.36
4"x4"-W7.4xW7.4
0.2215
4"x4"-D6.9xD6.9
#5 @ 10" Ctrs.
6"x6"-W11.1xW11.1
6"x6"-D10.3xD10.3
#3 @ 3" Ctrs.
3"x3"-W6.2xW6.2
3"x3"-D5.7xD5.7
and Grade 60. Smooth welded wire reinforcement, will be recognized as having a design strength
0.2057
of 65 ksi and deformed welded wire reinforcement will be recognized as having a design strength
of 70 ksi. The area of reinforcement required may be adjusted in accordance with the
Equivalent Steel Area Table provided. For bars and spacings not given, the steel area required
can be determined by the following equations:
#3 @ 5" Ctrs..
Special 1
0.267
#4 @ 6" Ctrs.
0.40
4"x4"-W8.2xW8.2
0.2465
4"x4"-D7.6xD7.6
0.2289
#4 @ 9" Ctrs.
#5 @ 9" Ctrs.
#3 @
C
1
3 2"
Ctrs.
1
2"
Ctrs.
#4 @ 6
#4 @ 4" Ctrs.
0.37
1
2"
1
2"
Ctrs.
0.53
#6 @ 5" Ctrs.
Ctrs.
3"x3"-W16.8xW16.8
3"x3"-D15.6xD15.6
1
2"
Ctrs.
1
2"
Ctrs.
1.095
#6 @ 3" Ctrs.
1
2"
#7 @ 4
#7 @ 7" Ctrs.
3"x3"-D11.4xD11.4
1
2"
#7 @ 6
1.06
3"x3"-W12.2xW12.2
6"x6"-D22.7xD22.7
#6 @ 4
Ctrs.
6"x6"-D15.9xD15.9
6"x6"-W24.5xW24.5
#5 @ 3
1
2"
6"x6"-W17.1xW17.1
Ctrs.
#4 @ 3" Ctrs.
#5 @ 3
4"x4"-D10.6xD10.6
Ctrs.
0.795
Ctrs.
1.59
#8 @ 6" Ctrs.
#5 @ 3" Ctrs.
4"x4"-W16.3xW16.3
4"x4"-W22.5xW22.5
0.4892
0.6738
4"x4"-D15.1xD15.1
4"x4"-D20.9xD20.9
6"x6"-W33.7xW33.7
6"x6"-D31.3xD31.3
3"x3"-W24.5xW24.5
3"x3"-D22.7xD22.7
4"x4"-W32.6xW32.6
Grade 40 Steel Area = A 40 = 60 x A 60

s
s
40
3"x3"-D7.9xD7.9
0.3415
1
2"
#6 @ 6
#6 @ 7" Ctrs.
4"x4"-W11.4xW11.4
1
2"
#5 @ 4
0.73
6"x6"-D11.4xD11.4
3"x3"-W8.5xW8.5
0.555
#4 @ 3" Ctrs.
#6 @ 10" Ctrs.
#5 @ 5" Ctrs.
Ctrs.
#6 @ 9
Ctrs.
#5 @ 7" Ctrs.
1
2"
#5 @ 6
#5 @ 10" Ctrs.
#4 @ 4
6"x6"-W12.3xW12.3
0.9785
4"x4"-D30.3xD30.3
6"x6"-W48.9xW48.9
6"x6"-D45.4xD45.4
3"x3"-W28.6xW28.6
3"x3"-D26.6xD26.6
0.3171
Smooth Welded Wire Reinforcement Steel Area = A 65 = 60 x A 60

s
s
65
Deformed Welded Wire Reinforcement Steel Area = A 70 = 60 x A 60
s
s
70
0.4543
When a reduced area of reinforcement is provided, any maximum bar spacing shown must
also be reduced as determined by the following equations, unless otherwise shown:
Max. Grade 40 Bar Spacing = Grade 60 Bar Spacing

0.6257
Max. Smooth Welded Wire Spacing = Grade 60 Bar Spacing x 0.86

Max. Deformed Welded Wire Spacing = Grade 60 Bar Spacing x 0.74
When an increased area of reinforcing is provided, then the maximum bar spacing may be
0.9086
increased by the squared ratio of increased steel area, but not to exceed 12":
Max. Bar Spacing Provided Max. Bar Spacing Required x
Steel Area Provided

Min. Steel Area Required
#7 @ 4" Ctrs.
Special 2
#6 @ 4" Ctrs.
1.24
1.86
4"x4"-W38.2xW38.2
1.1446
4"x4"-D35.4xD35.4
1.0629
#8 @ 5" Ctrs.
1
2"
Ctrs.
1
2"
Ctrs.
#7 @ 5
In no case will reinforcement with wires smaller than W3.1 or D3.1, or spacings greater than
6"x6"-W57.2xW57.2
6"x6"-D53.1xD53.1
8" be permitted. Bar reinforcement shall show the minimum yield designation grade mark or
3"x3"-W33.7xW33.7
3"x3"-D31.3xD31.3
Maximum bar spacing shall not be greater than two (2) times the slab thickness with a
either the number 60 or one (1) grade mark line to be acceptable at the higher value.
#6 @ 3
G
#7 @ 3" Ctrs.
1.46
2.19
#8 @ 4" Ctrs.
#7 @ 5" Ctrs.
1.3477
4"x4"-W44.9xW44.9
1.2514
4"x4"-D41.7xD41.7
maximum spacing of 12" or three (3) times the wall thickness, with a maximum spacing
of 18" for vertical bars and 12" for horizontal bars. Wires smaller than W3.1 or D4.0 are
permitted in the walls of ASTM C 478 round structure bottoms and round risers.
GENERAL NOTES
5. Fiber-reinforced concrete may be substituted for conventional steel reinforcement in
1. For square or rectangular precast drainage structures, either deformed or smooth welded wire reinforcement in accordance
accordance with the Structures Design Guidelines. Shop drawings corresponding to an

approved fiber-reinforced concrete mix design must be submitted for approval to the
with Specifcation Section 931:
State Drainage Engineer.
A.Width and length of the unit is four times the spacing of the cross wires.
B.Wire reinforcement shall be continuous around the box, and lapped in accordance with Option 1 or 3 as shown in the Wall
Reinforcing Splice Details.
2. Horizontal steel in the walls of rectangular structures shall be lap spliced in accordance with Option 1, 2 or 3 as shown in the
Wall Reinforcing Splice Details.
3. Welding of splices and laps is permitted. The requirements and restrictions placed on welding in AASHTO M259 shall apply.
4. Rebar straight end embedment of peripheral reinforcement may be used in lieu of ACI standard hooks for top and bottom slabs
except when hooks are specifically called for in the plans or standard drawings.
5. Concrete as specified in ASTM C478, (4000 psi) may be used in lieu of Class II concrete in precast items manufactured in plants
11:
31:
04 AM
which meet the requirements in accordance with Specifcation Section 449.
6. Precast opening for pipe shall be the pipe OD plus 6" ( 2" tolerance). Mortar used to seal the pipe into the opening will be of
such a mix that shrinkage will not cause leakage into or out of the structure. Dry-pack mortar may be used in lieu of brick and
1
2"
mortar construction to seal openings less than 2
wide.
7. For pay item purposes, the height used to determine if a drainage structure is greater than 10 feet shall be computed using:
12/3/2015
A. the elevation of the top of the manhole lid,

B.the grate elevation or the theoretical gutter grade elevation of an inlet, or
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
C. the outside top elevation of a junction box less the flow line elevation of the lowest pipe or to top of sump floor.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
201
SHEET
NO.
4 of 5
(
Shown)
(
See Note 2)
Curb Inlet, 8" Slab Or
1'
-0" Deep M in. Segm ent
Skewed Pipe
Pipe & Structure
Skewed Pipe
Pipe Opening
Pipe
Skew
Top Corner Bar

(See Note 3 Below)
6"
h
Provide 4 Extra #4 Bars
Min.
Skew
(Continuous Around Corner

Evenly Spaced). Tie To The
Outside Of Vertical Wall Reinf.
Wall
1'
3"
Mi
n
.
3"
1'
.
n
Mi
Dowel Construction Joint Or

Monolithically Wall & Slabs
1'
6"
Mi
n
.
Structure Bottom
6"
1'
.
n
Mi
h 1'-0" (See Notes 2 and 3 Below)
DESIGNER NOTE: Use only when round structures are not practical,
Pipe & Opening
engineer of record approval required.
PICTORIAL VIEW
(Not Centered)
NOTE:
1.
Submit Shop Drawings of corner openings for approval by the Engineer of Record.
2.
h may be less than 1'-0" when a minimum 1'-0" deep segment, 8" slab or curb inlet
(Not Centered)
is provided above the corner opening.
Riser Or Inlet Top

Top Slab
3.
For inlet segments at finish grade elevation substitute a #8 Bar for the top
corner bar when 1'-0" h < 2'-0".
Pipe Opening For
Pipe Opening
RECTANGULAR SEGMENT WITH
Normal Pipe
For Skewed Pipe
PIPE OPENING AT CORNER
Bottom Slab
SECTION AA
11:
31:
05 AM
(Pipes Not Shown For Clarity)
DETAILS FOR SKEWED PIPES IN
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
RECTANGULAR STRUCTURES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
201
SHEET
NO.
5 of 5
Grate Consisting Of Vertical Bars

3
4"
Transverse Bars
And Transverse Bars (Web Spacers)
Opening
3
4"
* 1
Opening For Fixed Height Grates,
6" (
M in.
)
Opening At the Pipe Can Be 3"
6" (
M in.
)
#4 Bars Continous
On Both Sides
Removeable Grate
Sl
o
p
e To
6" (Min.)
Fi
t
Concrete Backfill
Grate Frame
1
2"
15"
Pipe Channel 15" Diameter
Concrete Backfill
12
4" (
M in.
)
With Anchoring Lug

6" (Min.)
(Min.)
Standard Unless Otherwise

Shown in Plans.
Drain Channel
Channel
Concrete Backfill
6" (Min.)
6" (
M in.
)
6" (
M in.
)
Shown in Plans
PREFORMED POLYETHYLENE ALTERNATE
ROUND ALTERNATE
Drain Channel
6" (
M in.
)
4" Min. Unless Otherwise
(Bottom Shape Optional)
PREFORMED CHANNEL WITH REMOVABLE GRATE
SEE SHEET 2 FOR TYPICAL LOCATIONS
SEE SHEET 2 FOR TYPICAL LOCATIONS
TYPE I (NON-REMOVABLE GRATE)
TYPE II
GENERAL NOTES
DESIGN NOTES
1. Trench drain is intended for use in gutters and driveways as shown on the typical locations on Sheet 2. Type I is intended for use in Type E, F
1. Where placed adjacent to reinforced concrete barrier wall or median barrier wall, the
and drop curbing, and adjacent to traffic separators and standard barrier walls. The width of the channel grate for Type I Trench Drain shall
3
4"
be 1
throughout varying the depth of the channel neck. Type II may also be used in those locations if an independent laboratory certifies that
the grating used has an open area equal to at least 0.27 square feet per linear foot.
Type II
designer shall detail in the plans the position of the drain relative to the barrier
wall to avoid conflicts with the barrier wall footing. See Index No. 410.
is primarily intended for use in valley gutter
across driveway openings and drop curbing; Type I may also be used in those locations. The width of the channel grate for Type II Trench
2. The designer shall identify the following in the plans:
Drain shall be the same as the width of the channel. The linear slope or gradient for Type II may be manufactured by varying the depth of the
(a) The type of drain at each location.
channel. Trench Drain shall not be placed in pedestrian paths unless ADA compliant grates are used.
2. Unless shown in the plans, outlet pipes and preformed channel inverts shall be sloped 0.6% or steeper toward the outlet regardless of the
(b) The begin and end locations of the Trench Drain.
surface slope.
(c) The location of the outlet pipe if the Trench Drain is not stubbed directly into
3. Trench drain may be stubbed directly into drainage structures, or outlet pipes may be used to connect trench drain to drainage structures.
4. A cleanout port compatible with the manufactured system shall be provided for Type I drains at the upstream end and at intervals not to exceed
a drainage structure.
(d) The design flow (Q) for the Trench Drain must be shown on the plans.
50 feet. The cleanout port shall provide an opening 6" to 10" wide (transverse to the trench drain length) and 18" to 24" long. Where cleanouts
are placed adjacent to raised curb or separator, the curb or separator shall be formed around the cleanout. The cleanout shall have a
3. Capture efficiency for Type I Trench Drain may be computed using the equations for
slotted drain in FHWA's HEC 12 & 22. Grate Type I and Type II must have at least
removable load resistant cover or grate.
30% open area.

5. Trench excavation must allow for a minimum of 6" of concrete to be placed under and alongside the trench drain channel system. Concrete
backfill shall meet the requirements of Section 347 of the Standard Specifications. At the end of all units (Type I or II ), the concrete backfill
4. Round pipe alternate is available in 12, 18, 24 and 36 inch.
11:
31:
05 AM
shall extend 6" minimum past the end of the drain opening.
5. Type II Preformed Channel with integral anchoring lugs are applicable.
6. Transverse bars for Type I Trench Drain shall be spaced 4" to 6" on center.
7. Whenever the work disturbs existing conditions or work already completed, restore the same to its original condition in every detail. All such
8. Payment to be made under the contract unit price for Trench Drain, LF.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
repair and replacement shall meet the approval of the Engineer.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRENCH DRAIN
NO.
206
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
2'-0"
2'-3"
Edge Of Grate Frame
F Curb
E Curb
2'-0"
1
4"
1'-2"
1'-10"
Drop Curb
1'-6"
6"
Slope To Fit
1'-4"
1
4"
Driveway
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
5"
6"
1
2"
1'-4"
WITHIN VALLEY GUTTER
Grate To Be Used On
Preformed Polyethylene
Alternate In Driveways
WITHIN TYPE F CURB
WITHIN TYPE E CURB
WITHIN DROP CURB
Edge Of Grate Frame
Slope To Fit Driveway
1'-2"
1
4"
*
4'-0", 6'-0", Or 8'-6"
*
1
2"
Separator
1'-3"
3"
Shoulder
Slope To Fit Roadway
Pavement
Exposed Heel
Optional Trench
12"
WITHIN DROP CURB

1"
TYPICAL LOCATIONS FOR TYPE II
2'-10"
ADJACENT TO TRAFFIC SEPARATOR
11:
31:
06 AM
ADJACENT TO SHOULDER BARRIER WALL
* As Necessary To Provide 6" Of Concrete

On This Side Of Drain
ROUND PIPE ALTERNATE SHOWN, BUT PREFORMED POLYETHYLENE ALTERNATE ACCEPTABLE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/04
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TYPICAL LOCATIONS FOR TYPE I
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRENCH DRAIN
NO.
206
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Inlet Type 2 Symmetrical About
.
ia
D
D
"
.
6
r
ia
'
O
3
D
"
0
'
4
"
6
Location Reference
A
"
6
2' Dia. Cover
2' Dia. Cover
Detail This Sheet
10'-0"
6"
#6 Bar Top,
#7 Bars Bottom
1'
-6"
Support Post
Inlet
B
5" Concrete
#6 Bars
5" Concrete
Support Post
6'-0"
3'-0"
For Spacing
Back Of Curb
3'-0"
9'-0"
13'-0"
See Sections AA
#6 Bars
1'
-6"
6"
6
'
6
"
R
a
d
.
See Slab Reinforcing
6"
4'
-0"
Detail This Sheet
Inlet
"
6
.
ad
'R
10
See Slab Reinforcing
#6 Bars @ 9"
Location Reference
6"
"
-0
'
4
.
ia
D
4'
-0"
"
-6
'
r
3
O
Inlet Type 4 Symmetrical About
.
ia
#6 Bars @ 9"
Face Of Curb
5" Concrete Support Post
INLETS TYPES 1 AND 3

PLAN (INLET TYPE 2 SYMMETRICAL ABOUT )
PLAN (INLET TYPE 4 SYMMETRICAL ABOUT )

A
To Be Paid
For As C. & G.
For As C. & G.
Limits Of Inlet Construction
#6 Bars @ 9"
To Be Paid
#6 Bar Top,
For As C. & G.
#7 Bars Bottom
#6 Bars
6"
F.L. Of Gutter
4"
6"
F.L. Of Gutter
To Be Paid
6"
For As C. & G.
4"
6"
To Be Paid
See Sections AA
3'-0"
10'-0"
3'-0"
Gutter
Trans.
3'-0"
3'-0"
Gutter
Gutter
Trans.
Trans.
SECTION BB (INLET TYPE 2 SYMMETRICAL ABOUT )
3'-0"
6'-0"
6"
10"
10"
6"
6"
6"
10"
10"
6"
6"
For Spacing
3'-0"
#6 Bars
Gutter
Trans.
#6 Bars
Back Of Curb
SECTION BB (INLET TYPE 4 SYMMETRICAL ABOUT )

#6 Bars @ 9"
Support Post
conform with the finished cross slope and grade of the
6"
5" Concrete
1
2"
6"
1
2"
No. 4
GENERAL NOTES
1. The finished grade and slope of the inlet tops are to
See Note
1
2"
1'-6"
SLAB REINFORCING
4"
1'-6"
1'
-7"
Support Post
4'-0"
1'
-4"
5" Concrete
1'
-7"
6"
6"
10"
4"
1
2"
1'-6"
1'-6"
proposed sidewalk and/or border.
2. When inlets are to be constructed on a curve, refer to
Apron (Typ.)
the plans to determine the radius and, where
2'-0"
1'-9"
6" Concrete
6"
4'-0" Dia.
1
2"
9"
6"
6" Concrete
10
1
2"
7"
1-10
DIMENSIONAL SECTION
1
2" #6
6" 7
necessary, modify the inlet details accordingly. Bend

Top Bars
1
4"
1
2"
21
#7 Bottom Bars
Otherwise Shown
3"3"
1
2"
18
Otherwise Shown
6"
9"
9"
3"
#6 Bars
#6 Bars @ 9" Ctrs.
9"
1
2"
6" 7
1
2"
@ 9" Ctrs.
Structure Bottom
9"
3"
#6 Bars @ 9" Ctrs.
#6 Bars @ 9" Ctrs.
#4 Bars
#4 Bars
#7 Bars
@ 8" Ctrs.
6"
#6 Bars
#7 Bars
4. For precast units the rear wall and apron may be

precast as a separate piece from the top slab.
Provide a minimum of 7 ~ #4 dowels in accordance
with Index No. 201 "OPTIONAL CONSTRUCTION JOINTS".
5. For supplemental details see Index No. 201.
@ 8" Ctrs.
3'-6" Dia.
Both Ways
4'-0" Dia.
#4 Bars
#4 Bars
Both Ways
6. Only round concrete support post will be acceptable.
@ 8" Ctrs.
@ 8" Ctrs.
11:
31:
07 AM
#4 Bars
@ 8" Ctrs.
4"
4"
1'-8"
6"
4"
4"
1'-6"
7. These inlets are designed for use with standard curb

and gutter Types E and Type F. Locate inlet outside
1'-5"
DIMENSION & REINFORCING HALF SECTION

REINFORCING SECTION
REINFORCING SECTION
TYPES A & E CURB (HALF SECTION AA)
3'-6" DIA. STRUCTURE BOTTOM (SECTION AA)
4'-0" DIA. STRUCTURE BOTTOM (SECTION AA)
(TYPE E GUTTER SHOWN)
of pedestrian crosswalks.
8. For structure bottoms see Index No. 200.
9. Inlet to be paid for under the contract unit price for
TRANSVERSE SECTIONS FOR INLETS TYPES 1, 2, 3 & 4

LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
cast-in-place or precast concrete.
5"
2"
#6 Bars
minimum cover
unless otherwise shown. Inlet tops shall be either
For 4'-0"
3"
6"
For 3'-6"
Structure Bottom
#6 Bars Unless
#6 Bars @ 9" Ctrs.
Bottom Bars
3. All steel in inlet top shall have 1
DIMENSIONAL SECTION
#6 Bars Unless
steel when necessary.
1
2"#6
1
2"
6"
3'-6" Dia.
1
2"
6"
5" Concrete Support Post
10"
4'-0"
1'
-4"
See Note No. 4
Face Of Curb
inlets (Curb) (Type_), Each.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CURB INLET TOPS TYPES 1, 2, 3 AND 4
NO.
210
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
To Be Paid For
Limits Of Inlet Construction (See Note 13)
To Be Paid For
As Curb & Gutter

Type E Or F
Curb (See
GENERAL NOTES
As Curb & Gutter

4'-9"
3'-0"
5'-9"
Gutter Transition
Inlet Throat Transition
3'-0"
Type E Or F Curb
Gutter Transition
(See Note 8)
1.
and grade of the proposed sidewalk and/or border.
Note 8)
Bars 4B (Vert.
12"
For inlets constructed on a curve, refer to the plans to determine the radius, and modify
the inlet details accordingly. Bend steel when necessary.
Bars 4A & 4C @ 5" Sp.
Face, Field Bend)
3.
2'
-0"
D
C
12"
2.
The finished grade and slope of the inlet tops are to conform with the finished cross slope
minimum cover unless otherwise shown,
see Sheet 4 for equivalent area Welded Wire Reinforcement details.
4.
1
4"
All reinforcing steel to be Grade 60 bars with 1
Inlet tops shall be either cast-in-place or precast concrete. Precast units shall conform to
the dimensions shown or in accordance with approved shop drawing's. Request for shop
Top Of Curb
Inlet
5.
Concrete meeting the requirements of ASTM C478 (4,000 psi) may be used in lieu of Class
II concrete for precast units, manufactured in plants which meet the requirements of
Section 449 of the Specifications.
1'
-0"
Bars 4D (Bottom) @ 6" Sp.
1'
-6"
3"
drawing approval shall be directed to the State Drainage Engineer.
Bars 4B (Top) @ 6" Sp.
Control Line
6.
Corner fillets are required at inlet opening for precast units or C-I-P units used in
conjunction with circular inlet bottoms or skewed rectangular inlet boxes. Finish top of
Center Of Box
Location Reference
fillets flush with drain throat bottom and match slope.
Inlet (Type 6
Symmetrical About )
7.
J bottoms with 3'-6" square (Type B), 3'-6" or 4' round (Type A) risers or top slab openings.
TOP VIEW
1
2"
8.
1
2"
Bars 4A ~ 24 sp. @ 5" = 10'-0"
For inlet bottoms see Index No. 200. Inlet tops are to be used with Type P bottoms, or Type
These inlet tops are designed for use with standard curb and gutter Type E and Type F.
Locate inlet outside of pedestrian crosswalks. For Type E curb, transition the shape of the
Bars 4B (Vert. Face, Field Bend)
Bars 4A
Inlet (Type 6
6" Concrete Post
curb over the gutter transition length to match the face of the inlet (Type F).
Symmetrical About )
For C-I-P Inlets
9.
Corner Fillets (See Note 6)
6"
Bars 4E @ 5" Bottom
See Index No. 201 for supplemental details.
Bars 4K (For Fillets Only)
6"
10. All steel used for frame and grate shall meet the requirements of ASTM A36/A36M.
Bar 4E
(Tied to Bars 4A)
11. Either cast iron grates or steel grates may be used.
12"
Bar 4L
(Typ.)
12. When Alternate "G" grate is specified in the plans either the cast iron grate and galvanized
steel frame or the the galvanized steel grate and frame must be used. Grates are to be
1
2"
3" Grate Recess
grouted in accordance with the grouting detail shown on Sheet 5, in lieu of tack welding.
13. Inlet to be paid for under the contract unit price for Inlets (Curb) (Type _), Each.
1
2"
Bars 4S
10
Bars 4F @ 12" Sp.

2 ~ Bars 4J
Bars 4H
C-I-P Inlets
1
2"
6" 6"
Precast Inlets
3"
6"
1
2"
Bars 4S @ 8"
6"
3'-6"
2 ~ Bars 4J
9"
Type E Curb
5'-9"
4'-9"
Transition
Type F Curb
Transition
SECTION BB
(
Ty
pe
6"
6"
Curb Control Line)
Radius
9"
9" (10" Below Top Of
1
4"
Chamfer Or 1
(
Nose)
3
4"
4"
9"
Inlet (Type 6 Symmetrical about )
11:
31:
12 AM
Outline of Grate
6" Concrete Post
Ty
pe
5
S
&
ym
6
m
et
I
nl
ri
et
ca
l
Ab
ou
t
Inlet
Inlet Or Riser
5
pe
t
Ty
e
nl
I
For C-I-P Inlets

3'-0"
8'-0"
2'-6"
Gutter Transition
3'-0"
Gutter Transition
12/3/2015
SECTION AA (At Inlet)
SKETCH SHOWING FRAME SEAT AND THROAT RECESS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/10
REVISIO N
INLET TYPE 5 (Curb Inlet Type 6 Symmetrical With Left Half)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CURB INLET TOPS TYPES 5 AND 6
NO.
211
SHEET
NO.
1of 5
2'-0"
1
2"
Top Of Curb
1'-6"
1
2"
4
Bars 4A @ 5" Sp.
1
2"
1'
-8"
10"
1
2"
@ 8"
10
6" M ax.
@
3 ~ Bars 4B
1'
-8"
1
2"
1
2"
4"
1
2"
4"
1
2"
Elev.
Bars 4S
4"
Depression
1'
-3
Theoretical
@ 6" (Bottom)
Bars 4C @ 5" Sp.
Varies
1'
-3
1
2"
3" Radius
1'
-8"
9"
Optional
Varies
1
2"
Maintain 1 " Cover
And " Bottom Chamfer Or 1" Radius
4 ~ Bars 4D
4"
Field Cut Bars To
3"
10"
10"
1'-6"
Slope To Match Adjacent Curb With 2" Top Radius

1
2"
10"
3
8"
1
1'-0"
1
2"
3 ~ Bars 4B
@ 6" (Top)
to 2'-0" Max.)
10
Varies (1'-0" Min.
1
2"
5"
Control Line
1
2"
1'-6"
Bars 4H In Corners
Bars 4E @ 5" Sp.
Bars 4F @ 12" Sp.
Bars 4J
1'-3"
SECTION DD
SECTION EE
SECTION FF
(End View Of Inlet)
1
2"
1'-6"
2'-0"
1
2"
10
2'-0"
1
2"
3 ~ Bars 4B
1
2"
1
2"
@ 6" (Top)
3 ~ Bars 4B
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
@ 6" (Bottom)
1
2"
Bars 4C @ 5" Sp.
1
2"
5"
3
4"
1
2"
As Shown)
10
Bar 4L (Placed
Constructed Within
12" Corner Fillet
These Limits
(See Note 6, Sheet 1)
4"
" Chamfer
Pipe Shall Not Be
1'
-8"
5"
4"
6" M ax.
10
Bars 4S @ 8"
1
2"
3 ~ Bars 4B
1'
-8"
5"
4"
4"
6" M ax.
Fillet
3 ~ Bars 4B
Bar 4K Diag.
4"
4 ~ Bars 4D
10"
1
2"
@ 6" (Bottom)
Bars 4A @ 5" Sp.
Slab
1
2"
10
9"
4 ~ Bars 4D
10"
1
2"
4
Bars 4C @ 5" Sp.
Thickness
@ 6" (Top)
Bars 4A @ 5" Sp.
10"
1
2"
1'-6"
Slope To Match Adjacent Curb With 2" Top Radius
Bars 4H In Corners
3'-6"
1 ~ Bar 4E
Bars 4F @ 12" Sp.
Bars 4J
Bars 4S @ 8"
Bars 4H In Corners
Inlet Bottom Or Riser
9" Min. Or If Top Slab
(Type Varies, See
Present, Top Slab
Note 7, Sheet 1)
Thickness Plus 3"

4'-0"
Top Of Pipe
(Centered Below Opening)
11:
31:
13 AM
SECTION GG
SECTION HH
(Type 5 Inlet Only)
CROSS REFRENCES:
For General Notes See Sheet 1.
For Location Of Sections DD
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Thru HH See Sheet 1.
PRECAST DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
211
SHEET
NO.
2 of 5
Top Of Curb Control Line
Top Of Curb Control Line

1'-0"
1'-6"
1'-6"
6"
1
2"
Theoretical
Optional
9"
10"
1
2"
3" Radius
1'
-9"
1'
-9"
1
2"
1'
-4
(12" to 1'-3") Type F Curb
(11" to 1'-3") Type E Curb
3" Radius
Varies
Varies
Optional
1
2"
Varies
1'-6"
9"
10"
6" to 9" Type E Curb

6" Type F Curb
1
2"
3"
3"
1'-0"
Depression Elev.
Theoretical
Depression Elev.
SECTION CC
SECTION DD (OPTION A)
SECTION DD (OPTION B)
(Gutter Transition
(End View Of Inlet)
(End View Of Inlet)
Type F Shown, Type E Similar)

2'-0"
to 2'-0" Max.)
10"
4"
4"
5"
7"
1
2"
1
2"
Joint
4"
10
3
8"
Const.
5"
Joint
2" Cover (Above Soil)
2" Cover (Above Soil)
Spacing Bars 4B
1
2"
SECTION FF
Slope To match Adjacent Curb With 2" Top Radius
@ 6" (Top)
2'-0"
Bars 4A @ 5" Sp.

4 ~ Bars 4D
@ 6" (Bottom)
1
2"
Bars 4L @ 5" Sp.

1
2"
1
2"
10
1
2"
4 ~ Bars 4D
1
2"
4"
1
2"
@ 6" (Bottom)
5"
9"
7"
1
2"
Const.
Bar 4L (Placed
Joint
As Shown)
10
Bars 4S @ 8"
1
2"
3
4"
10
5"
Slab
4"
These Limits
Thickness
Constructed Within
Fillet
5"
5"
Joint
1'
-8"
4"
4"
7"
10"
Const.
1
2"
Bars 4C @ 5" Sp.
1
2"
Bars 4A @ 5" Sp.
Bar 4K Diag.
Pipe Shall Not Be
3 ~ Bars 4B
1'-6"
@ 6" (Top)
5"
Bars 4C @ 5" Sp.
1
2"
10"
1
2"
3'-0"
Concrete)
" Chamfer
4"
Bars 4H In Corners
12" Corner Fillet
11:
31:
14 AM
1'
-8"
3 ~ Bars 4B
1'-6"
1" Cover (Above
1
2"
10
Bars 4S @ 8"
1'-3"
10"
1
2"
1
2"
Bars 4H In Corners
Bars 4F @ 12" Sp.
Bars 4E @ 5" Sp.
SECTION EE (OPTION B)
1'-6"
Bars 4J
SECTION EE (OPTION A)
2'-0"
1'
-8"
4 ~ Bars 4D
@ 6" (Bottom)
10"
1
7 2"
1
2"
Const.
1'
-9"

1
1 2"
1
2"
1
4 2"
1
4 2"
4"
Varies
1
2"
1
2"
1'
-4
Slope To match Adjacent Curb With 2" Top Radius
10"
Varies
1
2"
Varies
Const. Joint
1
2"
10
Bars 4A @ 5" Sp.

Bars 4C @ 5" Sp.
4"
Maintain 1" Cover
1
2"
3 ~ Bars 4B
@ 6" (Top)
Maintain 1" Cover
3
8"
Field Cut Bars To
1
2"
3
8"
Field Cut Bars To
to 2'-0" Max.)
1
2"
10"
1'-6"
Varies (1'-0" Min.
1'-6"
1'-6"
Varies (1'-0" Min.

3'-6"
Spacing Bars 4B
Inlet Bottom Or Riser

(Type Varies, See
Note 7, Sheet 1)
9" Min. Or If Top Slab

Present, Top Slab
Thickness Plus 3"
12/3/2015
REVISIO N
07/01/12
Bars 4J
Bars 4S @ 8"
Bars 4H In Corners
CROSS REFRENCES:
For General Notes See Sheet 1.
SECTION GG
LAST
Bars 4F @ 12" Sp.
SECTION HH (Type 5 Inlet Only)
(Centered Below Opening)

Top Of Pipe
REVISION
1 ~ Bar 4E
4'-0"
For Location Of Sections CC Thru HH See Sheet 1.
CAST-IN-PLACE DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
211
SHEET
NO.
3 of 5
ALTERNATE REINFORCING STEEL DETAILS FOR WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT (WWR)
CONVENTIONAL REINFORCING STEEL BENDING DIAGRAMS

BILL OF REINFORCING STEEL
1'-9"
4" (Typ.)
1
4'-7 2"
6"
SIZE
NO.
Field Bend Horizontal
A (Precast)
5'
712"
Bars In Vertical Face
wn
o
Sh
s As
t
r
Ma
lBa
a
t
n
g Of
o
n
i
z
i
d
r
n
tHo
d Be
l
Cu
e
Fi
w
o
l
l
To A
37 S
p
.@
5"
(
Ty
p
e 6)
TYPE 6 INLET
LENGTH
NO.
25
3'-1"
38
38
LENGTH
8"
MARK
1
2"
(Type 5)
5"
.@
p
24 S
1
4 4"
3'-1"
A (C-I-P)
25
1
2'-1 2"
1
2"
10'-3"
15'-9"
25
11" to 1'-11"
38
11" to 1'-11"
10'-3"
15'-9"
16
6'-0"
6'-0"
4'-6"
4'-6"
3'-0"
3'-0"
K (Fillet)
2'-3"
2'-3"
L (Precast)
1'-4"
---
L (C-I-P)
10
1'-4"
1'-4"
3'-2"
3'-2"
2'-1
414"
Cut Dotted Portion Of Mat
WWR Symmetrical
As Required To Maintain Cover
About For Type 6
PLACEMENT SCHEMATIC FOR WELDED
PIECE NO. 1
WIRE REINFORCEMENT PIECE NO. 1
WWR Symmetrical About
For Type 6
C-I-P
Precast
1'-9"
1
2"
1
2"
4'-11
30
End Of Type 6 Top
Outline Of Top Slab
1
2"
4'-11
BAR 4S
D17.2 or W18.5 (Typ.)
1'
-4"
2 Sp. @
8"
1
4"
1'
-4"
TYPE 5 INLET
7 2"
5'
8"
2 Sp. @ 6"
3
2 4"
Field Cut As Required

To Maintain Cover
(1'-0" Max.)
BAR 4A
REINFORCING STEEL NOTES:
1
2"
4
D17.2 or W18.5
(Typ.)
End Of Type
1. All bar dimensions in the bending
6 Top
diagrams are out to out.

2. Bars 4A and 4E may be combined into
1"
4"
.@
Sp
3. Welded Wire Reinforcement consists of
1'
-4"
a single bar.
6"
Smooth or Deformed wire meeting the
"
11
1'
Outline Of Top Slab

4"
37 Sp.
24 Sp. @ 5" (Type 5)
@ 5"
2"
10'-3" (Min.)
requirements of Specification Section

4"
Field Cut As Required

To Maintain Cover
(1'-0" Max.)
931.
15'-9"
(Min.)
PIECE NO. 2
3'-3"
BAR 4E
)
.
n
Mi
7"(
5'
5"
.@
p
13 S
Piece No. 1
1
4" Cover
1
3 2"
1'
-4"
Piece No. 2
D17.2 Or W18.5
Conventional
(Typ.)
Reinf. Bar 4F
(One Required)
1
1 4"
Cover
1
4"Cover
Reinf. For Bar 4J,

2"
2 Sp. @ 12"
4H & 4S
1'-1"
3'-3"
Outline Of Inlet
Throat Bottom

Piece No. 3
PIECE NO. 3
Conventional Reinf. Bar 4F
TYPICAL SECTION SHOWING
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Provide Conventional
1
4" Cover
11:
31:
15 AM
(Piece No. 1 & 3)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17

DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
211
SHEET
NO.
4 of 5
1
4"
4'-0
3'-11"
3' -11" o. to o. Of Grate

3"
1
2"
3
8
3
8"
3x2x
1
8"
1
4"
Anchor
1
2"
Epoxy-Sand
Grout Each
3
4"
1
16"
Epoxy-Sand
Grout
1'
-9
1 "
4
Grommet
1
2"
1
3
2x 8
1
4"
6x3
1
8"
1 "
4
10"
1
4"
2"
9"
4"
o. to o. Of Grate
1
2"
1'-9
1
2"
1
2"
1
4"
o. to o. Of Frame
Side
S
6x3
1
3
2x 8
SECTION SS
TOP VIEW
1
16"
(See Detail)
7
16"
1
2"
Anchor
1
2"
2"
TOP VI
EW
11
16"
CAST I
RON GRATE
2"
5
8"
5
16"
SECTI
ON GG
SECTION NN
5
8"
SECTI
ON QQ
SECTION RR
CAST IRON GRATE

M
1
2"
1 "
4
6x3
1
3
2x 8
1
2"
Grommet
1 "
4
4x3x
3
8
1
8"
Cover
1
8"
Side
1
4"
3
4"
Grout Each
Grout
X
3
4"
Epoxy-Sand
Epoxy-Sand
Nonskid Floor Plate
1
2"
1
4"
4"
o. to o. Of Grate
5"
3
8"
1
2"
1
2"
1'-9
1'
-9
3' -11" o. to o. Of Grate
10"
9"
1
4"
1
4"
1
2"
o. to o. Of Frame
4 Spaces @
1
4"
4'-0
3"
Pickholes
Y
3'-11"
6x3
1
3
2x 8
SECTI
ON MM
SECTI
ON GG
SECTI
ON YY
TOP VI
EW
M
Anchor
(Typ.)
(See Detail)
TOP VI
EW
3
16
STEEL GRATE
SECTI
ON QQ
3
16
2 @ 8
SECTI
ON XX
STEEL GRATE
1"
GROUTING DETAILS
3
16
1
4"
11:
31:
16 AM
4"
10
Bar
3
16
3
16"
x 2"
CROSS REFERENCES:
For Location Of Section GG and QQ
1
"
12/3/2015
See Sheet 1.
60
TOP VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
FRAME DETAIL
Anchor
ANCHOR DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
211
SHEET
NO.
5 of 5
3
4"
1
4"
5
1'-6"
7"
2"
Pavement
7"
5"
6'Separator
3
4"
1
2"
R
#6 Bars
Joint Filler (Typ.)
THROAT DETAIL
MODIFICATION WHEN USED

AS A MANHOLE
C
Location Reference
Transition
Pavement Depression
#6 Bars ACI Std. Hooks Required Each
Transition
M inim um Dim ensions.
6"
Between These Lim its
3'
6"
Preformed
See Index No. 201 For
90 Hook
Const. Joints Perm itted
4"
Gutter
(Typ.)
1
2"
3"
13"
7"
Theoretical
3"
5"
5'
6"
(Typ.)
60(+)
180 Hook
1
4"
4@ 2
To Inlet
9"
2'
9"
Pavement
4' Separator
Pavement Transition
4"
1
4"
9"
M in.
Superelevated Pavt.
End of Straight Bars and Right End of

Bent Bars: 180 Hooks, Canted 60(+),
PLAN
4"
on Odd Bars; 90 Hooks, Down, on Even

Bars Numbered from Throat Side.
To Be Paid For As Separator (No Deduction For Inlet)
4"
#6 Bar
MAX. SPACING
SCHEDULE
WWF
0.20
12"
8"
A6
0.20
6"
5"
10' - 13'
A4
0.20
4"
3"
10' - 15'
B5.5
0.24
Throat Side
5"
3"
6 @ 5"
4 @ 6"
1
2
4" (
1
2"
#5 Bars
3"
4 @
REINFORCING STEEL DIAGRAM
6' Separator
TOP SLAB OF INLETS

4' Separator
5'
6"
(Cover Not Shown)
with Curbs Types A, B and E and sidewalk paving, which cannot accommodate Inlets
M in.
1'
-9"
Horiz. Wall Reinf.

(See Table 1)
6"
3" Cl.
Const. Joints Permitted
#4 Bars @
(Typ.)
3" Cl.
#4 Bars @
Between These Limits
12" Ctrs.
(Typ.)
12" Ctrs.
pipe, inlets with Alt. B bottoms, Index No. 200 are recommended.
6"
11:
31:
16 AM
3. Recommended maximum pipe sizes are 24" longitudinal and 30" transverse. For larger
3'
6"
2" Cl.
of pipe when necessary. Bars to clear pipe by
1
1 2"
(
4'M in.
-15'M ax.
)
Index No. 201 for equivalent area of welded wire fabric. Cut or bend bars out of way
W all Depth Varies
2. All reinforcing to be Grade 60 bars with 2" min. cover unless otherwise shown. See
Top Slab
Hooks Required
10"
Use of this Inlet on through traffic side of the separator
is not permitted in medians with Curb Types A and B. Locate inlet outside of
pedestrian way.
#5 Bars
Pavement
3"
Types 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
6"
4'
Type III Frame
7"
Pavement
Hook Arrangement
9"
1
2"
3"
5"
4"
1. This inlet is used in Traffic Separators Types I and II; or, in separators constructed
and Reinforcing Diagram for
2'
9"
GENERAL NOTES
#6 Bars - See Throat Detail
3
4"
1
4"
For M anholes)
A12
5"
0' - 6'
6' - 10'
7"
7"
2"
3"
BARS
(in./ft.)
DEPTH
AREA
WALL
4'
3 @
5'
4"
4'
7"
SCHEDULE (TABLE 1)
To Be Paid For As Inlet
6"
HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING
4. For supplementary details see Index No. 201.
Minimum Dimensions
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
#4 Bars @
(See Table 1)
10" Ctrs.
5. All dimensions are for both precast and cast-in-place inlets unless otherwise shown.
6. Inlet to be paid for under the contract unit price for Inlets (Curb) (Type 7), Each.
SECTION AA
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
#5 Bars
@ 10" Ctrs.
For Bottom Slab Rebar Embedment

Options See Optional Construction
Joints, Index No. 201
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SECTION BB
CURB INLET TYPE 7
NO.
212
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
#6 Bars ACI Std. Hooks Required
1
2"
1'-6"
18
Each End Of Straight Bars And Right

End Of Bent Bars. 180Hooks,
Pavement Transition To Inlet

1
2"
4 @ 2
6"
Canted 60(+), On Odd Bars;
2"
5'
90
Hooks, Down, On Even Bars
6' Separator
2 2"
#6 Bars
4 @
7"
#6 Bar
90 Hook (Typ.)
2 @
Preformed
6" For M anhol

es
Gutter
Joint Filler (Typ.)
2"
4"
4"
6"
7"
9"
2"
4 @
6"
1
2"
2 @ 3"
(Typ.)
60
2"
2" R
Theoretical
13"
6"
4' Separator
Numbered From Throat Side.

180Hook
6"
Location Reference
#5 Bars
Pavement Depression
Transition
THROAT DETAIL (SECTION AA)
9 @ 6"
3"
4"
Transition
3"
A
REINFORCING STEEL DIAGRAM
PLAN
TOP SLAB OF INLET
6' Separator
To Be Paid For As Separator (No Deduction For Inlet)
4' Separator
4'
6"
1
2"
(Cover Not Shown)

#5 Bars
4"
Top Slab Rebar

Hooks Required
#6 Bars
See Throat Detail
and Reinforcing
3'
6"
Diagram for Hook
6"
3" Cl.
Const. Joints Permitted
(Typ.)
Between These Limits
@ 10" Ctrs.
2" Cl.
12" Ctrs.
#5 Bars
#4 Bars @
12" Ctrs.
#4 Bars @
6"
(
4'M in.
-15'M ax.
)
W all Depth Varies
6"
Frame
6"
7"
7"
4'
6"
Type III
9"
Pavement
5'
2"
4"
4"
1
2"
2'
7"
5'
6"
4'
1
2"
18
1'
-9" M in.
See Index No. 201 for
3" Cl. (Typ.)

Horiz. Wall Reinf.
Minimum Dimensions
#4 Bars @
(See Table 1)
10" Ctrs.
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
SECTION CC
1
2"
(See Table 1)
1
2"
2'
18
For Bottom Slab

Pavement
1
2"
Rebar Embedment
SECTION BB
Options See Optional
7"
GENERAL NOTES
SECTION AA
1. This inlet is to be used only in Traffic Separators Types IV and V; or, in separators
Construction Joints,
Index No. 201.
constructed with Curbs Types D and F and sidewalk paving, which cannot accommodate
Pavement
7" M in.
Inlets Types 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6. Use of this inlet on the through traffic side of the
separator should be avoided in medians constructed with Curb Type D (Curb inlets
Types 9 or 10 are recommended). Locate inlet outside of pedestrian way.

6"
1
2".
11:
31:
17 AM
of pipe when necessary. Bars to clear pipe by 1
3. Recommended maximum pipe sizes are 24" longitudinal and 30" transverse. For larger
pipe, inlets with Alt. B bottoms, Index No. 200 are recommended.
4. For supplemental details and notes see Index No. 201.
MODIFICATION WHEN USED

AS A MANHOLE
AREA
WALL
SCHEDULE
DEPTH
(in./ft.)
MAX. SPACING
BARS
WWF
0' -6'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
6' -10'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
10'-13'
A4
0.20
4"
3"
10'-15'
B5.5
0.24
5 2"
5"
6. Inlet to be paid for under the contract unit price for Inlets (Curb) (Type 8), Each.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
5. All dimensions are for both precast and cast-in-place inlets unless otherwise shown.
SCHEDULE (TABLE 1)
M inim um Dim ensions.
3'
6"
Between These Lim its-
Index No. 201 for equivalent area of welded wire fabric. Cut or bend bars out of way
2. All reinforcing to be Grade 60 bars with 2" min. cover unless otherwise shown. See
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CURB INLET TYPE 8
NO.
213
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
#5 Bars Top #6 Bars
#4 Bars Continuous
Bottom 12" Returns,
#4 Bar
Or 12" Returns
Each (Min.)
#4 Bars, 6" cc, Top & Bottom
(Same Below)
#4 Bar
4x4-W4.0xW4.0
Direction Of
Opening
Predominant Flow
Welded Wire
#5 Bars, With Hooks.
Reinforcement,
6" cc, Bottom
Bottom
36"
Centered
B
#4 Bars, 12" cc
Center Of Opening
Center of Opening
Location Reference
36"
Face Of Curb
Di
r
ec
t
i
on
Pr
Of
ed
om
i
n
an
tF
l
ow
24"
Or 4x4-W4.0 x W4.0
Location Reference
Welded Wire Reinforcement
6"
24"
40" x 20"
TOP VIEW
3
8"
Top & Bottom

6"
(Three Sides)
1
2"
(Frame)
2 #4 Bars
Closed Stirrups 8" cc
6"
18
(Curb Box)
7
8"
17
Bottom, L=18"
Adjustable Curb Box
3
3
2"
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
(6" to 9" Curb Height)
1
734"
3
3
2"
#5 Bars
4"
6"
2"
#4 Bar (12" Legs)
#5 Bar Top &
1
7151 "
(Grate)
#5 Bar
#4 Bars (Or Welded
#6 Bar
24" (
1
16")
1
2"
31"
37"
Welded Wire
Wire Reinforcement)
8"
36"
8"
1
2"
5
8"
33"
Reinforcement
#4 Bar
43"
TRANSVERSE SECTION
Optional Key
Optional Key
6" Concrete
(In Lieu Of Dowels)
3'-6" Or 4'-0"
(In Lieu Of Dowels)

3'-6"
8" Brick
6"
FRAME AND GRATE

(Bottom Or Riser)
11
16"
Bottom Lug (2 Corners)
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
(SEE NOTE 6 BELOW)
(SEE NOTE 6 BELOW)
1
4"
1
8"
5
16"
(Bottom Or Riser)
TOP SLABS
3
4"
Approximate Debris Free Capacity
(
CFS)
2"
(0.02 Pavement Cross Slope)
GENERAL NOTES
d
ra
G
er
t
t
Gu
er
%
t
0
.
t
4
Gu
5%
0.
2.0
1.0
2"
5
8"
1. This inlet is primarily intended for locations with light to moderate flows where right of way does not permit the use
3.0
2"
Total
2"
5
8"
of throated Curb Inlets Types 1 through 6. The typical application is on curb returns to city streets. The inlet grate
e
ad
Gr
is suitable for pedestrian and bicycle traffic.
2. This inlet to be located outside of curb ramp area in vertical faced curbs such as Curb and Gutter Type F. Grate
shall be oriented with vanes directed toward Predominant flow.
0
100 90
80
Q
Intake
15
16"
70
50
60
/Q
Total
3. For structure bottoms see Index No. 200. For supplemental details see Index No. 201.
(%)
2
5
16"
EFFICIENCY CURVE
minimum cover unless otherwise shown. Tops shall be either cast-in-place or
precast concrete.
TOP VIEW
1
4"
4. All steel in slab tops shall have 1
5. For Alternate B applications, top slab openings shall be placed such that 2 edges of inlet frame will be located
directly above bottom wall or riser wall.
5
8"
7
8"
1
4"
31
4"
6. When used on a structure with dimensions larger than those detailed above and risers are not applied, the top slab
shall be constructed using Index No. 200 with the slab opening adjusted to 24"x36". The "Special Top Slab" on Index
No. 200 is not permitted.
See Detail B
5
8"
7. Frame may be adjusted with one to six courses of brick.

1
2"
See Detail A
1"
11:
31:
18 AM
5
16"
7
8"
12 Equal Spaces 2
5
8"
13
16"
1
8"
1
8"
7
8"
1
2"
35
12/3/2015
SECTION
DETAIL A
8. Vaned grates with approximately equal openings will be permitted that satisfy AASHTO HL-93 loading. Grates shall be
reversible, right or left.
DETAIL B
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
GRATE DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CURB INLET TOP TYPE 9
NO.
214
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
#5 Bars, With Hooks,

6" cc, Bottom
#5 Bar, Each Corner
#4 Bars
#4 Bars
Top & Bottom

Face Of Curb
#4 Bars, With Hooks,
Center Of Opening
#5 Bars,With Hooks,
4" cc, Bottom
Location Reference
4" cc, Bottom, 4 Sides

Opening
Frame Position
Centered
22"
Predominant Flow
24"
Center Of Opening
Frame Position
Location Reference
Di
re
ct
Pr
i
on
ed
Of
om
i
na
nt
Fl
ow
TOP VIEW
7"
17"
Top & Bottom
Or 12" Return Laps
(6" to 9" Curb Height)

Drop
5
8"
7"
5
8"
7
8"
23"
22"
8"
36"
36"
8"
7"
5
8"
3
4"
20
Same Opposite
7"
1
2"
#4 Bar (12" & 24" Legs)
TOP VIEW
"R
2
1" Seat
5
8"
TOP VIEW
Adjustable Curb Box

1
#4 Bar
24"
Closed Stirrups 8"cc
6"
(Frame)
2"
1
8"
20
2"
15
16"
#4 Bars,
#4 Bars Continuous
5
8"
21
22"
8"
Direction Of
Optional Key
Optional Key
TRANSVERSE SECTION
6" Concrete
(In Lieu Of Dowels)
FRAME AND GRATE
3'-6" Or 4'-0"
3'-6"
8" Brick
(Bottom Or Riser)
6"
(Bottom Or Riser)
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
(SEE NOTE 6 BELOW)
(SEE NOTE 6 BELOW)
Approximate Debris Free Capacity

(0.02 Pavement Cross Slope)
5
8"
TOP SLABS
1
2"
2"
1
4"
(In Lieu Of Dowels)
Q
CFS)
Total (
17"
5
8"
1. This inlet is primarily intended for locations with light flows where right of way does not permit the use of throated
Curb Inlets Types 1 through 6. The typical application is on curb returns to city streets. The inlet grate is suitable
5%
.
0
for pedestrian and bicycle traffic.
0
90
80
70
60
50
2. This inlet to be located outside of curb ramp area in vertical faced curbs such as Curb and Gutter Type F. Grate
Q
/ Q
Intake
Total
1
4"
Bottom Lug (4 Corners)
1.0
e
ad ade
r
r
G
rG
e
t
r
t
u
e
t
% G Gut
0
.
4
(%)
shall be oriented with vanes directed toward predominant flow.
EFFICIENCY CURVE
3. For structure bottoms see Index No. 200. For supplemental details see Index No. 201.
3
4"
GENERAL NOTES
2.0
100
1
2"
7
8"
1
2"
1
2"
3.0
9
16"
PLAN
1
4"
4. All steel in slab tops shall have 1
minimum cover unless otherwise shown. Tops shall be either cast-in-place or
precast concrete.
1"
7
8"
7
8"
7
8"
9
16"
5. For Alternate B applications, top slab openings shall be placed such that 2 edges of inlet frame will be located
directly above bottom or riser walls.
60
3" R
5
8"
be constructed using Index No. 200 with the slab opening adjusted to 22"x24". The "Special Top Slab" on Index No. 200
3
8"
See Detail A
1"
6. When used on a structure with dimensions larger than those detail above and risers are not applied, the top slab shall
5
8"
11:
31:
18 AM
3" R
5
8"
7 Equal Spaces @ 2
1
8"
15
16"
19
See Detail B
is not permitted.
7. Frame may be adjusted with one to six courses of brick.
SECTION
DETAIL A
DETAIL B
8. Vaned grates with approximately equal openings will be permitted that satisfy AASHTO HL-93 loading. Grates shall be
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
GRATE DETAIL
reversible.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CURB INLET TOP TYPE 10
NO.
215
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
A
1
4"
*Sloped
1
4"
Section to be used w/sidewalk applications only.
2'-0"
**Toe
2'
-0" *
4'-0" Without Sidewalk (Typ.)
Walls as depicted to be used with sidewalk application
only. For endwall without sidewalk see detail on Sheet 2.
6'-6" Where Sidewalk Abuts Back Of Curb (Typ.) *
Broken Line
Denotes Inside
4'-0"
2'-0"*
Util. Strip
Toe Wall
1'-6"
5'-0" Sidewalk*
Layer Of
& Curb
1
Varies From 3'- 2" To 6'-0"
Reinforcing
**
D (See Design Notes)

6"
6"
6"
#5 Bars Typ.
Match
Slope To Match Adjacent Curb
Slope
With 2" Top Radius And 1
1
4"
Cover
For Span Variation
#4 Bars, Top and
Bottom Radius
1
4"
Bottom (Typ.)
5"
Top & Nosing
Cover
1
3 2"
"
9
Laps 15" Min.
Lap 9" Min.
6"
For Single Barrel Flume

See Multiple Barrel Flumes
1
4"
7"
3
4"
@ 1'-0" Max.
1'
-9"
2"
Joint Permitted
Cover
Construction
2"
#4 Bars
9"
#4 Bars
7"
1'
-6"
2" Cover
3"
Cover
2" Cover
1
2"
11
6"
1'
-4
1
4"
2" Side
Cover
5"
#4 Bars @ 6" cc
3
8"
2'-3
#5 Bars @ 6" Continuous

Around Structure (See Section BB)
5'-0"
6'-0"
TOP VIEW
To Be Paid For
6"
1'-6"
6"
As Curb & Gutter
1'-6"
Sidewalk
3'-0"
3'-0"
1
2"
**Toe Wall
Curb & Gutter
8"
3'-0"
Theo. Gutter
Gutter Transition
6"
Depression Elev.
SECTION CC
1'
-5"
3
"
6"
2
"
"R
3 4
6"
1
2"
1'
-7"
3'-0"
Gutter Transition
1'
-0"
1
2"
3
4"
10"
10"
10"
6" 6"
F.L. Of Gutter
Typical All Around
SECTION BB
1
2"
To Be Paid For
As Curb & Gutter
SECTION AA
#4 Bars @ 6"
Cover
2" Bottom
#4 Bars
Location Reference
8"
SECTION DD
SECTION FF
SECTION EE
(Curb And Gutter Type F)
GENERAL NOTES
1. The finished grade and slope of the inlet top are to conform with the finished cross
slope and grade of the proposed sidewalk and/or border.
2. When inlets are to be constructed on a curve, refer to the plans to determine the radius
and, where necessary, modify the inlet details accordingly. Bend steel when ecessary.
11:
31:
19 AM
3. All steel shall have 2" minimum cover unless otherwise shown. Inlets can be either
cast-in-place or precast concrete. Chamfer all exposed edges
3
4".
4. All reinforcement is ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 steel, either smooth or deformed.

Equivalent area grade 40 steel or 65 ksi welded wire fabric may be substituted.
12/3/2015
5. Inlets to be paid for under the contract unit price for Inlets (Closed Flume) EA.
FLUME W/SIDEWALK INLET (CLOSED FLUME) TYPE I
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SI
NGL
E BARREL FL
UME DEPI
CTED
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CLOSED FLUME INLET
NO.
216
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
1'
-6"
*Bricks to Dissipate Energy

When Called For In Plans.
Bricks To Be Included In
The Cost Of The Inlet.
Varies
2'-0" (Min)
10
"
Slab
Swale or
Ditch Bottom
#4 Steel Tie Bar
3'-0"
#4 Steel Tie Bar
Sod (Same
Sod For Flumes Without Sidewalk
As Right)
ENDWALL
Curb & Gutter Type "F"
Curb & Gutter Type "F"

12'-0"
A
Swale or Ditch
Location Reference
PLAN
Varies
2'-0"
C & G
Varies
3'-0"
6'-0"
E.P.
(Min.)
2" Typ
6'-0"
Varies
Existing Ground
1'
4" Thick Concrete Slab

3'-0"
Varies
Varies
(Min.)
The Cost Of The 4" Thick Slab And The 6"x6"

W2.5xW2.5 Min. Welded Wire Reinforcement In
The Middle Of Slab To Be Included In The
Cost Of The Inlet.
SECTION BB
11:
31:
20 AM
SECTION AA
12/3/2015
FLUME W/O SIDEWALK INLET (CLOSED FLUME) TYPE II
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SI
NGL
E BARREL FL
UME DEPI
CTED
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CLOSED FLUME INLET
NO.
216
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
12'-0"
7'-0"
#5 Bars (Typ.)
Broken Lines
#5 Bars (Typ.)
6"
6"
Broken Lines
#4 Bars, Top and
Denotes Inside Layer
#4 Bars, Top and
Bottom (Typ.)
Bottom (Typ.)
Of Reinforcing
Center Wall
4'-6"
6"
#4 Bars
1'
-6"
1'
-6"
6"
6"
Of Reinforcing
Intermediate Wall
#4 Bars
5'-0"
TOP VIEW
To Be Paid For
To Be Paid For
As Curb & Gutter
As Curb & Gutter
To Be Paid For
As Curb & Gutter
F.L. Of Gutter
6"
6"
6"
6"
#4 Bars
4'-6"
5'-0"
TOP VIEW
F.L. Of Gutter
Intermediate Wall
#4 Bars
5'-0"
5'-0"
To Be Paid For
As Curb & Gutter
6"
4'-6"
4'-6"
5'-0"
6"
3'-0"
3'-0"
3'-0"
Gutter Transition
Gutter Transition
5'-0"
5'-0"
Gutter Transition
5'-0"
5'-0"
5'-0"
3'-0"
Gutter Transition
SECTION CC
SECTION CC
DOUBLE BARREL FLUME
TRIPLE BARREL FLUME

17'-0"
6"
Min.
#5 Bars (Typ.)
Broken Lines
6"
#4 Bars, Top and
Bottom (Typ.)
Of Reinforcing
#4 Bar (Typ.)
2" Min. Cover
6"
(Typ.)
C
1'
-6"
Intermediate Wall
4'-6"
5'-0"
6"
6"
6"
Intermediate Wall
5'-0"
#4 Bars
5'-0"
Intermediate Wall
INTERMEDIATE-WALL REINFORCING
NOTE: See Barrel Flume For Base Dimensions.
#4 Bars
4'-6"
5'-0"
TOP VIEW
To Be Paid For
To Be Paid For
6"
As Curb & Gutter
As Curb & Gutter
11:
31:
20 AM
6"
F.L. Of Gutter
3'-0"
5'-0"
5'-0"
5'-0"
Gutter Transition
5'-0"
3'-0"
Gutter Transition
12/3/2015
SECTION CC
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
QUADRUPLE BARREL FLUME

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CLOSED FLUME INLET
NO.
216
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Inlet
Symmetrical About For Inlet Types 2 & 4 and
Shoulder
for Double Throat Side of Inlet Type 5. See
Drop Height
Remarks
CIPL
Rate
Precast
9
16"
5
16"
Std. Median Concrete Shoulder
1
16"
7
8"
Std. Median Flexible Shoulder
1:6
13
16"
5
8"
0.07
1:5
0.08
1:5
0.09
1:5
0.10
1:5
0.03
1:6
0.05
1:6
0.06
Barrier Wall
Omit Back Wall Under Barrier
B
4'-0"
Inlets Type 3,
4, & 5
Sym m etrical About For
for Inlets Types 3, 4 & 5
8"
Grate
Slope
Slope
Tabular Description of Inlets, General Note 1.
Cast-In-Place
n
o
i
t
i
s
n
a
lTr
l
r Wa
e
i
t
r
c
r
a
r
Ba
t
n
e
o
t
C
e
r
e
c
n
Co
r Th
e
d
Un
)
l
d
l
i
a
a
rW
eP
e
i
r
r
To B
(
r Ba
e Fo
c
i
tPr
i
Un
GRATE SLOPE & DROP HEIGHT
5
8"
t
n
me
e
v
r Pa
de
l
u
o
Sh
3
8"
3
8"
3
16"
1
8"
15
16"
7
8"
PICTORIAL VIEW (TYPE I SHOWN)
11
16"
GENERAL NOTES
e (max)
1. Inlet Descriptions:
Type 1 Single throat, one side of barrier wall.

Type 2 Double throats, one side of barrier wall.
SCHEDULE (TABLE 1)
8"
WALL
AREA
Type 3 Two single throats, opposite side of
MAX. SPACING
SCHEDULE
Precast
6"
4'-0"
DEPTH
6"
BARS
(in./ft.)
barrier wall.
WWF
Type 4 Two double throats, opposite sides of

0'-3'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
3'-6'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
6'-9'
B5.5
0.24
9'-15'
C6.5
0.37
PLAN (INLETS TYPES 1 THRU 5)
barrier wall.
2"
3'-0"
1"
3'-0"
1
2"
5"
1
2"
6"
Type 5 Double throats, one side of barrier wall,

and single throat other side of barrier
wall.
Location Reference
Symmetrical About For Standard
2. For grate details see Index No. 220. The parallel
3"
Section (Profile Grades The Same)
bar grate shall be used unless the reticuline grate

3
4"
4
Symmetrical
About
1' Std.
Location
3
4 4"
is called for in the plans.
1
2 4"
See Index No. 410 For Width
5"
And Height Of Standard Wall
C-I-P
shall be specified where bicycle traffic is
1'-11"
Precast
anticipated. Used in areas of occasional

pedestrian traffic.
Reference
Vertical Face
For Reinforcing Steel

1
4"
5"
2'-1"
C-I-P Collar
1'-11"
Precast Collar
For Reinforcing Steel
5'-4"
Grate Support
See Note 5
Varies (
6"
Precast
4"
6"
3'-4"
6"
6"
3'-4"
Shldr. Pavt.
1
2")
6"
Shldr. Pavt.
4"
Inset A (Sheet 2)
Shldr.
Precast
Theo. GP
#4 Bars
2" Cl. (C-I-P)
Precast
8"
Cl.
3"
11"
Std.
*
Each Side and

Above Pipe
3"
Opening
Cl.
3" Cl.
Horiz. Wall Reinf. (See Table 1)

#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
6"
2"
Cl.
Std.
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
Cast-In-Place
Precast
Precast Or
11:
31:
21 AM
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs. (8" Slab)
8"
4'-0"
8"
Cast-In-Place
6"
4'-0"
6"
Precast
6"
Cast-In-Place
2'-0"
6"
Precast
length of concrete barrier wall transition. Tie bars
contract unit price for Concrete Barrier Wall. LF.
(See Table 1)
3" Cl.
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
8. All dimensions are for both precast and

cast-in-place inlets unless otherwise noted.

1
2"
8"
inlet. Longitudinal steel bars extend over full
@ 12" ctrs. Reinforcing to be paid for under the

Horiz. Wall Reinf.
Or 4
2'-0"
@ 9" Ctrs.
Grate Support
201 for equivalent area of welded wire fabric for
Ctrs. (Precast 6" Slab)

8"
4'-10" Std.
6"
4'-10" Std.
1
2"
Or 3
Ctrs. (Precast 6" Slab)

8" Cast-In-Place
6"
Precast
9. Inlets to be paid for under the contract unit price

for Inlets (Median Barrier Type_), EA. Barrier wall
to be paid for under the contract unit price for
Concrete Barrier Wall, LF.
SECTION FOR INLETS TYPES 3, 4 & 5

SECTION FOR INLETS TYPES 1 & 2
(Pipe Opening Shown)
12/3/2015
Or 8" Ctrs. (Precast 6" Slab)

8"
2 Extra
1'-5"
#4 Bars
@ 12" Ctrs.
1 Extra ~ #4 Bar
Support
6. All reinforcing is Grade 60 #4 bars. See Index No.

7"
Called For In The Plans
1
2"
Grate
9"
Cast-In-Place
Bars @ 9" Ctrs.
1'-5"
Or Special Only W hen
#4 Bars
2 Extra #4
7"
9" Ctrs.
(See Table 1)
Horizontal wall reinforcing must be positioned 3"

from the inside face unless otherwise shown.
#4 Bars @
6"
7"
Bond Breaker
2 Extra
Alt. B Structure Bottom
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
Min.
Index No. 410.
Pavt.
Theo. GP
Shldr. Pavt.
Bond Breaker
1'
-8"
Cl.
1
2"
6"
Cl. (Precast)
3" M in.
W all Depth Varies (

15'M ax.
)
Optional
1'-5"
1"
1
2"
Haunch Shape
incorporating light standards within the wall, see
5. Reinforcing steel shall have 2" minimum cover.
@ 9" Ctrs.
1
chamfer
radius.
for dimensions of concrete barrier wall
Details See
6" Cast-In-Place
4"
3
4"
4. For standard concrete barrier wall dimensions, and
Grate Support
6"
2"
1
4"
For Throat And
Theo. G.P.
(Sheet 2 of 2)
3"
Cast-In-Place
Details See Inset A
Detail See Inset A
5'-0"
3"
Precast
or tooled to
Grate Support
1'
-5"
Cast-In-Place
3. All exposed edges and corners shall be
For Throat And

For Throat And
Not suitable for use in
pedestrian traffic or bicycle way.
Varies
See Note 5
SECTION CC
The reticuline grate
2'-1"
SECTION AA
(NON-SYMMETRICAL SECTION SHOWN)

Const. Joint Permitted Between
SECTION BB
These Limits See Index No. 201
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
For Min. Dimensions

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MEDIAN BARRIER INLETS TYPES 1, 2, 3, 4 AND 5
NO.
217
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
INSET A
3 Spaces @ 12"
6'
5' -2"
-1
0" C-I
Pr -P
ec
as
t
6" 4"
2'
-8
"
2'
-6
"
-P
I
t
Cas
ec
Pr
1'
-8"
1'
-5
"
8"
CI
6"
-P
Pr
ec
as
t
3"
3
8"
1'
-11
10
"
10
"
5'-0"
4" 6"
1'
-11"
2'
-8
"
2'
-6
"
2"
Precast
-P
I
Ct
as
6"
ec
Pr
4"
6"
C4"
I
-P
Pr
ec
as
t
C-I-P
3
8"
1'
-10
1'
-10"
Varies
1'
-5"
C-I-P
6"
Precast
Eyebolt
See Index 201
(
1:
5 Grate Slope)
(
1:
6 Grate Slope)
1'
-5
"
Precast
2"
Varies
Slope)
(
1:
5 Grate
1'
-11"
1'
-10
6"
C4"
I
-P
Pr
ec
as
t
"
16
5"
3"
1'
-8"
Precast
1:5 For Shoulder Slope 0.07
C-I-P
G.P.
3
8"
1:6 For Shoulder Slope <0.07
Slope)
Grate Slope
Theo.
3
1'
-11 8"
(
1:
6 Grate
1
2")
1'
-10"
1"
2"
(5"
C-I-P
Varies (
See Table)
Drop H eight
-P
I
st
C- ca
"
e
6
Pr
4"
Throat Varies
-P
I
t
C"
as
-4
ec
5'
Pr
"
-0
5'
3'
-4
3'
-0 "C
"
-P
Pr I
ec
as
t
-P
I
t
C"
as
4
ec
5'
Pr
"
-0
5'
H
PICTORIAL VIEW OF INLET COLLAR (TYPES 1 & 2)
9"
@ 12" N.S.
9"
2" Cl.
2 Spaces
2" Cl.
12"
@
2 Spaces
9"
3 Spaces @
15"
4"
9" F.S.
3'
-0"
1'
-10"
1'
-11"
12"
9"
3" Cl.
5 Spaces @ 12"
2"
3 Spaces @
(
1:
6 Grate Slope)
3'-0"
6"
(
1:
5 Grate Slope)
6" 4"
1'
-10"
3 Spaces @ 12"
1'
-11"
4" 6"
1'
-8"
(
1:
6 Grate Slope)
5'-0"
3" Cl.
2" Cl.
(
1:
5 Grate Slope)
2" Cl.
12"
Spacing
9"
10"
Spacing
Varies
12" M ax. 12" M ax.
5 Spaces @
10"
9"
7 Spaces @
5'
-10"
PICTORIAL VIEW OF INLET COLLAR (TYPES 3, 4, & 5)
12"
4" 6"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/23/2015
VIEW KK
6"
4"
4" 6"
2" Cl.
Cl.
Shape Optional
4" 6"
6" 4"
SECTION DD
6"
4"
4" 6"
(
1:
6 Grate Slope)
1
2"
(
1:
5 Grate Slope)
Cl.
1'
-10"
2" Cl.
9"
1
2"
Haunch
1'
-11"
9"
2" Cl.
Varies
Varies
3
8"
6" 4"
Varies
3"
4" 6"
9"
2" Cl.
Cl.
3 Spaces @ 12"
2" Cl.
2" Cl.
5'-0"
5'-0"
12"
1
2"
Bars @
Varies
(
1:
6 Grate Slope)
3 Spaces @ 12"
3" Cl.
SECTION EE
5'-0"
2" Cl.
9:
12:
07 AM
6" 4"
1'
-10"
2" Cl.
2" Cl.
Cl.
1'
-11"
1
2"
Varies
9"
3 Spaces @ 12"
3" Cl.
TOP VIEW OF INLET COLLAR WITHOUT GRATE
SECTION HH
(
1:
5 Grate Slope)
TOP VIEW OF INLET COLLAR WITHOUT GRATE
5'-0"
5'-10"
12" Ctrs.
2" Cl.
7 Spaces @ 9"
VIEW FF
VIEW JJ
PRECAST COLLAR REINFORCING DETAILS (TYPES 3, 4 & 5)
PRECAST COLLAR REINFORCING DETAILS (TYPES 1 & 2)
(C-I-P COLLAR REINFORCING DETAILS SIMILAR)
(C-I-P COLLAR REINFORCING DETAILS SIMILAR)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MEDIAN BARRIER INLETS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TYPES 1, 2, 3, 4 AND 5
NO.
217
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
4'-3"
3'
Shoulder Pav't
1
2"
1
Edge Of Pavement
Clear
Edge Of Pavement
HIGH SIDE TRANSITION
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
One layer of 55lb. felt roofing bond breaker
(See Table 1)
between inlet and barrier including footings.
1 ~ Extra #4 Bar
Precast Inlets:
1
2"
Cl.
Each Side And
Joint width 1" max. Seal with backer rod and
Above Pipe
Department-approved pavement joint sealant.

See Section BB For Other Barrier Shape.
Opening
3" Cl.
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
M in. Dim ensions.
Cast-In-Place Inlets:
Min.
6"
Joint And Bond Breaker:
1
.
2" Cl
2" Clear
3" M in.
PAVEMENT WARP FOR SHOULDERS IN SUPERELEVATION
Const. Joint Perm itted
LOW SIDE SUPERELEVATION
Grate Elevation
0
.
0
6(
3
"Dr
o
pO
u
tT
oO
u
t
)
Refers To This point
See Sheet 2 of 2
Eyebolt & Chain

(See Index No. 201)
Horiz. Wall Reinf.

(See Table 1)
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
3" Clear
2" Clear
4"
3'-9"
See Inset B

15'M ax.
)
Shoulder Pav't
4'-4"
Varies (
27" M in.
)
3'
4"
6"
For Reinforcing Details
5'-0"
45
See Sections CC, DD & EE
3'
#4 Bars
@ 10" Ctrs.
2" Clear
8"
*Varies, 3" Std.

(0" To 5" Allowable)
*
6"
8"
Sand Fill
3'-8"
3'-3"
6"
8"
(Pipe Opening Not Shown)
SECTION AA (WITHOUT GRATE)
SECTION BB
Center Of Box
Location
Reference
B
6"
GENERAL NOTES
1. This inlet is primarily intended for use adjacent to concrete barrier walls on paved shoulders. Use
SINGLE FACE ROADWAY BARRIER
BARRIER WALL / RETAINING WALL
of the inlet adjacent to other wall types shall be approved by the Drainage Engineer. The inlet is
INLET SECTION AT WALLS
suitable for bicycle and occasional pedestrian traffic, with roller bar installation (see inset B) but
4"
should not be placed in a designated pedestrian travel way. It is not intended for use in curb and
4"
4"
4"
or 3'-8"
minimum depths to reduce adverse impact on the anchorage system. Runs of pipe parallel to and
near anchored wall shall be avoided wherever practical. Special coordination must be exercised
during the design and construction of storm water systems within anchored wall systems.
3'-3"
3. Inlet bottoms and/or tops may be either precast or cast-in-place. Whether cast as a single unit or
6"
3'-3"
Barrier W all Inlet
2. Inlets located in embankments constructed with earth anchored retaining wall shall be designed with
4'
-3"
gutter or other areas where throated inlets are required, nor areas subject to high debris.
as multiple segments, and whether precast or cast-in-place, the upper 2'-3" of the inlet shall be
or 3'-8"
reinforced in accordance with sections CC, DD and EE.
5'-0"
6'-0"
Unless Otherwise
11:
31:
23 AM
Shown On Plans
3
4"
chamfer or tooled to
1
4"
radius.
3'-6" or
3'-8"
Unless
Otherwise
Shown On
5. When Alternate G grate is specified in the plans, the grate is to be hot-dip galvanized after
TOP VIEW (WITHOUT GRATE)
fabrication. Field installation of the filler bar called for in Inset B will not be permitted, thereby
requiring tolerance adjustment during fabrication and/or casting, or, matching grate to structure
prior to galvanizing.
Plans
SCHEDULE (TABLE 1)
6. All reinforcing is Grade 60 bars. See Index No. 201 for equivalent area of welded wire fabric.
AREA
WALL
MAX. SPACING
SCHEDULE
7. All dimensions are for both precast and cast-in-place inlets unless otherwise noted.
Note: Alt. B Structure Bottom Only. See Index No. 200.
DEPTH
(in./ft.)
BARS
WWF
0'-5'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
5'-10'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
10'-15'
A4
0.20
4"
3"
0.24
1
5 2"
5"
8. For supplemental details see Index Nos. 200 and 201.
INLET WITH STRUCTURE BOTTOM

12/3/2015
9. Inlets to be paid for under the contract unit for Inlets (Barrier Wall), Each.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
10'-15'
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
B5.5
BARRIER WALL INLET
NO.
218
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
51"
3
8"
3
8"
12
4'-3"
3
8"
12
3
8"
12
12
1
2"
11"
11"
5'-0"
11"
Clear
3
8"
3
8"
1
2"
3
8"
12
12
10
12
1
3 2"
3
8"
4"
12
5
8"
5'-0"
4"
See Inset A
5x3x
Clear
1
4"
@ 11"
3" Clear
3" Clear
SECTION DD
SECTION CC
1
4"
3" Clear
1
8"
1
4"
SECTIO N FF
2'
12" Long
#4 Bars
44
3" Clear
1
2"
Clear
4"
4" 6"
3" Clear
1
2"
6"
6"
Clear
6"
2'
-3"
1
2"
9"
9"
5
16
SECTION EE
G
E
4'-3"
3'-9"
6"
D
See Inset B
7"
4"
5'-0"
0
.
0
6(
3
"Dr
o
pO
u
tT
oO
u
t
)
3'-8"
4"
4"
4"
4"
1
4"
Main Bars: 5"x
Cross Bars: Either
5
16"
Drilled Hole for
Asphaltic Concrete
Eyebolt & Chain
(See Plate Detail)
TOP VIEW
11
16"
1
2"
1
4
Welded
For Proprietary
(See Index No. 201)
6"
Electroforged or
2'
Hand Placed
Grouted Stud
3
8"
12"
3
4"
6"
Anchor Bolt or
3'
-6"
5'
-0"
2" Pitch
1
2"
5
8"
3" Drop
4"
4'-3"
SECTION GG
Walls With Battered
1
4
4"
Toe (Bond Breaker
TRANSVERSE SECTION
BACK VIEW
WITH GRATE & PLATE
WITHOUT BACK PLATE
Tolerance
Each Side Main Bar And

1
4
1
2"
Not Required)
Upper Half Cross Bars
1
2"
1
4"
E
U-Slot
TOP VIEW OF INLET
TOP VIEW OF
WITHOUT GRATE
METAL PLATE
1
2"
12"
3
4"
1
2"
Stud x 4"
(2 Required)
5
16"
to
5
8"
or less. After welding bar in place, clean
bar and damaged grate coating and coat with a

coal tar pitch varnish.
6"
4"
3"
3
8"
3"
3
8"
24"
and end band angles to reduce the clearance (c)

c
1
4
To Galvanizing)
1
4
a one-piece round
1
4
(Seal Weld Prior
5
16"
5
8"
bar shall be added to the end of the cross bars
Non-Chamfered
See Plate Details
For Alt. G Grates
4"
1
2"
15"
15"
3"
Anchor Bolt or
Stud (Bolt Shown)
11
5
8"
5
8"
11
3" Drop
1
4
When clearance (c) exceeds

11
16"
3-12
(4 Welds T&B Min.)
6"
For Std. Grates
Field Installation (See General Note):
6"
3
8"
4'
-3
"
27"
ELECTROFORGED
CROSS BAR OPTIONS
Seat
4"
3
8"
STEEL GRATE
3
8"
"
-0
5'
1
2"
WELDED
1
2"
10
3" Clear
Hole For
12"
4"
6"
3"
Anchor Bolt
6"
(2 Required)
OPTION FOR
OPTION FOR
GROUT STUD
ANCHOR BOLT
INSET A
INSET B
11:
31:
24 AM
NOTES
TRANSVERSE SECTIONS
PICTORIAL VIEW OF INLET COLLAR
THRU BACKWALL PLATE
1. All
bars #4.
2. Anchor bolts shall be either ASTM A307 hex head bolts cast-in-place, or ASTM A36 or F1554 (Grade 36)
12/3/2015
galvanized fully threaded rod, adhesive bonded anchors installed in accordance with Specification Section
416. Bolts or rods shall be 6" long (4" min. embedment) with one heavy hex head nut (ASTM 194 or A563)
LAST
REVISION
07/07/07
REVISIO N
and one flat washer (ASTM F436) each. All anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot-dip galvanized.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
BARRIER WALL INLET
NO.
218
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Heel Of Footing (With Bike Lane)
E
Varies
Heel Of Footing
l
l
r Wa
e
i
r
r
e Ba
t
e
r
c
n
Co
(Without Bike Lane)

Back Of Barrier
B
Inlet
Symmetrical About
For Double Throat Inlets
Top Of Barrier
1
2"
Preformed
Joint Filler (Typ.)

For Doweled Traverse
Construction Joint See
DETAIL B, Index 410

Toe Of Footing
With Bike Lane
Bond Breaker All
Gutter Line
Contact Surfaces
Toe Of Footing
Without Bike Lane
Shoulder Or
Between Wall & Inlet
Center of Box
Roadway Pavement
Location Reference
NOTE: For Sections QQ & TT, see Index 410.
6"
7"
6"
3"3"
3" M in.
L3
L4
L4
L5
L5
L5
L5
6"
3"
1'
-1 "
3"
e3
t
e No
Se
e1
t
e No
Se
R 1"
Varies
2"
U-Bar
3"
L2
3" M in.
6"
1'
-1 "
L1
Varies
Joint Filler
e1
t
e No
Se
R 1"
Varies
L3
R 10"
Preformed
L1
Varies
Joint Filler
3"
1
2"
7"
Preformed
5"
L1
R 10"
1'
-3"
1
2"
2"
3'-0"
5 "
5"
L1
3'-0"
4"3"
2"
L1
2'
-8"
2"
L1
Bar 4A @ 8" O.C.
1'
-10"
2'
-8"
L1
PLAN VIEW
R "
1'
-10"
L1
Bar 4K @ 8" O.C.
2"
2 "
R "
4 "
4 "
7"
PICTORIAL VIEW
R "
1'
-3"
2"
2 "
7"
R "
L3
L3
L4
L5
L5
L5
L5
L5
NOTES:
1. Distance = 1'-6" With Bike Lane, Or 2'-6" Without Bike Lane.
2. For Double Throat Inlet, Section BB replaces Section AA.
3. Field Bend Bar 4K To Maintain 2" Minimum Concrete Cover.
SECTION AA
SECTION CC
SECTION BB
GENERAL NOTES
1.
6.
Recommended maximum pipe sizes are 18"longitudinaland 30"transverse.For larger pipe,use Alternate B bottoms,Index No.200.
pedestrian way.
7.
Grates can be fabricated with reticuline bars or with either 1/2"

welded or 3/8"
electroforged cross bars and bearing bars as
detailed on Sheet 3.
Allreinforcing is Grade 60 bars. For equivalent area of welded wire fabric for inlet,see Index No.201. Reinforcing shallhave 2"
min.cover unless otherwise shown. Bars shallbe trimmed or bent to provide 1" clearance around pipe openings. Cost for
8.
When Alternate G grate is specified in plans,the grate is to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication according to Specification 962-9.
9.
For Pay Item purposes,the depth of the barrier wallinlet shallbe computed using the center of box grate elevation,less the flow
line elevation of the lowestpipe flow line or to the top of the sump floor elevation.
additional reinforcing in barrier wall to be included in cost of concrete barrier wall.

Barrier wallshallbe Class II Concrete,finished surface in accordance with GeneralNote 1,Sheet 1,Index No.410.
4.
Allexposed edges and corners shallbe 3/4"chamfer or tooled to 1/4"radius.
10. Alldimensions are for both precastand C-I-P inlets unless otherwise noted.
5.
A flat18"x2" drainage slot shall be constructed at the inlet centerline when the inlet is located in a curb sag. For drainage slot
construction, no more than two bars shall be trimmed or deleted such as type: 4A, 4K, and U-Bar. On each side of drainage slots,
vertical & horizontal bars shall be placed to provide 2" concrete cover.
11. Inlets to be paid for under the contract unit price for Inlets,Barrier Wall,Rigid,Curb & Gutter,Each.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
3.
12/3/2015
11:
31:
24 AM
2.
This inlet to be used in conjunction with Concrete Barrier Wall,Curb and Gutter,Index No.410.The inlet is suitable for bicycle and
occasionalpedestrian traffic with extended crossbar or bar stub (see INSETS B & B ALTERNATE).Inletshould not be placed in a
12. Concrete Barrier Wallto be paid for under the contract unit price for Shoulder Concrete Barrier Wall,Rigid-Curb & Gutter,LF.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE BARRIER WALL INLET
NO.
219
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
1'
-10"
4"
Construction Joint
4"
Permitted Between
1~Extra No. 4 Bar
These Limits See
Each Side and
Index No. 201 for
Above Pipe Opening
1
2"
Min. Dimensions
3" C-I-P
3" C-I-P
2" Precast
2" Precast
7"
1
2"
L2
6"
1'
-1 "
3" M in.
M in.
1'
-9" M in.
3"
4"
1
2"
Bar 4B @ 12" O.C.
L3
L4
2"
3"
1'-10"
2 "
2"
Install Grate With

Extended CROSSBAR
9" O.C. In Collar

1" Overhang for
OPTIONS (Sheet 3)
Eyebolt-See
Precast Walls
3" C-I-P
3" C-I-P
2" Precast
2" Precast
2"
(See TABLE 1)
3"
3"
To Front Of Inlet
Index 201
No. 4 Bars
@ 12" O.C.
(See TABLE 1)
3"
Bar 4D @ 12" O.C. (8"
3"
3"
Slab) Or 6" O.C.
8"
3"
6"
3"
8"
C-I-P
Precast
1"
INSET A
2~Extra No. 4 Bars @
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
Bar 4C @ 12" O.C.
13
16"
1~Extra No. 4
Bar In Inlet Top
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
3"
INSET B
SHEET 2
L3
3" M in.
1
2"
4"
Clearance Above Throat
L1
Varies
Precast
2"
6"
6"
Optional
Cant U-Bar For 2"

R 10"

15'M ax.
)
2"
5 "
1
2"
Clearance Below Slot)
5"
L1
Si
d
e
wa
l
k
0
.
0
2(
St
d
.
)
2" C-I-P
3" C-I-P
2" Precast
(Depress L1 Bars For Min.
SHEET 2
@ 9" O.C.
Haunch Shape
Bar 4B @ 12" O.C.
2"
No. 4 Bars
3" C-I-P
2" Precast
@ 8" O.C.
INSET A
"
6"
16
3'-4"
6"
4"
1'
-9" M in.
Precast
See General Note 5
Inlet Top
6"
1'
-10 " M in.
6"
2"
3'-4"
2"
6"
1'
-4 "
6"
2'
-8"
Bar 4A
C-I-P
5"
5'-0"
Precast
Theo. GP
1
2"
Drainage Slot 18"X2
L1
L1
1"
R "
5'-4"
C-I-P
Precast
2'-4"
2"
4 "
R "
C-I-P
2'-6"
2"
2 "
7"
No. 4 Bars
(Precast 6" Slab)
@ 12" O.C.
8"
4'-0"
8"
C-I-P
6"
4'-0"
6"
Precast
8"
6"
2'-5"
8"
C-I-P
2'-6"
6"
Precast
INSET B
Install Grate With
(18" Dia. Pipe Opening Shown)
SECTION DD
SECTION EE
SECTION CC
2'
-0" C-I-P
3"
REINFORCING NOTES:
1. Bars L1: Length 11'-1", Straight @ 8" O.C.
2. Bars L2: Length: 8'-4" (Single Throat) 11'-0" (Double Throat) @ 8" O.C.
3. Bars L3 & L4: Length 11'-1" Field Bend For 4" Drop (Top Bars) 3" Drop
INSET B (ALTERNATE)
(Bottom Bars) @ 8" O.C.

4. Bars L5: Length 2'-8" Field Bend For Drop Same As L3 & L4 @ 8" O.C.
4"
5. U Bars @ 8" O.C.

3 "
3'
-7 " C-I-P
3'
-3 " Precast
Varies
4"
3 "
4"
4"
To Front Of Inlet
2"
1'
-9" Precast
3'
-4"
4"
5"
8"
1"
9 "
4"
BAR STUB (Sheet 3)
WALL DEPTH
MAX. SPACING
AREA
SCHEDULE
C-I-P PRECAST
12/3/2015
BAR 4A
U-BAR
BAR 4B
BAR 4C
07/01/14
REVISIO N
LAST
WWR
0'-3'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
4'-9'
3'-6'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
B5.5
0.24
1
2"
5"
NOTES:
1. For DOWELED TRANSVERSE CONSTRUCTION JOINT WHEN ABUTTING
SEGMENT(S) LESS THAN 40' IN LENGTH, see DETAIL B, Index 410.
2. For Additional Information on "STANDARD BAR BENDING DETAILS,"
10'-15'
BAR 4D
C6.5
0.37
1
2"
6"
See Index 21300.

SCHEDULE (TABLE 1)
BAR BENDING DIAGRAMS
REVISION
BARS
0'-4'
9'-15' 6'-10'
4"
11:
31:
25 AM
3"
Varies
(in./ft.)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
219
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Each Side Main

4'-3"
4'-3"
3
4"
1
4"
5
8"
21
1
4"
WELDED
1
2"
1
4"
3
16
BAR STUB
1"
3
8"
1
16"
Tolerance
H
1
4"
Reticuline Bars 1
ELECTROFORGED
1
2"
Cross Bars: Either " Welded
3
16"
Intermediate Bars 1
1
4"
H
1
8"
1
8"
Bearing Bars: 5"x"
Bar
1
2"
1
4"
1
8"
5
16
7
8"
21
5x3x
U-Slot
1
4"
1
4"
2 "
5
16
5"
5"
3
4"
5x3x
Half Cross Bars
1
4
1
2"
2 "
20
4"
1
2"
4"
Bar And Upper

1
8"
1
3 2"
1
4"
Bearing Bars 5" x
1
4"
Or " Electroforged
CROSS BAR OPTIONS
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
Reticuline Bar
Intermediate Bar
1
4
Bar Stubs @ 4" O.C.
Cross Bars: Either " Welded
Cold Driven Rivet
Or " Electroforged
1
4
5x3x
5
16
Bearing Bar
Bar Stubs @ 5" O.C.
Bearing Bars: 5"x"
BAR STUB
5x3x
5
16
Bearing Bar
1
4
SECTION GG
SECTION FF
Bearing Bar
1
4
SECTION II
SECTION HH
CROSS BAR GRATE
RETICULINE GRATE
OPTIONAL STEEL GRATES

5'-0" Precast
6"
@ 9" (F.S.)
4"
@ 12" (N.S.)
3 " 5 "
8 "
2"
7 "
No. 4 Bars
2 Spaces
9"
12"
9 "
2"
Drop
3"
3"
No. 4 Bars
1
2"
6"
L
J
TOP VIEW OF INLET TOP WITHOUT GRATE
1
2"
@ 9" O.C.
3 Spaces @ 12"
2"
2"
Bars 4B
1"
1"
@ 12" O.C.
1'
-5"
1"
No. 4 Bars
9"
2"
2 "
@ 9" O.C.
Bars 4B
@ 12" O.C.
Min.
Bars 4B
2"
No. 4 Bars
@ 9" O.C.
3 Spaces @ 12"
3"
3'
3' 9"
-6
C"
I
-P
Pr
ec
as
t
No. 4 Bars
@ 9" O.C.
2"
SECTION JJ
No. 4 Bars
Varies
R
e
ce
P
re ss
ca
F
o
s
r
t
O
W
ve
a
l
rh
l
s
a
ng
1'
-10 "
1
"
o
f
219
01/01/12
3 Spaces @ 12"
2 "
8"
C7"
I
-P
Pr
ec
as
t
@ 12" O.C.
SECTION LL
SECTION KK
2"
pe
ha
S
al
h
on
i
nc pt
u
a
O
H
D
13
16"
1'
-10
Varies
1
n.
2" M i
1'
-1
0"
11:
31:
26 AM
2"
1
2"
3 8"
-P
I
t
C- cas
"
e
6
r
P
4"
3 Spaces
8"
6"
C
-I
P
-P
re
ca
st
-P
I
t
Cas
4"
ec
5'
Pr
"
-0
5'
3'
-6" Precast
2"
2 Spaces
2"
D
1'
-10 "
6"
2 "
3 Spaces
4"
Bars 4B
@ 12" O.C.
NOTE:
12/3/2015
1. For additional information on Bar 4B, see BAR BENDING DIAGRAMS (Sheet 2).
2. C-I-P Inlet Top Reinforcing Similar
PRECAST INLET TOP REINFORCING DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
PICTORIAL VIEW OF INLET TOP

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
219
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
4'-3" C-I-P
1
2"
4'-3" Precast
(Typ.)
3"
3"
t
s
a
c
e
Pr
C-I-P
t
s
a
c
e
Pr
8"
2'-11"
8"
6"
3'-3"
6"
3" Cl.
3" Cl.
Horiz. Wall Reinf.

(See Table 1)
2" Cl.
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
PLAN
1'
-6" M in.
4'-0"
P
8" CI
#4 Bars
t
s
a
c
6" Pr
e
@ 12" Ctrs.
Cl.
MAX. SPACING
(in/ft)
BARS
WWF
0'-5'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
5'-9'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
9'-12'
A4
0.20
4"
3"
0.24
1
5 2"
5"
Horiz. Wall Reinf.

9'-15'
1~Extra #4
1
2"
Cl.
B5.5
(See Table 1)
6"
INSET A
Min.
(PRECAST OPTION)
Bar Each
Side And
Above Pipe
3" Cl.
Opening
C-I-P
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
4'-0" Or 2'-11"
Precast
5 "
18
6"
1
4
3'-10" Or 3'-3"
2
6'-0" (Std.)
Precast
Unless Otherwise
Shown In Plans
1
4
SECTION AA
DETAIL
(CAST-IN-PLACE INLET SHOWN, PRECAST INLET SIMILAR)
3
16"
Thick bar
DETAIL OF BAR STUB
1
2"
2'-11" Or 4'-0"
C-I-P
3'-3" Or 3'-10"
Precast
3'-6" (Std)
Or 4'-0"
Unless
Otherwise
Shown On
Plans
NOTE: Alt. B Structure Bottom Only. See Index No. 200

8"
To Be Paid For As
(Notched For Cross Bars)
3
1
4"x 4"
Cross Bars 1
Center Of Box
Back Of Inlet
otherwise noted. See Index No. 201 for equivalent area

1
2"
of welded wire fabric. Bars to be cut or bent for 1

minimum clearance around pipe.
tooled to
1
4"
3
4"
chamfer or
radius.
( 16" Continuous Weld At Main Bar Notches)
Main Bars and Cross Bars Flush On Top
Location Reference
4'-3"
2'
-0"
1
2"
2'
-0"
3. When Alternate G grate is specified in plans, the grate is
Inlet
to be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
4. For supplementary details and notes see Index Nos. 200

7
16"
and 201.
For Grate Details
18
6"
2'
-1
1
2"
1'
-0"
Back Of Gutter
-0"
6" 1'
1. All reinforcing is Grade 60 bars with 2" min. cover unless
2. All exposed edges and corners must be

1
4"
Main Bars 5"x
1
2"
To Be Paid For As
Shoulder Gutter
Offset
9 M ain Bars
(See Detail Above)

5' Gutter Transition
Shoulder Gutter
1'
-6
Weld Main Bars To
1'
-6
SECTION DD
1
4"
5
16
GENERAL NOTES
Cross Bar
1
8"
4'-10" (Precast)
1'-5"
1
8"
7"
1
2"
5' Gutter Transition
1'-5"
5x3x
SECTION CC
1'-5"
4"
7"
7"
"
for structure bottom details and hole reinforcement.
4'-3" Out To Out
3"
1'-0"
Equally Spaced
6"
2'-0"
Out To Out
1
2"
1
2"
4"
7"
AREA
SCHEDULE
DEPTH
2'-1
1
2"
1'
-0"
9"
C-I-P 6"
1
2"
5'-4" (C-I-P)
2'
-0"
WALL
3" Min.
8"
Inlet
11:
31:
27 AM
1~Extra #4 Bar
Below Grate Seat
"
0
1
'
3
SECTION BB

SCHEDULE (TABLE 1)
@ 12" Ctrs.
6"
Or C-I-P
Precast
8"
W4xW4 WWF
1 2"
1
2"
and Index No. 200.
4"x4"
2'-1
201. For larger pipe see bottom detail below
Grating
15
GRATE SHOWN, PRECAST INLET SIMILAR)
Lip Of Gutter
30"
Note: Recommended sizes are for concrete pipe.
#4 Bars
(CAST-IN-PLACE INLET WITHOUT
Theoretical Gutter Line
24"
4'-0" or 3'-10"
Inl
et Type S
6"
6"
8"
For M in. Dim ensions
See Index 201
1
5 2"
These Lim its-See Index No. 201
Eye Bolt

15'M ax.
)
Precast
C-I-P
6"
6"
2"
3"
PIPE SIZE
2'-11" or 3'-3"
Sizes for other types of pipe must be
Const. Joints Perm itted Between
2'
-1" C-I-P
1
2"
1
4"
0"
3"
INLET INSIDE WIDTH
verified for fit in accordance with Index No.
5"
1
5 2"
3"
0"
t
s
a
c
e
Pr
Cl.
Steel
3"
6"
2"
6" 6"
2" Cl.
B
6"
1
4"
Al
t.B Structure Bottom
1
2"
P
I
C-
Gap
This Point
3
4"
2" Cl.
6"
5"
2" C-I-P
P
I
C-
6"
6"
Refers To
1
2"
for Precast Inlet
t
s
a
c
e
Pr
See Inset A
8"
Grate Elev.
6"
Ea. Side
P
I
C-
l
e
v
e
L
1
2"
6"
3"
6"
3"
C-I-P
Precast
4'
-10" Precast
5'
-4" C-I-P
8"
3
4"
8"
g
n
i
p
o
Sl
3"
Gap
1'
-6" Precast
8"
RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM PIPE SIZES
Gap
3"
4'-10" Precast
1
2'-1 2"
2" Cl.
1
2'-1 2"
2" Cl.
4'-3" C-I-P
1
2"
5'-4" C-I-P
4'-3" Precast
See Index No. 231

5. All dimensions are for both precast and cast-in-place
inlets unless otherwise noted.
Theoretical
Gutter Line
E
F
Bar Stubs
Lip Of Gutter
TOP VIEWS
6. Inlets to be paid for under the contract unit price for

5" Ctrs.
inlets (Gutter Type S), EA. Cost of concrete apron at
All Stubs
terminal inlets to be included in the cost of the inlet.
Shoulder
Pavement
Bar Stub
(See Detail)
SECTION FF
12/3/2015
SHOULDER GUTTER TRANSITION
SECTION EE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
STEEL GRATE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUTTER INLET TYPE S
NO.
220
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
7"
4'-3"
SECTION BB
(Enlarged)
Inlet
1
2"
1
2"
2'-1
1
2"
8"
Shoulder Pavement
7"
1
2"
4"
SECTION AA
1
2"
7"
3
4"
8"
2'-1
(Enlarged)
et
nl
I
d
An
n
ro
Ap
5'-0" Concrete Apron
Shoulder Gutter Transition
A
B
Inlet
8"
es
at
Gr
r
de
ul
ho
S
t
en
m
ve
a
P
Shoulder Pavement
PICTORIAL VIEW
Top View
Apron To be Constructed At The Most Downstream Inlet In A Run Of Shoulder Gutter
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
31:
28 AM
CONCRETE APRON AT TERMINAL INLETS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUTTER INLET TYPE S
NO.
220
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
A
#4 Bar Each Corner
(2'-0" Min. Length)
Centered Inlet
Structure Bottom
2 Way Reinforcement
See Tables
TOP SLAB
B
GRADE 60 (BAR)
#5 Hoop Bar
OR 65 KSI & 70 KSI

SCHEDULE
(Peripheral Reinforcement)
(WIRE FABRIC)
In/ft.
Centered OpeningSee Table For

Dimensions
TOP VIEW
0.20
0.24
0.37
0.53
0.73
1.06
1.45
#8 Bars
TOP SLAB WITH

CENTERED OPENING
TOP SLAB OPENINGS

DIAMETER
REINFORCING
OPENING SIZE
5'-0" To 8'-0"
MAX.
2'-11" x 4'-0"
3'-3" x 3'-10"
SLAB
DEPTH
THICKNESS
(2 WAYS)
TOP SLAB REINFORCING DIAGRAM
MIN.
SLAB
SCHEDULE
SIZE: 5'-0"
0.5'<30'
30'-40'
1
2"
1
2"
SIZE: 6'-0"
2'-11" To 4'-0"
Top Slab With
0.5'<8'
8'<18'
18'<30'
30'<37'
37'-40'
Centered Opening
#5 Hoop Bar
Round Structure Bottom
#4 Bars
2" Cl.
2" Cl.
See Index No. 200 For Structure
1
2"
For 5'-0"/6'-0" Structure Bottoms

1
2"
11
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
SIZE: 8'-0"
5'-0" Min. To 8'-0" Max.

(Unless Otherwise
1
2"
Each Corner
Bottom Details and Hole Reinforcement.
1
2"
For 8'-0" Structure Bottoms
0.5'<9'
11
9'<15'
11
15'<23'
11
23'<33'
11
33'-40'
11
2" Cl.
Shown In The Plans)
#8 Bars @ 5" Spacing
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
2 Way Reinforcement
See Tables
11:
31:
28 AM
SECTION BB
SECTION AA
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
ALT. A STRUCTURE BOTTOM FOR INLET TYPE S
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUTTER INLET TYPE S
NO.
220
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
4'-0" Or
2'-11" Or
2'-11"
4'-0"
Inlet Type V
C-I-P
3'-10" Or
Precast
3'-3"
4'-3" O.O.
C-I-P
Bar
GENERAL NOTES
5"
1
1
4"x1 2"x5"
5"
5"
5"
3"
3
16
1. This inlet is suitable for village swales, ditches, or other areas subject to heavy wheel
Precast
3'-3" Or
Inlet
(5 Required)
3'-10"
loads, minimum debris. This inlet may be placed in areas subject to occasional pedestrian
traffic such as landscaped areas and pavement areas where pedestrians can walk around
the inlet. This inlet is not for use in a bicycle way.
OPTIONAL BAR SPACING

2. When alternate "G" grate is specified in plans, the grate is to be hot dip galvanized after
Shown In Plans)
6"
3"
1
1
4"x1 2"x5"
6"
1
2"
6"
3. All reinforcing is Grade 60 bars with 2" min. cover unless otherwise noted. See Index No.
3
16
3'-6" Or
201 for equivalent area of welded wire fabric. Cut or bend bars out of way of pipe to
(4 Required)
4'-0"
(Unless
Inlet
1
2".
clear pipe 1
5
5x3x 16
Refer To Index
Otherwise
No. 231 For Weld
Shown In
3
16"
(Unless Otherwise
Bar
Details And Sections
Plans)
3
4"
1
4"
radius.
7
18 16"
18
6'-0"
fabrication.
4'-3" O.O.
(7 Equal Spaces
8 Bars @
1
4")
NOTE: Alt. B Structure Bottom Only. See Index No. 200 for
Intermediate Bars
structure bottom details and hole reinforcement.
Main Bars
7. Inlet to be paid for under the contract unit price for Inlets (Gutter Type V), EA
(For Pipes 30" Dia. And Larger)
TWO REQUIRED PER INLET
1
4"
5" Steel Grate: Main Bars 5"x
SCHEDULE (TABLE 1)
1
1
2"x 4"
Intermediate Bars 1
2'-11" Or 3'-3"
24"
4'-0" Or 3'-10"
30"
Note: Recommended sizes are for concrete pipe. Sizes

for other types of pipe must be verified for fit
221
Shown On Plans
2"
in accordance with Index No. 201. For larger
Steel Grate, See Detail
1
2"
A12
0.20
12"
8"
5' - 9'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
9' - 12'
A4
0.20
4"
3"
9' - 15'
B5.5
0.24
2
1
2"
Gap
3"
6"
Precast
2'-11" C-I-P
3" Cl.
C-I-P
8"
2'-11"
Precast
6"
3'-3"
8"
6"
1'
-6" M in.
1'
-0"
5
16"
5
16"
4"x4"
1~Extra #4 Bar
W4xW4 WWF
Below Grate Seat
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
1
.
2" Cl
#4 Bars
@ 12" Ctrs.
3" Cl.
6"
Min.
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
1~Extra #4 Bar
1
2"
Cl.
(8" Slab) Or 8" Ctrs.
Each Side And
(6" Slab)
Above Pipe
Opening
3" Cl.
SECTION BB
6" or 8"
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
Or 11" Ctrs. (6" Slab)

8"
4'-0"
8"
6"
3'-10"
SECTION AA
SECTION AA
GRATE; PRECAST INLET SIMILAR)
PRECAST INLET SIMILAR)
(CAST-IN-PLACE INLET)
(PRECAST INLET)
07/01/13
REVISIO N
(CAST-IN-PLACE INLET SHOWN
LAST
@ 12" Ctrs.
(See Table 1)
(CAST-IN-PLACE INLET SHOWN WITHOUT
REVISION
#4 Bars
Horiz. Wall Reinf.

(See Table 1)
4"
PLAN
2" Cl.
5"
8"
3"
6"
6"
3"
C-I-P
Precast
11:
31:
29 AM
DESCRIPTION:
6"
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
Gap
2" Cl.
0"
1
2"
8"
0"
5
16"
Cl.
6"
5
16"
2" Cl.
C-I-P
Precast
6"
Index 201 For M in. Dim ensions
2"
1
4"
#4 Bars
6"
2"
C-I-P
Precast
6"
Between These Lim its- See
@ 12" Ctrs.
3'-3" Precast
12/3/2015
Construction Joints Perm itted
(See Table 1)
#4 Bars
2" Cl.
4'
-10" Precast
5'
-4" C-I-P
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
Precast or
6"
3"
Center Of Box
3"
6"
See Index
Location Reference
6"
@ 12" Ctrs.
15'
-0" M ax.
)
5
16"
2'
-1
1'
-6" M in.
Precast
C-I-P
Eyebolt
3"
6"
2"
C-I-P
No. 201
C-I-P
6"
5
16"
2"
6"
C-I-P
5"
3"
Gap
3" M in.
2" Cl.
4'-3" Precast
1
2"
3"
6"
WWF
0' - 5'
1
2"
4'-3" C-I-P
BARS
Inlet Elevation As
Inlet
pipe see bottom detail above and Index No. 200.
(in./ft.)
5"
Pipe Size
SCHEDULE
DEPTH
1'
-0"
Inlet Inside Width
MAX. SPACING
AREA
WALL
1
3
4"x 16"
Reticuline Bars 1
GUTTER INLET TYPE V
NO.
221
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
A
#4 Bar Each Corner
Centered Inlet
(2'-0" Min. Length)
Structure Bottom
2 Way Reinforcement
See Tables
TOP SLAB
# 5 Hoop Bar
GRADE 60 (BAR)
OR 65 KSI &
SCHEDULE
70 KSI (WIRE FABRIC)
Centered OpeningIn./ft.
See Table For
Dimensions
5'-0" To 8'-0"
0.20
0.24
0.37
0.53
0.73
1.06
1.45
#8 Bars
TOP SLAB OPENINGS

DIAMETER
TOP SLAB WITH
OPENING SIZE
MIN.
MAX.
2'-11" x 4'-0"
3'-3" x 3'-10"
CENTERED OPENING
REINFORCING
SLAB
SLAB
DEPTH
THICKNESS
(2 WAYS)
SCHEDULE
SIZE: 5'-0"
0.5' <30'
30'-40'
1
2"
1
2"
SIZE: 6'-0"
2'-11" to 4'-0"
8' < 18'
18'
Top Slab With

Centered Opening
#5 Hoop Bar
2" Cl.
#4 Bars
2" Cl.
< 30'
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
9
9
SIZE: 8'-0"
0.5'
For 5'-0"/6'-0" Structure Bottoms

11
37'-40'
9'
1
2"
1
2"
Each Corner
1
2"
30' < 37'
5'-0" Min. To 8'-0" Max.
1
2"
0.5' < 8'

2" Cl.
(Unless Otherwise

Shown In The Plans)
< 9'
< 15'
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
11
11
15'
< 23'
11
23'
< 33'
11
33'-40'
11
2 Way Reinforcement
See Tables
11:
31:
30 AM
SECTION BB
SECTION AA
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
ALT. A STRUCTURE BOTTOM FOR INLET TYPE V
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUTTER INLET TYPE V
NO.
221
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
0.1'
Flow
0
2
:
1
1:
20
Ditch Bottom
8"
8"
10'
6"
Ditch Block (Low Side Of Inlet On Continuous Ditches)
6"
3'-1"
6"
Toe Wall Required
6"
Or
2'-0"
Inlet Type A
Normal Ditch Bottom
2'-0"
6"
6"
Or
3'-1"
(Paved Or Unpaved Ditches)

Inlet Inside Width
Pipe Size
2'-0"
18"
SECTION DD
6'-0"
24"
3'-1"
(Unless Otherwise
18" Where An 18" pipe
Shown In Plans)
Enters A 2'-0" Wall

6'
verified for fit in accordance with Index
3'-0"
1'-6"
3'
No. 201. For larger pipe see bottom detail
1'-6"
6"
6"
3'-6"
(Unless
Otherwise
Shown In
Plans)
right and Index No. 200.

1'
-6"
3"
3"
1
2"
2'-5
1
4"
Center Of Box

9 Bars
1
1
1
2"x3 2"x1'-8 2"
Locate As Shown
Preformed Joint Filler

1
4"
1
2"
Structure Bottom Details And Hole Reinforcement.
1
4"
5" 6"
Location Reference
Grate
1
2'
-2 2"
Grate
3
4"
B
E
Notch Permitted
(At The Option Of The
4"
4'
-1"
1
4"
3
16
1
1
2x3x 2
Manufacturer)
GENERAL NOTES
Eyebolt
1. This inlet is designed for ditches, medians, or other area
(See Index
1
4
No. 201)
6" 5"
Predom inant Flow
4'
-1"
7'
-1"
3"
3
1
2"x3"
subject to heavy wheel loads on limited access facilities where
debris may be a problem. This inlet is not for use in areas
SECTION EE
1
2"
subject to pedestrian and/or bicycle traffic.
2. All reinforcing is Grade 60 bars with 2" min. cover unless
otherwise noted. Cut or bend bars out of way of pipe to clear

1
2".
1'
-6"
pipe by 1
PLAN
See Index 201 for equivalent area of welded
wire fabric.
3" Conc. Ditch Pavt.

3'-1"
6"
6"
6"
1
4"
to

15'
-0" M ax.
)
8"
1 ~ Extra #4 Bar
Each Side and
Above Pipe
Opening
6"
1
4"
3
4"
chamfer or tooled
radius.
3"
4. When alternate "G" grate is specified in plans, the grate is to
be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
5. Cost of ditch paving to be included in the cost of Inlet.

Sodding to be paid for under contract unit price for
Performance Turf, SY.
3" Cl.
Horiz.
Wall Reinf.
7. All dimensions are for both precast and cast-in-place inlets
(See Table 1)
unless otherwise noted.
#4 Bars
6"
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
Cl.
2" Cl.
1
2"
See Index No.

201 for
6"
Min.
(See Table 1)
e
p
o
l
de S
Si
Si
de S
l
o
p
e
Horiz Wall Reinf.
3" M in.
1
.
2" Cl
3" Cl.
M inim um Dim ensions
1'M in.
All Around
3"
2" Cl.
4"
2' Sod
6"
1
4"
(Total 8 SY)
2'-0"
@ 12" Ctrs.
8. Inlet to be paid for under the contract unit price for inlets (Dt
Bot Type A), EA.
11:
31:
31 AM

#4 Bars @ 9" Ctrs.
07/01/09
REVISIO N
LAST
REVISION
SCHEDULE (TABLE 1)
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
12/3/2015
SECTION CC
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
MAX. SPACING
SCHEDULE
(in./ft.)
DEPTH
BARS
WWF
0' - 10'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
10' - 15'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
AREA
WALL
DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPE A
NO.
230
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
A
Centered Inlet
#4 Bar Each Corner
(2'-0" Min. Length)
Structure Bottom
TOP SLAB
2 Way Reinforcement
See Tables
GRADE 60 (BAR) OR
65 KSI & 70 KSI
SCHEDULE
(WIRE FABRIC)
#5 Hoop Bar
Centered
In./ft.
0.20
Opening-
0.24
See Table For
0.37
Dimensions
0.53
0.73
1.06
1.45
TOP VIEW
TOP SLAB WITH
TOP SLAB OPENINGS

DIAMETER
REINFORCING
MIN.
4'-0" To 8'-0"
CENTERED OPENING
#8 Bars
OPENING SIZE
SLAB
SLAB
DEPTH
THICKNESS
(2 WAYS)
2'-0" x 3'-1"
SCHEDULE
SIZE: 4'-0"
0.5'-40'
1
2"
SIZE: 5'-0"
3'-1" Or 2'-0"
0.5'<30'
30'-40'
1
2"
1
2"
Top Slab With

Centered Opening
SIZE: 6'-0"
8'<18'
18'<30'
30'<37'
37'-40'

2" Cl.
#5 Hoop Bar
#4 Bars
2" Cl.
4'-0" Min. To 8'-0" Max.
1
2"
9
(Unless Otherwise
Shown In The Plans)
Each Corner
1
2"
0.5'<8'
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
For 4'-0"/5'-0"/6'-0" Structure Bottoms

SIZE: 8'-0"
1
2"
11
2" Cl.
0.5'<9'
11
9'<15'
11
15'<23'
11
23'<33'
11
33'-40'
11

2 Way Reinforcement
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
See Tables
SECTION BB
12/3/2015
11:
31:
31 AM
SECTION AA
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
ALT. A STRUCTURE BOTTOM FOR INLET TYPE A

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPE A
NO.
230
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Ditch Bottom
8"
4'-2"
8"
C-I-P
6"
4'-2"
6"
Precast
0
2
:
1
1
:
2
0
Ditch Bottom
3'-8" Or
C-I-P
Toe Wall Required
4'-2"
Precast
3'-10" Or
10'
6"
(Paved Or Unpaved Ditches)
Inlet Type B
8"
0.
1'
4'-2"
3'-8" Or
4'-2"
C-I-P
3'-10" Or
Precast
4'-2"
DITCH BLOCK
3"
3'
-10"
Traversable Inlet Top
2'
(Single Slot Shown)
3" Precast
3'
-8"
4" C-I-P
Shown In Plans)
Index 201
Sod
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES
PAVEMENT
6"
Predominant Flow (s)
Otherwise
Shown In
Plans)
TH STRUCTURE BOTTOM
ET WI
NL
I
SOD
SY
CY
SY
Single Slot
6.2
0.9
14
Double Slot
8.1
1.1
19
2'
5'
ZES
PE SI
MUM PI
RECOMMENDED MAXI
2'
8"
C-I-P
Center Of Box
Inlet
(Unless
structure bottom details and pipe opening reinforcement.
SLOT TYPE
Location Reference
Same As
For Informational Purposes Only
Precast
4" C-I-P
(Unless Otherwise
Eyebolt See
3"
6'
SECTION EE
3" Precast
3"
6"
8"
Ditch Block
(Low Side Of Inlet On Continuous Ditches)
INLET INSIDE WIDTH
PIPE SIZE
3'-8"
30"
4'-2"
36"
Sod
Conc. Inlet Pavt.
Note: Recommended sizes are for concrete pipe. Sizes
CONCRETE INLET PAVEMENT AND SODDING
(Grate, Apron And Slot Not Shown)
for other types of pipe must be verified for fit in

accordance with Index No. 201. For larger pipe see
PLAN
bottom detail above and Index No. 200.
5"
4'-8"
5"
C-I-P
3"
4'-8"
3"
Precast
4'-3"
4" C-I-P
3" Precast
4" C-I-P
4" C-I-P
3" Precast
3" Precast
5"
1
2"
1
#4 Bars
Each Side And

Above Pipe
Opening
7
16"
18
5
16"
1
8"
8"
6"
3'-8"
8" C-I-P
3'-10"
6" Precast
6"
8"
C-I-P
4'-2"
6"
Precast
11:
31:
32 AM
SECTION AA
(See Table 1)
3
16"
1
2"
Intermediate Bars 1
1
4"
Bearing Bars 5" x
PLAN
#4 Bars
@ 12" Ctrs.
Cold Driven Rivet

1
4
5x3x
5
16
AREA
MAX. SPACING
SCHEDULE
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DEPTH
07/01/09
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs. (8" Slab),
1
4
Bearing Bar

Intermediate Bar
WALL
LAST
1
4"
Reticuline Bar
SECTION BB
SCHEDULE (TABLE 1)
*See Sheet 2 of 3
REVISION
Typ.
Bearing Bar
1
4"
Horiz Wall Reinf.
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs. (8" Slab),

4'-2"
Typ.
SECTION CC
8"
Typ.
8"
2"
@ 12" Ctrs.
Cl.
Cl.
1~Extra #4 Bar
5x3x5/16
3" Clear
2" Cl.
(See Table 1)
M Inim um Dim ensions
Min.
3" Precast
1
4"
These Lim its-See
6"
Horiz Wall Reinf.
5"
Reticuline Bars 1
Index No. 201 for
4"
3" M in.
3" Clear
1
.
2" Cl
4"
5"
Perm itted Between
6"
6"
Construction Joints

15'
-0" M ax.
)
5"
9" (Slot Depth)
5"
4" C-I-P
1'
-10" (
M in.
)
8"
4"
3"
8"
3"
1'-6"
3
16"
5
16"
4'-7
1'
18
3'
(in./ft.)
BARS
WWF
0' - 5'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
5' - 9'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
5"
4"
9' - 13'
B5.5
0.24
1
5 2"
13' - 15'
Special
0.267
5"
SECTION DD
STEEL GRATE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPE B
NO.
231
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
GENERAL NOTES
1. The general purpose of the inlet top designs are:
a. For ditches, medians or other areas subject to heavy wheel loads. This inlet may
be placed in areas subject to occasional pedestrian traffic such as landscaped
areas and pavement areas where pedestrians can walk around the inlet. Inlet not
suitable for bicycle traffic.
b. Provide full grate and horizontal slot designs for new construction.
c. Provide full grate and horizontal slot designs for replacing the vertical slot tops
AL
RI
O
T
C
PI
EW
I
V
AL
RI
O
T
C
PI
EW
I
V
on existing Inlets Type B and Type X that are in locations subject to occasional
pedestrian traffic.
2. All reinforcing is Grade 60 bars with 2" min. cover unless otherwise noted. See Index
1
2"
No. 201 for equivalent area of welded wire fabric. Bars to be cut or bent for min. 1
clearance around pipe.
B
3
4"
1
4"
radius.
4. When Alternate G grates are specified in the plans, the grates are to be hot-dip
Reticuline Grate
Type B Or Type X
Reticuline Grate
Type B Or Type X
Reticuline Grate
Type B Or Type X
Reticuline Grate
Type B Or Type X
Reticuline Grate
Type B Or Type X
Reticuline Grate
Type B Or Type X
galvanized after fabrication.
5. Cost for constructing traversable tops on new inlet boxes shall be included in the
contract unit price for Inlets (DT BOT) (Type B), EA., and shall include the cost for
surrounding concrete inlet pavement. Existing Inlets Type B and Inlets Type X that are
converted to traversable inlet tops shall be paid for under the contract unit price for
Inlets (DT BOT) (Type B) (Partial), EA. Unit price and payment shall be full compensation
for inlet conversion and shall include the removal and disposal of any existing concrete
inlet pavement; the removal and stockpiling or disposal of sufficient material from the
existing inlet box to facilitate construction of the required inlet top; construction of the
required inlet conversion; backfill construction; construction of concrete inlet pavement;
reusing, supplementing, transferring or replacing grates as required by plans or as
directed by the Engineer; any required earthwork for ditch restoration within 30' of the
inlet; and, restoration of disturbed turf.
PLAN
PLAN
5" C-I-P
5" C-I-P
5" C-I-P
4'-8"
3 Type B Or
1'
3'
3 Type B Or
1'
1'-6"
pavement types and units as called for in the plans.
3" Precast
1'
3'
7. Sod will be paid for under the contract unit price for Performance Turf, SY.
Type X Grates
Type X Grates
4"
5"
4"
9"
*
4"
(Slot
Depth)
4"
3"
8"
8"
5"
5"
6"
6"
6"
9"
4"
4"
Varies
5"
3"
8"
3"
3'
3" Precast
3" Precast
3"
3" Precast
6. Ditch pavement shall be paid for, separate from the inlet and concrete inlet pavement, by
5" C-I-P
4'-8"
(Slot
Depth)
DESIGN NOTES
1. The type of top (single or double slots) depends on the approach ditch configuration and
Dimensions Are Symmetrical About
SECTION AA
SECTION CC
SINGLE SLOT
DOUBLE SLOT
the hydraulic requirements of the site. The designer will stipulate in the plans the type
of top to be constructed at each individual inlet location.
2. On existing inlets, conversion grates shall be constructed at the original grate elevations
unless other elevations are called for in the plans. When plans call for the inlet top to
Inlet Box (Line Type Indicates Existing Box To Facilitate Depiction Of Partial Construction On
be constructed to support storm water detention, details for ditch modifications and
Existing Inlets)
underdrains shall be shown in the plans.
4" C-I-P or
3" Precast
1'-6"
1'-6"
On new boxes the traversable top may be cast as a monolithic unit or cast in segments, and the
MAINTENANCE NOTES
location of this line may be lower to facilitate handling and placement; however, the slot depth is
to remain at 9 inches. See Index No. 201 for top to wall connection. For converting to
8"
Varies
11:
31:
33 AM
8"
Grates
6"
6"
*
1. Traversable inlet tops that are constructed by maintenance contract or by maintenance
traversable tops on existing inlets remove concrete to this line and expose the existing
forces may reuse the existing grates that are determined by the Maintenance Engineer
reinforcement. Reshape or splice in reinforcement to penetrate the rim and returns of the grate
to be functionally sound, and their reuse is so directed by the Maintenance Engineer.
seat, and bend the reinforcement into the slot shelf to extend into the abutting throat pavement.
Existing grates approved for reuse and new grates may be mixed, matched or replaced
as directed by the Maintenance Engineer.
TRAVERSABLE TOPS FOR INLETS TYPE B AND

SECTION BB
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
FOR CONVERSIONS OF EXISTING INLETS TYPE B AND TYPE X
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
231
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Centered Inlet
#4 Bar Each Corner

Structure Bottom
(2'-0" Min. Length)
2 Way Reinforcement
See Tables
#5 Hoop Bar
TOP SLAB
Centered Opening-
GRADE 60 (BAR)
See Table For
OR 65 KSI &
Dimensions
SCHEDULE
In/ft.
A
0.20
0.24
TOP VIEW
#8 Bars
TOP SLAB OPENINGS

DIAMETER
0.37
0.53
0.73
OPENING SIZE
6'-0" to 8'-0"
MIN.
MAX.
3'-8" x 4'-2"
3'-10" x 4'-2"
1.06
1.45
TOP SLAB WITH
CENTERED OPENING
REINFORCING
SLAB
SLAB
DEPTH
THICKNESS
(2 WAYS)
SCHEDULE
C-I-P
Precast
SIZE: 6'-0"
3'-8" Or 4'-2"
1
2"
Top Slab With
0.5' < 8'
Centered Opening
8' < 18"
18' < 30'
30' < 37'
37'-40'
3'-10" Or 4'-2"

1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"

2" Cl.
#5 Hoop Bar
SIZE: 8'-0"
#4 Bars
2" Cl.
Each Corner
0.5' < 9'
11
9' < 15'
11
15' < 23'
11
23' < 33'
11
6'-0" Min. To 8'-0" Max.

(Unless Otherwise
Shown In The Plans)
1
9 2"
1
2"
11
2" Cl.
33'-40'
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
11 2"
11:
31:
34 AM
2 Way Reinforcement
See Tables
SECTION BB
12/3/2015
SECTION AA
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
ALT. A STRUCTURE BOTTOM FOR INLET TYPE B

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
231
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
4'-4" C-I-P
5'-1" Precast
C-I-P
3'-0" Precast
8"
5'-5" C-I-P
3'-4" C-I-P
6"
4'-0" Precast
8"
6"
1
4"
8"
C-I-P
3'-0"
6"
Precast
1
4"
4'
-6"
Precast
3'-0"
6"
4'
-6"
6"
1
4"
6"
8"
1
4"
1
4"
Center Of Box
Location Reference
8"
6"
6"
8"
C-I-P
Center Of Box
Precast
Location Reference
6"
1
4"
4'-1"
C-I-P
5'
-6" Precast
Precast
6"
8"
5'
-10" C-I-P
6"
4'-1"
3'
-1"
2'-0"
8"
3'
-1"
6"
4'
-5" C-I-P
C-I-P
4'
-1" Precast
8"
3'
-1"
2'-0"
3'
-1"
8"
8"
4'
-5" C-I-P
4'
-1" Precast
8"
Precast
Center Of Box
C-I-P
Location Reference
Precast
PLAN
PLAN
PLAN
5'-5" C-I-P
@ 12" Ctrs.
SECTION
C-I-P
Precast
Grate
3"
Eyebolt
Cl.
See Index 201

Horiz. Wall Reinf.
(See Table 2)
#4 Bars
@ 12" Ctrs.
6"
3
4"
C-I-P
3
4"
Precast
5
3'-0"
2"
3
3 4"
C-I-P
#4 Bars
Precast
4'-0" Precast
3
4"
Eyebolts
See Index 201
Grate
(
15'M ax.
)
#4 Bars
Precast
W all Depth Varies
2" Cl.
See Index 201
3
4"
8"
(
15'M ax.
)
Eyebolt
C-I-P
Horiz. Wall Reinf.

(See Table 3)
3" Cl.
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
C-I-P
#4 Bars @ 10" Ctrs.
#4 Bars
Precast
Precast
@ 12" Ctrs.
(Short Bars)
@ 11" Ctrs.
SECTION
SECTION
SCHEDULES (TABLE 1)
SCHEDULES (TABLE 2)
SCHEDULES (TABLE 3)
WALL
DEPTH
0'-15'
SCHEDULE
A12
AREA
MAX. SPACING
(in./ft.)
BARS
WWF
0.20
12"
8"
TYPE C
WALL
DEPTH
SCHEDULE
2'-0" Wall - 18" Pipe
AREA
MAX. SPACING
(in./ft.)
BARS
WWF
WALL
DEPTH
SCHEDULE
AREA
MAX. SPACING
(in./ft.)
BARS
WWF
0'-6'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
0'-5'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
6'-10'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
0'-7.5'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
10'-13'
A4
0.20
4"
3"
7.5'-10'
B5.5
0.24
10'-15'
B5.5
0.24
5"
10'-15'
C6.5
0.37
1
2"
TYPE D
Recommended Maximum Pipe Size:

11:
31:
34 AM
2"
Precast
Grate
3" Cl.
4'-1"
Cl.
3
3 4"
C-I-P
6"
Precast
8"
8"
2"
Precast
3
4"
2"
2'-0"
C-I-P
3
4"
(
15'M ax.
)
W all Depth Varies
3
4"
C-I-P
W all Depth Varies
3
3 4"
C-I-P
6"
3
4"
4'-4" C-I-P
5'-1" Precast
3
4"
3'-0" Precast
2" Cl.
3'-4" C-I-P
1
2"
5"
1
2"
6"
TYPE E
3'-1" Wall - 24" Pipe
3'-0" Wall - 24" Pipe
4'-1" Wall - 36" Pipe
4'-6" Wall - 36" Pipe
3'-1" Wall - 24" Pipe (18" where an 18" pipe
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
enters a 2'-0" wall)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPES C, D, E AND H
NO.
232
SHEET
NO.
1of 7
10'-1" C-I-P
7'-11" C-I-P
9'-9" Precast
7'-7" Precast
Of Pipes
8"
C-I-P
6"
Precast
1
2"
C-I-P
Precast
Center Of Box
PLAN
Precast
PLAN
6"
8"
8'-9"
8"
Precast
8'-9"
6"
C-I-P
Center Of Box
3'
-0"
6"
6"
8"
1
2"
C-I-P
4'
-0" Precast
6'-7"
4'
-4" C-I-P
3'
-0"
6"
8"
6"
6'-7"
8"
8"
3'
-0"
8"
3'
-0"
6"
Pipe Spacing
4'
-0" Precast
4'
-4" C-I-P
Pipe Spacing
1
2"
1
2"
Of Pipes
Location Reference
Location Reference
7'-11" C-I-P
10'-1" C-I-P
7'-7" Precast
9'-9" Precast
6'-7"
8'-9"
Grate
@ 12" Ctrs.
8"
C-I-P
Horiz. Wall Reinf.

(See Table 5)
3" Cl.
2" Cl.
#4 Bars
(
10'M ax.
)
W all Depth Varies
(See Table 4)
Eyebolt See Index 201
@ 12" Ctrs.
#4 Bars @ 10" Ctrs.
SECTION
Precast
#4 Bars @ 10" Ctrs.
C-I-P
(Short Bars)
SECTION
Precast
(Short Bars)
SCHEDULES (TABLE 4)
SCHEDULES (TABLE 5)
AREA
WALL
DEPTH
SCHEDULE
(in./ft.)
MAX. SPACING
BARS
WALL
WWF
0'-5'
B5.5
0.24
5'-7'
C6.5
0.37
7'-15'
D4.5
0.53
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
AREA
MAX. SPACING
SCHEDULE
(in./ft.)
0'-5'
C3.5
0.37
5'-10'
D4.5
0.53
DEPTH
11:
31:
35 AM
#4 Bars
6"
Horiz. Wall Reinf.

3" Cl.
2" Cl.
(
15'M ax.
)
See Index 201
6"
8"
W all Depth Varies
Grate
Eyebolt
BARS
WWF
5"
1
2"
3"
1
2"
4"
6"
4"
TYPE H (2 & 3-GRATE INLET)
TYPE H (4-GRATE INLET)
3'-0" Wall - 24" Pipe
3'-0" Wall - 24" Pipe
6'-7" Wall - 1-60" Pipe
8'-9" Wall - 1-78" Pipe
GENERAL NOTES
See Sheet 3 of 7.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Or 2-24" Pipe (S=3'-5")
Or 2-30" Pipe (S=4'-3")
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
232
SHEET
NO.
2 of 7
3'-4"
1
8"
1
2"
3
"
4
6'-6"
8'-8"
TYPE E
TYPE H (
3GRATE I
NL
ET)
TYPE H (
4
GRATE I
NL
ET)
Approx. Weight 465 Lbs.
TYPE C
1 2"
2"
1
2"
1 2"
HAL
F SECTI
ON CAST I
RON GRATES
1
2"
1 2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
CAST IRON GRATES
5
16"
8'-8
0" Clearance Over Rivets
Bands 2"
1
4"
1
1 4"
1
x 4"
Reticuline Bars
Bands 2"
15 Equal Spaces
15 Equal Spaces
14 Straight Bars
2 End-Bearing
2 End-Bearing
1
4"
Straight Bars 2" x

3
16"
1
x 4"
Reticuline Bars
Bands 2"
Band
Band
2'-178"
1
"
2
1
"
2
1
4"
Straight End-Bearing Bars 2" x

3
16"
1
x 4"
1
"
2
Band (Typ.)
Band (Typ.)
1
"
8
Straight Bearing Bars 2"

Reticuline Bars
1
1 4"
3
8"
1
x 4"
Clearance
Over Rivets (Typ.)
1
1 4"
2'-1316"
3'
- 4 "
Band
2'-178"
(Typ.)
3'
-4
Band
Band
TYPE E
1
1 4"
Band
2'-178"
11 Straight Bars
1
2"
22 Bars
5
16"
Straight Bars 2" x

3
16"
21 Spaces
4'
-5
Band
Band
15 Bars
3'
- 8"
Band
Band
Reticuline Bars
14 Spaces
15 Bars
14 Spaces
1
3'
- 8"
Straight Bars 2"x
TYPE D
10 Equal Spaces
3'-2
14 Straight Bars
4'-5"
TYPE C
5
16"
5
16"
3'-2
3'-4"
2'-4"
3'
-4"
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1'
-5"
1
2"
2"
1'
-5"
2"
1'
-5"
2"
1
2"
3'-4"
3'
-4"
4'
-4"
3
4"
1
1 2"
2"
1 2"
3
1 4"
2"
1 4"
4'
-4"
2"
1"
2"
2"
2'-4"
1
2"
1
2"
2"
3
4"
1
2"
3'
-0"
3
4"
3'
-0"
Of Grate
1
2 8"
2"
3
"
4
1
2 8"
1'
-5"
PERMITTED ON INLET TYPE D
2 2"
2"
1
2 2"
8'-8"
2 2"
CAST IRON GRATE NOT
2"
3'
-4"
6'-6"
11"
3'
-4"
11"
2"
2"
2"
2"
2"
3
4"
1
8"
2'-4"
1
2 2"
1'-5"
1'-5"
Banding Bars 2" x
1
4"
Approx. Total Weight 310 Lbs.
Straight End-Bearing Bars 2" x
3
16"
Reticuline Bars
1
1 4"
Banding Bars 2" x
1
4"
3
16"
3
16"
Approx. Total Weight 388 Lbs.
STEEL GRATES
NOTE: Steel Grates Are Required On Inlets With Traversable Slots And On Inlets where Bicycle Traffic Is Anticipated.
GENERAL NOTES
1. These inlets are suitable for bicycle traffic and are to be used in ditches,
non-traversable slots. Subject to the selection described above, when Alternate
medians and other areas subject to infrequent traffic loadings but are not to be
G grate is specified in the plans, either the steel grate, hot dip galvanized after
placed in areas subject to any heavy wheel loads. These inlets may be placed in
fabrication, or the cast iron grate may be used, unless the plans stipulate the
areas subject to occasional pedestrian traffic such as landscaped areas and
particular type.
8.
Sodding to be used on all inlets not located in paved areas and paid for under
contract unit price for Performance Turf, SY.
9.
For supplementary details see Index No. 201.
pavement areas where pedestrians can walk around the inlet.

4. Recommended maximum pipe sizes shown are for concrete pipe. Size for other
2. Inlets subject to minimal debris should be constructed without slots. Where
1
2"
debris is a problem inlets should be constructed with slots. Slotted inlets

located within roadway clear zones and areas subject to pedestrians shall have
10. All reinforcing is Grade 60 bars with 2" min. cover unless otherwise noted.
Bars to be cut or bent for 1
types of pipe must be checked for fit.
clearance around pipe opening. Provide one
additional #4 bar above and at each side of pipe opening.

3
4"
1
4"
radius.
11:
31:
36 AM
traversable slots. The traversable slot modification is not adaptable to inlet

Type H. Slots may be constructed at either or both ends as shown on plans.
6. Concrete inlet pavement to be used on inlets without slots and inlets with
Traversable slots shall not be used in areas subject to occasional bicycle
non-traversable slots only when called for in the plans; but required on all
traffic.
traversable slot inlets. Cost to be included in contract unit price for inlets.
Quantities shown are for information only.
3. Steel grates are to be used on all inlets where bicycle traffic is anticipated.
Either cast iron
7. Traversable slots constructed in existing inlets shall be paid for as inlets
or steel grates may be used on inlets without slots where bicycle traffic is not
partial. For conversion work and method of payment see 'TRAVERSABLE SLOT
anticipated. Either cast iron or steel grates may be used on all inlets with
INLETS (PARTIAL) FOR EXISTING INLETS'.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Steel grates are to be used on all inlets with traversable slots.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
232
SHEET
NO.
3 of 7
2'
Slot W idth
Varies (
5'Std.
)
Flow
Ditch W idth
5'
3
4"
Sod
Chamfer
2'
Concrete Inlet Pavement

(Hand Shape to Neat Lines)
Sod
B
2'
HALF PLAN WITH SLOT
HALF PLAN WITHOUT SLOT
PLAN VIEW
Varies
18"
Ditch Width
Varies
Sl
o
pe
Var
i
es
Varies
18"
18"
Varies
es
i
Var
pe
o
Sl
Varies (5' Std.)
Sl
o
pe
Var
i
es
Varies
Ditch Width
Varies
18"
es
i
Var
pe
o
Sl
Varies (5' Std.)
3'
B
18"
4"
Varies
Ditch
6"
6"
8"
3"
7" (Slot Depth)

3"
8"
8"
3"
8"
8"
3"
8"
Bottom
6"
6"
6"
6"
SECTION BB
SECTION AA
HALF PLAN WITH SLOT
HALF PLAN WITHOUT SLOT
PAVEMENT AND SODDING QUANTITIES

SECTION CC
FOR TRAVERSABLE SLOTS

11:
31:
37 AM
Pavement
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Inlet
Single Slot
Sod
Double Slot
Single Slot
Double Slot
SY
CY
SY
CY
SY
SY
4.87
0.77
6.16
0.93
12
16
5.99
0.91
7.70
1.10
14
19
5.88
0.91
7.37
1.08
14
18
TRAVERSABLE SLOTS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
232
SHEET
NO.
4 of 7
2'
B
2'
Sod
Inlet
Pavt. Sod
SLOTS NOT
SIDES WITH
Slot
GRATE SEATS
0.30
0.36
0.37
2'
Slot Depth
10'
Ditch Block (Low Side Of Inlet On Continuous Ditch)
Slot
0.45
11
Existing Or Proposed Structure
1'-6"
12" Unless
8"
6"
Sod
3" Concrete Inlet Pavement
SOD ONLY
Width Of
Traversable Or Non-traversable
(Traversable Shown)
PAVT. AND SOD
Otherwise
Ditch Bottom
Toe Wall Required
(Grate Not Shown)
1
:
2
0
Ditch Bottom
(Paved or Unpaved Ditches)
1'-6"
PLAN
SY
CY
2'
PERMITTED ON
Width Of
0
2
:
1
Inlet
SY
NOTE: See General Notes Nos. 6 and 7, Sheet 3 of 7.
Shown On
DITCH BLOCK FOR INLETS WITH OR WITHOUT SLOTS
SODDI
NG AND PAVEMENT FOR I
NL
ETS WI
THOUT
Slot
Plans
SL
OTS AND I
NL
ETS WI
TH NONTRAVERSABL
E SL
OTS
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
NONTRAVERSABL
E SL
OTS
Existing Cast Iron Grate(s)
To Be Replaced With Steel
Grates. Existing Steel

Reticuline Grates To Be
Replaced When Called For
es
i
Var
pe
o
Sl
Varies (5' Std.)
3"
Varies
18"
Varies
Ditch Width
Varies
Sl
o
pe
Var
i
es
18"
Sl
o
pe
Var
i
es
Ditch Width
Varies
18"
In The Plans Or As
Directed By The Engineer.
4"
Varies
3'
Varies
es
i
Var
pe
o
Sl
Varies (5' Std.)
18"
Const. Conc.
3"
Varies
18"
Inlet Pavt. & Slot
6"
6"
6"
6"
8"
7" (Slot Depth)

4"
8"
Ditch Bottom
8"
3"
8"
8"
8"
Inlet Pavt.
3"
Const. Conc.
5" (Min.)
6"
6"
Bottom Of Exist. 12"
4"
Const. Conc. Inlet
Slot Or Remove Exist.
3"
Pavt. & Slot
Wall To This Line (Exposed

4"
Rebars In Pavt. Zone May

Be Either Removed Or
Embedded).
Exist. Inlet With

Exist. Inlet With
Or Without Slots
Or Without Slots
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
SINGLE SLOT SHOWN (DOUBLE SLOTS

SYMMETRICAL ABOUT CENTERLINE)
SECTION CC (CASE I)
PAVEMENT AND SODDING QUANTITIES
11:
31:
37 AM
FOR TRAVERSABLE SLOTS

Pavement
Inlet
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
NOTE:
Sod
For plan view and additional details see Sheet 4 of 7.

For payment see General Notes Nos. 6 and 7, Sheet 3 of 7.
Single Slot
Double Slot
Single Slot
Double Slot
SY
CY
SY
CY
SY
SY
4.87
0.83
6.16
1.05
12
16
5.99
1.01
7.70
1.30
14
19
5.88
0.99
7.37
1.24
14
18
TRAVERSABLE SLOTS FOR EXISTING INLETS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
232
SHEET
NO.
5 of 7
DESIGN NOTES FOR TRAVERSABLE SLOT
Existing Cast Iron Grate To Be Replaced
INLETS (PARTIAL) FOR EXISTING INLETS
With Steel Grate. Existing Steel Reticuline

1. The general purpose of these conversions is to remove the hazard of the
Grate To Be Replaced When Called For In The
protruding inlet top, while not creating a hazard by depressing the top too deeply.
Plans Or As Directed By The Engineer.
4"
2. The corrective procedure depends on the approach ditch grade and hydraulic
requirements of the site. The selection of the appropriate case depends on the
Varies
3'
relationship between inlet top and ditch elevation, and, on the vertical clearance
18"
between the top of the uppermost pipe(s) and the grate. The purpose for the Case
1 conversion is to add the traversable slot to an existing inlet where top removal,
Break Angle Not To
change in grate elevation and ditch transitions are not required. Case 2 will
Varies
Exceed 3 (1:20)
Exist. Ditch Bottom
normally be applicable to ditches with flatter grades adjoining the inlet. Case 3
Remove This Portion Of
Varies (See Plans)
will normally be applicable to ditches with steeper grades adjoining the inlet
Box And Construct New

Const. Conc. Inlet Pavt. & Slot
3"
(Box With Slot Shown)
where build up of the existing ditch is acceptable.
Top, Seats And Slot(s)

3. The designer shall stipulate in the plans which case is to be constructed at each
Bottom Of Transition Ditch

8"
3"
These Points Can Be
3"
8"
individual inlet location.

7" (Slot Depth)
Where the existing inlet top is above the existing ditch (Case 2) but borrow
Grate
The Same Where Ditch

6"
Grades Are Flat
4"
The Same Or Nearly
material will be required to adjust the ditch (Case 3), and vertical clearance or
6"
5"
(Min.)
3"
4"
Remove Exist. Wall To This
other conditions do not prevent removal of the inlet top, the designer should call
Line (Exposed Rebars In
for Case 2. The designer shall determine if ditch reconstruction is required more
Pavt. Zone May Be Either
than 35 feet beyond any traversable slot side and shall include separate pay items
Removed Or Embedded)
in the plans to cover the cost for that portion of required ditch reconstruction
exceeding the 35 foot limit. The designer shall also determine whether ditch
pavement is required for ditch restoration within the 35 foot limit and include that
pavement under a pay item separate from the inlets partial.
Exist. Inlet With

Or Without Slots
When the detention ditch concept is to be used with Case 3, the designer shall
stipulate 'Case 3 (Detention)' in the plans.
The designer shall determine whether tight soil or other conditions at each
Existing Cast Iron Grate To
SINGLE SLOT SHOWN (DOUBLE SLOTS SYMMETRICAL ABOUT CENTERLINE)
Be Replaced With Steel Grate.
SECTION CC (CASE 2)
individual inlet indicates the need for underdrain in Case 3 conversions and shall
call for Underdrain, Type I in the plans.
Existing Steel Reticuline Grate

To Be Replaced When Called
For In The Plans Or As
4"
Directed By The Engineer.
Break Angle Not To Exceed 3 (1:20)

Minimum Slope For Transition Ditch
10' Level
3'
Varies
METHOD OF PAYMENT FOR TRAVERSABLE SLOT

INLETS (PARTIAL) FOR EXISTING INLETS
18"
0.10% Unless Existing Ditch Is Flatter.
1. Existing inlets converted to traversable slot tops under Cases 1, 2 and 3 shall be
Bottom Of Transition Ditch;

3"
Or Bottom Of Exist. Ditch

For Exist. Inlet Without Slot
Const. Conc. Inlet
paid for as inlets partial, each. Case shall not be included in the pay item
Pavt. & Slot
description.
Ditch Grade For

3"
3"
8"
7" (Slot Depth)
8"
2. All ditch reconstruction work within 35 feet of each traversable slot conversion,
20
1:
Detention Concept
whether required by these details or as a direct result of the conversion, shall be

included as a part of the partial cost. Reconstruction work shall include
excavation and removal of surplus materials or borrow materials in place, grading,
For Exist. Inlet With Slot
*
*
25'
Bottom Of Exist. Ditch
6"
Bottom Of Exist. 12" Slot
4"
2'
6"
5"
(Min.)
3"
Slope Same As Exist. Ditch
Or Remove Exist. Wall To

This Line (Exposed Rebars
compaction, shaping and restoration of disturbed turf. Sodding, ditch pavement

and underdrain are not included as part of the inlet partial cost and are to be
paid for separately.
In Pavt. Zone May Be Either
4"
Removed Or Embedded)
3. Concrete inlet pavement and sodding shall be in accordance with the sections on
this detail and with the Plan on Sheet 4 and Sections AA, BB and CC (as Case 1)
and tabular quantities on Sheet 5.
Underdrain, Type I To Be
Constructed Only With Detention
Ditch Concept, And Only When
11:
31:
38 AM
Called For In The Plans
4. Unit price and payment shall constitute full compensation for inlet conversion
*Extra Pavement When Exist.
Slot Exceeds 12" In Depth
(including concrete inlet paving and replacement grate(s)), ditch reconstruction,
SINGLE SLOT SHOWN (DOUBLE SLOTS SYMMETRICAL ABOUT CENTERLINE)
Exist. Inlet With
restoration of disturbed turf, and shall be paid for under the contract price for
Or Without Slot
Inlets (DT Bot) (Type __) (Partial), each.
Sodding shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Performance Turf, SY.
SECTION CC (CASE 3)
Ditch pavement shall be paid for separate from the inlet by pavement type(s) and
12/3/2015
unit(s) as called for in the plans.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
TRAVERSABLE SLOT INLETS (PARTIAL) FOR EXISTING INLETS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
232
SHEET
NO.
6 of 7
Inlet Types C, D, & E
Type C 3'-1"
Type D 4'-1"
Type E 4'-6"
#4 Bar Each Corner
Centered Inlet
Structure Bottom
2 Way Reinforcement
See Tables
6'-0"
Unless Otherwise
Shown On Plans
#5 Hoop Bar
Type E 3'-0"
(2'-0" Min. Length)
Type C 2'-0"
Type D 3'-1"
Centered
3'-6"
Unless Otherwise
Shown On Plans
OpeningSee Table
TOP SLAB
For Dimensions
See Index No. 200 for structure bottom details and hole reinforcement.
AL
T.B STRUCTURE BOTTOM FOR
GRADE 60 (BAR)
OR 65 KSI &
SCHEDULE
In./ft.
TOP VIEW
#8 Bars
TOP SLAB OPENINGS

DIAMETER
I
NL
ETS TYPE C,D & E
A
A
0.20
0.24
0.37
0.53
0.73
1.06
1.45
OPENING SIZE
MIN.
MAX.
4'-0"
2'-0" x 3'-1"
2'-0" x 3'-1"
5'-0"
2'-0" x 3'-1"
3'-1" x 4'-1"
6'-0"
2'-0" x 3'-1"
3'-0" x 4'-6"
8'-0"
2'-0" x 3'-1"
3'-0" x 4'-6"
TOP SLAB WITH

CENTERED OPENING
REINFORCING
SLAB
SLAB
DEPTH
THICKNESS
(2 WAYS)
SIZE: 4'-0"
C
30'-40'
1
2"
1
2"
Top Slab With

Centered Opening
1
2"
For 4'-0"/5'-0"/6'-0" Structure Bottoms
1
2"
11
SIZE: 6'-0"

2" Cl.
#5 Hoop Bar
#4 Bars
8' < 18'
1
9 2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
2" Cl.
TYPE C
4'-0"
TYPE D
6'-0"
TYPE E
6'-0"
(Minimum Diameter
Each Corner

Structure Bottom Details
18' < 30'
30' < 37'
37'-40'
SIZE: 8'-0"
2" Cl.
2 Way Reinforcement
0.5' < 9'
11
9' < 15'
11
15' < 23'
11
23' < 33'
11
33'-40'
11
See Tables
11:
31:
39 AM
and Hole Reinforcement.
Unless Otherwise
Shown In The Plans)
1
2"
0.5' < 8'
SECTION BB
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1 ~ Extra #4 Bar
1
2"
Cl.
Each Side And

Above Pipe
Openings
Alt. A Centered)
(
Alt. B Shown,
0.5' < 30'
Structure Bottom
SIZE: 5'-0"
Type E 4'-6"
Inlet Type C, D, E & H
Type C 3'-1"
Type D 4'-1"
6"
Min.
1
.
2" Cl
1
2"
3" M in.
0.5'-40'
6" M in.
SCHEDULE
PIPE OPENING SCHEMATIC
12/3/2015
SECTION AA
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
ALT. A STRUCTURE BOTTOM FOR INLETS TYPE C, D AND E
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
232
SHEET
NO.
7 of 7
Thickness
6" M in.
Min.
1
.
2" Cl
Full W all
Thickness
6" M in.
Full W all
6"
3"
C-I-P
Precast
3"
5"
5'-4" C-I-P
5'-0" Precast
4'-0"
Center of
C-I-P
6"
Precast
Box Location
1 ~ Extra #4
1
2"Cl.
Bar Each Side
Reference
And Above
2" Clear
(
Typ.
)
6"
8"
3" M in.
4'-0"
2'
-6"
3'
-10" C-I-P
3'
-6" Precast
Pipe
8"
3" Clear
Pipe Openings
Eyebolt See
Index 201
3"
3"
For Precast Inlets

See Index 201
Precast
GENERAL NOTES
(TYPE F SHOWN, TYPE G SIMILAR)
PLAN
PIPE OPENING SCHEMATIC
4'-0"
SECTION AA
9"
3. These inlets may be used with Alternate B structure bottoms, Index 200.
2'-6"
8"
C-I-P
6"
2'-6"
6"
Precast
#4 Bars
@ 12" Ctrs.
The inlet and bottom combinations are to be paid for under the contract
unit price for inlets (DT Bot) (Type F (or G)) (J Bot, Depth), Ea.
12"
SECTION BB
6"
@ 12" Ctrs.
3" Cl.
8"
8"
#4 Bars
Or C-I-P
Precast
8"
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
Precast
@ 12" Ctrs.
2. When Alternate G grate is specified in plans, the grate is to be hot dip
Or C-I-P
#4 Bars
traffic, install filler bar when clearance or gap is greater than 1" as
Precast
6"
can walk around the inlet. When inlet is placed in areas subject to bicycle
Chamfer Or Radius
shown in Index 218 Inset B.
3" M in.
3" Clear.
(
15'
-0" M ax.
)
3" Clear.
W all Depth Varies
6"
8"
M in. Dim ensions.
Precast
traffic such as landscaped areas and pavement areas where pedestrians
6"
8"
traffic. This inlet may be placed in areas subject to occasional pedestrian
2" Cl.
Precast
(See Table 1)
C-I-P
3" Precast
3
4"
Lim its- See Index 201 For
Construction Joints
Reinforcing
5
16"
5" C-I-P
3'-0"
2'-11"
Horiz. Wall
3
other areas subject to heavy wheel loads, minimal debris, and bicycle
3'-0"
3"
Chamfer Or Radius
Perm itted Between These
3
4"
1. These inlets are designed for use in ditches, medians, pavement areas, or
5"
2" Cl.
C-I-P
5"
Masonry Seal
3
4"
1
4"
radius.
5. For supplemental details, see Index 201.
6. All reinforcing is Grade 60 bars with 2" min. cover unless otherwise noted.
1
2"
clearance around pipe opening. Provide one
additional #4 bar above and at each side of pipe opening, as shown.
Sod
2'
3
8"
3'-10
7. All dimensions are for both precast and cast-in-place inlets unless
(18 Spaces, 19 Bars)

5
16
2'
Sod
3
4"
Inlet
SY
7
Notch Permitted
(At The Option Of The
2'
SOD ONLY
3x3x
5
16
Pavt. Sod
Inlet
2'
CY*
SY
0.43
10
0.34
5
16
SECTION DD
Purposes Only
3x3x
5
16
TYPE F INLET (TABLE 1)
Sod
1'-6"
11:
31:
40 AM
ZES
PE SI
MUM PI
RECOMMENDED MAXI
WALL
STEEL GRATE
3" Concrete Pavement
PAVT. AND SOD
1
4"
3
2"x 16"
1. Pavement and/or sod to be used only where called for in the plans.
2. Cost of paving to be included in cost of inlet.
PIPE SIZE
2'-6" (Type F)
18"
4'-0" (Type F)
AREA
MAX. SPACING
30"
4'-10" / 5'-0" (Type G)
42"
SCHEDULE
Steel Grating, Straight Bars 3"x

Reticuline Bars
Notes:
INLET INSIDE WIDTH
HORIZONTAL WALL REINF. SCHEDULES
*For Estimating
TYPE F
DEPTH
(in/ft)
BARS
WWF
0' - 4'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
4' - 7'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
7' - 12'
B5.5
0.24
12' - 15'
Special 1
0.267
1
2"
5"

verified for fit in accordance with Index No.
201. For larger pipe sizes see Note 3.
PAVEMENT AND SODDING

LAST
REVISION
01/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
5
16
Manufacturer)
2'
-11"
otherwise noted.
SECTION CC
3x3x
5"
4"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPES F AND G
NO.
233
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
2" Cl. (Typ.)
5
8"
4'-8
5x3
1
5
2x 16
4'-10"
8"
Center of
Eyebolt See
3" Cl.
4'
-4"
5'
-0"
Box Location
Index No. 201
Reference
5
16
1
5
2x 16
8"
5'
-3"
6"
2" Cl.
(Typ.)
(22 Spaces, 23 Bars)
12"
8"
5x3
SECTION CC
A
D
5
16
8"
12"
6"
5x3
1
5
2x 16
SECTION DD
STEEL GRATE
5" Steel Decking, Weight 630 Lbs. Main Bars 5" x
PLAN
1
2"
Intermediate Bars 1
1
4",
1
4"
Reticuline Bars 1
1
4"
TYPE G INLET (TABLE 2)
3
16"
AREA
WALL
MAX. SPACING
SCHEDULE
DEPTH
4'-10"
6"
Chamfer Or
12"
8"
6"
5"
7' - 10'
B5.5
0.24
10' - 15'
C6.5
0.37
1
2"
5"
1
2"
6"
12" Ctrs.
2" Cl.
6"
2" Cl.
(
See Table 2)
8"
4"
5'-0"
8"
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
3" Cl.
(See Table 2)
#4 Bars
@ 12" Ctrs.
Cl.
8"
8"
8"
2" Cl.
2" Cl.
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
3"
201 For M inim um Dim ensions
Optional
4"
3" Cl.
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
11:
31:
40 AM
12"
0.20
Chamfer Or
Haunch Shape
8"
H oriz. W all Reinf.
@ 12" Ctrs.
0.20
A6

15'
-0" M ax.
)
No. 201
#4 Bars
A12
3' - 7'
#4 Bars @
See Index
3" Cl.
0' - 3'
Radius (Typ.)
3
4"
Grate 5'-3"
Eyebolt
8"
WWF
5"
5
16"
Lifting Loop
BARS
6"
5'-4"
Between These Lim its-See Index
Grate
Radius (Typ.)
5
4'-8 8"
2" Cl.
3
4"
(in/ft)
#4 Bars @ 8" Ctrs.
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
LAST
REVISION
01/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TYPE G
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPES F AND G
NO.
233
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
4'-0" Or
Eyebolt
3"
See Index
C-I-P
2'-11"
Precast
3'-10"
3"
Or 3'-3"
Inlet Type J
4'-3" C-I-P
4'-3" Precast
2'-11" Or
4'-0"
C-I-P
3'-3"
Precast
Or 3'-10"
Cl.
2" Cl.
(
Typ.
)
3"
1
4"
Precast
3"
(
Typ.
)
C-I-P
6'-0"
Center Of Box
Steel
Location Reference
(Unless Otherwise
Grating
Shown In Plans)
C-I-P
6" (Typ.)
Precast
6" (Typ.)
2" (Typ.)
C-I-P
0" (Typ.)
Precast
1 ~ Extra #4 Bar
1'
-0"
5'
-4" C-I-P
4'
-10" Precast
Predom inant Flow
6"
6"
No. 201
Below Grate Seat

4"x4"-W4xW4 WWF
3'-6"
Or 4'-0"
(Unless
Otherwise
Shown In
Plans)
#4 Bars
structure bottom details and hole reinforcement.
@ 12" Ctrs.

SCHEDULE (TABLE 1)
PLAN
INSET A
(CAST-IN-PLACE INLET SHOWN, WITHOUT
(PRECAST OPTION)
AREA
WALL
MAX. SPACING
INLET INSIDE WIDTH
PIPE SIZE
2'-11" or 3'-3"
24"
3'-10" or 4'-0"
30"
SCHEDULE
DEPTH
(In/ft)
BARS
WWF
GRATE, PRECAST INLET SIMILAR)

Predominant Flow
Inlet
6" 6" C-I-P

Inlet (Typ.)
11:
31:
41 AM
C-I-P
Precast
8"
6"
9' - 12'
A4
0.20
4"
3"
9' - 15'
B5.5
0.24

verified for fit in accordance with Index
5"
1
2"
5"
Bottom detail above and Index No. 200.
1'
-0"
3"
1
.
2" Cl
6"
4"
Horiz. Wall Reinf.

(See Table 1)
3" Cl.
GENERAL NOTES
#4 Bars
6"
@ 12" Ctrs.
Min.
1
2"
Cl.
1. This inlet is designed for use in ditches, medians, pavement areas or other areas subject to heavy
1 ~ Extra #4 Bar
wheel loads with minimal debris. This inlet is not for use in areas subject to bicycle traffic. This inlet
Each Side And
may be placed in areas subject to occasional pedestrian traffic such as landscaped areas and pavement
Above Pipe
areas where pedestrians can walk around the inlet.
2. All reinforcing Grade 60 bars with 2" min. cover unless otherwise noted. See Index No. 201 for
equivalent area of welded wire fabric. Cut or bend bars out of way of pipe when necessary; bars to
1
2".
clear pipe by 1

2'-11"
8"
3'-3"
6"
Precast
C-I-P
5"
5
16"
Opening
8"
3" Cl.
8"
6"
2" Cl.
2" Cl.
@ 12" Ctrs.
12"
0.20
5
16"
#4 Bars

15'
-0" M ax.
)
(See Table 1)
0.20
A6
No. 201. For larger pipe, see Structure
3" 3"
6"
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
Between These Lim its-See
C-I-P Only
1'
-6" Precast
2" (Typ.)
Index No. 201 For M in. Dim .
5
2'
-1 16" C-I-P
Shown On Plans
Precast
3" 3" Precast
A12
4' - 9'
6" 6"
For Precast
Inlet Elevation As
Steel Grating, See Detail
C-I-P
M in.
2"
See Inset A
0' - 4'
C-I-P
Precast
8"
6"
4'-0"
8"
3'-10"
6"
3
4"
1
4"
radius.
4. When alternate G grate is specified in plans the grate is to be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
5. For supplemental details, see Index No. 201.
SECTION BB
SECTION AA
12/3/2015
7. Cost of ditch paving to be included in cost of inlet. Sodding to be paid for under contract unit price for
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPE J
NO.
234
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
1'
-6"
1
2"
e
p
o
l
de S
Si
Si
de S
l
o
p
e
8"
8"
6"
6"
1'-6"
SECTION CC
3" Conc. Ditch Pavt.
2' Sod All Around

(Total 9 SY)
'
.2
0
D
0
2
:
1
Ditch Bottom
1
:
2
0
Ditch Bottom
PAVEMENT & SODDING

(Paved Or Unpaved
10'
8"
8"
Toe Wall Required
Ditches)
Ditch Block (Low Side Of
4'-3" Out To Out
Inlet On Continuous Ditches)
1'-5"
3
16
1'-5"
Cross
5x3x
5
16
2
Main Bars 5" x
11:
31:
42 AM
1
4"
1
8"
1
4
Out To Out
(See Detail Below)
1'
-6
9 M ain Bars
Weld Main Bars To
Equally Spaced
Bar
Each End
SECTION DD
(Typ.)
1
8"
1'-5"
1
2"
6"
1'
-6
6"
Cross Bars
1
4"
3
1 4"
(Notched For Cross Bars)
1
4"
(Continuously Welded At
Main Bar Notches) Main Bars And Cross Bars Flush On Top.
1
4
Note: Two Required Per Inlet
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DETAIL
STEEL GRATING
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPE J
NO.
234
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
6" Concrete Ditch Paving

Reinforced With 6" x 6"
10/10 Welded Wire Fabric
GENERAL NOTES
1.
This inlet is to be used at locations having high flow rates, usually

where an endwall could not be utilized without hazardous intake.
12'
-6"
5'
-2" (
For L 14'
)
Location Reference
5'
-2" (
For L > 14'
)
Center Of Box
4'
-10" (
For L > 14'
)
4'
-10" (
For L 14'
)
8"
2.
Inlet length (L) shall be set by the designer for the greater of either
culvert requirement or inlet pool not to exceed 12" depth. Structures
over 6 feet in depth are to be checked for flotation by the designer of
project drainage.
3.
This inlet is not intended for use with Index 200 structure bottoms.
4.
All exposed edges and corners shall be
3
4"
1
4"
10"
radius.
10"
5'-2"
L+ 16"
5'-2"
13'-4"+ L
(Grate Not Shown)
6"
Typical
And Above Pipe Opening

1
1 2"
@ 12" Ctrs.
10"
6" Min.
Cl.
Construction Joint Permitted
8.
Channels and bars for grate shall be ASTM A242/A242M, A572/A572M or

A588/A588M, Grade 50 steel, and galvanized in accordance with
Specification Section 975.
9.
Fence enclosure shall be Fence Type B (Index No. 802). All posts to be
set in concrete. A minimum of 10 posts required. Corner and approach
side posts to be 3" nominal diameter.
F.L. Elev.
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
10. Cost of ditch paving, anti-vortex wall, grate, concrete, reinforcing steel
(See Table 1)
and fence enclosure to be included in the cost of inlet. Inlet to be paid
L (See Note 2)
alternate for the C 4x5.4 channel at 15" bar spacing.
6"
12"
1
2"
3" M in.
1 ~ Extra #4 Bar Each Side
#4 Bars
Channel section C 3x6 at 14" max. bar spacing may be used as an
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
6"
4" Clear
6"
Clear
2"
1
.
2" Cl
6"
2'
2'
6"
3" Clear
6"
7.
1'
-6"
1
4"
(See Table 1)
#4 Bars
Precast
clearance around pipe opening. Bend top
Anti-Vortex Wall
Ditch Grade
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
Or CIPL
1
2"
(See Note 2)
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
6"
(
15'M ax.
)
See Index No. 201 for equivalent area of welded wire fabric (WWF).
8"
Slope To Match
4" Clear
8"
W all Depth Varies
All reinforcing is Grade 60 with 2" min. cover unless otherwise noted.
Fence Type B
12"
Fence Type B
1
2"
Anti-Vortex Wall
Precast
6.
and corner bars to clear anchor holes.
PLAN
8"
Inlet and anti-vortex wall to be Class II Concrete.
1'-6"
4'-10"
@ 12" Ctrs.
5.
10"
8"
8"
8"
3'-6"
(Pipe Opening & Grate Not Shown)
(Pipe Opening Shown, Grate Not Shown)
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
for under the contract unit price for Inlets (DT Bot) (Type K), Each.
11. Anchor Bolts shall be ASTM F1554 Grade 36 fully threaded headless
bolts, installed in accordance with Specification Sections 416 and 937.
Nuts shall be ASTM A563 or A194 and washers shall be ASTM F436 or
INLET LENGTHS (L) LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 9' (SINGLE LAYER WALL REINFORCING)
Type A plain washers. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be galvanized.
For Depth 6'
Clear
@ 12" Ctrs.
2"
6"
8"
#4 Bars
For Depth > 6'
#4 Bars @ 8" Ctrs. (Each Face)

2"
1
2"
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs. (Each Face)
3" M in.
1
.
2" Cl
1
2"
(
15'M ax.
)
2" Clear
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
(See Table 2)
2" Clear
2" Clear
1 ~ Extra #4 Bar Each Side

And Above Pipe Opening
Horiz. Wall Reinf.
Clear
(See Table 2)
1
2"
6" Min.
Cl.
F.L. Elev.
Precast
Or CIPL
Precast
8" (For L 14')
L (See Note 2)
10" (For L > 14')
8" (For L 14')
8" (For L 14')
10" (For L > 14')
10" (For L > 14')
(Pipe Opening & Grate Not Shown)
12/3/2015
11:
31:
42 AM
W all Depth Varies
See Section BB Above For Details
8" (For L 14')
3'-6"
10" (For L > 14')
(Pipe Opening Shown, Grate Not Shown)
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
INLET LENGTHS (L) GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 9' (DOUBLE LAYER WALL REINFORCING)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPE K
NO.
235
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCING SCHEDULES

WALL
AREA
MAX. SPACING
WALL
SCH.
WWF
DEPTH
SIZE: L = 5'-0"
(in/ft)
MAX. SPACING
BARS
BILL OF STEEL
SIZE: L = 9'-0"
A12
0.20
12"
8"
0'-4'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
5'-8'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
4'-6'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
0.24
1
5 2"
5"
1
2"
6"
B5.5
5"
6'-8'
B5.5
0.24
1
5 2"
8'-15'
C6.5
0.37
SIZE: L = 6'-0"
A12
0.20
12"
8"
0'-3'
A12
0.20
12"
8"
4'-6'
B5.5
0.24
1
2"
5"
3'-5'
A6
0.20
6"
5"
6'-9'
C6.5
0.37
1
2"
6"
5'-8'
C6.5
0.37
0.37
1
3 2"
0.37
1
3 2"
C3.5
3"
8'-15'
SIZE: L = 7'-0"
9'-15'
E5
0.73
8'-11
8'-11
4'-1
9'-11
9'-11
11
4'-1
11'-11
11'-11
12
4'-1
66"&72"
1
2"
6"
1
2"
4"
5"
84"
1
4"
3
16
3
4"
12
7
8"
1
2"
0.37
4'-7'
D4.5
0.53
7'-15'
E3
0.73
3"
1
4"
14
4"
10'-0"
3
4"
12
1
2"
0'-4'
C6.5
0.37
4"
4'-8'
D4.5
0.53
3"
8'-15'
E5
0.73
6"
1
2
4"
5"
4"
SPECIAL
12'-0"
3
4"
SIZE: L = 18'-0" x 10" WALL THICK
Dia.
SINGLE LAYER
REINFORCING
12"
(TABLE 1)
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
4"
14
4'-1
5"
4"
15'-11
15'-11
16
4'-1
17'-11
17'-11
8'-15'
F5
1.06
SPECIAL
16'-0"
1
4"
11
SPECIAL
REINFORCING
18'-0"
1
4"
3
4"
(TABLE 2)
90
102
245
108
1
2"
5"
0.73
91
201
1
2"
13'-11
E5
81
1
2"
13'-11
1
4"
14
81
178
1
2"
14'-0"
72
1
2"
SPECIAL
71
178
1
2"
5'-8'
1
2"
63
1
2"
4"
0.53
61
156
1
"
2
6"
0.37
D4.5
DOUBLE LAYER
C
1
2"
1
2"
C6.5
3'-5'
54
1
2"
1
2"
0'-3'
Bars C (Flat)
12"
4'
-2"
1
4"
SIZE: L = 16'-0" x 10" WALL THICK

6"
C6.5
4"
1
2"
0'-4'
8'-0"
9'-0"
SPECIAL
Bar B (Angle)
7'-0"
51
134
1
2"
SIZE: L = 9'-0"
Bars A (Channel)
3
4"
0.53
5"
54"&60"
1
2"
D4.5
0.73
4'-1
4'-7'
E5
4'-1
6"
7'-15'
(3.4 lb/ft)
1
2"
1
2"
4"
5'-11
0.53
D4.5
7'-11
0.37
1
4 2"
122
267
1
2"
126
1
2"
1
2"
142
312
1
2"
144
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
45
1
2"
7'-11
C6.5
5'-11
0'-4'
0.37
1
2"
5"
C6.5
3"
SIZE: L = 14'-0"
1
2"
3'-5'
4'-1
0.53
0.24
4"
D4.5
2" x
1
2"
1
2"
6'-15'
B5.5
4'-11
4'-1
4"
0'-3'
1
2"
FLAT
1
4"
111
1
2"
0.53
4'-11
6"
0.37
SIZE: L = 8'-0"
1
2"
C6.5
D4.5
1
4"
11
6'-11
4'-6'
7'-15'
6'-0"
3
4"
12
4'-1
6'-11
6"
42"&48"
5'-0"
1
2"
0.37
3"x 2 2"x
(4.5 lb/ft)
1
2"
C6.5
4"x 5.4 lb
0.24
4'-7'
LENGTH
B5.5
CHANNEL
BAR No. REQD.
5"
0'-4'
0.24
ANGLE
1
2"
5"
B5.5
L
SIZE
6"
SIZE: L = 12'-0"
1
2"
0'-4'
5'-9'
C3.5
1
2"
STEEL WEIGHT
PIPE
30"&36"
SIZE: L = 10'-0"
0'-4'
9'-15'
GRATE QUANTITIES
WWF
0'-5'
8'-15'
ISOMETRIC OF INLET FENCE ENCLOSURE
AREA
SCH.
(in/ft) BARS
DEPTH
163
356
1
2"
162
1
2"
183
12
Table Notes:
See Sheet No. 1 of 2 for dimension "L" location.
1"
1
4"
See steel grate Plan View for dimension "S" location.
Bar B (Angle)
S
2"
15"
15"
15"
7
8"
2"
Clip Corner
PLAN
1
4"
Dia. Anchor Hole
3
16
2"
1
4"
Rod, Washer & Hex Nut
1
2"
1
2"
SECTIO N CC
12" Galv. Threaded Anchor
L -
3
4"
1
2"
Dia. Drilled
Anchor Hole
See Detail E
5
8"x
3
4"
3"
1
4"
1
4"
Seat
3
4"
Angle
1
4"
Bar B (Angle)
Bars A (Channel)
SECTIO N D D
Bars A (Channel)
1"
3"
1
1
2x 4
Bar B (Angle)
Anchor Hole
11:
31:
43 AM
3x2
8"
1
4"
Adhesive Bonding Material System
DETAIL E
GRATE SEAT AND ANCHOR HOLE PLAN
12/3/2015
SECTION FF
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
STEEL GRATE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DITCH BOTTOM INLET TYPE K
NO.
235
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Side Panel
Structure
3
8"
Flat Bar
3
8"
Dia. x
1
1 2"
Long Hex Bolt,
Dia. Stainless Steel Stud Type
Expansion Anchor With Nut And Washer.
Side Panel
1
2".
Flat Washer, Fender Washer, And
Embedment Depth = 2
Lock Nut, all Stainless Steel.
Installed According To The Manufacturer's
Anchors To Be
(6 Required Per Skimmer)
Recommendations (12 Required Per

Skimmer).
Bolt &
Fender Washer &
Flat Washer
de
Si
Lock Nut
l
ne
Pa
Front Panel
Fr
on
tP
an
el
de
Si
l
ne
Pa
Front Panel
PICTORIAL VIEW
Side Panel
GENERAL NOTES
1. This skimmer is intended for use on Type C, D, or E Ditch Bottom Inlets that are used as outlet control
structures of stormwater management facilities.
2. The side panels are dimensionally symmetric, therefore they may be used on either side of the structure.
See View A
3. Two (2) skimmers may be constructed on one structure provided they are on opposite ends.
4. The width of the front panel (dimension W) shall be the same as the outside dimension across the front of
See View B
7"
Front Panel
Flat Bar
the structure.
Expansion
Anchors
PLAN
5. The front panel, side panels, and flat bars are to be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
6. The location of the reinforcing steel in these structures must conform to the applicable standards to avoid
conflict with the expansion anchors used to attach the skimmer.
Expansion Anchor Spacing Varies, See Sheet 2
7. Grates to be used on the inlets unless otherwise specified in the plans.
Top Of Structure
8. A skimmer consists of two (2) side panels, one front panel, two (2) flat bars, and accessory hardware. The
Side Panel
cost of skimmers is to be included in the cost of the inlet.
VIEW A
DESIGN NOTES
Flat Bar
1. The designer must specify, in the plans, the skimmer height (dimension H) and the sides where the weir
slots and skimmers are located. The skimmer height must be one of the dimensions shown in the table on
Sheet 2. The skimmer should not be used on structure sides with outside dimensions greater than 6'-4".
Side Panel
2. To minimize hydraulic losses across the skimmer, the flow area under the skimmer should be three times
Front Panel
larger than the flow area of the weir slot. The distance between the pond bottom at the structure and the
See Design Note 2
skimmer shall be not less than 1 foot.

Bolt Spacing
Varies See Sheet 2
11:
31:
44 AM
Flat Bar
Front Face
3. The configuration of skimmers may be subject to regulatory requirements. The designer should coordinate
Of Structure
the outlet control structure details with the permitting agencies.
4. Where this skimmer is used, the designer should reference this index with the outlet control structure
details. Where a different skimmer design is needed, the designer should provide skimmer details in the
plans.
5. The designer shall evaluate if a grate is needed for safety reasons.
Where a grate is not needed for
safety reasons and is not desirable for hydraulic or other reasons, the designer may omit the grate by
12/3/2015
stating so in the outlet control structure details.
VIEW B
6. The designer must show the configuration of the weir slots in the outlet control structure detail.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
SIDE VIEW
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SKIMMER FOR OUTLET CONTROL STRUCTURES
NO.
240
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
C:\c\projects\STANDARDS\ROADWAY\00200-S\00240-02.xlsx!Dimensions!R1C1:R19C5
1312549954
2
Dimensions!R1C1:R19C5
C:/c/projects/STANDARDS/ROADWAY/00200-S/00240-02.xlsx
1
0
DIMENSIONS
1
2"
Skimmer Height
as Specified in
the Plans
H
Bolt
Spacing
D
3
4"
Inches
3
28
14
28
7
16"
Dia.
(3 Holes)
28
28
20
31
22
31
24
31
8
E
16
18
12
26
31
28
31
10
30
31
10
32
31
11
34
31
12
36
31
12
38
31
13
40
31
14
1
4"
1
2"
Thick x 1
Wide
FLAT BAR
Holes For Expansion Anchors
1"
3"
45
Top Flange (Cut Away)
3"
Bottom Flange
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
1"
L
Front Panel Width Varies, See General Notes
3"
1
2"
1
2"
D
E
1
2"
x 1
1
2"
4"
1
2"
1
1 2"
H
S
Steel Sheet 0.1345"

Thick (10 Gage)
9
16"
Dia.
11:
31:
45 AM
(3 Slots)
Steel Sheet 0.1345"

Thick (10 Gage)
(6 Holes)
9
16"
Dia.
(6 Holes)
END VIEW
12/3/2015
END VIEW (FRONT)
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
SIDE PANEL
FRONT PANEL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SKIMMER FOR OUTLET CONTROL STRUCTURES
NO.
240
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
A
Centerline
4"
6"
6"
Solid Cap
Centerline
5" M in.
Basin Wall
10"
6"
6"
Flange
Ten
1
4"
x 2" Studs
w/Nuts and Washers

1
2"
dia. hole (Typ.)
10" Round Cleanout Port

12"
W/Neoprene Gasket
"
0
1
1
2
"
See Angle Detail

Cleanout
Outlet
Loss Prevention
Pipe
Outlet
1'-0" c to c
Device
Pipe
Cleanout
-0"
4'
Pipe
Pipe
15", 18" & 24"
13
5
2'
-6"
Dia. Pipe
Gasket
6"
2A
2'-6"
Neoprene
24" M in.
6"
2"
3"
3"
24" M in.
Skimmer Baffle
Neoprene
Flange (3" Min.)
1
2"
18" M in.
Corrugated
Gasket
FRONT ELEVATION
3"
Basin Floor
3
4"
3
4"
2'-10"
3'-0"
FRONT ELEVATION
118"
Note: The cleanout port for the Type II skimmer shall be gasketed,
ANGLE DETAIL
SIDE ELEVATION
with either a threaded screw-in lid or a lid secured by four

stainless steel quick-release latches.
Angles on other side of
TYPE I SKIMMER
Latch Pin
4 @
3
8"
SIDE ELEVATION
skimmer are mirror image.
TYPE II SKIMMER
Latch Hinge
GENERAL NOTES
Bolt,
Hex Nut and Washer
Lid
TYPE I SKIMMER
1. The Frenchdrain Skimmer is a hooded cover, mounted over an outlet in a catchbasin, that prevents oil and floating debris from
exiting the basin. Use this skimmer in Frenchdrain Catchbasins and in other locations where there is a need to prevent oil,
Latch Hinge
DIMENSION TABLE
Latch Pin
.
D
I. t
"
ou
12
n
ea e
l
C
p
i
P
OUTLET
A
1
2
C
"
le
I.
a
D
n
.
P
o
ip
u
t
e
Lid Hinge
2. Place neoprene gasket material between the skimmer and the catchbasin at all points of contact. Trim the gasket neatly to
PIPE
extend
22
5
M
i
ni
m
um
Lid
18"
12"
42"
24"
15"
48"
30"
18"
54"
36"
21"
60"
1
2
inch beyond the joint on all sides.
3. Skimmer baffle, cleanout pipe and angles shall be primarily constructed of either galvanized steel, aluminum, polyvinyl chloride,
Hinge
PLAN
debris or other floating contaminants from exiting Catchbasins through outlet pipes.
polyethylene, fiberglass or acrylonitrite butadiene styrene. All steel components, other than stainless, shall be hot-dip
galvanized.
SECTION
LID DETAILS
4. Mounting hardware, hinges and latches shall all be stainless steel. Loss prevention device shall be either stainless steel chain
or riveted nylon strap.
Cleanout
Pipe
Weld Angles At
Bolt Angles To Basin Wall
All Points Of
With (4)
Contact With
SS Expansion Anchors
1
2"
5. Material used in construction of skimmer bodies (baffles) and cleanout pipe shall comply with Standard Specification 943 for
1
2"
steel, 945 for aluminum or 948 for plastics.
x 2
Skimmer
Limits Of Skimmer On
Round Wall Basin
6. All costs for furnishing and installing a frenchdrain skimmer shall be included in the cost of the basin in which it is installed.
Retrofit skimmers shall be paid for as 'modify existing structure'.
l
l
rWa
e
mm
ki
S
Gasket
11:
31:
45 AM
7. Plastic Skimmers shall contain a minimum of 1.5% by weight of carbon black for UV protection.
Variance
Neoprene
Ci
rc
ul
ar
Ba
si
n W
al
l
DESIGN NOTES
1. The contractor may submit an alternative design prefabricated Frenchdrain Skimmer for approval by the Engineer.
Outlet Opening
in Basin Wall
12/3/2015
TOP VIEW
Flat Wall
2. Show, in the plans, the location of the basin and indicate the interior side(s) of the basin on which a skimmer will be installed.
3. Type I Skimmer dimensions shall be based on the outlet pipe diameter as shown in the dimension table.
TOP VIEW SCHEMATIC
The backs of skimmers must conform to the shape of the basin walls on which they are mounted.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/04
REVISIO N
Show, in the plans, the radii required for curved-back skimmers. Applies to both skimmer types.
4. Type II Skimmers are to be used only with outlet pipe diameters of 15", 18", and 24".
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SKIMMERS FOR FRENCHDAIN OUTLETS
NO.
241
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Varies
12"
(12" Min.)
Concrete Apron (12" Max.)
Concrete Apron
Grout
6"
Slope Varies
24"
Varies
Curve Underdrain
To Box
To Box
6"
See Index No. 500)
Underdrain (
Preferred Location
24"
Varies
Curve Underdrain
Center of
Box Location
BACK VIEW
COVER REMOVAL
Reference
18"
12"
(
Secondary Location)
Underdrain
Curb & Gutter
EW
TOP VI
ON
ATI
L
NSTAL
CAL URBAN I
TYPI
1
2"
Stainless Steel
5'
-0"
Or Brass Pin
12"
Concrete Apron
12"
Slope Varies
5
8"
A Maximum Of Two (2)
28
Adjustment Courses Of
23
SECTION CC
1
2"
SECTION BB
Brick Will Be Permitted

Grout
L
NGE DETAI
HI
Grout
Chamfer
Varies
3"
EW
TOP VI
USTMENT
E TOP ADJ
BL
SSI
PERMI
3" Concrete Apron
)
M in.
-0" (
1'
3
4"
5'-6"
)
Std.
-7" (
1'
3"
6"
6"
18"
Frame
Optional Construction
Joint Permitted
Slope Varies
Typical Opening, One Or

More Sides. See Plans
1:12
GENERAL NOTES
For Required Openings.

12"
Grout Fill To Be
5
8"
28
1. Light duty cast iron cover and frame, see Specifications

12"
Included In Cost Of Box
Varies
(Max.)
1
2"
12"
2"
3"
(
M ax.
)
1
2"
Grout
6"
Varies
23
2'
-6" (
Std.
)
12"
Section 962.
2. Concrete shall be Class I, except ASTM C478 (4000 psi)

concrete may be substituted for precast items manufactured
in plants meeting the requirements of Section 449 of the
Specifications. Box shall be reinforced with No. 3 bars
Underdrain
Wide Slots (2) For
(Grade 60) on 8" centers both ways, sides and bottom.

6"
2"
Cast Or Field Cut 4"
Outlet Pipe
Concrete Apron
3. Concrete apron to be included in the contract unit price for
Hinge Covers. Grout
Underdrain Inspection Box.
Around Hinge Covers.
11:
31:
46 AM
4"
24"
4"
ON AA
SECTI
CAL TOP AND APRON
TYPI
4"
4. All covers shall be furnished with pick holes. Fitted lifts
4"
ON
SECTI
OPES
ON ON SL
ATI
L
NSTAL
CAL I
TYPI
24"
BOX AND TOP
or handles are not permitted.
5. Manhole Type P Alternate A, Index No. 200, with Type I

Frame and Cover, Index No. 201, may be used in lieu of the
box detailed on this sheet, and is recommended when high
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
ADT increases chance of the repeated vehicle loadings.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
UNDERDRAIN INSPECTION BOX
NO.
245
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Location Reference
5
10"
4"
3'-6"
3'-6"
3"
pe
o
l
nS
o
i
t
i
s
n
a
r
T
7"
2~#4 Bar
t
on
Fr
Const. Joint
6"
Permitted
6"
See End View
D Or Rise
12
1
1:
End Of Pipe
(See Note 9)
t
on
Fr
e
op
l
S
Point A
D+ 8"
3"
1:
B
ac
11
kf
2
i
l
l
S
l
op
e
e
op
Sl
Measured To This Point)
6"
1'
-3"
7"
D or Span
(Horizontal Clearance
6"
4"
4"
END VIEW
2
3B
(Enlarged)
1. Position is set by the intersection of the front
FRONT VIEW
GENERAL NOTES
slope and Point A where this intersection falls

outside the clear zone.
1.
Endwall dimensions, locations and positions are for round
Const. Joint Permitted

(Keyway & Dowels Required
Dowels #4 Bars, 18" With
inside the clear zone, the endwall is positioned
9" Embedment @ 12" Ctrs
so the location reference point is at the clear
(For Bar Grade And
zone limit. The front slope is transitioned to the
Payment See Note 3)
endwall as shown in Index No. 280.
corrugated metal pipe. Round concrete pipe shown.
2.
Front slope and ditch transitions shall be in accordance with

Index No. 280.
3.
END VIEW (ENLARGED)
EW
TOP VI
and elliptical concrete pipe and for round and pipe-arch
2. Where the front slope and Point A intersects
Endwalls may be cast in place or precast concrete.

Reinforcing steel shall be Grades 40 or 60. Additional
STANDARD
reinforcement necessary for handling precast units shall be
NG)
PE SPACI
E PI
PL
TI
VE OF MUL
USI
EXCL
ONS (
MENSI
L DI
ENDWAL
LOCATION CONTROL
determined by the Contractor or the supplier. Cost of

reinforcement shall be included in the contract unit price for
Concrete, (Endwalls).
(X=S)
4.
(X=S Sec )
All exposed corners and edges of concrete are to be

chamfered
5.
3
4".
Concrete shall be Class I, except ASTM C478 (4000 psi)

concrete may be substituted for precast items manufactured
in plants meeting the requirements of Section 449 of the
EW
FRONT VI
Outside
Interior
Pipe (Typ)
Pipe (Typ)
Specifications.
FRONT VIEW
6.
1
2
On outfall ditches with side slopes flatter than 1:1
provide
20' transitions from the endwall to the flatter side slopes,

right of way permitting.
Location Reference Line

(See Location Control Above)
7.
For sodding around endwalls see Index No. 281.
8.
Payment for concrete quantities for endwalls skewed to the

pipe shall be made on the following basis:
Endwall Skew to Pipe
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
NORMAL PIPE
Use Tabulated Value
0 to 5
SKEWED PIPE
15
16
30
31 or over
LEGEND
Pipe Skew
9.
S Center To Center Pipe Spacing
45
Pipe length plan quantities shall be based on the pipe end

locations shown in the standard location control end view, or
X Centerline To Centerline Dimension At Face Of Headwall
lengths based on special endwall locations called for in the

plans.
PIPE AND SPACING FOR MULTIPLE PIPE

11:
31:
47 AM
10. Payment for pipe in pipe culverts shall be based on plan
ENDWALL POSITIONS FOR SINGLE AND MULTIPLE
quantities, adjusted for endwall locations subsequently

established by the Engineer.
11. Endwalls to be paid for under the contract unit price for
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Class I Concrete (Endwalls), CY.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
STRAIGHT CONCRETE ENDWALLS
DESIGN STANDARDS
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE PIPE
NO.
250
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
DATA AND ESTI

MATED QUANTI
TI
ES FOR ONE ENDWAL
L
ROUND CONCRETE AND CORRUGATED METAL PI
PE
Class I
Concrete (CY)
Opening Area
(SF)
Number And Type Of Pipe And Skew Angle Of Pipe
Dimensions
Single
Number Of Pipes
X
A
Double
Conc Metal
Triple
Concrete
Metal
Quadruple
Concrete
Metal
Concrete
Metal
15
30
45
15
30
45
15
30
45
15
30
45
15
30
45
15
30
45
15
15"
1.23
2.46
3.69
4.92
1'-11"
1'-2"
4'-0"
1'-10"
1'-2"
0'-6"
30
45
2'-7"
2'-8"
3'-0"
3'-8"
1.23
1.24
1.59
1.60
1.65
1.74
1.62
1.63
1.68
1.78
1.94
1.96
2.05
2.23
1.99
2.02
2.11
2.30
2.30
2.34
2.47
2.74
2.37
2.41
2.75
2.84
18"
1.77
3.54
5.31
7.08
2'-2"
1'-3"
4'-6"
1'-11"
1'-3"
15"
1'-0" 2'-10" 2'-10" 2'-11"
3'-3"
4'-0"
1.56
1.59
1.99
2.01
2.06
2.17
2.04
2.06
2.11
2.23
2.43
2.46
2.56
2.79
2.51
2.54
2.65
2.89
2.86
2.91
3.06
3.40
2.96
3.01
3.17
3.53
21"
2.41
4.82
7.23
9.64
2'-5"
1'-4"
5'-0"
2'-0"
18"
1'-4"
1'-6"
3'-2"
3'-2"
3'-3"
3'-8"
4'-6"
1.97
24"
3.14
6.28
9.42
12.56
2'-8"
1'-4"
5'-6"
2'-0"
1'-4"
2'-0"
3'-5"
3'-5"
3'-6"
3'-11"
4'-10"
2.24
2.29
2.82
2.84
2.91
3.06
2.91
2.93
3.01
3.17
3.39
3.43
3.57
3.87
3.52
3.56
3.71
4.03
3.97
4.03
4.24
4.69
4.14
4.20
4.43
4.91
27"
3.98
7.96
11.94
15.92
2'-11"
1'-5"
6'-0"
2'-1"
1'-5"
2'-6" 3'-10" 3'-10"
4'-0"
4'-5"
5'-5"
2.73
30"
4.91
9.82
14.73
19.64
3'-2"
1'-6"
6'-6"
2'-2"
1'-6"
3'-0"
4'-3"
4'-3"
4'-5"
4'-11"
6'-0"
3.26
3.34
4.13
4.16
4.26
4.49
4.28
4.31
4.43
4.67
4.98
5.04
5.25
5.69
5.20
5.27
5.49
5.97
5.84
5.93
6.24
6.91
6.13
6.23
6.56
7.29
36"
7.07
14.14
21.21
28.28
30"
3'-8"
1'-8"
7'-6"
2'-4"
1'-8"
4'-0"
5'-1"
5'-1"
5'-3"
5'-10"
7'-2"
4.53
4.64
5.73
5.77
5.92
6.23
5.95
6.00
6.15
6.49
6.92
7.00
7.29
7.91
7.25
7.34
7.65
8.33
8.13
8.26
8.69
9.62
8.57
8.71
9.18
10.20
42"
9.62
19.24
28.86
36"
38.48
4'-2"
1'-10"
8'-6"
2'-6"
2'-0"
5'-0"
6'-0"
6'-0"
6'-3"
6'-11"
8'-6"
6.33
6.49
8.11
8.17
8.39
8.85
8.43
8.50
8.73
9.23
9.90
48" 12.57 25.14
37.71
50.28
4'-8"
2'-1"
9'-6"
2'-9"
2'-0"
6'-0"
6'-9"
6'-9"
7'-0"
7'-10"
9'-7"
8.15
8.38
54" 15.90 31.80
47.70
63.60
5'-2"
2'-6"
10'-6"
3'-2"
2'-3"
7'-0"
7'-8"
7'-8"
2'-7"
21"
24"
27"
10.02 10.45
11.38 10.38 10.52 10.98 11.99 11.68 11.87 12.51
13.89
12.32
12.52
13.22
14.73
42"
10.40 10.48 10.75 11.33 10.85 10.94 11.23 11.87 12.64 12.80 13.34
14.50 13.34 13.51 14.11 15.39 14.89 15.13 15.93
17.68
15.82
16.08
16.97
18.90
48"
7'-11" 8'-10" 10'-10" 11.71 11.77 15.23 15.35 15.78 16.69 15.35 15.48 15.90 16.83 18.77 19.02 19.86
21.69 18.93 19.18 20.04 21.89 22.29 22.66 23.93
26.67
22.51 22.89
24.17
26.96
54"
CORRUGATED METAL PI
PE ARCH
Class I
Opening Area
Concrete (CY)
Approx.
Dimensions
(SF)
Span
Equiv.
Number Of Pipe And Skew Angle Of Pipe
Rise
Span
Rise
Round
Number Of Pipes
X
A
Single
Double
Triple
Quadruple
Pipe
S
0
15
30
45
15
30
45
15
30
45
15
30
45
17"
13"
1.1
2.2
3.3
4.4
1'-9"
1'-2"
3'-10"
1'-10"
1'-2"
0'-4"
2'-6"
2'-6"
2'-7"
2'-11"
3'-6"
1.16
1.47
1.48
1.52
1.60
1.78
1.80
1.88
2.04
2.09
2.12
2.23
2.48
17"
13"
15"
21"
15"
1.6
3.2
4.8
6.4
1'-11"
1'-2"
4'-3"
1'-10"
1'-2"
0'-9"
2'-10"
2'-10"
2'-11"
3'-3"
4'-0"
1.33
1.69
1.70
1.75
1.84
2.04
2.06
2.15
2.33
2.40
2.44
2.57
2.84
21"
15"
18"
28"
20"
2.8
5.6
8.4
11.2
2'-4"
1'-3"
5'-2"
1'-11"
1'-3"
1'-8"
3'-5"
3'-5"
3'-6"
3'-11"
4'-10"
1.78
2.31
2.33
2.39
2.53
2.83
2.87
2.99
3.26
3.36
3.42
3.60
4.01
28"
20"
24"
35"
24"
4.3
8.6
12.9
17.2
2'-8"
1'-4"
5'-11
1
2"
2'-0"
1'-4"
2'-5
1
2"
4'-0"
4'-0"
4'-2"
4'-7"
5'-8"
2.34
3.03
3.05
3.14
3.32
3.72
3.77
3.93
4.29
4.40
4.47
4.72
5.25
35"
24"
30"
42"
29"
5.9
11.8
17.7
23.6
3'-1"
1'-5"
6'-10
1
2"
2'-1"
1'-5"
3'-4
1
2"
4'-9"
4'-9"
4'-11"
5'-6"
6'-9"
3.13
4.06
4.09
4.20
4.45
4.99
5.06
5.28
5.76
5.93
6.03
6.36
7.09
42"
29"
36"
49"
33"
8.4
16.8
25.2
33.6
3'-5"
1'-6"
2'-2"
1'-6"
5'-6"
5'-6"
5'-8"
6'-4"
7'-9"
3.83
5.00
5.04
5.18
5.48
6.16
6.24
6.52
7.12
7.32
7.44
7.86
8.76
49"
33"
42"
57"
38"
10.6
21.2
31.8
42.4
3'-10"
1'-7"
8'-7
1
2"
2'-3"
1'-7"
5'-1
1
2"
6'-4"
6'-4"
6'-7"
7'-4"
8'-11"
4.87
6.31
6.36
6.53
6.91
7.74
7.84
8.18
8.93
9.18
9.33
9.85
64"
43"
13.2
26.4
39.6
52.8
4'-3"
1'-8"
9'-6
1
2"
2'-4"
1'-8"
6'-0
1
2"
7'-1"
7'-1"
7'-4"
8'-2"
10'-0"
5.88
7.64
7.70
7.91
8.37
9.40
9.52
9.94
71"
47"
16.9
33.8
50.7
67.6
4'-7"
1'-10"
10'-4"
2'-6"
2'-0"
6'-10"
7'-10"
7'-10"
8'-1"
9'-1"
11'-1"
7.80
7'-8"
4'-2"
10.96
57"
38"
48"
10.86 11.15 11.33 11.97 13.33
64"
43"
54"
10.15 10.23 10.51 11.12 12.49 12.65 13.22 14.43 14.85 15.10 15.94 17.77
71"
47"
60"
Note: Use the guidelines of General

Note No. 8 for selecting
tabular quantities.
CONCRETE EL
L
I
PTI
CAL PI
PE
Class I Concrete (CY)
Opening Area
Approx.
Dimensions
(SF)
Rise
Equiv.
Number Of Pipe And Skew Angle Of Pipe
Span
Rise
Span
Round
Number Of Pipes
12"
18"
1.3
2.6
3.9
5.2
1'-8"
1'-2"
14"
23"
1.8
3.6
5.4
7.2
1'-10"
1'-3"
4'-2
3'-9"
19"
30"
3.3
6.6
9.9
13.2
2'-3"
1'-4"
5'-1
24"
38"
5.1
10.2
15.3
20.4
2'-8"
1'-5"
29"
45"
7.4
14.8
22.2
29.6
3'-1"
1'-6"
34"
53"
10.2
20.4
30.6
40.8
3'-6"
1'-7"
38"
60"
12.9
25.8
38.7
51.6
3'-10"
1'-8"
43"
68"
16.6
33.2
49.8
66.4
4'-3"
1'-10"
48"
76"
20.5
41.0
61.5
82.0
4'-8"
53"
83"
24.8
49.6
74.4
99.2
58"
91"
29.5
59.0
88.5
118.0
Single
Double
Triple
Quadruple
Pipe
S
15
2'-10"
2'-10"
2'-11"
3'-5"
3'-5"
3'-6"
4'-2"
4'-2"
4'-4"
30
45
15
3'-3"
4'-0"
3'-11"
4'-10"
4'-10"
30
45
1.09
1.45
1.36
1.82
5'-11"
1.89
15
1.46
1.51
1.84
1.89
2.55
2.57
30
1.60
1.80
1.82
1.91
2.01
2.29
2.32
2.43
2.65
2.82
3.22
3.27
3.43
45
15
30
45
2.09
2.16
2.20
2.33
2.60
12"
18"
15"
2.68
2.75
2.80
2.97
3.33
14"
23"
18"
3.77
3.88
3.95
4.19
4.70
19"
30"
24"
1'-10"
1'-2"
1
2"
1'-11"
1'-3"
1
2"
2'-0"
1'-4"
1'-7
6'-3"
2'-1"
1'-5"
2'-9"
5'-2"
5'-2"
5'-4"
6'-0"
7'-4"
2.64
3.55
3.58
3.69
3.93
4.48
4.54
4.77
5.24
5.39
5.49
5.82
6.53
24"
38"
30"
7'-0"
2'-2"
1'-6"
3'-6"
6'-0"
6'-0"
6'-3"
6'-11"
8'-6"
3.32
4.48
4.52
4.66
4.96
5.64
5.72
6.00
6.60
6.80
6.92
7.34
8.24
29"
45"
36"
2'-3"
1'-7"
7'-1"
7'-1"
7'-4"
8'-2"
10'-0"
4.24
5.76
5.81
6.00
6.39
7.29
7.40
7.76
8.55
8.81
8.97
9.52
10.70
34"
53"
42"
2'-4"
1'-8"
7'-11"
7'-11"
8'-2"
9'-2"
11'-2"
5.22
7.16
7.23
7.46
7.96
9.10
9.24
9.70
10.71
11.05
11.25
11.95 13.46
38"
60"
48"
9'-8
1
2"
2'-6"
1'-10"
8'-10"
8'-10"
9'-2"
10'-2"
12'-6"
6.63
9.01
9.09
9.38
10.00
11.39
11.56
12.13
13.36
13.77
14.02
14.88 16.73
43"
68"
54"
2'-1"
10'-8"
2'-9"
2'-0"
7'-2"
9'-9"
9'-9"
10'-1"
11'-3"
13'-9"
8.66
11.74
11.85
12.22
13.02
14.82
15.04
15.77
17.37
17.91
18.23
19.34 21.74
48"
76"
60"
5'-1"
2'-6"
11'-7"
3'-2"
2'-6"
8'-1"
10'-7"
10'-7" 10'-11" 12'-3"
15'-0"
12.50
16.98
16.98
17.67
18.83
21.47
21.78
22.86
25.18
25.97
26.44
28.06 31.55
53"
83"
66"
5'-6"
2'-10"
3'-6"
2'-10"
11'-4"
11'-4"
16'-0"
16.46
22.26
22.46
23.16
24.66
28.05
28.46
29.85
32.85
33.85
34.46
36.55 41.05
58"
91"
72"
1
2"
7'-11
8'-9"
1
2"
12'-6
0'-3"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
4'-5
5'-3"
1
2"
6'-2
1
2"
9'-0
11'-9"
13'-1"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/01
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
31:
48 AM
A
1
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE PIPE
NO.
250
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
60" Pipe
CMP
CMP
16'-0"
O.D. CMP
RCP
Seat For
Corrugation)
10"
(5" For 3"x1"
LOCATION
BENDING
#4
32
4'-2"
Footing
Straight
#4
13
31'-8"
Footing & Wall
Straight
#4
12'-4"
Wall
Straight
#4
13'-9"
Wall
Straight
#4
26
9'-4"
Wall
Bend
#4
18
7'-6"
Wall
Straight
#4
Footing & Wall
Straight
1'-8"
BENDING DIAGRAM
7'-6"
1'
-4"
6"
CMP Only
LENGTH
4'
-6"
Varies
Foundation
NO. REQD.
2'
-4"
5
'0
"
Bars A @ 12" Centers
SIZE
2'-0"
Bars B
BAR C
1'
-10"
16'-0"
MARK
NOTE: All bar dimensions are out to out
PLAN
SECTION BB
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
rI
n Fo
o
t
i
n
g)
RCP
CMP
Class II Concrete
Cu. Yd.
11.3
11.4
Reinforcing Steel
Lb.
695
695
ITEM
32'-0"
UNIT
16'-0"
16'-0"
Bars B
Bars B
Symmetrical About
2"
Bars B
12"
10"
10"
1'-2"
Field
Bend
Bend
Bars A
7'
-2"
Bars B
Bars B
4'-6"
Const. Joint
Dowels E
NOTE: Cut and field bend Bars B as shown.
2'-4"
1'-4"
B
Bars B
Cl.
Cl.
Bars B
Dowels E
2"
Bars B
Bars B
3"
Cl.
Field
Cl.
6"
2"
2"
5'
-0
"
D
i
a.
Bars C
@ 12" Centers
2'
-0"
6"
Bend
7'
-2"
5'
-0"
Below)
Bend
Bars D
Bars C
2'
-0"
(See Option
Field
18" Centers
6"
Field
Bars B @
@ 18" Ctrs.
Bars B @
Bars D
18" Centers
Bars B
(Class B Wall)
8"
9"
(3"x1" Corr.)
12"
1'-7"
Cl.
Loc. Ref.
Bars A
Bars B
A
SECTION AA
HALF ELEVATION
HALF ELEVATION
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fr
o
n
t Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
TYPICAL SECTION
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Ba
c
k Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
THRU ENDWALL
11:
31:
49 AM
GENERAL NOTES
3
4"
1. Straight concrete endwalls are intended for use outside the clear zone.
5. Chamfer: All exposed edges and corners to be chamfered
2. Endwalls may be cast-in-place or precast construction. Cast-in-place endwalls shall conform to the
6. That portion of corrugated metal pipe in direct contact with the concrete slab and extending 12"
details on this Index. Precast construction which adheres to this Index, including any additional
beyond shall have a continuous bituminous coating of .004" minimum thickness applied prior to
OPTIONAL ENTRANCE
reinforcement required for handling which shall be determined by the Contractor or supplier, does
placing of the concrete.
FOR CONCRETE PIPE
not require additional approvals. Deviations from this Index, for precast units, shall require the
approval of the State Drainage Engineer prior to construction. For precast construction, see Index
No. 201 for opening and grouting details.
unless otherwise shown.
7. Sodding shall be in accordance with Index No. 281 and paid for under the contract unit price for
3. Reinforcing steel shall be either Grade 40 or 60.
8. Basis of payment for either cast-in-place or precast construction shall be the estimated quantities
12/3/2015
tabulated on the Index. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be paid for under the contract unit
4. Concrete shall be Class II, except ASTM C478 (4000 psi) concrete may be substituted for precast
prices for Class II Concrete (Endwalls), CY and Reinforcing Steel (Roadway), LB.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
items manufactured in plants meeting the requirements of Section 449 of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SINGLE AND DOUBLE 60" PIPE
NO.
251
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
60" Pipe
60" Pipe
4'-3"
4'-3"
CMP
CMP
CMP
20'-3"
20'-3"
RCP
RCP
(5" For
Deepened For
4'
-6"
10"
5
'0
"
Varies
Foundation
2'
-4"
Bars A @ 12"
O.D. CMP
Corrugation)
2'-0"
1'
-4"
6"
6"
3" x 1"
CMP Only
Bars B
PLAN
SECTION BB
40'-6"
20'-3"
20'-3"
16'-0"
16'-0"
8'-6"
2" Cl.
Loc. Ref.
10"
(3"x1" Corr.)
Bars B
Bars B
12"
12"
Bars D @ 18"
1'-7"
Bars B
Bars C @ 12"
10"
Bars B
1'-2"
Bars B
Bars B
Field
Bend
2" Cl.
Bars D @ 18"
6"
Bars B
5
'
-0
"
Bend
D
ia
.
Bars B
D
Bars B
Dowel Bars E
Bars B @ 18"
Bars B
Dowel Bars E
2" Cl.
Bars B
Bars B
4'-6"
2'-4"
1'-4"
Bars B
2'
-0"
Bars B
Bend
2'
-0"
Bars A
Bars B
Field
Bars B
Bend
Bars C
Joint
Bars B
Field
Bars B
Const.
Bars C @ 12"
ia
.
B
Bars B
2" Cl.
3"
6"
Field
7'
-2"
5
'
-0
"
Bars B
Bars B @ 18"
7'
-2"
Option Below)
Bars B
Bars D
6
"
6" (See
5'
-0"
Bars B
Bend
9"
Field
Cl.
(Class B Wall)
Bars A
Bars B
8"
HALF ELEVATION
SECTION AA
HALF ELEVATION
Symmetrical About
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fr
o
n
t Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
1:
00:
27 PM
OPTIONAL ENTRANCE
LENGTH
LOCATION
BENDING
#4
41
4'-2"
Footing
Straight
#4
40'-2"
Footing & Wall
Straight
#4
12'-6"
Wall
Straight
#4
13'-9"
Wall
Straight
#4
6'-0"
Wall
Field Bend
#4
2'-2"
Wall
Straight
#4
15'-0"
Wall
Field Bend
#4
29
9'-4"
Footing & Wall
Bend
#4
20
7'-6"
Footing & Wall
Straight
#4
16
Footing & Wall
Straight
7'-6"
1'
-10"
NO. REQD.
BAR C
1'-8"
.
es
Not
al
er
t1of2 ForGen
ee
NOTE: See Sh
RCP
CMP
Class II Concrete
ITEM
Cu. Yd.
UNIT
13.7
13.8
Reinforcing Steel
Lb.
824
824
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/7/2015
FOR CONCRETE PIPE
SIZE
THRU ENDWALL
BENDING DIAGRAM

MARK
TYPICAL SECTION
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Ba
c
k Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

NO.
251
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
66" Pipe

CMP
CMP
MARK SIZE NO. REQD. LENGTH

A
63
LOCATION
BENDING
Footing
Straight
4'-11"
Footing &
B
17
33'-8"
Straight
Wall
17'-0"
5
'6
"
O.D. CMP
17'-0"
RCP
1
2"
Bars A @ 6
Centers
34
9'-11"
Wall
Bend
20
8'-1"
Wall
Straight
Wall
Straight
1'-8"
1
2"
Varies (5
BENDING DIAGRAM
1'
-4"
6"
2'-0"
10"
Corrugation)
CMP Only
1'
-10"
Seat For
3'
-1"
For 3"x 1"
5'
-3"
Foundation
SECTION BB
8'-1"
BAR C
Bars B
PLAN
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fo
o
t
i
n
g)
ITEM
UNIT
RCP
CMP
Class II Concrete
Cu. Yd.
13.2
13.3
Reinforcing Steel
Lb.
1170
1170
34'-0"
1
2"
1'-7
10"
Bars B
17'-0"
Symmetrical About
(3"x 1" Corr.)
2" Cl.
17'-0"
Loc. Ref.
Bars B
10"
Bars B
Bars B
Below)
Bar C
Bar D
2" Cl.
Field Bend
ia
.
Field Bend
D
5'
-6"
6"
6"
5
'
-6
"
Bars C @ 10" Centers
2" Cl.
7'
-9"
(Class B Wall)
Option
6" (
See
1'-2"
Bars B @ 18"
Bars D @ 18" Centers
Bars B
5'-3"
3'-1"
1'-4"
Field Bend
Field Bend
Const. Joint
Bars A
B
A
NOTE: Cut and Field Bend Bars B As Shown
8"
9"
3" Cl.
Bars E
2" Cl.
Bars E
Bars B
2'
-0"
Bars B
Bar A
Bars B
SECTION AA
HALF ELEVATION
HALF ELEVATION
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fr
o
n
t Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Ba
c
k Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
TYPICAL SECTION
THRU ENDWALL
GENERAL NOTES
3
4"
6. That portion of corrugated Metal pipe in direct contact with the concrete slab and extending 12"
beyond shall have a continuous bituminous coating of 0.004" minimum thickness applied prior to
11:
31:
51 AM
OPTIONAL ENTRANCE
FOR CONCRETE PIPE

12/3/2015
4. Concrete shall be Class II except ASTM C478 (4000 psi) concrete may be substituted for precast
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
252
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
66" Pipe
66" Pipe
CMP
CMP
CMP
21'-6"
21'-6"
O.D. CMP
4'-6"
RCP
RCP
10"
"
-6
'
5
Varies
Foundation
1'
-4"
6"
Corrugation)
CMP Only
6"
(512"For 3"x1"
Seat For
5'
-3"
Centers
3'
-1"
1
2"
Bars A @ 6
4'-6"
Bars B
2'-0"
PLAN
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fo
o
t
i
n
g)
SECTION BB
43'-0"
21'-6"
21'-6"
9'-0"
17'-0"
2" Cl.
17'-0"
Loc. Ref.
1'-712"
10"
Bars B
(3"x1" Corr.)
Bar D
Bars C
Bars B
10"
Bars B
Bars B
1'-2"
Bar C
(Class B Wall)
6" (
See
2" Cl.
9"
Field
Field Bend
5
'
-6
"
ia
.
Bar D
Field Bend
Bend
6"
6"
5
'
-6
"
ia
.
7'
-9"
5'
-6"
6"
Option Below)
10"
Bars B @ 18"
2" Cl.
Bars D @ 18"Centers
Bars B
5'-3"
3'-1"
1'-4"
Field
Field Bend
Field Bend
Bend
Const. Joint
Bars A
3" Cl.
Bars E
2" Cl.
Bars E
Bars B
2'
-0"
Bars B
8"
9"
Bar A
Bars B
Symmetrical About
SECTION AA
HALF ELEVATION
HALF ELEVATION
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Ba
c
k Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fr
o
n
t Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
SIZE
NO. REQD. LENGTH
80
BENDING DIAGRAMS
LOCATION
BENDING
4'-11"
Footing
Straight
17
42'-8"
Footing & Wall
Straight
37
9'-11"
Wall
Bend
22
8'-1"
Wall
Straight
Wall
Straight
1'-8"
1'
-10"

MARK
TYPICAL SECTION
THRU ENDWALL
ITEM
UNIT
RCP
CMP
Class II Concrete
Cu. Yd.
16.0
16.2
Reinforcing Steel
Lb.
1,406
1,406
8'-1"
1:
02:
59 PM
BAR C
Note: All bar dimensions are
OPTIONAL ENTRANCE
NO
T
E:Se
e Sh
e
e
t1 o
f2 f
o
r Ge
n
e
r
a
lNo
t
e
s
.
out to out
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/7/2015
FOR CONCRETE PIPE
DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

NO.
252
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
72" Pipe

CMP
MARK
SIZE
LOCATION
BENDING
NO. REQD. LENGTH

68
4'-11"
Footing
Straight
17
35'-8"
Footing & Wall
Straight
34
10'-5"
Wall
Bend
20
8'-7"
Wall
Straight
2'-6"
Wall
Straight
1'-6"
Wall
Straight
CMP
RCP
18'-0"
O.D. CMP
18'-0"
1
2"Ctrs
3"x1"
CMP Only
Corrugation)
8'-7"
1'
-4"
(6" For
Seat For
1'
-10"
3'
-1"
10"
Varies
Foundation
BENDING DIAGRAM
5'
-3"
6
'
-0
"
Bars A @ 6
BAR C
Bars B
PLAN
2'-0"
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fo
o
t
i
n
g)
ITEM
SECTION BB
UNIT
RCP
CMP
Class II Concrete
Cu. Yd.
14.4
14.5
Reinforcing Steel
Lb.
1249
1249
36'-0"
18'-0"
Bars B
Symmetrical About
Loc. Ref.
(3"x1" Corr.)
2"
Cl.
18'-0"
Bars B
1'-7"
10"
Bars B
10"
Bars C
Bars B
Bar D
1'-1"
2"Cl.
(Class B Wall)
Field Bend
Field Bend
"
-0
'
6
Option
6"
Below)
6'
-0"
2"Cl.
8'
-3"
6" (See
Bars B @ 18"
.
ia
Bars B
1'-4"
5'-3"
6"
Field Bend
Bars A
3'-1"
Const. Joint
Field Bend
9"
Cl.
Bars E
3"
Bars F
Bars A
2"
Cl.
2'
-0"

8"
Bars B
Bars B
HALF ELEVATION
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Ba
c
k Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
HALF ELEVATION
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fr
o
n
t Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
TYPICAL SECTION
THRU ENDWALL
SECTION AA
11:
31:
52 AM
GENERAL NOTES
3
4"
6. That portion of corrugated Metal pipe in direct contact with the concrete slab and extending 12"
beyond shall have a continuous bituminous coating of 0.004" minimum thickness coated applied prior
to placing of the concrete.
OPTIONAL ENTRANCE
FOR CONCRETE PIPE

12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
253
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
72" Pipe
72" Pipe
CMP
CMP
CMP
O.D. CMP
RCP
5'-0"
10'-0"
1
2"
18'-0"
3'
-1"
Centers
For 3"x1"
CMP Only
Corrugation)
6"
6"
Seat For
1'
-4" 10"
Varies (6"
Foundation
5'
-3"
6
'0
"
18'-0"
Bars A @ 6
RCP
5'-0"
2'-0"
Bars B
PLAN
SECTION BB
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fo
o
t
i
n
g)
Symmetrical About
1'-7"
46'-0"
Loc. Ref.
5'-0"
18'-0"
10"
5'-0"
2" Cl.
(3"x1" Corr.)
18'-0"
15"
Bars B
10"
10"
Bars B
1'-1"
(Class B Wall)
Bar C
Field Bend
2" Cl.
Field Bend
Bar D
6" (See
Field
Bend
6'
-0"
Below)
6"
6"
"
-0
'
6
.
ia
"
-0
'
6
Field
Bend
Bars B @ 18"
8'
-3"
Option
.
ia
6"
2" Cl.
Bars B
Field Bend
5'-3"
Field Bend
1'-4"
B
Bars A
3'-1"
Bars B
Const. Joint
Bars B
8"
9"
3" Cl.
2" Cl.
Bars B
Bars B
2'
-0"
Bars A
Bars B
SECTION AA
HALF ELEVATION
HALF ELEVATION
11:
31:
53 AM
FOR CONCRETE PIPE
BENDING DIAGRAM
MARK
SIZE
NO. REQD.
LENGTH
LOCATION
BENDING
85
4'-11"
Footing
Straight
17
45'-8"
Footing & Wall
Straight
38
10'-5"
Wall
Bend
23
8'-7"
Wall
Straight
2'-6"
Wall
Straight
1'-6"
Wall
Straight
THRU ENDWALL
ITEM
1'
-10"
OPTIONAL ENTRANCE
TYPICAL SECTION
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fr
o
n
t Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Ba
c
k Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
UNIT
RCP
CMP
Concrete Class II
Cu. Yd.
17.5
17.8
Reinforcing Steel
Lb.
1519
1519
8'-7"
BAR C
NO
T
E:Se
e Sh
e
e
t1 o
f2 f
o
r Ge
n
e
r
a
lNo
t
e
s
.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
253
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Loc. Ref.

10"
H
20'-0"
1'-4"
1'-11"
84" Pipe
(Class B Wall)
(3"x1" Corr.)
RCP
E @ 7" Ctrs.
V-Groove
1'
-8"
6"
3
4"
NO. REQD.
69
6'-0"
20
39'-8"
LENGTH
12'-4"
26
26
22
10'-2"
2'-0"
6" (
See Option Below)
6"
10"
6'
-4"
7'
-0"
3'
-10"
SIZE
7'-10"
BENDING DIAGRAM
10'
-2"
20'-0"
MARK
5'
-8"
CMP
E
2'-2"
PLAN
B
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fo
o
t
i
n
g)
BAR V
20'-0"
V-Groove Top and Sides
Symmetrical about
2" Cl.
20'-0"
3
4"
BAR V
SECTION AA
A
40'-0"
2'-2"
10"
ITEM
UNIT
Class II Concrete
RCP
CMP
Cu. Yd.
20.0
20.2
Lb.
2,095
2,095
Reinforcing Steel
15" Ctrs.
2" Cl.
Field Bend
V @ 15" Ctrs.
2" Cl.
V @ 18"
V @ 18" Ctrs.
6"
7'-0" Dia.
H @ 18"
9'
-8"
V @
Field Bend
CMP
V & V @ 7
1
2"
(Alternate)
H @ 18"
O.D. CMP
6'-4"
1'-8"
3'-10"
Construction Joint
8"
Note: Cut and field bend Bars H as shown
3" Cl.
2'
-0"
"
-0
'
7
11"
Field Bend
2" Cl.
Field Bend
Varies
(7" for 3"x1"
Foundation
CMP Only
HALF ELEVATION
HALF ELEVATION
TYPICAL SECTION
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Fr
o
n
t Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
(
Sh
o
wi
n
g Ba
r
sI
n Ba
c
k Fa
c
e Of Wa
l
l
)
THRU ENDWALL
11:
31:
54 AM
GENERAL NOTES
2'-0"
SECTION BB
3
4"
6. That portion of corrugated metal pipe in direct contact with the concrete slab and extending 12"
details on this index, design specifications AASHTO 1989. Precast construction which adheres to
beyond shall have a continuous bituminous coating of 0.004" minimum thickness applied prior to
this Index, including any additional reinforcement required for handling which shall be determined
by the Contractor or supplier, does not require additional approvals. Deviations from this Index,
for precast units, shall require the approval of the State Drainage Engineer prior to construction.
For precast construction, see Index No. 201 for opening and grouting details.
OPTIONAL ENTRANCE
FOR CONCRETE PIPE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Corrugation)
Seat For
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
STRAIGHT CONCRETE ENDWALL
DESIGN STANDARDS
SINGLE 84" PIPE
NO.
255
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
X
Loc. Ref.
Shape Sand-Cement Bags On Upstream End
Front Slope
Front Slope
1'-0"
To 45 Bevel (3" At Top To 6" On Lower
1'-0"
Sides) For Concrete And Metal Culverts

3"
3"
Varies (9" Min.)
Bars
Varies (6" Min.)
8:1 Batter
8:1 Batter
A
12"
12"
1
:
1
.
5
5
.
1
:
1
H
12"
12"
FL Elev.
FL Elev.
C
F
1'-0"
1'-0"
CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
CONCRETE PIPE
Note:
1. For concrete and corrugated metal pipes. Concrete pipe shown.
2. The top row of riprap bags shall be secured by pinning, using #4 reinforcing bars 18 inches in
SECTION YY
length, as follows:
a. The end bags shall be secured using two bars per bag, one vertical and one diagonal as shown.
b. The next to last bag on each end shall be secured with two bars vertically.
c. Bags located over the pipe shall be secured by a bar which is driven diagonally except that for
concrete pipe two bars shall be used for single bags above the pipe.
d. Intermediate bags shall be secured with a single bar.
Bars shall be driven to one inch below the surface of the bag. The cost of furnishing and installing
the bars shall be included in the cost of the riprap.
FRONT ELEVATION
TABLE OF DIMENSIONS AND
ONE PIPE CULVERTS
SIZE
OF
TWO PIPE CULVERTS
RIPRAP CY
L
PIPE
11:
31:
55 AM
QUANTITIES FOR ONE ENDWALL
L
CP
CMP
THREE PIPE CULVERTS
RIPRAP CY
L
CP
CMP
FOUR PIPE CULVERTS
RIPRAP CY
CMP
CP
1.8
1.9
CMP
17'-3"
2.1
3.7
2.3
4.0
20'-6"
4.3
5.1
4.7
5.5
24'-9"
6.0
6.5
18"
2'-3"
1'-0"
4'-0"
0'-0"
0'-0"
1'-9"
2'-10"
8'-9"
1.2
1.2
11'-7"
1.5
1.6
24"
2'-9"
2'-0"
2'-0"
2'-6"
0'-0"
1'-9"
3'-5"
10'-3"
2.4
2.5
13'-8"
3.0
3.2
30"
3'-4"
2'-0"
2'-0"
3'-2"
0'-0"
1'-10"
4'-3"
12'-0"
3.3
3.4
16'-3"
4.2
4.5
36"
3'-10"
2'-0"
2'-0"
3'-8"
0'-0"
1'-10"
5'-1"
13'-6"
4.0
4.2
18'-7"
5.2
5.7
23'-8"
6.3
6.9
28'-9"
7.4
8.2
42"
4'-5"
3'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
2'-4"
1'-11"
6'-0"
6.4
6.7
21'-3"
8.3
8.9
27'-3"
10.2
11.2
33'-3"
12.3
13.4
48"
4'-11"
3'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
2'-10"
1'-11"
6'-9"
16'-9"
7.7
8.1
23'-6"
10.0
10.8
30'-3"
12.3
13.5
37'-0"
14.5
16.2
54"
5'-6"
3'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
3'-6"
2'-0"
7'-8"
18'-6"
9.5
10.1
26'-2"
12.4
13.5
33'-10"
15.3
17.0
41'-6"
18.2
20.4
60"
6'-0"
3'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
4'-0"
2'-0"
8'-6"
20'-0"
11.0
11.7
28'-6"
14.4
15.8
37'-0"
17.8
19.8
45'-6"
21.1
23.8
66"
6'-7"
3'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
4'-8"
2'-1"
9'-3"
13.2
14.1
31'-0"
17.2
18.9
40'-3"
21.2
23.7
72"
7'-1"
3'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
5'-2"
2'-1"
10'-0"
15.0
16.0
33'-3"
19.4
21.4
43'-3"
23.9
26.8
78"
7'-8"
3'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
5'-10"
2'-2"
10'-9"
17.5
18.7
35'-9"
22.6
25.0
46'-6"
27.8
31.3
84"
8'-2"
3'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
6'-4"
2'-2"
11'-8"
19.5
20.9
38'-2"
25.3
28.1
49'-10"
31.1
35.2
15'-3"
21'-9"
23'-3"
25'-0"
26'-6"
14'-5"
RIPRAP CY
L
CP
17'-1"
20'-6"
49'-6"
25.1
28.5
53'-3"
28.3
32.3
57'-3"
32.9
37.6
36.9
42.4
61'-6"
12/3/2015
GENERAL NOTES
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
1. Straight sand-cement endwalls are intended for use outside the clear zone.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STRAIGHT SAND-CEMENT ENDWALS
NO.
258
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Location Reference
A
8"
2"
11
2"
1
2"
Bars E
Bar H
Grate Bars
4"
F. L.
Bars V
1
2"
3'
1" Or 1
20"
Bars H
4 Bars F
1' Std. Spcg.
45
16"
Cross Bar
Bar H
Bars V
Bars V
1' Std.
6"
'
D'
Bar H
(As Reqd.)
Bar H
'
(As Reqd.)
Bar H
Bar E
'
D
'
D'
+ 6"
31
2"
6"
'
D'
Bar H
Weld
11
1'Std.
1
2"
2"
1:
4
1'
-0"
Unit Only
Bar C
11
Bar H
SIDE VIEW
1
2"
8"
For Bottom Grate

2"
1"
Bar C
2"
Place On Topside
6"
'D'
6"
2"
4"
1:
6
2'-6"
Bar H
Bar E
Bars H
6" Spcg.
(U-Bends)
1
2"
6"
Bars F
SECTION BB
2"
TOP VIEW
8"
GRATE TYPE NO. 1
3
4"
Bar C (Top)
(Side & Bottom)
Bar E
6"
Grate
Bar H Over Bars H H & H
Bars V
Grate
END VIEW
Pipe Size
Bars Reqd.
(lb)
28.93
15"
SECTION AA
B
All
1
bars 2"
Bars H
'
D'
Bars to be evenly spaced across dimension 'D'

x 2"
Bars V
6"
1.33'
1
2
Offset
1" Or 1
Bar E
Bars F
See Grate Details
Place On Topside
Slope
'
D'
Grate Bars
5.67'
2.38'
Sodding (SY)
(CY)
(lb)
Type No. 1
Type No. 2
Grate Wt. (lb)
Offset
0.85
56
57.86
15
4.2'
42'
18"
6.67'
1.875'
1.01
73
101.08
16
4.8'
48'
Butt Ends Of
24"
8.67'
1.875'
1.65
97
174.52
19
5.8'
58'
Adjacent Grates
30"
10.67'
1.875'
2.33
129
267.75
21
6.9'
69'
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
Varies
1
2"
1:4
15"
Slope Transition
Total
Shoulder Line
3
4"
TABLE OF DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES

Class I Conc. Reinf. Steel Number Of Grates Reqd.
Pipe Size
1
2"
SIDE VIEW
1
2"
6"
Unit Only
W all
2"
For Bottom Grate
Weld
1:4
TOP VIEW
L= Length of Transition
2'
1:6
GENERAL NOTES
1. This endwall is to be used only in the clear zone for the drainage of medians and other areas having low design velocities and
Chain (Approx. 16
negligible debris.
Links) & 1 Cold Shut.

Cross Bar
For Security Purpose
1
2"
3
16
D itch
Use Two Chains If Needed

2. Reinforcing steel: All bars are size #4. Spacings shown are center to center. Laps to be 12" minimum. Clearance is 2" except as
noted. Square welded wire fabric (two cages max.) having an equivalent cross sectional area (0.20 sq. in.) may be substituted for bar
Bottom
5
16"
reinforcement.
FRONT SL
OPE
1
2"
3. Grates shall be ASTM A242/A242M, A572/A572M or ASTM A5888/A588M, Grade 50 steel. When "Alt. G" grates are specified in the
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
GRATE TYPE NO. 2
GRATE, SEAT,
plans, grates shall be galvanized in accordance with Section 975 and 425.3.2 of the Standard Specifications.
TRANSI
TI
ON AT ENDWAL
L
4. Endwall to be paid for under the contract unit price for U-Endwall, Each. Payment shall include cost of concrete, reinforcing steel,
Grate
Bars Reqd.
(lb)
Pipe Size
18"
33.69
24"
43.63
30"
53.55
WELD & CHAIN DETAIL

5. Sod slopes 5' each side and above endwall. Sodding to be paid for under contract unit price for Performance Turf, SY.
6. Precasting of this endwall will be permitted. Precast units shall conform to the dimensions shown or in accordance with approved
Bars to be evenly spaced across dimension 'D'.

All bars
1
2"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
x 2".
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
31:
55 AM
grate, and accessories. Quantities shown are for estimating purposes only.
Grate
shop drawings. Request for shop drawing approval shall be directed to the State Drainage Engineer. Use Index No. 201 for opening
and grouting details.
7. Concrete shall be Class I except ASTM C478 (4000 psi) concrete may be substituted for precast items manufactured in plants meeting
the requirements of Section 449 of the Specifications.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
U-TYPE CONCRETE ENDWALLS WITH GRATES
DESIGN STANDARDS
15" TO 30" PIPE
NO.
260
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
10"
8"
8"
Loc. Ref.
2'
-0"
C
Y Baffle
8"
8"
10"
812"
Loc. Ref.
W
B
6"
Y Baffle
6"
6"
3'-0"
M in.
8"
M in.
3'-0"
2'
-0"
4"
6"
X Baffle
Permitted
8"
2'
-0"
Joint
Bars M
1
2D
X Baffle
Permitted
Construction
Bars N
4"
Joint
4"
Construction
8"
8"
END VIEW
SECTION AA
END VIEW
SECTION BB
L
10"
10"
6"
6"
6"
6"
PLAN
PLAN
DIMENSIONAL DETAILS
DIMENSIONAL DETAILS
GENERAL NOTES
12"
Bars V
Bars H
Bars V
Bars H
18"
24"
9:
09:
43 AM
30"
1.77
3.14
4.91
3.
All reinforcing No. 4 bars with 2" clearance except as noted.
4.
All angles, channels and bars shall be ASTM A242/A242M, A572/A572M

or A588/A588M Grade 50 steel. When designated Alternate G in the
plans galvanize in accordance with Section 975 and 425-3.2 of the
REINFORCING DETAIL
REINFORCING DETAIL
5.
Channel section C 3x6 may be substituted for C 4x5.4 channel.
6.
Precasting of this endwall will be permitted. Precast units shall

conform to the dimensions shown or in accordance with approved shop
DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES FOR ONE U-ENDWALL
drawings. Request for shop drawing approval shall be directed to the

L
Sq. Ft.
1.23
Bars V
ALL PIPE SIZES

SIDE VIEW AND BACKWALL SECTION
X Baffle
15"
Bars H
ALL PIPE SIZES

SIDE VIEW AND BACKWALL SECTION
Pipe Size
Area
When steel grating is required on endwall see Sheet 3 of 3 for
3"
Bars H
2.
18"
3"
Bars V
Baffles to be constructed only when called for in plans.
details.
12" 12"
18"
1.
5'-9"
6'-6"
8'-0"
9'-6"
1
2"
2'-3
2'-5"
2'-8"
2'-11"
3'-7"
3'-10"
4'-4"
4'-10"
2'-3"
2'-6"
3'-0"
3'-6"
1'-3"
1'-6"
2'-0"
2'-6"
2'-3"
2'-6"
3'-0"
3'-6"
Y Baffle
Class I
Reinf.
Reinf. Steel
Conc.
Steel
Cu. Yd.
Lbs.
1.61
72
15"
Bar M
Bar N
4"
4"
4"
2 #4
1 #4
4"
5"
5"
4"
5"
5"
5"
6"
7"
3 #4
4 #4
4 #4
2 #4
3 #4
4 #4
1.89
2.52
3.34
86
108
131
Pipe Size
18"
24"
30"
Area
Sq. Ft.
1.23
1.77
3.14
4.91
WITH BAFFLES
3'-3"
1
2"
1'-7
Class I
Reinf.
Conc.
Steel
Cu. Yd.
Lbs.
3'-7"
0.89
39
3'-9"
1
1'-10 2"
3'-10"
1.05
43
4'-9"
1
2'-4 2"
4'-4"
1.40
55
5'-9"
1
2'-10 2"
4'-10"
1.88
64
State Drainage Engineer. Use Index No. 201 for opening and grouting
details.
7.
be substituted for precast items manufactured in plants meeting the

requirements of Section 449 of the Specifications.
8.
9.
12/23/2015
Sodding shall be in accordance with Index No. 281, and paid for under
the contract unit price for Performance Turf, SY.
WITHOUT BAFFLES
ENDWALLS FOR 1:2 SLOPES
Concrete shall be Class I, except ASTM C478 (4000 psi) concrete may
Endwall to be paid for under the contract unit price for U-Endwall,
Each. Payment shall include cost of concrete, reinforcing steel, and
when called for in the plans, steel grating, baffles and accessories.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
Quantities shown are for estimating purposes only.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
U-TYPE CONCRETE ENDWALLS
DESIGN STANDARDS
BAFFLES & GRATE OPTIONAL 15" TO 30" PIPE
NO.
261
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
L+12"
18"
10"
12"
6"
D=3"
6"
Bars H
Bars V
Bars H
Bars V
Bars H
18"
D=3"
6"
Varies
3"
PE
8"PI
"AND 1
5
1
Field Bend
12" 12"
W-4"
PLAN
Loc. Ref.
Bars V
AGRAM
NG DI
BENDI
Bars V
Bars H
Bars V
10"
Bars H
12" For 1:6 Slope

11" For 1:4 Slope
10" For 1:3 Slope
3"
W
PE
"AND 30"PI
24
8"
8"
OPES
3 SL
:
1
Slope
Y Baffle
18"
H
6"
Bars M
X Baffle
4"
Q
X Baffle
3'-0"
PE
8"PI
"AND 1
5
1
18"
8"
END VIEW
M in.
Bars H
3"
6"
Bars V
Bars N
8"
Bars H
6"
4"
2'
-0"
12"
Bars V
Y Baffle
1
2D
4"
Construction Joint
Permitted
ON AA
SECTI
12" 12"
S
L
ONAL DETAI
MENSI
DI
DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES FOR BAFFLES

Bars V
Bars H
Bars V
Bars H
3"
Pipe
Size
D
PE
"AND 30"PI
24
OPES
4 SL
:
1
18"
Ybaffle Reinf.
Steel
X Baffle
P
Width
Q
R
Height Length
Bar M
Bar N
Class I
Concrete
Cu.Yd.
Reinf.
Steel
Lbs
15"
4"
4"
4"
2- #4
1- #4
18"
4"
4"
5"
3- #4
2- #4
24"
5"
5"
6"
4- #4
3- #4
12
30"
5"
5"
7"
4- #4
4- #4
16
12"
0.10
Bars V
Bars H

Bars V
3"
Bars H
PE
8"PI
"AND 1
5
1
11:
31:
57 AM
12" 12"
1 3
Bars H
1 4
Bars V
Bars H
3"
PE
"AND 30"PI
24
1 6
OPES
6 SL
:
1
Area
(Sq.Ft.)
15"
1.23
5'-3"
1'-9"
18"
1.77
6'-0"
2'-0"
24"
3.14
7'-6"
2'-6"
30"
4.91
9'-0"
3'-0"
15"
1.23
7'-4"
1'-10"
3'-7"
18"
1.77
8'-4"
2'-1"
3'-10"
24"
3.14
10'-4"
2'-7"
4'-4"
3'-6"
30"
4.91
12'-4"
3'-1"
4'-10"
4'-2"
4'-2"
15"
1.23
11'-6"
1'-11"
3'-7"
3'-10"
3'-10"
18"
1.77
13'-0"
2'-2"
3'-10"
4'-4"
4'-4"
24"
3.14
16'-0"
2'-8"
4'-4"
5'-4"
30"
4.91
19'-0"
3'-2"
4'-10"
6'-4"
18"
Bars V
Baffle Locations
(When Required)
Pipe Size
Rate Of
Slope
Class I Reinf.
Concrete Steel
Cu.Yd.
Lbs.
3'-7"
1'-9"
1'-9"
1'-9"
1.19
51
3'-10"
2'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
1.42
56
4'-4"
2'-6"
2'-6"
2'-6"
1.94
77
4'-10"
3'-0"
3'-0"
3'-0"
2.54
96
2'-6"
2'-6"
2'-4"
1.54
64
2'-10"
2'-10"
2'-8"
1.84
71
3'-6"
3'-4"
2.53
92
4'-0"
3.34
124
3'-10"
2.19
89
4'-4"
2.63
103
5'-4"
5'-4"
3.59
143
6'-4"
6'-4"
4.81
180
12/3/2015
ONS
L SECTI
EWS AND BACKWAL
DE VI
SI
OPES
6 SL
:
4 AND 1
:
3,1
:
ES FOR 1
THOUT BAFFL
TH AND WI
S WI
L
ENDWAL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
S
L
NG DETAI
NFORCI
REI
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
261
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
of C4 x 5.4
of C4 x 5.4
1
4"
934"
L
Of C4 x 5.4
2"
Hole
2"
1"
1
4"
x 6" Anchor Bolt
1'
1"
1
2"
1
2"
8"
5
8"
x 6" Anchor Bolt
M in.
Pipe
Channels Spaced at 1' c. to c.
934"
238"
5
8"
Hole
1'
1
2
C4 x 5.4
x 2 x
1
4
2" x
1
2"
Bar
SECTION AA
7
8"
Holes
ELEVATION
Bar 2" x
3
16
Dia.
1
2 2
x 2 x
2"
2"
Slope
of C4 x 5.4
1
4
1
2"
1
2
W
2"
8"
Bar 2" x
1
2"
G
2" x
BAR TO BAR WELD
1
2"
114"
Bars 2" x
1
2"
C4 x 5.4
7
8"
2"
Bar
3
8"
2 4"
W -4"
8"
Dia. Holes
PLAN
"D"
5
8"
x 6" Galv. Bolt
(4 Reqd.)
1
2"
Bar
6"
6"
3
16
2
1
2
x 2 x
2"
1
2
1
4
C4 x 5.4
ANCHOR BOLT DETAIL
CHANNEL TO ANGLE WELD
END VIEW
1
2"
Bar
1
4
2" x
F
5
8"
2" x
9
16"
x 2 x
1
4
C4 x 5.4
1
2"
C4 x 5.4
SECTION BB
MOUNTING FOR STEEL GRATE
BAR TO CHANNEL WELD
STEEL GRATE
TABLE OF DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES FOR ONE GRATE
STEEL GRATING USE CRITERIA

1. Provide positive debris control at all upgradient openings. Do not install
Rate
Size
Of
Pipe
Slope
2 Each Bars @
(X) Channels @
3.4 lb/ft
5.4 lb/ft
2 Angles @
3.62 lb/ft
Total
Weight
W-4"
lb
(X)
9'-3"
3'-3"
85
2' -6
10'-3"
3'-6"
94
2' -9
13'-3"
4'-0"
117
12
3' -3
(lb)
lb
lb
7
"
8
111
7'-4"
53
249
7
"
8
137
8'-4"
62
292
7
"
8
215
11'-4"
82
414
7
-9 8"
310
14'-4"
104
555
7
8"
70
4'-4"
32
167
7
8"
92
5'-4"
39
204
7
8"
144
7'-4"
53
287
7
-9 8"
206
9'-4"
68
381
grates unless one or more of the following conditions exist:
A. Pipe culvert endwalls are located within the designated clear zone.
B. Drainage area to culvert consists of median or infield areas or areas
15"
1:6
where debris and/or drift is negligible.
18"
24"
30"
1
"
2
2' -8
2'
1
-11 2"
1
"
2
3' -5
3'
1
-11 2"
16'-3"
4'-6"
141
15
3'
6'-3"
3'-3"
65
2' -6
7'-3"
3'-6"
73
2' -9
9'-3"
4'-0"
90
3' -3
C. Runoff to culvert is by sheet flow or in such ill defined channels that

debris transport is not considered a major problem.
15"
D. Runoff to culvert is minor except on an infrequent basis (10 to 15 year
1:4
18"
1
2"
2' -8
2'
1
-11 2"
frequency); for example a drainage basin in flat sandy terrain with

24"
11:
31:
58 AM
normally low ground water table.
30"
1
2"
3' -5
3'
1
-11 2"
11'-3"
4'-6"
107
4'-3"
3'-3"
51
10
3'
E. Areas where culvert blockage with resultant backwater would not seriously
affect roadway embankment, traffic operation or upland property.
15"
2. Steel grating to be used only where called for in plans.
1:3
18"
12/3/2015
24"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
30"
1
2"
2' -8
2'
1
-11 2"
1
2"
3' -5
3'
1
-11 2"
7
8"
2' -6
42
2'-4"
17
110
7
-9 8"
61
3'-4"
24
145
7
8"
90
4'-4"
31
191
145
6'-4"
46
278
5'-3"
3'-6"
60
2'
6'-3"
4'-0"
70
3' -3
8'-3"
4'-6"
87
3'
7
-9 8"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
261
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Fence Type B
When Called For

In Plans
1:1
1
2:1
Slope: 1
Dia.
(Typical)
n
W
Pipe
k
n
PLAN
Sand - Cement Riprap
PERSPECTIVE
Loc. Ref.
a
6"
GENERAL NOTES
Fill Slope Varies

4 x Dia. (Min.)
1. U-type concrete endwall energy dissipators are intended for use outside the clear zone.
Max. Physical
Slope On Pipe
2. Chamfer all exposed edges
3
4".
6"
3. Concrete shall be Class I, except ASTM C478 (4000 psi) concrete may be substituted for
c
precast items manufactured in plants meeting the requirements of Section 449 of the
Specifications.
24"
12"
1.
75D
3" Fillet
To Be 4:1
4. Reinforcing steel shall have 2" min. cover.
5. Endwall to be paid for under the contract unit price for Class I Concrete (Endwalls), CY and
SECTION EE
Layer Of Plastic Filter Fabric
Reinforcing Steel (Roadway), LB. Riprap to be paid for under the contract unit price for
(Cost To Be Included In Contract
Riprap (Sand-Cement) (Roadway), CY. Cost of plastic filter fabric to be included in the
Unit Price For Riprap)
contract unit price for riprap.
6. Fencing, when called for in the plans, to be paid for under the contract unit price for Fencing,
Type B, LF. See Index No. 802 for details of Type B fencing.
Pipe Size
Dimensions
Sand-Cement
Concrete
Reinf.
Area
(in)
(SF)
Feet - Inches
(Max)
Inches
Class I
Steel
(CY)
(lb)
(Nom.)
(cfs)
W
(CY)
1
2
6.72
736
1
2
10.34
1,072
13.6
1
2
14.82
1,429
17.5
1
2
10
20.36
2,000
22.1
10
27.19
2,659
27.2
1
2
11
34.49
3,552
32.5
1
2
12
42.82
4,472
38.3
1
2
12
50.68
5,426
44.5
30
4.91
59
9-0
6-3
10-8
4-7
6-1
3-4
1-4
1-2
2-6
3-0
1-11
36
7.07
85
10-5
7-3
12-4
5-3
7-1
3-10
1-7
1-3
3-0
3-6
2-3
42
9.62
115
11-10
8-0
14-0
6-0
8-0
4-5
1-9
1-6
3-0
3-11
2-6
48
12.57
151
13-3
9-0
15-8
6-9
8-11
4-11
2-0
1-7
3-0
4-5
2-10
54
15.90
191
14-8
9-9
17-4
7-4
10-0
5-5
2-2
1-10
3-0
4-11
3-0
10
10
1
2
60
13.63
236
16-1
10-9
19-0
8-0
11-0
5-11
2-5
1-11
3-0
5-4
3-4
11
11
66
23.76
285
17-3
11-6
20-6
8-8
11-10
6-5
2-7
2-1
3-0
5-9
3-7
12
12
72
28.27
339
18-6
12-3
22-0
9-3
12-9
6-11
2-9
2-3
3-0
6-2
3-9
12
12
10.6
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
31:
59 AM
Riprap
Dia.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
U-TYPE CONCRETE ENDWALL
DESIGN STANDARDS
ENERGY DISSIPATOR 30" TO 72" PIPE
NO.
264
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
#4 Bars B @ 1'-6"
#4 Bars D @ 1'-6"
D @ 1'-6"
Bars B @ 1'-6"
Note: Bars C & C (N.S. & F.S.)

equivalent in size to C
#4 Bars B @ 1'-6"
#4 Bars A @ 1'-6"
#4 Bars
(cut and bend as required)
#4 Bars
B @ 1'-6"
Bars C
#4 Bars
#4 Bars
D @ 1'-6"
D @ 1'-0"
#4 Bars A @ 1'-6"
SECTION AA
B @ 1'-6"
4 Bars B
Pipe Dia.
s
Steel In Top Of Slab
#4 Bar A
#4 Bar A
m
C
#4 Bars B @ 1'-6"
#4 Bars D @ 1'-6"
Bars C
#4 Bars D @ 1'-6"
Bars C (N.S.)
#4 Bars
t
#4 Bars
B @ 1'-6"
#4 Bars
D @ 1'-0"
Bars A
#4 Bars A
#4 Bars
#4 Bar A
Bars A
Bars C (F.S.)
B @ 1'-6"
Steel In Bottom Of Slab
ia
.
D
2" Typ.
#4 Bars
P
ip
e
H
a
D @ 1'-0"(N.S.)
D @ 1'-0" (F.S.)
n
Bars A
Bars A
#4 Bar A
#4 Bars
Bars A
45
45
#4 Bars B @ 1'-6"
Construction Joint
3d
Bars A
PLAN
Bars C
Bars B @ 1'-6"
Bars D
Bars C
Bars A
4"
e-4"
m-4"
D, C
#4 Bars B
6"
A
2'
-0"
#4 Bars
D @ 1'-0"
B
2d+9"
#4 Bars B @ 1'-6"
#4 Bars
Bars: C, D, D, D, D
D @ 1'-0"
#4 Bars
B @ 1'-6"
9:
10:
04 AM
#4 Bars B @ 1'-6"
p+k+18"
C
C
W-4"
#4 Bars
D @ 1'-6"
Bar C
12/23/2015
SECTION BB
Size
Spacing
Size
Spacing
Size
Spacing
Size
Spacing
Size
Spacing
Size
Spacing
(No.)
(Ft.-In.)
(No.)
(Ft.-In.)
(No.)
(Ft.-In.)
(No.)
(Ft.-In.)
(No.)
(Ft.-In.)
(No.)
(Ft.-In.)
30"
1
0-9 2
1-6
0-11
1
0-9 2
1
0-5 2
36"
1-0
1-6
0-10
1-0
0-5
1-0
42"
0-11
1-6
1-1
0-11
0-6
0-11
48"
0-9
1
2
1-0
1-0
0-9
1
2
0-6
0-9
54"
0-8
1
2
0-10
1-1
0-8
1
2
0-6
0-8
60"
0-10
1-1
1-0
0-10
0-6
0-10
66"
1
0-8 2
1
0-11 2
0-11
1
0-8 2
1
0-5 2
0-8
72"
0-7
1
2
0-10
0-10
0-7
1
2
0-5
0-7
Size
Pipe
Pipe Dia.
BENT BARS TABLE
g-4"
12"
p+k+18"
@ 1'-6"
#4 Bars D @ 1'-6"
SECTION DD
D
, D
Varies
Fill Slope
SECTION CC
Bars B @ 1'-6"
1
2
1
2
1
2
0-9
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
Note: Bars A2 , A
, A
, A
, A
, B
, B
, B
, B
, B are straight bars.
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
Note: All bar dimensions are out to out.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
BENDING DIAGRAM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
U-TYPE CONCRETE ENDWALL
DESIGN STANDARDS
ENERGY DISSIPATOR 30" TO 72" PIPE
NO.
264
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Loc. Ref.
Loc. Ref.
5'
5'
G
Slope
10"
20"
20"
Slope
10"
Front Slope
1'
Front Slope
1'
20"
5"
20"
Transition
5"
Transition
Steel Tie Bar
10"
4"
4"
1'-6"
SECTION RR
FRONT ELEVATION
4
"
End Only
9"
10"
D+1'-0"
4"
SECTION NN
45
1
0
"
10"
4"
6"
6"
For Outlet
F+9"
Steel Tie Bar
Length of Culvert
Length of Culvert
4
"
9"
Steel Tie Bar
FRONT ELEVATION
Steel Tie Bar
PLAN
PLAN
VERTS
PE CUL
NGS FOR PI
TYPE WI
TH UL WI
CONCRETE ENDWAL
VERTS
PE CUL
NGS FOR PI
WI
5
TH 4
L WI
CONCRETE ENDWAL
TABLE OF DIMENSIONS AND ESTIMATED QUANTITIES
TABLE OF DIMENSIONS AND ESTIMATED QUANTITIES
PIPE CULVERT ENDWALLS WITH U-TYPE WINGS
PIPE CULVERT ENDWALLS WITH 45 WINGS
DIMENSIONS
Opening
QUANTITIES IN ONE ENDWALL
Wall
Footing
DIMENSIONS
Concrete, Class I, Total (CY)
Opening
QUANTITIES IN ONE ENDWALL

Footing
Wall
Concrete, Class I
Steel
RCP
Area
D
CMP
CIP
(ft)
Inlet
Outlet
Inlet
Outlet
Inlet
0.8
3'-8"
2'-0"
1'-0"
1'-3"
2'-2"
0.48
0.55
0.49
0.57
0.49
0.57
none
1.2
3'-11"
2'-3"
1'-5"
1'-3"
2'-7"
0.59
0.67
0.62
0.70
0.61
0.70
none
18"
1.8
4'-2"
2'-6"
1'-9"
1'-3"
2'-11"
0.70
0.79
0.74
0.82
0.74
0.82
none
24"
3.1
4'-8"
3'-0"
2'-6"
1'-6"
3'-8"
1.01
1.11
1.06
1.16
1.06
1.16
2-#6 Bars x 2'-0"
30"
4.9
5'-2"
3'-6"
3'-3"
1'-6"
4'-5"
1.33
1.44
1.41
1.51
1.40
1.51
2-#6 Bars x 2'-0"
36"
7.1
5'-8"
4'-0"
4'-0"
1'-9"
5'-2"
1.73
1.85
1.84
1.96
1.82
1.94
2-#6 Bars x 2'-6"
48"
12.6
6'-2"
6'-8"
4'-6"
5'-0"
4'-9"
5'-6"
2'-0"
2'-0"
5'-11"
6'-8"
2.19
2.64
2.32
2.78
2.32
2.81
2.45
2.95
2-#6 Bars x 2'-6"

2-#6 Bars x 3'-0"
Steel Tie Bars
(ft)
15"
9.6
Outlet
12"
42"
Total (CY)
Area
Tie Bars
RCP
CMP
CIP
15"
1.2
2'-3"
3'-7"
1'-0"
1'-3"
1'-3"
0.56
0.59
0.59
none
18"
1.8
2'-6"
3'-10"
1'-2"
1'-7"
1'-3"
0.74
0.77
0.77
none
24"
3.1
3'-0"
4'-4"
1'-5"
2'-1"
1'-4"
1.01
1.06
1.06
2 -#6 Bars x 2'-0"
30"
4.9
3'-6"
4'-10"
1'-9"
2'-5"
1'-6"
1.32
1.40
1.39
2 -#6 Bars x 2'-0"
36"
7.1
4'-0"
5'-4"
2'-0"
2'-11"
1'-8"
1.72
1.83
1.82
2 -#6 Bars x 2'-6"
42"
9.6
4'-6"
5'-10"
2'-3"
3'-6"
2'-0"
2.34
2.47
2 -#6 Bars x 2'-6"
48"
12.6
5'-0"
6'-4"
2'-6"
4'-0"
2'-0"
2.74
2.90
2 -#6 Bars x 2'-6"
GENERAL NOTES
1. Winged concrete endwalls are intended for use outside the clear zone.
2. Chamfer all exposed edges
3
4".
11:
32:
01 AM
3. Concrete shall be Class I, except ASTM C478 (4000 psi) Concrete may be
substituted for precast items manufactured in plants meeting the
requirements of Section 449 of the Specifications.
12/3/2015
4. Endwall to be paid for under the contract unit price for Class I Concrete.
5. Sodding to be in accordance with Index No. 281, and paid for under the
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
contract unit price for Performance Turf, SY.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WINGED CONCRETE ENDWALLS SINGLE ROUND PIPE
NO.
266
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
6"
M in.
Arch Span+2'
12"
12"
12"
Arch
ON AA
SECTI
A
B
A
D
9"
ON BB
SECTI
12"
12"
Min.
6"
12"
Min.
6"
9"
Span
12"
6"
Arch
Rise
12"
ON DD
SECTI
ON CC
SECTI
C
E
D
Place Plastic Filter Fabric Type

D-4 (See Specifications
Location
Section 985) Around And Below
Reference
12"
Sand-Cement Riprap. Cost Of
Toe Of Slope
Fill Slope
6"
M in.
Fabric To Be Included In Cost
Toe Of Slope
C
SOMETRI
I
12"
12"
Of Sand-Cement Riprap
C
SOMETRI
I
24"
12"
GENERAL NOTES
6" M in.
Outside Dia.
Of Pipe +2'
12"
ON EE
SECTI
1. U-Type Sand-Cement Endwalls Are

Intended For Use Outside The Clear Zone.
12"
12"
DETAILS FOR SINGLE METAL PIPE ARCH CULVERTS
12"
9"
Dia.
Min.
6"
Dia.
Pipe
DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES FOR METAL PIPE ARCH CULVERTS
12"
Pipe
NOTE: For multiple metal pipe arch culvert spacing between arch centers=X
Quantity Of Sand-Cement Riprap

Dimensions
In Cu. Yds. For One Endwall
ON AA
SECTI
Span
ON BB
SECTI
Rise
Y
For 1:2 Slopes
Min.
12"
6"
9"
ON CC
SECTI
ON DD
SECTI
12"
Grout Fill The Lower Two-Thirds
6"
M in.
Fill Slope
1-Arch
2-Arch
3-Arch
4-Arch
4-Arch
1-Arch
2-Arch
3-Arch
2'-6"
6'-6"
9'-0"
11'-6"
14'-0"
1'-7"
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
1.5
2.2
2.9
3.6
21"
15"
2'-10"
7'-6"
10'-4"
13'-2"
16'-0"
1'-9"
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.0
1.9
2.7
3.5
4.3
28"
20"
3'-5"
9'-3"
12'-8"
16'-1"
19'-6"
2'-0"
1.7
2.5
3.3
4.1
2.6
3.7
4.8
5.9
35"
24"
4'-0"
11'-0"
15'-0"
19'-0"
23'-0"
2'-0"
2.2
3.1
4.0
4.9
3.4
4.7
6.0
7.3
42"
29"
4'-9"
12'-9"
17'-6"
22'-3"
27'-0"
2'-0"
2.9
4.1
5.3
6.5
4.5
6.1
7.7
9.3
49"
33"
5'-6"
14'-6"
20'-0"
25'-6"
31'-0"
2'-0"
3.5
4.9
6.3
7.7
5.5
7.4
9.3
11.2
57"
38"
6'-4"
16'-6"
22'-10"
29'-2"
35'-6"
2'-0"
4.4
6.1
7.8
9.5
6.9
9.2
11.5
13.8
64"
43"
7'-1"
18'-3"
25'-4"
32'-5"
39'-6"
2'-0"
5.1
7.0
8.9
10.8
8.1
10.7
13.3
15.9
71"
47"
7'-10"
20'-0"
27'-10"
35'-8"
43'-6"
2'-0"
5.9
8.1
10.3
12.5
9.5
12.4
15.3
18.2
Quantity Of Sand-Cement Riprap

Dimensions
In Cu. Yds. For One Endwall
Y
6"
Dia.
For 1:2 Slopes
For 1:4 Slopes
12"
3-Pipes
4-Pipes
15"
2'-7"
7'-0"
9'-7"
12'-2"
14'-9"
1.2
1.6
2.1
2.6
1.7
2.4
3.0
3.6
18"
2'-10"
8'-0"
10'-10"
13'-8"
16'-6"
1.4
2.0
2.6
3.1
2.1
2.9
3.7
4.4
24"
3'-5"
10'-0'
13'-5"
16'-10"
20'-3"
1.9
2.7
3.5
4.3
2.9
4.0
5.1
6.3
30"
4'-3"
12'-0"
16'-3"
20'-6"
24'-9"
2.5
3.6
4.8
5.9
3.8
5.4
7.0
8.6
36"
5'-1"
14'-0"
19'-1"
24'-2"
3.1
4.6
6.2
7.7
4.8
7.0
9.2
11.4
42"
6'-0"
16'-0"
22'-0"
28'-0"
34'-0"
3.8
5.8
7.7
9.7
6.0
8.8
11.7
14.5
48"
6'-9"
18'-0"
24'-9"
31'-6"
38'-3"
4.5
7.0
9.4
11.8
7.2
10.8
14.3
17.9
54"
7'-8"
20'-0"
27'-8"
35'-4"
43'-0"
5.3
8.3
11.3
14.2
8.5
12.9
17.3
21.7
60"
8'-6"
22'-0"
30'-6"
39'-0"
47'-6"
6.2
9.7
13.3
16.9
10.0
15.3
20.6
25.9
24"
985) Around And Below

Sand-Cement Riprap. Cost Of
Fabric To Be Included In Cost Of
4-Arch
13"
24"
12"
3-Arch
Pipe
D-4 (See Specifications Section
11:
32:
02 AM
2-Arch
DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES FOR ROUND PIPE CULVERTS
Place Plastic Filter Fabric Type
ON EE
SECTI
Sand-Cement Riprap
VERT
PE CUL
E PI
NGL
L FOR SI
DETAI
12/3/2015
1-Arch
17"
Circumference Of End Of Pipe
12"
For 1:4 Slopes
12"
6"
12"
1-Pipe
2-Pipes
3-Pipes
4-Pipes
1-Pipe
2-Pipes
3-Pipes
4-Pipes
1-Pipe
2-Pipes
29'-3"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
Note: For multiple pipe culvert spacing between pipe centers=X
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
U-TYPE SAND-CONCRETE ENDWALLS
NO.
268
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
BELL
Spigot On Inlet
REINF.
DIA.
Section Bell On
R 1
R 2
FLAT
(in /ft)
(lb)
CLASS I CONC
Spigot
Straight Flare
12"
Shown)
Optional Shape
Dia.
2
a.
i
D
6'-1"
2'-6"
1
2"
9"
2'-3"
3'-10"
6'-1"
3'-0"
1
4"
9"
2'-11"
3'-2"
6'-1"
3'-6"
1
2"
2'-6"
0.07
27"
0.148
30"
1
2"
0.148
4"
1
2"
5"
1
2"
6"
1
2"
7"
2"
1
2"
4'-0"
3"
3
4"
4'-0"
1
6'-1 2"
4'-6"
3
4"
5'-0"
3
4"
6'-0"
10
5
16"
12
24
29"
5
8"
31
3
16"
33
36"
4'-6"
1'-7
1'-3"
5'-3"
2'-10
3
4"
1'-9"
5'-3"
2'-11"
8'-2"
6'-6"
53
1
4"
2'-0"
6'-0"
2'-2"
8'-2"
7'-0"
56
3
4"
2'-3"
5'-5"
2'-11"
8'-4"
7'-6"
65
2'-6"
5'-0"
3'-3"
8'-3"
8'-0"
72
2'-0"
6'-6"
1'-9"
8'-3"
8'-6"
2'-0"
6'-6"
1'-9"
8'-3"
9'-0"
0.148
0.174
5"
1
2"
6"
3
4"
6'-1
15
16"
19
1'-0"
0.148
0.174
1
2"
6'-1
1
2'-1 2"
2'-0"
1
2"
0.174
3'-7
1
10 2"
0.148
0.174
1
2"
1
2 2"
6'-0
8'-1
37"
13
16"
47
1
8"
9"
1
2"
11"
1
2"
12"
1
8"
13"
13
16"
14"
1
14 2"
15
16
16
9
18 16"
740
12"
.07
4"
990
15"
.11
4"
1280
15"
.12
1
2"
1520
18"
.17
1
2"
1930
18"
.19
20"
1
2"
22"
1
2"
22"
1
8"
24"
11
16"
24"
1
8"
24"
15
16"
24"
28
1
2"
33
13
16"
.06
1
2"
15"
27
77
12"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
530
5
16"
18
24
7
8"
72"
1
2"
36
36
38
5"
2190
21"
.24
1
2"
4100
21"
.29
1
2"
5380
24"
.36
3
4"
6550
24"
.39
1
4"
8040
24"
.42
3
4"
8750
24"
.44
1
4"
10630
24"
.47
3
4"
12520
24"
.50
"R
1 2
72"
3'-10"
1
3 4"
66"
2'-3"
0.07
3"
60"
6"
3
4"
24"
54"
4'-0
7
8"
2'-0"
0.07
21"
(CY)
7
8"
4"
1
2"
48"
0.07
18"
42"
1
2"
0.07
1
4"
36"
2"
15"
T
TOE WALL
WEIGHT
Or
Cylindrical For
Outlet Section
(Outlet Section
GENERAL NOTES
T
1. Flared end sections shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C76 with the exception that dimensions and
PLAN
Loc. Ref.
reinforcement shall be as prescribed in the table above. Circumferential reinforcement may consist of either one cage
Toe Wall
or two cages of steel. Fiber-reinforced concrete may be substituted for conventional reinforcement in accordance with
E
Structures Design Guidelines, Section 3.17. Compressive strength of concrete shall be 4000 psi. Shop drawings for
flared end sections having fiber reinforcing or dimensions other than above must be submitted for approval to the
OPTIONAL SHAPE
State Drainage Engineer.
2. Connections between the flared end section and the pipe culvert may be any of the following types unless otherwise
Dia.
+ 1"
a. Joints meeting the requirements of Section 449 of the Standard Specifications (O-Ring Gasket). Flared end section
joint dimensions and tolerances shall be identical or compatible to those used in the pipe culvert joint. When pipe
culvert and flared end section manufacturers are different, the compatibility of joint designs shall be certified to
by the manufacturer of the flared end sections.
"R
1 2
Optional Shape Only
a.
i
D
Dia.
shown on the plans.
b. Joints sealed with preformed plastic gaskets. The gaskets shall meet the requirements of Section 942-2 of the
Standard Specifications and the minimum sizes for gaskets shall be as that specified for equivalent sizes of
Toe Wall
h/2
elliptical
pipe.
Toe Wall
8"
SECTION AA
2 #4 Bars
STRAIGHT FLARE
SECTION BB
plans, the pipe shall be bituminous coated in the jacketed area as specified on Index No. 280. Bituminous coating
to be included in the contract unit price for the pipe culvert. Concrete jacket shall be as specified on Index No.
280. Cost of concrete and reinforcement shall be included in the contract unit price for the pipe culvert.
FLARED END SECTION
24" For 30" To 72" Pipe
c. Reinforced concrete jackets, as detailed on this drawing. Cost of the reinforced concrete jacket to be included in
the contract unit price for the flared end section. When non-coated corrugated metal pipe is called for in the
Min.
3. Toe walls shall be constructed when shown on the plans or at locations designated by the Engineer. Toe walls are to
3"
12" For 15" To 24" Pipe
Any Wire Mesh Arrangement Which Provides
be cast-in-place with Class I Concrete and paid for under the contract unit price for Flared End Section (Concrete),
0.126 Square Inches Of Steel Area Per Linear
EA. Reinforcing steel shall also be included in the cost of the Flared End Section (Concrete), EA.
Foot Both Ways May Be Used; Provided The

Wires Are Spaced A Minimum Of 2" And/Or
A Maximum Of 6" On Centers.
4. On skewed pipe culverts the flared end sections shall be placed in line with the pipe culvert. Side slopes shall be
warped as required to fit the flared end sections.
5. Flared End Section to be paid for under the contract unit price for Flared End Section (Concrete), EA. Sodding shall be
Pipe
in accordance with Index No. 281, and paid for under the contract unit price for Performance Turf, SY.
(Concrete
Flared End
Pipe Shown)
DESIGN NOTES
1. Flared end sections are intended for use outside the clear zone on median drain and cross drain installation, except
3"
that flared end sections for pipe sizes 12" and 15" are permitted within the clear zone. When the slope intersection
permits, 12" and 15" flared end sections may be located with the culvert opening as close as 8' beyond the outside
11:
32:
03 AM
6"
edge of the shoulder. Flared end sections are not intended for side drain installations.
2. Reinforced concrete jackets shall be used at all locations where high velocities and/or highly erosive soils may cause
SECTION CC
disjointing. These locations are to be shown on the plans.
3. Toe walls shall be used whenever the anticipated velocity of discharge and soil type are such that erosive action
END VIEW
12/3/2015
would occur. Toe walls are not required where ditch pavement is provided, except when disjointing would occur if the
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
REINFORCED CONCRETE JACKET DETAIL
ditch pavement should fail.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FLARED END SECTION
NO.
270
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
DIMENSIONS
AND
QUANTITIES
5 2" CONCRETE SLAB (CY)
1
M
E
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
SODDING (SY)
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
30
See General Note No. 5.

See Sheet 5 For 3" Slab Quantities
15"
2'-7"
1.92'
2.18'
4.10'
2.06'
5'
1.22'
2.9'
4.63'
7.21'
9.79'
12.37'
1.19'
0.38
0.58
0.77
0.96
21
24
27
18"
2'-10"
1.97'
2.74'
4.71'
2.56'
6'
1.41'
3.4'
4.92'
7.75'
10.58'
13.42'
1.21'
0.44
0.65
0.87
1.09
22
25
28
31
24"
3'-5"
2.06'
3.85'
5.91'
3.56'
7'
1.73'
3.4'
5.50'
8.92'
12.33'
15.75'
1.25'
0.54
0.83
1.12
1.42
24
28
32
35
30"
4'-3"
2.15'
4.95'
7.10'
4.56'
8'
2.00'
3.4'
6.08'
10.33'
14.58'
18.83'
1.29'
0.66
1.09
1.50
1.91
26
31
35
40
36"
5'-1"
2.25'
6.08'
8.33'
5.56'
9'
2.24'
3.4'
6.67'
11.75'
16.83'
21.92'
1.33'
0.81
1.38
1.95
2.51
28
34
39
45
42"
6'-0"
2.34'
7.21'
9.55'
6.56'
10'
2.45'
3.4'
7.25'
13.25'
19.25'
25.25'
1.38'
0.97
1.70
2.45
3.19
30
37
43
50
48"
6'-9"
2.43'
8.33'
10.76'
7.56'
11'
2.65'
3.4'
7.83'
14.58'
21.33'
28.08'
1.42'
1.13
2.04
2.93
3.84
32
39
47
54
54"
7'-8"
2.52'
9.44'
11.96'
8.56'
12'
2.83'
3.4'
8.42'
16.08'
23.75'
31.42'
1.46'
1.31
2.44
3.58
4.72
34
42
51
59
60"
8'-6"
2.62'
10.56'
13.18'
9.56'
3.00'
4.4'
9.00'
17.50'
26.00'
34.50'
1.50'
1.51
2.89
4.28
5.68
36
45
55
64
66"
9'-2"
2.71'
11.68'
14.39'
10.56'
15'
3.18'
4.4'
9.58'
18.75'
27.92'
37.08'
1.54'
1.68
3.25
4.84
6.43
38
48
58
68
72"
10'-0"
2.80'
12.80'
15.60'
11.56'
16'
3.30'
4.4'
10.16'
20.16'
30.16'
40.16'
1.58'
1.89
3.74
5.59
7.45
40
51
62
73
15"
2'-7"
2.27'
4.09'
6.36'
4.03'
8'
1.22'
4.0'
4.63'
7.21'
9.79'
12.37'
1.19'
0.57
0.87
1.15
1.44
23
26
29
32
18"
2'-10"
2.36'
5.12'
7.48'
5.03'
9'
1.41'
4.0'
4.92'
7.75'
10.58'
13.42'
1.21'
0.66
0.99
1.31
1.65
25
28
31
35
6.42'
24"
3'-5"
2.53'
7.18'
9.71'
7.03'
11'
1.73'
4.0'
5.50'
8.92'
12.33'
15.75'
1.25'
0.85
1.30
1.75
2.20
28
32
36
40
30"
4'-3"
2.70'
9.25'
9.03'
13'
2.00'
4.0'
6.08'
10.33'
14.58'
18.83'
1.29'
1.10
1.74
2.39
3.05
31
36
41
46
36"
5'-1"
2.87' 11.31'
14.18'
11.03'
15'
2.24'
4.0'
6.67'
11.75'
16.83'
21.92'
1.33'
1.32
2.21
3.08
3.96
34
40
46
52
42"
6'-0"
3.05'
13.37'
16.42'
13.03'
17'
2.45'
4.0'
7.25'
13.25'
19.25'
25.25'
1.38'
1.58
2.76
3.91
5.09
38
44
51
58
48"
6'-9"
3.22'
15.43'
18.65'
15.03'
19'
2.65'
4.0'
7.83'
14.58'
21.33'
28.08'
1.42'
1.85
3.30
4.73
6.17
41
48
56
63
54"
7'-8"
3.39'
17.49'
20.88'
17.03'
21'
2.83'
4.0'
8.42'
16.08'
23.75'
31.42'
1.46'
2.14
3.95
5.77
7.58
44
52
61
69
60"
8'-6"
3.56'
19.55'
23.11'
19.03'
23'
3.00'
4.0'
9.00'
17.50'
26.00'
34.50'
1.50'
2.45
4.66
6.87
9.07
47
56
66
75
66"
9'-2"
3.73'
21.62'
25.35'
21.03'
25'
3.18'
4.0'
9.58'
18.75'
27.92'
37.08'
1.54'
2.88
5.54
8.18
10.84
49
59
69
80
72"
10'-0"
3.91'
23.68'
27.59'
23.03'
27'
3.30'
4.0'
10.16'
20.16'
30.16'
40.16'
1.58'
3.54
6.61
9.87
13.13
52
63
74
85
11.95'
Sod
14'
Beveled Or Round Corners
1'
Dimensions permitted to allow

use of 8' standard pipe lengths.
10.40'
10.10'
Dimensions permitted to allow

use of 12' standard pipe lengths.
Concrete slab shall be deepened to form bridge

across crown of pipe. See section below.
1'
1.
5'
1'
1
.5
'
R
G
G
Sod
*Slope: 1:4 Miter: To Pipe For Pipes 18" And Smaller.

Loc. Ref.
1:2 For Pipes 24" And Larger.
1.
5'
TOP-VIEW SINGLE PIPE
5'S
Sl
o
d
o
pe
Var
i
es
Gen
S
er
ee
al
No
t
es
No
1
s
.3
3" Or 5 2"
& 4
Deepen Around Outside
1
2"
E
6.25'
Reinforced With WWF 6x6-WI.4xWI.4
Edge Of Pipe For 5
and are for information only.
D
M
Thick,
5'
1
2"
Concrete Slab, 3" Or 5
Values shown for estimating pipe quantities
Above
1'
1.
5'
W idth 6"
1.
5'
Sod
1
.5
'
Above
W idth 6"
1:4
Slope
5'
Slope
5'
1:2
1:2 Miter: To Pipe For Pipes 18" And Smaller.

1:
4o
r1
:
2
Slab
1
2"
Thick,
5'
Sod
Concrete Pipe
Connector
*
es
ri
Va
TOP-VIEW MULTIPLE PIPE
2'
6"
11:
32:
04 AM
Saddle
Side Ditch Grade
6"
Not < Than D

#4 Bar
No Pipe Joint Permitted
6"
5' Sod
NOTE: See sheet 6 for details and notes.
Unless Approved By The Engineer
12/3/2015
Paid For As
F (Pipe To Be Included Under Unit
Pipe Culvert
Price For Mitered End Section)
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE ROUND CONCRETE PIPE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/02
REVISIO N
SECTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CROSS DRAIN MITERED END SECTION
NO.
272
SHEET
NO.
1of 6
DIMENSIONS
AND
QUANTITIES
1
M
D
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
SODDING (SY)
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
29
15"
2'-7"
2.5'
1.68'
4.18'
1.5'
5.0'
1.23'
3.5'
4.33'
6.92'
9.50'
12.08'
1.04'
0.35
0.54
0.74
0.94
21
24
27
18"
2'-10"
2.5'
2.24'
4.74'
2.0'
6.0'
1.41'
4'
4.58'
7.42'
10.25'
13.08'
1.04'
0.38
0.62
0.87
1.12
22
25
28
31
24"
3'-5"
2.5'
3.35'
5.85'
3.0'
7.0'
1.73'
4'
5.08'
8.50'
11.92'
15.33'
1.04'
0.47
0.76
1.05
1.34
23
27
31
35
See Sheet 5
30"
4'-3"
2.5'
4.47'
6.97'
4.0'
8.0'
2.00'
4'
5.58'
9.83'
14.08'
18.33'
1.04'
0.57
0.96
1.37
1.77
25
30
35
39
For 3" Slab Quantities
36"
5'-1"
2.5'
5.59'
8.09'
5.0'
9.0'
2.24'
4'
6.08'
11.17'
16.25'
21.33'
1.04'
0.67
1.19
1.72
2.26
27
33
38
44
42"
6'-0"
2.5'
6.71'
9.21'
6.0'
10.0'
2.45'
4'
6.58'
12.58'
18.58'
24.58'
1.04'
0.78
1.48
2.17
2.87
29
36
42
49
48"
6'-9"
2.5'
7.83'
10.33'
7.0'
11.0'
2.65'
4'
7.08'
13.83'
20.58'
27.33'
1.04'
0.89
1.71
2.54
3.36
31
38
46
53
54"
7'-8"
2.5'
8.94'
11.44'
8.0'
12.0'
2.83'
4'
7.58'
15.25'
22.92'
30.58'
1.04'
1.02
2.06
3.10
4.14
33
41
50
58
60"
8'-6"
2.5'
10.06'
12.56'
9.0'
13.0'
3.00'
4'
8.08'
16.58'
25.08'
33.58'
1.04'
1.14
2.38
3.63
4.89
34
44
53
63
15"
2'-7"
2.5'
3.09'
5.59'
3.0'
7.0'
1.23'
4'
4.33'
6.92'
9.50'
12.08'
1.04'
0.44
0.68
0.91
1.15
22
25
28
31
18"
2'-10"
2.5'
4.12'
6.62'
4.0'
8.0'
1.41'
4'
4.58'
7.42'
10.25'
13.08'
1.04'
0.49
0.77
1.03
1.31
24
27
30
33
24"
3'-5"
2.5'
6.18'
8.68'
6.0'
10.0'
1.73'
4'
5.08'
8.50'
11.92'
15.33'
1.04'
0.65
1.09
1.38
1.77
27
30
34
38
30"
4'-3"
2.5'
8.25'
10.75'
8.0'
12.0'
2.00'
4'
5.58'
9.83'
14.08'
18.33'
1.04'
0.81
1.34
1.90
2.44
29
34
39
44
36"
5'-1"
2.5'
10.31'
12.81'
10.0'
14.0'
2.24'
4'
6.08'
11.17'
16.25'
21.33'
1.04'
0.97
1.68
2.41
3.14
32
38
44
49
42"
6'-0"
2.5'
12.37'
14.87'
12.0'
16.0'
2.45'
4'
6.58'
12.58'
18.58'
24.58'
1.04'
1.13
2.08
3.06
4.02
35
42
48
55
48"
6'-9"
2.5'
14.43'
16.93'
14.0'
18.0'
2.65'
4'
7.08'
13.83'
20.58'
27.33'
1.04'
1.29
2.49
3.69
4.88
38
46
53
60
54"
7'-8"
2.5'
16.49'
18.99'
16.0'
20.0'
2.83'
4'
7.58'
15.25'
22.92'
30.58'
1.04'
1.48
2.98
4.47
5.98
41
49
58
66
60"
8'-6"
2.5'
18.55'
21.05'
18.0'
22.0'
3.00'
4'
8.08'
16.58'
25.08'
33.58'
1.04'
1.66
3.49
5.31
7.13
44
53
63
72
1:2
Slope
Values shown for estimating

pipe quantities and are for
information only
1:4
Above
1'
1.
5'
1
Typ)
2" (
1
.5
'
M
Thick,
5'
1
2"
1'
G
1.
5'
Above
W idth 6"
1'
1.
5'
1
.5
'
1
Typ)
2" (
Sod
W idth 6"
1'
5'
Sod
5'
Slope
Sod
1.
5'
TOP VIEW-SINGLE PIPE
Sl
o
pe
Var
i
Gen
es
See
er
al
No
t
es
No
s
.3
&
3" Or
1
5 2"
1
2"
Thick,

A
Loc. Ref.
5'
*Slope: 1:4 Miter: To Pipe For Pipes 18" And Smaller.

5'S
o
d
Sod
1:2 Miter: To Pipe For Pipes 18" And Smaller.
4
1:
4o
r1
:
2
B
To
pL
i
mi
to
f
TOP VIEW-MULTIPLE PIPE

Co
r
r
uga
t
i
o
n
1
2"
Helical Corrugated
*
Saddle
Rerolled End Required

11:
32:
05 AM
#4 Bar
H
Paid For As
Pipe Culvert
6"
(Corrugation Depth)
Ditch Grade
es
i
r
Va
6"
Metal Pipe
6"
Anchor
5' Sod

NOTE: See Sheet 6 For Details And Notes.
12/3/2015
SECTION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/02
REVISIO N
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE ROUND CORRUGATED METAL PIPE

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
272
SHEET
NO.
2 of 6
13"
2"-6"
2.5'
1.30'
3.80'
1.17'
4'
1.39'
2.8'
4.50'
7.00'
9.50'
12.00'
1.04'
0.41
0.61
0.81
1.02
21
23
26
21"
15"
2'-10"
2.5'
1.68'
4.17'
1.50'
5'
1.76'
3.5'
4.83'
7.67'
10.50'
13.33'
1.04'
0.43
0.66
0.88
1.10
22
25
28
31
28"
20"
3'-5"
2.5'
2.61'
5.11'
2.33'
6'
2.22'
3.7'
5.42'
8.83'
12.25'
15.67'
1.04'
0.51
0.78
1.06
1.33
23
27
30
34
35"
24"
4'-0"
2.5'
3.35'
5.85'
3.00'
7'
2.55'
4.0'
6.00'
10.00'
14.00'
18.00'
1.04'
0.57
0.90
1.22
1.55
24
29
33
38
42"
29"
4'-9"
2.5'
4.29'
6.79'
3.83'
8'
2.97'
4.2'
6.58'
11.33'
16.08'
20.83'
1.04'
0.64
1.04
1.46
1.87
26
31
37
42
49"
33"
5'-6"
2.5'
5.03'
7.53'
4.50'
9'
3.34'
4.5'
7.17'
12.67'
18.17'
23.67'
1.04'
0.73
1.23
1.72
2.22
28
34
40
46
57"
38"
6'-4"
2.5'
5.96'
8.46'
5.33'
10'
3.65'
4.7'
7.83'
14.17'
20.50'
26.83'
1.04'
0.83
1.44
2.04
2.64
29
36
44
51
64"
43"
7'-1"
2.5'
6.89'
9.39'
6.17'
11'
3.89'
4.8'
8.42'
15.50'
22.58'
29.67'
1.04'
0.95
1.67
2.39
3.11
31
39
47
55
71"
47"
7'-10"
2.5'
7.64'
10.14'
6.83'
12'
4.14'
5.2'
9.00'
16.83'
24.67'
32.50'
1.04'
1.05
1.89
2.74
3.57
33
41
50
59
17"
13"
2'-6"
2.5'
2.41'
4.91'
2.33'
7'
1.39'
4.7'
4.50'
7.00'
9.50'
12.00'
1.04'
0.48
0.71
0.95
1.18
22
25
27
30
21"
15"
2'-10"
2.5'
3.09'
5.59'
3.00'
8'
1.76
5.0'
4.83'
7.67'
10.50'
13.33'
1.04'
0.52
0.80
1.09
1.31
23
26
29
32
28"
20"
3'-5"
2.5'
4.81'
7.31'
4.67'
9'
2.22'
4.3'
5.42'
8.83'
12.25'
15.67'
1.04'
0.61
0.92
1.27
1.59
25
29
33
37
35"
24"
4'-0"
2.5'
6.18'
8.68'
6.00'
11'
2.55'
5.0'
6.00'
10.00'
14.00'
18.00'
1.04'
0.73
1.14
1.55
1.97
28
32
37
41
42"
29"
4'-9"
2.5'
7.90'
10.40'
7.67'
12'
2.97'
4.3'
6.58'
11.33'
16.08'
20.83'
1.04'
0.87
1.39
1.92
2.45
30
35
41
46
49"
33"
5'-6"
2.5'
9.28'
11.78'
9.00'
14'
3.34'
5.0'
7.17'
12.67'
18.17'
23.67'
1.04'
1.00
1.66
2.30
2.96
32
38
45
51
57"
38"
6'-4"
2.5'
11.00'
13.50'
10.67'
16'
3.65'
5.3'
7.83'
14.17'
20.50'
26.83'
1.04'
1.18
2.00
2.82
3.64
35
42
49
56
64"
43"
7'-1"
2.5'
12.71'
15.21'
12.33'
17'
3.89'
4.7'
8.42'
15.50'
22.58'
29.67'
1.04'
1.36
2.39
3.38
4.38
38
45
53
61
71"
47"
7'-10"
2.5'
14.09'
16.59'
13.67'
19'
4.14'
5.3'
9.00'
16.83'
24.67'
32.50'
1.04'
1.50
2.65
3.81
4.97
40
48
57
66
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
1'
Triple
Quad.
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
29
1.
5'
Thick,

Values shown for estimating pipe

quantities and are for information.
1'
1
.5
'
Span
M
5'
1.
5'
1
2"
W idth 6" Above
1'
Double
Sod
1
.5
'
Single
5'
Span
1.
5'
1'
Sod
SODDING (SY)
17"
5'
Slope
RI
SE
1:4
SP
A
N
1:2
Slope
DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES
W idth 6" Above
1974 AASHTO
Sod
Span

5'
So
d
1
2"
3" Or 5
*Slope:
1:4 Miter: 1:2 For All Sizes
1.
5'
Loc. Ref.
A
1:2 Miter: 1:1 For All Sizes.
B
To
pL
i
mi
to
fC
o
1:
r
r
4o
uga
r1
t
i
o
:
2
n
1
2"
Thick,
5'
Sl
o
pe
Var
i
es
Gen
See
er
al
No
t
es
No
s
.3
&
Sod
1
2"
Helical Corrugated
11:
32:
06 AM
Ditch Grade
es
ri
Va
Saddle
#4 Bar
H
Paid For As Pipe Culvert
(Corrugation Depth)
Metal Pipe
6"
6"
Rise
Anchor
6"
5' Sod
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/02
REVISIO N
SECTION
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE CORRUGATED METAL PIPE-ARCH
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
272
SHEET
NO.
3 of 6
QUANTITIES
5 2" CONC. SLAB (CY)

1
M
Rise
Span
X
1:4
Slope
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Single Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
12"
18"
2'-10"
1.97'
1.62'
3.59'
1.56'
4'
1.50'
2.4'
4.92'
7.75'
10.58'
13.42'
1.21'
0.30
0.49
0.67
0.85
21
24
27
30
14"
23"
3'-4"
2.01'
1.99'
4.00'
1.89'
5'
1.90'
3.1'
5.38'
8.71'
12.04'
15.38'
1.23'
0.37
0.59
0.81
1.02
22
26
29
33
19"
30"
4'-0"
2.11'
2.92'
5.03'
2.73'
6'
2.37'
3.3'
6.04'
10.04'
14.04'
18.04'
1.27'
0.50
0.80
1.09
1.39
24
28
33
37
24"
38"
5'-0"
2.20'
3.85'
6.05'
3.56'
7'
2.85'
3.4'
6.79'
11.79'
16.79'
21.79'
1.31'
0.62
1.03
1.45
1.86
26
31
37
42
29"
45"
5'-11"
2.34'
4.79'
7.13'
4.39'
8'
3.19'
3.6'
7.50'
13.42'
19.33'
25.25'
1.38'
0.75
1.30
1.84
2.39
28
34
41
47
34"
53"
7'-0"
2.43'
5.72'
8.15'
5.23'
9'
3.57'
3.8'
8.25'
15.25'
22.25'
29.25'
1.42'
0.90
1.61
2.32
3.03
30
37
45
53
38"
60"
7'-10"
2.52'
6.46'
8.98'
5.89'
9'
3.95'
3.1'
8.92'
16.75'
24.58'
32.42'
1.46'
1.03
1.89
2.74
3.60
31
40
49
57
43"
68"
8'-11"
2.62'
7.39'
10.01'
6.73'
10'
4.28'
3.3'
9.67'
18.58'
27.50'
36.42'
1.50'
1.19
2.26
3.33
4.40
33
43
53
63
48"
76"
9'-11"
2.71'
8.33'
11.04'
7.56'
11'
4.59'
3.4'
10.42'
20.33'
30.25'
40.17'
1.54'
1.38
2.65
3.93
5.21
35
46
57
68
53"
83"
10'-8"
2.80'
9.26'
12.06'
8.39'
12'
4.77'
3.6'
11.08'
21.75'
32.42'
43.08'
1.58'
1.55
3.03
4.50
5.96
37
49
61
73
58"
91"
11'-8"
2.90'
10.19'
13.09'
9.23'
13'
5.01'
3.8'
11.83'
23.50'
35.17'
46.83'
1.63'
1.75
3.47
5.20
6.93
39
52
65
78
12"
18"
2'-10"
2.36'
3.06'
5.42'
3.03'
5'
1.50'
2.0'
4.92'
7.75'
10.58'
13.42'
1.21'
0.45
0.68
0.92
1.14
23
26
29
32
14"
23"
3'-4"
2.44'
3.75'
6.19'
3.70'
6'
1.90'
2.3'
5.38'
8.71'
12.04'
15.38'
1.23'
0.53
0.83
1.13
1.42
24
28
32
35
19"
30"
4'-0"
2.62'
5.47'
8.09'
5.36'
8'
2.37'
2.6'
6.04'
10.04'
14.04'
18.04'
1.27'
0.74
1.15
1.57
1.98
27
32
36
40
24"
38"
5'-0"
2.79'
7.18'
9.97'
7.03' 10'
2.85'
3.0'
6.79'
11.79'
16.79'
21.79'
1.31'
0.97
1.57
2.19
2.81
30
36
41
47
29"
45"
5'-11"
3.05'
8.90'
11.95'
8.70' 12'
3.19'
3.3'
7.50'
13.42'
19.33'
25.25'
1.38'
1.22
2.07
2.92
3.77
33
40
46
53
34"
53"
7'-0"
3.22'
10.62'
13.84'
10.36' 13'
3.57'
2.6'
8.25'
15.25'
22.25'
29.25'
1.42'
1.48
2.62
3.77
4.92
36
44
52
59
38"
60"
7'-10"
3.39'
11.99'
15.38'
11.70' 15'
3.95'
3.3'
8.92'
16.75'
24.58'
32.42'
1.46'
1.72
3.12
4.53
5.92
38
47
56
65
43"
68"
8'-11"
3.56'
13.71'
17.27'
13.36' 17'
4.28'
3.6'
9.67'
18.58'
27.50'
36.42'
1.50'
2.02
3.78
5.56
7.32
41
51
61
71
48"
76"
9'-11"
3.73'
15.43'
19.16'
15.03' 19'
4.59'
4.0'
10.42'
20.33'
30.25'
40.17'
1.54'
2.34
4.49
6.64
8.79
44
55
66
77
53"
83"
10'-8"
3.91'
17.15'
21.06'
16.70' 20'
4.77'
3.3'
11.08'
21.75'
32.42'
43.08'
1.58'
2.66
5.17
7.66
10.16
47
59
71
83
58"
91"
11'-8"
4.08'
18.87'
22.95'
18.36' 22'
5.01'
3.6'
11.83'
23.50'
35.17'
46.83'
1.63'
3.02
5.98
8.95
11.90
50
63
76
89
Sod
1'
Pipe
Pipe
Values shown for estimating pipe quantities and are

for information only.
5'
1:2
Slope
SODDING (SY)
G-W idth 6"
1'
1.
5'
1
.5
'R
Sod
5'
Thick,
1.
5'
1
2"
1'
Above
G-W idth 6"
1
.5
'
1.
5'
1'
Sod
Above
&
5'
DIMENSIONS

*Slope:
Loc. Ref.
1:2 For Pipes 29"x45" And Larger.

C
1:2 Miter: To Major Axis For Pipes 29"x45" And Smaller.

1:
4o
r1
:
2
Connector
Pipe
Saddle
es
ri
Va
1
2"
Thick,
Sod
11:
32:
07 AM
2'
6"
Ditch Grade
5'
Concrete
1:1 For Pipes 34"x53" And Larger.
1.
5'
Slab
6"
1
2"
1:4 Miter: To Major Axis For Pipes 24"x38" And Smaller.
Deepen Around Outside

Edge Of Pipe For 5
5'S
o
Sl
d
o
pe
Var
i
e
s
Ge
Se
n
e
e
r
alN
o
t
e
sN
o
s
.3
1
& 4
3" Or 5 2"
Not < R
#4 Bar
6"

5' Sod
TOP VIEW - MULTIPLE PIPE

E
12/3/2015
Paid For As Pipe Culvert
F (Pipe To Be Included Under Unit Price

For Mitered End Section)
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE ELLIPTICAL CONCRETE PIPE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/02
REVISIO N
SECTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
272
SHEET
NO.
4 of 6
1:2
Slope
1:4
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Span
Triple
Pipe
Ri
se
Double
Pipe
CMP-ARCH
ELLIPTICAL-CONCRETE
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
15"
0.27
0.41
0.54
0.67
15"
0.24
0.37
0.51
0.64
17"
13"
0.33
0.49
0.65
0.81
12"
18"
0.19
0.33
0.45
0.57
18"
0.31
0.45
0.60
0.75
18"
0.26
0.43
0.61
0.78
21"
15"
0.33
0.50
0.67
0.83
14"
23"
0.25
0.40
0.55
0.69
24"
0.39
0.59
0.79
1.00
24"
0.32
0.52
0.72
0.91
28"
20"
0.37
0.56
0.76
0.95
19"
30"
0.34
0.55
0.75
0.95
30"
0.46
0.76
1.04
1.32
30"
0.38
0.64
0.91
1.18
35"
24"
0.40
0.62
0.84
1.07
24" 38"
0.43
0.71
1.00
1.28
1.65
29"
45"
0.52
0.90
1.27
34"
53"
0.62
1.11
1.60
2.09
38"
60"
0.70
1.29
1.87
2.46
42"
29"
0.43
0.70
0.98
1.25
49"
33"
0.49
0.82
1.15
1.48
57"
38"
0.55
0.95
1.35
1.75
64"
43"
0.62
1.10
1.57
2.05
43"
68"
0.81
1.54
2.26
2.99
71"
47"
0.69
1.24
1.80
2.35
48"
76"
0.93
1.79
2.66
3.53
4.27
53"
83"
1.04
2.04
3.03
4.02
4.90
58"
91"
1.17
2.33
3.49
4.66
12"
18"
0.30
0.45
0.61
0.76
14"
23"
0.36
0.56
0.76
0.95
36"
0.44
0.78
1.13
1.48
42"
0.51
0.96
1.41
1.87
48"
0.57
1.09
1.63
2.15
3.14
54"
0.65
1.32
1.99
2.66
3.73
60"
0.71
1.49
2.28
3.07
36"
0.55
0.94
1.33
1.71
42"
0.66
1.15
1.66
2.15
48"
0.76
1.37
1.96
2.57
54"
0.87
1.62
2.38
60"
0.99
1.90
2.81
66"
1.11
2.15
3.21
72"
1.24
2.46
3.68
15"
0.40
0.61
0.80
1.00
15"
0.31
0.47
0.63
0.79
17"
13"
0.38
0.56
0.74
0.92
18"
0.47
0.69
0.91
1.14
18"
0.34
0.53
0.71
0.90
21"
15"
0.39
0.59
0.80
0.95
24"
0.60
0.90
1.21
1.52
24"
0.44
0.69
0.92
1.18
28"
20"
0.43
0.64
0.88
1.10
19" 30"
0.51
0.79
1.08
1.36
30"
0.76
1.19
1.63
2.07
30"
0.53
0.88
1.25
1.60
35"
24"
0.49
0.77
1.05
1.33
24"
38"
0.68
1.10
1.53
1.96
2.63
36"
0.89
1.48
2.05
2.63
42"
1.05
1.82
2.57
3.34
48"
1.21
2.15
3.07
4.00
1:2
Slope
1:4
Slope
36"
0.62
1.07
1.53
2.00
42"
0.71
1.30
1.92
2.52
48"
0.80
1.54
2.29
3.02
1:2
Slope
1:4
Slope
1:2
Slope
29"
45"
0.86
1.45
2.04
34"
53"
1.02
1.81
2.60
3.39
2.37
38"
60"
1.18
2.14
3.10
4.05
4.99
42"
29"
0.57
0.92
1.27
1.62
49"
33"
0.65
1.08
1.50
1.93
57"
38"
0.76
1.30
1.83
1:4
Slope
54"
1.39
2.55
3.72
4.88
54"
0.91
1.83
2.74
3.67
64"
43"
0.87
1.55
2.18
2.83
43"
68"
1.38
2.58
3.79
60"
1.59
3.02
4.44
5.86
60"
1.02
2.15
3.27
4.39
71"
47"
0.95
1.68
2.43
3.17
48" 76"
1.59
3.05
4.51
5.97
66"
1.91
3.66
5.40
7.15
53" 83"
1.80
3.50
5.19
6.88
72"
2.12
4.18
6.24
8.30
58" 91"
2.04
4.04
6.05
8.05
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
32:
08 AM
Slope
Single
Span
ROUND-CMP
ROUND-CONCRETE
D
Ri
se
QUANTITIES FOR 3" THICK CONCRETE SLABS (CY)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
272
SHEET
NO.
5 of 6
GENERAL NOTES
1.
Unless otherwise designated in the plans, concrete pipe mitered end sections may be used with any type of cross drain pipe; corrugated steel pipe
mitered end sections may be used with any type of cross drain pipe except aluminum pipe; and, corrugated aluminum mitered end sections may be
used with any type of cross drain pipe except steel pipe. When bituminous coated metal pipe is specified for cross drain pipe, mitered end sections
shall be constructed with like pipe or concrete pipe. When the mitered end section pipe is dissimilar to the cross drain pipe, a concrete jacket shall
be constructed in accordance with Standard Index 280.
2.
Corrugated polyethylene pipe (HDPE), polyvinyl-chloride pipe (PVC) and polypropylene pipe (PPP) for cross drain applications shall utilize either
Edge Of Shoulder
corrugated metal or concrete mitered end sections (MES). When used in conjunction with corrugated (MES), connection shall be by either a formed
metal band specifically designated to join HDPE or PVC pipe, with metal pipe or other coupler approved by the State Drainage Engineer. When used
in conjunction with a concrete (MES), connection shall be by concrete jacket constructed in accordance with Index No. 280.
Normal
Normal
Slope
Slope
Flattened
3.
Mitered end sections for pipe sizes 15", 18" and 24" round or equivalent pipe arch or elliptical pipe are permitted within the clear zone. When the
Slope
Ba
ck
slope intersection permits, the mitered end section may be located with the culvert opening as close as 8' beyond the outside edge of the shoulder.
Sl
op
e
4.
Slope and ditch transitions shall be used when the normal roadway slope must be flattened to place end section outside clear zone. See detail left.
5.
The reinforced concrete slab shall be constructed for all sizes of cross drain pipe and cast in place with Class NS concrete. Slabs shall be 5
ch
t
Di
al
m
r
No
om
t
t
Bo
1
2"
thick
unless 3" thickness called for in plans.
6.
Concrete pipe used in the assembly of mitered end sections shall be selective lengths to avoid excessive connections.
7.
Corrugated metal pipe galvanizing that is damaged during beveling and perforating for mitered end section shall be repaired.
8.
That portion of corrugated metal pipe in direct contact with the concrete slab and extending 12" beyond shall be bituminous coated prior to placing of
Length Of Transition
10 d
PLAN
the concrete.
NOTE: See General Note 4
9.
SLOPE AND DITCH TRANSITIONS
When existing multiple cross drain pipes are spaced other than the dimensions shown in this detail, or have non-parallel axes, or have non-uniform
sections, the mitered end sections will be constructed either separately as single pipe mitered end sections or collectively as multiple pipe end
sections as directed by the Engineer; however, mitered end sections will be paid for each based on each independent pipe end.
10. The cost of all pipe(s), fasteners, reinforcing, connectors, anchors, concrete, sealants, jackets, and coupling bands shall be included in the cost for
the mitered end section. Sodding shall be paid for separately under the contract unit price of Performance Turf, SY.
11. Mitered end sections shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Mitered End Section (CD), Each, based on each independent pipe end.
4x Bolt Dia.
4x Bolt Dia.
Varies
1" Min. Bell Lgth.
1
2"
212" Min.
1
2"
3L or Bell Length +3
Min.
212" x 14" Steel Bar
4x Bolt Dia.
(Varies)
Hex Nuts (2 Req.)
1
2"
Pipe Shell T
Bolt Diameter
(See Detail Right)
Flat Washer (1 Req.)

1
2"
1
1
2 2"
1
4"
612"
1
2"
1
2"
Steel Bar
Min.
x 6" Bolt
May Be Substituted
Anchors required for CMP only.

4x Bolt Dia.
Varies
Tongue Length L
4x Bolt Dia.
212" x 12" Steel Bar
(See Detail Right)
Dia. Of
Optional Shape
Anchor, washer and nuts to be galvanized steel.
Bolt + 116"
3L or Bell Length + 312" Min.
Bend anchor where required to center in concrete slab. Damaged surfaces to be repaired after bending. Anchors
Pipe Shell T
are to be spaced a distance equal to four (4) corrugations. Place the anchors in the outside crest of corrugation.
(Varies)
1:
04:
53 PM
Flat washers to be placed on inside wall of pipe.
All bars, bolts, nuts and washers are to be galvanized steel.
Holes in the mitered end pipe are to be drilled or punched; burning not permitted.
Bolt diameters shall be 38" for 15" to 36" pipe and 58" for 42" to 72" pipe.
Two connectors required per joint, located 60 right and left of bottom center of pipe.
ANCHOR DETAIL
12/7/2015
Bolt holes in pipe shell are to be drilled.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
CONCRETE PIPE CONNECTOR
SPECIAL DETAILS AND NOTES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
272
SHEET
NO.
6 of 6
DIMENSIONS & QUANTITIES

M
D
GRATE SIZES
Single
Double
Triple
Quad
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
CONCRETE (CY)
SODDING (SY)
Standard
Extra
Single
Double
Triple
Quad
Single
Double
Triple
Quad
Weight Pipe
Strong Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
15"
2'-7"
2.27'
4.09'
6.36'
4.03'
8'
1.22'
4.0'
4.63'
7.21'
9.79'
12.37'
1.19'
0.76
1.16
1.54
1.94
10
11
12
18"
2'-10"
2.36'
5.12'
7.48'
5.03'
9'
1.41'
4.0'
4.92'
7.75'
10.58'
13.42'
1.21'
0.85
1.28
1.71
2.17
10
12
13
24"
3'-5"
2.53'
7.18'
9.71'
7.03'
11'
1.73'
4.0'
5.50'
8.92'
12.33'
15.75'
1.25'
15
30"
4'-3"
2.70'
9.25'
9.03'
13'
2.00'
4.0'
6.08'
10.33'
14.58'
18.83'
1.29'
36"
5'-1"
2.87'
11.31'
14.18'
11.03'
15'
2.24'
4.0'
6.67'
11.75'
16.83'
21.92'
1.33'
42"
6'-0"
3.05'
13.37'
16.42'
13.03'
17'
2.45'
4.0'
7.25'
13.25'
19.25'
25.25'
1.38'
48"
6'-9"
3.22'
15.43'
18.65'
15.03'
19'
2.65'
4.0'
7.83'
14.58'
21.33'
28.08'
1.42'
54"
7'-8"
3.39'
17.49'
20.88'
17.03'
21'
2.83'
4.0'
8.42'
16.08'
23.75'
31.42'
1.46'
3"
60"
8'-6"
3.56'
19.55'
23.11'
19.03'
23'
3.00'
4.0'
9.00'
17.50'
26.00'
34.50'
1.50'
3"
11.95'
6.42'
6.25'
Dimensions permitted to allow use of 8' standard pipe lengths.
10.40'
10.10'
Dimensions permitted to allow use of 12' standard pipe lengths.
1.02
1.58
2.15
2.75
10
12
13
1
2"
3"
1.23
1.98
2.74
3.50
12
14
15
17
1
2"
3"
1.40
2.38
3.33
4.24
13
15
17
20
1
2"
1.60
2.83
4.04
5.26
14
17
19
22
1
2"
1.81
3.26
4.70
6.14
15
18
21
24
4"
2.03
3.78
5.54
7.28
17
20
23
27
4"
2.28
4.36
6.43
8.50
18
22
25
29
1
2"
1
2"
Values shown for estimating pipe quantities and are for information only.
Concrete slab shall be deepened to form bridge across crown of pipe. See section below.
1'
1.
5'
1
.5
Grate
Construction Joints
Permitted
1'
Permitted
2'
Sod
Construction Joints
1'
1'
1.
5'
1'
1'
2'
Sod
1
.5
Grate
Above
W idth 6"
1'
1.
5'
Above
W idth 6"
2'
Fastener
2'
2'
With WWF 6x6-W1.4xW1.4
Sl
o
2'S
pe
o
Var
d
i
Tr
es
an
S
s
e
i
eD
t
i
o
n
i
t
Mo
c
An
h
d.D
dP
av
et
eme
ai
l
sS
n
t
hee
t7
o
f7
Concrete Slab, 3" Thick, Reinforced

Sod
Loc. Ref.
1'
1'
1.
5'
Fastener
C
1'M
ax
2'
Gr
at
es
B
Spa
c
ed
14"
ct
oc
3"
Sod
1:
4
3"
Concrete
Construction Joints Permitted
Connector
Pipe
6"
1'
N
6"
Not < Than D
6"
11:
32:
09 AM
2'
6"

H
Paid For As
Pipe Culvert
M in.
Ditch Grade
1
2"
*
Saddle
6"
E
3'
2' Sod
F (Pipe To Be Included Under Unit Price For Mitered End Section)
Note:
See Sheets 6 and 7 for details and general notes.
12/3/2015
*Slope: To Pipe For Pipes 18" And Smaller
LAST
REVISION
07/01/02
REVISIO N
SECTION
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE ROUND CONCRETE PIPE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SIDE DRAIN MITERED END SECTION
NO.
273
SHEET
NO.
1of 7

M
D
Single
GRATE SIZES
Double
Triple
Quad.
SODDING (SY)
REMARKS
Standard
Extra
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Weight Pipe
Strong Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
2'-0"
2.5'
0.72'
3.22'
0.7'
4.0'
0.58'
3.3'
3.75'
5.75'
7.75'
9.75'
1.04'
0.52
0.90
1.22
1.54
10"
2'-2"
2.5'
1.34'
3.84'
1.3'
5.0'
0.81'
3.7'
3.92'
6.08'
8.25'
10.41'
1.04'
0.64
0.99
1.34
1.70
10
inlet and outlet treatment for
12"
2'-4"
2.5'
2.06'
4.56'
2.0'
6.0'
1.00'
4.0'
4.08'
6.42'
8.75'
11.08'
1.04'
0.68
1.09
1.48
1.88
10
11
water management systems
15"
2'-7"
2.5'
3.09'
5.59'
3.0'
7.0'
1.23'
4.0'
4.33'
6.92'
9.50'
12.08'
1.04'
0.64
1.00
1.35
1.71
10
11
or similar applications.
18"
2'-10"
2.5'
4.12'
6.62'
4.0'
8.0'
1.41'
4.0'
4.58'
7.42'
10.25'
13.08'
1.04'
0.69
1.09
1.49
1.89
10
11
12
24"
3'-5"
2.5'
6.18'
8.68'
6.0'
10.0'
1.73'
4.0'
5.08'
8.50'
11.92'
15.33'
1.04'
30"
4'-3"
2.5'
8.25'
10.75'
8.0'
12.0'
2.00'
4.0'
5.58'
9.83'
14.08'
18.33'
1.04'
36"
5'-1"
2.5'
10.31'
12.81'
10.0'
14.0'
2.24'
4.0'
6.08'
11.17'
16.25'
21.33'
1.04'
42"
6'-0"
2.5'
12.37'
14.87'
12.0'
16.0'
2.45'
4.0'
6.58'
12.58'
18.58'
24.58'
1.04'
48"
6'-9"
2.5'
14.43'
16.93'
14.0'
18.0'
2.65'
4.0'
7.08'
13.83'
20.58'
27.33'
1.04'
54"
7'-8"
2.5'
16.49'
18.99'
16.0'
20.0'
2.83'
4.0'
7.58'
15.25'
22.92'
30.58'
1.04'
3"
4"
60"
8'-6"
2.5'
18.55'
21.05'
18.0'
22.0'
3.00'
4.0'
8.08'
16.58'
25.08'
33.58'
1.04'
3"
4"
1.94
1.34
1.82
2.34
10
11
13
14
3"
0.96
1.63
2.32
2.99
11
13
15
17
1
2"
3"
1.08
1.92
2.77
3.62
12
14
17
19
1.20
2.26
3.34
4.61
13
16
18
21
1.60
3.11
4.62
6.12
14
17
20
23
1.76
3.56
5.34
7.14
15
19
22
26
4.03
6.12
8.20
17
20
24
28
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1'
information only.
Grate
Above
W idth 6"
1
2"
1
2"
2'
Sod
Sl
o
pe
Var
2'S
i
es
See
o
d
Di
t
c
hT
Pav
r
a
n
eme
s
i
t
i
n
o
tM
nA
She
o
n
di
d
et
f
i
c
7o
at
i
o
f7
nD
et
ai
l
s
,
1.
5'
Fastener
1'
1
2"
D
2'
1
2"
M
1'
1.
5'
1
.5
'
Above
W idth 6"
2'
Fastener
1'
1.
5'
Grate
R
1'
2'
Sod
These sizes are restricted to
2'
0.83
1
2"
1'
1'
1
.5
'
1
2"
1.
5'
1'
1
2"
CONCRETE (CY)
8"
Sod
Loc. Ref.
C
1'M
ax.
2'
Sod
B
Gr
at
es
Spa
c
ed
14"
ct
oc
3"
1:
4
3"

1'
Ditch Grade
6"
Saddle
6"
11:
32:
10 AM
1
2"
6"
Metal Pipe
Anchor
M in.
Helical Corrugated
6"
Paid For As
12/3/2015
Pipe Culvert
3'
2' Sod
NOTE: See Sheets 6 and 7 for details and general notes.

* Slope: To Pipe For Pipe 18" And Smaller

1:2 For Pipe 24" And Larger
LAST
REVISION
07/02/02
REVISIO N
SECTION
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE ROUND CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
273
SHEET
NO.
2 of 7

1974 AASHTO
GRATE SIZES
CONCRETE (CY)
SODDING (SY)

Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Standard
Extra
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
information only.
Rise
Weight Pipe Strong Pipe
13"
2'-6"
2.5'
2.41'
4.91'
2.33'
7'
1.39'
4.7'
4.50'
7.00'
9.50'
12.00'
1.04'
0.62
0.95
1.27
1.60
10
11
21"
15"
2'-10"
2.5'
3.09'
5.59'
3.00'
8'
1.76'
5.0'
4.83'
7.67'
10.50'
13.33'
1.04'
0.69
1.06
1.44
1.77
11
12
28"
20"
3'-5"
2.5'
4.81'
7.31'
4.67'
9'
2.22'
4.3'
5.42'
8.83'
12.25'
15.67'
1.04'
0.81
1.26
1.73
2.19
11
12
14
35"
24"
4'-0"
2.5'
6.18'
8.68'
6.00'
11'
2.55'
5.0'
6.00'
10.00'
14.00'
18.00'
1.04'
0.94
1.51
2.09
2.66
10
12
14
15
42"
29"
4'-9"
2.5'
7.90'
10.40'
7.67'
12'
2.97'
4.3'
6.58'
11.33'
16.08'
20.83'
1.04'
49"
33"
5'-6"
2.5'
9.28'
11.78'
9.00'
14'
3.34'
5.0'
7.17'
12.67'
18.17'
23.67'
1.04'
57"
38"
6'-4"
2.5'
11.00'
13.50'
10.67'
16'
3.65'
5.3'
7.83'
14.17'
20.50'
26.83'
1.04'
3"
64"
43"
7'-1"
2.5'
12.71'
15.21'
12.33'
17'
3.89'
4.7'
8.42'
15.50'
22.58'
29.67'
1.04'
3"
71"
47"
7'-10"
2.5'
14.09'
16.59'
13.67'
19'
4.14'
5.3'
9.00'
16.83'
24.67'
32.50'
1.04'
3"
1'
1
2"
3"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1.06
1.76
2.46
3.16
11
13
15
17
1
2"
1.19
2.02
2.84
3.68
12
14
17
19
4"
1.35
2.35
3.35
4.36
13
16
19
22
4"
1.50
2.70
3.86
5.03
14
17
20
24
4"
1.62
2.94
4.27
5.59
15
18
22
25
2'
Sod
2'
17"
Sod
Construction Joint
Construction Joint
1'
Permitted
1'
Grate
1
2"
Span
2'
2'
1'
1
2"
Loc. Ref.
A
1.
5'
Span
Sod
Fastener
1'M
ax.
B
Gr
at
es
Spa
c
ed
14"
ct
oc
3"
Required
2'
Rerolled End
1
.5
'
1
2"
M
1'
1.
5'
2'S
Sl
o
o
d
pe
Var
i
es
See
Di
t
c
h
Tr
Pav
an
eme
s
i
t
i
n
o
tM
nA
Det
o
n
di
d
ai
f
i
l
c
sS
at
i
o
hee
n
t7
o
f7
Above
W idth 6"
Span
1
2"
2'
Fastener
1'
1.
5'
1'
Grate
R
1
2"
1
.5
'
1
2"
1.
5'
1'
Permitted
W idth 6"
Span
Above
Sod
1:
4
3"
Anchor
1'
N
6"
Paid For As
Pipe Culvert
M in.
Ditch Grade
6" 512"
11:
32:
11 AM
Saddle
6"
6"
Metal Pipe
6"
3'
2' Sod
* Slope: To Span Line For Pipe Arch 28"x20" And Smaller

1:2 For Pipe Arch 35"x24" And Larger
SECTION
LAST
REVISION
07/02/02
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Helical Corrugated
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE CORRUGATED METAL PIPE-ARCH
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
273
SHEET
NO.
3 of 7

M
Rise
Span
GRATE SIZES
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
CONCRETE (CY)
SODDING (SY)
Standard
Extra
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Single
Double
Triple
Quad.
Weight Pipe
Strong Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Pipe
Values shown for

estimating pipe
12"
18"
2'-10"
2.36'
3.06'
5.42'
3.03'
5'
1.50'
2.0'
4.92'
7.75'
10.58'
13.42'
1.21'
0.68
1.04
1.41
1.77
11
12
quantities and are
14"
23"
3'-4"
2.44'
3.75'
6.19'
3.70'
6'
1.90'
2.3'
5.38'
8.71'
12.04'
15.38'
1.23'
0.76
1.19
1.63
2.05
10
12
13
for information only.
19"
30"
4'-0"
2.62'
5.47'
8.09'
5.36'
8'
2.37'
2.6'
6.04'
10.04'
14.04'
18.04'
1.27'
3"
0.95
1.52
2.09
2.65
10
12
13
15
24"
38"
5'-0"
2.79'
7.18'
9.97'
7.03'
10'
2.85'
3.0'
6.79'
11.79'
16.79'
21.79'
1.31'
3"
18
29"
45"
5'-11"
3.05'
8.90'
11.95'
8.70'
12'
3.19'
3.3'
7.50'
13.42'
19.33'
25.25'
1.38'
34"
53"
7'-0"
3.22'
10.62'
13.84'
10.36'
13'
3.57'
2.6'
8.25'
15.25'
22.25'
29.25'
1.42'
3"
38"
60"
7'-10"
3.39'
11.99'
15.38'
11.70'
15'
3.95'
3.3'
8.92'
16.75'
24.58'
32.42'
1.46'
3"
4"
43"
68"
8'-11"
3.56'
13.71'
17.27'
13.36'
17'
4.28'
3.6'
9.67'
18.58'
27.50'
36.42'
1.50'
3"
4"
48"
76"
9'-11"
3.73'
15.43'
19.16'
15.03'
19'
4.59'
4.0'
10.42'
20.33'
30.25'
40.17'
1.54'
3"
HSS 5"x
53"
83"
10'-8"
3.91'
17.15'
21.06'
16.70'
20'
4.77'
3.3'
11.08'
21.75'
32.42'
43.08'
1.58'
3"
HSS 5"x
11'-8"
4.08'
18.87'
22.95'
18.36'
22'
5.01'
3.6'
Sod
11.83'
1'
23.50'
35.17'
46.83'
1
2"
1
2"
1.95
2.74
3.53
11
13
15
1.41
2.42
3.44
4.45
12
15
18
20
1
2"
1.63
2.92
4.22
5.52
13
17
20
23
1.83
3.36
4.89
6.41
14
18
21
25
2.09
3.95
5.80
7.65
16
20
23
27
5
16"
2.37
4.54
6.73
8.92
17
21
26
30
5
16"
2.61
5.09
7.56
10.03
18
23
27
32
3
8"
2.91
5.77
8.64
11.50
19
24
29
35
1
2"
1.63'
1.18
1
2"
HSS 5"x
Sod
Construction Joint
1'
2'
91"
2'
58"
1
2"
Construction Joint
Permitted
Grate
R
1
.5
'
Grate
1'
1'
1.
5'
1
.5
'
1'
1.
5'
1'
Permitted
Above
W idth 6"
2'
Fastener
Sod
Sl
o
pe
Var
i
es
See
2'S
Di
t
c
o
hT
d
Pav
r
an
eme
s
i
t
i
n
o
t
n
M
Det
An
o
di
d
ai
f
i
l
c
s
at
,S
i
o
hee
n
t7
o
f7
2'
1'
1.
5'
Above
W idth 6"
2'
Loc. Ref.
A
Sod

3"
Concrete
Connector
Pipe
6"
1'
6" 5
N
6"
Not Less Than R
2'
6"
M in.
Ditch Grade
1
2"
Saddle
11:
32:
12 AM
Fastener
1'
B
Gr
at
es
Spa
c
ed
14"
c
.t
oc
.
2'
3"
1'
1.
5'
1'M
ax.
6"

H
Paid For As
12/3/2015
Pipe Culvert
3'
2' Sod


* Slope: To Major Axis For Pipes 24"x38" And Smaller.
1:2 For Pipes 29"X45" And Larger.
SINGLE AND MULTIPLE ELLIPTICAL CONCRETE PIPE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
SECTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
273
SHEET
NO.
4 of 7
Drain
Drain
s
La
Size
La
Size
CONCRETE PIPE (ROUND)
Note:
ELLIPTICAL CONCRETE PIPE

12"x18"
2'-10"
3'-9"
14"x23"
4'-0'
4'-11"
8'-5"
19"x30"
5'-2"
6'-1"
15"
4'-0"
4'-11"
18"
5'-2"
6'-1"
24"
7'-6"
**
drain pipes, which will require the following bolt lengths:
8'-8"
9'-7"
24"x38"
6'-4"
7'-3"
36"
10
11'-0"
11'-11"
29"x45"
8'-8"
9'-7"
13'-4"
14'-3"
34"x53"
42"
11
48"
13
14
15'-8"
16'-7"
38"x60"
54"
14
15
16'-10"
17'-9"
43"x68"
60"
16
17
19'-2"
20'-1"
48"x76"
13
53"x83"
14
58"x91"
15
16
CORRUGATED METAL PIPE (ROUND)

3'-9"
15"
2'-10"
18"
4'-0"
4'-11"
24"
6'-4"
7'-3"
30"
8'-8"
9'-7"
9'-10"
10'-9"
36"
x 3" bolts are standard for all grate fasteners,
except when the contractor elects to use the slotted

upper holes for the intermediate fasteners on multiple
30"
12
**
5
8"
Grate Size
Bolt Length
(Std. & X-Stg.)
9'-10"
0'-9"
10
11
12'-2"
13'-1"
11
12
13'-4"
14'-3"
14
15'-8"
16'-7"
15
16'-10"
17'-9"
18'-0"
18'-11"
1
2"
1'-8"
2'-7"
21"x15"
2'-10"
3'-9"
28"x20"
5'-2"
6'-1"
1
2"
10
11
12'-2"
13'-1"
35"x24"
6'-4"
7'-3"
48"
12
13
14'-6"
15'-5"
42"x29"
7'-6"
8'-5"
54"
14
15
16'-10"
17'-9"
49"x33"
8'-8"
9'-7"
60"
15
16
18'-0"
18'-11"
57"x38"
10
11'-0"
11'-11"
7"
***
** To be used only when grates are called for in the plans.
*** 1974 AASHTO Pipe Arch Sizes.
64"x43"
10
11
12'-2"
13'-1"
71"x47"
12
13
14'-6"
15'-5"
14"
h
t
i
lW
al
st
n
,I
r
e
ash
& W
Nut
wn
ed
o
z
D
i
e
an
v
Fac
Gal
d
e
er
mf
Cha
g
n
i
pac
eS
at
Gr
3"
TOP VI
EW
1
2"
4"
**
42"
t&
l
Bo
6"
17"x13"
#3 Steel Bars
3"
CORRUGATED METAL PIPE (ARCH)
**
1
2"
4
1:
5
8"
Galvanized Bolt Hex Head Bolt Shown;
Pipe Grate
zed
i
an
v
al
"G
Either Hex Head Or Square Head Bolt
t
l
Bo
s)
t
l
Bo
)
es
r
ac
be
Sp
m
"
Nu
14
(
n=
Of
r
be
m
L
Nu
(
s=
5
8
May Be Used. Only Hex Nut To Be Used.
Of
#3 Steel Bar
1
8"
3d (Min.)=1
6"
1 "
2
Saddle
"
13 6
1
"
1
2"
13 16
1
#3 Bars
76 To 90 Bend
2
1:
La
R)
Shell Thickness
ng
i
nd
)
be
(
R
(
R
R
1 8"
"
1
5 16
1
8"
Conc. Slab
Wire Mesh
6"
Varies
Spacer Bar
1
2
(Tack Weld)
END VI
EW
SI
DE VI
EW
6"
8"
1
4
*To be omitted on trailing

2"
Ref.
1
2"
Ref.
11:
32:
12 AM
fabricated unit is subject to hazardous hauls
FOR AL
L SI
ZES OF SI
NGL
E AND MUL
TI
PL
E DRAI
N PI
PE
and repeated handling. Tack welds are

permitted for local or job site fabrication.
6"
12/3/2015
Galvanizing over welded surface not required.
07/01/00
REVISIO N
LAST
FASTENER UNIT
DETAILS FOR CONCRETE & CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
BOTTOM VI
EW
REVISION
divided roadways.
#4 Bar
The specified weld shall be made when the
downstream ends on
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
273
SHEET
NO.
5 of 7
1
2"
1
2"
Hex Nuts (2 Req.)
Flat Washer (1 Req.)
1
2"
1
1
6 2"
1
2"
Min.
x 6" Bolt
May Be Substituted
Notes:
Anchors required for CMP only.
Anchor, washer and nuts to be galvanized steel.
Bend anchor where required to center in concrete slab.
Damaged surfaces to be repaired after bending.
Anchors are to be spaced a distance equal to four (4) corrugations.
Place the anchors in the outside crest of corrugation.
Flat washer to be placed on inside wall of pipe.
Holes in the mitered end pipe are to be drilled or punched; burning not permitted.
ANCHOR DETAIL
1
2"
Bell Lgth.
Min.
1
16"
1" Min.
Nominal Dia.
Pipe Shell T
3
4"
(Varies)
1
2 2"
1
4"
Steel Bar
(See Detail Right)
4x Bolt Dia.
3L or Bell
Length +3
4x Bolt
Dia. Min.
1
2"
Min.
Bolt Diameter
1
2"
1
2"
Varies
2"
45
Dia. of Bolt +
Slot
M Less 2'-0"
See Tables For Dimensions
4x Bolt Dia.
END VI
EW
SI
DE VI
EW
1
4"
Steel Bar
Intermediate and Fastener

For Multiple Drain Pipe Only
Optional Shape
4x Bolt Dia.
Options For Top Opening:
4x Bolt Dia.
Varies
1
2"
3L or Bell Length +3
a. 4" Or 6" Mill Head Cut, 1" Deep

b. 2" diameter Drilled Hole
c.
11
16"
1
2 2"
Tongue Length L
x 2" Slot
Bottom Opening:
11
16"
1
4"
Min.
Steel Bar
(See Detail Right)

x 2" Slot.
11
16"
x 2" Slot
Pipe Shell T
(Varies)
TOP VI
EW
All bars, bolts, nuts and washers are to be galvanized steel.
Bolt diameters shall be
3
8"
for 15" to 36" pipe and
5
8"
for 42" to 60" pipe.
Two connectors required per joint, located 60 right and left of bottom center of pipe.
Bolt holes in pipe shell are to be drilled.
FOR SI
NGL
E & MUL
TI
PL
E DRAI
N PI
PE
GRATE DETAIL
CONCRETE PIPE CONNECTOR DETAIL
11:
32:
13 AM
See General Notes, Sheet 7.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DETAILS FOR CONCRETE & CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
273
SHEET
NO.
6 of 7
GENERAL NOTES
1.
Unless otherwise designated in the plans, concrete pipe mitered end sections may be used with any type of side drain pipe;
corrugated steel pipe mitered end sections may be used with any type of side drain pipe except aluminum pipe; and,
corrugated aluminum mitered end sections may be used with any type of side drain pipe except steel pipe. When bituminous
coated metal pipe is specified for side drain pipe, mitered end sections shall be constructed with like pipe or concrete pipe.
When the mitered end section pipe is dissimilar to the side drain pipe, a concrete jacket shall be constructed in accordance
with Index No. 280.
2.
Corrugated polyethylene pipe (HDPE), polyvinyl-chloride pipe (PVC) and polypropylene pipe (PPP) for side drain applications
shall utilize either corrugated metal or concrete mitered end sections (MES). When used in conjunction with corrugated (MES),
1:4
connection shall be by either a formed metal band specifically designated to join HDPE or PVC pipe, with metal pipe or other
coupler approved by the State Drainage Engineer. When used in conjunction with a concrete (MES), connection shall be by
concrete jacket constructed in accordance with Index No. 280.
Ditch
Side
Bottom
Ditch
3.
Concrete pipe used in the assembly of mitered end sections shall be of selective lengths to avoid excessive connections.
4.
Corrugated metal pipe galvanizing that is damaged during beveling and perforating for mitered end section shall be repaired.
5.
That portion of corrugated metal pipe in direct contact with the concrete slab and extending 12" beyond shall be bituminous
Flow
1:4
coated prior to placing of the concrete.
1:4
6.
When existing multiple side drain pipes are spaced other than the dimensions shown in this detail, or have nonparallel axes,
or have non-uniform sections, The mitered end sections will be constructed either separately as single pipe mitered end
Intersect 1:4 Slope
sections or collectively as multiple pipe end sections as directed by the Engineer; however, mitered end sections will be paid
And Crown Line Elev.
for each, based on each independent pipe end.
7.
The reinforced concrete slab shall be constructed for all sizes of side drain pipe and cast in place with Class NS concrete.
8.
Round pipe size 30" or greater, pipe-arch size 35"x24" or greater and elliptical pipe 19"x30" or greater shall be grated
unless excepted in the plans. Smaller sizes of pipe shall be grated only when called for in plans. The lower grate on
Transition Length=10 D
trailing downstream ends on divided highways shall be omitted.
9.
Grates are to be fabricated from steel ASTM A53, Grade B, pipe. The lower grate on all traffic approach ends shall be
Schedule 80 and all remaining grates shall be Schedule 40. Grates subject to salt free and corrosive free environment may
PLAN
be fabricated from galvanized pipe, with base metal exposed during fabrication repaired as specified in Section 562,
DITCH TRANSITION
Standard Specifications; or, fabricated from black pipe and hot dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
A123. Grates subject to salt water or highly corrosive environment shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance
with ASTM A123.
10. Ditch transitions shall be used on all grades in excess of 3% as directed by the Engineer.
Modified Slope When Minimum

Cover Or Less Occurs Both On
Existing And Proposed Installations
2.
5'
11. The project engineer shall contact the District Drainage Engineer for possible alternate treatment prior to constructing side
1'
drain mitered end sections where a minimum spacing of 30' will not result between the toe points of the mitered end sections.
1
:
1
2 Or St
e
e
p
e
r
12. The cost of all pipe(s), grates, fasteners, reinforcing, connectors, anchors, concrete, sealants, jackets and coupling bands
shall be included in the cost for the mitered end section. Sodding shall be paid for separately under the contract unit price
1:
4
for Performance Turf, SY.
13. Mitered end sections shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Mitered End Section (SD), Ea., based on each
independent pipe end.
DESIGN NOTES
1.
PERMISSIBLE PAVEMENT MODIFICATION
In critical hydraulic locations, grates shall not be used until potential debris transport has been evaluated by the drainage
engineer and appropriate adjustments made. Ditch grades in excess of 3% or pipe with less than 1.5' of cover and grades in
excess of 1% will require such an evaluation (General Note 9).
11:
32:
14 AM
2.
The design engineer shall determine highly corrosive locations and specify in the plans when the grates shall be hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication (General Note 10).
3.
The design engineer shall determine and designate in the plans which alternate types of mitered end section will not be
12/3/2015
permitted. The restriction shall be based on corrosive or structural requirements.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
NOTES & INFORMATION

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
273
SHEET
NO.
7 of 7
SCHEDULE OF BELL REINFORCEMENT
Allowable Tolerance For Last
Classes II,III,IV,V; Wall A,B,C

Design
Collar Of Class NS Concrete (May Be Formed
Full Wrap Of Reinforcing When

1.75 L
Using Single Elliptical Cage
Maximum
Nominal
Bell
Reinforcement
Reinforcement
Under Tolerance
in per foot
in per foot
0.07
0.010
3"
Existing
By Any Method Approved By The Engineer)
Proposed
Pipe
Diameter
18"
0.07
0.09
0.010
30"
0.12
0.010
36"
0.14
0.010
0.16
1
2"
0.010
48"
0.19
0.011
54"
0.21
0.012
60"
0.23
0.0135
66"
0.26
0.015
72"
0.28
0.0165
78"
0.30
0.018
84"
0.33
0.0195
90"
0.35
0.021
96"
0.37
0.0225
102"
0.40
0.024
108"
0.42
0.0255
Than 1' Below Grade
Min.
3Max.
2- 2" Hoops
1
6- 2" x 16" Dowels
60Max.
Existing Endwall
Set In Adhesive
Min. Cover
Bonded Material System
Rubber Gasket (Round Or Profile)
(Round Rubber Gasket Shown)
A
*All circumferential steel located above this line
within 1.75 L is defined as bell reinforcement.
Of Direction Of Flow
DETAIL OF BELL & SPIGOT CONCRETE PIPE JOINT
SECTION AA
USING ROUND OR PROFILE RUBBER GASKET
Note: Cost for removal and disposal of portions of top and toe of existing endwall
the contract unit price for pipe culvert.

12" For Pipes 15" Thru 24"
24" For Pipes 30" And Larger
Steel Area Per Linear Foot Both
CONCRETE COLLAR FOR EXTENSION
Class NS Concrete
3"
Ways May Be Used; Provided The
OF EXISTING PIPE CULVERTS

Class NS Concrete
6"
Wires Are Spaced A Minimum Of 2"
3"
Varies
3"
3"
Provides 0.126 Square Inches Of
6"
and cost of concrete, reinforcing steel and construction of collar to be included in
Any Wire Mesh Arrangement Which
24" For Pipes 24"x38" And Larger
Existing Endwall Regardless
To Contour Of Pipe
ROUND RUBBER GASKET SHOWN
12" For Pipes 14"x23" Through 19"x30"
Spigot End To Be Placed In
Cut Toe Of Existing Endwall
Class NS Concrete
3"
Existing Endwall Less
Bell Reinforcement
3
4"
Min. Cover
Alternate Arrangement Of
Point And Meet ASTM C-76

1
2"
Remove Portion Of
30 Max.
Shall Extend To The Shoulder
0.010
24"
42"
12"
The Last Full Wrap Of Reinforcing
6"
15"
And/Or A Maximum Of 6" On Centers
Smooth Inside
Joint
Joint With Mortar

Class NS Conc.
CONCRETE JACKET
Joint
3"
6"
Round Or Elliptical
12"
Double Gasket
Max.
1
Diameter= 2
Of Main Line
Pipe Diameter (Or
1
2
d/2
Height Of
Elliptical Main Line Pipe)

d
DISSIMILAR JOINTS
4" Min.
Primer
Filter Fabric Jacket Required
Filter Fabric Jacket Required
PREFORMED PLASTIC JOINT
PROFILE RUBBER GASKET
Bituminous Coating Required For
M anufacturer
TONGUE & GROOVE
BELL AND SPIGOT
(BEFORE PULL-UP)
Main Line Pipe
Note: For reinforcement see elliptical pipe concrete jacket. (All Pipe Sizes)
Rubber Gasket
Opening
(Preformed Plastic)
By Pipe
Primer
Stub Pipe
All Metal Pipes (Any Suitable
1
4"
Bituminous Material May Be Field
(BEFORE PULL-UP)
Applied) Bituminous Coating To

Cost of concrete jacket or filter fabric jacket to be
Extend 12" Beyond Concrete Collar
6"
included in cost of elliptical concrete pipe culverts.
4" Min.
Hoop
Cut And Bend

Pipe Reinforcement
Cost of concrete and steel to be included
ELLIPTICAL CONCRETE PIPE JOINTS
in contract unit price for pipe culvert.

Varies
Joint
CONCRETE COLLAR FOR JOINING

Filter Fabric
12"
12"
MAINLINE PIPE AND STUB PIPE
Type D-3
Min. Min.
12"
Overlap 2' Min.
Class NS Concrete
ELLIPTICAL PIPE
Joint
Section 985)
Varies
12"
(See Specifications
Securing Device
12"
Note: Cost of concrete and bituminous coating to be included in

contract unit price for either new pipe or Mitered End Section.
Masonry Plug
Joint
"
12 .
" i
n
12 .M
n
i
M
8", Pipes To 60"

12"
12"
Min. Min.
Filter Fabric
12", Pipes 66" To 108"
Type D-3
16", Pipes Above 108"

A concrete jacket shall not be used to join:
Securing Device
11:
32:
14 AM
Alternate connection must be approved by the State Drainage Engineer.
a)metal pipe of dissimilar materials

b) flexible pipe when the minimum cover required in accordance with
ELLIPTICAL PIPE SHOWN
ROUND PIPE
ISOMETRIC VIEW
PIPE SECTIONS
Note: Unless otherwise called for in the plans, the
Index No. 205 cannot be obtained
cost of plugging pipes to be included in contract
DISSIMILAR TYPES
unit price for new pipe.
Cost of filter fabric jacket to be included in cost of pipe culverts.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
PIPE PLUG
FOR ALL PIPE TYPES - CONCRETE PIPE SHOWN
CONCRETE JACKET FOR CONNECTING DISSIMILAR TYPES
FILTER FABRIC JACKET
OF PIPE AND CONCRETE PIPES WITH DISSIMILAR JOINTS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MISCELLANEOUS DRAINAGE DETAILS
NO.
280
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
6" Std.
Varies
1
2"
6x4x
3
8x4
1" Hole
3
8"
1
Sidewalk
Steel Plate
1" Hole
1
4
C
SECTION - STEEL PLATE
4" Pipes
6"
2"
3"
6"
6" c to c
12"
1
4
1
2"
SECTION AA
A
Front Slope
CLIP DETAIL
(1:2 Std)
1
2"
PLAN
3"
Front Slope (1:2 Std.)
4"
1"
12"
3"
PVC Pipe Sleeve
1
2"
1:
1/
2
x 14" Bolt With

8"
Nut And Washers

12"
3"
Retaining Wall
3" Conc.
Retaining
Ditch Pavt.
Wall
4"
Expansion Material
Sidewalk
3
4"
Varies
4" Pipes
Anchor with nuts and washers
1
2"
Minimum Embedment:
Hex Bolt:
Cast-In-Place
90 Elbow Or
Adhesive-Bonded Anchor:
Quarter Bend
0.02 (Min.)
Fully Threaded Rod Installed In

Steel Plate
SECTION CC
Accordance With Specification

Section 416
SECTION BB
SIDE VIEW
Note: PVC pipe, Schedule 40, to be paid for under the contract
unit price for Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Culvert (4"), LF.
2x2x3/16
CONCRETE GUTTER AND DRAINS AT RETAINING WALLS
2'-4" For 18" Pipe

3'-0" For 24" & 30" Pipe
6"
3'-8" For 36" Pipe
Edge Of Pavement
Minimum Distance As
Variable Front Slope
With Safety Criteria
2"
1:2 Slope If Necessary To Go
4'-4" For 42" Pipe
Beyond Normal Toe Of Slope
Required To Comply
Shoulder Line
1
4
Normal Slope
Bars 8" Ctrs. Each Way
And Maintain Ditch Width By
Not Steeper
Varies
1:
6
Moving Out Back Slope.
1
4
Not Steeper
Than 1:10
1
2"
Bars, Pipes < 30"
5
8"
Bars, Pipes 30"
2"
Clip Angle
Than 1:10
Steel
Plate:
5"
1:
4
h
c
t
i
m Of D
o
t
t
Bo
8"
1:
2
See detail
3'-6" For 18" Pipe

Ditch Offset
4'-0" For 24" Pipe

Variable Front Slope
Slope To Normal Slope If Possible.

4'-6" For 30" Pipe
L=Length Of Transition
Slope Not To Be Steeper Than 1:2.
5'-0" For 36" Pipe

Normal Slope
See Section Above If 1:2 Slope Must

5'-6" For 42" Pipe
Vert Bars & Plate Holes
Go Beyond Toe Of Normal Slope.
Symmetrical About | Pipe:
Edge Of Pavement
4 For 18" Pipe

Edge Of Shoulder
5 For 24" & 30" Pipe
6 For 36" Pipe

7 For 42" Pipe
Not Steeper Than 1:10
NOTE: Filling or excavation of variable slopes to

H
be done during normal grading operations.

Pipe Dia.
L=Length Of Transition
Bottom Of Ditch
SECTION CC
Grate (Lbs.)
18"
24"
30"
36"
48
58
74
90
42"
111
11:
32:
15 AM
FRONT VIEW
Use Larger Value Of Either:
Note: Guards to be constructed only at locations specifically called for in
1. L=10xH (No Maximum)

2. L=10xDitch Offset (Maximum L=100')
plans. Guard, plate & clips, bolts, nuts and sleeves to be included in
the contract unit price for Reinforcing Steel (Miscellaneous).
12/3/2015
METHOD FOR SETTING LIMITS OF VARIABLE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
FRONT SLOPES AT DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
GUARD AT PIPE ENDS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
280
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
CLEARANCE
RAILROAD COMPANY
STRENGTH
BELOW
BOTTOM OF
(2)
RAIL (FEET)
ASTM (C76)
Minimum Length Of Special Pipes Required
CLASS
(To Be In Increments Of 8')

of Railroad
Alabama & Gulf CoastRailway (RailAmerica)
5.5
IV
AN Railway & Bay Line Railroad (Genesee &

Wyoming)
(1)
5.5 / 4.5
Top Of Rail
Standard Cover
See Table Above

2' Min.
CSX Transportation
2'
Bottom Of Rail
5.5
1:1 2Slopes
(Design Loading)
2' Min.
Additional Std. Strength

(1)
First CoastRailroad (Genesee & Wyoming)
5.5 / 4.5
Pipe As Required
Pipe Shell Thickness
Pipe As Required
Additional Std. Strength
Flow Line Of Pipe
Florida Midland,Central,and Northern Railroads
5.5
Florida East Coast(FEC)Railway Company
5.5
IV
Florida West CoastRailroad Company
5.5
Georgia & Florida Railway,Inc.
5.5
(Pinsly Railroad)
METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE LENGTH OF
(1)
South Florida RegionalTransportation Authority

(Tri-County Commuter Rail)
5.5
(1) -
Distance standard for yard and industrial tracks.
(2) -
Clearance is for casing pipe. All subgrade carrier pipelines and wirelines
Junction Box Riser Is Less Than 4 Feet

in Diameter; Or When 3'-6", Alt. B Inlet,
Manhole Or Junction Box Riser Is Used;
Or When Rectangular Inlet Is Used.)
2'-0"
6"
Integral Riser Reinforcement
(Top Required When Inlet, Manhole Or
For Optional Construction
5'-4" For 54" Pipe
Joints See Index No. 201
6'-0" For Other Size Pipes
1
2"
(1)
5.5 / 4.5
12'M ax. Depth
Junction Boxes, Ea.
6.0
Inlets, M anholes Or
See Plans
Wyoming)
6.0
Reinforced Concrete Top
Varies
14"
Talleyrand TerminalRailroad (Genesee &
IV
In Cost Of Pipe
South CentralFlorida Express
5.5
Contract Unit Price For
Seminole Gulf Railway (LP)
Cost To Be Included
Port of Palm Beach DistrictRailroad
5.5 / 4.5
To Be Paid For At The
Norfolk Southern (NS)Railway Corporation
Box As Called For In Plans
Inlet , M anhole Or Junction
SPECIAL PIPE REQUIRED UNDER RAILROADS
#5 Bars @ 18" Ctrs. Vert.
8" For 54" Pipe
And 6" Ctrs. Horiz.
#5 Bars
12" For All Others
Bend Pipe Steel To Riser
will be installed within a casing pipe which will extend from Right-of-Way
4'-0"
2'-0"
54" Minimum
(Span Or Dia.)
line to Right-of-Way line.

Round Or Elliptical Pipe
11:
32:
16 AM
SECTION
PLAN OF TOP
INLETS, MANHOLES OR JUNCTION BOXES
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
ON INTEGRAL PRECAST CONCRETE RISER FOR CONCRETE PIPE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
280
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Arc Length
tB
n
i
Po
Lip (3" Rise)

Side In Line With Bottom Weep Holes
Staples Not More
3"
Erosion Stops
0.0%
Varies
50' Max.
d
o
2'S
Flow Line
DPI
10' C. to C.
2'S
o
d
Varies (25' Min.)
Const. Weep Holes Half-Way Up The
Po
i
n
tA
When Width Is Greater Than 4',
Normal Ditch Elevation
4'
Than 3' Centers

b
SECTION EE
6" Min. Overlap

Weep Holes Centered
10'
W
TO REPLACE:
Rows Of
Arc
Weep Holes
Length
1'
6' Median Swale
6'
0.24'
19'
6.0'
Matting
PLAN
10'
0.67'
19'
9'
0.54'
19'
When
"x"= 1' To 4' Const. 1 Row (Centered)
"x"= 13' To 17' Const. 4 Rows
6" Typical
Note: All weep holes to be 3"x4" rectangle or 4" or 5" dia. circle hole.
1
2
0.74'
14'
PLAN
cu. ft. (12" x 12" x 6") of No. 6 aggregate to be placed under
Matting
9'
9.1'
1:4 Front Slopes & Back Slope

5' BW Ditch
1.5' Deep
More Than 18" Centers
10.1'
Sodded Ditch
Pavement
1.0' Deep
Sod
On Outer Edges At Not
(Typical)
4' BW Ditch
10'
Each Edge Of Overlaps,
Matting
5' BW Ditch
1.0' Deep
One Row
Each Side Of Stops And

1:6 Front Slopes; 1:4 Back Slope
Standard Paved Ditch
Sodded Ditch Paved Ditch
1' Except For
"x"
One Row Of Staples
10'
each hole. 1 sq. ft. of galv. wire mesh ( 4" openings) shall be placed
9.2'
PAVED DITCH END TREATMENT
between the aggregate and the ditch pavement. Cost of holes,

1
4' BW Ditch
8'
0.58'
14'
Side Slope
8.1'
(in center)
aggregate and wire mesh to be included in the cost of ditch
6" Overlap
pavement.
GENERAL NOTES
Side Slope
For use only where side slopes are 1:4 or flatter. Point "A" and "B" are to be
WEEP HOLE ARRANGEMENT
the same elevation and should be used to locate the paved section.
1.
Type of ditch pavement shall be as shown on plans.
2.
In concrete ditch pavement, contraction joints are to be
SECTION
MATTING FOR DITCH
ALTERNATE DITCH PAVEMENT
Ditch Median
spaced at 25' maximum intervals, or as directed by the

Engineer. Contraction joints may be either formed
Front Slope
Roadway Ditch
Sodding Or
Front Slope
Sodding
Li
ne
ho
ul
de
r
Point
2'
1:1.5 Slope
3'
3'
1:
6
6
1:
2'
5' Min.
4
0
.
0
Side Slope
1:1.5 Slope
more than 200'.
Lateral Ditch
5' Min.
*Misc. asphalt will not be
decrease in ditch velocity.
Ditch Pavt.
Slope
Slope
Natural Ground
construction.
Lip at end of ditch pavement shall normally be located
Front
4.
0.
5'
Pavt.
preformed joint filler shall be
Side Slope
Ditch Slope
permitted for this type of
1
2"
constructed at all inlets, endwalls, and at intervals of not
downstream of DPI or on flatter grades where there is a
Back
Expansion joints with

Roadway
3.
(No Weep Holes)
Ditch Slope
5' Min.
6
1:
SWALED MEDIAN
Ditch Slope
Ditch
permitted in concrete ditch pavement.
Point
Roadway
(construction joint) or tooled. No open joints will be

Shoulder
1:
6
0
.
0
4
N
at
ur
al
5' Min.
Ditch Pavt.
Shoulder
R/W Ditch
ho
ul
de
r
Shown On Plans
Gr
ou
nd
Li
ne
Back Slope As
1:1.5 Slope
Sodding
JUNCTION OF ROADWAY DITCH*
JUNCTION OF R/W DITCH*
AND LATERAL DITCH
AND LATERAL DITCH
Toewalls are to be used with all ditch paving. A toewall is

not required adjacent to drainage structures.
5.
2'
So
d
2'
When directed by the Engineer, weep hole spacing may be

reduced to 5' minimum.
d
So
6.
Sod Or
Do Not Construct Weep Holes In
For junction of R/W ditch spillway and lateral ditch, sides of

paving to be 1' high minimum.
Ditch Pavt.
This Area Or 5' Upstream

5'
Min.
Ditch Width Varies

1:1.5 Slope
Ditch Grade
Lateral Ditch a
Grade
Front And Back
Front And Back
7.
For ditch pavements requiring filter fabric (See Table 1) place
the filter fabric directly beneath the pavement for the entire
40'
length and width of the pavement. See Standard Specification
Slopes Vary
Slopes Vary
3"x4" Weep Holes
ROADWAY SIDE DITCH
Normal Ditch Elev.
Front
Back
Slope
3"x4" Weep Holes
Section 985 for fabric requirements and application.
Slope
0.
5'
Min.
0.
5'
5' Varies
Grade
Ditch
8.
When weep holes with aggregate are used, place filter fabric
below the aggregate to form a mat continuous with the
SECTION AA
TYPICAL SECTION
PROFILE OF DITCH PAVEMENT
2'
So
d
pavement filter fabric or underlapping the pavement filter
2'
4' Std.
fabric, if present.
d
So
9.
Pavement Type
Dimensions
Payment
Basis Of
Filter Fabric
Ditch Pavt.
References & Remarks
Unit
Estimate
Type
Range
Concrete
24"
6"
3"
SY
SY
D-6*
Low-High
Miscellaneous Asphalt
24" 12"
4"
TN
0.2 TN/SY
None
Low-Moderate
Section 339.
Riprap (Sand-Cement)
24" 12"
4"
CY
0.11 CY/SY
D-4*
Low-Moderate
Section 530. Grouting of joints required.
TN
TN
D-2*
Moderate-High
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
the plans.
Velocity
Riprap (Ditch Lining)
Ditch pavement requiring reinforcement shall be detailed in
Sod Or
TABLE 1: DITCH PAVEMENT
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
32:
17 AM
AT LOCATIONS OTHER THAN JUNCTION WITH LATERAL DITCH
40' MEDIAN
10. Cost of plastic filter fabric to be included in the contract unit

price for ditch pavement.
Section 524 of the Standard Specifications.
Section 530.
11. Sodding to be paid for under contract unit price for

Performance Turf, SY
* Filter Fabric Required.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DITCH PAVEMENT AND SODDING
NO.
281
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
5
'
5'
5'
5
'
5'
'
5
5'
5'
Sand-Cement Or
6" Fold Min.
Rubble Riprap
No Adhesive Above Here
Toe Of Slope
5'
Filter Fabric
12"
Toe Of Slope
Toe Of Slope
Note: Sodding quantities for each endwall to be
12" Bituminous Coating
determined by the designer from this detail.
On Face Of Concrete
(
EXCEPT I
NDEX NO.25
0)
STRAIGHT ENDWALL
U-TYPE ENDWALL
STRAI
GHT ENDWAL
L
INDEX NO. 250
INDEX NO. 261
Varies
5'
5'
5'
BONDED OPTION
Sand-Cement Or
6" Fold Min.
Rubble Riprap
5
'
5'
5'
Filter Fabric
1"x2" Pressure
Treated Timber
Toe Of Slope
Toe Of Slope
5'
5'
Nailed To Surface
Toe Of Slope
5'
U-TYPE WINGS
NAILED OPTION
45 WINGS
WINGED ENDWALLS
FLARED END SECTION
INDEX NO. 266
INDEX NO. 270
Note: Either option may be used unless otherwise called for in the plans.
FILTER FABRIC PLACEMENT AT CONCRETE STRUCTURE

TABLE 2: SOD QUANTITIES (SY)
INDEX NO. 250
INDEX NO. 261
INDEX NO. 266
SLOPE
SLOPE
SLOPE
PIPE
INDEX NO. 270
ALL SLOPES
1:2
SIZE
1:3
1:4
1:6
1:2
PIPES
1
1:3
1:4
1:6
1:2
1:3
14
15
18
22
10
11
PIPES
2
1:4
1:6
PIPES
12"
PIPES
15"
19
21
24
22
26
29
26
30
33
34
38
43
13 (15)
16
17
23
15
17
20
25
18"
21
24
27
25
29
33
30
34
38
39
44
50
14 (16)
17
19
25
16
18
22
28
21"
24"
26
30
34
32
37
42
38
44
50
50
58
66
15 (17)
19
21
28
19
22
26
34
27"
11:
32:
17 AM
11
12
14
15
30"
31
37
42
39
46
53
46
55
63
62
74
85
36"
37
44
52
46
56
65
56
67
79
76
91
107
42"
43
53
62
55
67
79
67
82
96
91
111
48"
50
62
73
64
79
93
78
97
115
108
133
54"
57
71
85
74
92
110
91
113
136
126
157
188
17 (18)
21
24
32
21
25
30
40
16
24
29
35
47
18
132
27
32
39
54
19
158
30
36
44
61
21
21
60"
22
66"
25
72"
26
12/3/2015
() Endwall With Baffles
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SOD PLACEMENT AT PIPE/CULVERT END TREATMENTS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DITCH PAVEMENT AND SODDING
NO.
281
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
4'
-5" (
Swk. 6'
)
7" (
Swk. = 5'
)
5"
See Plans For
4 1/2 "
Handrail Requirements
Anchor Bolts
SLAB REINFORCEMENT
Location Reference
4" - 45 Haunch
#5 Bars
Minimum Sod
7" Slab
2" Cover
#4 Bars
8"
SLAB SECTION
PLAN
Location Reference
SECTION BB
Location Reference
1/2" Preformed Joint
A
Back Of Sidewalk
0'
-11" M in.
Unsupported Edge
1'
-7" M ax.
4"
3"
3'-4"
Varies W ith Throat
5' Typ.
6'Sidewalk
3'-4"
4'
-5"
5' Typ.
7" (
Swk. 6'
)
Gutter
Sidewalk Joint
Varies
5'Sidewalk
Buffer
Curb and
Roadway
6 Spa. @
Symmetrical About
2'-6"
6"
Symmetrical About
5"
6' Sidewalk Without Buffer
2 Spa. 5 Spa. @
5' Sidewalk With Buffer
5'
-0" (
Swk. = 5'
)
3"
Filler Slab To Swk.
Back Of Sidewalk
Sidewalk ( 6')
Preformed
Buffer
Varies
4 1/2 "
Varies (6' Min.)
Joint Filler
Varies
Sidewalk (5' Typ)
7"
4'-5"
7"
1
2"
See Plans For

Handrail Requirements
2'-0"
4'-5"
8"
8"
1' Max., 4" Min.
3'-1"
Grading And Sodding
4'-5"
Back Of Sidewalk
As Directed By
The Engineer
8"
1' Max., 4" Min.

Varies
3'-1"
Varies
8"
Grading And Sodding

Back Of Sidewalk
2'-8"
3'-4"
Level With Slot
1'-4"
As Directed By
The Engineer
Elevation
8"
8"
11:
32:
23 AM
Notes:
6' SIDEWALK
5' SIDEWALK
SECTION AA
SECTION AA
FRONT ELEVATION
2. Inlet to be paid for under the contract unit price for Inlets (Ditch Bottom Type C Modified), EA.
INLET TYPE C (MODIFIED)
Handrail to be paid for under the contract unit price for Pipe Handrail, (Material), LF.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1. For additional details see Index No. 232.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
BACK OF SIDEWALK DRAINAGE
NO.
282
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
Sidewalk
1/2" Preformed
Joint Filler
Riprap-Half Plan Shown
PLAN
See Plans For Handrail Requirements

Back Of Sidewalk
1/2" Preformed Joint Filler
10"
Sidewalk
Varies
8"
D + 2'
-6" M ax.
1'-4"
6"
6"
Sidewalk
1
2
Sod Slopes 1:1
1
2
Or
Riprap Slopes Steeper Than 1:1
1'
-4"
2'-0"
FRONT ELEVATION
Pipe Size
Notes:
(in)
1. Maximum pipe size shall be 24" diameter.
Concrete Class I
Sand-CementRiprap
(CY)
(CY)
2. Grading back of sidewalk varies and shall be done as directed by the Engineer.
15
4'-9"
2.3
1.1
3. Concrete quantities shown are for maximum wall heights, and shall be basis for estimate and payment.
18
5'-3"
2.6
1.3
4. Riprap quantities shown are for estimate purposes only. Cost of riprap to be included in cost of the endwall.
24
6'-3"
3.3
1.8
5. Endwalls to be paid for under the contract unit price for Concrete Class I (Endwalls), CY. Handrail to be paid for
SPECIAL CONCRETE ENDWALL
under the contract unit price for Pipe Handrail, (Material), LF.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
11:
32:
24 AM
SECTION AA
12/3/2015
(Max. 1:1),
And Ditch Bottom (Symmetrical About )
Flatter (Sym. About )
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
282
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
R/W
Collar
24"
Varies
24"
Proposed Main Line Pipe
12" Pipe
Varies
24"x24"x3" Concrete Slab
12" Pipe
YARD DRAIN ITEM INCLUDES:

1.
15" x 15" x 12" Concrete or PVC Tee 4' long.
2.
Grate diameter = 14-"
Tee
Pipe Plug
Thickness = 2-"
Flow area = 45 sq in min.
Light Duty Cast Iron, see Specification Section
962.
24"
To Be Paid For
As Yard Drain
3.
12" pipe as necessary.
4.
0.04 Cubic yards concrete for slab.
To Be Paid For
As 15" Pipe
YARD DRAINS
Notes:
1.
Yard drains to be located outside the R/W. Drainage area should not exceed 750 SF (grate flow 0.1 Cfs).
2.
Yard drains may be constructed at the option of the property owner as shown on the plans.
3.
Cost of plugs and collars to be included in the cost for 15" pipe. For collar and plug details see Index No. 280.
4.
Yard drains to be paid for under the contract unit price for Yard Drains, EA.
24"
Varies
Mitered End
Class I Concrete
Sidewalk
Flow Lines Of Pipes To
Match Gutter Elevations
e
p
o
.Sl
n
5 % Mi
.
0
Double 4" Pipe
Ditch Bottom
6"
6"
6"
Curb And Gutter

11:
32:
25 AM
Varies
SHALLOW DITCHES
Notes:
Note:
1. To be constructed at locations as directed by the Engineer.
Miter to slope.
12/3/2015
2. Either cast iron pipe or PVC rigid conduit, U.L. listed for direct sunlight exposure, Schedule 40, may be used.
3. Pipe and Mitered End to be paid for under the contract unit price for either Cast Iron Soil Pipe (Standard) (4"),
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
LF or PVC Pipe For Back Of Sidewalk Drainage (4"), LF.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
282
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Public Rd. Or Crossover
Provide Approximately A Minimum Of 0.20% Grade On Gutter, Slightly

Warping The Surface Of The Median Pavement If Necessary, Within
Limits Of The Median Curb Or Curb And Gutter. Construct A Drainage
Flume Or Flumes At The Point Or Points Of Low Grade. See Details.
A
Grade To Drain As Shown In
Runoff
Prop. Pavt.
The Plans Or As Adjusted By
Runoff
The Engineer During Construction
Prop. Median Pavt., Warp
Median Width As Indicated
Surface If Necessary To
Drain To Prop. Flumes
In Detail Plans
Slope To Approx. Match That Of Adjoining
Auxiliary Lane
Match Surfaces
Pavt. (Breakover 0.02 Min., 0.05 Max.)

Runoff
Runoff
Exist. Pavt. Or Superelevated
Crown Line (Exist. Pavt.) Or Lane Line Of
Portion Of New 4-Lane Pavt.
Superelevated Pavt. (Exist. Pavt. Or New 4-Lane Pavt.)
Varies (4.75' Typ.)
Varies (4.75' Typ.)
7" For Type A Curb

Match Existing Grade
Provide Smooth Section
18" For Types E & F Curbs
9" For Types A & E Curbs

6" For Type F Curb
Median
Exist. Or
New Pavt.
4
'
Prop. Pavt.
Grade Established
In Detail Plans
s
e
ri
a
V
SECTION AA
3'-0"
C
9"
1'-6"
1'-6"
9"
9"
4"
9"
5' Wide Sod Unless

Other Treatment Called
3"
For In Plans
Min. Slope 0.01'/ft.

Median
Const. Ditch
Const. Ditch
To Drain
SECTION CC
To Drain
FLUME DETAIL
SECTION BB
(May Drain From Any Point Designated In the Plans Or
As Adjusted By The Engineer During Construction)
11:
32:
25 AM
GENERAL NOTES
1. These details are to apply to projects which provide for the conversion of 2-lane sections to 4-lane divided highway sections
and for superelevated sections of new 4-lane divided highways. Layout above is illustration only. Cost of flumes to be
included in the contract price for Curb or Curb and Gutter. Sod to be paid for under the contract unit price for Performance
12/3/2015
Turf, SY.
2. Flumes to be located in low point of noses and at other points as designated in the plans. The locations may be adjusted by
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
the Engineer during construction.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MEDIAN OPENING FLUME
NO.
283
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
C
B
Varies
Paved Shoulder
5' Transition
Shoulder Line
10'
B
2'
C
'R
50
6"
D
'
1
1
0
'
R
6"
1'
7"
'
3
3"
2'
Varies
SECTION AA
Ditch or Swale
2'
6"
1'
5'
7"
3"
10'
Ditch or Swale
Varies
SECTION BB
Varies
6"
Varies
(6" Min.)
6"
Var
i
es
es
i
Var
2'
6"
1'
SECTION DD
1. Spillway to be paid for as Shoulder Gutter, L.F.
10"
6"
6"
SECTION CC
2. If spillway empties into an unpaved ditch, the
11:
32:
30 AM
detail should be modified as necessary.
DETAIL OF CONCRETE SPILLWAY AT END OF SHOULDER GUTTER
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
(TO BE USED WHERE INLETS, PIPES & ENDWALLS ARE IMPRACTICAL)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE SHOULDER GUTTER SPILLWAY
NO.
284
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
GENERAL NOTES
Inlet Or Manhole (Inlet With Sump Shown)
1. Pipe shall be any of the optional types permitted in Section 443 of the Specifications
unless otherwise restricted in the plans. Dissimilar types of pipe will not be permitted in
a continuous run of pipe.
Bituminous Coating (Field Applied)
1
Coupling Band
1: 2
1'
Filter Fabric Envelope
Typical
2. Concrete pipe shall be placed with the slots positioned on sides.
1: 2
Location
For Bottom
3. Alignment joints are standard (gaskets not required). Recorrugation of metal pipe ends
Slab Without
not required.
Sump
Perforated Pipe
8' Nonperforated Pipe
Sum p Depth
4'
Varies (
4'Std.
)
Typ.
12" Dia.
1'
W eep H ole
4. The contractor may submit other methods of providing slots having equal or greater area
No. 4 Coarse Aggregate
Paid For As French Drain
of opening, for approval by the Engineer.

No. 4 Coarse Aggregate
4'
5. Filter fabric shall be Type D-3 meeting the requirements of Section 985. All filter fabric
8' Nonslotted Pipe
joints shall lap a minimum of one (1) foot.
Slotted Pipe
6. The standard cross section shall be constructed unless other section(s) described or
Paid For As French Drain
detailed in the plans.
CONCRETE PIPE
METAL PIPE
1
4"
Sumps Are To Be Constructed Unless Excluded In The Plans.

Weep Hole To Be Constructed Only Where Called For In The Plans.
Galvanized Hardware Cloth
No. 4 Coarse Aggregate 2' x 2' x 2'
8. The contractor shall take the necessary precautions to prevent contamination of the trench
For Additional Sump Bottom Information See Index No. 201.
with sand, silt and foreign materials.
Filter Fabric
9. French drains shall be paid for under the contract unit price for French Drains, LF. The
unit price shall include the cost of pipe, pipe plugs, pipe fittings, coarse aggregate and
filter fabric in place, and the cost for trench excavation, backfill and compaction. The unit
price shall also include the cost for disposal of surplus excavated materials and cost for
restoration of pavement removed or damaged by french drain construction, but shall not
include payments for items paid for elsewhere.
1' Min.
td
.
)
Overlap
6"
(Ve
rti
ca
lS
Steel, Cast Or Ductile Iron Sleeve.
Std.
Filter Fabric
Envelope
Only Cast and Ductile Iron

Sanitary Sewer, or Cast Iron,
Va
rie
s
Ductile Iron, and Steel Water Mains

Will Be Allowed To Pass Directly
Utility Pipe
No. 4 Coarse
Varies, As Shown In
6"
1. Pipe invert should be at or above the water table whenever possible.
2. French drains with minor dimensional changes or otherwise different from the standard
cross-section shall be either described or detailed in the plans. French drains with
significantly different cross-sections shall be detailed in the plans.
Sl
op
e
Through French Drain (Without Sleeve).
DESIGN NOTES
Aggregate
The Plans. 2' Min.
(Min.)
3' (Min.)
3' (Min.)
1' Std.
ROUND PIPE SHOWN

11:
32:
31 AM
UTILITY PIPES THRU FRENCH DRAIN
Pipe OD
1' Std.
ROUND PIPE SHOWN
STANDARD CROSS SECTION (ENLARGED)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
FRENCH DRAIN SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FRENCH DRAIN
NO.
285
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
TOP
ELLIPTICAL PIPE
ROUND PIPE
TOP
Slot Cut
Of Slots
Of Slots
Opening
Pipe
Opening
Size
Size
Min.
Max.
1 32
3 8"
Pipe
Of Slots
"
Slot Cut
Min.
1'
Max.
65
65
55
55
36"-72"
15"-30"
14"x23"
10"
12"
15"
12"
14"
19"x30"
14"
16"
18"
12"
14"
24"x38"
14"
16"
24"
16"
18"
29"x45"
20"
22"
30"
16"
18"
34"x53"
20"
22"
36"
22"
24"
38"x60"
20"
22"
42"
22"
24"
48"
22"
24"
54"
24"
26"
60"
24"
26"
66"
24"
26"
72"
24"
26"
ROUND PIPE SHOWN
PICTORIAL VIEW
2' For 8' Joints Of Pipe

2.5' For 12' Joints Of Pipe
8'-0"
Slot
1'-0"
1'-0"
1'-0"
1'-0"
2'-0"
1
32"
Slot
Slot
A curved cut is acceptable
Slot
1'
6"
4"
5
8"
2'-0"
provided the control dimension
2'
is maintained (Typical For

3
8"
1
32"
Slot
Slot
Elliptical & Round Pipe)
A
ELLIPTICAL PIPE
SIDE VIEW
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
OPTION A - ROUND PIPE
ROUND PIPE
SECTION AA
SIDE VIEW
OPTION B - ROUND OR ELLIPTICAL PIPE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
32:
32 AM
SLOTTED PIPE OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FRENCH DRAIN
NO.
285
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
GENERAL NOTES
1.
The underdrain pipe shall be either 4" smooth or 5" corrugated tubing unless otherwise shown in the plans.
The size to be furnished will be based on the nominal internal diameter of a pipe with a smooth interior
wall. Except when prohibited by the plans, the special provisions or this standard, pipe with a corrugated
interior wall may be provided based on the following size equivalency.
4" smooth interior equivalent to 5" corrugated interior

2.
Std.
6"
Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall be quartz sand meeting the requirements of Sections 902-4 of the Standard
Specifications.
Coarse Aggregate
Coarse Aggregate
3.
Coarse aggregate shall be gravel or stone meeting the requirements of Sections 901-2 or 901-3. The
Pipe
Underdrain
Filter Fabric
Pipe
Envelope
18" Std.
24" Std.
21" Std.
Underdrain
30" Std.
gradation shall meet Section 901, Grades 4, 467, 5, 56 or 57 stone unless otherwise shown restricted in
Fine Aggregate
the plans.
Underdrain
Filter Fabric
Pipe
Envelope
6"
4.
Underdrain Type I, II, III and V shall be in accordance with Section 440.
5.
Filter fabric shall be Type D-3 (See Specifications Section 985). The internal filter fabric of Type V
6"
Min.
Min.
underdrain shall have a permittivity of 0.7 /sec. and an AOS of #40 sieve.
3" Std.
6"
6"
Min.
Min.
9" Min.
9" Min.
18" Std.
3" Std.
6.
When Type I is used, a filter fabric sock meeting Section 948 is required.
7.
See Index No. 500 for the standard location of Type I, II, and III underdrain. The location of Type V
3" Std.
18" Std.
24" Std.
6"
6"
Std.
Std.
underdrain and nonstandard locations of Type I, II, and III underdrain will be as detailed in the plans.
8.
I
I
TYPE I
I
TYPE I
TYPE I
All filter fabric joints shall overlap a minimum of 1'. The internal filter fabric of Type V underdrain shall
overlap into the coarse aggregate or the fine aggregate a minimum of 1'.
9.
Underdrain outlet pipes shall be nonperforated and all bends shall be made using
deg. bends shall be constructed with two
1
8
1
8
(45 deg.) elbows. 90
elbows separated by at least 1' of straight pipe.
Outlet pipes
stubbed into inlets or other drainage structures shall be not less than 6" above the structure flow line.
Outlet pipes discharging to grassed areas shall have concrete aprons, hardware cloth, and bordering sod as
shown in Index No. 287 for Edgedrain outlets.
DESIGN NOTES
1. The type of underdrain should be selected to meet design water removal rate and soil conditions. Caution is
10. Pay Item shall be based on the size of the smooth interior products. The contract unit price for
prescribed in the use of these typical sections since special designs may be required to satisfy project
Underdrain, LF, shall include the cost of pipe, fittings, aggregate, sock, filter fabric, underdrain cleanouts,
conditions.
and concrete aprons.
The contract unit price for Underdrain Outlet Pipe, LF, shall be full compensation for trench excavation,
2. Type I underdrain is intended for minimum water removal conditions.
pipe and fittings, concrete aprons, hardware cloth for concrete aprons, stubbing into drainage structures,
3. Type II underdrain is intended for moderate water removal conditions. Where reactive conditions may
backfill in place, and disposal of excess materials.
create chemical clogging, the use of an inert material and/or elimination of the filter fabric may be
The contract unit price for Underdrain Inspection Box, EA. shall be for the number completed and accepted.
necessary.
4. Type III underdrain is intended for maximum water removal conditions. Filter fabric is required between
the coarse aggregate or fine aggregate including those described in general notes 2 and 3. Design note 3
applies for reactive conditions.
5. Type V underdrain is intended for use in detention basins and other locations which require a filtration
system. The standard fine aggregate specified for Type V underdrain conforms to filtration gradation
requirements of Chapter 62-25 FAC.
6. The designer should detail in the plans, the location of:

(a) Type V underdrain, (b) nonstandard locations of Type I, II, and III underdrain, (c) underdrain inspection
11:
32:
32 AM
boxes, (d) cleanouts for Type V underdrain, and (e) underdrain outlet pipes.
7. The designer should specify the flow line elevations at the beginning, bends, junctions and ends of
underdrain pipes and outlet pipes.
8. The designer should evaluate whether an external filter fabric envelope is required around underdrain Types
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
and III.
When required, fabric shall be specified in the plans.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
UNDERDRAIN
NO.
286
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
)
.
d
'St
4
s(
e
i
r
Va
Ditch Or Basin Bottom
Varies: (1: 4) (1:2 Max.)
No Filter Fabric
3" Std.
Filter Fabric
-2"
2'M in. to 2'
No Filter Fabric
Alt. Overlap Location
See Gen. Note 8.
2'
-2
"
3" of Coarse Aggregate
in
.t
o
Gen. Note 5.
3" Of Coarse
Aggregate
Optional Trench Side
Fine Aggregate
6"
2'
M
6"
Mi
n.
Crown Matches
Fine
Ditch Or Basin Bottom
Aggregate
Underdrain Pipe
Ditch or Basin Bottom
6"
6"
Min.
Min.
6" Std.
0'Absolute M inim um
Level Line
*
1'Desirable M inim um
Trench Side
Envelope
M in.
Fabric See
Optional
Filter Fabric
See Gen. Note 5.
12"
Location See
Gen. Note 8.
Internal Filter
Internal Filter Fabric
Alt. Overlap
Envelope
6"
6"
Min.
Min.
3" Std.
3" Std.
Coarse Aggregate

Coarse Aggregate
Underdrain
1' Desirable Minimum
.
d
"St
8
1
0' Absolute Minimum
Pipe
* Slope To Match Top of Fine Aggregate
Design Water
TYPE b
UPPER LIMIT
Table
Design Water
Table
Varies: (1:2 Max.)

3" of Coarse Aggregate
Filter Fabric
Envelope
"
6
'
2
No Filter Fabric
2'
6"
Ditch or Basin Bottom

Optional
2'
-2"
Warp Apron
Alt. Overlap Location
See Gen. Note 8.
Internal Filter
Fabric See
2"
2'M
in.
to
Trench Side
Threaded Cap
Surface
Fine Aggregate
Max.
Fine Aggregate
3"
Gen. Note 5.
6"
M in.
Coarse Aggregate
Conc. Apron
Filter Fabric Wrap
Underdrain Pipe
Cleanout Riser
6" Min.
6"
6"
Min.
Min.
(Nonperforated)
2'
1
8
3" Std.
Elbow
Wye Fitting
6" Min.
Coarse
11:
32:
33 AM
1' Desirable Minimum

Aggregate
0' Absolute Minimum
* Slope To Match Top of Fine Aggregate
Design Water
LAST
REVISION
07/01/02
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Table
LOWER LIMIT
UnderDrain
SECTION AA
TYPE a
Pipe
CLEANOUT FOR TYPE UNDERDRAIN
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
UNDERDRAIN
NO.
286
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
In Sag Vertical Curves
Varies (To Exist. Shldr. Pavt.)
1:6 Slope
2'
'
1
Existing Shoulder
Pavement (Varies)
Exist.
1'
Concrete
Edgedrain
Pavement
Width
4" Dia. Minimum Outlet Pipe
2' Single Pipe
(Nonperforated) Length Varies
3' Double Pipe
1:2 Pipe Bevel For 1:4 Slope

1:2 Pipe Bevel For 1:6 Slope
1'Centers. Single Pipe Shown
1:4 Slope
Outlet Pipe For Counter Drain
Double Pipe) Double Pipe At
2'
Sod
Outlet Pipe(
s) (
Single Or
GENERAL NOTES FOR
CONCRETE PAVEMENT SUBDRAINAGE

1. No trench greater than 2' in depth will be allowed overnight.
Trenches shall be barricaded at all times.
2. Concrete pavement subdrainage shall be constructed adjacent to

the low edge of the roadway pavement and under travel lanes,
auxiliary pavement and shoulders, as called for in the plans.
When the low edge shifts between outside and inside edges of
pavement the concrete pavement subdrainage shall extend 50'
beyond and begin 50' before the flat point (100' overlap).
Concrete pavement subdrainage shall be placed on the low side
3'
of ramps of crossroad terminals.

Type SP
Elbow Or Bend As Required
3. Concrete pavement subdrainage shall be constructed on a grade
Sod
1
'
(See Note No. 7)
Concrete
Trough For 1:6 Slope
Asphaltic
Type SP
parallel with the edge of pavement profile, except on profiles

Trough For 1:4 Slope
Asphaltic
flatter than one-tenth percent (0.10%) the concrete pavement
Perimeter Sod
subdrainage shall be constructed on a grade of one-tenth
2'
4.7 SF For 1:4 Slope
1
'
percent (0.10%).
2'
5.5 SF For 1:6 Slope
Class NS Concrete
4" Dia. Outlet Pipe
For 1:6 Slope
6" Thick (0.19 CY-1:4 Slope)
(Nonperforated) Length Varies
(0.25 CY-1:6 Slope)
4. Immediately prior to placing the filter fabric the entire vertical
2'
2'
Concrete
face of the concrete pavement shall be cleaned to remove
For 1:4 Slope
adhering base material and soil.

Silt Filter Fabric
1
2"
(4
Sod
5. The Contractor shall devise a procedure for holding the filter
Cross For Outlet Pipe)
1
8
PLAN - OUTLET PIPE APRON
Bend
procedure must be approved by the Engineer prior to placement

of the draincrete.
Perforated Pipe
End 4" Dia. Special
fabric in position on the vertical face of the trench. The

45 Elbow Or
So
d
6. The upper end of each separate run of the concrete pavement
2'S
o
d
subdrainage pipe shall be capped.
7. Outlet pipes shall be constructed at a maximum of 500' intervals.
3.
5'M
i
n
.
6"
Elbows or
1
8
bends shall be used to connect the outlet pipe to
the concrete pavement subdrain pipe. The elbows or bends shall
in.
)
ALIGNMENT OF OUTLET PIPE
2'S
o
d
1:2 Bevel
(
1'M
Var
ies
1:
4
21"
Mi
n
.
5" Min.
1
2"Galvanized
Cover
be of the same material as the outlet pipe but compatible with

the pipe.
Hardware Cloth
Trough Slope Shall Match Outlet Pipe Slope
NOTE: For Section AA see following Sheets.
When directed by the Engineer, outlet pipes shall be stubbed into
6"
existing inlets or into existing ditch pavements at an elevation 6"
(Nonperforated)
Class NS Concrete (6" Thick)
above the inlet flowline or ditch bottom. Concrete apron and

d
6"
1:
4
bordering sod are not required for stubbed outlets,but

replacement sodding will be required at trenches for pipes
stubbed into paved ditches.
1:4 SLOPE
Ditch Bottom
So
d
In sag vertical curves separate outlet pipes for concrete

pavement subdrains from opposite directions shall use a single
2'So
d
apron unless otherwise shown in the plans or otherwise directed

Hole Pattern Duplicated On
4.
5'
Top Side Of Pipe
1:
6
(See 1:4 Detail Above)
2'So
d
1:2 Bevel
2'Mi
n
.
Varies (1' Min.)
by the Engineer.
Mi
n
.
1
2"Galvanized
4" Min. Cover
Backfill around outlet pipes shall be of cohesive soils,

draincrete will not be permitted.
Hardware Cloth
Trough Slope Shall Match Outlet Pipe Slope

6"
8. Existing paved shoulder that is removed for the construction of

outlet pipes shall be replaced with Type SP asphaltic concrete at
6"
9. The contract unit price for Edgedrain Outlet Pipe (4") LF, shall
(Nonperforated)
11:
32:
34 AM
the rate of 500 LB per SY.

1:
6
Class NS Concrete (6" Thick)
Ditch Bottom
be full compensation for removal of existing shoulder pavement,

trench excavation, pipe and fitting, concrete apron, hardware
Hole Pattern In Accordance
cloth, sod, stubbing into existing inlets and paved ditches,
1:6 SLOPE
d = 1.75' std. for grassed ditches; 0.5' std. for paved ditches
With The Standard Specifications
12/3/2015
SUBDRAINAGE PIPE
SECTIONS BB
[less is acceptable to provide minimum 0.1% outlet pipe slope]
restoration of ditch pavement, backfill in place, and disposal of

excess materials.
4" EDGEDRAIN
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
EDGEDRAIN OUTLET
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
287
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
At The Contractor's Option This Area May Be

Constructed Of Optional Base Material Or Special
Stabilized Subbase. To Be Paid For Under Contract
Full Depth Concrete

Shoulder Pavement
Unit Price For Special Stabilized Subbase.

1'-6"
Sealed Longitudinal Joint
(Depth Varies)
1'-6"
Asphalt Pavement
Optional Base
Concrete Pavement
(Depth Varies)
Overlap Filter Fabric 6"
6" Special
Overlap Filter Fabric 6"
6" Special
Stabilized Subbase
Stabilized Subbase
Special Select Soil
Special Select Soil
6" Special
6" Special
Stabilized Subbase
Stabilized Subbase
Special Select Soil
Special Select Soil

Draincrete
Filter Fabric Type D-3

(See Specifications Section 985)
10" M in.
10" M in.
Draincrete

4" Dia. Special Perforated
Pipe (Noncorrugated Or Smooth

4"
4"
Lined Corrugated Only)

4"
4"
(See Sheet 1)
12"

(See Sheet 1)
12"
ASPHALT SHOULDERS
CONCRETE TRAVEL LANES,

SHOULDERS, AND AUXILIARY PAVEMENT
NEW CONSTRUCTION
Cut To A Neat Line Before

Removal Of Shoulder Pavement
12"
NOTES FOR DRAINCRETE

PAVEMENT SUBDRAINAGE
1. The edgedrain sections for DRAINCRETE SUBDRAINAGE are applicable to pavement construction
Shoulder Joint Seal

identified as RIGID PAVEMENT on Index No. 505, Sheet 2 and 4.
Type SP Asphaltic Concrete
Index No. 305

Exist Concrete Pavement
Tack
Exist Shoulder Pavement
2. The contractor shall confine the construction of draincrete edgedrain to an area in which the entire
operation can be carried out in five (5) work days, unless another construction period is called for in
the plans, with sufficient time allowed for the draincrete to set before placement of pavement.
METHOD OF PAYMENT
NEW CONSTRUCTION:
1. The contract unit price for Edgedrain (Draincrete) LF shall be full compensation for trench excavation,
Draincrete
Top Of Filter Fabric:
disposal of excess material, filter fabric, draincrete edgedrain pipe and fittings and draincrete.
Cement Stabilized, Soil Cement And

Econocrete Subbases; 2" Above Bottom
Of Pavement For Other Subbases
10" M in.
2" Below Bottom Of Pavement For

Payment for outlet pipe shall be in accordance with General Note 9, Sheet 1 of 4.
FOR REHABILITATION:
4"
4"
1. The contract unit price for Edgedrain (Draincrete) LF, shall be full compensation for removal of
existing shoulder pavement, trench excavation, disposal of excess materials, filter fabric, draincrete
edgedrain pipe and fittings, and draincrete, necessary for edgedrain construction.
11:
32:
35 AM
(See Sheet 1)
12"
Shoulder pavement shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Type SP, Asphaltic Concrete.
REHABILITATION
12/3/2015
Shoulder joint seal shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Pavement Joint, LF.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
DRAINCRETE SUBDRAINAGE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
287
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
Full Depth Concrete Shoulder

Pavement (Depth Varies)
Optional Base Group 1

Type B-12.5 Only
2"
Type B-12.5 Only

Draincrete
10" M in.

4" Dia. Special Perforated Pipe

(Noncorrugated Or Smooth Lined
Corrugated Only) (See Sheet 1)
4"
4"
12"
CONCRETE TRAVEL LANES,

SHOULDERS, AND AUXILIARY PAVEMENT
12"
NOTES FOR DRAINCRETE

Concrete Pavement
Shoulder Joint Seal
PAVEMENT SUBDRAINAGE
Index No. 305
Type SP Asphalt
Tack
1. The edgedrain sections for DRAINCRETE SUBDRAINAGE are applicable to pavement construction
identified as RIGID PAVEMENT on Index No. 505, Sheet 2 and 3.
2. The contractor shall confine the construction of draincrete edgedrain to an area in which the entire
Optional Base

Type B-12.5 Only
operation can be carried out in five (5) work days, unless another construction period is called for in
the plans, with sufficient time allowed for the draincrete to set before placement of pavement.
2"
Draincrete
Minimum 3" Type SP Asphalt Cap
METHOD OF PAYMENT
10" M in.

NEW CONSTRUCTION:
1. The contract unit price for Edgedrain (Draincrete) LF shall be full compensation for trench excavation,
disposal of excess material, filter fabric, draincrete edgedrain pipe and fittings and draincrete.
Corrugated Only) (See Sheet 1)

4"
4"
2. Type B-12.5 shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Optional Base.
12"
11:
32:
35 AM
3. Shoulder pavement shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Type SP, Asphaltic Concrete.
ASPHALT SHOULDERS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
ASPHALT BASE SUBDRAINAGE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
287
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
1'-6"
GENERAL NOTES FOR TREATED
Tied And Sealed

Longitudinal Joint
Tied And Sealed
(See Index No. 305)
PERMEABLE BASE EDGEDRAIN
Longitudinal Joint
(See Index No. 305)
Concrete Pavement
1'-6"
Concrete Pavement
NEW CONSTRUCTION
1. The contractor shall confine the construction of
edgedrain to an area in which the entire operation
can be carried out in (5) work days, unless another
6"
construction period is called for the plans.
6"
METHOD OF PAYMENT
4" ATPB or CTPB
Filter Fabric
NEW CONSTRUCTION
Stabilization
Stabilization
1. Payment shall be full compensation for trench
Separation Layer 2" Type SP

CTPB
6"
Joint for ATPB Construction Optional joint
excavation, disposal of excess materials, filter
for CTPB. Cover with Type D-3 Filter
fabric, pipe and fittings, necessary for concrete
Fabric If left exposed for over 5 days.
pavement subdrainage construction. Payment
12" Stabilization
shall be included in the cost for Asphalt Treated

Permeable Base, CY or Cement Treated Permeable
CONCRETE TRAVEL LANE, SHOULDERS, AND AUXILIARY PAVEMENT
10" M in.
Base, CY.
Payment for outlet pipe shall be in accordance

with General Note 9, Sheet 1 of 4.

2. Shoulder pavement and separation layer shall be

paid for under the contract unit price for Type
4"
4"
SP, Asphaltic Concrete.
Corrugated Only) See Sheet 1 of 4

12"
1'-6"
(See Index No. 305)

(See Index No. 305)
Optional Base
Type SP
Type SP Asphalt
1'-6"
Concrete Pavement
Concrete Pavement
6"
6"
Optional Base
6"
At The Contractor's Option This Area
4" ATPB or CTPB
Filter Fabric
May Be Constructed Of Optional Base

Material At No Additional Compensation.
Stabilization
CTPB
Separation Layer 2" Type SP

6"
Joint for ATPB Construction Optional joint
12" Stabilization
Stabilization
for CTPB. Cover with Type D-3 Filter
11:
32:
36 AM
10" M in.
Fabric If left exposed for over 5 days.

ASPHALT SHOULDERS
4"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TREATED PERMEABLE BASE SUBDRAINAGE
4"

Corrugated Only) See Sheet 1 of 4
12"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
287
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
12'-4"
8"
2'-0"
3'-0"
12"
M in.
2'-0"
M in.
8"
In Flow
8"
8"
3 FT.
2'
-0"
M in.
4'-0"
6"
2'-0"
6"
Steel Well Grate
Min.
Over 24" Deep Well
8"
El. A
8"
6"
Mean High Water

Elev. or Annual
High Water
In Flow
In Flow
2'-0"
Min.
Min.
Low Water
Out Flow
12"
12"
Min.
Min.
8"
TOP SLAB PLAN
Sum p
Elev. or Annual
4'
-0"
Mean Low Water
M in.
2'-0"
Min.
1'
-6"
1'-6"
Min.
M in.
1'-6"
2'
-0"
8"
2'
-0"
2'-0"
M in. M in.
5'
-4"
M.H. Opening
Frame & Cover
MH Cover
(Standard Index
(Standard Index
201, Sheet 1)
8"
6"
Inv. El. Varies
60'M in.
8"
Varies
8"
201, Sheet 1)
Inflow Pipe
Steel Well Grate
Pipe Material-DIP
3'-0"
24" STEEL WELL GRATE

Heavy duty "bee hive" grate
Min.
2'-0"
2'-0"
Min.
Min.
Note: Deep well encased and open lengths

as specified in plans. Contractor is
to verify design capacity.
8"
SPECIAL MANHOLE STRUCTURE
8'-10"
Min.
Openings: 1-" maximum
10'M in.
8"
Open H ole
3'
-6"
M in.
M in.
2'
-0"
M in.
4'
-0"
Over 24" Deep Well
DETAIL WITH OUTFALL
SECTION A-A
11:
32:
37 AM
Total Opening: 1.7 sq ft minimum
For 24" well, outer diameter = 29"
Design Notes
STRUCTURE WITH NO OUTFLOW
Steel well grate to be installed over 24" deep well.
1. Depth of Casing Varies, 60' min.
Steel grate to be hot dipped galvanized after
2. Depth of Open Hole, 10'-20'.
3. Actual Size Of The Inflow And Outflow Chambers Will Be Determined By
fabrication, see Specification Section 962.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
The Size Of The Pipes (Refer To Table 3 Of Index 200.) The Width Of
The Box Shall Be Constant Based On The Largest Pipe. The Length Is
To Be Adjusted Based On Size and Orientation Of The Pipes.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DEEP WELL INJECTION BOX
NO.
288
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
LEFT END
GENERAL NOTES:
RIGHT END
90
135
90
45
Left Exterior
Valid Skew
(SW)
Barrel Wall
Angle Range
225
-50
WINGWALL
135
45
Direction of Stationing
WINGWALL
LIVE LOAD: HL-93.
(SW)
CONSTRUCTION LOADING: It is the construction Contractor's responsibility to provide for
Valid Skew
supporting construction loads that exceed AASHTO HL-93, and any construction load
Angle Range
applied prior to 2 feet of compacted fill placed above the top slab.
SURFACE FINISH: All concrete surfaces shall receive a general surface finish.
225
SKEWED CONSTRUCTION JOINTS: Construction joints in barrels of culverts with skewed
wingwalls may be placed parallel to the headwalls and the reinforcing steel, and the slabs
-50
may be cut provided that the cut reinforcing steel extends beyond the construction joint
enough for splices to be made in accordance with Table 1 on this sheet. The cost of
Culvert
construction joints and additional reinforcing shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
Right Headwall
Left Headwall
Va
l
i
d Sk
e
w An
g
l
e
Va
l
i
d Sk
e
w An
g
l
e
Ranges (SR)
CULVERT EXTENSIONS: For cut backs and ties into existing concrete box culverts see
Sheet 6 of 7.
Ranges (SL)
+50
+50
REINFORCING STEEL: See the "Box Culvert Data Tables" in the Contract Plans for grade
225
and bar spacing. See the Reinforcing Bar List in the Contract Plans for bar sizes and
225
bar bending details.
Valid Skew
Angle Range
Valid Skew
Right Exterior
(SW)
(SW)
Angle Range
Barrel Wall
LEFT BEGIN
Culvert Skew
45
135
45
SCHEMATIC "A" - PLAN VIEW
90
135
(
Ne
g
a
t
i
v
e Sk
e
w)
90
HEADWALL & WINGWALL ALIGNMENT
WINGWALL
RIGHT BEGIN
Fo
r He
a
d
wa
l
lSk
e
w
WINGWALL
a
n
d Wi
n
g
wa
l
lSk
e
ws
,
90
Se
e Sc
h
e
ma
t
i
c"
A"
NOTE: All headwall and culvert skew angles are measured in degrees from
f
o
n
o
g
ti in
c
e on
ir ti
D
ta
S
a line perpendicular to the centerline of culvert (counter-clockwise

positive),
see Schematic "B".
Culvert
Le
ft
in
E
gw
nd
al
l
le
ng
th
Fo
r He
a
d
wa
l
lSk
e
w
a
n
d Wi
n
g
wa
l
lSk
e
ws
,
Se
e Sc
h
e
ma
t
i
c"
A"
SCHEMATIC "B" - PLAN VIEW

CULVERT ALIGNMENT
Co
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
nJ
o
i
n
ti
n
NO
T
E: Fo
r Cu
l
v
e
r
tSk
e
ws
e
e Co
n
t
r
a
c
tPl
a
n
s
.
Fo
o
t
i
n
gp
e
r
mi
t
t
e
d
Ex
t
e
r
i
o
r Ba
r
r
e
lWa
l
l
TABLE 1 - MINIMUM BAR SPLICE LENGTHS

Construction Joint
FOR LONGITUDINAL REINFORCING

Limits of sloped
BAR
Front Tip
Ex
t
e
r
i
o
r Ba
r
r
e
l Wa
l
l
H eight (
H e)
Le
ft
in
B
gw
eg
in
al
l
le
ng
th
Wi
n
g
wa
l
lr
e
q
u
i
r
e
d
top surface (Lw)
Sheet 5)
SIZE
SPLICE (CLASS B)
CLASS II
CLASS IV
BAR
SIZE
(3400 psi) (5500 psi)
(
H s)
Front Tip
Co
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
nJ
o
i
n
ti
n
W ingwall H eight
(See Detail "F",
Front Tip
Front Tip Height
(He) (1'-6" Min.)
SPLICE (CLASS B)
CLASS II
CLASS IV
(3400 psi) (5500 psi)
#3
1'-0"
1'-0"
#8
3'-6"
2'-9"
#4
1'-4"
1'-4"
#9
4'-5"
3'-6"
#5
1'-8"
1'-8"
#6
1'-11"
1'-11"
#7
2'-8"
2'-3"
TABLE 1 NOTE: Splice lengths are based on an AASHTO

Class B tension lap splice for the Specification Section 346
concrete class shown.
Co
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
nJ
o
i
n
ti
n
Fo
o
t
i
n
gp
e
r
mi
t
t
e
d
Half Elevation showing
Half Elevation showing
Parallel Wingwalls
Tapered Wingwalls
PART PLAN SHOWING PARALLEL WINGWALLS
END ELEVATION
AND LOCATION OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
OF CULVERT
11:
12:
14 AM
NOTE:
Construction Joints in wingwalls and footings are located as follows:
For non-skewed wingwalls they are located adjacent to the exterior
face of the exterior barrel wall; when the of wingwall and of
exterior barrel wall results in an acute angle see Left End Wingwall
12/17/2015
above, and when the angle is obtuse see Left Begin Wingwall above
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
and Detail C (Sheet 5).
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE BOX CULVERT DETAILS (LRFD)
NO.
289
SHEET
NO.
1of 8
Bars 110 top mat (see Note 1)
Tt
Bars 111 bottom mat

Half Bar
Bars 101
Space
Hs
(
see Note 2)
Bars 412 W all to Box Dowel Bars,
soil side
Bars 405
Bars 403
soil side
Bars 103
(
See Note 3)
Bars 407 (Dowels)
(See Note 3)
exposed side
Typical Space
Bars 404
Typical Space
(when Req'd.)
Bars 402
(Typ.)
Bars 408 (Dowels)
He
4" (
Typ.
)
Cover
(Tied to Bars 407)
(
1'
-6" M in.
)
(
see Note 2)
Bars 108
Bars 401 soil side
Bars 407 or
(
see Note 2)
Tw
Wc
Bars 108
Bars 406 exposed side

(See Note 3)
Bars 114 each m at
Chamfer (Typ.)
Tw
Hc
Bars 113 each m at
2" x 2"
(
Typ.
)
Cover
Bars 105
Bars 102
exposed side
(Typ.)
Tb
Space
(Typ.)
2'
-0"
Rd
Bars 106
Half Bar
Bars 104
Bars 109 top mat
Construction
Bars 411
Bars 112 bottom mat (see Note 1)
Joint (Typ.)
TYPICAL SECTION THRU SINGLE BARREL CULVERT
Half Bar
Bars 409 top mat
Half Bar
Space
Bars 410 bottom mat
Space
CULVERT BARREL NOTES:
Lw
1. Space Bars 110 and 112 with a bar in each corner, and at the of interior walls (for
Construction
Joint (See Note 1)
multiple barrel culverts only), and the remaining bars placed at equal spacing shown
in the Contract Plans. Adjust last bar spacing when required.

2. Place Bars 113 and 114 at spacing shown in the Contract Plans evenly between
WINGWALL ELEVATION - Variable Height
Bars 109 and 111.

3.
(Left End shown - other corners similar)
Locate the first transverse bar from the ends of the culvert at one half the bar
(Typ.)
Rw
Varies
Chamfer
(
3" M in.
)
Varies
2"x2"
Bars 110 top mat (see Note 1)
(
3" M in.
)
spacing, but provide the minimum reinforcement cover and not greater than 4" clear.
(Typ.)
Tt
Bars 111 bottom mat

Half Bar
Bars 101
Space
(Typ.)
Bars 107
Bars 404 (
405 Varies)
(
see Note 2)
Bars 108
Bars 114 each m at
Hc
Ti
Right Exterior Barrel W all
(Typ.)
(
Typ.
)
Cover
Cover
Tw
for Interior W alls)
Bars 107
Wc
Bars 115 each m at
(Typ.)
(
Bars 116, 117, if Req'
d.
Chamfer
4" (
Typ.
)
(
see Note 2)
Left Exterior Barrel W all
Bars 113 each m at
2" x 2"
Bars 401
Bars 402 (
403 Varies)
Bars 406
Bars 105
Bars 102
Dowel Bars 412

@ 8" spacing
shown as ( )
(Typ.)
Rt
Joint (Typ.)
reinforcement as necessary to maintain minimum

reinforcement cover.
3. For constant height wingwalls, variable length Bars
403, 405 & 408 are not required, and as such
of the wingwall, and the limits of Bars 402 & 404

Bars 409
extend to the full height of the wingwall.
Rd
2'
-0"
Tb
11:
12:
15 AM
Construction
2. In the vicinity of the construction joint, field bend
the limits of Bars 401 & 407 extend the full length
Rh
Bars 106
(Typ.)
1. Align construction joint perpendicular to wingwall.
Bars 103
Half Bar
Space
WINGWALL NOTES:
Bars 104
Bars 407
Bars 109 top mat
Bars 410
or Bars 408
Bars 112 bottom mat (see Note 1)
TYPICAL SECTION THRU MULTIPLE BARREL CULVERT
1'-0"
1
2"
Bars 411 each face
1
2"
12/17/2015
@ equal spacing
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
WINGWALL SECTION A-A

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
289
SHEET
NO.
2 of 8
Left End Wingwall,
Right End Wingwall,

h
R
(Reinforcing Bars 401-412)
(T
y
p
.)
SW (Typ.) Wingwall Skew
(Sheet 5)
Skew (- shown)
Space
SR,Ri
ght
He
ad
w
(
al
s
l
ho
S
wn
k
e
)
w
Bars 106 (Bottom corner of Barrel)

Bars 108 (Inside Face)
w
End Culvert (See Note 1)
.)
p
y
(T
.)
p
y
(T
Cul
ver
tS
ke
w
(
Se
e
An
No
g
t
e
l
e
1)
Space
See Detail "D",

SL, Left Headwall
Normal
Bars 101 (Top mat of Top Slab), Bars 102 (Bottom mat of Top Slab)
t
R
Normal
w
R
.)
p
y
(T

Lc (Length at of Culvert)
WP (See
Note 2)
w
lh
See Detail "E",
Bars 301 (Top mat, Right Skew)
(Sheet 5)
Bars 202 (Bottom mat, Left Skew)
ta
ti
o
n
in
g
Bars 109 (
Top m at)
B
Bars 201 (Top mat, Left Skew)
Bars 112 (
Bottom m at)
Bars 804 (Right Headwall)
o
f
Bars 801 (Left Headwall)
ir
e
c
ti
o
n
Bars 102 (Bot. mat)
Bars 110 (
Top m at)
Bars 101 (Top mat)
Bars 301 & 302 (Right Skew) (Typ.)
Bars 111 (
Bottom m at)
Bars 201 & 202 (Left Skew)

Bars 103 (Top mat)
Bars 304 (Bottom mat, Right Skew)
Bars 104 (Bot. mat)

Brcw
Culvert
Bars 303 & 304 (Right Skew)
Bars 203 & 204 (Left Skew) (Typ.)

WP (See
Bars 811 (Right Cutoff Wall)
Note 2)
Bars 808 (Left Cutoff Wall)

Begin Culvert
(See Note 1)
SW (Typ.) Wingwall Skew
Bars 105 (Top corner of Barrel)
Left Begin
Right Begin Wingwall,
Wingwall,
Bars 103 (Top mat of Bottom Slab
(Reinforcing
Bars 104 (Bottom mat of Bottom Slab)
Bars 501-512)
Slab Reinforcing Steel within these
Slab Reinforcing Steel within these

Slab Reinforcing Steel within these limits apply for the nonskewed portion of slabs
limits apply for the skewed portion
limits apply for the skewed portion
of culvert slabs when the left
of culvert slab when the right
Headwall is skewed.
Headwall is skewed.
PARTIAL PLAN TOP SLAB
PARTIAL PLAN BOTTOM SLAB
(Left Side, Left Skew)
SINGLE BARREL BOX CULVERT
(Right Side, Right Skew)
(Skewed Culvert With Parallel Wingwalls Shown)
NOTES:
1. See Contract Plans for Culvert location, Culvert
Center of Traffic Lanes
Skew Angle and Roadway Cross Section.

2. WP = Working Point, used for wingwall layout and
location of construction joint. See Detail "C" (Sheet 5).
X
1
Side Slope 1:X
Depth of fill (do not use upper or

See Detail "J",
lower points in normal or superelevated
(Sheet 5)
roadway sections unless so directed by

Half Bar Space
Bars 803
the Structures Design Office.)
Bars 806
Bars 802
Bars 805
Bars 110
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Construction Joint
Bars 108 ~ Interior
Bars 111
Face (Exterior Wall)
Bars 113 & 114 Exterior

Bars 107 ~ Each Face
Walls (Each Face)

Bars 105/Bars 106 ~ Exterior
Bars 115, 116... Interior Walls
Face (Exterior Wall)
(Interior Wall - Multiple Barrels only)
(Each Face, Multiple Barrels only)

4" (Typ.)
Bars 109
Construction Joint
Bars 112
11:
12:
16 AM
Bars 809
Bars 812
Half Bar Space
Bars 808
See Detail "K"
(Typ.)
(Sheet 5)
Bars 811
Partial Section showing Exterior Walls
Partial Section showing Interior Walls (Multiple Barrels only)
(Typ.)
12/17/2015
LONGITUDINAL SECTION THRU CULVERT
LAST
REVISION
01/01/07
REVISIO N
(Transverse Top & Bottom Slab Reinforcing Not Shown For Clarity)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
289
SHEET
NO.
3 of 8
Cu
l
v
e
r
t
Sk
e
w An
g
l
e
(
Se
e No
t
e 1)
(
-s
h
o
wn
)
SL
w
e
tSk
f
e
L
)
wn
o
h
s
+
(
SR
Ri
g
h
tSk
e
w
(
-s
h
o
wn
)
Lc (Length at of Culvert)
Bars 105 (Top corner of barrel)
Bars 106 (Bottom corner of barrel)

Right End Wingwall
Slab Reinforcing Steel within these limits apply for the nonskewed portion of slabs
(Reinf. Bars 601-612)

Bars 101 (Top mat of Top Slab), Bars 102 (Bottom mat of Top Slab)
Bars 103 (Top mat of Bottom Slab), Bars 104 (Bottom mat of Bottom Slab)
Normal
Normal
End Culvert (See Note 1)
Space
Space
Left End Wingwall

Bars 804 (Right Headwall)

Bars 101 (Top mat)
Bars 102 (Bottom mat)
See Detail "C",
6"
1'
of
Sta
tio
nin
g
Bars 109 (
Top m at)
Bars 801 (Left Headwall)
D ir
ect
ion
Ti
Bars 301 & 302 (Right Skew) (Typ.)
Bars 110 (
Top m at)
Bars 201 & 202 (Left Skew)
Bars 111 (
Bottom m at)
Wc

(
Typ.
)
Bars 112 (
Bottom m at)
WP (See Note 2)
WP (See Note 2)
Bars 303 & 304 (Right Skew)

Bars 203 & 204 (Left Skew) (Typ.)
Culvert
See Detail "G"

Bars 103 (Top mat)
(Sheet 5)
Bars 104 (Bottom mat)
Br
c
w
hw
Bl
Bars 812 (Right Cutoff Wall)

Bars 809 (Left Cutoff Wall)
(Sheet 5) Wingwall
WP (See Note 2)
to Box Connection
See Detail E (Sheet 5),
Chamfer Requirements
WP (See Note 2)
SW (Typ.)
Begin Culvert (See Note 1)
Wingwall Skew
Left Begin Wingwall
Right Begin Wingwall
Partial Plan Top Slab
Partial Plan Bottom Slab
SW (Typ.)
Lw
Wingwall Skew
)
.
yp
(T
PARTIAL PLAN TOP SLAB
PARTIAL PLAN BOTTOM SLAB
(Left Side, Left Skew)
(Right Side, Right Skew)
Rt
Rh
MULTIPLE BARREL BOX CULVERT
)
p.
Ty
(
Rw
)
p.
Ty
(
)
p.
Ty
(
(Skewed Culvert With Skewed Wingwalls Shown)
NOTES:
11:
12:
17 AM
1. See Contract Plans for Culvert Location,

Culvert Skew Angle and Roadway Cross Section.
2. WP = Working Point, used for wingwall layout and
LAST
REVISION
01/01/07
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
location of construction joint. See Detail C (Sheet 5).
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
289
SHEET
NO.
4 of 8
NOTES:
Bars 412 (Left End Wingwall)
Bars 712 (Right Begin Wingwall) (Typ.)
Coarse Aggregate
See Detail "F"
See Detail "G"
1. For small angles, the Contractor may elect to fill the area between the
box and the wingwall footing with unreinforced concrete. For wingwall skew
Bars 512 (Left Begin Wingwall)
2'-0" (Typ.)
angles less then 90 degrees, field bend wingwall reinforcement as necessary
Bars 612 (Right End Wingwall) (Typ.)

1'
-0"
3" Weep Hole with

continuous Underdrain
while maintaining cover. No additional payment will be made for this work.
Type D-3 Filter
(See Detail B)
1
2
2. Location of Construction Joint determined by WP at theoretical intersection of:

- Soil side face of Headwall and outside face of Box Exterior Wall, for SW90;
Fabric
- Outside face of Wingwall and outside face of Box Exterior Wall, for SW>90.
(Min.)
6"
W all H eight
(
H e and H s)
1
L '
a 0"
p
3. Provide 6" chamfer when angle 'A' is greater than 45. Maintain
Underdrain Pipe
(See Index 286)
minimum wall thickness. Field adjust reinforcing to maintain cover.
4. Wingwall Skew Angles (SW) are measured from the adjacent box
exterior wall to the wingwall.
5. Turn or extend Wingwall Cutoff Wall as necessary to meet Box Cutoff Wall.
2'-0"
6. Provide additional reinforcement in the top of the top slab below traffic
Hlcw (Left)
1'-0" Min.
Slope of
Hrcw (Right)
(Typ.)
Backfill
6"
Provide additional 3" Weep
1'-6"
railings to ensure a minimum area of 0.80 sq. in./ft. transverse reinforcing.
Holes @ 10'-0" spacing when
DETAIL "B"
base of Wingwall is exposed
Blhw
END ELEVATION
UNDERDRAIN DETAIL
(Showing Constant Height And
2" x 2"
(Similar to Type II ~ Index 286)
Bars 801
Chamfer
Variable Height Wingwalls)
(Bars 804)
(Typ.)
Traffic Railing Barrier
(32" F-Shape shown)
Headwall
Bars 803
Optional
(Bars 806)
Construction
Joint (Typ.)
Align Exposed Face of
Construction Joint
Wingwall with Inside
(See Note 2)
Face of Box Exterior Wall
See Traffic Railing Index

for reinforcing details
WP (SW90)
Wingwall
6" x 6"
Chamfer
Roadway Surface
Construction
Tt
H lhw
Cutoff Wall
(Typ.)
Joint required
Cutoff Wall
Varies (4" Min. if optional
1"
(See Note 5)
" Chamfer
DETAIL "J"
Optional
WP
See Note 1
(SW>90)
Wingwall
Bars 802 (Bars 805) (Typ.)
Const. Joint provided)
Exterior Wall of Box
Construction Joint
LEFT HEADWALL SECTION

(Right Headwall similar)
8" Min. TL-4 Traffic Railing
SW (See Note 4)
Bars 803 (Bars 806)
10" Min. TL-5 Traffic Railing

End of Barrel &
Min. #5 bars @ 8" sp.
Face of Headwall
Wingwall Footing
Edge of
Provide supplemental top bars
(Min. 5'-0" long) (See Note 6)
DETAIL "C" - PLAN VIEW
" x "
DETAIL "I"
WINGWALL TO BOX CONNECTION
Chamfer
V-Groove at
6"
H lcw
6"
Ti
Bars 809 (Bars 812)
Interior Wall
6"
6"
6" Top
Cham fer
Wingwall Only
Joint (Typ.)
(Bars 810)
Construction Joint
in Vertical Face of
Bars 807
Tb
TRAFFIC RAILING ATTACHMENT TO HEADWALL
(Left Begin Corner Shown, Other Corners Similar)
1
2"
Chamfer
1'-6"
Bars 808 (Bars 811)
See Note 1
6"
6" Side
11:
12:
23 AM
Chamfer
DETAIL "D"
DETAIL "F"
1/3 Ti
1/3 Ti
Angle 'A'
Blcw
(See Note 3)
DETAIL "E"
DETAIL "G"
SECTION H-H
DETAIL "K"
LEFT CUTOFF WALL SECTION
CROSS REFERENCE:
(Right Cutoff Wall similar)
12/17/2015
See Sheet 3 for locations of Details "D", "E", "J" & "K".
LAST
REVISION
01/01/10
REVISIO N
See Sheet 4 for locations of Detail "C".
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
289
SHEET
NO.
5 of 8
Remove Wingwalls and Footings

Sufficient to Construct
Length for
Length For
Culvert Extension
Estimated Quantities
Longitudinal Reinforcing
Steel to be Extended
Remove Headwall,
into Culvert Extension
Culvert Extension (Lc,
Tabulated on Box Culvert
(See Note 3)
Tie-In
Length
Wingwall & Footing
(See Note 3)
to Construction Joint
Data Tables for Standard
Cut back Existing
Tie-In
Box Section Extension)
Walls, Top Slab &
Length
Bottom Slab to
Exist. Box
Box Culvert
Beginning of Radius
Culvert
Extension
(2'-0" Min.)
Existing
2'-0"
Box Culvert
Box
Extension
Culvert
Existing
Exist. Box
Box Culvert
Box
Culvert
Extension
Culvert
Box Culvert
Extension
Cut back Existing

Walls, Top Slab &
See Transition
Bottom Slab
Exist. Construction Joint
See Transition
Detail "L"
Detail L
OUTSIDE WALLS OF BOXES
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
FLARED WINGWALL
STRAIGHT WINGWALL
Proposed Side Slope
2'-0" Straight
2'-0" Tapered
Existing
Transition
Transition
Side Slope
NOTES:
1. The Box Culvert Data Tables and Reinforcing Bar List do not include the additional
(See Detail "M")

Existing
Remove Portion of
quantities needed for dowel connections or transitions from double walls of existing
Wingwall
Wingwall less than 1'-0"
concrete box culverts; the cost for additional reinforcement and the thickened
below Proposed Side Slope Surface
concrete wall in the transitional area shall be included in the costs for concrete and
steel in the culvert extension.
2. Cost for removal and disposal of material from existing headwalls, wingwalls and box,
and cost of cleaning, straightening and extending or doweling longitudinal
reinforcing steel shall be included in the cost for concrete and steel of the culvert
INTERIOR DOUBLE WALLS OF BOXES
SECTION C-C
extension.
3. Remove existing concrete while avoiding damage to existing reinforcement. Clean
2'-0" Straight
and straighten existing reinforcement, lap and tie onto extension reinforcement.
2'-0" Tapered
Transition
4. Dowel in #4 Bars @ 1'-0" max. spacing into wall/slab when there is a single mat
Transition
of existing reinforcing steel, otherwise splice 1'-6" as shown for inside
(See Detail "L")
reinforcement. Use an Adhesive Bonding Material System in accordance with
Specifications Section 416 & 937.

5. Provide additional transverse bars for top and bottom slab, parallel and full width
of any skewed joint connection when shown in the Plans.
6. See Box Culvert Data Table notes in Plans for Connection Types allowed.
INTERIOR SINGLE WALLS OF BOXES
Wrap Filter Fabric
2'-0" Transition
and replaced, for Type I Connection.

2'-0" Min.
2'-0" Tapered
(See Note 3)
Transition
2'-0" (See Note 3)

1" Min. ~
Around Construction
3" Max.
Face of Existing Headwall or Wingwall
Joint (2'-0" Min. Width)

1'-6" Min.
3" Min. Cl.
Existing Headwall
Section of Existing Box Culvert to be removed
PLAN VIEWS
Field Bend
(Splice Length)
Outside Face of Wall/Slab
as Required
Existing
Existing
Slab or Wall
Walls
Extension Wall
Extension Slab
Thickness
or Wall Thickness
See Note 5
See Note 4
11:
12:
24 AM
1'-0" (Min.
Inside Face of Wall/Slab

Bend horizontal bars to lap with existing
1" Min. ~ 3" Max.
inner wall reinforcement 1'-6" Min.
Embedment)
DETAIL "L" - TRANSITION FOR EXTERIOR WALL/SLAB EXTENSION
DETAIL "M" - TRANSITION FOR INTERIOR DOUBLE WALLS OF BOX CULVERTS
12/17/2015
(Interior Single Walls Similar)
TYPE I CONNECTION DETAILS FOR CONCRETE BOX CULVERT EXTENSIONS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
(CUT BACK EXISTING CONCRETE)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
289
SHEET
NO.
6 of 8
Remove Portions of Wingwalls

Sufficient to Construct
Length for
Length for
Culvert Extension
Remove Headwall
Cut back Concrete and
& Wingwall to
Reinforcing to Face of
Culvert (See Note 3)
Construction Joint
(See Note 3)
2'-0" Additional Payment Length
Tabulated On Box Culvert
For Type II Connection
Cut back Existing
2'-0" Additional Payment Length
For Type II Connection
Walls, to Beginning
Exist. Box
Box Culvert
of Radius or Top
Culvert
Extension
Slab Chamfer
Existing
Box Culvert
Box
Extension
Culvert
Box Culvert
Box
Culvert
Extension
Culvert
Extension
Detail "N"
Detail N
Box Culvert
See Transition
See Transition
Exist. Construction Joint
Existing
Exist. Box
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
FLARED WINGWALL
STRAIGHT WINGWALL
NOTES:
1. The Box Culvert Data Tables and Reinforcing Bar List do not include the additional
Proposed Side Slope
2'-0" Tapered
quantities needed for dowel connections or transitions from double walls of existing
Existing
2'-0" Straight
Transition
Transition
(See Detail M)
concrete box culverts; the cost for additional reinforcement and the thickened
Side Slope
concrete wall in the transitional area shall be included in the costs for concrete and
Existing
Remove Portion of Wingwall
Wingwall
and/or Headwalls less than 1'-0"
steel in the culvert extension.

2. Cost for roughening and cleaning existing headwalls, wingwalls and box, and cost of
below Proposed Side Slope Surface
Face of Footing
doweling longitudinal reinforcing steel shall be included in the cost for concrete
Trim Wall Reinforcing
Cut off Wall
and steel of the culvert extension.
to provide 2" Min.
(Location varies)
3. Remove existing concrete and reinforcing back to edge of any chamfers exceeding
Clearance
Existing
1". Roughen and clean existing or exposed surface and coat with a Type A epoxy
Box Culvert
INTERIOR DOUBLE WALLS OF BOXES

SECTION C-C
bonding compound in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
1" Min. ~
Wall
4. Dowel in #5 Bars @ 1'-0" max. spacing horizontally into center of wall/slab. Provide
3" Max. Cl.
vertical dowels in footing to match size, alignment and spacing of outside vertical
Transition
(See Detail "L")
wall reinforcing. Use an Adhesive Bonding Material System in accordance with
Wall Reinforcing
Length
Transition
1'
-6"
2'-0" Tapered
Splice
Box Culvert Extension

2'-0" Straight
Specifications Section 416 & 937.

5. Provide additional transverse bars for top and bottom slab, parallel and full width
of any skewed joint connection when shown in the Plans.
Top of
6. Remove top of existing headwall when necessary to provide 1'-0" clearance below
Bottom Slab
finished grade. Saw cut full width and seal with Type F-2 epoxy compound to
Face of Footing
6" M in.
INTERIOR SINGLE WALLS OF BOXES

PLAN VIEWS
Roughened face of Existing
Headwall or Wingwall (See Note 3)
7. See Box Culvert Data Table notes in Plans for Connection Types allowed.
See Note 4
Filter Fabric
See Note 3
Existing Toe Slab
2'-0" Straight
2'-0" Tapered Transition
Transition
Existing Toe Slab
and Cutoff Wall
Existing Headwall
DETAIL "N"
Varies
& Cutoff Wall
See Note 4
2'-0" Transition
2'-0" Min. ~ Walls
Wrap Filter Fabric around
Em bedm ent
protect exposed reinforcing.
Cut off Wall
Varies ~ Slabs
See Note 6
Construction Joint (2'-0" Min. Width)

3" Min. Cl.
1'-6" Min.
Field Bend
(Overlap)
Outside Face of Wall/Slab
as Required
Existing
1'-6" Min.
Walls
Slab or Wall
Extension Slab
Thickness
or Wall Thickness
Extension Wall
(Splice Length)
Existing
Bend horizontal bars to lap with dowelled

1'-0" Min.
See Note 5
11:
12:
25 AM
See Note 4
1'-0" (Min.
1" Min. ~ 3" Max.
Inside Face of Wall/Slab

(Embedment)
1" Min. ~ 3" Max.
wall reinforcement 1'-6" Min. (Non-contact

lap splice permitted)
Embedment)
DETAIL "L" - TRANSITION FOR EXTERIOR WALL/SLAB EXTENSION
DETAIL "M" - TRANSITION FOR INTERIOR DOUBLE WALLS OF BOX CULVERTS
12/17/2015
(Interior Single Walls Similar)
TYPE II CONNECTION DETAILS FOR CONCRETE BOX CULVERT EXTENSIONS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
(ADHESIVE DOWEL TO EXISTING CONCRETE)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
289
SHEET
NO.
7 of 8
Aggressive Environment
Extremely Aggressive
1
2"
Slightly & Moderately Aggressive Environment

Extremely Aggressive Environment
3"
5"
12"
10"
Environment
3"
1
2"
4'-3" (Grate)
45
12"
Slightly & Moderately
1
4"
2 ~ #7 Bars @
Each Corner (Typ.)
10"
(Grate)
4'-4"
Thickness
1
2"
2'-5
Norm al slab
1
4"
(Typ.)
4"
Thickness
Norm al slab
2'-6"
2 ~ #7 Bars
@ Each Corner
45
3 ~ #7 Bars @ 3" sp.
1'-0"
For Entire Width of
Additional Concrete Haunch
Culvert Slab (Typ.)
SECTION A-A
4"
Additional Concrete Haunch
Required Only When Normal
Slab Thickness is Less Than
3 ~ #7 Bars @ 3" sp.
Minimum Shown
For Entire Width of
2'-6"
3"
3'-8"
4"
Required Only When Normal
Culvert Slab (Typ.)
1'-0"
Slab Thickness is Less Than

Minimum Shown
SECTION B-B
Use Extra Base When This

Dimension is Less Than 12"
10'-0"
6" Unless Otherwise
3"
Median Ditch
Shown in Plans
Culvert Wall
Bottom of Base
Culvert Wall
2'-0"
Friable
5"
Base Material
1'-0"
A
B
Concrete Box
3'
-1"
2'
-3"
Culvert
The cost of furnishing and installing extra friable base
3 ~ #7 Bars
4'
-8"
material shall be included in the cost of the Box Culvert.
FRIABLE BASE
5"
@ 3" Sp. (Typ.)
See Index No. 231

See Index No. 230
for Grate detail
for Grate detail
3 ~ #7 Bars
Use Extra Base When This
@ 3" Sp. (Typ.)
Dimension is Less Than 12"
10'-0"
Bottom of Base
Median Ditch
2 ~ #7 Bars 3'-6" long @ 3" sp.
PLAN
2'-0"
Coarse
Above Bottom Mat of Reinf. Across
Aggregate
Each Corner of Opening (Typ.)
Filter Fabric
(both sides)
1'-0"
INLET TYPE A GRATE

NOTES:
Concrete Box
PLAN
1. Cost of Steel Grating to be included in cost of Box Culvert.
Culvert
2. All reinforcing shall be 2" clear for Slightly and Moderately Aggressive
INLET TYPE B GRATE
Environments, and 3" clear for Extremely Aggressive Environments.
Place coarse aggregate in 6 inch lifts and compact sufficiently as
to be firm and unyielding. Provide coarse aggregate gravel or stone
INLET IN TOP OF BOX CULVERT
meeting the requirements of Specification Section 901-2 or 901-3

respectively. Meet the gradation requirements of Specification
Bridge Culvert
Location of Number
Paint Recessed
Section 901-6, Grades 4, 467, 5, 56 or 57 unless restricted in the
Surfaces Black
plans. Provide Type D-3 filter fabric (see Specification Section 985).
The cost of furnishing and installing the coarse aggregate and filter
45
fabric shall be included in the cost of the Box Culvert.
45
3
8"
000000
20' or more
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE BASE
NOTE: Extra base is required when cross box culverts are located
(Bridge Culvert)
on facilities subject to high speed traffic ( >45 mph) or high

traffic volumes ( >1600 ADT) and the cover is within the
11:
12:
25 AM
SECTION THRU RECESSED V-GROOVE

The number is to be placed in the center of
range specified in the notation above.
TO FORM INSCRIBED FIGURES
the top surface of all bridge culvert headwalls.

For Bridge Number see Plan-Profile sheet(s).
Black Plastic Figures 3" in height as approved by the Engineer

may be used in lieu of numbers formed by
12/17/2015
TOP VIEW OF HEADWALL
3
8"
V-Grooves.
V-Grooves shall be formed by preformed figures.
CROSSING UNDER FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT
LAST
07/01/14
REVISIO N
BRIDGE CULVERT NUMBER LOCATION
REVISION
EXTRA BASE FOR BOX CULVERTS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
289
SHEET
NO.
8 of 8
C-I-P Exterior Wall/Slab Transition (see Detail "E")
Existing Box Culvert

(If Applicable)
PERMITTED PRECAST ALTERNATE BOX SECTIONS
Precast Box Culvert Sections (Typ.)

TYPE DESCRIPTION
2'-0" (Min.)
Section C-C, C-I-P
Box lengths range
E
length at exterior
n. )
i
M
es
0" ox
1' w b
A
b/
(
longitudinal joint)
Type B Boxes only
to Precast Box Culvert
Precast Joint
Connection
DESIGN NOTES
C-I-P Wingwall as per
Index No. 292
Monolithic
or
(Four Sided)
Contractor Design
Single Cell
See Section A-A
MULTIPLE BARRELS
Single Cell
Headwall Connection
from 4'-0" to 16'-0"
Filter Fabric (full
SINGLE BARREL
Top slab
Three
section
sided
Two-Piece
bottom
(Four Sided)
section
Contractor Design
details shown in plans
Filter Fabric
Multicell
(full exterior
Monolithic
Not Applicable
Contractor Design
wrap)
Optional Lap
(2'-0" Min.)
1
2"
V-Groove
GENERAL NOTES:
1'-0" Min.
1. Specifications:
Bedding
General:
Material
FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,
6" Min.
Section 410 (current edition, and supplements thereto).

Concrete (Precast):
e
ov
ro
G
V1 2"
See Section B-B

Longitudinal Joint
(Type B Boxes only)
-P
I
C- on
,
i
t
-D ec
D
ox
nn db
n
o
o
n
C
i
t
E
l
ec al st
S
ew
ca
To Pre
o
t
ng
i
ow
h
d
s
an
on
l
s
i
l
t
e
a
ec
ox gw
S
B
n
i
f
l
B
W
a
H
pe l
el
l
Ty
ra
a
P
ISOMETRIC VIEW OF PRECAST CONCRETE BOX CULVERT

(Double Barrel Culvert shown,
Class III or Class II Modified (5,000 psi) for slightly aggressive
ng
i
ow
d
sh
n
a
on
i
l
t
es
al
x
ec
w
o
S
B
ng
f
i
l
A
W
a
H
pe ed
Ty ew
k
S
environments.
Class IV (5,500 psi) for moderately to extremely aggressive
environments.
er )
t
l
3
)
Fi D.
ed
h
yp
e
t
rc
i
T
p
(
y
w
fo
T
n
p
(
i
a
ab
ne c
re sl
rl
Li ri
un r
b
ve
e
l
Fa "o
l
l
a
fi
-0
on e
1'
i
t
t
Op cre
n
co
t
as
e)
l
ec
,
r
t
r
ab
o
u
t
P
o
a
nt
e
al me
Gr et cav
i
r
x
ec eg
nk nc
p
E
i
S
S
hr
Co onS
nd
N
E
nNS l(
l
No ss Fi
a
2" Cl
e
bl
4" wa
o
l
F
Concrete (Cast-In-Place):
Class II (3,400 psi) for slightly aggressive environments.
Class IV (5,500 psi) for moderately to extremely aggressive

environments.
Reinforcing Steel:
Maintain minimum clearance of 2" for slightly and moderately
aggressive environments or 3" for extremely aggressive
environments, unless otherwise shown. Equal area substitution
of welded wire (WWR) reinforcement is permitted.
2. Work this Index with the Cast-In-Place Concrete Box Culvert

Details and Data Tables shown in the plans, Index No. 289 and
P
I
C-
Single or Multiple Barrel Culvert similar)
l
l
wa
g
n
Wi
the Precast Concrete Box Culverts shown in the shop drawings.
For Type I Connection

3. All joints between precast sections must be tongue & groove
remove & replace

2'-0" section of
with joint sealant. Joints between cast-in-place & precast
existing box, headwall
sections shall have longitudinal reinforcing extending from top,
& toe slab
g
n
i
t
o
P Fo
I
C-
Exterior Wall/Slab
C-I-P Transition
Existing
Box Culvert
New Precast Box

Culvert Extension
-P
I
C-
11:
12:
55 AM
precast headwalls cast integrally with the end segment
when approved by the Engineer.
4. Extension of existing multiple barrel box culverts with multiple

single cell precast box culverts is not permitted unless approved
f
of
t
Cu
l
al
gw
n
i
W
-P
I
C-
-P
I
C-
DETAIL E
1'
-0
"
M
i
n.
er )
t
l
3
)
Fi Dp.
h
t
i
Ty
pe (
y
w
T
p
(
e
a
n
c
rl
Li ri
b
ve
Fa "o
-0
1'
bottom & both side slabs of the precast box tied to the
cast-in-place reinforcement. Single barrel culverts may have
e
To
ab
l
S
l
al
W
by the District Structures Engineer. Full transition details must
&
-P
I
C-
be shown in the shop drawings when approved.

l
al
dw
ea
H
5. Culverts larger than the specified size may be substituted
6" Chamfer
with no additional payment to the Contractor. Substitution must
(Typ.)
be approved by the Engineer, minimum earth cover and invert

elevations shown in the Contract Documents must be maintained.
ng
i
ot
Fo
n.
i
M
6"
Threaded Bars with mechanical
Dimensions of inner
couplers or full length lap splice
opening in new and
or bar extensions (Typ.)

n.
i
M
6"
existing box are equal
PICTORIAL VIEW OF EXTERIOR

WALL/SLAB TRANSITION
12/17/2015
EXPLODED VIEW OF CONNECTIONS AT END OF CULVERT
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
(Double Barrel Culvert shown, Single or Multiple Barrel Culvert similar)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
SUPPLEMENTAL DETAILS FOR PRECAST
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS
NO.
291
SHEET
NO.
1of 5
3" Min. Tongue length
(8 to 15 bevel)
1
2"
1" Min. cover
Fabric
Outside Face
Min.,
1
4"
(Typ.)
1
2"
(Typ.)
2" Cover
(Typ.)
Joint Sealant
3" Min.
2" Cover
1" Min. cover
Fabric
(Typ.)
Outside Face
2" Cover
Joint Sealant
Min.,
2" Max.
Min. cover outside
4"x4" ~ W4.0xW4.0
1" Min. cover WWR (Min. 10" Wide
& 3 Cross wires) *
3" Max.
& 1" Min. cover inside at joint
See Section A-A
for reinforcing
(8 to 15 bevel)
cover requirements
(Typ.)
7" M in.
2" Max.
Filter
3" Min.
8" M in.
1
1 4"
inside at joint
1" Min. cover inside at joint
Filter
1" Min. cover
(8 to 15 bevel)
Min. cover outside,
3" Min.
3" Min.
2" Cover
1
4"
(Typ.)
334"
1" Min. cover
Min.
2" Max.
Joint Sealant
1" Min. cover

Provide WWR or extend
Min.
3" Max.
reinforcing into tongue
inside at joint
Direction
Final joint gap as per
of Flow
sealant manufacturer's
Direction
recommendations
of Flow
(See Section A-A)
ALTERNATE BOTTOM SLAB TRANSVERSE JOINT
recommendations
TYPICAL SECTION
(DOUBLE-SIDED TONGUE & GROOVE JOINT)
SECTION A-A
SECTION A-A
(2" Cover - Thin Wall Detail)
(2" Cover - Thick Wall Detail)
(All reinforcing not shown for clarity)
NOTE:
Bottom Slab Joints in Type B Boxes may
be single tongue & groove joints as shown
Top Slab (Option 2)
Direction of Top Slab Placement (Option 2)
in Section A-A when the Top Slab Joints

are oriented as shown in Schematic "A".
(8 to 15 bevel)
(8 to 15 bevel)
2" Min. cover outside,
1" Min. cover

inside at joint

Filter
Filter
1" Min. cover
Fabric
Min.,
Min. 1" Cl.
1
4"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Joint Sealant
Min.
114" Min.,
(Typ.)
2" Max.
of Flow
3" Cover
Joint Sealant
3'-0" Min.
3'-0" Min.
(Typ.)
Direction of Top Slab Placement (Option 1)
WWR (Min. 10" Wide
3" Cover
434"
& 3 Cross wires) *
(Typ.)
Min.
3" Max.
Top Slab (Option 1)
114" Min.
2" Max.
1" Min. cover
1" Min. cover

Direction
Outside Face
4"x4" ~ W4.0xW4.0
1" Min. cover
2" Min. cover outside

(Typ.)
3" Cover
8" M in.
2" Max.
10" M in.
1
4"
1
Outside Face
1" Min. cover
Fabric
3" Max.
inside at joint
recommendations

Direction
of Flow
SECTION A-A
(3" Cover - Thin Wall Detail)
Direction of Flow
recommendations
SECTION A-A
(3" Cover - Thick Wall Detail)
* At the Contractor's option when the box culvert

Direction of Bottom Section Placement
reinforcing utilizes WWR, extend wall and slab
Bottom Slab
reinforcing into the joint and bend to maintain

cover in lieu of 4"x4" ~ W4.0xW4.0 WWR at joint.
SCHEMATIC "A"
Transverse wire in tongue may be cut at corners
TYPE B BOX SECTION PLACEMENT
11:
12:
56 AM
of box to allow bending of the WWR.
FOR SINGLE TONGUE & GROOVE JOINTS
PRECAST SEGMENT TO SEGMENT TONGUE & GROOVE TRANSVERSE JOINTS
TWO-PIECE PRECAST SEGMENT

ADDITIONAL JOINT DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
(TYPE B BOX)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
291
SHEET
NO.
2 of 5
Blhw (Index No. 289)
1'-0" Min.
(Filter Fabric)
2" x 2"
Headwall reinforcing
Chamfer
(Same as C-I-P in plans)
(Typ.)
6"
Extension of bottom steel (Provide
6"
Extension of bottom steel (Provide
Min.
standard hook or WWR anchorage)
Min.
standard hook or WWR anchorage)
Type D-3 Filter
Type D-3 Filter
Line with Filter Fabric

6"
of horizontal joint)
6" x 6"
or Joint Sealant)
Chamfer
Field bend & trim bottom
Top slab
bar extension as shown
C-I-P reinforcing
to maintain cover
or extension of
precast reinforcing
8" M in.
1
2"
Typ. Cover
Max. Joint
2" Cl.
(Non-Shrink
(Typ. @ joint)
Grout or Joint
2"
412"
1
2"
Sealant)
Min.
Varies**
2"
Bend bottom reinforcing
extension. (#4 Bar adhesive bonded
Varies**
as required to maintain
dowels with 1'-0" embedment and
(4" Min.)
cover at joint
1
2"
(5
Min.)
#4 STIRRUP
BEND DIAGRAM
1'-0" Min. spacing permitted)
Precast End
C-I-P End Section
1'-0" Max. spacing
Typ. Cover
Mechanical couplers or 1'-6" bar
SECTION B-B
SECTION B-B
TOP SLAB TO WALL JOINT
TOP SLAB TO WALL JOINT
(KEYED JOINT)
(HAUNCHED JOINT)
Segment
or Headwall
#4 Stirrups @
of horizontal joint)
As Reqd.
Max. Joint
(Non-Shrink Grout
Key
1
2"
1'
-0" M in.
slab reinforcing
1
n.
2" M i
Longitudinal top
8"
M in.
Cl.
slab reinforcing
Face of
Fabric (full length
8" M in.
1" Min.
Circumferential top
Face of Wingwall
Top Slab
with 1'-0" overlap (Min.)
Min.
(
Filter Fabric)
H lhw (
Index No. 289)
Fabric (full length
Precast Box Culvert
** Provide adequate width
(As per Plans)
to satisfy shear strength
requirements at joint
SECTION C-C
C-I-P HEADWALL DETAILS AND CONNECTION TO PRECAST BOX
TYPE B BOX LONGITUDINAL JOINTS

Face of C-I-P
Face of Precast
Wingwall/Headwall
End Segment &

Construction Joint
Mechanical couplers or 1'-6" Min. bar
1'-6"
3
4"
extension (Full length bar extension or
x 34"
adhesive bonded dowel bars with
1'-3" Min. Lap
Chamfer
1'-0" embedment permitted)
H lcw + 6" (
Index No. 289) *
Splice (when reqd.)
Thickness of C-I-P
See Index 289 for C-I-P
bottom slab in plans (Tb)
1" Min. ~
Transition details
3" Max.
Longitudinal bottom slab reinforcing
Inside Face
Circumferential bottom slab reinforcing
of Wall/Slab
Mechanical couplers or 2'-0"
Equivalent reinforcing
extension of precast box reinforcing
to C-I-P design
Longitudinal reinforcing
shown in plans
Bottom slab C-I-P reinforcing or

extension of precast reinforcing
Cutoff wall reinforcing (Typ.)
(See C-I-P design in plans)
Splice
Blcw (Index No. 289)
Outside Face
Filter Fabric wrapped
C-I-P End Section
11:
12:
56 AM
(As per Plans)
of Wall/Slab
around construction joint
Precast Box Culvert

Existing Box
Cast-In-Place (C-I-P) Transition
New Precast
Culvert to remain
4'-0" (Typ.)
Box Culvert
SECTION D-D
Section of Existing Box Culvert to be removed and replaced,
C-I-P TOE SLAB & CUTOFF WALL DETAILS
for Type I Connection.
SECTION E-E
12/17/2015
AND CONNECTION TO PRECAST BOX
EXTERIOR WALL/SLAB TRANSITION DETAIL FOR PRECAST EXTENSION
* Provide additional 6" depth of
(Type I Connection shown, Type II Connection similar)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
cutoff wall at no additional cost.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
291
SHEET
NO.
3 of 5
10"
Min.
Gap (between single cell
Thread length per

manufacturer for
PIPE BLOCKOUT NOTES:
vertical reinforcing
Inside vertical wall reinforcing

(See C-I-P design in plans)
1. Cut box culvert reinforcement as required

to maintain 2" cover.
2. For Precast Sections construct opening a

minimum of 1'-6" away from any box to
Filter
Additional inside
Fabric
mechanical splice
(
Typ.
)
End (1'-0" Min.)
Additional outside
embedment
6"
Rebar splice
1'-0" Min.
design in plans)
Tw
Culvert
Embedded
Precast Box
Mechanical
Tw
M in.
reinforcing (See C-I-P
Optional
(Typ.)
units, see Sheet 1)
Inside vertical wall
box joint, except opening may be a minimum
of 1'-0" away from joint when at least 2'-0"

of clearance to the box to box joint is
Blhw - 6" (Index No. 289)

8"
provided on the opposite side of the pipe
End of Precast
6"
For 3" Cover:
(
As per Plans)
C-I-P Box
Blhw - 5" (Index No. 289)
Culvert End
For 2" Cover:
opening.
Box Culvert &

back of Headwall
3. Pipe blockout diameter to be 6" greater
Diagonal Bars
than pipe outside diameter.

4. See Drainage Plans for size, placement,
and invert elevation.
#4 BAR END CAP ANCHOR

BAR BEND DIAGRAM
Pipe
6"
or extend outside wall
C-I-P Wing Wall
Face of Cutoff
6"
reinforcing (Typ.)
Wall & Toe Slab
reinforcing & field bend
(As per Plans)
Additional horizontal
Varies
#4 Bar End Cap Anchors
2 x Tw+Gap
Blhw (Index No. 289)
SECTION H-H
SECTION I-I
Top of Headwall
1
2"
6" Chamfer
(See Section C-C)
V-Groove at
Construction Joint
Top of
Construction
(Showing additional blockout reinforcing only)
Headwall
Joint permitted
Provide 50% of vertical reinforcing
Precast End
6" Chamfer
Construction
4"
Segment
(Typ.)
Joint permitted
Top of Precast
cut by blockout on each side of
End Segment
pipe at each face (Typ.)
Concrete Pipe
D
(Typ.)
longitudinal bar
Inside vertical
90 hook (Typ.)
wall reinforcing
(See C-I-P
design in plans)
3" Cl.
Match inside edge

of Precast Box (Typ.)
Inside vertical wall

reinforcing (See C-I-P
design in plans)
Provide concrete
transition to
haunch at inlet
@ Bot.
Additional inside
Construct grouted
pipe to structure
Longitudinal
reinforcing (Typ.)
ID
e
ip D )
(
P
extension with
(Typ.)
6
"
M
(T i
.
y
p
.)
Anchors
8" Leg
1'
-0" M ax. spacing
dowel or inside
(Typ.)
Additional outside
extensions @
End Cap
Haunch
End Cap Anchors or wall reinforcing
or adhesive bonded
1'
-0" M ax. spacing
#4 Bar
Mechanical couplers
Precast
(Max.)
l.
C )
.
"
2 yp
(T
Embedment
extensions @
1'-0" Min.
End Cap Anchors or wall reinforcing
(Max.)
4 ~ Additional #4
joint in accordance
with Index No. 201
Sheet 2
Diagonal Bars between

wall reinforcing mats
Edge of Precast
Blockout
6"
of box culvert (Typ.)

Circumferential
Pipe invert
reinforcing (Typ.)
elevation
(See Note 4)
6"
Field cut vertical
C-I-P Cutoff
bars to maintain
11:
12:
57 AM
clearance
C-I-P Box Culvert
Precast Box Culvert
Additional horizontal
Wall (See
Bottom of
Section D-D)
Cutoff Wall
#4 Bars 3'-0" long
(Top & Bottom) (Typ.)
Half Section
Half Section
showing outside reinforcing
showing inside reinforcing
End (As per Plans)
12/17/2015
SECTION F-F
VIEW G-G
ELEVATION VIEW
(Headwall, Toe Slab and Cutoff Wall Reinforcing not shown for clarity)
PIPE BLOCKOUT DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
C-I-P END CAP DETAILS AND CONNECTION TO PRECAST BOX
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
291
SHEET
NO.
4 of 5
LINK SLAB NOTES:
MARK
SIZE
NO. REQ'D
LENGTH
1. Provide a Cast-In-Place Link Slab to ensure uniform

4"
Bars 4M @ 1'-0" spacing (Max.)
4"
joint opening of precast box culverts when the differential

settlement shown in the plans exceeds the following limits,
1'-0"
1'-0"
1'-0"
C-I-P
1'-0"
Link Slab
Bars 4M
2 per Barrel/Ft.
1'-3"
As Reqd.
As Reqd.
except that a Link Slab is not required for differential

3" Cl. (Typ.)
settlements less than
7" Link
5"
Slab
REINFORCING STEEL BENDING DIAGRAMS
1
2".
(L)
760 x R x W
Where:
Length as required
6"
Filter Fabric, 2'-0"
R = Exterior height of Box Culvert (ft.)
Min. overlaps
W = Length of Box Culvert Segments (ft.)
Dowel
9"
Y = Maximum Long-Term Differential Settlement (ft.)
L = Effective length for single curvature deflection (ft.)
BAR 4M
Bars 4L *
2. Extend Link Slab to back face of headwalls and to limits
Precast Box
DOWEL BARS 4L
of existing box culverts for extensions.
Culvert (Typ.)
2" Non-Shrink Grout
4" Class NS Concrete
NOTES:
ESTIMATED LINK SLAB QUANTITIES
LINK SLAB TYPICAL SECTION
1. All bar dimensions are out to out.

2. Lap splice length for Bars 4M is 1'-4" minimum.
(Multiple Barrel Culvert shown, Single Barrel Culvert similar)

ITEM
UNIT
QUANTITY
Class II or IV Concrete (Culvert)
CY/SF
0.0216
Reinforcing Steel (Roadway)
Lb./SF
1.52
DESIGN NOTE:
1. Link Slab required when joint openings
* Install dowels with an Adhesive Bonding Material System
from differential settlement exceed
NOTE: Estimated quantities are based the plan area of
in accordance with Specification Section 416. The Contractor

may substitute mechanical couplers in lieu of adhesive
precast box slabs, and are provided for information only.
bonded dowels. Shift dowels to clear box culvert reinforcing.
No additional payment will be made for Link Slabs where
1
8"
as determined in Link Slab Note 1.
these are required for the precast box culverts.
Long-Term
Uniform
W
Settlement
Minimum 1'-6"
Roadway
earth cover at edge
Embankment
of shoulder when
Link Slab required
Precast Box Joint (Outside face)
Construction joints
permitted at mid
6"
span of precast
Bars 4M spacing
box segment
(Symmetrical about Jt.)
1'-0" spacing (Max.)

Y
7" Link Slab
Filter Fabric (Typ.)
Bars 4M
Long-Term
L (Effective Length along Box Culvert)
Differential
Bottom of
3" Cl. (Typ.)
Settlement
SCHEMATIC LONGITUDINAL SECTION (NEW CONSTRUCTION)
C-I-P Link
Slab
Roadway Embankment
Precast
Concrete Box
Dowel Bars 4L (Typ.) *

1'-0" spacing (Max.)
8"
Precast
New Precast Box
Concrete Box
Culvert Extension
Existing Box Culvert
Dowel Bars 4L spacing *

(Symmetrical about Jt.)
Long-Term Differential
VIEW J-J
Settlement with negative

curvature
11:
12:
58 AM
Top of existing
embankment slope
Point of reverse curvature
Y
Long-Term Differential
Settlement with positive
12/17/2015
curvature (Y)
Effective Length along box
SCHEMATIC LONGITUDINAL SECTION (WIDENING)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/09
REVISIO N
DIFFERENTIAL SETTLEMENT COUNTERMEASURES FOR PRECAST BOX CULVERTS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
291
SHEET
NO.
5 of 5
Min. length equal to
3" Min. ~ 6" Max. Tongue
end. (Same as As4)
length (8 to 15 bevel)
(Min. As1 extension)
wires + 2" (Typ.)
Outer cage (As1 or As6 @ top,
Outer cage @ tongue
spacing of longitudinal
1
1 2"
Min. 6"
Outside
As1 or As8 @ bottom, As1 @ sides)
1
2"
Min. cover outside,
longitudinal
Filter
1
4"
Fabric
(
Tt)
Top
Slab
typical reinforcing
1" Cl. Min. (Typ.)
1" Cl. Min. (Typ.)
See Detail "A" for
2" Min.
for As1 (Typ.)
Min.,
2" Max.
Filter
Joint
2" Cover
Sealant
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
3" Min.
(
See
7" M in.
2" Cover
Sealant
Tables)
(
See
2" Cover
1
4"
2" Max.
for reinforcement
(Typ.)
in this area
Rise (
R)
2" Cover
1
2"
2" Cover
Inner cage
Min.,
(Typ.)
See Section A-A
(Typ.)
Joint
As2
2" Cover
Min.,
2" Max.
7" M in.
Tables)
3" Min.
1
4"
Fabric
Min. cover outside,
1" Cl. Min. (Typ.)
1
2"
3" Max.
(As2 @ top,
As3 @ bottom,
Min. cover outside,
3" Max.
As4
As4 @ sides)
Direction
Direction
of Flow
recommendations
of Flow
recommendations
SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A
Span (S)
1" Cl. Min. (Typ.)
As1
Inner cage
Min.,
2" Max.
As3 @ bottom)
Min. cover outside,
1
4"
(Typ.)
(As2 @ top,
Side Wall
TYPICAL SECTION THRU JOINT
(Tw)
Wall thickness
See Section A-A
Max. ~ 2" Min.
for reinforcement
in this area
As1
As1
As1
Supplemental wires
As9 (Top,
As3
for As2 (Top)
Bot. & Sides)
or As3 (Bot.)
(
Tb)
Bot.
Slab
4d Min. R.
2" Min.
A
Top As2
4" Min.
Top As2, Bot. As3

Top As2
DESIGN EARTH COVER 2' OR GREATER
Side As4
As4
As4
(
Tt)
integrated with As4
Bot. As3
(Option 1 Reinforcing Configuration Shown)

Top
4d
Min. R.
Bot. As3
TYPICAL BOX SECTION (TYPE 2)
Slab
4d
Min. R.
As9
As2
As7
See Detail "B" for
DETAIL "A"
DETAIL "A"
DETAIL "A"
typical reinforcing
(OPTION 1)
(OPTION 2)
(OPTION 3)
As5
B
1 ~ Longitudinal
1 ~ Longitudinal
1 ~ Longitudinal
Wire space
Wire space
Wire space
plus 2"
plus 2"
10" Min.
(Typ.)
Rise (
R)
As1
2" Cover
(Typ.)
2" Min.
Top As7
As4
Bot. As8
10" Min.
2" Min.
Top As7
Bot. As8
plus 2"
4" M ax.
2" Cover
4" M ax.
10" Min.
Wall thickness
2" Min.
Max. ~ 2" Min.
Top As7
Bot. As8
Supplemental wires
for As2 (Top)
or As3 (Bot.)
Span (S)
Side Wall
As9
As9
(Tw)
As9
4d Min. R.
2" Min.
4d
4d
Min. R.
Min. R.
Top As2
As9 (Bot.
As3
4" Min.
Bot. As3
& Sides)
Top As2
Top As2, Bot. As3
Bot. As3
integrated with As4
11:
13:
29 AM
Side As4
(
Tb)
Bot.
Slab
As4
As8
12/17/2015
1. Work this Index with Index No. 291.

2. See sheets 2 thru 5 for dimensions
07/01/13
REVISIO N
LAST
As1
As4
NOTES:
DESIGN EARTH COVER LESS THAN 2'
REVISION
As1
As1
and areas of reinforcement.
DETAIL "B"
DETAIL "B"
DETAIL "B"
(OPTION 1)
(OPTION 2)
(OPTION 3)
STANDARD PRECAST BOX CULVERT WITH 2" CONCRETE COVER
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STANDARD PRECAST CONCRETE BOX CULVERTS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
1of 14
GENERAL NOTES:
1. These precast designs may be substituted for cast-in-place box culverts designed
9. Submittal of redesign calculations are not required for any increase to the slab
to AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, 4th Edition. Designs are based on
and/or wall thickness when the minimum reinforcement areas shown in the Design
the design criteria shown in FDOT Structures Design Guidelines.
Tables are provided.
2. Loading: HL-93 & any fill heights between the minimum & maximum shown.
10. For Design Earth Cover greater than 10 feet, the Contractor may interpolate
the required areas of reinforcement and slab or wall thickness.
3. Only one design of precast box culvert is to be used for any installation.
Interpolated areas
of reinforcement, slab or wall thickness must be approved by the Engineer.
4. Reinforcing steel must consist of smooth or deformed welded wire reinforcement
11. Minimum length of precast box segments is 4 feet and maximum length is 16 feet.
(WWR) meeting the requirements of Specification Section 931. Longitudinal

reinforcement may consist of reinforcing bars meeting the requirements of
12. See Index No. 291 for connections to wingwalls, headwalls and other general details.
Specification Section 931. Minimum cover must be 2" for slightly or moderately
aggressive environments or 3" for extremely aggressive environments, unless
otherwise shown. The spacing of circumferential wires must not be less than 2"
Lap Splice (Outer Cage)
nor more than 4". The spacing of longitudinal wires or bars must not be more than 8".
S/2
S/2
5. As9 longitudinal wires must have a minimum cross-sectional area of 40% of the
circumferential wires, but not less than a W2.5 or D4.0 for WWR, or #3 bars for
Varies
deformed bars.
6. Welding of reinforcement must be limited to the locations shown in ASTM C1577 and
in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4 "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel".
7. For alternate reinforcing configuration Options 2 and 3 shown in Detail "A" and
"B" (Sheet 1), As1 may be extended to the middle of either slab and lap spliced
Lap Splice (Inside Cage)
Varies
with As7 and As8. As4 may be lap spliced at any location or connected to As2
or As3 at corners by welding.
8. Haunch dimensions may vary between the minimum and maximum dimensions
shown in the Design Tables but only one haunch dimension must be used within
the full length of the box culvert installation.
SCHEMATIC OF LAP SPLICE LOCATIONS

FOR OPTION 2 & 3 REINFORCING CONFIGURATIONS
TABLE 1A - STANDARD PRECAST BOX CULVERT DESIGNS (2" COVER) - 3' & 4' SPANS
(R)
(Ft.)
SIDE HAUNCH
LENGTH
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(M)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
(in.)
to
to
4
11:
13:
29 AM
(sq. in./Ft.)
(Tt)
4' x 4'
EARTH COVER
As1 EXT.
BOT.
4' x 3'
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
TOP
3' x 3'
DESIGN
to
12/17/2015
As1
As2
As3
As4
As5
As7
As8
0.33' - <2'
0.17
0.29
0.21
0.17
0.17
0.17
0.17
As9
2' - <3'
0.13
0.28
0.21
0.09
31
3' - <5'
0.09
0.17
0.17
0.09
5' - 10'
0.09
0.17
0.17
0.09
15'
0.09
0.17
0.17
0.09
31
20'
0.12
0.17
0.17
0.09
25'
0.14
0.18
0.18
0.09
30'
0.17
0.21
0.22
0.09
35'
0.19
0.25
0.25
0.09
0.33' - <2'
0.19
0.38
0.26
2' - <3'
0.19
0.38
3' - <5'
0.14
5' - 10'
TABLE 1B - STANDARD PRECAST BOX CULVERT DESIGNS (2" COVER) - 3' & 4' SPANS
SPAN x RISE
(S)
(R)
(Ft.)
SLAB / WALL THICKNESS

SIDE HAUNCH
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
EARTH COVER
(sq. in./Ft.)
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
TOP
BOT.
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(M)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
(in.)
As1
As2
As3
As4
As5
As7
As8
0.33' - <2'
0.20
0.26
0.32
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
2' - <3'
0.16
0.25
0.31
0.10
31
31
3' - <5'
0.10
0.20
0.20
0.10
31
31
5' - 10'
0.10
0.20
0.20
0.10
31
15'
0.10
0.20
0.20
0.10
31
31
20'
0.10
0.20
0.20
0.10
31
31
25'
0.11
0.20
0.20
0.10
31
31
30'
0.13
0.20
0.20
0.10
31
31
35'
0.15
0.21
0.21
0.10
31
0.17
0.19
0.17
0.19
0.33' - <2'
0.20
0.31
0.22
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.26
0.09
38
2' - <3'
0.12
0.31
0.22
0.10
0.20
0.22
0.09
38
3' - <5'
0.12
0.20
0.20
0.10
0.11
0.17
0.17
0.09
38
5' - 10'
0.10
0.20
0.20
0.10
15'
0.15
0.17
0.18
0.09
15'
0.12
0.20
0.20
0.10
20'
0.20
0.23
0.23
0.09
20'
0.16
0.20
0.20
0.10
25'
0.24
0.28
0.29
0.09
38
25'
0.19
0.24
0.24
0.10
30'
0.29
0.34
0.35
0.09
38
30'
0.22
0.28
0.29
0.10
0.33' - <2'
0.19
0.41
0.28
0.17
0.21
0.17
0.19
0.33' - <2'
0.20
0.33
0.24
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
2' - <3'
0.19
0.41
0.28
0.09
38
2' - <3'
0.17
0.33
0.24
0.10
38
3' x 3'
to
4' x 3'
to
38
38
As9
See General Note 5
(S)
See General Note 5
SPAN x RISE
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
3' - <5'
0.14
0.21
0.24
0.09
38
3' - <5'
0.12
0.20
0.20
0.10
38
5' - 10'
0.12
0.17
0.17
0.09
38
5' - 10'
0.10
0.20
0.20
0.10
38
15'
0.16
0.19
0.20
0.09
38
15'
0.13
0.20
0.20
0.10
38
20'
0.21
0.25
0.25
0.09
38
20'
0.16
0.21
0.22
0.10
38
25'
0.26
0.31
0.32
0.09
38
25'
0.20
0.26
0.27
0.10
38
30'
0.31
0.37
0.38
0.09
38
30'
0.23
0.31
0.32
0.10
38
4' x 4'
to
NOTES: 1. See Sheet 1 for Reinforcing Details and dimension locations.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
2. See Sheet 14 for WWR Bending Diagram.

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
2 of 14
(R)
(Ft.)
SIDE HAUNCH
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
to
to
to
7.5
7
4
6' x 3'
to
0.48
3' - <5'
0.20
5' - 10'
0.17
15'
0.24
20'
25'
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
(sq. in./Ft.)
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
(M)
As7
As8
0.33' - <2'
0.26
0.39
0.36
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.26
2' - <3'
0.26
0.39
0.36
0.10
45
3' - <5'
0.16
0.23
0.24
0.10
36
5' - 10'
0.13
0.20
0.20
0.10
36
15'
0.19
0.21
0.22
0.10
35
20'
0.24
0.28
0.28
0.10
35
25'
0.30
0.34
0.35
0.10
35
35
30'
0.36
0.41
0.41
0.10
35
0.30
0.33' - <2'
0.25
0.42
0.38
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.25
45
2' - <3'
0.25
0.42
0.38
0.10
45
45
3' - <5'
0.16
0.25
0.25
0.10
45
36
5' - 10'
0.13
0.20
0.20
0.10
36
0.09
35
15'
0.19
0.23
0.24
0.10
35
As9
0.42
0.17
0.21
0.23
0.31
0.42
0.09
45
0.27
0.27
0.09
36
0.19
0.21
0.09
36
0.25
0.25
0.09
35
0.32
0.33
0.33
0.09
35
0.39
0.41
0.42
0.09
35
30'
0.47
0.50
0.50
0.09
0.33' - <2'
0.30
0.51
0.45
0.17
0.23
0.21
2' - <3'
0.30
0.51
0.45
0.09
3' - <5'
0.18
0.30
0.29
0.09
5' - 10'
0.17
0.21
0.23
0.09
15'
0.24
0.27
0.28
5' x 3'
to
5' x 4'
to
As9
(in.)
As5
20'
0.31
0.36
0.37
0.09
35
20'
0.24
0.30
0.31
0.10
35
25'
0.39
0.45
0.46
0.09
35
25'
0.30
0.37
0.38
0.10
35
30'
0.46
0.55
0.56
0.09
35
30'
0.35
0.45
0.46
0.10
35
0.33' - <2'
0.30
0.53
0.48
0.17
0.24
0.21
0.30
0.33' - <2'
0.25
0.44
0.41
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.25
2' - <3'
0.29
0.53
0.48
0.09
45
2' - <3'
0.25
0.44
0.41
0.10
45
3' - <5'
0.19
0.31
0.31
0.09
45
3' - <5'
0.16
0.26
0.27
0.10
45
5' - 10'
0.19
0.22
0.25
0.09
45
5' - 10'
0.15
0.20
0.22
0.10
45
15'
0.26
0.29
0.31
0.09
36
15'
0.20
0.25
0.26
0.10
36
20'
0.34
0.39
0.40
0.09
35
20'
0.26
0.32
0.33
0.10
35
25'
0.41
0.49
0.50
0.09
35
25'
0.32
0.40
0.41
0.10
35
30'
0.49
0.59
0.61
0.09
35
30'
0.37
0.48
0.49
0.10
35
0.33' - <2'
0.39
0.54
0.48
0.17
0.22
0.25
0.39
0.33' - <2'
0.32
0.47
0.41
0.20
0.20
0.25
0.32
2' - <3'
0.39
0.58
0.49
0.09
2' - <3'
0.32
0.47
0.41
0.10
3' - <5'
0.28
0.36
0.36
0.09
3' - <5'
0.23
0.30
0.31
0.10
5' - 10'
0.25
0.26
0.28
0.09
5' - 10'
0.19
0.22
0.24
0.10
15'
0.36
0.34
0.34
0.09
15'
0.28
0.29
0.29
0.10
5' x 5'
to
43
39
39
6' x 3'
to
38
43
39
39
38
20'
0.36
0.38
0.38
0.10
38
25'
0.45
0.47
0.47
0.10
38
30'
0.54
0.57
0.57
0.10
0.37
0.33' - <2'
0.31
0.50
0.44
0.20
0.21
0.23
0.31
43
2' - <3'
0.31
0.50
0.44
0.10
43
39
3' - <5'
0.23
0.32
0.34
0.10
39
39
5' - 10'
0.19
0.24
0.26
0.10
39
0.09
38
15'
0.27
0.31
0.32
0.10
38
0.09
0.09
30'
0.60
0.64
0.64
0.09
7.5
0.33' - <2'
0.37
0.58
0.52
0.17
0.24
0.23
2' - <3'
0.37
0.61
0.53
0.09
3' - <5'
0.26
0.39
0.39
0.09
5' - 10'
0.24
0.28
0.31
0.09
15'
0.35
0.37
0.38
38
12
6' x 4'
to
38
38
38
20'
0.46
0.50
0.50
0.09
38
20'
0.35
0.41
0.41
0.10
38
7.5
25'
0.56
0.63
0.60
0.09
38
25'
0.43
0.51
0.51
0.10
38
30'
0.58
0.69
0.69
0.09
38
30'
0.52
0.62
0.62
0.10
38
7.5
0.33' - <2'
0.36
0.60
0.56
0.17
0.25
0.22
0.36
0.33' - <2'
0.30
0.52
0.47
0.20
0.22
0.22
0.30
2' - <3'
0.36
0.64
0.56
0.09
43
2' - <3'
0.30
0.52
0.47
0.10
43
3' - <5'
0.26
0.410
0.42
0.09
43
3' - <5'
0.22
0.34
0.36
0.10
43
5' - 10'
0.25
0.30
0.33
0.09
39
5' - 10'
0.20
0.26
0.28
0.10
39
15'
0.34
0.40
0.41
0.09
38
15'
0.27
0.33
0.34
0.10
38
to
12
6' x 5'
to
20'
0.46
0.54
0.54
0.09
38
20'
0.36
0.44
0.45
0.10
38
7.5
25'
0.56
0.67
0.65
0.09
38
25'
0.44
0.55
0.55
0.10
38
30'
0.60
0.74
0.74
0.09
38
30'
0.52
0.66
0.67
0.10
38
7.5
0.33' - <2'
0.36
0.63
0.59
0.17
0.26
0.22
.036
0.33' - <2'
0.30
0.54
0.50
0.20
0.22
0.22
0.30
2' - <3'
0.35
0.67
0.59
0.09
52
2' - <3'
0.30
0.54
0.50
0.10
52
3' - <5'
0.27
0.43
0.44
0.09
52
3' - <5'
0.23
0.36
0.38
0.10
52
5' - 10'
0.27
0.32
0.35
0.09
43
5' - 10'
0.21
0.27
0.30
0.10
43
15'
0.38
0.43
0.44
0.09
39
15'
0.29
0.35
0.37
0.10
39
20'
0.50
0.57
0.59
0.09
39
20'
0.38
0.47
0.48
0.10
39
to
12
REVISIO N
0.48
0.31
SIDE HAUNCH
EARTH COVER
BOT.
As4
0.46
4
11:
13:
30 AM
0.31
2' - <3'
(Ft.)

TOP
As3
As8
0.55
to
(R)
As2
As7
0.57
(S)
As1
As5
0.46
12/17/2015
0.33' - <2'
(in.)
As4
0.47
12
07/01/13
As3
0.59
LAST
As2
25'
12
REVISION
As1
20'
SPAN x RISE
(M)
6' x 6'
LENGTH
7.5
6' x 5'
As1 EXT.
12
6' x 4'
(sq. in./Ft.)
(Tt)
5' x 5'
EARTH COVER
BOT.
5' x 4'
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
TOP
5' x 3'
DESIGN
See General Note 5
(S)
See General Note 5
SPAN x RISE
12
6' x 6'
to
12
7.5
25'
0.60
0.72
0.70
0.09
38
25'
0.47
0.59
0.60
0.10
38
30'
0.67
0.78
0.79
0.09
38
30'
0.55
0.70
0.71
0.10
38
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
3 of 14
TABLE 3 - STANDARD PRECAST BOX CULVERT DESIGNS (2" COVER) - 7' SPANS
(S)
(R)
(Ft.)

SIDE HAUNCH
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
EARTH COVER
(sq. in./Ft.)
TOP
BOT.
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
SPAN x RISE
(S)
(R)
(M)
As9
(in.)
As1
As2
As3
As4
As5
As7
As8
0.33' - <2'
0.37
0.58
0.49
0.20
0.22
0.29
0.37
2' - <3'
0.37
0.58
0.49
0.10
43
3' - <5'
0.30
0.40
0.42
0.10
43
5' - 10'
0.26
0.30
0.33
0.10
43
(Ft.)

SIDE HAUNCH
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
8.5
8.5
8.5
15'
0.37
0.40
0.40
0.10
41
20'
0.49
0.53
0.53
0.10
41
to
25'
0.60
0.67
0.66
0.10
41
8.5
8.5
12
30'
0.68
0.79
0.78
0.10
41
9.5
9.5
0.33' - <2'
0.36
0.60
0.53
0.20
0.23
0.28
0.36
8.5
2' - <3'
0.36
0.60
0.53
0.10
47
3' - <5'
0.30
0.42
0.45
0.10
43
5' - 10'
0.26
0.32
0.35
0.10
43
15'
0.37
0.43
0.44
0.10
20'
0.48
0.57
0.57
0.10
25'
0.60
0.72
0.72
0.10
30'
0.67
0.84
0.84
0.10
0.33' - <2'
0.36
0.63
0.56
0.20
0.24
0.27
0.36
2' - <3'
0.36
0.63
0.56
0.10
3' - <5'
0.29
0.44
0.47
0.10
5' - 10'
0.27
0.34
0.37
0.10
15'
0.38
0.46
0.46
0.10
41
20'
0.49
0.60
0.61
0.10
41
25'
0.61
0.76
0.76
0.10
41
8.5
8.5
30'
0.69
0.89
0.89
0.10
41
9.5
9.5
0.33' - <2'
0.36
0.65
0.58
0.20
0.25
0.27
0.36
2' - <3'
0.36
0.65
0.58
0.10
59
3' - <5'
0.30
0.46
0.50
0.10
59
5' - 10'
0.30
0.35
0.50
0.10
47
15'
0.41
0.48
0.50
0.10
43
20'
0.53
0.64
0.65
0.10
43
25'
0.65
0.80
0.81
0.10
43
8.5
8.5
30'
0.72
0.92
0.91
0.10
41
9.5
9.5
12
8
8.5
8.5
to
12
4
to
7' x 6'
8' x 5'
8.5
8.5
to
12
8.5
0.60
0.52
0.20
0.22
0.28
0.39
0.66
0.54
0.10
50
3' - <5'
0.39
0.48
0.50
0.10
50
5' - 10'
0.34
0.38
0.40
0.10
45
15'
0.49
0.51
0.50
0.10
41
20'
0.65
0.68
0.66
0.10
41
25'
0.76
0.83
0.80
0.10
41
30'
0.79
0.94
0.92
0.10
41
0.33' - <2'
0.38
0.65
0.59
0.20
0.22
0.30
0.37
2' - <3'
0.43
0.69
0.58
0.10
50
3' - <5'
0.37
0.51
0.53
0.10
45
5' - 10'
0.33
0.41
0.42
0.10
45
15'
0.48
0.54
0.53
0.10
41
20'
0.63
0.73
0.70
0.10
41
8.5
8.5
41
9.5
9.5
41
25'
0.74
0.88
0.86
0.10
41
30'
0.77
1.00
0.98
0.10
41
0.33' - <2'
0.32
0.65
0.58
0.20
0.23
0.25
0.31
2' - <3'
0.42
0.71
0.61
0.10
to
12
4
59
47
3' - <5'
0.37
0.54
0.56
0.10
5' - 10'
0.34
0.43
0.45
0.10
15'
0.49
0.57
0.57
0.10
20'
0.64
0.77
0.76
0.10
25'
0.74
0.94
0.92
0.10
30'
0.78
1.05
1.04
0.10
0.33' - <2'
0.31
0.67
0.60
0.20
0.24
0.24
0.31
2' - <3'
0.42
0.74
0.64
0.10
55
55
to
43
8' x 6'
50
to
12
50
45
41
41
41
41
3' - <5'
0.37
0.56
0.59
0.10
5' - 10'
0.36
0.45
0.47
0.10
50
15'
0.51
0.61
0.61
0.10
45
to
8' x 7'
8
12
to
12
(in.)
12
12
As9
12
As8
0.40
41
to
8
As7
0.45
41
7' x 7'
As5
2' - <3'
to
12
8
As4
to
As3
See General Note 5
As2
0.33' - <2'
12
to
8
(M)
As1
12
7' x 5'
LENGTH
to
8' x 4'
12
8
As1 EXT.
(sq. in./Ft.)
(Tt)
to
8
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
BOT.
7' x 4'
DESIGN
EARTH COVER
TOP
See General Note 5
SPAN x RISE
20'
0.66
0.81
0.80
0.10
41
25'
0.78
0.98
0.97
0.10
41
30'
0.84
1.10
1.09
0.10
41
0.33' - <2'
0.32
0.68
0.62
0.20
0.24
0.25
0.32
2' - <3'
0.43
0.76
0.67
0.14
65
3' - <5'
0.38
0.58
0.61
0.14
65
5' - 10'
0.39
0.46
0.50
0.13
55
15'
0.55
0.64
0.65
0.10
45
20'
0.71
0.86
0.85
0.10
45
25'
0.84
1.03
1.02
0.10
41
30'
0.93
1.15
1.15
0.10
41
to
12
to
8' x 8'
8
12
8.5
8.5
9.5
9.5
to
12
NOTES:
1. See Sheet 1 for Reinforcing Details and dimension locations.
2.
See Sheet 2 for General Notes.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
13:
31 AM
3. See Sheet 14 for Welded Wire Reinforcement Bending Diagram.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
4 of 14
(R)
(Ft.)
SIDE HAUNCH
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
EARTH COVER
(sq. in./Ft.)
TOP
BOT.
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
9.5
9.5
As4
As5
As7
As8
0.33' - <2'
0.41
0.62
0.53
0.22
0.23
0.34
0.38
2' - <3'
0.44
0.65
0.54
0.11
54
3' - <5'
0.39
0.53
0.51
0.11
49
5' - 10'
0.35
0.42
0.44
0.11
49
15'
0.50
0.56
0.55
0.11
44
20'
0.65
0.75
0.73
0.11
44
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
(sq. in./Ft.)
BOT.
SIDE HAUNCH
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
As2
As3
0.33' - <2'
0.46
0.62
2' - <3'
0.46
0.62
3' - <5'
0.42
5' - 10'
0.38
15'
0.52
20'
to
10' x 5'
10
10
10
12
LENGTH
(M)
As1
As1 EXT.
As9
(in.)
As4
As5
As7
As8
0.52
0.24
0.24
0.41
0.45
0.52
0.12
58
0.54
0.50
0.12
53
0.46
0.49
0.12
52
0.59
0.58
0.12
47
0.69
0.78
0.76
0.12
47
8 to
25'
0.77
0.92
0.90
0.11
44
10.5
10.5
10
8 to
25'
0.81
0.97
0.93
0.12
47
10.5
11
12
30'
0.81
1.05
1.02
0.11
44
11.5
12
10
12
30'
0.87
1.11
1.11
0.12
47
9.5
9.5
0.33' - <2'
0.38
0.64
0.56
0.23
0.23
0.33
0.37
0.33' - <2'
0.44
0.64
0.54
0.24
0.24
0.39
0.44
2' - <3'
0.43
0.67
0.57
0.11
54
2' - <3'
0.44
0.64
0.54
0.12
58
3' - <5'
0.37
0.55
0.54
0.11
49
3' - <5'
0.39
0.57
0.52
0.12
52
5' - 10'
0.35
0.45
0.47
0.11
49
5' - 10'
0.37
0.48
0.52
0.12
52
15'
0.49
0.60
0.59
0.11
44
15'
0.51
0.62
0.61
0.12
47
20'
0.65
0.80
0.78
0.11
44
20'
0.67
0.83
0.80
0.12
47
to
10' x 6'
10
10
10
12
9.5
9.5
8 to
25'
0.76
0.98
0.95
0.11
44
10.5
10.5
10
8 to
25'
0.79
1.02
0.99
0.12
47
10.5
11
12
30'
0.80
1.10
1.08
0.11
44
11.5
12
10
12
30'
0.85
1.17
1.14
0.12
47
9.5
9.5
0.33' - <2'
0.37
0.67
0.59
0.22
0.23
0.32
0.37
0.33' - <2'
0.43
0.66
0.57
0.24
0.24
0.38
0.43
2' - <3'
0.42
0.69
0.60
0.11
2' - <3'
0.43
0.66
0.57
0.12
58
3' - <5'
0.37
0.58
0.56
0.11
3' - <5'
0.38
0.59
0.55
0.12
58
5' - 10'
0.36
0.47
0.49
0.11
5' - 10'
0.37
0.50
0.54
0.12
52
15'
0.50
0.63
0.63
0.11
15'
0.52
0.66
0.65
0.12
20'
0.66
0.84
0.80
0.11
20'
0.67
0.87
0.85
0.12
to
9
12
54
49
8 to
25'
0.77
1.02
1.00
0.11
10.5
11
12
30'
0.81
1.15
1.13
0.11
9.5
9.5
0.33' - <2'
0.37
0.68
0.61
0.22
0.23
0.31
0.37
2' - <3'
0.42
0.71
0.62
0.11
59
to
9
12
10
10
10
12
44
to
10' x 7'
44
9.5
59
9.5
47
47
44
10.5
10.5
10
8 to
25'
0.79
1.07
1.04
0.12
44
11.5
12
10
12
30'
0.84
1.22
1.19
0.12
0.33' - <2'
0.43
0.68
0.60
0.24
0.24
0.38
0.43
2' - <3'
0.43
0.68
0.60
0.12
3' - <5'
0.38
0.62
0.57
0.12
5' - 10'
0.38
0.52
0.57
0.12
15'
0.53
0.69
0.68
0.12
47
20'
0.68
0.91
0.89
0.12
47
3' - <5'
0.37
0.60
0.59
0.11
59
5' - 10'
0.38
0.49
0.51
0.11
54
15'
0.53
0.66
0.66
0.11
44
20'
0.68
0.88
0.87
0.11
44
to
10' x 8'
10
10
10
12
47
47
64
58
52
9.5
9.5
8 to
25'
0.81
1.07
1.05
0.11
44
10.5
10.5
10
8 to
25'
0.81
1.12
1.09
0.12
47
10.5
11
12
30'
0.86
1.20
1.18
0.11
44
11.5
12
10
12
30'
0.86
1.27
1.25
0.12
47
9.5
9.5
0.33' - <2'
0.38
0.70
0.63
0.22
0.23
0.32
0.38
0.33' - <2'
0.43
0.70
0.62
0.24
0.24
0.38
0.43
2' - <3'
0.43
0.73
0.65
0.15
72
2' - <3'
0.43
0.70
0.62
0.12
70
3' - <5'
0.38
0.62
0.61
0.15
72
3' - <5'
0.39
0.64
0.60
0.12
64
5' - 10'
0.41
0.50
0.53
0.14
59
5' - 10'
0.40
0.54
0.59
0.12
58
15'
0.56
0.72
0.72
0.12
52
20'
0.71
0.95
0.94
0.12
47
to
9' x 9'
(Ft.)
DESIGN
EARTH COVER

TOP
12
9' x 8'
(R)
9.5
to
9' x 7'
(S)
9.5
9' x 6'
As9
(in.)
As3
12
SPAN x RISE
(M)
As2
LENGTH
As1
to
9' x 5'
As1 EXT.
See General Note 5
(S)
See General Note 5
SPAN x RISE
9
12
15'
0.57
0.69
0.70
0.12
49
20'
0.73
0.92
0.91
0.11
49
to
10' x 9'
10
10
10
12
9.5
10
8 to
25'
0.83
1.11
1.09
0.11
44
10.5
11
10
8 to
25'
0.82
1.15
1.13
0.12
47
10.5
11
12
30'
0.93
1.25
1.23
0.11
44
11.5
12
10
12
30'
0.90
1.32
1.30
0.12
47
0.33' - <2'
0.44
0.71
0.64
0.24
0.24
0.38
0.44
2' - <3'
0.44
0.71
0.64
0.17
79
3' - <5'
0.40
0.65
0.62
0.16
70
5' - 10'
0.44
0.56
0.61
0.15
64
15'
0.60
0.75
0.76
0.12
52
to
10' x 10'
10
10
10
11:
13:
32 AM
12
20'
0.76
0.99
0.99
0.12
52
10.5
11
10
8 to
25'
0.86
1.20
1.18
0.12
47
11.5
12
10
12
30'
0.97
1.36
1.35
0.13
47
NOTES:
2.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
3. See Sheet 14 for WWR Bending Diagram.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
5 of 14
(R)
(Ft.)
SIDE HAUNCH
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
11
11
12
LENGTH
SPAN x RISE
(S)
(R)
(M)
As1
As2
As3
0.33' - <2'
0.51
0.57
2' - <3'
0.51
0.57
3' - <5'
0.48
5' - 10'
0.47
15'
0.59
20'
As9
(in.)
As4
As5
As7
As8
0.47
0.27
0.27
0.45
0.48
0.47
0.14
62
0.57
0.46
0.14
62
0.50
0.50
0.14
55
0.58
0.56
0.14
55
0.77
0.77
0.74
0.14
55
(Ft.)
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
EARTH COVER
(sq. in./Ft.)

TOP
BOT.
SIDE HAUNCH
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
to
12' x 4'
12
12
12
LENGTH
(M)
As1
As2
As3
0.33' - <2'
0.52
0.57
2' - <3'
0.52
0.57
3' - <5'
0.50
5' - 10'
0.50
15'
0.63
20'
12
As1 EXT.
As9
(in.)
As4
As5
As7
As8
0.45
0.29
0.29
0.47
0.49
0.45
0.15
73
0.54
0.45
0.15
66
0.52
0.52
0.15
66
0.61
0.59
0.15
59
0.82
0.81
0.77
0.15
59
11.5
11
8 to
25'
0.92
0.95
0.91
0.14
55
12.5
12.5
12
8 to
25'
0.99
0.99
0.95
0.15
59
13
13
11
12
30'
0.94
1.09
1.06
0.14
55
14
14
12
12
30'
1.03
1.15
1.11
0.15
59
0.33' - <2'
0.45
0.62
0.52
0.27
0.27
0.41
0.45
0.33' - <2'
0.47
0.62
0.51
0.29
0.29
0.42
0.46
2' - <3'
0.45
0.62
0.52
0.14
62
2' - <3'
0.47
0.62
0.51
0.15
66
3' - <5'
0.42
0.58
0.51
0.14
55
3' - <5'
0.45
0.60
0.51
0.15
59
5' - 10'
0.43
0.56
0.56
0.14
55
5' - 10'
0.47
0.59
0.59
0.15
59
15'
0.54
0.65
0.64
0.14
50
15'
0.57
0.68
0.66
0.15
53
20'
0.70
0.86
0.83
0.14
50
to
11
11
11
12
to
12' x 6'
12
12
12
12
20'
0.74
0.90
0.86
0.15
53
11.5
11.5
11
8 to
25'
0.83
1.07
1.03
0.14
50
12.5
12.5
12
8 to
25'
0.88
1.11
1.06
0.15
53
13
13
11
12
30'
0.85
1.22
1.19
0.14
50
14
14.5
12
12
30'
0.92
1.27
1.24
0.15
53
0.33' - <2'
0.42
0.67
0.57
0.27
0.27
0.39
0.43
0.33' - <2'
0.44
0.67
0.56
0.29
0.29
0.40
0.44
2' - <3'
0.43
0.67
0.57
0.14
2' - <3'
0.44
0.67
0.56
0.15
3' - <5'
0.39
0.63
0.56
0.14
5' - 10'
0.43
0.60
0.61
0.14
15'
0.54
0.72
0.71
0.14
to
11
11
11
12
62
55
3' - <5'
0.41
0.64
0.56
0.15
5' - 10'
0.45
0.63
0.64
0.15
15'
0.56
0.75
0.73
0.15
12
59
59
53
20'
0.72
0.98
0.95
0.15
12
8 to
25'
0.85
1.20
1.16
0.15
50
14
14.5
12
12
30'
0.89
1.38
1.35
0.15
0.33' - <2'
0.44
0.71
0.60
0.29
0.29
0.39
0.44
2' - <3'
0.44
0.71
0.60
0.15
73
3' - <5'
0.42
0.68
0.60
0.15
66
5' - 10'
0.47
0.67
0.69
0.15
59
15'
0.59
0.81
0.81
0.15
53
0.92
0.14
0.82
1.16
1.13
0.14
13
13
11
12
30'
0.86
1.32
1.30
0.14
0.33' - <2'
0.44
0.71
0.62
0.27
0.27
0.38
0.44
2' - <3'
0.44
0.71
0.62
0.14
75
12
12
13
0.94
25'
to
12
12.5
0.70
8 to
11
12
66
50
20'
11
11
to
12' x 8'
50
11.5
11
62
11.5
50
3' - <5'
0.41
0.67
0.61
0.14
69
5' - 10'
0.47
0.64
0.66
0.14
62
15'
0.59
0.78
0.78
0.14
55
20'
0.75
1.03
1.01
0.14
50
to
12' x 10'
12
12
12
12
53
53
53
20'
0.75
1.06
1.04
0.15
53
11.5
12
11
8 to
25'
0.85
1.24
1.22
0.14
50
12.5
13
12
8 to
25'
0.87
1.30
1.26
0.15
53
13
13.5
11
12
30'
0.91
1.40
1.39
0.14
50
14
14.5
12
12
30'
0.92
1.47
1.45
0.15
53
0.33' - <2'
0.45
0.72
0.64
0.27
0.27
0.39
0.45
0.33' - <2'
0.46
0.74
0.64
0.29
0.29
0.40
0.46
2' - <3'
0.45
0.72
0.64
0.18
86
2' - <3'
0.46
0.74
0.64
0.20
93
3' - <5'
0.42
0.69
0.63
0.18
75
3' - <5'
0.42
0.72
0.64
0.20
80
5' - 10'
0.51
0.66
0.69
0.16
69
5' - 10'
0.54
0.71
0.74
0.18
73
15'
0.63
0.81
0.82
0.14
55
59
20'
0.80
1.07
1.06
0.14
55
to
11
11' x 11'
As1 EXT.
11.5
11' x 10'
(sq. in./Ft.)
(Tt)
to
11' x 8'
EARTH COVER
BOT.
11
11' x 6'
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
TOP
11' x 4'
DESIGN
See General Note 5
(S)
See General Note 5
SPAN x RISE
11
11
12
to
12' x 12'
12
12
12
12
15'
0.66
0.87
0.89
0.15
20'
0.83
1.14
1.13
0.15
59
11.5
12
11
8 to
25'
0.91
1.29
1.27
0.14
50
12.5
13
12
8 to
25'
0.96
1.39
1.37
0.15
53
13
13.5
11
12
30'
0.99
1.44
1.44
0.14
50
14
14.5
12.5
12
30'
1.05
1.56
1.56
0.15
53
NOTES:
11:
13:
32 AM

2.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
3. See Sheet 14 for Welded Wire Reinforcement Bending Diagram.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
6 of 14
Min. length equal to

spacing of longitudinal
(Min. As1 extension)
Outer cage (As1 or As6 @ top,
Outer cage @ tongue
end. (Same as As4)
As1 or As8 @ bottom, As1 @ sides)
Min. 6"
1
4"
Fabric
Min.,
2" Max.
Filter
Joint
3" Cover
Sealant
(Typ.)
9" M in.
314" Min.
As2
1
4"
Fabric
Min.,
2" Max.
Joint
3" Cover
Sealant
(Typ.)
314" Min.
(
See
Filter

1" Cl. Min. (Typ.)
9" M in.
typical reinforcing
2" Min.
(
Tt)
Top
Slab
for As1 (Typ.)
1" Cl. Min. (Typ.)
(
See
longitudinal
Tables)
See Detail "A" for
Tables)
wires + 2" (Typ.)

Outside
A
H
3" Cover
See Section A-A
for reinforcement
(Typ.)
in this area
Rise (
R)
3" Cover
3" Cover
(Typ.)
1
4"
(Typ.)
1" Cl. Min. (Typ.)

3" Max.
1
4"
(Typ.)
(As2 @ top,
As3 @ bottom)

As1
3" Cover
Inner cage
Min.,
2" Max.
Inner cage (As2 @
Min.,
2" Max.
1" Cl. Min. (Typ.)
top, As3 @ bottom,

As4 @ sides)

3" Max.
As4
B
Span (S)
Direction
Direction
of Flow
recommendations
of Flow
recommendations
Side Wall
SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A
(Tw)
See Section A-A
Wall thickness
for reinforcement
Max. ~ 3" Min.
in this area
As1
As1
As1
Supplemental wires
As9 (Top,
As3
for As2 (Top)
Bot. & Sides)
or As3 (Bot.)
(
Tb)
Slab
Bot.
4d Min. R.
Top As2
4" Min.
Top As2, Bot. As3
Top As2
(
Tt)
integrated with As4
Bot. As3

Slab
4d
Min. R.
Bot. As3
DESIGN EARTH COVER 2' OR GREATER

Top
4d
Min. R.
3" Min.
Side As4
As4
As9
As4
As7
See Detail "B" for
As5
B
H
1 ~ Longitudinal
1 ~ Longitudinal
Wire space
Wire space
Wire space
plus 2"
plus 2"
10" Min.
(Typ.)
As1
Rise (
R)
(Typ.)
DETAIL "A"
(OPTION 3)
1 ~ Longitudinal
3" Cover
3" Cover
DETAIL "A"
(OPTION 2)
As4
2" Min.
Top As7
Bot. As8
10" Min.
Top As7
2" Min.
Bot. As8
plus 2"
5" M ax.
As2
DETAIL "A"
(OPTION 1)
5" M ax.
typical reinforcing
10" Min.
Top As7
Wall thickness
2" Min.
Max. ~ 3" Min.
Bot. As8
Supplemental wires
for As2 (Top)
Span (S)
Side Wall
As9
(Tw)
or As3 (Bot.)
As9
As9
4d Min. R.
3" Min.
4d
4d
Min. R.
Min. R.
Top As2
As3
As9 (Bot.
4" Min.
Bot. As3
& Sides)
Top As2
Top As2, Bot. As3
Bot. As3
integrated with As4
11:
13:
33 AM
Side As4
As4
(
Tb)
Slab
Bot.
NOTES:
As8

12/17/2015
DESIGN EARTH COVER LESS THAN 2'
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
As1
As1
As1
As4
1. Work this Index with Index No. 291.

2. See Sheets 8 thru 14 for dimensions
and areas of reinforcement.
DETAIL "B"
DETAIL "B"
DETAIL "B"
(OPTION 1)
(OPTION 2)
(OPTION 3)
STANDARD PRECAST BOX CULVERT WITH 3" CONCRETE COVER
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
7 of 14
(R)
(Ft.)
SIDE HAUNCH
(sq. in./Ft.)
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
to
to
4' x 4'
EARTH COVER
BOT.
4' x 3'
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
TOP
3' x 3'
DESIGN
to
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
SPAN x RISE
(S)
(R)
(M)
As1
As2
As3
As4
As5
As7
As8
As9
(in.)
(Ft.)

SIDE HAUNCH
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
EARTH COVER
(sq. in./Ft.)
TOP
BOT.
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
(M)
As1
As2
As3
As4
As5
As7
As8
As9
(in.)
0.33' - <2'
0.22
0.24
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.33' - <2'
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.24
2' - <3'
0.11
0.23
0.22
0.11
31
2' - <3'
0.12
0.24
0.24
0.24
31
3' - <5'
0.11
0.22
0.22
0.11
31
3' - <5'
0.12
0.24
0.24
0.24
31
5' - 10'
0.11
0.22
0.22
0.11
31
5' - 10'
0.12
0.24
0.24
0.24
31
15'
0.11
0.22
0.22
0.11
31
15'
0.12
0.24
0.24
0.24
31
20'
0.13
0.22
0.22
0.11
31
20'
0.12
0.24
0.24
0.24
31
25'
0.16
0.22
0.22
0.11
31
25'
0.13
0.24
0.24
0.24
31
30'
0.19
0.24
0.25
0.11
31
30'
0.15
0.24
0.24
0.12
31
35'
0.22
0.28
0.29
0.11
31
35'
0.18
0.24
0.24
0.12
31
0.33' - <2'
0.22
0.32
0.24
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.33' - <2'
0.24
0.26
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.24
2' - <3'
0.17
0.31
0.24
0.11
2' - <3'
0.14
0.26
0.24
0.12
3' - <5'
0.13
0.22
0.22
0.11
3' - <5'
0.12
0.24
0.24
0.12
5' - 10'
0.13
0.22
0.22
0.11
5' - 10'
0.12
0.24
0.24
0.12
15'
0.17
0.22
0.22
0.11
15'
0.14
0.24
0.24
0.12
20'
0.23
0.26
0.27
0.11
20'
0.18
0.24
0.24
0.12
25'
0.28
0.32
0.34
0.11
38
25'
0.22
0.26
0.27
0.12
30'
0.33
0.39
0.40
0.11
38
30'
0.26
0.31
0.32
0.12
0.33' - <2'
0.22
0.34
0.26
022
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.33' - <2'
0.24
0.28
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.24
2' - <3'
0.17
0.33
0.26
0.11
38
2' - <3'
0.14
0.28
0.24
0.12
38
3' - <5'
0.13
0.22
0.22
0.11
38
3' - <5'
0.12
0.24
0.24
0.12
38
5' - 10'
0.14
0.22
0.22
0.11
38
5' - 10'
0.12
0.24
0.24
0.12
38
15'
0.19
0.22
0.23
0.11
38
15'
0.15
0.24
0.24
0.12
38
20'
0.24
0.28
0.30
0.11
38
20'
0.19
0.24
0.24
0.12
38
25'
0.29
0.36
0.37
0.11
38
25'
0.23
0.28
0.30
0.12
38
30'
0.34
0.43
0.45
0.11
38
30'
0.27
0.34
0.35
0.12
38
3' x 3'
10
10
10
to
38
38
38
4' x 3'
10
10
10
to
38
38
4' x 4'
10
10
10
to
See General Note 5
(S)
See General Note 5
SPAN x RISE
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
NOTES:
11:
13:
34 AM
1.
See Sheet 2
for General Notes.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
3. See Sheet 14 for WWR Bending Diagrams.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
8 of 14
(R)
(Ft.)
SIDE HAUNCH
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
to
to
to
6' x 3'
to
12
6' x 4'
to
12
6' x 5'
to
12
to
12
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
13:
34 AM
6' x 6'
(sq. in./Ft.)
(Tt)
5' x 5'
EARTH COVER
BOT.
5' x 4'
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
TOP
5' x 3'
DESIGN
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
SPAN x RISE
(S)
(R)
(M)
(in.)
(Ft.)

SIDE HAUNCH
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
EARTH COVER
(sq. in./Ft.)
TOP
BOT.
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
(M)
As1
As2
As3
As5
As7
As8
0.33' - <2'
0.24
0.33
2' - <3'
0.22
0.33
0.32
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.32
0.12
45
3' - <5'
0.16
5' - 10'
0.16
0.24
0.24
0.12
36
0.24
0.24
0.12
15'
0.23
36
0.24
0.24
0.12
35
20'
0.29
25'
0.36
0.30
0.31
0.12
35
0.38
0.39
0.12
35
30'
0.43
35
0.46
0.47
0.12
0.26
0.33' - <2'
35
0.24
0.35
0.34
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.24
45
2' - <3'
0.22
0.35
0.34
0.12
45
45
36
3' - <5'
0.15
0.24
0.24
0.12
45
5' - 10'
0.16
0.24
0.24
0.12
0.11
35
36
15'
0.22
0.25
0.27
0.12
35
0.43
0.11
35
0.54
0.11
35
20'
0.29
0.33
0.34
0.12
35
25'
0.36
0.41
0.43
0.12
0.63
0.65
0.11
35
35
30'
0.42
0.50
0.51
0.12
0.27
0.44
0.42
0.22
0.22
0.22
35
0.27
0.33' - <2'
0.24
0.37
0.36
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.27
0.44
0.42
0.11
45
2' - <3'
0.21
0.37
0.36
0.12
45
3' - <5'
0.16
0.24
0.25
0.12
45
5' - 10'
0.17
0.24
0.24
0.12
45
15'
0.24
0.27
0.29
0.12
36
20'
0.30
0.36
0.38
0.12
35
As2
As3
As4
As5
As7
As8
As9
0.33' - <2'
0.27
0.39
0.37
0.22
0.22
0.22
0.27
2' - <3'
0.26
0.39
0.37
0.11
45
3' - <5'
0.19
0.24
0.25
0.11
36
5' - 10'
0.20
0.22
0.22
0.11
36
15'
0.28
0.28
0.30
0.11
35
20'
0.37
0.38
0.39
0.11
35
25'
0.45
0.48
0.49
0.11
35
30'
0.54
0.58
0.59
0.11
0.33' - <2'
0.26
0.42
0.39
0.22
0.22
0.22
2' - <3'
0.26
0.42
0.39
0.11
3' - <5'
0.19
0.26
0.27
0.11
5' - 10'
0.20
0.22
0.23
0.11
15'
0.27
0.31
0.33
20'
0.36
0.42
25'
0.44
0.52
30'
0.53
0.33' - <2'
2' - <3'
3' - <5'
0.20
0.27
0.28
0.11
45
5' - 10'
0.22
0.23
0.26
0.11
45
15'
0.30
0.34
0.36
0.11
36
20'
0.38
0.45
0.47
0.11
35
5' x 3'
10
10
10
to
12
5' x 4'
10
10
10
to
12
5' x 5'
10
10
10
to
12
As9
(in.)
As4
As1
25'
0.47
0.56
0.59
0.11
35
25'
0.37
0.44
0.47
0.12
35
30'
0.55
0.68
0.71
0.11
35
30'
0.44
0.53
0.56
0.12
35
0.33' - <2'
0.34
0.47
0.42
0.22
0.22
0.25
0.34
0.33' - <2'
0.28
0.40
0.36
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.28
2' - <3'
0.34
0.47
0.42
0.11
2' - <3'
0.28
0.40
0.36
0.12
3' - <5'
0.22
0.26
0.28
0.12
5' - 10'
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.12
15'
0.34
0.31
0.32
0.12
3' - <5'
0.27
0.31
0.32
0.11
5' - 10'
0.29
0.26
0.28
0.11
15'
0.42
0.39
0.40
0.11
20'
0.55
0.52
0.53
0.11
25'
0.68
0.66
0.67
0.11
30'
0.82
0.81
0.82
0.11
0.33' - <2'
0.33
0.50
0.46
0.22
0.22
0.23
2' - <3'
0.33
0.50
0.46
0.11
3' - <5'
0.27
0.33
0.35
0.11
5' - 10'
0.28
0.29
0.31
0.11
15'
0.40
0.43
0.45
20'
0.52
0.57
25'
0.65
0.73
30'
0.78
0.33' - <2'
2' - <3'
43
39
39
6' x 3'
10
10
10
to
38
See General Note 5
(S)
See General Note 5
SPAN x RISE
43
39
39
38
20'
0.44
0.41
0.42
0.12
38
25'
0.54
0.52
0.53
0.12
38
30'
0.64
0.63
0.64
0.12
0.33
0.33' - <2'
0.27
0.42
0.39
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.27
43
2' - <3'
0.27
0.42
0.39
0.12
43
39
3' - <5'
0.21
0.28
0.30
0.12
39
39
5' - 10'
0.23
0.24
0.25
0.12
39
0.11
38
15'
0.32
0.34
0.35
0.12
38
0.59
0.11
38
20'
0.42
0.45
0.47
0.12
38
0.74
0.11
38
25'
0.51
0.56
0.58
0.12
38
0.88
0.90
0.11
38
30'
0.61
0.68
0.70
0.12
38
0.33
0.52
0.49
0.22
0.22
0.23
0.33
0.33' - <2'
0.26
0.44
0.42
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.26
0.33
0.52
0.49
0.11
43
2' - <3'
0.26
0.44
0.42
0.12
43
3' - <5'
0.27
0.35
0.37
0.11
43
3' - <5'
0.22
0.30
0.33
0.12
43
5' - 10'
0.29
0.31
0.34
0.11
39
5' - 10'
0.24
0.25
0.27
0.12
39
15'
0.41
0.46
0.49
0.11
38
15'
0.33
0.36
0.39
0.12
38
20'
0.53
0.62
0.64
0.11
38
20'
0.42
0.48
0.51
0.12
38
25'
0.66
0.78
0.80
0.11
38
25'
0.52
0.61
0.63
0.12
38
30'
0.78
0.95
0.97
0.11
38
30'
0.61
0.74
0.76
0.12
38
0.33' - <2'
0.34
0.55
0.51
0.22
0.22
0.24
0.34
0.33' - <2'
0.27
0.46
0.44
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.27
2' - <3'
0.34
0.54
0.51
0.11
52
2' - <3'
0.27
0.46
0.44
0.12
52
3' - <5'
0.23
0.31
0.34
0.12
52
5' - 10'
0.25
0.27
0.30
0.12
43
39
38
12
6' x 4'
10
10
10
to
12
6' x 5'
10
10
10
to
12
38
38
38
3' - <5'
0.29
0.37
0.39
0.11
52
5' - 10'
0.32
0.34
0.37
0.11
43
15'
0.44
0.50
0.53
0.11
39
15'
0.35
0.39
0.42
0.12
20'
0.57
0.66
0.70
0.11
39
20'
0.45
0.52
0.55
0.12
39
25'
0.70
0.84
0.87
0.11
38
25'
0.54
0.65
0.68
0.12
38
30'
0.83
1.02
1.05
0.11
38
30'
0.64
0.78
0.81
0.12
38
6' x 6'
10
10
10
to
12
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
9 of 14
TABLE 11B - STANDARD PRECAST BOX CULVERT DESIGNS (3" COVER) - 7' SPANS
TABLE 11A - STANDARD PRECAST BOX CULVERT DESIGNS (3" COVER) - 7' SPANS
(R)
(Ft.)
SIDE HAUNCH
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
to
9.5
7 to 12
to
12
9.5
7 to 12
to
12
9.5
7 to 12
7' x 7'
(sq. in./Ft.)
(Tt)
12
7' x 6'
EARTH COVER
BOT.
7' x 5'
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
TOP
7' x 4'
DESIGN
to
12
9.5
7 to 12
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
SPAN x RISE
(S)
(R)
(M)
(in.)
(Ft.)
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
EARTH COVER
(sq. in./Ft.)

TOP
BOT.
SIDE HAUNCH
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
(M)
As5
As7
As8
0.44
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.33
0.44
0.12
43
0.35
0.38
0.12
43
0.30
0.31
0.12
43
0.44
0.44
0.45
0.12
41
20'
0.58
0.59
0.60
0.12
41
41
25'
0.71
0.74
0.75
0.12
41
41
30'
0.85
0.91
0.91
0.12
41
0.30
0.41
0.33' - <2'
0.32
0.51
0.47
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.32
47
2' - <3'
0.32
0.51
0.47
0.12
47
0.11
43
3' - <5'
0.29
0.37
0.41
0.12
43
0.11
43
5' - 10'
0.31
0.32
0.35
0.12
43
0.63
0.11
15'
0.44
0.47
0.50
0.12
0.82
0.83
0.11
20'
0.57
0.63
0.65
0.12
0.90
1.04
1.06
0.11
41
25'
0.70
0.80
0.82
0.12
30'
1.06
1.26
1.19
0.11
41
30'
0.84
0.97
0.99
0.12
0.33' - <2'
0.42
0.63
0.58
0.22
0.24
0.30
0.42
0.33' - <2'
0.33
0.53
0.50
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.33
2' - <3'
0.42
0.63
0.58
0.11
2' - <3'
0.33
0.53
0.50
0.12
3' - <5'
0.38
0.45
0.50
0.11
3' - <5'
0.30
0.38
0.43
0.12
5' - 10'
0.41
0.44
0.47
0.11
5' - 10'
0.33
0.35
0.38
0.12
15'
0.57
0.65
0.68
0.11
41
20'
0.75
0.87
0.90
0.11
41
25'
0.93
1.11
1.13
0.11
30'
1.07
1.35
1.27
0.11
0.33' - <2'
0.44
0.66
0.61
0.22
0.25
2' - <3'
0.44
0.65
0.61
0.11
3' - <5'
0.41
0.47
0.52
5' - 10'
0.44
0.47
0.52
15'
0.62
0.69
20'
0.80
25'
0.99
30'
1.12
As2
As3
As4
As5
As7
As8
As9
0.33' - <2'
0.42
0.58
0.52
0.22
0.22
0.31
0.42
2' - <3'
0.42
0.58
0.51
0.11
43
3' - <5'
0.36
0.41
0.44
0.11
43
5' - 10'
0.39
0.40
0.39
0.11
43
15'
0.56
0.56
0.58
0.11
41
20'
0.74
0.76
0.77
0.11
41
25'
0.92
0.97
0.97
0.11
30'
1.09
1.18
1.10
0.11
0.33' - <2'
0.41
0.61
0.55
0.22
0.23
2' - <3'
0.41
0.61
0.55
0.11
3' - <5'
0.37
0.43
0.47
5' - 10'
0.39
0.41
0.43
15'
0.56
0.61
20'
0.73
25'
7' x 4'
10
10
10
to
As1
As2
As3
0.33' - <2'
0.33
0.49
2' - <3'
0.33
0.49
3' - <5'
0.29
5' - 10'
0.31
15'
12
7' x 5'
10
10
10
to
41
41
12
59
47
43
7' x 6'
10
10
10
to
As9
(in.)
As4
As1
See General Note 5
(S)
See General Note 5
SPAN x RISE
41
41
41
41
59
47
43
15'
0.45
0.51
0.54
0.12
41
20'
0.58
0.68
0.70
0.12
41
41
25'
0.72
0.85
0.88
0.12
41
41
30'
0.85
1.04
1.06
0.12
41
0.31
0.44
0.33' - <2'
0.35
0.55
0.52
0.24
0.24
0.24
0.35
59
2' - <3'
0.35
0.55
0.52
0.12
59
0.11
59
3' - <5'
0.32
0.40
0.46
0.12
59
0.11
47
5' - 10'
0.35
0.37
0.41
0.12
47
0.74
0.11
43
15'
0.48
0.54
0.58
0.12
43
0.93
0.97
0.11
43
20'
0.62
0.72
0.76
0.12
43
1.18
1.22
0.11
43
25'
0.76
0.90
0.94
0.12
43
1.43
1.36
0.11
41
30'
0.90
1.10
1.13
0.12
41
12
7' x 7'
10
10
10
to
12
NOTES:
11:
13:
35 AM
1.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
10 of 14
SPAN x RISE
(S)
(R)
(Ft.)

SIDE HAUNCH
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
EARTH COVER
(sq. in./Ft.)
TOP
BOT.
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
SPAN x RISE
(S)
(R)
(M)
As9
(in.)
As1
As2
As3
As4
As5
As7
As8
0.33' - <2'
0.52
0.66
0.57
0.22
0.24
0.42
0.52
2' - <3'
0.52
0.66
0.57
0.11
50
(Ft.)
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
EARTH COVER
(sq. in./Ft.)

TOP
BOT.
SIDE HAUNCH
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
(M)
As1
As2
As3
0.33' - <2'
0.42
0.56
2' - <3'
0.42
0.56
3' - <5'
0.38
5' - 10'
0.41
As9
(in.)
As4
As5
As7
As8
0.49
0.24
0.24
0.32
0.41
0.49
0.12
50
0.42
0.46
0.12
50
0.38
0.39
0.12
45
4
3' - <5'
0.48
0.49
0.52
0.11
50
5' - 10'
0.52
0.48
0.49
0.11
45
15'
0.75
0.72
0.72
0.11
41
20'
1.00
0.98
0.97
0.11
41
to
8' x 4'
8' x 4'
10
10
10
to
15'
0.59
0.56
0.57
0.12
41
20'
0.78
0.75
0.76
0.12
41
25'
0.97
0.96
0.96
0.12
41
30'
1.15
1.16
1.10
0.12
41
0.33' - <2'
0.40
0.58
0.52
0.24
.034
0.31
0.40
2' - <3'
0.40
0.58
0.52
0.12
50
3' - <5'
0.37
0.45
0.48
0.12
45
5' - 10'
0.41
0.41
0.43
0.12
45
15'
0.58
0.60
0.62
0.12
41
20'
0.76
0.81
0.81
0.12
41
25'
0.94
1.03
1.03
0.12
41
30'
1.10
1.24
1.24
0.12
41
0.33' - <2'
0.40
0.60
0.55
0.24
0.24
0.30
0.40
2' - <3'
0.40
0.60
0.55
0.12
12
9
9.5
8 to
25'
1.25
1.24
1.14
0.11
41
10
10.5
12
30'
1.31
1.29
1.21
0.11
41
0.33' - <2'
0.51
0.69
0.60
0.22
0.25
0.40
0.51
2' - <3'
0.51
0.69
0.60
0.11
50
3' - <5'
0.46
0.52
0.56
0.11
45
5' - 10'
0.51
0.51
0.53
0.11
45
15'
0.74
0.77
0.78
0.11
41
20'
0.97
1.05
1.05
0.11
41
12
10
10.5
10
8 to 12
4
4
to
8' x 5'
8' x 5'
10
10
10
to
9.5
8 to
25'
1.20
1.33
1.23
0.11
41
10
10.5
12
30'
1.26
1.38
1.30
0.11
41
0.33' - <2'
0.51
0.72
0.64
0.22
0.26
0.39
0.51
2' - <3'
0.51
0.72
0.64
0.11
3' - <5'
0.47
0.55
0.59
0.11
5' - 10'
0.52
0.55
0.58
0.11
15'
0.74
0.83
0.85
0.11
20'
0.97
1.12
1.13
0.11
to
8' x 6'
9
12
See General Note 5
12
10
10.5
10
8 to 12
50
50
45
8' x 6'
10
10
10
to
9.5
8 to
25'
1.18
1.42
1.32
0.11
10
10.5
12
30'
1.26
1.46
1.39
0.11
0.37
0.47
0.51
0.12
5' - 10'
0.42
0.43
0.46
0.12
15'
0.58
0.64
0.67
0.12
20'
0.76
0.86
0.88
0.12
25'
0.94
1.09
1.11
0.12
30'
1.09
1.32
1.26
0.12
0.33' - <2'
0.52
0.74
0.67
0.22
0.26
0.40
0.52
0.33' - <2'
0.41
0.63
0.58
0.24
0.24
0.30
0.41
2' - <3'
0.52
0.74
0.67
0.11
55
2' - <3'
0.41
0.63
0.58
0.12
55
3' - <5'
0.39
0.49
0.53
0.12
55
5' - 10'
0.44
0.46
0.50
0.12
50
15'
0.61
0.68
0.72
0.12
45
20'
0.78
0.91
0.94
0.12
41
25'
0.97
1.16
1.18
0.12
41
30'
1.11
1.40
1.34
0.12
41
0.33' - <2'
0.44
0.64
0.60
0.24
0.24
0.31
0.44
2' - <3'
0.44
0.64
0.60
0.12
65
3' - <5'
0.42
0.51
0.56
0.12
65
5' - 10'
0.47
0.50
0.55
0.12
55
15'
0.65
0.72
0.77
0.12
45
20'
0.84
0.96
1.01
0.12
45
25'
1.03
1.22
1.26
0.12
41
30'
1.16
1.47
1.42
0.12
41
12
41
41
10
10.5
10
50
3' - <5'
41
41
See General Note 5
12
8 to 12
50
45
41
41
41
41
4
3' - <5'
0.49
0.57
0.62
0.11
55
5' - 10'
0.55
0.59
0.63
0.11
50
15'
0.77
0.88
0.91
0.11
41
to
8' x 7'
8' x 7'
10
10
10
to
12
20'
1.01
1.19
1.21
0.11
41
9.5
8 to
25'
1.21
1.51
1.41
0.11
41
10
10.5
12
30'
1.31
1.53
1.47
0.11
41
0.33' - <2'
0.55
0.77
0.70
0.22
0.27
0.41
0.55
2' - <3'
0.55
0.77
0.70
0.13
65
3' - <5'
0.53
0.59
0.64
0.12
65
5' - 10'
0.60
0.63
0.68
0.11
55
15'
0.83
0.93
0.98
0.11
45
20'
1.08
1.26
1.29
0.11
45
12
10
10.5
10
8 to 12
4
4
to
8' x 8'
8' x 8'
10
10
10
to
12
9
9.5
8 to
25'
1.28
1.59
1.50
0.11
41
10
10.5
12
30'
1.41
1.61
1.55
0.11
41
12
10
10.5
10
8 to 12
NOTES:
11:
13:
36 AM
1.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
11of 14
(R)
(Ft.)
9' x 5'
9' x 6'
9' x 8'
(sq. in./Ft.)
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
SPAN x RISE
(S)
(R)
(M)
As1
As2
As3
As4
As5
As7
As8
As9
(in.)
0.33' - <2'
0.62
0.78
0.65
0.22
0.26
0.52
0.61
2' - <3'
0.62
0.78
0.65
0.11
54
to
3' - <5'
0.58
0.63
0.61
0.11
49
12
5' - 10'
0.65
0.63
0.64
0.11
49
15'
0.95
0.96
0.95
0.11
44
(Ft.)
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
EARTH COVER
(sq. in./Ft.)

TOP
BOT.
SIDE HAUNCH
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
9' x 5'
10
10
10
to
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
(M)
As1
As2
As3
0.33' - <2'
0.49
0.65
2' - <3'
0.49
0.65
As9
(in.)
As4
As5
As7
As8
0.57
0.24
0.24
0.40
0.48
0.57
0.12
54
3' - <5'
0.46
0.54
0.53
0.12
49
5' - 10'
0.52
0.50
0.51
0.12
49
15'
0.75
0.74
0.75
0.12
44
20'
0.98
1.01
1.00
0.12
44
12
20'
1.26
1.32
1.28
0.11
44
10
10.5
to
25'
1.39
1.41
1.32
0.11
44
10
10.5
10
8 to
25'
1.21
1.27
1.19
0.12
44
11
11.5
12
30'
1.46
1.50
1.42
0.11
44
11
11.5
10
12
30'
1.30
1.36
1.30
0.12
44
0.33' - <2'
0.60
0.81
0.69
0.22
0.27
0.51
0.60
0.33' - <2'
0.48
0.68
0.60
0.24
0.24
0.39
0.48
2' - <3'
0.60
0.81
0.69
0.11
54
2' - <3'
0.48
0.68
0.60
0.12
54
to
3' - <5'
0.56
0.66
0.65
0.11
49
12
5' - 10'
0.65
0.68
0.69
0.11
49
15'
0.94
1.03
1.02
0.11
44
9' x 6'
10
10
10
to
3' - <5'
0.45
0.57
0.56
0.12
49
5' - 10'
0.52
0.53
0.56
0.12
49
15'
0.74
0.79
0.81
0.12
44
20'
0.97
1.07
1.07
0.12
44
12
20'
1.25
1.40
1.38
0.11
44
10
10.5
to
25'
1.37
1.49
1.40
0.11
44
10
10.5
10
8 to
25'
1.18
1.35
1.28
0.12
44
11
11.5
12
30'
1.44
1.58
1.50
0.11
44
11
11.5
10
12
30'
1.27
1.44
1.38
0.12
44
0.33' - <2'
0.61
0.84
0.72
0.22
0.28
0.51
0.61
0.33' - <2'
0.49
0.70
0.63
0.24
0.24
0.39
0.49
2' - <3'
0.61
0.83
0.72
0.11
2' - <3'
0.49
0.70
0.63
0.12
3' - <5'
0.46
0.59
0.59
0.12
5' - 10'
0.54
0.57
0.60
0.12
to
3' - <5'
0.58
0.69
0.68
0.11
12
5' - 10'
0.67
0.73
0.75
0.11
15'
0.96
1.09
1.10
0.11
20'
1.27
1.49
1.47
0.11
10
10.5
to
25'
1.38
1.57
1.48
0.11
11
11.5
12
30'
1.49
1.70
1.58
0.11
9.5
0.33' - <2'
0.60
0.85
0.73
0.22
0.29
0.52
0.53
2' - <3'
0.64
0.86
0.76
0.12
59
to
3' - <5'
0.62
0.72
0.72
0.11
59
12
5' - 10'
0.71
0.77
0.81
0.11
54
15'
1.01
1.16
1.17
0.11
44
59
9' x 9'
EARTH COVER
BOT.
9' x 7'
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
TOP
SIDE HAUNCH
DESIGN
54
49
9' x 7'
10
10
10
to
44
12
44
15'
0.75
0.84
0.86
0.12
20'
0.98
1.13
1.14
0.12
See General Note 5
(S)
See General Note 5
SPAN x RISE
59
54
49
44
44
44
10
10.5
10
8 to
25'
1.18
1.43
1.36
0.12
44
11
11.5
10
12
30'
1.28
1.52
1.46
0.12
0.33' - <2'
0.51
0.72
0.65
0.24
0.24
0.39
0.51
2' - <3'
0.51
0.72
0.65
0.12
59
3' - <5'
0.49
0.61
0.62
0.12
59
5' - 10'
0.57
0.60
0.65
0.12
54
15'
0.79
0.89
0.92
0.12
44
20'
1.02
1.20
1.22
0.12
44
9' x 8'
10
10
10
to
12
44
44
9.5
20'
1.27
1.56
1.45
0.11
44
10
10.5
to
25'
1.45
1.65
1.57
0.11
44
10
10.5
10
8 to
25'
1.21
1.50
1.44
0.12
44
11
11.5
12
30'
1.59
1.72
1.66
0.11
44
11
11.5
10
12
30'
1.33
1.59
1.54
0.12
44
9.5
0.33' - <2'
0.68
0.88
0.76
0.22
0.29
0.55
0.57
0.33' - <2'
0.54
0.74
0.68
0.24
0.24
0.41
0.54
2' - <3'
0.68
0.88
0.78
0.18
72
2' - <3'
0.54
0.74
0.68
0.15
72
to
3' - <5'
0.68
0.75
0.78
0.18
72
3' - <5'
0.53
0.63
0.64
0.13
72
12
5' - 10'
0.79
0.82
0.88
0.17
59
5' - 10'
0.62
0.64
0.70
0.12
59
15'
1.11
1.22
1.26
0.13
49
15'
0.85
0.94
0.99
0.12
49
20'
1.09
1.26
1.29
0.12
49
9' x 9'
10
10
10
to
12
9.5
20'
1.37
1.64
1.54
0.13
49
10
10.5
to
25'
1.56
1.73
1.65
0.13
44
10
10.5
10
8 to
25'
1.28
1.56
1.52
0.12
44
11
11.5
9.5
12
30'
1.56
1.73
1.68
0.12
44
11
11.5
10
12
30'
1.42
1.66
1.66
0.12
44
NOTES:
11:
13:
37 AM
1.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
12 of 14
(R)
(Ft.)
10' x 5'
10' x 6'
10' x 9'
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
10
10
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
SPAN x RISE
(S)
(R)
(M)
As1
As2
As3
As4
As5
As7
As8
As9
(in.)
0.33' - <2'
0.60
0.73
0.61
0.24
0.24
0.50
0.57
2' - <3'
0.60
0.73
0.61
0.12
58
to
3' - <5'
0.57
0.64
0.58
0.12
53
12
5' - 10'
0.65
0.60
0.60
0.12
52
15'
0.94
0.90
0.89
0.12
47
(Ft.)
DESIGN
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
EARTH COVER
(sq. in./Ft.)

TOP
BOT.
SIDE HAUNCH
(Tt)
(Tb)
(Tw)
(H)
ABOVE
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
to
11' x 4'
11
11
11
As1 EXT.
LENGTH
(M)
As1
As2
As3
0.33' - <2'
0.60
0.66
2' - <3'
0.60
0.66
As9
(in.)
As4
As5
As7
As8
0.54
0.27
0.27
0.52
0.56
0.54
0.14
62
3' - <5'
0.60
0.61
0.53
0.14
62
5' - 10'
0.79
0.63
0.62
0.14
55
15'
1.01
0.82
0.79
0.14
55
20'
1.34
1.11
1.06
0.14
55
12
10
10
10
20'
1.24
1.23
1.19
0.12
47
11
11.5
10
to
25'
1.39
1.37
1.28
0.12
47
12
12
11
8 to
25'
1.52
1.27
1.23
0.14
55
12.5
12.5
10
12
30'
1.38
1.43
1.41
0.12
47
13.5
13.5
11
12
30'
1.54
1.37
1.34
0.14
50
0.33' - <2'
0.58
0.75
0.64
0.24
0.24
0.48
0.56
0.33' - <2'
0.57
0.71
0.60
0.27
0.27
0.47
0.53
2' - <3'
0.58
0.75
0.64
0.12
58
2' - <3'
0.56
0.71
0.60
0.14
62
to
3' - <5'
0.56
0.67
0.62
0.12
52
to
3' - <5'
0.56
0.67
0.59
0.14
55
12
5' - 10'
0.64
0.64
0.65
0.12
52
12
5' - 10'
0.73
0.71
0.72
0.14
55
15'
0.92
0.96
0.95
0.12
47
15'
0.92
0.92
0.91
0.14
50
10
10
11' x 6'
11
11
11
10
10
10
20'
1.21
1.31
1.27
0.12
47
11
11
11
20'
1.21
1.25
1.21
0.14
50
11
11.5
10
to
25'
1.35
1.44
1.36
0.12
47
12
12
11
to
25'
1.37
1.43
1.39
0.14
50
12.5
12.5
10
12
30'
1.35
1.51
1.49
0.12
47
13.5
13.5
11
12
30'
1.39
1.53
1.50
0.14
50
0.33' - <2'
0.57
0.78
0.67
0.24
0.24
0.48
0.57
0.33' - <2'
0.55
0.76
0.66
0.27
0.27
0.46
0.55
2' - <3'
0.57
0.78
0.67
0.12
58
2' - <3'
0.55
0.76
0.66
0.14
to
3' - <5'
0.58
0.70
0.65
0.12
58
to
3' - <5'
0.54
0.72
0.65
0.14
12
5' - 10'
0.65
0.68
0.70
0.12
52
12
5' - 10'
0.73
0.79
0.82
0.14
15'
0.92
1.02
1.02
0.12
15'
0.93
1.03
1.03
0.14
10
10
10
10
10
20'
1.21
1.38
1.35
0.12
11
11.5
10
to
25'
1.33
1.52
1.44
0.12
12.5
12.5
10
12
30'
1.38
1.58
1.57
0.12
0.33' - <2'
0.58
0.80
0.70
0.24
0.26
0.48
0.58
2' - <3'
0.58
0.80
0.70
0.12
11
11
62
55
50
11
11
11
20'
1.21
1.39
1.36
0.14
47
12
12.5
11
to
25'
1.34
1.56
1.50
0.14
47
13.5
13.5
11
12
30'
1.41
1.66
1.65
0.14
0.33' - <2'
0.60
0.81
0.71
0.27
0.27
0.48
0.60
2' - <3'
0.60
0.81
0.71
0.15
75
64
50
50
50
to
3' - <5'
0.61
0.77
0.70
0.14
69
11
11
11
12
5' - 10'
0.80
0.88
0.93
0.14
62
15'
1.01
1.13
1.15
0.14
55
47
11
11
11
20'
1.30
1.52
1.52
0.14
50
47
12
12.5
11
to
25'
1.42
1.70
1.65
0.14
50
47
13.5
14
11
12
30'
1.53
1.77
1.74
0.14
50
0.26
0.50
0.61
0.33' - <2'
0.64
0.83
0.74
0.27
0.27
0.51
0.64
0.14
70
2' - <3'
0.64
0.83
0.74
0.21
86
0.73
0.13
64
to
3' - <5'
0.67
0.79
0.75
0.21
75
0.80
0.12
58
12
5' - 10'
0.88
0.93
0.99
0.19
69
1.13
1.15
0.12
52
15'
1.09
1.19
1.23
0.16
55
to
3' - <5'
0.60
0.72
0.68
0.12
10
12
5' - 10'
0.67
0.72
0.75
0.12
15'
0.95
1.08
1.08
0.12
47
10
10
10
20'
1.24
1.45
1.44
0.12
11
11.5
10
to
25'
1.36
1.59
1.52
0.12
12.5
12.5
10
12
30'
1.45
1.64
1.64
0.12
0.33' - <2'
0.61
0.82
0.73
0.24
2' - <3'
0.61
0.82
0.73
to
3' - <5'
0.64
0.75
12
5' - 10'
0.72
0.77
15'
1.00
10
11
62
47
10
10
11' x 8'
47
10
10
10' x 10'
(sq. in./Ft.)
(Tt)
10
10' x 8'
EARTH COVER
BOT.
10
10' x 7'
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
TOP
10
SIDE HAUNCH
DESIGN
See General Note 5
(S)
See General Note 5
SPAN x RISE
58
52
11' x 10'
11' x 11'
11
11
11
10
10
10
20'
1.30
1.53
1.52
0.12
47
11
11
11
20'
1.40
1.59
1.60
0.15
55
11
11.5
10
to
25'
1.42
1.66
1.60
0.12
47
12
12.5
11
to
25'
1.54
1.77
1.73
0.15
50
12.5
12.5
10
12
30'
1.57
1.70
1.72
0.12
47
13.5
14
11.5
12
30'
1.57
1.77
1.76
0.14
50
0.33' - <2'
0.66
0.84
0.75
0.24
0.27
0.52
0.65
10
10
10
2' - <3'
0.66
0.84
0.75
0.20
79
to
3' - <5'
0.70
0.77
0.79
0.19
70
12
5' - 10'
0.79
0.81
0.87
0.18
64
15'
1.09
1.19
1.23
0.15
52
10
10
10
20'
1.40
1.61
1.61
0.14
52
11
11.5
10
to
25'
1.53
1.74
1.68
0.14
47
12.5
12.5
10.5
12
30'
1.60
1.71
1.74
0.14
47
NOTES:
11:
13:
37 AM
1.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
13 of 14
WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT BENDING DIAGRAM

(H)
ABOVE
(M)
(in.)
TOP SLAB
(in.)
12
12
12
to
12' x 4'
S+8" Min.
LENGTH
As1
As2
As3
As4
As5
As7
As8
As9
0.33' - <2'
0.59
0.64
0.51
0.29
0.29
0.52
0.55
2' - <3'
0.60
0.64
0.51
0.15
73
3' - <5'
0.60
0.61
0.51
0.15
66
5' - 10'
0.81
0.61
0.61
0.15
66
Option 2 or 3
As9
8" Max.
(See Sheets 1
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
& 7)
As9 (Typ.)
As2 or As3
Option 2 or 3 (See
15'
12
1.04
0.80
0.77
0.15
59
59
20'
1.37
1.08
1.03
0.15
13
13
12
8 to
25'
1.58
1.26
1.21
0.15
59
14.5
14.5
12
12
30'
1.63
1.38
1.34
0.15
53
12
12
to
12' x 6'
12
13
13
12
8 to
14.5
15
12
12
12
12
0.56
0.70
0.57
0..29
0.29
0.47
0.52
2' - <3'
0.56
0.70
0.57
0.15
66
3' - <5'
0.56
0.67
0.57
0.15
59
5' - 10'
0.74
0.69
0.70
0.15
59
0.94
0.90
0.88
0.15
53
1.23
1.22
1.17
0.15
53
25'
1.40
1.42
1.37
0.15
53
8" Max.
53
(Typ.)
1.44
1.54
1.48
0.15
0.55
0.75
0.63
0.29
0.29
0.45
0.53
2' - <3'
0.55
0.75
0.63
0.15
to
3' - <5'
0.55
0.73
0.63
0.15
12
5' - 10'
0.73
0.77
0.79
0.15
15'
0.93
1.00
0.99
0.15
12
12
12
20'
1.21
1.35
1.31
0.15
13
13.5
12
to
25'
1.35
1.55
1.48
0.15
14.5
15
12
12
30'
1.40
1.67
1.62
0.15
12
12
As9
As4 (3 Wires Min.)
66
59
59
53
WWR PIECE NO. 1
WWR PIECE NO. 4
WWR PIECE NO. 3
(2 Reqd. per segment)
(Tongue Reinforcement)
53
53
TYPE 2 BOX SECTION (DESIGN EARTH COVER 2' OR GREATER)
53
0.57
0.80
0.68
0.29
0.29
0.46
0.57
0.57
0.80
0.68
0.15
73
to
3' - <5'
0.59
0.77
0.68
0.15
66
As5 (Top Slab)
8" Max.
(See Sheets 1
5' - 10'
0.78
0.85
0.89
0.15
59
As9 (Bot. Slab)
(Typ.)
& 7)
15'
0.98
1.10
1.11
0.15
53
1.26
1.47
1.45
0.15
53
12
12
20'
25'
1.39
1.68
1.63
0.15
53
30'
1.48
1.79
1.76
0.15
53
0.33' - <2'
0.65
0.84
0.73
0.29
0.29
0.50
0.65
93
13
13.5
12
14.5
15
12
12
12
(Typ.)
2' - <3'
to
12
8" Max.
(Typ.)
0.33' - <2'
12' x 10'
12
As9
12
12
S+2(Tw+10"-Cover-M)
20'
30'
12' x 8'
WWR PIECE NO. 2

15'
0.33' - <2'
12
As1
2' - <3'
0.65
0.84
0.73
0.23
to
3' - <5'
0.68
0.81
0.75
0.22
80
12
5' - 10'
0.90
0.94
1.01
0.21
73
15'
1.12
1.20
1.24
0.18
59
12
12' x 12'
12
12
12
20'
1.42
1.60
1.61
0.16
59
13
13.5
12
to
25'
1.57
1.81
1.78
0.16
53
14.5
15
12.5
12
30'
1.63
1.86
1.85
0.15
53
(1'-0" Min.)
S+8" Min.
Option 2 or 3
As9 (Typ.)
As2 or As3
As1
Option 2 or 3 (See
As4
Sheets 1 & 7)
(
Typ.
)
12
0.33' - <2'
As4
Sheets 1 & 7)
R+2x Cover
(in.)
As1 EXT.
WWR PIECE NO. 2

R+2x Cover
(in.)
(sq. in./Ft.)
(
Typ.
)
(in.)
(Tw)
REINFORCEMENT AREAS
8" M ax.
(Tb)
DESIGN
EARTH COVER
(
Typ.
)
(Tt)
SIDE HAUNCH
8" M ax.
BOT.
8" M ax.
(Ft.)

TOP
R+Tt+Tb-2xCover
(R)
R+Tt+Tb-2xCover
(S)
See General Note 5
SPAN x RISE
S+2(Tw+10"-Cover-A)
8" Max.
As9
(Typ.)
As7 (Top Slab)
WWR PIECE NO. 1

NOTES:
1.
As9
As8 (Bot. Slab)
WWR PIECE NO. 4
WWR PIECE NO. 3
See Sheet 2 of 14 for General Notes.
2. See Sheet 7 of 14 for Reinforcing Details and dimension locations.

11:
13:
38 AM
TYPE 1 BOX SECTION (DESIGN EARTH COVER LESS THAN 2')

REINFORCEMENT NOTES:
1. Reinforcement bending dimensions are out-to-out.
2. See General Notes 4, 5 and 6 on Sheet 2.
12/17/2015
3. See Tables 1 thru 16 for dimensions M, R, S, Tb, Tt and Tw.

4. Dimension "A" is determined by the Manufacturer in accordance with
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
the requirements of Detail "B" on Sheets 1 and 7.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
292
SHEET
NO.
14 of 14
A
Slope Varies Not
Less Than
2'
10"
1
2":1'
7"
3"
Top Of Box
3'
6'
2'
3" Concrete Ditch Pavement
Exist. Slot In Box

(Depth Varies)
3"
PLAN
6'
Slope Varies Not

Less
6'
1
Than 2":1'
3" Concrete Ditch Pavement

3'
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
32:
37 AM
SAFETY MODIFICATION FOR INLETS IN BOX CULVERTS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
SAFETY MODIFICATIONS FOR
DESIGN STANDARDS
INLET IN BOX CULVERTS
NO.
293
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
10"
10"
8"
Dia. Hole
1'Std.
1
'St
d
.
1
2"
Bars H
Grate Seat
8"
1
2"
1
2"
x 1
1
4
2"
Bars 2" x
M -4"
Varies
2"
7
8"
C4 x 5.4
Anchor Bolt
Bars V
Anchor Bolt
(U-Bends)
PLAN
PLAN
L
Hole
1
2"
Hole
C4 x 5.4
Bar 2"x1/2"
1
2"
C4 x 5.4
6" Anchor Bolt
3
16
1'
1'
1'
1'
1'
1'
1'
1'
9 4"
1"
1
1 2
e
p
o
g Sl
n
i
t
s
i
Ex
2"
1"
1 "
4
Varies
P
1
2"
1
2"
x 1
1
4
SECTI
ON AA
Grate
1
'St
d
.
1 "
4
Construction Joint
Bar 2"x1/2"
2
9
16"
1
2 2"
1
1 2"
Dowel Bars
Existing Pipe and
2'
6"
6"
7
8"x1'-10"
Bars V (U-Bends)
F
C4 x 5.4
Va
r
i
e
s
8"
Permitted
Bars H
(6 Required)
4"
3
16
9 4"
Bars HV
1'Std.
1'-0" To 1'-3"
6" Anchor Bolt
Endwall (To Remain)
1
4
Bars F (5 Required)
Tie Bars (2 Required)
112"
3
16
1
2
SECTI
ON BB
SECTI
ON
8"
GRATE DETAI
L
GENERAL NOTES
1. For use criteria see "Steel Grating Use Criteria" Index No. 261.
5
8"x6"
Galvanized
Anchor Bolts
3
4"
8"
2. Grates shall be ASTM A242, A572 or A588, Grade 50 steel, and galvanized in accordance with Section 975 and 425-3.2 of the Standard Specifications.
2"
(4 Required)
1
2"
Bar 2"x
3. Channel section C3 x 6.0 may be substituted for the C4 x 5.4 channel.

3
8"
1
4"
4. All reinforcing No. 4 bars with 2" clearance except as noted. Spacings shown are center to center. Laps to be 12" minimum. Welded wire fabric (two
cages max.) having an equivalent cross section area (0.20 sq. in.) may be substituted for bar reinforcement.
1
4"
5. Drill 1
holes 8" deep with a rotary drill in existing endwall for dowel bars. Holes shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to installing Adhesive-Bonded
Dowels.
6. Endwall to be paid for under the contract unit price for Class I Concrete (Endwalls), CY and Reinforcing Steel (Roadway), LB. Cost of
GRATE SEAT DETAI

L
ANCHOR BOL
T DETAI
L
Adhesive-Bonded Dowels to be included in the contract unit price for reinforcing steel. Cost of grates to be paid for under the contract unit price
for Endwall Grate, LB., plan quantity. Cost of galvanized bolts and nuts to be included in the contract unit price for the grate.
7. Sod slopes 5' each side and above endwall. Sodding to be paid for under the contract unit price for Performance Turf, SY.
DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES PER GRATE

Pipe
Channels @ 5.4 Lbs./LF
Bars @ 3.4 lbs/LF (2 ea.)
DIMENSIONS AND QUANTITIES PER U-ENDWALL
Angles @ 3.2 Lbs./LF
(2)Total
Slope
Size
Quantity
15"
10
2'-6
18"
12
2'-9
24"
15
3'-3
30"
18
3'-9
15"
2'-6
18"
2'-9
24"
3'-3
30"
11
3'-9
11:
32:
38 AM
1:6
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:4
Pipe
Class I
G
Lbs.
M-4"
Lbs.
Lbs.
Weight-Lbs
7
8"
139
11'-3"
3'-3"
99
9'-4"
60
298
15"
2'-8
7
8"
183
13'-3"
3'-6"
114
11'-4"
73
370
18"
2'-11
7
8"
269
16'-3"
4'-0"
138
14'-4"
92
499
24"
3'-5
7
8"
372
19'-3"
4'-6"
162
17'-4"
111
645
30"
3'-11
7
8"
83
7'-3"
3'-3"
71
5'-4"
34
188
15"
2'-8
7
8"
107
8'-3"
3'-6"
80
6'-4"
41
228
18"
2'-11
7
8"
161
10'-3"
4'-0"
97
8'-4"
53
311
24"
3'-5
7
8"
227
12'-3"
4'-6"
114
10'-4"
66
407
30"
3'-11
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
Reinforcing
Concrete-CY
Steel-Lbs.
SY
3'-7"
2'-2"
13'-0"
9'-4"
2.12
167
23
3'-10"
2'-5"
14'-6"
11'-4"
2.53
173
25
4'-4"
2'-11"
17'-6"
14'-4"
3.48
238
29
4'-10"
3'-5"
20'-6"
17'-4"
4.57
315
32
19
3'-7"
2'-2"
8'-8"
5'-4"
1.44
120
3'-10"
2'-5"
9'-8"
6'-4"
1.72
130
20
4'-4"
2'-11"
11'-8"
8'-4"
2.36
167
22
4'-10"
3'-5"
13'-8"
10'-4"
3.09
225
25
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
Sod
Size
SAFETY MODIFICATIONS FOR ENDWALLS
NO.
295
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Future Curb And
R
3
4"
1
2"
Curb And Gutter
TYPE E
PLAN
Valley Gutter
"
2'-3"
5"
6"
3"
R
3
4"
3 4"
Joint Seal
Adjacent Pavement
7"
11"
3 4"
3
4"
Exp. Joint
3
4"
Same Slope As
9"
6" M in.
*
3
4"
1
2"
11"
*
1
d.
2" St
16"
5"
3
4"
3"
1'
-10"
1'
-2"
1'-6"
9"
20' R Or As Shown On Plans
Gutter Construction
Exp. Joint And

Concrete Pavement
1'-6"
6"
For details depicting usage adjacent to

flexible pavement, see diagram right.
R
3
4"
Joint Seal
8"
3'-0"
1'-6"
18"
Conc. Pavt.
1'-2"
1'-10"
TYPE F
"
SECTION AA
R
3 4
3 4"
2'-0"
6"
9"
R
3"
1
d.
2" St
R
3
4"
6" M in.
*
TYPE A
10"
1'-2"
Slope To
1
d.
2" St
R
3
4"
1
4"
1
d.
2" St
6" M in.
*
3
4"
1
4"
1
2"
"
6" M in.
*
R
3
"
Exp. Joint And
2
"
*
3 4
1'
-0"
1
2"
Fit Driveway
6"
5"
3
"
R
2
"
6"
1'
-0"
1
d.
2" St
6" M in.
*
R
3
4"
1
4"
"
3 4
1
2"
6"
1'-2"
1'-10"
TYPE B
8"
6"
Joint Seal
2'-0"
2
"R
Note: To be paid for as parent curb.
5'-0"
DROP CURB
18"
7"
4"
3
4"
7"
6" M in.
*
1
d.
2" St
R
3
4"
1
4"
Conc. Pavt.
1
2"
3"
R
3
"
R
2
"
6"
"
1'
-0"
3 4
Shoulder Pavement
2'
6"
1'
Exp. Joint And
TYPE D
3'-6"
Note: For use adjacent to concrete or flexible pavement, concrete

shown. Expansion joint, preformed joint filler and joint seal are
SHOULDER GUTTER
8"
Earth Berm
1'-2"
"
Standard Shoulder Line
1'-10"
3 4
SECTION BB
6"
6"
8"
required between curbs and concrete pavement only, see Sheet 2.

3'-6"
Truck Apron Surface
Roadway Pavement
9"
1
8"R
3
4"
1'
-0"
match the cross slope of the adjacent pavement. The thickness of the lip
Circulating
"
When used on high side of roadways, the cross slope of the gutter shall
3 4
VALLEY GUTTER
2"
3"
3
4"
Specified In The Plans
CONCRETE CURB
9"
R
SECTION CC
shall be 6", unless otherwise shown on plans.
11:
34:
38 AM
2'-3"
Rotate entire section so that gutter cross slope matches slope of adjacent
circulating roadway pavement.
TRAFFIC BEARING SECTION FOR USE IN

For use adjacent to concrete or flexible pavement. For details depicting
ROUNDABOUT CENTRAL ISLAND CONSTRUCTION
TYPE RA
usage adjacent to flexible pavement, see Sheet 2. Expansion joint, preformed

12/3/2015
joint filler and joint seal are required between curb & gutter and concrete
pavement only, see Sheet 2.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CURB & CURB AND GUTTER
NO.
300
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
6'
8.5'
20'R
R
20'
End Of Curb
1'
2'
End Of Curb
Edge Of Pavt.
Edge Of Pavt.
Edge Of Pavt.
PLAN
5.5'
Top Of Curb
PLAN
3'
3'
Trans.
3'
Top Of Curb
Top Of Curb
Gutter
1
2"
Min.
Top Of Curb
Gutter
PROFILE
PROFILE
PROFILE
FLARED END
STRAIGHT END
FLARED END
STRAIGHT END
CURB AND GUTTER TYPES E & F
CURB AND GUTTER ENDINGS
Depth Of Sawcut
Max.
3'
Trans.
Gutter
CURB TYPE A
1
2"
3'
Trans.
PROFILE
Depth Of Sawcut
2
PLAN
PLAN
Trans.
Gutter
Edge Of Pavt.
0" Min.
Joint Seal
5" Max.
0" Min.
Max.
Concrete
3
4"
Varies
TYPE E
Concrete
Gutter
Surface On Low Side Of Pavement to
Depth Of Sawcut
0" Min.
Be
1
4"
1
3 2"
"
SHOULDER GUTTER
Pavement
Above Lip Of Gutter. Surface
5" Max.
On High Side To Be Flush With Lip Of
0" Min.
Curb Or Curb & Gutter.
1
2"
Slope Varies
TYPE F
Exp. Joint And

Applies to both high and low sides of pavement, low side shown.
Sawcuts should be avoided within valley gutter and within curb and gutter endings.
Flexible Pavt.
CONTRACTION JOINT IN CURB AND GUTTER
EXPANSION JOINT BETWEEN GUTTER

AND CONCRETE PAVEMENT
Depth Of Sawcut
1
2"
Depth Of Sawcut
1
2"
Depth Of Sawcut
1
2"
Min.
1
2"
1
Min.
Min.
Applies to both high and low sides of pavement, low side shown.
Applies to shoulder gutter only where adjoining traffic lanes.
CURB AND GUTTER AND TYPE A CURB
TYPE A
TYPE D
TYPE B
ADJACENT TO FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT
CONTRACTION JOINT IN CURB

GENERAL NOTES
4" Min.,
1. For curb, gutter and curb & gutter provide
5" Max.
6'-0"
5
8"
Or
3
4"
2"
Holes
12"()
5"
2"
2" Min.,
6" M ax.
1
4"
contraction joints at 10'
and flat curves are to match the pavement joints, with intermediate joints not
be located in accordance with Section 520 of the Standard Specifications.

5"
5" M in.
,
11:
34:
39 AM
3" Max.
to exceed 10' centers. Curb, gutter and curb & gutter expansion joints shall
3" Max.
2" Min.,
1
8"
centers (max.). Contraction joints adjacent to concrete pavement on tangents
2. Ends of Curbs Types B and D shall transition from full to zero heights in 3'.
Pitch Optional
9"
#4 Bars, 18" Long
8" Min.,
R=2"
9" Max.
Cast Or
(Two Per Guard)
12/3/2015
Rubbed
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
CONCRETE BUMPER GUARD
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE CURB
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CURB & CURB AND GUTTER
NO.
300
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Delineator Post (Refer To Index No. 17346)
TURN LANES CURBED AND UNCURBED MEDIANS

URBAN CONDITIONS
Design
Entry
Clearance Brake To
Speed
Speed
Distance
Stop
Decel.
(mph)
(mph)
Distance
L
Total
10'
RURAL CONDITIONS
Concrete Curb Or Curb And Gutter
Total
Clearance
Stop
Decel.
Clearance
Distance
Distance
Distance
Distance
Distance
35
25
70'
75'
145'
110'
40
30
80'
75'
155'
120'
45
35
85'
100'
185'
135'
2" Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
(Refer To Index No. 300)
Brake To
Begin Lane Line
Taper 100'
Begin Lane Line

L
Queue Length
(Measured From Stop
L
50
40/44
105'
185'
290'
160'
55
48
125'
135'
240'
160'
225'
350'
195'
60
52
145'
260'
405'
230'
65
55
170'
290'
460'
270'
Bar Location)
L
Brakes Applied After Turning
Vehicle Clears Through Lane;
FLUSH AND/OR CURBED SEPARATION
Entry Speed:
10 mph Below Design Speed For Urban Condition
DESIGN NOTES
Traffic Separator (Refer
Average Running Speed For Rural Condition
To Index No. 302)
1. Basis for turn lane configurations:
Informed Driver.
Stop condition (With Or Without Stop Control).
Wet Pavement.
Reaction preceding entry point.
Minimum braking distance for urban conditions.
75' min. for L.
Comfortable deceleration rates for rural conditions

Begin Lane Line
Taper 100'
Begin Lane Line

L
Queue Length
(Measured From Stop
(AASHTO 2001 threshold rate of 11.2 ft./s).
Bar Location)
L
GENERAL NOTES
1. The plan views shown are for turn lane taper shapes and dimensional
RAISED SEPARATION
purposes only, they do not prescribe the use of curb, curb and gutter,
Entry Speed:
shoulders nor separators specifically to either rural or urban conditions.
2. Total deceleration distances must not be reduced except where lesser
DOUBLE LEFT TURNS
values are imposed by unrelocatable control points.

Delineator Post (Refer To Index No. 17346)
10'
3. Right turn lane tapers and distances identical to left turn lanes under stop
control conditions. Right turn lane tapers and/or distances are site specific
under free flow or yield conditions.
4. These left turn configurations apply to continuous left turn lanes only
where specifically called for in the plans.
Taper 50'
Begin Lane Line
L
5. For pavement markings see Index No. 17346.
Stop Bar (If Required)
Queue Length **
L
Limits of 4', 6' or
8'-6" Traffic
Limits of 4', 6' or

8'-6" Traffic
Edge Of Turn Lane
Separator
** Queue Length Is Measured From The Median Nose Radial
Edge Of Turn Lane
Separator
Edge Of Pavt.
Edge Of Pavt.
*
(Curbed Section)
Point Or, When A Stop Bar Is Required, From The Stop Bar.
FLUSH AND/OR CURBED SEPARATION
Entry Speed:
(Curbed Section)
Traffic Separator (Refer

Concrete Curb Or
To Index No. 302)
Curb And Gutter

TYPE E
TYPE F
CURB AND GUTTER
Limits of 4', 6' or

8'-6" Traffic
Separator
Limits of 4', 6' or
8'-6" Traffic
8'-6" Traffic
Edge Of
Turn Lane
Separator
Edge Of Pavt.
(Curbed Section)
11:
34:
39 AM
Taper 50'
Limits of 4', 6' or
Begin Lane Line

L
L
Separator
Edge Of Turn
Lane And Edge
Queue Length **
Edge Of Turn
*
Of Pavt.
Lane And Edge
Of Pavt.
RAISED SEPARATION
Entry Speed:
TYPE A
TYPE B
TYPE D
CURB
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
SINGLE LEFT TURNS
The length of taper may be increased to L for single left turns and L for double left turns when:
For Curb And Curb & Gutter Types, See Index No. 300
a. Left turn queue vehicles are adequately provided for within the design queue length.
* Option I Separators Shown (Refer To Index No. 302)
b. Through vehicle queues will not block access to left turn lane.
MEDIAN CURB AND TRAFFIC SEPARATOR JUNCTURE DETAILS

REVISIO N
12/3/2015
c. Approved by District Design Engineer.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TURN LANES
NO.
301
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
1
5 2"
3
5 4"
1
4"
For 4' Separator
1
2"
For 6' Separator
3
4"
For 8'-6" Separator
For 4' Separator

4'-0", 6'-0" Or 8'-6"
For 6' Separator

9"
For 8'-6" Separator
9"
4'-0", 6'-0" Or 8'-6"

2"
Or 3'-6"
3"
3
4"
Pitch
Const. Joint With
(Same As Below)
1
2"
For 6' Separator
1
4"
1
4"
For 8'-6" Separator
Or 3'-7"
Pitch
Tool Edge
Const. Joint
(Same As Below)
(Same As Below)
Permitted (Typ.)
1
2"
For 6' Separator
3
5 4"
For 8'-6" Separator
2"
Const. Joint With

1
4"
Pitch
6"
2"R
2" R
Base
Base
Base
Asphalt
Base
Asphalt
6"
Pavement
Base
Asphalt
6"
Pavement
6"
Pavement
Base
Asphalt
Stabilized
6"
Pavement
Stabilized
Subgrade
Subgrade
Stabilized Subgrade
Tool Edge
Permitted (Typ.)
(Same As Below)
5"
6"
5"
5"
3
4"
1
With 4"
Tool Edge Permitted
7"
3"
7" 5"
5"
5"
7"
3
4"
For 4' Separator
6" 1'-4", 2'-4"
2"
Const. Joint With
Tool Edge Permitted
1
4"
5"
1'-3", 2'-3"
Pitch
For 4' Separator
7"
9"
1
4"
6"
6"
2', 3' Or 4'-3" R

2', 3' Or 4'-3" R
5"
1
4"
Stabilized Subgrade
ON I
OPTI
TRANSVERSE SECTION
LONGITUDINAL SECTION (NOSE)
TRANSVERSE SECTION
OPTION I
4'-0", 6'-0" Or 8'-6"
4'-0", 6'-0" Or 8'-6"

Cost Of The Asphalt Pavt. and
2', 3' Or 4'-3" R
Cost Of The Asphalt Pavt. and
Base Under The Option II

2', 3' Or 4'-3" R
Separator Included In The

1'-3", 2'-3"
Cost Of The Separator.
Or 3'-6"
2"
Pitch
6"
Pitch
(Same As Below)
(Same As Below)
Min.)
Course
3
(5 4"
Min.)
Base
Layer Of Structural Course
6"
3
4"
Asphalt
Pavement
2"
3
(6 4"
3
4"
Layer Of Structural Course (6
Min.)
Min.)
Separator Key In Lieu Of

Dowels (12" Min., 18" Max.)
5"
1
6"
6" Plus Friction Course Or Upper
6"
Base
Separator Key In Lieu

Of Dowels
Asphalt
Pavement
Pavement
R
2"
3
4"
Asphalt
2"
6" Plus Friction Course Or Upper
(Same As Below)
R
2"
5"
Course
Pitch
Upper Layer Of Structural

3"
3"
Upper Layer Of Structural

3
(5 4"
Dowels 24" oc
5" Plus Friction Course Or
Cost Of The Separator.
(Same As Below)
Asphalt
Base
12" Min., 18" Max.
Dowel
3"
5" Plus Friction Course Or
Separator Included In The

Pitch
Or 3'-7"
9"
9"
Base Under The Option II
1'-4", 2'-4"
6"
9"
Base
Pavement
1
2"
Depth Varies
Stabilized Subgrade
Stabilized
Stabilized
(1" Min.) (To Top Of
Subgrade
Subgrade
Base Permitted)
To Be Included In
The Contract Unit
TRANSVERSE SECTION
x6" Steel
Dowel (Typ.) Cost
Price For Separator
OPTION II
TRANSVERSE SECTION
TYPE I CONCRETE TRAFFIC SEPARATOR
OPTION II
TYPE IV CONCRETE TRAFFIC SEPARATOR

2', 3' Or 4'-3" R
2', 3' Or 4'-3" R
For 8'-6" Separator
3
4"R
(Preformed Filler & Joint Sealant)
2"
1
4"
For 4' Separator
1
2"
For 6' Separator
3
4"
Or 4'-1"
1
2"
For 6' Separator
1
2"
3
4"
For 8'-6" Separator
Expansion Joint
For 4' Separator

2"
2"
1
2"
Expansion Joint (Typ.)
For 8'-6" Separator

(Preformed Filler & Joint Sealant
3
4"
(Preformed Filler & Joint Sealant
Pavement
TRANSVERSE SECTION
TYPE II CONCRETE TRAFFIC SEPARATOR
4"
4"
Cement Concrete
1
4"
3
4"R
Pavement
1'-10", 2'-10"
"R
2
3
4"
4'-0", 6'-0" Or 8'-6"
Expansion Joint (Typ.)
4"
4"
6"
5"
Filler & Joint Sealant
1
2"
2
"
Joint (Preformed
Cement Concrete
9"
6"
For 8'-6" Separator
3
4"
9"
6"
Expansion
For 6' Separator
6"
1
2"
For 4' Separator
1
2"
6"
For 6' Separator
1
4"
6"
1'-3", 2'-3"
Or 3'-6"
3"
3
4"
9"
For 4' Separator
3"
1
2"
5"
1
4"
4'-0", 6'-0" Or 8'-6"
3
4"R
Cement Concrete
3
4"
Cement Concrete
Pavement
Pavement
TRANSVERSE SECTION
NOTES
TYPE V CONCRETE TRAFFIC SEPARATOR
11:
34:
40 AM
1. Separators Type I and IV are to be used with flexible pavement. Separators Types II and V are to be used with rigid pavement.
2. Either Option I or Option II may be used for Types I and IV separators except when a specific option is called for in the plans.
3. For all separators provide
1
1
8"- 4"
contraction joints at 10' centers (max.). Contraction joints adjacent to concrete pavement on tangents and flat curves are to match the
4. Separators having widths of 4', 6' or 8'-6" shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Concrete Traffic Separator (Type_) (_' Wide) LF. Separators having widths other
ROADWAY INSTALLATIONS
than 4', 6' or 8'-6" shall be detailed in the plans as special separators and paid for under the contract unit price for Concrete Traffic Separator (Special) SY.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
pavement joints, with intermediate joints not to exceed 10' centers.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC SEPARATORS
NO.
302
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Cover
Construction
Min. (Typ.)
Joint
R = 134" (Typ.)
5"
9"
1
2"
Cover
Construction
Min. (Typ.)
Joint
Bars 4B @ 1"-6" O.C. (Max.) (Typ.)
Bridge Deck or
Approach Slab
Bars 4E @ 1"-6" O.C. (Max.) ##
Bridge Deck or
Bars 4C @ 1'-6"
Approach Slab
O.C. (Max.)
(Typ.)
Bars 4D @ 1'-6"
Bars 4A (Typ.) #
O.C. (Max.) (Typ.)
TYPICAL SECTION THRU TRAFFIC SEPARATOR
(Bridge Deck Shown, Approach Slab Similar)
2'-0" R, 3'-0" R, or 4'-3" R
2'-0" R, 3'-0" R, or 4'-3" R
For 6'-0" width: Bars 4A @ 5 equal spaces (continuous).
1'-3", 2'-3",
Bars 4A
R =
* Pitch
9"
or 3'-6"
3
1 4"
Bars 4E (Typ.)
Construction
## At the Contractor's option a one piece bar may be
Joint
1'-3", 2'-3",
9"
Bars 4A
R =
or 3'-6"
3
1 4"
Bars 4C (Typ.)
5"
Pitch
5"
R = 134"
9"
Riding Surface
3"
3"
3"
Riding Surface
# Bars 4A (Typ.)
9"
3"
1
2"
* Pitch
9"
4'-0", 6'-0", or 8'-6"
5"
* Pitch
4'-0", 6'-0", or 8'-6"
Construction
Joint
3"
3"
substituted for Bars 4B and 4E.
* Pitch:
Bridge Deck or
Bars 4B (Typ.)
Field bend and cut
Approach Slab
rebar as required
1
4"
For 4'-0" Separator
1
2"
For 6'-0" Separator
3
4"
For 8'-6" Separator
Bridge Deck or
Approach Slab
to maintain cover
Bars 4D (Typ.)
Field bend and cut

rebar as required
to maintain cover
LONGITUDINAL SECTION THRU TRAFFIC
SEPARATOR AT NOSE
SEPARATOR AT NOSE

REINFORCING STEEL OPTION B (NOT PERMITTED
REINFORCING STEEL OPTION A

ON BRIDGE DECKS WITH PRESTRESSING STEEL)
1'-0" Max. sp. as required
See Reinforcing Steel Option A or B
1'-6"
(Max.)
Typical @ Skewed Ends

Poured Joint with
for bar spacing
Backer Rod Expansion

Bars 4B or 4C
Joint (See Expansion
Approach Slab
(See Note 1)
Joint Details)
Expansion Joint
Traffic Separator
Assembly (See
Expansion Joint
Details)
Deck Expansion
Traffic
Separator (Typ.)
Joint
Traffic
Intermediate Pier
Bridge Deck
Begin or End
or Bent
Separator (Typ.)
Approach Slab
DETAIL AT EXPANSION JOINTS
DETAIL AT POURED JOINT WITH
(Strip Seal Shown,
BACKER ROD EXPANSION JOINTS
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF SKEWED BRIDGE DECK AND

APPROACH SLAB WITH TRAFFIC SEPARATOR
Other Armored Joint Types Similar)
(Deck Expansion Joint at Begin or End Bridge Shown,
11:
34:
41 AM
Expansion Joint at Pier or Intermediate Bents Similar)

Notes:
1. Traffic Separator transverse reinforcement adjacent to deck expansion joints shall be field adjusted to maintain clearance and spacing.
Bars shall be field cut as shown, bars may be rotated to maintain clearance.
2. Traffic Separator ends at deck expansion joints shall follow the deck joint limits. Drainage joints and " V-Grooves shall be placed
12/3/2015
perpendicular or radial to the of the Traffic Separator. See Structures Plans, Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets for details.
3. See Structures Plans, Superstructure Sheets for actual dimensions and joint orientation.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
BRIDGE INSTALLATIONS - TYPE "E" CURB

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC SEPARATORS
NO.
302
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
4'-0", 6'-0", or 8'-6"
Pitch
* Pitch
4'-0", 6'-0", or 8'-6"

2"
Construction
Min. (Typ.)
Joint
R = 2"
(Typ.)
6"
Cover
2"
2"
1
2"
1
2"
R = 2"
Construction
Min. (Typ.)
(Typ.)
Joint
Riding Surface
3"
3"
Riding Surface
Bars 4B @ 1"-6" O.C. (Max.) (Typ.)
Bridge Deck or
# Bars 4A (Typ.)
Cover
6"
2"
Approach Slab
Bars 4E @ 1"-6" O.C. (Max.) ##
Bridge Deck or
Bars 4C @ 1'-6"
Approach Slab
O.C. (Max.)
Bars 4A (Typ.) #
Bars 4D @ 1'-6"
O.C. (Max.) (Typ.)
# For 4'-0" width: Bars 4A @ 3 equal spaces (continuous).
2'-0" R, 3'-0" R, or 4'-3" R
2'-0" R, 3'-0" R, or 4'-3" R
2"
1'-10", 2'-10", or 4'-1"
Bars 4A
Bars 4E (Typ.)
R = 2"
* Pitch
* Pitch
## At the Contractor's option a one piece bar may be
substituted for Bars 4B and 4E.

Joint
Bridge Deck or
Approach Slab
Field bend and cut
* Pitch: 14" For 4'-0" Separator

1
2"
For 6'-0" Separator
3
4"
For 8'-6" Separator
1'-10", 2'-10", or 4'-1"
Bars 4A
Bars 4C (Typ.)
R = 2"
Construction
6"
6"
Construction
2"
Joint
Bars 4B (Typ.)
Bridge Deck or
rebar as required
Approach Slab
to maintain cover
Field bend and cut
Bars 4D (Typ.)
rebar as required
to maintain cover
SEPARATOR AT NOSE
SEPARATOR AT NOSE

REINFORCING STEEL OPTION B (NOT PERMITTED

ON BRIDGE DECKS WITH PRESTRESSING STEEL)
Poured Joint with

Backer Rod Expansion
Joint (See Expansion
Note: Treatment of separators on straight bridges
Joint Details)
shown. For additional notes and treatment of
Expansion Joint
separators on skewed bridges, see Sheet 2.
Assembly (See
Expansion Joint
Details)
Traffic
11:
34:
42 AM
Separator (Typ.)
Traffic
Separator (Typ.)
DETAIL AT EXPANSION JOINTS
DETAIL AT POURED JOINT WITH
(Strip Seal Shown,
BACKER ROD EXPANSION JOINTS
12/3/2015
Other Armored Joint Types Similar)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
BRIDGE INSTALLATIONS - TYPE "F" CURB

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC SEPARATORS
NO.
302
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
CONVENTIONAL REINFORCING
ALTERNATE REINFORCING STEEL
STEEL BENDING DIAGRAMS
DETAILS (WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT)
ESTIMATED TRAFFIC SEPARATOR QUANTITIES

CONCRETE:
CONSTANT WIDTH OF SEPARATOR:
TYPE "E"
OPTION A: Use Welded Wire Reinforcement 3 x 4 - W5.0 x W6.7 as
1'-0"
Bars 4E
8"
1'-0"
See Note
TYPE "F"
4'-0" Width = 0.056 CY per Ft.
- 0.072 CY per Ft.
required by plans in place of Bars 4A, 4B and 4E. Bend the
- 0.112 CY per Ft.
Welded Wire Reinforcement to the dimensions of Bar 4B
- 0.164 CY per Ft.
shown in the Bending Diagram for Reinforcing Steel Option A.

Length as required
OPTION B:Use Welded Wire Reinforcement 3 x 4 - W5.0 x W6.7 as

8"
Bars 4A
NOSE:
required by plans in place of Bars 4A and 4C shown in
TYPE "E"
Reinforcing Steel Option B.
Bars 4A & 4E
Bar 4B
Note: Welded Wire Reinforcement to consist of smooth wire meeting the
TYPE "F"
4'-0" Width = 0.080 CY
0.109 CY
6'-0" Width = 0.193 CY
0.257 CY
8'-6" Width = 0.403 CY
0.536 CY
requirements of Specification Section 931.

REINFORCING STEEL:
(All quantities are based on an 8" slab.)
Note:
1'-0" Min.
W5.0 (Lap Splice Each
Length of Bars 4E is 2'-5" for 4'-0" Separator.
Longitudinal Wire)
OPTION A:
Lap
4'-0" Width - 6.37 Lbs. per Ft.
W5.0
W5.0

W6.7 (Typ.)
OPTION B:
4" (Typ.)

SPLICE DETAIL
(Between WWR 3 x 4 - W5.0 x W6.7 Sections)

6"
Bars 4A
See Note
Length as required
8"
Bars 4C
Adhesive Bonding
Material System
Dowel Bar 4D
10"
5"
DRAINAGE JOINT DETAIL
Length of Bars 4C is 2'-4" for 4'-0" Separator.

5"
Note:
Em bedm ent Length
Bar 4D
5"
Bars 4A & 4C
FOR 5" OPENING OR LESS

See Structures Plans, Superstructure Sheets for location(s)
of drainage joints. Locations for drainage joints shall be
limited to the constant width section of separator.
"
REINFORCING STEEL OPTION B

Hole diameter to meet
adhesive bonding material
NOTES:
system manufacturer's
CONCRETE: See General Notes in Structures Plans.
requirements
REINFORCING STEEL: Reinforcing Steel shall be ASTM A615 Grade 60.

PAYMENT: Separators having widths of 4'-0", 6'-0", and 8'-6" shall
1. All dimensions are out to out.

2. The 8" vertical dimension shown for Bars 4B and 4D
be paid under the contract unit price for Traffic Separator Concrete
DOWEL DETAIL
(Type II or V) (__' Wide), LF. Separators having widths other
are based on a slab 8" thick or greater without a
than 4'-0", 6'-0", or 8'-6" shall be detailed in the plans as special
Dowel Notes:
wearing surface. If slab thickness is less than 8",
separators and paid under the contract unit price for Traffic Separator
1. Shift Dowel Holes to clear if existing reinforcement
decrease this dimension by an amount equal to the

difference in thickness. If a wearing surface is to
be provided, increase this dimension by an amount
equal to the wearing surface thickness.
Concrete (Special), S.Y.
is encountered.
TRAFFIC SEPARATOR CONSTRUCTION: The Contractor may construct
2. Provide and install an adhesive bonding material
the separator by the use of stationary removable forms or by the
system in accordance with Sections 416 and 937
use of slip forms without altering the separator dimensions shown.
of the Specifications.
" V-GROOVES: For all separators provide " V-Grooves at 30'-0"

11:
34:
48 AM
centers (max.) equally spaced between expansion joints, and/or
12/3/2015
drainage joints.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
BRIDGE INSTALLATIONS - TYPE "E" AND "F" CURBS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC SEPARATORS
NO.
302
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
Low Elev.
le
v.
le
v.
le
v.
le
v.
E
Low Elev.
High Elev.
High Elev.
.
ev
l
E
.
ev
El
.
ev
l
E
.
ev
El
PLAN VIEW
Return
Return
Inlet
Return
Inlet
Inlet
Inlet
Return
PROFI
L
E VI
EW
Note:
Profile grades should be established that will allow inlets to be located outside the return whenever practical. Inlets
should be located to avoid conflict with pedestrian movement. Special care must be exercised to prevent conflict with
public sidewalk curb ramps for the disabled. For information on public sidewalk curb ramps refer to Index No. 304.
11:
34:
48 AM
SHOWI
NG L
OCATI
ON OF I
NL
ETS AT RETURNS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TYPI
CAL RETURN PROFI
L
ES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CURB RETURN PROFILES
NO.
303
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
GENERAL NOTES
1.
Sidewalk curb ramps shall be constructed at locations that will provide continuous unobstructed
pedestrian circulation path to pedestrian areas, elements and facilities within the right of way and to
accessible pedestrian routes on adjacent sites. Curbed facilities with sidewalks and those without
sidewalks are to have curb ramps constructed for all intersections and turnouts with curbed returns.
To accommodate curb ramps, partial curb returns are to extend to the limits prescribed in Index No.
515. Ramps constructed at locations without sidewalks are to have a landing constructed at the top of
each ramp, see LANDINGS FOR CURB RAMPS WITHOUT SIDEWALKS.
2.
When altering existing pedestrian facilities, where existing restricted conditions preclude the
accommodation of a ramp slope of 1:12, a ramp slope between 1:12 and 1:10 is permitted for a rise of
6" maximum. Where compliance with the requirements for cross slope cannot be fully met, the minimum
feasible cross slope shall be provided. Ramp slopes are not required to exceed 15' in length.
3.
If sidewalk curb ramps are located where pedestrians must walk across the ramp, then provide
transition slopes to the ramp; otherwise a sidewalk curb may be required.
Tr
an
si
S
l
t
op
i
on
e
Cu
rb
C
U
RB
Tr
an
si
t
i
on
p
am
R
4.
All sidewalks, ramps, and landings with a cross slope of 0.02 shown in this Index are 0.02 maximum.
All ramp slopes shown in this Index as 1:12 are 1:12 maximum. Landings shall have slopes less than or
D
et
ec
t
ab
l
e
Tr
W
an
ar
si
S
ni
l
t
ng
op
i
on
s
e
equal to 0.02 in any direction.
5.
Grade breaks at the top and bottom of ramps shall be parallel to each other and perpendicular to the
direction of the ramp slope.
PI RAM
P
C
N
TO
O
M
RI
EN
AL
C
LA
TU
V
RE
I
EW
6.
Where a sidewalk curb ramp is constructed within existing curb, curb and gutter and/or sidewalk, the
existing curb or curb and gutter shall be removed to the nearest joint beyond the curb transition or to
the extent that no remaining section of curb or curb and gutter is less than 5' long. Existing sidewalks
shall be removed to the nearest joint beyond the transition slope or to the extent that no remaining
section of sidewalk is less than 5' long. For CONCRETE SIDEWALK details refer to Index 310.
7.
Sidewalk curb ramp alpha-identifications are for reference purposes (plans, permits, etc.).
Alpha-identifications CR-I and CR-J were intentionally omitted.
8.
Detectable warnings shall extend the full width of the ramp and to a depth of 2'. Detectable warnings
shall be constructed in accordance with Specification Section 527. For the layout of detectable warnings,
refer to the TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF DETECTABLE WARNINGS details. Detectable warnings shall not be
provided on transition slopes.
9.
When detectable warnings are placed on a slope greater than 5%, domes shall be aligned with the
centerline of the ramp; otherwise domes are not required to be aligned.
10.
Detectable warnings shall be required on sidewalks and shared use paths at:
a. Intersecting roads,
b. Median Crossings greater than or equal to 6' in width,
c. Railroad Crossings,
d. Signalized driveways.
11. Detectable Warnings - Acceptance Criteria:
LEGEND
a. Color and texture shall be complete and uniform.

b. 90% of individual truncated domes shall be in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act
Detectable Warnings
Standards for Transportation Facilities, Section 705.

c. There shall be no more than 4 non-compliant domes in any one square foot.
d. Non-compliant domes shall not be adjacent to other non-compliant domes.
e. Surfaces shall not deviate more than 0.10" from a true plane.
11:
34:
51 AM
12. Detectable warnings shall be installed no greater than 5' from the back of curb or edge of pavement.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
13. Detectable warnings shall not be installed over grade breaks.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DETECTABLE WARNINGS AND SIDEWALK CURB RAMPS
NO.
304
SHEET
NO.
1of 7
SI
D
EW
U
AL
TI
K
LI
TY
W
TH
ST I
RI
P
PI
C
TO
RI
AL
V
I
EW
SI
D
EW
SI
D
EW
U
AL
TI
K
LI
TY
W
TH
ST I
RI
P
PI
C
TO
RI
AL
V
I
EW
AL
K
SI
D
EW
SI
D
EW
2'-6"
PI
C
TO
RI
AL
AL
K
4' Min.
AL
K
V
I
EW
2'-6"
Sidewalk Curb
Utility Strip
Grass Or
Grass Or
Pavement
Pavement
45
1:12
6'M in.
Ramp
1:12
Sidewalk
0.
02
Ramp
0.
02
Landing
0.
02
11'(
Shown)
6'Std.
Sidewalk
0.
02
1:
12
Ram p
0.
02
5'Std.
Sidewalk
11'(
Shown)
6'Std.
Sidewalk
0.
02
1:
12
Ram p
0.
02
Utility Strip
(Where Necessary)
Landing (4' Min.)
0.
02
0.
02
5'Std.
Landing (4' Min.)

Sidewalk
9'(
Shown)
(2' Min.)
(2' Min.)
A
7'-0"
A
7'-0"
7'-0"
B
7'-0"
4' Min.
4' Min.
SIDEWALK WITH
SIDEWALK WITH
SIDEWALK
SIDEWALK
UTILITY STRIP
UTILITY STRIP
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
CR-A
CR-B
CR-C
Varies (11'-0" Shown)
8"
16" When Located Along
Landing (6' Min.)

Ramp Varies
Type 'F' Curb And Gutter
(7'-8" Std.)
Pavement Relief (See Section C-C)
4' (Min.)
Rdwy. Pavt.
Sidewalk Curb
2'
(Where Necessary)
Landing
0.02
1:12
0.02
5
%
ma
x
.
Gutter Line
0.02
2
0
.
0
H (Varies)
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
Note: For Additional Information On Sidewalk Curb Construction, See SIDEWALK CURB
11:
34:
51 AM
SECTION THROUGH RAMP AND LANDING

(UNRESTRICTED CONDITIONS)
and SIDEWALK CURB OPTIONS details.
SECTION THROUGH LANDING
12/3/2015
(UNRESTRICTED CONDITIONS)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
SIDEWALK CURB RAMPS WHERE RAMP AND LANDING DEPTHS ARE NOT RESTRICTED
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
304
SHEET
NO.
2 of 7
PICTORIAL VIEW
PICTORIAL VIEW
PICTORIAL VIEW
PICTORIAL VIEW
PICTORIAL VIEW
CR-D
CR-E
CR-F
CR-G
CR-H
Sidewalk
(6' Min.)
Si
de
wal
k
(
6'M
i
n
.
)
Util. Strip
45
Grass Or Pavt.
0.
02
(2' Min.)
Sidewalk
0.02
Sidewalk
(5' Std.)
(6' Min.)
Sidewalk Curb
4'
0.02
Ra
m
p
1:
12
0.02
Ramp Width
(4' Min.)
1:
12
Ram p
2'
R
2'
R
2'
R
Landing (5.5' Min.)
1:
12
Ram p
2
.0
0
2
.0
0
2'
R
1:
12
(5' Min.)
Sidewalk Curb
2
'R
Ram p
Sidewalk
Sidewalk Curb
Ramp Width
0.
02
2
.0
0
(4' Min.)
Sidewalk Curb
1:
12
Ramp Width
Ram p
Sidewalk Curb
Ramp Width
(4.5' Min.)
(4' Min.)
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
CR-D
CR-E
CR-F
CR-G
CR-H
11:
34:
52 AM
PLAN VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DIMENSIONAL FEATURES OF SIDEWALK CURB RAMPS FOR LINEAR PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
304
SHEET
NO.
3 of 7
3
4"
6"
3
4"
6"
R
H (Varies)
12"
H (Varies)
Ramp, Sidewalk
0.02
Or Landing
Or Landing
MONOLITHIC CAST CURB
SI
D
EW
U
AL
TI
K
LI
TY
W
TH
ST I
RI
P
PI
C
TO
RI
AL
V
I
EW
Ramp, Sidewalk
0.02
SEPARATELY CAST CURB
SIDEWALK CURB OPTIONS
R/
W
r
fe
uf
B
.
n
i
M
6"
SI
D
EW
AL
K
Transition (Where Necessary)
Drop (H)
1
:
1
2
2'-6"
4'
Sidewalk Curb
6" x 12" Separately Cast Curb
Landing
02
0.
1:
12
6" x H Monolithic Cast Curb or

0.02
(Where Necessary)
(3' Min.)
(M
4
'
in
.)
(M
1:12
0.
02
4'M in.
4
'
in
.)
0.
02
Crosswalk
1:
12
0.
02
Grass Or
Pavement
SIDEWALK CURB
Ram p
0.
02
5'Std.
Sidewalk
Utility Strip
4' Min.
Construct Sidewalk Curb In Cut Sections.
10'(
M in.
)
5
4
1:
12
(2' Min.)
D
7'-0"
4' Min.
7'-0"
Crosswalk
SIDEWALK WITH
SIDEWALK
UTILITY STRIP
%
5
1:
12
PI
C
TO
RI
AL
PLAN VIEW
.
ax
m
PLAN VIEW
CR-K
1:
12
Pa
ve
m
en
t
V
I
EW
Re
l
i
ef
No
t
To
E
xc
ee
d
18
"
CR-L
Note: Crosswalk Width and Configuration Vary; Must
Conform to Index No. 17344 and 17346.
Varies (10' Shown)

15' Radius Curve Shown for CR-L.
18"
Width Varies
Ramp Varies
Landing
(7' Std.)
3' (Min.)
(18" Max.)
Landing (4' Min.)

Varies
Asphalt Pavement
Rdwy. Pavt.
0.02
Pavement Relief
0.02
5
% ma
x
.
5
% ma
x
.
11:
34:
53 AM
1:12
Ramp
Final Rolled Surface
Lip Of Curb
Note: Remove Elevated Pavement By Spading
Sidewalk Curb
2'
(Where Necessary)
0.02
0.02
H (Varies)
SECTION D-D
SECTION E-E
SECTION THROUGH RAMP AND LANDING
SECTION THROUGH LANDING
(RESTRICTED CONDITIONS)
(RESTRICTED CONDITIONS)
And Rolling; Smooth Milling; or Grinding
12/3/2015
SECTION C-C
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
PAVEMENT RELIEF AT LIP OF CURB
SIDEWALK CURB RAMPS WHERE RAMP AND LANDING DEPTHS ARE RESTRICTED
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
304
SHEET
NO.
4 of 7
Curb Transition (On Existing

5' Refuge With Maximum Slope Of 0.02 Must Be Provided When
Facilities Remove And Reconstruct

Curb Or Curb And Gutter)
Slopes Of 0.05 Or Flatter And 5' In Length Are Not Available Along
The Crosswalk; The Refuge Can Be Constructed At Any Location

Within The Crosswalk; Or, A 5' x 5' Concrete Landing With Maximum
2' Curb Transition
Median
Slope Of 0.02 Can Be Constructed Adjacent To The Crosswalk.
5' Concrete
5' Concrete
Sidewalk
Sidewalk
Crossing (Concrete Sidewalk, 4")
Slope Varies
(0.02 Std.; 0.05 Max.)
Median
Median
Edge ofPavement
Curb Types A Or B Or
Curb & Gutter Type E
(Curb And Gutter
Curb Transition (Curb &
Type E Shown)
Slopes To Intersect At Centerline Of Median For The
Gutter Type E Shown)

Curb Types A Or B Or
0.02 Rate When The Edge Of Pavement Elevations Are
Curb & Gutter Type E
Equal. The Slopes May Intersect Off The Centerline
(Curb And Gutter
For Variable Edge Of Pavement Elevations Or To
Type E Shown)
Accommodate Other Construction In The Median; Slopes
Edge ofPavement
Are Not To Be Steeper Than 0.05.
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW - (ALTERNATE DETAIL)
SECTION F-F
MEDIAN REFUGE
MEDIAN CROSSING
5'
M
i
n.
n.
i
M
5'
6
'Mi
n
.
5
'Mi
n
.
02
0.
L
a
n
d
i
n
g
Other Options As
Shown In The Plans
M
'
5
.
in
L
a
n
d
i
n
g
M
'
5
.
in
L
a
n
d
i
n
g
0
.
0
2
0
.
0
2
11:
34:
53 AM
R
a
m
1
p
:1
2
R
a
m
1
p
:1
2
p
m
a
R
2
1
:
1
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
LANDINGS FOR CURB RAMPS WITHOUT SIDEWALKS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
304
SHEET
NO.
5 of 7
2'
2'
Ut
i
l
i
t
y
5' Concrete
5' Concrete
Sidewalk
Sidewalk
R
a
m
'
Median
p
m
a
2
PI
R
C
T
(
C
R- OR
I
B,
AL
C
V
RI
EW
E
AN
C
D
RA
C
RSH
K
SI OW
M
N
I
LA
R)
2'
2'
PLAN VIEW
S
t
ri
p
PLAN VIEW - (ALTERNATE DETAIL)
PI
C
TO
RI
AL
2'
ng
i
nd
La
Ra
m
p
V
I
EW
C
RC
SH
O
W
tr
ip
S
a
lk
id
e
w
S
id
e
w
S
(Where Necessary)
M
'
5
2'
.
x
a
2
'
2'
Sidewalk Curb
2'
-0"
Ram p
a
lk
U
ti
li
ty
U
ti
li
ty
tr
ip
Utility Strip
MEDIAN CROSSING
Width
M in.
6'
-0"
Rail Car
Ramp
2'
Utility Strip
PICTORIAL VIEW
PICTORIAL VIEW
FLUSH SHOULDER
FLUSH SHOULDER
(OPTION A)
(OPTION B)
PLAN VIEW CR-L SHOWN

(CR-D SIMILAR)
Sidewalk
1
2"
Max.
.
x
a
2
'
R
a
m
M
'
5
2'
11:
34:
54 AM
Gate
R
a
m
M in.
M ax.
4'
-0"
15'
-0"
Flangeway Gap
Flangeway Gap May Be

Up To 3" For
Freight-only Railways
PLAN VIEW
PICTORIAL VIEW CR-G SHOWN
PICTORIAL VIEW CR-G SHOWN
(OPTION A) (CR-F AND CR-H SIMILAR)
(OPTION B) (CR-F AND CR-H SIMILAR)
12/3/2015
RAILROAD CROSSING
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF DETECTABLE WARNINGS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
304
SHEET
NO.
6 of 7
C29.376082382634
1370538155
5
4
Sheet1!R1C2:R45C4
C:/d/projects/standards/roadway/00300-s/DEV/00304.xlsx
1
0
8.15c
:\d\projects\standards\roadway\00300-s\DEV\00304.xlsx!Sheet1!R1C2:R45C4
TABLE OF DETECTABLE
WARNINGS
CURB RAMP
CURB
TOTAL AREA
TYPE
RADIUS (FT)
(SF)
CR-A
N/A
CR-B
N/A
CR-C
N/A
CR-D
25
11
CR-E
N/A
CR-F
10
20
11
25
13
30
14
10
10
0.02
0.02
Max.
12
1:
Back Of Sidewalk
Alignment Variations
4' Min.
02
0.
12
1:
Crosswalk
12
1:
Crosswalk
0
.0
2
4' Min.
2' Min. Full

Height Curb
1:12
0.
02
Height Curb
1:
12
0.
02
1:
12
2' Min. Full
0.
02
0
.0
2
4' Min.
CR-G
1:12
Crosswalk
Utility Strip
Turnout Or
20
11
25
12
30
14
Side Road
CR-H
Crosswalk
Crosswalk
CR-K
RADIAL SIDEWALK RAMPS
CR-L
LINEAR SIDEWALK RAMPS
20
25
30
N/A
10
18
15
13
FLUSH SHOULDER
OPTION A
OPTION B
NOTES:
1.
Where crosswalk markings are used, ramps shall fall within the
crosswalk limits. A clear space of 48" minimum is required at
2.
10
11
20
14
25
15
30
17
40
19
50
21
10
10
20
10
25
10
Crosswalk widths and configurations vary; must conform to

Index No. 17344 and 17346.
the bottom of the ramp within a marked crosswalk. If crosswalk

markings are not present, a clear space of 48" minimum is
required at the bottom of the ramp outside of active travel
Note:
lanes.
Due to construction applications, CR-L is the only curb ramp

for which a detectable warning quantity was calculated using
a curb radius of 15'.
11:
34:
54 AM
For flush shoulder options with 5' sidewalks, the back of sidewalk
is measured at 10' from the edge of traveled way.
12/3/2015
TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF SIDEWALK CURB RAMPS AT CURBED RETURNS
AREAS OF DETECTABLE WARNINGS FOR SIDEWALK
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
CURB RAMP AND FLUSH SHOULDER APPLICATIONS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
304
SHEET
NO.
7 of 7
Preformed Joint
Filler (See Note #6)
D
Concrete
L/2
Approx. 3"
Pavement
L/2
1 8
Sheet Metal Bottom
Approved Dowel
BUTT CONSTRUCTION JOINT
D/2
Plastic Cap
Strip (See Note #8)
Support And Spacer
NOTES:
Bar (See Note #8)
Metal Or
12"
Approved Tie Bar Support
Plain Steel Dowel
D
D/2
D/2
D/2
of
(See Note #7)
D
on
i
ct
re
i
D
c
fi
af
Tr
3
4"
(See Note #3)
Dowel Bars
Plain Steel Dowel Bar
"
Steel Tie Bar
Longitudinal Joint
Pavement
L/2
Pavement
1
8"
Transverse Joint
Tie Bars
Top Of
Top Of
Top Of
EXPANSION JOINT
BUTT CONSTRUCTION JOINT
(See Note #6)
(Used At Discountiuance Of Work)
1. For joint seal dimensions see Sheet 2.

2. For slabs poured simultaneously, tie bars may
Initial
1
8"
Saw Cut Or
1
4"
Formed Groove (Depth
1
4
Max.
L
to
1
3
D)
3. For Longitudinal Joints:
1
8"
L/2
L
A. Tie bars are deformed #4 or #5 reinforcing
L/2
Pavement
Approx. 3"
(See Note #8)
1
8"
Top Of
steel bars meeting the requirements of

Specifications, Section 931.
L/2
Initial Cut
(Depth
Top Of
1
4
to
1
3
D)
Top Of
Pavement

Pavement
(See Note #8)
B. Provide a standard load transfer tied joint
Parting Strip ( 4" Max. Thick)
with #4 bars 25" in length at 24" spacing
Steel Tie Bar
or #5 bars 30" in length at 38" spacing.
(Depth
noted in the plans.
D)
Anticipated
Anticipated
D/2
all transverse joints unless otherwise
D/2
D/2
maximum of 15'. Dowels are required at
1
3
4. Transverse joints are to be spaced at a
to
(See Note #3)
1
4
Break
D/2
be inserted in the plastic concrete by means

approved by the Engineer.
Break
5. Expansion joints to be placed on approaches

to bridges, at street intersections and other
Approved Tie
locations indicated in the plans.
Anticipated Break
Bar Support
6. Punch clean holes in preformed joint filler
greater than bar diameter.
LANE-TIE JOINT
CONTRACTION JOINT
CONTRACTION JOINT
(See Note #2)
(Vibro Case Method)
(Sawed Method)
7. Coat and lubricate plain steel dowel bars in

accordance with Specifications, Section 350.
LONGITUDINAL JOINTS
TRANSVERSE JOINTS
8. Sheet metal bottom strips in accordance

with Specifications, Section 931.
DOWELS (LENGTH 18")

Pavement Thickness
Diameter
"D"
3
4"
1
2"
6"-6
1
2"
1"
7"-8
1
2"
1
4"
9"-10
1
2"
11"
3" Min.
3" Min.
1
8"
Plastic
3" To 9"
12"
12"
12"
12"
12"
12"
12"
12"
3" To 9"
Crimped
ID
1
16"
Bar Stop
On Both Sides
Plain Steel Dowel Bars

Sheet Metal Bottom Strip For
11:
34:
56 AM
12"
D/2
Puncture And Push Down
2" Min.
d+
1
16"
Metal
d+
2" Min.
ID
METAL
PLASTIC
Of Pavement After
Forms Are Removed
DOWEL BAR LAYOUT
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DOWEL BARS CAPS
Expansion Joints Only (See Note #9)
Bend Up Against End
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PAVEMENT JOINTS
NO.
305
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
1
8"
to
1
11
4"Min.,
32"
9
16"
Joint Sealant Material To Be

As Specified In The Plans
Max.
Preformed Elastomeric
Compression Seal
Tape Bond Breaker
(w
Existing Joint
Joint Width
Saw Cut Or Formed Joint
1
4"
1
1
2" 8"
1
4"
to
Backer Rod Placement Depth
Saw Cut Or Formed Joint
w
1
8"
1
8"
to
1
4"
Sealant Bead Thickness

Joint Depth
Saw Cut Or Parting Strip
1
+ 8")
1
4
Or Crack
to
1
3
Saw Cut Or Parting Strip
D (D=Conc. Pavt. Thick.)
1
4
to
1
3
Backer Rod Bond Breaker

D
(D=Conc. Pavt. Thick.) Not
Not Required For Construction Joints.
Required For Construction Joints

Or Existing Joints Or Cracks.
Note: Dimension w will be shown in the plans or

established by the Engineer based on field
conditions. Dimension d will be constructed
FOR NEW PROJECTS
FOR NEW AND REHABILITATION PROJECTS
PREFORMED ELASTOMERIC COMPRESSION SEAL
BACKER ROD BOND BREAKER
so that the shape factor w/t has a maximum

value of 2.0 and a minimum value of 1.0.
FOR REHABILITATION PROJECTS
TAPE BOND BREAKER
CONCRETE-CONCRETE JOINTS

d = w =
3
4"
Unless Specified Otherwise In The Plans
1
8"
Concrete Pavement
to
1
4"
d = w =
3
4"
Unless Specified Otherwise In The Plans
Saw Cut Joint

1
8"
Concrete Pavement
to
1
4"
Asphalt Shoulder Pavement
(CONCRETE-CONCRETE JOINTS)
JOINT DIMENSIONS (INCHES)
Saw Cut Joint
SEALANT
JOINT
WIDTH
3
8
1
2
3
8
1
4
1
2
1
1 4
1
2
1
2
1
4
5
8
1
1 4
1
2
Tape Bond Breaker
5
8
5
16
3
4
1
1 2
9
16
DEPTH
1
4
1
8")
(w +
Backer Rod Bond Breaker
PLACEMENT
DEPTH
1
4
BACKER ROD
JOINT
ROD DIA.
THICKNESS
MINIMUM
BACKER
BEAD
Asphalt Shoulder Pavement
3
4
3
8
7
8
7
16
1
1 8
1
2
>1
1
2
3
4
5
8
3
1 4
11
16
3
4
1
1 4+
2+
3
4
1
4
Unless otherwise indicated on the plans the joint width
TAPE BOND BREAKER
for new construction will be

3
8"
1
4"
for construction joints,
for all other joints.
For rehabilitation projects the joint width will be shown

FOR NEW AND REHABILITATION PROJECTS;
EITHER TAPE OR BACKER ROD BOND BREAKER REQUIRED;
on the plans or established by the Engineer based on

field conditions.
SHOULDER MUST BE REPAIRED IF PROPER JOINT SHAPE

CAN NOT BE ATTAINED
11:
34:
57 AM
CONCRETE-ASPHALT SHOULDER JOINTS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
JOINT SEAL DIMENSIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
305
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
12"
Spacer Bars
Inside Face Of Slip Form
9
16"
To Form
Hook Bolt
7
8"
9
16"
7
8"
9
16"
Joint
D/2
B
Tie Wire
Staking Pin
Threaded
2"
1
16"
2"
5
8"
Hex Bolt
Sleeve
8"
9
16"
6"
Guide Bar Fastened

Plastic Insert
12"
Guide Bar Fastened
SECTION AA
7
8"
To Form
A
Note: After the concrete has set to the extent that
Anchor bolts shall be Grade C in accordance with ASTM A 307.
TOP VIEW
the Keyway will retain its shape, the hex

bolt and plastic insert shall be removed.
Threaded sleeves shall develop the full strength of the bolt
The remaining portion of the hook bolt
and meet the material and thread requirements of ASTM A 563.
assembly shall be installed immediately prior

to placing of concrete in the adjacent lane.
SECTION BB
ALTERNATE KEYWAY AND HOOK BOLT
STEEL HOOK BOLT ASSEMBLY

CONTRACTION ASSEMBLY
12"
12"
Transverse Doweled
Contraction Joints
Tied Longitudinal
Untied Keyed Joint
Tied Longitudinal
Spacer Bars
Joints
Transverse Doweled
Joints
Joint Seal
Expansion Joint
Preformed
Joint Filler
Tie Wire
1"
D/2
Sealer
"D "
1
4"
R
0.1 D
D
Center Spacer Bar
Joint Filler
Transverse Doweled
1:3 Slope
Untied Keyed Joint
Transverse Doweled
Tied Longitudinal
Contraction Joint
Leg
Staking Pin
Untied Keyed Joint
Contraction Joints
SECTION CC
Joints
0.25 D
Filler Support Tie
1
8"
Expansion Cap
0.375 D
TOP VIEW
KEYED JOINT
JOINT LAYOUT
JOINT LAYOUT
AT THRU INTERSECTION
AT 'T' INTERSECTIONS
Filler Support Wire
SECTION DD
JOINT ARRANGEMENT
EXPANSION ASSEMBLY
11:
34:
57 AM
NOTES
1. Longitudinal joints will not be required for single lane pavement 14' or less in width. For entrance and exit ramp joint details, see Sheet 4.
Note: Proprietary contraction and expansion assemblies may be used. Products shall be introduced to
the State Construction Office in accordance with section (C) of the Product Evaluation Procedure.
2. Arrangement of longitudinal joints are to be as directed by the Engineer.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
3. All manholes, meter boxes and other projections into the pavement shall be boxed-in with
1
2"
preformed expansion joint material.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
305
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
12'
*
3'M in.
3'M in.
Contraction Joint (Typ.)
3'M in.
12'
Longitudinal Joint
PCC Gore Pavt.
r
e
p
a
1T
:
0
5
2-THRU LANES WITH SINGLE LANE ENTRANCE RAMP
.
t
v
Pa
12'
e
n
i
l
n
i
Ma
mp
Ra

3'M in.
Longitudinal Joint
.
t
v
Pa
Auxiliary Lane
r
e
p
a
1T
:
5
2
12'
12'
Longitudinal Joint
Ra
t
e Va
r
i
e
s
.
t
v
a
eP
n
i
l
n
i
Ma
.
t
v
Pa
mp
Ra
Auxiliary Lane
Wide Over 3 Slabs
3'M in.
Longitudinal Joint
Transition From * to 12'
ENTRANCE TAPER WITH AUXILIARY LANE
.
t
v
e Pa
r
Go
PCC
Transition From 12' to *

Wide Over 3 Slabs
12'
3'M in.
3'M in.
12'
Transition From * to 12' Wide Over 3 Slabs
ENTRANCE RAMP WITH ADDED LANE

EXIT TAPER WITH AUXILIARY LANE
3'M in.
3'M in.
3'M in.

12'
Longitudinal Joint
3'M in.
12'
PCC Gore Pavt.
2-THRU LANES WITH SINGLE LANE EXIT RAMP

Ma
i
n
l
i
n
e Pa
v
t
.
be constructed along centerline of ramp.
Longitudinal Joint
12'
*
3'M in.
3'M in.
12'
3'M in.
12'
12'
12'
Note: On single lane ramps, longitudinal joint to
Ra
mp Pa
v
t
.
PCC Gore Pavt.
Auxiliary Lane
11:
34:
58 AM
12'
Transition From * to 12' Wide Over 3 Slabs
12/3/2015
3-THRU LANES WITH AUXILIARY LANE AND 2-LANE EXIT RAMP
07/01/09
REVISIO N
LAST
Ra
mp Pa
v
t
.
JOINT LAYOUT AT ENTRANCE AND EXIT RAMP TERMINALS
* 13' with tied Concrete Shoulders or 14' with Asphalt Shoulders.
REVISION
Ma
i
n
l
i
n
e Pa
v
t
.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
305
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
30'
15'
Varies
Shoulder Pavement
DESIGN NOTES
Skew Varies
1. For rehabilitation projects, the designer must indicate in the plans
(See Approach
the number of slabs to be removed, the number of subslabs to be
Slab Details)
5' Subslab
5' Subslab
Construction Joint
Expansion
2. Pay quantity of expansion joint to be calculated across pavement at
(Doweled)
right angles to the centerline of the roadway pavement. Shoulder
Expansion
Joint
Shoulder
constructed/reconstructed, and the location of expansion joints.
(
W)
Roadway
Bridge
Joint
pavement joint included.
Construction Joint
Pavement
GENERAL NOTES
(Doweled)
1. The centerline of roadway and the centerline of bridge do not

necessarily coincide. Prior to the placement of the expansion joint,
the centerline of the roadway pavement shall be determined.
Approach Slab
Expansion Joints Shall Be Constructed Parallel To The Existing Transverse
2. For information on other types of concrete pavement joints see

3"
Pavement Joints On Rehabilitation Projects, And Parallel To The Standard
Index No. 305.
Transverse Pavement Joints Shown In The Plans For New Construction.
PLAN
1
4"
3. Pay quantity for expansion joint is the length of joint to be
constructed across the roadway and shoulder pavements, measured

at right angles to the centerline of the roadway. Payment for
expansion joint shall be full compensation for joint construction,
including reinforced concrete subslab, sheet metal strip and
For Joint Payment See General Note No. 3.

1"
Compression Seal
3"
compression seal, but, not including roadway pavement

reconstruction associated with joint replacement or reconstruction.
Compression
Expansion Joint
Expansion joint to be paid for under the contract unit price for
Seal
Conc. Pavt.
9"
Sheet Metal Strip

Sheet Metal Strip
Bars C
To Bridge
Subslab
3" Cl.
3"
WITH RIGID SHOULDER PAVEMENT
5'-0"
13
32"
*Class I Concrete
1
2"
Bars D
Subslab
1"
(Center About Expansion Joint)

Compression Seal
Bridge Approach Expansion Joint, LF.
3
8"
Conc. Pavt.
Pavt.
Rigid Shoulder Pavt.
Varies
Concrete
REINFORCING STEEL
Concrete Pavt.
Mark
Size
Spac. No. Req.

6"
Varies
4'-6"
6"
10
W Minus 6"
Finish surface smooth. Cure with

heavy coating of wax base white
Length
pigmented curing compound. Apply
second application immediately prior
OPTIONAL SEALS
Subslab
WITH GRASSED SHOULDER OR FLEXIBLE SHOULDER PAVEMENT
1
2"
to placing pavement.
Sheet Metal Strip
SECTION AA
1
4"
Tool To
1
4"
Radius
Or Grind 1#4" Chamfer
EXPANSION JOINT
Concrete Pavement
Note:
Seal Dimension
Immediately prior to placing the seal, the
Plus
joint shall be thoroughly cleaned of all
1
2"
1
2"
foreign material. Immediately after the seal
Concrete Pavement
is placed, sheet metal strip shall be bent up

Polychloroprene Compression
against the pavement edge.
Seal Installed As Per

Manufacturer's Specifications.
The sheet metal strip shall be a minimum 16 gage

11:
34:
59 AM
steel, 12" wide and shall be galvanized in
Note: All contacting surfaces between the
accordance with ASTM A-526, Coating
compression seal and concrete shall be
Designation G90.
thoroughly coated with a lubricant-adhesive.
JOINT DIMENSIONS
DETAIL SHOWING SHEET METAL STRIP
LAST
REVISION
07/01/04
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
COMPRESSION SEAL DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
BRIDGE APPROACH EXPANSION JOINT
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
NO.
306
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
10' Min.
Ditch Width (w) + 4'

Replacement Structural
10' Min. Monolithic Slab
#9 Stone Or Equivalent When
Course & Friction Course
Flowable Fill Option Is Used

Nearest Joint
Replacement Base
10' Min.
Match The Existing Pavement Thickness
(Not Less Than 8" Thickness)
24" Min.
24" Min.
18"
Criteria In Utility
Accommodation Manual
12"
Varies
10"
4"
See Location
See Notes Below
Stage # 2 Backfill *
In Pavement
12"
Refer To Index No. 305

For Butt Const. Joint
Replacement Pavement
See Location Criteria In

Utility Accommodation Manual
Stage #2 Backfill *
See Notes Below
Stage #1 Backfill *
Stage #1 Backfill *
See Notes Below
See Notes Below
12"
Varies
12"
12"
GENERAL NOTES
1. The details provided in this standard index apply to cases in which jack and
Ditch Width (w)
bore or directional boring methods are not required by the Engineer.
2. Flowable fill shall not be placed directly over loose, or high plastic, or muck
FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT NOTES
RIGID PAVEMENT NOTES
PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
Pavement shall be mechanically sawed.
High early strength cement concrete (3000 psi) meeting the requirements
of Standard Specification 346 shall be used for rigid pavement replacement.
Where highly compressible material exists, the amount, shape and depth of
flowable fill must be engineered to prevent pavement settlement.
3. These details do not apply to utility cuts longitudinal to the centerline of the
roadway which may require the additional use of geotextiles, special bedding
The replacement asphalt shall match the existing structural and friction courses for type
and thickness in accordance with current FDOT asphalt mix specifications.
material (see Index 505) which will cause settlement due to fill weight.
Pavement shall be mechanically sawed and restored to conform with existing
and backfill, or other special requirements.
pavement joints within 12 hours. (See Index No. 305)

The new base materials shall be either of the same type and composition as
the materials removed or of equal or greater structural adequacy (See Index No. 514).
4. Method of construction must be approved by the Engineer.
GRANULAR BACKFILL
Any edgedrain system that is removed shall be replaced with the same type
BACKFILL
materials. Any edgedrain system that is damaged shall be repaired with
5. Some pipe may require special granular backfill up to 6" above top of pipe.
Geotextiles may be required to encapsulate the special granular material.
methods approved by the Engineer.
COMPACTED AND STABILIZED FILL OPTION
6. Where asphalt concrete overlays exist over full slab concrete pavement, the
Backfill material shall be placed in accordance with Section 125 of the Standard
Specifications.
Fill material shall be placed in accordance with the Standard Specifications.
replacement pavement shall have an overlay constructed over the replacement
Fill material shall be special select soil in accordance with Index No. 505.
slab. The overlay shall match the existing asphalt pavement thickness. The
replacement friction course shall match the existing friction course, except
In Stage #1, construct compacted fill beneath the haunches of the pipe, using mechanical
tamps suitable for this purpose. This compaction applies to the material placed beneath
In Stage #1, construct compacted fill beneath the haunches of the pipe,
structural course may be used in lieu of dense graded friction course.
using mechanical tamps suitable for this purpose. This compaction applies
the haunches of the pipe and above any bedding.
to the material placed beneath the haunches of the pipe and above any bedding.
of the base,with the upper 12" receiving Type B Stabilization. In lieu of Type B Stabilization,
In Stage #2, construct fill along the sides of the pipe and up to the bottom
of replacement pavement.
the Contractor may construct using Optional Base Group 3.
8. The use of flowable fill to reduce the time traffic is taken off a facility is
acceptable but must have prior approval by the Engineer. Flowable fill use is
* FLOWABLE FILL OPTION
* FLOWABLE FILL OPTION
7. All shoulder pavement, curb, curb and gutter, and their substructure disturbed
by utility trench cut construction shall be restored in kind.
In Stage #2, construct compacted fill along the sides of the pipe and up to the bottom
allowed only when properly engineered for pavement crossings, whether
If compaction can not be achieved through normal mechanical methods then flowable fill may
If mechanical compaction can not be achieved through normal mechanical methods
be used.
then flowable fill may be used.
Flowable fill is to be placed in accordance with Section 121 of the Specifications, as
Flowable fill is to be placed in accordance with Section 121 of the Specifications,
as approved by the Engineer.
Do not allow the utility being installed to float. If a method is provided to prevent
Do not allow the utility being installed to float. If a method is provided to prevent
flotation from occurring, Stages #1 and #2 can be combined, if approved by the Engineer.
flotation from occurring, Stages #1 and #2 can be combined, if approved by
straight or diagonal, and shall not be installed for significant depths or

lengths. The maximum length shall be fifty (50) feet and a maximum depth of
six (6) feet unless supported by an engineering document prepared by a
registered professional engineer that specializes in soils engineering. The
engineering document shall address the evaluation of local groundwater flow
interruption and settlement potential.
the Engineer.
9. Excavatable flowable fill is to be used when the flowable fill option is

selected.
In Stage #1, place flowable fill midway up on both sides of the utility. Allow to harden before
In Stage #1, place flowable fill midway up on both sides of the utility. Allow to
placing Stage #2.
In Stage #2, place flowable fill to the bottom of the stone layer.
FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT CUT
12/3/2015
11:
34:
59 AM
harden before placing Stage #2.

In Stage #2, place flowable fill to the bottom of the existing base course.
RIGID PAVEMENT CUT
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
TRENCH CUTS AND RESTORATIONS ACROSS ROADWAYS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MISCELLANEOUS UTILITY DETAILS
NO.
307
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
NOTES FOR UTILITY CONFLICT PIPE

1. These details are for construction field expediency to resolve utility conflicts that cannot be remedied by
relocation. For conflicts determined during design, use the construction shop drawings for structure details.
Grout When Box Precast
Carrier
2. Concrete used in conflict structures shall be as specified in ASTM C478. 4000 psi may be used in lieu of
Class I
concrete.
3. Maximum opening for pipe shall be the pipe OD plus 6". Mortar used to seal the pipe into the opening will
be of such mix that shrinkage will not cause leakage into or out of the structure.
1' Min. Clearance Between Obstruction
And Flow Line Of Outlet Pipe
4. If the conflict structure is round or there are multiple inlet or outlet pipes, then the wall section should be
reviewed for strength.
5. If during construction or the plans design process it is determined that a potable water supply line must
pass though a storm drain structure, it must be in compliance with Chapter 62-555.314 (3) F.A.C. and shown
on the design or construction plans and submitted to the Florida Department of Environmental Protection
SECTION LONGITUDINAL TO CARRIER PIPE
(FDEP) Administrator For Drinking Water in the respective FDEP District for review and comment. This
index and rule citation provide accepted methods for addressing conflicts when and where they cannot be
(Nonpressure Or Nonfluid Carrier Installations)
reasonably avoided. To be submitted along with the plans shall be a justification describing inordinate cost
No Joints Allowed Within Structure
and the impracticality of avoidance. If identified, properly justified, and accomplished in accordance with
UTILITY CONFLICT CONDITION I
this index, approval is granted. Upon request, the Utility Agency Owner (UAO) must provide support data on
the cost of relocation or adjustment to the FDOT for submittal to the FDEP. See the following web site for
District FDEP Drinking Water Contacts: www.dep.state.fl.us/water/drinkingwater/index.htm and click on
"Organization" on the menu to the right.
Carrier Casing: The Casing Shall Be Rated To The

Greatest Pressure Of Either The Carrier That's Called
For By Design Or That's Required By Construction. The
Allow 2 Feet Minimum Clearance On One Side Of
Casing May Be Steel, Cast Iron, Ductile Iron Or Plastic.
Utility For Maintenance Purposes And No Less

Than 1 Foot Clearance On The Other Side
The Casing Can Be Seamless Or Sealed Half Sleeves.

For Structure Type See Plans
A
Grout
Annular Space Plug/Seal Option:
Carrier Casing Or The Carrier
Flowable Fill Or Neoprene Flexible Seal
If No Casing Is Used
See Note No. 3

Carrier
Carrier
1' Min. Clearance Between Obstruction

Carrier Spacer Or Cradle
And Flow Line Of Outlet Pipe
(Cradle Option Shown)
A
DESIGNER'S NOTE
"Sumped" Conflict Manholes Shall Not Be Used Unless The System
Is Hydraulically Designed To Account For The Headloss Generated
SECTION LONGITUDINAL TO CARRIER PIPE
If The Sump Is Completely Blocked
(Pressure Or Fluid Carrier Installations)

11:
35:
01 AM
UTILITY CONFLICT CONDITION II
SECTION BB
SECTION AA
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
UTILITY CONFLICT PIPES THRU STORM DRAIN STRUCTURES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
307
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Manhole
Manhole
*
Median Edge Of Pavement On Curbed
Curb And Gutter On Two-Lane Two-Way Facility Or
Or Uncurbed Divided Facility
One-Way Facility Or Type F Curb On Divided Facility
Manhole
Longitudinal Cut Lines For Both Curbed And Uncurbed Facilities Must Coincide
With A Regular Seam Or Midlane Point In Order To Be Outside The Wheel Path
PLAN VIEW
FOR TWO OR MORE LANES (TWO LANES SHOWN)
Longitudinal Cut Line
Varies
(
4'M in.
)
(Outside Wheel Path Where Practical)
Transverse Cut Line
MH Or
4' Min.
Transverse Cut Line
4' Min.
Ring & Cover
Varies
(
4'M in.
)
Excavation
Longitudinal Cut Line
PARTIAL CUTS FOR RING AND COVER ADJUSTMENTS
NOTES
1. No irregular seams are permitted. All seams must be clean sawed.
2. Pavement cut seams for underground utility structures in rigid

pavement are the same longitudinally, but the transverse seams
11:
35:
02 AM
shall extend to the nearest existing joint.
3. See Sheet 1 for replacement pavement.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/04
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
NONTRENCH PAVEMENT CUTS FOR UNDERGROUND UTILITY STRUCTURES IN PAVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
307
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Bond Breaker
(Along All Longitudinal and Transverse Joints)
Existing Transverse Joint

Existing Longitudinal Joint
12" (Typ.)
Full-Depth
Repair Area
Transverse
Crack
New Dowel Bars (Equally Spaced

Between Existing Dowel Bar Locations)

Remainder
6'-0" (Min.)
3'-0"
3'-0"
(Min.)
(Min.)
Epoxy Saw Overrun (Typ.)
6'-0" (Min.)
Remainder
6'-0" (Min.)
6'-0" (Min.)
FIGURE 10.2 - REPAIR METHOD: NONE OR CLEAN AND SEAL

FIGURE 10.5 - FULL-DEPTH REPAIR ON BOTH SIDES OF THE JOINT
Bond Breaker
New Full Slab

New Dowel Bars
(Equally Spaced
12" (Typ.)
Between Existing
1
2
Tie Bar
Dowel Bar Locations)

12" (Typ.)
Transverse
(10'-0" Max.)
Control Joint

FIGURE 10.3 - FULL SLAB FULL DEPTH REPLACEMENT
FIGURE 10.6 - MULTIPLE SLAB FULL DEPTH REPLACEMENT

GENERAL NOTES
1. For Repair and Replacement Criteria see Sheet 2.
2. Full depth repairs consist of removing and replacing at least a portion of the existing slab to the bottom of the concrete.
3. Repair boundaries shall be sawed full-depth with diamond saw blades. On hot days, it may not be possible to make this cut without first making a wide,
Bond Breaker
pressure relief cut within the repair boundaries. A carbide-tipped wheel saw may be used for this purpose, but the wheel saw must not intrude on the
adjacent lane, unless the lane is slated for repair. The wheel saw cuts produce a ragged edge that promotes excessive spalling along joints. Hence,
if wheel saw cuts are made, diamond saw cuts must be made 18 in. outside the wheel saw cuts. To prevent damage to the base, the wheel saw must not
be allowed to penetrate more than 0.5 in. into the base.
12" (Typ.)
Full-Depth
Repair Area
4. No additional base or subgrade material shall be added and all loose base or subgrade material shall be removed prior to placement of the new concrete
slab. The concrete slab shall be placed to the full depth of the material removed. No additional compensation will be allowed for additional concrete
required to bring proposed concrete slab up to finished grade.

5. Removal of the damaged concrete pavement shall be by lifting. Any good concrete pavement which is damaged during removal of damaged areas shall be
11:
35:
02 AM
Epoxy Saw Overrun (Typical)

removed and replaced by the contractor at his expense.
During Slab Replacement
Remainder
6'-0" (Min.)
6. If the roadway contract includes grinding, then the slab replacement shall be performed first.
6'-0" (Min.)
7. During slab replacement operations, fill any saw cut over runs into adjacent slabs with epoxy.
12/3/2015
FIGURE 10.4 - PARTIAL SLAB FULL DEPTH REPLACEMENT
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
8. Install tie bars at longitudinal joints when two full adjacent or multiple replaced slabs.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE SLAB REPLACEMENT
NO.
308
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
SLAB REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT CRITERIA

DISTRESS PATTERN
SEVERITY/DESCRIPTION
REPAIR METHOD
REFERENCE
None
Figure 10.2
CRACKING
Longitudinal
Transverse
1
8",
Light
<
Moderate
1
8"
no faulting, spalling <
Severe
width >
Light
<
Moderate
1
8"
Severe
width >
<width
1
8",
1
< 2",
1
2",
wide
spalling <3" wide
spalling >3" faulting >
no faulting, spalling <
<width <
1
2",
1
2"
1
2",
1
2"
1
2"
wide
spalling <3" wide
spalling >3" faulting >
Clean and Seal
Figure 10.2
Replace
Figure 10.3
None
Figure 10.2
Clean and Seal

1
2"
Replace
Figure 10.3, 10.4 and 10.5
Full Depth
Figure 10.4 and 10.5
Full Depth
None
A corner of the slab is separated by a crack that intersects the

Corner Breaks
adjacent longitudinal and transverse joint, describing an approximate

45 angle with the direction of traffic.
Intersecting Random Cracks

Cracking patterns that divide the slab into three or more segments.
(Shattered Slab)
JOINT DEFICIENCIES
Spall Nonwheel Path
Spall Wheel Path
1
2",
spall width <1
Moderate
1
1 2"
Severe
spall width >3" or length >12"
Light
spall width <1
Moderate
Severe
spall width >3" or length >12"
<spall width <3",
1
2",
1
2"
<
1
3
Light
slab depth, <12" in length

1
< 3
None
Full Depth
<than
1
3
None
<spall width <3", <
1
3
Full Depth
Full Depth
SURFACE DETERIORATION
Small pieces of surface pavement broken loose, normally ranging
from 1 to 4 in. diameter and
1
2
to 2 in. in depth.
Pop Outs Nonwheel Path

Light
Not deemed to be a traffic hazard
Severe
Flying debris deemed a traffic hazard
Keep under observation

Full Depth
Figure 10.4
Small pieces of surface pavement broken loose, normally

>3" diameter and 2" in depth.
Pop Outs Wheel Path
Light
Deemed to be a traffic hazard
Full Depth
Figure 10.4
Severe
Flying debris deemed a traffic hazard
Full Depth
Figure 10.4
MISCELLANEOUS DISTRESS
Elevation differences across joints or cracks.
Faulting
Lane To Shoulder Drop-Off
Light
Faulting <4/32"
None
Moderate
4 <Faulting <16/32"
Grind
Severe
Faulting >16/32"
Grind
Light
0 <drop-off <1"
None
Moderate
1" <drop-off <3"
Build Up
Severe
drop-off >3 "
Build Up
N/A
Install appropriate drainage, edge drain,

Water Bleeding Or Pumping
Seeping or ejection of water through joints or cracks.
N/A
11:
35:
03 AM
permeable subbase, reseal joints, etc.
Upward movement at transverse joints or cracks often

Blowups
Full Depth
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
accompanied by shattering of the concrete.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE SLAB REPLACEMENT
NO.
308
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
120' Max.
120' Max.
30' Max.
30' Max.
Clear Width
(5' or 6' Std., 4' Min.)
30' Max.
See Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing Index 852

& 862 Or Pipe Guiderail Index 870 & 880
A
1
2"
D
5'
D
5'
D
5'
D
5'
D
5'
E
5'
5'
D
5'
5'
A
1
2"
5'
.
x
2 Ma
0
.
0
8"
4"
1'
-0"
Return Curb
45
Rigid Structure; 6" Min. For Turnouts
9"
NOTE: "E" Joint(s) Required When Length Exceeds 30'
Sidewalk
(Total Width May Vary Based
SAWED JOINTS
On Railings Used.)
Back Of Sidewalk Variations

A
1
2"
B
5'
C
5'
B
5'
C
5'
5'
B
5'
C
5'
B
5'
SIDEWALK WITH EDGE BEAM FOR
A
5'
1
2"
SURFACE MOUNTED RAILINGS
Omit Joints On Curb Ramps
Return Curb
8"
4"
A (Signal Pole Or Controller Base, Ex.)
A (Utility Pole, Ex.)
4'
A
Rigid Structure; 6" Min. For Turnouts
4'
A
A
OPEN JOINTS
Sidewalk
Sidewalk
Turnout
Turnout
Utility Strip
Utility Strip
Turnout Or Side Road
(Full Return Shown)

A
(NOT TO SCALE)
Curb Or Curb And Gutter
JOINT LEGEND
A-
1
2"
Expansion Joints (Preformed Joint Filler)
1
8"
Dummy Joints, Tooled
1
8"
Formed Open Joints
B-
PLAN
SIDEWALK WITH UTILITY STRIP
Utility
Sidewalk
Strip
C-
Varies
Saw Cut Joints, 1
3
16"
Saw Cut Joints, 1
E-
F-
1
2"
1
2"
Deep (within 96 hours) Max. 5' Centers
1
2"
Deep (within 12 hours) Max. 30' Centers
Varies (5' Min.)
.
x
2 Ma
0
.
0
0.02
3
16"
D-
Back Of Sidewalk Variations
SECTION AA
Omit Joints On Curb Ramps
A (Signal Pole Or Controller Base, Ex.)
Expansion Joint When Run Of Sidewalk Exceeds 120'.
Intermediate locations when called for in the plans or at locations as directed by the Engineer.
A
4'
A (Utility Pole, Ex.)
G- Cold Joint With Bond Breaker, Tooled
4'
SIDEWALK JOINTS
Turnout
Sidewalk
Sidewalk
NOTES FOR CONCRETE SIDEWALK ON CURBED ROADWAYS

Turnout Or Side Road
G
1. Construct sidewalks in accordance with Specification Section 522.
Turnout
Curb or Curb
And Gutter
2. Include detectable warnings on sidewalk curb ramps and construct in accordance with Index No.
G
(Full Return Shown)
PLAN
304.
SIDEWALK WITHOUT UTILITY STRIP

3. Detectable warnings are not required where sidewalks intersect urban flared turnouts.
G
Sidewalk
4. Bond breaker material can be any impermeable coated or sheet membrane or preformed
7:
09:
03 AM
material having a thickness of not less than 6 mils nor more than
Varies (6' Min.)
1
2".
Flush-Tooled Edge
.
x
2 Ma
0
.
0
5. For turnouts see Index No. 515.
SECTION BB
6. Construct sidewalks with 1' thick Edge Beam through the limits of any surface mounted
12/11/2015
Pedestrian/Bicycle Picket Railing or Pipe Guiderail shown in the plans.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
CONCRETE SIDEWALK ON CURBED ROADWAYS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
NO.
310
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
30' Max.
D
5'
D
5'
D
5'
5'
5'
NOTES FOR CONCRETE SIDEWALKS ON UNCURBED ROADWAYS
5'
5'
** "E" Joint(s) Required When

1. Sidewalks shall be constructed in accordance with Specification Section 522.
Flexible Pavt.
4"
Length Exceeds 30'

2. Detectable Warnings shall conform to the requirements described in Index No. 304.
Detectable Warnings are not required for sidewalks that run continuous through driveways.
Graded Turnout
120' Max.**
120' Max.
30' Max.
30' Max.
D
A
1
2"
5'
D
5'
D
5'
D
5'
D
5'
5'
1
2"
5'
3. For TURNOUTS see Index No. 515.
30' Max.
30' Max.
5'
D
5'
1
2"
A
5'
5'
5'
5'
A
5'
4. Construct sidewalks with a 1'-0" thick Edge Beam through the limits of any surface mounted
Pedestrian/Bicycle Picket Railing or Pipe Guiderail shown in the plans (see SIDEWALK WITH
EDGEBEAM FOR SURFACE MOUNTED RAILINGS detail).
sidewalks shall not exceed 0.02.
8"
6"
5. When driveways are newly constructed, reconstructed, or altered, cross slopes for discontinuous
M in.
4"
Rigid Pavt.
SAWED JOINTS
B
5'
C
5'
B
5'
C
5'
4"
Flexible Pavt.
Sidewalk
Graded Turnout
1
2"
A
1
2"
B
5'
C
5'
B
5'
C
5'
C
5'
B
5'
5'
5'
A
5'
B
5'
C
5'
5'
Sidewalk
Varies (5' Std.)

1
2"
5'
.
x
2 Ma
0
.
0
Border
Rigid Pavt.
SECTION CC
8"
6"
Shoulder Line
M in.
4"
Driveway
Edge Of Travel Way
OPEN JOINTS
PLAN
LONGITUDINAL SECTIONS
CONTINUOUS SIDEWALK
(NOT TO SCALE)
2' Detectable
JOINT LEGEND
Warning Surface
A-
1
2"
Expansion Joints (Preformed Joint Filler)
1
8"
Dummy Joints, Tooled
B-
C-
C
See Note 5
Sidewalk
3
16"
Formed Open Joints
3
16"
Saw Cut Joints, 1
Border
D-
1
2"
Deep (96 Hour) Max. 5' Centers

Driveway
Shoulder Line
1
2"
Saw Cut Joints, 1
1
2"
Expansion Joint When Run Of Sidewalk Exceeds 120'.
E-
F-
1
2"
Side Road
Deep (12 Hour) Max. 30' Centers
Edge Of Travel Way
Intermediate locations when called for in the plans or at

7:
09:
04 AM
locations as directed by the Engineer.
PLAN
12/11/2015
SIDEWALK JOINTS
DISCONTINUOUS SIDEWALK
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
CONCRETE SIDEWALK ON UNCURBED ROADWAYS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE SIDEWALK
NO.
310
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
GENERAL NOTES
1. The illustrations for guardrail applications are standard configurations; adjustments are to be made as required by site specific
conditions to attain optimum design for function, economy and serviceability.
10. The W-beam guardrail system in this index is the standard system to be used on the State Highway System where a Test Level
3 semi-rigid barrier is required.
2. The beginning of guardrail need shall be at the greatest of the upstream distances from the hazard, as determined from Figures 1
and 2, and other application details of this Index.
11. Thrie-beam guardrail panels shall be used in guardrail transitions to bridge traffic railing barriers, to concrete and certain
water filled safety shaped barriers, certain crash cushions and as a continuous barrier when called for in the plans. For
additional information on rail attachment, post spacings, nested rails, location of thrie-beam transition panels and offset block
3. One Panel (i.e., panel length) equals 12'-6". Guardrail shall be constructed with rail elements 12'-6" in length except where 25'-0"
elements are called for by this and other standard indexes or where specifically called for in the plans.
configurations see details elsewhere in this Index, and Index Nos. 402, 410 and 414. The use of thrie-beam guardrail with
standard offset blocks (Test Level 3 semi-rigid system) may be considered where one or more of the conditions listed below or
similar conditions are anticipated or exist:
Post spacing shall be 6'-3" except that reduced spacing shall be used for (a) transitions to anchorages at rigid structures such as
bridges (See Detail J and Index No. 402 ) and transitions to redirective crash cushions, (b) the conditions in Note No. 7 below, (c)
a.
W-beam deflection is marginal,
special post applications, (d) reduced post spacing required for specific end anchorage assemblies, and, (e) specific spacing called
b.
W-beam with rub rail considered functionally deficient,
for in the plans.
c.
Vehicle overriding W-beam is probable,
d.
Drainage will be impeded or blocked by the use of concrete barrier wall (subject to deflection space requirements),
e.
High frequency of repairs to W-beam,
Modified thrie-beam shall be mounted at a height of 2'-0" to center of beam. The height is critical and shall be attained in all cases;
f.
Spandrel beam with low deflection needed around unrelocatable structure,
a deviation of 1" below and 3" above the standard mounting heights is permissible over necessary surface irregularities (e.g., across
g.
Accommodating passenger vehicles heavier or larger than the standard passenger car (e.g., passenger vans and small buses).
4. The standard guardrail mounting height for W-beam guardrail is 2'-1" and for thrie-beam guardrail is 1'-9" to the center of beam.
shoulder gutters, inlets and roadway surface break lines). For guardrail placed on slopes beyond the shoulder point, there shall be
no deviation more than 1" below to 3" above the desired height within any 25 foot section of guardrail. For standard guardrail with
a mounting height of 2'-1" to the center of beam, a construction tolerance of
1
2"
below and 1" above the standard mounting height is
The modified thrie-beam guardrail is a Test Level 4 semi-rigid system and may be used where a Test Level 4 guardrail is
required.
permissible. Use the applicable 2013 Design Standards, Index 400 Series for repair or replacement of existing W-beam guardrail
12. Single face median guardrail for bridges located on divided roadways shall be constructed the same as outer roadway guardrail
systems with a mounting height of 1'-9" to the center of beam.
under the following conditions:

5. All guardrail panels, end sections and special end shoes shall be lapped in the direction of adjacent traffic.
6. Flared end anchorage assemblies providing 4' offset are the standard end anchorage for single face free standing guardrail
approach ends. Parallel end anchorage assemblies for guardrail approach end anchorages will be constructed only when restraints
a.
Wide medians where approach end anchorage is located outside of opposing roadway clear zone,
b.
Medians of uniform width that are occupied by other transportation and joint use facilities,
c.
Medians of uniform or variable widths with independent vertical alignments not suited to normal median guardrail
d.
Medians of bifurcated roadways.
installations,
prevent construction of flared end anchors.
Guardrail end anchorage assemblies shall be of the type called for in the plans. If the plans call for a "flared" end anchorage
assembly and does not identify the specific system to be used, the contractor has the option to construct any FDOT approved "flared"
end anchorage assembly identified on the Approved Products List (APL), subject to the conditions identified in these drawings, or the
13. Straight rail sections may be used to construct radii of 125' or greater.
For radii less than 125' the rail must be fabricated
(shop-bent) to fit.
approved APL drawings.

14. Crash cushions may be required in lieu of or in conjunction with guardrail at locations where space does not permit development
If the plans call for a "parallel" end anchorage assembly and does not identify the specific system to be used, the contractor has the
of sufficient guardrail length, offset or crash worthiness at terminals. Crash cushions or Redirective Median End Anchorage
option to construct any FDOT approved "parallel" end anchorage assembly identified on the APL, subject to the conditions identified in
Assemblies shall be constructed at or in lieu of Type II assemblies located in the approach clear zones.
these drawings, or the approved APL drawings.

15. Corrugated sheet steel beams, end shoes, end sections and backup plates shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M180,
If the plans call for a specific end anchorage assembly, substitutions with other end anchorage assemblies will not be permitted
Class A (12 Gauge), Type II (zinc) coating, except the W-Thrie Beam Transition Panel detailed on Sheet 20A shall be Class B (10
unless approved by the Engineer. Approved substitutions will not be eligible for CSIP consideration.
Gauge). All other metallic components, hardware and accessories shall be in conformance with the appropriate current AASHTO
requirements.
When an end anchorage assembly is attached to guardrail and PEDESTRIAN SAFETY TREATMENTS are required, only end anchorage
16. Offset blocks:
assemblies approved with timber posts are to be used.
a.
COMBINATIONS are tabulated on Sheet 16.
approval of proprietary end anchorage assemblies for inclusion on the APL must submit an application with appropriate documentation
showing that the end anchorage assembly is deemed eligible by the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) for federal funding on
the National Highway System (NHS) and is compatible with FDOT guardrail systems. System approvals will be contingent upon FDOT's
Steel offset blocks other than modified thrie-beam offset blocks are not permitted for new guardrail construction. Existing
steel offset blocks may remain throughout the service life of the existing guardrail. PERMISSIBLE POST AND OFFSET BLOCK
Currently approved proprietary end anchorage assemblies are identified on the Approved Products List (APL). Manufacturers seeking
b.
Composite offset block installations shall be constructed on guardrail outside of approach end anchorage assemblies or any
transition system connecting to a rigid or thrie-beam barrier.
evaluation of crash test performance results for consistency with FDOT system applications and use. If approved, product drawings
17. New holes in existing guardrail are to be punched. Where necessary to enlarge existing holes to guardrail, the work will be done
signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the State of Florida is required.
by drilling or reaming. Repair damaged galvanization in accordance with Section 562. Burning of any holes will not be
7. At above ground rigid hazards where the face of guardrail is offset from the hazard less than the 5' minimum for standard W-beam,
permitted.
other guardrail configurations with reduced post spacing may be applicable; see General Note No. 11 and the minimum offset table
on Sheet 19. For guardrail with post spacing less than 6'-3" the reduced spacing should extend a minimum of one panel in advance of
18. For BARRIER DELINEATOR see DETAIL M.
the hazard. When minimum offset cannot be attained safety shape concrete barrier wall shall be used unless other shielding is
approved by the Engineer of Record. See Index No. 410 for safety shape concrete barrier walls and typical applications, and the
19. Any run of guardrail with existing concrete posts that is being relocated under a construction or maintenance contract shall be
replaced using timber or steel posts. Repair within a run of guardrail with existing concrete posts can be made with either
plans for special barrier shapes and applications.
steel, timber, sound salvaged concrete posts; replacement in kind of damaged posts is to be made when like posts are on hand
1:
00:
55 PM
8. In addition to use at roadside hazards or other areas where the Engineer has deemed guardrail necessary, guardrail should be
at time of repair.
considered on flush shoulder sections where fill slopes are steeper than 1:3 within the clear zone and fill heights are 6' or greater.
Curbed sections should be evaluated for installation of guardrail where fill slopes are steeper than 1:3 and fill heights are 6' or
20. Substitutions between thrie-beam guardrail and concrete barrier wall are not eligible for CSIP consideration.
greater within 22' of the traveled way. For additional details on curbed sections, see DETAIL L, LOCATION AT CURB & GUTTER
21. On roadways designated for reverse laning, all downstream ends of guardrail that are not shielded or that are not designed as
SECTIONS.
concrete barrier wall ends shall be marked with Type 3 Object Markers except where there is trailing end guardrail. Object
to concrete barrier wall connections see Index No. 410. For existing bridges receiving retrofit traffic railing barriers see Index No.
markers to be installed facing reverse laning traffic. The cost of the object marker shall be included in the cost of the
402.
guardrail.
LAST
REVISION
06/06/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
approach end terminals shall be marked with post-mounted Type 3 Object Markers. Trailing bridge ends and trailing shoulder
9. The guardrail to bridge connections contained in this Index are for bridges with Test Level 4 traffic railing barriers. For guardrail
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
1of 26
End Measurement For Guardrail Payment
10'
GENERAL NOTES
1. All FLARED OPTION and PARALLEL OPTION drawings are representative of the
various proprietary guardrail end anchorage assemblies listed on the Department's
1
:
1
5 To No
r
ma
lSh
l
d
r
.Br
e
a
k Po
i
n
t
manufacturer's detailed drawings, procedures and specifications located on the

Approved Products List (APL) website at
www.dot.state.fl.us/programmanagement/
2. These drawings present general graphics which depict the limits of payment for
Impact Head or
guardrail and end anchorage assemblies, modifications to the shoulder, and
Rounded End
Location Station
placement of miscellaneous asphalt mow strips.
M ax.
12'-6"
1:
10
De
p
ar
t
u
r
eL
i
n
e
Beginning Of Length Of Need
Approved Products List (APL). For specific details and requirements refer to the
Misc. Asph. Pavt.
M ax.
1:
10
Shoulder
4'
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
or Other Special Treatment
3'
Standard Guardrail, Special Transition
3. These drawings, along with the various manufacturer drawings on the APL, are
50' At 1:12.5 Flare Rate
intended to include sufficient details for installation of the end anchorage

assembly and their connection to Standard Guardrail. This precludes requirements
TRAFFIC
1
2")
End Anchorage Assembly - Flared (53'-1
for shop drawing submittals unless otherwise called for in the plans. The various
end anchorage assemblies shall be assembled in accordance with the
manufacturer's detailed drawings, procedures and specifications.
FLARED OPTION
PLAN VIEW
4. The various proprietary end anchorage assemblies listed on the APL are intended
for use as approach end guardrail anchorages for Standard Guardrail. The actual
length of end anchorage assemblies vary-refer to the manufacturer's drawings on
the APL for their length and use of special panels and details. Standard guardrail,
guardrail transitions or other special treatments shall not be included within the
limits of the end anchorage assembly. See the manufacturer drawings for the
alignment of the end anchorage assemblies with respect to the normal guardrail
10'
alignment.

Shoulder Line
M ax.
3'
M ax.
1:
10
3'
1:
10
1
:
1
5 To No
r
ma
lSh
l
d
r
.Br
e
a
k Po
i
n
t
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
5. Flared or parallel end anchorage assemblies shall not be used in medians where
horizontal clearance requires the use of a back rail.
6. Each of the various end anchorage assemblies have unique features. Careful
Misc. Asph. Pavt.
attention shall be given to the types and orientation of the posts and other
components. Refer to the manufacturer's drawings on the APL for the specific
De
p
ar
t
u
r
eL
i
n
e
12'-6"
requirements of each system.

Impact Head
Location Station
7. For galvanizing requirements of the metallic components see Standard

Specifications Section 967.
1
2")
End Anchorage Assembly - Parallel (53'-1
TRAFFIC
8. Test Level 3 End Anchorage Assemblies are suitable for all design speeds.
1
2"
However, use a 53'-1
PARALLEL OPTION
long TL-3 End Anchorage Assembly shown on the APL for

1
2"
Design Speeds greater than or equal to 50 mph and a 40'-7
PLAN VIEW
long TL-2 End
Anchorage Assembly Shown on the APL for Design Speeds less than or equal to 45
mph.
9. Flared end anchorage assemblies shall be paid for under the contract unit price
10'
for Guardrail, End Anchorage Assembly - Flared, EA.
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.

Parallel end anchorage assemblies shall be paid for under the contract unit price
for Guardrail, End Anchorage Assembly - Parallel, EA.
Misc. Asph. Pavt.
The unit price for end anchorage assemblies shall be full compensation for
furnishing and installing all components in accordance with these drawings, the
De
p
ar
t
u
r
eL
i
n
e
plans and the manufacturer's detailed drawings, procedures and specifications.
Face Of Curb
Beginning Of
Length Of Need
Impact Head
12'-6"
Location Station
1:
00:
56 PM
25' At 1:25 Flare Rate
1
2")
TRAFFIC
12/3/2015
PLACEMENT OF PARALLEL OPTION AT CURBED LOCATIONS
APPROACH END ANCHORAGE DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
PLAN VIEW
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
2 of 26
End Measurement
For Guardrail Payment
Standard Guardrail, Special

Transition or Other Special
1
2")
Treatment
End Anchorage Assembly - Flared (53'-1
Location Station
3'-12"
12'-6"
Impact Head or
2'
-1"
Rounded End
W-Beam Midspan
Panel Splice (Typ.)
TRAFFIC
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
FLARED OPTION
ELEVATION VIEW
End Measurement
For Guardrail Payment
Standard Guardrail, Special

Transition or Other Special
1
2")
Treatment
Location Station
3'-12"
12'-6"
W-Beam Midspan
Panel Splice (Typ.)
2'
-1"
Impact Head
TRAFFIC
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
PARALLEL OPTION
1:
00:
57 PM
ELEVATION VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
APPROACH END ANCHORAGE DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
2A of 26

Clear Zone Width Or Lateral Offset
Distance In Accordance With The
Criteria In PPM, Volume 1, Chapter 4
X (Length Of Advancement) Ft.
Extended
Hazard
Hazard Free, Traversable Slopes
Back Of Hazard
End Anchorage Assembly (Flare Shown)

Approach End Anchorage
Hazard Inside
Varies
Dep
ar
t
ur
e
Horizontal Clearance
L
i
n
e
Clear Zone Or
Face Of Guardrail
Edge Of Traffic Lane
Point Of Departure
Design
Speed
(See NOTES 1 & 2)
mph
45
= 16 (D-d)
50
= 13 (D-d)
NOTES
1. Length of advancement determined from the diagram and equations above establishes the
location of the upstream beginning length of need for guardrail, however, the length of
advancement can be no less than that required by other details of this index.
2. The flared end anchorage with 4' nose offset is shown in the diagram above, however, the
diagram applies to other configurations that may occur at the beginning of length of need,
such as, other flare designs; upstream returns; and, other upstream deflected, tangent and
curvilinear conditions.
Equation Variables:
D = Distance in feet from near edge of the near approach traffic lane to either (a) the back of
hazard, when the hazard is located inside the clear zone or horizontal clearance or (b) the clear
zone or horizontal clearance outer limit, when the hazard extends to or goes beyond the clear zone
or horizontal clearance limit. For left side hazards on two-way undivided facilities, D is measured
from the inside edge of the near approach traffic lane (see Figure 2).
d = Distance in feet from the near edge of the near approach traffic lane to the face of guardrail
at its intersection with the departure line.
For left side hazards on two-way undivided facilities,
d is measured from the inside edge of the near approach traffic lane (see Figure 2).
For flared and parallel end anchorage assemblies the beginning length of need is to be set at the
1:
00:
57 PM
center of post #3.
That is, the departure line must intersect the face of the rail at post #3.
For flared end anchorage assemblies the offset distance "d" will equal the normal guardrail offset
measured from the face of the guardrail to the edge of the near approach travel lane plus 1'-2" for
1
4"
for greater than 45 mph.
12/3/2015
45 mph or less and 1'-9
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
LENGTH OF ADVANCEMENT - FIGURE 1

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
3 of 26
Clear Zone Limit Or
H azard
Extended
X (Length Of Advancement)
End Treatment
Varies
(For Approach End Anchorage Assemblies)
Horizontal Clearance Limit

Back Of Hazard
App
r
o
ac
hD
epa
r
t
ur
eL
i
n
e
(Standard For Trailing Applications)
6' Min.
D
Type II End Anchorage Assembly
Clear Zone Or
Horiz. Clear.
Face Of Guardrail
Type 3 Object Marker When Required

(See General Note No. 21)
Trailing Departure Line
Required Extension
Approach End Anchorage Assembly

(Type Varies)
Hazard Inside
Point Of
Length Of Need
Departure
Length Of Guardrail System (Limit Of Pay For Guardrail)
(LEFT SIDE OPPOSITE HAND)
Extended H azard
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
Beginning Of Length Of Need (LA)

X (Length Of Advancement LA)
(LA) Clear Zone Limit Or

(RA) Clear Zone Limit Or
Back Of Hazard
End
Treatment
Dep
ar
t
ur
e
(Type Varies)
Face Of Guardrail
Varies
Varies
RIGHT APPROACH (RA)
End
Treatment
L
i
n
e(
RA)
Or Horizontal Clearance
D (
LA)
d (LA)
e
n
i
eL
ur
t
ar
p
e
D

Hazard Inside Clear Zone
A)
L
(
(
RA)
(Type Varies)
D (
RA)
Beginning Of Length Of Need (RA)

X (Length Of Advancement RA)
Point Of Departure (RA)
Point Of Departure (LA)
LEFT APPROACH (LA)
LENGTH OF NEED
Length Of Guardrail System (Limit Of Pay For Guardrail)
TWO-LANE TWO-WAY TRAFFIC
For description of the dimensions D, d and X, see Length of Advancement - Figure 1.
12/3/2015
1:
00:
58 PM
For additional shoulder guardrail information, see Details B and C.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
LOCATING TERMINALS ON SHOULDER GUARDRAILS - FIGURE 2

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
4 of 26
Approach End
6'
Varies
Min.
End Anchorage Type II
Varies
Anchorage Assembly
(2 Panels Min.)
(Flare Shown)
Hazard
Flared End Section
5' Min.
Approach End
Shoulder Line
Approach End
Varies
Anchorage Assembly
Varies
(Flare Shown)
(2 Panels Min.)
Edge Of Traffic Lanes
Varies
Anchorage Assembly
(2 Panels Min.)
(Flare Shown)
Hazard
5' Min.
Shoulder Line
Flared End Section
Shoulder Line
6'
Approach End
Min.
Anchorage Assembly
Varies
(Flare Shown)
Varies
5' Min.
Approach End
(2 Panels Min.)
Hazard
(2 Panels Min.)
6'
Anchorage Assembly
Min.
(Flare Shown)
5' Min.
Shoulder Line

Shoulder Line
Flared End Section
5' Min.
Edge Of Traffic Lanes

Hazard
Approach End
Approach End
Shoulder Line
5' Min.
Approach End
Varies
(Flare Shown)
(2 Panels Min.)

6'
Varies
(2 Panels Min.)
(Flare Shown)
Varies
Varies
Anchorage Assembly
(2 Panels Min.)
(Flare Shown)
Flared End Section

Hazard
Anchorage Assembly
Varies
Anchorage Assembly
LC
DED ROADWAY-DETAI
VI
UNDI
Notes For Details B & C:
Min.
See General Notes Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.
Median Guardrail Applications Shown Are For Locations
See Details K and L for guardrail offsets.
Where Approach End Anchorage Assemblies Are Outside
For end anchorage assemblies see sheets elsewhere in this Index and the plans.
Of The Opposing Roadway Clear Zone.
For hazards that require shielding and are located back of curb see other
sheets of this index, and where rigid barrier is required see Index No. 410.
LB
DED ROADWAY-DETAI
VI
DI
DE HAZARDS
ON FOR ROADSI
CATI
I
L APPL
GUARDRAI
6'
End Anchorage Type II With Buffer End Section

When Located Outside Of Approaching Clear Zone,
Varies
1 Panel
Varies
1 Panel
4 Panels Min.
Min
4 Panels Min.
Crash Cushion or Redirective Median End Anchorage

Assembly Required When Inside Approaching Clear
Zone; See Sheet 9 And General Note No. 14.

Shoulder Line
Shoulder Line
Flared End Section
125' R: 1:10 Taper Rate

Hazard
5' Min.
5' Min.
5' Min.
Hazard
Flared End Section
5' Min.

Shoulder Line
Shoulder Line
4 Panels Min.
1 Panel
Varies
End Anchorage Type II With Buffer End Section When Located
End Anchorage Type II With Buffer End Section When
Outside Of Approaching Clear Zone, Crash Cushion or Redirective
Located Outside Of Approaching Clear Zone, Crash
Median End Anchorage Assembly Required When Inside Approaching
Cushion or Redirective Median End Anchorage Assembly
Clear Zone. See General Note No. 14.
Required When Inside Approaching Clear Zone; See
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC- DETAIL G
Sheet 9 And General Note No. 14.

This Guardrail Configuration Applies Where Approach End Anchorage Assemblies
* 1:10 Taper Rate For Design Speeds 45 mph
Cannot be Located Outside Of The Opposing Roadway Clear Zone.
1:15 Taper Rate For Design Speeds 50 mph
OPPOSING TRAFFIC- DETAIL D

1:
00:
59 PM
Notes For Details D & G:

See General Notes Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and 14.
See Details K and L for guardrail offsets.
For hazards that require shielding and are located back of curb see other
12/3/2015
sheets of this index, and where rigid barrier is required see Index No. 410.
LAST
REVISION
06/06/14
REVISIO N
GUARDRAIL APPLICATION FOR NARROW MEDIAN AND GORE HAZARDS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
5 of 26
Installation For Bridge End Hazard Only
Installation When Other Hazards Or Shoulder Gutter Are Present
(No Shoulder Gutter)

Varies
2.5 Panels
Approach End
Transition Section
(See Detail J)
Transition Section
Anchorage Assembly
(See Detail J)
(Flare Shown)
Bridge Rail
2'
(Flare Shown)
Slope Steeper Than 1 : 3 Or Other
Hazards Are Present (62.5' Min.)
Bridge Rail Projection
Projection
Approach
Slab
2'
Bridge Rail
Guardrail Not Required Except Where
Varies
Approach
Bridge
Min.
Approach End
Approach End
(Flare Shown)
Transition Section
Anchorage Assembly
(See Detail J)
(Flare Shown)
Projection
AnchorageAssembly Varies
Approach End
4 Panels W-Beam
1 Panel
Slab
2'
Approach End
AnchorageAssembly
2.5 Panels
Transition Section
(See Detail J)
Transition Section
Anchorage Assembly
(See Detail J)
(Flare Shown)

Approach
Approach
Slab
Bridge
Slab
Flared End Section

For Median Guardrail See Sheets 8 & 9 And General Note 12.
With Four Or More Lanes Trailing Guardrail Anchorages May Be As Shown In Detail P Unless Other Anchorage Called Out In The Plans
Approach
Slab
2'
Approach
Bridge
Slab
Flared End Section

2'
UNDIVIDED ROADWAY - DETAIL O
4 Panels W-Beam
Varies
Approach End
Anchorage Assembly
Varies
(Flare Shown)
2.5 Panels
1 Panel
Transition Section
Min.
(See Detail J)
Guardrail Not Required Except Where

Slope Steeper Than 1:3 Or Other
Hazards Are Present
Notes For Details O & P:
(62.5' Min.)
See General Notes Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 and 9. See Detail J for approach connections to bridges.
DIVIDED ROADWAY - DETAIL P
1:
01:
00 PM
Shoulder gutter in itself does not require the installation of guardrail.
12/3/2015
GUARDRAIL APPLICATIONS FOR BRIDGES WITH FULL WIDTH SHOULDERS AND
LAST
REVISION
07/01/02
REVISIO N
SAFETY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILING BARRIER EXTENDING FULL LENGTH OF APPROACH SLAB
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
6 of 26
Guardrail Not Required Except Where Slope Steeper

Varies
1 Panel
Transition Section
Min.
See Index No. 402
Transition Section
2'
See Index No. 402
6'
Assembly (Flare Shown)
Min.
Approach
2'

Approach
Slab
Approach
Bridge
Slab
Flared End Section
For Median Guardrail See Sheets 10 & 11 And General Note 12

Varies
See Index No. 402
Slab
Varies
Transition Section
End Of Hazard
Bridge
Slab
1 Panel Min.

Approach
4 Panels
Transition Section
1 Panel Transition Section
Min.
See Index No. 402
Flared End Section
See Index No. 402

Approach
Installation For Bridge End Hazard
Or Shoulder Gutter Are Present
Only (No Shoulder Gutter)
Bridge
Slab
2'
Installation When Other Hazards
Approach
Slab
2'
Than 1:3 Or Other Hazards Are Present (62.5' Min.)

Varies
Varies
2'
With Four Or More Lanes Trailing Guardrail Anchorages May Be As

Shown In Detail I Unless Other Anchorage Called Out In The Plans
Varies

Notes For Details H & I:
See General Notes Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, and 9. See Index No. 402 for approach connections to bridges.
6'
End Of Hazard
Varies
LH
DED ROADWAY -DETAI
VI
UNDI
Min
1 Panels
Transition Section
Min.
See Index No. 402
4 Panels
Varies
1 Panel Min.
Installation When Other Hazards Are
Present Or Shoulder Gutter Present
Than 1:3 Or Other Hazards Are Present
For end anchorage assemblies see sheets elsewhere in this Index and in the plans.
(62.5' Min.)
LI
DED ROADWAY -DETAI
VI
DI
Shoulder gutter in itself does not require the installation of guardrail.
GUARDRAIL APPLICATIONS FOR BRIDGES WITH FULL WIDTH SHOULDERS AND

12.5'
SAFETY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILING BARRIER EXTENDING LESS THAN FULL APPROACH SLAB LENGTH
Wing Post
6.25'
Wing Post
Than 1:3 Or Other Hazards Are Present

No Panel (s) Required In Absence Of Other Hazards
Varies To Meet Need When Other Hazards Are Present
Varies
See Index No. 402
End Of Hazard
6'
Transition Section
Flared End
Min.
Section
1 Panel (See Detail W)

Exist. Bridge
Offset
Approach
Offset
Slab
1:10 For Design Speeds 45 mph

Shoulder Line
AYOUT
'R L
25
1

Offset
Wing Post
6.25'
Wing Post
Approach
Exist. Bridge
Slab
See Detail K
For Median Guardrail See Sheets 10 & 11 And General Note 12
1
4"
5
0.
10'
6.25'
12.5'
Shoulder Line
Projection Of Normal
12.48'

Shoulder Line
1
4"
5
6.25'
See Detail K
Varies
42'
0.
Varies
0.
16'
62'
0.
6.25'
6.25'
12.49'
See Detail K
See Detail K

Shoulder Line

Varies
See Index No. 402
Slab
See General Note No. 13
STANDARD PANELS SET TO

Varies To Meet Need When Other Hazards Are Present
1:
01:
01 PM
Exist. Bridge
Offset
Transition Section
No Panel (s) Required In Absence Of Other Hazards
AYOUT
'R L
87
1
Approach
No Panel (s) Required In Absence Of
Other Hazards, Varies To Meet Need
RADIALS ADJOINING BRIDGES
LW
DETAI
When Other Hazards Are Present
With Four Or More Lanes Trailing Guardrail Anchorages May Be As

Shown In Detail I Unless Other Anchorage Called Out In The Plans
UNDIVIDED ROADWAY - DETAIL S
Notes for Details S & T:
Varies
Transition Section
See Index No. 402
DIVIDED ROADWAY - DETAIL T
See General Notes Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 and 9. See Index No. 402 for approach connections to bridges.
12/3/2015
GUARDRAIL APPLICATIONS FOR BRIDGES WITH LESS THAN FULL WIDTH SHOULDERS AND
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
SAFETY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILING BARRIER EXTENDING LESS THAN FULL APPROACH SLAB LENGTH
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
7 of 26
Approach Slab
10' Min.
For Guardrail Lengths See Table Below Left
Bridge
Edge Of Travel Lane
Transition Section
6' Or 10' Shoulder (Std.)
See DETAIL J
Misc. Asph. Pavt. To
Suit Shoulder Treatment
Shoulder Line
1:25 When Shoulder Gutter Present

Extended Shoulder
Extended Shoulder
2'
5' Misc. Asphalt Pavt.

Approach End
Anchorage Assembly
GUARDRAIL LENGTH (Ft.)

6' & 8' Rdwy. Shldr. 10' & 12' Rdwy. Shldr.
Remarks
Design
Projected
CZ
Speed
ADT
(Ft.)
(mph)
Min.
Min.
Guardrail
Median
Guardrail
Lengths are based on minimum median widths and
Length
on standard clear zone widths for travel lanes on
Median
Length
Width
Width
(Extended Shoulder)
Slope Varies
Shoulder Line
tangent roadways, and the length of advancement
60-70
1500
36
50
356.5
54
306.5
60-70
<1500
30
44
281.5
48
219.0
55
1500
30
44
281.5
48
219.0
needed for flared end anchorage assemblies to

Edge Of Travel Lane
shield normal transverse underslope and bridge
55
<1500
24
38
194.0
42
144.0
45-50
1500
24
38
194.0
42
144.0
45-50
<1500
20
34
144.0
38
94.0
45-50
Urban w/o Curb
24
38
194.0
42
144.0
Urban w/o Curb
18
32
144.0
36
81.5
end hazards. Lengths may need to be adjusted for

auxiliary lanes, curved roadways, parallel end
Note: For approach end anchorage assemblies see sheets elsewhere in this Index and the plans.
anchorage assemblies, skewed crossings and other
35-40
Shoulder Transition
1:10
Extended Shoulder
Slope Varies
(See Detail W)
Not Steeper Than
M edian
Guardrail
Clear Z one W idth
Break Point
WHEN END TERMINAL IS OUTSIDE OF OPPOSING ROADWAY CLEAR ZONE
hazards present.
Bridge
Approach Slab
For Guardrail Lengths See Table Below
Transition Section
See DETAIL J
Flared End Section
10' Min.
Shoulder Line
Extended Shoulder Not

Steeper Than 1:10
To Suit Shoulder
Back Rail (To Be Paid
(See Detail W)
15 or Flatter
Shoulder Transition
Treatment
Median
For As Guardrail, LF)
Break Point
(Extended Shoulder)
C. C.
Extended Shoulder
2'
Asphalt Pavt.
Crash Cushion or Redirective Median End Anchorage Assembly
)
.3
tNo
e
e
e Sh
,Se
s
e
i
r
e Va
t
d Ra
n
A
n
o
i
t
a
c
o
L
e(
n
i
eL
r
u
t
r
a
p
De
5' Misc.
30
Uniform Slope
Guardrail Transition (For Transition Details See APL Manufacturer
Drawings For Individual Crash Cushion Used)
Shoulder Line
Bridge
M edian

Guardrail
Misc. Asph. Pavt.
Approach Slab
GUARDRAIL LENGTHS
1:10 TAPER RATE
Median
6' Bridge Shoulder
Width
(Ft.)
Panels (No.)
Front Back
1:15 TAPER RATE

10' Bridge Shoulder
Length (Ft.)
Total
Total
Panels (No.)
Front Back
Length (Ft.)
Total
Total
6' Bridge Shoulder

Panels (No.)
Front Back
32
9.5
15.5
193.75
6.5
10.5
131.25
13.5
10' Bridge Shoulder
Length (Ft.)
Total
Total
10
23.5
293.75
Panels (No.)
Front Back
8.5
Length (Ft.)
Total
Total
14.5
181.25
34
10.5
17.5
218.75
7.5
12.5
156.25
14.5
11
25.5
318.75
9.5
16.5
206.25
36
10.5
17.5
218.75
7.5
12.5
156.25
15.5
12
27.5
343.75
10.5
18.5
231.25
38
11.5
19.5
243.75
8.5
14.5
181.25
16.5
13
29.5
368.75
11.5
20.5
256.25
40
12.5
21.5
268.75
9.5
15.5
193.75
17.5
13
30.5
381.25
13.5
11
24.5
306.25
42
13.5
22.5
281.25
10.5
17.5
218.75
19.5
15
34.5
431.25
14.5
11
25.5
318.75
44
14.5
10
24.5
306.25
10.5
17.5
218.75
20.5
16
36.5
456.25
15.5
12
27.5
343.75
46
14.5
10
24.5
306.25
11.5
19.5
243.75
21.5
17
38.5
481.25
16.5
13
29.5
368.75
48
15.5
11
26.5
331.25
12.5
21.5
268.75
22.5
17
39.5
493.75
17.5
13
30.5
381.25
1:
01:
02 PM
The lengths shown on this table are typical for roadways with standard width shoulders. Length requirements shall be determined
on a site specific basis for both standard width and narrow bridge shoulders and end anchorage or end shielding use.
WHEN END TERMINAL CANNOT BE LOCATED OUTSIDE OF OPPOSING ROADWAY CLEAR ZONE
12/3/2015
APPROACH GUARDRAIL TREATMENTS FOR BRIDGES WITH SAFETY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILING
LAST
REVISION
06/06/14
REVISIO N
EXTENDING FULL APPROACH SLAB LENGTH IN WIDE MEDIANS WITH FLUSH SHOULDERS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
8 of 26
Crash
Guardrail Panels And Length (See Table Below)
Cushion
10' Min.
Approach Slab

10'
See DETAIL J

Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
Misc.
Guardrail (See Sheet 7)
Shoulder Line
M edian
10'
Transition Section
12'
Bridge
Median
Asphalt
12'
Shoulder Line
Guardrail Transition (Approach Section) As
10'
10'
C. C.
Required For Redirective Crash Cushion
(See Detail W)
Bridge
Guardrail Length-One Half Panel Less

Approach Slab
Than Taper Side For Plan Quantities
DERS
DGE SHOUL
0'BRI
TH 1
ANS WI
MEDI
Approach Slab
Bridge
4'
Transition Section
6'
Shoulder Line

M edian
Guardrail (See Sheet 7)
8'
6'
See DETAIL J
Median
10' Min.
(See Detail W)
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
Misc. Asphalt
Guardrail Transition (Approach Section) As Required For Redirective Crash Cushion
Bridge
Approach Slab
Shoulder Line
4'
6'
8'
C. C.
Guardrail Length-One Half Panel Less Than Taper Side For Plan Quantities
DERS
DGE SHOUL
'BRI
TH 6
ANS WI
MEDI
Note: The guardrail configurations shown apply only to parallel or near parallel bridges with open medians.
W idth (
CZ )
Clear Z one
GUARDRAIL LENGTHS
e
ur
t
par
De
e
n
i
L
MEDIAN
WIDTH
(Ft.)
C. C.
10' BRIDGE SHOULDERS
6' BRIDGE SHOULDERS

1:10 TAPER RATE
PANELS (No.)
LENGTH (Ft.)
1:15 TAPER RATE

PANELS (No.)
LENGTH (Ft.)
1:10 TAPER RATE

PANELS (No.)
1:15 TAPER RATE
LENGTH (Ft.)
PANELS (No.)
LENGTH (Ft.)
131.25
Point Of Impact Speed (S )
30
14.5
181.25
20.5
256.25
7.5
93.75
10.5
Crash Cushion Located On
28
12.5
156.25
18.5
231.25
6.5
81.25
8.5
106.25
26
11.5
143.75
15.5
193.75
5.5*
68.75
6.5
81.25
24
9.5
118.75
13.5
168.75
5.5*
68.75
5.5*
68.75
Opposing Roadway Shoulder
L (Runout Length)
The lengths shown in this table are based on standard widths for roadway and bridge median shoulders. Length requirements for
Speed (S ) For Determining Crash Cushion Size:
x
S = (Design Speed) =
both standard width and narrow bridge shoulders and end anchorage or end shielding requirements shall be determined on a site
(CZ-d)
Design Speed
CZ
specific basis. When crash cushions are required on opposing roadway shoulders, their sizes may be determined by the residual
speeds (S's) along the runouts from the approach roadways; however, when calculated speeds (S
's) are less than 30 mph; crash
OCATED
ONS L
NG CRASH CUSHI
ZI
SI
cushions shall be no less in size than for 30 mph, see speed diagram left. The number of panels may be reduced when installing a
crash cushion more than 2.5' in width, see * below.
1:
01:
03 PM
DERS
NG ROADWAY SHOUL
ON OPPOSI
* Number shown is the minimum number of panels plus a W-Thrie beam transition panel; single faced guardrail must have a length
of five (5) or more panels.
12/3/2015
NG
I
L
C RAI
TH SAFETY SHAPE TRAFFI
DGES WI
L TREATMENTS FOR BRI
APPROACH GUARDRAI
LAST
REVISION
06/06/14
REVISIO N
DERS
USH SHOUL
TH FL
ANS WI
N NARROW MEDI
ENGTH I
AB L
L APPROACH SL
NG FUL
EXTENDI
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
9 of 26
Approach Slab
10' Min.
Bridge
Edge Of Travel Lane

See Index No. 402
Misc. Asph. Pavt. To Suit
1:25 When Shoulder Gutter Present
Shoulder Treatment
Shoulder Line

Break Point

Guardrail
Extended Shoulder
Slope Varies
(See Detail W)
GUARDRAIL LENGTH (Ft.)
Approach End
Remarks
Anchorage Assembly
6' & 8' Rdwy. Shldr. 10' & 12' Rdwy. Shldr. Lengths are based on minimum median widths and on
Design
Projected
CZ
Min.
ADT
(Ft.)
Median
Speed
(mph)
standard clear zone widths for travel lanes on tangent
Min.
Guardrail
Guardrail
Median
Length
Length
Width
Width
(Extended Shoulder)
Extended Shoulder
roadways, and the length of advancement needed for

flared end anchorage assemblies to shield normal
60-70
1500
36
50
362.5
54
312.5
transverse underslope and bridge end hazards.
60-70
< 1500
30
44
287.5
48
237.5
Lengths may need to be adjusted for connection
55
1500
30
44
287.5
48
237.5
location on wing post or bridge traffic railing barrier
55
< 1500
24
38
212.5
42
162.5
(see Index No. 402), auxiliary lanes, curved roadways,
45-50
1500
24
38
212.5
42
162.5
parallel end anchorage assemblies, skewed crossings
45-50
< 1500
20
34
162.5
38
112.5
and other hazards present. When the wing post is
45-50
Urban w/o Curb
24
38
212.5
42
162.5
replaced by bridge traffic railing barrier, reference
35-40
Urban w/o Curb
18
32
162.5
36
100.0
Detail J and see Index No. 402.
Slope Varies
Clear Z one W idth
2'
Shoulder Transition
Steeper Than 1:10
M edian
Transition Section
Shoulder Line
Edge Of Travel Lane
Note: For approach end anchorage assemblies see sheets elsewhere in this Index and the plans.
WHEN END TERMINAL IS OUTSIDE OF OPPOSING ROADWAY CLEAR ZONE
Approach Slab
Bridge
Transition Section
Edge Of Travel Lane
Index No. 402

10' Min.
Shoulder Line
Median
For As Guardrail, LF)
(Extended Shoulder)
C. C.
Extended Shoulder
Break Point
2'
)
.3
tNo
e
e
e Sh
,Se
s
e
i
r
e Va
t
d Ra
n
A
n
o
i
t
a
c
o
L
e(
n
i
eL
r
u
t
r
a
p
De
M edian
Shoulder Transition
Back Rail (To Be Paid
Guardrail
(See Detail W)
15 or Flatter
Shoulder Treatment
Steeper Than 1:10
Section
Misc. Asph. Pavt. To Suit
Flared End
Uniform Slope
Guardrail Transition (For Transition Details See APL Manufacturer
Drawings For Individual Crash Cushion Used)
30
Shoulder Line
Bridge
Edge Of Travel Lane
Approach Slab
GUARDRAIL LENGTHS
1:10 TAPER RATE
Median
6' Bridge Shoulder
Width
(ft.)
Panels (No.)
Front Back
Length (Ft.)
Total
Total
1:15 TAPER RATE

10' Bridge Shoulder
Panels (No.)
Front Back
32
7.5
13.5
168.75
4.5
Length (Ft.)
6' Bridge Shoulder

Panels (No.)
Total
Total
Front Back
7.5
93.75
11.5
Length (Ft.)
10' Bridge Shoulder

Panels (No.)
Total
Total
Front Back
20.5
256.25
7.5
Length (Ft.)
Total
Total
13.5
168.75
34
8.5
14.5
181.25
5.5
9.5
118.75
12.5
10
22.5
281.25
7.5
13.5
168.75
36
9.5
16.5
206.25
6.5
11.5
143.75
13.5
11
24.5
306.25
8.5
15.5
193.75
38
10.5
18.5
231.25
7.5
13.5
168.75
14.5
12
26.5
331.25
10.5
19.5
243.75
40
10.5
18.5
231.25
7.5
13.5
168.75
16.5
13
29.5
368.75
11.5
20.5
256.25
42
11.5
19.5
243.75
8.5
14.5
181.25
17.5
14
31.5
393.75
12.5
10
22.5
281.25
44
12.5
21.5
268.75
9.5
16.5
206.25
18.5
15
33.5
418.75
13.5
11
24.5
306.25
46
12.5
21.5
268.75
10.5
18.5
231.25
19.5
16
35.5
443.75
14.5
12
26.5
331.25
48
14.5
11
25.5
318.75
11.5
20.5
256.25
20.5
16
36.5
456.25
16.5
13
29.5
368.75
The lengths shown on this table are typical for roadways with standard width shoulders and a relocated connection to the existing wing
1:
01:
03 PM
post. When the wing post is replaced by bridge traffic railing barrier, reference Detail J and see Index No. 402. Length requirements shall
be determined on a site specific basis for both standard width and narrow bridge shoulders and for end anchorage or end shielding use.
WHEN END TERMINAL CANNOT BE LOCATED OUTSIDE OF OPPOSING ROADWAY CLEAR ZONE
12/3/2015
APPROACH GUARDRAIL TREATMENTS FOR BRIDGES WITH SAFETY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILING
LAST
REVISION
06/06/14
REVISIO N
EXTENDING LESS THAN FULL APPROACH SLAB LENGTH IN WIDE MEDIANS WITH FLUSH SHOULDERS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
10 of 26
Crash
10' Min.
Cushion
Bridge
Transition Section

Shoulder Line
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
(See Detail W)
M edian
See Index No. 402
12'
10'
10'
Median
Misc. Asphalt
Guardrail
10'
10'
Shoulder Line
Guardrail Transition (Approach Section)
Approach Slab
As Required For Redirective Crash Cushion
Special Blocks As Required
Guardrail Panels And Lengths Same
Bridge
12'
C. C.
(See Sheet 9)
As Taper Side For Plan Quantities
DERS
DGE SHOUL
0'BRI
TH 1
ANS WI
MEDI
Transition Section
Bridge
6'
Shoulder Line
(See Detail W)
Guardrail
Special Blocks
(See Sheet 9)
As Required
Misc. Asphalt
M edian
8'
6'
4'
See Index No. 402
Median
10' Min.
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
Approach Slab
Guardrail Transition (Approach Section)
Bridge
8'
4'
6'
C. C.
Shoulder Line
As Required For Redirective Crash Cushion

Guardrail Panels And Lengths Same
As Taper Side For Plan Quantities
DERS
DGE SHOUL
'BRI
TH 6
ANS WI
MEDI
Note: The guardrail configurations shown apply only to parallel or near parallel bridges with open medians.
W idth (
CZ )
Clear Z one
GUARDRAIL LENGTHS
e
n
i
eL
ur
t
par
De
6' BRIDGE SHOULDERS
MEDIAN
WIDTH
1:10 TAPER RATE
10' BRIDGE SHOULDERS
1:15 TAPER RATE
1:10 TAPER RATE
1:15 TAPER RATE
(Ft.)
PANELS (No.)
LENGTH (Ft.)
PANELS (No.)
LENGTH (Ft.)
PANELS (No.)
LENGTH (Ft.)
PANELS (No.)
LENGTH (Ft.)
30
12.5
156.25
18.5
231.25
6.5
81.25
9.5
118.75
28
11.5
143.75
16.5
206.25
5.5
68.75
7.5
93.75
Crash Cushion Located On
26
9.5
118.75
14.5
181.25
5.5*
68.75
5.5*
68.75
Opposing Roadway Shoulder
24
8.5
106.25
11.5
143.75
5.5*
68.75
5.5*
68.75
C. C.
Point Of Impact Speed (S
)
L (Runout Length)
The lengths shown in this table are based on standard widths for roadway and bridge median shoulders. Length requirements for both
standard width and narrow bridge shoulders and end anchorage or end shielding requirements shall be determined on a site specific basis.
Speed (S ) For Determining Crash Cushion Size:
x
S = (Design Speed) =
(CZ-d)
Design Speed
CZ
When crash cushions are required on opposing roadway shoulders, their sizes may be determined by the residual speeds (S
's) along the
runouts from the approach roadways; however, when calculated speeds (S 's) are less than 30 mph crash cushions shall be no less in size
than for 30 mph; see speed diagram left. The number of panels may be reduced when installing a crash cushion more than 2.5' in width;
see * below.
1:
01:
04 PM
OCATED
ONS L
NG CRASH CUSHI
ZI
SI
DERS
NG ROADWAY SHOUL
ON OPPOSI
*Number shown is the minimum number of panels plus a W-Thrie beam transition panel; single faced guardrail must have a length of five (5)
or more panels.
12/3/2015
NG
I
L
C RAI
TH SAFETY SHAPE TRAFFI
DGES WI
L TREATMENTS FOR BRI
APPROACH GUARDRAI
LAST
REVISION
06/06/14
REVISIO N
DERS
USH SHOUL
TH FL
ANS WI
N NARROW MEDI
ENGTH I
AB L
L APPROACH SL
ESS THAN FUL
NG L
EXTENDI
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
11of 26
EGEND
L
1 Edge of traffic lane for simple curve turnouts.
Edge of travel lane for taper turnouts.
2 Taper.
RADIAL GUARDRAIL
3 Pavement return (radius R).
Normal Turnouts
4 Flared end anchorage to be installed except when existing
guardrail on intersecting drive or side road adjoins the
11
3
5 Post for locating flare, proximate to PC or PT:
No. 2 post for Radii 25' or less.

No. 3 post for Radii
> 25' and < 50'.
RADIAL GUARDRAIL
Between No. 4 and No. 5 posts for Radii 50' or greater.
Post for locating flare, proximate to PC or PT:
Simple Curve
Panels
project.
Taper
Panels
Required
Required
8556'
15'
25'
8556'
25'
20'
25'
8556'
25'
8556'
25'
25'
8556'
25'
8556'
30'
25'
8556'
25'
8556'
35'
25'
8556'
25'
8556'
40'
40'
8931'
40'
8931'
45'
40'
8931'
40'
8931'
50'
40'
8931'
40'
8931'
No. 3 post for Radii 25' or less.

Note: Only 25' and 40' radius panels are to be used for
Between No. 4 and No. 5 posts for Radii greater than 25'.
return guardrail on normal turnouts. On skewed

turnouts the number of panels used and their
7 Expanded shoulder for guardrail.
arrangement with straight panels will be as shown

in the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
8 Expanded shoulder for flared guardrail end anchorage.
Intersecting Drive
Or Side Road
9 Shoulder in absence of guardrail.
10 Flared end anchorage assembly.
Intersecting Drive
Varies
Or Side Road
11 Radial guardrail to be installed when guardrail required on the
intersecting drive or side road (radius R).
Varies
13
12 End anchorage Type II (radial return only).
13
13 Guardrail installation limited to roadway right of way unless
otherwise called for in the plans.
13
13
10
5
10
10
10
6
11
11
12
12
PC or PT
PC or PT
12
Roadway
11
PC or PT
11
Roadway
12
PC or PT
SIMPLE CURVE TURNOUTS
TAPER TURNOUTS
Note: The guardrail application shown on this sheet are for highways with flush
shoulders and no restraints for constructing flared end anchorages and minimum
lengths of guardrail. For highways with flush shoulders and restraints to
constructing flared anchorages, see General Note No. 6.
1:
01:
05 PM
Where openings in guardrail are required in close proximity to bridge traffic

rails or ends of concrete barrier walls, and minimum length guardrail with
flared end anchorages can not be applied, either controlled release returns
12/3/2015
or energy absorbing terminals are to be applied.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/04
REVISIO N
GUARDRAIL APPLICATIONS FOR INTERSECTING DRIVES AND SIDE ROADS ON RURAL FACILITIES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
12 of 26
3'
02
0.
)
d.
St
(
4"
D
i
re
ct
i
on
Of
G
ua
Tr
r
av
TR drai
el
l
AN Om
SI itt
TI ed
F
O
N rom
D
I
K
E
25
(
S
'
ho
S
ho
ul
de
ul
de
r
Gu
r
Gu
t
t
er
t
t
er
To
Gu Tra
ns
t
t
er
i
t
i
on
W
i
t
h
D
i
ke
)
S
ho
ul
de
r
Ne
ar
E
dg
e
PI Vi
C ew
TO
RI
AL
5
8"
Of
3
4"
And Nut With 1
Tr
af
fi
c
5
8"
x18.5" Long Upper And
17.5" Long Lower Post Bolt
06
0.
Gu
t
t
er
)
d.
St
(
La
ne
x20" Long Upper And
19" Long Lower Post Bolt

3
4"
OD Steel
And Nut With 1
Washers Under Nuts
7'-6"
OD Steel
2'-4"
Washers Under Nuts

End Shoulder
Gutter
6" Dike
Transition
1'
-9"
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.

With Dike
6"
0.06
7"
0
.
0
2(
St
d
.
)
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
SECTION CC
3
8"
3'-7
SECTION DD
SECTION EE
5
8"
21"x12"x
Thrie-Beam
Terminal Connector Plate
SECTION CC
SECTION DD
APPLICATIONS
Single Face Guardrail
22"
3
4"
19
8"
13
16"
22"
3
4"
2"
19
4"
1
1 2"
Double Face Guardrail With
1
1 4"
8"
Double Face Guardrail With
1
4"
Special
All Holes Are 1"
Galvanized Steel
Back
Contoured
Filler Plate
SPECIAL GALVANIZED STEEL FILLER PLATE
1
8"
3
8"
4
Steel Posts
8"x8"x1
1
8"
6
5
Timber Posts
1
8"
1
8"
3
8"
5
8"
5
8"
7
8"
1
2"
nom.
1
2"
nom.
3
4"
1
2"
nom.
5" nom.
1
2"
nom.
4" nom.
3
4"
1
4"
Back
Contoured
BLOCK FOR
BLOCK FOR
SECTION CC
SECTION DD
For Double Face Guardrail Connections To Median Bridge Traffic Railing Barrier,
See Index No. 410, GUARDRAIL CONNECTION TO BARRIER WALL APPROACH ENDS.
FOR USE AT SECTION BB

1:
01:
07 PM
THRIE-BEAM OFFSET BLOCKS FIELD TRIMMED FOR USE AT SECTIONS CC & DD
GUARDRAIL APPROACH TRANSITION AND CONNECTION FOR BRIDGES WITH SAFETY SHAPE
12/3/2015
TRAFFIC RAILING BARRIERS EXTENDING FULL LENGTH OF APPROACH SLAB
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
DETAIL J
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
13 of 26
See Index Nos. 420, 422, 423, 424, 425, and 5210 For Barrier End Details
Approach Slab And Bridge Traffic Railing Barrier
Standard W-Beam Blockout
Thrie-Beam
End Measurement For
Terminal
Midspan Splice
Guardrail Payment
Connector
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(m)
(l)
(n)
(o)
1
1'-1 2"
3'
12'-6"
12'-6" Thrie-Beam
Panel (Nested)
25' Thrie-Beam Panel
12'-6" Thrie-Beam Panel
12'-6" W-Beam Panel (Nested)
6'-3" W-Thrie
Beam Transition
Standard Guardrail,
Panel
56'-3" Guardrail Transition
Special Transition Or Other Special Treatment
ELEVATION VIEW
Note:
Post Alpha Designations l, m, n, and o will have
a Standard 6"x8"x14" Wooden W-beam Blockout.
5
8"
21"x12"x
Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector Plate (Back-Up Plate)

1
4"
and 8"x8"x1
7
8"
Special Galvanized Steel Filler Plate.

1
2"
x15" Long HS Hex Bolts (3
And Nuts (5 Reqd.) With
1
2 4"
Min. Thread Length)
Shoulder Break Point
OD Plain Round Washers
Under Heads And Nuts.

1
c
1 2"c
'
8@ 3
3'
3
c
6 4"c
'
6@ 1
D
2'
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
l
a
c
i
p
y
"T
3
'
6
For Other Flare Offsets And Parallel Alignments See Sheets Nos. 6, 7, 8 and 9
Arc
d
e
t
s
"Ne
6
'
2
1
Approach Slab

Shoulder Gutter
25' Shoulder Gutter Transition (Shoulder Gutter To Gutter With Dike)
G
Direction Of Travel
E
PLAN VIEW - GUARDRAIL, SHOULDER GUTTER AND SHOULDER TRANSITIONS
7'-6"
7'-6"
GUARDRAIL TRANSITION NOTE
3'-6"
4'
4'
When shoulder gutter is required, the 25' long dike transition,
W-Thrie Beam
1'-6"
Transition Panel
6"
shown in the 'PLAN' and 'PICTORIAL' above, is required. Double
Standard
offset blocks are shown for guardrail installations adjacent to
Shoulder
shoulder gutter/dike transitions; single offset blocks shall be
Begin Shoulder
Shoulder Gutter
0
.
0
6(
St
d
.
)
0.06
2'
-1"
Line
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
Gutter Transition
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
installed in absence of shoulder gutter. Nested rails shall not

be bolted to the blocks and posts at posts (a), (c), and (e). One
0
.
0
6(
St
d
.
)
0.06
16d galvanized nail shall be driven between each post and block,
and between double blocks, in order to prevent block rotation,
3'
3'
see '16d NAIL FOR PREVENTION OF OFFSET BLOCK ROTATION',

this Index.
SECTION FF
1:
01:
08 PM
SECTION GG
GUARDRAIL APPROACH TRANSITION AND CONNECTION FOR BRIDGES WITH SAFETY SHAPE
12/3/2015
TRAFFIC RAILING BARRIERS EXTENDING FULL LENGTH OF APPROACH SLAB
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
DETAIL J
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
13A of 26
Existing 1'-9" Guardrail Mounting Height
Guardrail Mounting Height Transition
Proposed 2'-1" Guardrail Mounting Height
25'-0"
Post Mounted
6'-3"
1
2"
3'-1
6'-3"
6'-3"
6'-3"
6'-3"
1
2"
3'-1
Midspan Panel
1
2"
3'-1
6'-3"
Splice
1'
-9"
2'
-1"
Panel Splice
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
ELEVATION VIEW
Note:
1.
The W-beam Guardrail Mounting Height Transition from 1'-9" to 2'-1" shall
be used to connect to existing 1'-9" guardrail at the project limits or in
1:
01:
09 PM
special cases as determined by the Engineer.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TRANSITION FROM 1'-9" TO 2'-1" W-BEAM GUARDRAIL MOUNTING HEIGHT
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
13B of 26
Rubble Protection (Sand-Cement
Rubble Protection (Sand-Cement
Protection When Specified)
Protection When Specified)
Wing Wall
Bridge Traffic Railing Barrier
15'
Bridge
Varies (15' Min.)
30' Approach Slab With Bridge Traffic Railing Barrier
BRIDGES OVER STREAMS
BRIDGES OVER STREAMS
Limit Of Slope Pavement At Roadways

And Sand Cement Protection At Railroads
45
Sand-Cement Protection
12"
1'-6" R (Min.)
Wing Wall
Bridge Traffic Railing Barrier
Bridge
30' Approach Slab With Bridge Traffic Railing Barrier
BRIDGES OVER ROADWAYS OR RAILROADS
BRIDGES OVER RAILROADS
For Additional Information See Index No. 402
For Additional Guardrail Information See Sheet 13
SKETCHES - BRIDGES WITH SAFETY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILING
SKETCHES - BRIDGES WITH SAFETY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILING
BARRIER EXTENDING LESS THAN FULL APPROACH SLAB LENGTH
BARRIER EXTENDING FULL APPROACH SLAB LENGTH
SKETCH NOTES
1. These sketches are for showing shoulder interface between roadways and bridges where crossings are normal to
other roadways, railroads and streams. For site specific applications and details see the plans and the FDOT
Structures Design Office "Detailing Manual" and "Design Guidelines".
2. Shoulder treatments shown in these sketches are for locations with shoulder gutter; shoulder hinge location will
1:
01:
09 PM
vary for facilities without shoulder gutter.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/04
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
SHOULDER INTERFACE BETWEEN ROADWAYS AND BRIDGES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
14 of 26
4'
Normal Face Of Guardrail
3'
6"
Varies
(See Detail K)
Varies
Varies
Varies
4'-6" (Min.)
Varies
See Plan Below
(See Detail K)
Shoulder Pavt.
Shoulder Pavt.
3'
2" Misc.
Shoulder Gutter
SHOULDER WITH OR WITHOUT 5' PAVEMENT
6"
6"
6"
PAVED SHOULDERS
Asphalt Pavt.
SHOULDER GUTTER
DOUBLE FACE RAIL
MISCELLANEOUS PAVING FOR STANDARD GUARDRAIL SECTIONS
Shoulder Line
1
:
1
5 To No
r
ma
l
Sh
o
u
l
d
e
r Br
e
a
k Po
i
n
t
Misc. Asphalt
3'
Pavt.
30'
Extended Shoulder
10'
Normal Face
8'
Of Guardrail
8'
Of Guardrail
6'-6"
Paved Or Unpaved Shoulders

When Called For In The Plans
Varies
Varies
Misc. Asphalt Pavt. With
Norm al Shoulder
See Detail K
3'
Not Steeper
4'
Than 1:10
1:6 For 20'
4'
Than 1:10
Clear Zone
1:3 (Max.) For
Transition Slope
20' Clear Zone

3'
3'
1:3 (Max.)
1:3 (Max.) For

14' Clear Zone
1:6 Reference Line
SHOULDER WITH OR WITHOUT 5' PAVEMENT
6'-6"
Not Steeper
Shoulder Line
20'
Normal Face
SECTION AA (EXAMPLE FOR 30' CLEAR ZONE)
SECTION AA (EXAMPLE FOR 20' CLEAR ZONE)
1
:
1
5 To No
r
ma
l
Sh
o
u
l
d
e
r Br
e
a
k Po
i
n
t
Extended Shoulder
10'
30'
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
Normal Face
2' Std.
8'
Of Guardrail
Normal Face
Traffic Lane
Of Guardrail
Not Steeper
4'
Than 1:10
Varies
Varies
See Detail K
6'-6"
Transition Slope
Shoulder Pavt.
Varies
1:3 (Max.)
PAVED SHOULDERS
*12' For Shoulders 10' And Wider; 8' For Median

Shoulders 8' Or Less In Width; and, Shoulder Width
Plus 2' For All Others Shoulders.
1:6 Reference Line
SECTION BB (EXAMPLE FOR 30' CLEAR ZONE)
STANDARD LOCATIONS
For Guardrail on slopes see Sheet 26.
1
:
1
5 To No
r
ma
l
Sh
o
u
l
d
e
r Br
e
a
k Po
i
n
t
Shoulder Line
3'
GUARDRAIL LOCATION-DETAIL K
Extended Shoulder
10'
On 0.06 Rise
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
30'
6"
8'
6"
**
Shoulder Gutter
Normal Face
Varies
** 8' For 6' Shoulders 10' For 8' Shoulders 12' For 10' And 12'
1:
01:
10 PM
Of Guardrail
Shoulders Applies To Left And Right Side Shoulders. (See Index

No. 525 For Shoulder Widths And Shoulder Gutter Locations On
Transition Slope
Ramps And Auxiliary Lanes)

Shoulder Pavt.
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:6 Reference Line
SHOULDERS, SLOPES AND MISCELLANEOUS PAVING FOR FLARED END ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLIES
07/01/09
1:3 (Max.)
SHOULDER GUTTER
LAST
7'
Shoulder Gutter
REVISION
4'
SECTION CC (EXAMPLE FOR 30' CLEAR ZONE)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
15 of 26
M14x18 or W14x22
16d Galvanized Nail (Timber And
Structural Shape
1
4"
1
4"
2
Non-Form Fit Composite Blocks Only)
1
8"
1
8"
PERMI
SSI
BL
E POST AND OFFSET BL
OCK COMBI
NATI
ONS
17"
7"
7
8"
VIEW
10"
CUTAWAY
16d Galvanized Nail
POSTS
OFFSET BLOCKS
REMARKS
Post bolt hole in timber and composite blocks to be centered
1
4").
Timber 6"x8"x14" (Nominal) For

W-Beam And 6"x8"x22"
40
Timber
All timber offset blocks shall be dressed on all four sides (S4S).
(Nominal) For Thrie-Beam
6"
Timber Or Composite
Block
STEEL POST
POST
TIMBER POST
FACE
SIDE VIEW
All Holes Are
16d NAIL FOR PREVENTION OF
of block (see detail left).
FACE
Timber 6"x8"x14" (Nominal) For
13
16"
W-Beam And 6"x8"x22"
Same as above for timber and composite blocks except that form fit
(Nominal) For Thrie-Beam
composite block holes align with holes in steel posts and do not
Steel
W6x8.5, W6x9 Or 6" C
STEEL MODIFIED THRIE-BEAM
OFFSET BLOCK ROTATION
One 16d galvanized nail per block is to be used to prevent rotation
Composite (See Notes)
TRAFFIC
require nails.
Composite (See Notes)
OFFSET BLOCK
5
1
8"x1 2"
Steel
W6x8.5, W6x9 Or 6" C
long hex head bolts with full length thread and nuts
5
8"
W14x22x17" (M14x18x17")
(2 Reqd.) and
(Steel Modified Thrie-Beam)
steel block to post. Bolts are to be installed in opposite holes,
plain round washers (4 Reqd.) for mounting
top and bottom.

Post Bolt
Steel Modified Thrie-Beam

Offset Blocks See Detail
Notes: 1. Timber and composite offset blocks of comparable size and shape can be intermixed within a run of rail.
Rub Rail When Called For

Post Bolt
Left And Table Above)
By Location In The Plans

2. Composite offset blocks shall be in conformance with Section 536 of the Specifications and be included on
Panel Bolt
(On One Or Both Sides
W-BEAM
2'
3'
-11"
Varies (3' Min.)
1, GENERAL NOTE 16.
W-BEAM WITH RUB RAIL
Std.
3'
-7"
2'
-4"
12"
For Additional Information)
Std.
Std.
3'
-10"
2'
-1"
the Approved Products List. For additional information on composite offset block installations refer to Sheet
As Specified, See Sheet 26
MODIFIED THRIE-BEAM
Post Bolts
Post Bolts
THRIE-BEAM
SINGLE FACED GUARDRAIL
2'
-1"
2'
-1"
Line
6"
.
d
6 St
0
.
0
For Median With Swale.
Environmental Or Other Restrictions

Prohibit Normal Shoulder Extension
Shoulder
4'
For Narrow Medians With No

Median Swale. See Sheet 26
*Front Slope When Right Of Way,
2'
-1"
Lip of Gutter
Edge Of Shoulder Pavement
Varies

Std.
Varies (3' Min.)
Std.
3'
-10" 1'
-9"

-1"
3'
-10" 2'
Std.
3'
-10"
1'
-9"
Post Bolt
W-BEAM
THRIE-BEAM
DOUBLE FACED GUARDRAIL
Y = 6" Or Greater
Y = Less Than 6"
Shoulder Gutter
NOTE:
For location of guardrail with offset behind curb and
1:
01:
10 PM
gutter refer to the PPM, Volume 1, Chapter 4.
MOUNTI
NG HEI
GHTS ON SHOUL
DERS AND I
N MEDI
ANS
LOCATION AT CURB & GUTTER SECTIONS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DETAIL L
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
16 of 26
Barrier
Barrier
Delineator
Delineator
BARRIER DELINEATOR NOTES

1. Barrier delineators shall conform to Section 993.
**
200'
100'
75'
50'
25'
2. Barrier delineator color (white or yellow) shall conform to the color of
the near lane edgeline.
Steel Post
Wood Post
Note: Adjustment in spacing may be required to fit exact guardrail lengths
3. Barrier delineators installed on median guardrail shall have
as directed by the Engineer. For minimum installations (length 62.5') provide
retro-reflective sheeting on both sides of the barrier delineator.
one barrier delineator at each end and one at the approximate center.
PICTORIAL VIEW
4. The cost for barrier delineators shall be included in the contract unit
BARRIER DELINEATOR MOUNTING
**For curves greater than 2 the spacing shall be reduced to 100' increments through the curve.
price for Guardrail.
BARRIER DELINEATOR SPACING
BARRIER DELINEATORS - DETAIL M
5
8"
Bracket And Pipe Holes With
Long Hex Bolt And Nut With
1
2"
1
1
2"x3 2"
NPS 2 Sch. 40
Galv. Pipe Rail Per
Plain Round
ASTM F1083
Washer (Upset Threads After Tightening)

Install Pipe Rail Over Pipe Rail End Fixture And
1
With 2"
1
1
2"x3 2"
Attach Pipe Rail End Fixture To Post With
Long Hex Bolts And Nuts
"x7" Long Hex Bolts And Nuts
Plain Round Washers Under Heads And
1
With 2"
1
2
1
4"
1
3
4"
Plain
Bolt And Nut With
Round Washers Under Heads And Nuts
Nuts (2 Reqd.) (Upset Threads After Tightening)
End Anchorage
(2 Reqd.) (Upset Threads After Tightening)
Assembly
End Anchorage
5
8"
5
8"x2"
Long Hex
Plain Round Washers
(Upset Threads After Tightening)

This Post Shall
Be Timber Only
Steel Post
Assembly
Bracket Hole With
2"
Thru-bolt With
Steel Guardrail Post

Steel Guardrail Post
Pipe Rail
Guardrail Beam
End Fixture
1
4"
Pipe Rail
Timber Post
Top Of Curb
Timber Offset Block
2'
-1"
20" R
Steel Post
Offset Block
1"
Pipe Rail
1
1
2"x2"x 4"x4"
PLAN
Offset From
Of Guardrail Post
4"
Pipe Rail End Fixture
Gutter
1
8"
Long Angle
Bracket (Galvanized)
Lip Of Gutter
Guardrail Beam
1
4"
VIEW A
ELEVATION
VIEW B
PIPE RAIL MOUNTING
NOTES
<4'
1. Pipe Rail is required on steel guardrail posts when the front
of sidewalks or shared use paths are located 4' or less from
Pipe Rail
1
4"
Pipe rail shall terminate at the
first post of the end anchorage assembly. Begin and end the
Pipe Rail in accordance with the PIPE RAIL END FIXTURE
1
1 2"
Sch. 40
(See Pipe Rail

1"
behind the back of the post.
Steel Pipe
l
ne
Pa
l
i
a
dr
ar
Gu
Mounting Detail)
75
detail.
anchorage assembly requirements and GENERAL NOTE 16. b.
6"
3"
2"
6"
1"
Refer to Sheet 1, GENERAL NOTE 6 for guardrail end
pe
Pi
1
4
l
i
Ra
e
gl
An
et
ck
ra
B
VI
EW
B
1"
for offset block requirements.
3"
W
E
VI
2. When guardrail with timber posts are located with the back of
5
8"
et
fs
Of
st
Po
l
i
a
dr
ar
Gu
l
ee
t
S
k
oc
l
B
post 4' or less from the near front of sidewalks or shared
All Holes Shall Be
use paths, the bolt ends will require one of the following
Galvanize After Drilling And Welding

STEEL POST
treatments:
SECTION
PIPE RAIL END FIXTURE
Sidewalk or
Shared Use Path
PICTORIAL
1:
01:
11 PM
a. Trim back flush with the face of nut and metalize or

b. Use post bolts 15" in length with washers and nuts counter
1
2"
sunk into sinks 1" to 1
deep or
c. Use post bolts 15" in length with sleeve nuts and washers.
FOR L
OCATI
ONS USED BY PEDESTRI
ANS OR BI
CYCL
I
STS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
PEDESTRI
AN SAFETY TREATMENTS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
17 of 26
B
C
k
l
wa
de
Si
)
.
n
Mi
; 4'
d.
'St
s -5
e
i
r
a
V
h
t
d
Wi
(
Sidewalk Without Utility Strip
20'R
SAFETY TREATMENTS
6'
6'
-6"
See PEDESTRIAN
2" Misc. Asphalt
Location Station
This Standard Post Must
21'-6" (Curb And Gutter Flare)
3'
13'
6'-8"
10'
3'
3'
10'
Curb And Gutter Type F
Be Timber When Steel Post

Used In Guardrail Ahead
Flared End Anchorage Assembly
Curb Transition
1
2")
End Anchorage Assembly - MELT (40'-7
Transition
(MELT Shown)
35'-4" Drop Curb
See Detail L
C
45'
Notes
PLAN
1. END ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY, TYPE MELT Details and Notes are Shown
for Maintaining Existing Installations Only.
Varies 0'-9" Min.
2. For Specific Details, Offset Requirements, and Special Treatments of
Sidewalk (Varies)
See Note 2
Proprietary End Anchorage Assembly - Flared Systems, see the
3. Test Level 2 Crash Tested End Anchorage Assemblies Shown on the
2'
-1"
Approved Products List (APL).

2" Misc. Asphalt
)
.
d
St
2(
0
.
0
APL are Suitable For Design Speeds Less Than or Equal to 45 mph.
SECTION CC
Varies 1'-1" Min.
Sidewalk (Varies)
2'
-1"
See Note 2
2" Misc. Asphalt
)
.
d
St
2(
0
.
0
SECTION BB
4'
2'
-1"
Sidewalk (Varies)
1:
01:
12 PM
)
.
d
St
2(
0
.
0
2" Misc. Asphalt
SECTION AA
12/3/2015
APPROACH TREATMENT FOR CURB AND GUTTER
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DETAIL Q
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
18 of 26
3" Min.
3
8"
Approach Beam,
Steel
End Section Or
Washer Under Nut
End Shoe
15
16"
29
1
32"x1 8"
Hole (Typ.)
(4 Reqd.)
5
Note: 8"
CE
I
L SPL
BEAM RAI
W-
Contour To Fit
Over Beam
Slot
1
4"
1
4"
2"
30
Slot
5
8"
3
1
4"x2 2"
3
1
4"x2 2"
1'
-4
With
1
2"
Varies
Slots
(Typ.) (8 Reqd.)
29
1
32"x1 8"
29
1
32"x1 8"
Slots
Steel washer required with splice bolts
Slots
ON
ROUNDED END SECTI
FLARED END SECTION
AL END SHOE
SPECI
1
2"
Varies
(Typ.) (4 Reqd.)
(Typ.) (8 Reqd.)
1
2"
2"
1
8"
Slots With
Post Bolt And Nut
1
2"
2"
1
4"
1
4"
1
2"
3"
12
Type MELT
1
4"
1
8"
Or End Shoe
1
4"
With End Anchorage
1
4"
4"
1
1
2" 3 2"
Terminal Section
x 2
4"
2"
12
3
4"
Hole For Use
12
3
4"
Trailing Beam,
Type MELT)
1'
-4
And Nuts (8 Reqd.)
1
4 4"
1'
-9" or 2'
-6"
Lap
1
4 4"
R When Used
For End Anchorage
30
Long
3
8"
1
4"
x 1
Button Head Bolts
1
2"
(10
R
1 4"
6
Over Beam
5
8"
Metalizing Permitted
Direction Of Traffic
1'-3" R Standard
Contour To Fit
Neutral Axis
10"
(8 Per Beam)
With
3"
and CRT. Field Bend With
1
4"
Slots
1
8" Approx.
1
8"
x 1
1'
-4
Anchorage Type MELT

29
32"
1
2"
2'-3
2'-6"
For End
12
1
2
25
3"
1
2"
3
16"
29
1
32"x1 8"
Base Metal
1
16"
1"x
Thickness
3
4"
3
1
4"x2 2"
Slot
1
4"
7
8"
3
8"
12
15
16"
3
8"
5
8"
anchorage assembly details. Washers are to be used where necessary
3
32"
Slot
For beam washer requirements on end terminals, see individual end
11
16"x1"
Note:
ON
BUFFER END SECTI
11
16"
1
1 4"
7
32"
(Typ.) (4 Reqd.)
6"
(Both Sides)
5
16"
Slots
12"
Deep Recess
5
ED
FI
8"MODI
to accomplish alignment or where the posts bolt head shows tendency
HEAVY
RECESSED NUT)
HEX NUT (
to pull through the rail slot. Washers installed on guardrail, between
Note: For application information see individual
end anchorages, prior to July 1, 1990 may remain in place until the
end anchorage assembly details.
15
16"
guardrail is relocated or until repairs require removal and

reinstallment of a post bolt.
W-BEAM BACK-UP PLATE
THREAD
L
Slot
1
8"
Rail Splice Bolt
Slots
Timber Or Composite Offset

Base
10"
4"
Post Bolt -
Metal Thickness
4"
SPACING (Ft.)
As An Option, A Single 25"*
6'-3"
Long Post Bolt May Be Used
1
3'-1 2"
Post Bolt - Single Faced Guardrail Timber Posts
3
4"
1'-6
SINGLE BEAMS
W-Beam
5'-0"
Thrie-Beam
Of Beam
W-Beam
Thrie-Beam
N/A
N/A
3'-10"
3'-10"
3'-2"
3'-0"
2'-10"
3'-2"
2'-10"
2'-8"
2'-6"
Post Bolt - Double Faced Guardrail Timber Posts

4"
Double Faced Guardrail Steel Posts
Note:
Special bolts having lengths of 10" or greater shall have a thread length of
The round washer is not intended for use under the recess nut for
not less than 4".
post bolt nut for connecting the beam to the timber post and offset
required, the Contractor may use a 5/8" threaded rod (field cut to
blocks; for connecting the beam to steel posts with timber offset
length). A hex nut and beam washer shall be used at the guardrail face with
blocks; under the hex bolt head for securing the beam anchor plate to
no more than
5
8"
hex bolts
1:
01:
12 PM
and nuts and under hex nut for connecting rub rail to wood and steel
3
4"
anchorage assembly details, SPECIAL STEEL GUARDRAIL POSTS,

SPECIAL END SHOE, W-BEAM RAIL SPLICE, THRIE-BEAM RAIL SPLICE,
Sheet
Thickness
development is understood.
MINIMUM OFFSETS FOR SINGLE FACED GUARDRAIL (Ft.)
of the threaded rod projecting beyond the top of the nut.
10( 1)
Tolerance
3
16"
(-0,+
1
16")
1
3 4"
BEAM
W-
The projecting thread on both ends shall be distorted to secure the nuts, and
both ends of the threaded rod metalized with organic zinc-rich coating.
HS Hex bolts for THRIE-BEAM TERMINAL CONNECTORS shall conform to the
posts. For supplemental information see BEAM ANCHOR PLATE,

PERMISSIBLE POST AND OFFSET BLOCK COMBINATIONS, individual end
3
8"R
111 "
6
develop offset values from the simulated deflection
cautioned to proceed only if background in the table

For applications where special bolts having lengths greater than 25" are
the beam; and, for general guardrail connections by
supported by empirical validation. Those desiring to
Delfections" of the AASHTO Roadside Design Guide are
recess nut for connecting the beam to the special end shoe; under the
21
32"
The values shown should be utilized unless changes are
values shown in Table 5-6, "Summary of Maximum
the beam to beam rail splice. The washer is required under the
1
2 4"
Note:
25"*
15
16"
NESTED BEAMS
55
18"
Block(s) On Steel Post
POST
55
9
64"
1
4"
Of Above Ground Rigid Hazard
Single Or Double Faced Guardrail
3
4"
11
16"
Measured From Face Of Guardrail To Front
Full Length
3
1
4"x2 2"
5
16"
1
4"
OFFSETS (Ft.)
BEAM WASHER
12
29
1
32"x1 8"
1
4"
APPLICATION
(Min.) (In.)
25
LENGTH
(In.)
55
ATE WASHER)
AR PL
RECTANGUL
(
requirements of ASTM A449 (Type 1) with heavy hex nuts and washers. All
*Use of the 25" AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA standard length post bolt on double faced
guardrail that results in the bolt projecting more than
the nut after pull-up shall be trimmed to
3
4"
3
4"
beyond the face of
reveal and metalized with
and THRIE-BEAM TERMINAL CONNECTOR details.
other hex bolts shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A563. Bolts, nuts
and washers shall be hot dip galvanized. Heavy hex nut may be used in lieu
of hex nuts and hex nuts used for jam nuts.
12/3/2015
organic zinc-rich coating.
LAST
REVISION
06/06/14
REVISIO N
5
TEEL WASHER
8"S
5
8"
OVAL SHOULDER BUTTON HEAD BOLT
HEX BOLTS AND NUTS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
19 of 26
Steel
2" Nom. Dia.
5"
1"x7" Stud, Full Threads,
1
4"
2"
Galvanized (Both Ends)
5
8"
1
3
8"
Long Hex Head Bolts
And Nuts With Plain Round

4"
4"
4"
2"
Washers Under Heads (8 Reqd.)
Hex Nut
8"
11
16"
7"
5
1
8"-11x1 2"
16"
(2.067" ID, 2.375" OD)
3
4"
6"
Hex (Jam) Nut
Swage Fitting
Holes (Typ.) (8 Reqd.)
3
4"
Holes
1
8"
4"
3
8"
Swage Connected To Studs

Note:
35
Washer (2" OD,
8"
Cable assemblies shall be in accordance with the specifications
1
16"
BREAKAWAY TERMINAL
of AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA 'A Guide To Standardized Highway Barrier
Hole
3
4"
Galvanized Cable (6x19)
Cable Assembly
3
4"
3
8"
W-Beam
1
4"
1" Anchor Rod And

15
16"
Anchor Plate
15
16"
5
8"
6'-6"
BEARING PLATE
ID,
9
64"
5
8"
Thick)
Steel End Plate

1
8"
With 1
assembly 9' in length with a swaged fitting on one (1) end is
1
2
12"
required for each end anchorage assembly Type CRT.
Holes
8"
9
(16"x12 16"x3/16")
Three
1
4
Center Hole
3
4"
23
Shaped Steel Plate

3
3
8"x2 4"x3"
POST SLEEVE
Hardware' Cable Anchor Assembly FCA01. An additional cable
33
8"
Sides
BACK VIEW
SECTIONS
6"
4"
4"
BEAM ANCHOR PLATE
2"
4"
2"
4"
1
2"
4"
12"
13
16"
8"
13
16"
1
2"
Hole
3
8"
12"
8"
12"
1
2"
2"
3
4"
24"
20" (
5
8"
3
4"
Holes
9"
21"
18"
Holes
1
)
4"
12"
3
4"
3
8"
Slot
5
8"
3
1
4"x2 2"
13
16"
7
8"
CABLE ASSEMBLY
9"
5
8"
9"
6"
Plate For Bridge Traffic Railing Barrier

1
4"
24"
Back-up plate required behind rail

9"
6"
9"
24"
1
4"
Plate For Barrier Walls
Plate
See Detail J For Application
Plate For All Applications
FILLER PLATE
SPECIAL END SHOE
THRIE-BEAM TERMINAL CONNECTOR
elements at intermediate (non-splice)

posts when steel offset block used.
All Holes 1" Except As Shown
THRIE-BEAM BACK-UP PLATE

1
4"
1
14"
GALVANIZED STEEL BACK-UP PLATES FOR CONNECTING SPECIAL END SHOES AND TERMINAL
Steel , Galvanized
CONNECTORS TO CONCRETE BRIDGE TRAFFIC RAILING BARRIERS AND CONCRETE BARRIER WALLS
SOIL PLATES
29
1
32"x1 8"
With
Lap
Slots (12 Per Beam)
5
1
8"x1 4"
Long Button Head
1
4 4"
3
3 8"
2'-6"
3"
Neutral Axis
1
4"
Bolts And Nuts (12 Reqd.)
Trailing Beam, W-Thrie
3
4"
2"
4"
1
4"
4"
Holes
1
4"
3"
Beam Transition Section
Neutral Axis
(2 Reqd.)
55
Slots
With
5
8"
Steel Washers
3
1
4"x2 2"
15
16"
Post Bolt Slot
29
3
32"x1 4"
Holes (Typ.)
1
4"
(12 Reqd.)
21
32"
Slots
Rotated 50 (Typ.)
(7 Reqd.)
Post Bolt
Slots (2 Reqd.)
Under Nuts (2 Reqd.)
55
15
16"
13
16"
Slots (2 Per Beam)
With Post Bolts And Nuts
1
20" (
4"
)
3
1
4"x2 2"
1
8"
29
1
32"x1 8"
1
4"
20" (
15
16"
About
1
)
4"
Symmetrical
3
1
x2 2" Slots
4"
Or Terminal Connector
Note:
1
4"
5
8"
steel
washer
required with splice bolts
111 "
6
Sheet
Thickness
3
16"
Beam Transition Section
25
1:
01:
13 PM
55
3
8"R
3
8"
Approach Beam, W-Thrie
THRIE-BEAM TERMINAL CONNECTOR
Or Terminal Connector
10( 1)
1
16")
Tolerance (-0,+
12/3/2015
THRIE-BEAM RAIL SPLICE

1
4"
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
THRIE-BEAM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
20 of 26
6'-3"
1
2"
1
2"
1
4"
1
4"
2" Min.
2" Min.
1
4"
1
4"
2"
1
8"
20"
1
4"
12
1
8"
2"
3'-1
1
4"
3'-1
3
1
4"x2 2"
3
1
4"x2 2"
Post Bolt
3
1
4"x2 2"
Post Bolt
Post Bolt
Slot
Slots (Typ.)
29
1
32"x1 8"
Slots (Typ.)
29
1
32"x1 8"
Splice Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
Splice Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
TRANSITION PANEL RIGHT
6'-3"
1
2"
1
2"
3'-1
1
4"
1
4"
2" Min.
2" Min.
Post Bolt
1
4"
2"
20"
1
4"
3
1
4"x2 2"
1
4"
1
8"
1
8"
12
1
4"
2"
3'-1
3
1
4"x2 2"
Post Bolt
3
1
4"x2 2"
Post Bolt
Slot
Slots (Typ.)
29
1
32"x1 8"
29
1
32"x1 8"
Splice Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
1:
01:
14 PM
Slots (Typ.)
Splice Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
TRANSITION PANEL LEFT
12/3/2015
ASYMMETRICAL W-THRIE BEAM TRANSITION PANEL
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
W-THRIE BEAM TRANSITION PANEL
RWT02 (AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA Report) 10 Gauge
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
20A of 26
12'-6"
6'-3"
1
2"
3'-1
1
2"
1
2"
3'-1
3'-1
1
1
4"4 4"
1
1
4"4 4"
2"
12
12
1
4"
1
4"
2"
1
2"
3'-1
3
1
4"x2 2"
Post Bolt
3
1
4"x2 2"
3
1
4"x2 2"
Post Bolt
Post Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
Slots (Typ.)
Slot
29
1
32"x1 8"
29
1
32"x1 8"
Splice Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
Splice Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
PANEL DETAIL
Guardrail Post (Typ)
Offset Block (Typ)
PLAN VIEW
TRAFFIC
Lap in Direction of Adjacent Traffic
W-Beam Midspan
W-Beam Midspan
Panel Splice
Panel Splice
2'
-1"
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
1:
01:
19 PM
ELEVATION VIEW
4-SPACE W-BEAM GUARDRAIL PANEL

RWM04a (AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA Report)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
12'-6" W-BEAM PANEL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
20B of 26
1
2"
15'-7
6'-3"
1
2"
3'-1
6'-3"
1
2"
1
2"
3'-1
3'-1
1
2"
1
2"
3'-1
3'-1
1
1
4"4 4"
1
1
4"4 4"
1
4"
2"
12
12
1
4"
2"
3
1
4"x2 2"
3
1
4"x2 2"
Post Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
3
1
4"x2 2"
29
1
32"x1 8"
Post Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
Post Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
Splice Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
29
1
32"x1 8"
Splice Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
PANEL DETAIL
Offset Block (Typ)
PLAN VIEW
TRAFFIC
2'
-1"
W-Beam Midspan
Panel Splice
1:
01:
20 PM
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
ELEVATION VIEW
Note:
1.
1
2"
The 5-Space 15'-7
W-beam Guardrail Panel shall be used
at the downstream end of an End Anchor System that
5-SPACE 15'-712" W-BEAM GUARDRAIL PANEL
12/3/2015
does not offset the W-beam Panel Splice to Midspan.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
15'-7 2" W-BEAM PANEL

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
20C of 26
1
2"
15'-7
6'-3"
6'-3"
1
2"
1
2"
3'-1
2"
1
2"
3'-1
1'-4"
1
1
4"4 4"
1
2"
3'-1
1'-0"
1
1
4"4 4"
2"
2"
12
12
1
4"
4" 4" 4"
1
2"
3'-1
1
4"
2"
3'-1
3
1
4"x2 2"
3
1
4"x2 2"
Post Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
3
1
4"x2 2"
29
1
32"x1 8"
Splice Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
Post Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
3
4"
Holes (Typ.)
Post Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
(8 Reqd.)
29
1
32"x1 8"
Splice Bolt
Slots (Typ.)
PANEL DETAIL
Offset Block (Typ)
PLAN VIEW
TRAFFIC
2'
-1"
Beam Anchor Plate Attachment
W-Beam Midspan
Panel Splice
1:
01:
20 PM
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
ELEVATION VIEW
Note:
1.
1
2"W-beam
The 5-Space 15'-7
Guardrail Panel with Beam Anchor Plate Attachment
5-SPACE 15'-712" W-BEAM GUARDRAIL PANEL
shall be used to Anchor the Type II or Type CRT End Anchorage Assemblies.
12/3/2015
WITH BEAM ANCHOR PLATE ATTACHMENT

1
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
15'-7 2" W-BEAM END ANCHORAGE PANEL

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
20D of 26
13
2"
1 2"
(4 Reqd.)
1
4
12
"
(See Note 3)
6"
6"
2" Recess
"
12
FOR REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING W8x18
Galvanized
Existing Structure
(See Note 3)
PROJ
ECTI
ON
GUARDRAIL POSTS ON APPROACH SLABS AND BRIDGES
3
16"
TS 8"x6"x
Anchor Hole
1
2"
SIDE VIEW
17"
Base Plate
Adjusting Nuts
Anchor Hole
TOP VIEW
FRONT VIEW
3"
1
2"x12"x12"
Standard Washers
5'
11
H
ol
es
3"
Nuts (8 Reqd.) &
1"
Slotted Hole
Part Of BEST System )
2" Recess
7"
1"
Adjusting Nuts
1" Holes
Base Plate
7
8"
Base Plate
(4 Reqd.), Hex
(
6'
-6" W hen Used As
14"
7"
(4 Reqd.)
Holes
Anchor Bolts
Slotted Holes
7
8"x14"x11"
M in.
1
2"
& Standard Washers
3
1
4"x1 2"
Galvanized
7"
1
4
Hex Nuts (8 Reqd.)

W8x18 Post
3
4"
3
4"x10"
M in.
Galvanized
Anchor Bolts (4 Reqd.),
7
8"x10"
4"
6"
W6x9 Post
See Notes Nos. 2 thru 5 Below.
5
*
8"
Varies
1
5 2"
Slotted Hole
5
*
8"
Varies
7"
11"
3
1
4"x1 2"
8"
Note:
7"
3
8"
1"
8"
W8x18 Post
W8x18 Post
SIDE VIEW
Open End
FOR CONSTRUCTI
ON OF GUARDRAI
L WHERE CUL
VERT,PI
ER FOOTI
NG
* Additional slotted hole required when mounting thrie-beam guardrail
EW
SIDE VIEW FRONT VI
OR OTHER STRUCTURE PRECL

UDES DRI
VEN POST I
NSTAL
L
ATI
ON
For Use In Combination With

NOTES: (SPECIAL STEEL POST)
3. Posts are to be plumbed by adjusting nuts or mortar seating. Posts installed using anchor bolts and adhesive
Short Timber Breakaway Post
anchors are to be set with adjusting nuts as detailed, unless the Engineer approves the use of mortar seating in lieu
1. See Index No. 402 for special steel posts required for construction and repair of guardrail transitions to
STEEL TUBE
of adjusting nuts. Posts installed using wedge anchors are to be set with mortar seating. Base plates shall be
bridge traffic railing barrier retrofits on existing bridges. See Structures Index Nos. 470 through 476 for
grouted with neat finish.
steel posts required to construct traffic railing barrier retrofits on existing bridges.
4. Adhesive-Bonded Anchors for Structural Applications shall comply with Section 937 and be installed in accordance with
2. Either anchor bolts, concrete wedge anchors or approved Adhesive-Bonded Anchors for
Section 416. Drilled hole diameter shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Structural Applications may be used. Anchor bolts, wedge anchors and adhesive anchors
shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi and galvanized in accordance with
5. Anchor holes and recesses shall be drilled; wedge anchor holes are to be drilled in accordance with the
ASTM A153 (stainless steel components may be substituted but components plated in
manufacturer's specifications. Encountered reinforcing steel shall be drilled through. Holes shall be thoroughly
accordance with ASTM B-633 are not acceptable). Adhesive anchor rods shall be equal in
cleaned when setting bolts and anchors and dry when setting wedge anchors.
diameter to that detailed for anchor bolts. Wedge anchors are to be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, assuming 3,000 psi compressive
6. Steel post and base units shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Any damaged galvanized areas are to be
strength for concrete. Wedge anchors shall also meet the following requirements:
metalized in accordance with Section 562 of the Standard Specifications.
a. tensile load each anchor: approach slabs 14,000 lbs.; other structures 8,000 lbs.
b.
7. Special steel guardrail posts are not to be incorporated into a guardrail approach end anchor system.
shear load each anchor: approach slabs 15,000 lbs.; other structures 7,800 lbs.
6"
6"
6"
SPECIAL STEEL GUARDRAIL POSTS
6"
8"
Nom.
Nom.
SIDE VIEW
13
16"
Hole When Rub Rail Called For WITH STANDARD

OFFSET BLOCKS
STEEL MODIFIED
THRIE-BEAM
1:
01:
21 PM
OFFSET BLOCKS
FRONT VIEW
All Holes Shall Be
FRONT VIEW
13
16"
SIDE
FRONT
VIEW
VIEW
FRONT VIEW
Terminal Post
7
8"
6'
H ole
1
2"
(
2 H oles Each Post)
2'
-1"
Hole
Sleeve In End
Post Only)
Hole
Required)
SIDE
FRONT
FRONT
SIDE
VIEW
EW
VI
EW
VI
VIEW
S4S And Treated
in any continuous run of guardrail. Posts to
For Use In Combination With Steel Tube
be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
W6x8.5 or W6x9 steel posts may be either rolled or welded structural shapes conforming to or exceeding the design properties of
ASTM A6/A6M. Welding shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A769/A769M. Posts shall be cut to length and the ends
SIDE
FRONT
VIEW
EW
VI
TIMBER POST
seal welded between web and flange before galvanizing. Posts to be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
SHORT TIMBER BREAKAWAY POST
CRT TIMBER POST
SPECIAL TIMBER GUARDRAIL POSTS
W6x8.5 OR W6x9 STEEL POST
STANDARD TIMBER AND STEEL GUARDRAIL POSTS

LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Treated
(When Rub Rail
6"-C STEEL POST
Note:
Breakaway
S4S And
Slot
1'
-4"
1
2"
5
8"
12"
Beam Post)
Note: 6"-C steel posts are to face the same direction
Identical Front And Back Flanges
Hole
(When Thrie
3
4"
THRIE-BEAM WITH
Hole
(Install
7"
-6"
6'
3
4"
6'
-6"
Hole When
Rub Rail Called For
THRIE-BEAM
3
8"
3
3
4"x2 4"
1'
-10"
7"
10"
6'
-9"
13
16"
W-BEAM
Hole
(+0,-
(Centered 1/4")
Flanges (Total 4 Holes)
13
16"
5
16")
3
4"
2 Holes Front And Back
All Holes
1
2"
6"
Nom.
Hole
1
(+0,- 4")
1
2"
0.25" R
8"
Nom.
3'
-10
0.170"
1
5 2"
5.
875"
7"
3
4"
12"
7"
5
8"
6'
-6"
12"
6'
-6"
1
1 8"
7
8"
1
1 8"
7"
1
1 8"
1
8"
4"
0.
75"
4"
7"
4.340"
4"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
21of 26
Only Single Special Post Shown

(Normal Location For Special Post)
Max. Variation In Location
Max. Variation In Location Of
For Single Special Post
One Of Two Special Posts
Max. Variation In Location On

Max. 2
Max. 2
Max. 2
Basis Of Estimate For Payment 2
ET TYPE 1
NL
CURB I
ET TYPE 2
NL
CURB I
Only Single Special Post Shown

(Normal Location For Offset Block)
Max.Variation In Location
2'
-1"
Min. 1
At Face Of Rail
Min. 2
Min. 1
2"
(Single Offset Block) (Double Offset Block)
Posts (W6x9
Post Shown)
Misc. Asphalt
Varies (
2'M in.
)
Varies (
4'
-7" M in. For W -Beam ,
NUMBER OF SPECIAL POSTS
4'
-7" M in. For Thrie-Beam )
Timber Or Steel
Foam Wrap
Class NS Conc.
(Do Not Add
For Single Special Post
Reinf. Steel)
3"
Of Special Post
ON
SECTI
15" For Steel Post Or

17" For Timber Post

(Single Offset Block) (Double Offset Block)
To Facilitate Post Replacement
Min. 1
Max. 1
Min. 1
Min. 1
Max. 2
Max. 1
Install With
Basis Of Payment 1
3
16"
Plastic Foam Sheet
On All Sides, Below The Surface Of
The Miscellaneous Asphalt Pavement.

Foam Or Timber Block-Out
For W6x9 Or 6" C Posts
PLAN
ON)
SQUARE OPTI
(
15" For Steel Post Or
ET TYPE 4
NL
CURB I
ET TYPE 3
NL
CURB I
Of Special Post
17" For Timber Post

Foam Wrap And Foam Or
Timber Block-Outs Same As
Min. 1
For Square Option Above.
Min. 2
Max. 1
Max. 2
Basis Of Payment 1
Basis Of Payment 2
PLAN
ON)
ROUND OPTI
(
Note: For line post applications only, i.e., not to be used
with breakaway post applications nor be used to
modify End Anchorage Assemblies Type II.
ES
TI
I
L
OW UTI
L
Y OVER SHAL
L
PAL
NCI
TO BE USED PRI
ET TYPE 6
NL
CURB I
ET TYPE 5
NL
CURB I
Notes:
L POST
ENCASED GUARDRAI
1. The locations shown for special posts mounted on inlets are to be used as guidelines for positioning the posts and for estimating the number of required posts.
2. Special posts and their anchorages mounted on curb inlets shall be in accordance with special steel guardrail posts Sheet 21, and paid for under the contract unit price for Special
Guardrail Post, EA.
1:
01:
22 PM
EGEND
L
3. Variations shown for the locations of special posts mounted on inlets are established from standard post spacing (6'-3"); clearance of standard posts from inlets (4" min.); use of single and
3
4"
double offset blocks on standard posts adjacent to the inlets; optional flange mountings; and, concrete anchor edge distances (2" for grouted and 3
Variation In Location Of Special Post:
for expansion anchors). The number

Single Offset Block(s) On Adjacent Standard Post(s)
of posts and their locations may vary by reducing post spacing and adjusting the length of rail panel (s).
Expanded Location By Using Double Offset
Blocks On Adjacent Standard Post(s)
cost of foam wrap and concrete encasement.
ETS
NL
ONS ON CURB I
OCATI
AL POST L
SPECI
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
4. Encased guardrail posts shall conform in section to standard timber and steel posts, and be paid for under the contract unit price for Special Guardrail Post, EA. Payment shall include
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
22 of 26
Misc. Asphalt Pavt. 10' Approach End Guardrail

Location Station
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.

Soil Plate
Anchor Plate
Cable Assembly
5
8"x25"
Location Station
Misc. Asphalt Pavt. 6'
Hex Nut & Hex (Jam) Nut
10' Approach End Guardrail
Trailing End Guardrail
And Washer Each End
Approach Rail
Buffer End Section For
(Position Varies)
Long Post Bolt And Nut

With Beam Washer Under Head And
Buffer End Section
Under Nut (Timber Post And Block)
Steel End Plate, Washer,

Hex Nut And Hex (Jam) Nut
TOP VIEW-DOUBLE FACE
Anchor Rod
30"
Position Varies
5
8"x18"
Long Post Bolt And Nut With Beam
Washer Under Head
5
And 8"
Plain Round
Washer Under Nut (Timber Post And Block)
5
8"x10"
Long Post Bolt And Nut
With Beam Washer Under Head And

5
8"
Trailing Rail
Turnbuckle (6")
See Note Below
Plain Round Washer Under Nut
30"
Flared Or Rounded End Section

Flared End Section (Rounded End
Cable Assembly
Anchor Plate
(Block To Be Positioned To Suit
On Trailing End Section
Section When Located Adjacent To
Concrete Anchor Block
Anchorage Alignment. Only One
TOP VIEW
Anchorage Required. Anchorage
Sidewalks Or Shared Use Paths)

To Be On Approach Rail When
Both Approach And Trailing
Hex Nut & Hex (Jam) Nut

Soil Plate
TOP VIEW-SINGLE FACE
And Washer Each End
6'-3" To Next Post
Location Station
Guardrails Are Connected.)
4'-9"
6'-3"
Location Station
See Sheet 23A of 26
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
12"
16"
Anchor Plate
6' Trailing End Guardrail
Standard Post
6'-3" To Next Post
2'
-1"
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
6'-3"
See Sheet 23A of 26
No Cover Required
Turnbuckle (6")
16"
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
See Note Below
Location Station
12"
Short Timber
30"
Std.
End Section
3'
-2"
1" Galv.
Breakaway Post
Anchor Rod
1
2"
Anchor Plate
ID Pipe Sleeve
3
4"
Galvanized 4"x4"x
Cable To Be Drawn Taut
Post Sleeve
Two 8d Nails To
Prevent Rotation
With Hand Wrench Prior

To Setting Jam Nuts
2'
-1"
FRONT VIEW
Bearing Plate
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.

5
8"x10"
Timber Or Steel Post With
Long Bolt And Nut
5
With 8"
Turnbuckle shall be field cut, threaded 4" on each end, then cleaned and metalized in accordance with Sections 562 and
975 of the Standard Specifications. The cost for cutting, threading, metalizing and the turnbuckle shall be included in
the contract unit price for End Anchorage Assembly Type II, EA.
The payment for the items of End Anchorage Assembly Type II shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing
5
8"x18"
Plain
With
Round Washer Under Head And Nut
Timber Offset Block May Be
Long Bolt And Nuts
5
8"
the Beam Anchor Plate, Anchor Rod, Pipe Sleeve, Anchor Block, either Flared, Rounded or Buffer End Section, and the
necessary hardware.
Plain Round Washer
Under Head And Nut (2 Req'd.)
Used, Timber Post And Offset

Block Shown. This Post Must
CONCRETE ANCHOR BLOCK OPTION

1
4"
Soil Plate 18"x24"x
Be Timber In A Steel Post Run
Note: Steel tubes and attached soil plate may be
TYPE II NOTES
installed by:
Of Guardrail Adjacent To
1. Unless specified in the plans, the contractor can supply either the cable anchor option or the concrete anchor block option.
Sidewalks Or Shared Use

Paths (see PEDESTRIAN
Plate
Beveled Washer And Hex Nut
1. Excavating, backfilling and compacting to

TS 8x6x.188 Galvanized Steel Tube
SAFETY TREATMENTS).
provide full passive soil resistance to
2. Type II end anchorage assemblies are approved for all speeds and are intended for use as:
all surfaces of the tube and soil plate.

a. trailing end anchors for single face free standing guardrail systems;
2. Driving steel tube and soil plate as a
unit with a dummy timber post to
prevent damage to breakaway post.
b. approach end anchors for single face free standing guardrail systems when the end anchor is located outside of the
clear zone; and,
c. both approach and trailing ends of double face guardrail systems.
FRONT VIEW
1:
01:
22 PM
Crash cushions shall be constructed at or in lieu of approach Type II end anchorages located inside the clear zone.
The payment for the items of End Anchorage Assembly Type II shall be full compensation for
furnishing and installing either the Round or the Buffer End Section, the Beam Anchor Plate,
Cable Assembly, Pipe Sleeve, Soil Plate, Steel Tube, Bearing Plate, Short Timber Breakaway Post,
End anchorage for thrie beam guardrail shall be constructed the same as detailed for W-beam, except use thrie beam rail
and end section; and the Anchor Plate is to be attached to the bottom corrugation of the thrie beam.
Offset Blocks and the necessary hardware.

12/3/2015
3. These end anchors are to be paid for under the contract unit price for Guardrail, End Anchorage Assembly (Type II), EA as
CABLE ANCHOR OPTION
called for in the plans or by permit.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
END ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY TYPE II

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
23 of 26
End Anchorage Assembly - Type II
12'-6"
Location Station
1
2"
15'-7
12'-6" Panel
Panel
Offset Block (Typ)
TRAFFIC
e
n
i
eL
r
u
t
ar
p
De
PLAN VIEW
Location Station
1
2"
15'-7
6'-3"
W-beam End Anchorage Panel
Standard Guardrail
1
2"
3'-1
6'-3"
1
2"
3'-1
1
2"
3'-1
6'-3"
TRAFFIC
2'
-1"
Beam Anchor Plate Attachment
W-Beam Midspan
Panel Splice (Typ.)
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
Timber Or Steel Posts With Timber Offset Blocks May Be Used,
ELEVATION VIEW
1:
01:
23 PM
Timber Posts And Offset Blocks Are Shown. These Posts Must Be
Note:
1.
For Beam Anchor Plate Details see Sheet 20 of 26.
2.
For Beam Anchor Plate Attachment Details see Sheet 20D of 26.
Timber In A Steel Post Run Of Guardrail Adjacent To Sidewalks
12/3/2015
Or Shared Use Paths (see PEDESTRIAN SAFETY TREATMENTS).
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
END ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY TYPE II
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
23A of 26
Notes
1. END ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY, TYPE MELT Details and Notes are Shown
MODIFIED ECCENTRIC LOADER TERMINAL NOTES
for Maintaining Existing Installations Only.

1. The MELT is applicable for design speeds up to 45 mph. The MELT is intended for use as an approach
3
alignment with a flare length of 37.5' including three standard W-beam panel outside of any standard
guardrail, guardrail transitions or other special treatments.
10'
3'
Shoulder Line
4
end guardrail anchorage for shoulder guardrail. Its alignment is a flare from the normal guardrail
1
:
1
5 To No
r
ma
l
Sh
o
u
l
d
e
r Br
e
a
k Po
i
n
t
Proprietary End Anchorage Assembly - Flared Systems, see the
1:
10 M ax.
2. For Specific Details, Offset Requirements, and Special Treatments of
e
n
i
eL
r
u
t
r
a
p
De
Treatment
2 Spaces @ 6'-3"
1'-2"
8"
4"
Other Special
1
2"
1"
Special Transition Or
Standard Guardrail,
3
4"x1"
3. This standard drawing is sufficient for plan details for the MELT when installed in connection with
shoulder guardrail and precludes the requirement for shop drawing submittals unless the plans otherwise
call for such submittals. The MELT shall be assembled in accordance with the distributor's detailed
Sheet No. 15
3 Spaces @ 4'-2"
drawings, procedures and specifications.
2 Spaces @ 6'-3"
21' R Fabricated
4. The first two post must be short timber breakaway posts with steel foundation tubes and soil plates, post
Over Beg. 6'-3"
Nos. 3 thru 6 must be CRT timber posts and post No. 7 must be a standard timber post.
To No. 4 Post To Provide Nested Support For Rail)

Location Station
37.5' Flare (Lap Panels In Direction Of Near Traffic)
6"
necessary to field identify component parts of the MELT and their incorporation into a whole system.
Treatment, See
No Bolts Through Rail To Posts (Bolt Back Up Plate
And Offset Block
Department and its assignees. This standard drawing provides the general graphics and information
To Suit Shoulder
CRT Timber Posts & Offset Blocks

Standard Timber Post
2. This standard drawing is produced by the Florida Department Of Transportation solely for use by the
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
4'
-0"
Panel
2'
-1"
1
2"
1:
10
APL are Suitable For Design Speeds Less Than or Equal to 45 mph.
15'-7
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
M ax.
3. Test Level 2 Crash Tested End Anchorage Assemblies Shown on the
3"
End Anchorage Assembly - MELT
Slot
5. The MELT can not be used in medians where horizontal clearance requires the use of a backrail.
1
(40'-7 2")
6. See the General Notes for galvanizing requirements of metallic components.
7. If the plans call for the MELT at a specific location, substitutions with other end anchorage assemblies
1
2"
MODIFIED ECCENTRIC LOADER TERMINAL (MELT)
will not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer. If the plans call for end anchorage assembly
'flared' at a specific location, the contractor has the option to construct any FDOT approved flared
assembly that meet the applications for that location.
Hex Nut, Hex (Jam) Nut
Soil Plate
And Washer Each End
1
8 4"
3
4"
1
5 2"
Soil Plate
1
4"
or 24"x24"x
Soil Plate
Steel Tube
1
24"x18"x 4"
Steel Tube
Yoke
PLAN
Yoke
11
16"
YOKE (2 Reqd.)
1
4"
or 24"x24"x
1:
01:
24 PM
* Cable To Be Drawn Taut
To Setting Jam Nuts
12/3/2015
2. Driving steel tube and soil plate as a unit with a dummy timber post to prevent damage to breakaway post.
1
8"
1
4"
1
8"
6" Hole
2"
1
2"
@ 35
10
4"
3
6 4"
3
1
R Before
Bending
PLAN
STEEL STRUT AND YOKE ASSEMBLY
1. Excavating, backfilling and compacting to provide full passive soil resistance to all surfaces of the tube and soil plate.
R (Typ.)
@ 10
3
4"
side guardrail and turned up for left side guardrail.

Steel tubes and attached soil plate may be installed by:
21
2" @ 35
Note: Assembly installed with channel turned down for right

With Hand Wrench Prior
Note:
3
8"
A
1
2"
Plain Round Washer Under Heads
And Nuts (2 Reqd. Per Steel Tube)

1
24"x18"x 4"
2- 4"x4" Slots
3
16
3
16
e
t
No
5
8"
Long Bolts And Nuts With
1
2"
"
Round Washer Under Head And Nut
2- 8"x7
8"
1 2"
5 16
Plain
e
Se
11
0
1
1
4"
1
6 4"
1
3 2"
1" R (Typ.)
STRUT
5
8"
4"
2"
1'
-9"
Prevent Rotation
Slot
21
5'-7
Long Bolt And Nut With
3
4"
5
4
Two 8d Nails To
7
8"x2"
C 6x8.2
Bearing Plate
5
8"x10"
Slot
SECTION BB
4"
5
8"
Strut And Yoke Assembly
3
1
4"x1 8"
Amber Retroreflective
Sheeting (See Above)
Pavement
1
4"
29
1
32"x1 8"
BUFFERED END SECTION
Breakaway Terminal Post Sleeve
1
4"
Diaphragm Plate
Splice Bolts And Nuts
FLAT PLATE LAYOUT
ELEVATION
3
16" 1"
1'-4"
Post And Offset Block
5
8"
Max.
All Slots Shall Be

3
1'-8 4"
1
8 4"
1
8"
1
2"
6'-3"
Hole
7
16"
7
7
4 8"
8"
1
4"
Plain Round Washer Under Nut
Location Station
Short Timber Breakaway
Guardrail
5
16"
SECTION AA
2"
TOP VIEW
10
5
8"
11 "
16
1
"
2
35
Beam Washer Under Head And
With Beam Washer Under Head And Nut
3
2 8"
25
1
8"
Long Button Head Bolt And Nut
Long Post Bolt And Nut With
12
5
8"x10"
Shelf Angle
Shelf Angle
1
2"
3
4"
25
1'
- 4"
Retroreflective Adhesive
Sheeting To Nose
1'-0"
3
4"
1
2"
Apply 8"x24" Amber
Anchor Plate
Washer Under Nut
5
3
8"x1 4"
plans; the distributor's detailed drawings, procedures and specifications and this Index.
PLAN
Cable Assembly
Long Post Bolt &

Plain Round
EA and shall be full compensation for furnishing and installing all components in accordance with the
Strut And Yoke Assembly
Steel Tube
5
8"
8. The MELT shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Guardrail, End Anchorage Assembly (Flared),
45
Special End Shoe
Nut & Washer
Nut With
13 13
Steel Tube
Soil Plate
5
8"x18"
And Recess Nuts (6 Reqd.)
Diaphragm Plate
SHELF ANGLE
2"
Steel Plate
Where a flared end anchorage is called for in the
plans, any approved substitution with a parallel end anchorage will not be eligible for CSIP consideration.
Long Button Head Bolts
45
1
4"
5
3
8"x1 4"
Buffer End Section
10 1
1
1 2"
3
4"
1
8"
PLAN
Note: Bolt holes are not required, but, diaphragms with either manufacturer
produced two or three hole in line patterns are acceptable.
FRONT VIEW
DIAPHRAGM PLATE (2 Reqd.)
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
END ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY TYPE MELT

LAST
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
24 of 26
Timber Breakaway Post
3
4"
CONTROLLED RELEASE RETURN NOTES
Special End Shoe
Dia. x 9'-0" Cable With One
Steel Tube
Swaged End (See Sheet 21)
1. Controlled release returns are intended for use (a) in
Soil Plate
openings in continuous guardrail for driveway and side

Lower Cable Attachment
Short Timber
3
4"
(See Left)
Buffer End Section
Anchor Plate
Dia. x 9'-0" Cable
3
8"x4"x12"
4"
With One Swaged End
shielding the ends of bridge traffic rails and barrier
Soil Plate
Steel Plate
walls where the driveway and side road access is in
Soil Plate
1
1
1
2"x2 2"x 4"x8"
permit the proper use of approved flared and parallel

3
4"
Structural Tube
Attach W-beam To Steel Pipe
1
1
1
2"x2 2"x 4"
Tack Weld 2
1
16"
Steel Plate With 1
With
Dia.
& Washer Each End
5
1
8"x1 4"
Button Head Bolt
Cable With Swaged Ends
types of Guardrail End Anchorage Assemblies.
(See Sheet 20) Cable To Be Drawn Taut
Special Guardrail Pipe
With Hand Wrench Prior To Setting Jam
Attachment (See Left)
Hole To Tubular Steel
substitute or replacement for the appropriate use of
TOP VIEW
To Post Is Required.
6'-3"
TOP VIEW
3. Controlled release returns with either 8', 16' or 24' radii

Hex Bolt & Beam Washer Under Head
12"
16"
1
4
Steel Tube
10" OD Schedule 40
Retroreflective Sheeting To Nose
3
4"
5
8"x10"
Dia Hole
1
4
guardrail as shown or as otherwise detailed in the plans.
5. The Guardrail End Anchorage Assembly Type CRT is to be

Long Bolts And
Nuts With
FRONT VIEW
FRONT VIEW
Anchorage Assembly Type CRT or connected to standard
Bearing Plate
Galvanized Steel Pipe
Cable (See Above)
5
8"
3
4"
6~
1
2"
Spacing Typ.
5
8"x10"
Attachment
used in any tangent rail or flared rail applications.

Long Bolts And Nuts
5
With 8"
(See Left)
1
(24"x18"x 4")
used only for the controlled release returns with 8', 16',
24' and 32' radii as shown; the assembly is not to be
Lower Cable
Under Head And Nut

Soil Plate
Cable Clamps
Plain
Round Washers
SPECIAL GUARDRAIL PIPE ATTACHMENT
LOWER CABLE ATTACHMENT
Apply 8"x24" Amber
2'
-1"
Structural Tube
full returns based on an intersection angle of 90. The

return can be terminated with the Guardrail End
1
4
Galv.
4. The controlled release returns shown are designed as
Attachment (See Left)

Buffer End Section
6"
1
1
1
2"x2 2"x 4"x8"
are designed for highway speeds of 60 mph or less.
Special Guardrail Pipe
18"
7"
1
4
approved vehicle impact attenuators.
10'
5
1
8"x1 2"
12"
Steel Plate (See Above)
Location Station
6'-3"
To Next Post
2. Controlled release returns are not intended as a
Nuts And Connecting Lower Cable
With No Washer. No Connection
TOP VIEW
close proximity to the structure and space does not
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
10" OD Pipe (See Below)
Galvanized
Hex Nut, Hex (Jam) Nut
road access when flares and transitions or standard

radial returns can not be applied (Sheet 12); and, (b) for
Breakaway Post
Other types of end anchorage assemblies are not to be

Plain Round Washers
used in the controlled release returns.
Under Head And Nut
1
4")
Soil Plate (24"x18"x

5
8"x8"
5
8"
5
8"x8"

Steel Tubes
Plain Round Washers Under Head
5
8"
And Nut (2 Reqd. Per Steel Tube)
And Nut (2 Reqd. Per Steel Tube)
Plain Round Washers Under Head
6. The area immediately behind the control release return

shall have slopes not steeper than 1:2 and be maintained
free of fixed objects in accordance with the area limits
tabulated in the plan below.
FRONT VIEW
7. The surface approaching the controlled release return
GUARDRAIL END ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY TYPE CRT
shall have a transverse slope not exceeding 1:10. The

effective width of the transverse surface is to be based
Do NOT Bolt Rail To Post At The Center Of The Nose.
on standard vehicle departure, return radii and
g
n
i
c
pa
S
p
S
L x W
6
'
-3
"
@
CRT
Po
st
s
panels).
To Be Maintained Free
Of Fixed Object Hazards
5
8"x10"
And Nut
1:
01:
25 PM
5
With 8"
Plain
Steeper Than 1:2

Round Washer Under Nut
L
Slope=10:1
Or Flatter
controlled release terminal (CRT) post or at any

Guardrail End Anchorage Assembly Type CRT breakaway
timber post.
2'-0" Min.
10. The guardrail beam of the 8' radius return is not bolted
Connecting
1
2"
3
Guardrail On
Centered In Post
Intersecting
1:2 Max.
to the center control release post.
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
Dia. Holes
End Measurement For

Guardrail Payment
Roadway Or
See Sheet 15
11. See the General Notes for galvanizing requirements of

metallic components.
12. Controlled release return systems shall be paid for
8'
12.5'
25' x 15'
16'
25'
30' x 15'
24'
37.5'
40' x 20'
32'
50'
11
50' x 20'
15'-72" W-Beam End Anchor Panel
Driveway
Transition from 1'-9" to 2'-1" W-Beam Guardrail as needed
under the contract unit prices for Guardrail (Roadway),

LF, Guardrail (Shop-bent Panels), LF, and Guardrail, End
Guardrail End Anchorage

8"
Anchorage Assembly (Type CRT), EA as called for in the
AssemblyType CRT (In

Absence Of Connecting
Guardrail)
plans or by permit and shall be full compensation for

Note: To be constructed when flares and transitions or standard
furnishing and installing all components in accordance
radial returns can not be applied. See Sheet 12.
Options
with the plans and with this index. CRT posts are
CRT TIMBER POST
included in the cost for guardrail.
CONTROLLED RELEASE RETURN FOR SIDE ROAD AND DRIVEWAY ACCESS

LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
9. Washers are not to be used between the guardrail beam

Long Post Bolt
and the head of the button head post bolts at any
And Have Slopes Not
1'
-4"
Or Driveway
Intersecting Roadway
return shall be full section shop bent panels (12.5' or 25'

Area Behind Guardrail
2'
-0"
Of Hazards
Bent Panels
ng
ci
a
p
S
2'
-1"
6'
-3
"
@
CRT Pos
ts
Free
Of Shop
Posts
tabulated below.
8. The curved guardrail portion of the controlled release

2
4
'
R
CRT Posts @
1
6
'
R
'
2
3
No. Of CRT
R
not greater than the corresponding 15' and 20', 'W' values
Index No. 402) Or To Barriers Wall (Index No. 410)
g
n
ci
a
p
S
ng
ci
a
Length
Nom.
preceding shielding; the width (beyond shoulder) shall be
Or Guardrail Transition To Bridge Rail (See Detail J and
Required Area
Return
Standard Wood Or Steel Posts Guardrail Section (As Shown)

Principle Highway
6'
-3
"
8
'
R
CRT Posts @
6'
-3
"
(See 'CONTROLLED RELEASE RETURN NOTES' No. 10)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
25 of 26
LATERAL PLACEMENT ON SLOPES

12'-0"
3 Or More Lanes
Notes:
(FROM EDGE OF NEAR TRAFFIC LANE)
1. For shoulders less than 12' in width the
6
1:
Or Ditch
Misc. Asphalt
Pavement
Guardrail
2'
-1"
10'-0"
tabulated values will be reduced by the
Standard
Slope
0.02
Guardrail
Not
difference between 12' and the shoulder
Guardrail
5
0
.
0
With Rub Rail

Recommended
3'
-10" Std.
Median Swale
12"
Varies
Post Bolt
width. Placement of guardrail on front

slopes steeper than 1:6 not recommended.
1:6
to 16'
17'
to 22'
23'
to 45'
1:7
to 20'
21'
to 24'
25'
to 45'
1:8
to 25'
26'
to 45'
1:9
to 26'
27'
to 45'
1:10
to 27'
28'
to 45'
2. Standard guardrail; 2'-1" to post bolt. Rub

Rail is required on the median side when
double face guardrail is used.
8'-0"
3. Guardrail with Rub Rail; 2'-4" to post bolt.
2 Lanes
Traffic
Traffic
Lane
Lane
Shoulder
12"
*Rub Rail
Lateral Offset
2'
-4"
Pavement
Shoulder
12"
Misc. Asphalt
Lateral Offset
2'
-4"
Or Ditch
2'
-1"
0.02
5
0
.
0
Varies
6
1:
4'-0"
3'
-10" Std.
Median Swale
12"
Varies
Post Bolt
Rub Rail
Front Slope
(1:6 Or Flatter)
Not Recommended on
Notes:
Slopes Steeper Than 1:6

1. Typical placement shown. May be constructed at other
GUARDRAIL ON MEDIAN SLOPES
GUARDRAIL ON OUTSIDE SLOPES
locations as called for in the plans.
2. Rub Rail is required on the median side or ditch side of the
* C6x8.2, Plates And Fasteners or Bent Plate And
barrier.
Fasteners In Accordance With
Standards RLR01 And RER01 Of AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA "A Guide To Standardized
MOUNTING HEIGHT FOR DOUBLE FACED
Highway Barrier Hardware"
GUARDRAIL ON MEDIAN SHOULDERS (FREEWAYS)

GUARDRAIL ON SLOPES
Terminate Rub Rail Within The Standard Guardrail

Run At The Backside Of The Post Nearest The End
1:
01:
26 PM
Anchorage Assembly.
"Flared" End Anchorage Assembly Shown

Standard Guardrail
End Anchorage Assembly
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
RUB RAIL TERMINATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GUARDRAIL
NO.
400
SHEET
NO.
26 of 26
11
GENERAL NOTES
8"
1. This index provides thrie-beam transition and connection details for approach end guardrail
3
4"
H
B
ol
ol
e
t
(
Ty
p.
)
7"
on existing bridges, and anchorage details for trailing end traffic railing retrofits and safety
shapes on existing bridges. Sheets 1 through 23 apply to bridges with retrofitted traffic
railings, (Sheet 23 shows the trailing end guardrail connections). Sheet 24 applies to bridges
5
8"
Varies
Of
al ed
ot
T
ac
(
Pl
es
y
l
l
ol
a
H
c
ri
et
1"
m
m
y
S
e
at
Pl
"
4
x1
1"
x1
"
4"
1 2"
with safety shaped traffic railing.
)
p.
Ty
2. The schemes identified by Arabic numerals in this index are complementary to the bridge
traffic railing barrier retrofit schemes with like numeral identification in Index Nos. 470, 471
through 476, 480 through 483. The schemes in this index identified by Roman numerals are
6'
-0
"
complementary to bridge safety shaped traffic railing barrier where determined to be in

"
-0
1'
accordance with applications of criteria specified in the Instructions for Design Standards
(IDS-470 & IDS-480).
34
11
3. For guardrail applications and details of related hardware and accessories that are not
2"
provided on this index, refer to Index No. 400.
CURB TYPE F FLARE WHEN

PICTORIAL
END OF EXISTING APPROACH
7
8"
NOTES FOR GUARDRAIL TRANSITIONS CONNECTING TO
SLAB CURB EXPOSED
W6x9 Post
TRAFFIC RAILING RETROFITS ON EXISTING BRIDGES
x 10" Galvanized
1. The transition detail shown on this sheet shows (a) the standard post spacings within the
11"
Adhesive-Bonded Anchor
typical thrie-beam approach transitions connecting to existing bridges with retrofit traffic
Studs (4 Reqd.), Hex Nuts
railings, and (b) depict the typical alignments of the approach transitions.
(8 Reqd.) & Standard
Remove Any Asphalt To Set
1
4
Base Plate Flush With Slab
14"
Washers (4 Reqd.)
2. The curb and gutter flare shown on this sheet is typical of flares that are to be constructed
when approach slab curbs extend to the beginning of the slab, and where other treatment to
7" (Min.)
1
4"
1"
Adjusting Nuts
curb blunt ends are not in place.
(Max.)
3. The special steel post for roadway thrie-beam transitions detailed on this sheet is specific to
2" Recess
3
4"
all transition applications on this index that require one or more steel posts.
Bolt Holes
Anchor Hole
The special steel post and base plate assembly shall be fabricated using ASTM A36 or ASTM
TOP VIEW
SIDE VIEW
A709 Grade 36 steel. Welding shall conform to ANSI/AASHTO/AWS D1.5. The assembly shall be
hot-dip zinc coated in accordance with Section 536 of the Specifications.
SPECIAL STEEL POST FOR ROADWAY THRIE-BEAM

Anchor studs shall be fully threaded rods in accordance with ASTM F1554 Grade 36 or ASTM
TRANSITIONS TO BRIDGE TRAFFIC RAILING RETROFITS
A193 Grade B7. All nuts shall be heavy hex in accordance with ASTM A563 or ASTM A19
4. Anchor studs and nuts shall be hot-dip zinc coated in accordance with the Specifications.
After the nuts have been snug tightened, the anchor stud threads shall be single punch
distorted immediately above the top nuts to prevent loosening of the nuts. Distorted threads
shall be coated with a galvanizing compound in accordance with the Specifications.
10 Gage Thrie-Beam Or
Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector
Adhesive bonding material systems for anchors shall comply with Specification Section 937 and
be installed in accordance with Specification Section 416.4. Nested beam extensions and points
Traffic Railing (Thrie-Beam
Or Vertical Face Retrofit)
for terminal connector attachments will vary for traffic railing barrier vertical face retrofits.
Roadway Guardrail Transition
The plan views for the vertical face retrofit barriers show the primary configurations for each
particular scheme. The associated pictorial views show the variations.
APPROACH SLAB WITHOUT CURB

5. For installing thrie-beam terminal connector to traffic railing vertical face retrofits, see
6 Posts Spaced @
3
1'-6 4"
1
3'-1 2"
1
3'-1 2"
1
3'-1 2"
notations on Sheets 12 through 15 and the flag notation on Sheet 23.

6'-3"
hole construction, terminal connector, terminal connector plate and bolts, nuts and washers.

Or Vertical Face Retrofit)
6. Payment for connections to traffic railing vertical face retrofits are to be made under the
contract unit price for Bridge Anchorage Assembly, EA., and shall be full compensation for bolt
10 Gage Thrie-Beam Or
DESIGN NOTES FOR GUARDRAIL TRANSITIONS CONNECTING

TO TRAFFIC RAILING RETROFITS ON EXISTING BRIDGES

1. For selection of an appropriate transition scheme, see the Instructions for Design
APPROACH SLAB WITH CURB

1:
01:
27 PM
Standards (IDS-470 & IDS-480) for instructions to the Structures and Roadway engineers.
Longitudinal Location Of Transition Blocks And Curb End Flares Will Vary With Scheme Type
PARTIAL PLAN VIEWS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
GUARDRAIL TRANSITION ALIGNMENTS FOR BRIDGE THRIE-BEAM AND VERTICAL FACE TRAFFIC RAILING RETROFIT
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
GUARDRAIL TRANSITIONS AND
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONNECTIONS FOR EXISTING BRIDGES
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
1of 24
Front Face Of Existing Backwall

& Begin Or End Existing Bridge
Special Steel Post For
Existing Perpendicular Or Angled Wing Post Removed
Existing Flared Wing Post Removed
Roadway Thrie-Beam
Existing Railing Removed
Transitions
Transition Block In Absence Of Curb
Existing Curb To Remain
See Indexes For
See Indexes For

Face Of Rail Offset
Curb And Transition Block
Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
Post Bolts
Traffic Railing (Thrie-Beam Retrofit)
Key Post
Gutter Line
Existing Approach Slab
Key Post ( Post Bolts)
SEE INDEX NO. 471 - SCHEME 1


Existing Parallel
Existing Flared Wing Post Removed

Wing Post Removed
Curb And Transition Block

See Indexes For
Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
See Indexes For

Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line

1:
01:
27 PM
PARTIAL PLAN VIEWS OF GUARDRAIL APPROACH TRANSITIONS AND CONNECTIONS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
FOR BRIDGE TRAFFIC RAILING (THRIE-BEAM RETROFIT)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
2 of 24

Special Steel Post For Roadway

Thrie-Beam Transitions
Existing Parallel Wing Post
Existing Curb
Transition Block In
See Indexes For
Absence Of Curb
Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
Post Bolts

Any Detached Or Integral

Sidewalk Removed
SEE INDEX NOS. 472 & 475 - SCHEME 2



Existing Flared Wing Post

Existing Perpendicular Or Angled Wing Post

Sidewalk Removed
Existing Curb

Existing Curb
See Indexes For
Transition Block In
See Indexes For
Absence Of Curb
Face Of Rail Offset
Face Of Rail Offset

Gutter Line
Gutter Line
Post Bolts
Post Bolts




Sidewalk Removed
Existing Curb
See Indexes For
Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
Post Bolts

Existing Integral Approach Slab Wide Curb.

Remove Portion Of Curb As Required For Post
Placement. Area Of Curb Removal To Be Finish
Smooth And Even With Adjoining Area.
1:
01:
28 PM
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
3 of 24

Intermediate Posts May Be Required.
See Index Nos. 472 Or 475 For Alternate Spacings.
Existing Integral Reinforced Approach

Slab Safety Curb Or Sidewalk (6" Minimum
Thickness). See Index Nos. 472 Or 475

For Approach Slab Configurations.

Existing Curb
Existing Curb
See Indexes For
See Indexes For
Face Of Rail Offset
Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
Gutter Line
Post Bolts

SEE INDEX NOS. 472 & 475 - SCHEMES 3 & 4


Existing Integral Reinforced Approach
Slab Safety Curb Or Sidewalk (6" Minimum
Thickness). See Index Nos. 472 Or 475

End of Existing Approach Slab Flare
Existing Curb
See Indexes For
Existing Curb
See Indexes For
Face Of Rail Offset
Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
Gutter Line

Post Bolts

LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:
01:
29 PM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
4 of 24

Existing Integral Reinforced Approach Slab
Safety Curb Or Sidewalk (6" Minimum Thickness).

Existing Curb
See Index Nos. 473 Or 476 For Approach Slab
Configurations.
See Indexes For
Existing Curb
Face Of Rail Offset
See Indexes For

Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
Post Bolts
Gutter Line

Post Bolts


Sidewalk Removed
Existing Curb
Existing Integral Reinforced Approach Slab
Transition Block In
See Indexes For

Absence Of Curb
Safety Curb Or Sidewalk (6" Minimum Thickness).
Face Of Rail Offset
See Index Nos. 473 Or 476 For Approach Slab

Configurations.
Gutter Line

Post Bolts
Existing Curb
See Indexes For
Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
Post Bolts

Sidewalk Removed
Existing Curb
Roadway Special Steel Guardrail Posts
See Indexes For

Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
Post Bolts

Placement. Area Of Curb Removal To Be Finish

Smooth And Even With Adjoining Area.
1:
01:
29 PM
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
5 of 24


Existing Flared
Wing Post
End of Existing
Approach Slab Flare
Existing Curb
See Indexes For
Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line

Existing Curb
See Indexes For
Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:
01:
30 PM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
6 of 24

Placement. Area Of Curb Removal To Be
Finished Smooth And Even With Adjoining Area.
Existing Flared Wing Wall Removed
Edge of Existing Approach Slab Varies

Configurations Varies
Existing Railing And Flared
Wing Post Removed

Existing Curb
Existing Curb
See Indexes For
See Indexes For
Face Of Rail Offset
Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
Gutter Line
Post Bolts
Post Bolts


Placement. Area Of Curb Removal To Be
Finished Smooth And Even With Adjoining Area.
Existing Flared Wing Wall Removed

Edge of Existing Approach Slab Varies
Existing Railing And Parallel
Configurations Varies
Existing Railing And Flared
Wing Post Removed

Wing Post Removed
Existing Curb
Existing Curb
See Indexes For
See Indexes For
Face Of Rail Offset
Face Of Rail Offset
Gutter Line
Gutter Line
Post Bolts


LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:
01:
30 PM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
7 of 24
E
xi
st
i
ng
Ra
i
W
l
i
ng
ng i
Po An
st d
F
Re l
a
m re
ov d
ed
E
xi
st
i
ng
or R
a
An i
l
n
gl i
ed g A
W nd
i
ng Pe
Po rpe
st nd
cu
Re i
l
m
ov ar
ed
E
xi
st
i
ng
or R
a
An i
l
n
gl i
ed g A
W nd
i
ng Pe
Po rpe
st nd
cu
Re i
l
m
ov ar
ed
Tr
a
(
Th ffi
ri c
e- Ra
B
l
ea i
i
ng
m
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
SE
E
1'
-63
4"
Tr
a
(
Th ffi
ri c
e- Ra
B
l
ea i
i
ng
m
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
SE
E
K
ey
Ro
Po
ad
st
w
B
ay
ol
t
Gu
s
ar
PI
dr
I
N
ai
C
l
D
TO
Tr
EX
an
RI
si
A
t
N
i
on
L
O
.
47
1
V
I
EW
SC
H
EM
Po Tr
st an
si
t
i
on
K
ey
Po
st
ua
os
I
PI
N
rd
t
D
B
ra
C
ol
EX
i
TO
t
l
s)
Tr
RI
an
N
si
AL
O
t
i
.
on
47
V
I
1
EW
SC
H
EM
E
2
Ne
st
ed
I
n
SE
E
Tr
an
si
t
i
on
Ro
ad
w
ay
B
l
oc
k
Tr
a
(
Th ffi
ri c
e- Ra
B
l
ea i
i
ng
m
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
Ab
se
nc
e
Of
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
Cu
rb
Tr
an
si
t
i
on
K
Ro
ey
ad
Po
w
st
ay
(
Gu
Po
ar
st
dr
ai
P
B
I
l
ol
I
N
C
Tr
t
s)
D
TO
an
EX
s
i
RI
t
i
on
A
N
L
O
.
V
47
I
EW
1
SC
H
EM
B
l
oc
k
B
l
oc
k
Ne
st
ed
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
3
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
I
n
Ab
se
nc
Ne
e
st
Of
ed
Cu
Th
rb
ri
eB
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
Cu
rb
&
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
1
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
Ne
st
ed
W
-B
ea
m
1:
01:
31 PM
B
ar
ri
er
12/3/2015
PICTORIAL VIEWS OF GUARDRAIL APPROACH TRANSITIONS AND CONNECTIONS FOR
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
BRIDGE TRAFFIC RAILING (THRIE-BEAM RETROFIT)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
8 of 24
SE
E
SE
E
I
N
D
EX
N
O
S.
47
2,
I
N
D
EX
N
O
S.
47
2,
47
3,
47
5
&
I
N
D
EX
N
O
S.
47
2,
47
3,
47
5
&
47
6
1'
-63
4"
SE
E
Tr
af
fi
(
Th
c
ri
e- Rai
l
B
i
ng
ea
m
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
K
ey
Po
st
Tr
an
si
t
i
on
B
l
oc
k
I
N
D
EX
Po
Ro
st
ad
B
w
ol
ay
t
s
Gu
ar
N
dr
O
ai
PI
S.
l
Tr
C
47
an
TO
si
2,
t
RI
i
on
47
AL
3,
V
I
47
EW
5
S
&
47
6
SC
H
EM
Ne
st
ed
I
n
Ab
se
nc
e
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
Of
SC
H
EM
47
3,
47
5
An
y
D
et
ac
he
d
Or
SC
H
EM
Po
st
An
y
&
47
6
47
6
SE
E
K
ey
Re
fe
re
nc
e
Li
ne
D
et
ac
he
d
Or
I
I
nt
nt
eg
eg
Re
ra
ra
m
l
l
ov
Ap
E
S
e
i
pr
de
2
Po
oa
w
rt
al
ch
i
k
on
S
Re
An
l
a
O
m
y
b
f
ov
D
W
Cu
ed
et
i
de
rb
ac
he
As
Cu
d
r
Re
b
Or
qu .
I
i
nt
re
eg
d
ra
Fo
l
r
S
Tr
Po
i
de
an
st
w
si
al
Pl
t
i
k
on
ac
Re
em
B
m
l
oc
en
ov
k
t
ed
.
I
n
Ab
se
nc
e
Of
Cu
rb
SC
H
EM
Tr
an
si
t
I
i
nt
on
eg
B
ra
l
oc
l
k
S
i
I
de
n
Ab
w
al
se
k
nc
Re
e
m
Of
ov
ed
Cu
rb
Cu
rb
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
1:
01:
32 PM
B
ar
ri
er
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
9 of 24
On
B
ri
P
dg
Fo
os
e
r
t
S
Al s L
t
ru
l
oc
S
ct
at
ch
ur
ed
em
e
Fl
B
es
l
us
oc
Of
h
ks
W
I
nd
Om
i
h
ex t
i
t
B
ed
ac t
No
k
s.
An
O
47
d
f
Ra
3
&
i
l
47
6
I
nt
er
m
ed
i
at
S
e
ee
Po
Or
I
st
nd
47
ex
M
ay
6
N
Fo
os
B
e
r
.
R
47
Al
t
2, equ
er
i
47
na
r
t
3, ed.
e
47
S
pa
5
ci
ng
.
I
nt
er
m
ed
i
at
S
e
ee
Po
Or
I
st
nd
47
ex
M
ay
6
N
Fo
os
B
e
r
.
R
47
Al
t
2, equ
e
I
nt
rn
i
re
er
at 473
d.
m
e
,
ed
47
S
p
i
at
5
Tr
ac
S
e
a
i
ee
ng
(
Po
Th ff
.
Or
I
c
st
ri i
nd
Ra
e47
ex
M
B
i
ay
l
6
S
e
i
am ng
EE
Fo No
B
s.
e
r
Re
R
47
Al
I
t
ro
t
N
2, equ
er
fi
D
i
47
na
re
t
EX
)
t
3,
d.
e
47
S
pa
N
5
P
ci
O
I
ng
S.
C
.
T
On
B
ri
dg
Fo Pos
e
r
t
S
Al s L
t
ru
l
oc
S
ct
at
ch
ur
ed
em
e
Fl
B
es
l
us
oc
Of
h
ks
I
nd Wi
Om
h
ex t
i
t
B
ed
ac t
No
k
s.
Of And
47
Ra
3
&
i
l
47
6
Tr
an
si
t
i
on
K
ey
Tr
an
si
t
i
on
K
ey
Ro
ad
Po
w
st
47
O
ay
(
RI
2,
Gu
Po
AL
ar
st
47
dr
V
B
ai
3,
ol
I
l
E
t
T
s)
47
W
ra
ns
S
5
i
t
i
&
on
47
6
1'
-63
4"
SE
E
Tr
a
(
Th ffi
ri c R
eai
B
i
ea l
ng
m
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
I
N
D
EX
K
ey
SC
H
EM
Po
st
Po
Ro
st
ad
w
B
ay
ol
N
t
PI
s
Gu
O
ar
S.
C
TO
dr
47
ai
l
2, RI
Tr
AL
an
47
si
V
t
3,
i
on
I
ES
Po
st
Re
fe
re
nc
e
I
n
Ab
se
nc
Ne
e
st
Of
ed
Cu
Th
rb
ri
eB
ea
m
Li
ne
B
l
oc
k
I
n
Ab
Ne
se
st
nc
ed
e
Of
Th
ri
Cu
erb
B
ea
m
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
&
6
Ne
st
ed
B
l
oc
k
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
47 EW
5
&
47
6
SC
H
EM
ES
&
1:
01:
34 PM
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
PICTORIAL VIEWS OF GUARDRAIL APPROACH

B
ar
ri
er
TRANSITIONS AND CONNECTIONS FOR BRIDGE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TRAFFIC RAILING (THRIE-BEAM RETROFIT)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
10 of 24
E
xi
st
i
ng
Ra
i
l
i
W
ng
i
ng
An
Po
d
st
Fl
ar
Re
e
m
ov d
ed
1'
-63
4"
DETAIL C
E
xi
st
i
ng
Cu
r
Cu b T
yp
r
e
Co b O
F
n
nt
F
Ap
i
nu
ar
pr l
e
e
oa
Al
W
ch
on
he
g
S
n
l
Ro
ab
E
xi
ad
D
st
w
oe
i
ay
ng
s
(
No
Ty
t
pi
ca
l
)
Ra
i
l
i
ng
W
i
ng
An
d
Po
st Pa
ra
Re
l
l
el
m
ov
ed
E
xi
st
i
ng
Ra
Or
i
l
i
An
ng
gl
An
ed
d
W
Pe
i
ng
r
Po pen
di
st
Re cul
a
m
ov r
ed
K
ey
SE
E
1'
-63
4"
Tr
af
fi
(
Th
c
ri
e- Rai
l
B
i
ng
ea
m
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
K
ey
Po
st
Tr
an
si
t
i
on
B
l
oc
k
SE
E
Po
Ro
st
ad
w
B
a
ol
PI
y
t
s
Gu
C
I
N
ar
T
D
O
dr
EX
RI
ai
l
AL
Tr
N
an
O
V
si
.
I
t
i
EW
on
47
SC
H
EM
Ne
st
ed
I
n
I
N
Po
Ro
P
D
st
ad
C
EX I
w
B
TO
ay
ol
t
s
RI
N
Gu
O
ar
A
.
dr
L
47
a
V
i
l
4
I
Tr
EW
an
si
SC
t
i
on
H
EM
E
2
Ab
se
nc
e
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
Of
Cu
rb
SE
E
Po
st
Tr
af
fi
(
Th
c
ri
e- Rai
l
B
i
ng
ea
m
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
Tr
af
fi
(
Th
c
ri
e- Rai
l
B
i
ng
ea
m
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
Cu
rb
K
ey
Po
st
Re
m
ov
al
Re
qu
i
re
d
PI
I
N
C
Ro
D
Po
TO
EX
ad
st
w
B
RI
ay
ol
N
t
A
G
s
O
ua
L
.
r
V
dr
47
I
ai
EW
4
l
Tr
an
SC
si
t
i
H
on
EM
E
3
Tr
an
si
t
i
on
B
l
oc
k
I
n
Ne
st
ed
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
S
Ab
ee
se
D
nc
et
e
ai
Of
l
C
Cu
Th
rb
ri
eB
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
Ne
st
ed
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
1
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
1:
01:
35 PM
B
ar
ri
er
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
11of 24


Place First Post 2"

Clear Of Wing Wall
Traffic Railing (Vertical
Face Retrofit) Constructed

Existing Flared Wing Post Removed, Traffic
Railing (Vertical Face Retrofit) Constructed

Existing Curb - See Indexes
For Face Of Railing Offset

Traffic Railing (Vertical Face Retrofit)

*

Parallel Wing Post Removed,

5' Or More In Length Constructed
*
Existing Flared Wing Post Removed, Traffic


*
Parallel Wing Post Removed

Less Than 5' In Length Constructed

*
Roadway 12 Gauge Nested
Existing Curb

Thrie-Beam For Bridge Connection
See Indexes
For Face Of
Railing Offset
Note:
1:
01:
35 PM
*21"x 12" x
5
8"
Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector Plate (Back-Up Plate), And
Hex Bolts And Nuts (5 Reqd.) With
1
2 4"
7
8"
x 12" Long HS
OD Plain Round Washers Under Heads And Nuts
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
PARTIAL PLAN VIEWS OF TRAFFIC RAILING (VERTICAL FACE RETROFIT)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
12 of 24

Existing Integrally Reinforced Wide Curb

Transition Block In
Absence Of Curb
Existing Curb (See Indexes
For Face Of Railing Offset)



SEE INDEX NOS. 405 OR 482 - SCHEME 3


End of Existing
Existing Integrally Reinforced Wide Curb
Approach Slab Varies

Transition Block In
Absence Of Curb
*


*
Traffic Railing

(Vertical Face Retrofit)

Note:
*21" x 12" x
5
8"
HS Hex Bolts And Nuts (5 Reqd.) With
1
2 4"
7
8"
x 12" Long
1:
01:
36 PM
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
(INDEX 482 SHOWN, INDEX 405 SIMILAR)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
13 of 24

Place First Post 2" Clear Of Wing Wall

Wide Curb Constructed Integrally
With Existing Approach Slab

Transition Block Integral With
Retrofit Approach Slab In Absence
Of Approach Slab Curb


*





*



Transition Block Integral With

Retrofit Approach Slab In Absence
Of Approach Slab Curb

*


Note:
*21" x 12" x
5
8"
HS Hex Bolts And Nuts (5 Reqd.) With
1
2 4"
7
8"
x 12" Long
1:
01:
37 PM
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
14 of 24

Existing Perpendicular Or Angled

Wing Wall & Post Removed
Existing Railing Removed And Traffic Railing
Place First Post 2" Clear Of Wing Post
(Vertical Face Retrofit) Constructed


Existing Parallel Wing Post Removed and Traffic



Existing Flared Wing Post Removed And Traffic
Railing (Vertical Face Retrofit) Constructed.

Existing Railing Removed And Traffic Railing
(Vertical Face Retrofit) Constructed
Edge of Approach Slab Varies

See Structures Index No. 474
*

Existing Parallel Wing Post Removed and Traffic



Existing Flared Wing Post Removed And Traffic

Railing (Vertical Face Retrofit) Constructed.
Existing Railing Removed And
Edge of Approach Slab Varies

See Structures Index No. 474


*

1:
01:
37 PM
Note:
*21" x 12" x
5
8"
Scheme 1 And Length To Fit For Schemes 2 And 3) (5 Reqd.) With
1
2 4"
7
8"
HS Hex Bolts And Nuts (12" Long For
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
15 of 24
E
nd
O
Co
nn f T
er
ec
I
n
m
t
Th
or
i
na
S
e
t
I
l
at
de
Pl
i
nt
an
on
i
s
fi
Lo
ed
B
ca
y
t
i
on
Po
st
Po
B
ol
st
12
t
s
(
7"
'
H
-6
At
o
"
l
M
e
F
12
i
n.
i
Lo
rs
Fr
Ga
ca
t
om
S
t
ug
i
t
on
an
e
E
da
Th
On
nd
r
ri
d
B
Of
eri
(
3'
B
dg
B
ea
-11
ri
e
m
dg
2"
)
e)
E
Tr xi
st
af
i
fi ng
c
Ra
Ra
i
l
i
i
ng
l
i
ng
A
(
Ve nd
Pa
rt
i
ra
ca
l
E
l
el
nd
Fa l
W
ce
Of
i
Re ng
Te
I
Po
t
n
rm
ro
s
Th
i
fi
t
na
t
e
Re
)
l
Pl
Co
m
an Con
ov
ns
ne
s
e
t
d;
ru
B
ct
y
ct
or
ed
S
t
I
at
d
i
on ent
fi
Lo i
ed
ca
t
i
on
E
Tr xi
st
af
i
fi ng
c
Ra
Ra
i
l
i
i
ng
l
i
ng
A
(
Ve nd
E
Pa
nd
rt
i
ra
ca
Of
l
l
el
Te
Fa l
I
W
n
rm
ce
i
Th
n
i
Re
g
na
e
P
l
t
Pl
ro
os
an Con
fi
t
t
ne
R
s
)
em
Co
B
ct
y
ov
or
ns
S
e
t
t
I
d;
ru
at
d
i
ct
on ent
ed
fi
Lo i
ed
ca
t
i
on
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
SE
E
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
SE
E
K
ey
Ro
B
ol
ad
t
s
w
ay
Gu
ar
PI
dr
I
C
N
ai
TO
l
D
Tr
EX
RI
an
si
AL
N
t
i
on
O
V
.
I
48
EW
1
SC
H
EM
Ro
B
ol
ad
t
s
w
ay
Gu
ar
PI
dr
I
C
N
ai
TO
l
D
Tr
EX
RI
an
si
AL
N
t
i
on
O
V
.
I
48
EW
1
SC
H
EM
Tr
Po
an
st
si
t
i
on
B
l
oc
k
I
n
Ne
st
ed
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
2
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
Ab
se
nc
e
Of
Th
Cu
ri
rb
eB
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
1
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
1:
01:
38 PM
Ro
a
Th dw
a
ri
e- y N
B
ri
es
B
ea
dg
Tr
t
ed
m
e
af
Co
fi
Fo
(
Ve
c
nn
r
rt
Ra
ec
i
ca
i
t
l
i
i
l
ng
on
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
S
t
Ro
)
pl
ad
i
ce
w
ay
(
Po
st
Gu
SE
ar
B
E
ol
d
ra
W
t
s
P
I
i
i
ng
N
I
l
Om
C
Tr
Fo
D
Po
i
T
t
an
EX
r
t
O
s
ed
si
S
t
D
R
t
)
t
es
5'
ru
i
I
o
N
i
AL
n
Or
ct
gn
O
ur
M
.
S
al
or
V
t
an
48
I
EW
da Ade e I
1
n
rd
qu
L
s
ac
en
SC
(
y
gt
ID
Pr
h
S
H
-4
Th
es
EM
80
cr
at
)
i
be
M
E
ee
d
Tr
2
t
I
s
n
an
Th
Th
si
e
e
t
i
on
I
ns De
si
B
t
ru
l
gn
oc
ct
k
Cr
i
on
I
i
n
t
s
er
Ab
fo
i
a
se
r
nc
e
Ne
Of
st
Cu
ed
rb
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
E
xi
st
Tr
i
ng
af
Ra
fi
c
l
Ra i
i
ng
i
l
i
An
W
ng
i
d
ng
(
Ve
Pa
Le
Po
rt
ng
r
st
i
t
ca al
S
l
h
el
t
L
l
ru
e
Th
Fa
ss
W
ct
D
at
i
es
ce
ng
ur
T
D
ha
al
i
gn
Re
Po
oe
n
A
t
st
s
S
d
ro
5
eq
t
'
No
an
fi
Re
I
ua
n
t
t
da
)
m
Le
M
cy
Co
o
rd
ee
ng
ns ved
Pr
s
t
t
;
h
t
(
T
e
ID
ru
;
sc
he
An
ct
S
ri
-4
D
ed
es d,
80 bed
W
i
)
gn
i
I
n
n
Tr
Cr g P
Th
an
os
i
e
si
t
er
t
t
I
i
ns
i
on
a
t
5'
ru
Fo
B
l
ct
I
r
oc
n
i
on
k
I
s
n
f
Ab
or
se
nc
e
25
Of
'
-0
Cu
"
12
rb
Ga
ug
e
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
(
Ne
st
ed
)
W
-B
ea
m
PICTORIAL VIEWS OF GUARDRAIL APPROACH TRANSITIONS
B
ar
ri
er
12/3/2015
AND CONNECTIONS FOR BRIDGE TRAFFIC RAILING
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
(VERTICAL FACE RETROFIT)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
16 of 24
E
nd
O
Co
nn f T
er
ec
I
n
m
t
Th
or
i
na
S
e
t
I
l
at
d
Pl
i
an ent
on
i
s
fi
Lo
ed
B
ca
y
t
i
on
E
Tr
xi
st
af
i
fi
ng
c
Ra
Ra
i
i
l
l
i
i
ng
ng
E
nd
(
Ve An
Of
d
rt
Fl
Te
i
ca
ar
I
n
rm
l
Th
Fa ed
i
na
e
W
ce
l
i
Pl
n
Re
g
an Con
Po
t
ne
s
ro
st
B
ct
fi
y
or
t
Re
)
S
Co
t
m
I
at
d
ov
ns
i
on ent
e
t
d;
ru
fi
Lo i
ct
ed
ca
ed
t
i
on
E
nd
Po
12
st
'
-6
Po
B
"
ol
12
st
t
s
(
Ga
7"
H
At
o
ug
l
M
e
F
i
e
n.
i
Lo
rs
Th
Fr
ca
t
ri
om
S
t
i
et
on
an
B
E
ea
da
On
nd
m
r
d
B
Of
ri
(
3'
dg
B
-11
ri
e
dg
2"
)
e)
*
Ro
ad
Th
w
a
ri
e- y N
B
ri
es
B
ea
dg
t
ed
m
e
Co
Fo
nn
r
ec
t
i
on
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
Of
Te
rm
i
na
l
E
Co
Tr
xi
nn
st
af
ec
i
fi
ng
t
c
or
Ra
Ra
Tr
I
i
de
i
l
l
af
i
i
ng
ng
nt
fi
(
Ve
i
c
A
f
(
Ve
i
nd
rt
Ra
ed
i
rt
ca
i
Fl
l
I
i
i
n
ca
l
ng
ar
F
T
l
ac
he
Fa ed
e
W
ce
P
Re
i
l
an
Re ng
t
ro
s
Po
t
ro
fi
B
st
y
t
fi
)
S
t
Re
)
t
at
Co
m
i
ov
on
ns
ed
t
Lo
ru
;
ca
ct
ed
t
i
on SE
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
SE
E
I
N
D
EX
Ro
B
ad
ol
t
w
s
ay
Gu
ar
dr
PI
ai
C
l
Tr
TO
an
RI
si
N
t
i
A
on
O
L
.
48
1
V
I
EW
SC
H
EM
S
pl
i
ce
(
Po
Gu
st
ar
B
dr
ol
ai
t
s
l
Om
Tr
an
i
t
t
si
ed
t
)
i
on
25
'
-0
"
12
Ga
ug
e
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
(
Ne
st
ed
)
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
I
EW
1
W
i
n
SC
Fo g P
os
r
H
S
t
D
EM
t
es
5'
ru
i
Or
ct
gn
E
ur
M
S
al
3
or
t
an
A
e
da
de
I
n
rd
qu
Le
s
ac
Th
ng
(
y
ID
r
t
Pr
(
h
S
e
W i
-4
Th
-B -B
es
80
cr
at
ea ea
m
)
i
m
.
be
M
O
ee
S
d
ho r
t
I
s
n
w WTh
n) B
Th
ea
e
e
m
I
ns De
B
si
t
ar
ru
gn
ri
ct
Ne
er
C
i
ri
on
st
t
s
ed
er
F
i
a
Th
or
ri
eB
ea
m
Ne
st
ed
W
-B
ea
m
3
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
1:
01:
39 PM
W
i
n
SE
Fo g P
E
os
r
S
t
D
I
PI
t
N
es
5'
ru
D
i
C
Or
ct
gn
EX
TO
ur
M
S
al
or
t
an
RI
N
da Ade e I
AL
O
n
rd
qu
.
L
s
ac
en
48
V
(
y
gt
ID
I
Pr
EW
h
1
S
-4
Th
es
80
cr
at
S
)
i
C
.
be
M
ee
H
d
EM
t
I
s
n
Th
Th
E
e
e
D
3
I
ns
es
t
i
ru
gn
ct
Ne
Cr
i
on
st
i
t
ed
s
er
Fo
i
a
Th
r
ri
eB
ea
m
Ro
B
ad
ol
t
w
s
ay
Gu
PI
ar
I
C
N
dr
TO
D
ai
EX
l
RI
Tr
an
AL
N
si
O
t
i
V
on
.
48
Ro
ad
w
ay
E
xi
st
Tr
i
ng
af
Ra
fi
c
l
Ra i
i
ng
i
l
i
An
ng
d
W
(
Ve
Fl
i
n
ar
rt
Le g P
i
ed
ca
o
ng
s
l
t
t
S
h
Fa Wi
t
L
ru
es
Th
ce ng
ct
D
s
at
es
ur
Re Pos
Th
D
al
i
t
t
gn
an
oe
ro
Ad
fi Rem
s
S
t
eq
t
No 5'I
)
ov
an
Co
u
n
t
ed
da
ac
Le
M
ns
;
rd
y
ee
n
t
ru
Pr
s
gt
t
h;
(
ct
Th
es
ID
ed
cr
e
An
S
-4
i
D
es d,
80 bed
W
i
)
gn
i
.
I
n
n
Cr g P
Th
os
i
e
t
er
t
I
ns
i
a
t
5'
ru
Fo
ct
I
r
n
i
on
s
Fo
r
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
17 of 24
E
nd
O
Co
nn f T
er
ec
I
n
m
t
Th
or
i
na
S
e
t
I
l
at
d
Pl
i
an ent
on
i
s
fi
Lo
ed
B
ca
y
t
i
on
Tr
af
fi
c
Ra
i
l
i
ng
W
i
ng
Tr
af
fi
c
E
xi
st
(
Ve
i
ng
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
l
i
ng
Fa
ce
An
d
Re
Fl
t
ro
ar
fi
ed
t
)
Co
W
i
ng
ns
t
ru
Po
ct
st
ed
Po
st
Po
B
ol
st
t
s
(
7"
H
12
At
o
l
M
'
e
-6
Fi
i
n.
Lo
"
rs
12
Fr
ca
t
om
S
t
Ga
i
t
on
an
ug
E
d
O
nd
e
ar
n
Th
d
B
Of
ri
ri
(
3
d
B
e'
ge
-11
ri
B
dg
ea
2"
)
e)
m
P
Fo ost
r
5'
S
Or
t
ru
M
ct
or
ur
e
al
n
Ad I
Le
eq
ng
ua
t
h
cy
Pr Th
at
es
M
cr
ee
i
be
t
s
d
Th
D
n
es I
e
i
D
gn The
es
S
I
i
t
an nst gn
ru
Cr
da
c
i
rd
t
t
er
i
on
s
i
a
s
(
ID
Fo
S
-4
r
80
)
.
Ra
i
l
i
ng
(
E
Ve
xi
rt
st
i
i
ca
ng
l
Ra
Fa
i
ce
l
i
E
ng
nd
Re
An
t
Of
ro
d
fi
Te
P
t
I
ar
)
n
rm
Co
al
Th
i
na
l
ns
el
e
l
t
Pl
ru
W
C
a
i
ct
ng
ns onn
ed
ec
Po
B
W
t
y
or
s
i
ng
t
Th
S
t
I
at
e
d
Po
i
D
on ent
s
t
Pr esi
fi
5'
Lo i
gn
ed
es
ca
Or
cr
Cr
t
i
i
M
on
i
be
t
o
e
r
d
ri
e
a
I
n
n
Fo I
Th
Le
r
e
ng
S
I
t
t
ns
ru
h
t
ct
Th
ru
ur
ct
al at
S
i
o
t
an
ns
Ad Me
et
da
eq
Fo
rd
ua s
r
s
cy
D
(
es
ID
i
S
gn
-4
80
)
.
SE
E
I
N
D
EX
Tr
an
si
t
i
on
Ro
B
ad
ol
w
t
ay
s
Gu
ar
dr
ai
l
Tr
PI
an
N
si
C
O
t
T
i
on
S
O
1:
01:
40 PM
.
40
5
RI
AL
V
O
I
R
EW
48
2
SC
H
EM
SE
E
B
l
oc
k
I
n
&
5
Te
rm
Th
i
na
e
l
Pl
an Con
ne
s
B
ct
y
or
S
t
I
at
d
i
on ent
fi
Lo i
ed
ca
t
i
on
I
N
D
EX
Tr
an
si
t
i
on
Ro
B
ad
ol
w
t
ay
s
Gu
ar
dr
ai
l
Tr
PI
an
N
si
C
O
t
T
i
on
S
O
RI
AL
V
O
I
R
EW
48
2
SC
H
EM
Ab
se
nc
e
Ne
st
ed
ES
Of
I
n
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
.
40
5
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
E
nd
*
Ro
a
Th dw
a
ri
e- y N
B
ri
es
B
ea
dg
t
Tr
ed
m
e
af
Co
Fo
fi
(
Ve
nn
r
c
rt
ec
Ra
i
t
ca
i
i
l
on
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
Ro
)
S
ad
pl
i
w
ce
ay
(
Po
SE
Gu
st
a
E
rd
B
ra
ol
I
t
i
N
s
l
D
Tr
Om
EX
an
i
t
si
t
PI
ed
t
i
N
o
)
C
n
B
l
oc
k
I
n
Ab
se
nc
e
Ne
st
ed
ES
&
5
Of
Cu
rb
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
O
TO
S.
RI
40
AL
5
V
O
I
R
EW
48
2
SC
H
EM
Of
Cu
rb
ES
E
xi
st
i
ng
Tr
Ra
af
i
l
i
fi
ng
c
Ra
An
d
i
l
i
ng
Pa
W
i
ra
ng
(
Ve
l
l
Le
el
Po
rt
ng
i
st
W
c
a
t
S
i
h
l
ng
t
L
ru
Fa
es
Th
Po
ct
D
s
ce
at
es
ur
st
Th
D
R
a
i
gn
an
et
l
oe
Ad
ro
s
S
5
fi
eq
t
'
No
an
I
t
ua
n
)
t
da
Co
Le
M
cy
rd
ee
ns
ng
Pr
s
t
t
t
ru
h
(
Th
es
I
;
D
ct
cr
e
An
S
ed
-4
i
D
d
b
e
,
ed
80
si
W
)
gn
i
.
I
ng
n
Cr
Th
Tr
Po
i
an
e
t
st
er
I
si
ns
i
a
t
i
t
on
5'
ru
Fo
c
I
r
B
t
n
i
l
on
oc
k
s
I
Fo
n
r
Ab
se
nc
e
25
Of
'
-0
Cu
"
rb
12
Ga
ug
e
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
(
Ne
st
ed
)
&
5
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
PICTORIAL VIEWS OF GUARDRAIL APPROACH TRANSITIONS AND CONNECTIONS
B
ar
ri
er
12/3/2015
FOR BRIDGE TRAFFIC RAILING (VERTICAL FACE RETROFIT)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
18 of 24
E
nd
O
Co
nn f T
er
ec
I
n
m
t
Th
or
i
na
S
e
t
I
l
at
de
Pl
i
nt
an
on
i
s
fi
Lo
ed
B
ca
y
t
i
on
E
xi
st
i
ng
Tr
af
fi
c
E
xi
st
i
ng
(
Ve
rt
i
ca
l
Fa
ce
An
d
Fl
ar
ed
E
nd
W
i
ng
An
d
Fl
ar
ed
E
nd
Of
Te
W
I
n
rm
i
ng
Th
i
na
e
Po
l
Pl
st
an Con
ne
s
B
ct
y
or
S
t
I
at
d
i
on ent
fi
Lo i
ed
ca
t
i
on
Of
Te
rm
Th
i
na
e
l
Pl
Po
an Con
st
ne
s
B
ct
y
or
S
t
I
at
d
i
on ent
fi
Lo i
ed
ca
t
i
on
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
Co
ns
t
ru
ct
ed
*
Ro
a
Th dw
a
ri
e- y N
B
ri
es
B
e
d
t
am
ge
Tr
ed
af
C
Fo
fi
on
(
Ve
r
c
ne
rt
Ra
ct
i
ca
i
i
l
on
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
Ro
t
)
ad
w
ay
I
N
D
EX
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
Po
st
I
nt
eg
ra
l
Ap
pr
oa
ch
Ro
B
ol
ad
t
w
s
ay
Gu
ar
dr
ai
l
Tr
an
PI
si
N
t
C
i
O
on
T
1:
01:
41 PM
S.
O
RI
40
AL
5
O
V
I
R
EW
48
2
SC
H
EM
Ne
st
ed
ES
&
4
RI
AL
O
V
I
R
EW
48
2
SC
H
EM
ES
Po
st
&
4
S
l
ab
W
i
t
h
K
ey
S
pl
i
ce
Po
st
I
nt
eg
ra
l
Ap
pr
oa
ch
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
S
l
ab
25
'
W
-0
i
t
"
h
12
Cu
Ga
rb
ug
e
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
(
Po
st
Gu
ar
B
ol
dr
t
ai
s
l
Om
Tr
i
an
t
t
ed
si
t
)
i
on
EE
W
i
ng
S
I
t
N
ru Pos
D
ct
t
S
EX
t
5'
ur
an
PI
al
Or
da
C
Ad
rd
N
M
TO
or
eq
O
s
e
(
S
u
ID
RI
ac
I
.
n
S
y
AL
4
-4
Le
Pr
05
80
ng
e
I
)
sc
V
t
nt
.
h
O
I
ri
eg
Th
EW
be
R
ra
at
d
l
4
I
Ap
M
n
8
e
pr
2
et
Th
oa
s
e
Th
ch
I
ns
SC
e
S
t
ru
D
l
ab
H
es
ct
EM
Ne
i
i
W
g
o
n
i
ns
st
t
h
ES
C
ed
ri
Fo
Cu
t
Th
r
er
rb
D
ri
i
a
es
eFo
i
B
gn
ea
r
m
Ro
B
ol
ad
t
s
w
ay
Gu
ar
dr
ai
l
Tr
PI
an
N
C
O
si
T
t
S.
i
O
on
40
5
K
ey
I
N
D
EX
K
ey
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
SE
E
E
xi
st
i
ng
Ra
Tr
i
af
l
i
ng
fi
c
An
Ra
d
i
l
i
Fl
ng
ar
(
ed
Ve
rt
W
i
i
c
ng
W
a
l
i
n
Po
Fa
An g P
st
c
e
os
d,
Re
t
D
W
oe
Le
t
i
r
n
of
s
s
g
Fo
i
No
Po s T
t
r
)
ha
t
st
Co
S
I
M
n
t
n
r
ns
ee
Th
uc
5
5
t
'
t
S
ru
t
e
'
I
u
t
T
I
n
an
ra
ct
I
he
n
n
Le
ed
da
l
st
Le
D
Ad
ng
ru
rd
ng
e
t
eq
si
ct
s
t
h
h
gn
;
i
ua
(
o
I
Th
ns
D
c
Cr
S
at
-4
Fo y P
i
t
e
80
re
r
sc ri
)
D
a
.
es
ri
be
i
gn
d
I
n
Ra
i
l
i
ng
Tr
Fa
af
fi
ce
c
Re
Ra
t
i
ro
l
i
ng
fi
t
)
Ve
Co (
rt
ns
i
ca
t
ru
l
ct
ed
SE
E
Ra
i
l
i
ng
Ra
i
l
i
ng
Po
12
st
'
-6
Po
B
"
ol
12
st
t
s
(
Ga
7"
H
At
o
ug
l
M
e
F
i
e
n.
i
Lo
rs
Th
Fr
c
t
ri
om at
S
i
et
on
an
B
E
da
ea
On
nd
m
r
d
B
Of
ri
(
3'
dg
B
-11
ri
e
dg
2"
)
e)
(
Ne
st
ed
)
&
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
Cu
rb
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
PICTORIAL VIEWS OF GUARDRAIL APPROACH TRANSITIONS AND CONNECTIONS

B
ar
ri
er
12/3/2015
FOR BRIDGE TRAFFIC RAILING (VERTICAL FACE RETROFIT)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
19 of 24
Tr
af
fi
c
Ra
i
l
i
ng
E
xi
st
i
ng
Ra
i
l
i
(
ng
Ve
rt
An
i
ca
d
l
Pe
Fa
rp
ce
en
Re
di
cu
t
ro
l
ar
fi
t
)
W
Co
i
ng
ns
Po
t
ru
st
ct
ed
E
nd
I
n
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
K
ey
SE
E
Ro
ad
w
ay
I
N
D
EX
B
ol
t
s
T
Po ra
st ns
i
t
i
on
B
l
oc
k
Ne
st
ed
Gu
ar
dr
ai
l
Tr
an
si
t
i
on
PI
C
N
TO
O
S.
RI
AL
40
5
V
I
O
EW
R
48
2
SC
H
EM
Of
Th
Te
e
rm
Pl
na
an i
l
s
Co
B
nn
y
S
ec
t
at
t
or
i
on
I
de
Lo
nt
ca
i
fi
t
i
ed
on
I
n
Ab
se
nc
e
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
Of
Cu
rb
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
PICTORIAL VIEWS OF GUARDRAIL APPROACH TRANSITIONS AND

CONNECTIONS FOR BRIDGE TRAFFIC RAILING (VERTICAL FACE RETROFIT)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:
01:
42 PM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
20 of 24
E
nd
O
Co
nn f T
er
ec
I
n
m
t
Th
or
i
na
S
e
t
I
l
at
de
Pl
i
nt
an
on
i
s
fi
Lo
ed
B
ca
y
t
i
on
Po
st
12
Po
B
ol
'
st
-6
t
s
(
"
7"
H
A
12
ol
t
M
e
Fi
i
Ga
n.
L
rs
ug
Fr oca
t
e
om
S
t
i
t
on
Th
an
E
ri
da
On
nd
erd
B
B
Of
ea
ri
(
3'
dg
B
m
ri
11
dg e
2"
)
e)
E
Tr xi
st
af
i
fi ng
c
Ra
Ra
i
l
i
i
ng
l
i
ng
A
(
Ve nd
Pa
rt
i
ra
ca
l
l
el
Fa l
W
ce
i
Re ng
Po
t
ro
st
fi
E
t
Re
nd
)
Co
m
Of
ov
ns
e
t
Te
d;
ru
I
n
rm
ct
Th
ed
i
na
e
l
Pl
an Con
ne
s
B
ct
y
or
S
t
I
at
d
i
on ent
fi
Lo i
ed
ca
t
i
on
*
Ro
ad
Th
w
a
ri
e- y N
B
ri
es
B
ea
dg
Tr
t
ed
m
e
af
Co
fi
Fo
(
Ve
c
nn
r
rt
Ra
ec
i
ca
i
t
l
i
i
l
ng
on
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
Ro
)
ad
w
SE
ay
E
I
N
E
nd
Of
I
n
Te
rm
Th
i
na
e
l
Pl
an Con
ne
s
B
ct
y
or
S
t
I
at
d
i
on ent
fi
Lo i
ed
ca
t
i
on
E
xi
st
W
i
i
ng
ng
(
Ve
Ra
Po
rt
i
st
l
i
i
ca
Re ng
l
An
m
Fa
ov
d
ce
e
Pe
Re d;
Tr rpe
t
ro
nd
fi aff
i
cu
t
i
)
c
l
Co
ar
Ra
ns
i
l
t
ng
ru i
ct
ed
SE
E
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
Ro
B
ad
ol
t
w
s
ay
G
I
ua
PI
N
rd
D
ra
EX CT
i
O
l
Tr
R
N
I
an
AL
O
si
.
t
i
4
on
V
83
-
K
ey
SE
E
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
Ro
ad
w
ay
B
ol
t
s
Gu
ar
PI
dr
I
N
C
ai
D
TO
l
EX
Tr
RI
an
si
AL
N
t
i
O
on
.
V
48
3
Po Tra
st ns
i
t
i
on
B
l
oc
k
Ne
st
ed
I
n
SC
H
EM
P
W
D
i
ng
C
EX I
S
TO
t
ru Pos
N
RI
ct
t
S
O
t
5'
ur
an
AL
.
al
Or
da
4
A
rd
M
83
V
de
or
s
I
q
EW
e
(
ua
ID
I
cy
n
S
S
-4
Le
P
C
80
re
ng
H
)
sc
t
.
EM
h
ri
Th
be
E
a
d
t
I
M
2
n
Tr
Th eet
an
s
e
si
Th
I
ns
t
i
e
on
t
ru
D
es
B
ct
l
oc
i
i
gn
on
k
s
I
n
Fo Cri
t
Ab
r
er
se
D
a
es i
nc
Fo
i
e
gn
r
Of
Ne
Cu
st
rb
ed
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
Of
Th
Cu
ri
rb
eB
ea
m
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
I
EW
S
pl
i
ce
(
Gu
Po
ar
st
dr
B
ai
ol
l
t
s
Tr
Om
an
i
si
t
t
t
ed
i
on
)
Ab
se
nc
e
1
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
1:
01:
42 PM
I
EW
SC
H
EM
E
xi
st
Tr
i
ng
af
Ra
fi
c
l
Ra i
i
ng
i
l
i
An
ng
W
d
i
(
ng
Ve
Pa
Po
rt
Po
r
st
i
ca al
st
l
el
D
l
es
Le
Fa
W
5
ss
i
'
i
gn
Pr
ce
ng
I
n
T
es
Cr
R
h
L
et Pos
cr
S
an
en
i
t
t
ro
i
er
an
gt
t
be
5'
fi
Re
i
h
da
d
a
t
I
Th
)
m
n
rd
I
Fo
n
Co
o
Le
at
s
r
T
ns ved
n
(
he
S
I
D
D
;
t
t
oe gt
ru
ru
h
S
I
;
n
-4
s
ct
ct
An
No
ed
80 st
ur
ru
d,
al
t
)
ct
.
M
W
i
Ad
on
ee
i
ng
e
s
t
Th
Fo qua
Tr
e
cy
r
an
D
es
si
i
t
gn
i
on
B
l
oc
k
I
n
Ab
se
nc
e
Of
25
'
-0
Cu
"
rb
12
Ga
ug
e
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
(
Ne
st
ed
)
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er

LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
21of 24
E
nd
O
Co
nn f T
er
ec
I
n
m
t
Th
or
i
na
S
e
t
I
l
at
d
Pl
i
an ent
on
i
s
fi
Lo
ed
B
ca
y
t
i
on
Po
st
12
Po
B
'
-6
ol
st
t
"
s
(
12
7"
H
At
o
l
M
Ga
e
F
i
n.
i
Lo
ug
rs
Fr
c
e
t
om at
S
Th
i
t
on
an
ri
E
eda
On
nd
B
r
d
ea
B
Of
ri
(
m
3'
dg
B
-11
ri
e
dg
2"
)
e)
K
ey
Po
st
Ro
*
ad
Th
w
a
ri
e- y N
B
ri
es
B
ea
dg
t
Tr
ed
m
e
af
C
Fo
fi
(
on
Ve
r
c
ne
rt
Ra
ct
i
ca
i
i
l
on
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
Ro
S
)
pl
ad
i
ce
w
ay
(
Po
Gu
st
ar
SE
B
dr
ol
E
ai
t
s
l
Om
I
T
PI
N
ra
i
D
t
ns
C
t
ed
EX
i
TO
t
)
i
on
R
E
nd
Of
Te
I
n
rm
E
Th
Tr
xi
i
na
s
e
af
t
l
i
Pl
fi
ng
c
an Con
Ra
Ra
ne
s
i
B
i
ct
l
l
i
y
i
ng
or
ng
S
t
I
(
at
d
Ve An
d
i
on ent
rt
Fl
i
fi
ca
ar
Lo i
ed
l
ca
Fa ed
t
i
W
ce
on
i
n
Re
g
Po
t
ro
st
fi
t
Re
)
Co
m
ov
ns
ed
t
ru
;
ct
ed
E
nd
Of
I
n
Te
rm
Th
i
na
e
l
Pl
an Con
ne
s
B
ct
y
or
S
t
I
at
d
i
on ent
fi
Lo i
ed
ca
t
i
on
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
E
xi
st
i
ng
(
Ve
Po
Ra
rt
st
i
i
ca
l
i
Re
ng
l
m
Fa
An
ov
ce
ed
d
Re
Fl
;
Tr
ar
t
ro
a
ed
ff
fi
t
i
W
)
c
i
Co
ng
Ra
ns
i
l
t
ng
ru i
ct
ed
SE
E
Ro
B
ol
ad
t
w
s
ay
Gu
ar
PI
dr
C
ai
TO
l
Tr
RI
an
N
si
AL
O
t
i
on
.
48
3
Tr
af
fi
(
Ve
c
rt
Ra
i
ca
i
l
i
l
ng
Fa
ce
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
K
ey
I
N
D
EX
TO
RI
N
AL
O
.
V
48
I
EW
3
SC
H
EM
Po
st
V
I
EW
SC
H
EM
gn
t
r
ur
E
M
S
al
or
t
an
3
Th
da Ade e I
n
r
rd
qu
(
e
W i
L
s
ac
en
-B -B
(
y
gt
ID
ea ea
I
Pr
h
nt
m
S
m
-4
Th
es
eg
O
S
80
cr
at
ra
ho r
)
i
l
w W.
b
M
ed
Ap
n) B
ee
ea
pr
t
I
s
m
n
oa
Th
Th
B
ch
ar
Ne
e
e
ri
S
st
I
l
ns De
er
ab
ed
si
t
ru
gn
W
Th
ct
i
t
Cr
ri
h
i
on
ei
Cu
t
s
er
B
rb
ea
Fo
i
a
m
r
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
Ne
st
ed
W
-B
ea
m
W
-B
ea
m
B
ar
ri
er
Ne
st
ed
Th
r
(
e
W i
-B -B
ea ea
m
m
O
S
ho r
w Wn) B
ea
m
Po
st
I
nt
eg
ra
l
Ap
pr
oa
ch
Ne
S
st
l
ab
ed
W
Th
i
t
ri
h
eCu
B
rb
ea
m
Ro
B
ol
ad
t
w
s
ay
Gu
ar
dr
ai
l
Tr
an
si
PI
t
i
C
on
1:
01:
44 PM
SE
E
I
N
D
EX
K
ey
N
I
O
AL
.
48
V
I
3
EW
W
i
ng
Fo
Po
S
r
C
st
S
D
H
t
es
5'
ru
EM
i
O
c
E
xi
st
Tr
i
ng
af
Ra
fi
c
l
Ra i
i
ng
i
l
i
An
ng
d
(
Ve
Fl
ar
rt
i
ed
ca
W
l
i
ng
Fa Wi
Po
ce ng
Po
st
Re Pos
st
D
t
t
es
L
ro
es
5'
i
fi Rem
gn
Pr
s
I
t
n
)
ov
Th
es
Cr
Co
L
ed
c
S
a
en
i
ns
t
t
;
er
an ri
gt n 5
be
t
ru
i
h
da
'
d
a
I
Th
ct
n
rd
I
F
n
ed
or
L
a
s
e
Th
t
n
(
S
I
D
e
D
t
oe gt
ru
h;
S
I
ns
-4
s
ct
An
No
t
80
ur
I
ru
nt
d,
al
t
)
eg
ct
.
M
W
i
Ad
ra
on
ee
i
ng
l
eq
s
t
Ap
Th
ua
Fo
pr
e
cy
r
oa
D
es
ch
i
gn
S
l
ab
W
i
t
h
Cu
rb
25
'
-0
"
12
Ga
ug
e
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
(
Ne
st
ed
)
W
-B
ea
m

B
ar
ri
er
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
22 of 24
15
'
-71
2"
Pa
ne
l
E
nd
An
Un
ch
l
es
or
Fo
s
ag
r
Ot
e
I
As
he
n
As
se
r
Th
se
E
m
e
n
bl
m
d
Pl
y
bl
A
an
y
Ty
s. nch
Ty
pe
or
E
pe
nd
I
ag
I
I
e
I
A
S
nc
Ca
ho
h
l
w
l
ed
n. ora
ge
E
nd
An
Ca
ch
l
l
ed
or
Fo
ag
r
Fo
e
E
S
r
nd
H
As
I
OU
n
se
Lo
Th
LD
m
ca
e
E
bl
t
R
i
Pl
y
o
n
an
GU
Ty
S
s;
AR
pe
ee
D
I
I
RA
I
nd End
I
Un
e
LS
A
x
l
es
No nch
s
or
FI
.
40
Ot
ag
GU
he
0,
e
RE
r
As
"
LO
E
2"
se
nd
CA
m
TI
An
bl
NG
y
ch
or
TE Typ
ag
e
RM
e
I
I
NA I S
ho
LS
w
ON
n.
2"
Pa
ne
l
G
U
AR
D
RA
I
L
Ro
ad
w
ay
TR
AI
LI
N
G
Tr
ai
l
i
ng
EN
D
E
nd
G
U
AR
D
RA
I
L
AN
D
M
ea
su
re
Fo
r
Ro
ad
w
ay
AN
C
H
O
RA
G
E
Gu
ar
dr
ai
l
Tr
af
fi
c
Tr
af
fi
(
Th
c
ri
e- Rai
l
B
i
ng
ea
m
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
Th
I
e
N
L
B
l
AB
oc at
er
k
S
al
s
SE
l
ab
M
L
oc
N
An ay
C
Ne at
d
i
E
on
W
ed
i
ng
O
O
To
f
F
Po
Th
B
O
st
e
es
TH
D
e
D
et
et
er Pos
ER
ai
m
t
l
s
s
i
ne
Fo
An
H
Re
d
r
d
AZ
Fr
t
Th
ro
om Req
AR
fi
e
ui
t
A
T
re
pp
Po
D
he
d
ro
S
st
Ap
Of
s
ac
pr
fs
h
oa
et
S
i
ch
de
Ro
ad
(
w
E
ay
i
t
As her
Pa
re
W
Ca
-B
n
l
l
ed
ea t G
ua
Fo m
rd
Or
r
ra
I
Th
n
i
l
ri
Th
e- Sys
e
B
t
Pl
em
ea
an
m
s)
EN
D
E
nd
AN
C
H
O
RA
G
E
12
'
-6
"
Pa
ne
l
TR
AI
LI
N
G
Th
e
L
B
l
oc at
ks era
S
l
l
ab
M
Lo
An ay
c
Ne at
d
i
on
W
ed
i
ng
Of
To
Po
Th
st Be
es
D
D
et e P
et
er
os
ai
m
t
l
s
i
ne s A
Fo
Re
n
d
r
Fr d R
t
Th
ro
om
eq
fi
e
t
A
Th ui
re
pp
Po
e
d
ro
st
Ap
Of
s
ac
pr
fs
h
o
et
S
i
de ach
.
15
'
-71
Gu
ar
dr
ai
l
H
EN
O
TH
ER
THRIE-BEAM RETROFIT NOTES
Tr
af
fi
c
Tr
af
fi
(
Th
c
ri
e- Rai
l
B
i
ng
ea
m
Re
t
ro
fi
t
)
H
AZ
AR
D
S
NOTES FOR TRAILING END TRAFFIC RAILING

VERTICAL FACE RETROFITS
1. Where Guardrail Extensions Are Required Beyond The Trailing End Of Bridges With
Traffic Railing Vertical Face Retrofits, Guardrail Connections To The Bridge Railing
Will Be By SPECIAL END SHOE For W-Beam Guardrail Extensions And By
THRIE-BEAM TERMINAL CONNECTOR For Thrie-Beam Guardrail Extensions.
2. Install W-Beam Special End Shoes and Thrie-Beam Terminal Connectors With Back-up
Plates, And
PR
ES
EN
T
1. See indexes for bridge thrie-beam traffic railing retrofits.
7
8"
1
4"
HS Hex Bolts And Nuts (12" Long) with 2
OD Plain Round Washers
Under Heads And Nuts (4 Required For Special End Shoes And 5 Required For
Thrie-Beam Terminal Connectors). Back-Up Plates For Special End Shoes are
5
8"
12"x12"x
5
8".
And For Terminal Connector 21"x12"x
3. Payment For Connecting Trailing End Special End Shoes And Thrie-Beam Terminal
Connectors To Traffic Railing Vertical Face Retrofits Will Be Made Under The
2. Trailing end guardrail to be paid for under the contract unit price for the parent roadway guardrail;
Contract Unit Price For Guardrail Bridge Anchorage Assembly, EA..
end measure includes length of end anchorage assembly; additional payment made for end anchorage
1:
01:
45 PM
assembly. No additional payment for connecting roadway thrie-beam to bridge thrie-beam retrofit.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TRAILING END GUARDRAIL AND ANCHORAGE FOR BRIDGE TRAFFIC RAILING (THRIE BEAM RETROFITS)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
23 of 24
Th
ri
eTe Bea
m
Co rm
i
na
nn
l
ec
t
or
Th
ri
eB
ea
S
pe
m
ci
Te
al
rm
Ga
i
na
l
va
l
ni
Co
ze
nn
(
a)
d
ec
(
S
t
b)
or
t
ee
(
c)
Pl
l
Fi
at
(
d)
l
e
l
er
(
e)
Pl
(
a
f)
t
e,
S
ee
(
g)
25
'
B
Th *
ea
ri
m
ePa
ne
l
B
ri
dg
e
Te
rm
T
i
na hri
e
l
Co -Be
am
nn
ec
t
or
Te
rm
T
i
na hri
e
l
Co -Be
am
nn
ec
t
or
Th
ri
eB
ea
m
Te
rm
G
(
a)
i
U
na
(
b)
AR
l
C
(
c)
on
D
(
ne
RA
d)
ct
(
I
e)
or
L
(
f)
Pl
W
at
H
e
EN
(
g)
*
B
25
ri
'
dg
Th
e
ri
eAp
B
pr
ea
oa
m
S
ch
l
Pa
ab
ne
l
G
U
AR
D
RA
No
I
.
L
4
Th
ri
eB
ea
S
pe
m
ci
Te
al
rm
Ga
i
na
l
va
l
ni
Co
ze
nn
d
ec
S
t
or
t
ee
Pl
l
Fi
at
l
e
l
e
r
(
a)
Pl
(
at
b)
e,
(
c)
S
ee
(
d)
I
nd
(
e)
ex
(
f)
No
.
40
0
(
g)
25
B
ri
dg 'T
hr
e
i
eB
Ap
ea
pr
m
oa
S
Pa
ch
l
ab
ne
l
AT
TA
C
W
(
H
Ap
h)
A
ED
(
I
pr
h)
pp
N
G
oa
ro
G
0
A
U
ch
ac
0
TT
AR
PO TO
h
Tr
S
Ap
Tr
t
AC
D
an
af
pr
(
EX
ST
12
h)
af
S
1
RA
f
d
t
oa
2'
'
i
fi
an
ar
H
-6
c
I
ch
c
6"
I
da
ED
d
ST
"
I
L
S
Th
SA
W
Tr
rd
Th
A
I
ri
W
S
af
Tr
ri
I
N
W
TO sse -Bea
t
-T
FE AT
eN
As
W
ean
Tr
fi
an
-B
G
m
-T
B
AD
c
m
B
se
an
da
*
si hri
bl
ea
ea
TY TA
*
ea
hr
B
e
m
t
y
G
s
E
rd
m
m
i
C
,
E
ua
m
i
i
on
bl
R
e
B
t
X
*
O
i
H
Q
Pa
y,
Gu
ea
W
on
rd
I
SH
P
r
B
As
I
S
D
1
ED
-B
an
U
ea
ST
ar
ne
m
ra
Ot
Or
1
2
ec
se
S
G
2'
'
AT
el
ea
-6
AP
m
he
l
i
ec
t
l
-6
m
i
E
Ot dra
,
I
(
on
m
"
(
r
N
t
bl
N
T
N
E
"
i
h
E
i
Th
E
es
on
l
es
S
y,
Gu
n
er
T
S
O
,
G
W
d
pe
hr
ri
t
E
A
-T
t
F
ar
ed
Or
TR
e
S
e
A
n
ci
i
FE
EX
O
W
d)
hr
ed
-B
nc
pe
)
a
Ot dra
R
AF
l
B
An
i
h
e
I
c
SCHEME I
N
e
TY
*
SCHEME II
or
ea
he
i
am
N
i
Tr
I
al
e
l
c
S
B
,
*
G
st
ho
ag
G
FI
m
r
ea
e
E
TI
Tr
Pa
ed
U
Ne
S
ra
Pa
SH am
C
pe nd
ea
PO tme e
AR
ne
N
ge
st
W
n
SCHEME
III
T
An
ci
t
nt
el
l
G
ed
-B
RA
ra
m
A
al
D
S
ch
PE
ea
ns
(
T
Ne
RA
W
or
BR ent
Tr
I
i
m
-B
LI
t
s
ag
ea
i
t
on
*
I
e
I
T
e
N
e
L
t
am
D
d)
m
R
G
S
G
en
A
A
ec
E
t
N
FF
t
i
on
C
I
H
C
O
Use Of Scheme I Shall Be Determined
* Splice Locations: Thrie-Beam - 12 Guardrail Splice Bolts And Recessed Nuts
RA
RA
*
In Accordance With The Instructions For Design Standards (IDS-402).
I
G
W-Beam - 8 Guardrail Splice Bolts And Recessed Nuts
LI
E
N
Use Of Schemes II And III Shall Be Determined In Accordance With The Instruction For Design Standards (IDS-402)
G
Ne
GUARDRAIL TRANSITION TO EXISTING FLAT SLAB BRIDGES
Ap
pr
oa
S
ch
l
ab
I
nd
ex
st
ed
GUARDRAIL TRANSITIONS TO EXISTING PRESTRESSED BEAM OR GIRDER BRIDGES

Existing Flat Slab
6'-3"
APPROACH POSTS AND SPECIAL OFFSET BLOCKS
Bridge Wing Post

Transition
1
5 4"
(a)
W
-B
ea
m
Block assemblies for special offsets can be made up of one special block plus one standard size block or of three standard size blocks field dressed
to approximately equal size, with the pieces secured for relative position by 16d galvanized nails, see '16d NAIL FOR PREVENTION OF OFFSET BLOCK
ROTATION' - Index 400. The nested rails shall not be bolted to the blocks and posts at posts (a), (c) and (e). The details shown are for approach slabs
with internal edge dike extending beyond parapet type traffic railing termini.
Bridge Approach Slab

Varies (k)
(2'-6" Typ)
Or Girder Bridge Wing Post
SCHEME II
3'-9"
2'-6" Or
or 3'-5"
2'-10"
c
1 2"c
'
3@ 3
c
6 4"c
'
6@ 1
(a)
7'-6"
A
3'-6"
Transition Recess
Varies (2' Min)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
l
a
c
i
p
y
"T
3
'
6
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
(h)
(g)
Shoulder Gutter
2'
Bridge
6'-3"
6'-3" Add Single

Panels As Required
SCHEME III
1
5
"
4
0.06
3'
Guardrail Payment
1
2"
Varies (3'-1
Min.,
6'-3" Max. With Face
SECTION AA
Existing Approach
Exist. Shoulder Gutter Transition
Slab (To Remain)
End Measurement For
When Face Panel
0
.
0
6(
St
d
.
)
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
Arc
Approach Slab
Adjustment Exceeds
4'
6"
22'
-10 1/8 "
Shoulder Break Point
6'-3"
2'
-1"
Existing Prestressed Beam
Exist. Shoulder Gutter
A
Approach Traffic
Offset Location Shown For 1:25 Flare.
Guardrail Transition Cost To Be Included In The Contract Unit Price For The
For Other Flare Offsets And Parallel Alignments
Approaching Guardrail System; No Additional Payment For Thrie-Beam Panels,
See Index No. 400. (Shoulder Gutter Shown)
Nested Panels, W-Thrie Beam Transition Panel, and Accessories.
Panels Adjusted Forward)
NOTES FOR GUARDRAIL TRANSITIONS TO SAFETY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILINGS ON EXISTING BRDIGES
PLAN
SCHEME III
1. When the existing wing post is to be replaced with a bridge traffic railing in accordance with the Instructions For Design Standards (IDS-402), the
thrie-beam guardrail connection shall be in accordance with Detail J of Index No. 400.
2. When the guardrail attachment overlays the Bridge Number, Bridge Name or Date on the traffic railing, provide an aluminum sign panel with the
5
8"
21"x12"x
7
8"
1
2"
x 18" Long [15" Long With 3

1
4"
Length For Bridge Safety Shape Railing] HS Hex Bolts And Nuts (5 Reqd.) With 2
Min. Thread
OD Plain Round Washers Under
1:
01:
46 PM
Heads And Nuts. [When Attaching Guardrail To Existing Wing Posts Or Bridge Rails, Care Should Be Exercised To Avoid
Damaging Conduits And Their Utilities That May Be Routed Through Wing Posts Or Bridge Rails. When Conduits And
Their Utilities Are Encountered, At Least Five
7
8"
obscured information. Attach the sign panel to the face of the traffic railing adjacent to the Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector with
concrete screws or expansion anchors at each corner, as approved by the Engineer. The sign panel shall be a
1
minimum 16"
1
4"
x 1" long
thick and meet the
requirements of Specification Section 700 with a white background and 3" tall black letters and sized appropriately to contain the information
required. The cost of the sign panel shall be included in the cost of the Guardrail Bridge Anchorage Assembly.
HS Hex Bolts Shall Be Installed In Any Of The Seven Holes Provided
In The Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector.]
3. When retrofitting thrie-beam guardrail to existing wing posts or existing bridge safety shape traffic railing, attachment construction to be paid for
under the contract unit price for Guardrail Bridge Anchorage Assembly, EA., and shall be full compensation for bolt hole construction, terminal
12/3/2015
connector, terminal connector plate(s) and bolts, nuts and washers.
GUARDRAIL APPROACH TRANSITIONS AND CONNECTIONS FOR EXISTING FLAT SLAB, PRESTRESSED BEAM AND
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
GIRDER BRIDGES WITH SAFETY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILING EXTENDING LESS THAN FULL APPROACH SLAB LENGTH
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
402
SHEET
NO.
24 of 24
GENERAL NOTES
Adhesive Bonding
Dowel Bar 6D
Material System
Em bedm ent Length
shall be Class II (Bridge Deck).
ADHESIVE-BONDED DOWELS: Adhesive Bonding Material Systems for Dowels shall comply with Specification Section 937 and be
Varies
installed in accordance with Specification Section 416. The field testing proof loads required by Specification Section 416
shall be 23,800 lbs. for Dowel Bars 6D on the inside face (traffic side) of the railing (1'-0" embedment) and 18,500 lbs for
Dowel Bars 6D along the outside face of the traffic railing (5" min. embedment).
BRIDGES ON CURVED ALIGNMENTS: The details presented in this Standard are shown for bridges on tangent alignments.
Details for bridges on horizontally curved alignments are similar.
"
BARRIER DELINEATORS: Barrier Delineators shall meet Specification Section 993. Install Barrier Delineators on top of the
Varies
CONCRETE: Concrete for the Traffic Railing (Vertical Face Retrofit) shall be Class IV. Concrete for Curb Transition Blocks
Traffic Railing along the entire length of the bridge 2" from the face on the traffic side at the spacing shown in the table
Existing
below. Barrier Delineator color (white or yellow) shall match the color of the near edgeline.
Concrete
GUARDRAIL: See Index 400 for guardrail component details, geometric layouts and associated notes not fully detailed herein.
Hole Diameter to meet

BRIDGE NAME PLATE: If a portion of the existing Traffic Railing is to be removed that carries the bridge name, number and or
Manufacturer's Requirements
date, or if the installation of the Traffic Railing (Thrie Beam Retrofit) will obscure the bridge name, number and or date, then
replace the information that has been removed or obscured, with 3" tall black lettering on white nonreflective sheeting applied
DOWEL DETAIL
to the top of the adjacent guardrail. The information must be clearly visible from the right side of the approaching travel lane.
The sheeting and adhesive backing shall comply with Specification Section 994 and may comprise individual decals of letters
and numbers.
Note:
Shift dowel holes to clear if the
PAYMENT: Guardrail Bridge Anchorage Assembly (each) includes all barrier delineators for the entire bridge length, transition
existing reinforcement is encountered.
blocks, and necessary hardware to complete the Guardrail transitions shown.
BARRIER DELINEATOR
SPACING
Distance Edge of Travel Lane
Spacing (Ft.)
1:
01:
47 PM
to Face of Railing
< 4'
40'
4' to 8'
80'
None Required
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
> than 8'
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
GUARDRAIL TRANSITIONS-EXISTING POST & BEAM
DESIGN STANDARDS
BRIDGE RAILINGS (NARROW & RECESSED CURBS)
NO.
404
SHEET
NO.
1of 8
Begin or End Bridge
(if present at this location)
Beam Railing
Open Joint
See Detail A
Existing Post &

Open Joint in Railing (width varies)
in Railing
(if present)
Existing Post & Beam Railing
Existing End Post
See Detail A
Existing End Post
Begin or End Bridge
Open Joint (width varies)
Existing Guardrail
Existing
(to be removed,
Guardrail
if present)
(to be removed,
if present)
Existing Narrow Curb
Existing Bridge Deck
Flat Slab
Existing Approach Slab (if present)
Existing
Approach Slab
Existing Wing Wall

Existing Bent Cap
3 OR MORE CONTINUOUS RAILING PANELS ON WINGWALL ADJACENT TO END POST
(if present)
3 OR MORE CONTINUOUS RAILING PANELS ADJACENT TO BEGIN OR END BRIDGE
Begin or End Bridge

Open Joint
in Railing
(if present)
Existing End Post
Existing Post &

Beam Railing
Existing End Post
Begin or End Bridge

Existing Guardrail
Existing
(to be removed,
Guardrail
if present)
(to be removed,
if present)

Flat Slab
Existing
Approach Slab
Existing Wing Wall
Existing Bent Cap
2 CONTINUOUS RAILING PANELS ON WINGWALL ADJACENT TO END POST
(if present)
2 CONTINUOUS RAILING PANELS ADJACENT TO BEGIN OR END BRIDGE
Begin or End Bridge

Open Joint
Existing Post &
C
Existing End Post
in Railing
Beam Railing
Existing Post &

Beam Railing
(if present)
Existing End Post
Begin or End Bridge

Existing Guardrail
Existing
(to be removed,
Guardrail
if present)
(to be removed,
if present)
Flat Slab
Existing
Approach Slab
Existing Wing Wall
Existing Bent Cap
1 RAILING PANEL ON WINGWALL ADJACENT TO END POST
(if present)
1 RAILING PANEL ADJACENT TO BEGIN OR END BRIDGE

SCHEME 2 - APPROACH ENDS OF BRIDGES
WITH FLAT SLAB SUPERSTRUCTURE & PARALLEL WINGWALLS (SHOWN)
WITH BEAM OR GIRDER SUPERSTRUCTURE
OR BEAM OR GIRDER SUPERSTRUCTURE & PARALLEL OR CURVED WINGWALLS (SIMILAR)

Existing Reinforcing
Steel (Typ.)
Existing Post
Existing
Existing Post
Post &
& Beam Railing
Existing
& Beam Railing
End Post &
to be removed
Beam
to be removed
Railing
within limits
Existing
Remove exposed existing
Post &
Curb to be
within limits
Beam
removed
shown above
Railing
1:
01:
48 PM
Narrow Curb
Structure
Narrow Curb
Existing
Wingwall
Existing
Existing
Structure
F-1 epoxy in accordance
Existing
Structure
Existing
Wingwall
to remain
Flat Slab
12/3/2015
Superstructure
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
with Section 926. (Typ.)
Narrow Curb
Narrow Curb
to remain
Existing
to remain
Structure to be removed
end of railing with Type
Existing
Existing
Limits of Existing
below finished end of saw

cut. Repair resulting holes
Existing Post
Existing
burning or grinding to 1"
and then coat entire cut
shown above
Existing
LEGEND
reinforcing steel by
Existing Railing
SECTION C-C
Existing Bridge
Saw cut Railing and grind flat
Deck, Flat Slab
to align with edge of post.
or Approach
Slab (if present)
DETAIL A
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
LIMITS OF REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURE - POST & BEAM RAILING WITH NARROW CURB
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
404
SHEET
NO.
2 of 8
" Open Joint
Existing Bridge
Existing Post &
Dowel Bars 6D1
Beam Railing
Direction of Traffic
Coping
or Deck Joint
(Typ. Except as noted)
Bars 5S
existing Deck Joint at
Existing Bridge
Existing End Post
Coping
Existing Post &
Begin or End Bridge
Bars 6D2
(Typ.)
" Open Joint
Match width of
Vertical Face Retrofit Railing
Beam Railing
(if present).
Dowel Bars 6D1
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
(Parallel End Post shown;
Curved End Post similar)
** See Limits of Removal

of Existing Structure
Sheet 2 of 8.
3" (Typ.)
3" (Typ.)
Gutter
7"
Roadway Guardrail
Line
Gutter
7"
Roadway Guardrail
Line
Approach Transition
Approach Transition
2 equal sp. @
2 equal sp. @
1'-3" Spacing Max. (Typ.)
11" Max.
11" Max.
2 equal sp. 1'-3" Spacing Max. (Typ.)
@ 1'-3" Max.
@ 1'-3" Max.
Bars 6D spacing at
Bars 6D spacing at
PARTIAL PLAN OF RAILING
Railing Ends (Typ)
Varies**
Existing Post &
Existing End Post
Beam Railing
Railing End Transition
2'-8"
6D (Typ.)
Varies**
Existing Post &
Dowel Bars
4"
Beam Railing
Begin or End Bridge
Railing Ends (Typ)
Deck Joint
Dowel Bars 6D (Typ.)
(Field cut Bars 6D2 and
field bend Bars 5S
Roadway
to clear)
Guardrail
Approach
Top of
Top of
Existing
Existing
Curb
Transition
Curb
Roadway
Guardrail
Existing
Approach
Narrow Curb
Transition
Existing Wingwall
Existing Flat Slab
Existing Approach
Slab (if present)
PARTIAL ELEVATION OF INSIDE FACE OF RAILING


Gutter Line

Gutter Line
1'-112"
Match height & face

11"
1"
112"
of Existing Railing
11"
ESTIMATED TRAFFIC RAILING QUANTITIES
1
2"
2 "
Thrie-Beam Guardrail Bolts
3"
3" Cover (Front)

2" Cover (Top & Back)
2" Cover (Top & Back)
7 sp. @
Bars 6D1
3 "
(Typ.)
Existing
= 2'
-2"
(Typ.)
2'
-3"
Bars 5S
Dowel
0.076
Reinforcing Steel
LB/FT
14.71
CONVENTIONAL REINFORCING STEEL BENDING DIAGRAM

3'-1"
Bars 6D1
MARK
SIZE
LENGTH
3'-10"
Bars 6D2
D1
3'-1"
Length as Required
Bars 5S
D2
3'-10"
AS REQD.
Dowel
Bars 6D2
BARS 6D & 5S

Existing
Em bed.
Wingwall
1'
-0" M in.
4"
(if present)
9"
Approach Slab
Varies
Em bed.
1'
-0" M in.
2" M in.
9"
Varies
Deck
Bridge
1:
01:
49 PM
QUANTITY
CY/FT
Existing

12/3/2015
UNIT
Narrow Curb
SECTION A-A
ITEM
Concrete
3" Cover (Front)
Bars 5S
3'
-0"
3 "
3"
= 1'
-6 "
5 sp. @
2'
-3"
1"
at top of Railing
2 "
at top of Railing
3'
-0"
1'-112"
Match height & face
of Existing Railing
Existing Bent Cap
1. All bar dimensions in the bending diagrams are out to out.

2. The reinforcement for the railing on a retaining wall shall be
the same as detailed for a bridge deck.
3. All reinforcing steel in the Vertical Face Retrofit Railing shall
have a 2" minimum cover.
SECTION B-B
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
VERTICAL FACE RETROFIT RAILING DETAILS - POST & BEAM RAILING WITH NARROW CURB
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
404
SHEET
NO.
3 of 8
Begin or End Bridge

Beam Railing
Open Joint
See Detail A
Existing Post &
Existing End Post
in Railing
See Detail A
Existing End Post
Begin or End Bridge

(if present)
Existing Guardrail
Existing
(to be removed,
Guardrail
if present)
(to be removed,
if present)
Existing Recessed Curb

Flat Slab
Existing
Existing Wing Wall
Approach Slab
Existing Bent Cap
3 OR MORE CONTINUOUS RAILING PANELS ON WINGWALL ADJACENT TO END POST
(if present)
3 OR MORE CONTINUOUS RAILING PANELS ADJACENT TO BEGIN OR END BRIDGE
Begin or End Bridge

Open Joint
Existing End Post
in Railing

(if present)
Existing Post &

Beam Railing
Existing End Post
Begin or End Bridge

Existing Guardrail
Existing
(to be removed,
Guardrail
if present)
(to be removed,
if present)
Flat Slab
Existing
Existing Wing Wall
Approach Slab
Existing Bent Cap
2 CONTINUOUS RAILING PANELS ON WINGWALL ADJACENT TO END POST
(if present)
2 CONTINUOUS RAILING PANELS ADJACENT TO BEGIN OR END BRIDGE
Begin or End Bridge

Existing Post &
Open Joint
Existing End Post
in Railing
Beam Railing
Existing Post &

Beam Railing
(if present)
Existing End Post
Begin or End Bridge

Existing Guardrail
Existing
(to be removed,
Guardrail
if present)
(to be removed,
if present)
Flat Slab
Existing
Existing Wing Wall
Approach Slab
Existing Bent Cap
1 RAILING PANEL ON WINGWALL ADJACENT TO END POST
(if present)
1 RAILING PANEL ADJACENT TO BEGIN OR END BRIDGE


Existing Reinforcing
Existing
Existing Post &
Post &
Beam Railing to
Beam
Railing
be removed within
Existing Post &
Existing
Beam Railing to
Post &
be removed within
limits shown above
Steel (Typ.)
Remove exposed existing
LEGEND
reinforcing steel by burning or
Existing Railing
Beam
grinding to 1" below finished end of
Limits of Existing
Railing
saw cut. Repair resulting holes and
Structure to be removed
then coat entire cut end of railing
limits shown above
or curb with Type F-1 epoxy in

Existing Post
Recessed Curb
1:
01:
50 PM
Structure
accordance with Section 926. (Typ.)
Existing
Existing
Existing
Existing
Recessed Curb
Saw cut Railing and Recessed
Structure
to remain
Existing
Curb and grind flat to align
to remain
Existing Bridge Deck,
with edge of post.
Flat Slab or Approach
Wingwall
Existing
Slab (if present)

Flat Slab
12/3/2015
Superstructure
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
DETAIL A
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
LIMITS OF REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURE - POST & BEAM RAILING WITH RECESSED CURB
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
404
SHEET
NO.
4 of 8
" Open Joint
Existing Bridge
or Deck Joint
Existing Post &
(Typ. Except as noted)
" Open Joint
Existing Bridge
existing Deck Joint at

Bars 5S
Dowel Bars 6D
Beam Railing
Match width of
Coping
Begin or End Bridge
Bars 6D2
(Typ.)
Existing End Post
Coping
Existing Post &
Beam Railing
(if present).
Dowel Bars 6D
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
** See Limits of Removal

of Existing Structure
Sheet 4 of 8.
3" (Typ.)
3" (Typ.)
Roadway Guardrail
7"
Roadway Guardrail
7"
Approach Transition
Approach Transition
2 equal sp. @
2 equal sp. @
11" Max.
11" Max.
@ 1'-2" Max.
@ 1'-2" Max.
Existing Flat Slab
Bars 6D spacing at
Bars 6D spacing at
Railing Ends (Typ)
Varies**
Beam Railing
6D (Typ.)
Varies**
Existing Post &
Dowel Bars
2'-8"

4"
Existing Post &
Begin or End Bridge
Railing Ends (Typ)
Existing End Post
Beam Railing
Deck Joint
(Field cut Bars 6D and
field bend Bars 5S
Roadway
to clear)
Guardrail
Approach
Transition
Roadway
Guardrail
Approach
Transition
Top of
Existing
Wingwall
Existing Flat Slab
Existing Wingwall
Existing Approach
Slab (if present)

Existing Bent Cap

SCHEME 3 - APPROACH ENDS OF BRIDGES WITH BEAM OR GIRDER SUPERSTRUCTURE
1'-012"
Match height & face

of Existing Railing
11"
1
2"
of Existing Railing
2 "
3"
Dowel
Bars 6D
UNIT
QUANTITY
CY/FT
0.102
Reinforcing Steel
LB/FT
17.97
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
= 2'
-2"
Varies
3 "
(Typ.)
ITEM
Concrete
3" Cover (Back)
3 "
Bars 5S
3'
-0" M in.
, 3'
-1 " M ax.
3" Cover (Back)
= 2'
-2"

2" Cover (Front & Top)
7 sp. @
3"
2" Cover (Front & Top)
7 sp. @
Varies
3'
-0" M in.
, 3'
-1 " M ax.
11"
1
2"
at top of Railing
2 "
at top of Railing
1'-012"
Match height & face

1
3'-4"
Bars 6D
Length as Required
Bars 5S
Dowel
Bars 6D
MARK
SIZE
LENGTH
3'-4"
AS REQD.
BARS 6D & 5S
Flat Slab
Superstructure
Em bed.
Existing
1'
-0" M in.
**
1'
-0" M in.
(if present)
12/3/2015
1:
01:
50 PM
Approach Slab
Wingwall
4"
Existing
Em bed.
4"

Existing
** 6" Min. Embed. with

Notched Sidewalk Slab.

Notched Sidewalk Slab (if present)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
VERTICAL FACE RETROFIT RAILING DETAILS - POST & BEAM RAILING WITH RECESSED CURB
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
404
SHEET
NO.
5 of 8
Guardrail Post (Typ.)
Existing Bridge Coping

Gutter Line
Transition Block (if shown in Plans)
Varies
Begin or End Bridge

PARTIAL PLAN - APPROACH TRANSITION

Limiting Station of Transition
Begin or End Bridge

Varies
Direction of Adjacent Traffic
(2'-6" Min., 3'-0" Max.)

Guardrail Transition
Thrie-Beam
Standard Guardrail
Terminal Connector
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
1'
-9"
2'
-1"
(a)
Existing Curb

(if present)
Two 12'-6" Thrie-Beam Panels (Nested)
6'-3" W-Thrie Beam
12'-6" W-Beam Panels (Nested)
Transition Panel
PARTIAL ELEVATION - APPROACH TRANSITION

SCHEMES 1 & 3
(Narrow Curb Shown, Recessed Curb Similar)

Gutter Line
Varies
Begin or End Bridge


Varies
(2'-6" Min, 3'-0" Max.)

1
2"
1'-1
Standard Guardrail
Thrie-Beam
Begin or End Bridge
Terminal Connector
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
1'
-9"
2'
-1"
(a)
Existing Curb

Varies

1:
01:
51 PM
Thrie-Beam Panel
6'-3" W-Thrie Beam
Transition Panel

SCHEMES 2 & 4
*
See Limits of Removal of

Existing Structure, Sheets
2 of 8 and 4 of 8.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
(Narrow Curb Shown, Recessed Curb Similar, Flat Slab Superstructure Shown, Beam or Girder Superstructure Similar)
GUARDRAIL TRANSITION DETAILS - SHEET 1 OF 2
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
404
SHEET
NO.
6 of 8

Existing Solid
Section of Railing
Gutter Line
Varies
Begin or End Bridge


Begin or End Bridge

Varies
(2'-6" Min., 3'-0" Max.)

Thrie-Beam
Standard Guardrail
Terminal Connector
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
1'
-9"
2'
-1"
(a)
Existing Curb

Existing Solid Section of Railing
(if present)
6'-3" W-Thrie Beam
Transition Panel

SCHEME 5
(Narrow Curb shown; Recessed Curb similar)
Existing End Post

Trailing End Guardrail Connection
(W-Beam shown) when called for
Begin or End Bridge

2'
-1"
in Plans, See Index 400
Existing
Flat Slab
Approach Slab
(if present)
Existing Bent Cap
PARTIAL ELEVATION - TRAILING END TRANSITION

(Narrow Curb Scheme 2 shown; All other Schemes similar)
12/3/2015
1:
01:
52 PM
SCHEME 6
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
GUARDRAIL TRANSITION DETAILS - SHEET 2 OF 2

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
404
SHEET
NO.
7 of 8
7'-0"
Existing Bridge or Approach
New Guardrail Posts, positioned
8"
Top of
10"
1'
-0"
tooled top edge
Approach Slab
1'
-6"
10"
Top of Existing
4"
Transition Block
3
4"
8"
Varies
Existing Curb
8"
Gutter Line
Block (Typ.)
Spaces
2 Equal
10"
as required to clear Transition
& Sides)
1
ear
2" Cl
(
Top
Slab Mounted Curb
or Bridge Deck
1'-6"
#3 Stirrups (Field
#4 Adhesive-Bonded
Edge of Existing Approach
Bend) (Typ.)
Slab (Location varies)
Dowels (6 Required)
END VIEW A-A

2'-3"
2'-3"
1'-3"
Varies
PLAN VIEW OF TRANSITION BLOCK
8"
(GUARDRAIL NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
4" (
Typ.
)
1'-3"
or Bridge Deck
Transition Block
and slope at traffic face
#3 Stirrups (Field
Bend) (Typ.)
Top of Existing Approach
1'
-0"
NOTES:
ANCHOR RODS: Steel Anchor Rods shall be ASTM A36, ASTM A709 Grade 36
1
ear
2" Cl
Slab or Bridge Deck
A
#3 STIRRUP (FIELD BEND)
(
Bottom )
Existing Curb
Match existing curb height
Varies
Top of
1'
-0"
Dowels (6 Required)
10"
4"
#4 Adhesive-Bonded
1" Anchor Rods 3'-0" long driven
or ASTM A615 Grade 60 hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
into ground prior to casting concrete
ADHESIVE-BONDED DOWELS: Adhesive Bonded Dowels are shown installed

in an existing curb or sidewalk integrally reinforced with Approach Slab,
Wingwall or Bridge Deck. For installations in existing detached curbs or
sidewalks, install dowels in available sound concrete.
ELEVATION OF TRANSITION BLOCK

Shift bars (as needed) to install six dowels into existing bridge or
(GUARDRAIL AND POSTS NOT
approach slab mounted curb.
SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES PER TRANSITION BLOCK

UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete Class II (Bridge Deck)
CY
0.4
Reinforcing Steel
LB
61
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:
01:
53 PM
ITEM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
404
SHEET
NO.
8 of 8
Match Deck Joint width
GENERAL NOTES
Field Cut Bars 6D to provide
CONCRETE: Concrete for the Traffic Railing (Vertical Face Retrofit) and replacement curb sections shall be Class IV. Concrete
2" cover above blockout (Typ.)
Bars 4C and Expansion Dowels
for Curb Transition Blocks shall be Class II (Bridge Deck).
Bars B, see Sheet 2 (Typ.)
REINFORCING STEEL: Reinforcing steel shall be ASTM A615, Grade 60, except Expansion Dowel Bar B which shall be ASTM A36
Field Bend Bars 5S to
smooth round bar hot-dip galvanized in accordance with the Specifications.
maintain Cover (Typ.)
Bars 5S
EXPANSION SLEEVE ASSEMBLY: Pipe sleeve shall be ASTM D2241 PVC pipe, SDR13.5. End Cap shall be ASTM D2466 PVC
socket fitting, Schedule 40. End of Sleeve assembly at railing open joint shall be sealed with silicone to prevent concrete
intrusion during railing casting. A compressible expanded polystyrene plug is required in the opposite end of the assembly
for correct dowel positioning during railing casting. Correct dowel positioning is required in order to provide for thermal
Top of Existing Curb
movement of the deck.
Top of Existing
Curb
ADHESIVE-BONDED ANCHORS AND DOWELS: Adhesive Bonding Material Systems for Anchors and Dowels shall comply with
Specification Section 937 and be installed in accordance with Specification Section 416. The field testing proof loads
required by Specification Section 416 shall be 23,800 lbs. for Dowel Bars 6D on the inside face (traffic side) of the railing
(1'-0" embedment) and 18,500 lbs for Dowel Bars 6D along the outside face of the traffic railing (5" min. embedment).
BRIDGES ON CURVED ALIGNMENTS: The details presented in these Standards are shown for bridges on tangent alignments.
Polystyrene Blockout *

Dowel Bars 6D Spacing (Inside Face)
3"
3 sp.
BARRIER DELINEATORS: Barrier Delineators shall meet Specification Section 993. Install barrier delineators on top of the
Traffic Railing along the entire length of bridge 2" from the face on the traffic side at the spacing shown in the table below.
Dowel Bars 6D Spacing (Outside Face)
Barrier Delineator color (white or yellow) shall match the color of the near edgeline.
1'-3" (Max)
@ 7"
3"
2 sp.
1'-3" (Max.)
@ 7"
PAYMENT: Concrete Traffic Railing- Bridge Retrofit- Post & Beam Railing (each) includes all materials
and labor required to demolish a portion of the existing structure where required and to construct the
concrete portion of the retrofit railings. Guardrail Bridge Anchorage Assembly (each) includes all
PARTIAL ELEVATION OF RAILING SHOWING FINGER/SLIDING PLATE JOINT

AT BEGIN OR END BRIDGE - SCHEMES 2 THRU 5
barrier delineators for the entire bridge length, transition blocks, and necessary hardware to complete
the Guardrail transitions shown.
* Place 1" thick polystyrene blockout over limits

of bridge deck expansion joint full width to the
end of the Traffic Railing to allow for thermal
movement. Seal Forms to prevent mortar

leakage into the expansion joint.
1'-4"
Field Bend Bars 5S
to maintain clearance
2"
Bars 5S

2" cover above blockout
BARRIER DELINEATOR
Top of Existing
SPACING
Curb
Spacing (Ft.)
to Face of Railing
< 4'
40'
4' to 8'
80'
> than 8'
1" Cl.
None Required
1'-3" (Max)
2 sp.
@ 7"
1'-3" (Max.)
ITEM
UNIT
9" Curb
Increment
Concrete
CY/FT
0.064
0.003 per in. height
Reinforcing Steel
LB/FT
13.27
0.10 per in. length
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
(Quantities are based on a 9" curb, no curb cross

slope and 1'-0" embedment length of Bars 6D. If
the curb height or embedment length differs from
that shown, increase or decrease quantity by the
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:
01:
58 PM
QUANTITY
2 sp. @
@ 11"
given per inch increment.)
PARTIAL ELEVATION OF RAILING SHOWING FINGER/SLIDING PLATE

JOINT AT BEGIN OR END BRIDGE - SCHEME 1
(Guardrail Transition not shown for clarity)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
GUARDRAIL TRANSITIONS - EXISTING
DESIGN STANDARDS
POST & BEAM BRIDGE RAILINGS (WIDE CURBS)
NO.
405
SHEET
NO.
1of 6

" Int. Open Joint
Length as Required
LENGTH
NOTE NOS.
AS REQD.
or Deck Joint
1'-0"
Adhesive Bonding
1'-0"
Expansion Sleeve Assembly
2'-0"
1, 2 & 3
AS REQD.
2 & 3
4'-1"
1 & 3
4'-3"
1 & 3
2'-5"
1 & 3
AS REQD.
2, 3 & 4
Bar 4N
2'-0"
Bar 4M
3'-10"
Bar 4L
3'-8"
Dowel Bars B
1'-0"
4L or 4N
Length of Expanded Polystyrene

Plug to match width of open joint
1" PVC Pipe Sleeve,

Cap & Polystyrene Plug
2 sp. @ 3 "
Spacing Pairs of Bars 4C
"
BARS 4A, B, 6D & 5S
Varies
2 & 5
5 "
2'-0"
7 "
1"
4 "
Dowel Bar 6D,
Material System
Spacing Expansion
Varies
SIZE
Em bedm ent Length
MARK
BARS 4L, 4M & 4N
Existing
Concrete

5 "
Top of Existing
2 " (Shift Bars 4C
Curb
to clear Bars 6D for
2. The reinforcement for the railing on a retaining wall shall
skewed joints)
be the same as detailed for a bridge deck.

3. All reinforcing steel in the Vertical Face Retrofit Railing
9"
D = 4 " Pin
shall have a 2" minimum cover.
OPEN JOINT EXPANSION DOWEL DETAIL
4. Bars 5S may be continuous or spliced at the construction
DOWEL DETAIL
(Railing Reinforcing Not Shown For Clarity)
joints. Bar splices for Bars 5S shall be a minimum of
Dowel Installation Note:
2'-0".
BARS 4C
Shift dowel holes to clear if the existing
5. Expansion Dowel Bars B shall be ASTM A36 smooth round
reinforcement is encountered.
(12 required per open joint)
bar and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with the

Specifications.
" Preformed Joint Filler at top of Existing Curb shall extend beyond
the joint material (Silicone, poured rubber, armored neoprene seal or sliding
plates) as shown to prevent concrete intrusion during railing casting and
shall be placed so as not to restrict in any way normal joint movement.
Match width of Deck Joint

2" Cover
1'-0"
1'-0"
Bars 6D @ 1'-3" Spacing
1'-0"
Max. (Back Face, Approach

Embedment
(Typ.)
Slab Side only)

Bars 6D
(Typ.)
" Preformed
Joint Filler
Pairs of Bars 4C
Expansion
"
3
Vertical Face
Pairs of Bars 4C @ 3 "
Retrofit Railing
sp. (Typ.) Shift to clear
Dowel Sleeve
Bars 6D as required
Assembly
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
@ 3 " sp. (Typ.)

Shift to clear Bars
Expansion Dowel
6D as required
Vertical Face
Existing
Expansion
Line
1'-3" sp. (Typ.)
7 "
7 "
2 equal sp.
Bars 6D @ 7 " Spacing
"
3
Max. (Front Face, Approach
Slab Side only)
(11" Max.)
7 " or 1'-3" spacing (Typ.) **
2 equal spaces (7 " Max. on
Approach Slab, 1'-3" Max. on Bridge)
er
v
Co
2"
)
p.
Ty
(
k
c
De
nt
oi
J
Existing
Approach
Slab
1:
01:
59 PM
for corner overhangs
2" above existing curb
"
Field Cut 2 ~ Bars 6D
Gutter Line
D
ec
k
Jo
in
t
Embedment
Approach Slab
Gutter
(T
yp
.
)
6D
1'-0"
ar
s
Dowel Bar B
Retrofit Railing
Expansion Dowel Bar B
Sleeve Assembly
12/3/2015
PARTIAL PLAN OF RAILING (SKEW ANGLE LESS THAN 70)
PARTIAL PLAN OF RAILING (SKEW ANGLE = 70 OR GREATER)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
SKEW DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
405
SHEET
NO.
2 of 6
Set Form flush with back of Existing Railing
Existing
Railing
Varies
Varies
treatment at skewed deck joints see Skew
Deck Joint *
2nd or 3rd Existing Post
Varies, 7'-0" Max.
Non skewed deck joint shown, actual joint

dimensions and orientation vary. For
and cast concrete below Rail.
Existing Post Spacing
Post & Beam
between 2nd & 3rd or 3rd & 4th Existing Post
3rd or 4th Existing Post
Existing Post &
1" (Min.)
Expansion Joint locations matching the
1st Existing Post
10"
3" (Max.) Preferred
Detail. Provide open Railing Joints at Deck
Beam Railing
dimension of the Deck Joint.

3 "
Thrie-Beam
** Curb heights vary from 5" Min. to 1'-2" Max.
Guardrail Bolts
Vertical Face
6" Min. if Edge Distance or Bottom

6 Min.
Varies
2"
Final Riding
Varies
Varies
(See Sheets 4, 5 or 6)
3rd or 4th
Deck
Bridge
or End Bridge & Match Line
Existing
Curb
(Varies)
Front Face of Backwall, Begin
Existing Post
Bars 6D
when present
Surface
minimum possible length using criteria shown above in Partial Plan of Railing
(Typ.)
Asphalt Overlay
Varies 1st to 3rd or 4th Existing Post - Contractor to establish and construct
Bars 5S
Em bedm ent
(Typ.)
Dowel
Varies
Bridge Deck
** Curb
3'-0" Min.
Existing
2'
-10"
Gutter Line
1" (
M in.
)
3" (
M ax.
) Preferred
Clearance is less than 2".
3 "
2" Cover
4" 3 sp. @
Distance or Bottom Clearance.
(Schemes 2 thru 5 only)
= 11"
Embedment - 1'-0" preferred with 2" Edge
Expansion Dowel
M in.
Retrofit Railing
Existing Curb
Varies (
3 " M in.
)
2" Min. Clear
Edge
Embedment
Distance
Coping
Bottom
Clearance
Bottom
Clearance
(2'-6" Min.)
Existing
2nd or 3rd Existing Post
Post & Beam
Limiting Station
1'-4"
* Deck Joint
of Transition
Railing
SECTION A-A
TYPICAL SECTION THRU RAILING ON BRIDGE DECK
Scheme 1 only
2"
Roadway Guardrail
Varies
Transition
Top of
Varies
(See note 1)
Existing Curb
10"
3" (Max.) Preferred

Varies
(Type Varies)
3 "
60 under
Field cut to
2" clear at
Existing
front face of
field cut to
Existing Railing
maintain min.
Riding
1. On approach end provide a Roadway Guardrail Transition, Index No. 402 (as shown)
Surface
or other site specific treatment. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of Roadway
Bars 5S
Guardrail Transition or other site specific treatment. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail
Field Cut to
Transition is on the bridge, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing as shown above.
If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, see Schemes 2, 3, 4 or 5,
Sheets 4, 5 and 6. On skewed bridges, if the skew along the deck joint extends across the width of
the railing, the 2'-6" minimum dimension shall apply to both the front and back face of the railing.
Bottom
Clearance
1:
02:
00 PM
For treatment of trailing end see Roadway Plans.
= 11"
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
Dowel
Bars 6D
2" clear of
Embedment
(Typ.)
Final
concrete cover
NOTES:
** Curb
TYPICAL TREATMENT OF RAILING ALONG BRIDGE
Railing and
2" Cover
M in.
Bars 5S
2"
Bars 6D at
2'
-10"
Angle Dowel
Guardrail Bolts
Em bedm ent
(Expansion Dowel Assemblies & Bars 4C not shown for clarity)
Varies
Varies (
3 " M in.
)
Beam Railing
Thrie-Beam
Varies
B
3 "
Existing Post &
4" 3 sp. @
Existing Curb
Existing Wing Post
1" (Min.)
Form at
Asphalt Overlay
back face of
when present
Existing Railing
(Varies)
5" Min.
Embed.
Reinforced Curb Integral

with Approach Slab or Wing
Wall (6" Min. thickness)

2"
(Min.)
Bottom
Clearance
2. Field cut Bars 5S and Dowel Bars 6D to maintain clearance within Vertical Face Retrofit Railing.
Existing Wing Wall

3. Where existing structure has been removed and not encased in new concrete; match adjoining areas
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
SECTION C-C
TYPICAL SECTION THRU RAILING ALONG APPROACH SLAB
SECTION B-B
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
and finish flat by grouting or grinding as required. Exposed existing reinforcing steel not encased
in new concrete shall be burned off 1" below existing concrete and grouted over.
(SCHEMES 2 AND 3 ONLY)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
405
SHEET
NO.
3 of 6
Existing Wing Post
Existing Perpendicular Wing Wall shown,
Existing Parallel Wing Wall shown,
Existing Angled Wing Wall similar
Existing Flared Wing Wall similar
(Type Varies)
Dowel Bars 4L (10" Embedment)
Existing Wing Post (Type Varies)
(See Note 2)
Existing Curb
Dowel Bars 4L (10" Embedment) (Place 3 Bars Min.
Slab (Location Varies)

9 "
Vertical Face
Top and 1 Bar Min. Bottom) (See Note 3)

Bars 4C
Dowel Bars 6D @ 1'-3" Spacing
(Typ.)
Max. (Back Face only)

9 "
7"
Retrofit Railing
(See Note 1)
7"
Expansion Dowel
Transition Block
Sleeve Assembly
(See Note 1 Below & Note 1,

Sheet 3 of 6)
1
2"
(Typ. each
Bars 5S
end)
Bars 6D @ 7 "
Transition Block
(Typ.)
(See Note 2)
Spacing Max.
3'-0"

Sheet 3 of 6)
(Front Face only)
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
Existing Approach
Slab
Varies (Match Length
3'-0" Transition
of Existing Curb)
Block (See Note 2)
Front Face of Backwall, Begin or End Bridge &
Match Line (See Sheet 3 of 6)


Varies
Limiting Station
of Transition
(2'-6" Min.)
(See Note 2)
2"
1'-4"
(See Note 2)
Asphalt Overlay when
Sheet 3 of 6)
present (Varies)
Sheet 3 of 6)
Transition Block
Final Riding
(See Note 1)
Surface
1'-0"
Existing
Transition Block
Curb
(See Note 2)
1'-0"
Match Existing
Curb Height
Match Existing
Curb Height
C
Place first post 2"

clear of Wing Wall
Dowel Bars 4L (10" Embedment) (Place 3 Bars
Min. Top and 1 Bar Min. Bottom)
PARTIAL ELEVATION OF INSIDE FACE OF GUARDRAIL

(Existing Wing Post not shown for clarity)
(Existing Wing Post, Railing Reinforcing and Expansion Dowel Assemblies not shown for clarity)
SCHEME 1
SCHEME 2
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PARALLEL CURBS
PERPENDICULAR OR ANGLED WING WALLS
SCHEME 2 NOTES:
SCHEME 1 NOTES:
1. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition or other site specific treatment. If limiting
1:
02:
01 PM
1. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab does not have a curb, see Roadway
above. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is on the bridge, see Sheet 3 of 6. On skewed bridges, if the
Transition and Transition Block may be omitted on trailing ends with no opposing traffic.
skew along the deck joint extends across the width of the railing, the 2'-6" minimum dimension shall apply to both the front
and back face of the railing.
2. Field bend Dowel Bars 4L within Transition Block as required to maintain 2" top and side clearance and 3"
2. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab Curb does not extend beyond end of existing End Bent
bottom clearance.
Wing Wall, see Roadway Plans. Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Railing End
3. If a Special Steel Guardrail Post is required for attachment to the top of a sloping Wing Wall, saw cut
and remove a wedge shaped portion of the sloping Wing Wall as required to provide a level surface for post
3. Field bend Dowel Bars 4L within Transition Block as required to maintain 2" top and side clearance and 3" bottom clearance.
installation.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing as shown
Plans. Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Railing End
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
405
SHEET
NO.
4 of 6
Existing Wing Post
Parallel portion of Existing Curb
Existing Flared Wing Wall
and Wing Wall may or may not

exist (length varies)
Curb and Wing Wall may or
2 Layers of 30 Lb.
may not exist (length varies)
Existing Curb
Vertical Face
Parallel portion of Existing
(Type Varies)
Bars 4A @ 9" Max. (Field Bend
Smooth Roofing
Paper along joint
Retrofit Railing
clearance) (Typ.)

Bars 4C
(Typ.)
Expansion
Bars 5S (Field
Dowel
Bend) (Typ.)
Bars 4C (Typ.)
Expansion Dowel
Sleeve
Sleeve Assembly
Assembly
Bars 6D cut to clear Backwall

(Typ. each
1
2"
Gutter Line (Cut Exist.
end)
1
2"
Bars 6D @ 7
Max. (Front Face only)
Bars 5S (Field
this line)
Bend) (Typ.)
1
3 2"
(Typ. each
Sheet 3 of 6)
Dowel Bars 4N
Approach Slab along
Spacing
Bars 6D @
1
7 2"
@ 1'-3" (Typ.)
Sheet 3 of 6)
Spacing Max.
(Front Face only)
end)
Existing Approach

Varies (Match Length of Existing Flared Curb)
Slab
Front Face of Backwall, Begin or End
Bridge & Match Line (See Sheet 3 of 6)
Parallel Portion of Vertical Face Retrofit

Railing if present (See Note 1)
Varies (1'-0" Min.)
Varies (1'-0" Min.)

Begin Flared Portion of Vertical
Limiting Station
Face Retrofit Railing
of Transition
Begin Flared Portion
Limiting Station
Retrofit Railing
Sheet 3 of 6)
Asphalt Overlay
Sheet 3 of 6)
present (Varies)
when present
(Varies)
Final Riding
of Vertical Face
of Transition
Surface
Final Riding
Match Existing
Surface
Curb Height on
Bridge
2'
-0"
M in.
C-I-P Curb
Existing Curb

SCHEME 4
SCHEME 3
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR FLARED CURBS
SCHEME 4 NOTES:
1. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition or other site specific treatment. If limiting station
of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing as shown above.
1:
02:
02 PM
SCHEME 3 NOTE:
If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is on the bridge, see Sheet 3 of 6.
1. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition or other site specific
2. Dowel Bars 4N may be installed on a maximum angle of 45 to the cut edge of the Approach Slab as shown to facilitate
treatment. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, attach
drilling of holes and installation of bars.
Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing as shown above. If limiting station of Roadway

Guardrail Transition is on the bridge, see Sheet 3 of 6.
3. At the Contractor's option, along the length of the Approach Slab curb that is to be replaced, Dowel Bars 6D may be cast
12/3/2015
in with the new section of curb as shown or they may be installed in drilled holes in the new section of curb using an
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
Adhesive Bonding Material System with a 1'-0" minimum embedment.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
405
SHEET
NO.
5 of 6
*** Curb heights vary from 5" Min. to

Flared Wing Wall may or may
2 Layers of 30 Lb. Smooth
not exist (length varies)
Roofing Paper along joint
Existing Flared Wing Wall shown,
Varies
10" Max. Match height and shape
Existing Parallel Wing Wall similar
Varies (1'-2" Min.)
of existing curb on bridge.
Varies
Bars 4A @ 9" Max. (Field Bend as
Note 4)
(See Note 3)
2'
-10"
clear Backwall
Roadway Guardrail
Dowel Bars 6D @ 7 " Spacing
Exist. Approach
Below & Note 1,
@ 1'-3" (Typ.)
Slab along this line)
Sheet 3 of 6)
Varies (Match Length of Existing Curb)
Surface
Block (See Note 3)

(Typ.)
3 "
Dowel Bars 6D
(See Note 5)
2 Layers of 30 Lb.
Smooth Roofing
Final Riding
3'-0" Transition
Bars 5S
Paper along joint
Bars 4A @ 9" Max.
Asphalt Overlay
when present
2" Min. Clear. Top
(Varies)
Bridge & Match Line (See Sheet 3 of 6)

Varies
and Sides, 4" Min.

Limiting Station
(2'-6" Min.)
Clear. Bottom
(See Note 3)
1'-4"
Roadway Guardrail
2"
of Transition
Transition Block
Transition (See Note 1
(See Note 3)
Below & Note 1,

Sheet 3 of 6)
Dowel Bars 4N @ 1'-3" (Typ.)
10" Min.
Embedment

Final Riding
Bars 4A @ 9" Max., Min. 3 full length bars

required Top & Bottom (Field Bend to clear) (Typ.)
Match Existing
present (Varies)
2'
-0" (
M in.
)
Dowel Bars 4N
(Typ.)
M in.
2"
Gutter Line (Cut
*** Curb
3 "
2" Clear
= 11"
Bars 6D cut to
end)
(Type Varies)
Guardrail Bolts
4" 3 sp. @
Varies
7"
Sleeve Assembly
Varies (
3 " M in.
)
Bars 5S
Expansion Dowel
(Typ. each
Existing Wing Post
Thrie-Beam
Bars 4C (Typ.)
9 "
Retrofit Railing
Transition Block
Varies
Vertical Face
1" Min.
3 "
Bars 4M (See
10"
3" (Max.) Preferred
required to maintain clearance) (Typ.)
Curb Height on
Surface
M in.
M in.
(SCHEME 4 SHOWN, SCHEME 5 SIMILAR)

2'
-0"
1'
-0"
SECTION D-D
Bridge
C-I-P Curb
Varies
Existing Wing Post
Gutter Line (Cut

Bars 4M (1'-0" Min.
(Type Varies)
Existing Approach
Embedment, See Note 4)

Varies (1'-2" Min.)

Portion of Existing Approach

Slab with Integral Curb less
than 6" thick or portion of
SCHEME 5
Existing Approach Slab and
Curb with Floating Detached

Sidewalk to be removed
SCHEME 5 NOTES:
shown hatched.
of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing as shown above. If
Asphalt Overlay
limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is on the bridge, see Sheet 3 of 6.
when present
(Varies)
1:
02:
03 PM
Existing
Wing Wall
4. Field bend Dowel Bars 4M within Transition Block as required to maintain 2" top and side clearance and 3" bottom clearance.
SLAB AND END BENT WING WALL SHOWING LIMITS OF REMOVAL
with the new section of curb as shown or they may be installed in drilled holes in the new section of curb using an

LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TYPICAL SECTION THRU EXISTING APPROACH

5. At the Contractor's option, along the length of the Approach Slab curb that is to be replaced, Dowel Bars 6D may be cast in
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
405
SHEET
NO.
6 of 6
Symmetrical About
1'-0"
4"
Barrier Delineators Are
Begin Barrier
Required On The Top Of
2"
7"
25' (5 Equal Spaces @ 5')
Concrete Barrier Walls (Typ.)

R "
2'
-8"
Steel Stake
B
A
(Optional)
(Typ.)
R 1"
R 3"
R 2"
Steel Stake
(Optional)
2'-0"
1'-3"
FULL WALL
1'
-2 "
R 1"
3"
7"
(See Note #2)
8 "
Pavement
3"
7"
Roadway
E
Approaching Traffic Side
6"
1'
-10"
6"
No. 5 Bars
R 10"
R 10"
R 1"
5"
3"
2'
-8"
1'
-10"
5"
2'
-8"
Shoulder
or Flexible
R "
6"
6"
(See Note #2)
Delineator Spacing
1'-0"
2'-0"
Footing extended as
2'
-8"
R "
R "
No. 5 Bars
2'
-2 "
9"
1'
-8 "
2"
required per Index
HALF WALL
ELEVATION
END VIEW
or as shown in the
plans.
STANDARD BARRIER WALL SECTIONS
CONCRETE BARRIER WALL TERMINAL
DETAIL I
DETAIL II
80' (8 Equal Spaces @ 10')
BARRIER DELINEATOR SPACING FOR CONCRETE BARRIER WALLS

REMARKS
1. Install barrier delineators for use on Concrete Barrier

Walls in accordance with Specification Section 993.
80'
Barrier
E
D
C
R 1"
B
A
> 8'
None
Required
6"
R 2"
2'-0"
Note: Location Offset is measured from the Edge of Travel Way, Lane Line to the
Concrete Barrier Wall, Gutter Line.
END VIEW
2'
-8"
F
2'
-4 "
4'to 8'
2. Retroreflective sheeting shall be yellow or white and

conform to the color of the near Edge of Travel Way,
Lane Line.
Begin
2'
-0 "
(See General Note 5)
Approaching Traffic Side
10"
40'
3"
< 4'
2'
-8"
NJ Shape
1'-0"
Standard F-Shape
1'
-9 "
SPACING
1'
-1 "
OFFSET
1'
-5 "
LOCATION
Delineator
Spacing
R 3"
A
ELEVATION
DESIGN SPEED 45 MPH OR LESS
WALL FACE SAFETY SHAPES
CONCRETE BARRIER WALL TERMINAL FOR NARROW MEDIANS

DETAIL III
GENERAL NOTES
1. Class II concrete shall be used for the construction of Concrete Barrier Walls; except, in moderately and extremely
aggressive environments, Class IV concrete shall be used. All nondesignated size reinforcing steel shall be No. 5 bars.
Exposed concrete surfaces shall have a Class 3 surface finish in accordance with Specification Section 521 or as
required in the plans.
2. Longitudinal reinforcement to be continuous or spliced No. 5 Bars. Lap splices a minimum of 2-0.
3. Concrete barrier wall terminal notes for design speeds =50 mph.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Terminated outside clear zone of the approach traffic, use DETAIL II end treatment.
Terminated within a shielded location.
Terminal protection by the use of a crash cushion system.
Terminated in conjunction with a suitably designed transition to another barrier.
8. For wall segments constructed with the slip form method, score 3/ 8" deep crack control V-Grooves while the concrete is
still plastic and mold them when walls are constructed with the stationary form method. V-Grooves shall be spaced at 20'
intervals, the end of the side face grooves shall be in line with the ends of the top face groove and the long dimension
of all grooves shall align at 90 degrees to the longitudinal axis of the wall. When wall segments are less than 40' in
length, space the V-Groove equally between open joints. Dowel transverse construction joints for abutting segments less
than 40' (See DETAIL B).
9. Minimum length of cast-in-place or precast segments is 20 feet.
4. Expansion joints are required at bridge ends and/or at locations where the wall is an integral part of an existing or
proposed concrete slab. Construct required joints to match existing or proposed expansion joints.
1:
02:
04 PM
7. Shoulder concrete barrier wall has been structurally evaluated to be equivalent or greater in strength to other safety
shapes which have been crash tested to NCHRP Report 350, TL-4 requirements.
5. When the barrier is installed adjacent to the pavement, compact the top 12" of the subgrade to at least 98% of the
maximum density determined by FM 1-T 180, Method D.
6. Where standard F-Shape walls abut existing New Jersey (NJ) Shape walls, face transitions of not less than 5' in length
shall be constructed at the adjoining end of the F-Shape wall.
10. Precast construction is allowed as an alternate to cast-in-place construction.

a. Wall segments < 40' in length shall be joined by a transverse joint in accordance with DETAIL C. The minimum segment
length is 20'.
b. Bedding of the precast sections shall be facilitated by the use of sand-cement grout or equal method to assure uniform bearing.
c. Reinforcement may be required for handling stresses.
11. On roadways designated for reverse laning, all downstream ends that are not shielded or outside the clear zone shall
be marked by Type 3 Object Markers.
12. For BARRIER WALL INLET details see Index 218 and Index 219. For MEDIAN BARRIER INLETS see Index 217.
12/3/2015
13. Concrete barrier wall with NJ Safety Shape may not be substituted for the Standard F Shape Barrier.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
CONCRETE BARRIER WALL TERMINALS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE BARRIER WALL
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
1of 25
Edge Of Travel Way
h
ac
o
r
App
2' Misc. Asphalt

Pavement (2" Thick)
Edge of Travel Way
15 Or Flatter
Extended Shoulder
C.C.
Break Point
10'
Shoulder Treatment
Varies
Misc. Asphalt Pavt.
Clear Zone Width

Concrete
25' (See DETAIL II)
Barrier Wall
5'
W ide M edian
Varies
Crash Cushion (Type Varies)
M edian Or Outside
Normal Shoulder Line
Shoulder And Slope
Extended Shoulder
Const.
Shoulder Pavement
Edge Of Travel Way
TRANSITION BETWEEN NARROW AND WIDE MEDIANS WHERE END OF BARRIER
SHOULDER TREATMENT WHEN CRASH CUSHIONS SHIELD CONCRETE BARRIER
WALL IS LOCATED OUTSIDE THE APPROACH CLEAR ZONE OR LATERAL OFFSET
WALL ENDS LOCATED INSIDE APPROACH CLEAR ZONE OR LATERAL OFFSET

DETAIL A
3'-112"
7"
Special End Shoe
12"x12"x"
(See Index No. 400)
Galvanized
Steel Back-Up
Standard W-Beam Guardrail
Plate
Cold Joint
Install Load Transfer Device

at of wall per Specification
9"
Section 350 using 1" smooth dowels.
8"
6"
2'
-1"
9"
Wall
1'
-2"
Barrier
NOTES:
ELEVATION
END VIEW
END VIEW
1. End of wall flush mounted connections are not applicable to two-lane two-way facilities. For trailing end
connections on two-lane two-way facilities, see SHOULDER BARRIER WALL AT ABOVE GROUND RIGID HAZARDS
WHEN GUARDRAIL OFFSET FROM HAZARD < 3'.
DOWELED TRANSVERSE CONSTRUCTION JOINT WHERE
2. Trailing guardrail connections to double face safety shaped walls will be under one of the following traffic
ABUTTING SEGMENT(S) LESS THAN 40' IN LENGTH
conditions and mounting methods:

(a) One-way traffic trailing condition one side only - flush mount with flat steel back-up plate on back side.
(Required on abutting ends of Segments < 40' long)
(b) One-way traffic trailing condition both sides - flush mount both sides.
DETAIL B
(c) For trailing condition one side and approach traffic condition opposite side - see MEDIAN BARRIER WALL.
W-BEAM GUARDRAIL CONNECTION TO CONCRETE BARRIER WALL TRAILING ENDS
7'-10"
See Tongue and
End Reinforcement
1"
2"
+ 0.00
3"
R "
R "
3"
5"
6"
80"
10 spaces @ 8" each
No. 5 Hairpins
+ 0.01
3"
- 0.01
6"
1"
3"
Groove Details
" Chamfer Typ.
- 0.00
4 Draft
"
2
8"
See Note 1
4 3O' Draft
No. 5 Bars
" Max.
Half Wall
(3 Each Face)
2"
Hairpin
Hairpin Front Face Bend
TONGUE DETAIL
GROOVE DETAIL
Extended As Required By
Other Indexes For Mounting
PRECAST TONGUE AND GROOVE TRANSVERSE JOINT
3"
1:
02:
05 PM
TOP VIEW
Half Walls On Rigid
ELEVATION
(Required on abutting ends of Precast Segments 40' long)
Concrete Surfaces
END VIEW
NOTE:
12/3/2015
DETAIL C
1. Free end reinforcement required for nonreinforced walls at the following locations: All exposed ends; abutting ends of precast segments 40'; ends
with guardrail connections; ends with redirective crash cushion connections; and, ends connecting to bridge traffic rails or other rigid barriers.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
CONCRETE BARRIER WALL SPECIAL DETAILS
FREE END REINFORCEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
2 of 25
2 "
2 "
R "
4"
2
"
2
"
2"
)
x.
Ma
2"
Expanded Shoulder
2"
1'
-10"
1'
-10"
2
"
e
op
Sl
:2
(1
es
i
r
a
V
4"
R "
4"
R "
2 "
2"
7"
2"
734"
Expanded Shoulder
Varies (2' Min.)
Varies (2' Min.)
R 10"
R 10"
(Typ.)
No. 5 Bars @ 8" O.C.
See Index
3"
Shoulder
(Typ.)
No. 218 For
3"
Joint Details
5"
No. 5 Bars @ 8" O.C. (Typ.)
R 1"
Pavement
3"
R 1"
Pavement
7"
5"
3"
Shoulder
Bar 5C @ 8" O.C.
Bar 5B @ 8" O.C.
Gutter Line
3" 3"
7"
Bar 5A @ 8" O.C.
Bar 5D @ 8" O.C.

(See NOTE Below)
Slope
1'-0"
Gutter Line
Barrier
Wall Inlet
Construction Joint
1'-3"
1'-0"
Permitted
Construction Joint
3" Min.
4 Space
1'
-0"
1'
-0"
3"
3"
3" Min.
3" Min.
4"
3 Space
1'-0"
No. 5 Bars
(Typ.)
3"
3"
4"
1'-3"
1'-0"
(Typ.)
3"
1'
-0"
3"
Permitted
Permitted
1'-3"
No. 5 Bars
(Typ.)
Construction Joint
3"
No. 5 Bars
2'
-0"
1'
-9"
Gutter Line
1'
-9"
Varies
4"
4"
4 Space
4"
4"
3'-3"
2'-3"
3'-3"
QUANTITIES: Concrete 0.26 CY/LF
NOTE: Bar 5D Shall Be Used In Lieu of Bar 5C In Areas Where
Reinforcing Steel 28 LBS/LF
Obstructions Require Localized Omission Of Toe
SHOULDER WALL (TYPICAL)
SHOULDER WALL (MODIFIED)

QUANTITIES:
With Reinforcing Steel (Bar 5C) 27 LBS/LF; Concrete 0.27 CY/LF
With Reinforcing Steel (Bar 5D) 23 LBS/LF; Concrete 0.23 CY/LF

Heel Of Footing
SHOULDER WALL (RETAINING)
NOTES:
1. Reduce the vertical steel spacing to 4 inches O.C. a distance of
4 feet for each side of all cold or expansion joints.
Front Face Barrier Wall
2. Unless otherwise noted, Minimum Segment Wall Length is 20 LF.
1" Expansion
Back Of Barrier
Toe of Footing
Material
3. All walls may be made up of segments 20' or more in length
Top of Barrier
provided the segments are joined by a transverse joint in

accordance with the CONCRETE BARRIER WALL SPECIAL DETAILS,
DETAIL B.
Gutter Line
4. Quantities shown are for information only. Barrier wall inlets

(Index 218) shall be isolated from the barrier wall stem and
1'-0"
1'-0"
Toe Of Footing
footing by 1" expansion material.
1:
02:
06 PM
5. All longitudinal reinforcement to be continuous or spliced No. 5

Inlet Per Index 218
bars. Lap splices a minimum of 2'-0".
6. For additional information on Bars 5A, 5B, 5C and 5D, see BAR
PLAN VIEW
BENDING DIAGRAMS.
SHOULDER WALL FOOTING
12/3/2015
TRANSITION AT INLETS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
REINFORCED CONCRETE SHOULDER WALL

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
3 of 25
9"
9"
2"
"
2
Bar 5E @ 8" O.C.

No. 5 Bars
5"
No. 5 Bars
2 "
914"
1'
-10"
914"
2 "
"
2
Bar 5E @ 8" O.C.
R "
R "
2"
1'
-10"
R "
R "
5"
@ 12" O.C.
R 10"
Field Trim To
Shoulder Or
"
3"
Field Trim To
Pavement
Maintain Clear Cover
R 10"
When Y 1'-6"
Roadway
9"
Vertical Face
2"
Const. Joint
Pavement
Steel Stake (Optional)
Shoulder Or
1'
-10"
No. 5 Bars
No. 5 Bars
Const. Joint
Pavement
2'-0"
3"
@ 8" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
R 1"
3"
3"
1'
-0"
Varies 0'-0" to 0'-6"
@ 8" O.C.
3"
"
R 1"
1'
-4"
1'
-3"
3"
Pavement
"
Roadway
3"
R 10"
Roadway
3"
3"
R 1"
Y
No. 5 Bars
Shoulder Or
@ 8" O.C.
10"
7"
R 10"
R 10"
Roadway
Y Varies
5"
No. 5 Bars
3" 7"
Shoulder Or
10"
3" 7"
Roadway
2
"
Const. Joint
2'-0"
3"
1'
-0"
Shoulder Or
Y Varies
5"
Bar 5J @ 8" O.C.
Bar 5H @ 8" O.C.
2
"
3" 7"
5"
1'
-10"
No. 5 Bars
5"
Bar 5G @ 8" O.C.
Bar 5F @ 8" O.C.

1'
-10"
to 0'-6"
2"
2"
Varies 0'-0"
3"
6"
Const. Joint
6"
1'
-10"
Vertical Face
Vertical Face
2"
1'
-4"
Pavement
R "
R "
Pavement
Roadway
3"
R 1"
Vertical Face
2"
Shoulder Or
"
Maintain Clear Cover

R 1"
2"
7"
7"
@ 12" O.C.
When Y 1'-6"
No. 5 Bars
@ 8" O.C.
3" Min.
3" Min.
Space No. 5 Bars
4"
2'-0"
No. 4 Dowel-24" Long at
4"
4"
Space No. 5 Bars
@ 8" (Max.) O.C.
4"
@ 8" (Max.) O.C.
24" Centers (See Note #5)
W1
F-SHAPE MEDIAN BARRIER
CANTILEVER WALL
L-WALL
WHEN Y IS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 6 INCHES
SUPERELEVATED SECTION
SUPERELEVATED SECTION
NOTES:
DIMENSIONS TABLE
1. Unless the plans stipulate a specific wall type, either the
Cantilever
Wall
HeightY
1'-0"
1'-6"
2'-0"
2'-6"
3'-0"
3'-6"
4'-0"
Cantilever Wall or the L-Wall may be constructed at the
Width W
2'-6"
2'-9"
3'-0"
3'-3"
3'-3"
3'-6"
3'-6"
Contractor's option.
29'
27'
25'
23'
24'
22'
24'
Min.SegmentWallLength
2. Reduce the vertical steel spacing to 4 inches O.C. a distance

of 4 feet for each side of all cold or expansion joints.
HeightY
1'-0"
1'-6"
2'-0"
2'-6"
3'-0"
3'-6"
4'-0"
Width W1
2'-6"
2'-9"
3'-0"
3'-3"
3'-3"
3'-6"
3'-6"
26'
24'
22'
21'
22'
21'
24'
L-Wall

Min.SegmentWallLength
1:
02:
07 PM
4. For additional information on Bars 5E, 5F, 5G, 5H and 5J, see
BAR BENDING DIAGRAMS.
5. No. 4 dowel may be extended to provide steel stake. Omit
12/3/2015
dowel bars when construction joint is not used.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
MEDIAN BARRIER WALL FOR SUPERELEVATED SECTIONS WITH VARIABLE ROADWAY PROFILE GRADE LINES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
4 of 25
2'-0"
Shoulder
(
Typ.
)
(
Typ.
)
Min.
(Typ.)
Gutter Line
2'
-0"
Shoulder
Symmetric About
Gutter Line
PLAN
Extend index 410
Symmetric About
Reinforcing (Typ.)
* See Plans For Additional Project Specific Reinforcement
For Sign Support Foundation.

3
4"
3
4"
1'-0"
V-Groove
V-Groove
Min.
Field Bend #5 Bar
2'-0"
Min.
To Maintain Cover
1
2"
(Typ.)
V-Groove Joint
(Typ.)
#5 Bars (Typ.)
1
2"
V-Groove Joint
2'
-8"
4'
-6"
Const.
Const.
Jt.
Jt.
Foundation
(Drilled Shaft shown,
Spread Footing similar)
6" Max.
1'-6"
2'-0"
2'-0"
3'-0"
3'-0"
Spacing of #5 Stirrup Bars
6"
#5 Stirrup Bars @ 1'-0" Spacing
Max. Shift To Clear Project Specific
Sign Support Foundation

Design Standards Index 410
15'-0"
Varies
15'-0"
32" F-Shape Median Barrier
Transition from 32" to 54" Barrier Height
* 54" High Vertical Face Barrier
Transition from 32" to 54" Barrier Height
ELEVATION
2'-0"
#5 Stirrup Bars
2'-0"
2" Cover (Min.)

0" Setback
2" Cover (Min.)
1
4"
6 ~ # 5 Bars
1
2"
1
4"
Overhead Sign Support
Distance (Min.)
(Project Specific Design)
Design Standards
Index 410
2'
-8"
Varies
6 ~ # 5 Bars
1:
02:
07 PM
4'
-6"
3"
12/3/2015
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
LARGE SIGN MEDIAN BARRIER MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORT TRANSITION (OPTION 1)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
5 of 25
Symmetric About
2'-0"
Shoulder
(
Typ.
)
Shoulder
(
Typ.
)
Min.
Gutter Line
Reduced Shoulder
20
(Typ.)
20
1
2'
-0"
Varies
1
20
20
Reduced Shoulder
PLAN
Gutter Line
C
Extend index 410
Reinforcing (Typ.)
Symmetric About
D
3
4"
3
4"
1'-0"
V-Groove
V-Groove
Min.
2'-0"
Field Bend #5 Bar
Min.
To Maintain Cover
1
2"
(Typ.)
#5 Bars (Typ.)
V-Groove Joint
1
2"
V-Groove Joint
2"
-8"
4'
-6"
Const.
Foundation
Jt.
(Spread Footing shown,

Drilled Shaft similar)
6" Max.
1'-6"
2'-0"
2'-0"
Varies
Equal Spaces @
3'-0" Max.
6"

Varies (15'-0" Min.)
Varies
* Transition from 32" to 54" Barrier Height
* 54" High Vertical
Face Barrier
ELEVATION
2'-0"
#5 Stirrup Bars
Varies
2" Cover (Min.)

2" Cover (Min.)
1
4"
1
2"
0" Setback
1
4"
6 ~ # 5 Bars

Design Standards
Index 410
2'
-8"
Varies
6 ~ # 5 Bars
1:
02:
08 PM
4'
-6"
Distance (Min.)
3"
12/3/2015
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
6 of 25
2'-0"
Shoulder
(
Typ.
)
(
Typ.
)
Min.
(Typ.)
Gutter Line
Varies
2'
-0"
Shoulder
Symmetric About
1
20
20
Reduced Shoulder
Gutter Line
PLAN
Extend index 410
Reinforcing (Typ.)
Symmetric About

3
4"
3
4"
1'-0"
V-Groove
V-Groove
Min.
2'-0"
Field Bend #5 Bar
Min.
To Maintain Cover
1
2"
(Typ.)
#5 Bars (Typ.)
V-Groove Joint
1
2"
V-Groove Joint
2'
-8"
4'
-6"
Foundation
Const.
(Spread Footing shown,
Jt.
Drilled Shaft similar)
6" Max.
1'-6"
2'-0"
2'-0"
Varies
Equal Spaces @
3'-0" Max.
6"

Varies
* 54" High Vertical
Face Barrier
ELEVATION
2'-0"
#5 Stirrup Bars
Varies
2" Cover (Min.)

2" Cover (Min.)
1
4"
1
2"
0" Setback
1
4"
1:
02:
08 PM
6 ~ # 5 Bars

Design Standards
Index 410
2'
-8"
Varies
4'
-6"
6 ~ # 5 Bars
Distance (Min.)
3"
12/3/2015
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
7 of 25
Standard
Barrier Wall
Median Concrete Barrier Wall
Overhead Sign Pedestal
20
1
" Expansion Material

1'-6" Min.
20
1

Varies (See Plans)
Pedestal With Safety Shape Face
Conc. Fill
Conc. Fill
2'-0"
Overhead Sign
20
Support Footing
End Reinforcement
1'-6" Min.
1
20
C
PLAN
Symmetrical About
1'-6" Min.
1'-6" Min.
Varies (See Plans)
" Expansion Joint

Doweled Transverse Construction Joint, See
Conc. Fill
Conc. Fill
CONCRETE BARRIER WALL SPECIAL DETAILS, DETAIL B.
Shoulder Or
Safety Shape
Roadway Pavement
Face
Overhead Sign
Overhead Sign
Support Pedestal
Support Pedestal
NOTE:
ELEVATION
1. Footing Extended As Called For On
SECTION CC
Other Indexes Or As Called For In
12/3/2015
1:
02:
09 PM
The Plans
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
CONCRETE MEDIAN BARRIER WALL TRANSITIONS AT OVERHEAD SIGN SUPPORTS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
8 of 25
2'-0"
2'-0"
1'-0" x 1'-3" x 6"
912"
912"
Embedded Junction
1'-3"
Box
" Typ.
Shoulder Or
Roadway Pavement
With Rigid Pavement
With Rigid Pavement
Only
Only
Roadway Pavement
Shoulder Or
TRANSVERSE SECTION
1" Conduit
(Pole)
Shoulder Or
Roadway Pavement
0'
-6"
Shoulder Or
1" Exp. Jt. Material
1'
-0"
2'
-9"
(Box & Cover)
Roadway Pavement
INSTALLATION
3
16
(Typ.)
312"
312"
4"
4"
SPREAD FOOTING AND
END VIEW
CYLINDRICAL NOTES
SPREAD FOOTING OPTION
FRONT VIEW
The Reinforcement Details And

Dimensions For Both The Spread
Footing And Cylindrical Foundations
Can Be Found In Index 17515.
EMBEDDED JUNCTION BOX
END VIEW
CYLINDRICAL OPTION
"
6
1'-0" x 1'-3" x 6"
1'-0" x 1'-3" x 6"
1" Conduit (Pole)
1" Conduit (Pole)
Embedded Junction Box
3'-0"
2'-3"
Optional
2'-0"
3'-0"
2'-3"
-0"
1'
2'-0"
Min. 10' from free

end, barrier wall transition
approach ends and guard rail
Min. 10' from free

end, barrier wall
transition approach
ends and guard rail
Cover
Optional
1'-3"
Const.
1'-3"
Const.
Joint
1'
-0"
Optional
Const.
Joint
"
3
2'
-9"
Traffic Railing
1'
-0"
Joint
1
1 2"
Optional
Const.
Joint
1" Conduit
Ground Rod
2" Conduit
2'
-6"
SIDE VIEW
EMBEDDED JUNCTION BOX
NOTES:
2" Conduit
Ground Rod
(4" Below Bottom
2'
-6"
2" Conduit (Feed)
1" Conduit For
Ahead
As Req'd
1" Conduit For

Ground Rod
Of Footing)
(4" Below
" x 20' Long
Bottom Of Wall)
2. Remove excess concrete while green and hand form

chamfers.
Ground Rod
12/3/2015
1:
02:
10 PM
2" Conduit (Feed)
" x 20' Long
2" Conduit Ahead
Ground Rod
As Req'd
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
SPREAD FOOTING OPTION
CYLINDRICAL OPTION
LAST
07/01/14
REVISIO N
MEDIAN BARRIER MOUNTED LIGHT POLE DETAILS
REVISION
1. Embedded junction boxes are to be fabricated from

steel conforming to ASTM A36 and be hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication. All seams shall be
continuously welded and ground smooth. A neoprene
gasket shall be attached to the box to provide a
watertight cover. The cover screws shall be fully
galvanized.
3. Embedded junction box complete and conduit risers are

incidental to the construction and cost of the barrier
wall; there is to be no separate compensation for the
box, risers or installation unless specifically called for
in the plans.
EMBEDDED JUNCTION BOX - ELECTRICAL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
9 of 25
84'-412" Min. Approach Guardrail Except When Plans

Call For Attenuator In Lieu Of Guardrail, See Note 2
Shoulder Wall
For Additional Details See Index No. 400

Varies (Deflected Barrier Wall )
Varies (See Plans)
Expanded Shoulder When

See Note 3
Varies (See Plans)
Shoulder Wall Constructed
Transition Section
Assembly (Flared)
Expanded Shoulder
Expanded Shoulder
For 84'-412" Guardrail

Shoulder Wall
Bridge Traffic Rail
Normal Shoulder
See Note 4
1 : 50
Grassed
Bridge Shoulder
For Extended Guardrail
Shoulder Pavement
Bridge
Approach
Roadway Shoulder
Slab
(Width Same As
Paved Shoulder
WITH CONCRETE BARRIER WALL (SHOULDER)
Bridge Shoulder)
Guardrail (For Additional Details See Index No. 400)

2 Panels
See Note 3
Transition Section
Varies
Assembly (Flared), See Note 1

Varies (See Plans)
4'
Shoulder Line
Shoulder Wall
Bridge Traffic Rail
See Note 4
Bridge Shoulder
For Shoulder Gutter

Requirements See Plans
15' Shoulder Gutter
Roadway Shoulder
Bridge
Approach
(Width Same As
Slab
Bridge Shoulder)
Shoulder Pavement
Transition To Suit Barrier
Deflected Shoulder Gutter When Required
Wall Terminal Configuration
For Variations In Shoulder Widths
WITH SHOULDER GUTTER AND GUARDRAIL
Guardrail (For Additional Details See Index No. 400)

2 Panels
See Note 3
Transition Section

Varies
Assembly (Flared), See Note 1

Varies (See Plans)
See Shoulder
Notation Left
Shoulder Wall
Shoulder Line
Bridge Traffic Rail
Grassed
See Note 4
Bridge Shoulder
Shoulder Pavement
Bridge
Approach
Roadway Shoulder
Slab
(Width Same As
Bridge Shoulder)
Paved Shoulder
WITH GRASSED OR PAVED SHOULDERS AND GUARDRAIL
NOTES:
1. To be deleted on trailing ends except for 2-lane 2-way facilities. The tangent
guardrailshallbe anchored by End Anchorage Type II,Index No.400.
1:
02:
10 PM
2. To be deleted on trailing ends except for 2-lane 2-way facilities.
4. Guardrail connection to concrete traffic railings or retaining walls shall be in

accordance with the Design Standards, Index 400 Series and the plans.
5. Views show approach roadside barriers when length of need exceeds the length of
either retaining walls with concrete traffic railings or Shoulder Wall. When either of
3. End measurement for guardrailpaymentwhen guardrailconnected to shoulder barrier
these rigid barriers alone satisfies the approach length of need,the wallends shall
walls. See Index No.400,Detail J for end measurementwhen guardrailconnected to
be shielded by crash cushions,or by guardrailthe same as for bridge traffic rails,as
concrete traffic rails constructed with approach slab or on retaining walls.
detailed in Index No.400.See other flagged notes for trailing end treatments.
Miscellaneous asphaltpaving under guardrailnotshown.
12/3/2015
EITHER REINFORCED CONCRETE BARRIER WALL (SHOULDER) OR RETAINING WALL WITH CONCRETE TRAFFIC RAILING
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
CONCRETE BARRIER WALLS ON BRIDGE APPROACHES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
10 of 25
NOTES:
3'-9" Without Bike Lane
1. Transition Segments Shall Be Doweled Into The End Of The Barrier Wall In The Following Manner: Four 1" diameter holes 6" deep on 6"
2'-9" With Bike Lane
centers shall be drilled in the end of the barrier and No. 6 bars 15" long set in an Adhesive Bonded Material System per Standard
See Note 1
Specification Section 416. The ends of the dowels extending into the transition segment shall be wrapped with one layer of 15 lb. Type I
3"
2'
-8"
2'-1"
10 "
Const. Joint
1'-6"
Permitted
2. When Construction Joints Are Utilized For Transition Segment Construction The Stem Shall Be Doweled To The Footing In The Following
Const. Joint
Manner: Five No. 5 bars 15" long shall be embedded 7" into the footing. The dowels shall be spaced 15" on centers with the first dowel
Permitted
located 12" from the barrier wall. Dowels may be placed within or adjacent to the keyway.
12"
Asphalt-saturated roofing felt with the ends crimped.
See Note 2
3. The detail BRIDGE WITH BIKE LANE can be superimposed over the details: WITH UTILITY STRIPS AND WITH BIKE LANE and WITHOUT UTILITY
STRIPS AND WITH BIKE LANE. The detail BRIDGE WITHOUT BIKE LANE can be superimposed over the details: WITH UTILITY STRIPS AND
WITHOUT BIKE LANE and WITHOUT UTILITY STRIPS AND WITHOUT BIKE LANE.
WITH AND WITHOUT UTILITY STRIP
SECTION DD
SECTION EE
4. For SECTION QQ, see CURB AND GUTTER WITHOUT ADJACENT BICYCLE LANE. For SECTION TT, see CURB AND GUTTER WITH
PICTORIAL VIEW
ADJACENT BICYCLE LANE.

Departure- 25' Unless

Otherwise Called For In Plans
2'-6"
Barrier Wall
Barrier Wall
1'-6"
T
Q
BRIDGE WITH BIKE LANE
BRIDGE WITHOUT BIKE LANE

10' Transition
End Barrier Wall
End Barrier Wall

Sidewalk Alignment
(Rigid) (Curb & Gutter)
10' Transition
Varies To
Sidewalk Alignment
Suit Conditions
Around Hazard
Varies
" Expansion Joint
Sidewalk (5' Std.)
Varies To
Sidewalk (5' Std.)
Suit Conditions
Varies
" Expansion Joint
(See Plans)
Around Hazard
(See Plans)
Tactile Surface
Tactile Surface
Utility Strip (Varies)
Q
2'-6"
" Expansion Joint
" Expansion Joint
Barrier Wall
1'-6"
Type F Curb
Type F Curb
& Gutter (2')
& Gutter (2')
Barrier Wall
WITH UTILITY STRIP AND WITH BIKE LANE
WITH UTILITY STRIP AND WITHOUT BIKE LANE

End Barrier Wall
10' Transition
Sidewalk Alignment
10' Transition
Varies To
Suit Conditions
Varies To
End Barrier Wall
Around Hazard
Suit Conditions
Varies
Varies
Around Hazard
(See Plans)
1:
02:
11 PM
(See Plans)
Sidewalk (6' Std.)

" Expansion Joint
" Expansion Joint

Sidewalk (6' Std.)
2'-6"
Barrier Wall
1'-6"
Type F Curb
Type F Curb
Sidewalk Alignment
Barrier Wall
& Gutter (2')
12/3/2015
& Gutter (2')
WITHOUT UTILITY STRIPS AND WITHOUT BIKE LANE
HAZARD 4' OR LESS FROM FACE OF CURB
WITHOUT UTILITY STRIP AND WITH BIKE LANE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
ONE-WAY CURB AND GUTTER DEPARTURES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
11of 25
NOTES:
1. For X=Length of advancement in feet for near and opposing lanes and for sectional details see CURB AND GUTTER WITHOUT ADJACENT
BICYCLE LANE.
2. The 1'-6" and 2'-6" offsets to toe of barrier wall cannot be reduced to accommodate hazards; however, hazards located in the stem of

1'-6"
the wall may be accommodated by the details on HAZARD PENETRATION INTO STEM OF RIGID CONCRETE BARRIER WALLS; AND
SHOULDER BARRIER WALL WHEN OFFSET FROM ABOVE GROUND HAZARD < 1'-6" AND THE DESIGN SPEED 45 MPH.
0
.
0
2
0
.
0
4
(
0
.
0
2 St
d
.
)
3. The detail BRIDGE WITH BIKE LANE can be superimposed over the details: WITH UTILITY STRIPS AND WITH BIKE LANE and WITHOUT
UTILITY STRIPS AND WITH BIKE LANE. The detail BRIDGE WITHOUT BIKE LANE can be superimposed over the details: WITH UTILITY
STRIPS AND WITHOUT BIKE LANE and WITHOUT UTILITY STRIPS AND WITHOUT BIKE LANE.
Const. Joint
4. For SECTION EE, see ONE-WAY CURB AND GUTTER DEPARTURES.
Permitted
SECTION FF
5. For SECTION QQ, see CURB AND GUTTER WITHOUT ADJACENT BICYCLE LANE.
PICTORIAL VIEW
For Section TT, see CURB AND GUTTER WITH ADJACENT BICYCLE LANE.
X (Length Of Advancement, Ft.)
Bridge
Barrier Wall
Bridge
Barrier Wall
2'-6"
1'-6"
T
Q

End Barrier Wall
End Barrier Wall

10' Transition
10' Transition
Sidewalk Alignment
Conditions
Conditions
Around Hazard
Sidewalk (5' Std.)
Around Hazard
Sidewalk (5' Std.)

" Expansion Joint
" Expansion Joint
Tactile Surface
" Expansion Joint
2'-6"
" Expansion Joint
Barrier Wall
Type F Curb
Type F Curb
Sidewalk Alignment
Varies To Suit
Varies To Suit
1'-6"
Barrier Wall
& Gutter (2')
& Gutter (2')

End Barrier Wall
End Barrier Wall

Varies
10' Transition
Varies To Suit
(10' Min.-20' Max.)
10' Transition
Varies
Sidewalk Alignment
Conditions
Conditions
Around Hazard
Sidewalk Alignment
Varies To Suit
(10' Min.-20' Max.)

Sidewalk
Around Hazard
(6' Std.)
Sidewalk
" Expansion Joint
" Expansion Joint
(6' Std.)
Tactile Surface
Tactile Surface
1:
02:
12 PM
2'-6"
1'-6"
Barrier Wall
Type F Curb
Type F Curb
Barrier Wall
& Gutter (2')
12/3/2015
& Gutter (2')
WITHOUT UTILITY STRIP AND WITHOUT BIKE LANE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
TWO-WAY CURB AND GUTTER TRAFFIC DEPARTURE

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
12 of 25
NOTES:
1. For SECTION EE, see ONE-WAY CURB AND GUTTER DEPARTURES.
2. For SECTION QQ, see CURB AND GUTTER WITHOUT ADJACENT BICYCLE LANE.
For SECTION TT, see CURB AND GUTTER WITH ADJACENT BICYCLE LANE.
1'-6"
3. The detail BRIDGE WITH BIKE LANE can be superimposed over the details: WITH UTILITY
STRIPS AND WITH BIKE LANE and WITHOUT UTILITY STRIPS AND WITH BIKE LANE. The
detail BRIDGE WITHOUT BIKE LANE can be superimposed over the details: WITH UTILITY
Const. Joint
STRIPS AND WITHOUT BIKE LANE and WITHOUT UTILITY STRIPS AND WITHOUT BIKE LANE.
Permitted
SECTION GG
PICTORIAL VIEW
Bridge
Bridge
Barrier Wall
Barrier Wall
1'-6"
2'-6"
T
Q

Sidewalk Alignment
Varies To
10' Transition
Begin Barrier Wall
Sidewalk Alignment
Varies To
Suit Conditions
Begin Barrier Wall

10' Transition
Suit Conditions
Around Hazard
Around Hazard
Varies
" Expansion Joint
(See Plans)
Barrier Wall
(See Plans)
Sidewalk (5' Std.)
" Expansion Joint
Varies
Sidewalk (5' Std.)
Tactile Surface
Barrier Wall
2'-6"
" Expansion Joint
1'-6"
" Expansion Joint
Type F Curb & Gutter (2')
T
Q
Begin Barrier Wall

Sidewalk Alignment
10' Transition
Begin Barrier Wall

Varies
Sidewalk Alignment
(10' Min.-20' Max.)
Varies To
Varies To
Suit Conditions
Suit Conditions
Around Hazard
10' Transition
Varies
(10' Min.-20' Max.)
Around Hazard
Varies
" Expansion Joint
Barrier Wall
Varies
Sidewalk (6' Std.)
(See Plans)
Tactile Surface
" Expansion Joint
Sidewalk (6' Std.)
(See Plans)
Barrier Wall
Tactile Surface
1'-6"
2'-6"
T
1:
02:
13 PM
WITHOUT UTILITY STRIP AND WITHOUT BIKE LANE

12/3/2015
Type F Curb
& Gutter (2')
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
ONE-WAY AND TWO-WAY CURB AND GUTTER NEAR LANE APPROACHES TRAFFIC (UNDIVIDED)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
13 of 25
7"
2 "
2"
R "
End Of Bridge Rail Or Other Hazard
R "
That Requires Shielding
Bar 5K @ 8" O.C.

2'
-8"
Pavt. Slope
2"
5"
R 10"
Offset Control Point
(Typ.)
Beginning Of Barrier
See Insert A
Edge of Travel Way
Departure Line
1'
-0"
Barrier Wall
Varies
Type 'F' Curb & Gutter
Wall Need
Point Of
R 1"
2"
Face Of
3" 7"
4"

Field Bend to Match
Adjacent Pavt. Slope
3"
3"
1'
-0"
Match Adjacent
2
"
1'
-10"
1
2"
Begin Concrete Barrier Wall

3" Min.
Departure
RIGHT SIDE APPROACH SHOWN - LEFT SIDE OPPOSITE HAND
No. 5 Bars
NEAR LANE APPROACH
@ 8" O.C.
2'-6"
1'-3"
4'-0"
QUANTITIES:
5
2
1
.
1 :0
B
734"
Concrete: 0.24 CY/LF; Reinforcing Steel: 26 LBS/LF

Face Of Barrier
SECTION QQ
(FOR HIGH SIDE)
714"
714"
Wall
Toe Of Barrier
Wall
2"
Or Other Hazard
R "
or 425
R "
End Concrete Barrier Wall
Traffic Railing (Index 420/425).
Edge of Travel Way
Beginning Of
(Near Lane Approach Opposite Hand)
See Insert A
Point Of Departure
2'
-8"
For Opposing Lane Approach
Barrier Wall Need

Roadway
OPPOSING LANE APPROACH
Index
420
2'-0"
1034"
425
WITH OR WITHOUT UTILITY STRIP - UTILITY STRIP SHOWN
3'-0"
3"
3"
1'
-0"
Departure Line
R 10"
R 1"
Barrier Wall
Bar 5K @ 8" O.C.
3" 7"
to Mate With Back Side of F Shape Bridge
2"
5"
2"
Type F Curb & Gutter
4"
(Typ.)
Face Of
INSERT A
Transition Concrete Barrier Wall (Index 410)
1 "
Offset Control Point
2
"
1'
-10"
1
2"
s
u
o
u
n
i
t
n
Co
7"
Index 420
2 "
Index 410
End Of Bridge Rail
3" Min.
No. 5 Bars
1'-014"
2'-6"
1'-3"
@ 8" O.C.
4'-0"
For Applications, see CURB AND GUTTER (WITH AND WITHOUT) UTILITY
STRIP AND WITHOUT ADJACENT BIKE LANE
QUANTITIES:
Concrete: 0.24 CY/LF; Reinforcing Steel: 26 LBS/LF
SECTION QQ
EQUATION VARIABLES:
Design
Speed
(FOR LOW SIDE)
D= Distance in feet from near edge of the near approach
Length Of Advancement, Ft. (X)
mph
NOTES:
traffic lane to back of hazard or clear zone width

whichever is lesser. For left side hazards and clear

zones on two-way undivided facilities D is measured

= 16 (D-d)
45
from the inside edge of the near approach traffic lane.
Note: The minimum length of advancement for

both near and opposing lane approaches is 40'.

d= Distance in feet from near edge of the near approach

traffic lane to the face of barrier (at offset control
3. Transverse expansion joints are to be constructed at the juncture

of wall transitions and curb and gutter, and at intervals so that
spacing will not exceed 100'.
1:
02:
13 PM
point). For left side hazards on two-way undivided

facilities d is measured from the inside edge of the
nearest opposing traffic lane.
4. For Concrete Barrier Wall Inlet details with Rigid Curb and Gutter
applications, see Index No. 219.
5. Minimum Segment Wall Length = 20 LF.
12/3/2015
LENGTH OF ADVANCEMENT
6. For additional information on Bar 5K, see BAR BENDING DIAGRAM.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
CURB AND GUTTER WITHOUT ADJACENT BICYCLE LANE

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
14 of 25
End Of Bridge Rail

Or Other Hazard
2"
That Requires
7"
R "
Beginning Of Barrier Wall, Length
Edge Of Travelway
Point Of Departure
of Need And Offset Control Point
Varies
414"
2"
2'
-8"
Bar 5K @ 8" O.C.

R 10"
5"
3" 7"
R 1"
Varies
2"
2"
Departure Line
Continuous
1'
-0"
Min.
Pavement Slope
Gutter Line
2
"
Field Bend to Match

Adjacent Pavt. Slope
3"
3"
1'
-0"
7"
Match Adjacent
Face Of Barrier Wall
R "
Tactile Surface
1'
-10"
Shielding
2 "
Begin Concrete Barrier Wall
3" Min
RIGHT SIDE APPROACH SHOWN - LEFT SIDE OPPOSITE HAND

NEAR LANE APPROACH
1'-6"
1'-3"
W2
End Of Bridge Rail
SECTION TT
Or Other Hazard
End Concrete Barrier Wall
(FOR HIGH SIDE)
Tactile Surface
Departure
QUANTITIES
Line
Gutter Line
Face Of Barrier Wall
Continuous
Length
Of
Barrier
Wall(LF)
W2
30'
26'to 29'
Concrete
CY/LF
Reinforcing
Steel
LBS/LF
3'-3"
0.21
24
3'-6"
0.22
24
Edge Of Travelway
Beginning Of Barrier Wall, Length

of Need And Offset Control Point
2"
OPPOSING LANE APPROACH
7"
2 "
Roadway
Point Of Departure
R "
R "
WITH OR WITHOUT UTILITY STRIP - UTILITY STRIP SHOWN

NOTES:
7"
2
"
2"
Bar 5K @ 8" O.C.

2'
-8"
STRIP AND ADJACENT BIKE LANE FOR APPLICATIONS
R 10"
5"
Min.
Drainage Slot
3. Transverse expansion joints are to be constructed at the juncture
(See Note #7)
of wall transitions and curb and gutter, and at intervals so that

6"
1'
-0"
Varies
2"
3" 7"
18" x 2"
2"
1 "
Sidewalk
R 1"
3"
3"
1'
-0"
1'
-0"
414"
For Applications, see CURB AND GUTTER (WITH AND WITHOUT UTILITY
3" Min
spacing will not exceed 100'.
H
4. For Concrete Barrier Wall Inlet details with Rigid Curb and Gutter

1'-6"
1'-3"
applications, see Index No. 219.

W2
5. Minimum Segment Wall Length = 20 LF.
PICTORIAL VIEW
SECTION HH
6. For additional information on Bar 5K, see BAR BENDING DIAGRAM.
SECTION TT
(FOR LOW SIDE)
1:
02:
14 PM
SIDEWALK DRAINAGE SLOT FOR

BARRIER WALL (RIGID) (CURB & GUTTER)
7. Drainage slots shall be located at all low points along the sidewalk
and unless otherwise shown in the plans, slots shall be spaced at
intervals not exceeding 50' in fill sections and 20' cut sections. Slots
shall be located such that only two bars are cut away or
deleted
in front and back lines of vertical reinforcement. On each side of

12/3/2015
Drainage slots, vertical and horizontal bars shall be placed to

provide 2" concrete cover.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
CURB AND GUTTER WITH ADJACENT BICYCLE LANE

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
15 of 25
End Measurement For Concrete

Barrier Wall Payment
Transition Section, see TRANSITION SECTION NOTES
Double Faced Guardrail
6'-3" W-Thrie Beam
Transition Panel
12'-6" Thrie-Beam (Nested)
For Traffic Approach To Barrier Wall
3 @ 3'-1"
12'-6" W-Beam Panel
6 @ 1'-6"
6'-3"
6'-3"
7"
See TRANSITION
Direction Of Lap
SECTION NOTES
Thrie-Beam
(8)
Single Faced Guardrail
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
Direction Of Lap
Terminal Connector
MEDIAN BARRIER WALL
Direction Of Lap
Thrie-Beam
Terminal Connector
Shoulder Wall
RIGHT SIDE APPROACH ONE-WAY LANES OR RIGHT SIDE APPROACH TWO-LANE TWO-WAY

Shoulder Wall
Thrie-Beam
Terminal Connector
Direction Of Lap
LEFT SIDE APPROACH ONE-WAY LANES


Shoulder Wall
Thrie-Beam
1:
02:
15 PM
NOTES:
1. For Section II, JJ, KK and LL
Guardrail and Offset Block Views, see
" plain round washers under heads and nuts.
SHOULDER BARRIER.
Attach to shoulder barrier wall with a 21"x12"x"
Direction Of Lap
thrie-beam terminal connector plate and 5-"x12"
LEFT SIDE OF TWO-LANE TWO-WAY (APPROACH FOR FAR LANE)
12/3/2015
long HS hex bolts and nuts with " plain round
07/01/14
REVISIO N
washers under heads and nuts.
LAST
Terminal Connector
wall with 5-"x15" long HS hex bolts and nuts with
STANDARD GUARDRAIL APPROACH TO
REVISION
2. Attach thrie-beam terminal connector to median barrier
GUARDRAIL CONNECTION TO CONCRETE BARRIER WALL APPROACH ENDS
DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
16 of 25
" Button Head Bolt,
(2 Reqd.)
See Note 8
Free End
Reinforcement
1'
-9"
1'
-9"
Thrie-Beam
" Holes
4"
3"
4"
" Holes
2"
II & KK
" x17" Button Head
" 16" Button Head
Timber Offset
II
JJ
FOR DOUBLE FACED GUARDRAIL USING TIMBER
FOR DOUBLE FACED GUARDRAIL
POSTS AND FOR SINGLE FACED GUARDRAIL
USING STEEL POSTS
STANDARD TIMBER OR PLASTIC OFFSET BLOCKS FIELD TRIMMED
Bolt With Beam Washer And
Timber Offset
Bolt With Beam Washer And
1"
USING EITHER TIMBER OR STEEL POSTS
SECTION JJ
SECTION II
2"
3"
3"
JJ & LL
1'
-10"
With Washer & Beam Washer
(2 Reqd.)
4"
5"
1'
-7 "
With Washer & Beam Washer
5"
1'
-10"
With Beam Washer And Nut
1'
-7 "
With Beam Washer And Nut
6"
1'
-10"
22" Long For Steel Post,
1'
-7 "
22" Long For Steel Post,
See Note 8
Thrie-Beam
24" Long For Timber Post,
Timber Offset
1'
-7 "
24" Long For Timber Post,
1'
-10"
" Button Head Bolt,

Timber Offset
FOR USE AT SECTIONS II, JJ, KK & LL
Nut & Washer (2 Reqd.)
Nut & Washer (2 Reqd.)
See Note 8
See Note 8
12"x12"x"
Back-Up Plate
Back-Up Plate
With " Holes
With " Holes
" Holes
1'
-9"
" Holes
1'
-9"
12"x12"x"
Free End
Reinforcement
Thrie-Beam
Terminal Connector
SECTION KK
SECTION LL
Direction Of Lap
Varies, See Index No. 400, Detail K
(8)
l
e
n
m Pa
a
Be
"W6
'
2
1
)
d
e
t
s
Ne
l(
e
n
m Pa
a
Be
"W6
'
2
1
m
a
e Be
i
r
h
T
"W3
'
6
l
e
n
n Pa
o
i
t
i
s
n
a
r
T
l
e
n
m Pa
a
Be
e
i
r
h
"T
6
'
2
1
(7)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
Shoulder Wall
)
d
e
t
s
Ne
l(
e
n
m Pa
a
Be
e
i
r
h
"T
6
'
2
1
STANDARD GUARDRAIL APPROACH TO SHOULDER BARRIER

TRANSITION SECTION NOTES:
1. The longitudinaldimensions and paymentlimits shown for median concrete barrier wallalso
apply to shoulder concrete barrier walls.
1:
02:
16 PM
2. W-beam elements do not apply to these transition schemes. For barrier wall trailing end
guardrail connections for one-way lanes, see FREE END REINFORCEMENT.
5. The nested beams shallnot be bolted to blocks and posts at posts numbers (1),(3)and (5).
6. On the trailing side of MEDIAN BARRIER WALL, offset blocks may be omitted at posts
numbers (1), (2), (3), (5), (6), and (8).
7. For additionalguardrailinformation refer to Index No.400.
3. Where reaming is necessary to fitnested beams,the reamed surfaces shallbe metalized in

accordance with Section 562 of the Standard Specifications.
8. Single Thrie-Beam on trailing ends of barrier wall;Nested Thrie-Beams on approach ends of

barrier wall.
12/3/2015
4. Either steelor timber guardrailpostmay be used,timber posts shown.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
GUARDRAIL CONNECTION TO CONCRETE BARRIER WALL APPROACH ENDS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
17 of 25
7"
See Note 6
Standard Thrie-Beam Offset Block,
Nom.
< 3'
1'
-7 "
R 125'
See Note 6
Round Pier Shown
See Note 5
1'
-10"
Field Trimmed, See Detail, Right
1: 10
5" Nom.
s
r
t
e
h
n
s
me
y
m Wa
a
l
Be
i
lPa
l
a
r Wa
k Of R
c
e
i
a
r
B
r
d
e
k
Ba
c
a
e
t
St
e
r
c
n
r Co
tFo
n
me
e
r
u
s
a
Me
d
n
E
m
a
Be
e
i
r
h
T
r
o
t
c
e
n
n
lCo
a
n
mi
r
e
T
"
9
'
1
1
5" Nom.
)
d
e
t
s
Ne
l(
e
n
m Pa
a
e
b
e
i
r
Th
FOR USE WITH EITHER

1: 10 OR 1: 15
e9
t
e No
,Se
n
o
i
t
c
n Se
o
i
t
i
s
n
a
Tr
'
5
2
t
n
me
y
lPa
i
a
r
d
r
a
r Gu
tFo
n
me
e
r
u
s
a
d Me
En
GUARDRAIL TRANSITIONS
STANDARD THRIE-BEAM OFFSET BLOCK
PLAN FOR DESIGN SPEED 45 MPH
(FIELD TRIMMED)
NOTES:
1. The affected segments between bent supports or pier columns shall
be constructed in accordance with the detail for REINFORCED
See Note 6
where the barrier wall and slope pavement or other structure would
occupy the same location, the wall and structure are to be modified
R 125'
< 3'
Round Pier Shown
Field Trimmed, See Detail, Right
CONCRETE SHOULDER WALL, Section QQ, or Section TT. In cases
See Note 6
as detailed in the plans.
See Note 5
2. The barrier wall radial segments are intended for use on approach
and trailing ends of both one-way and two-way facilities. The
guardrail connections shown on this sheet apply to one-way
1: 15
approaches and to the approaching and trailing ends of two-lane twoway facilities. For Details on trailing ends of two-way multilane and
s
r
e
h
s
m Wa
a
Be
l
i
a
k Of R
c
d Ba
e
k
c
a
t
S
one-way facilities, the end connection on W-Beam guardrail connection
t
n
me
y
lPa
l
r Wa
e
i
r
r
Ba
e
t
e
r
c
n
r Co
tFo
n
me
e
r
u
s
a
d Me
En
m
a
Be
e
i
r
h
T
r
o
t
c
e
n
n
lCo
a
n
mi
r
e
T
"
7
'
7
)
d
e
t
s
Ne
l(
e
n
m Pa
a
e
b
e
i
r
Th
e9
t
e No
,Se
n
o
i
t
c
n Se
o
i
t
i
s
n
a
Tr
'
1
2
t
n
me
y
lPa
i
a
r
d
r
a
r Gu
tFo
n
me
e
r
u
s
a
d Me
En
to concrete barrier wall trailing ends may be used.
For walls with normal offsets from hazards and their guardrail
connections, see GUARDRAIL CONNECTION TO CONCRETE BARRIER WALL
APPROACH ENDS.
3. Refer to Index No. 400 for additional guardrail information.
4. Attach thrie-beam terminal connector to shoulder barrier wall with a

21"x12"x" thrie beam terminal connector plate and 5-"x12" long HS
hex bolts and nuts with " plain round washers under heads and nuts.
5. 12"x12"x" galvanized steel back-up plate with " post bolts (either
14" or 18" long) and nuts with " plain round washers under nuts.
6. For details at Rigid Hazard, see HAZARD PENETRATION INTO STEM
OF RIGID CONCRETE BARRIER WALLS.
DISTANCE
OFFSETS
"X" (FT)
"Y" (FT)
4.00
0.06
7.99
0.26
12
11.98
0.58
16
15.96
1.02
25'
R 1
ARC
LENGTH (FT)
7. For additional information on PLAN FOR DESIGN SPEED 45 MPH, see

SHOULDER BARRIER WHEN OFFSET FROM ABOVE GROUND HAZARD <
1'-6" AND THE DESIGN SPEED 45 MPH.
Y
8. For additional information on PLAN FOR DESIGN SPEED 50 MPH, see
SHOULDER BARRIER WALL WHEN OFFSET FROM ABOVE GROUND
Note:
HAZARD < 1'-6" AND THE DESIGN SPEED 50 MPH.
20
19.91
1.60
in chords having lengths

9. See GUARDRAIL CONNECTION TO CONCRETE BARRIER WALL APPROACH
21
20.91
1.76
24
23.85
2.30
ENDS For Post Spacing And Bolt Connections, Steel Or Timber Posts
25
24.83
2.49
Are Applicable.
12/3/2015
1:
02:
17 PM
Wall may be constructed

4 feet.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
SHOULDER BARRIER WALL AT ABOVE GROUND RIGID HAZARDS WHEN OFFSET FROM HAZARD < 3'
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
18 of 25
M
" Min. Open Joint Or
" Min. Open Joint Or
Contractor's Option: Cast
Contractor's Option: Cast
The Back Face Of Barrier
The Back Face Of Barrier
Wall Up Against The

Heel Of Footing
Wall Up Against The
Heel Of Footing
Existing Pier With "
Existing Pier With "
Expansion Material
Expansion Material
3
4"
Top Of Barrier
5"
Face Of Barrier
" V-Groove
2"
Pier Offset
3
4"
Back Of Barrier
Top Of Barrier
5"
2"
Pier Offset
Back Of Barrier
" V-Groove
Gutter Line
Face Of Barrier
Gutter Line
PIER AT BACK OF CONCRETE BARRIER WALL

NOTES:
1. These treatments are not applicable to hazards that cannot
provide lateral support to resist the LRFD lateral equivalent

static force.
See the plans for limits of wall sections and
other associated wall treatments.

Heel Of Footing
N
Heel Of Footing
2. For Low Speed SECTIONS MM, NN and OO, see SHOULDER

BARRIER WALL WHEN OFFSET FROM ABOVE GROUND HAZARD
< 1'-6" AND THE DESIGN SPEED 45 MPH.

3. For High Speed SECTIONS MM and NN, see SHOULDER
Back Of Barrier
Back Of Barrier
BARRIER WALL WHEN OFFSET FROM ABOVE GROUND HAZARD
5"
Bridge bent supports and piers are shown.

" V-Groove
Face Of Barrier
5. When thru drainage is required, a 3"x 12" Drain Slot shall be
3
4"
Top Of Barrier
5"
clearances between above ground hazards and the walls.
2"
The details on this sheet are treatments to the F-shape

concrete barrier walls, where site conditions impose reduced
Pier Offset
3
4"
4.
Top Of Barrier
2"
Pier Offset
< 1'-6" AND THE DESIGN SPEED 50 MPH.
" V-Groove
Face Of Barrier
provided at one of the following locations:
a. 4' upstream of pier edge for a declining approach.
Gutter Line
Gutter Line
b. 4' downstream of pier edge for an inclining approach.
PIER PENETRATION INTO TOP OF CONCRETE BARRIER WALL

O
Heel Of Footing
Heel Of Footing
Back Of Barrier
Back Of Barrier
Face Of Barrier
Top Of Barrier
5"
Pier
" V-Groove
Offset
5"
Top Of Barrier
2"
3
4"
3
4"
2"
Offset
Pier
1:
02:
17 PM
" V-Groove
Gutter Line
Face Of Barrier
Gutter Line
12/3/2015
PIER AT FACE OF CONCRETE BARRIER WALL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
RIGID HAZARD PENETRATION INTO STEM OF CONCRETE BARRIER WALL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
19 of 25
Pier
Pier
Pier
Offset
Offset
Offset
Varies (5" Min.)
R "
R "
R "
6"
3
4"
Galvanized 6x6
1'
-10"
2"
2
"
1'
-10"
1'
-10"
R 10"
2 "
R "
"
2
"
2"
2"
1
2"
1
2"
R "
7"
2 "
2"
" Expansion
" Expansion
Material
Material
W4.0 / 4.0 WWM

W/ 6" Overlap 4'
Ea. Side of Pier
" Expansion
Material
R 10"
R 10"
Bar 5L @ 4" O.C. for
5"
No. 5 Bars
Pavement
No. 5 Bars
7"
Pavement
@ 8" O.C.
3"
5"
R 1"
No. 5 Bars
@ 8" O.C.
2"
3"
3"
3"
3"
5"
R 1"
@ 8" O.C.
Shoulder
3"
Shoulder
R 1"
Pavement
7"
7"
Shoulder
4' Ea. Side of Pier
4' Ea. Side of Pier
Bar 5A @ 8" O.C.
Field Cut And

Bend Bar 5L
As Necessary To
Gutter Line
Permitted
Construction Joint
Permitted
1'-0"
No. 5 Bars
No. 5 Bars
No. 5 Bars
No. 5 Bars
@ 8" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
3"
3"
5"
Pier
3" Min.
3" Min.
2'-3"
2'-0"
32" SHOULDER WALL
3"
4"
5"
Pier
3" Min.
1
4"
1'-8
32" SHOULDER WALL
32" OR 42" SHOULDER WALL
SECTION NN
SECTION OO
WHEN 12" PIER OFFSET < 15"
SECTION MM
WHEN PIER OFFSET 15"
1'
-0"
Pier
Permitted
3"
3"
5"
1'
-0"
3"
Construction Joint
1'-0"
No. 5 Bars
3"
1'
-0"
1-9"
Construction Joint
1'-0"
Maintain 3" Cover
Gutter Line
1-9"
1-9"
Gutter Line
NOTES:
1. Reduce the vertical steel spacing to 4 inches O.C. a distance of 4 feet
for each side of all cold or expansion joints.
2. All longitudinal reinforcement to be continuous or spliced No. 5 bars. Lap

splices a minimum of 2'-0".
1:
02:
18 PM
3. For additional information on Bars 5A and 5L, see BAR BENDING DIAGRAMS.
4. " Min. Expansion Joint or at the contractor's option: Back face of barrier
12/3/2015
wall may be cast against Pier with " Expansion Material.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SHOULDER BARRIER WALL WHEN OFFSET FROM ABOVE GROUND HAZARD < 1'-6" AND THE DESIGN SPEED 45 MPH
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
20 of 25
Pier Offset
Bar 5M @ 8" O.C.
2"
" Expansion
R 10"
2 "
2 "
Bar 5A @ 8" O.C.

7"
Bar 5B @ 8" O.C.
5"
R 1"
No. 5 Bars
Shoulder
@ 8" O.C.
Pavement
See Index
No. 5 Bars
5"
R 1"
3"
No. 5 Bars
No. 218 For
@ 8" O.C.
Joint Details
3"
Pavement
2"
2"
4' Ea. Side of Pier
3"
Shoulder
@ 8" O.C.
3"
3"
No. 5 Bars
2
"
2"
Bar 5P @ 4" O.C. for
7"
7"
5"
R 1"
Pavement
2
"
R 10"
R 10"
Bar 5A @ 8" O.C.
Shoulder
2"
Bar 5N @ 8" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
3" 3"
2"
1'
-10"
2
"
1'
-10"
2"
Material
Bar 5N @ 8" O.C.
Bar 5M @ 8" O.C.
1'
-10"
" Expansion
2"
2"
Bar 5M @ 8" O.C.
Material
1
2"
1
2"
Bar 5N @ 8" O.C.
over 15'-0"
R "
1
2"
2"
2
"
R "
R "
10"
See Note 6
42" height
10"
R "
2 "
2 "
R "
Transition to
3"
10"
R "
3
4"
Varies (5" Min.)
3
4"
412"
Pier Offset
Gutter Line
Gutter Line
Construction Joint
Permitted
1'-0"
Barrier Wall
Construction Joint
Permitted
1'-0"
Inlet
1'
-9"
1'
-9"
1'
-9"
Gutter Line
1'-0"
1'
-9"
Gutter Line
Construction Joint
1'-3"
Permitted
Construction Joint
Permitted
1'-3"
No. 5 Bars
No. 5 Bars
No. 5 Bars
No. 5 Bars
No. 5 Bars
@ 8" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
3" Min.
3"
3"
5"
Pier
3" Min.
2'-3"
4" 3"
3"
1'
-0"
Pier
1'
-0"
3"
5"
1'
-0"
1'
-0"
3"
3"
No. 5 Bars
@ 8" O.C.
3"
No. 5 Bars
@ 8" O.C.
3"
No. 5 Bars
3" Min.
2'-3"
QUANTITIES:
QUANTITIES:
Concrete 0.35 CY/LF
Concrete 0.31 CY/LF
42" SHOULDER WALL

SECTION MM
WHEN PIER OFFSET 16"
42" SHOULDER WALL
42" SHOULDER WALL (TYPICAL)
3"
3"
3" Min.
3'-3"
2'-0"
4"
42" SHOULDER WALL (MODIFIED)
SECTION NN
NOTES:
1. Reduce the vertical steel spacing to 4 inches O.C. a distance of 4 feet each side of all cold joints.
1:
02:
19 PM
2. All longitudinal reinforcement to be continuous or spliced No. 5 bars. Lap splices a minimum of 2'-0".
3. For additional information on Bars 5A, 5B, 5M, 5N and 5P, see BAR BENDING DIAGRAMS.
4. For Section OO, see SHOULDER BARRIER WALL WHEN OFFSET FROM ABOVE GROUND HAZARD < 1'-6" AND THE DESIGN SPEED 45 MPH.
5. Where the 42" SHOULDER WALL does not abut the pier, use the TYPICAL or MODIFIED sections.
12/3/2015
6. " Min. Expansion Joint or at the contractor's option: Back face of barrier wall may be cast against Pier with " Expansion Material.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SHOULDER BARRIER WALL WHEN OFFSET FROM ABOVE GROUND HAZARD < 1'-6" AND DESIGN SPEED 50 MPH
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
21of 25
100'-0"
Beginning Length Of Need
Back of Pier or Bent

15'-0"
Vertical
Transition
Pier or Bent
Type 3 Object Marker when

D
required (see Index 400,
General Note No. 21)

Gutter Line
Shoulder Wall
Edge of Traffic Lane
Point of
Departure (RA)
42" Barrier
Shoulder Wall
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
100'-0"
100'-0"
Beginning Length Of Need (LA)
Beginning Length Of Need (RA)

15'-0"
d
(
LA)
Gutter Line
Vertical
Transition
d
(
RA)
Shoulder Wall
D (
LA)
Pier or Bent
D (
RA)
15'-0"
Vertical
Transition
Shoulder Wall

Point of
RIGHT APPROACH (RA)
Departure (RA)
Roadway
Point of
LEFT APPROACH (LA)
Departure (LA)
Shoulder Wall
42" Barrier
Shoulder Wall
12/3/2015
1:
02:
21 PM
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SHOULDER BARRIER WALL WHEN OFFSET FROM ABOVE GROUND HAZARD < 1'-6" AND DESIGN SPEED 50 MPH
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
22 of 25
End or Begin
Thrie-Beam Guardrail
Tapered Transition
(See Plan View)
Extend 32" Shoulder Wall (Typ.)
Bolts (Omit With Concrete

& Supporting Footing Horizontal
Barrier Wall Continuation)

42" Shoulder Wall (Typ.)
Bars 5M & 5N Field
End or Begin
Reinforcment 3' Into 42" Shoulder
Tapered
Wall End Transition
Transition
Cut Splice & Lap
32" Shoulder
1'-1"
214"
3 "
32" H eight
42" H eight
412"
Wall (Typ.)
378"
Shoulder Pavement
Bar 5A
@ 8" O.C.
15'-0"
Vertical
Transition
1:
02:
22 PM
NOTES:
ELEVATION VIEW
For additional information on Bars 5A, 5M and 5N see BAR BENDING
12/3/2015
42" SHOULDER WALL END TRANSITION
DIAGRAMS.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
END TRANSITION DETAILS - 42" SHOULDER WALL WITH GUARDRAIL OR SHOULDER WALL CONTINUATION FOR DESIGN SPEED 50 MPH
DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS

INDEX
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
23 of 25
Standard
Barrier Wall
End Measurement for Median Barrier Transition

Pier (P)
L (Total Transition) = 100'-0" (Symmetrical At Pier Approaches)

42" Median Wall
15'-0"
42" Half Wall
15'-0"
Varies
Pier
M
12"
Horizontal Transition
20
4" Concrete
4" Concrete
Material
Cap
Cap
Pier (
P)
12"
" Expansion
4" Concrete Cap

Over Granular Fill
P + 1"
Vertical
Transition
See 42"
" Expansion
Half Wall
Material
Below
See 42"
Half Wall
Granular Fill
Below
In Wall Cavity
1
20
B
M = [(P+1)/12 - 1] * 10; where M is in feet and P is in inches.
Shoulder Or
Shoulder Or
Roadway
Roadway
Pavement
Pavement
4" Concrete Cap

Over Granular Fill
Varies = L - 30 - M; when Varies, L and M are in feet.
SECTION AA (42" BARRIER)
PLAN
" Expansion
" Expansion
Symmetrical
About
R "
R "
Wall
2"
2"
Bars 5R @
R "
16" O.C.
@ 8" O.C.
2
"
"
2
2"
1'
-10"
32" H eight
42" Half Wall
Bar 5N
8" O.C.
1'
-10"
Wall
42" H eight
42" Median
R 10"
R "
2"
Bar 5M @
1
2"
Standard Barrier
7"
6'
-6"
Over Granular Fill
2 "
27" Max.)
10"
@ 8" O.C.
Varies (9" Min.
10"
Over Granular Fill
Material
4" Concrete Cap
1
2"
1
2"
No. 5 Bars
@ 16" O.C.
4" Concrete Cap
Material
No. 5 Bars
SECTION BB (42" BARRIER)
2
"
2"
2"
R 10"
15'-0"
85'-0"
Gutter Line
Shoulder Pavement
@ 16" O.C.
Pavement
@ 8" O.C.
Gutter Line
Construction
Vertical
@ 8" O.C.
No. 5 Bars
3"
Shoulder
Joint
Permitted
No. 5 Bars
@ 8" O.C.
Construction
Joint
3"
15'-0"
Horizontal Transition
3'
-0"
Varies
1'
-9"
3"
Pavement
No. 5 Bars
5"
1'
-9"
Shoulder
R 1"
3" 7"
5"
3"
Pier
7"
Bar 5A
R 1"
Permitted
ELEVATION
3"
3"
NOTES:
1'
-0"
Transition
3" Min.
3"
No. 5 Bars
@ 8" O.C.
3" Min.
1:
02:
23 PM
1. Reduce the vertical steel spacing to 4 inches O.C. a distance of 4 feet for each side of all cold or expansion joints.
2'-3"
2. All longitudinal reinforcement to be continuos or spliced No. 5 bars. Lap splices a minimum of 2'-0".
3. Granular Fill To Be Free of Deleterious and Cementitious Material.
3'-6" Max.)
42" MEDIAN WALL
4. For additional information on Bars 5A, 5M, 5N and 5R, see BAR BENDING DIAGRAMS.
12/3/2015
Varies (2'-0" Min.
42" HALF WALL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
CONCRETE MEDIAN BARRIER WALL TRANSITIONS AT BRIDGE PIERS FOR DESIGN SPEEDS 50 MPH
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
24 of 25
4"
6"
4"
212"
8"
1'
-8 "
Varies
1'
-11"
Y + 1'
-9 "
6 "
112"
6"
1'-0"
D
8"
1112"
BAR 5C
BAR 5B
BAR 5A
5"
10"
2"
1'
-10"
1'-0"
3'
-3 "
5"
3'
-3 "
D
5"
5"
5'
-22"
5'
-22"
5'
-212"
5'
-212"
1'
-10 "
1'
-10 "
1"
1'
-6 "
514"
1
2"
4"
4"
1'
-1
4"
8"
1'-4"
3"
BAR 5D
CANTILEVER WALL & L-WALL
CANTILEVER WALL
CANTILEVER WALL
BAR 5G
BAR 5F
1'
-6 "
D
D
2"
7"
814"
6"
5'
-5"
5'
-5"
6"
2'
-5"
1'
-0"
5'
-2"
6"
1'
-9"
1'
-10"
6"
3'
-212"
Y + 1'
-9 "
1'
-3"
6"
5"
1'
-11 "
4"
1'
-11"
2"
1
2"
1
2"
BAR 5E
8"
1'-0"
1:
02:
23 PM
W1 - 6"
L-WALL
L-WALL
BAR 5H
BAR 5J
BAR 5K
BAR 5L
1'-0"
BAR 5M
BAR 5N
BAR 5P
1'-3"
BAR 5R
NOTES:
1. For Additional Information on "STANDARD BAR BENDING DETAILS," See Index 21300.
12/3/2015
2. For Bar 5G, Bar 5J, and Dimensions (W, W1 and Y), see CANTILEVER WALL DIMENSIONS TABLE.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
410
SHEET
NO.
25 of 25
This Pier Protection Barrier has been structurally evaluated to be equivalent or greater in
strength to other safety shape traffic barriers which have been crash tested to NCHRP Report
350 TL-5 criteria. This barrier meets the requirements of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications for a barrier used for bridge pier protection.
GENERAL NOTES
1. Concrete shall be Class III or IV unless otherwise called for in the plans.
5. On roadways designated for reverse laning,mark alldownstream barrier ends

that are notshielded or outside the clear zone with Type 3 ObjectMarkers.
Include the cost of the ObjectMarker in the cost of the Pier Protection
Barrier.
2. Construct Pier Protection Barrier continuous without transverse contraction or expansion joints.
Transverse construction joints may be used at a spacing greater than or equalto 40'. Provide
longitudinalreinforcing steelcontinuous across construction joints.
3. When the Pier Protection Barrier is installed adjacent to Roadway or Shoulder pavement,compact the
top 12" of the subgrade to at least98% of the maximum density determined by FM 1-T 180,Method D.
6. Payment: Pier Protection Barrier and Crash Wallto be paid for under the
contract unit price for Shoulder Concrete Barrier Wall(Rigid-Shoulder 42"),LF,
or Shoulder Concrete Barrier Wall(Rigid-Shoulder 54"),LF.
7. Provide 3/8 deep crack control V-grooves at 15 to 30 spacing. Locate V-grooves above any joint or
4. Isolate Barrier WallInlets,Index 218,from Pier Protection Barriers and

Footings with 1"expansion material.
discontinuity in the barrier footing. Align V-Grooves perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the Pier
Protection Barrier and make continuous across the top surface and both side faces. For slip formed
barriers, score 3/8 V-Grooves while the concrete is still plastic, otherwise pre-form the joints when
stationary forms are utilized.
Pier Footing or Column (Typ.),

1'M in.
Round Column shown, rectangular

columns and piles similar
Edge of Pier Footing, Drainage Structure,

Utility, etc. at or above Pier Protection
Barrier Footing (Typ.)
1'M in.
1'-9" Min.
> 2'-0" Preferred

Pier Column or Pile
B
Field bend & shift
54" Pier
10'-9" Min.
42" Pier
Drainage
Bars 5B as shown
4'-0"
Structure,
Overlap
etc.
Barrier Gutter Line
Barrier Gutter Line
Protection Barrier
Protection Barrier
3" Min.
Barrier Gutter Line
Construction Joint
D
6" Min.
permitted (Typ.)
Drainage
Footing, Type varies (Typ.)
Structure,
Field bend & shift

Bars 5B as shown
Edge of Pier Protection
Pier Footing
(Varies)
etc.
C
Front Cantilever Footing
SECTION
T Footing
Back Cantilever Footing

Front Cantilever Footing
1:
02:
29 PM
12/3/2015
PLAN VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
PIER PROTECTION BARRIER FOOTING LAYOUT SCHEMATICS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PIER PROTECTION BARRIER
NO.
411
SHEET
NO.
1of 10
Extended
Design
Beginning of length of need
Speed
PPB
App
r
o
Dep
ac
h
ar
t
ur
eL
i
n
e
Pier or Bent
Inside Setback
45
= 16 (D-d)
50
= 13 (D-d)
See Detail 'A'

NOTE:
d
Distance
Barrier Gutter Line

X (Length of Advancement) Ft.
mph

Distance
30'Setback
Pier or Bent
Setback Limit
X (Length of Advancement)
Length of Advancement determined from the diagrams and equations shown establishes
the location of the upstream beginning length of need for a Pier Protection Barrier,
Point of Departure
however, the Length of Advancement for the combination of Pier Protection Barrier

42" or 54" Pier Protection Barrier - 50' Min.
and required guardrail can be no less than that required by other details of Index 400.
Guardrail Transition, see Index 410, Sheet 24
Equation Variables:
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
D = Distance in feet from the near edge of the near approach traffic lane to
either (a) the back of pier, when the pier is located inside the Setback Distance
PPB
Dep
ar
t
ur
eL
i
n
e
or (b) the Setback Distance, when the pier extends to or goes beyond the Setback
2.49' - Design Speed 45 mph
Distance. For left side piers on two-way undivided facilities, D is measured
from the inside edge of the near approach traffic lane.
d = Distance in feet from the near edge of the near approach traffic lane to the
Pier Protection Barrier gutter line at its intersection with the departure line or
the face of guardrail at its intersection with the departure line.
Barrier Gutter Line
For left side
hazards on two-way undivided facilities, d is measured from the inside edge of

the near approach traffic lane.
DETAIL 'A'
Extended Pier or Bent
(Guardrail not shown for clarity)
Pier or Bent
PPB
Dep
ar
t
ur
L
e
i
n
e(
RA)
See Detail 'A' (Typ.)
D (
LA)
Distance
Inside Setback Distance
D (
RA)
Pier or Bent
30'Setback
d (
LA)
e
ur
t
ar
Dep
B
P
P
A)
L
e(
n
i
L
Barrier Gutter Line

RIGHT APPROACH (RA)
(
RA)
(LA) Setback Limit
(RA) Setback Limit
Back of
Distance
X (Length of advancement LA)
30'Setback
Beginning of length of need (LA)
Beginning of length of need (RA)

X (Length of advancement RA)
Point of Departure
Guardrail Transition, see
Index 410, Sheet 24 (Typ.)
Point of Departure (LA)
LEFT APPROACH (LA)

NOTE:
1:
02:
31 PM
See Index 400 for Clear
Zone and Horizontal Clearance

Length of Advancement Diagrams.
PPB = Pier Protection Barrier
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
LENGTH OF ADVANCEMENT DIAGRAMS - PIER PROTECTION BARRIER WITH GUARDRAIL CONTINUATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
411
SHEET
NO.
2 of 10
Extended

Distance
D
30'Setback
Pier or Bent
Setback Limit
X (Length of Advancement)
PPB
App
r
o
Dep
ac
h
ar
t
ur
eL
i
n
e
Pier or Bent
Inside Setback
Distance
Concrete Barrier Wall, see Index 410
Barrier Gutter Line
Point of Departure

32" Concrete Barrier Wall, See Index 410
(LA) Setback Limit
Pier or Bent
D (
RA)
Pier or Bent

PPB
Dep
ar
t
ur
L
i
e
n
e(
RA)
D (
LA)

Distance
30'Setback
d (
LA)

e
ur
t
ar
Dep
B
P
P
A)
L
e(
n
i
L
(RA) Setback Limit
Back of
Barrier Gutter Line
(
RA)
X (Length of Advancement LA)
X (Length of Advancement RA)
Distance
Beginning of length of need (LA)
Beginning of length of need (RA)
30'Setback
Extended Pier or Bent
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
Point of Departure
RIGHT APPROACH (RA)

LEFT APPROACH (LA)

NOTES:
1:
02:
32 PM
See Notes on Sheet 2.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/06
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
LENGTH OF ADVANCEMENT DIAGRAMS - PIER PROTECTION BARRIER WITH CONCRETE BARRIER WALL CONTINUATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
411
SHEET
NO.
3 of 10
Extended

Pier or Bent
See Detail 'B'
Inside Setback
Crash Wall
Distance
PPB
App
r
o
ac
hD
epa
r
t
ur
eL
i
n
e
Distance
30'Setback
Pier or Bent
Setback Limit
X (Length of
Advancement)

Point of Departure

Guardrail Transition,
Barrier Gutter Line
PPB
De
par
t
ur
e
see Index 410, Sheet 24
42" or 54" Pier Protection

Barrier with Crash Walls - 50' Min.
Pier or
Crash Wall
'
7
Bent
L
i
n
e
M
.
in
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
Pier Footing
45
d
2'
Barrier Gutter Line
DETAIL 'B'
(Guardrail not shown for clarity)
Beginning of length
Limit
Crash Wall (Typ.)

See Detail 'B' (Typ.)
D (
RA)
D (
LA)

Distance
(
LA)
A)
L
e(
n
i
L
30'Setback
Pier or Bent
Barrier Gutter Line
(
RA)
(RA) Setback
Pier or Bent
Distance
(LA) Setback Limit
Back of
30'Setback
X (Length of
Advancement LA)
Advancement RA)
or Bent
Extended Pier
of need (LA)
e
ur
t
ar
Dep
B
P
P
of need (RA)
X (Length of
Beginning of length
PPB
Dep
ar
t
ur
e
L
i
n
e(
RA)

RIGHT APPROACH (RA)
Pier Protection
Guardrail Transition, see
Barrier
Index 410, Sheet 24 (Typ.)
Point of Departure
LEFT APPROACH (LA)

NOTES:
42" or 54" Pier Protection Barrier with Crash Walls - 50' Min.
1:
02:
32 PM

12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
LENGTH OF ADVANCEMENT DIAGRAMS - PIER PROTECTION BARRIER WITH CRASH WALL AND GUARDRAIL CONTINUATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
411
SHEET
NO.
4 of 10
Extended
Pier or Bent
Crash Wall
PPB
App
r
o
ac
De
h
par
t
ur
eL
i
n
e
Inside Setback
Distance

Distance
D
30'Setback
Pier or Bent
Setback Limit
X (Length of
Advancement)
Barrier Gutter Line


42" or 54" Pier Protection
Point of Departure
Barrier with Crash

Walls - 50' Min.

ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
Beginning of length
Beginning of length
(LA) Setback Limit
Back of Pier
(RA) Setback Limit
or Bent
Hazard Free,
PPB
Dep
ar
t
ur
L
e
i
n
e(
RA)
D (
RA)
D (
LA)
Setback Distance
(
RA)
Crash Wall (Typ.)
Pier or Bent Inside
e
ur
t
par
De
PPB
A)
L
(
e
n
i
L
(
LA)
Distance
30'Setback
Traversable Slopes
Distance
X (Length of
Advancement LA)
of need (RA)
Advancement RA)
30'Setback
Extended
of need (LA)
Pier or Bent
X (Length of
Barrier Gutter Line

Concrete Barrier Wall,
Point of Departure (RA)
see Index 410
Concrete Barrier Wall,

See Index 410
RIGHT APPROACH (RA)
LEFT APPROACH (LA)
42" or 54" Pier Protection Barrier with Crash Walls - 50' Min.

NOTES:
1:
02:
33 PM
12/3/2015
LENGTH OF ADVANCEMENT DIAGRAMS - PIER PROTECTION BARRIER WITH CRASH WALL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/06
REVISIO N
AND CONCRETE BARRIER WALL CONTINUATION

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
411
SHEET
NO.
5 of 10
NOTES
* 12"x12"x" galvanized steel back-up plate with " post bolts (either
17" or 21" long) and nuts with " plain round washers under nuts.
Attach thrie-beam terminal connector to Pier Protection Barrier with
1. The Pier Protection Barrier radial segments are
called for in Plans)
intended for use on approach and trailing ends of
a 21"x12"x" thrie-beam terminal connector plate and 5-"x15"
E
*
long HS hex bolts and nuts with " plain round washers under
heads and nuts.
125'R
Thrie-Beam
both one-way and two-way facilities. The guardrail
field trimmed, see Detail
connections shown on this sheet apply to one-way

approaches and to the approaching and trailing ends
45
42" or 54" PPB
Terminal Connector
of two-lane two-way facilities. On trailing ends of

two-way multilane and one-way facilities the end
**
connection on Index 410, Sheet 2 may be used.

1:10
t
n
me
y
a
Bp
r PP
o
f
l
i
a
t
r
n
f
e
m
ko
e
c
r
a
u
s
db
e
a
k
c
a
t
d me
ss
r
e
En
h
s
m Wa
a
Be
"
9
'
1
1
,
g
n
i
c
a
p
ts
s
o
l
rp
e
o
n
0f
t2
e
m,1 Pa
e
a
,Sh
d Be
0
e
1
t
4
s
)
.
x
Ne
e
e
l
d
b
n
a
I
c
i
l
e
p
e
s
p
s(
ea
l
r
e
n
sa
t
s
Pa
o
,2
rp
n
e
o
i
t
mb
c
i
rt
n Se
lo
o
i
e
t
i
e
t
s
n
a
,s
s
Tr
n
o
i
t
c
e
n
n
o
tc
l
o
db
n
ga
n
i
c
a
p
s
'
5
2
Barrier
Gutter Line
x
7" nom.
19 "
Crash Wall (when

Thrie-Beam
125'R
Terminal Connector
**
5" nom.
field trimmed, see Detail

*
2. Refer to Index No. 400 Detail J for additional

guardrail information.
ARC
DISTANCE
OFFSETS "y"
LENGTH (Ft.)
"x" (Ft.)
"y" (Ft.)
4.00
0.06
7.99
0.26
12
11.98
0.58
16
15.96
1.02
20
19.91
1.60
21
20.91
1.76
24
23.85
2.30
25
24.83
2.49
Y
X
Note:
42" or 54" PPB
For guardrail connections, see Index 410, Sheet 20.
45
5" nom.
'R
125
l
a
n
o
i
t
i
d
d
oa
n
t(
n
me
y
a
lp
i
a
)
.
r
s
d
e
r
i
a
r
o
s
s
r Gu
e
o
c
c
tf
n
da
e
n
m
a
e
,
r
s
u
t
s
s
a
o
e
P
h
dm
c
a
En
o
r
p
,Ap
ms
a
E
Be
d
e
t
s
e
N
r
o
tf
n
me
y
a
p
22"
**
Crash Wall (when
Barrier may be
constructed in
chords having
lengths 4 feet.
FOR USE WITH EITHER

1:10 OR 1:15
1:15
t
n
me
y
a
p
l
i
a
r PPB
fr
o
ko
c
tf
a
n
db
e
me
k
c
e
a
r
t
s
u
s
s
r
a
e
h
e
s
dm
m Wa
a
En
Be
"
7
'
7
Barrier
'
1
2
Gutter Line
GUARDRAIL TRANSITIONS
e
v
o
b
sa
me a
a
m,s
a
d Be
e
t
s
Ne
e
v
o
b
sa
me a
a
,s
n
o
i
t
c
n Se
o
i
t
i
s
n
a
Tr
STANDARD THRIE-BEAM
OFFSET BLOCK
l
a
n
o
i
t
i
d
d
oa
n
t(
n
me
y
a
lp
i
a
r
d
r
a
)
.
r Gu
s
o
e
i
r
tf
o
n
s
s
e
me
c
e
c
r
a
u
s
d
a
n
e
a
m
,
s
d
t
n
s
E
h Po
c
a
o
r
p
,Ap
ms
a
Be
d
E
e
t
s
e
N
r
o
tf
n
me
y
a
p
(FIELD TRIMMED)
D
FLARED END TREATMENT - PIER PROTECTION BARRIER WITH GUARDRAIL CONTINUATION

42" or 54" PPB
Crash Wall (when
3' Taper
45
Barrier
D
PLAN
Gutter Line
6'-8" (42" PPB)
14'-8" (54" PPB)
Construction Joint permitted
42" or 54" PPB
Extend 32" Concrete Barrier Wall & supporting footing horizontal

reinforcing 3' into 42" or 54" Pier Protection Barrier (Typ.)
1:
02:
33 PM
NOTE:
PPB = Pier Protection Barrier.
12/3/2015
ELEVATION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/06
REVISIO N
END TREATMENT - PIER PROTECTION BARRIER WITH CONCRETE BARRIER WALL CONTINUATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
411
SHEET
NO.
6 of 10
1'-1"
1'-1"
Thrie-Beam
Guardrail Bolts
4"
Bars 8S & 5B (Bottom)
D
Field Cut
of Bars 5V
# Bars 5V (Typ.)
Unless Otherwise Noted)
Rotate Transition
6"
Bars 5P as required
1'
-1 "
5P
Bars 8T2 &

5B (Bottom)
Field Bend Bar 5B

(Bottom) as required
Bars 5V @ 8" sp. (max.)
Barrier
Begin or
Gutter Line
End PPB
3 sp. @ 7"
5"
5"
1'
-6 "
Bar
125'R
1'
-6 "
125'R
Transition Bars 5P Field

Cut & Lap Splice (Typ.
End Bars 5V
1'
-1 "
# Bundle 1 set
Bars 8S
Barrier
Begin or
or 8T1
Gutter Line
End PPB
3"
1'-1"
6"
Bars 5P @ 8" sp. (max.)
= 1'-9"
3"
E
5'-0" (Tapered Toe)
5'-0" (Tapered Toe)
6'-8" (Top Transition) 42" Pier Protection Barrier (shown)
6'-8" (Top Transition) 42" Pier Protection Barrier (shown)
14'-8" (Top Transition) 54" Pier Protection Barrier (similar)
14'-8" (Top Transition) 54" Pier Protection Barrier (similar)
PLAN
PLAN
# Rotate Bars 5V as shown

to maintain clearance.
(Showing Bars 5V, 8S, 5B & 8T2)
(Showing Transition Bars 5P and Bars 8S & 8T1)
END TRANSITION AND TAPERED TOE DETAILS - PIER PROTECTION BARRIER WITH GUARDRAIL CONTINUATION
Begin Bars 5R
Begin or End PPB
Bars 5R @
8" sp. (max.)
9'-3"
6'-8" (42" Pier Protection Barrier) (shown)

NOTE:
placed with Bars 5P
14'-8" (54" Pier Protection Barrier) (similar)

Lap Bars 8T1 and 8T2
Bars 8T1
1'-1"
42" PPB (shown)
Barrier Wall continuation)
54" PPB (similar)
10"
as required
Bars 8T1
Bolts (omit with Concrete
Begin or End PPB
NOTES:
1.
See Sheet 9 for Footing Details.
2.
See Sheet 8 for Cross Sections.
ESTIMATED 42" PPB QUANTITIES

ITEM
Bars 8S
Concrete
2'
-8"
3'
-6" (
42" PPB) (
shown)
Bars 8S
4'
-6" (
54" PPB) (
sim ilar)
Bars 5P
1'
-10"
Field Bend Bars
min. Lap Splice).
to clear Bars 8T1

Bar 5R
E or F
with Bars 8S (4'-0"
Shift Bars 5P vertically
Bar 8T2
Bar 8T2
or 8S
or 8S
Bars
5V
UNIT
QUANTITY
CY/LF
0.141
LB/LF
33.10
Reinforcing Steel
(w/out Bars 5V)
ESTIMATED 54" PPB QUANTITIES

ITEM
Concrete
UNIT
QUANTITY
CY/LF
0.172
LB/LF
48.74
Reinforcing Steel
(w/out Bars 5V)
Transition Bars 5P
1:
02:
34 PM
Field Cut & Lap Splice
Omit Tapered Toe with Concrete

Barrier Wall Continuation
Bundle 1 set
of Bars 5V
Field cut
End Bars 5V
E or F
PARTIAL ELEVATION - 54" PPB DETAIL
ELEVATION - BARRIER END TRANSITION - 42" PPB (shown); 54" PPB (similar)
NOTE:
PPB = Pier Protection Barrier.
12/3/2015
(Guardrail and back leg of Stirrups not shown for clarity)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/06
REVISIO N
END TRANSITION DETAILS - PIER PROTECTION BARRIER WITH GUARDRAIL OR CONCRETE BARRIER WALL CONTINUATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
411
SHEET
NO.
7 of 10
7'-6"
6'-7"
As Reqd.
42" PPB T1 & T2
13'-0"
54" PPB T1 & T2
21'-0"
9'-2"
NOTES:
1.
See Sheet 9 for Footing Details.
2.
See Sheet 7 for bar spacings and details
joints. Lap splices for Bars 8S shall be a minimum of 4'-0".

3. The Contractor may utilize Welded Wire Reinforcement when
1'-6"
5"
approved by the Engineer. Welded Wire Reinforcement must

consist of Deformed wire meeting the requirements of
1'-6"
Specfication Section 931.

NOTE: PPB = Pier Protection Barrier
8"
Barrier
5"
3"
@ 8" Sp.
Bars 5P
@ 8" Sp.
7 "
4'
-6"
(Typ.)
Bars 8S
(Typ.)
7 "
(within Flared End Treatments)
Bars 8S
7 "
& Discard
2'
-8"
Field Cut
3'
-6"
Varies (
Field Cut to
# # Varies
'R
125
BARS 8S
m aintain cover, 10" m ax.

)
to maintain a 2'-0" min. lap.
Bars 5R
3" 3 "
3" 3 " 4 "
@ 8" Sp.
BARS 8S
3"
1'
-0"
Bars 5P
Length as Required
## Vary Field Cut from 7" to 1'-0"
10"
10"
Gutter Line
L
e
d
n
e
g
r
i
t
u
ha
q
s Re
8"
Barrier
Gutter Line
within End Transitions.
4 "
LENGTH
7 "
SIZE
1'
-0"
MARK
2'
-8"
2" Cl.
2" Cl.
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
"
2
'
6
Bars 8T2
Bars 5V
7"
3"
@ 8" Sp.
8"
= 5 for Bars 8T2
Bars 5V
@ 8" Sp.
3"
6'-2" (42" PPB)

14'-6" (54" PPB)
10
"R
8"
= 8 for Bars 8T1
7"
# # Varies
Bars 8T1
10
"R
4'-10"
TRANSITION STIRRUP BARS 5P

Shoulder
To Be Field Cut (10 of each
TRANSITION BARS 8T1 & 8T2
10"
Contractor's
3"
Const. Joint Required
Footing
or Fill (see Plans)
Fill (see Plans)
SECTION D-D
5
"
required per Railing End Transition)
Shoulder Pavement
Footing
Pavement or
SECTION D-D
TYPICAL SECTION THRU
42" PIER PROTECTION BARRIER
54" PIER PROTECTION BARRIER
option
6"
45
1'-6"
1'-1"
1
'
-5
"
6"
3"
Barrier
10"
5"
Thrie-Beam
2
"Cl
.
Otherwise Noted)
4"
2'
-8"
Bars 8S (Typ. Unless
2 "
1'
-10"
Transition Bars 5P
2 "
2'
-8"
Barrier
2"
4 "
4 "
4"
4'
-2"
2'
-4"
5430'
3'
-0"
11"
Bars 8T1
Bars 8T1
Guardrail Bolts
3'
-3"
7"
Gutter Line
Transition Bars 5P
Bars 5V
2
"Cl
.(
To
p
& Fr
o
n
t
)
Bars 8S (Typ. Unless

Otherwise Noted)
10
"R
(
Ty
p
.
)
Cl. varies to Bars
Gutter Line
5P & 5V back
Bars 5V
8"
to maintain cover
5"
STIRRUP BAR 5P
STIRRUP
BAR 5R
STIRRUP BAR 5V
Field Cut
3"
Bar 8T2
1'-2"
1:
02:
35 PM
Bars 5V
7"
Field cut End

Field Bend Bar 5V
6"
END STIRRUP BAR 5V

Shoulder
To Be Field Cut
(Two required per
Pavement or
or Fill (see Plans)
Footing
Fill (see Plans)
Barrier End Transition
12/3/2015
Shoulder Pavement
Footing
w/ Tapered Toe)
END VIEW E-E
END VIEW F-F
(with Tapered Toe)
(without Tapered Toe)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
BARRIER DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
411
SHEET
NO.
8 of 10
7'-0"
1'-6"
7'-0"
2'-8"
5'-5"
1'-6"
2'-8"
Barrier Gutter Line

Expanded Shoulder
Expanded Shoulder
Varies (6'-0" Min.)
2"
Bars 5V @ 8" sp.
Varies (3'-0" Min.)
Barrier Gutter Line

2"
Bars 5V @ 8" sp.
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
42" or 54" Pier Protection Barrier

Shoulder

Shoulder
Spacing
Pavement or
Pavement or
Bars 5B
Fill (see Plans)
Fill (see Plans)
Spacing Bars 5B
Slope
3"
Bars 5B (Typ.)
Bars 5U @ 6" sp.
Varies
10"
1'
-4"
Varies
10"
1'
-4"
3"
Slope
Bars 5B (Typ.)
Bars 5B (Typ.)
Bars 5B (Typ.)
See Plans for actual
1'
-0"
Utility, etc. if present.
1'
-0"
Drainage Structure,
locations and
configurations
3" Lip (See Note 1)
Spacing
Optional Const.
3" Cover (Bottom)
Bottom of Spread Footing
Joint (See Note 1)
2" Cover (Top & Sides)
(Level Transversely)
1'-9"
5 sp. @ 1'-0" = 5'-0"
Bars 5A @ 6" sp.
Spacing
3"
3"
3" Cover (Bottom)
Const. Joint
Permitted
2 sp. @ 1'-0" = 2'-0"
2'-6"
2 sp. @ 1'-0" = 2'-0"
3"
Bars 5B
Bars 5B
SECTION A-A TYPICAL SECTION THRU BACK CANTILEVER FOOTING
SECTION B-B TYPICAL SECTION THRU T FOOTING

7'-0"

5'-5"
1'-6"
Expanded Shoulder
MARK
SIZE
LENGTH
6'-8"
As Reqd.
14'-0"
Varies (2'-0" Min.)

Barrier Gutter Line
2. Lap splices for Bars 5B shall be a minimum of 2'-2".

3. The Contractor may use Welded Wire Reinforcement when
approved by the Engineer. Welded Wire Reinforcement
2"
must consist of Deformed wire meeting the requirements

of Specification Section 931.
(Typ.)
Bars 5V @ 8" sp.

Spacing
5A
Shoulder Pavement
6'-8"
6'-8"
Bars 5B
Slope
3"
BARS 5A & 5B
1'
-4"
10"
Length as Required
Varies
'R
125
Bars 5B (Typ.)
5B
7"
or Fill (see Plans)
L
e
d
n
e
g
r
i
t
u
ha
q
s Re
BARS U
For Bars 5V see

Bars 5B (Typ.)
Bars 5U @ 6" sp.
Bending Diagram
Sheet 8.
BARS 5B
1'
-0"
Drainage Structure,
(within Flared End Treatments)
Utility, etc. if present.

See Plans for actual
ESTIMATED BARRIER FOOTING QUANTITIES
locations and
configurations
ITEM
1:
02:
37 PM

3"
3" Cover (Bottom)

5 sp. @ 1'-0" = 5'-0"
Optional Const.
3" Lip (See Note 1)
Joint (See Note 1)
1'-9"
Spacing
Bars 5B
12/3/2015
SECTION C-C TYPICAL SECTION THRU FRONT CANTILEVER FOOTING
UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete
CY/LF
0.335
Reinforcing Steel (w/ Bars 5V) Cantilever Footing
LB/LF
64.32
Reinforcing Steel (w/ Bars 5V) T Footing
LB/LF
63.01
NOTES:
1. Provide 3" lip when optional construction joint is used. Omit 3" lip adjacent to Barrier Wall Inlets and
as required to provide 2" min. clear between Cantilever Footing and adjacent Pier Footing or Column.
2. See Sheets 7 & 8 for Barrier Details.
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
BARRIER FOOTING DETAILS

LAST
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
411
SHEET
NO.
9 of 10
Length as Required
7"
Field bend and shift Bars 5B

in Crash Wall Footing to lap
MARK
SIZE
LENGTH
As Reqd.
6'-4" / 7'-4"
6'-8"
Crash Wall Footing
2'-0" min. with Bars 5B in
4'-8"
11'-0"

2'-8"
1'
-0"
Barrier Footing
1. All bar dimensions in the bending

diagrams are out to out.
2. Lap splices for Bars 5B shall be a
5'-4"
42" PPB
6'-4"
54" PPB
1'
-0"
(type varies)
PPB
De
par
t
ur
eL
i
n
e
BARS U
BARS 5B
C
E
minimum of 2'-2".
3. The Contractor may use Welded Wire
Reinforcement when approved by the
Engineer. Welded Wire Reinforcement
BARS 5C
BARS 5E
must consist of Deformed wire meeting

the requirements of Specifciation Section
931.
o
r
5
4
P
"
la
C
n
r
s
a
s
f
h
o
r
W
le
a
ll
n
g
*
th
ESTIMATED CRASH WALL & FOOTING QUANTITIES

ITEM
& 5U in Footings as shown (Typ.)
QUANTITY
Concrete (Footing)
CY/LF
0.260
Concrete (42" Crash Wall)
CY/LF
0.389
Concrete (54" Crash Wall)
CY/LF
0.500
Reinforcing Steel (42" Crash Wall)
LB/LF
66.06
Reinforcing Steel (54" Crash Wall)
LB/LF
70.23
4
2
"
45
e
e
Field cut, rotate and shift Bars 5A
UNIT
NOTES:
1. Provide 3" lip when optional construction joint is used.
2.
See Sheet 8 for Barrier Details and Sheet 9 for Barrier Footing details.
32" Concrete Barrier Wall
3'-0"
4'-0"
4"
PLAN VIEW
7'-0"
(
54" PPB)
(
54" PPB)
Barrier Gutter Line
(
42" PPB)
to extend 2'-0" min. into PPB (Typ.)
(
42" PPB)
Field bend Bars 5B in Crash Wall
(Concrete Barrier Wall Continuation shown, Guardrail Continuation similar)
Bars 5E placed
Bars 5B
1:
02:
38 PM
Field trim Bars 5C

42" or 54" Crash Wall *
Protection Barrier
See Plans for length
and bend Bars 5B

locally as required
to maintain cover (Typ.)
VIEW G-G
Bars 5U @ 6" sp.
* Match height of adjacent
Bars 5B (Typ.)
1'
-0"
1'
-0"
Spacing
Slope of Shoulder
42" or 54" Pier
Bars 5B (Typ.)
3"
2'
-8"
2'
-8"
Match Cross
Bars 5C @ 1'-0" sp.
Construction
Joint permitted
1'
-4"
Slope of Shoulder
5 Sp. @
4'
-6" *
3'
-6" *
Match Cross
1'
-0"
3'-8"
(Typ.)
4 Sp. @
1'-8"
(54" Pier Protection Barrier)
2" Cover
1'
-10" (
54" PPB) (
Typ.
)
(42" Pier Protection Barrier)
10" (
42" PPB) (
Typ.
)
with Bars 5C
3" Lip (See Note 1)
Joint (See Note 1)
Spacing
3" Cover (Bottom)
Bottom of
2" Cover (Top & sides)
Spread Footing
2 Sp. @ 1'-0"
3 Sp. @ 1'-0"
3"
Bars 5B
SECTION H-H
NOTE:
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
CRASH WALL & FOOTING DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
411
SHEET
NO.
10 of 10
GENERAL NOTES
1. Pursuant to 35 United States Code, Chapter 18, also known as the Bayh Dole Act of 1980,
the non mountable curb was developed through federal funding. The 'Portable Temporary
Low Profile Barrier For Roadside Safety' is a licensed design by the University Of Florida.
Any infringement on the rights of the designer shall be the sole responsibility of the user.
2. This standard drawing (Index No. 412) is provided by the Florida Department Of
Transportation solely for use by the Department and its assignees. The purpose for this
standard drawing is to indicate the approval of use of the barrier on the State Highway
System; to provide sufficient pictorials for identifying the barrier unit; and, to provide
general installation geometry for the barrier.
3. This legally mandated relationship is unique to federally funded University patents that
Department contractors use on Contracts. Pursuant to federal law, the University may
pursue royalties for a valid patent. Only those barrier units cast by producers licensed
by the University Of Florida will be allowed for installation on the State Highway System
in Florida. Barrier wall units shall conform to Section 521 of the Standard Specification
and shall be produced in Department-approved plants with quality control plans for
precasting concrete barrier walls. Each barrier wall unit shall be permanently marked
with an identification that is traceable to the manufacturer, the producing precast
concrete plant and the date of production. This permanent identification mark will serve
as certification that the unit has been manufactured in accordance with University of
Florida drawings and specifications, and the approved quality control program.
4. The low profile barrier is to be installed only with hardware and accessories furnished by
the licensed barrier producer. Units shall be used for no purpose other than as
interconnected segments in a run of barrier. Low profile barrier wall units shall maintain
firm contact with adjoining units. Nuts on tensioning rods shall be installed snug tight.
5. The low profile barrier is applicable for work zone speeds of 45 mph or less.
6. If the plans specify Low Profile Barrier then substitution with other barrier types is not
permitted.
7. Tubular markers shall be orange in color and installed along the run of barrier at the
ends and at 50' centers on tangents and 25' centers on radii. The markers shall be fixed
to the top of the barrier by an adhesive or other method approved by the engineer.
Approach end units shall be marked with a Type I object marker. The cost of the tubular
markers and Type I object marker shall be included in the cost of the low profile barrier.
8. Information regarding licensing, shop drawings, specifications, quality control and
certification of compliance can be obtained from the University Of Florida: Office of
Technology Licensing, P.O. Box 115500, Gainesville, Florida, 32611-5500. Telephone:
352-392-8929, Fax: 352-392-6600. Reference UF#11052.
9. The Portable Temporary Low Profile Barrier For Roadside Safety shall be paid for under
the contract unit price for Barrier Wall (Temporary) Low Profile Concrete, LF, and will be
full compensation for furnishing, installing, maintaining and removing barrier wall.
10. Deflection space shall be kept clear of any grass, construction debris,
2"
stockpiled materials, equipment, and objects.
Un
i
t
Le
ng
t
h
"
ot
l
S
-7
2'
ge
a
n
i
ra
D
12
'
-0
"
1:
02:
38 PM
"
-8
4'
BACKSIDE AND END PICTORIAL VIEWS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
PORTABLE TEMPORARY LOW PROFILE BARRIER FOR ROADSIDE SAFETY
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
LOW PROFILE BARRIER
NO.
412
SHEET
NO.
1of 5
1'
-6"
Traffic Face
1'
-6"
2'-3"
Traffic Face
Traffic Face
1"
BEVELED FACE MALE END
FLAT FACE FEMALE END
CONCAVE CONNECTION
2'-3"
1"
Beveled Washer
END VIEWS
Traffic Face
WORK ZONE
SPEED
OFFSET TO
TRAVELWAY
DEFLECTION
SPACE
Clear Zone (CZ)
Edge Of Travel Way

45 MPH
OR LESS
1' MIN,
2' PREFERRED
Notes:
9"
1'-2'
LIMITATION OF USE: This installation technique

can only be used on flexible or rigid pavement.
*
B
Flexible or Rigid Pavement
* Minimum 9" on 1:10 or flatter slopes for

'Portable Temporary Low Profile Barrier
ASPHALT PAD: Where exisiting pavement is not

present, construct 2" Asphalt Pad using mi
scellaneous asphalt pavement in accordance with
Specification Section 339 with the exception that
the use of a pre-emergent herbicide is not
required. Payment for asphalt pad will be
included in the cost of the barrier.
Portable Temporary Low Profile

Barrier For Roadside Safety
For Roadside Safety.' For values A, B,
PARALLEL CONNECTION
D and X see Index No. 600.
DEFLECTION SPACE AT DROPOFFS
Varies
Traffic Face
Approach Traffic
6'Offset
Tangent Extension
Beveled Washer
Height To Bottom Of
Type 1 Object Marker
Is 18"
1:
02:
40 PM
CONVEX CONNECTION
PLAN VIEW OF APPROACH END OFFSET
12/3/2015
PLAN VIEWS OF CONNECTIONS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
LOW PROFILE BARRIER
NO.
412
SHEET
NO.
2 of 5
in)
(M
)
'
37
.
(67
'R
67
See Inset A
TRAFFIC SIDE
Inset A
66
'R
(M
in.
)
CONVEX CURVATURE
Inset B
TRAFFIC SIDE
See Inset B
1:
02:
40 PM
CONCAVE CURVATURE
MAXIMUM CURVATURE MINIMUM RADIUS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
LOW PROFILE BARRIER
NO.
412
SHEET
NO.
3 of 5
w+58' (Min.)
Approach Traffic
23'
'
6
6'
Edge Of Traveled Way
67'
R
6'
67'R
Work Area
Driveway
Work Area
Width (w)
w+62' (Min.)
Approach Traffic
31'
67'
R
10
'
R
7'-9"
Work Area
67'R
n.
Mi
6'
r.
ea
Cl
6'
Driveway
Work Area
Width (w)
w+70' (Min.)
Approach Traffic
35'
67'
R
Work Area
*
67'R
15
'R
11'-7"
n.
Mi
6'
r.
ea
Cl
6'
Driveway
Work Area
Width (w)
* Trailing End Flares Are Not Required When Barrier

Located Outside The Clear Zone Of Opposing Traffic
Type I Object Marker To Be Installed When Trailing End
1:
02:
42 PM
Flare Falls Within The Clear Zone Of Opposing Traffic
LEGEND
BARRIER OPENINGS AT DRIVEWAYS
12/3/2015
Type I Object Marker
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
LOW PROFILE BARRIER
NO.
412
SHEET
NO.
4 of 5
w+86' (Min.)
Approach Traffic
43'
6'
67'
R
Driveway
Width (w)
67'R
n.
Mi
6'
r.
ea
Cl
20'
Work Area
2
5
'
R
Work Area
w+130' (Min.)
Approach Traffic
65'
6'
67'
R
67'R
n.
Mi
6'
r.
ea
Cl
42'
Work Area
Driveway
Work Area
Width (w)
5
0
'
R
* Trailing End Flares Are Not Required When Barrier

Located Outside The Clear Zone Of Opposing Traffic
Type I Object Marker To Be Installed When Trailing End

Flare Falls Within The Clear Zone Of Opposing Traffic
LEGEND
1:
02:
43 PM
Type I Object Marker
12/3/2015
BARRIER OPENINGS AT DRIVEWAYS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
LOW PROFILE BARRIER
NO.
412
SHEET
NO.
5 of 5
The Type K Temporary Concrete Barrier System has been crash tested to NCHRP Report 350 TL-3 criteria
or structurally evaluated to meet the requirements of NCHRP Report 350 TL-3 criteria for the installation
configurations as shown utilizing the types, sizes, lengths, shapes, strengths and grades of the fabrication
and installation materials as shown.
In order to maintain crashworthiness of the system, do not substitute different grades, sizes, shapes or
types of reinforcing steel for those shown for constructing Type K Barrier Units. Also, do not substitute
different type, size, length or material grade anchor bolts, nuts, washers, adhesives, connector pins, stakes,
keeper pins, or guardrail components for installing Type K Barrier Units.
FABRICATION NOTES:
FABRICATOR PREQUALIFICATION: The Barrier Units shall be made in a prestressed concrete plant that meets the requirements of
Specification Section 450 or in a precast plant meeting the requirements of Specification Section 105.
CONCRETE: Concrete shall be Class IV in accordance with Specification Section 346. Specification Sections 346-10.2 through 346-10.4
are not applicable. Barrier Units represented by concrete acceptance strength tests which fall below 5000 psi will be rejected.
REINFORCING STEEL: All reinforcing steel shall be ASTM A 615, Grade 60 except for Bars 6D1, 6D2 and 6D3. Bars 6D1, 6D2 and 6D3
shall be ASTM A 706 except that a 2" diameter pin must be used for the 180 degree bend test. After fabrication, all or part
of Bars 6D shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with Specification Section 962 or coated with a cold galvanizing compound in
accordance with Specification Section 975. The minimum limit of galvanizing or coating is shown in the Bending Diagrams. At the
Fabricator's option, the entire length of Bars 6D may be galvanized or coated. Install Bars 6D within " of the plan dimensions.
Correct placement of Bars 6D is critical for proper fit up and performance of individual Barrier Units.
At the option of the Fabricator, Deformed Welded Wire Fabric in accordance with Specification Section 931 and the details shown on Sheet 2
may be utilized in lieu of Bars 4A and 5B.
All dimensions in the Bending Diagrams are out to out. All reinforcing steel shall have a 2" minimum cover except as noted.
LIFTING SLEEVE ASSEMBLY: Inclusion of the Lifting Sleeve Assemblies is optional. Steel for Pipe Sleeve shall be in accordance
with ASTM A 53.
Hot-dip galvanize the Lifting Sleeve Assemblies after their fabrication in accordance with the Specifications.
SURFACE FINISH: Construct Barrier Units in accordance with Specification Sections 400 and 521. Finish the top and sides
of the Barrier Units with a General Surface Finish. Finish the bottom of the Barrier Units to a dense uniform surface by
floating in lieu of the General Surface Finish. Use stationary metal forms or stationary timber forms with a form liner.
MARKING: Permanently mark the top left end of each Barrier Unit by the use of an embedded and anchored metallic plate with letters
and figures a minimum of 0.5" tall. Ink stamps are not allowed. Permanently mark with the following information:
- Type K1
- Fabricator's name or symbol
- Date of manufacture (day, month and year)
HANDLING: At no time shall the Barrier Units be lifted or moved by use of Bars 6D that extend from the ends of the units. Approximate
weight of one unit equals 2.7 tons.
Alternate Designs: Manufacturers/vendors seeking approval of proprietary Temporary Barrier Systems for inclusion on the Approved
Products List (APL) as alternative designs shall submit a Product Application package. The application package shall include
manufacturer's product drawings, specifications, installation manual, National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) Report 350
or Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH) Test Level 3 (TL-3) crash test documentation and the FHWA "Letter of Acceptance."
The posted APL drawings will need to include the following:
1. Anchorage, bolting, and staking details for connections to asphalt and concrete pavement.
1:
02:
43 PM
2. Sections and tables showing required deflection space and minimum offsets to above ground hazards or drop-offs.
3. Alignment and length of need details.
4. Transition and overlap details.
End treatment details.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
5.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER SYSTEM
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
1of 15
12'-6"
D
4'-3"
2'-0"
2" Lifting Sleeve Assembly
Bars 4E (Bend to
with
clear Bars 6D) (Typ.)

Bar 6C
1
2"
(Typ.)
Chamfer (Typ.)
Bar 6C
Bar 6C
Bar 4A2
D
4"
1
2"
Bars 4A1
1'
-10
Bars 4A1
11
1
4"
Bar 4A2
2" Hole
Anchor Blockout
3"
4'-3"
5"
2'-0"
ANCHOR BLOCKOUT DETAIL
1
4"
Bars 6D
11
Bars 6D
Bar 6C
Bars 5B
Bar 4A1
Bar 4A1
Bar 4A1
Bar 6C
Bar 4A1
Bar 6C
3"
PLAN VIEW
1
2"
10"
1
2"
1'-8
1'-8
2" Lifting Sleeve Assembly
Marked End
(see Note)
(Optional)
1
with 2"
Chamfer (Typ.)
1
2"
10"
1
2"
1'-8
Optional Spacing
1'-8
1'-1"
1'-3"
10"
1
2"
2 sp. @ 8
2" Spacing Bars 4A
1'-1"
Bars 4A (Typ.)
2" Hole
Bar 4A2 (Omit if

Bars 4A1
Optional Sp. used)
Bars 5B
clear Bars 6D)
shown for clarity)

Bar 6D2
(Typ.)
5
*3 8"
(Reinforcement not
Bars 4E (Bend to
1
8"
5
8"
*3
1'
-5"
1'
-5"
Bar 6D3
SECTION D-D
3"
1'
-0"
Bar 6D1
Bars 4A1
(
Typ.
)
5"
Bars 4A1
1
2"
Bar 4A2
2'
-8"
2 sp. @ 8
3'-3"
6"
1
2"
2"
6'-0"
4"
3'-3"
1
8"
Bar 6D2
Bar 6D3
Measured from end of Barrier Unit
6"
Bar 6D1
Bars 6C
3"
Anchor Blockout
(
Typ.
)
1
2"
3"
to outside edge of Bars 6D.
Bars 6C
Bars 6C
B
91
4"
(both sides) (Typ.)

3'-0"
2'-3" (Lift/Drain Slot)
2'-0"
2'-3" (Lift/Drain Slot)
3'-0"
2
1
4
ELEVATION VIEW
21
4"
3
4"
Side
ESTIMATED TEMPORARY
4"
CONCRETE BARRIER QUANTITIES
3"
Slot
1" Top
Cham fer
ITEM
1:
02:
44 PM
4E
43
Chamfer
12/3/2015
s
ar
B
ve
ee
l
)
S
PS
pe "N
Pi (
2
UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete
CY
1.29
Reinforcing Steel
LB
218
Cross References:
For Section A-A, Section B-B and
LIFTING SLEEVE
Section C-C see Sheet 3.
ASSEMBLY DETAIL (OPTIONAL)

The above quantities are for one Barrier Unit.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
SECTION THRU LIFT/DRAIN SLOT
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
2 of 15
ALTERNATE REINFORCING STEEL DETAIL
1
2"
1'-10

5"
NUMBER
1
4"
8"
5"
10
6'-1"
A2
5'-5"
12'-3" (Straight)
3'-1"
D1
8'-4"
D2
7'-6"
A1
1
2"
vertical bar)
D 15.5
1'
-9"
6"
1130'
D3
8'-6"
2'-0"
2" Pin
(Typ.) all
2 ~ No. 5 Bars
Bars 6D (Typ.)
(Marked end shown)
Bars 5B
1'-4"
6"
2'-9"
6"
6D2
1
2"
1
2"
Pin
8"
1'-4"
6D3
3"
2'-10
1
2"
slots (Conventional Steel),
3
4"
Bars 4A1
6D1
7"
1
2"
3
4"
2'-9
No. 4 Drain Bar over drain
10
"R
8"
55
(Typ.)
r
e
3
v
1 4"Co
s
e
d
i
)s
.
n
Mi
(
(Typ.)
Bends
(Conventional Steel)
placed with D 17.2
1'
-10"
(Typ.)
(CONVENTIONAL STEEL)
7"
DRAIN SLOTS
8"
5
8"
NO. 4 DRAIN BAR OVER
Pin
NOTES:
Provide
BAR 6C
Reinforcement cage as shown.
TOP VIEW
D 17.2 spacing shall match spacings for Bars 4A shown in Elevation
of Barrier.
1
2"
1'-10
134"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
Pin
1130'
2" Lifting Sleeve

Assembly with
55
3"
1
4"
2" Pin
7"
except over drain slots
NOTES:
Chamfer
(Conventional Steel),
1
2"
r
e
3
v
1 4"Co
s
e
d
i
)s
.
n
Mi
(
1
2"
No. 4 Typical Bar
placed with D 19.7

D 6.3 (2 required)
(Typ.)
8"
1
4"
No. 4 Drain Bar over drain
placed with D 19.7
Bars 5B
2" Cover
1130'
slots (Conventional Steel),
(see Detail)
10
"R
1'
-9"
Pin
1'
-9"
212"
1
4"
1
2"
(Conventional Steel)
(Typ.)
Bars 4E
Bar 4A2
7"
1130'
5
8"
1
2"
1'
-2
1
2"
1'
-10"
1
2"
2'
-8"
412"
3
-2"
2'
10"
1
2"
Pin
2 ~ No. 5 Bars
1'
-0"
612"
BARS 6D1, 6D2 & 6D3
D 15.5
NO. 4 TYPICAL BAR
Cover top
7
8"
D 19.7
4"
1'-4"
5"
SIDE VIEW
(Typ.)
1
4"
bottom
DRAIN SLOTS
Pin
8"
2" M in.
1
2"
NO. 4 DRAIN BAR OVER
1
4"
BAR 4E
5"
1'
-4" (
6D3)
1
4"
1'
-0" (
6D2)
1'
-4" (
6D1)
7"
.)
p
y
(T
90
1'-0"
55
SECTION A-A (SHOWN)
8" Min. (Limit of Galvanizing)
"
0
'1
55
1
4"
11
(SECTION B-B SIMILAR)
CONFIGURATION ONE
(Typ.)
1
4"
11
Chamfer at
top and bottom corners
BARS 6D1, 6D2 & 6D3
View, Sheet 2. Field trim D 17.2 to clear drain slots by 2".
3
4"
2" M in.
NOTE:
Place 2 ~ No. 5 Bars (12'-3" long) in bottom of Welded Wire
Cover bottom
1
2"
5
8"
1
2"
1'
-2
1
2"
2'
-8"
D 17.2 (Typ.
1'-0"
55
2" Pin
1:
02:
45 PM
1
4"
LENGTH
2" M in.
7"
55
(Typ.)
SIZE
7
8"
MARK
Cover top
1
2"
Cover - Bars 6C
Bars 6C
Place 2 ~ No. 5 Bars (12'-3" long) tied to D 19.7 inside of bottom Welded Wire
Reinforcement cage as shown.
6"
6"
1
5 2"
1
5 2"
12/3/2015
Field trim D 19.7 to clear drain slots by 2".
STIRRUP BAR 4A1
07/01/14
REVISIO N
LAST
STIRRUP BAR 4A2
SECTION C-C
(Bars 6D not shown for clarity)
CONFIGURATION TWO
REVISION
Anchor Blockout
(see Detail)
D 19.7 spacing shall match spacings for Bars 4A shown in Elevation View,
Sheet 2.
to 2" Holes (Typ.)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
3 of 15
NOTES FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS:
See Connection Pin Installation Note
1.
Connection Pin
LIMITATION OF USE: This Temporary Concrete Barrier System is intended for work zone traffic control and other temporary applications. It shall not be
used for permanent traffic railing construction unless specifically permitted by the Plans. Except as shown for the Back Filled Roadway Installations, the
Barrier Unit
Unmarked End
Marked End
Barrier Units must be installed on a flexible pavement (asphalt) or rigid pavement (concrete) surface as shown with a cross slope of 1:10 or flatter. Except
Barrier Unit
as shown for transition installations, Type K Barrier Units are not intended to be bolted down or staked down in locations where they can be impacted from
the back side.
2.
HANDLING: At no time shall the Barrier Units be lifted or moved by use of Bars 6D that extend from the ends of the units. Approximate weight of one unit
equals 2.7 tons.
3.
SURFACE PREPARATION: Except as shown for the Back Filled Roadway Installations, remove all grass, debris, loose dirt and sand from the pavement, bridge
deck or Asphalt Pad surface within the barrier footprint just prior to placement of the Barrier Units.
4.
OFFSET TO TRAVELWAY: Offset shall meet requirements as shown on sheet 1 of Index 415.
5.
CONNECTION PIN ASSEMBLY: Steel for Connection Pin and Top Plate assemblies shall be in accordance with ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36.
Nondestructive testing of welds shall not be required. At the Contractor's option, a " diameter hole may be provided at the bottom of the Connection Pin, as
Bars 6D (Typ.)
shown, for the installation of a vandal resistance bolt.

6.
CONNECTION PIN INSTALLATION: Initially set Barrier Units by using a 3" wooden block between ends of adjacent units. Install Connection Pin between
adjacent Barrier Units as shown, then pull newly placed Barrier Unit away from adjacent Barrier Unit to remove slack between Connection Pin and Bars 6D
(except as shown on Sheet 5). Barrier Units shall not be used unconnected.
7.
DELINEATION: Mount Barrier Delineators on top of Barrier Units that are used as traffic barriers along travel ways in work zones. Space the Barrier
Delineators at 50' centers in alignment transitions, 100' centers on horizontal curves and 200' centers on tangent alignments.
8.
MAINTENANCE: Deflection space shall be kept clear of any grass, construction debris, stockpiled materials, equipment, and objects.
9.
REUSE OF CONNECTION PINS: Connection pins may be reused if they have the structural integrity of new pins.
10. INSTALLATIONS ON CURVED ALIGNMENTS: The details presented in these Standards are shown for installations on tangent alignments. Details for
horizontally curved alignments are similar.
Top of Bridge Deck or
11. TRANSITIONS: Transitions are required between freestanding, bolted down, staked down and back filled Type K Barrier installations, see Sheet 8 for
Roadway Surface
transition requirements and details. Transitions are also required between installations of Type K Barrier and other types of temporary barrier, see Index
No. 415 for transition requirements and details. Splices and transitions are required between installations of Type K Barrier and permanent Bridge or
Roadway Traffic Railings, see Sheets 9 through 13 for transition requirements and details. Transitions are required between installations of Type K Barrier
DETAIL OF CONNECTION BETWEEN BARRIER UNITS
and Proprietary (APL) Barrier Systems, See Sheets 14 and 15 for transition requirements and details.
12. PAYMENT: Barrier Units for work zone traffic control and other temporary applications shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Barrier Wall
(Temporary) (F&I) (Type K), LF. Any relocation of the Barrier Units required for the project shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Barrier Wall
(Temporary) (Relocate) (Type K), LF. The Contractor shall furnish Barrier Units except when the Plans stipulate the availability of Department owned units.
Regardless of unit source the Contractor shall furnish all hardware and shall be responsible for all handling including loading, transport, unloading,
stockpiling, installation, removal and return. Unless otherwise noted on the Plans, the Barrier Units shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
removed from the site prior to acceptance of the completed project.
NOTES FOR THRIE BEAM GUARDRAIL SPLICE INSTALLATIONS:
1.
2 "
2"
THRIE-BEAM GUARDRAIL: Provide Thrie-Beam Guardrail for splices in accordance with AASHTO M 180, Type II (Zinc coated) and as follows:
Two panels per splice (One panel per side) of Class B (10 Gauge), or
Four panels per splice (Two nested panels per side) of Class A (12 Gauge).
Guardrail panel length shall be 12'-6". Provide and install all other associated metallic guardrail components (Terminal Connectors, Shoulder Bolts, Hex Bolts
and Nuts, Filler Plates, etc.) in accordance with Index No. 400.
4"
Top Plate
Install five Guardrail Anchor Bolts at each end of each splice in any of the standard seven anchor bolt holes in the Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector.
(See Detail)
If reinforcing steel is encountered when drilling holes for Guardrail Anchor Bolts in Type K Barrier Units, shift Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector so as to
clear reinforcing steel within the given tolerances or select a different bolt hole to use. Do not drill or cut through reinforcing steel within Type K Barrier
2 "
2'
-4"
1"
Units. Drilling or cutting through reinforcing steel within permanent concrete traffic railings is permitted. Do not drill or cut through utilities or conduits
within permanent concrete traffic railings.
"
" hole for
1" hole
2.
GUARDRAIL OFFSET BLOCKS: Provide and install timber Offset Blocks meeting the material requirements of Index No. 400. Field trim Offset Blocks as
required for proper fit. Utilize Offset Blocks as shown and required in order to prevent bending or kinking of Thrie-Beam Guardrail panels.
(Centered)
3.
Retainer Bolt (at
CONCRETE FOR FILLING TAPERED TRAFFIC RAILING TOES: Provide concrete for filling tapered toes of Traffic Railings as shown meeting the material
requirements of Specification Section 346, any Class, or a commercially available prebagged concrete mix (3000 psi minimum compressive strength). Sampling,
Contractor's option)
1"
TOP PLATE
DETAIL
testing, evaluation and certification of the concrete in accordance with Specification Section 346 is not required. Saturate with water the surfaces upon and
against which the concrete fill will be placed prior to placing concrete. Place and finish concrete fill using forms or by hand methods to the general
configurations shown so as to provide a smooth shape transition between the Type K Barrier and the adjacent traffic railing.
A low slump is desirable if
placing and finishing concrete by hand methods. Cure the concrete fill by application of a curing compound, or by covering with a wet tarp or burlap for a
minimum of 24 hours. Completely remove the concrete fill upon relocation or removal of the Type K Temporary Concrete Barrier.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:
02:
46 PM
CONNECTION PIN DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
4 of 15
2'-0"
** Wrap threads with a single
Traffic Side for
Median Traffic
TRAFFIC
Railings, see
SIDE
Sheet 9
Barrier Unit
Heavy Hex Nut & 3" Sq. Top Plate

Washer on Top and 2 ~ Heavy Hex
Nuts with 4" Sq. Bottom Plate
Washer on Bottom
3" Min.
Edge of Above
Asphalt Overlay
Ground Hazard
Nominal
Asphalt Overlay
Drop-off
if present
of anchors.
1" Adhesive-Bonded
Anchor with Heavy Hex Nut &
3" Sq. Top Plate Washer
Asphalt Overlay
7" Min. **
PTFE
Embedment
Tape
7" Min. **
Embedment
See PTFE Taping Detail

See PTFE Taping Detail
Bridge Deck, Approach

Slab or Rigid Pavement
Supplemental Bottom Plate

Washer also required if
Bridge Deck, Approach Slab or
Bridge
(See Removal of
PTFE
Deck
Unit
tape to facilitate removal
Tape H eight
Bolt Detail
if present
7" M in. Thread
See Anchor
1"
Barrier
Barrier Unit
overlapping layer of PTFE
Overlap Tape W idth
Barrier Unit
1" Through Bolted Anchor with
PTFE Tape W idth
Transition to
Roadway Rigid Pavement
Anchor Bolt Note)

SIP Metal Forms present
TYPICAL SECTION (BRIDGE DECK SHOWN, APPROACH SLAB

OR RIGID PAVEMENT SIMILAR; INSTALLATION ADJACENT TO
WITHOUT ASPHALT
TAPING DETAIL
WITH ASPHALT
OVERLAY
THROUGH BOLTED ANCHOR
OVERLAY
INSTALLATION ON BRIDGE DECK
ADHESIVE BONDED ANCHOR INSTALLATION ON
DROP-OFF SHOWN, MEDIAN TRANSITION INSTALLATION SIMILAR)
BRIDGE DECK, APPROACH SLAB OR RIGID PAVEMENT

Dimension as required
NOTES FOR BOLTED DOWN BRIDGE, APPROACH SLAB, ROADWAY AND TRANSITION INSTALLATIONS:
to span SIP Metal Form

LIMITATION OF USE: This installation technique can only be used on rigid pavement and concrete bridge decks as shown. Barrier Units
shall not be bolted down on bridge superstructures that contain post-tensioned tendons within the concrete deck (top flange of concrete
Corrugations plus " Min.

overlap each side
3"
4"
box girders) or on bridge superstructures consisting of longitudinally prestressed, transversely post-tensioned, solid or voided concrete
slab units. Anchor Bolts must not be installed on both sides of the Barrier Units. Do not bolt down Barrier Units across bridge finger
or modular expansion joints.
4 "
3 "
ANCHOR BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS: Adhesive-Bonded Anchor Bolts shall be fully threaded rods in accordance with ASTM F 1554 Grade
36. Anchor Bolts for through bolting shall be in accordance with ASTM A 307 or ASTM F 1554 Grade 36. Nuts shall be in accordance
with ASTM A 563 or ASTM A 194. Flat Washers shall be in accordance with ASTM F 436 and Plate Washers shall be in accordance with
ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 709 Grade 36.
"
Install three (3) Anchor Bolts per Barrier Unit on the traffic side of the Barrier Units as shown, except for Transition Installations.
For the number and positions of Anchor Bolts required in Transition Installations see Sheets 8 and 9 and Index No. 415. Drilling through
"
1" hole
otherwise damage the tops of supporting beams or girders, bridge deck expansion joints or drains. Install Anchor Bolts and Nuts so that
the maximum extension beyond the face of the Barrier Units is ". Snug tighten the Nuts on the Anchor Bolts. For through bolted
(Centered)
(Centered)
SUPPLEMENTAL BOTTOM
BOTTOM PLATE
TOP PLATE
PLATE WASHER DETAIL
WASHER DETAIL
WASHER DETAIL
installations, snug tighten the double Nuts on the underside of the deck against each other to minimize the potential for loosening.
Omit one (1) Anchor Bolt within a single Barrier Unit if a conflict exists between the Anchor Bolt location and a bridge deck expansion
1" hole
1" hole
(Centered)
deck reinforcing steel to install Anchor Bolts is permitted. Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, at the Contractor's option Barrier Units
may be installed by through bolting (where geometrically possible) or by the use of Adhesive-Bonded Anchor Bolts. Do not drill into or
"
3" *
3" *
Omit this Anchor Bolt adjacent
Barrier Units
joint or drain. The adjacent Barrier Units must each be installed with the standard three (3) Anchor Bolts.
to Expansion Joint
Anchor Bolts (Typ.)
Omit one (1) Anchor Bolt within a single Barrier Unit as shown in the Treatment at Bridge Deck Expansion Joint Schematic if the Barrier
(Through Bolted shown,
Unit straddles a bridge deck expansion joint. The adjacent Barrier Units must each be installed with the standard three (3) Anchor Bolts.
Adhesive-Bonded similar)
ADHESIVE-BONDING MATERIAL SYSTEMS: Adhesive Bonding Material Systems for Anchor Bolts shall be Type HSHV in accordance with
Specification Section 937 and shall be installed in accordance with Specification Section 416. Prior to installation of the Barrier Units in
the Plan location(s), install a demonstration Barrier Unit using the proposed production installation method, at a location approved by the
Engineer. In lieu of the production test requirements of Specification Section 416-6, install six (6) Adhesive-Bonded Anchor Bolts in the
demonstration Barrier Unit and test each Anchor Bolt with a 29,800 pound tensile proof load. Install and test additional demonstration
Barrier Units when requested by the Engineer. Remove the demonstration Barrier Unit prior to testing the Anchor Bolts. Remove the
Bridge Deck or
test Anchor Bolts after testing as directed by the Engineer.
Approach Slab
1:
02:
47 PM
REMOVAL OF ANCHOR BOLTS: Upon removal or relocation of Barrier Units, remove all Anchor Bolts and completely fill the remaining holes
in bridge decks, approach slabs and roadway rigid pavements that are to remain with Magnesium Ammonium Phosphate Concrete in
Bridge Deck Expansion Joint

* To accommodate movement at Expansion Joint, set
Barrier Units with 3" gap at locations shown.
accordance with Specification Section 930 or with an Epoxy Resin Compound, Type F or Q, in accordance with Specification Section 926.
If a flexible pavement overlay is present and is to remain, completely fill the remaining holes in the flexible pavement with hot or cold
TREATMENT AT BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINT SCHEMATIC
12/3/2015
patch asphalt material.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
BOLTED DOWN BRIDGE, APPROACH SLAB, ROADWAY AND TRANSITION INSTALLATIONS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
5 of 15
Threaded Stake Head

Traffic Side for
TRAFFIC
NOTES FOR STAKED DOWN ROADWAY AND TRANSITION INSTALLATIONS:
for Extraction
Transition to
Device by others
LIMITATION OF USE: This installation technique can only be used on flexible pavement or an Asphalt Pad as shown.
Median Traffic
Railings, see
()
Sheet 9
Stakes must not be installed on both sides of the Barrier Units.
1 "
SIDE
ASPHALT PAD: Where existing flexible pavement is not present, construct the Asphalt Pad using Miscellaneous Asphalt
Barrier Unit
Pavement in accordance with Specification Section 339 with the exception that the use of a pre-emergent herbicide is not
Edge of Flexible
Pavement or
Asphalt Pad
Flexible
1'-0"
Pavement or
Min.
OPTIONAL STAKE
STAKES: Provide steel for Stake assemblies in accordance with ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 709 Grade 36. All welding shall be
in accordance with the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code (Steel) ANSI/AWS D1.1 (current edition). Weld
EXTRACTION DETAIL
metal shall be E60XX or E70XX. Nondestructive testing of welds is not required.
or Hazard
3"
Stop
Install three (3) Stakes on the traffic side of the Barrier Units as shown, except for Transition Installations. For the
Plate
number and positions of stakes required in Transition Installations see Sheets 4, 5 and 6 and Index No. 415. Install
Stakes so that the Stop Plate is snug against the bottom of the Anchor Blockout.
1"
3'
-4"
M in.
BURIED UTILITIES: Prior to installation of Stakes verify locations of all adjacent buried utilities, drainage structures,
3 "
2"
Drop-off
Asphalt Pad
required. Payment for the asphalt pad will be included in the cost of the barrier.
Extraction Detail
1 "
Stake
See Optional Stake
3"
pipes, etc. If conflicts between Stake locations and buried elements exist, a maximum of two (2) Stakes within a single
Barrier Unit may be omitted if the adjacent Barrier Units are installed with the standard three (3) Stakes.
Grind bottom
REMOVAL OF STAKES: Upon removal or relocation of Barrier Units, completely remove all Stakes and completely fill the
1" to a point
TYPICAL SECTION (INSTALLATION
remaining holes in flexible pavement that is to remain with hot or cold patch asphalt material.
"
ADJACENT TO DROP-OFF SHOWN, MEDIAN

TRANSITION INSTALLATION SIMILAR)
1" hole
(Centered)
STAKE DETAIL
REUSE OF STAKES: Stakes may be reused if they have the structural integrity of new stakes.
STOP PLATE DETAIL
STAKED DOWN ROADWAY AND TRANSITION INSTALLATIONS
Edge of Above Ground Hazard or Obstruction
Limits of Flexible Pavement or

Rigid Pavement or Asphalt Pad
TRAFFIC
SIDE
Barrier Unit
TRAFFIC
2'-0" Minimum
SIDE
Work Zone Speed

45 MPH or Less
Keeper Pin,
4'-0" Minimum
" Steel Bar,
Barrier Unit
4'-0" Minimum
Work Zone Speed
Drop-off
2" (
M ax.
)
1" (
M in.
)
6" Min. Length
50 MPH and Greater

or Hazard
2'-0" Min. - Work Zone Speed 45 MPH or less
Flexible or Rigid
2'-0" Min. - Work Zone Speed 50 MPH
Pavement, or
and greater with drop-off
Asphalt Pad
Drop-off
with Work Zone Speed 50 MPH
M in.
Bridge Deck or
2"
(if present)
" Hole
4'-0" and no traffic below

4'-0" Min. - All other drop-off conditions
Asphalt Overlay
and greater
Approach Slab
TYPICAL SECTION (BRIDGE DECK SHOWN,

APPROACH SLAB SIMILAR)
NOTES FOR FREE STANDING BRIDGE OR APPROACH SLAB INSTALLATIONS:
TYPICAL SECTION
KEEPER PINS: Keeper Pins shall be " diameter, smooth steel bar in accordance with ASTM A 36 or ASTM A 709 Grade 36. As directed
by the Engineer in order to limit vibration induced translation of the Barrier Units, install one (1) Keeper Pin per Barrier Unit on the
NOTES FOR FREE STANDING ROADWAY INSTALLATION:
traffic side of the Barrier Units as shown. Do not drill into or otherwise damage bridge deck expansion joints or drains.
LIMITATION OF USE: This installation technique can only be used on flexible or rigid pavement or on an Asphalt Pad as shown.
in bridge decks and approach slabs that are to remain with Magnesium Ammonium Phosphate Concrete in accordance with Specification
ASPHALT PAD: Where existing pavement is not present, construct the Asphalt Pad using Miscellaneous Asphalt Pavement in
Section 930 or with an Epoxy Resin Compound, Type F or Q, in accordance with Specification Section 926. If a flexible pavement
accordance with Specification Section 339 with the exception that the use of a pre-emergent herbicide is not required. Payment
overlay is present and is to remain, completely fill the remaining holes in the flexible pavement with hot or cold patch asphalt material.
will be included in the cost of the barrier.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
FREESTANDING BRIDGE OR APPROACH SLAB INSTALLATIONS
12/3/2015
1:
02:
48 PM
REMOVAL OF KEEPER PINS: Upon removal or relocation of Barrier Units, remove all Keeper Pins and completely fill the remaining holes
FREESTANDING ROADWAY INSTALLATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
6 of 15
TRAFFIC ON BOTH SIDES
Work Zone Speed

45 MPH or Less
Barrier Unit
1-0" Min.,
1-0" Min.,
2'-0" Preferred
2'-0" Preferred
Work Zone Speed

Retaining Wall Face
45 MPH or Less
Bond Breaker
Edge of
Edge of
Travel Way
Work Zone Speed

50 MPH and Greater
Flowable Fill
Travel Way
2'-0" Mini.
2'-0" Mini.
4'-0" preferred
4'-0" preferred
NOTES FOR FLOWABLE FILL BACK
Bond Breaker
FILLED ROADWAY INSTALLATIONS:
Work Zone Speed

FLOWABLE FILL: Provide Flowable Fill in
50 MPH and Greater
accordance with Specification Section 121.

Asphalt Overlay
Barrier Unit
TRAFFIC SIDE
if present
2" Min.
For Roadway
Flexible or
Keeper Pin,
2" (
M ax.
)
1" (
M in.
)
Rigid Pavement
1
2"
Steel
Bar, 6" Min. Length

3
4"
Hole
Bridge Deck or
Flexible or Rigid
Approach Slab
Pavement, or Asphalt Pad
TYPICAL SECTION
NOTES FOR FREESTANDING MEDIAN INSTALLATION:
KEEPER PINS: Required for Bridge Decks only, Keeper Pins shall be
1
2"
diameter, smooth steel bar in accordance with ASTM A 36 or
ASTM A 709 Grade 36. As directed by the Engineer in order to limit vibration induced translation of the Barrier Units, install one (1)
Keeper Pin per Barrier Unit as shown. Alternate Keeper Pin locations from side to side of Barrier Units along the length of the
installation. Do not drill into or otherwise damage bridge deck expansion joints or drains. Upon removal or relocation of Barrier Units,
TYPICAL SECTION
remove all Keeper Pins and completely fill the remaining holes in bridge decks and approach slabs that are to remain with Magnesium
3"
ADJACENT TO RETAINING WALL
Ammonium Phosphate Concrete in accordance with Specification Section 930 or with an Epoxy Resin Compound, Type F or Q, in
accordance with Specification Section 926. If a flexible pavement overlay is present and is to remain, completely fill the remaining
Min.
WITH FLOWABLE FILL BACK FILL
holes in the flexible pavement with hot or cold patch asphalt material.
ASPHALT PAD: Where existing pavement is not present, construct the Asphalt Pad using Miscellaneous Asphalt Pavement in accordance
with Specification Section 339 with the exception that the use of a pre-emergent herbicide is not required. No separate payment will
be made for the Asphalt Pad.
FREESTANDING MEDIAN INSTALLATION
FLOWABLE FILL BACK FILL ROADWAY INSTALLATIONS
(BRIDGE DECK SHOWN, APPROACH SLAB, ASPHALT PAD, FLEXIBLE OR RIGID PAVEMENT SIMILAR)
Retaining Wall Face
5'-0" Min.
Geotextile Fabric
Geotextile Fabric
Soil Back Fill
Soil Back Fill
2 (Min.)
Barrier Unit
Barrier Unit
TRAFFIC SIDE
2'
-8" M in.
TRAFFIC SIDE
NOTES FOR SOIL BACK FILLED ROADWAY INSTALLATIONS:
SOIL BACK FILL MATERIAL: Provide Back Fill Material consisting of

any available clean soil. Compact Back Fill Material until the soil
Flexible or
Rigid Pavement,
or Asphalt Pad
Flexible or
mass is firm and unyielding. Provide erosion control as specified in
Rigid Pavement,
the Plans. If none is specified in the Plans, provide erosion control
or Asphalt Pad
as required to maintain the integrity of the Back Fill embankment.
GEOTEXTILE FABRIC: Provide Type D-5 Geotextile Fabric in

accordance with Specification Section 985 to contain Back Fill
Material behind Barrier Units. Geotextile Fabric may be continuous
over the length and height of the installation or may be individual
1:
02:
49 PM
pieces as required to cover the Lift / Drain Slots and open vertical
joints between Barrier Units.
1'-0"
TYPICAL SECTION
12/3/2015
TYPICAL SECTION
Minimum
6"
ADJACENT TO RETAINING WALL
Typ.
With Temporary MSE Wall Systems
WITH SOIL BACK FILL
Minimum
WITH SOIL BACK FILL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SOIL BACK FILLED ROADWAY INSTALLATIONS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
7 of 15
*
Edge of Travel Way
1
2"
First full Barrier Unit before Drop-off or

Type K Barrier Units (Typ.)
Bolted - 1
Hazard shielded by Bolted or Staked Units
Nominal
Staked - 1'-0" Min.
See Sheet 6 for dimensions
Drop-off or Hazard
Freestanding Units (13 Units Min.)
Transition Units (4 Units)
Bolted or Staked Units
Transition Units (4 Units) *
Freestanding Units (13 Units Min.) *
APPROACH TRANSITION FROM FREESTANDING TO BOLTED OR STAKED DOWN TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS
* NOTE:
Where Barrier is located within
Clear Zone of opposing traffic,

Approach Transition is required.
Edge of Travel Way
First full Barrier Unit before Back Filled Units
Back Fill
Drop-off or Hazard
Back Filled Units
Transition Units (4 Units) *
Freestanding Units (13 Units Min.) *
APPROACH TRANSITION FROM FREESTANDING TO BACK FILLED TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS
Edge of Travel Way
LEGEND:
Dot indicates number and
position of Bolts or Stakes
First full Barrier Unit after Drop-off or Hazard

shielded by Bolted or Staked Units

1
2"
Bolted - 1
Nominal
Staked - 1'-0" Min.
Drop-off or Hazard
Freestanding Units
TRAILING END TRANSITION FROM BOLTED OR STAKED DOWN TO FREESTANDING TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS
Edge of Travel Way
1:
02:
50 PM
Back Fill
Drop-off or Hazard
Back Filled Units
Freestanding Units
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TRAILING END TRANSITION FROM BACK FILLED TO FREESTANDING TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
8 of 15
Edge of Travel Way
Thrie-Beam Guardrail Splice (Typ.)
See Approach Transition Splice

Details Sheets 10 & 13
Bridge Median Traffic Railing (32" F Shape or

New Jersey Shape) or Roadway Concrete Median
Barrier Wall (32" F Shape or New Jersey Shape)

Details Sheets 10, 12 & 13
Edge of Travel Way
TRANSITION FROM FREESTANDING TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS TO BRIDGE MEDIAN TRAFFIC RAILING OR ROADWAY MEDIAN CONCRETE BARRIER WALL
* NOTE:
Where barrier is located within
clear zone of opposing traffic,

approach transition is required.
Edge of Travel Way

* See Trailing End Splice
Details Sheets 11 thru 13
Drop-off or Hazard
Bridge Traffic Railing or
* Freestanding Units (13 Units Min.)
Roadway Concrete Barrier Wall
TRANSITION FROM FREESTANDING TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS TO BRIDGE TRAFFIC RAILING OR ROADWAY CONCRETE BARRIER WALL
Edge of Travel Way
Bolted - 1" Nominal

Staked - 1'-0" Min.

* See Trailing End Splice

Details Sheets 11 thru 13
Drop-off or Hazard
1:
02:
50 PM
TRANSITION FROM BOLTED OR STAKED DOWN TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS TO BRIDGE TRAFFIC RAILING OR ROADWAY CONCRETE BARRIER WALL
LEGEND:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
9 of 15
32" F or New Jersey Shape
Bolted or Staked Down Type K Barrier Units
Median Traffic Railing
32" Florida Corral Traffic Railing (shown),
32" & 42" Vertical Shape Traffic Railings (similar)
Align of Type K Barrier Unit with 32" F or
1'-0"
New Jersey Shape Median Traffic Railing
* Thrie-Beam Guardrail Splice

Offset Block
Anchor Bolts
or Stakes
Fill tapered toe if present (shown hatched)
bolted to guardrail
Anchor Bolts
Offset Block
or Stakes
with concrete, see Note on Sheet 4
Align Top of Type K Barrier Unit

with Traffic Railing at its end
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW AT MEDIAN TRAFFIC RAILING

PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
Cross References:
See Sheet 13 for Section A-A,
Cross References:
Section B-B and Section C-C.
32" F Shape Traffic Railing (shown);
32" New Jersey Shape and 42" F Shape

Traffic Railings and 8' or 14' Traffic
32" Florida Corral Traffic Railing
Railing / Noise Walls (similar)

Offset Block
bolted to guardrail
Offset Block
Anchor Bolts
or Stakes
Paved Surface
Align Top of Type K Barrier Unit with Traffic Railing at its end
Anchor Bolts or Stakes (shown);
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW AT SHOULDER TRAFFIC RAILING
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW - FLORIDA CORRAL TRAFFIC RAILING
* See Thrie-Beam Guardrail Positioning Detail,
Sheet 13 and Notes for Thrie-Beam Guardrail
Splice Installations, Sheet 4.

(Type varies)
see Partial Plan Views for locations
42" Vertical Shape Traffic Railing (shown),

32" Vertical Shape Traffic Railing (similar)
Vertical End Taper required for 42" F Shape Traffic

Vertical End Taper required for
Railing & 8' & 14' Traffic Railing / Noise Wall
42" Vertical Shape Traffic Railing
Fill tapered toe if present (shown

hatched) with concrete on Median
Paved Surface
Paved Surface
(Type varies)
(Type varies)
Raised Sidewalk
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW - VERTICAL SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILINGS
APPROACH TRANSITION SPLICE DETAIL
FOR F AND NEW JERSEY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILINGS AND 8' & 14'
FOR FLORIDA CORRAL AND VERTICAL
TRAFFIC RAILING / NOISE WALLS (CONCRETE BARRIER WALL SIMILAR)
SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILINGS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:
02:
53 PM
installations, see Note on Sheet 4
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
10 of 15

Freestanding Type K Barrier Units shown; Bolted or

Staked Units similar. See Plans for specific requirements.
32" & 42" Vertical Shape Traffic Railing (similar)
1'-0"
1'-0"
Offset Block
bolted to
Guardrail
Offset Block
Offset Block
bolted to guardrail
of concrete fill
Offset Block
2" M ax. at end
Fill tapered toe (shown hatched)

7'-0"
Limits of concrete fill
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
See Thrie-Beam Guardrail Positioning

Detail, Sheet 13 and Notes for Thrie-Beam
Guardrail Splice Installations, Sheet 4.


Paved Surface (Type varies)
32" & 42" Vertical Shape Traffic Railing (similar)
Paved Surface (Type varies)
Fill tapered toe (shown hatched)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:
02:
54 PM
Cross References:
Cross References:
TRAILING END SPLICE DETAIL
FOR F AND NEW JERSEY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILINGS
FOR FLORIDA CORRAL AND VERTICAL
AND 8' & 14' TRAFFIC RAILING / NOISE WALLS
SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILINGS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
11of 15
32" F or New Jersey Shape Traffic Railing,

Railing Transition & End Post (Beam or Girder
Bridge shown, Flat Slab Bridge similar)
Freestanding Type K Barrier Units shown, Bolted or Staked

Railing Transition & End Post (Flat Slab Bridge
shown, Beam or Girder Bridge similar)
Down Units similar; See Plans for specific requirements

1'-0"
1'-0"
* Thrie-Beam
Guardrail Splice
Offset Block
Offset Block
bolted to Guardrail
Offset Block
Offset Block bolted to Guardrail
Offset Block
C
Anchor Bolts or Stakes
Begin or End Approach Slab
(approximate location)


PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
See Thrie-Beam Guardrail Positioning

Detail, Sheet 13 and Notes for Thrie-Beam
Guardrail Splice Installations, Sheet 4.

Railing Transition & End Post (Beam or Girder
Freestanding Type K Barrier Units shown, Bolted or Staked
Bridge shown, Flat Slab Bridge similar)

Railing Transition & End Post (Flat Slab Bridge
shown, Beam or Girder Bridge similar)
Down Units similar; See Plans for specific requirements

End Post
Railing
Traffic Railing
Traffic Railing
Railing
End Post
Transition
Transition
Paved Surface
Approach Slab
(type varies)

Anchor Bolts (shown) or Stakes;

Begin or End Bridge
Approach Slab shown,
see Partial Plan View for locations
Paved Surface similar
(approximate location)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:
03:
02 PM
Cross References:
Cross References:
See Sheet 13 for Section B-B,
See Sheet 13 for Section B-B,
Section C-C and Section D-D.
Section C-C and Section E-E.
FOR 32" F AND NEW JERSEY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILINGS
FOR 32" F AND NEW JERSEY SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILINGS
WITH RAILING TRANSITION AND END POST
WITH RAILING TRANSITION AND END POST
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
12 of 15
Thrie-Beam Guardrail Splice
Fill tapered toe (shown

hatched) with concrete
Traffic Railing
Traffic Railing
Traffic Railing
on Trailing Ends only
Offset Block
Offset Block
Offset Block
or Filler Plate
or Filler Plate
Traffic
Railing
SECTION A-A
SECTION A-A
32" F Shape Median Traffic Railing (shown),
SECTION A-A
32" F Shape Traffic Railing (shown),
SECTION A-A
32" New Jersey Shape Concrete Barrier
32" & 42" Vertical Shape Traffic
Median Concrete Barrier Wall (similar)
42" Traffic Railing and 8' & 14' Traffic
Wall (shown), 32" New Jersey Shape Traffic
Railing (shown), Florida Corral
Railing & other Narrow Traffic Railings (similar)
Traffic Railing (similar)
Anchor Bolt (shown)
Anchor Bolt or Stake
or Stake required for
(shown) required for
Approach Transition
Type K Barrier Unit
Anchor Bolt or Stake
Offset Block bolted

Type K Barrier Unit
(shown) required for
to Guardrail with
two
5
8"
Approach Transition
Traffic Railing
Type K Barrier Unit
Offset Block
Approach Transition
Bolts
SECTION B-B
SECTION C-C
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
Adjacent to Shoulder Traffic Railings
Adjacent to 32" F or New Jersey Shape
Adjacent to Shoulder Traffic Railings
32" F or New Jersey Shape Traffic
Median Traffic Railing or
Railing, Railing Transition & End Post
Median Concrete Barrier Wall

* Shift Thrie-Beam Guardrail Splice

beyond Open Joint 1'-0" Min. (as
shown) when 3" Min. dimension
can not be obtained
Open Joint
* 1'-0"
in Railing
Min.
Open Joint
5
8"
Varies 3
Min.,
Varies 7'-8" Min., 9'-7" Max.
1'-0" Max.
* 3" Min.
Varies 2'-11" Min.,

4'-10" Max.
in Railing
See Notes, Sheet 4
Type K Barrier Unit

Terminal Connector (Typ.)
Traffic Railing
1'
-9" 1"
1:
03:
03 PM
Offset Block
SECTION E-E
32" New Jersey Shape Traffic Railing
Riding Surface
(shown), 32" F Shape Traffic

12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
THRIE-BEAM GUARDRAIL POSITIONING DETAIL
Railing (similar)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
13 of 15
*
* NOTE:
Edge of Travel Way
Barrier Units (Typ.)
1
2"
First full Type K Barrier Unit before Drop-off or
Bolted - 1
Staked - 1'-0" Min.
Nominal
Drop-off or Hazard
Partially / Fully Bolted

or Staked Type K
Freestanding Proprietary Barrier Units
or Staked Type K
Barrier Units (4 Units)
Type K-Proprietary Barrier Transition

Unit A or B (See APL)
Fully Bolted or Staked Type K Barrier Units
Freestanding Proprietary Barrier Units *
Transition Section from
Freestanding to Bolted
Freestanding to Bolted
or Staked Barrier Units
or Staked Barrier Units *
APPROACH TRANSITION FROM FREESTANDING PROPRIETARY TEMPORARY BARRIERS TO BOLTED OR STAKED DOWN TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS
LEGEND:
Edge of Travel Way
First full Type K Barrier Unit before Drop-off or


1
2"
Bolted - 1
Nominal
Staked - 1'-0" Min.
Drop-off or Hazard
Fully Bolted or Staked Type K Barrier Units

TRAILING END TRANSITION FROM BOLTED OR STAKED DOWN TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS TO FREESTANDING PROPRIETARY TEMPORARY BARRIERS
Edge of Travel Way
~
Drop-off or Hazard
1:
03:
04 PM
Freestanding Type K Barrier Units
Type K-Proprietary Barrier Transition Unit A or B (See APL)
12/3/2015
APPROACH AND TRAILING END TRANSITIONS FROM FREESTANDING TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS TO FREESTANDING PROPRIETARY TEMPORARY BARRIERS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
TYPE K-PROPRIETARY TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER TRANSITIONS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
14 of 15
*
NOTE:

Edge of Travel Way
First full Type K Barrier Unit before Back Filled Units

Drop-off or Hazard
Back Fill
or Staked Type K
or Staked Type K
*
Type K-Proprietary Barrier

Transition Unit A or B (See APL)
Back Filled Type K Barrier Units
Freestanding Proprietary Barrier Units *
Freestanding to Back
Freestanding to Back
Filled Barrier Units
Filled Barrier Units *
APPROACH TRANSITION FROM FREESTANDING PROPRIETARY TEMPORARY BARRIERS TO BACK FILLED TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS
LEGEND:
Edge of Travel Way
Drop-off or Hazard
Back Fill
Back Filled Type K Barrier Units

TRAILING END TRANSITION FROM BACK FILLED TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS TO FREESTANDING PROPRIETARY BARRIERS
Freestanding Type K Barrier Units
Type K-Proprietary Barrier Transition Unit A or B (See APL)
12/3/2015
1:
03:
04 PM
MEDIAN APPROACH AND TRAILING END TRANSITIONS FROM FREESTANDING TYPE K TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIERS TO FREESTANDING PROPRIETARY TEMPORARY BARRIERS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
TYPE K-PROPRIETARY TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER TRANSITIONS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
414
SHEET
NO.
15 of 15
GENERAL NOTES
Symmetrical About
1. Temporary concrete barrier systems on roadways may be any of the following:
Symmetrical About
1'
1'
4"
3"
a. The FDOT Type K Temporary Concrete Barrier system (Design Standard Index 414). F-Shape Units. For
1
4"
2"
Radius Or Chamfer
" Min., " Max.
7"
13
4"
3. Alignment, length of need, anchorage and end treatment shall be in accordance with this Index.
10
"R
2'
-8"
10
"R
2. Barrier units of dissimilar types may be interconnected within a single line barriers using transition units.
1'
-7"
are included on the Approved Products List.
2'
-8"
7"
1'
-10"
5"
b. Proprietary temporary concrete barrier systems meeting NCHRP Report 350 Test Level 3 criteria which
Radius Or Chamfer
" Min., " Max.
10"
temporary concrete barrier systems on bridges see Design Standard Index No. 414.
13
4"
regardless of unit length.
3"
3"
4. Temporary concrete barrier units shown herein shall not be used for permanent barrier wall construction
5. If the plans specify Barrier (Temporary) (Type K), substitution with other barrier types is not permitted.
.SHAPE
J
N.
F-SHAPE
6. If the plans specify temporary concrete barrier system, substitution with water filled barriers is not
EWS
END VI
permitted.
S NOT SHOWN.
L
ON DETAI
CATI
T FABRI
NFORCEMENT AND OTHER UNI
REI
7. Where existing pavement is not present, construct an Asphalt Pad using Miscellaneous Asphalt Pavement. Cost
PERMITTED BARRIER UNIT END VIEWS
of the Asphalt Pad to be included in the cost of the Barrier system.
8. Barrier Delineators meeting the requirements of Specifications Section 993 are to be mounted on top of
temporary concrete barriers that are used as barriers along traveled ways in work zones. The barrier
Barrier Delineators Are Required
delineators are to be spaced at 50' centers in transitions, 100' centers on curves and 200' centers on tangent
On Top Of Concrete Barrier Walls.
roadways. Color must match adjacent longitudinal pavement marking.
Barrier Unit
9. Barrier units used for work zone traffic control and other temporary applications shall be paid for under
the contract unit price for Barrier (Temporary), LF.
Offset
Offset
Edge of Travelway
Edge of Travelway
10. Deflection space shall be clear of any grass, construction debris, stockpiled materials, equipment, and
2" m in.
objects.
Flexible or Rigid Pavement or
11. Placing alternate temporary barrier systems with heights greater than 32 inches within the work zone may
Asphalt Pad
obstruct the clear sight distance at intersections and driveways. Prior to placing these barrier systems, the
contractor shall submit a Certification Statement that the clear sight distance meets the requirements of
Index 546, signed and sealed by a Florida Professional Engineer.
12. Minimum temporary concrete barriers installed per run shall be 16 units.
MEDIAN INSTALLATION
OFFSET AND DEFLECTION SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Barrier Delineators Are Required

On Top Of Concrete Barrier Walls.
Installation
Shielding
Above
Ground
Hazards
Work Zone Speed
2' min.
50 mph and Greater
2' min,
4' preferred
4' min.
1' min,
2' preferred
2' min.
Offset
Deflection Space
Above Ground Hazard
Edge of Travel Way
Flexible or Rigid
Pavement or Asphalt Pad
Above Ground
Hazard
a.Drop-offs 4'or Less and NO traffic below
2' min,
4' preferred
2' min.
b.Alldrop-off conditions other than 'a'
2' min,
4' preferred
4' min.
45 mph or Less
1' min,
2' preferred
1' min.,
2' prefered
50 mph and Greater
2' min,
4' preferred
2' min.,
4' preferred
Deflection Space
Drop-Off Hazard
Drop-Off Hazard
2" m in.
Separating
Adjacent
Opposing
Traffic
Slope 1:10 or Flatter
ROADWAY INSTALLATION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
1:
03:
05 PM
Barrier Unit
1' min,
2' preferred
50 mph and Greater

Drop-Off
Hazards
Traffic
Deflection
Space
45 mph or Less
45 mph or Less
Left or
Right
Shoulder
Offset to
Travelway
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TEMPORARY CONCRETE BARRIER
NO.
415
SHEET
NO.
1of 7
Clear Zone Limit

Back Of Hazard Or Back Of
Work Area Inside Clear Zone
Approach Departure Line
Flare
1
*

Extend Concrete Barrier
8 Units Beyond Work Area
Offset Varies*
c
i
f
f
a
r
gT
n
i
h
c
a
o
r
p
Ap
Edge of travelway. See 600 Series Indexes

For Applications of Traffic Control Devices
*
* Note:
Work Zone Outside
Where barrier is located
within the clear zone of
opposing traffic, approach
transistion is required.
Clear Zone Limit
Clear Zone Limit
1
*

Offset Varies*
c
i
f
f
a
r
gT
n
i
h
c
a
o
r
p
Ap
Edge of travelway. See 600 Series Indexes

For Applications of Traffic Control Devices
The approach departure line location is determined by the line intersect with the back of the hazard or the area to be shielded, however the intersect offset distance is not to be beyond the
Departure Rates
1:16 For Speeds 45 mph
clear zone limit. The trailing departure line is determined by the line intersect with the front of the downstream end of the hazard or the area to be shielded.

The length of barrier wall need is the distance from the approach departure line intersect with the upstream toe of the temporary concrete barrier wall to the trailing departure line intersect
with the downstream toe of the temporary concrete barrier wall.
Area Shielded When Work Zone Hazards Or The

Work Area Occupy Space Less Than Clear Zone
Where temporary concrete barrier wall Temporary concrete barrier wall end units shall be located at or outside the clear zone or shielded by other structure, earth embedment or a crash
Width
cushion.
Proprietary redirective crash cushions designed for use with temporary concrete barriers have the beginning length of need and departure line intersect point indicated on the respective APL

Work Area Extend To Or Beyond Clear Zone Limit
drawing for each proprietary crash cushion. Where redirective crash cushions are located on the departure line by their length of need reference point, the wall upstream end unit must be
aligned with the crash cushion, and the wall's end unit secured with bolts or stakes. See Sheets 3 through 6 for configurations requiring end unit anchorage.
Dot Indicates Number And Position Of Bolts Or

Stakes
1:
03:
06 PM
The wall offset from the near traffic lane, wall flare rate and wall flare length are to be in conformance with the alignment called for in the plans and the alignments called for by Department
Design Standards specified in the plans; in absence of either plan requirement, the offset shall be as determined by the Engineer, and, unless other flare rates are approved by the Engineer the
flare rates to be applied are 1:10 or flatter for speeds 45 mph and 1:15 or flatter for speeds 50 mph; see Index No. 642 for other flare rates on freeway facilities.
12/3/2015
The surface cross slope approaching the barrier wall and continuing across the required deflection space shall not exceed a rate of 1 vertical: 10 horizontal.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
ALIGNMENT AND LENGTH OF NEED

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
415
SHEET
NO.
2 of 7
L (Length Of Need)
X (Length Of Advancement, LA)
Back Of Hazard Or Back Of

Work Area Inside Clear Zone
Clear Zone Limit
D(RA)
Temporary Concrete
D(LA)
Barrier Wall
d(LA)
Edge of travelway RA. See 600

d(RA)
c
i
f
f
a
r
gT
n
i
h
c
a
o
r
p
Ap
Series Indexes For Applications Traffic
Control Devices
*
Edge of travelway LA.
L (Length Of Need)
X (Length Of Advancement, LA)
* Note:
Work Zone Extends
Where barrier is located
within the clear zone of
opposing traffic, approach
transistion is required.
Outside Clear Zone

Limit
Clear Zone Limit

D(RA)

Temporary Concrete
D(LA)
Barrier
d(LA)
Edge of travelway RA. See 600

d(RA)
c
i
f
f
a
r
gT
n
i
h
c
a
o
r
p
Ap
Series Indexes For Applications Traffic
Control Devices
*
Edge of travelway LA.
Work Zone
Speed
CLEAR ZONE WIDTHS FOR WORK ZONES
LEGEND
(mph)
The term 'clear zone' describes the unobstructed relatively flat area, impacted by
construction, extending outward from the edge of the traffic lane. The table
below gives clear zone widths in work zones for medians and roadside conditions
45
= 16 (D-d)
50
= 13 (D-d)
LA : Left Approach
RA : Right Approach
other than for roadside canals; where roadside canals are present, clear zone
widths are to conform with the distances to canals as described in the PPM,
Equation Variables:
Volume 1, Chapter 4.
L=(Length of Need) = The distance a longitudinal barrier must be extended in advance of an area
Departure Rates
of concern in order to adequately shield the hazard.

X=(Length of advancement) = The distance a longitudinal barrier must be extended in advance of

TRAVEL LANES &
AUXILIARY LANES &
MULTILANE RAMPS
SINGLE LANE RAMPS
WORK ZONE SPEED
D(RA), D(LA) = Distance in feet from the near edge of the travel way to the back of the hazard or the
(MPH)
1:
03:
07 PM
an area of concern in order to adequately shield the hazard
clear zone limit, which ever is less

(feet)
(feet)
60-70
30
18
55
24
14
45-50
18
10
Work Area Occupy Space Less Than Clear Zone

Width

Work Area Extend To Or Beyond Clear Zone Limit
d(RA), d(LA) = Distance in feet from the near edge of the travel way to the face of the Barrier
Dot Indicates Number And Position Of Bolts Or
Departure line = A line extending from the Point of Departure to the back of a hazard or clear zone.
Stakes
The point at which a barrier intersects the departure line establishes the beginning
30-40
14
10
4' BEHIND FACE
4' BEHIND FACE
OF CURB
OF CURB
CURB & GUTTER
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
of both the Length of Need and the Length of Advancement.

ALL SPEEDS
STRAIGHT ALIGNMENT AND LENGTH OF NEED
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
415
SHEET
NO.
3 of 7
Edge Of Travel Way In Use
c
i
f
f
a
r
gT
n
i
h
c
a
o
r
p
Ap
Type K or Approved
Proprietary Transition Unit
Type K or Approved
Crash Cushion

Crash Cushion
1
c
i
f
f
a
r
gT
n
i
h
c
a
o
r
p
Ap
Type K or
Approved Proprietary
Transition Unit

* Flare rates to be applied are 1:10 or flatter
O
p
p
o
s
i
n
gT
r
a
f
f
i
c
for speeds 45 mph and 1:15 or flatter

for speeds 50 mph
MEDIAN HAZARDS WITHIN CLEAR ZONES BOTH ROADWAYS
c
i
f
f
a
r
gT
n
i
h
c
a
o
r
p
Ap
Type K or Approved
Crash Cushion
Clear Zone Limit For Approach Roadway
Crash Cushion
Type K or
Bolted or Staked Type K
Transition Unit
O
p
p
o
s
i
n
gT
r
a
f
f
i
c
c
i
f
f
a
r
gT
n
i
h
c
a
o
r
p
Ap
MEDIAN HAZARDS EXTENDS TO OR BEYOND CLEAR ZONES BOTH ROADWAYS
1:
03:
08 PM
LEGEND
Dot Indicates Number And
Position Of Bolts Or Stakes
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
BARRIER END UNIT ANCHORAGE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
415
SHEET
NO.
4 of 7
Free Standing Units (Type K

Edge Of Travel Way
or Approved Proprietary Unit)
Free Standing Units (Type K or Approved Proprietary Unit)
Edge Of Travel Way
3 Units
Crash Cushion
5
.
2
1
:
1
4 Units
3 Units
s
t
i
3 Un
2'Clear
2'Clear
5
.
2
1
:
1
Bolt Anchored Units
s
t
i
4 Un
Bridge Or Approach Slab
d
e
k
a
St
( Index No. 414)
Barrier Type K
Type K or
Bolt Anchored Units
s
t
i
4 Un
4 Units
3 Units
d
e
k
a
s St
t
i
3 Un

(Index No. 414)
Barrier Type K
Free Standing Units
Transition Unit
Fixed Units
Transition Units
Free Standing Units
Fixed Units
Transition Units
45 MPH OR LESS
45 MPH OR LESS
Free Standing Units (Type K

or Approved Proprietary Unit)
Edge Of Travel Way
Edge Of Travel Way
3 Units
Crash Cushion
5
7
.
8
1
:
1
5
7
.
8
1
:
1
3 Units
s
t
i
6 Un
4 Units
Bridge Or Approach
d
e
k
a
s St
t
i
5 Un
Bolt Anchored Units
2'Clear
2'Clear
Bolt Anchored Units
Slab (Index No. 414)
3 Units
Fixed Units
Transition Units
Bridge Or Approach
d
e
k
a
s St
t
i
5 Un
Barrier Type K
Free Standing Units
s
t
i
6 Un
4 Units
Barrier Type K
Free Standing Units
Fixed Units
Transition Units
Type K or
Transition Unit
50 MPH OR GREATER
50 MPH OR GREATER
e
n
i
eL
c
n
e
r
e
f
p Re
a
l
r
e
v
O
APPROACH SHOULDER BARRIER ON DIVIDED FACILITIES

APPROACH SHOULDER BARRIER ON UNDIVIDED FACILITIES
2'Clear
Free Standing Barrier Type K
6 Units
1
:
1
8
.
7
5
1
:
1
8
6 Units
3 Units
3 Units
Free Standing Units (Other Than Type K)
LEGEND
1:
03:
09 PM
INTERIOR MEDIAN BARRIER
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
CONTINUATION OF BARRIER FROM OTHER TYPE BARRIERS TO BARRIER TYPE K
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
415
SHEET
NO.
5 of 7
Barrier Type K
Edge Of Travel Way
Edge Of Travel Way
Clear
Crash Cushion
2'
Clear
2'
Barrier Type K
2
1
:
1
3 Type K
3 Type K Units
Units Staked
Freestanding
2
1
:
1
Bolt Anchored Units
s
t
i
4 Un
4 Units
3 Units
s
t
i
4 Un
4 Units
3 Units
(Index No. 414)
Bolt Anchored Units
Bridge Or Approach
45 MPH OR LESS
45 MPH OR LESS
Barrier Type K
Barrier Type K
2'
Edge Of Travel Way
Crash Cushion
Clear
2'
Clear
Edge Of Travel Way
3 Type K
3 Type K Units
Units Staked
Freestanding
8
1
:
1
Bolt Anchored Units
3 Units
8
1
:
1
s
t
i
6 Un
4 Units
3 Units
s
t
i
6 Un
4 Units
Bolt Anchored Units
(Index No. 414)
Bridge Or Approach
50 MPH OR GREATER
50 MPH OR GREATER
e
n
i
eL
c
n
e
r
e
f
p Re
a
l
r
e
v
O
DEPARTURE (TRAILING) SHOULDER BARRIER ON DIVIDED FACILITIES
DEPARTURE (TRAILING) SHOULDER BARRIER ON UNDIVIDED FACILITIES
LEGEND
1:
03:
10 PM
CONTINUATION OF BARRIER FROM BARRIER TYPE K TO OTHER TYPE BARRIERS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
BARRIER TYPE K ON BRIDGES AND APPROACH SLABS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
415
SHEET
NO.
6 of 7
Crash Cushion
Crash Cushion
Temporary Barrier Wall
Transition Panel
UNIDIRECTIONAL -
BIDIRECTIONAL -
SEPARATED TRAFFIC
SEPARATED TRAFFIC
Crash Cushion
Crash Cushion
)
r
e
t
t
a
r Fl
0O
2
:
1
s(
e
i
r
Va
Transition Panel
Flare Varies:
Flare Varies:
1:10 Or Flatter For 45 mph
1:10 Or Flatter For 45 mph
1:15 Or Flatter For 50-70 mph
1:15 Or Flatter For 50-70 mph
TWO-WAY TRAFFIC WITH CRASH CUSHION LOCATED OUTSIDE
TWO-WAY TRAFFIC WITH CRASH CUSHION LOCATED
OPPOSING LANE CLEAR ZONE OR ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
WITHIN OPPOSING LANE CLEAR ZONE
SHOULDER - RIGHT OR LEFT (RIGHT SIDE SHOWN)

WALL END TREATMENT WHEN SHIELDED BY A CRASH CUSHION
NOTES FOR WALL END SHIELDING

1. Redirective crash cushions are the principal (standard) device to be used for shielding
approach ends of temporary concrete barrier walls. The contractor has the option to
5. Optional temporary redirective crash cushions are to be paid for per locations under
the contract unit price for Crash Cushion (Redirective Option) (Temporary), LO.
construct any of the redirective crash cushions listed on the Approved Products List
at "102 Temporary Crash Cushion", subject to the uses and limitations described on
6. A yellow Type I Object Marker shall be centered 3' in front of the crash cushion
their respective drawings. The barrier wall four end unit abutting crash cushions
nose. Mounting hardware shall be in conformance with Section 993 of the Standard
must be anchored to a paved surface using anchors/stakes in accordance with
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
Standard Index 414.

As an option, the contractor may install reflective sheeting on the nose of the crash
2. Temporary redirective crash cushions shall be installed in accordance with the
cushion. The sheeting to be used must be solid yellow, Type III or better and must be
manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. Temporary crash cushions can be
a product listed on the Department's Approved Products List (APL). The sheeting to be
either new or functionally sound used devices. Performance of intended function is
applied to the nose of the crash cushion shall be a minimum of 360 square inches
the only condition for acceptance, whether the crash cushion is new, used,
with a minimum height of 15 inches.
refurbished, purchased, leased, rented, on loan, shared between projects, or made up

of mixed new and used components.
7. Equipment, stockpile material, etc., shall not be placed behind the crash cushion.
3. Temporary Crash Cushions shall not be bolted down on bridge superstructures that
8. When subjected to reverse direction hits, construct Transition Panels from Concrete
contain post-tensioned tendons within the concrete deck (top flange of concrete box
Barrier Walls to Crash Cushions; for additional details refer to the applicable crash
girders) or on bridge superstructures consisting of longitudinally prestressed,
cushion drawings on the APL.
transversely post-tensioned, solid or voided concrete slab units. Gating crash cushions
shall be used where bolting is not allowed.
9. Galvanize metallic components to meet the requirements for Steel Guardrail, Section
967 of the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
4. Assemble and install Crash Cushions according to the limitations noted on the
1:
03:
10 PM
LEGEND
Approved Products List (APL) webpage, the manufacturer's specifications, and the
applicable crash cushion drawings posted on the APL.
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
SHIELDING WALL ENDS WITH REDIRECTIVE CRASH CUSHIONS (REDIRECTIVE OPTION)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
415
SHEET
NO.
7 of 7
For Railing End Transition see Detail "A"

(Typical except as noted below)
" Intermediate Open
Deck Joint (see Notes)
" V-Groove in both faces and
Joint (see Notes)
top of Traffic Railing
Edge of Approach
Slab (Coping)
For Railing End Transition see
Coping (Typ.)
Edge of Approach Slab (Coping)
Detail "A" (Typical except as noted)
Gutter Line
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Approach Slab
Approach Thrie-Beam Guardrail
Transition (When called for in Plans)
Begin or End Approach Slab or Begin

or End Railing on Retaining Wall
PLAN
(Reinforcing Steel not shown for clarity)
Trailing End, W-Beam Guardrail Connection

Begin or End Approach
(shown), Thrie-Beam Guardrail Connection
Slab or Begin or End
(similar) (When called for in Plans)
BARRIER DELINEATOR
SPACING
Railing on Retaining
Superstructure
Wall
Distance -
Supports
Edge of Travel Lane

30'-0" Maximum
" Intermediate Open
" V-Groove in both faces
Joint (see Notes)
and top of Traffic Railing
See Detail "B"
Approach Thrie-Beam Guardrail Transition

6" Min.
5"
for Pre-cured
Spacing (Ft.)
to Face of Railing
Spacing " V-Grooves (see Notes)
< 4'
40'
4' to 8'
80'
> than 8'
None Required
(When called for in Plans)
Bridge Deck
NAME OR DATE
BRIDGE NUMBER
3"
2"
3"
Silicone Sealant
Front Face of Backwall &

Begin or End Bridge
Approach Slab (Flexible Pavement Approach Slab
Shown, Rigid Pavement Approach Slab Similar)
Shown, Rigid Pavement Approach Slab Similar, Typ.)

CROSS REFERENCE:
ELEVATION OF INSIDE FACE OF RAILING
For Section A-A, View B-B and
Detail "A", see Sheet 2.

For Detail "B", see Sheet 4.
(Railing on Bridge Deck and Approach Slab shown, Railing on Retaining Wall similar)
TRAFFIC RAILING NOTES
This railing has been structurally evaluated to be equivalent or greater in strength to other safety shape railings
which have been crash tested to NCHRP Report 350 TL-4 Criteria.
NAME, DATE AND BRIDGE NUMBER : The Name and Bridge Number shall be placed on the Traffic Railing so as to
be seen on the driver's right side when approaching the bridge. The Date shall be placed on the driver's left
side when approaching the bridge. The Name shall be as shown in the General Notes in the Structures Plans. The
CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL : See Structures Plans General Notes.
Date shall be the year the bridge is completed. For a widening when the existing railing is removed, use both the
GUARDRAIL : For Guardrail connection details see Index Nos. 400 and 410.
existing date and the year of the widening. Black plastic letters and figures 3" in height may be used, as approved
SUPERELEVATED BRIDGES : At the option of the Contractor the Traffic Railing on superelevated bridges may be
by the Engineer, in lieu of the letters and figures formed by " V-Grooves.
constructed perpendicular to the roadway surface. If an adjoining railing is constructed plumb, transition the
end of the Traffic Railing from perpendicular to plumb over a minimum distance of 20'-0". The cost of all
modifications will be at the Contractor's expense.
V-Grooves shall be formed by
preformed letters and figures.

BARRIER DELINEATORS : Barrier Delineators shall meet Specification Section 993. Install Barrier Delineators
on top of the Traffic Railing 2" from the face on the traffic side at the spacing shown in the table above. Barrier Delineator color
PEDESTRIAN AND BICYCLE RAILING : See Index Nos. 821 and 822 for Notes, Details and post spacings for
Traffic Railings with Aluminum Pedestrian /Bicycle Bullet Railings.
(white or yellow) shall match the color of the near edgeline. The cost of the Barrier Delineators shall be included in the
Contract Unit Price for the Traffic Railing.
V-GROOVES : Construct " V-Grooves plumb. Space V-Grooves equally between " Open Joints
JOINTS : See Plans, Superstructure, Approach Slab and Retaining Walls Sheets for actual dimensions and joint orientation. Provide open
and/or Deck Joints and at V-Groove locations on Retaining Wall footings.
Railing Joints at Deck Expansion Joint locations matching the dimensions of the Deck Joint. For treatment of Railings on skewed
11:
14:
09 AM
bridges see Sheet No. 3.

Provide " Intermediate Open Joints at :
(1) - Superstructure supports where slab is continuous.
(2) - Ends of approach slabs when adjacent to retaining walls and at expansion
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
joints on retaining wall junction slabs.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC RAILING - (32" F SHAPE)
NO.
420
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
* Where railings of adjacent bridges are to be built back to back,
1'-6"
W-Beam Special End Shoe
3"
2" (
M ax.
)
6" M in.
Bars 5S
Bridge Deck
6"
1
2"
Thrie-Beam Terminal
Connector & Guardrail
Bars 5S (Typ.)
2'
-8"
2'
-6" (
M in. with
Future Asphalt
bar spacings)
Overlay
Bolts (Approach End)
End Bar 5V
3
"Co
v
e
r
(
Si
d
e
s
)
(Field Cut)
Rotate Bars 5V as
shown (See Detail "A"
Riding
for bar spacings)
Surface
1 " *
6" M in.
8"
1 " *
Overlay
Em bed.
7"
Bars 5V
@ 8" sp.
Detail "A" for
Asphalt
Overlay
2" (
M ax.
)
3" Cover
8" M in. Bridge Deck
1 "
10
"R
Required
Bars 5P (See
2" Cover (Top)
Bolts (Trailing End only)
(Typ.)
1" *
Const. Joint
10 "
Superstructure Sheets for Details.
Future Asphalt Overlay)
3
4"
Bars 5S
3
"Co
v
e
r
1"
312" 312"
1'
-10"
2'
-8"
2'
-6" (
M in. with
Future Asphalt
3
4"
Bars 5P @ 8" sp.
3"
1'
-0"
2"
line. A bond breaker will be required. See Structures Plans,
Coping *
Em bed.
2" Cover
5"
may coincide along a plane centered 1'-6" from each gutter
10"
(
Top)
7"
1'-2"
the outside vertical plane of the railing and deck/approach slab
Bars 5S (Field
Bend as Reqd.)
Edge of Approach
Slab (Coping) *
Approach Slab
SECTION A-A
TYPICAL SECTION THRU TRAFFIC RAILING
(Section thru Bridge Deck shown, Section thru Approach Slab
VIEW B-B
and Retaining Walls similar)
(Section thru Approach Slab shown,

Section thru Retaining Walls similar)
W-Beam Special End Shoe or

4" 4"
1'-8"
Thrie Beam Guardrail
1'-8"
NOTES:
1'-1 "
Bolts (Approach End only)
Coping
Railing Bars 5P and 5V on Approach Slab at the barrier end and proceed
Slab or limiting station
toward Begin or End Bridge to ensure placement of guardrail bolt holes.
on Retaining Wall
Rotate Bar 5P
"
Coping
Rotate Bars 5V in Railing End Transition to maintain cover. Begin placing
on Retaining Wall
1'-1 "

Slab or limiting station
"
4" 4"
Bolts (Trailing End)
(Typ.)
1'
-6"
1'
-2"
5V
1'
-2"
Bars
Bars
1'
-6"
If required, adjustments to the bar spacing for Bars 5P and 5V shall be

made immediately adjacent to Begin or End Bridge.
2" as shown
5P
(Typ.)
CROSS REFERENCE:
B
Bars 5S
(Bottom)
maintain cover
Approach Slab
Field Cut End Bar 5V
Bars 5V @ 8" sp. (Max.)
View B-B see Sheet 1.

4"
Field Bend to
4"
Bars 5S
8 "
For locations of Section A-A and
Approach Slab
Bars 5P @
3"
7 " 6 " 7 " 4"
9"
6"
2 "
8" sp. (Max.)

3'-0"
11:
14:
10 AM
3'-0"
PLAN - Railing End Transition
(Showing Bars 5V and 5S)
(Showing Bars 5P and 5S)

DETAIL "A"
(Railing on Approach Slab shown, Railing on Retaining Wall similar)

NOTE:
Omit Railing End Transition and Guardrail if Index 410 Concrete Barrier Wall is used beyond the Approach Slab or Retaining Wall.
12/17/2015
See Structures Plans, Plan and Elevation Sheet and Roadway Plans. If Railing End Transition is omitted, extend Typical Section to
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
end of the Approach Slab or limiting station on Retaining Wall, and space Bars 5P and 5V at 8" (Typ.)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
420
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
Front Face of Backwall and

Begin or End Bridge
Intermediate Pier
Deck Expansion
Coping
or Bent
Joint
Sidewalk
" Intermediate Open

Joint in Railing or Parapet
Inside Face of
Parapet
Parapet
Concrete
Begin or End Bridge
Approach Slab
Intermediate Pier
Railing end transition
or Bent
" Intermediate Open
Deck Expansion
Barrier end transition
Joint in Railing
Joint
Coping
where required
Bars 5V Field cut
Gutter
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Traffic Railing
See Note 7.
Begin or End
Traffic Railing
Approach Slab
(see Note 3)
Note 6)
Typical Bars 5V
Bridge Deck
Gutter
3" (
See
1'
-9"
where required

See Note 3.
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF SKEWED BRIDGE DECK AND APPROACH SLAB WITH SIDEWALK,
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF SKEWED BRIDGE DECK AND APPROACH SLAB WITH F SHAPE
F SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILING AND PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE RAILING
TRAFFIC RAILING, OTHER TRAFFIC RAILINGS SIMILAR
INDEX NO. 820, 825 or 826, OTHER TRAFFIC RAILINGS SIMILAR
NOTES:
NOTES:
1) Concrete Parapet reinforcement is not effected by skew angle, see Index No. 820 for details.
1) Railing expansion joint shall match the deck expansion joint which shall be turned perpendicular
2) Parapet expansion joint shall match the deck expansion joint which shall be turned perpendicular
or radial to the gutter line.
or radial to the gutter line.
See Structures Plans, Superstructure Sheets for details.
2) " Intermediate Open Joints and " V-Grooves in railing shall be placed perpendicular or radial to the
See Structures Plans, Superstructure Sheets for details.
3) Traffic Railing reinforcement vertical Bars 5V & 5P may be shifted up to 1" (Max.) and rotated
up to 10 degrees as required to allow proper placement. Bars 5V adjacent to expansion joints shall
gutter line. See Structures Plans, Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets for locations.
3) Begin placing Railing Bars 5P and 5V on Approach Slab at the railing end and proceed toward Begin or End
be field adjusted to maintain clearance and spacing, extra Bars 5V will be required. Bars 5V bottom horizontal
Bridge to ensure placement of guardrail bolt holes.
portion shall be cut so as to maintain maximum bottom horizontal length of bar to each vertical leg being placed,
5V shall be made immediately adjacent to Begin or End Bridge.
If required, adjustments to the bar spacing for Bars 5P and
the remainder of bar shall be discarded. Cut Bars 5V may be rotated to maintain clearance.
4) Railing ends at deck expansion joints shall follow the deck joint with allowance for joint movement. Expansion
joint at the inside face of parapet shall be turned perpendicular or radial to this line.
See Structures Plans,
Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets for details.

5) " Intermediate Open Joints and V-Grooves in railing and parapet shall be placed perpendicular or radial to
the gutter line or inside face of parapet line.
See Structures Plans, Superstructure Sheets for locations.
6) At begin or end approach slab extend slab at the railing ends 3" (gutter side or back face
of railing as required) as shown to provide a base for casting of the railing.
7) Begin placing Railing Bars 5P and 5V on Approach Slab at the railing end and proceed toward Begin or End
Bridge to ensure placement of guardrail bolt holes.
If required, adjustments to the bar spacing for Bars 5P and
5V shall be made immediately adjacent to Begin or End Bridge.
GENERAL NOTES:
1) Work this Sheet with Traffic Railing, Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing, and Approach Slab Indexes
as applicable.
2) Deck Expansion Joint at begin or end bridge shown. Deck Expansion Joints at Pier or
Intermediate Bents are similar.
3) Partial Plan Views shown are intended as guides only. See Structures Plans, Superstructure
11:
14:
10 AM
and Approach Slab Sheets for skew angles, joint orientation, dimensions and details.
4) Railings on Raised Sidewalks shall be treated similar to the Partial Plan View of Bridge Deck
with Traffic Railing.
5) If Welded Wire Reinforcement is used in lieu of conventional reinforcement, placement of the WWR
vertical elements shall be similar to those shown above. Clipping of horizontal elements to
facilitate placement shall be minimized where possible. When clipping is required, supplement
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
horizontal elements by lap splicing with deformed bars having an equivalent area of steel.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
420
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
ALTERNATE REINFORCING STEEL (WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT) DETAILS

5
"
option
45
2
"
9"
0% to 2%
90
90
90
90
2% to 6%
93
87
87
93
6% to 10%
96
84
84
96

MARK
SIZE
B
A
5'-7"
As Reqd.
5'-1"
A and B shall be 90 if Contractor elects to place

railing perpendicular to the deck and approach slabs.
Length as Required
634"
Wire or #5 Bar
BAR 5S
3"
may be tied
Option 1
Option 2
8" Ctrs.
2"
6"
3
4"
5"
(Option 3) (2")
1
(4 2")
End Transition
2"
Field Cut Line
1
4"
(See Note 2)
(312")
Contractor's option
Portion of Bar 5V
10"
to be used
45
1
8"
1
'
-2
"
Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) Piece No. 1
Piece No. 2
3
"Co
v
e
r
8"
longitudinal wire)
5430'
9"
D30.7 (Extend or
2'-0" Min. Lap
Welded Wire
(Typ.)
Discard
2'
-4"
2" Cover
Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR)
Field Cut &
2'
-5"
1078"
Lap Splice each
LENGTH
2'
-4"
2'
-5"
3
2'
-3 16"
HIGH GUTTER
9
"
D30.7 @
(
Option 3)
5430'
D30.7 (Typ.)
2'
-4"
(Typ.)
Longitudinal D30.7
LOW GUTTER
8" Ctrs.
D30.7
1
2"
1
)
2"
(
3
234"
1
4"
(
7"
)
1
2"
= 2
1
'
-2
"
Diameter
Option 1 & 2
3"
7"
8"
D30.7 @
1'
-2"
(
Option 3)
Bend
3
(
7"
) (
7"
) (
412"
4
1
2"
2'
-312"
ROADWAY
CROSS-SLOPE
Contractor's
1
)
2"
Option 2
1
2"
Option 1
1
5
"
2
Reinforcement
Piece No. 2
512"
1
2"
10"
3" Cover
D30.7
STIRRUP BAR 5P
STIRRUP BAR 5V
END STIRRUP BAR 5V

To Be Field Cut
D30.7
D30.7
SPLICE DETAIL
(One Required per
6" Min.
(Between WWR Sections)
Embed.
Railing End Transition)

Piece No. 1
2. The 9" and the 2'-4" vertical dimensions shown for Bar 5V are based on a bridge deck
without a raised sidewalk. If a raised sidewalk is to be provided, increase these dimensions
to achieve a 6" minimum embedment into the bridge deck. See Structures Plans,
WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT NOTES:
Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets.

1. At the option of the Contractor Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) may be utilized in lieu of all Bars 5P, 5S and 5V.
3. The reinforcement for the railing on a retaining wall shall be the same as detailed above
for a 8" deck with A = B = 90
WWR must consist of Deformed wire meeting the requirements of Specification Section 931.
4. All reinforcing steel at the open joints shall have a 2" minimum cover.
2. WWR at Railing End Transition shall be field bent inward as required (Pieces 1
& 2) to maintain cover. The vertical wires (D30.7) in Piece 1 shall be cut as shown and the gutter
5. Bars 5S may be continuous or spliced at the construction joints. Bar splices for Bars 5S
shall be a minimum of 2'-0".
side portion bent inward as required to allow placement.
Pre-cured Silicone
3
8"
INTERMEDIATE JOINT SEAL NOTES:
Sealant (4" wide)
1. At Intermediate Open Joints, seal the lower 6" portion of

the open joint with Pre-cured Silicone Sealant in accordance
ESTIMATED TRAFFIC RAILING
6"
with Specification Section 932.
QUANTITIES
2. Apply sealant prior to any Class V finish coating and remove
45
11:
14:
11 AM
all curing compound and loose material from the surface

2"
Paint Recessed
prior to application of bonding agent.
ITEM
UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete
CY/LF
0.104
Reinforcing Steel
LB/LF
27.12
Surfaces Black
3. The cost of the Pre-cured Silicone Sealant shall be included
in the Contract Unit Price for the Traffic Railing.
SECTION THRU RECESSED
DETAIL "B" - SECTION
"V" GROOVE TO FORM INSCRIBED
AT INTERMEDIATE OPEN JOINT
LETTERS AND FIGURES
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
45
(The above quantities are based on a 2% deck

cross slope; railing on low side of deck.)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
420
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
" Intermediate Open
Joint (see Notes)
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
" V-Groove in both faces and top
of Traffic Railing (Equally spaced

between open joints)
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Approach Slab
Approach Thrie-Beam Guardrail Transition
(When called for in Plans, Typ.)
Begin or End
Approach Slab
PLAN (Reinforcing Steel not shown for clarity)

Trailing End W-Beam Guardrail Connection
Begin or End
BARRIER DELINEATOR
Approach Slab
SPACING
Superstructure
Distance -
Supports
Edge of Travel Lane

Spacing " V-Grooves
30'-0" Maximum
" Intermediate Open
< 4'
Joint (see Notes)
of Traffic Railing (Equally spaced
for Pre-cured
40'
4' to 8'
See Detail "B"
Spacing (Ft.)
to Face of Railing
80'
> than 8'
None Required
Transition on Approach Slab shown,
Silicone Sealant
Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge
Approach Slab

CROSS REFERENCE:
ELEVATION
For Section A-A, View B-B and
Detail "A" see Sheet 2.
For Detail "B" see Sheet 4.

This railing has been structurally evaluated to be equivalent or greater in strength to other
safety shape railings which have been crash tested to NCHRP Report 350 TL-4 criteria.
JOINTS : See Plans, Superstructure, Approach Slab and Retaining Walls Sheets for actual dimensions
and joint orientation. Provide open Railing Joints at Deck Expansion Joint locations matching the
dimensions of the Deck Joint. For treatment of Railings on skewed bridges see Sheet No. 3.
CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL : See Structures Plans, General Notes.

GUARDRAIL : For Guardrail connection details see Index No. 400.
11:
14:
34 AM
SUPERELEVATED BRIDGES : At the option of the Contractor the Traffic Railing on

superelevated bridges may be constructed perpendicular to the roadway surface.

The cost of all modifications will be at the Contractor's expense.
BARRIER DELINEATORS : Barrier Delineators shall meet Specification Section 993.
Install Barrier Delineators on top of the Traffic Railing along the centerline at the
spacing shown in the table above. Barrier Delineator color (white or yellow) shall
12/17/2015
match the color of the near edgeline. The cost of the Barrier Delineators shall be
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
included in the Contract Unit Price for the Traffic Railing.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC RAILING - (MEDIAN 32" F SHAPE)
NO.
421
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
2'-0"
1
4"
1
2"
"A" for bar spacings)

1
4"
Future
Required
1'-0" sp.
3"
Bridge
2"
2" (
M ax.
)
6" M in.
Em bed.
Deck
Overlay
Field Cut, Shift and Bend Transition

Bars 5W as shown to maintain cover
Asphalt
(See Detail "A" for bar spacings)
Overlay

Riding Surface
Bars 5S
Em bed.
Bars 5W @
Asphalt
3
"Co
v
e
r
(
Si
d
e
s
)
6" M in.
Const. Joint
& Guardrail Bolts (Approach End)

Bars 5S (Typ.)
2" (
M ax.
)
7"
"R
10
2'
-8"
)
s
de
Si
(
2'
-6" (
M in. with
9"
r
e
v
"Co
3
714"
1'
-10"
Bars 5S (Typ.)
Overlay
2'
-8"
2'
-6" (
M in. with
Future Asphalt
3
4"
Bars 5R @ 1'-0" sp.
1
4"
Bars 5R (See Detail
(
Top)
1'-4"
2" Cover
5"
1
4"
2" Cover
1
2"
(
Top)
1
4"
SECTION A-A
Approach Slab
Bars 5S
(SECTION THRU BRIDGE DECK SHOWN SECTION THRU APPROACH SLAB SIMILAR)
VIEW B-B
4" 4"

1'-8"
NOTE:
Begin placing Railing Bars 5R and 5W on Approach Slab at the
4" 4"
railing end and proceed toward Begin or End Bridge to ensure

placement of guardrail bolt holes. If required, adjustments to the
1'-1 "
1'-8"
1'-1 "
bar spacing for Bars 5R and 5W shall be made immediately
Approach Slab
adjacent to Begin or End Bridge. Shift and rotate Bars 5R and 5W

as required to maintain cover in Railing End Transition.
Approach Slab
Begin or End
Begin or End
Approach Slab
4"
4"
Approach Slab
Omit Railing End Transition and Guardrail if Index 410 Concrete Barrier
Wall is used beyond the Approach Slab. See Structures Plans, Plan
and Elevation Sheet and Roadway Plans. If Railing End Transition is
omitted, extend Typical Section to the end of Approach Slab and
Bars 5S
5W
B
Bars 5R
(Typ.)
(Bottom)
4"
4"
Bars 5S
space Bars 5R and 5W at 1'-0" (Typ.)
1'
-4"
Bars
2'
-0"
1'
-4"
2'
-0"
Bars 5S
Field Cut Transition Bars
Field Bend as
required (Typ.)
5W (in pairs). Bend and
Shift as shown to maintain
3'-0"
3'-0"
cover.
Bars 5W @ 1'-0" sp. (Max.)
4 sp. @ 8" = 2'-8"
End Transition
Bars 5R @ 1'-0" sp. (Max.)
3"
3
8"
4 sp. @ 8" = 2'-8"
(Showing Bars 5W and 5S)
(Showing Bars 5R and 5S)
12/17/2015
11:
14:
35 AM
End Transition
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
DETAIL "A"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
421
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
D
e
Jo ck
in
E
t
x
p
a
n
s
io
n
Bars 5W Field cut
" Intermediate Open

Joint in Railing
Railing end transition

where required
Approach Slab
Begin or End
Intermediate Pier
or Bent
3" (
See
Typical Bars 5W
Bridge Deck
Note 5)
2'
-3"
(see Note 2)
Approach Slab
Begin or End Bridge
See
Note 6.
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF BRIDGE DECK AND APPROACH SLAB WITH

MEDIAN TRAFFIC RAILING
NOTES:
1)
Median Traffic Railing reinforcement vertical Bars 5W may be shifted up to 1" (Max.)
and rotated up to 10 degrees as required to allow proper placement.
2)
Transition Stirrup Bars 5W shall be used as required at railing ends adjacent to expansion joints
to facilitate placement of bars in acute corners.
Place Transition Bars 5W in a fan pattern to
maintain spacing. Rotate bars in 10 (Max.) increments as required.
3)
Median Traffic Railing ends at deck expansion joints shall follow the deck joint with allowance for joint
movement. See Structures Plans, Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets for Details.
4)
" Intermediate Open Joints and V-Grooves in railing shall be placed perpendicular or radial to the
of the median railing. See Structures Plans, Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets for locations.
5)
At begin or end approach slab extend slab at the median railing ends 3" (open side) as shown
to provide a base for casting of the railing.
6) Work this Sheet with Approach Slab Indexes as applicable.

7) Deck Expansion Joint at begin or end bridge shown. Deck Expansion Joints at Pier or
Intermediate Bents are similar.
8) Partial Plan Views shown are intended as guides only. See Structures Plans,
Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets for skew angles, joint orientation, dimensions and details.
9) If Welded Wire Reinforcement is used in lieu of conventional reinforcement, placement of the WWR
vertical elements shall be similar to those shown above. Clipping of horizontal elements to
facilitate placement shall be minimized where possible. Where clipping is required, supplement horizontal
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
14:
36 AM
elements by lap splicing deformed bars with an equivalent area of steel.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
421
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4

1
9 2"
1
2"
1'-4
ROADWAY
ON SLOPE
CROSS-SLOPE
1
3" 3 2" 3"
1
4"
1
4"
3
4"
AT CROWN
0% to 2%
90
90
90
90
2% to 6%
93
87
90
90
6% to 10%
96
84
90
90
MARK
SIZE
LENGTH
6'-1"
As Reqd.
5'-3"
D30.7 @
1'-0" Ctrs.
1
2"
714"
11"
A and B shall be 90 if Contractor elects to place

railing perpendicular to the deck, and approach slabs.
9"
1
2"
10
D30.7 @
2'
-5"
8"
Length as Required
D30.7 (Typ.)
934"
Contractor's option
(Typ. both legs)
1'-0" Ctrs.
3"
11"
D30.7
3
3 4"
3"
BAR 5S
6"
6"
9"
Portion of Bar 5W

1
2"
to be used
Piece No. 1
1
2"
45
(
Si
d
e
s
)
D30.7 (Lap Splice each
2'
-5"
(
Top)
2" Cover
3
"Co
v
e
r
"
-2
'
1
Piece No. 2
Field Bend
"
-2
'
1
.)
yp
(T
to maintain
cover
Field Cut &

Discard
5430'
Reinforcement Piece
9"
Welded Wire
9"
longitudinal wire)
(
Typ.
)
2'-0" Min. Lap
A or B
to match
No. 2
Typ. Bars
D30.7
6" M in. Em bedm ent
D30.7
D30.7
1'-0"
(Typ.)
SPLICE DETAIL
Optional Splice
512"
1'-412"
1
2"
(see Note 4)
1'-2
(Typ.)
STIRRUP BAR 5R
STIRRUP BAR 5W
TRANSITION STIRRUP BAR 5W

To Be Field Cut and Bent
(10 required per Railing
End Transition)
WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT NOTES:
Piece No. 1
1. At the option of the Contractor Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) may be utilized in lieu of all Bars 5R, 5S and 5W.
2. WWR at Railing End Transition shall be field bent inward as required (Pieces 1 & 2) to maintain cover. The top of
3. Bars 5S may be continuous or spliced at the construction joints. Bar splices for Bars 5S
Piece 1 shall be cut to allow overlap.

3. Place WWR panels so as to minimize the end overhang of longitudinal wires at Railing Ends and Open Joints.
4. At the Contractor's option, Bars 5W may be fabricated as a two piece bar with a 1'-2"
lap splice of the bottom legs.
Overhangs greater than 6" are not permitted.
Pre-cured Silicone
Sealant 4" wide (Typ.)

QUANTITIES
ITEM
11:
14:
37 AM


12/17/2015
UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete
CY/LF
0.120
Reinforcing Steel
LB/LF
23.29
(The above quantities are based on a crowned

roadway, with a 2% cross slope)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
421
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
" Intermediate Open
Deck Joint
Joint (see Notes)
spaced between open joints)
Coping (Typ.)
Gutter
Raised Sidewalk
4" Taper
top of Traffic Railing (Equally

Raised Sidewalk
B
Guardrail (When called for in Plans)
PLAN
C
BARRIER DELINEATOR
Begin or End Approach Slab or Begin

or End Railing on Retaining Wall
SPACING

Superstructure
Wall
Supports

Spacing " V-Groove
30'-0" Maximum
" Intermediate Open
Joint (see Notes)
See Detail "A"
top of Traffic Railing (Equally
for Pre-cured
Spacing (Ft.)
to Face of Railing
< 4'
40'
4' to 8'
80'
> than 8'
Approach Thrie-Beam Guardrail Transition on
Approach Slab shown, Retaining Wall similar
None Required
6" Min.
3"
1'
-3"
Silicone Sealant
Raised Sidewalk
10 "
BRIDGE NUMBER
3"
2"
NAME OR DATE
Raised Sidewalk
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab

Begin or End Bridge


CROSS REFERENCE:
For Section A-A, View B-B and View C-C, see Sheet 2.
For Detail "A" see Sheet 3.

This railing has been structurally evaluated to be equivalent or greater in strength to other safety shape
3'-0"
Taper (Typ.)
NAME, DATE, AND BRIDGE NUMBER : The Name and Bridge Number shall be placed on the Traffic Railing so
railings which have been crash tested to NCHRP Report 350 TL-4 Criteria.
as to be seen on the driver's right side when approaching the bridge. The Date shall be placed on the
driver's left side when approaching the bridge. The Name shall be as shown in the General Notes in the Structures
Plans. The Date shall be the year the bridge is completed. For a widening when the existing railing is removed, use
GUARDRAIL : For Guardrail connection details, see Index No. 400.
both the existing date and the year of the widening. Black plastic letters and figures 3" in height may be used, as
RAILINGS ON RETAINING WALLS : If the Traffic Railing is to be provided on a retaining wall, the railing
approved by the Engineer, in lieu of the letters and figures formed by " V-Grooves. V-Grooves shall be formed
section will be the same as shown on Index No. 422, Sheet 2. All other details such as the guardrail
transition attachment, the maximum spacing of the " open joints and " V-Groove shall apply.
by preformed letters and figures.

JOINTS : See Plans, Superstructure, Approach Slab and Retaining Walls Sheets for actual dimensions and
BARRIER DELINEATORS : Barrier Delineators shall meet Specification Section 993. Install Barrier
joint orientation. Provide open Railing Joints at Deck Expansion Joint locations matching the dimensions of the
Delineators on top of the Traffic Railing 2" from the face on the traffic side at the spacing shown
Deck Joint. For treatment of Railings on skewed bridges see Index No. 420.
in the table above. Barrier Delineator color (white or yellow) shall match the color of the near
edgeline. The cost of the Barrier Delineators shall be included in the Contract Unit Price for the
V-GROOVES : Construct " V-Grooves plumb and provide at 30'-0" maximum intervals as shown. Space
V-Grooves equally between " Open Joints and/or Deck Joints and at V-Groove locations on Retaining
(2) - Ends of approach slabs when adjacent to retaining walls and at expansion
joints on retaining wall junction slabs.
Wall footings.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
15:
53 AM
Traffic Railing.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC RAILING - (42" VERTICAL SHAPE)
NO.
422
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
1'-3"
2" Cover (Top)
1'-3"
Transition Bars 5X (Field Cut and Lap
Bars 5X @ 1'-0" sp. (Max.)

(Alternate with Bars 5T)
Splice for Railing End Transition, Shift and
2" Cover (Top)
Rotate as Required to Maintain Cover)
5" Cover (Bars 5T)
10"
Transition Bars 5T (Field Cut and Lap Splice

for Railing End Transition, Shift and Rotate
4" Taper
Bars 5S
Raised
Ft
/
2 Ft
0
.
as Required to Maintain Cover)

" VGroove
Sidewalk
Const.
Sidewalk
Const.
Joint
Slope Varies
Coping
Bridge
Bars 5S
Standard 180 Hook Top

Steel in Approach Slab
Edge of Approach
Approach Slab
8"
1'-2"
Slab (Coping)
Standard 180 Hook

Top Steel in Deck
Deck
Joint
Slope Varies
into Deck
Ft
/
2 Ft
0
.
2"
into App. Slab
= 1'-8"
(Alternate with Bars 5X)
Reqd.) (Typ.)
Bars 5T @ 1'-0" sp. (Max.)
Bend as
1034"
3" Cover
(Sides)
Bars 5S (Field
2 Sp. @
2'
-8"
10" = 2'
-6"
Bars 5S (Typ.)
3 Sp. @
3'
-6"
2"
Raised

3" Cover (Bars 5X)
1"
5"
312"
8"
1
4" 3 2"
Thrie-Beam Terminal
VIEW B-B
(Rotate bars to
(End View of Traffic Railing, Approach Slab shown,
maintain cover)
Retaining Wall Junction Slab similar)

6'-8"
SECTION A-A
SECTION THRU BRIDGE DECK SHOWN
4"
1'-8"

11"
Bars 5X @ 1'-0" sp. (Max.)

Field Bend
Bars 5T @ 1'-0" sp. (Max.)
Bars 5S as
1'-112"
1012"
9"
1112" 8"
612"
CROSS REFERENCE:
For location of Section A-A, View B-B
1
2 2"
and View C-C, see Sheet 1.

10"
Required
NOTES:
Begin placing Railing Bars 5T and 5X on Approach Slab
If required,
2'
-8"
to ensure placement of guardrail bolt holes.
adjustments to the bar spacing for Bars 5T and 5X shall be
3'
-6"
at the railing end and proceed toward Begin or End Bridge
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
10
and rotate Bars 5T and 5X as required to maintain cover

in Railing End Transition.
3
4"
made immediately adjacent to Begin or End Bridge. Shift
Omit Railing Taper, End Transition and Guardrail if Concrete

Barrier Wall is used beyond the Approach Slab or Retaining
Transition Bars 5T
Wall. See Structures Plans, Plan and Elevation Sheet and
Field Cut, Lap Splice
Roadway Plans. If Taper and Railing End Transition is omitted,
(2'-2" Min.)
extend Typical Section to end of the Approach Slab or limiting

station on Retaining Wall, and space Bars 5T and 5X at 1'-0"
(Typ.)
Transition Bars 5X
Approach Slab
Raised Sidewalk
11:
15:
54 AM
Field Cut & Lap

3'-0" Taper
Splice (2'-2" Min.)
VIEW C-C
12/17/2015
RAILING END TRANSITION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
(Guardrail Not Shown For Clarity)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
422
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3

A
ROADWAY
CROSS-SLOPE
SIZE
As Reqd.
10'-8"
6'-9"
LOW GUTTER
HIGH GUTTER
0% to 2%
90
90
2% to 6%
87
83
6% to 10%
84
96
LENGTH
Pre-cured Silicone
Sealant (4" wide)
6"
MARK
2"
Length as Required
DETAIL "A" - SECTION

BAR 5S

Discard


Field
Cut &
3
8"
Cut &
1'
-2"
Varies (
Field cut to
Field
m aintain cover. 10" M ax.

)
512"
4'
-634"
1'
-2"
Varies (
Field cut to
4'
-634"
m aintain cover. 10" M ax.

)
Discard
45
45
11"
11"
7"
Paint Recessed
9"
TRANSITION STIRRUP BARS 5T

To Be Field Cut (7 of each required
per Railing End Transition)
STIRRUP BAR 5T
Surfaces Black
TRANSITION STIRRUP BARS 5X

STIRRUP BAR 5X
SECTION THRU RECESSED "V" GROOVE

TO FORM INSCRIBED LETTERS AND FIGURES

3
4"
2. The 4'-6
vertical dimension shown for Bars 5T and 5X is based on a bridge deck with a
6" thick x 6' wide raised sidewalk at low side of deck, 2% deck cross slope and a counter 2%
raised sidewalk cross slope.
If the raised sidewalk thickness, width or cross slope vary from the
QUANTITIES
above amounts, adjust this dimension accordingly to achieve a 6" minimum embedment into the bridge
ITEM
deck. See Structures Plans, Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets.

3. The reinforcement for the railing on a retaining wall shall be the same as detailed above with
UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete
CY/LF
0.145
Reinforcing Steel
LB/LF
30.68
A = 90.
5. Bars 5S may be continuous or spliced at the construction joints. Bar splices for Bars 5S shall be
a minimum of 2'-2".
(The above quantities are based on a 6" thick x 6'
6. The Contractor may utilize Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) when approved by the Engineer. WWR
wide raised sidewalk at low side of deck, 2% deck
must consist of Deformed wire meeting the requirements of Specification Section 931.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
15:
55 AM
cross slope and counter 2% sidewalk cross slope)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
422
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
" Intermediate Open
End Detail (Typical except as noted)
Joint (see Notes)
Deck Joint
" V-Groove in
both faces and top

of Traffic Railing
Coping (Typ.)
For Railing End Transition see Railing End Detail
(see Notes)
(Typical except as noted)
B
4" Taper
For Railing End Transition see Railing
A
Gutter
Raised Sidewalk
Raised Sidewalk
B
Approach Slab
PLAN
(Rails, Posts and Reinforcing Steel not shown for clarity)
BARRIER DELINEATOR
or Begin or End Railing on
SPACING
Retaining Wall
Wall
Distance Spacing " V-Groove
30'-0" Maximum
Superstructure
Edge of Travel Lane
Spacing (Ft.)
to Face of Railing
8'-0" Maximum
for Special Height Bicycle

1'-0" Min. 1'-0" Min. Railing
7'-0" Max. 7'-0" Max.
1'-0"
1'-0"
Max.
Min.
(Typ. all posts)
Additional Rail required

1'-9" (Max.)
7'-0"
Post Spacing (Typ.)
< 4'
40'
4' to 8'
80'
at terminus of Bullet Railing

1'-9" (Max.)
Tapered End
Transition
Rail Splice/Exp. 1'-9" (12")

Assembly Spacing
When Railing is continuous

provide Tapered End Transition
Supports
> than 8'
(Typ.)
Rail Expansion Assembly
None Required
Rail Splice Assembly
1'-0"
1'-0"
(Min.)
Max.
Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing requires Post "C"
of Traffic Railing
Raised Sidewalk
See Detail "A"

for Pre-cured
Pavement Approach Slab
Silicone Sealant
6" Min.
Deck Joint
Bridge Deck

Begin or End Bridge
Shown, Rigid Pavement
Raised Sidewalk
(see Notes)
10 "
both faces and top
Notes)
NAME OR DATE
BRIDGE NUMBER
3"
" V-Groove in
" Intermediate
Open Joint (see
Approach Slab (Flexible
2"
5"
3"
(Min.)
Begin or End
Approach Slab
Approach Slab Similar)
3'-0"
Taper

This railing has been structurally evaluated to be equivalent or greater in strength to other safety shape
RAILINGS ON RETAINING WALLS : If the Traffic Railing is to be provided on a retaining wall, the railing section will be the
same as shown on Sheet 2. All other details such as the guardrail transition attachment, the maximum spacing of the
" open joints and " V-Groove shall apply.
NAME, DATE, AND BRIDGE NUMBER : The Name and Bridge Number shall be placed on the Traffic Railing so as to be seen on
GUARDRAIL : For Guardrail connection details, see Index 400.
the driver's right side when approaching the bridge. The Date shall be placed on the driver's left side when approaching the
PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE RAILING AND SPECIAL HEIGHT BICYCLE RAILING DETAILS : See Index 822
bridge. The Name shall be as shown in the General Notes of the Structures Plans. The Date shall be the year the bridge is
for Post, Rail and Rail Splice/Expansion Assembly fabrication and installation Details and Notes.
plastic letters and figures 3" in height may be used, as approved by the Engineer, in lieu of the letters and figures formed by
" V-Grooves.

BARRIER DELINEATORS: Barrier Delineators shall meet Specification Section 993. Install Barrier
11:
16:
31 AM
completed. For a widening when the existing railing is removed, use both the existing date and the year of the widening. Black
V-Grooves shall be formed by preformed letters and figures.
OPEN JOINTS : See Structures Plans, Superstructure, Approach Slab Sheets and Retaining Walls for actual dimensions and joint
Delineators on top of the Traffic Railing 2" from the face on the traffic side at the spacing shown
orientation. Provide open Traffic Railing Joints at Deck Expansion Joint locations matching the dimensions of the Deck Joint.
in the table above. Barrier Delineator color (white or yellow) shall match the color of the near
For treatment of Railings on skewed bridges see Index 420.
edgeline. The cost of the Barrier Delineators shall be included in the Contract Unit Price for the
Traffic Railing.

(2) - Ends of approach slabs when adjacent to retaining
walls and at expansion joints on retaining wall
junction slabs.
CROSS REFERENCE:
For Section A-A and
12/17/2015
View B-B, see Sheet 2.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
423
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
1'-1"
1'-1"
1
6 2"
612"
Additional Rail required for
Additional Rail required for

Special Height
Special Height
Special Height Bicycle Railing
Bicycle Railing
Bars 5T @ 1'-0" sp. (Max.)

3" Cover
Joint
Coping
Bars 5S
Deck
8"
1'-0"
9"
1
2"
1"
2"
(Trailing End only)

Bars 5S (Field Bend as
Required) (Typ.)
4" Taper
Bars 5T @ 1'-0" sp. (Max.)
2"
Ft
/
2 Ft
0
.
Const.
Joint
Raised
to maintain cover)
Sidewalk
Standard Hook Top
Bridge
Steel in Deck (Rotate
W-Beam Special
End Shoe Bolts
Slope Varies
Standard Hook Top
Bridge
Sidewalk
into Deck
Const.
2"
Ft
/
2 Ft
0
.
Thrie-Beam Terminal
(Sides)
Slope Varies
Raised
Bars 5T)
into Deck
Bars 5S (Typ.)
(Max.) (Alternate with
2" Cover (Top)
1034"
2"
1"
10" = 1'
-8" 4"
2 sp. @
2'
-8"
1
2"
9"
Bars 5T)
4"
(Max.) (Alternate with
Railing
10" = 1'
-8"
Bars 5X @ 1'-0" sp.

2" Cover (Top)
Pedestrian/Bicycle
Bars 5X @ 1'-0" sp.
2 sp. @
Railing
2'
-8"
Pedestrian/Bicycle
Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing
3'
-6" (
Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing)
4'
-0" (
Special H eight Bicycle Railing)
3'
-6" (
Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing)
4'
-0" (
Special H eight Bicycle Railing)
Bicycle Railing
Special Height Bicycle Railing
Bars 5S
Deck
8"
1'-0"
Steel in Deck (Rotate

to maintain cover)
Edge of Approach
Slab (Coping)
SECTION A-A
SECTION THRU BRIDGE DECK SHOWN
4"
VIEW B-B
1'-8"
APPROACH SLAB END VIEW

1
2"
1'-1
Bars 5T & 5X
Alternating at 6"
2@
5"
1
2"
6" 2 @
OF TRAFFIC RAILING
1
6 2"
Spacing Bars 5T
& Bars 5X
CROSS REFERENCE:
For location of Section A-A and View B-B
see Sheet 1.
NOTES:
Omit Railing End Taper and Guardrail if Concrete Barrier
Wall is used beyond the Approach Slab. See Structures
NOTE: For Post "B", Post "C" and Rail Details,
Bars 5S
see Index No. 822.
(Typ.)
Plans, Plan and Elevation Sheet and Roadway Plans. If

Railing End Taper is omitted, extend Typical Section to
Bars 5X
the end of the Approach Slab. Begin placing Railing Bars 5T

and 5X on Approach Slab at the railing end and proceed
Bars 5T
toward Begin or End Bridge to ensure placement of guardrail
Raised
bolt holes.
Sidewalk
If required, adjustments to the bar spacing for
Bars 5T and 5X shall be made immediately adjacent to

11:
16:
32 AM
Begin or End Bridge. Shift and rotate Bars 5T and 5X on

Approach Slab in end taper section as required to maintain
cover.
12/17/2015
Approach Slab
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
RAILING END DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
423
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3

A
ROADWAY
CROSS-SLOPE
SIZE
LOW GUTTER
HIGH GUTTER
0% to 2%
90
90
2% to 6%
87
93
6% to 10%
84
96
LENGTH
As Reqd.
9'-0"
5'-10"
Pre-cured Silicone
Sealant (4" wide)
6"
MARK
2"
1
2"

3'
-834"
3'
-834"
Length as Required


11"
"
BAR 5S
11"
5"
45
45
7"
Paint Recessed
Surfaces Black
STIRRUP BAR 5T
STIRRUP BAR 5X
SECTION THRU RECESSED "V" GROOVE

TO FORM INSCRIBED LETTERS AND FIGURES

3
4"
2. The 3'-8
vertical dimensions shown for Bars 5T and 5X are based on a bridge deck with a
6" thick x 6' wide raised sidewalk at low side of deck, 2% deck cross slope and a counter 2%
raised sidewalk cross slope.
If the raised sidewalk thickness, width or cross slopes vary from the
above amounts, adjust these vertical dimensions accordingly to achieve a 6" minimum embedment into
the bridge deck.

3. The reinforcement for the railing on a Retaining Wall shall be the same as detailed with A = 90.
QUANTITIES
5. Bars 5S may be continuous or spliced at the construction joints. Bar splices for Bars 5S shall be
a minimum of 2'-2".
ITEM
UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete
CY/LF
0.095
Reinforcing Steel
LB/LF
25.90
6. The Contractor may utilize Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) when approved by the Engineer. WWR
(The above quantities are based on a 6" thick x 6'

11:
16:
33 AM
wide raised sidewalk at low side of deck, 2% deck
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
cross slope and counter 2% sidewalk cross slope.)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
423
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
** " Intermediate
* Deck Expansion Joint
Open Joint
* See Structures Plans Superstructure
Coping
and Approach Slab Sheets for actual

dimensions and joint orientation.
Provide open Railing Joints at Deck
Expansion Joint locations matching
the dimension of the Deck Joint.
See Sheets 6 and 7 for details at
Skewed Deck Joints.
Gutter Line
Bridge Deck
PLAN OF RAILING ON BRIDGE DECK (WITHOUT SIDEWALK SHOWN, WITH SIDEWALK SIMILAR)
Approach Slab
Expansion Joint at End Bent, or Superstructure
(APPROACH SLAB WITHOUT GUARDRAIL WITH OR WITHOUT SIDEWALK SIMILAR)
Support (where Deck is not Continuous)
(Reinforcing Steel Not Shown For Clarity)
4" spacing,
Superstructure Support (Continuous Deck)
number varies,
Interior Post (Construction Joint
and Intermediate Joint
5 sp. Min.
Spacing Bars 4S1, 4V1 & 7P1
3"
permitted in Rail) (Typ.)
3"
5 sp. @
5 sp. @
5 sp. @
4"
4"
4"
4" spacing, number
Interior Post
3"
varies, 5 sp. Min.

6 sp. @ 11" (Typ.)
5 sp. @
3" Spacing Bars 4S1, 4V1 & 7P1 or 7P2 (As Shown)
or 7P2 (Place Bars 4S1 with

Bars 4V1 & 7P1 or 7P2)
4"
(Place Bars 4S1 with Bars 4V1 & 7P1 or 7P2)
** "
Deck Expansion Joint *
Intermediate
Bars 6R1 (Lap with Bars 6T,
Open Joint
Bars 6R1
2'-6" Min. Lap) (Typ.)
Bars 4S1 (Typ.)
See
Detail "A"
Curb (If Reqd.)
Bars 6T (Typ.
at End Post)
Bars 4S3
Bars 5U (Typ.
Bridge
Bars 4S2
Deck
2'-6" Min.
Bars 7P1 or 7P2 (NF)
as shown) omit
4" 6"
if sidewalk is
Bars 4R3
Bars 4S3
6"
2'-10"
2'-10"
6"
(With Curb Only)
Bars 4V1 (FF) (Typ.)

Spacing Bars 5U (Typ.)

Bars 4S2
Bars 4P5 @ 1'-0" Max.
behind railing
(Place Between Posts)
(Typical End Post
2'-6"
2'-6"
2'-6"
2'-6"
Without Curb)
BARRIER DELINEATOR
SPACING
** " Intermediate Open Joints in the Rail and
Post shall be provided at Substructure supports

where the Superstructure Deck is continuous.
5'-0"
5'-0"
(Typical Interior
(Typical Interior Post With Curb)
Post Without Curb)
5'-0" (Typical Opening)
2'-6" Min.
(With Curb shown,
7'-6" Max.
without Curb similar)
(Typical End Post

With Curb)

NOTE:
< 4'
40'
4' to 8'
APPROACH SLAB WITHOUT GUARDRAIL OR ADJACENT TO ROADWAY BARRIER SIMILAR)
80'
> than 8'

This railing has been structurally evaluated to be equivalent or greater in strength to other
Spacing (Ft.)
to Face of Railing
(BRIDGE DECK SHOWN,
End Post dimensions for a

given span shall match.
Begin or End Bridge
(With Curb Only)
7'-6" Max.
None Required
NOTES:
RETAINING WALL : If the Traffic Railing Barrier is to be provided on a
(NF) means Near Face, (FF) means Far Face.
retaining wall, the railing sections will be the same as on Sheets 3

and 4. See Retaining Wall Plans for payment.
CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL : See Structures Plans General Notes.
CROSS REFERENCES:
NAME, DATE AND BRIDGE NUMBER : The Name and Bridge Number
For Sections see Sheets 3 and 4.
AGGREGATE LIMITATION: The aggregate used in the concrete mix shall be a #67 aggregate.
shall be placed on the Traffic Railing so as to be seen on the
GUARDRAIL : For Guardrail connection details see Index No. 400.
driver's right side when approaching the bridge. The Name shall be as
For Quantities and Quantity Breakdown
SUPERELEVATED BRIDGES : At the option of the Contractor the Traffic Railing on
shown in the General Notes in the Structures Plans. The Date shall be
superelevated bridges may be constructed perpendicular to the roadway surface. The
placed on the driver's left side when approaching the bridge. The Date
cost of all modifications will be at the Contractor's expense.
shall be the year the bridge is completed. For a widening when the existing
see Sheet 5.
railing is removed, use both the existing date and the year of the widening.
11:
17:
00 AM
Black plastic letters and figures 3" in height may be used, as approved by
the Engineer, in lieu of the letters and figures formed by "
V-Grooves.
V-Grooves shall be formed by preformed letters and figures.

BARRIER DELINEATORS: Barrier Delineators shall meet Specification Section 993.
Install Barrier Delineators on top of the Traffic Railing 2" from the face on
12/17/2015
the traffic side at the spacing shown in the table above. Barrier Delineator color
(white or yellow) shall match the color of the near edgeline. The cost of the Barrier
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
Delineators shall be included in the Contract Unit Price for the Traffic Railing.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC RAILING - (CORRAL SHAPE)
NO.
424
SHEET
NO.
1of 7
* Deck Expansion
Joint
Front Face of Backwall & Begin or End Bridge
Begin or End
Approach Slab
Bridge
Gutter Line
1
2"
Deck
1
2"
Taper
Taper
Approach Slab
Guardrail (Thrie-Beam attachment
shown, W-Beam similar)
PLAN OF RAILING WITH GUARDRAIL ON APPROACH SLAB WITHOUT
* See Structures Plans, Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets for
** Begin placing Railing Bars 7P1 or 7P2 and 4V on Approach Slab at the barrier end
SIDEWALK (APPROACH SLAB WITH ADJACENT SIDEWALK SIMILAR)
actual dimensions and joint orientation. Open railing Joints at Deck
and proceed toward Begin or End Bridge to ensure placement of guardrail bolt holes
(Reinforcing Steel Not Shown For Clarity)
Expansion Joint locations shall match the dimension of the Deck Joint.
If required, adjustments to the bar spacing for Bars 7P1 or 7P2 and 4V shall be
For treatment of Barriers on skewed bridges see Sheets 6 and 7.
30'-0" (min.) to 40'-0" Approach Slab (Measured Along Gutter Line)

1
2"
2 @ 7
Bars 4S1 sp. @ 1'-4" ; Bars 4V, 7P1 & 7P2 sp. @ 8"
6"
4"
Spacing Bars 4S1, 4V & 7P1 **
* Deck Expansion
Joint
or 7P2 (As Shown)
1
14'-4 4"
2'-0" Gap
6" Min.
5"
Bars 4S1 (Placed with Bars 7P1
(Field Cut)
Field Cut Bars 6R1 8'-0" Long (Centered
or 7P2 & 4V) (Typ.)
about Guardrail Bolt Connection)
Bars 6R1
Guardrail (Thrie-Beam attachment
2"
NAME OR DATE
BRIDGE NUMBER
3"
3"
shown, W-Beam similar)
Bars 7P1 or 7P2 (NF)
Bridge
Bars 4V (FF)
Deck
(Typ.)
*** NOTE:
Front Face of
Backwall &
Begin or

and Field Bend
Begin or End
For curb details and reinforcement
Approach Slab
of Typical End Section, Typical
as Necessary at
3'-0"
End Bridge
Field Cut Bar 6R1
Interior Section and Posts with
3'-0"
or without curbs see "Elevation
Taper (Typ.)
Taper
*** 2'-6" Min.

7'-6" Max.
Taper
5'-0" Typical Opening
of Inside Face of Railing"

Sheet 1.
Approach Slab End Section ~ 22'-6" Min., 27'-6" Max.
Typical End Post

3
8"
ELEVATION OF INSIDE FACE OF RAILING WITH GUARDRAIL ON APPROACH SLABS 40'-0" OR LESS ALONG GUTTER (WITHOUT CURB SHOWN, WITH CURB SIMILAR)
Approach Slabs greater than 40'-0" (Measured Along Gutter Line)
Interior Post
Varies
*** 10'-0" Min., 15'-0" Max.
Approach Slab End Section ~ 22'-6" Min., 27'-6" Max.
* Deck Expansion
Joint
*** 2'-6" Min.
*** 5'-0" Typical Opening
*** 5'-0"
Paint Recessed
Typical Interior Post
7'-6" Max.
3'-0"
3'-0"
Taper
Taper
Typical End Post
45
45
(See Elevation View above for Reinforcement)
Surfaces Black

V-GROOVE TO FORM INSCRIBED
LETTERS AND FIGURES
Begin or End
Approach Slab
11:
17:
04 AM
NOTES:
Bridge
(NF) means Near Face.
Deck
(FF) means Far Face.
CROSS REFERENCES:
For Sections see Sheets 3 and 4.
Front Face of
Backwall & Begin
or End Bridge
For Quantities and Quantity Breakdown

see Sheet 5.
ELEVATION OF INSIDE FACE OF RAILING WITH GUARDRAIL ON APPROACH SLABS GREATER THAN 40'-0" ALONG GUTTER (WITHOUT CURB SHOWN, WITH CURB SIMILAR)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
424
SHEET
NO.
2 of 7
1'-612"
Edge of
2" Cover
612" 3"
3" 2 sp. @
1'
-7"
2"
Cover
Bars 5U
Bars 7P1 (Typ.)
Bars
Bars 7P1 (Typ.)
4S1
Bars 6R1
Const. Jt. Required
1
2"
Const. Jt.
Curb
Required
1'-0
2" Cover
(END POST SHOWN, INTERIOR POST SIMILAR)

(Bars R, S and T not shown for clarity)
Bars 4V1
2"
Bars 5R2
NOTES:
1) Shift deck and approach slab transverse reinforcement minimally
to allow placement of Bars 7P & 4V.
Embedment
Bars 5U
8" Min. Bridge Deck
Bars 5R2
(see Section C-C
8" Min. Bridge Deck
(see Note 2)
Coping or Edge of
Approach Slab
Deck Expansion Joint
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF BRIDGE DECK AND APPROACH SLAB
6"
6"
Curb
Gutter Line
Bars 4P5
Bars 4S2 (End Post)
(
M ax.
)
Bars 4V1 (Typ.)
Bridge Deck
Bars 4S3 (Interior Post)
*Bars 4R3
Bars 4V1 (Typ.)
Rail
7"
3"
Overlay
Post
3 sp.
Asphalt
V-Groove
2" Cover
1
4"
1'
-1"
Future
3
4"
1
2"
(Rail)
3" 3"
1
4"
Bars 6T (End Post)
reinforcement
1'-5"
1'
-1"
Bars 6R1 (Interior Post)
2'
-6" (
M in. with
Bars 7P1
2" Cover
2" Cover
2 sp. @
1'
-7"
612" 3"
Bars 4S1
Gutter Line
M easured along
(Post)
Approach Slab
Approach Slab
Reinforcement
Gutter Line
2'
-8"
Gutter Line
curb is not present.
1
2"
1'-0
(
M ax.
)
M easured along
Overlay
2"
* Omit Bars 4R3 when
(Rail)
1
2"
2'
-8"
2'
-6" (
M in. with
Asphalt
1'-5"
Bridge Deck
Coping
1
1'-6 2"
Future
1
1 2"
Gutter Line
Bars 4R3
(see Section C-C
Approach Slab
for Approach Slab)
1
2"
2) For decks to 8
Coping or Edge
place Bars 7P1 & 4V with the bottom mat of
reinforcement as shown in Section A-A. For decks and slabs thicker
of Approach Slab
for Approach Slab)
than 812" place Bars 7P1 and 4V with 6" embedment. At skewed
SECTION A-A (WITH CURB SHOWN,
SECTION B-B (WITH CURB SHOWN,
WITHOUT CURB SIMILAR)
joints, place Bars 7P3 and 4V with 5" embedment.
TYPICAL SECTIONS THRU RAILING (BRIDGE DECK SHOWN,
Gutter Line
Bars 4S1
2" Cover
1
2"
Const. Jt. Required
Asphalt
6" Embedment
(see Note 2)
Edge of
3
4"
3
4"
1
2"
SECTION C-C
2. Apply sealant prior to any Class V finish coating and
Bend as Required
remove all curing compound and loose material from
in Taper)
Taper
the surface prior to application of bonding agent.
3
4"
Const. Jt. Required
2 sp. @
3. The cost of the Pre-cured Silicone Sealant shall be

6" Embedment
included in the Contract Unit Price for the Traffic
(see Note 2)
Railing.
Edge of
Approach
Bars 5R2
Section 932.
Bars 6R1 (Field
2" (
M ax.
)
11:
17:
05 AM
2" (
M ax.
)
Overlay
Silicone Sealant in accordance with Specification
V-Groove
Asphalt
Overlay
Approach
Slab (Coping)

AT INTERMEDIATE OPEN JOINT WITH CURB
Slab (Coping)
Bars 5R2
Bars 4V1
END VIEW D-D
Bars 4V1
TYPICAL SECTIONS THRU RAILING END SECTIONS ON APPROACH SLAB WITH GUARDRAIL
CROSS REFERENCES:
For Locations of Sections and Detail "A", see Sheets 1 and 2.
For Quantities and Rebar Details see Sheet 5.
(APPROACH SLAB (FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT APPROACHES) SHOWN, APPROACH SLAB (RIGID PAVEMENT APPROACHES) SIMILAR)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
1'
-7"
as Required in Taper)
3
4"
10
Taper
Overlay
Asphalt
Bars 6R1 (Field Bend
2 sp.
1
2"
1. At Intermediate Open Joints in Curb Sections, seal

the lower 6" portion of the open joint with Pre-cured
1'
-1"
Future
** Bars 7P1
Bars 6R1 (Typ.)
1
2 2"
3
4"
V-Groove
6
@
2 sp.
3
4"
1
2"
3
4"
2"
2" Cover
2'
-8"
1 each face (placed

to anchor bolts)
7P1
2'
-6" (
M in. with
2 sp. @
** Bars
1
6 2"
1'
-7"
Bar 6R1 ~ 8'-0" long
Bars 6R1 (Typ.)
1'
-1"
Overlay
3
4"
2" Cover
2'
-8"
2'
-6" (
M in. with
Asphalt
Future
3"
clearance.
Sealant (4" wide)

1
2"
1'-5"
3"
Bars 4S1
Slab 3'-0" Tapers to maintain
Pre-cured Silicone
6"
1
2"
1'-5"
1
2"
1'-6
Gutter Line
M easured along
** Shift Bars 7P1 in Approach
Gutter Line
2" Cover
Gutter Line
M easured along
APPROACH SLAB SIMILAR)

1
2"
1'-6
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
424
SHEET
NO.
3 of 7
Bars 5R2
Embedment
(see Note 3)
(see Note 2)
Sidewalk
3"
2" Cover
612"
3" 2 sp. @
Bars 7P2
Bars 4V1
Bars 4V1 (Typ.)
(Typ.)
4S1
Gutter Line
Bars 6R1
7"
Const. Jt. Required
2"
Bars
1'-012"
Const. Jt.
Curb
Bars 4P5
Bars 4S2 (End Post)
Bars 4V1
Bars 7P1
1'
-7"
Bars 4S3 (Interior Post)
2"
Cover
Bars 7P2
Required
Bars 7P1
6"
6"
*Bars 4R3
Rail
3" 3"
Overlay
Post
1'
-1"
2" Cover
Curb
3"
Asphalt
V-Groove
2'
-8"
Future
3
4"
2'
-6" (
M in. with
1
4"
Const. Jt. Permitted
Bars 6T (End Post)
Cover
3 sp.
1'
-1"
214"
curb is not present.
Bars 6R1 (Interior Post)
2"
2 sp. @
1'
-7"
612"
Bars 4S1
reinforcement
(Rail)
Gutter Line
2" Cover
Bars 7P1
(
M ax.
)
3"
(Post)
* Omit Bars 4R3 when
Approach Slab
Reinforcement
Sidewalk
1'-5"
Gutter Line
2" Cover
Gutter Line
1
2"
1'-0
(
M ax.
)
Overlay
2"
M easured along
M easured along
1
2"
2'
-8"
2'
-6" (
M in. with
Gutter Line
Bridge Deck
Asphalt
Sidewalk
Future
1'-5"
Bridge Deck
Bars 7P2
8" Min. Bridge Deck
(see Note 3)
(see Section C-C
Bars 5R2
Bars 4R3
Approach Slab
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF BRIDGE DECK

AND APPROACH SLAB WITH SIDEWALK
for Approach Slab)
(Bars R, S and T not shown for clarity)
SECTION A-A (WITH CURB SHOWN,
SECTION B-B
RAILING ADJACENT TO SIDEWALK NOTES:

1) End Post detailed above, Interior Post and Approach Slab End Section similar.
TYPICAL SECTIONS THRU RAILING ON BRIDGE DECK WITH SIDEWALK (SHOWN)
2) For decks to 812" place Bars 7P1 and 7P2 and 4V with the bottom mat of
(RAILING ON APPROACH SLAB SIMILAR)
Gutter Line
as Required in Taper)
Const. Jt. Required
Asphalt
3"
2" Cover
612"
2 sp. @
3
4"
3
4"
3
4"
Overlay
Bars 6R1 (Typ.)
10
Asphalt
Bars 6R1 (Field Bend
2" Cover
V-Groove
Bars 6R1 (Field
1
2"
Bend as Required
in Taper)
Taper
3
4"
Taper
1
2"
placement of Bars 7P & 4V.
Future
5) Shift deck and approach slab transverse reinforcement minimally to allow

Bars 4S1
V-Groove
or 7P2.
Gutter Line
2 sp.
3
4"
3
4"
3
4"
required, at Intermediate Post 6 each required.
Sidewalk
4) Reverse direction of every other Bar 4V1 to match direction of Bars 7P1
1
2"
to anchor bolts)
1'-5"
1'
-7"
1 each face (placed
place Bars 7P1 and 7P2 and 4V with 6" embedment.
3) Alternate Bars 7P1 and 7P2 at each post. At End Posts 3 each (Min.)
1'
-1"
2 sp. @
Bar 6R1 ~ 8'-0" long
2'
-6" (
M in. with
234"
Bars 6R1 (Typ.)

2 sp.
M easured along
clearance.
1
2"
2'
-8"
3"
612"
1'
-7"
Slab 3'-0" Tapers to maintain
2" Cover
Gutter Line
Bars 4S1
** Shift Bars 7P in Approach
2" Cover
2'
-8"
Overlay
Sidewalk
Gutter Line
1
2"
Asphalt
1'-5"
1'
-1"
Future
2'
-6" (
M in. with
M easured along
reinforcement as shown in Section A-A. For decks and slabs thicker than
Const. Jt. Required
Asphalt
2" (
M ax.
)
Bars 4V1
Overlay
6" Embedment
(see Note 2)
Bars 4V1
2" (
M ax.
)
Overlay
6" Embedment
(see Note 2)
11:
17:
05 AM
CROSS REFERENCES:
For Locations of Sections see Sheets 1 and 2.
** Bars 7P1
Bars 5R2
(see Note 3)
** Bars 7P1
** Bars 7P2
Bars 5R2
(see Note 3)
** Bars 7P2
(see Note 3)
SECTION C-C
12/17/2015
For Quantities and Rebar Details see Sheet 5.
(see Note 3)
END VIEW D-D
TYPICAL SECTIONS THRU RAILING END SECTION ON APPROACH SLAB WITH SIDEWALK AND GUARDRAIL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
(APPROACH SLAB (FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT APPROACHES) SHOWN, APPROACH SLAB (RIGID PAVEMENT APPROACHES) SIMILAR)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
424
SHEET
NO.
4 of 7

812"
4'-8"
5'-4"
1'-0"
14.82
P3
7'-2"
14.65
*** P4
7'-3"
14.82
* P5
2'-11"
1.94
R1
As Reqd.
1.5 (LB/LF)
R2
As Reqd.
1.04 (LB/LF)
* R3
As Reqd.
0.67 (LB/LF)
** S1
5'-0"
3.34
Varies
Varies
** S2
6'-3" Min.
4.18 Min.
16'-3" Max.
10.86 Max.
Bars 6R1, 5R2 & 4R3 *
Length As Required
Bars 6R1, 5R2 & 4R3
1
2"
7'-3"
10
Stirrup Bar 4S3
Stirrup Bar 6T
Stirrup Bar 4S1
8"
1
2"
Stirrup Bar 4S2
2'-3"
1"
2'
2'
-1"
2'-0"
2'-1"
7"
3
4"
7"
11'-4"
17.02
4'-8"
4.87
V1
3'-2"
2.12
*** V2
3'-6"
2.34
Stirrup Bar 5U
2'
-9"
2'
-1"
7.52
2'
-10"
11'-3"
2'
-10"
2'
-1"
Bar 4P5 *
** S3
Pin
4"
P2
8"
Parallel to Joint
Top of C-I-P Concrete

Retaining Wall
* Bars 4P5 and 4R3 are to be used with
Line Perpendicular or
a curb only.
180 - A
** Bend Bars 4S1, 4S2 & 4S3 around a
Radial to Gutter
Skew Angle (measured in

the horizontal plane, see
#3 Stirrup Pin.
3'
-6"
15.00
Em bedm ent Length
7'-4"
10"
7
"
P1
812"
LB/BAR
7'
-2" M ax.
LENGTH
Varies ~ 2'
-2" M in.
SIZE
1'
-3"
MARK
Superstructure Sheets)
Concrete Retaining Walls.
Bar 7P3 (Requires

Bar 7P1
Bar 7P2
3 Dimensional Bend)
A
7"
shall be the same as detailed above for a 8" deck with A = 90,
where applicable. If bottom horizontal legs of Bars 7P1, 7P3 and 4V1
prohibit placement, Bars 7P4 and 4V2 may be substituted for Bars 7P1,
7P3 and 4V1 as shown.
3. All reinforcing steel at the open joints shall have a 2" minimum cover
unless otherwise noted.
4. At Construction Joints Bars 6R1, 5R2 and 4R3 may be continuous or
spliced. Where bars are spliced provide a 2'-6" Min. lap length for
LOW
SIDE
SIDE
CROSS-SLOPE
0% to 2%
90
90
2% to 6%
93
87
6% to 10%
96
84
Bar 4V1
Top of C-I-P
Bar 4V2 ***
Concrete
Retaining
Wall
A shall be 90 if Contractor elects
to place Railing Perpendicular to
the Deck.
Bar 6R1, a 2'-0" Min. lap length for Bars 5R2 and a 1'-3" Min. lap
2'
-6"
length for Bars 4R3.

5. The skew angle for Bars 7P3 may vary from joint to joint and side
12/17/2015
11:
17:
06 AM
to side, see Structures Plans, Superstructure Sheets for details.
4'
-10"
2. The reinforcement for the railing on a C-I-P Concrete Retaining Wall
HIGH
SIDEWALK
Em bedm ent Length
ROADWAY OR
2'
-1"
1'
-5"
2'
-7"
Structures Plans,
*** Bars 7P4 & 4V2 are to be used on C-I-P
ITEM
CONCRETE
REBAR
QUANTITY
QUANTITY
(CY)
(LB)
Typical 10'-0" Section w/Curb
1.13
451
Typical 10'-0" Section w/o Curb
1.03
428
Approach Slab with Guardrail End Section
0.14
44
(per LF)
(per LF)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
Bar 7P4 ***
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
424
SHEET
NO.
5 of 7
Bridge Deck
2'-6" Min., 7'-6" Max.
Transverse
Reinforcement
2'-6" Min., 7'-6" Max.
End Post
Coping
End Post
2'-6" Min., 7'-6" Max.
2'-6" Min., 7'-6" Max.
End Post
Bars 4V1 (Typ.)
End Post
Bridge Deck Transverse
Bars 4V1
Gutter Line
Bars 7P3
Sidewalk
Reinforcement
Approach Slab
reinforcement
Bars 7P2
Bars 7P1
Bars 7P2
~
Bars 4V1 (Typ.)
~
Deck Expansion
Bars 4V1 (Typ.)
Approach Slab
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Joint
reinforcement
Gutter Line

- SKEW ANGLE GREATER THAN 15 DEGREES
Bars 7P1
Bars 7P1
NOTES:
1) Railing expansion joint shall match the deck expansion joint which shall be turned perpendicular or radial to the
gutter line.
See Structures Plans, Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets for details.
2) Bars 4S1 (not shown) shall be placed perpendicular or radial to the gutter.
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
BRIDGE DECK AND APPROACH SLAB WITHOUT GUARDRAIL ATTACHED (SHOWN):

3) End Post & Approach Slab End Section - Place Bars 7P1 & 4V1 in obtuse corners of intersection of deck joint
and gutter line. Place Bars 7P3 & 4V1 in acute corners of intersection of deck joint and gutter line as required.
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF BRIDGE DECK AND APPROACH SLAB WITH SIDEWALK
Interior Post - use Bars 7P1 and 4V1 placed with bottom mat of reinforcement. Shift deck or slab reinforcement
- 0 DEGREE SKEW ANGLE
minimally to allow proper placement of Bars 7P and 4V and to facilitate placement of concrete.
APPROACH SLAB WITH GUARDRAIL ATTACHED (NOT SHOWN):
4) Place Bars 7P1 & 4V1 in obtuse corners of intersection of deck joint and gutter line and Bars 7P3 & 4V1 in
acute corners of intersection of deck joint and gutter line as required. Shift deck or slab reinforcement minimally
to allow proper placement of Bars 7P & 4V and to facilitate placement of concrete.
NOTES:
5) Begin placing Railing Bars 7P & 4V on Approach Slab at the railing end and proceed toward Begin or End Bridge
to ensure placement of guardrail bolt holes. If required, adjustments to the bar spacing for Bars 7P & 4V shall be
2'-6" Min., 7'-6" Max.

End Post
Coping
1) Alternate Bars 7P1 with Bars 7P2 and reverse direction of every other Bar 4V1 as detailed
above to facilitate placement of concrete.
2) Shift deck transverse reinforcement minimally to allow placement of Bars 7P & 4V.
2'-6" Min., 7'-6" Max.

End Post
NOTES:
1) Railing expansion joint shall match the deck expansion joint which shall be turned perpendicular or radial
Bars 4V1 (Typ.)
to the gutter line. See Structures Plans, Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets for details.
3) Bars 7P & 4V in the Approach Slab may be rotated to match Approach Slab reinforcement or placed
perpendicular or radial to the gutter line.
4) Rotate vertical Bars 7P & 4V to match bridge deck reinforcement. Shift deck & slab transverse
reinforcement to allow proper placement of Bars 7P & 4V and to facilitate placement of concrete.
Gutter Line
Approach Slab
Bridge Deck

5) Begin placing Railing Bars 7P & 4V on Approach Slab at the railing end and proceed toward Begin
or End Bridge to ensure placement of guardrail bolt holes. If required, adjustments to the bar spacing for
Bars 7P & 4V shall be made immediately adjacent to Begin or End Bridge.
Bridge Deck
6) Bars 7P at end of the railing shall be field cut and shifted to maintain clearance, see Railing End Taper
Transverse
Bars 7P1 (Typ.)
Reinforcement
Detail Sheet 2 for similar details.
Approach Slab
reinforcement
11:
17:
07 AM
Deck Expansion
Joint
GENERAL NOTES:
1) Deck Expansion Joint at begin or end bridge shown. Deck Expansion Joints at Pier or Intermediate Bents are similar.
- SKEW ANGLE 15 DEGREES OR LESS

12/17/2015
2) Partial Plan Views shown are intended as guides only. See Structures Plans, Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
for skew angles, joint orientation, dimensions and details.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
424
SHEET
NO.
6 of 7
2'-6" Min., 7'-6" Max.
2'-6" Min., 7'-6" Max.
End Post
End Post
2'-6" Min., 7'-6" Max.
Bridge Deck
End Post
Transverse
Deck Expansion
Reinforcement
Joint
2'-6" Min., 7'-6" Max.

End Post
Deck Expansion
Sidewalk
Sidewalk
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Bars 7P2
reinforcement
Joint
Bars 7P2
Bars 7P2
Bars 7P2
Bars 4V1
Bars 4V1
Bars 4V1 (Typ.)
Bars 4V1 (Typ.)
Approach Slab
Gutter Line
Gutter Line
Bars 7P1
Bars 7P1
Bars 7P1
Bars 7P1
Bridge Deck
Transverse
Reinforcement
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Place 1 ~ Bar 4V1 in each corner as

Approach Slab
reinforcement
shown (maintain clearance to bar)
- SKEW ANGLE 15 DEGREES OR LESS
- SKEW ANGLE GREATER THAN 15 DEGREES
NOTES:
1) Railing ends at deck expansion joints shall follow the deck joint with allowance for joint movement. Expansion
joint at the inside face of parapet shall be turned perpendicular or radial to this line.
Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets for details.

3) Edge of Approach Slab adjacent to the roadway shall follow end of railing, Bars 7P at end of the railing shall be
Approach Slab
reinforcement
field cut and shifted to maintain clearance, see detail bottom left this sheet for similar details.
Approach Slab

4) Alternate Bars 7P1 with Bars 7P2 and reverse direction of every other Bar 4V1 to facilitate placement of concrete.
5) Bars 7P & 4V shall be rotated to match bridge deck reinforcement.
Shift deck transverse reinforcement minimally
to allow placement of Bars 7P & 4V.

Begin or End
6) Railing End Post and reinforcement detailed above. Railing Interior Post reinforcement similar.
Approach Slab
Bars 7P2
7) Begin placing Railing Bars 7P & 4V on Approach Slab at the railing end and proceed toward Begin or End Bridge
to ensure placement of guardrail bolt holes. If required, adjustments to the bar spacing for Bars 7P & 4V shall be made
Field Cut Bar 7P at Begin
Bars 4V1
immediately adjacent to Begin or End Bridge.
or End Approach Slab and

shift to maintain cover in
4"
Tapered End Section
NOTES:
1) Railing ends at deck expansion joints shall follow the deck joint with allowance for joint movement. Expansion joint at the inside
face of parapet shall be turned perpendicular or radial to this line. See Structures Plans, Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets
Edge of Approach Slab to follow edge of railing
Gutter Line
(Typ. with or without Guardrail attached)
BRIDGE DECK AND APPROACH SLAB WITHOUT GUARDRAIL ATTACHED (NOT SHOWN):
Guardrail Bolts
3) Deck transverse reinforcement may be shifted minimally as required to allow proper placement of Bars 7P & 4V and to facilitate
3'-0"
Bars 7P1
for details.
placement of concrete. Bars 7P1 & 4V1 or 7P2 & 4V1 shall be used on opposing sides of the joint depending on the direction of the
Taper
skew, see Detail above. Approach Slab reinforcement may be shifted if conflicts occur.
4) Interior Post - alternate Bars 7P1 with Bars 7P2 and reverse direction of every other Bar 4V1 to facilitate placement of concrete.
11:
17:
08 AM
5) End Post - alternate Bars 7P1 with Bars 7P2 and reverse direction of Bars 4V1 (as detailed) where possible.
APPROACH SLAB WITH GUARDRAIL ATTACHED (SHOWN):
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW AT BEGIN OR END APPROACH SLAB WITH
6) Use Bars 7P2 and reverse direction of Bars 4V1 where skew restricts use of Bars 7P1 & 4P1.
7) Begin placing Railing Bars 7P & 4V on Approach Slab at the railing end and proceed toward Begin or End Bridge to ensure
SIDEWALK AND RAILING WITH GUARDRAIL ATTACHED
placement of guardrail bolt holes. If required, adjustments to the bar spacing for Bars 7P & 4V shall be made immediately
adjacent to Begin or End Bridge.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
- SKEW ANGLE GREATER THAN 15 DEGREES SHOWN, 15 DEGREES OR LESS SIMILAR
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
424
SHEET
NO.
7 of 7
" Intermediate Open
(Typical except as noted)
Joint (see Notes)

Edge of Approach
Slab (Coping)
View C-C and Detail "A"
both faces and
(Typical except as noted )
top of Traffic
Coping (Typ.)
For Railing End Transition see
" V-Groove in
Railing
Gutter Line
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Approach Slab

Trailing End, W-Beam Guardrail
PLAN
Connection (shown), Thrie-Beam
Guardrail Connection (similar)
SPACING
Superstructure
Supports
Distance -
Wall
Spacing " V-Groove (see Notes)
30'-0" Maximum
Edge of Travel Lane
Spacing (Ft.)
" Intermediate Open
" V-Groove in
See Detail "B"
for Pre-cured
top of Traffic
6" Min.
Railing
2"
3"
3" 1'
-3"
Silicone Sealant
both faces and
or Begin or End Railing on

Retaining Wall
to Face of Railing
Joint (see Notes)
BARRIER DELINEATOR
< 4'
40'
4' to 8'
80'
> than 8'
None Required
NAME OR DATE
BRIDGE NUMBER

Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge

Transition (When called for

in Plans)

CROSS REFERENCE:
For Section A-A, End View B-B and Detail "A"
(Railing on Bridge Deck and Approach Slab shown, Railing on Retaining Wall Similar)
This railing has been structurally evaluated to be equivalent or greater in strength to other safety shape railings
which have been crash tested to NCHRP Report 350 TL-5 Criteria.
see Sheet 2.
For Detail "B" see Sheet 3.
NAME, DATE, AND BRIDGE NUMBER : The Name and Bridge Number shall be placed on the Traffic Railing so as to be
seen on the driver's right side when approaching the bridge. The Date shall be placed on the driver's left side when
approaching the bridge. The Name shall be as shown in the General Notes in the Structures Plans. The Date shall be
the year the bridge is completed. For a widening when the existing railing is removed, use both the existing date and the
SUPERELEVATED BRIDGES : At the option of the Contractor the Traffic Railing on superelevated bridges may be
year of the widening. Black plastic letters and figures 3" in height may be used, as approved by the Engineer, in lieu of
constructed perpendicular to the roadway surface. If an adjoining railing is constructed plumb, transition the
end of the Traffic Railing from perpendicular to plumb over a minimum distance of 20'-0". The cost of all
modifications will be at the Contractor's expense.
the letters and figures formed by " V-Grooves. V-Grooves shall be formed by preformed letters and figures.
JOINTS : See Structures Plans, Superstructure, Approach Slab and Retaining Walls Sheets for actual dimensions and
joint orientation. Provide open Railing Joints at Deck Expansion Joint locations matching the dimensions of the Deck Joint.
GUARDRAIL : For Guardrail connection details, see Index No. 400.
For treatment of Railings on skewed bridges see Index No. 420.
RAILINGS ON RETAINING WALLS : If the Traffic Railing is to be provided on a retaining wall, the railing section
will be the same as shown on Sheet 2. All other details such as the guardrail transition attachment, the
maximum spacing of the " open joints and " V-groove shall apply.
11:
17:
38 AM
Provide " Intermediate Open Joints shall be provided at :

(2) - Ends of approach slabs when adjacent to retaining
walls and at expansion joints on retaining wall

junction slabs.
BARRIER DELINEATORS: Barrier Delineators shall meet Specification Section 993. Install Barrier Delineators on top of
the Traffic Railing 2" from the face on the traffic side at the spacing shown in the table above. Barrier Delineator color
(white or yellow) shall match the color of the near edgeline. The cost of the Barrier Delineators shall be included in the
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
Contract Unit Price for the Traffic Railing
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
425
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
W-Beam or Thrie-Beam
4" 4"
1'-8"
Guardrail Bolts (Trailing End)

1'-1
Bars 8S1 and 5S2 (Bottom)
W-Beam or Thrie-Beam
Guardrail Bolts (Trailing End)
1
2"
(Typ.)
Field Cut
Coping
1
2"
1
2"
1'-1
Splice (Typ. Unless Otherwise Noted)
of Bars 5V
1'-8"
Transition Bars 5P Field Cut & Lap
*** Bundle 2 sets

*** Bars 5V
4" 4"
End Bar 5V
Rotate Transition
NOTE:
Bars 5P as
Coping
1
2"
Begin placing Railing Bars 5P and 5V on Approach
Bars 8T1
required
Slab at the railing end and proceed toward Begin or
1
2"
5P
1'
-8
1'
-8
If required, adjustments to the bar spacing for Bars 5P

and 5V shall be made immediately adjacent to Begin or
1'
-3
1
2"
Bar
1'
-3
1
2"
1
2"
End Bridge to ensure placement of guardrail bolt holes.
End Bridge. Shift and rotate Bars 5P and 5V (see

Detail "A") as required to maintain cover in Railing
Approach
Bars 8T2 and
Field Bend Bar 5S2
Begin or End
Slab
5S2 (Bottom)
(Bottom) as required
Approach Slab **
Bars 5V @ 8" sp. (Max.)
5"
5"
End Transition.
Bars 8S1
Begin or End
Approach Slab **
Approach
358"
1'-1"
3 sp. @ 7"
Bars 8T2
= 1'-9"
1
2"
Bars 5P @ 8" sp. (Max.)
Slab
7"
6"
238"
5'-0" (Toe Transition)
5'-0" (Toe Transition)
Where railings of adjacent bridges are to be built back to back,

the outside vertical plane of the railing and deck may coincide
6'-8" (Top Transition)
6'-8" (Top Transition)
1
2"
along a plane centered 1'-8
from each gutter line. A bond
breaker will be required. See Structures Plans, Superstructure
(Showing Bars 5V, 8S1, 5S2 and 8T2)
(Showing Transition Bars 5P and Bars 8S1, 8T1 & 8T2)
Sheets for Details.
** See joint orientation note on Sheet 1.
DETAIL "A"
*** Rotate Bars 5V as shown to maintain clearance.
1
2"
1'-8
1
4"
1'-0
@ 8" sp.
3
3
3" 3 4" 4 4"
Const. Joint
Required
7"
Bars 5V
@ 8" sp.
3
4"
Detail "A")
Bars 5S2
Bundle 2 sets
of Bars 5V
Approach Slab Shown, Rigid
Future Asphalt
Pavement Approach Slab Similar)
Bridge Deck
1
2"
3
4"
Asphalt
Overlay
414" 434"
bar spacings)
Bars 8T1 (Lap with
212"
2'
-8"
Bars 8S1)
3
"Co
v
e
r
End Bar 5V (Field

Cut)
Bars 8S1 (Typ. Unless
Otherwise Noted)
Bar 8T2
Bars 5V (See
(Lap with
Detail "A" for
Bars 8S1)
Riding
bar spacings) ***

1
2"
Surface
Asphalt
Overlay
Approach
Coping *
Edge of Approach
Slab
Slab (Coping) *
Overlay
Bars 5S2 (Field
VIEW C-C
SECTION A-A
ELEVATION - RAILING END TRANSITION
VIEW B-B
(Guardrail and back leg of Stirrups not shown for clarity)
(SECTION THRU BRIDGE DECK SHOWN -
(Section thru Approach Slab shown,
SECTION THRU APPROACH SLAB SIMILAR)
Section thru Retaining Walls similar)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
17:
39 AM
Approach Slab (Flexible Pavement
8" M in.
3"
Detail "A")
Splice (see
Bars 5S2
2" (
M ax.
)
Bars 5V (see
Field Cut & Lap
Future
(See Detail "A" for
8" M in.
10
"R
Transition Bars 5P
2'
-6" (
M in. with
3" Cover
3
"Co
v
e
r
114" *
Transition Bars 5P
2" (
M ax.
)
2'
-8"
Bars 8T
Bars 8T2
Shoe Bolts (Trailing End only)
Em bed.
3
4"
Bars 8S1
Spacing
3'
-6"
Bar 8T2
Bar 8S1)
2" Cover (Top)
W-Beam Special End
(Typ.)
8"
434"
Bars 8T1
10"
Field Bend Bars as required
Bars 8S1
1
4"
1'-0
Bar 8T2 (Lap with
712"
1'-112"
712"
Connector Bolts (Trailing End)
2'
-8"
Min. Lap Splice).
1'-8"
3'
-6"
or Thrie-Beam Terminal
4"
3'
-4" (
M in. with
with Bars 8S1 (4'-0"
4"
Lap Bars 8T1 and 8T2

1'
-0"
Note:
1
4"
Thrie-Beam Terminal
1
1 4"
6'-8"
1
2"
1'-3
DESCRIPTION:
Bend as Reqd.)
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
Em bed.
Bars 5P
(
Top)
314"
2" Cover
5"
1
4"
NO.
425
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
CROSS-SLOPE
MARK
SIZE
7'-5"
S1
As Reqd.
S2
As Reqd.
T1 & T2
13'-0"
6'-2"
LOW GUTTER
HIGH GUTTER
0% to 2%
90
90
90
90
2% to 6%
93
87
87
93
6% to 10%
96
84
84
96
LENGTH
Pre-cured Silicone
Sealant (4" wide)
6"
ROADWAY
2"
A and B shall be 90 if Contractor elects
to place Railing perpendicular to the Deck.

"
6
'
6
Length as Required

= 8 for Bars 8T1
6'-6"
= 6 for Bars 8T2
BARS 8S1 & 5S2
TRANSITION BARS 8T1 & 8T2

(2 of each required per Railing End Transition)
9"

3
4"
# # Varies
3
8"
5
"
Contractor's
Portion of Bar 5V
to be used
1
'
-5
"
option
45
Field Cut &
45
Discard
2'
-9"
2'
-9"
11"
& Discard
Varies (
Field Cut to
Field Cut
3'
-3"
# # Varies
to maintain a 2'-0" Min. lap.
m aintain cover, 10" m ax.

)
## Vary Field Cut from 7" to 1'-0"
45
Paint Recessed
Surfaces Black
5430'
"V" GROOVE TO FORM INSCRIBED
LETTERS AND FIGURES

1
1'-0 2"
512"
STIRRUP BAR 5P
TRANSITION STIRRUP BARS 5P
STIRRUP BAR 5V
1
6 2"
END STIRRUP BAR 5V

To Be Field Cut
(One required per

Railing End Transition)


ITEM
UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete
CY/LF
0.154
Reinforcing Steel
LB/LF
44.71
Note:
2. The reinforcement for the railing on a retaining wall shall be the same
The estimated railing quantities are based on a 2%
as detailed above for a 10" deck with A = B = 90.
deck cross slope; railing on low side of deck.
4. Bars 8S1 may be continuous or spliced at the construction joints. Lap splices
for Bars 8S1 and 5S2 shall be a minimum of 4'-0" and 2'-0", respectively.
5. The Contractor may utilize Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) when approved by the
Engineer. WWR must consist of Deformed wire meeting the requirements of
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
17:
40 AM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
425
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Traffic
Traffic
End Measurement
For Concrete Barrier
Length Restriction
Wall Payment
Length Restriction
Foundation Pad
Foundation Pad
Manufacturer's Transition
Varies (See APL for Details)
Standard Guardrail Transition
Guardrail
Transition Panel
(1)
PERMANENT CRASH CUSHION
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(9)
PERMANENT CRASH CUSHION
Lap In
Direction
Beginning Of
Of Adjacent
Beginning Of
Downstream End of
Length Of Need
Downstream End of
Length Of Need
Crash Cushion
Traffic
Crash Cushion
Design Length
Design Length
Location Station
Location Station
Traffic
Traffic
Departure Line
Departure Line
GENERAL NOTES
1.
Index 430 is applicable for permanent crash cushion installations that shield the ends of Concrete
Barrier Wall or Guardrail, only.
2.
Design Length is based on a given design speed and the shortest Crash Cushion available on the
Approved Products List (APL). When a Length Restriction is not applicable (N/A), then the Contractor
has the option to select valid Crash Cushions from the APL which have design lengths greater than
Concrete Barrier WallApplications
GuardrailApplications
or equal to the Design Length identified in the plans. When a Length Restriction is applicable, then
Design Length
Design Speed
(ft.)
(mph)
5.75
35
7.25
40
7.25
45
10.25
50
13.25
55
the Contractor has the option to select valid Crash Cushions from the APL which have design lengths
Crash
greater than or equal to the Design Length identified in the plans and that are less than or equal
TestLevel
to the Length Restriction identified in the plans.

3.
4.
16.00
For High Speed Facilities with a Design Speed greater than 60 mph, use a TL-3 Crash Cushion.
TL-2
posted on the APL.

5.
When subjected to reverse direction hits, construct Transition Panels from Concrete Barrier Walls
to Crash Cushions; for additional details refer to the applicable crash cushion drawings on the APL.
60
Design Speed
(ft.)
(mph)
8.75
35
11.50
40
11.50
45
Crash
TestLevel
TL-2
Assemble and install Crash Cushions according to the limitations noted on the Approved Products
List (APL) webpage, the manufacturer's specifications, and the applicable crash cushion drawings
TL-3
Design Length
6.
Galvanize metallic components are to meet the requirements in the Specification, Section 967.
7.
For Guardrail Applications, construct the Manufacturer's Transition between the Permanent Crash
14.25
50
20.00
55
22.75
60
TL-3
Cushion and the Standard Guardrail Transition; refer to all Standard Guardrail Transition details of
this Index.
8.
For additional information on the End Measurement for Guardrail Payment, refer to the Standard
1:
03:
11 PM
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Section 536.

9.
Provide delineation in accordance with Specification, Secton 544.
10.
The EOR shall provide the station of the Length of Need (LON) location in the plans.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
PERMANENT CRASH CUSHION APPLICATIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CRASH CUSHION DETAILS
NO.
430
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Location Station
Manufacturer's Transition - Distance Varies

.
(See Crash Cushion Drawings On The APL)
Traffic
Lap In Direction Of Adjacent Traffic

Nested for Bi-Directional Traffic
PERMANENT
CRASH CUSHION
Offset Block (Typ)

Traffic
PLAN VIEW
Location Station
Manufacturer's Transition - Distance Varies

.
(See Crash Cushion Drawings On The APL)
4 Spaces @ 1'-6" CC
5 Spaces @ 3'-1" CC
6'-3" to Next Post
Standard W-Beam Blockout
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
PERMANENT
Design Length
2'
-1"
CRASH CUSHION
12'-6" Thrie-Beam Panel (Nested For Bi-Directional Traffic)
6'-3" W-Thrie Beam Transition Panel
18'-9" Standard Guardrail Transition
W-Beam Guardrail
1:
03:
12 PM
Downstream End of Crash Cushion

(Manufacturer's Transistion)
Note:
ELEVATION VIEW
Post Numbers 8, 9 and 10 will have Standard

6"x8"x14" Wooden W-beam Blockouts.
For Additional Information on Standard Guardrail
12/3/2015
Transitions see Design Standard, Index 400.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
STANDARD GUARDRAIL TRANSITION

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CRASH CUSHION DETAILS
NO.
430
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
GENERAL NOTES
End Measurement For Opaque
1
2"
Visual Barrier Payment, LF
6' Transition
Open Joint
1. The opaque visual barrier is intended to function as a visual screen, and is not
Above Barrier Wall
intended to resist vehicle impact loads nor to restrain, contain or restrict
Joints Or Adjoining
vehicles or cargo. The barrier is designed to withstand zone wind loading and
Rigid Structures
strikes by light debris; and, designed to yield to exceptional strikes by
2" Clear
Cut & Field Bend Reinf. Steel
vehicles or cargo, and to contain ruptured segments of the screen when
2" Clear
yielding to such strikes.
ar
Cle
2"
2" Clear
2. When the opaque visual barrier is constructed on an existing barrier wall,

dowels shall be 1'-8" in length, embedded 6" into the barrier wall and set with
an approved non shrink grout. Embedment holes shall be 5#8" diameter, drilled
3"
to a depth 1#4" below the tip of the dowel unless greater depth is required to
accept manufactured grout capsules.
When the opaque visual barrier is constructed in conjunction with project

concrete barrier walls, dowels may be set as described above, in either the
drilled or preformed holes; or, placed when the barrier wall is cast. For
dowels that are placed when the wall is cast, the dowel shall be 2'-2" in length
Top Of Concrete
and embedded to a depth of 12".
Barrier Wall
ELEVATION OF REINFORCEMENT AND DOWELING

When longitudinal reinforcing bars are encountered in the stem of existing
barrier, shift the dowels to clear, maintaining the 11#2" Cover Minimum to the
of Barrier Wall
face of the Opaque Visual Barrier.
& Visual Barrier
3. For both double and single faced concrete barrier walls the opaque visual
Tooled Edge
5"
barrier is to be located in the center of the top of the wall.

2" Clear
Tooled Edge
For single faced barrier walls that are constructed around other vertical
structures, the opaque visual barrier shall follow the alignments of only one
of the walls and be centered atop that wall.
#4 Vert. Bars 2'-0" Long
(See Note 2)
For dual median barrier walls that follow differential profiles, the opaque
Spaced At 1'-6" Ctrs.

Class II Concrete. See

General Note No. 6 For
1
2"
Surface Finish And
Cover Min.
2'
-3"
ue
aq
Op
er
ri
ar
B
al
su
Vi
Cover Min.
(See Note 2)
Coating Requirements
#4 Dowels 1'-8" Or 2'-2"
#4 Horiz. Bars
Long. Spaced At 3'-0" Ctrs.
Spaced At 11" Ctrs.
Opaque Visual Barrier
1
2"
visual barrier shall be constructed atop the wall with the higher elevation,
unless conditions dictate otherwise. Lateral transitions or end overlaps for
opaque visual barriers that alternate between dual walls shall be detailed in
the plans.
For median barrier walls that are divided when connecting to separated
bridges, the opaque visual barrier shall be constructed atop the approach side
barrier wall, unless differential profiles dictate locating the opaque visual
barrier on the departure side barrier wall.
Opaque visual barriers to be located on capped fills between dual barrier walls
shall be detailed in the plans.
Tooled Edge
Tooled Edge
4.In lieu of the reinforcement shown, the Contractor may substitute welded wire
fabric equal to or better than that shown, when approved by the Engineer.
Details shall be submitted with requests for substitution.
AL
RI
O
T
C
PI
1
4"
Type F Safety Shape
5. The Contractor may construct contiguous precast concrete panels in lieu of the
cast-in-place opaque screen when approved by the Engineer. Panel design and
Barrier Wall
method for anchorage to the barrier wall shall be detailed by shop drawings
(Symmetrical Or Asymmetrical)
when requesting the Engineer's approval.
The Contractor may construct the opaque screen monolithically with the barrier
New Jersey Safety Shape
wall; however, the screen design shall not be modified so as to cause the wall
to be dynamically active from strikes on the screen; see design considerations
in Note No. 1 above.
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES, LF
1:
03:
13 PM
6. Exposed concrete surfaces shall have a Class 3 surface finish in accordance

Concrete
0.042 CY
Reinforcing Steel
3.27 Lbs.*
with Section 521 of the Standard Specification, unless another finish is called
for in the plans.
Roadway
Surface
*3.38 Lbs. With 2'-2" Dowels
7. Payment for opaque visual barrier shall be full compensation for concrete,
reinforcement, dowels, casting, placement, drilling, grouting, tooling, finishing
12/3/2015
and work incidental thereto, and shall be paid for under the contract unit price
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
END VIEW
for Opaque Visual Barrier (Concrete) (2'-3" Height), LF.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
OPAQUE VISUAL BARRIER
NO.
461
SHEET
NO.
1of 1

This Traffic Railing Retrofit has been structurally evaluated to be equivalent or greater in strength to a
design which has been successfully crash tested in accordance with NCHRP Report 350 TL-4 criteria.
THRIE-BEAM EXPANSION SECTION: Thrie-Beam Expansion Sections shall be installed at locations shown
in the Plans.
Install nuts for splice bolts finger-tight at 2" slots in thrie beam expansion sections.
Nuts
shall fully engage bolts with a minimum of one bolt thread extending beyond the nuts. Distort the first thread
on the outside of the nut to prevent loosening.
CONCRETE: Concrete for Transition Blocks and Curbs shall be Class II (Bridge Deck).
Tighten guardrail bolts in 3" slots at guardrail post(s) that
lie between the slotted expansion splice and bridge deck joint so that the bolt heads are in full contact with
thrie-beam elements, but not so tight as to impede movement due to expansion.
REINFORCING STEEL: Reinforcing steel shall be ASTM A615, Grade 60.

NEOPRENE PADS: Neoprene pads must be plain pads with a durometer hardness of 60 or 70 and meet the
THRIE-BEAM GUARDRAIL: Steel Thrie-Beam Elements shall meet the requirements for Class B (10 Gauge)
requirements of Specification Section 932, except that testing of the finished pad will not be required.
Guardrail of AASHTO M 180, Type II (Zinc coated). The minimum panel length for Thrie-Beam Elements
shall be 12'-6".
Field drilled holes for Post connections shall be " by 2" slotted holes.
ELEVATION MARKERS: Elevation Markers need not be replaced when portions of the existing traffic railing
carrying existing elevation markers are removed.
GUARDRAIL BOLTS: Guardrail bolts, nuts and washers shall be in accordance with AASHTO M180.
BARRIER DELINEATORS: Barrier Delineators shall conform to Spec. Section 993. Install Barrier Delineators
GUARDRAIL POSTS AND BASE PLATES: Posts and Base Plates shall be in accordance with ASTM A36
or ASTM A709 Grade 36.
at the top of the guardrail offset blocks at the spacings shown in the table below. Barrier Delineator color (white
or yellow) shall conform to the color of the near edgeline.
ANCHOR BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS: Adhesive-Bonded Anchors and Anchor Bolts shall be fully
PEDESTRIAN SAFETY TREATMENTS: Pedestrian Safety Treatment is required when called for in the Plans. See
threaded rods in accordance with ASTM F1554 Grade 105 or ASTM A193 Grade B7. At the Contractor's
Index No. 400 for details.
option, Anchor Bolts for through bolting may be in accordance with ASTM A449. All Nuts shall be single
self-locking hex nuts and in accordance with ASTM A563 or ASTM A194. Flat Washers shall be in
BRIDGE NAME PLATE: If a portion of the existing Traffic Railing is to be removed that carries the bridge name, number
accordance with ASTM F436 and Plate Washers (for long slotted holes only) shall be in accordance with
and or date, or if the installation of the Traffic Railing (Thrie Beam Retrofit) will obscure the bridge name, number and or
ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36. After the nuts have been snug tightened, the anchor bolt threads
date, then replace the information that has been removed or obscured, with 3" tall black lettering on white nonreflective
shall be distorted to prevent removal of the nuts. Distorted threads and the exposed trimmed ends of
sheeting applied to the top of the adjacent guardrail. The information must be clearly visible from the right side of the
anchors shall be coated with a galvanizing compound in accordance with the Specifications.
approaching travel lane. The sheeting and adhesive backing shall comply with Specification Section 994 and may comprise
of individual decals of letters and numbers.
COATINGS: All Nuts, Bolts, Anchors, Washers, Guardrail Posts, Anchor Plates and Base Plates shall
be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with the Specifications. Guardrail Post Assemblies shall be hot-dip
PAYMENT: Payment will be made under Metal Traffic Railing (Thrie-Beam Retrofit) which shall include all materials
and labor required to fabricate and install the barrier and lapped guardrail where necessary to maintain post spacing.
Transition Blocks and Curbs, Bridge Name Plate and Barrier Delineators and installation of Elevation Markers, where
ADHESIVE-BONDED ANCHORS AND DOWELS: Adhesive Bonding Material Systems for Anchors
required, will not be paid for directly but shall be considered as incidental work.
and Dowels shall comply with Specification Section 937 and be installed in accordance with Specification
Section 416. The field testing proof loads required by Specification Section 416 shall be 15,000 lbs.
for " anchor bolts; 55,000 lbs. for the 1" anchor bolts with 13" embedment; and 30,500 lbs.
for the 1" anchor bolts with 5" embedment.

BRIDGES ON CURVED ALIGNMENTS: The details presented in these Standards are shown for
bridges on tangent alignments. Details for bridges on horizontally curved alignments are similar.
POST SPACING: Posts shall be located along the length of the bridge at typical 6'-3" or 3'-1" spaces.
Utilize the Modified Post Spacing at Intermediate Deck Joints Details as required to clear deck joints.
Establish post spacing along the bridge and Roadway Guardrail Transition beginning with the Key Post.
The variable post spacings located near begin and end bridge may be utilized to optimize the typical post
BARRIER DELINEATOR
SPACING
spacing. Variable lengths of guardrail overlap are also permitted to optimize the typical post spacing.
Symmetry of post spacing is not necessary.
Spacing (Ft.)
to Face of Railing
< 4'
4' to 8'
80'
None Required
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
18:
14 AM
> than 8'
40'
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TRAFFIC RAILING - (THRIE-BEAM RETROFIT)
DESIGN STANDARDS
GENERAL NOTES & DETAILS
NO.
470
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
1
2"
1
2"
3'-1
3'-1
1
2"
1
2"
3'-1
6'-3"
3'-1
measured to
11" Min. Index Nos. 471 & 476; 1'-2" Min. Index
1
8"
Post Assembly
Post Bolts
No. 475 for non skewed joints. See Skew Detail
Guardrail Post
Blocks Required
Varies
3
4"
1'-6
Intermediate
Post Bolts
Min.
Deck Joint
Field
3
Drill 4"
1
2 2"
Guardrail Post
Skew Angle
(Typ.)
Assembly (Offset
Thrie-Beam
Intermediate Deck Joint
Existing Curb
for treatment at skewed joints.
Guardrail
Post Spacing as
Assembly With
(Varies)
Offset Block
slots
on Index No. 475)
Guardrail
7" Min.
7
8"
Adhesive-Bonded Anchors
Anchor Bolts
Asphalt Overlay
when present (Varies)
Existing Curb
Thrie-Beam
Guardrail
1
4"
Adhesive-Bonded Anchors
1
4"
Thru-Bolts with Anchor Plate
1'-1" Min.
7" Min.
Shift Guardrail Post Assembly to clear Deck Joint
PARTIAL PLAN
INTERMEDIATE JOINT SKEW DETAIL

13'-714"
MODIFIED POST SPACING AT INTERMEDIATE DECK JOINTS DETAIL FOR INDEX NOS. 471, 475 & 476
7 sp. @ 1'-634" = 10'-514" ~ Spacing 34" x 334"
7"
1'-634"
614"
Post Bolt Expansion Slots

Slotted Expansion Splice
3
4"
x 334" Post Bolt
Expansion Slots (Typ.)
3'-1 12"
6'-3"
6'-3"
3
4"
3'-1 12"
6'-3"
Post Spacing as
Bolt Slots
measured to
118"
Guardrail
Post Assembly
1'-6" Min. for non skewed joints. See Skew
Post Bolts
Detail for treatment at skewed joints.
(Typ.)
Post Bolts
29
32"
234"
Intermediate
Deck Joint
Offset Blocks required on
Guardrail Post
Thrie-Beam
Assembly
Guardrail
x 212"
Post
x 212" Splice Bolt
29
32"
1
1 8"
Splice
Bolt Slots (Typ.)

2"
414"
414"
Index Nos. 472 & 474
THRIE-BEAM EXPANSION SECTION
Existing Curb
Asphalt Overlay
when present (Varies)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
18:
15 AM
MODIFIED POST SPACING AT INTERMEDIATE DECK JOINTS DETAIL FOR INDEX NOS. 472, 473 & 474
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
470
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Lap
1'-2"
W 6 X 15 Post
(1'-012" Min.)
29
32"
5
8"
Varies
and Recessed Nuts (12 Required) (Typ.)
3
4"
Post) with Post Bolts and
s&
i
lAx
a
r
t
u
Ne
Recessed Nuts (2 Required).
Not required when splice
Slots
1
2"
is located between posts.
Panel
412"
Thrie-Beam Panel
15
16"
R
5
8"
10"
Approach Thrie-Beam
Trailing
(Typ.)
Base Plate
1
"
8
x 1
1
8"
29
32"
234"
2
3
4"
Slots (2 Per
W 6 x 15 Post
3
4"
Dim . Y
5
8"
Face
Dim . X
3
4"
Front
1
2"
x 2
3
4"
Anchor Bolts
1" Holes for 78"
314"
3
4"
1
4"
1
4"
Holes
(Typ.)
3
4"
1
4"
CE
I
L SPL
BEAM GUARDRAI
ETHRI
Note: All Thrie Beam Panels shall be lapped in the direction

of adjacent traffic.
POST DIMENSION TABLE
be extended.
1'-5"
At the Contractor's option, laps may
Field drill holes in Trailing Thrie Beam
Guardrail Panel as required.
5" to 7"
11
Post "B"
> 7" to 10"
1
4"
812"
2'-0"
Note: The Anchor Plate and Plate Washer are applicable only
1'-10"
1
4"
1
4"
Post "C"
714"
> 10" to 1'-0"
1
4"
1
4"
to 1
1
4"
1'-8"
Anchor Bolts that are to be thru-bolted for
Index Nos. 471 & 476.

1
2"
Note: Dim. A is equal to the exposed curb height. For location
4"
3
"
8
4"
2"
GUARDRAIL POST ASSEMBLY DETAIL

712" Max.
Special
Offset Block
4" Min.
Special
Standard
Offset Block
Standard
1
8"
x 3
Long Slotted Holes for
5
16"
Anchor Bolts with Plate Washers (Typ.)
Offset Block
21
32"
Tolerance
(-0, +
3316"
0.135" (nominal)
ANCHOR PLATE DETAIL
10 ( 1)
Offset Block
5
16"
1
2"
111 "
6
Hole
(centered)
1
1
2"
5
16"
4"
512" Min.
1
4"
471 thru 476, Sheet 1.
2"
of Dim. A see Index Nos.
R (Typ.)
812"
1
4"
Post "A"
15
16"
DIM. Y
3
8"
DIM. X
25
CURB HEIGHT (DIM. A)
55
55
)
p. (Typ
y
.
)
(T
POST
1
4"
SECTION B-B
SIDE VIEW
6316"
Anchor Bolts
55
)
.
yp
(T
FRONT VIEW
1
4"
Holes for 1
1
4"
118"
3
8"
Post to Base Plate
1
4"
Front Face
1
ots
2" Sl
1
4"
1
4"
1
4"
1
1 2"
2"
x 118" Slots (12 Per Splice) with
3
4" x
3
4"
1
3
4"
7"
1
)
4"
7"
1'
-8" (
1
8"
Post Assembly
1
8"
Guardrail
6316"
1
8"
238"
1
8"
1
16")
Sheet Thickness
PLATE WASHER DETAIL
1
4"
3
5
16"
BEAM
EON THRU THRI
CAL SECTI
TYPI
1. Offset blocks shall be timber or Approved
3
4"
1
4"
OFFSET BLOCK NOTES:
Alternate. Uniformity of block size and
Holes
3
8"
7
32"
AR)
L
MI
ON SI
ON SECTI
EXPANSI
L(
GUARDRAI
alignment of guardrail shall be maintained

1
4"
15
16"
3
8"
3
32"
1
4").
3. Timber offset blocks shall be dressed on
centered (
11
16"
Post bolt holes in offset blocks to be

5
8"
5
8"
1'
-10"
along length of retrofit.

2.
all four sides (S4S).

4. Block assemblies for Special Offset Blocks
1
8"
can be made up of 2 or 3 Special or
Standard Offset Blocks, field dressed as
11:
18:
16 AM
8" x 6" x 1'-10" (Nominal) Timber

1
2"
Offset Block (7
5
8"
required.
1
2"
x 5
Dressed Dimensions)
FRONT VIEW
x 1'-10"
Pare corner of offset
LENGTH
1" x
APPLICATION
block as required to
1
2"
clear anchor bolt
Varies
SIDE VIEW
(8" Min.)
12/17/2015
THREAD
Full Length
4" Min.
Rail Splice Bolt, Post Bolt for

Index Nos. 471, 473 & 476
1
16"
Deep
Recess (Both Sides)

5
ED
FI
8"MODI
HEAVY
RECESSED NUT)
HEX NUT (
Post Bolt for Index Nos. 472,

473, 474, 475 & 476
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
OFFSET BLOCK DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
470
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Intermediate Deck
Joint (See Note 2)
Guardrail Post
Existing Curb
NOTES:
Existing Bridge
Assembly (Typ.)
Coping
1. On approach end provide Index No. 402 (as shown) or other site
specific treatment, see Roadway Plans. For treatment of trailing end
see Roadway Plans.
2. Actual joint dimension and orientation vary. For Intermediate Deck Joints use the
Modified Post Spacing at Intermediate Deck Joints Detail, Index No. 470, Sheet 2,
Gutter Line
as required.
3. Areas where existing structure has been removed shall match adjoining areas and
Front Face of Thrie-Beam
shall be finished flat by grouting or grinding as required. Exposed existing
reinforcing steel shall be burned off 1" below existing concrete and grouted over.
Guardrail
Post Bolts and Match
Line (Trailing End) (See
Line (Approach End) (See
Sheets 3 and 4)
Sheets 3 and 4)
1
2"
3'-1
spacing (Typ. except as noted along bridge, see Note 2)
Post Bolts
Thrie-Beam
Guardrail Post
Guardrail
Assembly (Typ.)
1
8"
Intermediate Deck
(Typ.)
Joint (See Note 2)
Asphalt Overlay
when present
Post
Existing Curb
11" Min.
(Varies)
Final Riding Surface

11:
18:
40 AM

CROSS REFERENCES:
For Section A-A see Sheet 2.

For Traffic Railing Notes and Details
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
see Index No. 470.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NARROW CURB
NO.
471
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Control Line (Scheme 2), Control Line
Control Line
1
2"
1
2"
**
Thrie-Beam
1
2"
Out
1
4"
Final Riding
Surface
10"
1'-2"x 10"x
1
2"
Max. Depth)
Slab
Washers set in drilled holes (5
Varies
Detail "A"
See
Detail "A"
2 ~
1
1 4"
Washers set in drilled holes (512"

Max. Depth)
r
o
h
c
d HS An
a
x He
He
2~
2 ~ Plate Washers
x
y He
v
a
g He
n
i
k
c
o
l
f
l
e
hs
t
s wi
t
l
Bo
1
4"
2 ~ 1
2" **
1
n 1 2"
ti
e
ss
r
e
h
s
d Wa
n
sa
t
Nu
(See Index No. 470)
x 8" Adhesive-Bonded
Existing Wing Wall
1 ~ Anchor Plate with

2" Cover Min.
7
8"
Anchors with Heavy Hex Nuts and
Existing Curb
2" **
1
8"
Thick Neoprene Pad
or "C" (See Roadway Plans)
Guardrail
1'
-1" M in. Em bed.
Em bed.
present (Varies)
See
Post Bolts
Guardrail Post Assembly "A", "B"
Thrie-Beam
Dim . A
Approach
Varies
Deck
2 ~
Bridge
1
8"
Thick Neoprene Pad
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
Guardrail

1'-2"x 10"x
1
2"
x 1
and Recessed Nuts
7
8"
5
8"
Post Bolts
Thrie-Beam
5" M in.
Surface
112"
and Recessed Nuts
Dim . A
Final Riding
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
present (Varies)
Out
Guardrail Post
11"
Post
5
8"
1
2"
of Plumb (Max.) *
Guardrail
10"
11"
of Plumb (Max.)
5" M in.
1
4"
Em bed.
1"
1"
Guardrail
Projected from Bridge (Scheme 3)
**
x 1'-4" Adhesive-Bonded

Washers set in drilled holes (1'-112"
2" Cover Min.
.
s
e
l
o
dh
e
l
l
i
r
ed
r
o
c
Max. Depth)
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
AS REQUIRED
1'-11"
4'-1"
Length as Required
1
2"
along length of bridge.
4"
1'
-2"
LENGTH
(
See Note 2)
SIZE
Control Line
Top of Curb
Dowel Bar 4D
(Standard 180 Hook)
Front of Curb
along Bridge
3'-8"
1
2"
BAR 4A
TYPICAL SECTION THRU EXISTING TRAFFIC
NOTES:
1.
All bar dimensions are out to out.
RAILING SHOWING LIMITS OF REMOVAL
2. The 1'-2" vertical dimension shown for
(BRIDGE DECK SHOWN, WING WALL SIMILAR)

DETAIL "A"
Bar 4D is based on a curb height of 9".
11:
18:
41 AM
shaded)
minimum edge clearance. Offset shall be consistent
MARK
to rem ain
to clear existing curb reinforcing and provide
rem oved (
shown
& W ing W all
**
Offset may vary 1" for Adhesive-Bonded Anchors
(
Type Varies) to be
maintain tolerance.
Existing Traffic Railing
*
Shim with washers around Anchors as required to
Existing Curb
If curb height is less or more than 9",

decrease or increase this dimension by
DOWEL BAR 4L
CROSS REFERENCES:
an amount equal to the difference in curb
For location of Section A-A see Sheets 1, 3 & 4.
height.
For location of Section B-B see Sheets 3 & 4.
12/17/2015
For application of Dim. A see Post Dimension Table
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
on Index 470, Sheet 3.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NARROW CURB
NO.
471
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
End Deck Joint (See Note 2,
Sheet 1)
Begin or End Bridge


Begin or End Bridge
(See Note 2)
Existing Bridge
Existing Bridge
Coping
Guardrail Post
Transition Block
Assembly (Typ.)
(See Note 1)
Key Post
(See Note 2)
Existing Parallel
Coping
Existing
Wing Wall
Transition Block (See Note 1)
Guardrail Post
Curb
Assembly (Typ.)
Front Face of
7" 9
7" 9
1
2"
1
2"
Key Post
Thrie-Beam
Edge of Existing
Existing Curb
Guardrail
Edge of Existing
Gutter Line
Approach Slab
Gutter Line
Approach Slab
(Location Varies)
Post Bolts (Last
Roadway Guardrail
Transition (See Note 1,

3'-0" Transition
Post Bolts
Index No. 471 Post)
Sheet 1)
Block (See Note 1)

Traffic Railing (Thrie-Beam Retrofit) Limits of Payment
(Location Varies)
Front Face of
Post Bolts
3'-0" Transition
Block (See Note 1)
Limits of Payment
Post Bolts (Last
Post Bolts and
Index No. 471 Post)
Match Line (Approach
or Trailing End)
(See Sheet 1)
2 ~ Variable Spaces (3'-112" Max.,
1'-634"
11"
Min.)
Post Spacing as measured
to Post Bolts
3
1'-6 4"
Line (Approach or Trailing

End) (See Sheet 1)
Post
Thrie-Beam
Guardrail Post
Guardrail
Assembly (Typ.)
1'-634"
to Post Bolts
Min.)
Key Post
Sheet 1 of 4)
118"
11"
End of Existing Wing Wall

1
8"
138"
Thrie-Beam
3
4"
1'-6
Guardrail
Key Post
Guardrail Post
Post Bolts
Post Bolts
Assembly (Typ.)
present (Varies)
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
(See Note 1)
(Varies)
Final Riding
Surface
Existing Curb
1'
-0"
Transition Block
when present
1'
-0"
Asphalt Overlay
Existing Curb
Match Existing
Match Existing
Begin or End Bridge
Curb Height
Curb Height

(See Note 2)
Front Face of

(See Note 2)
Backwall & Begin

or End Bridge
SCHEME 1
SCHEME 2
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PERPENDICULAR OR ANGLED WING WALLS
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PARALLEL WING WALLS

SCHEME 2 NOTES:
11:
18:
41 AM
SCHEME 1 NOTES:
Plans. Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Transition Block may
be omitted on trailing ends with no opposing traffic.

bottom clearance.
bottom clearance.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NARROW CURB
NO.
471
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4

Existing Wing Wall with combined
Parallel and Flared portion similar
Existing Wing Wall

Construction Joint with 2 Layers
Front Face of
of 30 Lb. Smooth Roofing Paper
Limit for Cast-In-Place Curb when Transition Block
Backwall & Begin

or End Bridge
Assembly (Typ.)
Coping
clearance to Adhesive-Bonded Anchors.
Transition Block (See Detail)
Guardrail Post
Existing Bridge
is not required on trailing end. Provide 6" Min.
Cast-In-Place Curb with

Bars 4A @ 9" Max. (See Note 2) (Typ.)
Depth of shaded portion
extending off Approach
Existing Curb

See Note 3
Slab shall be 1'-0" Min.
1
2"
Edge of Existing
Gutter Line
chamfer
(Location Varies)
45
Existing
Post Bolts
Key Post
Dowel Bars 4D @ 9" centers
each way (See Note 2) (Typ.)


2" Cover
Approach Slab
Front Face of
M in. (
Typ.
)
Provide 2"
Approach Slab
projection
7"
Gutter Line
Match Bridge curb alignment
Post Bolts (Last

Cast-In-Place Curb
Varies (3'-112" Max., Varies (4'-814" Max.,

1'-634" Min.)
End) (See Sheet 1)
to Post Bolts
1'-634" Min.)
PLAN OF CAST-IN-PLACE CURB & TRANSITION BLOCK DETAIL

(Approach End with Transition Block Shown, Trailing End without Transition Block Similar)
Key Post
1
8"
Thrie-Beam
3
4"
1'-6
Post Bolts
present (Varies)
Final Riding
Match Existing
Surface
Curb Height
Cover (
Typ.
)
Post Bolts
2" M in.
Assembly (Typ.)
Curb H eight
Guardrail Post
M atch Existing
Guardrail
3'-0" Taper
Index No. 471 Post)
1"
Varies
Bars 4A @ 9"
Max. (Typ.)
Dowel
1'-0" Min.
Bars 4D
@ 9"
Existing Curb
Existing
Cast-In-Place Curb with
Bridge Deck
Existing Approach
Begin or End Bridge
Slab
Transition Block (See Detail)

present (remove to the
top of concrete within
7" Embed. (Typ.)
limits of Cast-In-Place Curb)
Existing Wing Wall

Existing
3" Cover
Approach Slab
2" Cover
SCHEME 3
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR FLARED WING WALLS
SECTION C-C
SCHEME 3 NOTES:
Transition Block may be omitted on trailing ends with no opposing traffic.
2. Field cut and bend Bars 4A and rotate Dowel Bars 4B within Curb and Transition Block as required to maintain
2" top and side clearance and 3" bottom clearance.
3. A single
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
18:
42 AM
1. Provide Cast-In-Place Curb as shown. Shape and height of Transition Block and Curb shall match existing bridge curb.
7
8"
x 8" Adhesive-Bonded Anchor may be omitted as shown when 2" clear cover cannot be provided.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NARROW CURB
NO.
471
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4

Existing Curb
(See Note 2)
Existing Bridge
(Type Varies)
NOTES:
Coping
1. On approach end provide Index No. 402 (as shown) or other site specific
treatment, see Roadway Plans. For treatment of trailing end see Roadway
Plans.
Guardrail Post
2. Actual joint dimension and orientation vary. For Intermediate Deck Joints
Assembly with
use the Modified Post Spacing at Intermediate Deck Joints Detail, Index
Offset Block
No. 470, Sheet 2, as required.
(Typ.)
3. Areas where existing structure has been removed shall match adjoining
areas and shall be finished flat by grouting or grinding as required. Exposed
existing reinforcing steel shall be burned off 1" below existing concrete and
Gutter Line
grouted over.
Front Face of

Post Bolts and Match Line
(Approach End) (See Sheets 3
and 4)
Sheets 3 and 4)
6'-3" spacing (Typ. except as noted along Bridge, see Note 2)
1'-6" Min. for non skewed joints. For treatment

of skewed Intermediate Deck Joints see Skew
Detail Index No. 470, Sheet 2 (Typ.)
Post Bolts
Guardrail Post
Assembly with
Offset Block (Typ.)
(See Note 2)
118"
Post
Asphalt Overlay
when present
Thrie-Beam
Guardrail
(Varies)
Final Riding
Existing Curb
Top of
Existing Curb
Surface

11:
19:
10 AM
(Existing Traffic Railing not shown for clarity)

CROSS REFERENCES:

LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
see Index No. 470.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE STRONG CURB TYPE 1
NO.
472
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
** Varies
Match Front Face of
1'-0" **
(1'-0" Min.)
1"
Nominal
1
2"
1
4"
along Bridge
Out of
Plumb (Max.) *
Offset Block(s) as required
(Type Varies)
Bridge
1'-2" x 10"
Thick Neoprene Pad
:
e
p
o
Sl
Existing Curb
s
e
i
r
Va
Overhang
Embedment
2 ~
7
8"
Asphalt Overlay
when present
(Varies)
5" Min.
See Detail "A"
Final Riding
Surface
x 8" Adhesive-Bonded Anchors
with Heavy Hex Nuts and Washers set in

1
2"
drilled holes (5
(Type Varies)
10"
Guardrail

Existing Curb Overhang
1'-2" x 10"
1
x 8"
:
e
p
o
Sl
s
e
i
r
Va
Thick Neoprene Pad

See
5" Min.
Detail "A"
Embedment
Existing
Slab Varies
Approach
Existing Wing
Wall
2 ~
Schemes 3 & 4 - Overhang Varies
** Varies
1
5 2"
1
4"
2 ~ 1
x 1'-4" Adhesive-Bonded Anchors with
1
5 2"
Control Line (Schemes 5 & 6)
Heavy Hex Nuts and Washers set in drilled holes

1
2"
(1'-1
Control Line (Projected from

Bridge) (Schemes 3 & 4)
1
2"
drilled holes (5
Max. Depth)
3" Cover Min.

1
4"
2 ~ 1
or 2 ~
Max. Depth)
7
8"
Schemes 5 & 6 - 2" Nominal Overhang
3" Cover Min.

**
Post Bolts (length varies)
and Recessed Nuts
Guardrail
Slab
Overhang
Control Line
5
8"
Thrie-Beam
Approach
Max. Depth)
1'-1" Min. Embedment
2" Nominal
Existing Wing Post
Thrie-Beam
Dim . A
11"
Varies
Surface
Guardrail
Dim . A
Final Riding
Thrie-Beam
Varies
(Varies)
x 8" Post Bolts
and Recessed Nuts
1
x 8"
Out of
Guardrail Post
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
10"
11"
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
when present
Deck
Asphalt Overlay
1
2"
Plumb (Max.) *
Guardrail Post
5
8"
Varies
1
4"
6"
1"
Standard Offset Block
x 1'-4" (1'-1" Min. Embedment Schemes 3 & 5)
114" x 8" (5" Min. Embedment Schemes 4 & 6)
Adhesive-Bonded Anchors with Heavy Hex Nuts and

1
2"
Washers set in drilled holes (1'-1
SECTION A-A
1
2"
or 5
Max.
depth respectively)
SECTION B-B
(SCHEMES 5 AND 6 SHOWN, SCHEMES 3 AND 4 SIMILAR)
Match shape of
LENGTH
3'-7"
1
1'-7 2"
**
5"
curb height)

present (Varies)
Bars
4M
2'-8"
9"
3"
4'-1"
1
4"
9"
1
2"
2'-0
Existing
1
2"
1'-4
Control Line
DOWEL BAR 4D
Varies
SIZE
maintain tolerance.
Varies (Match
1
2"
existing curb
3
4"
MARK
*
Approach Slab
Dowel Bars 4D (10" Embedment)

Top of Curb
Edge of Existing
(See Note 2, Sheet3, Scheme 2)
Approach Slab
3'-8"
1
2"
2'-8"
Front of Curb
along Bridge
VIEW C-C
11:
19:
11 AM
CROSS REFERENCES:
DOWEL BAR 4L
For location of Section A-A see Sheets 1, 3 & 4.
BAR 4M
For location of Section B-B see Sheet 4.

For location of View C-C see Sheet 3.
NOTE: All bar dimensions are out to out.
DETAIL "A"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
472
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
Existing Detached Sidewalk or Integral Sidewalk

Begin or End Bridge
Begin or End Bridge
less than 6" thick to be removed. See Roadway

Plans for Details of Sidewalk replacement.

Sheet 1)
End Deck Joint (See

Existing Curb
Existing Bridge
Coping
Note 2, Sheet 1)
Existing Bridge
Coping
(Type Varies)
Key
shown, Existing Parallel
Wing Wall similar
(Type Varies)
Approach Slab Curb to
(See Note 2)
remain (Parallel Curb
Post
shown, Flared Curb
similar)
5 Bars 4M
with Offset Block (Typ.)
7" 9
Existing Curb
7"
912"
1
2"
Guardrail Post Assembly

Transition Block
Gutter Line
(See Note 1)
Guardrail
Front Face of
Double Dowel Bars 4D (10"
Edge of
Embedment) (See Note 2)
Existing
Gutter Line
Approach
Slab
Post Bolts (Last
Post Bolts
Key
Post Bolts (Last
Block (See Note 1)
Post
Index No. 472 Post)
Transition Block
Retrofit) Limits of Payment
End) (See Sheet 1)
(Approach or Trailing End)

11"
(See Sheet 1)
Varies (6'-3" Max.,
3'-112"
11"
when present
Guardrail
Thrie-Beam
118"
1'-634"
118"
Assembly with
1'-634"
Offset Block (Typ.)
Key Post
Assembly with
see Sheet 2.
Sheet 1 of 3)
Guardrail Post
138"
Guardrail Post
Offset Block (Typ.)
Post
Sheet 1)
Guardrail
(Varies)

to Post Bolts
Thrie-Beam
Post
CROSS REFERENCES:
For Section A-A and View C-C
Min.)
to Post Bolts
Asphalt Overlay
(See Note 1)
Varies (6'-3" Max., 3'-112" Min.)
C
3'-0"
3" Varies)
2 sp. @ 1'-3"
3"
(Location
Slab
Bridge Deck
3'-0" Transition
Post Bolts
Index No. 472 Post)
Existing Approach
Existing
Post
Post Bolts

Key Post
Transition Block
Bolts
(See Note 1)
present (Varies)
Varies (Match
Transition Block
curb height)
(See Note 1)
Existing Curb

9"
Existing Curb
Match Existing
Varies
1'
-0"
Bars 4M
Curb Height
Existing
Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge
Existing

Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge
(Existing Wing Post and Traffic Railing not shown for clarity)
SCHEME 1
SCHEME 2
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PARALLEL OR FLARED CURBS WITH DETACHED SIDEWALKS
OR INTEGRAL SIDEWALKS LESS THAN 6" THICK
SCHEME 1 NOTES:
SCHEME 2 NOTES:
1. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab Curb does not extend to end of Approach Slab.
Plans. Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Transition Block may be
Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Transition Block may be omitted on trailing
omitted on trailing ends with no opposing traffic.
ends with no opposing traffic and on bridges with flared Approach Slab Curbs.
bottom clearance.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
19:
12 AM
Dowel Bars 4L (10" Embedment) (See Note 2)
2. Field bend or tilt Dowel Bars 4D and Bars 4M within Transition Block as required to maintain 2" top and side clearance
and 3" bottom clearance.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
472
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4

Begin or End Bridge
Existing Wing Post
with Approach Slab or Wing Wall
(Type Varies)
Existing Wing Post
(Type Varies)
Edge of Existing
Curb
Existing Curb integrally reinforced
Existing
Begin or End Bridge
Approach Slab
Existing Bridge
(Location
(Type Varies)
Coping
Varies)

Transition Block
Existing
Bridge Coping
(See Note 1)
(Type Varies)
Dowel Bars 4L (10"
Embedment) (Place 3 Bars

Min. Top and 1 Bar Min.
Bottom), shift to clear Post
Existing
Anchor Bolts (See Note 2)
Curb
7" 9
1
2"
B
Front Face of
Key
Line
Post
Post Bolts
Roadway Guardrail
Existing
Bridge Deck
Index No. 472 Post)
Post Bolts (Last
3'-0" Transition
Post Bolts
Post Bolts and Match Line (Approach
or Trailing End) (See Sheet 1)
(See Sheet 1)

Varies (6'-3" Max.,
3'-112" Min.)
Varies (6'-3" Max. spacing)
Post Spacing Scheme 3 as
Varies (6'-3" Max.,
3'-112" Min.)
(Typ. along Approach Slab)
Min.)

Asphalt Overlay
when present
(Varies)
Assembly with
Offset Block (Typ.)
118"
Additional Posts required
for Scheme 4 (shown
Thrie-Beam
dashed, number reqd.
Guardrail
varies)

measured to Post Bolts
1
2"
3'-1
Min.)

11"

Post
Guardrail Post
11"
Varies (6'-3" Max.,

Varies (6'-3" Max.,
3'-112"
Sheet 1)
Block (See Note 1)
Index No. 472 Post)
Approach Slab
Post
(Location Varies)
Note 1, Sheet 1)
Edge of Existing
Key
Transition (See
Bridge Deck
Gutter Line
Front Face of
Roadway Guardrail
Existing
Post Bolts (Last
Gutter
Key
Thrie-Beam
Key Post
1'-634"
Post
Additional Posts required for Scheme 6
Guardrail
(shown dashed, number reqd. varies)

Post
Roadway Guardrail
Bolts
Transition (See
Note 1, Sheet 1)
Post Bolts
118"
End of Existing
Asphalt Overlay
when present
(Varies)
Wing Wall and Curb

Roadway Guardrail

Sheet 1)
Transition Block
Existing Curb
1'
-0"
(See Note 1)
Existing Curb
Match Existing
Curb Height
Existing
Existing
Bridge Deck
Bridge Deck
11:
19:
13 AM
Begin or End Bridge

(Place 3 Bars Min. Top and 1 Bar
Begin or End Bridge
Min. Bottom)
SCHEMES 3 AND 4
SCHEMES 5 AND 6
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR FLARED INTEGRAL CURBS
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PARALLEL INTEGRAL CURBS

SCHEMES 5 AND 6 NOTES:
12/17/2015
ends with no opposing traffic.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
472
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
Existing
Curb
(See Note 2)
NOTES:
Existing Bridge
(Type Varies)
Coping
1. On approach end provide Index No. 402 (as shown) or other site specific treatment,
see Roadway Plans. For treatment of trailing end see Roadway Plans.
2. Actual joint dimension and orientation vary. For Intermediate Deck Joints use the Modified
Post Spacing at Intermediate Deck Joints Detail, Index No. 470, Sheet 2, as required.
Guardrail Post
3. Areas where existing structure has been removed shall match adjoining areas and shall be
Assembly (Typ.)
finished flat by grouting or grinding as required. Exposed existing reinforcing steel shall
be burned off 1" below existing concrete and grouted over.
Gutter Line
Front Face of

Line (Approach End)
Sheets 3 and 4)
(See Sheets 3 and 4)
1'-6" Min. for non skewed joints. For treatment

of skewed Intermediate Deck Joints see Skew
Detail Index No. 470, Sheet 2 (Typ.)

Post Bolts
Guardrail Post
(See Note 2)
118"
Assembly (Typ.)
Post
Asphalt Overlay
when present
Thrie-Beam
(Varies)
Guardrail
Final
Existing Curb
Riding
Surface
Top of
Existing Curb

11:
19:
47 AM
CROSS REFERENCES:
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
see Index No. 470.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
473
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Match Front Face of
Thrie-Beam Guardrail along Bridge

**
1"
1
4"
1
2"
(Out
(Type Varies)
Existing Wing Post
Plumb (Max.) *
(Type Varies)
Post
11"
5
8"
12" Out of
Guardrail
Guardrail Post
10"
1
4"
(Schemes 3 and 4 only)
of Plumb) (Max.) *
11"
Varies

1"
1
2"
x 112" Post Bolts
10"
Control Line
5
8"
Thrie-Beam
x 8" Post
Bolts and Recessed Nuts
Guardrail
Bridge
(Varies)
See
5" Min.
Detail "A"
Embedment
2 ~
3" Cover
7
8"
Surface
1'-2" x 10"
1
(5 2"
:
e
p
o
Sl
Approach
Approach
Slab Varies
Slab
Max. Depth)
Existing Wing
Wall
2 ~
2 ~
2" **
Varies
Embedment
Existing
114"
5" Min.
s
e
i
r
Va
Thick Neoprene Pad

drilled holes
Min. **
Final Riding

1
x 8"
Varies
when present
Guardrail
Overhang
s
e
i
r
Va
Thrie-Beam
Dim .
:
e
p
o
Sl
Asphalt Overlay
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
Surface
Existing Curb
1
8"
Thick Neoprene Pad
Final Riding
Dim .
(Varies)
Guardrail
Varies
when present
1'-2" x 10" x
Deck
Asphalt Overlay
Thrie-Beam
Varies
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
and Recessed Nuts
Varies 512" **
Schemes 5 & 6 - Nominal Overhang
x 1'-4" Adhesive-Bonded Anchors with
7
8"
1
2"
drilled holes (5
Max. Depth)
3" Cover Min.
(1'-112" Max. Depth)

1
4"
2 ~ 1

SECTION A-A
or 2 ~
x 1'-4" (1'-1" Min. Embed. Schemes 3 & 5)
114" x 8" (5" Min. Embed. Schemes 4 & 6)

1
2"
Washers set in drilled holes (1'-1
1
2"
or 5
Max.
Depth respectively).
SECTION B-B
* Shim with washers around Anchor Bolts and Anchors as

Match shape of
required to maintain tolerance.
4'-1"
2'-8"
1
2"
2'-0
4M
Existing
1
2"
1'-4
Approach Slab
Dowel Bars 4D (10"
Control Line
DOWEL BAR 4D
3'-8"
Bars
Varies
9"
5"
3'-7"
3"
present (Varies)
provide minimum edge clearance. Offset shall be consistent
1
4"
1
1'-7 2"
3
4"
Anchor Bolts to clear existing curb reinforcing and
LENGTH
curb height)
SIZE
** Offset may vary 1" for Adhesive-Bonded Anchors and
9"
MARK
Varies (Match
1
2"
existing curb
Top of Curb
Embedment) (See
Edge of Existing
Note 2, Sheet 4)
Approach Slab
1
2"
2'-8"
Front of Curb
along Bridge
VIEW C-C
11:
19:
48 AM
CROSS REFERENCES:
For location of Section A-A see Sheet 1, 3 and 4.
DOWEL BAR 4L
BAR 4M

DETAIL "A"
For Traffic Railing Notes and Details see Index No. 470.
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/08
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
473
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4

Begin or End Bridge
Begin or End Bridge
Sheet 1)
Existing Flared Wing

Existing Bridge
End Deck Joint (See
Wall shown, Existing
Note 2, Sheet 1)
Parallel Wing Wall similar
Existing Wing Post
Coping
(Type Varies)
Existing Bridge
Coping
(Type Varies)
Key Post
Existing Wing Post
(Type Varies)
(Type Varies)
(See Note 2)
shown, Flared Curb similar)
Edge of Existing
Approach Slab
(Location Varies)
5 Bars 4M
Existing Curb
Front Face of
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
Assembly (Typ.)
7"
Assembly (Typ.)
Gutter Line
Guardrail Post
7" 9
Guardrail Post
912"
1
2"
Existing Curb
Gutter Line

Post Bolts
Existing
Existing Approach
Slab
Guardrail
Bridge Deck
Post Bolts (Last
3'-0" Transition
Post Bolts (Last Index No. 473 Post)
Post Bolts
Key
Post
3"
3'-0"
Index No. 473 Post)
Block (See Note 1)
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
(See Sheet 1)
2 sp. @ 1'-3"
3"
(See Sheet 1)
Varies (6'-3" Max., 3'-112" Min.)
11"
Varies (6'-3" Max., 3'-112" Min.)
11"
to Post Bolts
Asphalt Overlay
when present
Thrie-Beam
(Varies)
Guardrail
to Post Bolts
Thrie-Beam
Post
Post
Guardrail
Sheet 1)
118"
Guardrail Post
Post
Assembly (Typ.)
Bolts
1'-634"
Sheet 1)
Guardrail Post
138"
118"
Assembly (Typ.)
Key Post
Asphalt Overlay
Post
when present
Bolts
1'-634"
138"
Key Post
(Varies)
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
Varies (Match
Curb Height)
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
Existing Curb

Match Existing
Curb Height
Existing
Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge
Existing
Bridge Deck

Begin or End Bridge
SCHEME 1
SCHEME 2
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PARALLEL OR FLARED CURBS WITH DETACHED

SIDEWALKS OR INTEGRAL SIDEWALK LESS THAN 6" THICK
SCHEME 1 NOTES:
SCHEME 2 NOTES:
2. Field bend Dowel Bars 4L within Transition Block as required to maintain 2" top and side clearance and
3" bottom clearance.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
11:
19:
49 AM
12/17/2015
Varies
1'-0"
Existing Curb
9"
Bars 4M
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
473
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
Begin or End Bridge

Existing Wing Post
(Type Varies)
Curb
Existing Bridge
(Type Varies)
Coping
Existing Flared Wing Wall Similar
Existing Wing Post

(Type Varies)
Existing
B
A
Existing Parallel Wing Wall Shown,
Edge of

Existing
Begin or End Bridge

Approach
Existing
Slab
Bridge Coping
(Location
(Type Varies)
Min. Bottom), shift to clear Post

Varies)
Transition Block
Existing
Assembly (Typ.)
Assembly (Typ.)
Gutter
Guardrail
Key
Gutter Line
Existing
Transition (See
Post Bolts
Key
Edge of Existing
Post
Approach Slab
Note 1, Sheet 1)
Roadway Guardrail
Existing
Bridge Deck

3'-0" Transition
Post Bolts

Sheet 1)
Block (See Note 1)
Guardrail
(Location Varies)
Roadway Guardrail
Line
Post
Bridge Deck
7" 9
Guardrail Post
1
2"
(See Note 1)
Curb
Guardrail Post

1
2"
Varies (6'-3" Max., 3'-1
1
2"
Varies (6'-3" Max., 3'-1
Varies (6'-3" Max., 3'-112" Min.)

Min.)

Varies (6'-3" Max.,
Min.)

Asphalt Overlay
11"
Min.)
11"

Key Post
118"
3
8"
End of Existing
Wing Wall and Curb
1'-634"
1
8"
(shown dashed, number Reqd. varies)
3
4"
1'-6
(shown dashed, number Reqd. varies)
when present
Key Post
Guardrail Post
(Varies)
1
3'-1 2"
Post

Thrie-Beam
Assembly (Typ.)
Post Bolts
Guardrail
Post Bolts
Asphalt Overlay
Guardrail Post
when present
Thrie-Beam
(Varies)
Guardrail
Roadway Guardrail
Assembly (Typ.)

Sheet 1)
Transition Block
Existing Curb
1'
- 0"
(See Note 1)
Existing Curb
Match Existing
Curb Height
Existing
Existing
Bridge Deck
Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge

Begin or End Bridge
11:
19:
50 AM
Min. Bottom) (See Note 2)
SCHEMES 3 AND 4
SCHEMES 5 AND 6

12/17/2015
ends with no opposing traffic.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
473
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4

Existing Bridge
(See Note 2)
Existing Curb
Coping
NOTES:
1. On approach end provide Index No. 402 (as shown) or other site specific treatment, see
Roadway Plans. For treatment of trailing end see Roadway Plans.
2. Actual joint dimension and orientation vary. For Intermediate Deck Joints use the Modified
Post Spacing at Intermediate Deck Joints Detail, Index No. 470, Sheet 2, as required.
Gutter Line
3. Areas where existing structure has been removed shall match adjoining areas and shall be
finished flat by grouting or grinding as required. Exposed existing reinforcing steel shall be
burned off 1" below existing concrete and grouted over.
Front Face of
Thrim-Beam Guardrail

Sheets 3 and 4)
Sheets 3 and 4)
1'-6" Min. for non skewed joints. For treatment of

skewed Intermediate Deck Joints see Skew Detail
Index No. 470, Sheet 2 (Typ.)

Guardrail Post
Post Bolts
Assembly with
(See Note 2)
118"
Offset Block (Typ.)
Post
Asphalt Overlay
when present
Thrie-Beam
Guardrail
(Varies)
Final Riding
Top of
Existing Curb
Surface
Existing Curb
CROSS REFERENCES:
11:
20:
19 AM
For Match Line see Sheets 3 & 4.

For Traffic Railing Notes and Details see
Index No. 470.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INTERMEDIATE CURB
NO.
474
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
1'-0" **
Varies **
1
4"
6"
1"
Nominal
1
2"
(1'-0" Min.)
1
4"
Out of
Plumb (Max.) *
Guardrail
:
e
p
o
Sl
s
e
i
r
Va
Dim . A
Thick Neoprene Pad
See
5" Min.
Detail "A"
Embedment
Varies
1'-2" x 10"
1
x 8"
Out of

10"
5
8"

Guardrail
Existing Wing Wall
1'-2" x 10"
1
x 8"
:
e
p
o
Sl
s
e
i
r
Va
Thick Neoprene Pad
See
5" Min.
Detail "A"
Embedment
present (Varies)
Deck
Varies
Bridge
present (Varies)
2" Cover
7
8"
Min.
1
2"
drilled holes (5
Approach
Max. Depth)
Slab Varies

2" Nominal
Washers set in drilled holes
Varies
1
2"
(5
Max. Depth)
Overhang
2 ~ 114" x 1'-4" Adhesive-Bonded Anchors with

Control Line

(1'-112"
7
8"
3" Cover Min.
512" **
2 ~
1'-1" Min. Embed.
Overhang
Control Line
2" Cover Min.
2" Nominal
2 ~
Post Bolts (length varies)
and Recessed Nuts
Thrie-Beam
Dim . A
11"
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
10"
11"
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
x 8" Post Bolts
and Recessed Nuts
Thrie-Beam
1
2"
Guardrail Post
Guardrail Post
5
8"
Plumb (Max.) *
1"
3" Cover
1
4"
Min.
Max. Depth)
2 ~ 1
x 1'-4" Adhesive-Bonded Anchors
drilled holes (1'-112" Max. Depth)
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B (SCHEME 2)
*
Shim with washers around Anchor Bolts and
Anchors as required to maintain tolerance.
4'-1"
BAR BENDING DIAGRAM
1
2"
3'-8"
be rem oved
(
shown shaded)
LENGTH
(
Type Varies) to
SIZE
and provide minimum edge clearance. Offset
Control Line
shall be consistent along length of bridge.
Top of Curb
Front of Curb
along Bridge
DETAIL "A"
to rem ain
MARK
Anchors to clear existing curb reinforcing
& W ing W all
Existing Curb Existing Traffic Railing
**
Offset may vary 1" for Adhesive-Bonded
DOWEL BAR 4L
11:
20:
20 AM
CROSS REFERENCES:
For location of Section A-A see Sheet 1 and 3.

RAILING SHOWING LIMITS OF REMOVAL (BRIDGE

LAST
REVISION
07/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DECK SHOWN, WING WALL SIMILAR)
For location of Section B-B see Sheet 3
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INTERMEDIATE CURB
NO.
474
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
End Deck Joint (See Note 2, Sheet 1)

Front Face of Back wall & Begin or End Bridge
Front Face of Back wall
Existing Perpendicular Wing Wall Shown,
Coping
Note 2, Sheet 1)
(See Note 2)
(10" Embedment)
(See Note 2)

Post
Dowel Bars 4L
Existing Parallel Wing Wall
Key
Existing Curb
Existing Bridge
Block (See Note 1)
Intermediate Deck Joint (See
Existing Angled Wing Wall Similar

3'-0" Transition
& Begin or End Bridge
Transition Block
Existing Curb
(See Note 1)
Front Face of
Gutter Line
Front Face of Thrie
-Beam Guardrail
1
2"
Post
7" 9
Key
7"
1
2"


3'-0" Transition
Block (See Note 1)
Existing Approach
Slab
Post Bolts
Roadway Guardrail Transition (See Note 1, Sheet 1)

Post Bolts
Index No. 474 Post)
(Approach End or Trailing End)

Post Bolts
Post Bolts (Last
(See Sheet 1)
(Last Index
Post Bolts
No. 474 Post)
and Match Line

3'-112"
11"
Min.)
(Approach End or
to Post Bolts
Trailing End)
Varies (6'-3" Max.,

3'-112"
Min.)
1
2"
Varies (3'-1
Spacing Max.)
Key
End Deck Joint (See Note 2, Sheet 1)
Post
Guardrail Post
Assembly with
Thrie-Beam
Offset Block (Typ.)
Guardrail
1
8"
Asphalt Overlay
Post Bolts
when present
3
4"
1'-6
Key Post
Asphalt Overlay
when present
Thrie-Beam
(Varies)
Guardrail
Post
Assembly with
3
8"

to Post Bolts
(Typ. Along Wing Wall)
(See Sheet 1)
Guardrail Post
11"
118"
1'-634"
Offset Block (Typ.)

Post Bolts

Transition Block
(Varies)
Match Existing
Existing Curb
Existing Bridge
Front Face of Back wall &
Deck
Begin or End Bridge
Curb Height
1'
-0"
1'
-0"
(See Note 1)
Match Existing

Dowel Bars 4L (10"

(See Note 2)
11:
20:
21 AM
Curb Height
Existing Curb
Begin or End Bridge
SCHEME 1
SCHEME 2
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PARALLEL WING WALLS
SCHEME 1 NOTES:
SCHEME 2 NOTES:
1. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab does not have a curb, see Roadway Plans. Shape and
1. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab Curb does not extend to end of
height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Transition Block may be omitted on trailing ends with
Approach Slab. Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Transition
no opposing traffic.
Block may be omitted on trailing ends with no opposing traffic.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INTERMEDIATE CURB
NO.
474
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
Existing Integral Approach Slab Curb.
Seal exposed joint with low
Remove portion of Curb as required

modulus silicone sealant.
for post placement. Area of Curb

removal to be finished smooth and
Begin or End Bridge
even with Approach Slab.

Intermediate Deck Joint (See
Existing Flared
Wing Wall
See
Match Front Face of Thrie

Varies
Beam Guardrail along Bridge
(1'-0" Min.)
Note 1
Note 2, Sheet 1)

1"
1
4"
1
2"
Out of
Plumb (Max.) *
Guardrail Post
10"
11"
Existing Curb
5
8"
Post Bolts (Length
Key Post
Post Bolts
present (Varies)

Thrie-Beam
Guardrail

1'-2" x 10" x
:
e
p
o
Sl
1
8"
s
e
i
r
Va
Thick Neoprene Pad

Post Bolts (Last
Dim . A
Front Face of
Gutter Line
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
Varies) and Recessed Nuts
5" Min. Embedment
2 ~ 78" x 8" Adhesive-Bonded Anchors

Index No. 474 Post)
1
2"
drilled holes (5
Approach
Post Bolts and
Varies (6'-3" Max., 3'-112" Min.)
Varies (3'-112" sp.
Match Line (Approach
Max.,
End or Trailing End)
1'-634"
Min.)

to Post Bolts
Overhang
(See Sheet 1)
1'-634"
2" Cover Min.
Varies
Varies
3" Cover
2" Nominal
118"
Max. Depth)
Slab Varies
Existing Wing Wall
Min.
2 ~ 114" x 1'-4" Adhesive-Bonded
138"
Anchors with Heavy Hex Nuts and Washers

Asphalt Overlay
when present
(Varies)
Thrie-Beam
Guardrail
Post Bolts
Post
Key Post
Control Line (Projected from Bridge)
set in drilled holes (1'-112" Max. Depth)
SECTION C-C (SCHEME 3)

SCHEME 3 NOTE:
1. A single
Begin or End Bridge
7
8"
x 8" Adhesive-Bonded Anchor may be omitted as shown when 2"
clear cover cannot be provided (see Section C-C).

Existing Curb
11:
20:
22 AM
SCHEME 3
CROSS REFERENCE:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INTERMEDIATE CURB
NO.
474
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4

Existing Curb
Existing Bridge
(See Note 2)
Coping
(Type Varies)
NOTES:
1. On approach end provide Index No. 402 (as shown) or other site specific treatment, see Roadway Plans.
2. Actual joint dimension and orientation vary. For Intermediate Deck Joints use the Modified Post Spacing at
Intermediate Deck Joints Detail, Index No. 470, Sheet 2, as required.
3. Areas where existing structure has been removed shall match adjoining areas and shall be finished flat by
grouting or grinding as required. Exposed existing reinforcing steel shall be burned off 1" below existing
concrete and grouted over.
Gutter Line
Front Face of
Sheets 3 and 4)
Sheets 3 and 4)
3'-1 " spacing (Typ. except as noted along Bridge, see Note 2)
1'-2" Min. for non skewed joints. For treatment of

skewed Intermediate Deck Joints (see Skew Detail
Index No. 470, Sheet 2) (Typ.)
Post Bolts
Guardrail Post
Assembly with
(See Note 2)
1 "
Offset Block (Typ.)

Post
Asphalt Overlay
when present
Thrie-Beam
(Varies)
Guardrail
Final
Existing Curb
Riding
Surface
Top of
Existing Curb
CROSS REFERENCES:
11:
20:
46 AM
see Index No. 470.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB TYPE 1
NO.
475
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Varies **
1'-0" **
1"
Nominal
1
2"
1
4"
Out of
Plumb (Max.) *
(Type Varies)
(Type Varies)
Guardrail Post
Bridge
Asphalt Overlay
Thick Neoprene Pad
Existing Curb
s
e
i
r
Va
Overhang
See
5" Min.
Detail "A"
Embedment
when present
(Varies)
Final Riding
Surface
Overhang
Approach
drilled holes (5 " Max. Depth)
Slab Varies
Thrie-Beam
Guardrail

1'-2" x 10"
1
2"
:
e
p
o
Sl
s
e
i
r
Va
See
5" Min.
Detail "A"
Embedment
Existing
Existing Wing
Approach
Wall
Slab
2 ~ " x 8" Adhesive-Bonded Anchors

Schemes 5 & 6 - 2" Nominal Overhang
3" Cover Min.
Varies
**
1
x 8"
Thick Neoprene Pad
Control Line
5
and Recessed Nuts
Guardrail
2" Nominal
:
e
p
o
Sl
Varies
1'-2" x 10"
" Post Bolts (length varies)
Thrie-Beam
Dim . A
10"
11"
Guardrail
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
Thrie-Beam
Dim . A
Surface
10"
11"
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
Final Riding
Deck
(Varies)
and Recessed Nuts
Varies
when present
" x 8" Post Bolts
1
x 8"
Existing Wing Post
Plumb (Max.) *
Guardrail Post
Asphalt Overlay
12" Out of
1
5 2"
**
2 ~ 1" x 1'-4" Adhesive-Bonded Anchors with
3" Cover Min.

2 ~ 1" x 1'-4" (1'-1" Min. Embed. Schemes 3 & 5)
Varies
1
4"
6"
1"
(1'-0" Min.)
Match Front Face of
or 2 ~
(1'-1 " Max. Depth)
Washers set in drilled holes (1'-1 " or 5 " Max.

Depth respectively)
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B

Match shape of
LENGTH
3'-7"
1
1'-7 2"
**
5"
curb height)

present (Varies)
Bars
4M
2'-8"
9"
3"
4'-1"
1
4"
9"
1
2"
2'-0
Existing
1
2"
1'-4
Approach Slab
Control Line
DOWEL BAR 4D
Varies
SIZE
maintain tolerance.
Varies (Match
1
2"
existing curb
3
4"
MARK
*
Top of Curb
Edge of Existing
Approach Slab
3'-8"
1
2"
2'-8"
Front of Curb
11:
20:
47 AM
along Bridge
VIEW C-C
CROSS REFERENCES:
DOWEL BAR 4L
BAR 4M
For location of Section A-A see Sheet 1, 3 & 4.

DETAIL "A"
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB TYPE 1
NO.
475
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4

Begin or End Bridge
Begin or End Bridge

Sheet 1)
End Deck Joint (See

Existing Curb
Existing Bridge
Coping
Note 2, Sheet 1)
Wing Wall similar
Coping
(Type Varies)
shown, Existing Parallel
Existing Bridge
(Type Varies)
Key
(See Note 2)
shown, Flared Curb
Post
similar)
5 Bars 4M
Existing Curb
7"
7"
9 "
9 "
Transition Block
Gutter Line
Front Face of Thrie
(See Note 1)
-Beam Guardrail
Front Face of
Edge of
Existing
Gutter Line
Approach
Slab
Existing

Post Bolts (Last
Existing Approach
Bridge Deck
Slab
Key
Post Bolts
Post
Post Bolts (Last
3'-0" Transition
Post Bolts
Index No. 475 Post)
Transition Block
(See Sheet 1)
11"
Thrie-Beam
when present
Guardrail
Guardrail Post
Assembly with
Offset Block (Typ.)

11"
2 ~ Variable Spaces
(3'-1" Max., 1'-6" Min.)
Thrie-Beam
Sheet 1)

to Post Bolts
Post
Sheet 1)
Guardrail Post Guardrail

1 "
(Varies)
(See Sheet 1)
to Post Bolts
Post
Asphalt Overlay
2 ~ Variable Spaces
(See Note 1)
(3'-1 " Max., 1'-6 " Min.)
3'-0"
Index No. 475 Post)
Block (See Note 1)
(Location
3" Varies)
2 sp. @ 1'-3"
3"
1'-6 "
1 "
Assembly with
1'-6"
Offset Block (Typ.)
Key Post
Post
1 "
Post
Bolts
Key Post
Bolts
present (Varies)

Transition Block
(See Note 1)
Varies (Match
Curb Height)
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
Existing Curb

9"
Existing Curb
Match Existing
Varies
1'
-0"
Bars 4M
Curb Height
Existing
Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge
Existing
Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge
SCHEME 1
SCHEME 2
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PARALLEL OR FLARED CURBS WITH DETACHED SIDEWALKS
OR INTEGRAL SIDEWALKS LESS THAN 6" THICK
SCHEME 1 NOTES:
SCHEME 2 NOTES:
Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Transition Block may be omitted on
trailing ends with no opposing traffic and on bridges with flared Approach Slab Curbs.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
20:
47 AM

2. Field bend or tilt Dowel Bars 4D and Bars 4M within Transition Block as required to maintain 2" top and side
clearance and 3" bottom clearance.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB TYPE 1
NO.
475
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4

Begin or End Bridge
Existing Wing Post

(Type Varies)

Approach Slab
Curb
(Type Varies)
Edge of Existing
Existing Bridge
(Location
(Type Varies)
Coping
Varies)
Existing Wing Post
Existing
Begin or End Bridge

Existing
Bridge Coping
(Type Varies)

Transition Block
Existing
(See Note 1)
7"
9 "
Curb
B
Front Face of Thrie
-Beam Guardrail
Roadway Guardrail
Key
Gutter
Line
(Location Varies)
Roadway Guardrail
Existing
Post Bolts
Bridge Deck
Post Bolts (Last
Index No. 475 Post)
3'-0" Transition
Post Bolts


(See Sheet 1)

2 ~ Variable Spaces
(3'-112" Max., 1'-634" Min.)
2 ~ Variable Spaces
(3'-112"
Max.,
1'-634"
Min.)
Sheet 1)
Block (See Note 1)
Index No. 475 Post)

Approach Slab
Post
Note 1, Sheet 1)
Bridge Deck
Edge of Existing
Key
-Beam Guardrail
Existing
Post Bolts (Last
Gutter Line
Front Face of Thrie
Transition (See
Post
1
2"
Varies (3'-1
Max. spacing)
2 ~ Variable Spaces
(3'-1 " Max., 1'-6 " Min.)
2 ~ Variable Spaces
(3'-1 " Max., 1'-6 " Min.)
118"
Guardrail Post
when present
Thrie-Beam
Assembly with
(Varies)
Guardrail
11"
11"
Key Post
Post
Asphalt Overlay
Max. spacing)
1
2"
Varies (3'-1
Post Bolts
1'-634"
1 "
Guardrail Post
Key Post
Offset Block (Typ.)
Post Bolts
Asphalt Overlay
End of Existing
Assembly with
when present
Thrie-Beam
(Varies)
Guardrail
Wing Wall and Curb
Offset Block (Typ.)
Roadway Guardrail

Sheet 1)
Transition Block
Existing Curb
1'
-0"
(See Note 1)
Existing Curb
Match Existing
Existing
Bridge Deck
Existing
Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge
Curb Height

Begin or End Bridge
11:
20:
49 AM
Min. Bottom)
SCHEMES 3 AND 4
SCHEMES 5 AND 6

1. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab Curb does not extend to end of Approach Slab. Shape
and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Transition Block may be omitted on trailing ends with
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB TYPE 1
NO.
475
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
Existing
Existing Bridge
(See Note 2)
Curb
NOTES:
Coping
(Type Varies)
1. On approach end provide Index No. 402 (as shown) or other site specific treatment, see Roadway Plans.
2. Actual joint dimension and orientation vary. For Intermediate Deck Joints use the Modified Post Spacing
Guardrail Post
at Intermediate Deck Joints Detail, Index No. 470, Sheet 2, as required.
Assembly (Typ.)
3. Areas where existing structure has been removed shall match adjoining areas and shall be finished flat by
grouting or grinding as required. Exposed existing reinforcing steel shall be burned off 1" below existing
Gutter Line
Front Face of
Sheets 3 and 4)
Sheets 3 and 4)
3'-1 " spacing (Typ. except as noted along Bridge, see Note 2)
11" Min. for non skewed joints. For treatment of

skewed Intermediate Deck Joints (see Skew Detail
Index No. 470, Sheet 2) (Typ.)
Post Bolts
Guardrail Post
1 "
Assembly (Typ.)
Post
(See Note 2)
Asphalt Overlay
when present
Thrie-Beam
(Varies)
Guardrail
Final
Existing Curb
Riding
Surface
Top of
Existing Curb

11:
27:
57 AM
CROSS REFERENCES:
see Index No. 470.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB TYPE 2
NO.
476
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Match Front Face of
Control Line
Varies

6 " **
" " Out of
" " (Out
(Type Varies)
Guardrail
Post
11"
Guardrail Post
10"
Existing Wing Post
Plumb (Max.) *
1"
(Type Varies)
of Plumb) (Max.) *
11"
(Schemes 3 and 4 only)
" x 1 " Post Bolts
10"
1"
" x 8" Post
Thrie-Beam
Bolts and Recessed Nuts
Guardrail
Bridge
Existing Curb
when present
Thick Neoprene Pad
s
e
i
r
Va
Overhang
(Varies)
See
5" Min.
Detail "A"
Embedment
3" Cover
Final Riding
Surface

1'-2" x 10" x "
:
e
p
o
Sl
5" Min.
Thick Neoprene Pad
s
e
i
r
Va
Embedment
Existing
Approach

Min. **
Guardrail
Varies
:
e
p
o
Sl
Thrie-Beam
Dim . A
Surface
Asphalt Overlay
1'-2" x 10" x "
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
Final Riding
Varies
(Varies)
Guardrail
Dim . A
when present
Deck
Asphalt Overlay
Thrie-Beam
Varies
Varies 1'
-9" to 2'
-0"
and Recessed Nuts
Existing Wing
Approach
Slab Varies
Wall
Slab
1 ~ Anchor Plate with

2" **
2 ~ Plate Washers
r
o
h
c
d HS An
a
x He
" He
2~1
x
y He
v
a
g He
n
i
k
c
o
l
f
l
e
hs
t
s wi
t
l
Bo
Varies
"
n1
ti
e
ss
r
e
h
s
d Wa
n
sa
t
Nu
Varies 5 " **
.
s
e
l
o
dh
e
l
l
i
r
ed
r
o
c
(See Index No. 470)
Schemes 5 & 6 - Nominal Overhang
3" Cover Min.

2 ~ 1" x 1'-4" (1'-1" Min. Embed. Schemes 3 & 5)
or 2 ~
Washers set in drilled holes (1'-1 " or 5 " Max.

Depth respectively).
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B

Match shape of
SIZE
LENGTH
maintain tolerance.
1'-7 "
5"
curb height)
**
present (Varies)
3'-7"
Varies (Match
9 "
existing curb
Bars
4M
2'-8"
9"
4'-1"
3"
3"
9"
2'-0 "
Existing
1'-4 "
DOWEL BAR 4D
Varies
MARK
2 "
*
Approach Slab
Control Line
Top of Curb
Edge of Existing
Approach Slab
3'-8"
11:
27:
57 AM
4 "
2'-8"
DOWEL BAR 4L
Front of Curb
along Bridge
VIEW C-C
BAR 4M
CROSS REFERENCES:
For location of Section A-A see Sheet 1, 3 & 4.
DETAIL "A"

For location of Section C-C see Sheet 3.
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/08
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB TYPE 2
NO.
476
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4

Begin or End Bridge
Begin or End Bridge
Sheet 1)

Existing Wing Post
Existing Bridge
Existing Bridge
(Type Varies)
Coping
Coping
(Type Varies)
Key Post
End Deck Joint (See
Wall shown, Existing
Note 2, Sheet 1)
Parallel Wing Wall similar
Existing Wing Post
(Type Varies)
(Type Varies)

shown, Flared Curb similar)
(See Note 2)
Guardrail Post
Guardrail Post
Assembly (Typ.)
Assembly (Typ.)
Existing Curb
5 Bars 4M
7"
7"
9 "
9 "
Existing Curb
Gutter Line
Transition Block
Guardrail
(See Note 1)

Gutter Line
Post Bolts
Existing
Existing Approach
Guardrail
Post Bolts (Last
3'-0" Transition
Bridge Deck
Key
Slab
Post
Post Bolts
Transition Block

(See Sheet 1)
(See Note 1)
(See Sheet 1)
11"
2 ~ Variable Spaces
Post
Asphalt Overlay
when present
Thrie-Beam
(Varies)
Guardrail
Post
Sheet 1)
1'-6 "

Sheet 1)
Thrie-Beam
Guardrail Post
1 "
Guardrail

to Post Bolts
(3'-1 " Max., 1'-6 " Min.)
1 "
11"
2 ~ Variable Spaces
to Post Bolts
(3'-1 " Max., 1'-6 " Min.)
3"
3'-0"
Index No. 476 Post)
Block (See Note 1)
2 sp. @ 1'-3"
3"
1 "
1'-6 "
1 "
Assembly (Typ.)
Guardrail Post
Assembly (Typ.)
Post
Key Post
Bolts
Asphalt Overlay
Post
when present
Bolts
Key Post
(Varies)
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
Varies (Match
Transition Block
Curb Height)
(See Note 1)
Existing Curb

Match Existing
Varies
1'-0"
Existing Curb
9"
Bars 4M
Curb Height
Existing
Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge
Existing

Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge
SCHEME 1
SCHEME 2
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PARALLEL OR FLARED CURBS WITH DETACHED

SIDEWALKS OR INTEGRAL SIDEWALK LESS THAN 6" THICK
SCHEME 1 NOTES:
SCHEME 2 NOTES:
Plans. Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Transition Block may be
bottom clearance.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
27:
58 AM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB TYPE 2
NO.
476
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4

Begin or End Bridge
Existing Wing Post
(Type Varies)
Begin or End Bridge
Existing Parallel Wing Wall Shown,

Existing Flared Wing Wall Similar

Edge of Existing

Existing
Curb
(Location
Existing Bridge
(Type Varies)
Coping
Varies)
Existing Wing Post
(Type Varies)
Approach Slab

Existing
Bridge Coping
(Type Varies)

Transition Block
Existing
Guardrail Post
(See Note 1)
Guardrail Post
Curb
Assembly (Typ.)
7"
9 "
Assembly (Typ.)
Gutter
Gutter Line
Guardrail
Key
Roadway Guardrail
Post Bolts
Note 1, Sheet 1)
(3'-1 " Max., 1'-6 " Min.)
2 ~ Variable Spaces
(3'-1 " Max., 1'-6 " Min.)
Varies (3'-1 " Max. spacing)
Trailing End) (See Sheet 1)

2 ~ Variable Spaces
Varies (3'-1 " Max. spacing)
(3'-1 " Max., 1'-6 " Min.)
11"
2 ~ Variable Spaces
(3'-1 " Max., 1'-6 " Min.)

11"
Key Post
End of Existing
Wing Wall and Curb
1 "
1'-6 "
1 "
Asphalt Overlay
Key Post
Guardrail Post
Thrie-Beam
1 "
(Varies)
Post Bolts and Match Line (Approach or
Post
when present
Sheet 1)
Block (See Note 1)

2 ~ Variable Spaces

3'-0" Transition
Post Bolts
Approach Slab
Roadway Guardrail
Existing
Edge of Existing
Post
Bridge Deck
Key
(Location Varies)
Transition (See
Bridge Deck
Guardrail
Post
Existing
Line
Assembly (Typ.)
Post Bolts
Guardrail
1'-6 "
Post Bolts
Asphalt Overlay
Guardrail Post
when present
Thrie-Beam
(Varies)
Guardrail
Assembly (Typ.)
Roadway Guardrail

Sheet 1)
Transition Block
Existing Curb
1'
-0"
(See Note 1)
Existing Curb
Match Existing
Curb Height
Existing
Existing
Bridge Deck
Bridge Deck
Begin or End Bridge
11:
27:
59 AM

Begin or End Bridge
Min. Bottom) (See Note 2)
SCHEMES 3 AND 4
SCHEMES 5 AND 6

1. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab Curb does not extend to end of Approach Slab. Shape
and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Transition Block may be omitted on trailing ends with
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/08
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB TYPE 2
NO.
476
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
Lap
See Index 400 for component details, geometric layouts and associated notes not fully detailed herein.
29
32"
5
8"
CONCRETE: Concrete for Transition Blocks shall be Class II (Bridge Deck).
1
8"
x 1
2"
Slots (12 Per Splice) with
112"
414"
Min.)
414"
3
8"
1
2"
(1'-0
Varies
TRAFFIC RAILING RETROFIT NOTES

3
16"
and Recessed Nuts (12 Required) (Typ.)
1
2"
by 2
3
4"
slotted holes.
BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS: Bolts, nuts and round washers shall be in accordance with AASHTO M180. Plate Washers
1
4"
3
4"
x 212" Slots (2 Per Post) with
holes for Post connections shall be
Post Bolts, Recessed Nuts, Round
s&
i
lAx
a
r
t
u
Ne
Washers and Plate Washers (2 of
29
32"
each required). Not required when
shall be in accordance with ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36.
1
"
8
x 1
1
8"
AASHTO M 180, Type II (Zinc coated). The minimum panel length for Thrie-Beam Elements shall be 12'-6". Field drilled
THRIE-BEAM PANEL: Steel Thrie-Beam Elements shall meet the requirements for Class B (10 Gauge) Guardrail of
Slots
splice is located between posts.
COATINGS: All Nuts, Bolts, Anchors, and Washers shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with the Specifications.
Approach
Trailing
NOTE: All Thrie Beam Panels shall be lapped in the direction
bridge deck joint so that the bolt heads are in full contact with thrie-beam elements, but not so tight as to impede
At the Contractor's option, laps may
55
)
.
yp
(T
of adjacent traffic.
movement due to expansion.
be extended. Field drill holes in Trailing Thrie-Beam

Panel as required.
WOOD BLOCKS: All wood blocks, including required wedge shaped blocks shall be Pressure Treated Lumber in
1
( 4").
1
ots
2" Sl
accordance with Specifications Section 955. Bolt holes in blocks to be centered
1'
-8" (
1
4"
CE
I
BEAM PANEL SPL
ETHRI
slots at guardrail post(s) that lie between the slotted expansion splice and
3
4"
758"
slots in thrie-beam expansion sections. Nuts shall fully engage bolts
with a minimum of one bolt thread extending beyond the nuts. Distort the first thread on the outside of the nut to prevent
loosening. Tighten bolts in 3
(Typ.)
1
8"
1
2"
Install nuts for splice bolts finger-tight at 2
1
)
4"
15
16"
THRIE-BEAM EXPANSION SECTION: Thrie-Beam Expansion Sections shall be installed at locations shown in the Plans.
Panel
3
4" x
BRIDGES ON CURVED ALIGNMENTS: The details presented herein are shown for bridges on tangent alignments.
1
4"
Thrie-Beam
Thrie-Beam Panel
15
16"
R (Typ.)
approaching travel lane. The sheeting and adhesive backing shall comply with Specification Section 994 and may comprise
of individual decals of letters and numbers.

Wedge Shaped
PAYMENT: Payment will be made under Thrie-Beam Panel Retrofit which shall include all materials and labor required
Wood Block
1
4"
3
"
8
512"
M in.
512"
where required, will not be paid for directly but shall be considered incidental work.
M in.
to fabricate and install the retrofit railing. Transition Blocks and Curbs, Bridge Name Plate and Barrier Delineators,
238"
sheeting applied to the top of the adjacent guardrail. The information must be clearly visible from the right side of the
25
or date, then replace the information that has been removed or obscured, with 3" tall black lettering on white nonreflective
55
55
)
p. (Typ
y
.
)
(T
and or date, or if the installation of the Traffic Railing (Thrie-Beam Retrofit) will obscure the bridge name, number and
3
16"
314"
BRIDGE NAME PLATE: If a portion of the existing Traffic Railing is to be removed that carries the bridge name, number
111 "
6
10 ( 1)
21
32"
Match taper of
3"
PLAN VIEW
Hole
3"
Standard
Offset Block
ASS B
ON THRU CL
CAL SECTI
TYPI
BEAM PANEL
E0 GAUGE)THRI
1
(
PLATE WASHER DETAIL

1'-634"
614"
3
4"
Post Bolt Expansion Slots

x
3
3 4"
Holes
5
16"
Post Bolt
1
2"
x 2
3
4"
11:
28:
25 AM
Splice Bolt
29
32"
1
8"
x 1
Splice
Wood Block
1
8"
1
2 2"
Bolt Slots (Typ.)
5
8"
2"
1
4"
L (in)
1
4"
29
32"
3
8"
1
Wedge Shaped
10
Bolt Slots
Hole
1
2"
Post
3
8"
7
32"
3
4"
3
4"
1
5 2"
1
4"
5
8"
Slotted Expansion Splice
3
4"
AR)
L
MI
ON SI
ON SECTI
EXPANSI
(
15
16"
3
4"
x 3
3
32"
3
4"
5
8"
~ Spacing
1
4"
1
4"
= 10'-5
3
4"
7 sp. @ 1'-6
(-0", + 116")
314"
712"
1
13'-7 4"
7"
3316"
0.135" (nominal)
Sheet Thickness
(centered)
1
4"
Tolerance
existing Wingwall
3
4"
1" WOOD
THRIE-BEAM EXPANSION SECTION
FRONT VIEW
THREAD LENGTH (in) APPLICATION
1
2
14
BLOCK
Full Length
Splice Bolt
Post Bolt
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
WEDGE SHAPED BLOCK DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
THRIE-BEAM PANEL RETROFIT
DESIGN STANDARDS
(CONCRETE HANDRAIL)
NO.
477
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Wingwall mounted railing section (if present; length varies)
Remove existing and install new guardrail posts and offset

blocks as required to clear Transition Block
1
4"
Varies
7'-0" Max. (Typ.)
Gutter Line
Wedge Shaped
Wood Block
See Note 1
Existing Concrete Traffic Railing
Transition Block
Front Face of Thrie-Beam Panel
Varies
2'-6"
Begin or End Bridge


Limits of Payment for Thrie-Beam Panel Retrofit
Traffic Railing (Thrie-Beam Panel Retrofit) - Class B (10 Gauge) Panels
Limits of Payment for Guardrail

Guardrail Approach Transition
W-Beam Guardrail
See Index 400
Begin or End Bridge
Thrie-Beam
along bridge
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
2'
-1"
(a)
2'
-0"
Thrie-Beam Panel
Existing Curb
Transition Block

(if present)
6'-3" W-Beam to
Class A (12 Gauge)
Class A (12 Gauge)
Thrie-Beam
Class A (12 Gauge)
Transition Section
Class B (10 Gauge)
Varies
Wingwall mounted
714"
Wedge Shaped
railing section
Wood Block
(if present;
7'-0" Max. (Typ.)

See Note 1
length varies)
2'-6"
Varies
Gutter Line
Front Face of Thrie-Beam Panel
Begin or End Bridge

PARTIAL PLAN - TRAILING END TRANSITION

Limits of Payment for Guardrail
W-Beam Guardrail - See Index 400
Limits of Payment for Thrie-Beam Panel Retrofit
Guardrail Trailing End Transition
Traffic Railing (Thrie-Beam Panel Retrofit) - Class B (10 Gauge) Panels

Thrie-Beam
Begin or End Bridge
along Bridge
2'
-0"
2'
-1"
Existing Curb
NOTES:
Existing Approach
1. Dimensions and elevations for existing guardrails to be
verified by the Contractor before beginning construction.
Slab (if present)

6'-3" W-Beam to
Thrie-Beam
Class A (12 Gauge)
Transition Section
2. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing
Class B (10 Gauge)
Approach Slab Curb does not extend to end of Approach

11:
28:
26 AM
Slab.
Shape and height of the traffic face of Transition
PARTIAL ELEVATION - TRAILING END TRANSITION
Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. See

Sheet 4 for Transition Block details. Block may be
(a), (c) & (e).
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
3. Do not bolt nested rails to the blocks and posts at posts
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
(CONCRETE HANDRAIL)
NO.
477
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
4"*
4"*
Existing Reinforcement
Thrie-Beam
Panel
Post Bolt, Nut,
5
8"
Round Washer &
31316"31316"
5
8"
10"
1'
-0"
2"
Thrie-Beam Panel
Post Bolt, Nut, Round
Washer & Plate Washer (Typ.)
Plate Washer (Typ.)
5
8"
Post Bolt, Nut,
Round Washer &

Plate Washer (Typ.)
Thrie-Beam
2'
-0"
Panel
1
1
2"x10 2"x1"
1
1
5 2"x10 2"x1"
Existing Concrete
1
1
2"x10 2"x1"
Traffic Railing
Wood Block (Typ.)
Wood Block (Typ.)
Wood Block (Typ.)
Asphalt Overlay
Existing Curb
(When present)
(Thickness varies)
ELEVATION VIEW A-A
ELEVATION VIEW A-A
(At Double Posts)
(At Single Post)
Existing Curb
(View at Intermediate Double Posts shown;

*
View at Expansion Joints similar)
Measured from edge of existing Post. Bolts
(Thickness varies)
may be installed at either side of any Post.
TYPICAL SECTION THRU RAILING POST ON BRIDGE DECK
Open Joint (Varies)

4"*
Wingwall mounted railing section
Varies
2'-6" End Post
(if present; length varies)
1
4"
Thrie-Beam
Begin or End Bridge
Panel
4"*
Varies
2'-6"
Existing
1" Joint
End Post
1
4"
Existing
End Post
Wedge Shaped
Wood Block**
(when required)
Wedge Shaped
Wood Block**
Existing Concrete
Front Face of
Existing concrete wedge
Traffic Railing
Thrie-Beam Panel
or existing wedge
shaped wood block
5
8"
Existing
Curb
1
1
2"x10 2"x1"
Wood Block
5
8"
Post Bolt, Nut, Round Washer & Plate Washer (Typ.)
PLAN OF END POST
Post Bolt, Nut,

Round Washer &
wedge shaped wood block, remove

NOTES:
Plate Washer (Typ.)
(Typ.)
Existing
Wingwall
1. Post Bolts shall be
existing wood block and replace

5
8"
x 14" long set in
7
8"
core
drilled holes, see Sheet No. 1.
11:
28:
27 AM
2. Shift Post Bolt holes minimally inward toward center of
with new Wedge Shaped Wood

Block (See Sheet 1 for notes and
details).
posts if existing reinforcement is encountered during

drilling of holes. If reinforcement is still encountered,
notify the Engineer before proceeding with drilling.
Existing
3. Post Bolt spacing not to exceed 8'-0" ( 1").
ELEVATION VIEW A-A
Bridge Deck
(At End Post)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
** For End Posts with an existing
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
(CONCRETE HANDRAIL)
NO.
477
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
7'-0"
Existing Bridge or Approach
Block (Typ.)
8"
Top of
10"
Approach Slab
1'
-6"
8"
Gutter Line
tooled top edge
1'
-0"
Top of Existing
4"
Transition Block
3
4"
8"
Varies
Existing Curb
10"
10"
& Sides)
1
ear
2" Cl
(
Top
Slab Mounted Curb
or Bridge Deck
1'-6"
#3 Stirrups (Field
#4 Adhesive-Bonded
Bend) (Typ.)
Slab (Location varies)
Dowels (6 Required)
END VIEW A-A

2'-3"
2'-3"
1'-3"
Varies
8"
4" (
Typ.
)
1'-3"
or Bridge Deck
Match existing curb height
Transition Block
and slope at traffic face
#3 Stirrups (Field
Bend) (Typ.)
Top of Existing Approach
1'
-0"
NOTES:
ANCHOR RODS: Steel Anchor Rods shall be ASTM A36, ASTM A709
1
ear
2" Cl
Slab or Bridge Deck
A
(
Bottom )
Existing Curb
10"
Varies
Top of
1'
-0"
Dowels (6 Required)
4"
#4 Adhesive-Bonded
Grade 36 or ASTM A615 Grade 60 hot-dip galvanized in accordance
ADHESIVE-BONDED DOWELS: Adhesive Bonding Material Systems

for Dowels shall comply with Specification Section 937 (Type HV)
and be installed in accordance with Specification Section 416.
Adhesive Bonded Dowels are shown installed in an existing curb
or sidewalk integrally reinforced with Approach Slab, Wingwall or
Bridge Deck. For installations in existing detached curbs or
SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
sidewalks, install dowels in available sound concrete.
Shift bars (as needed) to install six dowels into existing bridge
or approach slab mounted curb.
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES PER TRANSITION BLOCK

UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete Class II (Bridge Deck)
CY
0.4
Reinforcing Steel
LB
61
Guardrail (Reset)
LF
12.5
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
28:
28 AM
ITEM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
(CONCRETE HANDRAIL)
NO.
477
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4

Match Deck Joint width
This Traffic Railing Retrofit has been structurally evaluated to be equivalent or greater in strength to a design which has been successfully
crash tested previously and approved for a NCHRP Report 350 Test Level 4 rating, except for the Tapered End Transition on Index
No. 484.
2" cover above blockout (Typ.)
Bars 4C and Expansion Dowels
CONCRETE: Concrete for the Traffic Railing (Vertical Face Retrofit), Spread Footing Approaches and replacement curb sections shall be
Bars B, see Sheet 2 (Typ.)
Class IV. Concrete for Curb Transition Blocks shall be Class II (Bridge Deck).
Field Bend Bars 5S to
REINFORCING STEEL: Reinforcing steel shall be ASTM A615, Grade 60, except Expansion Dowel Bar B which shall be ASTM A36
maintain Cover (Typ.)
smooth round bar hot-dip galvanized in accordance with the Specifications.
Bars 5S
EXPANSION SLEEVE ASSEMBLY: Pipe sleeve shall be ASTM D2241 PVC pipe, SDR13.5. End Cap shall be ASTM D2466 PVC
socket fitting, Schedule 40. End of Sleeve assembly at railing open joint shall be sealed with silicone to prevent concrete
intrusion during railing casting. A compressible expanded polystyrene plug is required in the opposite end of the assembly
for correct dowel positioning during railing casting. Correct dowel positioning is required in order to provide for thermal
movement of the deck.
Top of Existing
ADHESIVE-BONDED ANCHORS AND DOWELS: Adhesive Bonding Material Systems for Anchors and Dowels shall comply with
Curb
Specification Section 937 and be installed in accordance with Specification Section 416. The field testing proof loads
required by Specification Section 416 shall be 23,800 lbs. for Dowel Bars 6D on the inside face (traffic side) of the railing
(1'-0" embedment) and 18,500 lbs for Dowel Bars 6D along the outside face of the traffic railing (5" min. embedment).
BRIDGES ON CURVED ALIGNMENTS: The details presented in these Standards are shown for bridges on tangent alignments.
NAME, DATE AND BRIDGE NUMBER: The Name and Bridge Number shall be placed on the Traffic Railing so as to
be seen on the driver's right side when approaching the bridge. The Date shall be placed on the driver's left side when
approaching the bridge. The Date shall be the year the bridge was constructed. Letters and figures may be 3" tall black
plastic as approved by the Engineer or " V-Grooves. V-Grooves shall be formed by preformed letters and figures.
3"
3 sp.
elevation markers are removed.
1'-3" (Max)
@ 7"
ELEVATION MARKERS: Elevation Markers need not be replaced when portions of the existing traffic railing carrying existing
3"
2 sp.
1'-3" (Max.)
BARRIER DELINEATORS: Barrier Delineators shall meet Specification Section 993. Install Barrier Delineators on top
@ 7"
of the Traffic Railing 2" from the face on the traffic side at the spacing shown in the table below. Barrier Delineator color
(white or yellow) shall match the color of the near edgeline.
PAYMENT: Payment under Traffic Railing (Vertical Face Retrofit) includes all materials and labor required to construct the
railing and incidental work as required for transition blocks, curbs, spread footing approaches, and Barrier Delineators.
PARTIAL ELEVATION OF RAILING SHOWING FINGER/SLIDING PLATE JOINT - SCHEMES 2 THRU 5

(Begin or End Bridge Shown, Intermediate Joints Similar)
* Place 1" thick polystyrene blockout over limits

of bridge deck expansion joint full width to the
end of the Traffic Railing to allow for thermal
movement. Seal Forms to prevent mortar

leakage into the expansion joint.
1'-4"
Field Bend Bars 5S
(Min.)
2"
3"
to maintain clearance
Bars 5S
Varies
(2'-6" Min.)
2"
(See Roadway Plans)

3" 7"
1'-0"
BARRIER DELINEATOR
SPACING
NAME OR DATE

2" cover above blockout
Top of Existing
Curb
BRIDGE NUMBER
Spacing (Ft.)
to Face of Railing
< 4'
40'
4' to 8'
80'
> than 8'
NAME, DATE AND BRIDGE NUMBER
1'-3" (Max)
LETTERING DETAIL
1'-3" (Max.)
11:
28:
54 AM
QUANTITY
UNIT
9" Curb
CY/FT
0.064
2 sp.
Increment
0.003 per in. height
2 sp. @
@ 11"
(Quantities are based on a 9" curb, no curb cross
slope and 1'-0" embedment length of Bars 6D. If
the curb height or embedment length differs from
that shown, increase or decrease quantity by the
Concrete
@ 7"
ITEM
1" Cl.
None Required
given per inch increment.) See Index No. 484,
PARTIAL ELEVATION OF RAILING SHOWING FINGER/SLIDING PLATE

JOINT AT BEGIN OR END BRIDGE - SCHEME 1
(Guardrail Transition not shown for clarity)
Reinforcing Steel
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
Sheet 4 for Spread Footing Approach Quantities.

LB/FT
13.27
0.10 per in. length
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TRAFFIC RAILING - (VERTICAL FACE RETROFIT)
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
480
SHEET
NO.
1of 2

Length as Required
1'-0"
BARS 4A, B, 6D, 5F, 4G & 5S
1"
2'-0"
481 THRU 483
2 & 5
Bar 4N
2'-0"
2'-0"
481 THRU 484
1, 2 & 3
Bar 4M
3'-10"
AS REQD.
481 THRU 484
2 & 3
Bar 4L
3'-8"
7'-4"
484 ONLY
1 & 3
4'-3"
484 ONLY
AS REQD.
484 ONLY
4'-1"
481 THRU 483
1 & 3
4'-3"
482 ONLY
1 & 3
2'-5"
482 ONLY
1 & 3
AS REQD.
481 THRU 484
2, 3 & 4
Adhesive Bonding
1'-0"
Expansion Sleeve Assembly
Dowel Bars B
1'-0"
Dowel Bar 6D,
Material System
Spacing Expansion
4L or 4N
Length of Expanded Polystyrene

Plug to match width of open joint
1" PVC Pipe Sleeve,

Cap & Polystyrene Plug
2 sp. @ 3 "
Spacing Pairs of Bars 4C
BARS 4L, 4M & 4N
"
5 "
Varies
482 ONLY
or Deck Joint
Em bedm ent Length
AS REQD.
" Int. Open Joint
NOTE NOS.
Varies
INDEX NO.
5 "
LENGTH
7 "
SIZE
4 "
MARK
Existing
Concrete
9"
D = 4 " Pin
Top of Existing
2 " (Shift Bars 4C
Curb
to clear Bars 6D for
skewed joints)
BARS 4C
OPEN JOINT EXPANSION DOWEL DETAIL
(12 required per open joint)
DOWEL DETAIL
(Railing Reinforcing Not Shown For Clarity)

Field Cut
6"
Dowel Installation Notes:
& Discard
1. Shift dowel holes to clear if the existing

reinforcement is encountered.

joints. Bar splices for Bars 5S shall be a minimum of 2'-0".
5. Expansion Dowel Bars B shall be ASTM A36 smooth
2. See individual Standards Index Nos. 481
Varies
3'
-3 "
3'
-0"
thru 484 for required embedment length

of Bars 6D, 4L or 4N.
round bar and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with the
* " Preformed Joint Filler at top of Existing Curb shall extend beyond
Specifications.
10"
10"
the joint material (Silicone, poured rubber, armored neoprene seal or sliding
plates) as shown to prevent concrete intrusion during railing casting and
BARS 5E
BARS 5E
shall be placed so as not to restrict in any way normal joint movement.
(Typical Section) (Tapered End Transition)

** See individual Standard Index Nos. 481 thru 484 for spacing of Bars 6D.
Match width of Deck Joint

2" Cover
1'-0"
1'-0"
Bars 6D @ 1'-3" Spacing
1'-0"
Max. (Back Face, Approach

Embedment
(Typ.)

**
Bars 6D
(Typ.)
" Preformed
Pairs of Bars 4C
Expansion
"
3
Vertical Face
Pairs of Bars 4C @ 3 "
Retrofit Railing
sp. (Typ.) Shift to clear
Dowel Sleeve
Bars 6D as required
Assembly
Bars 5S
Joint Filler
Slab Side only)
(Typ.)
@ 3 " sp. (Typ.)

Shift to clear Bars
Expansion
6D as required
Expansion Dowel Bar B
Dowel Sleeve
Assembly
Vertical Face
Expansion
Gutter Line
11:
28:
55 AM
for corner overhangs
2" above existing curb
"
Field Cut 2 ~ Bars 6D
ec
k
Jo
in
t
Line
7 "
2 equal sp.
Bars 6D @ 7 " Spacing
"
3
Max. (Front Face, Approach

Slab Side only)
(11" Max.)
7 " or 1'-3" spacing (Typ.) **
2 equal spaces (7 " Max. on
Approach Slab, 1'-3" Max. on Bridge)
er
v
Co
2"
)
p.
Ty
(
k
c
De
nt
oi
J
Existing
Approach
Slab
PARTIAL PLAN OF RAILING (SKEW ANGLE GREATER THAN 20)
PARTIAL PLAN OF RAILING (SKEW ANGLE = 20 OR LESS)
(Skewed Deck Joint at Begin or End Bridge Shown, Skewed Deck
(Skewed Deck Joint at Begin or End Bridge Shown, Skewed Deck
Joint at Intermediate Pier or Bent Similar)
12/17/2015
7 "
1'-3" sp. (Typ.)
Embedment
Gutter
(T
yp
.
)
6D
1'-0"
ar
s
Dowel Bar B
Retrofit Railing
Joint at Intermediate Pier or Bent Similar)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
SKEW DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
480
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Existing Bridge
Open Joint **
Non skewed deck joint shown, actual joint dimensions and

orientation vary. For treatment at skewed deck joints see
Coping
Varies
Skew Detail, Index No. 480. Provide open Railing Joints at
Bars 4C
Dowel Bars 6D
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Deck Expansion Joint locations matching the dimension of
Varies (3" max. and Preferred,
the Deck Joint.
10"
Varies
(1" Min.)
1" Min., constant for full

length of Retrofit)

Expansion Dowel & Bars 4C
11" Max.
beyond ends of bridge, see
Deck Joint *
2 equal sp. 1'-3" Spacing Max. (Typ. along Bridge)
Index No. 484

2'
-10"
@ 1'-3" Max.
Superstructure
(Varies)
Supports
" V-Groove Spacing ~ 30'-0" (Max.)

" Intermediate
Asphalt Overlay
Bars 5S
Dowel Bars 6D
when present
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
(Varies)
2"
(Min.)
Scheme 1 only (See

Note 1, Scheme 1,
1'-4"
Sheet 2)
2"
Open Joint **
Deck Joint *
Varies
Varies (2'-6" Min.)
of Transition
Deck
Bridge
" V-Groove in both
Curb
6" M in.
when present
M in.
No. 484, Sheets 5, 6 & 7)
Existing
Em bed.
Asphalt Overlay
Limiting Station
(Typ.)
Bars 6D
2"
Line (See Sheet 2 & 3 & Index
*** Curb
Begin or End Bridge & Match
as noted for skewed deck joints)
Bars 5S
Front Face of Backwall,
Joints (Typ. on bridge except
faces and top of Vertical
(Typ.)
Dowel
1'
-0" M in.
Bars 6D spacing at Railing
2" Cover
= 11"
traffic railing retrofit extends
1'-3" Spacing Max. (Typ. along Bridge)
Guardrail Bolts
*** Curb heights vary from 5" Min. to 1'-2" Max.

3 "
for Scheme 1, except where
4" 3 sp. @
not required at end of railing
Line
Varies
2 equal sp. @
Gutter
Varies (
3 " M in.
)
7"
Varies
3" (Typ.)
Thrie-Beam
3 "
** Provide " Intermediate Open Joints at:
Varies
" Intermediate
Assembly
Em bed.
Expansion Dowel
SECTION A-A
TYPICAL SECTION THRU RAILING
Final
ON CURB WITH CORBELS
Riding Surface
Roadway Guardrail
Transition (See Note 1)
Top of Existing
Varies
Curb
CROSS REFERENCE:
10"
Varies
For General Notes, Estimated Quantities, Dowel

Detail, Expansion Dowel Detail, Reinforcing Steel
1" Min., constant for full
Notes & Bending Diagrams see Index No. 480.
length of Retrofit)
(1" Min.)
Thrie-Beam
3 "
Existing Curb
Guardrail Bolts
11:
29:
17 AM
No. 484 for treatment and Details.
3 "
= 11"
4" 3 sp. @
Existing
Curb
Em bed.
2"
Bars 6D
M in.
Varies
Dowel
Retrofit Railing.
3. Where existing structure has been removed and not encased in new concrete; match
adjoining areas and finish flat by grouting or grinding as required. Exposed existing
reinforcing steel not encased in new concrete shall be burned off 1" below existing
SECTION A-A
RAILING SHOWING LIMITS OF REMOVAL
TYPICAL SECTION THRU RAILING ON FULL
DEPTH CURB (BRIDGE SHOWN, WING WALL SIMILAR)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
2'
-10"
2. Field cut Bars 5S and Dowel Bars 6D to maintain clearance within Vertical Face
(Typ.)
Varies
and back face of the railing. For treatment of trailing end see Roadway Plans. If
vertical face retrofit extends beyond bridge and approach slab ends, see Index
Bars 5S
1'
-0" M in.
the width of the railing, the 2'-6" minimum dimension shall apply to both the front
(Varies)
(Typ.)
Varies
2 and 3. On skewed bridges, if the skew along the deck joint extends across
*** Curb
Transition is along the Wing Wall, see Schemes 2 or 3, Index No. 481, Sheet
2" Cover
Varies
Connector to railing as shown above. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail
when present
Deck
of Roadway Guardrail Transition is on the bridge, attach Thrie Beam Terminal
Asphalt Overlay
Bridge
shown) or other site specific treatment. See Roadway Plans for limiting station
of Roadway Guardrail Transition or other site specific treatment. If limiting station
shaded)
1. On approach end provide a Roadway Guardrail Transition, Index No. 402 (as
rem oved (
shown
NOTES:
(
Type Varies) to be
to rem ain
(Expansion Dowel Assemblies & Bars 4C not shown for clarity)
& W ing W all
Existing Curb Existing Traffic Railing
Varies (
3 " M in.
)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NARROW CURB
NO.
481
SHEET
NO.
1of 3

Dowel Bars 6D @
Existing Parallel
(See Note 2)
1'-3" Spacing Max.
Wing Wall

Edge of Existing
(See Note 3)
Approach Slab
(Back Face Wing
Bars 5S
Wall only)
(Typ.)
(Location Varies)
9 "
9 "
Bars 4C
7"
7"
(Typ.)
(Typ. each
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
3 "
Roadway Guardrail
Sheet 1)
Max. (Front Face Wing

Sheet 1)
Wall only)
Expansion Dowel
Transition Block
(See Note 2)
Sleeve Assembly
3'-0"
3'-0"
Varies (Match Length of Existing
Existing Approach
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
(See Note 1 below & Note 1,
end)
End Bent Wing Wall)
Transition Block
Slab
(See Note 2)
Bridge & Match Line (See Sheet 1)

Match Line (See Sheet 1)

PARTIAL PLAN OF GUARDRAIL
Limiting Station
Asphalt Overlay of Transition

when present
(See Note 2)
1'-4"
2"
Roadway Guardrail
Varies
(2'-6" Min.)
(Varies)
(See Note 1 below & Note 1,

Sheet 1)
Sheet 1)
Final
Dowel Bars 4L (10"
Transition Block
Embedment) (See
Riding
Transition Block
Surface
(See Note 2)
(See Note 1)
Note 2)
Existing
Curb
1'-0"
1'-0"
Match Existing
Match Existing
Curb Height
Curb Height
Place first post 2"
Existing End
clear of Wing Wall
Bent Wing Wall
(See Note 3)

(Railing Reinforcing and Expansion Dowel Assemblies not shown for clarity)
SCHEME 1
SCHEME 2
PARALLEL WING WALLS

SCHEME 2 NOTES:
SCHEME 1 NOTES:
station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing
as shown above. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is on the bridge, see Index No. 481, Sheet 1.
see Roadway Plans. Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge
On skewed bridges, if the skew along the deck joint extends across the width of the railing, the 2'-6" minimum
curb. Railing End Transition and Transition Block may be omitted on trailing ends with no
dimension shall apply to both the front and back face of the railing.
opposing traffic.
2. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab does not have a curb, see Roadway Plans.
2. Field bend Dowel Bars 4L within Transition Block as required to maintain 2" top and side clearance
Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Railing End Transition and Transition
Block may be omitted on trailing ends with no opposing traffic.
3. Field bend Dowel Bars 4L within Transition Block as required to maintain 2" top and side clearance and 3" bottom
12/17/2015
11:
29:
18 AM
1. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab does not have a curb,
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
clearance.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NARROW CURB
NO.
481
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Existing Flared
Max. (Back Face Wing Wall only)
Wing Wall
Bars 5S (Field
SCHEME 3 NOTE:
Bend) (Typ.)
Bars 4C (Typ.)
1. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition or
Expansion Dowel
other site specific treatment. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition
Sleeve Assembly
is along the Wing Wall, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing as shown
above. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is on the bridge, see
Sheet 1.
3 "
(Typ. each
end)
Max. (Front Face Wing Wall only)

Gutter Line
(See Note 1, This Sheet & Note 1, Sheet 1)
Varies (Match Length of Existing End Bent Wing Wall)

Begin Flared Portion of Wing Wall
Parallel Portion of Vertical Face
and Vertical Face Retrofit Railing
Retrofit Railing (if present)

(See Note 1)
Varies (1'-0" Min.)

Roadway Guardrail Transition (See
Note 1, This Sheet & Note 1, Sheet 1)

present (Varies)
Final Riding
Surface
Existing Curb
Existing End Bent Wing Wall

11:
29:
19 AM
SCHEME 3
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
FLARED WING WALLS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NARROW CURB
NO.
481
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
(Type Varies)
" Intermediate
Skew Detail, Index No. 480. Provide open Railing Joints at
Open Joint **
Non skewed deck joint shown, actual joint dimensions and
Varies
orientation vary. For treatment at skewed deck joints see
Deck Joint *
10"
Deck Expansion Joint locations matching the dimension of
1" Min., constant for
the Deck Joint.
(Type Varies)
full length of Retrofit)

Railing
Expansion
3" (Typ.)
7"
2 equal sp. @
Dowel
Gutter Line
3 "
(Typ.)
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
Dowel
Bars 6D
(Varies)
Final
Railing Joints (Typ.
Riding
on bridge except
Surface
End Bridge & Match Line (See
Bridge
Sheets 2, 3 or 4, & Index No.

484, Sheets 5 & 8)
Superstructure
Supports
Varies
of Transition
" V-Groove in both
SECTION A-A
(2'-6" Min.)
faces and top of Vertical
* Deck Joint
Varies
Varies
Roadway Guardrail
Note 1)
Existing Wing Post
(Type Varies)
(Type Varies)
Existing Curb
Thrie-Beam
Guardrail Bolts
Gutter Line (Cut

Existing Approach
Portion of Existing Approach
2'
-10"
Slab with Integral Curb less

than 6" thick or portion of
Existing Approach Slab and
Curb with Floating Detached
(Existing Traffic Railing, Expansion Dowel
Varies
Varies (1'-6" Min.)
Sidewalk to be removed
Assemblies & Bars 4C not shown for clarity)
shown hatched.
Final
Surface
when present
NOTES:
(Varies)
1. On approach end provide a Roadway Guardrail Transition, Index No. 402 (as shown)
Varies
*** Curb
Riding
Asphalt Overlay
or other site specific treatment. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of Roadway
Guardrail Transition or other site specific treatment. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail
Existing
Transition is on the bridge, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing as shown above.
Wing Wall
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
Dowel
5" Min.
Embed.
Reinforced Curb Integral

with Approach Slab or Wing
when present
(Varies)
Sheets 3 and 4. On skewed bridges, if the skew along the deck joint extends across the width of
Wall (6" Min. thickness)

2"
(Min.)
Existing
Approach Slab
For treatment of trailing end see Roadway Plans. If vertical face retrofit extends beyond bridge
(Typ.)
Asphalt Overlay
If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, see Schemes 2, 3, 4 or 5,
the railing, the 2'-6" minimum dimension shall apply to both the front and back face of the railing.
2" Cover
Bars 6D
2"
Existing Wing Post
Top of
10"
Transition (See
Em bed.
(Typ.)
Limiting Station
= 11"
Dowel Bars 6D
(Typ.)
M in.
Bars 5S
than 2"
1'
-0" M in.
Open Joint **
Min. if edge distance is less
3 "
present (Varies)
" Intermediate
Coping
with 2" edge clearance, 6"
3 "
Edge
Distance
Embedment - 1'-0" preferred
4" 3 sp. @
skewed deck joints)
Curb
Varies
Front Face of Backwall, Begin or
as noted for
Varies (
3 " M in.
)
Bars 6D spacing at
*** Curb
Notes & Bending Diagrams see Index No. 480.
Existing
Em bed.
when present
2"
Varies
@ 1'-3" Max.
1'
-0" M in. M in.
Asphalt Overlay
11:
32:
09 AM
(Typ.)
CROSS REFERENCE:
11" Max.
Existing Wing Wall
and approach slab ends, see Index No. 484 for treatment and Details.
TYPICAL SECTION THRU EXISTING APPROACH

SECTION B-B
SLAB AND END BENT WING WALL
SHOWING LIMITS OF REMOVAL
RAILING ALONG APPROACH SLAB
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
2" Cover
= 11"
(Typ.)
4" 3 sp. @
(Typ.)
Guardrail Bolts
Vertical Face Retrofit

Varies (
3 " M in.
)
Bars 5S
Varies
Dowel Bars 6D
2'
-10"
Assembly
Bars 4C
Deck
Dowel
3 "
** Provide " Intermediate Open Joints at:
Existing Curb
Expansion
Thrie-Beam
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB
NO.
482
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Existing Wing Post
(Type Varies)
(See Note 2)
Existing Curb
Dowel Bars (10" Embedment) (Place 3 Bars Min.

9 "
Vertical Face
Top and 1 Bar Min. Bottom) (See Note 3)

Bars 4C
(Typ.)

9 "
7"
Retrofit Railing
(See Note 1)
7"
Expansion Dowel
Transition Block
Sleeve Assembly

Sheet 1)
1
2"
(Typ. each
Bars 5S
end)
Bars 6D @ 7 "
Transition Block
(Typ.)
(See Note 2)
Spacing Max.
3'-0"

Sheet 1)
(Front Face only)
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
Existing Approach
Slab
Varies (Match Length
3'-0" Transition
of Existing Curb)
Block (See Note 2)


Varies
Limiting Station
of Transition
(2'-6" Min.)
(See Note 2)
2"
1'-4"
(See Note 2)
Sheet 1)
present (Varies)
Sheet 1)
Transition Block
Final Riding
(See Note 1)
Surface
1'-0"
Existing
Transition Block
Curb
(See Note 2)
1'-0"
Match Existing
Curb Height
Match Existing
Curb Height
B
Place first post 2"

clear of Wing Wall
Dowel Bars 4L (10" Embedment) (Place 3 Bars
Min. Top and 1 Bar Min. Bottom)

(Existing Wing Post not shown for clarity)
SCHEME 1
SCHEME 2
SCHEME 2 NOTES:
SCHEME 1 NOTES:
11:
32:
10 AM
above. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is on the bridge, see Sheet 1. On skewed bridges, if the skew
along the deck joint extends across the width of the railing, the 2'-6" minimum dimension shall apply to both the front
and back face of the railing.
bottom clearance.
3. If a Special Steel Guardrail Post is required for attachment to the top of a sloping Wing Wall, saw cut
and remove a wedge shaped portion of the sloping Wing Wall as required to provide a level surface for post
installation.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing as shown
Plans. Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge curb. Railing End
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB
NO.
482
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
Existing Wing Post
Parallel portion of Existing Curb
and Wing Wall may or may not

exist (length varies)
Curb and Wing Wall may or
2 Layers of 30 Lb.
may not exist (length varies)
Existing Curb
Vertical Face
(Type Varies)
Bars 4A @ 9" Max. (Field Bend
Smooth Roofing
Paper along joint
Retrofit Railing
clearance) (Typ.)

Bars 4C
(Typ.)
Expansion
Bars 5S (Field
Dowel
Bend) (Typ.)
Bars 4C (Typ.)
Expansion Dowel
Sleeve
Sleeve Assembly
Assembly
Bars 6D cut to clear Backwall

1
2"
(Typ. each
Gutter Line (Cut Exist.
end)
1
2"
Bars 6D @ 7
Bars 5S (Field
this line)
Bend) (Typ.)
1
3 2"
(Typ. each
Sheet 1)
Dowel Bars 4N
Approach Slab along
Spacing
Bars 6D @
1
7 2"
@ 1'-3" (Typ.)
Sheet 1)
Spacing Max.
(Front Face only)
end)
Existing Approach

Slab

Varies (1'-0" Min.)
Varies (1'-0" Min.)

Begin Flared Portion of Vertical
Limiting Station
of Transition
Begin Flared Portion
Limiting Station
of Vertical Face
of Transition
Retrofit Railing
Sheet 1)
Asphalt Overlay
Sheet 1)
present (Varies)
when present
Final Riding(Varies)
Final Riding
Match Existing
Surface
Surface
Curb Height on
Bridge
2'
-0"
M in.
C-I-P Curb
Existing Curb

SCHEME 4
SCHEME 3
SCHEME 4 NOTES:
of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing as shown above.
11:
32:
11 AM
SCHEME 3 NOTE:
If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is on the bridge, see Sheet 1.
1. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition or other site specific
treatment. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, attach
Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing as shown above. If limiting station of Roadway

Guardrail Transition is on the bridge, see Sheet 1.
12/17/2015
3. At the Contractor's option, along the length of the Approach Slab curb that is to be replaced, Dowel Bars 6D may be cast
in with the new section of curb as shown or they may be installed in drilled holes in the new section of curb using an
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB
NO.
482
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4

Flared Wing Wall may or may
not exist (length varies)

Varies
*** Curb heights vary from 5" Min. to
Existing Parallel Wing Wall similar
10" Max. Match height and shape

Bars 4A @ 9" Max. (Field Bend as
Varies (1'-6" Min.)
of existing curb on bridge.
required to maintain clearance) (Typ.)

Bars 4M (See
Note 4)
(See Note 3)
7"
Sleeve Assembly
clear Backwall
(Typ. each
3 "
end)
Gutter Line (Cut
Dowel Bars 4N
Exist. Approach
Below & Note 1,
@ 1'-3" (Typ.)
Sheet 1)
2'
-10"
Roadway Guardrail
Varies
Bars 6D cut to
3 "
Expansion Dowel
Existing Wing Post
Thrie-Beam
(Type Varies)
Guardrail Bolts
2" Clear
= 11"
Bars 5S
4" 3 sp. @
Bars 4C (Typ.)
3 "
9 "
Retrofit Railing
10"
Varies (
3 " M in.
)
Vertical Face
Varies (3" Preferred,

Transition Block
(Typ.)
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
Dowel Bars 6D
(See Note 5)
2 Layers of 30 Lb.
Smooth Roofing
Surface
Varies
Final Riding
*** Curb
Block (See Note 3)
Paper along joint
Bars 4A @ 9" Max.
Asphalt Overlay
when present
2" Min. Clear. Top
(Varies)
and Sides, 4" Min.
2'
-0" (
M in.
)
2"
3'-0" Transition
M in.
Varies (Match Length of Existing Curb)
Clear. Bottom
Dowel Bars 4N @ 1'-3" (Typ.)
of Transition
Bars 4A @ 9" Max., Min. 3 full length bars
Varies
Limiting Station

(2'-6" Min.)
clear) (Typ.)
1'-4"
Roadway Guardrail
2"
Transition Block
(See Note 3)
Below & Note 1,
SECTION C-C
Sheet 1)

Final Riding
required Top & Bottom (Field Bend to
10" Min. Embedment
(See Note 3)
Match Existing
present (Varies)
Curb Height on
Surface
Bridge
M in.
M in.
SCHEME 5 NOTES:
2'
-0"
1'
-0"
C-I-P Curb
1. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition or other site specific treatment.
If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal
Connector to railing as shown above. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is on the bridge,
see Sheet 1.
2. Dowel Bars 4N may be installed on a maximum angle of 45 to the cut edge of the Approach Slab as
Bars 4M (1'-0" Min.
shown to facilitate drilling of holes and installation of bars.
Embedment, See Note 4)

3. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab Curb does not extend beyond end
of existing End Bent Wing Wall, see Roadway Plans. Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall
match existing bridge curb. Railing End Transition and Transition Block may be omitted on trailing ends with
(Existing Wing Post, Railing Reinforcing and Expansion

Dowel Assemblies not shown for clarity)
4. Field bend Dowel Bars 4M within Transition Block as required to maintain 2" top and side clearance and 3"
11:
32:
12 AM
bottom clearance.
SCHEME 5
5. At the Contractor's option, along the length of the Approach Slab curb that is to be replaced, Dowel Bars 6D
may be cast in with the new section of curb as shown or they may be installed in drilled holes in the new
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
section of curb using an Adhesive Bonding Material System with a 1'-0" minimum embedment.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WIDE CURB
NO.
482
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
Coping
Open Joint **
Dowel
Bars 4C
Assembly
No. 480. Provide open Railing Joints at Deck Expansion Joint locations
Dowel Bars 6D
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Varies
Non skewed deck joint shown, actual joint dimensions and orientation
vary. For treatment at skewed deck joints see Skew Detail, Index
matching the dimension of the Deck Joint.
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
10"

** Provide " Intermediate Open Joints at :
Thrie-Beam

3 "
Expansion
Existing Bridge
" Intermediate
Guardrail Bolts
11" Max.
Varies

Deck Joint *
2'
-10"
Expansion Dowel & Bars 4C not required

at end of railing for Scheme 1, except where
@ 1'-3" Max.
traffic railing retrofit extends beyond ends of
Bars 6D spacing at
bridge, see Index No. 484
3 "
2" Cover
= 11"
2 equal sp. @
Gutter Line
4" 3 sp. @
7"
Varies (
3 " M in.
)

3" (Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
Dowel
Bars 6D
Varies
Railing Joints (Typ.
(Varies)
(See Sheet 2 and 3 and Index
Superstructure
Final Riding
No. 484, Sheets 5, 9 & 10.)
Surface
Supports
Varies (2'-6" Min.)
of Transition
" Intermediate
Deck Joint *
Open Joint **
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
1'-4"
when present
(Varies)
Edge
Coping
Distance
Embedment - 1'-0"
preferred with 2" edge
distance, 6" Min. if edge
distance is less than 2"
Scheme 1 only (See Note 1,
Asphalt Overlay
Scheme 1, Sheet 2, & Index

2"
Bars 5S
Dowel Bars 6D
Varies
Limiting Station
Traffic Railing
Deck
faces and top of
Bridge
" V-Groove in both
Overhang
Em bed.
Existing Curb
M in.
deck joints)
1'
-0" M in.
when present
*** Curb
2"
Asphalt Overlay
noted for skewed
Varies
on bridge except as
No. 484, Sheet 5, 9 & 10)
SECTION A-A
Final
Riding Surface
Varies
Top of Existing
(See Note 1)
= 11"
(Typ.)
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
Dowel
Bars 6D (Field
cut as required to
maintain clearance)
Em bed.
site specific treatment. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is on the bridge, attach
2" Cover
10" M in. M in.
SHOWING LIMITS OF REMOVAL
specific treatment. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition or other
3 "
3 "
TYPICAL SECTION THRU EXISTING TRAFFIC RAILING
1. On approach end provide a Roadway Guardrail Transition, Index No. 402 (as shown) or other site
Varies
Surface
*** Curb
Riding
NOTES:
4" 3 sp. @
Varies (
3 " M in.
)
be rem oved
(
Type Varies) to
(
shown shaded)
Final
Guardrail Bolts
Bars 6D
2"
Varies
(Expansion Dowel Assemblies and Bars 4C not shown for clarity
Thrie-Beam
2'
-10"
Existing Curb
Varies (10" Min.)
to rem ain
A
& W ing W all
Curb
Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector to railing as shown above. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail
Transition is along the Wing Wall, see Schemes 2 or 3, Sheets 2 & 3. On skewed bridges, if the skew
along the deck joint extends across the width of the railing, the 2'-6" minimum dimension shall apply
present (Varies)
11:
33:
45 AM
to both the front and back face of the railing.
If
CROSS REFERENCE:
4" (Edge
Distance)
Existing
vertical face retrofit extends beyond bridge and approach slab ends, see Index No. 484 for treatment
Provide bond breaker
and Details.
on top of curb
Notes & Bending Diagram see Index No. 480.
Wing Wall
SECTION B-B
TYPICAL SECTION THRU RAILING ON WING WALL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INTERMEDIATE CURB
NO.
483
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
Dowel Bars 6D @
1'-3" Spacing Max.

(Front and Back row
(See Note 2)
of bars only)
Existing Parallel
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
Expansion
(See Note 3)
Wing Wall

9 "
9 "
Dowel Sleeve
7"
7"
Assembly
Bars 4C (Typ.)

Transition Block
(See Note 1)
Dowel Bars 6D
on top of existing curb
Roadway Guardrail
(shown hatched)
Transition (Note 1,
Sheet 1)
3 " (Typ.)
@ 7 " Spacing
Transition Block
Max. (Middle row
(See Note 2)

Sheet 1)
of bars only)
each end)
3'-0"
(See Note 1)
End Bent Wing Wall)

Existing Approach
3'-0"
Transition Block
Slab
Transition Block
(See Note 2)
Begin or End Bridge

& Match Line (See
Sheet 1)
PARTIAL PLAN OF GUARDRAIL
(See Sheet 1)

Limiting Station
of Transition
Varies

(See Note 2)
(2'-6" Min.)
present (Varies)
(See Note 2)
2"
1'-4"

Sheet 1)

(Note 1, Sheet 1)
Existing Curb
Existing
Transition Block
Final Riding
Transition Block
(See Note 1)
Surface
(See Note 2)
Backwall
Curb
1'-0"
1'-0"
Match Existing
Match Existing
Curb Height
Curb Height
B

Place first post 2"
clear of Wing Wall
Existing End
Bent Wing Wall
(See Note 3)

SCHEME 1
SCHEME 2

PARALLEL WING WALLS

SCHEME 2 NOTES:
1. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition or other site specific treatment.
SCHEME 1 NOTES:
If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is along the Wing Wall, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal
1. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab does not have a curb,
see Roadway Plans. Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match existing bridge
curb. Railing End Transition and Transition Block may be omitted on trailing ends with no
Connector to railing as shown above. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition is on the bridge,
see Sheet 1. On skewed bridges, if the skew along the deck joint extends across the width of the railing,
the 2'-6" mminimum dimension shall apply to both the front and back face of the railing.
opposing traffic.
11:
33:
46 AM
2. Provide Transition Block (as shown) or Curb if existing Approach Slab Curb does not extend beyond end of
2. Field bend Dowel Bars 4L within Transition Block as required to maintain 2" top and side
existing End Bent Wing Wall, see Roadway Plans. Shape and height of Transition Block or Curb shall match
clearance and 3" bottom clearance.
existing bridge curb. Railing End Transition and Transition Block may be omitted on trailing ends with no
opposing traffic.
3. If a Special Steel Guardrail Post is required for attachment to the top of a sloping Wing Wall,
12/17/2015
saw cut and remove a wedge shaped portion of the sloping Wing Wall as required to provide a
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
level surface for post installation.
bottom clearance.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INTERMEDIATE CURB
NO.
483
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Bars 5S (Field Bend)

Dowel Bars 6D @ 1'-3"

Spacing Max. (Front and
Back row of bars only)
Vertical Face
Retrofit Railing
SCHEME 3 NOTE:
Expansion Dowel
Sleeve Assembly
1. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of Roadway Guardrail Transition

or other site specific treatment. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail
Transition is along the Wing Wall, attach Thrie-Beam Terminal Connector
Bars 4C (Typ.)
to railing as shown above. If limiting station of Roadway Guardrail
Max. (Middle row of bars only)
Transition is on the bridge, see Sheet 1.
on top of curb
3" (Typ. each end)
Existing
(shown hatched)
Approach
Slab
End Bent Wing Wall)


(See Sheet 1)

Begin Flared portion of Vertical
Varies (1'-0" Min.)

B
present (Varies)
Existing Curb

Existing Approach
Slab

11:
33:
47 AM
SCHEME 3
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
FLARED WING WALLS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INTERMEDIATE CURB
NO.
483
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Lateral Hazard or Top
End of bridge end bent wing (flared wing
of Non-Traversable
shown, parallel wing similar) or other
slope
Hazard that requires shielding
Limits of Payment for Vertical Face Retrofit

(include Tapered End Transition when provided)
X (Length of Advancement, Ft.)
Tapered End Transition *

20'-0"
Beginning of Length
Begin Vertical Face Traffic
of Need and Offset
Railing Tapered End
Control Point
Transition
Departure Line
D(
b)
D(
a)
Clear Zone Limits or Horizontal Clearance Limit
Back of Curb
Point of Departure
Face of Vertical Face
Toe of Vertical Face Traffic Railing
Toe of Curb
Traffic Railing
* Guardrail or Crash Cushion may also be shown in the
SCHEMATIC PLAN VIEW - NEAR LANE APPROACH
Contract Plans, in lieu of the Tapered End Transition.
End of bridge end bent wing

(flared wing shown, parallel
Limits of Payment for Vertical Face Retrofit
wing similar) or other Hazard
(include Tapered End Transition when provided)
Lateral Hazard or Top of
that requires shielding
Non-Traversable slope
Tapered End Transition *
X (Length of Advancement, Ft.)
20'-0"
Begin Vertical Face
Traffic Railing Tapered
Beginning of Length
End Transition
of Need and Offset
Clear Zone Limits or Horizontal Clearance Limit
Control Point
Departure Line
D(
a)
Face of Vertical Face Traffic Railing
Toe of Curb
D(
b)
Back of Curb
Toe of Vertical Face Traffic Railing
Departure Line
Point of Departure
Opposing Traffic Lane Line
SCHEMATIC PLAN VIEW - OPPOSING LANE APPROACH
LENGTH OF ADVANCEMENT - TAPERED END TRANSITION (40 MPH OR LESS)

Design Speed
(mph)
Length of Advancement, Ft. (X)
DESIGN NOTES:
The Tapered End Transition should only be used when space is limited which precludes the use
40
= 16 (D-d)
of a guardrail end treatment or crash cushion.
D = Distance in feet from near edge of near approach traffic lane to either:
Notes:
(a) the back of hazard, when the hazard is located inside the clear zone or horizontal clearance;
11:
34:
07 AM
1. The minimum length of advancement for both near lane

and opposing lane approaches is 20'.
(b) the clear zone or horizontal clearance outer limits, when hazard extends to, or goes beyond
CROSS REFERENCES:
the clear zone or horizontal clearance limits.

For left side hazards on two way undivided facilities, "D" is measured from the inside edge of the
2. For Design Speeds greater than 40 mph the Tapered End

Transition is not permitted. See Index No. 400 for length
treatments.
Reinforcing Steel Bending Diagram see Index

d = Distance in feet from near edge of near approach traffic lane to face of traffic railing (at
No. 480.
offset control point). For left side hazards on two-way undivided facilities "d" is measured
from the inside edge of the nearest opposing traffic lane as shown above.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
of Advancement of guardrail or other project specific end
For General Notes, Dowel Details, Expansion

Dowel Details, Reinforcing Steel Notes and
near approach traffic lane as shown above.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SPREAD FOOTING APPROACH
NO.
484
SHEET
NO.
1of 10
Approach Slab Transition
Offset Control Point (Front Face of
(See Schemes 1 thru 7 for
Railing) Begin Tapered End Transition
Details and Reinforcement)
Typical Section
20'-0" (Traffic Railing to Curb Transition)

End Spread Footing
Begin or End Approach Slab Transition
Approach Retrofit,
Extend Bars 5S in back face of Traffic Railing 1'-6" into Tapered End Transition
begin Roadway Curb
(see Schemes for Details)
Begin or End Bridge

and Begin Spread
Bars 5F (Typ.)
Footing Approach
1'
-6"
(field bend)
Bridge and/or Approach

~
Slab Transition
(
Transition)
Bars 5S
Bars 5S
Top of Curb
Bars 4G (Typ.)
Toe of Curb
Bars 5E (Typ.) (Cut to maintain

cover in Transition Area)
1'-6 "
Bars 5E @ 8" spacing (Tied to Bars 4F)
3 "
Bars 5F @ 8" spacing
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
Typical Section
20'-0" (Traffic Railing and Curb Transition)
Slab Transition (see

" V-Groove (Both faces and
Schemes for Details)
top) @ 30'-0" Max. spacing
Bars 5E (Typ.)
(Cut to maintain
Bars 5S
20'-0" (Traffic Railing
Extend Bars 5S in back face of Traffic Railing 1'-6" into Tapered End Transition
cover in Taper)
Bars 5S (field bend &
Joint
no approach curb
is present
B
2"
Construction
See Detail "B" when
2"
Optional
cut to maintain cover)
Curb
6"
& Curb Transition)
Roadway
Top of
Top of Curb
Shoulder
Curb
Toe of Curb
Bars 4G (Typ.)
Bars 5F (Typ.)
2'-9" Vertical
X
B
Curb Transition
11:
34:
08 AM

DETAIL "B"
TRANSITION TO NON-CURB APPROACH
(Reinforcing Not Shown For Clarity)
TAPERED END TRANSITION

CROSS REFERENCES:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
For Section A-A, B-B and X-X see Sheet 4.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
484
SHEET
NO.
2 of 10

Transition (see Schemes
for Details)
Typical Section
See Schemes 1 thru 7 for
Typical Section
Details and Reinforcement

End Spread Footing
Transition (see Schemes
Approach Retrofit,
for Details)
begin Roadway Curb
Varies, Curb & Railing

Transition
End Spread Footing

Approach Retrofit,
Begin or End Bridge

Bars 5F (Typ.)
and Begin Spread
Footing Approach
Bars 5F (Typ.)
Bars 5E (Typ.)
Bars 5S
(See Note 1)
(See Note 1)
Top of Curb
Bars 4G (Typ.)
4"
Varies
Toe of Curb
Edge of Shoulder
Bars 5E shift & cut

Bars 5S (field bend)
bars as shown
2'-8" Transition of top edge of Railing

4"
Curb to match face of approach curb
3 "
4"
3 "
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
to maintain cover
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
(With Curb Approach)
(Without Curb Approach)


Varies, Curb & Railing

Transition
Varies

(2'-6" Min.)

2"
Bars 5E (Typ.)
(2'-6" Min.)
(See Note 2)
1'-4"
Varies
(See Note 2)
1'-4"
(See Note 1)
2"
Bars 5S
Typical Section
Typical Section
Bars 5S
(See Note 1)
Bars 5E
3
4"
(Typ.)
10
Bars 4G (Typ.)
Top of Curb
X
Bars 5F (Typ.)
C
Bars 5F
Toe of Curb
& face of Railing Curb to

match face of approach curb
2'-8"
Curb
Railing
Transition
Transition
(With Curb Approach)

11:
34:
08 AM
Shoulder line
Varies
(Typ.)
2'-8" Transition of top edge
(Without Curb Approach)
GUARDRAIL END TRANSITION
NOTES:
1. On approach end provide a Roadway Guardrail Transition, Index No. 402 (Sheet 16 Scheme 1) or other site specific treatment. See Roadway Plans for limiting station of
Roadway Guardrail Transition or other site specific treatment.
CROSS REFERENCES:
For Section A-A, C-C and X-X see Sheet 4.
Spread Footing Approach, see Roadway Plans. Railing End Transition & Railing & Curb Base
Transitions may be omitted on trailing ends with no opposing traffic.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
2. Provide Railing & Curb Base Transitions (as shown) if curb does not extend beyond end of
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
484
SHEET
NO.
3 of 10
1'-6"
1'-1"
2'-2"
Varies (3" Max., 1" Min., match

10"
bridge offset constant for Retrofit
CY
4.57 Total
SECTION X-X (TYPICAL CURB,
Lb.
776 Total
(See Index No. 300 and Plans for Details)
End Transition plus Footing
3 "
Bars 5S (Typ.)
Curb & Railing
Construction Joint
Transition
Sl
o
p
e*
Permited
3" Cover
10 "
Varies *
NOTE: Quantities are based on a 9" curb, no curb cross slope.
2"
3 "
TYPE VARIES, TYPE F SHOWN)
Reinforcing Steel - 20'-0" Tapered
Grade Elevation
1"
* Match Cross Slope of high side and low

side at begin or end bridge or approach
Bars 4G
slab.
(
M in.
)
Transition plus Footing
Sidewalk or Finish
4"
10 "
Concrete - 20'-0" Tappered End
2'-0"
3" Cover (
Typ. ends)
38
maintain cover)
4"
Lb./Ft.
cut & shift to
Reinforcing Steel - Typical Section
End Bar 5E (field
5 sp. @
0.25
10 "
CY/Ft.
Curb **
Concrete - Typical Section
Varies
2'
-10" (
M in. m atch
9" Curb
Bridge and Approach Slab)
QUANTITY
UNIT
Varies
1'
-0"
SPREAD FOOTING APPROACH QUANTITIES
ITEM
Varies (0" to 2")
to begin Curb & Railing Transition)
ESTIMATED TRAFFIC RAILING RETROFIT
Bars 5F @ 8"
3" Cover
4 "
** Match curb height of adjacent bridge and
3 sp. @ 1'-4" = 4'-0"
4 "
approach slab. Adjust height in Transition

4'-9"
area to match adjoining Roadway curb.
SECTION C-C
1'-6"
1'-1"
(GUARDRAIL END TRANSITION)
2'-2"
10"
bridge offset constant for
Varies (0" to 2")

3 "
Bars 4G
Bars 5E (Cut and tied
Transition
to maintain cover in
2"
transition area)
Grade Elevation
Permited
3" Cover
3" Cover
Bars 4G
Bars 5F @ 8"
3" Cover
11:
34:
09 AM
(
M in.
)
(Typ. ends)
Bars 5F @ 8"
3 sp. @ 1'-4" = 4'-0"
Sidewalk or Finish
Construction Joint
10 "
10 "
(
M in.
)
10 "
4"
3" Cover
3" Cover (
Typ. ends)
Permited
Sl
o
p
e*
Varies *
Varies
Construction Joint
Railing Transition
to Roadway Curb
Varies *
Grade Elevation
1'-6" Traffic
1'-8" Bridge
Curb **
2" Cover
Varies
Sidewalk or Finish
Varies
2'
-10" (
M in. m atch
Bars 5E @ 8" sp.
3 "
2"
Cover
5 sp. @
Varies
Retrofit to begin transition)
Bars 5S (Typ.)
Curb **
2'
-10" (
M in. m atch
10"
2" Cover
1"
4 "
10"
Railing Transition)
10 "
2'-5" (Curb &
1'-6"
3" Cover
4 "
4 "
4'-9"
3 sp. @ 1'-4" = 4'-0"
4 "
4'-9"
CROSS REFERENCES:
For location of Sections A-A, B-B
12/17/2015
SECTION A-A
Sheet 3.
LAST
07/01/09
REVISIO N
(9" Curb shown, 6" Curb similar)
REVISION
SECTION B-B
and X-X see Sheet 2.

For location of Section C-C see
TYPICAL SECTION
TAPERED END TRANSITION

(Bars 5S not shown for clarity)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
484
SHEET
NO.
4 of 10
1'-1"
Typical Section

10"
3 "
Note:
Bars 5F (Typ.) Clip bars as
4"
(when present, shown Shaded) to
Line
be removed
(Min.)
Asphalt Overlay
when present
3 "
Construction Joint
Permited
3" Cover
10 "

Bars 4G (Typ.)
(
M in.
)
Curb & portion of Approach Slab
Bars 5S
Bars 5S (Typ.)
10 "
(Typ.) tied to Bars 5F
1"
3" Cover (
Typ. ends)
Bars 5E @ 8" spacing Max.
2" Cover
4"
(Typ.)
Bars 5E @ 8" sp.
5 sp. @
Bars 4C
2"
Cover
Curb **
Sleeve Assembly
Varies
Bars 4G (Typ.)
Varies
2'
-10" (
M in. m atch
bridge and approach slab.
Expansion Dowel
2" Cover
** Match curb height of adjacent
Reqd. to maintain Cover
Wing Wall similar
4" (Min.)
Wall shown, Existing Angled
Gutter
Varies (0" to 2")
1'-0"
Existing Perpendicular Wing
2'-2"
Bars 5F @ 8"
3" Cover
Begin or End Bridge &
PARTIAL PLAN
Match Line (See Index No.
Varies
481, 482 & 483 Sheet 1)
2 sp. @ 1'-4" = 2'-8"
4 "
3" (Min.)
3'-3"
Bars 5E
Bars 5S
(Typ.)
SECTION D-D
Field Cut Bars 5E to

maintain 2" cover
10"

" Preformed
3 "
Top of Curb
2" Cover

(Expansion Dowel Assemblies and Bars 4C not shown for clarity)
Asphalt Overlay
when present
SCHEME 1 ~ MODIFICATION FOR INDEX NO. 481, 482 AND 483 - SCHEME 1
bottom 2" clear
2" Cover
3 "
1"
Existing W ing
Bars 5E @ 8" sp., clip
Post Rem oved
2"
Cover
5 sp. @
Bars 5S (Typ.)
Curb **
Bars 4G (Typ.)
Varies
2'
-10" (
M in. m atch
Varies
Bars 5F (Typ.)
Joint Filler
1
2"
Preformed
Joint Filler
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PERPENDICULAR OR ANGLED WING

WALLS WITH NARROW CURBS (SHOWN), WIDE CURBS
AND INTERMEDIATE CURBS (SIMILAR)
Existing Perpendicular
11:
34:
10 AM
End Bent Wing

CROSS REFERENCE:

For Expansion Dowel Assembly and
12/17/2015
placement of Dowel Bars 6D Details
SECTION E-E (NARROW CURB SHOWN,
see Index 480.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
WIDE AND INTERMEDIATE CURBS SIMILAR)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
484
SHEET
NO.
5 of 10
Typical Section
8" (Max.)
1'-1"
Bars 5F @ 8" spacing Max. (Typ.) Clip
4"
bars as reqd.to maintain Cover

10"
Varies (0" to 2")
Existing Parallel
3 "

Bars 4G (Typ.)
Wing Wall
Dowel
2" Cover
Bars
Bars 6D
1'-3" Max. Spacing
3" (Min.)
(when present, shown shaded) to

be removed
(Max.)
7 "
Asphalt Overlay
when present
End Bent Wing Wall)
2" Cover
3 "
1"
Existing W ing
2@
Post Rem oved
4"
3 "
Bars 5S (Typ.)
Em bed.
Gutter Line
Sleeve Assembly
Dowel Bars 6D
1'
-0" M in.
2"
Cover
5 sp. @
Expansion Dowel
Varies
Varies
2'
-10" (
M in. m atch
Curb **
(Typ.)
5S
Bars 4C
No. 481, Sheet 2)
PARTIAL PLAN
Match Line (See Index
Note:
** Match curb height at adjoining

Dowel Bars 6D
(Typ.)
Final Riding
Surface
Existing End
Bent Wing
existing end bent wing.
Bars 5E
(Typ.)
A
SECTION F-F

present (Varies)
Top of Curb
Bars 5S
Existing
Curb
Bars 4G (Typ.)
Saw Cut
Asphalt Overlay
when present
Joint
Curb and portion of existing
approach slab (shown shaded)
Bars 5F (Typ.)
Existing End
to be removed when present
Bent Wing Wall
SECTION THRU EXISTING CURB AND
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PARALLEL
APPROACH SLAB TO BE REMOVED
WING WALLS WITH NARROW CURBS
(Free Standing Curb Similar)
11:
34:
11 AM
SCHEME 2 ~ MODIFICATION FOR INDEX NO. 481 - SCHEME 2
NOTES:
CROSS REFERENCES:
1. Remove existing concrete along saw cut joints. Existing reinforcing
steel may be cut at joint or extended into new concrete. Exposed
For Section D-D see Sheet 5.
existing reinforcing not encased in new concrete shall be removed
For Expansion Dowel Assembly and
1" below existing concrete surface and grouted over.

12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
see Index 480.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
484
SHEET
NO.
6 of 10
Varies
Typical
Section
Bond Breaker along end
Bars 4G
Max. (Typ.) Clip bars as

Curb & portion of Approach
to top of curb
(Typ.)
reqd. to maintain Cover
Post to be removed
Varies
10"
2" Cover
3 "
bent wing wall only
Slab (when present, shown

shaded) to be removed
Expansion Dowel
Sleeve Assembly
3 "
Gutter
Line
2@
" Chamfer
1'-3" Max. Spacing
Bars 5S
(Typ.) tied to Bars 5F (tilt
4"
Final Riding
(Min.)
bars minimally as required)
Surface
7 "
Asphalt Overlay
when present
3 "
Bars 5E @
8" sp.
2" Cover
1"
Bars 5S (Typ.)
Construction Joint Permited

Bond Breaker, 2
3" Cover
4"
(Typ.)
2"
Cover
5 sp. @
Bars 5S
Varies
Bars 6D
Varies
2'
-10" (
M in. m atch
Dowel
Bars 4C
Curb **
be removed to top of curb
Existing Flared Wing Post to
layers of 30#
Smooth Roofing
Paper along joint
Existing End
(
M in.
)
10 "
10 "
Bars 5F @ 8"
Bent Wing

No. 481, Sheet 3)
3" Cover (Typ. ends)
Bars 4G @ 1'-4"
Dowel
Final Riding
Surface
Varies
Bars 6D
3" (Min.)
SECTION G-G
present (Varies)
Top of
Curb
Existing
Bars 5S
Curb
Note:

Existing
Approach Slab


Existing End
Bent Wing Wall

SCHEME 3 ~ MODIFICATION FOR INDEX NO. 481 SCHEME 3

11:
34:
12 AM

WITH NARROW CURBS
CROSS REFERENCES:
For Section F-F see Sheet 6.
For Expansion Dowel Assemblies Details and
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
placement of Dowel Bars 6D see Index 480.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
484
SHEET
NO.
7 of 10
Typical
Section
8" (Max.)
Typical Section
4"
8" (Max.)

4"
Existing Parallel Wing
Wall and Wing Post
Existing Wing Wall
and Wing Post
Bars 4G
(Typ.)
reqd.to maintain Cover

Bond Breaker
Bond Breaker
against wing
against wing
wall only
wall only
Bars 5S
Bars 4G (Typ.)
Bars 4C
Bars 4C
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Expansion Dowel
Expansion Dowel
Gutter Line
Sleeve Assembly
4"
(Min.)
Gutter Line
Sleeve Assembly
Bars 5S
4"
(Min.)



No. 482, Sheet 2)

No. 482, Sheet 3)

Bars 5S (Typ.)
Bars 5S (Typ.)
present (Varies)
present (Varies)
Top of Curb
Final Riding
Surface
Final Riding
Top of
Surface
Curb

reqd.to maintain Cover

Existing
Approach Slab
Bars 4G (extend 2'-0"

beyond wing wall as shown)
Bars 4G (extend 2'-0"
beyond wing wall as shown)


Existing End
Edge of Existing
Approach Slab
(Location Varies)
Bent Wing Wall
(Existing Wing Post, Expansion Dowel Assemblies and Bars 4C not shown for clarity)
(Existing Wing Post, Expansion Dowel Assemblies and Bars 4C not shown for clarity)
SCHEME 5 ~ MODIFICATION FOR INDEX NO. 482 SCHEME 3 AND 4
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PARALLEL CURBS AND FLARED
11:
34:
13 AM
RAILING END TREATMENT FOR PARALLEL CURBS AND
WING WALLS WITH WIDE CURBS
WING WALLS WITH WIDE CURBS

CROSS REFERENCES:
For Section A-A see Sheet 4
12/17/2015
For Section G-G see Sheet 7.

For Expansion Dowel Assemblies Details
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
see Index 480.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
484
SHEET
NO.
8 of 10
Typical Section
Varies
Bars 4G

1
Provide 2"
(Typ.)
Varies 10" (Min.)
Preformed
existing curb (shown
Bars 5S (extend
hatched)
2'-0" beyond wing
312"
Joint Filler on top of
4"
2" Cover
Max. (Typ.)
312"
2@
(Min.)
312"
1'-3" Max. Spacing
Final Riding
1
2"
Surface

Asphalt Overlay
Edge of Existing
when present
Approach Slab
End Bent Wing Wall)
334"
Dowel Bars 6D
Dowel
Bars
6D
2" Cover
1"
Bars 5S (Typ.)
1
2"
Preformed
Joint Filler
Em bed.
8" spacing
2"
Cover
1'
-0" M in.
Dowel Bars 6D
4"
5 sp. @
Sleeve Assembly
Curb **
Bars 5E @
Gutter Line
Varies
Expansion Dowel
2'
-10" (
M in. m atch
(Typ.)
Varies
Bars 4C
wall as shown)
(Location Varies)
Existing End
Bent Wing
Front Face of Backwall, Begin or

End Bridge & Match Line (See
Index No. 483, Sheet 1)
SECTION H-H
Final Riding
Dowel
Surface
Bars 6D

Note:
Asphalt Overlay
when present
(Varies)
Top of
Curb
Existing
Bars 5S
Curb
Existing
Edge of Existing
Approach Slab
Bars 4G
Existing End
Approach Slab
(Location Varies)

Bent Wing Wall

CROSS REFERENCES:
11:
34:
14 AM

For Expansion Dowel Assembly

and placement of Dowel Bars 6D
Details see Index 480.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
WING WALLS WITH INTERMEDIATE CURBS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
484
SHEET
NO.
9 of 10
Typical

Bond Breaker against wing wall only
Portion of existing curb
Section
(when present, shown shaded)
Bars 4G
to be removed
(Typ.)
to remain (shown hatched),
Existing Flared Traffic Railing
provide " Preformed
(Hatched portion to remain)
Varies
Joint Filler bond breaker
Dowel
on top of existing curb
Varies 10" (Min.)
Bars 6D

3 "
Bars 5S
Bars 4C
2" Cover
1
2"

Final Riding
Surface
Asphalt Overlay
when present
3 "
Bars 5E @
8" sp.
1"
Bars 5S (Typ.)
Construction Joint
Permited
3" Cover
4"
(Min.)
bars minimally as required)
1'-3" Max. Spacing
2"
Cover
5 sp. @
(Typ.) tied to Bars 5F (tilt
4"
Curb **
2@
Bars 5S
Varies
3 "
4"
Varies
Line
2'
-10" (
M in. m atch
Gutter
Sleeve Assembly
Expansion Dowel
1'
-0"
(Typ.)
Bond Breaker, 2
(
M in.
)
10 "
10 "
layers of 30#
Smooth Roofing
Paper along joint

Existing End
Bars 5F
@ 8"
No. 483, Sheet 3)
Dowel
Final Riding
Surface
Varies
Bars 6D
1'-4"
Bent Wing
3" Cover (Typ. ends)
3" (Min.)
SECTION I-I
present (Varies)
Top of
Curb
Existing
Bars 5S
Curb
Note:
Existing
Approach Slab


Existing End
Bent Wing Wall

CROSS REFERENCES:
11:
34:
14 AM
For Section H-H see Sheet 9.


see Index 480.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
FLARED WING WALLS WITH INTERMEDIATE CURBS
For Expansion Dowel Assemblies and
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
484
SHEET
NO.
10 of 10
Control Line Set By Normal Shoulder Point

Whether Or Not Shoulder Gutter Is Used
Control Line Set By Normal Shoulder Point

Outer Roadway
Outer Roadway
Whether Or Not Shoulder Gutter Is Used
**
1:
2
Overlying Material
O
r
g
a
n
i
c Ma
t
e
r
i
a
l
1:
2
Co
nt
ro
l
Li
ne
Co
nt
ro
l
Li
ne
O
r
g
a
n
i
c Ma
t
e
r
i
a
l
Bottom Of
Bottom Of
Organic Material
Limit For Minimum Removal
Organic Material
WI
THOUT OVERBURDEN -HAL
F SECTI
ON
WI
TH OVERBURDEN -HAL
F SECTI
ON
IN RURAL CONSTRUCTION
Outer Roadway
Outer Roadway
Back Of Proposed Or Future Sidewalk
Back Of Proposed Or Future Sidewalk

Gutter Line
Gutter Line
**
1:
2
1:
2
Co
nt
ro
l
Li
ne
Overlying Material
Co
nt
ro
l
Li
ne
O
r
g
a
n
i
c Ma
t
e
r
i
a
l
O
r
g
a
n
i
c Ma
t
e
r
i
a
l
Bottom Of
Organic Material
Bottom Of
Organic Material
WI
THOUT OVERBURDEN -HAL
F SECTI
ON
WI
TH OVERBURDEN -HAL
F SECTI
ON
** Remove overlying material and organic material within the limits shown and backfill in
* Remove organic material within the limits shown and backfill in accordance with Index
accordance with Index no. 505, unless approved otherwise by the District Geotechnical
no. 505, unless approved otherwise by the District Geotechnical Engineer; The limits
IN URBAN CONSTRUCTION
Engineer; The limits include full median width when applied to divided facilities with
include full median width when applied to divided facilities with median widths up to
median widths up to 64'; When median width is greater than 64' and for bifurcated
64'; When median width is greater than 64' and for bifurcated roadways the organic
roadways the organic material removal limits will be set by a 1:2 control line
material removal limits will be set by a 1:2 control line complimentary to the outer
complimentary to the outer roadway that will accommodate one future median lane on
roadway that will accommodate one future median lane on each roadway unless
each roadway unless specified otherwise by the plans.
specified otherwise by the plans.
REMOVAL OF ORGANIC MATERIAL

GENERAL NOTES
1. All details shown on this index for removal of organic and plastic materials apply
unless otherwise shown on the plans.
2. Utilization of excavated materials shall be in accordance with Index No. 505.
DESIGN NOTES
District Geotechnical Engineer. Average organic content shall be determined from
1. At locations where organic material or other soft soil deposits persists to
the test results from a minimum of three randomly selected samples from each
such depth that removal is impractical, the construction of a geosynthetic
stratum. Tests shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T 267 on the
foundation over those soils should be considered. The Engineer of Record
portion of a sample passing the No. 4 sieve.
should request guidance from the District Geotechnical Engineer and make a
geosynthetic foundation design in accordance with Index No. 501 when
3. Where organic or plastic material is undercut, backfill shall be made of suitable

material in accordance with Index No. 505, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
6. The normal depth of side ditches shall be 3.5' below the shoulder point except in
pursuing geosynthetic alternates.
special cases.
11:
36:
15 AM
2. The designer shall take into consideration the expectancy of roadway

4. The term "Plastic Material" used in this index in conjunction with removal of
widening to the outside, and where widening is anticipated specify in the
plastic soil is as defined under soil classifications for Plastic (P) and High Plastic
pavement, the grade of the underdrain filter material will not extend above the
plans the limits of removal of organic and plastic materials necessary to
(H) on Index No. 505.
bottom of the stabilized section of the subgrade. Gradation of the filter material
accommodate anticipated widening.
shall conform to FDOT specifications. Minimum grade on underdrain pipe shall be

5. The term "Organic Material" as used on this index is defined as any soil which has
0.2%.
an average organic content greater than five (5.0) percent, or an individual organic
content test result which exceeds seven (7.0) percent. Organic material shall be
8. See Index No. 506 for miscellaneous earthwork details.
removed as shown on this index and the plans unless directed otherwise by the
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
7. In municipal areas, where underdrain is to be constructed beneath the proposed
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
REMOVAL OF ORGANIC AND PLASTIC MATERIAL
NO.
500
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Section On Superelevation
Section On Tangent
.02
2
0
.
24"
Remove Plastic Material To This Line
Undercut Line
Undercut Line
TYPICAL CUT SECTION

Note: When this detail is applied to minor collectors and
local facilities, the undercut may be reduced to 18".
At locations where plastic material
Where paved side ditches are used in
is being removed, the side ditches
areas of removal of plastic material,
must be at least as deep as the
the top of the ditch pavement must be
undercut plane.
no higher than the undercut plane.
REMOVAL OF PLASTIC MATERIAL ON DIVIDED FREEWAYS,

MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
ARTERIALS AND MAJOR COLLECTORS HAVING FLUSH MEDIANS,

AND ON UNDIVIDED ARTERIALS AND MAJOR COLLECTORS
6"
6"
24"
24"
24"
24"
Cut Limit For Minimum
Remove Plastic
Removal Of Plastic Material
Material To This Line
Median
12"
12"
Gutter Line
24"
1:
2
Material To This
C
on
tr
ol
TYPICAL CUT SECTION ON TANGENT
Material. Where Preferable Method Of Removal Governs And It Is

Impossible To Place The Underdrain At The Outer Cut Limit Due
Li
ne
To Conflict With Storm Drain Trunk Lines, Remove To Inner Limit

And Place Underdrain At Location Shown For Minimum Removal.
Extended Undercut Slope When Underdrain
6"
Remove Plastic
Inner And Outer Cut Limit For Preferable Removal Of Plastic
6"
Located At Outer Control Line Limit

1'-6"
Or
Line. See Note*.
24"
0.02 Undercut Backslope When Underdrain Located At Back Of Curb

24"
.02
2
0
.
2
0
.
Underdrain, See Index No. 286

Minimum Grade On Underdrain Pipe Shall Be 0.2%.
Remove Plastic Material To This Line
HALF SECTION
NOTES:
TYPICAL CUT SECTION ON SUPERELEVATION
Refer to roadway cross sections to determine whether minimum or preferable removal is used.
REMOVAL OF PLASTIC MATERIAL ON INTERSTATE
Where frequency of median breaks indicates that it is impractical to leave plastic material in the median, the designer may elect to
FACILITIES, FREEWAYS, DIVIDED ARTERIALS AND
indicate total removal of this material. If during construction it becomes apparent, due to normal required construction procedures,
that it is impractical to leave the plastic material in the median, total removal of this material shall be approved by the Engineer.
MAJOR COLLECTORS HAVING DEPRESSED MEDIANS
REMOVAL OF PLASTIC MATERIAL AND LOCATION

11:
36:
16 AM
OF UNDERDRAIN IN URBAN CONSTRUCTION
REMOVAL OF PLASTIC MATERIAL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Note: For GENERAL NOTES see Sheet 1.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
REMOVAL OF ORGANIC AND PLASTIC MATERIAL
NO.
500
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Median
Shldr.
Shldr.
Lanes
Lanes
Va
r
i
e
s(
0
.
0
2
-
2
0
.
0
s(
e
i
r
Va
0.
06
.
0
4
6
1:
4
0
.
48"
*
48"
*
12"
S
Type B Stabilization LBR 40
Bottom Of Base
0
.
0
3T
y
p
.
)
5
0
.
0
2.5' Std.
1:
6
d.
t
6S
1:
St
d.
0
.
0
5
12"
)
.
p
y
3T
0
.
0
06
0.
1:
4
Shldr.
1
:2
48"
*
Shldr.
Bottom Of Base
1:
6T
y
p.
C
o
n
tr
o
l
S
L
in
e
S, P
4
1:
d.
St
S, P, H
Water Level At Time Fill Is Placed
DIVIDED ROADWAYS
Shldr.
Lanes
Shldr.
GENERAL NOTES
Varies
Varies
1. Roadway dimensions are representative. Subgrade dimensions and control lines are standard. The details
shown on this Index do not supersede the details shown in the plans or on Index Nos. 500 or 506.
Varies
d.
t
6S
1:
of the proposed base. It should be placed uniformly in the lower portion of the embankment for some
0.
06
Bottom Of Base
12"
48"
*
distance along the project rather than full depth for short distances.
48"
*
St
d.
12"
1:
4
2. Plastic (P) soils may be placed above the existing water level (at the time of construction) to within 4 feet
(0.02-0.03)
06
0.
1
:2
Type B Stabilization
LBR 40
C
o
S
n
tr
o
l
L
in
e
1:
6T
yp
.
3. High Plastic (H) soils excavated within the project limits may be used in embankment construction as
indicated on this index. High Plastic soils are not to be used for embankment construction when obtained
from outside the project limits.
4. Select (S) soils having an average organic content of more than two and one-half (2.5) percent, or having
S, P
Water Level At Time
S, P, H
Fill Is Placed
an individual test value which exceeds four (4) percent, shall not be used in the subgrade portion of the
roadbed. Select (S), Plastic (P), or High Plastic (H) soils having an average organic content of more than
five (5) percent, or an organic content individual test result which exceeds seven (7) percent, shall not be
used in the portion of embankment inside the control line, unless written authorization is provided by the
District Geotechnical Engineer; these soils may be used for embankment construction outside the control
UNDIVIDED ROADWAY
line, unless restricted by the plans or otherwise specified in the plans, provided they can be compacted
sufficiently to sustain a drivable surface for operational vehicles as approved by the Engineer. Average
organic content shall be determined from the test results from a minimum of three randomly selected
SYMBOL
SOIL
CLASSIFICATION (AASHTO M 145)
Select
A-1, A-3, A-2-4 **
Plastic
A-2-5, A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, A-7 (ALL WITH LL < 50)
High Plastic
Muck
samples from each stratum or stockpile of a particular material. Tests shall be performed in accordance
with AASHTO T 267 on the portion of a sample passing the No. 4 sieve.
5. Highly organic soils, composed primarily of partially decayed organic matter, often dark brown or black in
color with an odor of decay, and sometimes fibrous, shall be designated as muck. Further, any stratum or
A-2-5, A-2-7, A-5 Or A-7 (ALL WITH LL > 50)
stockpile of soil which contains pockets of highly organic material may be designated as Muck (M). Highly
organic soils shall not be used within the subgrade or embankment portion of the roadbed, with the
exception of muck used as a supplement to construct a finish soil layer as described in Section 162 of
A-8
the FDOT Standard Specifications.

Classification listed left to right in order of preference.
See General Notes Nos. 4 & 5 for utilization of soils classified as organic material or muck.
** Certain types of A-2-4 material are likely to retain excess moisture and may be difficult to
dry and compact. They should be used in the embankment above the water level existing at
11:
36:
17 AM
time of construction. They may be used in the subgrade portion of the roadbed when
DESIGN NOTES
1. The designer shall take into consideration the expectancy of roadway widening to the outside, and
where widening is anticipated, specify in the plans the location of the future widening control line for
utilization of High Plastic (H) soils and/or soils classified as organic material in the embankment.
approved by the District Materials Engineer. A-2-4 material placed below the existing water
level must be nonplastic and contain less than 15% passing the No. 200 U.S. Standard sieve.
2. The designer shall take into consideration the position of the drainage swales in the portion of the
embankment where Plastic (P) soils, High Plastic (H) soils, or soils classified as organic material
* For cut sections this dimension may be reduced to 24"; see Index No. 500. For minor
collectors and local facilities this dimension may be reduced to 18".
would be allowed. The designer shall limit the use of Plastic (P) soils, High Plastic (H) soils, and/or
soils classified as organic material to locations that will not inhibit the infiltration of stormwater
12/3/2015
from the swales.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
EMBANKMENT UTILIZATION
NO.
505
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Median
Shldr.
Shldr.
Lanes
Lanes
Va
r
i
e
s(
0
.
0
2
-
2
0
.
0
s(
e
i
r
Va
)
.
p
y
3T
0
.
0
0
.
0
5
06
0.
0.
06
48"
*
6
1:
4
0
.
0
0
.
0
4
48"
*
St
d.
d.
t
6S
1:
S
Type B
Edgedrain, See
Type B
Stabilization
Index No. 287
0
.
0
3T
y
p
.
)
5
0
.
0
2.5' Std.
1:
6
12"
1:
4
Shldr.
Stabilization
LBR 40
12"
Shldr.
Edgedrain, See
LBR 40
Index No. 287
S, P
1
:2
C
o S
n
tr
o
l
L
in
e
1:
6T
y
p.
4
1:
d.
St
S, P, H
DIVIDED ROADWAYS
Shldr.
Shldr.
Lanes
DESIGN NOTE
Varies
Varies
1. Concrete pavement is to be placed over 4" of Asphalt Treated
Permeable Base (ATPB) or Cement Treated Permeable Base (CTPB) as
Varies
identified in the plans. This will be placed on a separator layer using
(0.02-0.03)
2" Type SP. This will be placed on a working platform using 12" of
0.
06
06
0.
St
d.
S
S
12"
6
1:
48"
*
1:
4
Type B Stabilization.
d.
St
Edgedrain, See
Type B
Index No. 287
Stabilization
1
:2
C
o
S
n
tr
o
Edgedrain, See
l
L
in
Index No. 287
e
1:
6T
yp
.
LBR 40
S, P
S, P, H
Water Level At
Time Fill Is Placed
UNDIVIDED ROADWAY
SYMBOL
SOIL
Select
A-1, A-3, A-2-4 **
Plastic
High Plastic
Muck
A-8
** Certain types of A-2-4 material are likely to retain excess moisture and may be difficult to dry and compact.
They should be used in the embankment above the water level existing at time of construction. They may be used in
the subgrade portion of the roadbed when approved by the District Materials Engineer. A-2-4 material placed below
11:
36:
18 AM
the existing water level must be nonplastic and contain less than 15% passing the No. 200 U.S. Standard sieve.
* For cut sections this dimension may be reduced to 24"; see Index No. 500. For minor collectors and local facilities
this dimension may be reduced to 18".
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
RIGID PAVEMENT - TREATED PERMEABLE BASE OPTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
505
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
Median
Shldr.
Lanes
Lanes
Shldr.
Varies (0.02-
Varies (0.02-
0.03) Typ.
0.03) Typ.
2.5' Std.
1:
6
d.
t
6S
1:
48"
*
Type B
Type B
Stabilization
0.
06
6
1:
4
0
.
0
0
.
0
4
12"
St
d.
05
0.
48"
*
0.
05
06
0.
1:
4
1'
12"
1'
Shldr.
Shldr.
1
:2
Stabilization
Edgedrain, See
LBR 40
Edgedrain, See
LBR 40
Index No. 287
Index No. 287
S, P
C
o S
n
tr
o
l
L
in
e
1:
6T
y
p.
4
1:
S, P, H
d.
St
DIVIDED ROADWAYS
Shldr.
Shldr.
Lanes
DESIGN NOTE
Varies
Varies
1. Concrete pavement is to be placed over Optional Base Group 1 Type
B-12.5 only Asphalt Base as identified in the plans. This will be
Varies
placed on a working platform using 12" of Type B Stabilization.
(0.02-0.03)
0.
06
d.
t
6S
1:
St
d.
48"
*
1:
4
S
S
Edgedrain, See
Index No. 287
12"
06
0.
Type B
Stabilization
LBR 40
1
:2
C
S
o
n
Edgedrain, See tro
l
L
Index No. 287
in
e
S, P
Water Level At Time
1:
6T
yp
.
S, P, H
Fill Is Placed
UNDIVIDED ROADWAY
SYMBOL
SOIL
Select
A-1, A-3, A-2-4 **
Plastic
High Plastic
Muck
A-8
They should be used in the embankment above the water level existing at time of construction. They may be used in
the subgrade portion of the roadbed when approved by the District Materials Engineer. A-2-4 material placed
11:
36:
19 AM
below the existing water level must be nonplastic and contain less than 15% passing the No. 200 U.S. Standard
sieve.
* For cut sections this dimension may be reduced to 24"; see Index No. 500. For minor collectors and local facilities
12/3/2015
this dimension may be reduced to 18".
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
RIGID PAVEMENT - ASPHALT BASE OPTION

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
505
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
Median
Shldr.
Shldr.
Shldr.
Lanes
Lanes
Varies (0.02-
Varies (0.02-
0.03 Typ.)
0
.
0
5
S+
S+
5
0
.
0
4
0
.
0
0
.
0
4
0.
06
6
1:
60"
St
d.
1:
6
60"
d.
t
6S
1:
0.03 Typ.)
2.5' Std.
06
0.
1:
4
Shldr.
S+
S+
1
:2
S+
Draincrete
Draincrete
Edgedrain
Edgedrain
S, P
C
S+
o
n
tr
o
l
L
in
e
S+
See Index No. 287
See Index No. 287
1:
6T
y
p.
4
1:
d.
St
S, P, H
DIVIDED ROADWAYS
Shldr.
Lanes
Varies
Shldr.
Varies
Varies
(0.02-0.03)
d.
t
6S
1:
St
d.
S+
60"
1:
4
S+
Edgedrain
1
:2
C
S+
o
n
tr
o
Draincrete Edgedrain
l
L
in
See Index No. 287
e
S+
Draincrete
See Index No. 287
0.
06
06
0.
S, P
Water Level At Time
1:
6T
yp
.
S, P, H
Fill Is Placed
SYMBOL
S
SOIL
Select
S+
P
Special Select
Plastic
High Plastic
Muck
UNDIVIDED ROADWAY
A-1, A-3, A-2-4 **

A-3 *** With Minimum Average Lab Permeability of 5x10 cm/sec. (0.14 ft./day) as per FM 1-T215
A-2-5, A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, A-7 (ALL WITH LL<50)
A-2-5, A-2-7, A-5 Or A-7 (ALL WITH LL>50)
A-8
Note: SPECIAL SELECT SOIL OPTION may be used only when approved in
*** When allowed by the plans, some types of A-2-4 material may be approved in writing by the District Materials Engineer.
writing by the District Materials Engineer and shown in the plans.
This material must meet the minimum lab permeability requirement, be nonplastic, and not exceed 12% passing the No. 200
U.S. Standard sieve.
11:
36:
19 AM
They should be used in the embankment above the water level existing at time of construction. A-2-4 material placed
below the existing water level must be nonplastic and contain less than 15% passing the No. 200 U.S. Standard sieve.
3" of #57 or #89 Coarse Aggregate Mixed Into Top 6".
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
RIGID PAVEMENT - SPECIAL SELECT SOIL OPTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
505
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
Select Material Required In Upper 2' Of The Subgrade
Stabilize Crossover Area Plus Normal
Stabilize 4" Back Of Curb For Crossovers
Shoulder Width For Crossovers That
That Connect To Paved Public Roads
Connect To Paved Public Roads
Projected Shoulder Width:

Limits Of Stabilization For Intermediate U-turn Crossovers
And, Unless Otherwise Called For In The Plans, At Paved
And Unpaved Private Roads And Unpaved Public Roads.
Projected Shoulder Width:

Limits Of Stabilization For Intermediate U-turn Crossovers
And, Unless Otherwise Called For In The Plans, At Paved
And Unpaved Private Roads And Unpaved Public Roads.

Limits of Pay for Base

(See Notes)
Select Material Required In Upper 24" Of The Subgrade
4"
Friction Course
Neat Edge
:1
1
Base
Stabilize Full Width Under Traffic Separator
Stabilize 4" Back Of Curb
Surface Course
S
e
p
lo
Of Base
Actual Limits Of Base
NOTES
1. When the median has curb or curb and gutter, stabilize 4" back of curb.
2. When the median has shoulder with no curb or curb and gutter, stabilize to normal shoulder width.
3. See the details above for stabilizing requirements at crossroads.
NOTES
1. All material in the shaded area is excess base to be removed.
4. Stabilize entire area under all paved traffic islands.
2. The cost for removal of excess base material shall be
5. Stabilize full width under all traffic separators.
included in the contract unit price for base.

6. Select material as defined on Index No. 505. For minor collectors and local facilities the depth of
11:
36:
20 AM
3. Payment for base shall be calculated using normal width.
select material thickness may be reduced from 24" to 18".
REMOVAL OF EXCESS BASE MATERI

AL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
MEDIAN STABILIZING DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MISCELLANEOUS EARTHWORK DETAILS
NO.
506
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Straight Line Superelevation
SLOPE RATIOS FOR
Transition L (Varies, 100' Min.)
Straight Line Superelevation Transition
SUPERELEVATION TRANSITIONS
Normal Crown
Superelevation Slope
Full Superelevation
0.8 L
45-50
Of Curve
55-60
Tangent
1:200
1:225
1:250
6 Lane
1:160
1:180
1:200
8 Lane
1:150
1:170
1:190
4 Lane
Outside Edge Of Pavement
C
*
*
Pavement Rotated About
the travel way edge of pavement and the
Outside Edge Of Pavement, Outer Roadway
Superelevated Pav't.,
Inside Edge Of Pavement, Both
Outer Roadway
Roadways & Profile Grade
Hold Normal Cross Slope On
Straight Line Transition
Inside Half Of Pavement
On Inside Edge Of Pavt.
Construction To Avoid Angular Breaks In
Normal Pavement Slope
WITH SUPERELEVATION
Pavement Width
Point
0.
05
THESE TRANSITION DETAILS ARE TO
0.
06
0.06 (Or Steeper To
REVERSE CROWN
WITH SUPERELEVATION
3. Deficient transition distance between a curve
SECTION CC
4. At PCC's or PRC's (Runoff rates are applicable).
NORMAL SECTION
FULLY SUPERELEVATED
SECTION AA
SECTION BB
4-LANE OR 6-LANE PAVEMENT WITH MEDIAN
Transitions for these exceptions are to be as detailed in the plans.
SUPERELEVATION TRANSITIONS
SHOULDER ON HIGH SIDE: A shoulder slope of 0.06
40
45/50
55
60
65
70
015'
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
and the shoulder flattened until the shoulder slope
030'
NC
NC
NC
NC
RC
RC
RC
reaches the minimum of 0.02 downward from the
045'
NC
NC
RC
RC
0.023
0.025
0.028
NC
130'
NC
0.021
200'
RC
widths 5 feet o less see Special Shoulder Break
Pavement (Rate Of 0.05
Shoulder Width
S
Shoulder Width
S
Or Flatter)
Shoulder Slope 0.06

(0.05 For Medians)
Until Pavt. Cross Slope
Over Details on Sheet 2 of 2.
See Table
Superelevated
and the outer half outward, both at 0.02 for
superelevation 0.10. For shoulders with paved
0.025
To Right
inside half of the shoulder toward the travel way
superelevations 0.06-0.09 and both at 0.03 for
0.021
Shoulder Slope Not

Note: Algebraic Difference In
FlatterThan 0.02 Nor
Cross Slope Not To Exceed 0.07
Steeper Than 0.06
Reaches That Rate

SHOULDER ON LOW SIDE: Maintain 0.06 drop across
inside shoulder until pavement cross slope reaches
0.06. For pavement cross slopes greater than 0.06,
Superelevated
shoulder to have same slope as pavement.
Pavement (Rate
S
These slopes are the same as those shown pictorially

on Sheet 2 of 2.
Steeper Than 0.05)
Note: Algebraic Difference In Cross

Slope Not To Exceed 0.07
S
2
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
'
0.09
S
2
Shoulder Slope
0.08
0.07
'
5
1
0.09
'
0
3
'
15
'
8
=
15
.
x
m
a
'
D
10
m
15
=
.
D
5
13
5
ax
=
m
0
.
D
5
ax
=
m
5
D
V
4
=
0
4
V
V=
0.06
.=
x
a
0.05
0.08
0.07
30
V=
=
x.
ma
D
5'
4
24
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.04
V=Design Speed
0.03
0.03
0.02
0.02
e
=0.10
MAX.
See Table
See SHOULDER ON
HIGH SIDE Notation
To Left
0.01
SUPERELEVATIO N RATE (e)
NC
0.10
70
V
Dm
=
6
ax
5
.=
V
=
D
3
6
m
0
ax
3
0
V
.=
'
D
=
4
m
a
1
x
5
.
=
pavement superelevation will necessitate sloping the
100'
0.10
V=
edge of travel way. Any further increase in
(D)
SUPERELEVATIO N RATE (e)
increases, the 0.07 break in slope will be maintained
1300
MPH
3000
OF
CURVE
4000
DESIGN SPEED, V
5000
RADIUS OF CURVE - FEET

DEGREE
30
the pavement. As the pavement superelevation
See SHOULDER CONSTRUCTION
On Plans
2. Insufficient tangent length between curves.
2-LANE, 4-LANE OR 6-LANE PAVEMENT, NO MEDIAN
pavement edge is reached due to superelevation of
0.05 (Or Steeper To

Match Pavt. Slope)
and other control point(s).
maintained until a 0.07 break in slope at the
Match Pavt. Slope)
Slope As Indicated
1. Curves of insufficient length.
FULLY SUPERELEVATED
SECTION BB
0.
06
THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
Match Pavt. Slope)
downward from the edge of travel way will be
Profile Grade Points
0.06 (Or Steeper To
05
0.
06
0.
APPLY IN ALL CASES, EXCEPT UNDER
SECTION AA
Pavement Width
Median
Point
NORMAL CROWN
Profile Grade Points
1400
2
Profile Grade
Point
Full Superelevation
L (Varies, 100' Min.)
PROFILES
WITH SUPERELEVATION
0.2 L
Superelevation Transition
Edge Profiles
1500
W W
2
2
Profile Grade
W
2
Pavement, Inner Roadway
0.8 L
Straight Line
2000
Pavement Width
Curve
Tangent
Short Vertical Curves Are To Be Used On
PROFILES
Pavement Width
Outside Edge Of
Inner Roadway
A
*
length of transition shall be 100 ft.
Superelevated Pav't.,
*
Pavement Edges
Inside Edge Of Pavement
Outside
profile grade, except that the minimum
2500
06
0.
be determined by the relative slope between
Pavement Edges
Profile Grade
Curve
1
& Profile Grade
The length of superelevation transition is to
Pavement Width
Inside Pavement Edges
Full Superelevation
0.2 L
0.8 L
65-70
2 Lane &
Profile Grade
Pavement To Superelevation Slope
1 : d
Curve
PC Or PT
Centerline &
SECTION
0.2 L
Tangent
L (Varies, 100' Min.) From Normal

Normal Pavement Slope
DESIGN SPEED, MPH
Of Curve
Normal Crown Slope To
PC Or PT
Outside Half Of Pavement From
0.01
11:
36:
21 AM
NOTE:
S
4
These details apply to both paved and grassed

shoulders. For median shoulders use 0.05 in
Round
S
2
0
0
Shoulder Slope to Match Pavt. Slope For Pavt.
lieu of 0.06.
Slopes Greater Than 0.06 (0.05 For Medians)
10
DEGREE OF CURVE
GENERAL NOTES:
1. For curves in Urban Highways and high speed Urban Streets, see Index No. 511.
12/3/2015
SHOULDER CONSTRUCTION WITH SUPERELEVATION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
DESIGN SUPERELEVATION RATES FOR RURAL HIGHWAYS, URBAN FREEWAYS AND HIGH SPEED URBAN HIGHWAYS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
SUPERELEVATION RURAL HIGHWAYS, URBAN
DESIGN STANDARDS
FREEWAYS AND HIGH SPEED URBAN HIGHWAYS
NO.
510
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Superelevation Transition L (Varies 100' Min.)
Full Superelevation
Straight Line Transition Outside Edge Of Pavement
Outer Roadway
0.8 L
0.2 L
Tangent
Curve
03
0.
Outer Roadway
P.C. Or P.T.
Of Curve
Crown Point
Outer Roadway
Profile Grade
D
D
02
0.
0.
02
09
0.
02
0.
0.
02
08
0.
02
0.
0.
02
02
0.
0.
02
Crown Point
Edges-Both
Inner Roadway
0.8 L
Inner Roadway
Curve
Superelevation Transition L (Varies 100' Min.)
S=SLOPE RATIO
SHOULDERS WITH 5' OR
b) 8' FULL WIDTH SHOULDERS
03
0.
0.
04
WIDTHS,
Travel Way
0.
05
5'
03
0.
0.
06
0.
03
0.00
0.
06
09
0.
06
0.
0.
06
Full Superelevation
0
.
0
2
Inner Roadway
02
02 0.
0.
10
0.
0
.
0
1
Straight Line Transition Outside Edge Of Pavement
Shoulder
Outside Pav't Edge
0.2 L
Tangent
L = L + L
09
0.
06
0.
0.
02
0.
03
L = S (D - D)
0.
02
LESS PAVED WIDTHS,
04
0.
1
0
.
0
L = S (D - D)
0.
03
02
0.
10
0.
06
0.
2
0
.
0
L = S (D + D)
03
0.
WITH 4' OR LESS PAVED
Outside Pav't
Shoulder
a) 12' AND 10' FULL WIDTH
07
0.
05
0.
Travel Way
0.
03
10
0.
Crown Point
Both Roadways
Roadways
Shoulder
Outside Pav't Edge
Travel Way
0.
06
0.
03
0.
O4
Median
W/4
WITH 5' PAVED WIDTH
W
W/4
0.
05
8' FULL WIDTH SHOULDER

0.
06
Travel Way
Profile Grade
D
D
0.
06
SECTION A-A
NORMAL CROWNED SECTION
0.
06
0.
06
0.
07
0.
06
0.
08
SECTION B-B
0.
09
SECTION C-C
SUPERELEVATION SECTION LT. & RT.
SUPERELEVATION SECTION LT.

PLANE INCLINED SECTION RT.
03
0.
0.
07
Median
02
0.
10
0.
09
0.
06
0.
0.
08
0.
10
0.
09
6' FULL WIDTH SHOULDER

WITH 5' OR LESS PAVED WIDTH
0.
10
Shoulder
SPECIAL SHOULDER
SLOPES OF TRAVELED WAY
BREAK OVER DETAILS
AND ABUTTING SHOULDERS
Profile Grade
D
SHOULDER SLOPES ON
D
SUPERELEVATION SECTIONS
*FOR SHOULDERS WITH PAVED WIDTHS

SECTION D-D
SECTION E-E
SECTION F-F
5 FEET OR LESS SEE SPECIAL
11:
36:
22 AM
SHOULDER BREAK OVER DETAILS
PLANE INCLINED SECTION LT.
SUPERELEVATION TRANSITION LT.
SUPERELEVATION TRANSITION RT.
FULL SUPERLEVATION RT.
FULL SUPERELEVATION LT. & RT.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
8-LANE PAVEMENT WITH ONE LANE SLOPED TO MEDIAN
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
SUPERELEVATION RURAL HIGHWAYS, URBAN
DESIGN STANDARDS
FREEWAYS AND HIGH SPEED URBAN HIGHWAYS
NO.
510
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
SUPERELEVATION RATES (e) FOR URBAN HIGHWAYS AND HIGH SPEED URBAN STREETS
e max.
= 0.05
TABULATED VALUES
Radius
Curve
(R)
Design Speed (mph)
(D)
(Ft.)
30
35
40
45
50
2 00'
2,865
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
2 15'
2,546
2 45'
GENERAL NOTES
10
1. Maximum rate of superelevation for urban highways and high
RC
NC
3 00'
1,910
RC
3 45'
1,528
NC
4 00'
1,432
RC
4 45'
1,206
5 00'
1,146
NC
0.023
5 15'
1,091
RC
0.027
5 30'
1,042
0.030
5 45'
996
0.035
6 00'
955
6 15'
917
0.022
0.045
881
0.024
0.050
6 45'
849
0.027
Dmax.=
7 00'
819
NC
0.030
6 30'
7 15'
790
RC
0.033
DEGREE OF CURVE (D)
7 30'
739
8 00'
716
15
2. Superelevation shall be obtained by rotating the plane

successively about the break points of the section until the
1.25
RC
1.50
1.75
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
12
plane has attained a slope equal to that required by the
+0.05
RC
+0.05
+0.02
+0.02
0.040
-0.02
-0.02
H
MP
50
40
H
MP
H
P
0
3
RC
0.045
8 15'
694
0.022
0.050
8 30'
674
0.025
Dmax.=
8 15'
8 45'
655
0.027
9 00'
637
0.030
9 30'
603
0.034
10 00'
573
0.040
10 30'
546
RC
0.047
11 00'
521
0.023
Dmax.=
11 30'
498
0.026
10 45'
12 00'
477
0.030
441
0.036
6000
5500
5000
4500
4000
3500
3000
2500
2000
1500
the plane shall be about the low edge of the inside travel
lane. Crown is to be removed in the auxiliary lane to the
outside of the curve only when the adjoining travel lanes
require positive superelevation.
3. When positive superelevation is required, the slope of the

gutter on the high side shall be a continuation of the slope
of the superelevated pavement.
4. In construction, short vertical curves shall be placed at all

angular profile breaks within the limits of the
-0.05
-0.05
0.041
chart. Should the rotation traverse the entire section and

further superelevation be required, the remaining rotation of
0.037
764
7 45'
speed urban streets shall be 0.05.
20
2,083
6 30'
30
RATE O F CRO SS SLO PE
Degree Of
CHARTED VALUES
1000
500
RADIUS (R) (Ft.)
superelevation transition.
5. The variable superelevation transition length "L" shall have a

minimum value of 50 feet for design speeds under 40 MPH
and 75 feet for design speeds of 40 MPH or greater.
a:
When the speed curves and the degree of curve or radius lines intersect above this line, the pavement
is to be superelevated (positive slope) at the rates indicated at the lines intersecting points.
6. Roadway sections having lane arrangements different from

those shown, but composed of a series of planes, shall be
b:
When the speed curves and the degree of curve or radius lines intersect between these limits, the
superelevated in a similar manner.
pavement is to be superelevated at the rate of 0.02 (positive slope).

7. For superelevation of lower speed urban streets, see the
c:
When the speed curves and the degree of curve or radius lines intersect below this line. The
FDOT 'Manual Of Uniform Minimum Standards For Design,
pavement is to have normal crown (typically 0.02 and 0.03 downward slopes).
Construction And Maintenance For Streets And Highways'.

For superelevation of curves on rural highways, urban
freeways and high speed urban highways, see Index No. 510.
13 00'
14 00'
409
RC
0.045
15 00'
382
0.023
Dmax.=
16 00'
358
0.027
14 15'
17 00'
337
0.032
18 00'
318
0.038
19 00'
302
0.043
20 00'
286
0.050
NC = Normal Crown
RC = Reverse Crown
(+0.02 Superelevation)
Dmax.=
11:
36:
22 AM
20 00'
= 0.05
max.
SUPERELEVATION URBAN HIGHWAYS AND STREETS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
SUPERELEVATION FOR URBAN HIGHWAYS AND HIGH SPEED URBAN STREETS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
511
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
Maximum Superelevated Section
05
.
+0

See notation 'b' under
02
+0.
05
0.
+
02
0.
02
.
+0
CHARTED VALUES Sheet 1.
0.
02

Normal Crowned Section
02
0.
0.
02
TWO TRAVEL LANES EACH
DIRECTION WITH MEDIAN

TWO TRAVEL LANES EACH DIRECTION

05
0.
+
Median
03
.
+0
Roadway
05
.
+0
02
+0.
03
.
+0
Rotation Points (Typ.)
02
+0.
03
0.
Auxil.
Lane
0.
03
03
0.
0.
02
02
0.
0.
02
02
0.
0.
03
Rotation Points (Typ.)

Travel
Lane
Travel
Lane
Median
Travel
Lane
Travel
Lane
Auxil.
Lane

Auxil.
Lane
Travel
Lane
Travel
Lane
Travel
Lane
Travel
Lane
Auxil.
Lane
TWO TRAVEL LANES EACH DIRECTION

WITH MEDIAN AND AUXILIARY LANES
TWO TRAVEL LANES EACH
Line 1
Line 2
DIRECTION WITH AUXILIARY LANES
Line 3
05
.
+0
Line 4
Point A
05
.
+0
Point B
03
.
+0
See notation 'b'

03
.
+0
02
+0.
under CHARTED
VALUES Sheet 1.
02
+0.
Line 1 - Max. Superelevation Rate (0.05 )

Line 2 - Slope Of Parabola At Inside Edge Of Pavt.
Line 3 - Positive Superelevation Rate Less Than
Max. Slope Of Parabola.
Line 4 - Adverse Superelevation.
02
0.
0.
03
03
0.
0.
03
03
0.
0.
02
02
0.
0.
02
Superelevation rates obtained from the chart or table on Sheet 1

Normal Crowned
are also applicable to a parabolic crown section. When this section is
Section
used, superelevation is established by rotating a tangent about the

arc of the parabolic crown until the desired slope is attained (points
A & B on sketch). The normal parabolic crown will be maintained
outside the limits of the plane thus formed.
THREE TRAVEL LANES EACH DIRECTION WITH MEDIAN
11:
36:
23 AM
UNDIVIDED FACILITIES
DIVIDED FACILITIES
PARABOLIC SECTION
SUPERELEVATION TRANSITION SECTIONS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
FOR URBAN HIGHWAYS AND HIGH SPEED URBAN STREETS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
511
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Superelevation Transition "L"
0.2 L
0.8 L
Tangent
LINE
Curve
PC or PT Of Curve
05
0.
+
Superelevated Section
(Varies, See Note Below)
Line G
Line F
Line D
Line B
Line A
Normal Section
Line F
03
0.
+
To This Point
02
.
+0
02
0.
Line D
Line D
Line B
Theoretical Grade Line
Line B & F
0.
02
Inside Lane Line
Inside Median Edge Pavement
Construction
Outside Median Edge Pavement
Outside Lane Line
Outside Travel Lane
Inside And Outside Are Relative

Line A
To Curve Center
Inside Travel Lane
Line G
*d:1
C
Profile Grade Refers
DESCRIPTION
Line A & G
SECTION 0-A to 0-D

PROFILE
Line G
Line F
Line E
Line D
Line C
Line B
Line A
TWO LANES EACH DIRECTION
Superelevation Transition "L" (Varies, See Note Below)
Normal Section
0.8 L
Superelevated Section
0.2 L
Outside Edge Outside Auxiliary Lane
*d (Slope Ratio)
Curve
Tangent
Line G (Outside Edge Of Travel Lane)
PC or PT Of Curve
Note: Runoff rate "d" is to be
Line F
applied to the outside
05
0.
*d:1
1: 125
45-50 MPH
1: 150
Line E
1: 125 May Be Used For

45 MPH Under Restricted
Line D (Profile At Const.)
03
.
+0
Conditions.
Line D
C
02
+0.
Line C
(Profile At Const.)
Lines C & E
Line B
Theoretical Grade Line
Line B & F
0.
02
03
0.
Line A (Outside Edge Of Travel Lane)
0.
03
Profile Grade
1: 100
40 MPH
edge of travel lane.
02
0.
30 MPH
Refers To This Point
Line A & G
Outside Edge Inside Auxiliary Lane
Outside Edge
Auxiliary Lane
Auxiliary Lane
O
PROFILE
SECTION 0-A to 0-E
TWO LANES EACH DIRECTION WITH MEDIAN AND AUXILIARY LANE

Note:
The sections and profiles shown are examples of superelevation transitions.
Similar schemes should be used for roadways having other sections.
11:
36:
24 AM
EXAMPLE SUPERELEVATION SECTIONS AND PROFILES
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
FOR URBAN HIGHWAYS AND HIGH SPEED URBAN STREETS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
511
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
BASE THICKNESS AND OPTION CODES
4"
4"
4"
0.80-0.90
702
5"
5"
5"
5"
5"
0.95-1.05
703
1.05-1.15
704
6"
6"
6"
6"
6"
1.25-1.35
705
7"
7"
7"
7"
7"
1.35-1.50
706
8"
8"
8"
8"
8"
1.50-1.65
707
1.65-1.75
708
1.75-1.85
10
GENERAL NOTES
1. Where base options are specified in the plans, only those options may be bid and used.
RAP Base
4"
Subbase, LBR 100 *
4"
B-12.
5 And 4" G ranul
ar
701
Type B-12.
5
0.65-0.75
Base, LBR 100
G raded Aggregate
Aggregate, LBR 150 **
Recycl
ed Concrete
LBR 100
Base G roup Pay Item
(0.18)
LBR 100
Structural Range
Bank Run Shel

l
,
Shel
l Rock, LBR 100
Cem ented Coqui

na,
Base G roup
Li
m erock, LBR 100
Num ber
Base Options
2. In situations where the designer requires the use of a single base option, as shown in the
plans, bid and use as optional base.
Structural Number (Per. in.)

(0.30 &
(0.18)
(0.18)
(0.18)
(0.18)
(0.15)
(0.30)
(NA)
0.15)
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
709
1.90-2.00
11
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
10"
710
2.05-2.15
711
12
2.20-2.30
712
12
13
2.35-2.45
713
13
14
2.45-2.55
714
15
2.60-2.70
715
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
10"
11"
12"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
10"
11"
12"
1
2"
4"
1
2"
4"
1
2"
4"
1
2"
4"
1
2"
9"
5"
1
2"
5"
1
2"
10"
1
2"
11"
10"
10"
12"
11"
11"
11"
13"
12"
12"
12"
14"
1
2"
*
1
2"
For granular subbase, the construction of both the subbase and Type
B-12.5 will be bid and used as Optional Base. Granular subbases include
Limerock, Cemented Coquina, Shell Rock, Bank Run Shell, Recycled Concrete
6"
Aggregate and Graded Aggregate Base. The base thickness shown is Type
4"
B-12.5. All subbase thicknesses are 4" minimum.

1
2"
1
2"
11:
36:
24 AM
** For restrictions on the use of Recycled Concrete Aggregate - see
1
2"
1
2"
14"
1
2"
12
1
2"
13
14"
1
2"
12
1
2"
13
14"
1
2"
12
1
2"
13
14"
1
2"
12
1
2"
13
14"
7"
1
2"
5"
1
2"
8"
1
2"
6"
1
2"
9"
Specifications Section 911.
To be used for widening, three feet or less.
Based on minimum practical thicknesses.
For restrictions on the use of RAP Base - see Standard Specifications.
7"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
GENERAL USE OPTIONAL BASE GROUPS AND STRUCTURAL NUMBERS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
OPTIONAL BASE GROUP AND STRUCTURAL NUMBERS
NO.
514
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
BASE THICKNESS AND OPTION CODES
0.95-1.05
703
8"
8"
1.05-1.15
704
9"
9"
10
1.20-1.35
705
10"
10"
1.30-1.45
706
11"
11"
1.45-1.60
707
1.65-1.75
708
LBR 70
(Pl
ant M i
xed)
Soi
l Cem ent (500 psi
)
702
(Road M i
xed)
0.75-0.90
Soi
l Cem ent (300 psi
)
(Pl
ant M i
xed)
5"
Soi
l Cem ent (300 psi
)
701
LBR 75
0.60-0.75
LBR 70
Sand-Cl
ay
Shel
l Stabi
l
i
zed
Base G roup Pay Item
(0.12)
Shel
l LBR 70
Structural Range
Li
m erock Stabi
l
i
zed
Base G roup
Num ber
Base Options
Structural Number (Per. in.)

(0.12)
(0.10)
(0.12)
(0.15)
(0.15)
5"
7"
5"
5"
5"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
12
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
12"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
10"
12
5"
9"
1
2"
12
1
2"
1
2"
11"
4"
8"
4"
1
2"
1
2"
(0.20)
1
2"
1
2"
9"
1
2"
6"
7"
10"
11"
1
2"
1
2"
Not Recommended For 20 Year Design

Accumulated 18 kip Equivalent Single
Axle Loads (ESAL) Greater
Than 1,000,000
Note:
These base materials may be used on FDOT projects when approved
in writing by the District Materials Engineer and shown in the plans.
Based on minimum practical thicknesses.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
36:
25 AM
LIMITED USE OPTIONAL BASE GROUPS AND STRUCTURAL NUMBERS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
OPTIONAL BASE GROUP AND STRUCTURAL NUMBERS
NO.
514
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
GENERAL NOTES
Frontage
Property Line
Structure
P
ro
pe
rt
y
e
ur
t
uc
r
t
S
Property Line
Li
ne
R/W
LEGEND
Structure
Frontage
Frontage
1. For definitions and descriptions of access connection "Categories" and access
Return Radius Point
"Classifications" of highway segments, and for other detailed information on access to
Or Flare Point
the State Highway System, refer to FDOT Rule Chapter 14-96, "State Highway
Connection Permits Administrative Process" and Rule Chapter 14-97, "State Highway
Buffer Areas
F.B. Line
System Access Management Classification System And Standards."
Frontage
Boundary Line
2. For this index the term 'turnout' applies to that portion of driveways or side roads
adjoining the outer roadway. For this index the term 'connection' encompasses a
Driveway Width
driveway or side road and their appurtenant islands, separators, transition tapers,
auxiliary lanes, travelway flares, drainage pipes and structures, crossovers,

Y
Driveway Angle
Corner Clearance
Setback
Outside Radius
Inside Radius
Distance Between
sidewalks, curb cut ramps, signing, pavement marking, required signalization,

maintenance of traffic or other means of access to or from controlled access
facilities. The turnout requirements set forth in this index do not provide complete
R/W
F.B. Line
Shoulder Line
intersection design, construction or maintenance requirements.
Edge Of Travel Way
W
F
3. The location, positioning, orientation, spacing and number of connections and median
openings shall be in conformance with FDOT Rule Chapter 14-97.
4. On Department construction projects all driveways not shown on the plans shall be
Connections
reconstructed at their existing location in conformance to these standards, or, in
Flare
conformance to permits issued during the construction project.
5. Driveways shall have sufficient length and size for all vehicular queueing, stacking,
maneuvering, standing and parking to be carried out completely beyond the right of
way line. Except for vehicles stopping to enter the highway, the turnout areas and
For Corner Clearnace (C) Requirements see General Note 3.
drives within the right of way shall be used only for moving vehicles entering or
leaving the highway.
For Additional Information Refer To FDOT Rules Chapters 14-96 And 14-97.
6. Connections with expected daily traffic over 4000 vpd shall be constructed as
SKETCH ILLUSTRATING DEFINITIONS
intersecting side roads. The design requirement of this index and that of the local
government will be used to select appropriate connection widths, radii and
intersection design, subject to the approval of the Department. For connections with
URBAN (CURB & GUTTER)
RURAL
expected daily traffic less than 4000 vpd, the Department will determine if a drop
curb or radius returns are required in accordance with existing or planned
ELEMENT DESCRIPTION
21-600 Trips/Day
601-4000 Trips/Day
1-20 Trips/Day
or
or
or
6-60 Trips/Hour
61-400 Trips/Hour
1-5 Trips/Hour
21-600 Trips/Day
601-4000 Trips/Day
1-20 Trips/Day
or
or
or
6-60 Trips/Hour
61-400 Trips/Hour
2-Way
2-Way
connections. Where radius returns apply, the design requirements of this index and
that of the local government will be used to select appropriate connection widths,
radii and intersection design, subject to the approval of the Department.
1-5 Trips/Hour
2-Way
2-Way
For connections that are intended to daily accommodate either multi-unit vehicles or
single unit vehicles exceeding 30' in length, returns with 50' radii shall be used,
12' Min.
24' Min.
24' Min.
12' Min.
24' Min.
24' Min.
24' Max.
36' Max.
36' Max.
24' Max.
36' Max.
36' Max.
10' Min.
10' Min.
N/A
N/A
CONNECTION WIDTH W
unless otherwise called for in the plans or otherwise stipulated by permit. Where
large numbers of multi-unit vehicles will use the connection, the connection width and
radii shall be increased and auxiliary lanes, tapers, lane flares, separators and/or
FLARE (Drop Curb) F
N/A
N/A
islands constructed, as determined by the Department to be necessary for safe

turning movements.
25' Min.
RETURNS (Radius) R & U
ANGLE OF DRIVE Y
N/A
60-90
15' Min.
25' Min.
25' Min.
50' Std.
25' Std.
50' Std.
50' Std.
75' Max.
50' Max.
75' Max.
(Or 3-Centered Curves)
60-90
60-90
60-90
7. Any connection requiring or having a specified median opening with left turn storage
and served directly by that opening shall have radial returns.
8. Where a connection is intended to align with a connection across the highway, the
through lanes shall align directly with the corresponding through lanes.
DIVISIONAL ISLAND
4'-22' Wide
4'-22' Wide
4'-22' Wide
4'-22' Wide
(Throat Median)
9. For new connections and for connections on all new construction and reconstruction
projects, pavement materials and thicknesses shall meet the requirements applicable
12' Min., All categories.
to either that detailed for "Urban Flared Turnouts", or, that described in "Table 515-1"
SETBACK G
for connections with radial returns and/or auxiliary lanes.
Side road intersection design, with possible auxiliary lanes and channelization, may be necessary. Intersection design, with possible auxiliary lanes and channelization, should
11:
36:
26 AM
be considered for connections with more than 4000 trips/days.
10. The responsibility for the cost of construction or alteration to an access connection
shall be in accordance with FDOT Rule Chapter 14-96.
"2-Way" refers to one "in" movement and one "out" movement i.e., not exclusive left or right turn lanes on the connection.
When more than 2 lanes in the turnout connection are required, the 36' max. width may be increased to relieve interference between entering and exiting traffic which
DESIGN NOTES
adversely affects traffic flow. These cases require documented site specific study and design.
1. Prior to the adoption of FDOT Rules Chapters 14-96 and 14-97, connections to the
Small radii may be used in lieu of flares as approved by the Department.
State Highway System were defined and permitted by Classes. Connections have been
DESIGN NOTE: 1-Way connections will be designed to effectively eliminate unpermitted movements.
redfined by Categories under Rule 14-96; and, the term "Class" has been applied to
12/3/2015
highway segments of the State Highway System as defined under Rule 14-97.
NOT INTENDED FOR FULL INTERSECTION DESIGN
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
SUMMARY OF GEOMETRIC REQUIREMENTS FOR TURNOUTS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TURNOUTS
NO.
515
SHEET
NO.
1of 7
Driveway Width (W)

(See Sheet 1)
Footnotes:
R/W Line
(See Sheet 1)
Open joints placed at equal (20' max.) intervals for driveways over 20'
Varies
wide. Joints in curb and gutter to match joints in driveways.
When connecting to side road curb and gutter sections, the no drop curb
limits should extend back to the side road radius point. With or without
curb and gutter, no driveway should encroach on the corner radius.
Driveways (6" concrete) shall be of a uniform width (W) to the right of way
line.
Varies
1
8"
Driveway Width (W)
joints shall be constructed with preformed joint filler.

Driveway To Be
Driveway Pavement
Constructed As Called For
(For Concrete Pavement
In The Plans Or As
Joint Patterns, See
Directed By The Engineer
'INSET' Right)
1
8"
Driveway To Be Constructed
Open Joints @ 10' Ctrs.;
Every 5th Joint Shall Be
1
2"
As Called For In The Plans Or

As Directed By The Engineer
*
6" Concrete
10'
1
2"
If < 15'Refer To '

PLAN A'
All
1
2"
1'
_ __ Alpha-numeric identification of a flared driveway type specifically called
Concrete Turnout
Driveway
Joint
1'
JOINT PATTERN WHEN CONCRETE DRIVE CONSTRUCTED
for in the plans, see sheets 3 and 4.

3'
INSET
7'
PLAN C
TURNOUT WITHOUT SIDEWALK
Distance Between Connections 'D' See
Side Road R/W
Flare Point
'Sketch Illustrating Definitions' and General Note No. 3
3' Curb Transition From Full To Zero Height At
Driveway Width (W)

4" Conc. Swk.
4" Conc. Swk.
(See Sheet 1)
1
8"
4" Conc. Swk.
Open Joints @ 10' Ctrs.;
Every 5th Joint shall
Back Of Sidewalk
(3' Min.)
Joint
1
2"
Utility Strip
1
2"
Point
Utility
1'
For Connecting To Existing Curb.
1'
Than 10'
1
2"
Joint
Joint
1'
Side Road Edge Of Pavement Extension Line

(Future Edge Of Pavement Where Available In
An Adopted Five Year Transportation Plan).
Joint
_ __
7'
Absence Of Sidewalk Curb Ramps. As Required
And Sidewalk
1
2"
Strip Less
1'
3'
See Index No. 304. 4' Min. Back Of Sidewalk In
6" Conc. Driveway
10'
1
2"
Back Of Sidewalk
(0.02)
Flare
And Sidewalk
Full Height Curb Length Varies:

2' Min. Beyond Limits Of Sidewalk Curb Ramps -
Joint
4' Min.
5'
Warp
6" Conc. Driveway
(Example Only)
4" Conc. Swk.
No. 310
Joint
10' Or Greater
Curb Ramp
(See Sheet 1)
Refer To Index
Where Connecting Existing Curb And Gutter.
Sidewalk
Driveway Width (W)
1
be 2"
5'
1
2"
End Of All Curb And Gutter Construction Except
Varies
7'
3'
Varies (To Suit Distance
Drop Curb (Width Varies)
6'
4'
_ __
Radius Point
4'
No Drop Curb Allowed Within These Limits Except As Required
6'
For Sidewalk Curb Ramps Shown On Index No. 304.

Drop Curb (Width Varies)
Between Connections 'D')

But Not Less Than 6'
Corner Clearance (C).
PLAN B
PLAN A
TURNOUT WITH SIDEWALK AND
TURNOUT WITH SIDEWALK AND
UTILITY STRIP (10' OR GREATER)
UTILITY STRIP (LESS THAN 10')
SPECIAL NOTES FOR URBAN FLARED TURNOUTS

1. Drop curb, concrete sidewalks (6" thick) and driveways (6" thick) shall meet
5. Maintenance of pavement shall extend out to the right of way or 2' beyond the
Specification Sections 520 and 522. The driveway foundation shall meet the
back of sidewalk, whichever distance is less.
requirements of Subarticle 522-4.
DESIGN NOTES FOR URBAN FLARED TURNOUTS

1. Driveways indicated as 'Adverse Applications' are those with slopes that can cause
overhang drag for representative standard passenger vehicles under fully loaded
conditions; or, those with slopes that can cause drivers who are leaving the roadway to
6. The maintenance and operation of highway lighting, traffic signals, associated

2. For details of drop curb and sidewalk curb ramps refer to Indexes Nos. 300
slow or pause to the extent that traffic demand volumes will be impeded.
equipment, and other necessary devices shall be the responsibility of a public
and 304 respectively.
agency.
Driveways indicated as 'Marginal Applications' are those with slopes that can cause
overhang drag for representative standard passenger vehicles under fully loaded
3. Where turnouts are constructed within existing curb and gutter, the existing
7. All pavement markings on the State highways, including acceleration and
curb and gutter shall be removed either to the nearest joint beyond the flare
deceleration lane markings, and signing installed for the operation of the State
point or to the extent that no remaining section is less than 5' long; and, drop
highway shall be maintained by the Department.
curb constructed in accordance with Notes Nos. 1 and 2.
4. For turnouts with radial returns see the requirements under the "Summary Of
stop bars and stop signs for the connection) shall be the responsibility of the
Geometric Requirements For Turnouts", the "General Notes", the details of "Rural
11:
36:
27 AM
Driveways indicated as 'General Applications' are those with slopes that can readily
accommodate representative standard passenger vehicles and those that can accommodate
8. All signing and marking installed for the operation of the connection (such as
representative standard trucks, vans, buses and recreational vehicles operating under
normal crown and superelevation conditions.
permittee.
Turnout Construction" and the detail of "Limits Of Clearing & Grubbing,

Stabilization And Base At Intersections".
conditions when the driveway is located on the low side of fully superelevated roadways.
2. The standard flared driveways on this index may not accommodate vehicles with low beds,
9.
All sidewalk surfaces crossing driveways with a cross slope shown in this
low undercarriage or low appendage features. Where such vehicles are design vehicles,
Index to be 0.02 shall be 0.02 Maximum.
driveways shall have site specific flare designs or Category III designs.
12/3/2015
3. When specific flare type driveways shall be constructed, the type shall be designated in
the plans using the assigned alpha-numeric designation.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
URBAN FLARED TURNOUTS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TURNOUTS
NO.
515
SHEET
NO.
2 of 7
10'
*
5' Sidewalk
See 'DESIGN NOTES FOR URBAN FLARED TURNOUTS'.
0.02
0.04
2
8
0
.
0
G 30
8'
10'
4' Min.
5' Sidewalk
4' Min.
10'
0.02
3
6
0
.
0
9'
5' Sidewalk
0.02
0.02
10'
3
6
0
.
0
4' Min.
0.02
G 8
0.04
G 18
7'
9'
4' Min.
5' Sidewalk
8'
0.02
0.02
7
6
0
.
0
G 29
4' Min.
9'
0.02
0
8
0
.
0
5' Sidewalk
4' Min.
10'
7
6
0
.
0
0.02
G 7
0.04
G 17
6'
8'
5' Sidewalk
0.02
7'
5' Sidewalk
0.02
0.02
3
7
0
.
0
G 28
4' Min.
8'
4' Min.
7
7
0
.
0
4' Min.
9'
3
7
0
.
0
0.02
G 6
0.04
G 16
5'
7'
5' Sidewalk
4' Min.
7'
2
8
0
.
0
G 27
4' Min.
6'
0.02
0.02
9
7
0
.
0
G 5
0.02
9
7
0
.
0
6'
0.02
0.04
5' Sidewalk
4' Min.
6
8
0
.
0
G 26
GENERAL*
4' Min.
6'
5'
0.02
8
8
0
.
0
G 4
5' Sidewalk
0.02
0.02
4' Min.
8'
G 15
4'
5' Sidewalk
7'
8
8
0
.
0
0.02
0.04
G 14
APPLICATIONS
4' Min.
2
9
0
.
0
G 25
3'
5'
5' Sidewalk
0.02
0.02
0.04
9
9
0
.
0
M 3
M 13
4' Min.
6'
0.02
9
9
0
.
0
5' Sidewalk
4'
4' Min.
5'
4' Min.
9
9
0
.
0
MARGINAL*
APPLICATIONS ON LOW SIDE
OF FULLY SUPERELEVATED
ROADWAY (REFER TO
M 24
MODIFICATIONS ON SHEET 4)
3'
2'
5' Sidewalk
5' Sidewalk
4' Min.
5'
4'
4' Min.
4' Min.
4'
0.04
0.02
0.02
6
1
1
.
0
6
1
1
.
0
0.02
APPLICATIONS (REFER TO
MODIFICATIONS ON SHEET 4)
0
1
1
.
0
A 23
A 2
A 12
1'
4' Min.
3'
0.02
0.02
A 1
142
0.
4' Min.
5' Sidewalk
4'
0.02
A 11
SIDEWALK ADJACENT TO CURB
2'
5' Sidewalk
3'
142
0.
0.04
4' Min.
0.02
5
2
1
.
0
A 22
SIDEWALK WITH UTILITY STRIP ON 0.02 SLOPE
DRIVEWAY SECTIONS ON CURBED FACILITIES WITH SIDEWALKS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
36:
28 AM
0.02
ADVERSE*
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TURNOUTS
NO.
515
SHEET
NO.
3 of 7
Driveway Width (W)
4'M in.
0.
02
Utility Strip
Varies
Joint
(
5'M in.
)
1
2"
0.
02
(
Varies)
Sidewalk
(See Sheet 1)
R/W or Easement
1
2"
Joint
(0-4')
Curb
6'
_ __
4'
6" Concrete Driveway

And Sidewalk
4'
7'
MODIFICATIONS OF 'ADVERSE' AND 'MARGINAL' APPLICATIONS
2'
5' Sidewalk
PLAN
4' Min.
0.02
0.04
0
9
0
.
0
G 24
2'
8'
6'
3'
4' Min.
0.04
8
8
0
.
0
G 3
G 13
7'
3'
6'
5' Sidewalk
4' Min.
6'
0.02
0.02
G 2
4' Min.
0.02
0.04
5
8
0
.
0
5' Sidewalk
4' Min.
6'
0.02
0.02
G 1
5' Sidewalk
G 22
4' Min.
0.02
GENERAL* APPLICATION
7'
0.02
8
8
0
.
0
1'
8
8
0
.
0
MODIFIED TO ACHIEVE
4' Min.
G 12
6'
7
8
0
.
0
2'
3'
ADVERSE* AND
MARGINAL* SECTIONS
0.02
G 23
2'
8
8
0
.
0
3'
4' Min.
7'
0.02
8
8
0
.
0
5' Sidewalk
4' Min.
6'
0.02
3'
2'
5' Sidewalk
8
8
0
.
0
G 11
3'
4' Min.
6'
0.04
2'
5' Sidewalk
0.02
7
9
0
.
0
ADVERSE* SECTIONS
M 23
MODIFIED TO ACHIEVE
2'
7'
5'
2'
4' Min.
0.02
0.02
M 2
9
9
0
.
0
MARGINAL* APPLICATION
2'
4' Min.
5'
9
9
0
.
0
2'
5' Sidewalk
5' Sidewalk
6'
0.02
0.04
M 12
3'
4' Min.
0.02
4
9
0
.
0
M 22
6'
5'
3'
1'
0.02
0.02
9
9
0
.
0
M 1
3'
5' Sidewalk
5'
4' Min.
4' Min.
0.02
9
9
0
.
0
M 11
11:
36:
28 AM
12/3/2015
SIDEWALK ADJACENT TO CURB
See 'DESIGN NOTES FOR URBAN FLARED TURNOUTS'.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
MODIFICATIONS TO ADVERSE AND MARGINAL SECTIONS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TURNOUTS
NO.
515
SHEET
NO.
4 of 7
Side Road
Limits of Clearing and Grubbing
Typical Half Section For Low
Typical Half Section For
Volume/Residential Connections
Higher Volume Connections
Base Limits:
End Const.
8"
Shoulder 5' Min. For

Point Of Connection As Shown On The Plans
Private Connections
Or As Determined By The Engineer During
6' Min. For Side Roads
L
i
mi
t
sO
fB
as
e
Construction Or As Stipulated By Permit.

Drainage Pipe
3' Transition
R/W Line
4" Limit of Stabilization
5' Min. For Private Connections
Shoulder
6' Min. For Side Roads

60-120
Std.
10'
And To Toe Of Curb.
R/W Line
Roadway Ditch
Shoulder Line
All Bases To Apron Of Curb & Gutter
Shoulder
Same As Opposite
All Other Bases 4" Outside Edge Of Pavt.
Sod
Graded Or
Roadway Ditch
Paved Turnouts
Sod
Limits Of Stabilization
Connection
Width (See Sheet 1)

W
R/W Line
Paved Or Graded
Asphalt Base To Edge Of Pavt.
8"
Edge Of Travel Way

10' Std.
Edge Of Travel Way
4" For All Bases
Project
Edge Of Travel Way
Shoulder Line
Edge Of Travel Way
WITHOUT CURB & GUTTER
5' Pavement At Graded Connections
WITH CURB & GUTTER
PLAN
In Accordance With Index No. 516

Or As Shown In The Plans Or
Varies
As Stipulated By Permit.
Varies
Varies-Determined By
LIMITS OF CLEARING & GRUBBING,

STABILIZING AND BASE AT INTERSECTIONS
Drive Width And Angle
PLAN
INTERSECTIONS NOTES:
F.L. Rdwy. Ditch
Sod (See Index 273)
Width (Varies)
Sod (See Opposite)
4
1:
d.
St
Return Radius Point or Transition Point.
Shoulder
Shoulder
Drainage Pipe
1:
4
St
d.
8" Or Match Exist. Stabilization Limits (8" Min.).
FL
Mitered End Section
Mitered End Section
(See Index No. 273)
(See Opposite)
Varies-Determined By Slope Intercept
DRIVE ENTRANCES NOTES:
Drainage pipe size and length shall be that shown on the plans, or as stipulated by permit, or, as determined by the Engineer during construction.
The size shall be at least that established by the FDOT District, but not less than 15" diameter or equivalent. For minimum cover over drainage pipe
DRAINAGE SECTION
see Index No. 205. Pipe arch or elliptical pipe may be required to obtain necessary cover. At minimal cover applications a modified pavement apron
is permitted. See 'PERMISSIBLE PAVEMENT MODIFICATION' Index No. 273. For spacing between adjacent pipe end treatments see Index No. 273.
Roadway Shoulder,
Turnout Taper Or
Travel Way
Stable material may be required for graded turnouts to private property as directed by the Engineer in accordance with Section 102-8 of the
Turnout Auxillary Lanes
See Sheet 7
The 5' pavement at graded connections is not required where there is paved shoulder 4' or more in width. The 5' pavement requirement may be
waived for connections serving one or two homes or field entrances with less than 20 trips per day, or 5 trips per hour as approved by permit or by
Existing Or Proposed Drive

the Engineer, or when not itemized in the plans.
Paved turnouts shall be constructed for all paved connecting facilities. The connecting point will be determined by the Engineer.
Paved turnouts shall be constructed for all business, commercial, industrial or high volume residential graded connecting facilities. The connecting
Point Of Connection
point shall be 30' from edge of travel way or at R/W line, whichever is less.
11:
36:
29 AM
TURNOUT PROFILE AND END VIEW
See "Summary Of Geometric Requirements For Turnouts" chart for return radii lengths and supplemental information.
Return Radius Point or Flare Point.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
RURAL TURNOUT CONSTRUCTION
Paved turnouts shall be constructed for all connecting facilities over 4000 vehicles per day. The connecting point shall be at the R/W line.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TURNOUTS
NO.
515
SHEET
NO.
5 of 7
Edge of Travel Way
Edge of Travel Way
R/W
R/W
(See Note #2)
RESIDENTIAL
OR
LOW VOLUME
SIDE ROAD
COMMERCIAL
OR
LARGE COMMERCIAL
Determined By The Engineer
MATERIAL TYPES AND THICKNESSES IN DRIVING
DRIVEWAY
AREAS FOR RURAL AND URBAN CONNECTIONS
30' From Edge Of Travel Way Or

R/W Line, Whichever Is Less
Thickness (in.)
Materials
Course
Connections
Roadway
Structural
Asphaltic Concrete
1"
1
1 2"
Bases
Optional Base (See Index No. 514)
O.B.G. 1
O.B.G. 3
Minimum thickness.
All materials shall be approved by the Department prior to being placed.
Connection structure other than traffic lanes. See Notes 1 and 2 below.
Travel way flares (bypass lanes), auxiliary lanes serving more than a single connection,
Auxiliary Lane Width

(See Note #1)
SMALL/MEDIUM
COMMERCIAL
Notes 1 and 2 below.
R/W
R/W
and all median crossovers including their auxiliary lanes and/or transition tapers. See
NOTES
LEGEND
(See Note #2)
Graded Or Paved
1. The pavement should be structurally adequate to meet the expected traffic loads and
should not be less than that shown above, except as approved by the Department for
Required Paving
graded connections. Other Department-approved equivalent pavements may be used at
the discretion of the Engineer. For additional information see Index No. 514.
Limits Of Department Maintenance
2. Auxiliary lanes and their transition tapers shall be the same structure as the abutting
Lane Identification and Direction of Traffic
travel way pavement thickness or any of the roadway structures tabulated above,
NOTES
whichever is thicker.
1. Auxiliary lane pavements and crossover pavements shall be maintained by the Department.
3. If an asphalt base course is used for a turnout, its thickness may be increased to
match the edge of travel way pavement thickness in lieu of a separate structural
2. Department maintenance of turnout pavement extends 5' from edge of the travel way or to
course. 6" of Portland cement concrete will be acceptable in lieu of the asphalt base
and structural courses.
the edge of paved shoulder, whichever is greater. The remainder of any turnout paved
See Notes 4 and 5 below.
area on the right of way shall be maintained by the owner or his authorized agent. As a
function of routinely reworking shoulders, the Department may grade and shape existing
4. A structural course is required for flexible pavements when they are used for
material on nonpaved areas beyond the maintained pavement.
auxiliary lanes serving more than a single connection.

3. Control and maintenance of drainage facilities within the right of way shall be solely the
5. Connections paved with Portland cement concrete shall be Class NS concrete at least 6"
responsibility of the Department, unless specified differently by Department permit.
thick. The Department may require greater thickness when called for in the plans or
stipulated by permit. Materials and construction shall conform with FDOT Standard
4. The maintenance and operation of highway lighting, traffic signals, associated equipment,
Specifications Sections 347, 350 and 522.
and other necessary devices shall be the responsibility of a public agency.
6. The Department may require other pavement criteria where local conditions warrant.
5. All pavement markings on the State highways, including acceleration and deceleration lane
markings, and signing installed for the operation of the State highway shall be maintained
by the Department.
6. All signing and marking installed for the operation of the connection (such as stop bars
PAVEMENT STRUCTURE FOR TURNOUTS AND AUXILIARY LANES

11:
36:
30 AM
and stop signs for the connection) shall be the responsibility of the permittee.
TABLE 515-1
LIMITS OF
CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
FOR RURAL CONNECTIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TURNOUTS
NO.
515
SHEET
NO.
6 of 7
G Slopes
(See Rural Turnout
Profile, Left)
Roadway Shoulder, Turnout Taper Or Turnout
LENGTHS (L)(FT.)
Auxiliary Lane (Greatest Width). See Sections
CRESTS
Existing Or
Right For Roadway In Superelevation.

Maximum Grades
Commercial=10%
Proposed Drive
Travel Way
L
G
G
SAGS
ROUNDED
STRAIGHT
03
0.
ROUNDED
Desirable
Minimum
Desirable
Minimum
Desirable
Minimum
Desirable
Minimum
6-13%
14%
10
10
15%
2.5
10
10
16%
10
10
17%
3.5
10
10
18%
10
10
19%
4.5
10
11
12
20%
11
12
13
10
21%
5.5
12
13
8.5
14
11
22%
10
13
10
14
16
12
Residential=28%
5' Min.
STRAIGHT
G 0.02
A
A
G
Option 1
L
Definitions
A- Algebraic Difference In Grades (%)
23%
10
6.5
14
10.5
14
9.5
16
12.5
24%
11
15
11
15
10
17
13
Proposed Drive
25%
12
7.5
15
11.5
16
10.5
18
13.5
26%
12
16
12
17
11
18
14
27%
13
8.5
17
12.5
17
11.5
19
14.5
28%
14
17
13
18
12
20
15
29%
NA
NA
22
14
NA
NA
21
17
30-31%
NA
NA
23
15
NA
NA
22
18
32-33%
NA
NA
24
16
NA
NA
23
20
34-36%
NA
NA
26
17
NA
NA
25
21
37-38%
NA
NA
27
18
NA
NA
26
22
39-41%
NA
NA
29
19
NA
NA
28
24
42-43%
NA
NA
30
20
NA
NA
29
25
44-46%
NA
NA
32
21
NA
NA
31
26
47-48%
NA
NA
33
22
NA
NA
32
27
49-51%
NA
NA
34
23
NA
NA
34
28
52-54%
NA
NA
36
24
NA
NA
35
30
55-56%
NA
NA
37
25
NA
NA
36
31
Maximum Grades
G
Commercial=10%
L- Transition (See Tabulated Lengths):

A 14%- Transition Not Required
Residential=28%
A > 14%- Straight Or Rounded Transition Required
RURAL TURNOUT PROFILES
Existing Or
A
Proposed Drive
Maximum Grades
Commercial=10%
Utility Strip
Residential=28%
Drop Curb
Travel Way
Sidewalk
4' Min.
A
)
m.
No
% (
+)5
(
0.02
A
Rounded:Either circular,parabolic,or spline curvature.

The plans or the Engineer may specify a particular type of
curvature.
Existing Or
Definitions
Maximum Grades
G- Grade (%)
A- Algebraic Difference In Grades (%)
Residential=28%
Proposed Drive
Commercial=10%
Desirable:Desirable minimum lengths
{Greater lengths than minimum and
Minimum:Absolute minimum lengths
desirable are recommended where
02
0.
0.
02
02
0.
0.
02
08
.
=0
G
02
0.
0.
02
07
.
=0
G
02
0.
0.
02
06
.
=0
G
Existing Or
Option 2
G- Grade (%)
10
0.
=
G
09
.
=0
G
0.
03
05
0.
G=
0.
02
04
0.
G=
0.
03
03
.
G=0
2
0
.
G=0
1
0
.
G=0
0.
04
0.
05
0.
06
G =0.00
0.
06
G=0
.
0
1
0.
06
G=0
.
0
2
G=0
.
03
G=
0.
O4
0.
06
0.
06
G=
0.
05
0.
06
G
=0
.
06
0.
06
G
=0
.
07
0.
06
G
=0
.
08
G
=0
.
09
G
=
0.
10
practicalfor flatter and smoother
0.
07
0.
08
0.
09
0.
10
profile.}
L- Transition (See Tabulated Lengths):
RECOMMENDED TURNOUT PROFILE
A 14%- Transition Not Required
TRANSITION LENGTHS (L) (FT.)
A > 14%- Straight Or Rounded Transition Required
STORMWATER RUNOFF AND PROFILE OPTION NOTES
ROADWAY PAVEMENT SLOPES

AND SLOPES OF ABUTTING
RURAL TURNOUT SURFACES (G)
URBAN TURNOUT PROFILES

1. Turnouts shall neither cause water to flow on or across the roadway pavement, nor cause water
When restoring or reconstructing existing commercial turnout connections on
ponding or erosion within the State right of way. On all rural turnouts the transition (L) nearest
new construction and reconstruction projects, the maximum 10% commercial
the roadway shall be sloped or crowned to direct stormwater runoff to the roadside ditch. Inlets,
grade may be exceeded provided this does not create adverse roadway
flumes or other appropriate runoff control devices shall be constructed when runoff volumes are
operational or safety impacts. This shall be approved by the District
sufficient to cause erosion of the shoulder. Similar runoff control devices shall be constructed as
Design Engineer and supported by documented site specific findings.
necessary to properly direct and control the stormwater runoff on urban turnouts.
11:
36:
31 AM
SUPERELEVATION SECTIONS
2. The Option 1 profile is intended for locations where roadway, turnout taper and auxiliary lane
stormwater runoff volumes are relatively large. The Option 2 profile is intended for locations
12/3/2015
where runoff volumes are relatively small and/or where there is no roadside ditch.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
TURNOUT PROFILES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TURNOUTS
NO.
515
SHEET
NO.
7 of 7
TURNOUT
Existing Drive
CONSTRUCTION
Widening
5' Slope To Be Same

As Shoulder Slope
Friction Course
Existing Graded Connections To Be Paved In Accordance With Index No. 515.
Structural Course
1' Feathered FC
Existing Paved Connections To Be Paved With A Structural Course To The
Leveling Course
Limits Specified For "Rural Turnout Construction" Index No. 515, Unless
Structural Course
Otherwise Called For In The Plans Or Directed By Engineer.
For Drainage Pipe And Mitered End Section

Requirements See Index No. 515.
Existing Base
& Surface
Base
SECTION AA WITH WIDENING

R
See "Summary Of Geometric Requirements For

Turnouts" Index No. 515 For Return Radii Lengths.
TURNOUT
CONSTRUCTION
5'
5' Slope To Be Same
Edge of Travel Way
As Shoulder Slope
Friction Course
Edge of Travel Way
Structural Course
1' Feathered FC
Leveling Course
Varies- Determined By Drive Width & Skew
15'
21'
TYPE I TURNOUT
TYPE II TURNOUT
Typical Half-Section
Typical Half-Section
For Automobile Traffic
For Truck-Trailer Traffic
Structural Course
Existing Base
& Surface
Base
SECTION AA
AREAS FOR ONE 5' DEEP TURNOUT (SY)
PAVEMENT STRUCTURE FOR 5' DEEP TURNOUTS
Intersection
Course
Normal
(Ft.)
Thickness
Type I
Type II
Type I
Type II
26
51
31
60
14
27
52
33
61
16
28
53
34
63
18
29
54
35
64
20
31
55
37
65
22
32
56
38
67
24
33
57
39
68
26
34
58
40
69
28
35
59
42
70
30
36
61
43
72
37
62
44
73
34
38
63
46
74
36
39
64
47
76
38
41
65
48
77
40
42
66
49
78
42
43
67
51
79
44
44
68
52
81
46
45
69
53
82
48
46
71
55
83
50
47
72
56
85
52
48
73
57
86
54
49
74
58
87
Friction Course
5'
Structural Course
Asphaltic Concrete
1"
1' Feathered FC
Leveling Course
Structural Course
Base
32
Optional Base (See Index No. 514)
O.B.G. 1
Notes:
Existing Base & Surface
1. Turnout structural course to be the same material as roadway
leveling or structure course.
Structural course not required if
asphalt base course and its thickness increased to match edge of
SECTION AA
roadway pavement.
GENERAL NOTES
2. Any Department-approved pavement structure equivalence may be
1. Turnouts are to be constructed or resurfaced for low volume (single family, duplex, farm, etc.) residential
used at the discretion of the Engineer.
connections as directed by the Engineer.
3. Additional structural strength may be required if heavy truck loads
2. Turnout construction is not required for low volume residential connections where roadway shoulders are paved.
are anticipated.
3. Connections outside the 5' limit are to be constructed as directed by the Engineer.
4. The contract unit price for Turnout Construction includes the cost for excavation and base.
5. Payment for structural course is to be included in roadway resurfacing pay item.
56
51
75
60
88
58
52
76
61
90
placed on the roadway. Feathered areas will not be included in measured quantities. Feathering is not required
60
53
77
62
91
for FC-5 friction course.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
11:
36:
32 AM
12/3/2015
Material
Skewed
Structural
12
EXISTING TURNOUT
Minimum
Drive
Width
RESURFACING
6. Payment for feathering friction course is to be included in the unit price for Asphaltic Concrete Friction Course
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TURNOUTS RESURFACING PROJECTS
NO.
516
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
15' (4 Strips)
Rumble Strip Set
4" Min.
5' (Typical)
c
1
2"
Thermoplastic Rumble Strip (Typical) *

c = 0' For Roadways With Paved Shoulders
* Use multiple applications to achieve
c = 1.5' For Roadways Without Paved Shoulders
1
desired 2"
thickness
Note: Intersection thermoplastic rumble strip sets shall be white.
INSET A
THERMOPLASTIC SET
Note: Rumble strips may be required for one or more legs of

the intersection (one leg shown for spacing information).
Rumble strips shall be constructed only on the legs
5'
12"
2"
(6 Strips)
10"
2"
1
2"
identified in the plans.
Raised Rumble
Asphalt Rumble
Strip Sets
Strip (Typical)
Stop Line
See
ASPHALT SET
Inset A
SECTION AA FOR THERMOPLASTIC AND ASPHALT RUMBLE STRIP SETS

200'
125'
75'
400' Alert/Reaction Zone
500'**
Braking Zone
** May be decreased in urban areas with low operating speeds.
PLAN
NOTE:
Raised rumble strips are to be constructed in accordance
11:
36:
33 AM
with Section 546 of the Specifications.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
RAISED RUMBLE STRIPS AT INTERSECTIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
RAISED RUMBLE STRIPS
NO.
517
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Shoulder Line
Shoulder Pavement
Rumble Strips
Rumble Strips
Rumble Strips
Shoulder Line
Edge of Travel Lanes
GORE
GORE
Shoulder Pavement
Rumble Strips
EXI
T RA
MP
Shoulder Line
AMP
CE R
RAN
ENT
Shoulder Pavement
Shoulder Pavement
Note:
(
) Arrows indicate direction of travel
HALF PLAN
and not the number of lanes nor width

of median shoulder pavement.
LIMITED ACCESS FACILITIES
SHOULDER GROUND-IN RUMBLE STRIP PLACEMENT
12
"
(
1"
)
c
7'
5' Skip
t
o
7'
5' Skip
8 Cuts (12" c to c)
5' Skip
8 Cuts (12" c to c)
B
Fr
i
ct
Co
i
on
ur
se
Pa
ve
m
en
t
7"
(
1/
2"
)
1
2" Min.,
E
dg
e
Tr
av Of
el
La
ne
E
dg
e
5
8"
SKIP ARRAY
Max.
Continuous Cuts (12" c to c)
S
ho
ul
Pa
ve der
m
en
t
n.
i
M
"
16
S
t
ri
pe
CONTINUOUS ARRAY
4"
ARRAYS
8"
2"
ISOMETRIC - LONGITUDINAL CUT
GENERAL NOTES FOR

SHOULDER GROUND-IN RUMBLE STRIPS
1. Shoulder ground-in rumble strips shall be constructed on limited access facilities.
7" (
1
2")
Shoulder Pavement Structural Course

2. The skip array is the standard array. The continuous array shall be constructed
in advance of bridge ends for a distance of 1000', or back to the gore recovery
1
2"
5
Min., 8"
area for mainline interchange bridges; and constructed at other specific locations
Max.
as called for in the plans.
SECTION BB
3. Ground-in rumble strips are to be constructed in accordance with Section 546 of
11:
36:
33 AM
LONGITUDINAL CUT
the Specifications.
4. When friction course extends more than 8" beyond the edge of the travel lane,
LOCATION ALONG SHOULDER (FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT)
the extended friction course shall be bladed off back to the 8" line, prior to
rumble strip grinding.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
SHOULDER GROUND-IN RUMBLE STRIPS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIPS
NO.
518
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Fl
ex
i
bl
e
S
ho
ul
de
r
Pa
ve
m
en
t
Lanes
Shoulder
12'-0"
12'-0"
Shoulder
E
dg
e
2'-0"
Ground-In Rumble
Strips For Flexible Pavement
of
See INSET A
Tr
av
el
La
ne
"
16
2"
Pa
ve
m
en
t
E
dg
e
"
24
S
t
ri
pe
2"
NTS
RIGID PAVEMENT WITH FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT SHOULDER

INSET A
Lanes
Shoulder
12'-0"
12'-0"
E
dg
e
1'-0"
Profiled Thermoplastic Markings
Co
nc
re
t
e
Shoulder
2"
See INSET B
6"
of
Tr
av
el
La
ne
S
ho
ul
de
r
Pa
ve
m
en
t
Pr
of
i
l
ed
Th
er
m
op
l
as
t
i
c
1'
M
ar
ki
ng
s
6"
'
2'
11:
36:
34 AM
NTS
RIGID PAVEMENT WITH RIGID PAVEMENT SHOULDER
ISOMETRIC - LONGITUDINAL CUT (RIGID PAVEMENT)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
INSET B
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHOULDER RUMBLE STRIPS
NO.
518
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Rumble Strip (Typ.)
E
dg
e
N
O
PA
SS
I
N
G
30
'
Ga
p
6"
D
ou
bl
e
AR
Ye
EA
l
l
ow
12
"
(
1"
)
c
t
o
Ce
nt
er
l
i
ne
Ru
m
bl
e
4"
"
16
S
t
ri
p
(
Ty
p.
)
7'
S
ho
ul
de
r
PA
SS
I
N
G
AR
EA
6"
Ye
l
l
ow
12
"
(
1"
)
c
10
'
-3
0'
S
ki
p
12
"
(
1"
)
c
t
o
6"
E
dg
e
c
Pa
ve
m
en
t
Li
ne
M
ar
ki
ng
6"
5"
Li
ne
Ar
ra
y
S
pa
ci
ng
8"
"
16
EDGE LINE RUMBLE STRIPING

5' Gap
8 Cuts (12" CC)
GENERAL NOTES:
1
1
4"( 2")
8"
8 Cuts (12" CC)
S
t
ri
p
6"
7'
Ru
m
bl
e
1"
1"
S
pa
ci
ng
CENTER LINE RUMBLE STRIPING
5' Gap
t
o
1"
5"
7'
Pa
ve
m
en
t
10
'
(
Ty
p.
)
5' Gap
Tr
av
el
La
ne
S
t
ri
p
6"
Of
6"
Ru
m
bl
e
5'
Ga
p
1. Construct ground-in rumble strips centered on the proposed centerline or

edge line markings in accordance with Specification Section 546.
2. The rumble strip depth detailed on this sheet is for use on dense-graded
SKIP ARRAY RUMBLE STRIP
flexible pavement only.
(For All Edge Lines)

3
8"
Min.
1
TO 2"
3. Use the Skip Array Rumble Strip for edge line rumble striping and use the
Max.
Continuous Array Rumble Strip for center line rumble striping.

Continuous Cuts (12" CC) (Typ.)
11:
36:
45 AM
16"
SECTION C-C
RUMBLE STRIP DEPTH
CONTINUOUS ARRAY RUMBLE STRIP
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
(For All Centerlines)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
RUMBLE STRIPING
NO.
519
SHEET
NO.
1 of 1
** Tread
R =
1
2"
1
8"
Max.
Pitch
1
2"
Pedestrian Railing
7" M ax.
(Picket Railing shown,

other railings similar)
*Riser
16" Max.
4" M in.
11" Min.
Pedestrian Railing
(Guiderail shown,
other railings similar)
Max.
1" Min.
STAIR TREAD AND RISER DETAILS

* The greatest riser height within the flight of steps
shall not exceed the smallest by more than
3
4"
3
8".
Chamfer
** The greatest tread depth within the flight of steps
1'
-0"
2"
1'
-2"
3
8".
2"
shall not exceed the smallest by more than
Min.
#3 Bars @ 12" ctrs.

5' -0" Min.
#4 Bars @ 12" ctrs.
(2" Min. Cover)
1'-0"
Max Landing Cross-Slope = 2%
Exp. Jt.
1'-0"
Max Landing Slope = 2%
Length of Landing 5'-0" Min.
Top Landing
Length of Intermediate Landing
(2" Min. Cover)
ELEVATION
2"
5" Min.
#3 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.

#3 Bar Each Nosing
Equal to one
1
(1 4"
6'-3"
8"
8"
Cheekwall
Cover)
Cheekwall
6'
-0" M ax. between landings
Tread Length
#4 Bars
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs. (2" Min. Cover)
(2" Min. cover)
Chamfer
2"
3
4"
(Typ.)
NOTE: Provide a maximum of 12 risers between landings.
Varies
5" Min.
2" Min. cover
#3 Bars @ 12" Ctrs.
(Typ.)
2"
1
4"
#3 Bar Each Nosing (1
Cover)
#4 Bars @ 12" Ctrs. (2" Min. Cover)
2" Min. cover
#3 Bars
(Typ.)
SECTION A-A
1'-0"
Cheekwall Extension
Pedestrian Railing (Typ.)
Exp. Jt.
8"
Cheekwall
Cheekwall
(If Present)
6'-3"
8"
Align Railings
#3 Bars @ 12" ctrs.
Cheekwall
2" Min. cover
Min.
2"
2"
1'
-0"
#4 Bars
5" Min.
(2" Min. Cover)
(Typ.)
6'-0"
Max Landing Cross-Slope = 2%
NOTES:
1. Do not use this Index for suspended (structural) steps or stairways.
2. Construct steps in accordance with Section 522 of the FDOT Standard Specifications.
3. Concrete: Class NS, Specification 347.
4. Tread Finish: Broom finish parallel to steps unless otherwise shown in Plans.
1'
-0"
Max Landing Slope = 2%
W idth Varies (
See Plans)
Bottom Landing
Handrail (Typ.)
#3 Bars
8"
(Typ.)
1'-0"
1'-0"
8"
Steps
SECTION B-B
1
2"
6'-9"
Expansion Joint
(Premoulded Joint Filler)
2" Min. cover
5. Pedestrian Railing: See Index Nos. 852, 862, 870, 880 or Project Specific Design.
5" Min.
(Typ.)
1'
-0"
6. Cost of concrete steps, landings and cheekwalls shall be paid for under the contract
11:
36:
46 AM
2" Min. cover
#4 Bars
Landing
unit price for Class NS Concrete (Concrete Steps), CY. Cost of reinforcing steel shall
be paid for under the contract unit price for Reinforcing Steel (Miscellaneous), LB.
Cheekwall
#3 Bars
2" Min. cover
#4 Bars
12/3/2015
PLAN AT JUNCTION OF STEPS & LANDING
8"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
(Bottom Landing shown, Top Landing similar)
DESCRIPTION:
7"
8"
SECTION C-C
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
(Typ.)
7"
CONCRETE STEPS
NO.
521
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
4'
Shoulder Line
Shoulder Line
360'
6'
PCC Pa
v
e
me
n
tO
r
Fl
e
x
i
b
l
e Pa
v
e
me
n
t
3
5
0
'
Va
r
i
e
s
Ra
mp
See Inset Below For
(See Gen. Note No. 4)

Varie
s
Sh
o
u
l
d
e
r Gu
t
t
e
r(
Se
e Ge
n
e
r
a
lNo
t
e No
.4
)
Ra
mp W
i
dt
h Ca
s
Tr
eI
a
f
f
i
c Co
n
di
t
i
o
n"
C"
2' Shoulder
Pavement
Ma
x
.De
g
r
e
e Cu
r
v
e
=8
15'
Fl
e
x
i
b
l
e
Pa
v
e
me
n
tT
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
sT
r
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n
L
= 1
0
0
'(
Se
e De
t
a
i
lBe
l
o
w)
DETAIL A
Shoulders Without Gutter
Shoulder Line
6'
Wi
d
t
h Co
r
r
e
s
p
o
n
d
s To Ca
s
eI
Tr
I
a
f
f
i
c Co
n
d
i
t
i
o
n"
B"
Ra
mp Pa
v
t
.
PC
Pa
v
t
.Ty
p
e Sa
me As
Edge Of Berm
Ram p
Pavement
3.
5'
8' Shoulder
Shoulder Gutter
4'
1
0
'Sh
o
u
l
d
e
r Pa
v
t
.
3.
5'
Edge Of Berm
6'
12'
12'
2 LANES
Varies
2'
4'
6'
19'
2 LANES
4'
10'
3.
5'
4'
PCC Pavement Or Flexible Pavement
Edge Of Berm
TWO THRU LANES

6'
Shoulder Line
Width Corresponds To Case II
2' Shoulder
Traffic Condition "B"
Pavement
3.5'
Ramp Width
Ramp Width Case I
2'
Case I Traffic
Condition "C"
2'
Traffic Condition "C"
1.5'
4'
'
6
0
.
0
Slope Varies
Width Corresponds
Shoulder Gutter
Shoulder Line
To Case II Traffic
(See Gen. Note No. 4)
Condition "B"
4' Shoulder
INSET
SECTION AA
Pavement
4'
4'
725' - 12' Lane
4' Shoulder
Shld
Ramp
Shoulder Line
Shoulder Line
600' Trans.
12' to 0'
4' Shoulder
Pavement
Pavement
2 LANES
3 LANES
Surface
Mainline Thickness
2'
Shoulder Line
6'
Limits Of Pay
For Ramp Thickness
FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT THICKNESS TRANSITION
Max
. D
e
g
r
e
eC
u
r
v
e
=8
15'
NOTE: For General Notes See Sheet No. 2

Shoulder Line
Edge Of Travel Lane
4'
Limits Of Pay For
Ramp Width Case I
Shoulders With Gutter
THREE APPROACH LANES - TWO THRU LANES
varies
Base
3.
5'
Base
See Inset Below For
Shoulder Line
Pa
v
e
me
n
tT
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
sT
r
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n
L
= 1
0
0
'(
Se
e De
t
a
i
lBe
l
o
w)
Ra
mp
Fl
e
x
i
b
l
e
DETAIL B
L
PC
Flexible Pavement
Fr
o
m Ed
g
eO
f Sh
o
u
l
d
e
r Pa
v
'
t
.T
o Di
t
c
h Bo
t
t
o
m
Ram p
So
dT
h
i
s Ar
e
a
4'
PCC Pavement Or
Wi
d
t
h Co
r
r
e
s
p
o
n
d
s To C
Tr
a
a
f
s
f
eI
i
c Co
I
n
d
i
t
i
o
n"
B"
2'
Shoulder Line
Pavement
3
5
0
'
12'
6'
12'

2'
2'
10' Shoulder
19'
7'
Pavement Type
11:
36:
47 AM
Same As Ramp Pavt.
Ramp Width Case I
EXIT TERMINALS

Edge Of Berm
Shoulder Gutter
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/04
REVISIO N
SINGLE - LANE RAMPS
INSET
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
RAMP TERMINALS
NO.
525
SHEET
NO.
1of 5
Varies
4'
Shoulder Line
4' Shoulder Pavt.
PCC Pavt. Or Flexible Pavt.
Shoulder Line
4'
1200' Taper
4' Shoulder Pavt.
6'
2 LANES
24'
17'
2 LANES
12'
mp
Ra
PC
2'
e
n
i
rL
de
l
u
o
.
t
v
Sh
r Pa
de
l
u
o
h
S
4'
eI
s
h Ca
dt
i
mp W
Ra
C"
n
o "
i
t
di
n
c Co
i
f
f
a
I
Tr
I
e
s
Ca
d To
n
o
p
s
e
r
r
o
"B "
C
n
o
h
i
t
t
d
di
Wi
n
c Co
i
f
f
a
Tr
Flexible Pavt.
10' Shoulder Pavt.
6'
e
g
m Ed
o
a Fr
e
s Ar
i
h
dT
So
4'
m
o
t
t
h Bo
c
t
o Di
tT
n
me
e
v
r Pa
e
d
l
u
o
f Sh
O
t
n
me
e
v
e Pa
l
b
i
x
e
Fl
n
o
i
t
i
s
n
a
r
T
s
s
e
n
k
c
i
Th
w)
o
l
Be
l
i
a
t
e
eD
Se
'(
0
0
=1
L
See Inset Below For Shoulders With Gutter
DETAIL C
Pavement
6'
TAPER-TYPE ENTRANCE
2' Shoulder
Varies
ies
Var
PCC Pavt. Or
PT
Shoulder Line
2' Shoulder Pavt.
6'
6'
10' Shoulder Pavt.
2'
1:50 Taper
Shoulder Line
Surface
Pavement Type Same
GENERAL NOTES
3.
5'
As Ramp Pavement
4'
Base
Ramp Width Case I
Shoulder Gutter
L
2
L
2
1. Taper-Type exit and entrance terminals as detailed shall not be used on ramps for
Base
which a speed of 50 MPH or greater cannot be maintained. For such ramps,
Edge Of
Limits Of Pay For Ramp Thickness
parallel deceleration and acceleration lanes shall be used in place of tapers with
Limits Of Pay For Mainline Thickness
lengths set according to AASHTO.
Berm
FLEXIBLE PAVT. THICKNESS TRANSITION
2. a. PCC Pavement Projects:
INSET
Where shoulder pavement adjacent to shoulder gutter is less than 6' wide, it
shall be identical to the adjacent roadway pavement beginning with the
transverse joint nearest the point of 6' width.
Shoulder Gutter
b. Flexible Pavement Projects:
4'
Where shoulder pavement used in conjunction with shoulder gutter is less than
4' Shoulder
Varies
Varies
6' uniform width, it shall be identical to the adjacent roadway pavement.

Shoulder Line
Pavement

3. For concrete pavement joint details and layouts at entrance and exit ramp
6'
2 LANES
6'
terminals see Index No. 305.
3 LANES
6'
Shoulder Transition
10'
4'
5'
3.
ies
Var
eI
as
hC
t
i
pW
C"
m
a
n
R
o "
i
t
di
n
c Co
i
f
f
a
I
r
T
eI
as
oC
dT
"
n
B
o
"
p
s
n
o
e
i
r
t
r
o
di
n
hC
dt
c Co
i
f
Wi
f
a
r
T
m
r
Be
Shoulder Gutter (See General Note No. 4)
t
n
me
e
v
e Pa
l
b
i
x
e
n
Fl
o
i
t
i
s
n
a
s Tr
s
e
n
)
k
e
c
v
i
o
b
Th
A
l
i
a
t
e De
e
S
(
'
0
=10
L
Pavt. Type Same As Ramp Pavt.
PT
e Of
g
Ed
4'
4. Shoulder gutter applications will be determined by drainage design.
mp
Ra
t
n
me
e
av
rP
de
l
u
e
o
n
h
i
L
S
r
2'
de
l
u
Sho
3.
5'
8' Shoulder Pavt.
Varies
4'
3.
5'
17'
8' Shoulder
Pavement
See Inset Right For Shoulders Without Gutter

Shoulder Line
DETAIL D
PARALLEL-TYPE ENTRANCE
6'
ENTRANCE TERMINALS
6'
Shoulder Line
SINGLE-LANE RAMPS
11:
36:
48 AM
Ramp Width Case I Traffic Condition "C"

Width Corresponds To Case II Traffic Condition "B"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/04
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
INSET
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
RAMP TERMINALS
NO.
525
SHEET
NO.
2 of 5
Shoulder Line
Shoulder Line
360'
24'
19'
AUXILIARY LANE
3 LANES
6'
3 LANES
12'

Shoulder
Line
Ra
mp
Ma
8'
x
. De
g
r
e
e Cu
r
v
e
=8
15'
A
Shoulder Line
Fl
e
x
i
b
l
e Pa
v
e
me
n
t
Th
i
c
k
n
e
s
s Tr
a
n
s
i
t
i
o
n
L
=1
0
0
'(
Se
e De
t
a
i
lSh
t
.1
)
2'
3
5
0
'
So
d Th
i
s Ar
e
a Fr
o
m Ed
g
e Of Sh
o
u
l
d
e
r Pa
v
t
. To Di
t
c
h Bo
t
t
o
m
8
'No
n
I
n
t
e
r
s
t
a
t
e
1
0
'I
n
t
e
r
s
t
a
t
e
PC
Pa
v
e
me
n
t
Ram p
PCC Pa
v
e
me
n
tOr Fl
e
x
i
b
l
e
1500' Min. Auxiliary Lane

With 300' Taper
24'
2'
Shoulder Line
2'
2'
2'
8' Shoulder Pavement - Non-Interstate

10' Shoulder Pavement - Interstate
THREE THRU LANES - APPROACH AUXILIARY LANE
EXIT TERMINALS

24'
TWO-LANE RAMPS
Ramp
3.5'
2'
4'
1.5'
Slope Varies
6
0
.
0
Shoulder Gutter
SECTION WHEN SHOULDER GUTTER USED
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
36:
48 AM
SECTION AA
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
RAMP TERMINALS
NO.
525
SHEET
NO.
3 of 5
2'
3.
5'
Shoulder Pavement
Taper
Shoulder Pavement
Edge Of Berm
10' 12' 12'
Speed Change Lane
2'
10' 12' 12' 12'
8'
4'
10' 12' 12'

5.
5'
8'
Thru Lane
2'
Taper
Thru Lane
10'
Speed Change Lane
s
rie
Va
12' 12' 12'
Thru Lane
8'
5'
3.
s
rie
Va
6'
4'
Thru Lane
'
6
Shoulder Line
Shoulder Pavement
Same As Ramp Pavement
Shoulder Pavement
6'
2'
Speed Change Lane
Va
ri
es
Thru Lane
Taper
4'
Shoulder Pavement
Shoulder Pavement
6
'
Taper
Thru Lane
2' 10' 12' 12' 12'
10' 12' 12'
ACCELERATION LANE WITHOUT SHOULDER GUTTER
Va
rie
s
3.
5'
Speed Change Lane
8'
Thru Lane
12' 12' 12'
8'
Thru Lane
4'
3.
5'
10' 12' 12'
ACCELERATION LANE WITH SHOULDER GUTTER
Edge Of Berm
Shoulder Line
Shoulder Pavement
Shoulder Pavement
DECELERATION LANE WITH SHOULDER GUTTER
DECELERATION LANE WITHOUT SHOULDER GUTTER
SHOULDER TREATMENT
AT SPEED CHANGE LANES AT FREEWAY RAMP TERMINALS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
36:
49 AM
FREEWAY RAMP TERMINALS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
RAMP TERMINALS
NO.
525
SHEET
NO.
4 of 5
For Median Widths Greater Than 22'
in
.
1:25
*380' (35-50 mph)
PT
*500' (30-50 mph)
250'
.
M in
le
ab
sir
De
Standard cross road entrance terminals. To be used when roadway alignment is tangent and no bridges
12'
R
0'
31
are located within the merging lane.

50'
See Index No. 301 For Deceleration Length (L)
Queue Length
*380' (35-50 mph)
10'
R
0'
31
R
.
'
in
0
0
M
1
R
'
5
7
1:25
250'
PT
*500' (30-50 mph)
e
abl
sir
De
12'
W
12'
For Channelization Of Traffic

10'
8'
8'
7
5
'
R
Curb Is To Be Used Only As Required
SIGNALIZED OR UNSIGNALIZED
LEFT TURN CONTROL
Parallel cross road entrance terminals. Recommended when a bridge is located within the merging lane,
turning roadway speed is less than 60% of thru roadway speed or for the combinations of horizontal
.
M in
alignment shown elsewhere on this sheet.
UNSIGNALIZED
8'
ENTRANCES
r
e
p
Ta
300'
1:15
Tangent
*Decel. Dist. From 2001
PC
Mi
n.
AASHTO Exhibit 10-73
De
sir
ab
le
285' (50-35)
315' (50-30)
See Drawing
31
0'
R
Standard cross road exit terminal. To be used when roadway alignment is tangent.
PCC
180'
12'
300
'Ta
per
UNSIGNALIZED
8'
ENTRANCES
Parallel cross road exit terminals. Recommended when exit is partially hidden over the crest
of vertical curve or when turning roadway speed is less than 60% of the thru roadway speed,
11:
36:
49 AM
or for the combinations of horizontal alignment shown elsewhere on this sheet.
M in
.
Tangent
r
e
p
Ta
100'
UNSIGNALIZED
See Drawing
EXITS
UNSIGNALIZED
EXITS
Normal shoulder pavement width.

NOTE:
PCC
315' (50-30)
100'
Ta
p
e
r
De
sir
abl
e
AASHTO Exhibit 10-73

285' (50-35)
FOOTNOTES:
12'
*Decel. Dist. From 2001
31
0'
R
180'
PC
12'
W
1:15
Ramp terminals on curves should be avoided when possible.
Adjust for grades if greater than 2% (See Exhibit 10-71, AASHTO).
12/3/2015
RAMP TERMINALS ON CURVES

RAMP TERMINALS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
CROSSROAD TERMINALS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
RAMP TERMINALS
NO.
525
SHEET
NO.
5 of 5
Auxiliary Lane Or Turn

Lane-See Index No. 301.
Ta
C
R
C
R
Varies
Ta
Td
Varies
Queue Length
Deceleration Length (L)
DESIGN
T (FEET)
a
T
d
ADD LANE
LANE DROP
SPEED
(mph)
4-LANE WITH TWO-WAY LEFT-TURN LANES
1:25
<30
30-45
50' ( 1:4)
>45
1:30
1:40
Note: For locations with unrelocatable control points

minimum taper rates for lane drop (T ) will be 1:20.
d
(See Sheet 2 )
C
R
C
R
L
d
Ta
Queue Length
Deceleration Length (L)
GENERAL NOTE
1. For pavement markings refer to Index No. 17346.
4-LANE UNDIVIDED FLARED - SYMMETRICAL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
36:
50 AM
INTERSECTION TURNS AND STORAGE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ROADWAY TRANSITIONS
NO.
526
SHEET
NO.
1of 8
La
C
R
Ld
Ta
See Index No. 301
Queue Length
For Deceleration Length (L)
LEFT SIDE WIDENING
C
R
Ld
Ld
Ta
See Index No. 301
Queue Length
CENTERED WIDENING
C
R
300' (Desirable) (1: 25)
Ld
La
Ta
See Index No. 301
Queue Length
RIGHT SIDE WIDENING
DESIGN
L (Ft.)
a
11:
36:
51 AM
SPEED
MINIMUM UNDER
(mph)
STANDARD
30
180
120
40
320
150
50
500
180
60
720
240
CONSTRAINTS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
(mph)
FLARED & PAINTED LEFT TURNS FOR 2-LANE 2-WAY ROADWAYS
L (Ft.)
d
30
180
120
40
240
150
50
360
180
60
480
240
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ROADWAY TRANSITIONS
NO.
526
SHEET
NO.
2 of 8
L =
WS
45 mph
L =
WS
< 45 mph
120
4-LANE DIVIDED TO 4-LANE UNDIVIDED
L =
WS
45 mph
L =
WS
< 45 mph
120
L = 12S 45 mph
L =
< 45 mph
4-LANE DIVIDED TO 2-LANE UNDIVIDED

L = 12S 45 mph
L =
< 45 mph
11:
36:
52 AM
2L
4-LANE UNDIVIDED TO 2-LANE UNDIVIDED

S=Design speed (mph)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
LANE DIVERGENCE AND CONVERGENCE FOR CENTERED ROADWAYS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ROADWAY TRANSITIONS
NO.
526
SHEET
NO.
3 of 8
200'
200'
Existing Pavement
Existing Pavement
Connect To Existing Pavement
CONNECTING FLARE WITH PAVED SHOULDERS TO

CONNECTING SIMILAR WIDTH PAVEMENTS
EXISTING ROADWAY WITHOUT PAVED SHOULDERS
Existing Pavement
200'
W
L=WS
Existing Pavement
200'
CONNECTING ROADWAY WITH PAVED SHOULDERS TO

EXISTING SYMMETRICAL FLARE WITHOUT PAVED SHOULDERS
CONNECTING DIFFERENT WIDTH PAVEMENTS
Existing Pavement
200'
FLARED - PAVED SHOULDERS

200'
Existing Pavement
S=Design speed (mph).
CONNECTING ROADWAY WITH PAVED SHOULDERS TO
11:
36:
52 AM
EXISTING ASYMMETRICAL FLARE WITHOUT PAVED SHOULDERS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
PAVED SHOULDER TREATMENT AT TRANSITIONS AND CONNECTIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ROADWAY TRANSITIONS
NO.
526
SHEET
NO.
4 of 8
Crossover
22'
Min.
24'
24'
10' R
12'
12'
12'
12'
50'
L (Taper)
657.83'
= 4
24'
24'
1:15 Taper
D = 1
L = 400'
(1:4 Min., But Not
T = 200.08'
Less Than 50')
660'
Future Crossover
22' MEDIAN
50'
L (Taper)
915.24'
Crossover
12'
Min.
24'
12'
15'
40'
12'
12'
3' R
12'
24'
1
:
1
5 Ta
p
e
r
= 4
(
1
:
4 Mi
n
.
,Bu
t
No
tL
e
s
s Th
a
n5
0
'
)
24'
D = 1
L = 400'
Future Crossover
T = 200.08'
660'
660'
Future Crossover
40' MEDIAN
Crossover
1005.84'
50'
L (Taper)
12'
Min.
64'
12'
12'
12'
11' R
5
24'
12'
15'
24'
1
:
1
5 Ta
p
e
r
Future Crossover
= 5
(
1
:
4 Mi
n
.
,Bu
t
No
tL
e
s
s Th
a
n5
0
'
)
24'
D = 1
L = 500'
Future Crossover
T = 250.16'
660'
660'
L = WS for speeds = 45 mph

WS
L =
for speeds 40 mph
60
64' MEDIAN
Where:
W=Width of lateral transition in feet.
S=Design speed.
NOTES FOR SHEETS 5 THRU 8

1. The transition details as represented on sheets 5 thru 8 are intended as guidelines
LEFT ROADWAY CENTERED ON APPROACH ROADWAY
only. The transition lengths, curve data, nose radii and offsets are valid only for
11:
36:
53 AM
tangent alignment, design speeds 45 mph, the median widths and lane widths shown.
2. Approach lane departures ( = 5) are suitable for design speeds up to 60 mph. Interior
TWO LANE TO FOUR LANE TRANSITION
curves (D = 1) are suitable for normal crown for design speeds up to 50 mph. Merging
curves (D 5) will require superelevation.
3. The geometrics of these schemes are associated with the standard subsectional spacing
12/3/2015
for side roads, but in any case will require modification to accommodate side road
location, multilane and/or divided side roads, oblique side roads, crossover widths,
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
storage and speed change lane requirements, and, other related features.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ROADWAY TRANSITIONS
NO.
526
SHEET
NO.
5 of 8
= 4
D = 4
Crossover
486.22'
T = 50.02'
(1:4 Min., But Not Less Than 50')

22'
12'
L = 100'
1:15 Taper
12'
24'
24'
11' R
= 524'45.63"
24'
D = 402'01.65"
12'
L (Taper)
50'
Min.
= 4
= 524'45.63"
D = 1
D = 128'27.69"
L = 400'
L = 367.12'
T = 200.08'
T = 183.70'
L = 134.18'
T = 67.14'
660.95'
Future Crossover
660'
22' MEDIAN
= 4
743.63'
D = 4
= 4
L = 100'
D = 1
1:15 Taper
317.95'
T = 50.02'
12'
L = 400'
Crossover
T = 200.08'
5.11' R
24'
40'
12'
24'
= 436'02.38"
15'
D = 402'01.65"
24'
L = 114.05'
= 436'02.38"
12'
T = 57.06'
D = 137'42.04"
L = 282.54'
T = 141.34'
50'
915.24'
L (Taper)
Min.
Future Crossover
Future Crossover
660'
660'
40' MEDIAN
= 5
868.68'
= 5
D = 5
D = 1
Crossover
443.01'
T = 50.03'
T = 250.16'
12'
L = 100'
1:15 Taper
L = 500'
12'
'
4
2
24'
64'
13.35' R
= 526'30.28"
D = 503'10.48"
12'
15'
L = 107.70'
24'
Future Crossover
T = 53.89'
= 526'30.28"
D = 125'26.19"
L = 382.16'
T = 191.22'
50'
1
0
0
5
.
8
4
'
L (Taper)
Min.
Future Crossover
660'
660'
11:
36:
53 AM
64' MEDIAN
L =
WS
for speeds 40 mph
60
Where:
LEFT ROADWAY CENTERED ON THRU ROADWAY
W = Width of lateral transition in feet.

12/3/2015
S = Design speed.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
FOUR LANE TO TWO LANE TRANSITION

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ROADWAY TRANSITIONS
NO.
526
SHEET
NO.
6 of 8
660'
Future Crossover
L (Taper)
660.95'
= 524'45.63"
= 4
= 524'45.63"
D = 128'27.69"
D = 4
D = 402'01.65"
L = 367.12'
L = 134.18'
T = 183.70'
Min.
= 4
D = 1
L = 400'
T = 200.08'
22'
12'
24'
T = 67.14'
T = 50.02'
12'
24'
12'
L = 100'
Crossover
50'
11' R
24'
486.22'
1:15 Taper
(1:4 Min., But
22' MEDIAN
Not Less Than 50')
660'
660'
Future Crossover
Crossover
Future Crossover
50'
L (Taper)
915.24'
Min.
= 436'02.38"
D = 137'42.04"
D = 4
12'
L = 100'
T = 50.02'
L = 282.54'
= 436' 02.38"
12'
T = 141.34'
D = 402' 01.65"
24'
L = 114.05'
15'
40'
= 4
T = 57.06'
5.11' R
24'
12'
24'
1:15 Taper
= 4
(1:4 Min., But
D = 1
317.95'
L = 400'
Not Less Than 50')
T = 200.08'
743.63'
40' MEDIAN
660'
660'
Future Crossover
Crossover
Future Crossover
L (Taper)
1
0
0
5
.
8
4
'
50'
Min.
= 526' 30.28"
D = 125'26.19"
L = 382.16'
12'
= 5
= 526' 30.28"
D = 5
D = 503'10.48"
T = 191.22'
24'
64'
12'
L = 100'
15'
L = 107.70'
T = 50.03'
T = 53.89'
13.35' R
12'
24'
443.01'
24'
1:15 Taper
= 5
(1:4 Min., But
D = 1
Not Less Than 50')
L = 500'
868.68'
T = 250.16'
64' MEDIAN
11:
36:
54 AM
L =
WS
for speeds 40 mph
60
Where:
RIGHT ROADWAY CENTERED ON APPROACH ROADWAY
TWO LANE TO FOUR LANE TRANSITION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
S = Design speed.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ROADWAY TRANSITIONS
NO.
526
SHEET
NO.
7 of 8
Future Crossover
660'
= 4
D = 1
1:15 Taper
L = 400'
(1:4 Min., But
T = 200.08'
12'
Not Less Than 50')

22'
24'
24'
12'
Crossover
10' R
24'
12'
24'
12'
50'
L (Taper)
657.83'
Min.
22' MEDIAN
660'
660'
= 4
D = 1
Future Crossover
L = 400'
1
:
1
5 Ta
p
e
r
(
1
:
4 Mi
n
.
,Bu
t
No
tL
e
s
s Th
a
n5
0
'
)
T = 200.08'
40'
24'
12'
Future Crossover
12'
Crossover
24'
15'
12'
50'
L (Taper)
12'
24'
3' R
915.24'
Min.
40' MEDIAN
660'
660'
Future Crossover
= 5
Future Crossover
D = 1
64'
24'
1
:
1
5 Ta
p
e
r
(
1
:
4 Mi
n
.
,Bu
t
No
tL
e
s
s Th
a
n5
0
'
)
24'
12'
L = 500'
T = 250.16'
12'
Crossover
12'
50'
L (Taper)
15'
12'
24'
11' R
1005.84'
Min.
64' MEDIAN
11:
36:
55 AM
RIGHT ROADWAY CENTERED ON THRU ROADWAY

L =
WS
for speeds 40 mph
60
Where:
FOUR LANE TO TWO LANE TRANSITION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
S = Design speed.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ROADWAY TRANSITIONS
NO.
526
SHEET
NO.
8 of 8
70'
L Index No. 301 *
Add 70' For Each Additional

WB-40 Expected In Storage
RETURN NO. 2
6
0
'
4'
C
R
RETURN NO. 1
Chevrons (Optional)
40'
Separator Wing (Optional)
Curb Type E
6
0
'
4'
C
R
12'
'R
62
20'
Curb Type E
RETURN NO. 3
RETURN NO. 4
NOTE:
Return configurations for each quadrant must be analyzed independently to assure adequate return pavement for
semi-trailer inside tracking and for 4' minimum clearance between trucks making opposing movement. The depicted
design only applies where roads and streets intersect at 90 to the mainline and have centerlines common with the
opposing road or street. Swept paths are by AutoTURN 4.0 for the AASHTO 2001 SU and WB-40 tractor-semitrailer.
45'
21'
4'
'R
62
'R
62
RETURNS:
Returns Depicted:
21'
Three Centered Compound Curves For All Returns Depicted:
45'
120'-40'-200' Radii; 2' And 8' Offsets
20'
Simple Curve With Tapers Not Shown:

40' Radius; 1:15 And 1:8 Tapers With
2' And 8' Offsets Tested (Practical Fit)
SWEPT PATH LEGEND:
WB 40
SU
QUADRANT NOS. 1 & 2 VACANT
Chevrons (Optional)
40'
Curb Type E
11:
36:
55 AM
4'
6
0
'
4'
C
R
20'
Curb Type E
RETURN NO. 4
RETURN NO. 3
NOTE:
Return configurations for each quadrant must be analyzed independently to assure adequate return pavement
for semi-trailer inside tracking. The depicted design only applies where roads and streets intersect at 90
12/3/2015
to the mainline. Swept paths are by AutoTURN 4.0 for the AASHTO 2001 SU and WB-40 tractor-semitrailer.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/04
REVISIO N
40' MEDIAN 4-LANE DIVIDED PARALLEL TURN BAY 2001 AASHTO SU & WB-40
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DIRECTIONAL MEDIAN OPENINGS
NO.
527
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
70'
L Index No. 301 *
RETURN NO. 2
7
5
'
4'
Curb Type E
Chevrons (Optional)
40'
Curb Type E
7
5
'
4'
C
R
12'
'R
70
20'
C
R
RETURN NO. 1
* Add 70' For Each Additional
RETURN NO. 4
RETURN NO. 3
NOTE:
opposing road or street. Swept paths are by AutoTURN 4.0 for the AASHTO 2001 WB-50 tractor-semitrailer.
48'
4'
RETURNS:
'R
70
'R
70
33'
Returns Depicted:
33'
Simple Curve With Tapers For Returns Nos. 1, 2 & 4 (Best Configuration):
48'
70' Radius; 1:15 And 1:12 Tapers
20'
2' And 6' Offsets
Three Centered Compound Curves For Return No. 3:
4'
Chevrons (Optional)
40'
Curb Type E
4'
C
R
7
5
'
4'
20'
Curb Type E
11:
36:
56 AM
RETURN NO. 4
RETURN NO. 3
NOTE:
for semi-trailer inside tracking. The depicted design only applies where roads and streets intersect at 90
12/3/2015
to the mainline. Swept paths are by AutoTURN 4.0 for the AASHTO 2001 WB-50 tractor-semitrailer.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/04
REVISIO N
40' MEDIAN 4-LANE DIVIDED PARALLEL TURN BAY 2001 AASHTO WB-50
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
527
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
70'
L Index No. 301 *
* Add 70' For Each Additional

RETURN NO. 2
24'
RETURN NO. 1
Curb Type E
'
55
4'
R
C
'
0
6
Chevrons (Optional)
40'
24'
4'
4'
4'
R
R
C
'
60
Curb Type E
RETURN NO. 4
RETURN NO. 3
NOTE:
'
55
R
4'
opposing road or street. Swept paths are by AutoTURN 4.0 for the AASHTO 2001 SU and WB-40 tractor-semitrailer.
'
55
RETURNS:
R
4'
Returns Depicted:
SWEPT PATH LEGEND:
Three Centered Compound Curves For All Returns Depicted:

WB 40

Simple Curve With Tapers Not Shown:
SU
40' Radius; 1:15 And 1:8 Tapers With

2' And 8' Offsets Tested (Practical Fit)
4'
24'
40'
Chevrons (Optional)
Curb Type E
24'
R
C
'
0
6
4'
4'
RETURN NO. 3
'R
55
20'
Curb Type E
RETURN NO. 4
NOTE:
for semi-trailer inside tracking. The depicted design only applies where roads and streets intersect at 90 to
11:
36:
57 AM
the mainline. Swept paths are by AutoTURN 4.0 for the AASHTO 2001 SU and WB-40 tractor-semitrailer.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/04
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
40' MEDIAN 4-LANE DIVIDED TAPERED TURN BAY 2001 AASHTO SU & WB-40
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
527
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
38'-0"
06130-C
1'
-0"
1'-0"
1'-0"
12'-0"
12'-0"
05500-C
12'-0"
4
3
03300-A
03300-B
NOTES
03300-H
Conc. Slab
18"
Keynotes on sheet 2.
Picnic Tables (Typ)
45
Typ.
FLOOR
3"
12'
-0"
03300-C
6" reinf. concrete slab

w/ WWR 6x6-W1.4xW1.4
SECTION
1
1
26'
-0"
Wood Post (Typ)
Drop footing at slab

perimeter & interior posts see keynotes.
Harden & broom finish slab surface.
12'
-0"
06130-C
STRUCTURE
05500-C
Posts: 8 x 8 PT
4
3
03300-A
03300-B
Foundation (Below)
Beams: 4 x 6 PT
03300-D
24"
Framing: 4x PT as described.
45
Misc members: 1x and 2x as described.
Typ.
3"
1'
-0"
03300-C
FLOOR PLAN
12" Min.
ROOF
3"
3"x6" T&G wood decking.
SECTION
LARGE PAVILION
30# asphalt impregnated fiberglass felt

underlayment.
1
2"
Standing seam metal roof (24 GA Steel or
4"
Chamfer
0.032 Alum.) w/ Kynar 500 finish.
1
2"
Structure, decking and roofing shall be

designed to withstand 130 mph wind load.
12'-0"
9"
12'-0"
5
8"
Hole
"
"
1
4"
1'
-6"
Foundation (Below)
1
2"
1'-0"
1'
-0"
1'-0"
1
4"
(Typ)
26'-0"
1
2"
7"
Typ.
BUILDING CODE
Picnic pavilions shall be constructed
(Min.)
according to the requirements of the
appropriate sections of the "Florida
05500-B
14'
-0"
12'
-0"
Building Code", current, adopted edition.

Top Of Concrete Slab
PICNIC TABLES
Conc. Slab
Picnic tables and benches shall be 6'x6'

05500-A
w/heavy galvanized pipe frames and
Picnic Table (Typ.)
recycled plastic wood seats and table tops.
11:
36:
58 AM
1'
-0"
All tables shall be of walk thru design
Wood Post (Typ.)
FLOOR PLAN
POST BASE DETAIL
suitable for exterior locations. Pavilions

shall meet the requirements of the
Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA)
accessibility guidelines. A minimum of 20%
of picnic tables to meet ADA.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
SMALL PAVILION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
REST AREA PAVILION
NO.
530
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
07411-A
07411-A
Shape A
07411-B
06130-A
07411-B
05500-D
KEYNOTES
06130-B
06130-A
03300-A
Class II 6" conc slab
03300-B
6"x6"-W1.4xW1.4 @ of slab
03300-C
6 mil vapor barrier
03300-D
#5 rebar cont. (2 required)
03300-E
24" cont. drop footing
03300-F
18"x18" drop footing
03300-G
6" min comp sand fill
03300-H
#5x18" rebar (4 required)
(Typ.)
05500-A
3
8"
galv. steel plate
05500-B
1
2"
galv. steel plate
05500-C
post base.
05500-D
1
2"
bolt, washer & nut (typ.)
05500-E
3
4"
eyebolt, washer & nut
06130-B
Shape C
2
Shape A
05500-E
05500-D
Shape B
06130-C
1
12
06130-C
2
3
Shape C
Work Point EL
6
12
Work Point
SECTION
SECTION
2
Work Point
1
4"
2'-4"
06130-C
"
2
"
1'-0"
1 2"
"
-8
1'
"
2
03300-A
"
3 16
9'
-0"
05500-C
Chamfer
3 16
Shape A
p.
Ty
4"
0.02
0.02
05500-E
2"
03300-E
05500-A
Finish Floor
126.86
5
8"
Hole
4"
2"
41
03300-F
2
"
03300-G
06130-B
2
"
03300-C
for cross brace bars
05500-D
05500-F
1
2"
06130-C
06130-A
3"x6" T&G wood decking
06130-B
4"x6" PT wood frame
06130-C
8"x8" PT wood post
06130-D
2"x6" PT wood sub fascia
06130-E
1"x10" PT wood fascia
06130-F
3
4"
07411-A
Standing seam metal roof
07411-B
Felt underlayment
steel rod w/turnbuckle
(Typ.)
10
"
2"
LARGE PAVILION SECTION
2
4
SHAPE B DETAIL
SECTION
2
Shape D
12
1 16
"
2
1
4"
7
8"
05500-A
5
8"
Hole
2"
3"
2"
7"
OF LARGE PICNIC PAVILION
shown with timber frames and decking.

Alternate materials (i.e., aluminum, steel, etc.)
41
sealed by a specialty engineer as per Section 5

of the Standard Specifications and when
2"
1
4"
Alternate Material Note: These structures are
may be used when submittals are signed and
Hole
3"
05500-A
NOTE: DETAILS TO MATCH THOSE
10"
6"
1
2"
(Typ.)
Chamfer (Typ.)
(Typ.)
11:
36:
58 AM
" Hole
2"
Hole
16
"
63
.
43
2"
5
8"
5"
63
.
43
05500-A
0.02
wood shim
513
2"
n.
Mi
2"
)
p.
Ty
(
1'
-012"
"
2
41
126.86
k
or
W
2"
)
p.
Ty
(
nt
i
Po
"
2
"
2
)
p.
Ty
(
"
5
4"
)
p.
Ty
(
"
2
"
1 16
12
"
Work Point
"
2
12
"
4"
)
p.
Ty
(
2"
p.
Ty
"
12
"
-8
1'
1 2"
"
12
2"
"
Shape C
2"
1
4"
Chamfer
(Typ.)
7"
Chamfer
(Typ.)
SMALL PAVILION SECTION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
SHAPE D DETAIL
6
2
SHAPE C DETAIL
SHAPE A DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
REST AREA PAVILION
NO.
530
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
SPECIFICATIONS
1
3
05500-F
Keynotes On Sheet 2.
CONCRETE
Concrete: FDOT Class II.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60.
2
Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A-185.
Vapor Barrier: Black 6-Mil Polyethylene.
STEEL
Galvanized Steel Plate: Steel Plate ASTM A36 or
END ELEVATION
SIDE ELEVATION
SECTION
A709.
3
Provide galvanizing in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM A123.
Galvanized Fasteners: High-Strength bolts and

nuts, ASTM A325 in accordance with Specification
Section 962.
Galvanize shapes after fabrication, make field

repairs to galvanizing in accordance with
WOOD
Comply with American Institute For Timber
Construction AITC 108, "Standard For Heavy
Timber Construction."
For solid wood decking, comply with AITC 112,
SIDE ELEVATION
END ELEVATION
"Standard For Tongue And Groove Heavy Timber

Standard."
Species: Douglas Fir, Hem-fir, or Southern Pine,

at fabricator's option.
Preservative Treatment: Pressure treat fabricated

members with waterborne solution for above
06130-C
ground use, complying with AWPA U1, category
06130-A
06130-F
UC3B above ground exposed.

06130-C
06130-B
DRIP EDGE
05500-E
05500-E
05500-A
lateral spiking to adjacent units. Spikes to be 8"

(
M in.
)
05500-A
05500-C
1
ear
4" Cl
Wood Decking: Predrill decking at 30" centers for

05500-F
spikes galvanized common.
05500-F
03300-A
06130-E
06130-F
11:
36:
59 AM
06130-C
06130-D
06130-B
Notch 06130-C To
Notch 06130-C To
Accommodate Steel Plates
Accommodate Steel Plates
DETAIL
DETAIL
DETAIL
3
3
Similar At Roof Rake
DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
REST AREA PAVILION
NO.
530
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
GENERAL NOTES
1. The location and construction of mailboxes shall conform to the rules and
5. Mailboxes shall be located on the right-hand side of the roadway in the
9. Wood and steel support posts for both single and double mailbox mountings
regulations of the United States Postal Service as modified by this design
direction of the delivery route, except on one-way roads and streets where they
standard.
may be placed on the left-hand side.
shall be embedded no more than 24" into the ground.
Concrete, block, brick, stone or other rigid foundation structure or encasement,

2. Mailboxes will not be permitted on Interstate highways, freeways, or other
highways where prohibited by law or regulation.
Mailboxes on rural highways shall be set with the roadside face of the box
either above or below the shoulder groundline, will not be permitted for
offset from the edge of the traveled way a minimum distance of the greater of
mailboxes on rural highways. On urban roads and streets where mailbox
the following:
support posts are set within rigid pavement back of curb, the support posts
3. The contractor shall give the Postmaster of the delivery route(s) written notice
of project construction 7 days prior to the beginning of work, with Saturdays,
shall be separated from the pavement by a minimum of 1" of expansion

a. Shoulder width plus 8" to 12".
material.
b. 10' for ADT over 10,000 vpd.
Support posts shall not be fitted nor installed with surface mount base plates.
Sundays and Holidays excluded.
The Contractor shall furnish and install one mailbox in accordance with this
8' for ADT 100 to 10,000 vpd.
design standard at each mail patron delivery location and maintain the box
6' for ADT under 100 vpd
throughout the contract period. The Contractor shall apply box numbers to
2'-6" for low speed and ADT under 100 vpd.
10. At driveway entrances mailboxes shall be placed on the far side of the
driveway in the direction of the delivery route.
each patron box in accordance with identification specifications of the

Domestics Mail Manual of the U. S. Postal Service; where local street names
When a mailbox is installed within the limits of guardrail it should be placed
At intersecting roads mailboxes shall be located 100' or more from the
and house numbers are authorized by the Postmaster as a postal address, the
behind the guardrail whenever practical.
centerline of the intersecting road on the far side in the direction of the
Contractor shall inscribe the house number on the box; if the box is located
delivery route, with the distance increased to 200' when the route volume
on a different street from the patrons residence, the Contractor shall inscribe
Mailboxes on curbed highways, roads and streets shall be set with the face of
the street name and house number on the box.
the box between 6" and 12" back of the face of curb. If the sidewalk abuts the
curb or if an unusual condition exists which makes it difficult or impractical to
exceeds 400 vehicles per day.
11. Wood support posts shall be in conformance with the material and dimensional
The Contractor shall coordinate removal of the patrons existing mailboxes.
install or serve boxes at the curb, the Contractor with concurrence of the local
requirements of Section 952 and the treatment requirements of Section 955 of
Immediately after installing the new mailboxes the Contractor must notify each
postal authority may be permitted to install all mailboxes at the back edge of
the Standard Specifications.
"Mail Delivery Patron" by Certified Mail that removal of the existing mailboxes
the sidewalk, where they can be served by the carrier from the sidewalk.
must be accomplished in 21 days after receipt of notices. Patrons shall have

the option of removing their existing mailboxes or leaving the mailboxes in
Steel support posts shall have an external finish equal to or better than two
6. Mailboxes shall be set with the bottom of the box between 42" and 48" above the
coats of weather resistant, air dried or baked, paint or enamel. Surface(s)
place for removal by the Contractor; removal by the Contractor shall be
mail stop surface, unless the U.S. Postal Service establishes other height
shall be cleaned of all loose scale prior to finishing. The Postal Service
included in the contract unit price for Mailbox, Each. The Contractor shall
restrictions.
prefers that posts be painted white, but other colors may be used when
dispose of mailboxes and supports in areas provided by him.
approved by the Engineer. When galvanized posts are used painting is not
7. No more than two mailboxes may be mounted on a support structure unless the
Reuse of existing mailboxes by the Contractor will not be a requirement under
support structure and mailbox arrangements have been shown to be safe by
any construction project; however where an existing mailbox meets the design
crash testing in accordance with NCHRP Report 350.
required.
Mounting brackets, plates, platforms, shelfs and accessory hardware surface
requirements of this standard and is structurally and functionally sound, the
finishes are to be suited to support post finish.
Contractor at his option may elect to reuse the existing mailbox in lieu of
Neighborhood Delivery and Collection Box Units (NDCBU) are a specialized
constructing a new mailbox. Any use of existing mailboxes must be approved by
multiple mailbox installation that must be located outside the highway and street
the Engineer.
clear zones. The location of NDCBUs is the sole responsibility of the
Payment shall be full compensation for boxes, posts and accessory items
Postmaster for the delivery route under consideration.
essential for installation in accordance with this standard; erection;
4. Mailboxes shall be light sheet metal or plastic construction, in traditional style

only, and only in Size 1 as prescribed by the Domestic Mail Manual of the U. S.
Postal Service (DMM).
Mailbox production standards, lists of approved manufacturers and suppliers
12. Mailboxes shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Mailboxes, Each.
adjustments to suit construction needs; and, for identification letters and

8. Lightweight newspaper receptacles may be mounted below the mailbox on the
numbers.
side of the support post in conformance with the USPS Domestic Mail Manual.
The mail patron shall be responsible for newspaper receptacle installation and
Payment shall be limited to one mailbox per patron address whether the
maintenance.
mailbox is new, reused, salvaged, reset or relocated. Payment shall be per
of mailboxes, design approval and guidance may be obtained by writing to the
mailbox regardless of the number of mailboxes per support or grouping
Rural Delivery Division, Delivery Service Department, Operations Group, USPS
arrangement.
Headquarters, Washington, DC 20260.

The above compensation shall include any work and cost incurred by the
11:
37:
00 AM
contractor for removal and disposal of existing mailboxes.
There shall be no payment participation for NDCBU furnishing, assembly,
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
installation, resetting or relocation.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAILBOXES
NO.
532
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
#8-32 x
Slotted Rd. Hd. Bolt
3
4"
(Stove Bolt) 2 Washers,
(Stove Bolt) 2 Washers,
Adapter Plate
Platform
Platform
5
16"-16
3
4"
x 1
Hex Bolt
2 Washers, 1 Lockwasher,
1 Nut, 1 Spacer (12 Reqd.)
3
4"
Platform
Hex Bolt,
Bracket
Bracket
2 Lb. Per Foot

5
16"-18
See General Notes
For Finish Requirements
1 Nut (3 Reqd.)
1
2 4"
5
16"-18
1 Nut (4 Reqd.)
Bracket
Flanged Channel
5
16"-18
Hex Bolt,
1
4"
x 2
Hex Bolt,
Ground
Line
Depth
h= 42" to 48"
Platform
Notes
1 Lockwasher, 1 Nut (10 Reqd.)
See General
3
4"
24" M ax.
#8-32 x
2 Lb. Per Foot
1 Nut (3 Reqd.)
Flanged Channel
3
4h
See General Notes
(Min.)
3
4h
(Min.)
For Finish Requirements
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
ELEVATION
SINGLE OR COMBINED WOOD, FLANGED CHANNEL
OR PIPE POST TYPES SHOWN ON THIS INDEX
FLANGED CHANNEL
FLANGED CHANNEL
POST SPACING
9"
15"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
7
1
4"
2"
1
16"
3
32"
1
4"
4"
7
8"
1
2"
Dia.
3
1
8"x1 4"
1
2"
Slots (4 Reqd.)
4"
1
16"
3"
13
16"
6"
3
3
8"x1 8"
1
16"
13
16"
3"
1"x3" Slots (4 Reqd.)
1
4"
1
4"
4"
TOP VIEW
END VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
END VIEW
Note: See General Notes for finish requirements.
STEEL ADAPTER PLATE
3"
1
2"
3
4"
3
4"
(10 Reqd.)
SIDE VIEW
3
8"
Diameter
3
4"
For Platforms
5
16"
(3 Holes)
FRONT VIEW
For Brackets
END VIEW
Nominal
1
2"
Std. Wt. Pipe
1"
STEEL PLATFORM
3
32"
1
2"
3
4"
3"
3
4"
13
16"
Slots
3
8"
1
16"
x 1
1"
2"
3
16"
11:
37:
01 AM
STEEL SPACER
TOP VIEW
12/3/2015
STEEL BRACKET
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
STEEL FLANGED CHANNEL SUPPORT POSTS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAILBOXES
NO.
532
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
#8-32 x
3
4"

3
4"
(Stove Bolt), 2 Washers,
#8-32 x
(Stove Bolt), 2 Washers,
Shelf
3
8"-16
3
4"
Hex Bolt,
Bracket
(Flange To Inside)
3
8"-16
Platform
x 3" Hex Bolt,
Bracket
1 Nut (2 Reqd.)
1 Nut (12 Reqd.)
Notes
Depth
h= 42" to 48"
Platform
24" M ax. See General
(Flange To Inside)
Muffler Clamp (2 Reqd.)
3
8"-16
Anti-Twist Plate
Nominal 2" (2.375 o.d.) Steel Pipe
1
2"
x 4
3
8"-16
Hex Bolt,
1
2"
x 4
3
4h
(Min.)
3
4h
(Min.)
Hex Bolt,
1 Nut (2 Reqd.)
1 Nut (2 Reqd.)
SINGLE OR COMBINED WOOD, FLANGED CHANNEL

OR PIPE POST TYPES SHOWN ON THIS INDEX
Schedule 40 Or Resistance Welded,

ASTM A569 & A669, Min. 50,000 psi
FRONT VIEW
ELEVATION
SIDE VIEW
POST SPACING
4" X 4" WOOD POST
Yield Strength. See General Notes

For Finish Requirements.
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
2" PIPE POST
15"
3
16"
9"
1
7 2"
3
16"
7
16"x
1
2"
Slots (4 Reqd.)
5
8"
7
1
2"
7
16"x
1
4"
1
2"
1"
Slots (4 Reqd.)
3
4"
3
4"
7
1
16"x1 2"
Slots
1
2"
1
2"
3
1 16"
(4 Reqd.)
1
2"
334"
1
2"
3
16"
3"
1
16"
3
16"
6"
234"
1
2"
3"
214"
234"
1316"
1316"
4"
8"
3
4"
3
16"
1
16"
1
2"R
Dia. (8 Reqd.)
1
2 4"
3"
1
1 2"
1
1 2"
1
2 4"
3
4"
TOP VIEW
END VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
END VIEW
1
1
4"x 2"
1
2"
4"
Slots
END VIEW
1
2"
Dia. (4 Reqd.)
1
2"
1
4"
SIDE VIEW
1
2"
SIDE VIEW
STEEL BRACKET
4"
7
16"
2"
3
2 4"
STEEL SHELF
7"
Dia.
(4 Reqd.)
Slots (4 Reqd.)
3"
1
2"
7
16"
7
1
16"x1 4"
7
8"
7
16"
1
16"
1
8"
3
8"
STEEL PLATFORM
11:
37:
02 AM
Nominal 2
5
16"
Muffler Clamp
5
16"
12/3/2015
FRONT VIEW
END VIEW
STEEL ANTI-TWIST PLATE
TOP VIEW
STEEL CLAMP
Note: See General Notes for finish requirements
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
STEEL PIPE AND WOOD SUPPORT POSTS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAILBOXES
NO.
532
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
1 Mat (6"x6" Treated Timbers, 5 Required)

Bolts With
1'
-3"
1
2"
Heads, Washers and

Nuts Countersunk
4'
-6"
Symmetrical About
1
2"
Roadway Traffic
6"
4'
-6"
16'
-0"
18" Ctrs.
(In Center Of Slab)
Top And Bottom
1
2"
1
2"
m
o
t
t
d Bo
p An
o
.T
s
r
"Ct
8
s@ 1
r
#4 Ba
1'
-3"
6"
4'
-6"
# 4 Bars @
16'
-0"
One Row Of 1" x 18"

Long Dwls. @ 12" Centers
w
o
l
n Be
o
i
t
c
e Se
s -Se
e
i
r
h Va
t
d
Wi
Width Varies-See Note Below
PLAN
PLAN
Const. Joint
Traveled Way Width
Slope To
Shoulder Width
4' Std.
Slope To
1
2"
1
Match Pavt.
To Be Chamfered
1
2"
Tractor Passage
Cl.
6' Std.
6"
1
2"
Match Shldr.
9"
9"
Dowels
Corners Exposed To Traffic

Cl.
1'
-3"
1
2
SECTION BB
Note: Tractor crossing to be constructed to match pavement cross slope.
SECTION AA
The number of mats required will vary with the pavement width. A
Note: Class I concrete is to be used unless otherwise
sufficient number of mats will be used so that the tractor crossing
noted in plans or special provisions.
will extend a minimum of four feet (4') beyond roadway shoulders.
REINFORCED CONCRETE
TREATED TIMBER
TYPE A
11:
37:
03 AM
TYPE B
GENERAL NOTES
1. Tractor crossing shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Tractor Crossing, EA.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TRACTOR CROSSINGS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRACTOR CROSSINGS
NO.
535
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Threaded or Socket Type Cap.

Stamp or label with Installation Date, Location and Identification Number
(when Socket Type Cap is used drill 14" diameter holes and secure with wire.
Threaded Type Caps to be hand tightened.)
Stem To Be Plumb
1
2 2"
2' Min.
Steel or PVC Schedule 40 Pipe (Casing).
Top Of Lift Or
Top Of Full Surcharge
Casing to be installed in 5' sections, as required.

Threaded or Socket Type Fittings (PVC Socket Type shown)
PVC casing sections not permitted below steel sections
6-2"x8" Treated Timbers

Fill Within 3' Of Stem
Surcharge
Coupling (As Required)
Shall Be Compacted By
(Compacted Fill )
Hand To Required Density
Cement when Socket Type Coupling used
2"x6" Treated Timber
Top Of Strata To Be Surcharged

Plate To Be Seated (Level) After Clearing
And Grubbing & Demucking Operations And
1
2"
Prior To Placing First Fill Lift
Dia. Bolt, Nut & Washer
(Bolt thread end up)
Iron Coupling (As Required)
INSTALLATION
4'
1" Iron Pipe (Marker)
PLAN
Lower pipe section to be 4'-6" in length
TIMBER PLATE
NOTES:
Added pipe sections to be 5'-0" in length
1. Elevation of the top of each length of marker

pipe shall be determined as soon as it is installed
and also immediately before the next length of
marker pipe is added.
2. Settlement plate locations shall be flagged and

protected from construction vehicles and equipment.
If settlement plates are disturbed, they shall be
replaced in kind.
3. Oakum used to construct seal should not have a
mesh covering (plastic or other synthetic material).

Oakum Seal
4. The settlement plates shall be paid for under
the contract unit price for Settlement Plate
6"
Assembly, AS.
Oakum Seal
Oakum Seal
Oakum Seal
Iron Pipe Cap
Iron Pipe unthreaded this end
6"
(See Detail Above)
6"
2"x6" Treated Timber
6"
Iron Pipe Cap
Iron Pipe Cap
Timber Plate
3
16
5
8"
5
8"
Dia. Hole
11:
34:
48 AM
1
2"
Dia. Hex Head Bolt,
1
2
x 24
1
2
x 24
1
2
x 24
Dia. Hole
1
2"
1
2"
Dia. x 1
Hex Head
Nut & Washer. Deform
Bolt, Nut & Washer. Deform
thread or use Jam Nut
thread or use Jam Nut
TIMBER PLATE
3
16
STEEL PLATE
STEEL PLATE
STEEL PLATE
LAST
REVISION
01/01/00
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
STEM AND PLATE OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SETTLEMENT PLATE
NO.
540
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Tree Canopy
Tree Canopy
Tree Canopy
Cross-Braces
1"-3" From Trunk

Straps
Straps
Anchors
Anchors
Wood Stakes
Flexible Guying Material

Rootball
Rootball
Rootball
Tree Trunk
Tree Trunk
Tree Trunk
Top Of Wood
Stakes And
Straps Positioned
Straps Positioned
Between
1
2
To
Between
2
3
Straps Securely
1
2
To
2
3
Of Tree Height
Fastened To Wood Stakes
Of Tree Height
Safety Flags
Straps Securely
Two 2x4 Wood Cross-Braces
Fastened To Tree
(Length Not To Exceed

Rootball Diameter) Placed
Safety Flags
Wood Stakes
Strapping
Spaced At 180 Apart
3
4"
Over Rootball On Each Side
Wire Cinch Buckle Tensioned
of Trunk, 1"-3" From Trunk
With Mechanical Tensioner)
Straps Securely
Fastened To Anchors
Anchors
Soil Ring For Water Collection

High Tenacity 2,400 lb
3
Woven 4"
Mulch
Polyester Straps
Spaced At 120Apart
Existing Soil
2' Minimum
Depth
Anchors (4 - Min. 500 lb Rated
Mulch
Anchors) Anchors Installed At

1
2x
1x
3' - 5' Depth Into Undisturbed
Existing Soil
Mulch
Existing Soil Backfill

1
2x
2x
1x
Soil With Strap At 45 Angle

1
2x
Existing Soil
Planting Pit 2 Times
1x

2x
2x
Width Of Rootball
Width Of Rootball
Width Of Rootball
1" - 3 1/2 " CALIPER TREE PLANTING

4" AND LARGER CALIPER TREE PLANTING
1" - 312" CALIPER TREE PLANTING

WITH UNDERGROUND BRACING
GENERAL NOTES:
1. All dimensions 6" and less are exaggerated for illustrative purposes only.
7. Straps shall be minimum 1" wide nylon or polypropylene. All wood stakes or anchors shall be located beyond the edge of soil ring
and located below finished grade, unless otherwise specified.
2. Plant containers shall be removed prior to planting. If plants are not container grown, remove a minimum of the top
1
3
of burlap,
8. Sabal Palms may be hurricane cut. All other palms must have fronds tied with biodegradable twine. Palm trunks shall have no burn
fabric, or wire mesh. Never lift or handle the tree by the trunk.
marks, scars, or sanding.

3. The uppermost root on all trees shall be covered by less than 1" of soil. Use hand tools to carefully remove all excess soil. The
top of root ball shall be set 1"-2" above finish grade and set plumb to the horizon. If planting pit is too deep, remove the tree
9. All dimensions provided for wood materials are nominal.
and firmly pack additional soil in the bottom of the planting pit to raise the rootball. After positioning the tree in the planting pit,
10. When a permanent, subsurface, or drip irrigation system is provided, a soil ring is not required. Mulch to edge of planting pit.
slice through rootballs with 3 or 4 vertical slices (top to bottom) equally distributed around the tree.
11:
48:
53 AM
4. Backfill shall be loosened existing soil. Remove rocks, sticks, or other deleterious material greater than 1" in any direction prior
11. Alternate tree bracing and guying systems approved by the Engineer may be used in lieu of the tree bracing and guying methods
to backfilling. Water and tamp to remove air pockets. If existing soils contain excessive sand, clay, or other material not conducive
detailed on the Index. Alternate tree protection systems approved by the Engineer may be used in lieu of the tree protection
to proper plant growth, contact Engineer prior to planting.
barricade detailed on the index.
5. Soil rings shall be constructed of existing soil at the outer edge of the planting pit, with a height of 3" and gently sloping sides.
12. Remove aboveground guying systems at the end of the establishment period.
6. Mulch shall be a 3" deep layer placed to the edge of the trunk flare, around the base of shrub, or solidly around groundcover.
Never pile mulch against the tree trunk.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
Do not pile soil on top of rootball.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
LANDSCAPE INSTALLATION
NO.
544
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
Tree Canopy
Rootball
See Wood
See Wood Batten Detail
Minimum Of Three Wood Braces
Strap
Spaced at 120 Apart with
Batten Detail
2 x 4 Wood Braces (Minimum
Optional Fourth Wood Brace.

Safety Flags
Spaced At 120 Apart. Saw
to Allow for Flush Connection
See Wood
Cut Ends At Proper Angle
Staking Detail
To Allow For Flush
to Wood Batten. Nail Braces
Optional Fourth Wood Brace.
Securely to Wood Batten.
Of Trunk
1
3
To Wood Batten
Is Used, Spaced At 90 Apart.

1
:2
1:
3
1:
4
1 :6
1
3
Of Trunk
Nail Wood Braces Securely
H eight M inim um
If Optional Fourth Wood Brace
Connection To Wood Batten.
Wood Stakes
Saw Cut Ends at Proper Angle
Safety Flags
H eight M inim um
Of Three Wood Braces)
Tree Trunk
Top Of Wood
Straps Securely
Stakes And
Fastened To Tree
Straps Positioned
Horizon Line
See Wood
Between
1
2
To
Straps Securely
1
3
Of Tree Height
Safety Flags
Staking Detail
30" Minimum
Mulch
Depth Of
Three Wood Stakes

Wood Stake
Soil Ring For
Spaced At 120 Apart
Water Collection
Soil Ring For
Mulch
Water Collection
1
2x
Soil Ring For
1x
Mulch
Existing Soil
Water Collection
6"
2x
1x
6"
Planting Pit 1 Times Width
Existing Soil
Of Rootball Plus 6" On Both Sides
Width Of Rootball
2' Minimum Depth

Of Wood Stake
NOTES: Slope Provided As Rise:Run. For All Other Palms, Use
NOTE: For All Other Palms, Use Detail Provided
Detail Provided By Landscape Architect In Contract Plans.
By Landscape Architect In Contract Plans.
CABBAGE PALM PLANTING
CABBAGE PALM PLANTING ON SLOPE
FOR UP TO 24' CLEAR TRUNK
FOR UP TO 24' CLEAR TRUNK
1
2x
1x
Existing Soil
2x
Width Of Rootball
MULTI-TRUNK TREE PLANTING

Burlap Layers (Five)
Trunk
Straps Securely
Fastened To Tree
Bands Or Straps
Straps Securely
2 x 4 x 12
Nails
Wood Batten
Straps Positioned
Between
"
4
2 x 4 Wood Brace
1
3
1
2
Fastened To Tree
To
Top Of Wood
Of Tree Height
Stakes And
Straps Positioned
Between
Safety Flags
Soil Ring For
1
3
1
2
Strapping Securely
To

Of Tree Height
Safety Flags
Water Collection
Strap
Two Wood Stakes

Mulch
WOOD BATTEN DETAIL

1
:2
1:
3
1:
4
1 :6
2 x 4 Wood Brace
Spaced At 180 Apart
Strap Securely Fastened

To Earth Anchor
Anchors Spaced At
Horizon Line
1
:2
1:
3
1:
4
1 :6
Soil Ring For

Water Collection
Mulch
Horizon Line
120 Apart
2' Minimum Depth
Of Wood Stake
With Boards Positioned
2 x 4 Wood Stake
Face To Face, Nail Brace

6"
Securely To Wood Stake
Below Finished Grade
11/30/2015
11:
48:
54 AM
Existing Soil
NOTE: Stake Into Firm, Existing Soil.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
WOOD STAKING DETAIL
1x
6"
Existing Soil
6"
1x
6"
Existing Soil
NOTE: Slope Provided As Rise:Run.
4" AND LARGER CALIPER TREE PLANTING ON SLOPE
1" - 3 1/2 " CALIPER TREE PLANTING ON SLOPE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
544
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Wood 2 x 4 Posts
Wood 1 x 4 Stringers. Nail Wood

Stringers Securely To Wood Posts.
Tree Trunk
1
:2
1:
3
1 :4
1 :6
Mulch
Mulch
Soil Ring For

Water Collection
e
n
i
nL
zo
i
r
Ho
Existing Soil
* Dimension Varies

1
2x
1x
1
2x
Per Critical
Protection Zone
1x
2x
2x
Width Of Rootball
Width Of Rootball
NOTE:
Existing Soil
For Groups Of Trees, Place Barricades
GROUND COVER/SHRUB PLANTING
Between Trees And Construction Activity.
GROUND COVER/SHRUB PLANTING ON SLOPE
* Dimension Varies
Per Critical
Protection Zone
Shrub Or Ground Cover Planting
Bedline Or Edge Of Sidewalk
Maximum Mature Maintained

Safety - Orange Nylon Or
Polypropylene Type Fence
Spread Of Plants
Spacing Per Plans
Securely Affix Fence To

Stringer With Staples Or Nails
1 x 4 Minimum Stringer
Spacing Per Plans
2 x 4 Minimum Posts
4' Minimum Height
12' Maximum Spacing
GROUND COVER/SHRUB LAYOUT DETAIL
2' Minimum Depth
Existing Undisturbed Soil
NOTES: Critical Protection Zone: The Area Surrounding A Tree Within A
11:
48:
55 AM
Circle Described By A Radius Of One Foot For Each Inch Of The

Tree Trunk Diameter At 54" Above Finished Grade. For Groups Of
Trees, Place Barricades Between Trees And Construction Activity.
Tree Protection Barricades Shall Be Located To Protect A
11/30/2015
Minimum Of 75% Of The Critical Protection Zone.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
TREE PROTECTION BARRICADE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
544
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
DESIGN NOTES
GENERAL NOTES
1. Details apply to both rural and urban intersections under stop sign control or
flashing beacon control. For full signal controlled intersections see Design
1. The information shown on this index is intended solely for the purpose of clear sight
5. (Cont.)
Ground Cover & Trunked Plants (Separate or Combined):
development and maintenance at intersecting highways, roads, streets and driveways, and
Note No 4. At intersections listed in the Department's High Crash Intersection
is not intended to be used to establish roadway and roadside safety except as related to
Report, designers shall give attention to keeping to a minimum, objects that
Ground Covers - Plant selection of low growing vegetation which at maturity does not
clear sight corridors. An analysis of sight distance shall be documented for all
distract or affect sight distance.
attain a height greater than 18" below the sight line datum. For ground cover in
combination with trees and palms; the following heights below the sight line datum will
intersections.
2. Sight distance 'd' applies to normal and skewed intersections (intersecting
apply:
angles between 60 and 120), and where vertical and/or horizontal curves are
2. For the purpose of this Index, Minor Road is defined as all intersecting highways, roads,
streets and driveways.
not present. Sight distance 'd' is measured along the major road from the
24" for trees and palms 11" dia.; and, 18" for sabal palms >11" but 18" dia.
center of the entrance lane of the minor road to the center of the near
(dia.-within Sight Window).
approach lane (right or left) of the major road.
3. Details are based on the AASHTO 'A Policy On Geometric Design Of Highways And Streets,
Distances 'd
L
' and 'd

r
' are
2001', CHAPTER 9, INTERSECTION SIGHT DISTANCE, CASES B and F, and Department
measured from the centerline of the entrance lane of the minor road to a
Trunked Plants - Plant selection of a mature trunk diameter 4" or less measured at 6"
practices for channelized median openings (left turns from major road).
point on the edge of the near side outer traffic lane on the major road.
above the ground. Canopy or high borne foliage shall never be lower than 5' above the
Distance 'd
m ' is measured from the centerline of the entrance lane of the
sight line datum. These selections shall be spaced no closer than 20'.
minor road to a point on the median clear zone limit or horizontal clearance
4. The minimum driver eye setback of 14.5' from the edge of the traveled way may be
limit for the far side road of the major road.
adjusted on any intersection leg only when justified by a documented, site specific field
Trees - Trees can be installed with sod; pavers; gravel, mulch; ground covers or other
Department-approved material. The clear sight window must be in conformance with
study of vehicle stopping position and driver eye position.

3. A. The limits of clear sight define a corridor throughout which a clear sight
the 'WINDOW DETAIL' modified to attain the height requirements listed in 'Ground
window must be preserved. See WINDOW DETAIL, Sheet 2.
5. For SIGNALIZED INTERSECTIONS sight distances should be developed based on AASHTO
Covers' above.
'Case D-Intersections With Traffic Signal Control'. 'At signalized intersections, the first
B.Clear sight must be provided between vehicles at intersection stop
vehicle stopped on one approach should be visible to the driver of the first vehicle
A. Size and spacing shall conform to the Tree Spacing Table.
locations, and vehicles on the major road within dimension 'd'.
stopped on each of the other approaches. Left turning vehicles should have sufficient
B. Requirements for placement within medians at median openings and at unsignalized
sight distance to select gaps in oncoming traffic and complete left turns. Apart from
C. Since observations are made in both directions along the line of sight, the
these sight conditions, there are generally no other approach or departure sight triangles
and signalized intersections:
reference datum between roadways is 3'-6" above respective pavements.
needed for signalized intersections. However, if the traffic signal is to be placed on
a. Horizontal clearance for the mature specimen shall be maintained as specified in
two-way flashing operation (i.e. flashing yellow on the major road approaches and
4. Barrier systems within intersection sight corridors, where penetration into the
flashing red on the minor road approaches) under off peak or nighttime conditions, then
the appropriate departure sight triangles for Case B, both to the left and to the right,
sight window might occur, shall be located to provide the least adverse affect
should be provided for the minor road approaches. In addition, if right turns on a red
practical.
Index 700. Specimens whose mature trunk diameter is greater than 18" shall not
be permitted,
b. Where left turns from the major road are permitted, no trees shall be located
signal are to be permitted from any approach, then the appropriate departure sight
5. The corridor defined by the limits of clear sight is a restricted planting area.
triangle to the left for Case B2 should be provided to accommodate right turns from that
within the distance 'd

b ', Sheet 2 of 6; and not less than the distances called for
Drivers of vehicles on the intersecting road and vehicles on the major road
approach.'
in (c) or (d), as applicable,
must be able to see each other clearly throughout the limits of 'd' and 'd
a '.
If in the Engineers judgement, landscaping interferes with the line of sight
6. Where curvature, superelevation, adverse split profiles or other conditions preclude the
c. For safety, these additional setbacks are required:
use of standard tree sizes and spacing, proof of view and shadowing restraints must be
corridor prescribed by these standards the Engineer may rearrange, relocate
documented and the size and location of trees in medians detailed in the plans.
or eliminate plantings. Plants within the restricted areas are limited to
1. Where no left turn lane is present, size and spacing shall conform to the
selections as follows:
Tree Spacing Table. No trees shall be permitted within 100' of the

restricted median nose (measured from the edge of pavement),
7. Intersection sight distance values are provided for Passenger Vehicles, SU Vehicles and
Combination Vehicles. Intersection sight distance based on the Passenger Vehicle is
2. Where left turn lane(s) are present, the following requirements apply:
suitable for most intersections. Where substantial volumes of heavy vehicles enter the
major road, such as from ramp terminals with stop control or roadways serving truck
terminals, the use of tabulated values for SU Vehicles or Combination Vehicles should be
considered.
spacing shall conform to the Tree Spacing Table. No trees shall be
TREE SPACING TABLE **
Description
permitted within 100' of the restricted median nose (measured from the
Design Speed (mph)

30
35
40
edge of pavement).
45
Diameter
For low speed facilities (design speed less than 50 mph), size and
50
55
60
(Inches)
(Within Limits Of SightWindow)
>411
>1118
>411
>1118
>411
>1118
>411
Minimum Spacing (c.to c.Of Trunk)
25
90
30
105
35
120
40
>1118
>411
>1118
>411
>1118
>411
>1118
50
150
55
165
60
180
shall be permitted within 200' of the restricted median nose. Beyond this
limit, size and spacing shall conform to the Tree Spacing Table.
(Feet)
135
For high speed facilities (design speed 50 mph or greater), no trees
100'*
** Sizes and spacings are based on the following conditions:
100' for <50 mph*

200' for 50 mph*
a.A single line of trees in the median parallelto but notnecessarily colinear with the centerline.
b.A straightapproaching mainline,within skew limits as described in No.2 above.

c.1.Trees and palms 11" in diameter casting a vertical 6' wide shadow band on a vehicle entering at stop bar location when viewed by mainline
driver beginning atdistance 'd';see SHADOW DIAGRAM,Sheet 2.
11:
37:
03 AM
2.Sabalpalms with diameters > 11" 18" spaced at intervals providing a 2 second full view of entering vehicle at stop bar location when
viewed by the mainline driver beginning atdistance 'd';see PERCEPTION DIAGRAM,Sheet 2.
d.Trees with diameters 11" intermixed with trees with diameters > 11" 18" are to be spaced based on trees with
* See GENERAL NOTE 5.B
Lane Identification and

diameters > 11" 18".
12/3/2015
For any other conditions the tree sizes,spacings and locations shallbe detailed in the plans;see Design Note 5.
Pavement Markings
PLAN
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
Special Areas Limited to Ground Cover

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SIGHT DISTANCE AT INTERSECTIONS
NO.
546
SHEET
NO.
1of 6
dL
dr
Restricted
(
M in.
)
14'
-6"
*
Unrestricted
(2 Sec. Min.)
R/W Line
R/W Line
Corner Clip For Development And
Corner Clip For Maintenance

Maintenance Of Clear Sight Window
Traveled Way Is The Portion Of The Roadway
Minor Road Under Stop Control
Min. Spacing When

Caliper > 11" 18"
For The Movement Of Vehicles, Exclusive Of

Shoulders And Marked Bicycle Lanes.
Note:
d
5'
-0"
Edge Of Major Road Traveled Way. The
R/W Line
R/W Line
Of Clear Sight Window
Bottom Of Canopy
PERCEPTION DIAGRAM
Sight Line Datum
PICTORIAL
Lines For 'Limit Of Clear Sight' Are Opposite
SETTING SABAL PALM (STATE TREE) SPACING
3'-6" (See
Hand When Major Road Near Lane Traffic
ORIGIN OF CLEAR SIGHT LINE
Moving Left (e.g., One-Way Left).
1'-6"
General
Note 3c)
ON MINOR ROAD
Top Of Ground Cover
Pavement
The Intent Of This Standard Is To Provide A Window With Vertical

Min. Spacing
Limits Of Not Less Than 5' Above And 1'-6" Below The Sight Line
Datum, And Horizontal Limits Defined By The Limits Of Clear Sight.
Max. Trunk Dia.
PICTORIAL
14'
WINDOW DETAIL
6' Shadow
d
w+12
6' HC
HC
SHADOW DIAGRAM
w
d
b
6' HC
Limit Of Median
Sight Obstruction
d
a
LEGEND
PICTORIAL
Areas Free Of Sight Obstructions
(Feet)
The da values in this table were established by the method referenced in

Design Note 2, and are applicable to urban, predominantly curbed roadways
with design speeds of 45 mph or less and meeting the restricted conditions
Design
1 Lane Crossed
11:
37:
04 AM
Speed
MPH
2 Lanes Crossed
3 Lanes Crossed
defined in Index No. 700. For horizontal clearance (HC) of 6', the values for
db may be determined by the equation db = d a(w/(w+12)). For roadways with
SU
Comb.
SU
Comb.
SU
Comb.
30
245
290
330
265
320
365
290
350
395
35
285
335
385
310
370
425
335
410
460
40
325
385
440
355
425
485
385
465
525
45
365
430
495
400
475
545
430
525
590
nonrestricted conditions, a
d and d
b should be based on the geometry for the
left turn storage and on clear zone widths (See Index No. 700).
For wide medians where the turning vehicle can approach the through lanes
at or near 90, use dvvalues from tables on sheets 5 or 6. (The clear sight
12/3/2015
See Note
line origin is assumed to be 14'-6" from the edge of the near lane.)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
CHANNELIZED DIRECTIONAL MEDIAN OPENINGS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
546
SHEET
NO.
2 of 6
d
r
d
L
d
r
Desi
gn
Speed
d
L
Speed
Desi
gn
Speed
Desi
gn
Crossroad
d
L
d
r
30
335
240
155
30
420
300
190
30
510
365
230
35
390
275
175
35
490
350
220
35
595
420
265
40
445
315
200
40
560
400
250
40
680
480
305
45
500
355
225
45
630
450
285
45
765
545
345
50
555
395
250
50
700
495
315
50
845
600
380
55
610
435
275
55
770
545
345
55
930
660
415
60
665
470
300
60
840
595
375
60
1015 720
455
65
720
510
325
65
910
645
410
65
1100 780
495
dL
dr
d
Passenger Vehicle
SU Vehicle
Combination Vehicle
SIGHT DISTANCE (d) AND RELATED DISTANCES L

(d , r
d ) (FEET)
2 LANE UNDIVIDED
PICTORIAL
Crossroad
2 LANE UNDIVIDED
dL
dr
Desi
gn
Speed
Crossroad
30
355
195
135
30
450
250
170
30
540
295
35
415
230
160
35
525
290
200
35
630
345
240
40
475
260
180
40
600
330
230
40
720
395
275
45
530
290
200
45
675
370
255
45
810
445
305
50
590
325
225
50
750
410
285
50
900
495
340
55
650
355
245
55
825
455
315
55
990
545
375
60
710
390
270
60
900
495
340
60
1080 590
410
65
765
420
290
65
975
535
370
65
1170 640
440
d
L
d
r
Speed
2 LANE 2 WAY FLARED FOR OPPOSING LEFT TURN CENTERED ON ALIGNMENT
Desi
gn
PICTORIAL
Desi
gn
Speed
Passenger Vehicle
dL
d
L
d
r
SU Vehicle
d
L
d
r
205
Combination Vehicle

(d , d
r ) (FEET)
2 LANE 2 WAY FLARED FOR LEFT TURNS
dr
d
11:
37:
05 AM
LEGEND
PICTORIAL
12/3/2015
2 LANE 2 WAY FLARED FOR SINGLE SIDE LEFT TURN CENTERED ON ALIGNMENT
NOTE:
See Sheet 2 for intersecting roadway origin
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
of clear sight and quadrant corner clips.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
546
SHEET
NO.
3 of 6
dL
dr
Desi
gn
Speed
30
355
255
120
30
450
320
150
30
540
385
180
35
415
295
135
35
525
375
175
35
630
450
205
d
L
Desi
gn
Speed
Desi
gn
Speed
Crossroad
d
r
d
L
d
r
d
L
d
r
40
475
335
155
40
600
425
200
40
720
510
235
45
530
375
175
45
675
480
220
45
810
575
265
50
590
420
195
50
750
530
245
50
900
640
295
55
650
460
215
55
825
585
270
55
990
700
325
60
705
500
230
60
900
640
295
60
1080 765
355
65
765
545
250
65
975
690
320
65
1170 830
385
Passenger Vehicle
SU Vehicle
Combination Vehicle

(d , r
d ) (FEET)
4 LANE UNDIVIDED
PICTORIAL
dL
d
r
d
L
Desi
gn
Speed
d
L
Speed
Desi
gn
Speed
Desi
gn
4 LANE UNDIVIDED
d
r
d
L
d
r
30
375
205
110
30
480
265
140
30
570
315
165
35
440
245
130
35
560
310
165
35
665
365
195
40
500
275
145
40
640
350
185
40
760
420
220
45
565
310
165
45
720
395
210
45
855
470
245
950
50
625
345
180
50
800
440
230
50
520
275
55
690
380
200
55
880
485
255
55
1045 575
300
60
750
410
215
60
960
525
280
60
1140 625
330
65
815
450
235
65
1040 570
300
65
1235 675
355
dr
Passenger Vehicle
d
SU Vehicle
Combination Vehicle

(d , r
d ) (FEET)
4 LANE UNDIVIDED FLARED - SYMMETRICAL
PICTORIAL
dL
dr
Desi
gn
Speed
30
375
265
80
30
480
340
105
30
570
405
125
35
440
315
95
35
560
400
120
35
665
470
145
40
500
355
110
40
640
455
135
40
760
540
165
45
565
400
120
45
720
510
155
45
855
605
185
50
625
445
135
50
800
570
170
50
950
675
205
55
690
490
150
55
880
625
190
55
1045 740
225
60
750
530
160
60
960
680
205
60
1140 810
245
65
815
580
175
65
1040 740
220
65
1235 875
265
d
L
d
r
d
L
d
r
SU Vehicle
Desi
gn
Speed
Passenger Vehicle
d
Desi
gn
Speed
4 LANE UNDIVIDED FLARED - SYMMETRICAL
d
L
d
r
Combination Vehicle

(d , r
d ) (FEET)
4 LANE UNDIVIDED WITH OPTIONAL LANE
11:
37:
06 AM
PICTORIAL
4 LANE UNDIVIDED WITH OPTIONAL LANE
LEGEND
12/3/2015
NOTE:
See Sheet 2 for intersecting roadway origin
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
of clear sight and quadrant corner clips.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
546
SHEET
NO.
4 of 6
Crossroad
See INSET A
See INSET B
MEDIAN 22'OR LESS
25'-64'MEDIAN
d
L
d
r
d
m
Desi
gn
Speed
Speed
Desi
gn
d
L
d
v
d
vL
30
395
280
90
325
30
355
255
330
240
35
460
325
100
380
35
415
295
390
280
40
525
375
115
430
40
470
335
445
320
45
590
420
130
485
45
530
375
500
360
50
655
465
145
540
50
590
420
550
400
55
720
510
160
590
55
650
460
610
440
60
785
555
175
645
60
705
500
665
480
65
850
605
185
700
65
765
545
720
520
Limit Of Median
dr
Sight Obstruction
dm
dL
LEGEND
* 6' For Restricted Conditions

CZ For Nonrestricted Conditions
PLAN
See Index No. 700
PICTORIAL
PASSENGER VEHICLE (P)
dv
d
L
d
v
d
vL
30
450
320
420
330
535
35
525
375
490
385
615
40
600
425
560
440
160
685
45
675
480
630
490
640
180
760
50
750
530
700
545
d
L
d
r
d
m
30
540
385
110
460
35
630
450
125
40
720
510
145
45
810
575
50
900
990
55
40'-64'MEDIAN
Desi
gn
Speed
Speed
Desi
gn
MEDIAN 35'OR LESS
700
195
840
55
825
585
770
600
60
1080 765
215
915
60
900
640
840
655
65
1170 830
230
990
65
975
690
910
710
dvL
INSET B
Where The Median Is Sufficiently Wide For The Design Vehicle To Pause In The Median Vehicle
SINGLE-UNIT TRUCK (SU)
Length Plus 6' Min.) The Clear Line Of Sight To The Right (d
V ) Is Measured From The Vehicle
Pause Location, i.e., Not From The Cross Road Stop Position; Distances dr & dm Do Not Apply.
d
r
d
m
30
615
435
120
520
35
720
510
140
605
d
L
d
r
d
m
30
670
475
105
585
35
780
555
120
680
890
Speed
d
L
64'MEDIAN
Desi
gn
35'-50'MEDIAN
Desi
gn
Speed
Speed
Desi
gn
MEDIAN 30'OR LESS
d
L
30
540
35
630
INSET A
d
v
d
vL
385
510
435
NOTES FOR 4-LANE DIVIDED ROADWAY
450
595
500
1. See Sheet 2 for origin of clear sight line on the minor road.
40
820
580
160
690
40
630
140
780
40
720
510
680
575
45
925
655
180
780
45
1000 710
155
875
45
810
575
760
645
50
1025 725
200
860
50
1110 790
170
970
50
900
640
845
720
55
1130 800
220
950
55
1225 870
190 1070
55
990
700
930
790
60
1230 870
240 1035
60
1335 945
205 1165
60
1080 765 1015 865
65
1335 945
260 1120
65
1445 1025 225 1265
65
1165 825 1100 935
Vehicle Type
Vehicle Length (Ft.)
Passenger (P)
19
Single Unit(SU)
30
Large SchoolBus
40
WB-40
45.5
WB-50
55
11:
37:
07 AM
INTERMEDIATE SEMI-TRAILERS (WB-40 & WB-50)
2. Values shown in the tables are the governing (controlling) sight

distances calculated based on 'AASHTO Case B - Intersection
with Stop Control on the Minor Road.'
SIGHT DISTANCES (d) & (d

(dr, d ,m d & d
) (FEET)
v ) AND RELATED DISTANCES
L
VL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
4 LANE DIVIDED ROADWAY
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
546
SHEET
NO.
5 of 6
Crossroad
See INSET A
See INSET B
25'-64'MEDIAN
LEGEND
Desi
gn
Speed
Desi
gn
Speed
MEDIAN 22'OR LESS
d
L
d
v
d
vL
30
375
265
330
240
35
440
315
385
280
40
500
355
445
320
530
45
565
400
500
360
130
585
50
625
445
555
400
540
140
645
55
690
490
610
440
830
590
155
705
60
750
530
665
480
900
640
170
765
65
815
580
720
520
d
x
d
L
d
r
d
m
30
415
295
80
355
35
485
345
90
415
40
555
395
105
470
45
625
445
115
50
690
490
55
760
60
65

Limit Of Median
dr
Sight Obstruction
dm
dL
d (dx For One-Step Crossing)
d (dx For One-Step Crossing)
* 6' For Restricted Conditions

CZ For Nonrestricted Conditions
PLAN
See Index No. 700
PICTORIAL
PASSENGER VEHICLE (P)
dv
d
x
d
L
d
r
d
m
30
570
35
665
405
90
495
470
105
580
40'-64'MEDIAN
*
Desi
gn
Speed
Desi
gn
Speed
MEDIAN 35'OR LESS
d
L
d
v
30
480
340
420
330
35
560
400
490
385
dvL
d
vL
40
760
540
120
660
40
640
455
560
440
45
855
605
135
745
45
720
510
630
490
955
545
675
155
830
50
805
570
700
55
50
1050 745
170
915
55
885
625
770
600
60
1145 810
185
995
60
965
685
840
665
65
1240 880
200 1080
1045 740
910
710
65
Where The Median Is Sufficiently Wide For The Design Vehicle To Pause In The Median (Vehicle
SINGLE-UNIT TRUCK (SU)
INSET B
Length Plus 6' Min.) The Clear Line Of Sight To The Right (d
v ) Is Measured From The Vehicle
Pause Location, i.e., Not From The Cross Road Stop Position; Distances dr & dm Do Not Apply.
d
L
d
r
d
m
d
x
d
L
INSET A
64'MEDIAN
d
r
d
m
Desi
gn
Speed
d
x
35'-50'MEDIAN
Desi
gn
Speed
Desi
gn
Speed
MEDIAN 30'OR LESS
NOTES FOR 6-LANE DIVIDED ROADWAY

d
d
L
d
v
d
vL
435
30
650
460
110
560
30
700
495
95
625
30
570
405
510
35
755
535
130
655
35
815
580
115
725
35
665
470
590
500
40
865
615
145
745
40
930
660
130
825
40
760
540
680
575
45
970
690
165
835
45
1045 740
145
930
45
855
605
760
645
930
950
1. See Sheet 2 for origin of clear sight line on the minor road.
50
1080 765
185
50
1165 825
160 1035
50
675
845
720
55
1185 840
200 1025
55
1280 905
175 1140
55
1045 740
930
790
60
1290 915
220 1115
60
1395 990
190 1240
60
1140 805 1015 865
65
1400 990
235 1210
65
1510 1070 210 1340
65
1235 875 1100 935
2. Values shown in the tables are the governing (controlling) sight

distances calculated based on 'AASHTO Case B - Intersection
with Stop Control on the Minor Road.'
11:
37:
07 AM
INTERMEDIATE SEMI-TRAILERS (WB-40 & WB-50)
SIGHT DISTANCES (d), (d

V ) & (d
X ) AND RELATED DISTANCES
L (d r, d ,md & d
vL ) (FEET)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
6 LANE DIVIDED
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
546
SHEET
NO.
6 of 6
CROSSING SURFACES
Type
Definition
Concrete
Rubber
RA
Rubber/Asphalt
TA
Timber/Asphalt
GENERAL NOTES
1. The Railroad Company will furnish and install all track bed (ballast), crossties, rails, crossing surface panels and accessory components.
All pavement material, including that through the crossing, will be furnished and installed by the Department or its Contractor, unless
negotiated otherwise.
2. When a railroad grade crossing is located within the limits of a highway construction project, a transition pavement will be maintained at
the approaches of the crossing to reduce vehicular impacts to the crossing. The transition pavement will be maintained as appropriate to
protect the crossing from low clearance vehicles and vehicular impacts until the construction project is completed and the final highway
surface is constructed.
3. The Central Rail Office will maintain a list of currently used Railroad Crossing Products and will periodically distribute the current list to
the District Offices as the list is updated.
STOP ZONE FOR RUBBER CROSSING

4. The Railroad Company shall submit engineering drawings for the proposed crossing surface type to the Construction Project Engineer
Design Speed
Zone Length
(mph)
(Distance From Stop)
45 Or Less
250'
50 - 55
350'
60 - 65
500'
70
600'
and/or the District Rail Office for concurrence along with the List of Railroad Crossing Products. The approved engineering drawings of
the crossing surface type shall be made a part of the installation agreement.
5. Sidewalks shall be constructed through the crossing between approach sidewalks of the crossing. Sidewalks shall be constructed with
appropriate material to allow unobstructed travel through the crossing in accordance with ADA requirements.
6. All asphalt shall be installed in accordance with Index No. 514 and Section 300 of the Standard Specifications.
7. The Department will participate in crossing work, that requires adjustments to rail outside of the crossing, no more than 50 feet from
Notes:
the edge of the travel way.
1. Type R Crossings are NOT to be used for multiple track

crossings within zones for an existing or scheduled
future vehicular stop. Zone lengths are charted above.
2. Single track Type R Crossings within the zones on the

chart may be used unless engineering or safety
LAST
REVISION
01/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
37:
08 AM
considerations dictate otherwise.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
RAILROAD CROSSING
NO.
560
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Railroad
Crossing Shoulder Pavement
Pavement
(Except Area Occupied By Crossing Surfacing Material):

V
a
r
ie
s
a. To Shoulder Line For Outside Shoulders Less Than 8' Wide.

b. To 8' Maximum Width For Outside Shoulders 8' Or Wider
(Regardless Of Approach Shoulder Pavement Width).
RA
IL
RO
AD
c. 4' For Median Shoulders.
Shoulder Pavement In Lieu
Crossing Materials
Shoulder Pavement In Lieu Of Curb
Of Curb And Sidewalk
(Width Varies)
(Continuous Over Utility Strip)
(Continuous Over Utility Strip)

* Where the existing shoulder
3' Curb Transition
3' Curb Transition

Varies (8' Min.)
is substandard for the facility

type, the shoulder width is to
Varies (8' Min.)
Concrete Curb And Gutter
Concrete Curb And Gutter
be widened to accommodate
Cr
os
si
ng
(
W
i
dt
M
a
h
er
Va t
i
al
ri
es
s
)
Shoulder Pavement When
gates or signals and gates see

See 'Crossing Shoulder
50'M ax
Shoulder Pavement
Crossing Materials Do Not
Index No. 17882
Extend Beyond Lip Of Gutter
Pavement' Above
Beveled Edge (1:4 Slope)
(
See General Note 7)
Edge Of Travel Way
2' Setback
Departm ent Participation
50' Min.
Sidewalk
Note: For location of railroad signals,
No. 17882
Shoulder Pavement
Utility Strip
Shoulder Pavement
Varies (2' Min.)
Varies,
Shoulder Line*
Utility Strip
Or Signal And Gate
See Index
Beveled Edge (1:4 Slope)
Railroad Signal, Gate
12
'
M
i
n.
(S
ep
ar
50
tm
'M
en
ee
ax
t
Ge
Pa
ne
rt
ra
ic
ip
l
at
No
io
te
n
7)
crossing shoulder pavement.
50' Min.
With Or Without Signal,
Gate Or Signal And Gate
HALF PLAN
es
ri
a
V
Pavement
CURBED ROADWAYS
Flexible Pavement
HALF PLAN
DERS
USH SHOUL
TH FL
ROADWAYS WI
Track
Rail
Rail
30'
30'
(Full Depth Asphalt/Rubber Shown)
(1' To 4.5')
Cap Or Expansion
3"
Varies
Varies
Grade
Level
(1' To 4.5')
Level
Grade
Material (When Required

By Crossing Type)
Friction Course
3"
2'
2'
RR Crossing Varies
Crosstie
Friction Course
To prevent low-clearance vehicles from becoming caught on the tracks, the crossing surface should be at the same
Overbuild
Overbuild
Crosstie
Exist. Rdwy. Pavt.
Exist. Rdwy. Pavt.

Ballast
Ballast
Type SP Asphalt (500 Lb/SY)
Type SP Asphalt (500 Lb/SY)
plane as the top of the rails for a distance of 2 feet outside the rails.
The surface of the highway should also not
be more than 3 inches higher or lower than the top of the nearest rail at a point 30 feet from the rail unless track
superelevation makes a different level appropriate. Vertical curves should be used to traverse from the highway
11:
37:
09 AM
grade to a level plane at the elevation of the rails. Rails that are superelevated, or a roadway approach section that
Filter Fabric (Optional

With RR Company)
SECTION VIEW
is not level, will necessitate a site specific analysis for rail clearances.
Filter Fabric (Optional
With RR Company)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TYPICAL CROSSING MATERIAL REPLACEMENT AT RR CROSSINGS
VERTICAL ROADWAY ALIGNMENT THROUGH A RAILROAD CROSSING
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
RAILROAD CROSSING
NO.
560
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
SHEET NO. CONTENTS

Preface
ManualOn Uniform Traffic ControlDevices
1
Abbreviations
Symbols
PREFACE
SYMBOLS
All projects and works on highways, roads and streets shall have a
The symbols shown are found in the FDOT site menu under
traffic control plan. All work shall be executed under the established
Traffic Control cell library on the CADD system.
plan and Department-approved procedures. This index contains information
Symbols assigned to the 600 series Design Standards and
specific to the Federal and State guidelines and standards for the
applicable to traffic control plans, unless otherwise identified
preparation of traffic control plans and for the execution of traffic
in the plans, are as follows:
control in work zones, for construction and maintenance operations
Definitions
Temporary Traffic ControlDevices
Pedestrian and Bicyclist
and utility work on highways, roads and streets on the State Highway
Work Area, Hazard Or Work Phase (Any pattern within a boundary)
System. Certain requirements in this Index are based on the high

volume nature of State Highways. For highways, roads and streets
Channelizing Device
off the State Highway System, the local agency (City/County) having
Overhead Work
Railroads
jurisdiction may adopt requirements based on the minimum requirements

Pedestrian Longitudinal Channelizing Device (LCD)
provided in the MUTCD.
Type III Barricade
SightDistance
Index No. 600 provides Department policy and standards. Changes are
Above Ground Hazard

Clear Zone Widths For Work Zones
only to be made thru Department-approved procedures. Index Nos. 601
Work Zone Sign
thru 670 provide typical applications for various situations. Modification

Flagger
Superelevation
can be made to these Indexes as long as the changes comply with the
MUTCD and Department Design Standards.
Automated Flagger Assistance Device (AFAD)
Length Of Lane Closures

3
Overweight/Oversize Vehicles
Lane Widths
Traffic Signal
The sign spacing shown on the Indexes are typical (recommended) distances.
These distances may be increased or decreased based on field conditions,
Advance Warning Arrow Board
in order to avoid conflicts or to improve site specific traffic controls.
High-Visibility Safety Apparel

Regulatory Speeds In Work Zones
Flagger Control
Portable Signal
Except for emergencies, any road closure on State Highway System shall
c. c.
comply with Section 335.15, F.S.
Crash Cushion
Stop Bar
Survey Work Zones

Signs
Work Zone Sign Supports
MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
ProjectInformation Sign
The Florida Department of Transportation has adopted the "Manual On
Commonly Used Warning and Regulatory Signs In Work Zones
Work Vehicle With Flashing Beacon
Shadow (S) Or Advance Warning (AW) Vehicle

With Advance Warning Arrow Board And Warning Sign
Uniform Traffic Control Devices For Streets And Highways" (MUTCD)

A
Manholes/Crosswalks/Joints
Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration, for
Truck Mounted Attenuators
mandatory use on the State Maintained Highway System whenever

there exists the need for construction, maintenance operations or
Removing PavementMarkings
Truck/Trailer Mounted Attenuator (TMA)
and subsequent revisions and addendums, as published by the U.S.

Law Enforcement Officer
Portable Regulatory Sign
utility work.
Radar Speed Display Unit
Signals
8
Channelizing Devices
Portable Changeable (Variable) Message Sign
Channelizing Devices Consistency

Lane Identification + Direction Of Traffic
Portable Changeable (Variable)Message Signs (PCMS)

Advanced Warning Arrow Boards
9
Traffic Control Officer
Drop-Offs In Work Zones

Business Entrance
10
Temporary Asphalt Separator
Identifications-Channelizing Devices
12
PavementMarkings
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
38:
12 AM
11
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
GENERAL INFORMATION FOR TRAFFIC
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONTROL THROUGH WORK ZONES
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
1of 12
DEFINITIONS
OVERHEAD WORK
Regulatory Speed (In Work Zones)
Work is only allowed over a traffic lane when one of the following
The maximum permitted travel speed posted for the work zone is indicated by the
regulatory speed limit signs. The work zone speed must be shown or noted in the
plans. This speed should be used as the minimum design speed to determine runout
lengths, departure rates, flare rates, lengths of need, clear zone widths, taper
NO ENCROACHMENT BELOW THE OVERHEAD WORK AREA)
OPTION 1 (OVERHEAD WORK USING A MODIFIED
Traffic shall be detoured, shifted, diverted or paced as to not encroach in the

area directly below the overhead work operations in accordance with the
LANE CLOSURE)
appropriate standard index drawing or detailed in the plans. This option applies
lengths, crash cushion requirements, marker spacings, superelevation and other
Overhead work using a modified lane closure is allowed if all of the following
similar features.
conditions are met:
limited to signals, signs, lighting and utilities.
The maximum recommended travel speed through a curve or a hazardous area.
Travel Way
to, but not limited to, the following construction activities:

a. Beam, girder, segment, and bent/pier cap placement.
a. Work operation is located in a signalized intersection and
Advisory Speed
OPTION 4 (OVERHEAD WORK MAINTAINING TRAFFIC WITH
options is used:
b. Form and falsework placement and removal.

c. Concrete placement.
b. Work operations are 60 minutes or less.
d. Railing construction located at edge of deck.
c. Speed limit is 45 mph or less.
e.
Structure demolition.
d. Aerial lift equipment in the work area has high-intensity, rotating, flashing,
The portion of the roadway for the movement of vehicles. For traffic control
through work zones, travel way may include the temporary use of shoulders and
any other permanent or temporary surface intended for use as a lane for the
OPTION 5 (CONDUCTOR/CABLE PULLING ABOVE AN OPEN
oscillating, or strobe lights operating.

e. Aerial lift equipment is placed directly below the work area to close the
TRAFFIC LANE)
lane.
Overhead cable and/or de-energized conductor installations initial pull to proper
movement of vehicular traffic.
f. Traffic control devices are placed in advance of the vehicle/equipment

tension shall be done in accordance with the appropriate Standard Index or
closing the lane using a minimum 100 foot taper.
a. Travel Lane: The designated widths of roadway pavement marked to carry

through traffic and to separate it from opposing traffic or traffic occupying
temporary traffic control plan.

g. Volume or complexity of the roadway may dictate additional devices, signs,
flagmen and/or a traffic control officer.
Continuous pulling operations of secured cable and/or conductors are allowed
other traffic lanes.
OPTION 2 (OVERHEAD WORK ABOVE AN OPEN

b. Auxiliary Lane: The designated widths of roadway pavement marked to
separate speed change, turning, passing and climbing maneuvers from
through traffic.
activities, materials or equipment within the minimal vertical clearance above
TRAFFIC LANE)
the travel way. The utility shall take precautions to ensure that pull ropes and
Overhead work above a open traffic lane is allowed if all of the following
conductors/cables at no time fall below the minimum vertical clearance.
conditions are met:
Detour, Lane Shift, and Diversion

A detour is the redirection of traffic onto another roadway to bypass the
temporary traffic control zone.
over open lane(s) of traffic with no encroachment by any part of the work
A lane shift is the redirection of traffic onto a
different section of the permanent pavement. A diversion is the redirection of

traffic onto a temporary roadway, usually adjacent to the permanent roadway and
within the limits of the right of way.
Aboveground Hazard
An aboveground hazard is any object, material or equipment other than traffic
control devices that encroaches upon the travel way or that is located within
the clear zone which does not meet the Department's safety criteria, i.e.,
anything that is greater than 4" in height and is firm and unyielding or doesn't
meet breakaway requirements.
a. Work operation is located on a utility pole, light pole, signal pole, or

their appurtenances.
required. The temporary traffic control plan shall include:
b. Work operations are 60 minutes or less.
a. The temporary traffic control set up for the initial pulling of the pull rope
across the roadway.
d. No encroachment by any part of the work activities and equipment
b. During pulling operations, advance warning consisting of no less than a
within an area bounded by 2 feet outside the edge of travel way and
Changeable Message Sign upstream of the work area with alternating messages,
18 feet high.
"Overhead Work Ahead" and "Be Prepared to Stop" followed by a traffic control
e. Aerial lift equipment in the work area has high-intensity, rotating,
officer and police vehicle with blue lights flashing during the pulling operation.
flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights operating.

f. Volume or complexity of the roadway may dictate additional devices,
RAILROADS
signs, flagmen and/or a traffic control officer.

g. Adequate precautions are taken to prevent parts, tools, equipment and
other objects from falling into open lanes of traffic.
h. Other Governmental Agencies, Rail facilities, or Codes may require a
greater clearance. The greater clearance required prevails as the rule.
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
On Limited Access facilities, a site specific temporary traffic control plan is
Railroad crossings affected by a construction project should be evaluated for traffic

controls to reduce queuing on the tracks. The evaluation should include as a minimum:
traffic volumes, distance from the tracks to the intersections, lane closure or taper
locations, signal timing, etc.
OPTION 3 (OVERHEAD WORK ADJACENT TO AN OPEN
All temporary traffic control devices shall be ON the Department's Approved

Products List (APL). Ensure the appropriate APL number is permanently marked on
TRAFFIC LANE)
SIGHT DISTANCE
the device in a readily visible location.
Overhead work adjacent to an open traffic lane is allowed if all of the
Tapers: Transition tapers should be obvious to drivers. If restricted sight distance is a
following conditions are met:
problem (e.g., a sharp vertical or horizontal curve), the taper should begin well in
All temporary traffic control devices shall be removed as soon as practical when
they are no longer needed. When work is suspended for short periods of time,
a. Work operation is located on a utility pole, light pole, signal pole, or their
temporary traffic control devices that are no longer appropriate shall be removed
b. Work operations are 1 day or less.
or covered.
Intersections: Traffic control devices at intersections must provide sight distances for
d. No encroachment by any part of the work activities and equipment within
the road user to perceive potential conflicts and to traverse
Arrow Boards, Portable Changeable Message Signs, Radar Speed Display Trailer,
Above 18' in height, no encroachment by any part of the work activities
with a temporary traffic control device placed at each corner when in use and shall
and equipment over the open traffic lane (except as allowed in Option 2
crash cushion when not in use.
ABOVEGROUND HAZARD
for work operations of 60 minutes or less).

e. Aerial lift equipment in the work area has high-intensity, rotating,
signs, flagmen and/or a traffic control officer.
When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work
zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided.
Aboveground hazards (see definitions) are to be considered work areas during working
hours and treated with appropriate work zone traffic control procedures. During
f. Volume or complexity of the roadway may dictate additional devices,
PEDESTRIAN AND BICYCLIST
the intersection safely.
Construction equipment and materials shall not restrict intersection sight distance.
2 foot from the edge of travel way up to 18' height.
Portable Regulatory Signs, and any other trailer mounted device shall be delineated
be moved outside the travel way and clear zone or be shielded by a barrier or
11:
38:
13 AM
advance of the view obstruction. The beginning of tapers should not be hidden behind
curves.
appurtenances.
nonworking hours, all objects, materials and equipment that constitute an aboveground
hazard must be stored/placed outside the travel way and clear zone or be shielded by
g. Adequate precautions are taken to prevent parts, tools, equipment and
a barrier or crash cushion.
other objects from falling into open lanes of traffic.

h. Other Governmental Agencies, Rail facilities, or Codes may require a
greater clearance. The greater clearance required prevails as the rule.
For aboveground hazards within a work zone the clear zone required should be based
on the regulatory speed posted during construction.
Only approved pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to delineate a
Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and marked detours shall be provided by

appropriate signs.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
2 of 12
REGULATORY SPEEDS IN WORK ZONES
OVERWEIGHT/OVERSIZE VEHICLES
The term 'clear zone' describes the unobstructed relatively flat area, impacted by
Restrictions to Lane Widths, Heights or Load Capacity can greatly
construction, extending outward from the edge of the traffic lane. The table
impact the movement of over dimensioned loads. The Contractor
below gives clear zone widths in work zones for medians and roadside conditions
shall notify the Engineer who in turn shall notify the State Permits
other than for roadside canals; where roadside canals are present, clear zone
Office, phone no. (850) 410-5777, at least seven calendar days in
widths are to conform with the distances to canals as described in the PPM,
advance of implementing a maintenance of traffic plan which will
Volume I, Chapter 4.
Traffic Control Plans (TCP's) for all projects must include specific regulatory
speeds for each phase of work. This can either be the posted speed or a reduced
speed. The speed shall be noted in the TCPs; this includes indicating the existing
speed if no reduction is to be made. Regulatory speeds are to be uniformly
established through each phase.
impact the flow of overweight/oversized vehicles. Information
In general, the regulatory speed should be established to route vehicles safely
provided shall include location, type of restriction (height, width or

weight) and restriction time frames. When the roadway is restored
to normal service the State Permits Office shall be notified
through the work zone as close as to normal highway speed as possible. The
regulatory speed should not be reduced more than 10 mph below the posted speed
and never below the minimum statutory speed for the class of facility. When a
immediately.
speed reduction greater than 10 mph is imposed, the reduction is to be done in 10

mph per 500' increments.

TRAVEL LANES &
AUXILIARY LANES &
MULTILANE RAMPS
SINGLE LANE RAMPS
(feet)
(feet)
60-70
30
18
55
24
14
WORK ZONE SPEED

(MPH)
45-50
18
10
Temporary regulatory speed signs shall be removed as soon as the conditions
LANE WIDTHS
requiring the reduced speed no longer exist. Once the work zone regulatory speeds
Lane widths of through roadways should be maintained through work

zone travel ways wherever practical. The minimum widths for work zone
14
10
4' BEHIND FACE
4' BEHIND FACE
OF CURB
OF CURB
go back into effect unless new speed limit signing is provided for in the plans.
travel lanes shall be as follows: 11' for Interstate with at least one 12'
lane provided in each direction, unless formally excepted by the Federal
Highway Administration; 11' for freeways; and 10' for all other
On projects with interspaced work activities, speed reductions should be located in

proximity to those activities which merit a reduced speed, and not "blanketed" for
facilities.
30-40
are removed, the regulatory speed existing prior to construction will automatically
the entire project. At the departure of such activities, the normal highway speed
should be posted to give the motorist notice that normal speed can be resumed.
ALL SPEEDS
CURB & GUTTER
HIGH-VISIBILITY SAFETY APPAREL
If the existing regulatory speed is to be used, consideration should be given to
All high-visibility safety apparel shall meet the requirements of the International
Safety Equipment Association (ISEA) and the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) for "High-Visibility Safety Apparel", and labeled as ANSI/ISEA 107-2004 or
107-2010. The apparel background (outer) material color shall be either
SUPERELEVATION
fluorescent orange-red or fluorescent yellow-green as defined by the standard.
Horizontal curves constructed in conjunction with work zone traffic
The retroreflective material shall be orange, yellow, white, silver, yellow-green, or
control should have the required superelevation applied to the design
a fluorescent version of these colors, and shall be visible at a minimum distance of
radii. Under conditions where normal crown controls curvature,
1,000 feet. Class 3 apparel may be substituted for Class 2 apparel. Replace
the minimum radii that can be applied are listed in the table below.
apparel that is not visible at 1,000 feet.
supplementing the existing signs when the construction work zone is between
existing regulatory speed signs. For projects where the reduced speed conditions
exist for greater than 1 mile in rural areas (non-interstate) and on rural or urban
interstate, additional regulatory speed signs are to be placed at no more than 1
mile intervals. Engineering judgement should be used in placement of the additional
signs. Locating these signs beyond ramp entrances and beyond major intersections
are examples of proper placement. For urban situations (non-interstate), additional
speed signs are to be placed at a maximum of 1000' apart.
When field conditions warrant speed reductions different from those shown in the
WORKERS: All workers within the right-of-way shall wear ANSI/ISEA Class 2
MINIMUM RADII FOR
apparel. Workers operating machinery or equipment in which loose clothing could

become entangled during operation shall wear fitted high-visibility safety apparel.
NORMAL CROWN
WORK ZONE
MINIMUM RADIUS
Workers inside the bucket of a bucket truck are not required to wear high-visibility
TCP the contractor may submit to the project engineer for approval by the
Department, a signed and sealed study to justify the need for further reducing the
posted speed, or, the engineer may request the District Traffic Operations
Engineer (DTOE) to investigate the need. It will not be necessary for the DTOE to
issue regulations for regulatory speeds in work zones due to the revised
safety apparel.
provisions of F.S. 316.07451(2) (b). Advisory Speed plates will be used at the option
POSTED SPEED
MPH
feet
UTILITIES: When other industry apparel safety standards require utility workers to
65
3130
wear apparel that is inconsistent with FDOT requirements such as NFPA, OSHA,
60
2400
ANSI, etc., the other standards for apparel may prevail.
55
1840
50
1390
FLAGGERS: For daytime activities, Flaggers shall wear ANSI/ISEA Class 2 apparel.
45
1080
For nighttime activities, Flaggers shall wear ANSI/ISEA Class 3 apparel.
40
820
35
610
30
430
of the field engineer for temporary use while processing a request to change the
regulatory speed specified in the plans when deemed necessary. Advisory speed
plates cannot be used alone but must be placed below the construction warning sign
for which the advisory speed is required.
For additional information, refer to the Plans Preparation Manual, Volume I,

Chapter 10.
Superelevate When Smaller
LENGTH OF LANE CLOSURES

Lane closures shall not exceed 2 miles in total length (taper, buffer
space and work space) in any given direction on the Interstate or
on state highways with a posted speed of 55 MPH or greater.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
38:
14 AM
Radii is Used
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
3 of 12
FLAGGER CONTROL
Survey Between Active Traffic Lanes
SIGN COVERING AND INTERMITTENT WORK STOPPAGE SIGNING
Where flaggers are used, a FLAGGER symbol or legend sign must replace the
or Shared Left Turn Lanes
Existing or temporary traffic control signs that are no longer applicable or are inconsistent
WORKERS symbol or legend sign.
The following provisions apply to Main Roadway Traffic Control Work Zones. These
with intended travel paths shall be removed or fully covered.
provisions must be adjusted by the Party Chief to fit roadway and traffic
The flagger must be clearly visible to approaching traffic for a distance sufficient
Sign blanks or other available coverings must completely cover the existing sign. Rigid sign
conditions when the Survey Work Zone includes intersections.
to permit proper response by the motorist to the flagging instructions, and to

permit traffic to reduce speed or to stop as required before entering the work
site. Flaggers shall be positioned to maintain maximum color contrast between the
coverings shall be the same size as the sign it is covering, and bolted in a manner to prevent
(A) A STAY IN YOUR LANE (MOT-1-06) sign shall be added to the Advance Warning
Flagger's high-visibility safety apparel and equipment and the work area
background.
movement.
Sign sequence as the second most immediate sign from the work area.
Sign covers are incidental to work operations and are not paid for separately.
(B) Elevation Surveys-Cones may be used at the discretion of the Party Chief to
Hand-Signaling Devices
protect prism holder and flagger(s). Cones, if used, may be placed at up to 50'
SIGNING FOR DETOURS, LANE SHIFTS AND DIVERSIONS
intervals along the break line throughout the work zone.
Detours should be signed clearly over their entire length so that motorists can easily
STOP/SLOW paddles are the primary hand-signaling device. The STOP/SLOW paddle
shall have an octagonal shape on a rigid handle. If the STOP/SLOW paddle is
determine how to return to the original roadway. The reverse curve (W1-4) warning sign
(C) Horizontal Control-With traffic flow in the same direction, cones shall be used
placed on a rigid staff, the minimum length of the staff, measured from the bottom
to protect the backsight tripod and/or instrument. Cones shall be placed at the
of the paddle to the end of the staff that rests on the ground, must not be less
equipment, and up to 50' intervals for at least 200' towards the flow of traffic.
than 6 ft. STOP/SLOW paddles shall be at least 24 inches wide with letters at least
6 inches high and should be fabricated from light semirigid material. The
(D) Horizontal Control-With traffic flow in opposite directions, cones shall be used
should be used for the advanced warning for a lane shift. A diversion should be
signed as a lane shift.
EXTENDED DISTANCE ADVANCE WARNING SIGN
background of the STOP face shall be red with white letters and border. The
to protect the backsight tripod and/or instrument. Cones shall be placed at the
Advance Warning Signs shall be used at extended distance of one-half mile or more when
background of the SLOW face shall be orange with black letters and border. When
equipment, and up to 50' intervals for at least 200' in both directions towards
limited sight distance or the nature of the obstruction may require a motorist to bring
used at night-time, the STOP/SLOW paddle shall be retroreflectorized.
the flow of traffic.
their vehicle to a stop. Extended distance Advanced Warning Signs may be required on
any type roadway, but particularly be considered on multilane divided highways where
Flag use is limited to immediate emergencies, intersections, and when working on
vehicle speed is generally in the higher range (45 MPH or more).
SIGNS
the centerline or shared left turn lanes where two (2) flaggers are required and
there is opposing traffic in the adjacent lanes. Flags, when used, shall be a
minimum of 24 inches square, made of a good grade of red material, and securely
SIGN MATERIALS
UTILITY WORK AHEAD SIGN
Mesh signs may be used only for Daylight Operations.
The UTILITY WORK AHEAD (W21-7) sign may be used as an alternate to the ROAD WORK
fastened to a staff that is approximately 36 inches in length. When used at

nighttime, flags shall be retroreflectorized red.
AHEAD or the ROAD WORK XX FT (W20-1) sign for utility operations on or adjacent to a
Vinyl signs may be used for Day or Night Operations not to exceed 1 day except
highway.
as noted in the standards.

Flashlight, lantern or other lighted signal that will display a red warning light shall
be used at night.
LENGTH OF ROAD WORK SIGN

Rigid or Lightweight sign panels may be used in accordance with the vendor APL
The length of road work sign (G20-1) bearing the legend ROAD WORK NEXT_____ MILES is
drawing for the sign stand to which they are attached.
required for all projects of more than 2 miles in length. The number of miles entered
Flagger Stations
should be rounded up to the nearest mile. The sign shall be located at begin construction
Flagger stations shall be located far enough in advance of the work space so that
approaching road users will have sufficient distance to stop before entering the
work space. When used at nighttime, the flagger station shall be illuminated.
INTERSECTING ROAD SIGNING
points.
Signing for the control of traffic entering and leaving work zones by way of
intersecting crossroads shall be adequate to make drivers aware of work zone
SPEEDING FINES DOUBLED WHEN WORKERS PRESENT SIGN
conditions. When Work operations exceed 60 minutes, place the ROAD WORK AHEAD
SURVEY WORK ZONES
The SPEEDING FINES DOUBLED WHEN WORKERS PRESENT sign should be installed on all
sign on the side street entering the work zone.
projects, but may be omitted if the work operation is less than 1 day. The placement
The SURVEY CREW AHEAD symbol or legend sign shall be the principal Advance
Warning Sign used for Traffic Control Through Survey Work Zones and may replace
the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign when lane closures occur, at the discretion of the
Party Chief.
should be 500 feet beyond the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign or midway to the next sign
ADJOINING AND/OR OVERLAPPING WORK ZONE SIGNING
whichever is less.
Adjoining work zones may not have sufficient spacing for standard placement of
signs and other traffic control devices in their advance warning areas or in some
GROOVED PAVEMENT AHEAD SIGN
cases other areas within their traffic control zones. Where such restraints or
When Traffic Control Through Work Zones is being used for survey purposes only,
the END ROAD WORK sign as called for on certain 600 Series Indexes should be
omitted.
conflicts occur or are likely to occur, one of the following methods will be employed
to avoid conflicts and prevent conditions that could lead to misunderstanding on the
part of the traveling public as to the intended travel way by the traffic control
The GROOVED PAVEMENT AHEAD sign is required 500 feet in advance of a milled or
grooved surface open to traffic. The W8-15P placard shall be used in conjuction with
the GROOVED PAVEMENT AHEAD sign.
procedure applied:
END ROAD WORK SIGN

(A) For scheduled projects the engineer in responsible charge of project design
will resolve anticipated work zone conflicts during the development of the
project traffic control plan. This may entail revision of plans on preceding
projects and coordination of plans on concurrent projects.
The END ROAD WORK sign (G20-2) should be installed on all projects, but may be omitted
where the work operation is less than 1 day. The sign should be placed approximately
500 feet beyond the end of a construction or maintenance project unless other distance
is called for in the plans. When other Construction or Maintenance Operations occur
within 1 mile this sign should be omitted and signing coordinated in accordance with
(B) Unanticipated conflicts arising between adjoining in progress highway
Index No. 600, ADJOINING AND/OR OVERLAPPING WORK ZONE SIGNING.
construction projects will be resolved by the Resident Engineer for projects

under his residency, and, by the District Construction Engineer for in
PROJECT INFORMATION SIGN
progress projects under adjoining residencies.

11:
38:
16 AM
The Project information sign shall be installed when called for in the plans.
(C) The District Maintenance Engineer will resolve anticipated and occurring
conflicts within scheduled maintenance operations.
(D) The Unit Maintenance Engineer will resolve conflicts that occur within routine
12/3/2015
maintenance works; between routine maintenance work, unscheduled work

and/or permitted work; and, between unit controlled maintenance works and
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
highway construction projects.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
4 of 12
GENERAL NOTES:
Sign
Sign
POST AND FOUNDATION
1. All signs shall be post mounted when work operations

exceed one day except for:
6' Min.
(No Paved
(At Post)
ROAD
Shoulders)
shown on the APL.
work
500 FT
30x30
36x36x36
Triangle
48x48x48
60x60x60
24x18
24x30
30x24
36x18
36x24
48x18
H eight
Face of
crashworthy in accordance with NCHRP 350 requirements
Steel U-Channel Posts

Clear
barricades, and barricade/sign combination must be
U CHANNEL POSTS
Bottom Of Sign
M in. 7'
-0"
the Clear Zone, signs mounted on temporary supports or
Clear
1. Unless shielded with 5'-0" deflection space or outside of
NUMBER OF STEEL
(inches)
Octagon
Bolts,
Nuts & Washers (Typ.)
Bottom Of Sign
H eight
TEMPORARY SIGN SUPPORT NOTE:
5
16"
2-
Shoulders)
M ounting
c. Median barrier mounted signs per Index 11871.
2' Min.
SIGN SIZE
SIGN SHAPE
WORK
Bolts,
(With Paved
H eight
drawing shown on the APL.
5
16"
2-
500 FT
6' Min.
M in. 7'
-0"
Edge Of
mounted on sign supports in accordance with the vendor
Travelway
b. Pedestrian advanced warning or regulatory signs
TABLE FOR
WORK ZONE SIGNS
ROAD
M ounting H eight
the vendor drawing for the Type III Barricade
1" Min. 6" Max (Typ.)
(At Post)
Curb
a. Road closure signs mounted in accordance with
Rectangle
(W x H)
48x24
36x48
48x30
Paved
48x36
Shoulder
54x36
48x60
60x54
and included on the Approved Products List (APL).
POST MOUNTED SIGN NOTES:
Edge Of
1. Use only approved systems listed on the Department's
Walkway
Curb & Gutter
Travelway
Elevation
Ground Surface
2. Manufacturers seeking approval of U-Channel and steel
72x48
120x60*
4*
Square
square tube sign support assemblies for inclusion on

1'-6" ( 3") for 36" Wide Signs; 2'-6" ( 6") Typ. For Others
the Approved Products List (APL) must submit a APL
30x30
36x36
48x48
48x48
36
Diamond
application, design calculations (for square tube only),

and detailed drawings showing the product meets all the
2 POST SIGN SUPPORT MOUNTING DETAILS
(See Note 7)
(SINGLE POST SIMILAR)
(SINGLE POST SIMILAR)
Circle
RURAL
URBAN
requirements of this Index.
Notes For Table:
3. Provide 3 lb/ft Steel U-Channel Posts with a minimum

Sign
section modulus of 0.43 in for 60 ksi steel, a minimum
1. Use 3 lb/ft posts for Clear Height up to 10'
section modulus of 0.37 in for 70 ksi steel, or a
and 4 lb/ft posts for Clear Height up to 12'.
W=Width
minimum section modulus of 0.34 in for 80 ksi steel.
Cutting Edge
(At Post)
Sign Post Or
4. Provide 4 lb/ft Steel U-Channel Posts with a minimum
2. Minimum foundation depth is 4.0' for 3 lb/ft

posts and 4.5' for 4 lb/ft posts.
3
8"
7. For diamond warning signs with supplement plaque (up
@ 1" Centers
Soil Em bedm ent
Surface
Sign
a
sign panel using Z-bracket detail on Sheet 6.
For Base Post Only
Ground
Bottom Of
Clear
conform with ASTM A307 or A 36.
present
Shoulders)
H eight
6. Sign attachment bolts, washers, nuts, and spacers shall
(With Paved
M in. 7'
-0"
with ASTM A 653, Grade 50, or ASTM A 1011, Grade 50.
when workers
6' Min.
M ounting
strength of 60 ksi). Square tube posts shall conform
Edge Of
60, or ASTM A 576, Grade 1080 (with a minimum yield
Travelway
5. U-channel posts shall conform with ASTM A 499, Grade
See Note 2 in Table
doubled
Shoulders)
Sign Details
steel.
H = H eight
Speeding fines
(No Paved
Stub Height 4" Max.
H eight
minimum section modulus of 0.47 in for 70 ksi or 80 ksi
17355 for M OT
6' Min.
See Index No.
section modulus of 0.56 in for 60 ksi steel, or a
Use 4 lb/ft U-channel sign post with a

mounting height of 7' min. and 8' max. Attach
Base Post
3. For both 3 lb/ft and 4 lb/ft base or sign

posts installed in rock, a minimum cumulative
depth of 2' of rock layer is required.
4. The soil plate as shown on the APL vendor

drawing is not required for base posts or
sign posts installed in existing rock (as
defined in Note 3), asphalt roadway, shoulder
to 5 ft in area), use 4 lb/ft posts for up to 10 ft Clear
pavement or soil under sidewalk.
TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAIL
Height (measure to the bottom of diamond warning sign).
See APL for post, splice and connection details.

Paved
8. Install 4 lb/ft Steel U-Channel Posts with approved
No bolts installed closer than 1" to cutting edge.

Shoulder
breakaway splice in accordance with the manufacturer's

detail shown on the APL.
Edge Of
Travelway
9. The contractor may install 3 lb/ft Steel U-Channel Posts
Elevation
Sign
Ground Surface
Steel U-Channel Post

Lock Washer
with approved breakaway splice in accordance with the

5
( 16" Nominal Size)
manufacturer's detail shown on the APL.

11:
38:
17 AM

10. Install all posts plumb.
Where
W = 48":
1
2"
a = 1' - 4
( 1")
5
16"
Steel Hex
Head Bolt
5
16"
Steel Hex Nut

Flat Washer
W = 60": a = 1' - 9" ( 1")
11. The contractor may set posts in preformed holes to the
( 16" Nominal Size)
W = 72": a = 2' - 1" ( 1")
all sides, or drive 3 lb/ft sign posts and any size base
SECTION A-A
SIGN ATTACHMENT DETAIL
post in accordance with the manufacturer's detail shown
(SCHEMATIC)
(WITHOUT Z-BRACKET)
on the APL.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
specified depth with suitable backfill tamped securely on
WORK ZONE SIGN SUPPORTS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
5 of 12
10'-0"
1
2"
1'-1
2'-7"
2'-7"
2'-7"
1
2"
1'-1
5'-0"
10'-0"
1'
-0"
4.2"
SR XXX
4"
CONTRACTOR
4"
0.8"
4"
SEASON YR.
5"
4'
-6"
5'
-0"
3'
-0"
5'
-0"
5"
4"D
Optional Splice:
Strip Details
6"C
4"D
See Index 11200

for Backing
4"
6"D
SR XXX
6"D
SEASON YEAR
5"
4"
0.8"
4"
4"D
5"
4"D
1-XXX-XXX-XXXX
1'
-0"
4"
1-XXX-XXX-XXXX
6"C
6"D
6"C
4"
4.2"
Bottom
Of Sign
7'M in.
; 8'M ax.
M ounting H eight
*-See Note 1.
BORDER
10'-0"x 5'-0"
BORDER
5'-0"x 4-6"
4 lb/ft U-Channel
R=8"
8" Radii
R=3"
3" Radii
Sign Post
TH=0.25"
4" and 6" series D Legend
TH=0.25"
4" series D Legend and
IN=0.75"
Blue Background
IN=0.75"
6" series C Legend
Ground
Surface
Blue Background
White Legend and Border

Edge Of
PROJECT INFORMATION SIGN DETAIL
PROJECT INFORMATION SIGN DETAIL
Travelway
Elevation
50 MPH OR GREATER
45 MPH OR LESS
Use SIGN ATTACHMENT DETAIL
Use SIGN ATTACHMENT DETAIL
(WITH Z-BRACKET).
(WITHOUT Z-BRACKET)
On Sheet 6.
4 POST SIGN SUPPORT MOUNTING DETAIL

4 lb/ft U-Channel
Sign Post
1
4"
Aluminum Flat Head
Machine Screws With Nuts

And Lock Washers.
5
16"
9'-2"
Galvanized Steel Bolts
With Nuts and Lock Washers.

- Bracket Wind Beam Length
Z
3
3
4x1 4x1.09
Aluminum Z 1
5
16"
Galvanized Steel Bolts

Sign Panel
With Nuts and Lock Washers.

1 "
8
Thick Aluminum
PROJECT INFORMATION SIGN NOTES:

1. Road designation should be the most common
designation (ie. I-Interstate, SR-State Road or US.)
1
4"
3" 3"
Aluminum Flat Head
3 Eq. Sp.= 2'-7" 1"
Aluminum Z
5"
2. Italic text on signs indicate variable information

specific to the project.
1"
Machine Screws With

11:
38:
18 AM
3" 3" 3"
3
3
1 4x1 4x1.09
Nut and Washer
3. See Sheet 5 for POST AND FOUNDATIONS TABLE FOR
(Typ) Bolt spacing 1"
WORK ZONE SIGNS.
BRACKET DETAIL
SIGN ATTACHMENT DETAIL
4. See Sheet 5 for TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAIL.
12/3/2015
(WITH Z-BRACKET)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
PROJECT INFORMATION SIGN

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
6 of 12
SPEED
YIELD
EXIT
EXIT
END
ROAD WORK
END
PILOT CAR
DETOUR
DETOUR
DO
PASS
NOT
WITH
TRUCKS
LIMIT
KEEP
USE
CENTER
OPEN
CLOSED
NEXT X MILES
ROAD WORK
FOLLOW ME
XX
PASS
CARE
LANE
E5-2
E5-2a
G20-1
G20-2
G20-4
M4-8
M4-8A
M4-9L
M4-9R
M4-10L
M4-10R
OM-3R
R1-1
R1-2
R2-1
R4-1
R4-2
R4-5
R4-7
R4-8
R4-7AL
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
O/B
O/B
B/Y
W/R
RW/R
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
KEEP
KEEP
KEEP
DETOUR
DETOUR
DETOUR
SIDEWALK CLOSED
PEDESTRIAN
SIDEWALK
CROSSWALK
CLOSED
DETOUR
LEFT
SIDEWALK CLOSED
SIDEWALK CLOSED
AHEAD
USE OTHER SIDE
CROSS HERE
CROSS HERE
CLOSED
ROAD
RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
R4-7AR
R4-7BL
R4-7BR
R5-1
R9-8
R9-9
R9-10
R9-11
R9-11a
R11-2
W1-1R
W1-2R
W1-3R
W1-4R
W1-4b
W1-4c
W1-6
W1-7
W1-8
W3-1
W3-2
B/W
B/W
B/W
WR/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/W
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
RB/O
RB/O
BUMP
DIP
PAVEMENT
SOFT
SHOULDER
BE
SPEED
PREPARED
ROAD
NARROW
ONE LANE
NARROWS
BRIDGE
BRIDGE
LIMIT
GKO
XX
W3-3
W3-4
W3-5
W4-1
W4-2
W5-1
W5-2
W5-3
W6-1
W6-2
W6-3
W8-1
W8-2
W8-3
W8-4
W8-5
B(RYG)/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
TRUCK
LOW
SHOULDER
LOOSE
ROUGH
GRAVEL
ROAD
W8-6
W8-7
W8-8
W8-9
W8-9a
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
DETOUR
DETOUR
CROSSING
TO STOP
ENDS
SHOULDER
DROP OFF
W8-15P
B/O
UNEVEN
LANES
LEFT
RIGHT
LANE
LANE
ENDS
ENDS
LANE ENDS
ROAD
WORK
LANE ENDS
MERGE
MERGE
LEFT
RIGHT
12'-6"
R
ROAD
ROAD
WORK
WORK
500 FT
ROAD
WORK
1000 FT
1500 FT
ROAD
MILE
XX
ROAD
WORK
WORK
DETOUR
DETOUR
DETOUR
1 MILE
AHEAD
AHEAD
500 FT
1000 FT
1500 FT
MILE
M.P.H.
W8-11
W9-1L
W9-1R
W9-2L
W9-2R
W10-1
W11-2
W12-1
W12-2
W13-1
W20-1A
W20-1B
W20-1C
W20-1D
W20-1E
W20-1F
W20-2A
W20-2B
W20-2C
W20-2D
W20-2E
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/Y
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
Notes:
W16-7P
1. The size of diamond shaped Temporary Traffic Control (TTC) warning signs shall
B/O
be a minimum of 48" X 48".

ROAD
LEFT
CLOSED
RIGHT
ONE LANE
TWO LANES
LEFT LANE
ROAD
CLOSED
CLOSED
RIGHT LANE
CLOSED
CENTER LANE
FLAGGER
SHOULDER
WORKERS
CLOSED
AHEAD
SURVEY
SHOULDER
WORK
UTILITY
2. Fluorescent orange shall be used for all orange colored work zone signs.
WORK
CLOSED
CREW
AHEAD
3. The sign shields, symbols and messages contained on this sheet are provided for
W20-3
W20-4
W20-5a
W20-5L
W20-5R
W20-5C
W20-7A
W20-7
W21-1A
W21-1
W21-5
W21-5a
W21-6
W21-7
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
ready reference to those signs used in the development of the 600 series Design
Standards and are commonly used in the development of traffic control plans.
For additional signs and sign detail information refer to the STANDARD HIGHWAY
SIGNS MANUAL as specified in the MUTCD. Special signs for traffic control plans
will be as approved by the State Traffic Plans Engineer.
W16-2P
TURN OFF
B/O
The sign codes shown on this sheet are for the purpose of identifying cell names
2-WAY RADIO
END
COLOR CODES
AND
BLASTING
Legend and/or Symbol Background
found in the Traffic Control Cell Library (TCZ.Cel).
ZONE
CELL PHONE
W22-1
W22-2
W22-3
B/O
B/O
B/O
O-Orange (Reflectorized)
R-Red (Reflectorized)
B-Black (Non-Reflectorized)
Y-Yellow (Reflectorized)
W-White (Reflectorized)
G-Green (Reflectorized)
The STANDARD HIGHWAY SIGNS MANUAL should be referenced for the official
sign codes for use in the development of traffic control plans.
See Index No. 17355 for MOT sign details.
GROOVED
PAVEMENT
SPEEDING FINES
STAY
lN YOUR
TRUCKS
ENTERING
AHEAD
LANE
11:
38:
19 AM
LITTER
PICK UP
HIGHWAY
TRUCKS
MERGE
TURNING
RIGHT ON
LEFT
FLASHING
000 FT
ARROW
LIGHTED
WORK
ZONE
STATE
BUSINESS
PRISONERS
ENTRANCE
WORKING
PEDESTRIAN
WALKWAY
AHEAD
PEDESTRIAN
WALKWAY
AHEAD
DOUBLED
Slow Down
Slow Down
RUMBLE
WHEN WORKERS
My Daddy
My Mommy
STRIPS
Works Here
Works Here
PRESENT
MOT-15-06
AHEAD
B/O
MOT-1-06
MOT-4-06
MOT-5-06
MOT-7-06
MOT-8-06
MOT-9-06
MOT-10-06
MOT-11-06
MOT-12-06R
MOT-12-06L
MOT-13-06
MOT-16-06
MOT-17-06
MOT-18-10
B/O
B/O
MOT-6-06
B/O
B/O
B/O
B/O
BLUE/W
B/W
B/W
(Limited access facilities)
B/O
B/O
B/O
12/3/2015
B/O
MOT-14-06
W8-15P
(All other facilities)
B/O
LAST
REVISION
12/15/14
REVISIO N
COMMONLY USED WARNING AND REGULATORY SIGNS IN WORK ZONES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
7 of 12
MANHOLES/CROSSWALKS/JOINTS
PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGNS
Manholes extending 1" or more above the travel lane and crosswalks
(PCMS)
having an uneven surface greater than
1
4"
shall have a temporary
The PCMS can be used to:
asphalt apron constructed as shown in the diagram below.
1. Supplement standard signing in construction or maintenance work
All transverse joints that have a difference in elevation of 1" or more
2. Reinforce static advance warning messages.
shall have a temporary asphalt apron constructed as shown in the
zones.
Provide motorists with updated guidance information.
diagram below.
Manhole or other
Asphalt Apron
above ground obstruction
Temporary Surface
50
ADVANCE WARNING ARROW BOARDS
PCMS should be placed approx. 500 to 800 feet in advance of the work
An arrow board in the arrow or chevron mode shall be used only for
zone conflicts or 0.5 to 2 miles in advance of complex traffic control
stationary or moving lane closures on multilane roadways.
schemes which require new and/or unusual traffic maneuvers.
For shoulder work, blocking the shoulder, for roadside work near the
If PCMS are to be used at night, the intensity of the flashers shall be
shoulder, or for temporarily closing one lane on a two-lane, two-way
reduced during darkness when lower intensities are desirable.
The apron is to be removed prior to constructing the next lift of
roadway, an arrow board shall be used only in the caution mode.

For additional information refer to the FDOT Plans Preparation
asphalt. The cost of the temporary asphalt shall be included in the

contract unit price for Maintenance of Traffic, LS.
A single arrow board shall not be used to merge traffic laterally more
Manual, Volume I, Chapter 10.
than one lane. When arrow boards are used to close multiple lanes, a
single board shall be used at the merging taper for each closed lane.
When Advance Warning Arrow Boards are used at night, the intensity of
the flashers shall be reduced during darkness when lower intensities
TRUCK/TRAILER-MOUNTED ATTENUATORS
Truck/Trailer-mounted attenuators (TMA) can be used for moving operations and
short-term stationary operations. For moving operations, see Index Nos. 607
are desirable.
and 619. For short-term, stationary operations, see Part VI of the MUTCD.
REMOVING PAVEMENT MARKINGS

Existing pavement markings that conflict with temporary work zone
delineation shall be removed by any method approved by the Engineer,
CHANNELIZING DEVICES
where operations exceed one daylight period. Painting over existing

Or
Or
pavement markings with black paint or spraying with asphalt shall not be
CAUTION
Part VI of the MUTCD, subject to supplemental revisions provided in the contract
accepted as a substitute for removal or obliteration. Full pavement width
documents and Index 600 requirements. Lighting Devices must not be used to
overlays of either a structural or friction course are a positive means
supplement channelization.
to achieve obliteration.
SIGNALS
Existing traffic signal operations that require modification in
Channelizing devices for work zone traffic control shall be as prescribed in
MOVE/MERGE LEFT
MOVE/MERGE RIGHT
MOVE/MERGE RIGHT
OR LEFT
Minimum Required Lamps
CHANNELIZING DEVICE CONSISTENCY
Additional Lamps Allowed
Barricades, vertical panels, cones, tubular markers and drums shall
order to carry out work zone traffic control shall be included

in the TCP and be approved by the District Traffic Operations
not be intermixed within either the lateral transition or within the
Engineer.
tangent alignment.
MODES
Maintain all existing actuated or traffic responsive mode signal
operations for main and side street movements for the duration of
the Contract and require restoration of any loss of detection within
12 hours. The contractor shall select only detection technology listed
on the Department's Approved Products List (APL) and approved by
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
38:
19 AM
the Engineer to restore detection capabilities.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
8 of 12
DROP-OFF CONDITION NOTES

1. These conditions and treatments can be applied only in work areas that fall within
a properly signed work zone.
Table 1
TRAVEL LANE TREATMENT FOR
Drop-off Protection Requirements
2. A drop-off is defined as a drop in elevation, parallel to the adjacent travel lanes,
MILLING OR RESURFACING NOTES
greater than 3" with slope (A:B) steeper than 1:4 and an algebraic difference in
slopes greater than 0.25 (See Drop-off Condition Detail). When drop-offs occur
Device
(ft)
(in.)
Required
0-12
> 3
Barrier (See Note 8)
12-CZ
> 3 to 5
Warning Device
0-CZ
> 5
Barrier (See Note 8)
Condition
within the clear zone due to construction or maintenance activities, protection

devices are required (See Table 1).
3. Drop-offs may be mitigated by placement of slopes with optional base material per
Specifications Section 285. Slopes shallower than 1:4 may be required to avoid
algebraic difference in slopes greater than 0.25. Include the cost for the placement
travel lanes.
2. Whenever there is a difference in elevation between adjacent travel lanes, the

W8-11 sign with "UNEVEN LANES" is required at intervals of
1
2"
3. If D is 1
Removal of Bridge or
4
and removal of the material in Maintenance of Traffic, LSD. Use of this treatment in
1. This treatment applies to resurfacing or milling operations between adjacent
1
2
mile maximum.
or less, no treatment is required.
Barrier
Retaining Wall Barrier
lieu of a barrier is not eligible for CSIP consideration. Conduct daily
4. Treatment allowed only when D is 3" or less.
Removal of portions of
inspections for deficiencies related to erosion, excessive slopes, rutting or other
Barrier
Bridge Deck
adverse conditions. Repair any deficiencies immediately.
5. If the slope is steeper than 1:4 (not to be steeper than 1:1), the R4-1 and
MOT-1-06 signs shall be used as a supplement to the W8-11; this condition
4. Distance X is to be the maximum practical under project conditions.
should never exceed 3 miles in length.
5. For Clear Zone widths, see Index No. 600, Sheet 3.

Clear Zone (CZ)
Edge Of Travel Lane
Travel Lane
Travel Lane
6. For Setback Distance, refer to the Standard Index drawing of the selected barrier
Setback Distance
Travel Lane
practical for project conditions.
8. For Conditions 1 and 3 provided in Table 1, any drop- off condition that is created and
* Algebraic
restored within the same work period will not be subject to the use of barriers; however,
Difference
warning devices will be required.
(When Steeper Than 1:4)

4
Travel Lane
6" Solid Lane Line
3"
Or Barrier
7. Distance from the travel lane to the barrier or warning device should be maximum
M ax.
Warning Device
Varies
for the required deflection space.
In Slopes
TRAVEL LANE TREATMENT FOR
9. When permanent curb heights are 6", no warning device will be required. For curb
heights < 6", see Table 1.
DROP-OFF CONDITION DETAIL
MILLING OR RESURFACING DETAIL
10. Where a barrier is specified, any of the types below may be used in accordance with
the applicable Index:
Index No.
400
412
414
415
Description
Guardrail
Low Profile Barrier
Type K Temporary Concrete Barrier System
For other types of temporary barriers see the APL.
PEDESTRIAN AND/OR BICYCLIST WAY

DROP-OFF CONDITION NOTES
11. Drop- off condition and protection requirements apply to all speeds.
1. A pedestrian and/or bicyclist way drop-off is defined as:
a. a drop in elevation greater than 10" that is closer than 2' from the edge of
the pedestrian or bicyclist way
Table 2
WARNING DEVICE NOTES
b. a slope steeper than 1:2 that begins closer than 2' from the edge of the
pedestrian or bicyclist way when the total drop-off is greater than 60"
Warning Device Spacing
1. The following are defined as acceptable warning devices:

Max. Distance Between Devices (ft)
a. Vertical panel
b. Type I Or Type II barricades
11:
38:
20 AM
c. Drum
Speed
(mph)
Cones or Tubular
2. Protect any drop-off adjacent to a pedestrian or bicyclist way with warning

devices, temporary barrier wall, or approved handrail.
Barricades or Vertical
Markers
Panels or Drums
d. Cone (where allowed)

Taper
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
25
25
50
25
50
30 to 45
25
50
30
50
50 to 70
25
50
50
100
e. Tubular marker (where allowed)
12/3/2015
2. Use the warning device spacing shown in Table 2.
Type I or Type II
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DROP-OFFS IN WORK ZONES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
9 of 12
Asphalt (See Note 5)
Entire Separator Shall Be
Table 3
Max. Distance Between Devices (ft.)
M ax
12"
(Included In Cost Of Separator)
Device Spacing
Fixed (Surface Mounted)

Channelizing Devices
Vertical Panels or
Speed
(mph)
Lane Separator
Painted Reflectorized Yellow
Tubular Markers
Opposing Traffic Lane

Divider
Taper
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
25
25
50
25
50
30 to 45
25
50
30
50
50 to 70
25
50
50
100
A
Device Spacing
See Table 3
1
4"
2" M ax
PLAN
Min.
12"
12"
Two 3" White
Base
2"-6" Space
Standard
40'
BUSINESS
ENTRANCE
1
0
'
td
.
2" R
Asphalt (See Note 5)
D ri
vew ay
'
0
.
1
td
S
Spacing
Lane Separator
40'
Reduced
Reduced
Spacing
Spacing
4" M ax.
Bands
28" to 36"
Retroreflectorized
12"
12"
12"
Max
Max
Max
Tubular Marker
Vertical Panel
Orange
Opposing Traffic
O/W
Lane Divider
W6-4
FIXED (SURFACE MOUNTED)
B/O
CHANNELIZING DEVICES
SECTION AA
1. For single business entrances, place one 24" x 36" business sign for each
1. Temporary lane separators shall be supplemented with any of the following approved fixed (surface mounted)
driveway entrance affected. Signs shall show specific business names. Logos
channelizing devices: tubular markers, vertical panels, or opposing traffic lane divider panels. Opposing traffic lane
may be provided by business owners. Standard BUSINESS ENTRANCE sign in
divider panels (W6-4) shall only be used as center lane dividers to separate opposing vehicular traffic on a
Index 17355 may be used when approved by the Engineer.
two-lane, two-way operation. Tubular Markers, Vertical Panels and Opposing Traffic Lane Divider panels shall not
be intermixed within the limits where the temporary lane separator is used. The connection between the
2. When several businesses share a common driveway entrance, place one 24" x 36"
channelizing device and the temporary lane separator curb shall hold the channelizing device in a vertical position.
standard BUSINESS ENTRANCE sign in accordance with Index 17355 at the
common driveway entrance.
2. Reflectorized materials shall have a smooth sealed outer surface which will display the same approximate color day
and night. Furnish channelizing devices having retroreflective sheeting meeting the requirements of Section 990.
3. Channelizing devices shall be placed at a reduced spacing on each side of the
driveway entrance, but shall not restrict sight distance for the driveway users.
3. 12" openings for drainage shall be constructed in the asphalt and portable temporary lane separator at a maximum
spacing of 25' in areas with grades of 1% or less or 50' in areas with grades over 1% as directed by the Engineer.
4. Business entrance signs are intended to guide motorist to business entrances
moved/modified or disturbed during construction projects. Business entrance
4. Tapered ends shall be used at the beginning and end of each run of the temporary lane separator to form a
signs are not required where there is minimal disruption to business driveways
gradual increase in height from the pavement level to the top of the temporary lane separator.
which is often the case with resurfacing type projects.
5. The Contractor has the option of using portable temporary lane separators containing fixed channelizing devices in
lieu of the temporary asphalt separator and channelizing devices detailed on this sheet. The portable temporary
lane separator shall come in portable sections that can be connected to maintain continuous alignment between the
separate curb sections. Each temporary lane separator section shall be 36 inches to 48 inches in total length.
11:
38:
21 AM
Portable temporary lane separators shall duplicate the color of the pavement marking. Portable temporary lane
PLACEMENT OF BUSINESS ENTRANCE SIGNS AND
separators shall be one of those listed on the Approved Products List.
CHANNELIZING DEVICES AT BUSINESS ENTRANCE
6. Any damage to existing pavement caused by the removal of temporary lane separator shall be satisfactorily
12/3/2015
repaired and the cost of such repairs are to be included in the cost of Maintenance of Traffic, LS.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
TEMPORARY LANE SEPARATOR
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
10 of 12
6'-0"
12"
18" Diameter
36"
24"
12"
Max.
Max.
24"
8"
PLASTIC DRUMS
TYPE I
I BARRI
CADE
TYPE I BARRICADE
12"
DI
RECTI
ON I
NDI
CATOR
5'
M ax.
8"
A-FRAME
TUBULAR MARKER
8"
8"
8"
CONES
M in.
M in.
36"
36"
12"
M in.
M in.
36"
36"
12 lbs
36"
8"
12"
M in.
4" Diameter
POST MOUNT
VERTICAL PANEL
TYPE I
I
I BARRI
CADE
BARRICADE
TUBULAR NON-FIXED
MARKER TO BE USED
DURING DAYLIGHT ONLY
Barrier Delineators
CHANNELIZING DEVICE NOTES

9. Spacing for longitudinal channelizing devices when placed singly shall
be the same as Type I or Type II barricades or drums.
(b) To provide information that supplements or supersedes that provided by

the MUTCD.
10. Vehicular longitudinal channelizing devices shall not exceed 36" in

height. For vehicular longitudinal channelizing devices (LCDs) less than
2. The Type III Barricade shall have a unit length of 6'-0" only. When barricades of
greater lengths are required those lengths shall be in multiples of the 6'-0" unit.
See Notes
(a) For ease of identification and
See Notes
1. The details shown on this sheet are for the following purposes:
(See Note 12)
32" in height, the LCD shall be supplemented with approved fixed

(surface mounted) channelizing devices (tubular markers, vertical
panels, etc.) along the run of the LCD, at the ends, at 50' centers on
3. No sign panel should be mounted on any channelizing device unless the
tangents, and 25' centers on radii. The cost of the fixed supplemented
channelizing device/sign combination was found to be crashworthy and the sign
channelizing devices shall be included in the cost of the LCD. LCDs
panel is mounted in accordance with the vendor drawing for the channelizing
less than 32" in height shall not be used for speeds greater than 45
device shown on the APL.
mph.
Forklift Access
higher than 13" above the driving surface.
5. The direction indicator barricade may be used in tapers and
11. For pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices, the device shall have
a minimum of 8" continuous detectable edging above the walkway. A
Barrier Delineators
gap not exceeding a height of 2" is allowed to facilitate drainage. The
(See Note 12)
top surface of the device shall be a minimum height of 32" and have
transitions where specific directional guidance to drivers is
smooth connection points between the devices to facilitate hand
necessary. If used, direction indicator barricades shall be used in
trailing. The bottom and the top surface of the device shall be in the
series to direct the driver through the transition and into the
same vertical plane. If pedestrian drop-off protection is required, the
intended travel lane.
device shall have a footprint or offset of at least 2', otherwise the
See Notes
4. Ballast shall not be placed on top rails or any striped rails or
device must be at least 42" in height above the walkway and be

6. The splicing of sheeting is not permitted on either channelizing
devices or MOT signs.
7. For rails less than 3'-0" long, 4" stripes shall be used.
anchored or ballasted to withstand a 200 lb lateral point load at the

top of the device.
12. For vehicular longitudinal channelizing devices, use Barrier Delineators

meeting Specifications Section 993. Place on top of unit so that
11:
38:
22 AM
8. Cones shall:
retroreflective sheeting faces vehicular traffic.
L
ONGI
TUDI
NAL CHANNEL
I
ZI
NG DEVI
CE
Spacing must be a
a. Be used only in active work zones where workers are present.
maximum of 50' centers in transitions, 100' centers on curves and 200'
b. Not exceed 2 miles in length of use at any one time.
centers on tangents. Color must match adjacent longitudinal pavement
c. Be reflectorized as per the MUTCD with Department-approved
marking.
12/3/2015
reflective collars when used at night.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
IDENTIFICATIONS - CHANNELIZING DEVICES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
11of 12
5'
Monodirectional White
10'
10'
30'
2'-6"
Bidirectional White/Red
2'-6"
2'-6"
2'-6"
Monodirectional Yellow
ONE-WAY OR MULTILANE DIVIDED

SKIP LANE LINE
5'
5'
Bidirectional Yellow
10'
30'
5'
2-LANE - 2-WAY
NOTES FOR REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
TEMPORARY SUBSTITUTION OF RPM'S FOR PAINT OR REMOVABLE TAPE
1. The color of the raised pavement marker under both day and night conditions shall conform
to the color of the marking for which they serve as a positioning guide, or for which they
1. Paint or removable tape are the required work zone markings and shall be placed in accordance with the plans and specifications. If these work zone markings
supplement or substitute.
can not be placed due to weather restrictions identified in the appropriate specification, temporary substitution of RPM's for work zone markings will be allowed
until the weather condition permits the placement of appropriate work zone marking. Temporary substitution of RPM's for work zone markings will be allowed for
2. To provide contrast on concrete pavement, or light asphalt, the five (5) white RPM's shall be
equipment malfunction, placement of the appropriate work zone marking shall be made within 3 days, or sooner if possible. When RPM's are used as a temporary
followed by five black RPM's. The spacing between RPM's shall be 2'-6". Black RPM's will
substitution for work zone markings the following shall apply:
not be required for contrast with yellow RPM's.
a. Lane widths identified in the plans must be maintained. Placement of RPM's should consider where work zone markings will be placed as soon as conditions
3. RPM's used to supplement lane lines are to be paid for as Reflective Pavement Marker
allow. If the RPM's can not be placed so that the lane width is maintained after the placement of the work zone markings, the conflicting RPM's must be
(Temporary), EA. RPM's used as a temporary substitute for paint or removable tape due to
removed.
weather restrictions are to be paid for as Reflective Pavement Marker (Temporary), EA.
RPM's used as a temporary substitute for paint or removable tape due to equipment
malfunction are to be placed at the Contractor's expense.
b. The color of the RPM body and the reflective face shall conform to the color of the marking for which they substitute.
c. In work zones, B RPM's must be used to form lane lines, edge lines and temporary gore areas as a temporary substitute for paint or removable tape at the
spacing shown above.
Centerline of
Pavement Marking
Approach
Transition
100'
White Reflectorized
Pavement Markings
Tangent
40' (Typ.) Through
Tangent
Transition
Approach
LW
100'
LW
LW
LW = Total width of travel lanes divided
Class A or B RPM's
by the number of travel lanes unless
(See Note 1 below)
other widths are shown in the plans.
(Paint or RemovableTape)
Travel Lanes
5' (Typ) Through
Edge Line
Transition &
Lane Lines
Approach
6"
2"
Edge Lines
Edge of
Work Area
Travel Way
Double Yellow Reflectorized

Pavement Markings
(Paint or Removable Tape)
11:
38:
23 AM
USE OF RPMS TO SUPPLEMENT PAINT OR REMOVABLE TAPE IN WORK ZONES

PLACEMENT OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS
1. RPM's shall be installed as a supplement to:

a. All lane lines.
b. Edge lines in transition & approach areas.
c. Edge lines of gore areas.
12/3/2015
2. Placement of RPM's should be as shown in Index No. 17352 with the following exceptions:
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
RPM's shall be placed at 5 feet center to center in approach and transition areas.
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
600
SHEET
NO.
12 of 12
Offset zone:
a. Behind an existing barrier,
b. More than 2' behind the curb,
Work Area
c. 15' or more from the edge of travel way.
GENERAL NOTES
1. If the work operation (excluding establishing and terminating the work area)
requires that two or more work vehicles cross the offset zone in any one hour,
traffic control will be in conformance with Index No. 602.
2. No special signing is required.
3. When a side road intersects the highway within the work area, additional TTC
devices shall be placed in accordance with other applicable TCZ Indexes.
SYMBOLS
4. When construction activities encroach on a sidewalk refer to Index No. 660.
Work Area
CONDITIONS
WHERE ANY VEHICLE, EQUIPMENT,
5. For general TCZ requirements and additional information, refer to Index No. 600.
Lane Identification + Direction of Traffic
WORKERS AND THEIR ACTIVITIES

ARE BEHIND AN EXISTING BARRIER,
MORE THAN 2' BEHIND THE CURB,
OR 15' OR MORE FROM THE EDGE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
38:
24 AM
OF TRAVEL WAY.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY, WORK OUTSIDE SHOULDER
NO.
601
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
ROAD
WORK
AHEAD
END
ROAD WORK
Taper Length =
Work Area
1
3L
15'
M in.
2'
See Table II
END
Table II
ROAD WORK
ROAD
Taper Length - Shoulder
WORK
Device Spacing-Taper
Device Spacing-Tangent
See Table I
See Table I
500'
1
3L
AHEAD
(ft)
Speed
Notes
SPEEDING FINES
(mph)
DOUBLED
WHEN WORKERS
8'
10'
12'
Shldr. Shldr. Shldr.
PRESENT
Speed
25
28
35
42
Table I
30
40
50
60
Device Spacing
35
55
68
82
40
72
90
107
Type I or Type II
45
120
150
180
Cones or
WS
L=
60
(mph)
DISTANCE BETWEEN SIGNS
Tubular Markers
Taper
Spacing (ft.)
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
Speed
A
25
25
50
25
50
40 mph or less
200
200
30 to 45
25
50
30
50
45 mph
350
350
50 to 70
25
50
50
100
50 mph or greater
500
500
133
167
200
147
183
220
60
160
200
240
65
173
217
260
70
187
233
280
8'
*Midway between signs.
1
3L
SYMBOLS
50
55
Panels or Drums
GENERAL NOTES
DURATION NOTES
L=WS
minimum shoulder width
W =
Length of shoulder taper in feet
Width of total shoulder in feet

(combined paved and unpaved width)
Work Area
Channelizing Device (See Index No. 600)
1. When four or more work vehicles enter the through traffic lanes in a one hour
1. Signs and channelizing devices may be omitted if all of the
period or less (excluding establishing and terminating the work area), the advanced
FLAGGER sign shall be substituted for the WORKERS sign. For location of flaggers
a. Work operations are 60 minutes or less.
and FLAGGER signs, see Index No. 603.
b. Vehicles in the work area have high-intensity, rotating,
S =
Posted speed limit (mph)

Work Zone Sign
2. SHOULDER WORK sign may be used as an alternate to the WORKER symbol sign only
on the side where the shoulder work is being performed.

3. When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC zone, additional TTC
CONDITIONS
11:
38:
24 AM

WORKERS OR THEIR ACTIVITIES
ENCROACH THE AREA CLOSER
THAN 15' BUT NOT CLOSER THAN
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
2' TO THE EDGE OF TRAVEL WAY.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY, WORK ON SHOULDER
NO.
602
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
SYMBOLS:
Work Area
Buffer
Space
Work Zone Sign
250'
See
Flagger
Table 1

BE
PREPARED
TO STOP
ROAD
ONE LANE
ROAD
AHEAD
WORK
AHEAD
Work Area
Device Spacing (See Table 1)

Tangent
ROAD
BE
PREPARED
TO STOP
ONE LANE
ROAD
AHEAD
WORK
AHEAD
Taper Length
50' To 100'
* May
*
A
Be omitted if ROAD WORK AHEAD sign is installed upstream within the project limits.
WITHOUT TEMPORARY RAISED RUMBLE STRIPS
GENERAL NOTES:
TABLE 1
1. Special Conditions may be required in accordance with these notes
and the following sheets:
A. Railroad Crossings:
a. If an active railroad crossing is located closer to the Work Area than
the queue length plus 300 feet, extend the Buffer Space as shown on
Sheet 3.
b. If the queuing of vehicles across an active railroad crossing cannot be
avoided, provide a uniformed traffic control officer or flagger at the
highway-rail grade crossing to prevent vehicles from stopping within
the highway-rail grade crossing, even if automatic train warning
devices are in place.
B. If the Work Area encroaches on the Centerline, use the Layout for
Temporary Lane Shift to Shoulder on Sheet 3 only if the Existing
Paved Shoulder width is sufficient to provide for an 11' lane
between the Work Area and the Edge of Existing Paved Shoulder.
Reduce the posted speed when appropriate.
2. Temporary Raised Rumble Strips:
A. Use when both of the following conditions are met concurrently:
a. Existing Posted Speed is 55 mph or greater;
b. Work duration is greater than 60 minutes.
B. Use a consistent Strip color throughout the work zone.
C. Place each Rumble Strip Set transversely across the lane at locations
shown.
D. Use Option 1 or Option 2 as shown on Sheet 2. Use only one option
11:
38:
26 AM
throughout work zone.
4. When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC zone, place
DEVICE SPACING
additional TTC devices in accordance with other applicable TCZ Indexes.
Maximum Spacing
Maximum Spacing of
Distance
Posted
of Cones or
Type I or Type II
Between
Speed
Tubular Markers
Barricades/Panels/Drums
Signs
5. The two channelizing devices directly in front of the work area may be
omitted provided vehicles in the work area have high-intensity rotating,
Buffer
Space
6. When Buffer Space cannot be attained due to geometric constraints, use

the greatest attainable length, not less than 200 ft, for posted speeds
greater than 25 mph.
7. ROAD WORK AHEAD and the BE PREPARED TO STOP signs may be omitted if
all of the following conditions are met:
A. Work operations are 60 minutes or less.
On a
On a
On a
On a
Taper
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
25
20'
50'
20'
50'
200'
200'
200' 100'
155'
30
20'
50'
20'
50'
200'
200'
200' 100'
200'
35
20'
50'
20'
50'
200'
200'
200' 100'
250'
40
20'
50'
20'
50'
200'
200'
200' 100'
305'
45
20'
50'
20'
50'
350'
350'
350'
175'
360'
50
20'
50'
20'
100'
500'
500'
500' 250'
425'
55
20'
50'
20'
100'
2640' 1500' 1000' 500'
495'
60
20'
50'
20'
100'
2640' 1500' 1000' 500'
570'
65
20'
50'
20'
100'
2640' 1500' 1000' 500'
645'
70
20'
50'
20'
100'
2640' 1500' 1000' 500'
730'
B. Speed limit is 45 mph or less.

C. There are no sight obstructions to vehicles approaching the work area for
a distance equal to the Buffer Space shown in Table 1.
D. Vehicles in the work area have high-intensity, rotating, flashing, oscillating,
or strobe lights operating.
E. Volume and complexity of the roadway has been considered.
F. If a railroad crossing is present, vehicles will not queue across rail tracks.
G. AFADs are not in use.
8. See Index 600 for general TCZ requirements and additional information.
9. Automated Flagger Assistance Devices (AFADs) may be used in accordance
with Specifications Section 102, 990 and the APL vendor drawings.
CONDITIONS
3. Additional one-way control may be provided by the following means:

A. Flag-carrying vehicle;
B. Official vehicle;
C. Pilot vehicles;
D. Traffic signals.
ENCROACH THE AREA BETWEEN

THE CENTERLINE AND A LINE 2'
OUTSIDE THE EDGE OF TRAVEL WAY.
must be in sight of each other or in direct communication at all times.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
When flaggers are the sole means of one-way control, the flaggers
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY,
DESIGN STANDARDS
WORK WITHIN THE TRAVEL WAY
NO.
603
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
SYMBOLS:
Work Area
Work Zone Sign

Flagger
BE
PREPARED
TO STOP
Temporary Raised Rumble Strip Set
ROAD
RUMBLE
STRIPS
AHEAD
STAY
IN YOUR
LANE
ONE LANE
ROAD
AHEAD
WORK
AHEAD
250' 250' 250'
(See GENERAL NOTE #2)
Work Area
Temporary Raised Rumble Strip Set
250' 250' 250'
ROAD
RUMBLE
STRIPS
AHEAD
WORK
AHEAD
STAY
IN YOUR
LANE
(See GENERAL NOTE #2)
BE
PREPARED
TO STOP
ONE LANE
ROAD
AHEAD
*
A
* May
See Sheet 1 For Layout
Be omitted if ROAD WORK AHEAD sign is installed upstream within the project limits.
WITH TEMPORARY RAISED RUMBLE STRIPS

(When Required See GENERAL NOTE #2)
e
bl
m e
n
Ru i
L
er n
nt I
p
Ce ri
t
S
2"
2"
2'
S
pa
ci
ng
er
ym .
)
l
p
Po Ty
(
e
l
e
b
p
a
ov
Ta
m
ng
Re pi
ri
t
S
4
1
S
t
S
ri
Pa
et
ps
ve
Pe
d
S
r
ho
S
et
ul
de
r
4"
e)
t
hi
W
(
(
Ty
p.
)
e
dg
E
ne
Li
of
e
dg el
E
v
a
Tr e
n
La
10
'
S
pa
ci
ng
(
Ty
p.
)
3
1
S
Pa
t
S
ri
et
ve
ps
d
Pe
S
ho
r
ul
S
et
de
r
1'
-0
"
ed
er e
ne
bl
i
m
)
.
ng
E
Ru yp
r
T
d
(
e
e
d
m
p
l
i
y
o
r
l
t
M
S
Po
e
dg
E
ne
Li
e)
t
hi
W
(
ne
i
l
er
nt w)
e
o
C
l
l
Ye
(
REMOVABLE POLYMER STRIPING TAPE
MOLDED ENGINEERED POLYMER SET
RUMBLE STRIP SET
RUMBLE STRIP SET
OPTION - 1
OPTION - 2
2/11/2016
1:
39:
37 PM
ne
i
l
er
t
)
n
ow
Ce l
l
e
Y
(
of
e
dg el
E
av
Tr e
n
La
LAST
REVISION
02/04/16
REVISIO N
TEMPORARY RAISED RUMBLE STRIPS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2017-18
TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY,
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
603
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
SYMBOLS:
Work Area
Work Zone Sign
Flagger
Taper Length
Cont. Layout
50' To 100'
Extended Buffer Space
250'
C
Cont. Layout
DO NOT
STOP
ON
TRACKS
Work Area
15' Clear (Typ., Each Side)
50' To 100'
R/R Tracks
Taper Length
Tangent
TEMPORARY RAILROAD CROSSING BUFFER SPACE EXTENSION
Shifted Lane (11' Min.)

C
Cont.
Taper Length
Buffer Space (See Table 1)
Buffer Space (See Table 1)
375'
50' To 100'
C
Cont.
Edge Of Existing Paved Shoulder (Typ.)
Layout
Layout
Work Area
Edge Of Existing Travel Lane (Typ.)
Taper Length
50' To 100'
Tangent
TEMPORARY LANE SHIFT TO SHOULDER WHEN

WORK AREA ENCROACHES ON THE CENTERLINE
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Cross Rererence:
12/3/2015
11:
38:
28 AM
1. See General Note #1, Sheet 1 for more information.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY,
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
603
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
END
ROAD
END
ROAD
ROAD WORK
ROAD WORK
WORK
AHEAD
WORK
AHEAD
ROAD
ROAD
WORK
WORK
END
AHEAD
AHEAD
KEEP
KEEP
ROAD WORK
RIGHT
Existing
STOP
END
100'
KEEP
RIGHT
KEEP
100'
ROAD WORK
RIGHT
Work Area
RIGHT
100'
Work Area
50'
100'
50'
Existing
STOP
ROAD WORK
END
END
ROAD WORK
ROAD
ROAD
WORK
WORK
AHEAD
A
AHEAD
ROAD
ROAD
WORK
WORK
AHEAD
END
AHEAD
END
ROAD WORK
ROAD WORK
UNSIGNALIZED
SIGNALIZED
GENERAL NOTES
DURATION NOTES
SYMBOLS
1. The FLAGGER legend sign may be substituted for the symbol sign.
Work Area
Spacing (ft.)
Speed
if all of the following conditions are met:

2. When vehicles in a parking zone block the line of sight to TCZ signs, the signs
1. ROAD WORK AHEAD AND END ROAD WORK sign may be omitted
shall be post mounted and located in accordance with Index No. 17302.
40 mph or less
200
200
45 mph
350
350
b. Speed is 45 mph or less.

c. No sight obstructions to vehicles approaching the work
3. If the work space extends across a crosswalk, the crosswalk should be closed
Work Zone Sign
using the information in Index No. 660.
area for a distance equal to A plus B.

d. Vehicles in the work area have high-intensity, rotating,
Flagger
4. Flaggers shall be located where they can control more than one direction of
e. Volume and complexity of the roadway has been considered.
traffic.
Stop Bar
Flaggers shall be in sight of each other or in direct communication at all times.
CONDITIONS
5. Maximum spacing between channelizing devices shall be not greater than 20'.
11:
38:
28 AM

6. Temporary signal phasing modifications are to be approved by the District
Traffic Operations Engineer prior to the beginning of work.
ENCROACH ON THE PAVEMENT

REQUIRING THE CLOSURE OF A
PORTION OF ONE OR MORE TRAFFIC

LANES IN AN INTERSECTION.
12/3/2015
8. For unsignalized intersections, use Temporary Raised Rumble Strips in

accordance with Index 603. Placement of Rumble Strips and additional signs
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
should begin at FLAGGER sign location.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY, WORK IN INTERSECTION
NO.
604
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
ROAD
WORK
AHEAD
200'
200'
400'
CONDITIONS
WHERE ANY VEHICLE, EQUIPMENT, WORKERS
OR THEIR ACTIVITIES ENCROACH ON THE
PAVEMENT REQUIRING THE CLOSURE OF ONE
TRAFFIC LANE, FOR WORK AREAS LESS THAN
Work Area
200' DOWNSTREAM FROM AN INTERSECTION

FOR A PERIOD OF MORE THAN 60 MINUTES.
400'
Less Than
200'
200'
ROAD
ROAD
WORK
WORK
AHEAD
AHEAD
200'
400'
CONDITIONS
PAVEMENT REQUIRING THE CLOSURE OF ONE
TRAFFIC LANE, FOR WORK AREAS 200' OR
Work Area
MORE DOWNSTREAM FROM AN INTERSECTION

FOR A PERIOD OF MORE THAN 60 MINUTES.
400'
50'
200'
200'
More Than
ROAD
200'
WORK
AHEAD
DURATION NOTES
SYMBOLS
Work Area
GENERAL NOTES
1. Work operations shall be confined to one travel lane, leaving
5. The FLAGGER legend sign may be substituted for the symbol sign.
the opposing travel lane open to traffic.
1. ROAD WORK AHEAD sign may be omitted if all of the following

conditions are met:
6. The maximum spacing between devices shall be no greater than 25.'

2. When vehicles in a parking zone block the line of sight to TCZ
signs or when TCZ signs encroach on a normal pedestrian

7. For general TCZ requirements and additional information, refer to
Work Zone Sign

walkway, the signs shall be post mounted and located in
Index No. 600.
accordance with Index No. 17302.
a distance of 600 feet.
11:
38:
29 AM
Flagger
8. The two channelizing devices directly in front and directly at the

3. If work area is confined to an outside auxiliary lane, the work
end of the work area may be omitted provided vehicles in the work
area shall be barricaded and the FLAGGER signs replaced by
area have high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe
ROAD WORK AHEAD signs. Flaggers are not required.
lights operating.
4. Flaggers shall be in sight of each other or in direct

communication at all times.
12/3/2015
c. No sight obstructions to vehicles approaching the work area for

9. Use Temporary Raised Rumble Strips in accordance with Index 603.

Placement of Rumble Strips and additional signs should begin at
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
FLAGGER sign location.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY, WORK NEAR INTERSECTION
NO.
605
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Center Of Lane
Clear
Zone
19'M ax.
17' M in.
8'M in.
15'M ax.
8'
Clear
Zone
Pavement Or Bridge Deck
PORTABLE SIGNALS
SPAN WIRE SIGNALS
SIGNAL MOUNT DETAILS
SYMBOLS
Work Area
GENERAL NOTES
1. Work operations shall be confined to one traffic lane, except for haul road crossings,
leaving the opposite lane open to traffic.
6. SIGNAL AHEAD and EQUIPMENT CROSSING AHEAD signs are to be removed or fully covered
when no work is being performed and the highway is open to two-way traffic. Type III
Barricades shall be in place to block haul road access when the haul road is not in
Work Zone Sign
2. The installation and timing of signals shall be approved by the District Traffic Operations
Engineer prior to signals being placed in operation.
operation and a flagger/signal operator is not on duty, except when the haul road is an
existing properly marked road.
Traffic Signal
Where sight distance to the signal is limited, the signals may be mounted on span wire or
relocated at the discretion of the Engineer.
7. When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC zone, additional TTC devices shall
be placed in accordance with other applicable TCZ Indexes.
Type III Barricade

Whether the signals are in automatic mode or being controlled manually, in no case will the
distance between the portable signals (receiver/controllers) exceed the maximum distance
Stop Bar
at which both of the portable signals can be positively and safely operated.
9. Span wire signals are to be used only in work zones with workers present, where the
contractor can monitor signal operation and maintain traffic with flaggers in the event of
Flagger
3. Additional signals or flaggers may be required to assure safe movements between traffic
a power failure.
and operating equipment, as determined by the Engineer.

Portable Signal
10. Use Temporary Raised Rumble Strips in accordance with Index 603, General Note #3.
4. An additional warning sign may be required in advance of the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign, as
determined by the Engineer. The distance between successive signs shall be 500'.
5. The SIGNAL AHEAD legend sign may be substituted for the symbol sign.
CONDITIONS
11:
38:
30 AM

WILL ENCROACH ON ONE LANE OR
MOMENTARILY ENCROACH ON BOTH
LANES OF A TWO-LANE TWO-WAY
ROADWAY AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
ARE NEEDED.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY, WORK WITHIN
DESIGN STANDARDS
THE TRAVEL WAY - SIGNAL CONTROL
NO.
606
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
KEEP
KEEP
RIGHT
LEFT
SPEEDING FINES
R
ONE LANE
DOUBLED
ROAD
WHEN WORKERS
1000 FT
PRESENT
Portable Signal
0.25 Mile (Max.) See General Note No. 2
500'
ROAD
WORK
AHEAD
CTR
Varies (To Provide Width
Portable Signal
500' Min.
500'
Needed For Turning Trucks)

100' Min.
80' Min.
1000' Max.
Va
rie
s
15
'M
in.
150' Max.
24" White Reflectorized Preformed

Mat Or Pavement Marking Tape
(Location To Suit Signal Position)
Work Area

10'
500' Min.
500'
500'
80' Min.
75'
150' Max.
1000' Max.
KEEP
CTR
Cones Or Tubular Markers At 25' Centers
ROAD
SPEEDING FINES
WORK
DOUBLED
ROAD
AHEAD
WHEN WORKERS
1000 FT
Type I Or Type II Barricades Or Vertical Panels
Or Drums At 50' Centers
RIGHT
ONE LANE
All Transition Barricades Or Tubular
Markers At 25' Centers Max.
PRESENT
KEEP
LEFT
KEEP
KEEP
RIGHT
LEFT
R
Portable Signal
ONE LANE
ROAD
1000 FT
G
ROAD
DOUBLED
WORK
WHEN WORKERS
AHEAD
PRESENT
0.25 Mile (Max.) See General Note No. 2

Portable Signal
SPEEDING FINES
80' Min.
150' Max.
Varies (To Provide Width
500'
500'
500' Min.
CTR
Needed For Turning Trucks)
Va
rie
s

Work Area
15
'M
1000' Max.
Signal Operator/Flagger
in.
100' Min.

10'
500' Min.
500'
500'

75'
80' Min.
150' Max.
1000' Max.
CTR
SPEEDING FINES
ROAD
DOUBLED
WORK
WHEN WORKERS
ROAD
AHEAD
PRESENT
1000 FT
ONE LANE
KEEP
RIGHT
All Transition Barricades Or Tubular

Markers At 25' Centers Max.
KEEP
11:
38:
30 AM
Side Road
LEFT
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
SINGLE LANE CLOSURE ROADWAY AND BRIDGES ALL LENGTHS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
606
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
Side Road
KEEP
KEEP
LEFT
SPEEDING FINES
RIGHT
R
Y
Portable Signal
0.25 Mile Max. See General Note No. 2
ONE LANE
DOUBLED
ROAD
WHEN WORKERS
ROAD
WORK
AHEAD
1000 FT
PRESENT
500'
Portable Signal
CTR
Varies (Min.: Side Road Return Width)

100' Min.
80' Min.
500' Min.
500'
150' Max.
Va
rie
s
15
'M
in.

1000' Max.
Work Area
10'
500' Min.
500'
500'
75'
80' Min.

Signal Operator/Flagger
150' Max.
1000' Max.

KEEP
CTR
WORK
All Transition Barricades
Or Vertical Panels
At 25' Centers Max.
ROAD
RIGHT
ONE LANE
ROAD
SPEEDING FINES
AHEAD
1000 FT
DOUBLED
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
KEEP
LEFT
SINGLE LANE CLOSURE ROADWAY AND BRIDGES ALL LENGTHS
SPEEDING FINES
Span Wire Signal
KEEP
ONE LANE
ROAD
(Not On Bridge)
RIGHT
1000 FT
G
ROAD
DOUBLED
WORK
WHEN WORKERS
AHEAD
PRESENT
Varies See General Note No. 2

CTR
Span Wire Signal
Varies
(Not On Bridge)
(75'Min.)
500'
500'
500' Min.
1000' Max.

Work Area
10'
500'
500' Min.
500'
AHEAD
DOUBLED
ONE LANE
SPEEDING FINES
CTR
WORK
75'
150' Max.
1000' Max.
ROAD
80' Min.
ROAD
1000 FT
40' Min.

G
150' Max.
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
11:
38:
31 AM
KEEP
LEFT
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
SINGLE LANE CLOSURE SHORT BRIDGES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
606
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
Varies To Suit Normal, Skewed

Or Offset Crossing Conditions
R
ROAD
EQUIPMENT
Y
Span Wire Signal

Haul Road (Configuration Varies)
WORK
CROSSING
AHEAD
AHEAD
500' Min.
500'

Supplemental Flagger
500'
1000' Max.
40' Min.,
150' Max
24" White Reflectorized Preformed Mat Or Pavement Marking Tape

500' Min.
40' Min.,
1000' Max.
500'
500'
150' Max

Signal Operator/Flagger When Haul Route
In Operation - See General Note No. 6
Haul Road (Configuration Varies)

Span Wire Signal
R
ROAD
WORK
EQUIPMENT
CROSSING
AHEAD
AHEAD
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
38:
32 AM
MOMENTARY ROADWAY CLOSURE HAUL ROUTE CROSSING
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
606
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
CAUTION MODE
CAUTION MODE
SHOULDER
ROAD
SLOW TRAFFIC
WORK
WORK
or
AHEAD
AHEAD
AW
Work Area
AW
500'-800' Rural
See Note *
OPTION 1
ROAD
300'-500' Urban
WORK
500'-1500' Rural
AHEAD
300'-500' Urban
100'-500' Rural
OPTION 2
* The distance between the advance warning sign and the
50'-300' Urban
work location should not exceed 5 miles.
OPTION 1: Advanced Warning Vehicle is optional and to be operated on the shoulder when feasible.
WORK ON SHOULDER
If an Advance Warning Vehicle is operated in the shoulder, an approved Truck Mounted

Attenuator is required on both the Advance Warning and Shadow Vehicles. If an Advance
Warning Vehicle is operated in the lane behind the Shadow Vehicle, an approved Truck
Mounted Attenuator will be required on the Advance Warning Vehicle, but not required on
the Shadow Vehicle. The Advance Waning Arrow Board and Warning Sign is required on
both the Advance warning and Shadow Vehicles.
OPTION 2: Advanced Warning Vehicle is required and must be operated in the lane behind the shadow
vehicle. An approved Truck Mounted Attenuator will be required on the Advanced Warning Vehicle
but not required on the Shadow Vehicle. The Advance Warning Arrow Board and Warning Sign is
required on both the Advance Warning and Shadow Vehicles.
WORK IN TRAVEL WAY

(Option 2 Shown, Option 1 Similar)
SYMBOLS
Work Area
GENERAL NOTES
Wo
r
k Zo
n
e Si
g
n
L
a
n
eI
d
e
n
t
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n + Di
r
e
c
t
i
o
no
fT
r
a
f
f
i
c
Work Vehicle With Rotating/Strobe Lights
1. Where work activities within 2' of the edge of travel way are incidental
(i.e., Mowing, Litter Removal), the Engineer may delete requirements for
signs and the advance warning vehicle provided vehicles in the work area
have high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights operating.
Shadow (S) Or Advance Warning (AW)
11:
38:
32 AM
Vehicle with Advance Warning Arrow
CONDITIONS
2. If an arrow board is used, the caution mode shall be used.
Board and Sign Message

A
3. Shadow and Advance Warning Vehicle shall display rotating/strobe lights.
Advanced Warning Arrow Board
4. For general TCZ requirements and additional information, refer to Index 600.

REQUIRE AN INTERMITTENT OR
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
CONTINUOUS MOVING OPERATION.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY MOBILE OPERATION, WORK
DESIGN STANDARDS
ON SHOULDER AND WORK WITHIN THE TRAVEL WAY
NO.
607
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Required Only When
Required Only When
(T) Exceeds 500'
(T) Exceeds 500'

Required Only When
Construction Zone
Speed Reduced
SPEEDING FINES
Below Existing
ROAD
Required Only When Construction Zone
DOUBLED
Posted Speed
WORK
Speed Reduced Below Existing
WHEN WORKERS
Prior To
1500 FT
Posted Speed Prior To Construction
500' Or
1
2(T),
Whichever Is Less
PRESENT
Construction
ROAD
WORK
SPEED
(T)
LIMIT
1000 FT
White Reflectorized
SPEED
Pavement Markings
LIMIT
ROAD
END
XX
LIMIT
ROAD WORK
1 MILE
XX
XX
Double Yellow
Detour Connection To Existing
WORK
SPEED
Reflectorized
Pavement To Be Constructed
Pavement Markings
500'
500'
500'
500'
500'
500'
1140'
1640'
500'
R*
R*
R*
(Same For Opposite Connection)
R*
Under TCZ Plan Of Index No. 603.
Work Area
500'
1640'
1140'
500'
500'
500'
500'
ROAD
ROAD
CLOSED
CLOSED
SPEED
500'
500'
LIMIT
XX
Type I Or Type II Barricades Or Vertical
SPEED
SPEED
LIMIT
ROAD
Panels Or Drums At 50' Centers
LIMIT
XX
WORK
Speed Reduced Below Existing
XX
1 MILE
END
ROAD WORK
R*: See SUPERELEVATION Index No. 600.
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
When Other Construction Or Maintenance Operations

ROAD
ROAD
WHEN WORKERS
WORK
WORK
PRESENT
1500 FT
1000 FT
Occur Within 1 Mile, Sign(s) To Be Omitted And Signing

To Be Coordinated In Accordance With Index No. 600

Speed Is Reduced Below Existing
GENERAL NOTES
1. For speed sign applications, see Index No. 600.
5. When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC

zone, additional TTC devices shall be placed in accordance
2. Where the tangent distance (T) exceeds 600', spacing between cones or
with other applicable TCZ Indexes.
tubular markers may be increased to 50' or spacing between Type I or
SYMBOLS
Type II barricades, vertical panels or drums may be increased to 100'

within limits of the tangent, or post mounted delineators at 50' centers
Work Area
6. If temporary structures are required on the diversion,

traffic control will be in conformance with Index No. 650.
may be substituted for the barricades, vertical panels or drums.

7. For general TCZ requirements and additional information,
3. On the existing pavement, all existing markings within the realignment
refer to Index Nos. 600 and 17352.
which conflict with the revised traffic pattern are to be removed and
Type III Barricade
removable pavement markings used for marking a new centerline and

edge lines.
8. If posted speed for Work Zone is 45 mph or less, use

"ROAD WORK
1
2
MILE" and space accordingly.
11:
38:
33 AM
Work Zone Sign

4. Where the tangent distance (T) exceeds 600' and no passing or stopping
CONDITIONS
sight distance restrictions exist, the yellow reflectorized markings

used to indicate the centerline of the traveled way may be replaced
with yellow reflectorized markings in a broken pattern. For raised
REQUIRE THE CLOSURE OF BOTH
pavement marker application see Index No. 600 and Index No. 17352.
12/3/2015
LANES AND A TEMPORARY DIVERSION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
IS CONSTRUCTED.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY
DESIGN STANDARDS
TEMPORARY DIVERSION CONNECTION
NO.
608
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Median
Offset zone:
a. Behind an existing barrier,
b. More than 2' behind the curb,
c. 15' or more from the edge of travel way.
Work Area
GENERAL NOTES
1. If the work operation (excluding establishing and terminating the work area),
requires that two or more work vehicles cross the offset zone in any one hour,
traffic control will be in accordance with Index No. 612.
2. No special signing is required.
3. This index also applies when work is being performed on a multilane undivided
highway.
4. This index also applies to work performed in the median behind an existing
barrier or more than 15' from the edge of travel way, both roadways. Work
performed in the median behind curb and gutter shall be in accordance with
Index No. 612.
5. When a side road intersects the highway within the work area, additional traffic
SYMBOLS
control devices shall be placed in accordance with other applicable TCZ Indexes.
Work Area
6. When construction activities encroach on a sidewalk, refer to Index No. 660.
CONDITIONS

11:
38:
34 AM

WORKERS AND THEIR ACTIVITIES
ARE BEHIND AN EXISTING BARRIER,
MORE THAN 2' BEHIND THE CURB,
OR 15' OR MORE FROM THE EDGE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
OF TRAVEL WAY.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MULTILANE WORK OUTSIDE SHOULDER
NO.
611
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Taper Length =
Table II
15'
Work Area
A
M in.
2'
Median
Taper Length - Shoulder
1
3L
1
3L
See Table II
Notes
(mph)
END
ROAD
WORK
AHEAD
(ft.)
Speed
See Table I
SPEEDING FINES
10'
12'
Shldr. Shldr. Shldr.
500'
ROAD WORK
See Table I
8'
DOUBLED
25
28
35
30
40
50
42
60
35
55
68
82
WS
L=
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
Table I
40
72
90
107
45
120
150
180
50
133
167
200
55
147
183
220
60
160
200
240
65
173
217
260
70
187
233
280
60
Device Spacing
Type I or Type II
Speed
Cones or
(mph)
Tubular Markers
L=WS
Panels or Drums
Spacing (ft.)
Speed
A
40 mph or less
200
200
45 mph
350
350
50 mph or greater
500
500
25
Taper
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
25
50
25
50
30 to 45
25
50
30
50
50 to 70
25
50
50
100
8'
1
3L
*250' beyond the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign or
minimum shoulder width.
= Length of shoulder taper in feet
midway between signs whichever is less.

W =
Width of total shoulder in feet

(combined paved and unpaved width)
GENERAL NOTES
DURATION NOTES
1. When a high volume of work vehicles are entering and leaving the Work Area at
SYMBOLS
Work Area
1. Signs and channelizing devices may be omitted if all of the
speeds slower than 10 MPH below the posted speed, place an MOT-5-06 sign in
the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign location and shift the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign
upstream 500 ft.
b. Vehicles in the work area have high-intensity, rotating,
S =

2. This TCZ plan also applies to work performed in the median more than 2' but
Work Zone Sign
less than 15' from the edge of travelway.
3. When work is being performed on a multilane undivided roadway the signs

normally mounted in the median (as shown) shall be omitted.

4. WORKERS signs to be removed or fully covered when no work is being performed.
5. SHOULDER WORK sign may be used as an alternate to the WORKER symbol sign.
CONDITIONS
11:
38:
34 AM
6. When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC zone, additional TTC
ENCROACH THE AREA CLOSER THAN

15' BUT NOT CLOSER THAN 2' TO
THE EDGE OF TRAVEL WAY.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MULTILANE, WORK ON SHOULDER
NO.
612
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Table II
Buffer Space and Taper Length
Taper Length
Buffer
(12' Lateral
Median
Space
Speed
Transition)
(mph)
Dist.
Notes
(ft.)
(ft.)
(Merge)
25
155
125
30
200
180
35
250
245
White Reflectorized Pavement Markings
Work Area
WS
2'
L =
ROAD
Taper Length=L
Buffer Space
See Table II
See Table II
500'
END
ROAD WORK
**
WORK
AHEAD
See Table I
See Table I
RIGHT LANE
100'
CLOSED
SPEEDING FINES
AHEAD
DOUBLED
40
305
320
45
360
540
50
425
600
55
495
660
60
570
720
65
645
780
70
730
840
60
L = WS
Table I
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
Device Spacing
When Buffer Space cannot be attained

Type I or Type II
Speed
Cones or
(mph)
due to geometric constraints, the

greatest attainable length shall be used,
but not less than 200 ft.
Tubular Markers
Panels or Drums

Spacing (ft.)
Taper
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
25
25
50
25
50
30 to 45
25
50
30
50
50 to 70
25
50
50
100
GENERAL NOTES
1. Work operations shall be confined to one traffic lane, leaving the adjacent lane open to traffic.
40 mph or less
200
200
200
45 mph
350
350
350
50 mph
500
500
500
*55 mph or greater
2640
1640
1000
* The ROAD WORK 1 MILE sign may be used

as an alternate to the ROAD WORK AHEAD
sign and the RIGHT LANE CLOSED
1
2
MILE
sign may be used as an alternate to the
2. On undivided highways the median signs as shown are to be omitted.
L = Length of taper in feet

W = Width of lateral transition in feet
3. When work is performed in the median lane on divided highways, the channelizing device plan is inverted
S = Posted speed limit (mph)
and left lane closed and lane ends signs substituted for the right lane closed and lane end signs.
DURATION NOTES
The same applies to undivided highways with the following exceptions:
1. Temporary white edgeline may be omitted for work operations less than 3
a. Work shall be confined within one median lane.

b. Additional barricades, cones, or drums shall be placed along the centerline abutting the work area and
consecutive calandar days.
across the trailing end of the work area.

2. For work operations up to approximately 15 minutes, signs, channelizing devices,
RIGHT LANE CLOSED AHEAD sign.
** 500' beyond the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign or
formula for L shown in notes column.

Where:
Speed
A
For lateral transitions other than 12', use
When work on undivided highways occurs across the centerline so as to encroach on both median lanes,
arrow board, and buffer space may be omitted if all of the following conditions
the inverted plan is applied to the approach of both roadways.
are met:
a. Speed limit is 45 mph or less.
b. No sight obstructions to vehicles approaching the work area for a distance
4. Signs and traffic control devices are to be modified in accordance with INTERMITTENT WORK STOPPAGE
equal to the buffer space and the taper length combined.
details (sheet 2 of 2) when no work is being performed and the highway is open to traffic.
c. Volume and complexity of the roadway has been considered.

d. The closed lane is occupied by a class 5 or larger, medium duty truck(s) with
5. The two channelizing devices directly in front of the work area may be omitted provided vehicles in the
a minimum gross weight vehicle rating (GWVR) of 16,001 lb with high-intensity,
work area have high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights operating.
rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights mounted above the cab height
and operating.
6. When paved shoulders having a width of 8 ft. or more are closed, channelizing devices shall be used to
SYMBOLS
close the shoulder in advance of the merging taper to direct vehicular traffic to remain within the travel
Work Area
3. For work operations up to 60 minutes, arrow board and buffer
way. See Index No. 612 for shoulder taper formulas.
space may be omitted if conditions a, b, and c in DURATION NOTE 2

7. When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC zone, additional TTC devices shall be placed in
are met, and vehicles in the work area have high-intensity,

rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights operating.
accordance with other applicable TCZ Indexes.
11:
38:
35 AM
Work Zone Sign

8. This TCZ plan does not apply when work is being performed in the middle lane(s) of a six or more lane
CONDITIONS
highway. See Index No. 614.
12/3/2015
ENCROACH ON THE LANE ADJACENT

TO EITHER SHOULDER AND THE
AREA 2' OUTSIDE THE EDGE OF
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
TRAVEL WAY.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, WORK WITHIN TRAVEL WAY
DESIGN STANDARDS
MEDIAN OR OUTSIDE LANE
NO.
613
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Arrow Board Operation Discontinued And Arrow Board

Shall Be Removed Or Relocated Outside The Clear
Median
Zone Or Be Shielded By A Barrier Or Crash Cushion
Work Area
ROAD
END
L and Buffer Space
ROAD WORK
Signs Covered
**
Area Temporarily
WORK
500'
Reopened To Traffic
1 MILE
ROAD
SPEEDING FINES
WORK
DOUBLED
1
2
MILE
WHEN WORKERS
Temporary Pavement Markings
PRESENT
Placed Through Work Area And Devices Relocated

Laterally 2' To 4' Outside Edge Of Travel Way.
EVEN PAVEMENT
Arrow Board Operation Discontinued And Arrow Board

Shall Be Removed Or Relocated Outside The Clear
Median
Zone Or Be Shielded By A Barrier Or Crash Cushion
Work Area
END
A
ROAD
WORK
Hinged Or Overlay Shields

**
L and Buffer Space
ROAD WORK
Area Temporarily
500'
Reopened To Traffic
1 MILE
ROAD
WORK
SPEEDING FINES
1
2
MILE
UNEVEN
LANES
DOUBLED
Temporary Pavement Markings

Placed Through Work Area And Devices Relocated
Laterally 2' To 4' Outside Edge Of Travel Way.
WHEN WORKERS
11:
38:
36 AM
PRESENT
UNEVEN PAVEMENT
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
INTERMITTENT WORK STOPPAGE - LANE REOPENED TO TRAFFIC
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, WORK WITHIN TRAVEL WAY
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
613
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
EXISTING
PROPOSED
POSTED
WORK ZONE
REMARKS
SPEED
SPEED
MPH
MPH
65
55
where the Engineer deems other speeds
55
45
are appropriate, the applicable speeds
45
35
are to be shown on the plans.
The 'Proposed Work Zone Speeds' are

recommended speeds for the traffic
control plan detailed below; however,
SPEED
LIMIT
XX
Required Only When Construction Zone Speed Reduced
OPTIONAL
Below Existing Posted Speed Prior To Construction

Median
16'
max.
500'
2140'
1140'
500'
500'
500'
m in.
30'
Work Area
Buffer
Taper Length=L
2L
Taper Length=L
Space
See Table II
See Table II for L
See Table II
See
See Table II for L
Table II
SPEED
SPEED
500'
SPEED
LIMIT
WORK
SPEEDING FINES
1 MILE
DOUBLED
RIGHT LANE
CLOSED
Tangent
See Table I
See Table I
XX
XX
Device Spacing
END
LIMIT
ROAD
LIMIT
ROAD WORK
XX
1
2
MILE
WHEN WORKERS
Table I
Table II
Device Spacing
PRESENT

Speed
(mph)
Type I or Type II
Speed
(mph)
Cones or
Tubular Markers
30 to 45
50 to 70
Taper
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
25
50
25
50
25
25
50
50
30
50
Taper Length
Space
(12' Lateral Transition)
Dist.
Notes
(ft.)
(ft.)
(Merge)
25
155
125
30
200
180
35
250
245
40
305
320
45
360
540
50
425
600
55
495
660
60
570
720
65
645
780
70
730
840
Panels or Drums
25
Buffer
50
WS
L =
60
100
CONDITION NOTES
1. The RIGHT LANE CLOSED and lane reduction signs are to be removed or fully covered
when no work is being performed and the center lane is opened to traffic.
2. For work performed in the median or outside lane, refer to Index No. 613.
L = WS
SYMBOLS
3. When the lane closure exceeds a continuous 24 hour period, all existing pavement
markings within the realignment which conflict with the revised traffic pattern are to be
Work Area
removed and removable pavement marking used for marking new edge lines and centerline.
GENERAL NOTES

formula for L shown in the notes column.
1. When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC zone, additional TTC devices
Where:
Work Zone Sign

shall be placed in accordance with other applicable TCZ Indexes.
11:
38:
37 AM
Length of taper in feet
Width of lateral transition in feet
CONDITIONS
S

ENCROACH ON ANY PORTION OF A
DURATION NOTES
CENTER LANE OF A MULTILANE

1. Temporary pavement markings may be omitted for work operations less than 3 days.
12/3/2015
HIGHWAY, AND TWO DRIVING LANES

ARE MAINTAINED ON THE TRAVEL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
WAY.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, WORK WITHIN
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAVEL WAY, CENTER LANE
NO.
614
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Device Spacing
Tangent
See Table I
See Table I
See Table I

Median
Work Area
500'
2140'
640'
500'
500'
500'
See Condition Note 4
500'
L
Taper Length=L
500'
500'
See Table II
2 (Min.)
2L
Taper Length=L
200'
See Table II for L
See Table II
(Min.)
500'
See Table II
for L
Buffer Space
Optional
ROAD
WORK
RIGHT LANE
TRUCKS
CLOSED
USE
1 MILE
CENTER
MILE
LANE
SPEED
SPEED
XX
See Table II
SPEED
LIMIT
XX
LIMIT
ROAD WORK
XX
XX
Table II
500
SPEEDING FINES
SPEED
END
LIMIT
LIMIT
FEET
DOUBLED
WHEN WORKERS
Speed Reduced Below Existing Posted
PRESENT
Speed Prior To Construction
Table I
Buffer
Taper Length
Speed
Space
(mph)
Dist.
Notes
(ft)
(ft)
(Merge)
25
155
125
30
200
180
35
250
245
Device Spacing
EXISTING
PROPOSED
POSTED
WORK ZONE
SPEED
SPEED
MPH
MPH
65
55
REMARKS
(mph)
The 'Proposed Work Zone Speeds' are
WS
L =
Type I or Type II
Speed
Cones or
Tubular Markers
40
305
320
Taper
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
45
360
540
25
50
25
50
50
425
600
Panels or Drums
60
recommended speeds for the traffic

control plan detailed below; however,
55
45
where the Engineer deems other speeds
25
45
35
are appropriate, the applicable speeds.
30 to 45
25
50
30
50
55
495
660
50 to 70
25
50
50
100
60
570
720
65
645
780
70
730
840
L = WS
CONDITION NOTES

1. See General Notes, Sheet 1.

2. Length of time that traffic is using shoulder should be minimized. For example, remove
lane closure and lane shift at night (unless performing night work) if practical.

3. The RIGHT LANE CLOSED, lane reduction and reverse curve signs are to be removed or
fully covered when no work is being performed and the travel way is open to traffic.
SYMBOLS
4. When the lane closure exceeds a continuous 24 hour period, all existing pavement markings
Work Area
Where:
L
within the realignment which conflict with the revised traffic pattern are to be removed
11:
38:
37 AM
and removable pavement markings used for marking new edge lines and centerlines.
Work Zone Sign
CONDITIONS
WHERE ANY VEHICLE, EQUIPMENT, WORKERS OR THEIR ACTIVITIES
ENCROACH ON ANY PORTION OF A CENTER LANE OF A MULTILANE

12/3/2015
HIGHWAY, AND TWO DRIVING LANES ARE MAINTAINED, AND, THE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
OUTSIDE SHOULDER PAVEMENT IS TEMPORARILY USED AS A TRAVEL LANE.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, WORK WITHIN
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAVEL WAY, CENTER LANE
NO.
614
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
AHEAD
WORK
Table II
ROAD
END
A
ROAD WORK
Taper Length - Merge

Spacing (ft.)
Speed
A
AHEAD
40 mph or less
200
200
200
45 mph
350
350
350
Speed
Notes
(mph)
(ft.)
(Merge)
25
125
CLOSED
RIGHT LANE
30
180
35
245
40
320
45
540
WS
L =
60
L=WS
For lateral transitions other than 12',

use formula for L shown in the notes
ROAD
Taper Length= L
END
ROAD WORK
column. Where:
WORK
AHEAD
GENERAL NOTES
1. The WORKERS legend sign may be substituted for the symbol sign.
2. When vehicles in a parking zone block the line of sight to TCZ signs,
Work Area
the signs shall be post mounted and located in accordance with Index
No. 17302.
3. If the work space extends across a crosswalk, the crosswalk should be

closed using the information in Index No. 660.
A
Taper Length=L
Varies
4. Dual signs are required for divided roadways.
END
ROAD WORK
ROAD
WORK
markers and drums shall not be greater than 25'.
6. Temporary signal phasing modifications are to be approved by the

LEFT LANE
District Traffic Operations Engineer prior to the beginning of work.
CLOSED
AHEAD
AHEAD
5. Maximum spacing between barricades, vertical panels, cones, tubular
ROAD
Index No. 600.
WORK
AHEAD
SYMBOLS
Work Area
END
ROAD WORK

Work Zone Sign
DURATION NOTES
SIGNALIZED
1. Signs and arrow board may be omitted if all of the following

conditions are met:
Stop Bar
CONDITIONS
11:
38:
38 AM


PAVEMENT REQUIRING THE CLOSURE OF AT
LEAST ONE MEDIAN TRAFFIC LANE.

c. No sight obstructions to vehicles approaching the work area
for a distance equal to twice the taper length.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MULTILANE WORK IN INTERSECTION
NO.
615
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
GENERAL NOTES
DURATION NOTES
1. Work operations shall be confined to either one lane, or lane combinations as
1. For work operations up to approximately 15 minutes, signs,
follows:
channelizing devices, and arrow board may be omitted if all of

the following conditions are met:
a. Outside travel lane;

b. Outside auxiliary lane;
c. Outside travel lane and adjoining auxiliary lane;
b. No sight obstructions to vehicles approaching the work area
d. Inside travel lane ;
for a distance equal to twice the taper length.
e. Inside auxiliary lane ;
c. Volume and complexity of the roadway has been considered.
f. Inside travel lane and adjoining auxiliary lane
d. The closed lane is occupied by a class 5 or larger, medium
See Sheet 3
duty truck(s) with a minimum gross weight vehicle rating

(GWVR) of 16,001 lb with high-intensity, rotating, flashing,
If the work area is confined to an auxiliary lane the work area shall be
oscillating, or strobe lights mounted above the cab height and
barricaded and the RIGHT (LEFT) LANE CLOSED AHEAD signs replaced by ROAD
operating.
WORK AHEAD signs, and the merge symbol signs eliminated.

2. For work operations up to 60 minutes, the arrow
2. When vehicles in a parking zone block the line of sight to TCZ signs, the signs
board may be omitted if conditions a, b, and c in
shall be post mounted and located in accordance with Index No. 17302.
DURATION NOTE 1 are met, and vehicles in the work

area have high-intensity, rotating, flashing,
3. If the work space extends across a crosswalk, the crosswalk should be closed
using the information in Index No. 660.
4. Signs are required on the median side for divided highways.
5. The two channelizing devices directly in front and directly at the end of the work
area may be omitted provided vehicles in the work area have high-intensity
rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights operating.
SYMBOLS
Work Area
Work Zone Sign

11:
38:
39 AM
Type III Barricade
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, WORK NEAR INTERSECTION
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
616
SHEET
NO.
1of 3

Spacing (ft.)
Speed
Work Area
*
500'
Taper Length=L
A
40 mph or less
200
200
200
45 mph
350
350
350
500' beyond the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign or

Device
A
See Table II
ROAD
WORK
Device Spacing -Taper
AHEAD
See Table I
Spacing
Tangent
See
END
Table II
Table I
ROAD WORK
RIGHT LANE
Device Spacing
CLOSED
STOP
AHEAD
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
ROAD
Type I or Type II
WHEN WORKERS
Cones or
Speed
WORK
(mph)
AHEAD
Tubular Markers
Panels or Drums
Erect STOP Sign where the existing stop bar is more than
PRESENT
Taper
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
25
25
50
25
50
30 to 45
25
50
30
50
30' from the taper line. Remove or cover existing STOP

sign and reinstall when through lane reopened to traffic.
RIGHT LANE CLOSED ON FAR SIDE OF MINOR SIDESTREET
Table II
AHEAD
WORK

Speed
Notes
(mph)
(ft)
(Merge)
25
125
30
180
35
245
40
320
45
540
WS
ROAD
L =
60
Work Area
L=WS

Device
column. Where:
Spacing
A
Tangent
A
ROAD
500'
See
Table I
END
WORK
AHEAD
RIGHT LANE
ROAD WORK
THRU
MUST
TRAFFIC
TURN RIGHT
MERGE
LEFT
ROAD
SPEEDING FINES
WORK
DOUBLED
AHEAD
WHEN WORKERS
11:
38:
40 AM
PRESENT
RIGHT LANE CLOSED ON FAR SIDE OF INTERSECTION

WITH SIGNIFICANT RIGHT TURNING MOVEMENTS
1.
The normal procedure is to close on the near side of the intersection any lane that
is not carried through the intersection. However, when this results in the closure of
2.
For intersection approaches reduced to a single lane, left turning movements may
be prohibited to maintain capacity for through vehicular traffic.
12/3/2015
a right lane having significant right turning movements, then the right lane may be
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
restricted to right turns only as shown in this detail.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
616
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
ONE WAY
AHEAD
WORK
CLOSED
ROAD
ROAD

Spacing (ft.)
Speed
A
40 mph or less
200
200
200
45 mph
350
350
350
Work Area
*
500' beyond the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign or

500'
Taper Length=L
ROAD
WORK
Spacing
AHEAD
Table I
Device
See Table II
A
Device Spacing
Tangent
See Table I
END
See
Type I or Type II
ROAD WORK
Table II
Speed
Cones or
(mph)
Tubular Markers
Panels or Drums
SPEEDING FINES
LEFT LANE
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
25
25
50
25
50
30 to 45
25
50
30
50
ROAD
CLOSED
CLOSED
DOUBLED
Taper
ROAD
AHEAD
WORK
WHEN WORKERS
ONE WAY
AHEAD
PRESENT
LEFT LANE CLOSED ON FAR SIDE OF MINOR
AHEAD
WORK
SIDESTREET - RESTRICTED TURNING MOVEMENTS
Table II
ROAD
A

Speed
Notes
(mph)
(ft.)
(Merge)
25
125
30
180
35
245
40
320
45
540
Work Area
Taper Length=L
100'
See Table II
Gap
ROAD
*
WORK
Tangent
See Table I
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
column. Where:
END
Table I
AHEAD
L = WS

500'
See
LEFT LANE
60
Device
Spacing
A
WS
L =
ROAD WORK
MUST
TURN LEFT
ROAD
LEFT LANE
CLOSED
WORK
AHEAD
AHEAD
11:
38:
40 AM
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
LEFT LANE CLOSED ON FAR SIDE OF INTERSECTION TURNING MOVEMENTS ALLOWED
1. The normal procedure is to close on the near side of the intersection any lane that is not carried through
12/3/2015
the intersection. However, when this results in the closure of a left lane having significant left turning
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
movements, then the left lane may be reopened as a turn bay for left turns only as show in this detail.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
616
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3

Spacing (ft.)
Speed
A
40 mph or less
200
200
45 mph
350
350
Table I
Device Spacing
Speed
Cones or
(mph)
Tubular Markers
Type I or Type II
Panels or Drums
Work Area
Taper
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
25
25
50
25
50
30 to 45
25
50
30
50
ROAD
A
WORK
AHEAD
Taper Length=L
Buffer Space
END
See Table II
See Table II
ROAD WORK
**
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
Table II
See Table I
See Table I
CENTER LANE
CLOSED
Buffer
Taper Length
Speed
Space
(mph)
Dist.
Notes
(ft.)
(ft.)
(Merge)
25
155
125
AHEAD
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
30
200
180
35
250
245
40
305
320
45
360
540
WS
L =
60
** 500' beyond the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign or

L = WS

GENERAL NOTES
1. Work operations shall be confined to one center travel lane,
leaving the adjacent travel lanes open to traffic.
DURATION NOTES
1. Signs and buffer space may be omitted if all of the following

conditions are met:

2. The merging taper shall direct vehicular traffic into either

the right or left lane, but not both.

b. Speed limit is 45 mph or less.
c. No sight obstructions to vehicles approaching the work area for a
SYMBOLS
3. When vehicles in a parking zone block the line of sight to

TCZ signs, the signs shall be post mounted and located in
Work Area
accordance with Index No. 17302.
distance equal to the buffer space and the taper length combined.
Where:
L
d. Vehicles in the work area have high-intensity, rotating, flashing,

4. If the work space extends across a crosswalk, the crosswalk

should be closed using the information in Index No. 660.
Work Zone Sign

11:
38:
42 AM
5. For general TCZ requirements and additional information,

refer to Index No. 600.
CONDITIONS
PAVEMENT REQUIRING THE CLOSURE OF
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
THE CENTER LANE NEAR AN INTERSECTION.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MULTILANE, WORK IN INTERSECTION CENTER LANE
NO.
617
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Erect STOP Sign And Install Removable Stop Bar
Marking. Remove Or Cover Existing STOP Sign And
Reinstall When Through Lane Reopened To Traffic.
CONDITIONS
STOP
STOP

PAVEMENT REQUIRING THE CLOSURE OF EITHER
THE OUTSIDE AND CENTER TRAVEL LANES
OR THE MEDIAN AND CENTER TRAVEL LANES,
WITH OR WITHOUT CLOSURE OF ADJOINING
Work Area
AUXILIARY LANES, FOR WORK AREA LESS THAN

200' FROM INTERSECTION, FOR A PERIOD OF
MORE THAN 60 MINUTES.
Transition Pattern When

200'
200'
200'
25'
Crossroads 500' Centers
Less Than < L
Use Pattern Below When

Crossroads > 500' Centers
END
RIGHT
ROAD
ROAD WORK
TWO LANES
WORK
CLOSED
AHEAD
AHEAD
CONDITIONS
PAVEMENT REQUIRING THE CLOSURE OF EITHER
STOP
THE OUTSIDE AND CENTER TRAVEL LANES

OR THE MEDIAN AND CENTER TRAVEL LANES,
WITH OR WITHOUT CLOSURE OF ADJOINING
AUXILIARY LANES, FOR WORK AREA 200' OR
MORE FROM INTERSECTION, FOR A PERIOD
OF MORE THAN 60 MINUTES.
Work Area
Table II
200' Taper
200'
200'
200'
25'
200' Or More
ROAD
Use Pattern In Plan Above When Crossroads 500' Centers

S
L = , But Not Less Than 200'.
5
RIGHT
TWO LANES
WORK
CLOSED
AHEAD
Speed
Notes
(mph)
(ft.)
(Merge)
25
125
END
Transition Pattern When Crossroads > 500' Centers
ROAD WORK
30
180
35
245
40
320
45
540
AHEAD
WS
L =
GENERAL NOTES
60
L = WS
1. If the work space extends across a crosswalk, the crosswalk should be closed using the information in
Index No. 660.

2. Signs are required on the median side for divided highways.
SYMBOLS
3. The two channelizing devices directly in front and directly at the end of the work area may be omitted
Work Area
provided vehicles in the work area have high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights
column. Where:
L
operating.
4. Within the lateral transitions, the maximum spacing between cones and tubular markers shall be 25'.
Work Zone Sign
Maximum spacing between Type I or Type II barricades or vertical panels or drums shall be based on
the speed limit as follows: 15' up to 25 MPH; 30' for 30-40 MPH; 50' for 45 MPH.
11:
38:
43 AM

Spacing for devices parallel to the travel lanes shall be 25' centers for cones or tubular markers and
Stop Bar
50' centers for Type I or Type II barricades or vertical panels or drums for 250', thereafter, cones or
tubular markers at 50' centers and Type I or Type II barricades or vertical panels or drums at 100'
12/3/2015
centers.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, WORK IN INTERSECTION
DESIGN STANDARDS
TWO LANES CLOSED - 45MPH OR LESS
NO.
618
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
CAUTION MODE
MOVE/MERGE MODE
SHOULDER
WORK
AW
Work Area
AW
RIGHT
500'-800' Rural
LANE
300'-500' Urban
See Note *
OPTION 1
CLOSED
AHEAD
* The distance between the advance warning sign and the
500'-1500' Rural
300'-500' Urban
work location should not exceed 5 miles.
100'-500' Rural
ROAD
WORK
AHEAD
OPTION 2
50'-300' Urban
WORK ON SHOULDER
OPTION 1: Advanced Warning Vehicle may be operated in the lane behind the Shadow Vehicle
where adequate shoulder width is not available. Approved Truck Mounted Attenuators
are required on both the Advance Warning Vehicle and the Shadow Vehicle.
OPTION 2: Advance Warning Vehicle must be operated in the lane behind the Shadow Vehicle.
Approved Truck Mounted Attenuators are required on both the Advance Warning
Vehicle and the Shadow Vehicle.
WORK WITHIN TRAVEL LANE

(Option 1 Shown, Option 2 Similar)
GENERAL NOTES
1.
These illustrations are representative of general conditions.
6.
If the work vehicle speed exceeds the minimum legal speed limit on
2.
The figures illustrate closing the right shoulder or right lanes for
other facilities, the Engineer may delete requirements for shadow
various lane configurations. When work is required on left side of
vehicle and attenuator. The work vehicle will be required to have
roadways, the inverted plan is to be applied. The intent of this
an arrow board and sign message.
limited access facilities and one half the posted speed limit on
index is to allow passing on only one side of the work convoy.

7.
SYMBOLS
3.
Incidental (i.e. Mowing, Litter Removal), the Engineer may delete
or the enclosure.
requirements for signs and the advance warning vehicle provided
Work Vehicle
Where work activities within 2' of the edge of travel way are
Arrow boards shall not be obscured by equipment, supplies, signs,
vehicles in the work area have high-intensity rotating, flashing,

4.
Vehicle-mounted signs shall be mounted with the bottom of the sign
at a minimum height of 48 inches above the pavement. Vehicle
Shadow (S) Vehicle with Arrow Board
Advance Warning (AW) Vehicle with
AW
Arrow Board and Sign Message

or Changeable Message Sign
mounted changeable message signs may be used in lieu of truck
8.
Work, Shadow, and Advance Warning Vehicles shall have
mounted static signs. Changeable message signs shall flash
high-intensity, rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights
alternately to read "Left or Right Lane" or "Two Left or Two Right
operating.
Lanes", "Closed Ahead", and the arrow symbol. Arrow boards shall
not be used with truck mounted changeable message signs. Sign
legends shall be covered or turned from view when work is not in
9.
Functional two-way communication is required between all vehicles

in the mobile operation convoy.
11:
38:
44 AM
progress.
Lane Identification And Direction Of Traffic

5. On freeway facilities (interstates, toll roads, and expressways), a
Arrow Board
Index No. 600.
traffic control officer is required for all nighttime non-emergency
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
operations for work within the travel lane.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, MOBILE OPERATIONS WORK ON
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHOULDER, WORK WITHIN TRAVEL WAY
NO.
619
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
MOVE/MERGE MODE
2
RIGHT LANES
CLOSED
AHEAD
AW
500'-1500' Rural
500'-1500' Rural
500'-800' Rural
300'-500' Urban
300'-500' Urban
300'-500' Urban
WORK WITHIN TRAVEL WAY, CENTER LANE OR OUTSIDE CENTERLINE

Where adequate shoulder width is not available, the advance warning vehicle may drive in the lane.
MOVE/MERGE MODE
3
RIGHT LANES
CLOSED
AHEAD
SYMBOLS
Work Vehicle
A
S
Shadow (S) Vehicle with Arrow Board
Advance Warning (AW) Vehicle with Arrow
AW
Board and Sign Message or

Changeable Message Sign
11:
38:
44 AM
A
A
AW
Lane Identification And Direction Of Traffic

500'-1500' Rural
500'-1500' Rural
500'-1500' Rural
500'-800' Rural
300'-500' Urban
300'-500' Urban
300'-500' Urban
300'-500' Urban
12/3/2015
Arrow Board
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
WORK WITHIN TRAVEL LANE

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, MOBILE OPERATIONS WORK ON
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHOULDER, WORK WITHIN TRAVEL WAY
NO.
619
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
SCHEME APPLICATIONS
Scheme 1: Restricted Construction Limits.
Scheme 2: Unrestricted Construction Limits
GENERAL NOTES
1. TWO-WAY TRAFFIC sign(s) shall be repeated
And Light To Moderate Traffic.

1
every 4
mile in each direction,
Scheme 3: Unrestricted Construction Limits
throughout the tangent distance (T).
And Moderate To Heavy Traffic.
2. L (min.) = WS for speeds 45 mph
Where: Construction Limits Are The

Outward Beginning Or Ending
WS
= for speeds 40 mph
60
Of Lane Reductions.
Where:
Where: Unless A Specific Scheme Is
W= Width of lateral transition in feet.
Called For In The Plans, Scheme
S= Posted speed limit (mph).
Selection Shall Be At The Contractor's

Option And As Approved By The
3. Where the tangent distance (T) exceeds 250', spacing between Type I or II
Engineer.
barricades or vertical panels or drums may be increased to 100' within the limits
of the tangent, or post mounted delineators at 50' centers may be substituted
for barricades, vertical panels or drums.
4. All existing pavement markings within the realignment which conflict with the
revised traffic pattern are to be removed and removable pavement markings used
for making new edge lines.
5. When side roads, cross roads or interchanges intersects the highway within the
TTC zone, additional TTC devices shall be placed in accordance with other
applicable TCZ Indexes.
SYMBOLS
Work Area
CONDITIONS

Work Zone Sign
REQUIRE THE CLOSURE OF ONE

ROADWAY AND THE OPPOSING
11:
38:
45 AM
ROADWAY IS CONVERTED TO
TEMPORARY TWO-WAY TRAVEL BY
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
WAY OF CROSSOVERS.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, DIVIDED
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
620
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
SPEED
SPEED
LIMIT
BUFFER LENGTH (FEET)
LIMIT
Type I Or Type II Barricades Or Vertical Panels Or Drums At 50' Centers
XX
XX
Construction
ROAD
(ft)
(ft)
DO
Zone Speed
CLOSED
SPEED
630
55
360
510
50
180
380
1000 FT
500'
100'
(T)
500'
500'
1500 FT
500'
500'
WORK
WORK
1
1 MILE
MILE
640'
500'
2140'
500'
(See Chart
Yellow Removable Reflectorized
Temporary Concrete
Upper Left)
(See Chart
ROAD
CLOSED
PASS
ROAD WORK
XX
560
LEFT LANE
NOT
END
LIMIT
MPH
60-70
LEFT LANE
Upper Left)
Pavement Marking
Barrier Wall
100'
1:
20
Yellow Removable Reflectorized Pavement Marking
20
1:
White Removable Reflectorized Pavement Marking
KEEP
Crash
1:
20
RIGHT
Cushion
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
100'
WHEN WORKERS
Work Area
PRESENT
2140' 500'
640'
500'
500'
500'
500'
500'
*
500'
SPEED
LIMIT
Cushion
*
*
100'
Crash
SPEED
XX
DO
END
LIMIT
NOT
RIGHT LANE
XX
SPEED
CLOSED
LIMIT
ROAD
Where Other Construction Or Maintenance Operations
ROAD WORK
SCHEME 1
PASS
1000 FT
XX
Occur Within 1 Mile, Sign(s) To Be Coordinated In
ROAD
RIGHT LANE
WORK
WORK
1
1 MILE
Accordance With Index No. 600 (All Schemes)
CLOSED
MILE
1500 FT
END
ROAD WORK
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
DO
WHEN WORKERS
SPEED
PRESENT
500'
LIMIT
Maximum As Called For In The Plans Or As
100'
XX
(T)
Z
(See Chart
Temporary
Upper Left)
Sign Shields And
NOT
PASS
Approved By The Engineer (2L Minimum)
Spacings Same As Above
Traffic Separator
Pavement Marking
100'
KEEP
20
1:
1:
20
100'
RIGHT
Work Area
L
Crash
DO
100'
NOT
Sign Shields And
Cushion
PASS
*
500'
SPEED
LIMIT
Spacings Same As Above
XX
SCHEME 2
END
ROAD WORK
END
ROAD WORK

DO
*
SPEED
500'
LIMIT
NOT
(See Chart
100'
XX
(T)
(See Chart
Upper Left)
PASS
Upper Left)
120'
Same As Above
Temporary Traffic Separator
Pavement Marking
Crash Cushion
100'
1:
20
Temporary Asphalt Separator

20
1:
1:
20
Te
mp
or
ar
yB
Crash Cushion
ar
r
i
er
Wa
l
l
KEEP
RIGHT
100'
11:
38:
48 AM
Work Area
L
Crash
DO
NOT
100'
Cushion
*
500'
SPEED
LIMIT
PASS
Same As Above
12/3/2015
SCHEME 3
XX
Required Only When Construction

Zone Speed Reduced Below Existing
END
ROAD WORK
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
Note: See Sheet 1 for Scheme Applications
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, DIVIDED
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
620
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
ROAD
ROAD
DO
NOT
LEFT LANE
LEFT LANE
CLOSED
CLOSED
1000 FT
1500 FT
WORK
1
2
WORK
MILE
1 MILE
PASS
END
ROAD WORK
Yellow Removable
500'
(T)
Reflectorized
Taper Length
Taper Length
See Table II
See Table II
500'
500'
500'
1140'
2140'
500'
Pavement Marking
KEEP
RIGHT
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT

100'
500'
2140'
1140'
500'
500'
500'
Work Area
Taper Length=L
See Table II
Taper Length=L
See Table II
100'
Taper Length=L
See Table II
500'
Type I or Type II Barricades Or

Vertical Panels Or Drums At 50' Centers
ROAD
DO
RIGHT LANE
WORK
CLOSED
1 MILE
1500 FT
RIGHT LANE
CLOSED
1000 FT
ROAD
NOT
CLOSED
PASS
END
ROAD WORK
ROAD
SPEEDING FINES
WORK
DOUBLED
1
2
WHEN WORKERS
MILE
PRESENT
GENERAL NOTES
1.
TWO-WAY TRAFFIC signs shall be repeated every
1
4
Table II
mile in each
direction, through the tangent distance (T).
2.
When paved shoulders having a width of 8 ft. or more are
Speed
(mph)
L
(ft.)
25
125
30
180
35
245
40
320
closed, channelizing devices shall be used to close the shoulder

in advance of the merging taper to direct vehicular traffic to
remain within the travel way. See Index No. 612 for shoulder
taper formulas.
SYMBOLS
Work Area
3.
WS
L=
60
Where the tangent distance (T) exceeds 250', spacing between

45
540
between Type I or Type II barricades or vertical panels or
50
600
drums may be increased to 100' within the limits of the tangent.
55
660
60
720
65
780
70
840
cones or tubular markers may be increased to 50' or spacing

Notes
(Merge)
L=WS
Type III Barricade
4.
This index does not apply when work is being performed in the
middle lane(s) of a six or more lane highway. Special
Work Zone Sign
maintenance of traffic details will be required.
CONDITIONS

11:
38:
48 AM
5.
When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC zone,
For lateral transitions other than 12' use
Where:
REQUIRE THE CLOSURE OF THE LANES
additional TTC devices shall be placed in accordance with other

6.
IN ONE DIRECTION AND A DIVERSION
IS PROVIDED BY UTILIZING ONE LANE
OF THE OPPOSING TRAFFIC LANES.
For general TCZ requirements and additional information, refer
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
to Index No. 600.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, UNDIVIDED
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
621
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
WHEN WORKERS
LEFT LANE
CLOSED
ROAD
PRESENT
WORK
AHEAD
CONDITIONS
AHEAD
CTR
END
200' (Min.)
ROAD WORK
200'
200'
200'
Reduced Device Spacing Run
TRAFFIC LANES IN ONE DIRECTION AND

THE USE OF ONE OPPOSING TRAFFIC
LANE TO MAINTAIN TWO-WAY TRAFFIC,
See Duration Note
FOR WORK AREA LESS THAN 200' FROM

INTERSECTION, FOR A PERIOD OF MORE
THAN 60 MINUTES.
White Removable Reflectorized
Work Area
See Duration Note
Pavement Marking See Duration Note
200'
200'
200'
200'
25'
Less Than
END
STOP
ROAD WORK
200'
*
CTR
ROAD
WORK
SPEEDING FINES
AHEAD
DOUBLED
RIGHT LANE
CLOSED
AHEAD
SPEEDING FINES
WHEN WORKERS
DOUBLED
PRESENT
ROAD
LEFT LANE
CLOSED
WHEN WORKERS
WORK
PRESENT
AHEAD
AHEAD
CONDITIONS
CTR
200' (Min.)
END
200'
200'
200'
ROAD WORK


See Duration Note
TRAFFIC LANES IN ONE DIRECTION AND
See Duration Note
THE USE OF ONE OPPOSING TRAFFIC

LANE TO MAINTAIN TWO-WAY TRAFFIC,
FOR WORK AREA 200' OR MORE FROM

See Duration Note
Work Area
INTERSECTION, FOR A PERIOD OF MORE
See Duration Note
THAN 60 MINUTES.
200'
200'
200'
200'
END
More Than 200'
ROAD
ROAD WORK
Reduced Device
*
WORK
AHEAD
Spacing Run See

General Note No. 4
CTR
SPEEDING FINES
When Other Construction Or Maintenance

Operations Occur Within 1 Mile, Sign To Be
RIGHT LANE
CLOSED
DOUBLED
Omitted And Signing To Be Coordinated In
AHEAD
WHEN WORKERS
Accordance With Index No. 600.
PRESENT
SYMBOLS
Work Area
GENERAL NOTES
1. When vehicles in a parking zone block the line of sight to TCZ signs or when TCZ
Ch
a
n
n
e
l
i
zi
n
g De
v
i
c
e(
Se
eI
n
d
e
x No
.6
0
0
)
signs encroach on a normal pedestrian walkway, the signs shall be post mounted
DURATION NOTE
and located in accordance with Index No. 17302.

Type III Barricade
Removable reflectorized pavement markings

2. Dual signs are required for divided roadways.
shall be used when closure time exceeds one
Work Zone Sign

11:
38:
49 AM
daylight period.
3. Channelizing devices are to be spaced with Type I or Type II barricades or

vertical panels or drums at 30' centers in tapers, 50' centers in tangent sections
Stop Bar
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
and 15' centers where reduced device spacing runs are identified in the drawing.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE WORK NEAR INTERSECTION-TEMPORARY
DESIGN STANDARDS
DIVERSION CONNECTION - 35MPH OR LESS
NO.
622
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Median
D
White Reflectorized
Pavement Markings
Taper Length=L
Tangent= 2L
Taper Length=L
Buffer Space
(See Table II)
(See Table II)
(See Table II)
(See Table II)
Device Spacing-
Device Spacing-
(Taper See Table I)
(See Table I)
Taper (See Table I)
(See Table I)
500'
Work Area
***
ROAD
RIGHT LANE
WORK
AHEAD
SPEEDING FINES
CLOSED
DOUBLED
AHEAD
END
ROAD WORK
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
Table II
1.
Taper Length
Speed
A
GENERAL NOTES
Spacing (ft.)
D**
Buffer
Space
(12' Lateral
40 mph or less
200
200
200
Speed
45 mph
350
350
350
(mph)
50 mph
500
500
500
*55 mph or greater
2640
1640
1000
Work operations shall be confined to the two outside traffic

lanes, leaving the adjacent lane(s) open to traffic.
Tangent
Transition)
2.
Dist.
Notes
2L
(ft.)
(ft.)
(Merge)
(ft.)
25
155
125
250
30
200
180
360
On undivided highways the median signs as shown are to be

omitted.
3.
* The ROAD WORK 1 MILE sign may be used as an

alternate to the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign MILE
highways, the channelizing device plan is inverted and left
WS
L =
sign may be used as an alternate to the RIGHT
35
250
245
LANE CLOSED AHEAD sign.
40
305
320
640
45
360
540
1080
50
425
600
1200
55
495
660
1320
lanes closed and lane ends signs substituted for the right
490
60
When work is performed in the median lane on divided
lanes closed and lane end signs.
4.
** See Table II for L
When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC zone,
additional TTC devices shall be placed in accordance with other
*** 500' beyond the ROAD WORK AHEAD sign or

Table I
L = WS
60
570
720
65
645
780
1440
1560
70
730
840
1680
When Buffer Space cannot be attained due to geometric

constraints, the greatest attainable length shall be used,
(mph)
When paved shoulders having a width of 8 ft. or more are

closed, channelizing devices shall be used to close the shoulder
SYMBOLS
For general TCZ requirements and additional information, refer

to Index No. 600.
6.
Device Spacing
Speed
5.
Type I or Type II
Cones or
in advance of the merging taper to direct vehicular traffic to

remain within the travel way. See Index No. 612 for shoulder
taper formulas.
Tubular Markers
Panels or Drums
Taper
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
25
25
50
25
50
30 to 45
25
50
30
50
50 to 70
25
50
50
100
For lateral transitions other than 12', use formula for L

shown in the notes column.
Work Area
Where:
11:
38:
50 AM
Work Zone Sign
L= Length of taper in feet

W= Width of lateral transition in feet
S= Posted speed limit (mph)
CONDITIONS
omitted for work operations less
than three (3) days.
TWO LANES ADJACENT TO EITHER SHOULDER.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DURATION
Temporary white edgeline may be
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE, WORK WITHIN THE TRAVEL WAY
DESIGN STANDARDS
DOUBLE LANE CLOSURE
NO.
623
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
ROAD
BE
PREPARED
TO STOP
WORK
AHEAD
Buffer
Space
Work Area
Buffer
B
ROAD
BE
PREPARED
TO STOP
Space
WORK
AHEAD
Buffer
ROAD
BE
PREPARED
TO STOP
WORK
AHEAD
Space
TWO-LANE, TWO-WAY
BUFFER SPACE
Speed
Dist.
(mph)
(ft.)
25
155
30
200
35
250
40
305
45
360
50
425
55
495
60
570
65
645
Median
ROAD
WORK
SYMBOLS
Work Area
Buffer
A
AHEAD
Speed
Spacing (ft.)
(mph)
40 or less
200
200
200
45
350
350
350
50 or greater
500
500
500
Space
BE
PREPARED
TO STOP
MULTILANE
GENERAL NOTES
1. This Index does not apply to limited access facilities.
2. When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC zone, additional TTC devices shall be placed in
accordance with applicable TCZ Indexes.
3. Traffic volume or complexity of the roadway may dictate additional devices, signs, flagmen and/or a traffic
Work Area
control officer.
4. The buffer space may be omitted if there are no sight obstructions to vehicles approaching the
Work Zone Sign
Flagger
Flagger/Officer for distance equal to the buffer space.
5. A Flagger may be substituted for a Traffic Control Officer and the BE PREPARED TO STOP sign may be
omitted, when the following conditions are met:
Traffic Control Officer

b. No sight obstructions to vehicles approaching the Flagger/Officer for a distance equal to the buffer space.
11:
38:
51 AM
c. Vehicles in the work area have high-intensity, rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights operating.
CONDITIONS
6. On undivided highways the median sign as shown are to be omitted.
PLANNED CLOSURE NOT

EXCEEDING 5 MINUTES.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
7. For general TCZ requirements and additional information refer to FDOT Index No. 600.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TEMPORARY ROAD CLOSURE 5 MINUTES OR LESS
NO.
625
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
ROAD
WORK
Occur Within 1 Mile, Sign(s) Are To Be Coordinated
AHEAD
In Accordance With Index No. 600.

END
ROAD WORK
200'
200'
200' Taper
100' Buffer
200'
200'
AW
AW
100' Buffer
200' Taper
200'
200'
Maximum Spacing Between Cones And Tubular Markers Shall Be 25'. Maximum Spacing Between Type I Or Type II Barricades Or Vertical Panels
END
Or Drums Shall Be Based On The Speed Limit As Follows: 15' Up To 25 MPH; 30' For 30-40 MPH: 50' For 45 MPH Or Greater.
ROAD WORK
When Other Construction Or Maintenance
ROAD
Operations Occur Within 1 Mile, Sign(s) Are To Be
WORK
Coordinated In Accordance With Index No. 600.
AHEAD
SYMBOLS
Work Area
Work Zone Sign
Work Vehicle With Rotating/Strobe Lights
Shadow (S) Or Advance Warning (AW)

X
Vehicle with Advance Warning Arrow
GENERAL NOTES
1. Work operations shall be confined to two way left turn lane, leaving the adjacent lanes
open to traffic.
Board and Sign Message

2. Advance Warning Vehicle will have an Advanced Warning Arrow Board in the Warning Mode.
CONDITIONS
11:
38:
53 AM
3. When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC zone, additional TTC devices
shall be placed in accordance with other applicable TCZ Indexes.

WORKERS OR THEIR ACTIVITIES ARE
BEING CONDUCTED IN THE TWO WAY
LEFT TURN LANE.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TWO WAY LEFT TURN LANE CLOSURE
NO.
628
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
When This Sign Conflicts With ROAD WORK

These Signs Advance
The ROAD WORK
With Taper Transition
RIGHT LANE
1
2
1
2
MILE Sign,
MILE Sign Shall Be Temporarily Removed.
CLOSED
RIGHT LANE
1000 FT
CLOSED
TRUCKS
ENTERING
Paving Train (Milling And/Or Placement)
MILE
Varies
HIGHWAY
500' Min.
Varies
1000'
1640'
Project Advance Warning Signing
Sign No. 3
500' Min.
Sign No. 1
500' Min.
Sign No. 3
1000' Min.
1000' Min.
Crossover
Sign No. 2
(F)
Sign No. 1
CONDITION A
MERGE
RIGHT ON
These Signs Advance
LEFT LANE
TRUCKS
FLASHING
TURNING
ARROW
CLOSED
See GENERAL NOTE 5
WHEN THE PAVING TRAIN IS IN LANE THE
With Taper Transition
1000 FT
LEFT
TRUCKS
000 FT
ENTERING
LEFT LANE
U-TURNING VEHICLE SHALL CAUTIOUSLY TURN INTO
CLOSED
1
LANE AND PROCEED IN LANE TO THE
MILE
HIGHWAY
CONDITION A
Same As Above
1000'
1640'
Same As Above
FRONT OF THE TRAIN.
Paving Train (Milling And/Or Placement)

Varies
500' Min.
Sign No. 3
500'Min.
U-TURNING VEHICLE SHALL CAUTIOUSLY TURN

INTO LANE , AND PROCEED IN LANE TO
THE FRONT OF THE PAVING TRAIN.
1000' Min.
500'
Crossover
Sign No. 1
CONDITION B
Sign No. 2
500'
Sign No. 3
(F)
CONDITION A & B
THE ADVANCE WARNING ARROW BOARDS ARE
Sign No. 1
TRUCKS
MERGE
TURNING
RIGHT ON
LEFT
FLASHING
000 FT
ARROW
REQUIRED. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL
CONDITION B
THE TRAFFIC TRANSITION BE LOCATED WITHIN

THE LIMITS OF THE CROSSOVER.
TRAFFIC TRANSITION AREA UPSTREAM FROM CROSSOVER
CASE I
SYMBOLS
Work Area
GENERAL NOTES
Work Zone Sign
1. This index does not apply to limited access facilities.
4. Within the lateral transitions, the maximum spacing between cones and tubular markers shall be 25'. Maximum spacing
between Type I or Type II barricades or vertical panels or drums shall be based on the speed limit as follows: 15'
2. When crossovers do not exist, the contractor will construct

Advance Warning Arrow Board - Type C (48"x 96")
up to 25 MPH; 30' for 30-40 MPH; 50' for 45 MPH or greater.
temporary crossovers in accordance with Index No. 631.

Spacing for devices parallel to the travel lanes shall be 25' centers for cones or tubular markers and 50' for Type I
Advance Warning Arrow Board - Type C (48"x 96")

3. L
(F)
Length of taper in feet:
WS for speeds 45 mph

WS
for speeds 40 mph
60
Trailer Mounted And Actuated By Flagger Upon

Approach Of The Work Vehicle
=
Work Vehicle
11:
38:
53 AM
Lane Number
5. For Case I, Condition A, when the median width is too narrow for trucks to make turns into Lane No. 2, Sign Nos. 1, 2,
3 and the Flagger Actuated Advance Warning Arrow Board shall be moved ahead to a crossover in advance of the
Where:
or Type II barricades or vertical panels or drums.
paving lane taper. Project advance warning signs (not shown) shall be located in advance of the relocated Sign No. 3.
= Width of lateral transition in feet.
= Posted speed limit (mph).
6. For Case II, Conditions A & B, when the median width is too narrow for trucks to make turns into Lane No. 2, Sign
Nos. 1, 2, 3 and the Flagger Actuated Advance Warning Arrow Board shall be moved ahead to a crossover in advance of
the 'RIGHT LANE CLOSED
1
2
MILE' sign. Project advance warning signs (not shown) shall be located in advance of the
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
relocated Sign No. 3.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
CROSSOVER FOR PAVING TRAIN
DESIGN STANDARDS
OPERATIONS, RURAL
NO.
630
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
When This Sign Conflicts With ROAD WORK

1
WORK 2
ROAD
RIGHT LANE
1
2
MILE Sign, the
RIGHT LANE
CLOSED
CLOSED
These Signs Advance
1000 FT
MILE
TRUCKS
With Crossover Signing
ENTERING
HIGHWAY
Paving Train
1000'
1500'
(Milling And/Or Placement)

Sign No. 3
500' Min.
Sign No. 1
500' Min.
Sign No. 2
Crossover
1000' Min.
(F)
Sign No. 3
1500' Min.
CONDITION A
Sign No. 1
U-TURNING VEHICLE SHALL CAUTIOUSLY TURN INTO
MERGE
RIGHT ON
LANE AND PROCEED IN LANE TO THE
FLASHING
TRUCKS
FRONT OF THE TRAIN.
ARROW
TURNING
See GENERAL NOTE 6
LEFT
000 FT
CONDITION B
CONDITION A

U-TURNING VEHICLE SHALL TURN INTO LANE ,
When This Sign Conflicts With ROAD CONSTRUCTION
the ROAD WORK
1
2
1
2
MILE Sign,
CAUTIOUSLY MERGE INTO LANE AND PROCEED

TO THE FRONT OF THE PAVING TRAIN.
LEFT LANE
CLOSED
1000 FT
These Signs Advance
LEFT LANE
CLOSED
With Crossover Signing
TRUCKS
CONDITION A & B
ENTERING
MILE
HIGHWAY
THE ADVANCE WARNING ARROW BOARD IS

Paving Train
1000'
1500'
(Milling And/Or Placement)
REQUIRED. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL

THE TRAFFIC TRANSITION BE LOCATED WITHIN
Sign No. 3
THE LIMITS OF THE CROSSOVER.
500' Min.
Sign No. 1
500' Min.
Crossover
1000' Min.
(F)
Sign No. 2
Sign No. 3
1500' Min.
Sign No. 1
MERGE
RIGHT ON
FLASHING
TRUCKS
TURNING
ARROW
See GENERAL NOTE 6
LEFT
000 FT
CONDITION B
11:
38:
54 AM
TRAFFIC TRANSITION AREA DOWNSTREAM FROM CROSSOVER
CASE II
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Note: See Sheet 1 for General Notes.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
CROSSOVER FOR PAVING TRAIN
DESIGN STANDARDS
OPERATIONS, RURAL
NO.
630
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
TRUCKS
ENTERING
HIGHWAY
500'
LENGTH OF ACCESS LANES (Ft.)

D
2% or less
590'
1540'
3 to 4% Upgrade
530'
2310'
3 to 4% Downgrade
710'
925'
Grade
24'
30' Min.
A
12'
Exist. Shldr. Pavt.
D Accel
350' Taper
75'
TRUCKS
HIGHWAY
D Decel
300' Taper
ENTERING
Mitered End Section
Exist. Shldr. Pavt.
24'
12'
See Index No. 273
PLAN
GENERAL NOTES
1. Temporary median crossovers shall be within the project limits and shall not be used
for transporting materials to or from any other project. The acceleration-deceleration
12'
12'
surfaces shall be paved. RAP material is acceptable for crossing surfacing.
Existing
Existing
Roadway
Paved
Widening
2'
2'
Widening
Shoulder
Existing
Existing
Paved
Roadway
Shoulder
distance. On limited access facilities temporary median crossovers shall not be located
within 1.5 miles of interchanges nor within 2000 ft. of acceleration-deceleration lanes at
rest areas, other access openings or other highway service areas.
Match Slope Of Existing Paved Shoulder
1:4 Or Flatter
2. Temporary median crossovers shall be located only in areas having adequate sight
3. For paving train operations at permanent crossovers, see Index No. 630.
1:4 Or Flatter
4. All traffic control devices are to be removed when crossover will not be in use for one
hour or longer.
5. Trailer mounted advance warning panel may be used in lieu of advance warning vehicle.
SECTION AA
6. When a crossover is no longer needed, all temporary construction shall be immediately
removed and the area restored to its original condition.
5'
30'
5'
7. Cost of construction, maintenance, removal and restoration work related to temporary
Mitered End Section
'
2
2
'
Mitered End Section
6
1:
crossovers shall be included in the contract unit price for Maintenance of Traffic, LS.
8. Temporary crossovers on limited access right of way and use of this Index are
prohibited unless specifically permitted in the Contract Plans or Special Provisions.
When permitted in the Contract Plans or Special Provisions and prior to construction of
any temporary crossover, the Contractor must submit, in writing, a request identifying
SECTION BB
11:
38:
55 AM
specific locations for approval by the Engineer.
SYMBOLS
9. Pipe and mitered end sections are not required when crossover is located at the high
Work Zone Sign
point of a crest vertical curve.

Temporary Pavement
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TEMPORARY CROSSOVER FOR MEDIAN WIDTHS 75'
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TEMPORARY CROSSOVER
NO.
631
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
TRUCKS
LANE ENDS
ENTERING
HIGHWAY
MERGE
RIGHT
30' Min.
Exist. Shldr. Pavt.

D Accel.
LANE ENDS
MERGE
RIGHT
50'
D Decel.
Exist. Shldr. Pavt.
Varies 75' to < 100'
AW
Exist. Shldr. Pavt.

500'
500'
Mitered End Section

See Index No. 273
AW

L
STAY
Grade
2% or less
590
1540
3 to 4% Upgrade
530
2310
3 to 4% Downgrade
710
925
IN YOUR
500'
500'
LANE
NOTE
SYMBOLS
1. A lane closure analysis will be required to determine the
times of day that this crossover can be in operation.
Temporary Pavement
Maximum Spacing Between Cones And Tubular Markers Shall Be 25'
Work Zone Sign
L (Min.) = WS
S = Existing Posted Speed (MPH)
11:
38:
56 AM
AW
Advance Warning Vehicle
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TEMPORARY CROSSOVER FOR MEDIAN WIDTHS FROM 50' TO < 75'
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TEMPORARY CROSSOVER
NO.
631
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
ROAD
SPEEDING FINES
WORK
DOUBLED
1500 FT
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
SPEED
LIMIT
Shoulder Pavement (To Become Permanent
LIMIT
**
XX
When Shoulder Pavement Called For In Plans)

DOUBLED
LIMIT
WHEN WORKERS
ROAD
500'
1500'
Shoulder 6' Min.
500'
200'(Min.)
200'(Min.)
6' Min. (Temp.)
200'(Min.)
2' (Min.)
500'
500'
**
***
Alignment In Conformance
*
SPEED
END
LIMIT
With Roadway Plans
PHASE I
SPEED
ROAD WORK
XX
ROAD WORK
LIMIT
LIMIT
ROAD
XX
WORK
500'
1500'
**
SPEED
2640'
2' (Min.)
(See Step 2)
ROAD
1 MILE
640'
(See Step 2)
2640'
**
500'
200' (Min.)
500'
640'
WORK
**
Proposed 4-Lane Roadway
Temporary
PRESENT
**
NEXT X MILES
ROAD WORK
XX
500'
XX
ROAD WORK
END
4'
SPEED
4'
SPEEDING FINES
SPEED
NEXT X MILES
XX
WORK
1500 FT
1 MILE
1. Maintain two-lane two-way traffic over existing pavement. Construct new roadway within the proposed 4-lane
limits, excluding the friction course. Sign as shown if roadway construction area falls within 15' of existing
pavement edge. When the construction area falls more than 15' from the existing pavement edge, traffic shall be
controlled in accordance with Index No. 601 or 602.
2. Construct shoulder pavement to provide two-lane two-way traffic over shoulder and existing pavement during
ROAD
WORK
Phase II roadway construction. For lane width requirements see Index No. 600. Signing as shown, with the near
ROAD
1500 FT
WORK
1500' zone modified in accordance with Index No. 603, to be in place prior to shoulder pavement construction.
1 MILE
SPEED
ROAD
LIMIT
SPEED
LIMIT
WORK
END
**
SPEEDING FINES
ROAD WORK
XX
SPEED
DOUBLED
XX
1000 Feet
**
WHEN WORKERS
LIMIT
PRESENT
XX
200'(Min.)
500'
500'
**
ROAD WORK
500'
500'
500'
500'
NEXT X MILES
500'
500'
500'
640'
2640'
500'
100'
100'
Double Yellow Reflectorized Pavement Markings
500'
100'
2640'
640'
500'
500'
500'
500'
500'
Transition
**
*
ROAD
WORK
SPEED
LIMIT
ROAD
1000 Feet
XX
WORK
1 MILE
500'
Transition
100'
500'
500'
**
200'
ROAD WORK
SPEEDING FINES
500'
(Min.)
NEXT X MILES
**
SPEED
***
END
DOUBLED
LIMIT
WHEN WORKERS
XX
PRESENT
SPEED
ROAD WORK
LIMIT
ROAD
XX
WORK
PHASE II
1500 FT
1. Remove existing pavement marking in areas of diversion and remark as shown,

install warning devices and resign as shown. Traffic to be controlled in accordance
with Index No. 607. For lane width requirements see Index No. 600.
SYMBOLS
* Required For Projects > 2 Miles
2. Route through traffic to temporary and existing pavement.
** Required Only When Construction

3. Construct transitions, excluding friction course.

LEGEND
11:
38:
58 AM
*** When Other Construction Or

Phase I Construction
Work Zone Sign

Note: See Sheet 2 for General Notes.
Phase II Construction
Maintenance Operations Occur Within

1 Mile, Sign(s) To Be Omitted And
Signing To Be Coordinated In
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Phase III Construction
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
CONVERTING TWO LANES TO FOUR LANES
DESIGN STANDARDS
DIVIDED, RURAL
NO.
640
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
ROAD
WORK
1000FT
SPEED
LIMIT
END
XX
SPEEDING FINES
ROAD WORK
ROAD
ROAD
CLOSED
CLOSED
ROAD
SPEED
WORK
LIMIT
ROAD
SPEED
WORK
LIMIT
1500FT
XX
1 MILE
XX
DOUBLED
**
ROAD WORK
**
WHEN WORKERS
**
NEXT X MILES
500'
PRESENT
500'
500'
500'
500'
500'
500'
640'
2640'
100'
200'
2640'
500'
640'
500'
500'
500'
*
500'
500'
SPEEDING FINES
ROAD WORK
Double Yellow
**
NEXT X MILES
**
XX
WORK
XX
SPEED
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
LIMIT
ROAD WORK
XX
1500FT
WORK
Yellow Reflectorized Markings (Double Yellow
ROAD
1 MILE
**
END
LIMIT
LIMIT
ROAD
***
600' (Min.)
Pavement Markings
ROAD
DOUBLED
500'
Reflectorized
SPEED
SPEED
600' (Min.)
In No Passing Zones As Directed By Engineer)
WORK
1000FT
PHASE III
1. Remove temporary marking from the existing pavement and temporary shoulder pavement. Mark
pavement, install warning devices and resign as shown. Traffic to be controlled in accordance with
Index No. 607. For lane width requirements see Index No. 600.
2. Route through traffic to newly constructed roadway.
3. Resurface or reconstruct existing pavement including required shoulder pavement and friction course.
* Required For Projects > 2 Miles
PHASE IV
** Required Only When Construction Zone
1. Reroute through traffic as shown in Phase II. Signing to be as shown in Phase II.
Speed Reduced Below Existing Posted
Speed Prior To Construction
2. Construct friction course over pavement constructed in Phases I and II.
*** When Other Construction Or Maintenance
Operations Occur Within 1 Mile, Sign(s) To
GENERAL NOTES
Be Omitted And Signing To Be Coordinated

1. Existing signs and pavement markings that conflict with
5. For speed sign applications, see 'Regulatory Speed

In Accordance With Index No. 600.
construction signing and marking shall be obliterated or
In Work Zones' Index No. 600.
removed.
6. For reflectorized raised pavement marker
SYMBOLS
2. Lane widths for maintenance of two-way traffic should

desirably be equal to lane widths of the existing facility,
and Index No. 17352.
but lanes shall be not less than 10' in width. When one-lane
one-way operations are necessary, a minimum width of 12'
Type III Barricade
applications, see 'Pavement Markers' Index No. 600
LEGEND
7. Additional barricades, signing, or other traffic
shall be maintained and traffic controlled in accordance
controls shall be provided for limited work areas in
with Index Nos. 603 and 607. Minimum width for the
temporary shoulders is 6'.

8. When a side road intersects the highway within the

Work Zone Sign
3. Within the lateral transitions, the maximum spacing between

Type I or Type II barricades or vertical panels or drums
TTC zone, additional TTC devices shall be placed in

shall be based on the speed limit as follows: 15' up to 25

MPH; 30'-40 MPH; 50' for 45 MPH or greater.
9. Provisions approved by the Engineer shall be made
11:
38:
59 AM
for the removal of storm water from the

The maximum spacing between warning devices used for
roadway(s) during construction.
delineation between the travel way and construction area is

50' for Type I or Type II barricades or vertical panels or
12/3/2015
drums.
10. For general TCZ requirements and additional

information, refer to Index No. 600.
4. Warning devices shall be in conformance with 'Dropoffs In
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
Work Zones', see Index No. 600.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DIVIDED, RURAL
NO.
640
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
AHEAD
AHEAD
AHEAD
WORK
WORK
WORK
ROAD
ROAD
ROAD
Required For
Projects >2 Miles
PRESENT
PRESENT
WHEN WORKERS
WHEN WORKERS
DOUBLED
DOUBLED
PRESENT
SPEEDING FINES
ROAD
WHEN WORKERS
WORK
ROAD WORK
500'
Bar Marking. Remove
500'
500'
SPEEDING FINES
Install Removable Stop
DOUBLED
SPEEDING FINES
Erect STOP Sign And
WHEN WORKERS
NEXT X MILES
AHEAD
PRESENT
DOUBLED
SPEEDING FINES
CTR
Existing STOP Sign And
KEEP
200'
Reinstall When Through
200'
ROAD WORK
STOP
END
400'
LEFT
Lane Reopened To Traffic.
Temporary Guide Lines
400'
Temporary Pavement
200'
Temporary Pavement
Temporary
When Other Construction Or

END
White Reflectorized Pavt. Markings
ROAD
Guide Lines
Maintenance Operations Occur

Pavt. Markings
DOUBLED
500'
SPEEDING FINES
500'
500'
ROAD WORK
WORK
AHEAD
SPEEDING FINES
Within 1 Mile, Sign(s)

SPEEDING FINES
WHEN WORKERS
DOUBLED
DOUBLED
PRESENT
WHEN WORKERS
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
PRESENT
SPEEDING FINES
To Be Omitted And Signing To

Be Coordinated In Accordance
With Index No. 600.
DOUBLED
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
ROAD WORK
ROAD
ROAD
NEXT X MILES
CTR
ROAD
WORK
WORK
WORK
AHEAD
AHEAD
AHEAD
Required For
Projects > 2 Miles
PHASE I
1. Maintain two-lane two-way traffic along existing facility. Install construction signing.
2. Remark existing pavement to facilitate temporary pavement construction. For lane width requirements see Index No. 600.
3. Construct temporary pavement of sufficient width to accommodate two-lane two-way traffic on the temporary pavement and a
portion of the existing pavement during Phase I roadway construction. When two-lane two-way traffic can not be maintained
during temporary pavement construction one-lane operations shall be maintained in accordance with Index No. 605. Channelizing
devices shall be in conformance with 'Drop-Offs in Work Zones' of Index No. 600.
4. Mark the pavement in accordance with the Phase I diagram. Reroute through traffic to the temporary pavement and a portion of
SYMBOLS
Type III Barricade
the existing pavement. For lane width requirements see Index No. 600.
5. Construct two lanes of the proposed roadway, excluding the friction course. Side street traffic to be maintained. Through and
cross traffic to be controlled in accordance with Index Nos. 604, 605 and 615. Barricading shall be in conformance with
'Drop-Offs in Work Zones', Index No. 600. When work extends through an intersection, temporarily reroute the cross traffic to
Work Zone Sign
other cross streets. When rerouting is not possible, provide one-lane access (minimum) for two-lane two-way cross streets and
one-lane access (minimum) each direction for four-lane two-way cross streets, in accordance with Index Nos. 604, 605 and 615.
Stop Bar
11:
39:
00 AM
LEGEND
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DIVIDED, URBAN
NO.
641
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
AHEAD
AHEAD
AHEAD
WORK
WORK
SPEEDING FINES
WORK
ROAD
ROAD
ROAD
DOUBLED
WHEN WORKERS
Required For
PRESENT
Projects >2 Miles
CTR
ROAD
ROAD WORK
500'
500'
DOUBLED
SPEEDING FINES
PRESENT
WHEN WORKERS
500'
PRESENT
WHEN WORKERS
DOUBLED
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
SPEEDING FINES
Within 1 Mile, Sign(s) To Be
PRESENT
Maintenance Operations Occur
WHEN WORKERS
When Other Construction Or
WORK
NEXT X MILES
AHEAD
Omitted And Signing To Be

Coordinated In Accordance
With Index No. 600.
200'
END
Pavement Markings
400'
200'
ROAD WORK
200'
400'
200'
ROAD
Erect STOP Sign And
Erect STOP Sign And Install Removable
STOP
SPEEDING FINES
NEXT X MILES
Lane Reopened To Traffic.

SPEEDING FINES
ROAD WORK
DOUBLED
STOP Sign And Reinstall

SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
WHEN WORKERS
DOUBLED
END
Install Removable Stop Bar

Marking. Remove Existing
STOP Sign And Reinstall When Through

500'
ROAD WORK
500'
CTR
STOP
Stop Bar Marking. Remove Existing
500'
WORK
AHEAD
When Through Lane
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
Reopened To Traffic.
WHEN WORKERS
WHEN WORKERS
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
Required For
PRESENT
PRESENT
PRESENT
Projects >2 Miles
ROAD
ROAD
ROAD
WORK
WORK
WORK
AHEAD
AHEAD
AHEAD
PHASE II
1. Sign and mark Phase I pavement in accordance with the Phase II diagram. For lane width requirements see Index No. 600.
2. Reroute through traffic to Phase I pavement.
3. Complete all Phase II construction, including the friction course. Side street traffic to be maintained. Through and cross
traffic to be controlled in accordance with Index Nos. 604, 605 and 615. Channelizing devices shall be in conformance with
'Drop-Offs in Work Zones' of Index No. 600. When work extends through an intersection, temporarily reroute cross traffic to
SYMBOLS
other cross streets. When rerouting is not possible, provide one-lane access (minimum) for two-lane two-way cross streets and
one-lane access (minimum) each direction for four-lane two-way cross streets, in accordance with Index Nos. 604, 605 and 615.
Type III Barricade
Work Zone Sign
Stop Bar
11:
39:
00 AM
LEGEND
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DIVIDED, URBAN
NO.
641
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
SPEEDING FINES
AHEAD
DOUBLED
WORK
WHEN WORKERS
AHEAD
AHEAD
WORK
WORK
ROAD
ROAD
PRESENT
ROAD
Required For
CTR
Projects
PRESENT
PRESENT
> 2 Miles
PRESENT
WHEN WORKERS
WHEN WORKERS
ROAD
500'
DOUBLED
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
500'
500'
WHEN WORKERS
ROAD WORK
WORK
NEXT X MILES
AHEAD
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
SPEEDING FINES

KEEP
ROAD WORK
STOP
END
200'
400'
LEFT
200'
400'
Double Yellow Reflectorized Pavt. Markings
200'
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
NEXT X MILES
AHEAD
When Other Construction
END
500'
ROAD WORK
WORK
500'
ROAD
500'
Or Maintenance Operations
ROAD WORK
Occur Within 1 Mile, Sign(s)

SPEEDING FINES
To Be Coordinated In
DOUBLED
PRESENT
PRESENT
Required For
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
Projects
SPEEDING FINES
To Be Omitted And Signing
WHEN WORKERS
WHEN WORKERS
Accordance With Index

No. 600.
> 2 Miles
DOUBLED
ROAD
ROAD
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
WORK
WORK
ROAD
AHEAD
AHEAD
WORK
AHEAD
CTR
PHASE III
1. Sign and mark Phase II pavement in accordance with the Phase III diagram.
2. Reroute through traffic to Phase II pavement.
3. Construct friction course over Phase I pavement. Side street traffic to be maintained. Through and cross traffic to be
controlled in accordance with Index Nos. 604, 605 or 615. When work extends through an intersection, temporarily reroute
cross traffic to other cross streets. When rerouting is not possible, provide one-lane access (minimum) for two-lane two-way
cross streets and one-lane across (minimum) each direction for four-lane two-way cross streets.
GENERAL NOTES
LEGEND
1. All signing, pavement marking, and barricades necessary for maintenance of traffic shall conform to Index No. 600.
SYMBOLS
2. Lane widths for maintenance of two-way traffic should desirably be equal to lane widths of the existing facility, but lanes
shall not be less than 10' in width. When one-lane one-way operations are necessary, a minimum width of 12' should be
maintained and traffic controlled in accordance with Index Nos. 604, 605 or 615.
Type III Barricade

3. At signalized intersections, signals shall be directed or relocated as required to the center of relocated lanes.
Work Zone Sign
4. For reflectorized raised pavement marker application, see Index Nos. 600 and 17352.
Stop Bar
5. Additional barricades, signing, lighting or other traffic controls for limited work areas shall be provided in accordance with
11:
39:
01 AM
other applicable TCZ Indexes as conditions warrant in each phase.

6. Provisions approved by the Engineer shall be made for the removal of storm water from the roadway(s) during construction.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DIVIDED, URBAN
NO.
641
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Type I or Type II Barricades or Vertical Panels or Drums (At 50' Centers)

L=WS For Speeds 45 mph; WS/60 For Speeds 40 mph

y (Varies: See Index 415)
Same As "y"
Type I or Type II Barricades or Vertical Panels or Drums
Temporary Concrete Barrier Wall
Crash Cushion
15
1:
Edge Line
C. C.
WORK AREA
Shoulder Line
BARRIER AND TRANSITION LOCATED ON PAVED OR UNPAVED SHOULDERS

PLAN SHOWN FOR RIGHT LANE - INVERTED PLAN FOR LEFT LANE

Removable Reflectorized Pavement Marking:

Remove Or Obliterate
Lane Line
White For Right Edge Line
Varies 2' To 4'
Yellow For Left Edge Line
(4' Std.)
Same As "y"
y (Varies: See Index 415)
Edge Line
15
1:
Exist.
Type I or Type II Barricades
Edge Stripe
or Vertical Panels or Drums
18" Removable Solid Diagonal
6'
C. C.
WORK AREA
3' (Min.)
Crash Cushion
Stripes At 20' Centers:

White For Right Edge Markings
Shoulder Line
Yellow For Left Edge Markings
TWO OR MORE LANES ONE WAY
LANE DROP PLAN SHOWN FOR RIGHT LANE MERGE LEFT - INVERTED PLAN FOR LEFT LANE MERGE RIGHT


Reflectorized Pavement Marking:
Reflectorized Pavement Marking:
Solid Line If Edge Of Pavement Stripe
Solid Line Only (Transition Zone)

Removable If On Shoulder Or Travel Pavement (Final Surface)
Shoulder Or Temporary Pavement
Skip Line If Lane Line (3 Or More Lanes And Passing Permitted)
Removable Or Painted If On Temporary Pavement
(2 Lanes, 1-Way)
Removable If On Shoulder Or Travel Pavement (Final Surface)
White For Right Edge Line and Lane Lines
Existing Travel Way Pavement,
Removable Or Painted If On Temporary Pavement
Yellow For Left Edge Line Only
Interior Lanes (3 Or More Lanes, 1-Way)
White For Right Edge Line, Or, Lane Line
Exist. Edge Line (2-Lanes)

(Lane Line, 3 Or More Lanes)
See "LANE WIDTHS"

Index No. 600
Yellow For Left Edge Line (Only)
Remove Or Obliterate Existing Lane And/Or Edge Lines

Remove Or Obliterate Lane Line
y (Varies:
See Index 415)

2'
Remove Or Obliterate Lane Line
6'
Varies 2' To 4' (4' Std.)
15
1:
Type I or Type II Barricades or Vertical Panels or Drums
C. C.
3' (Min.)
18" Removable Solid Diagonal

Exist. Lane Line
Exist. Edge Stripe
WORK AREA
Crash Cushion
Stripes At 20' Centers:

Shoulder Line
White For Right Edge Markings

Yellow For Left Edge Markings
11:
39:
02 AM
TWO OR MORE LANES ONE WAY

LANE DROP AND LANE SHIFTS - PLAN SHOWN FOR RIGHT LANE MERGE LEFT - INVERTED PLAN FOR LEFT LANE MERGE RIGHT
SYMBOLS
GENERAL NOTES
12/3/2015
1. For signing information see the Plans, Specifications, MUTCD and other TCZ Standards.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
2. Where W=width of lateral transition in feet, S=posted speed limit.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TRANSITIONS FOR TEMPORARY CONCRETE
DESIGN STANDARDS
BARRIER WALL ON FREEWAY FACILITIES
NO.
642
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
END
Diversion Connection To Existing Pavement To Be
ROAD WORK
ROAD WORK
1500'
ROAD
LIMIT
WORK
XX
MILE
XX
Existing Structure
Limits of Construction
SPEED
ROAD
WORK
1
NEXT X MILES
(Same For Opposite Connection)
500'
LIMIT
500'
SPEED
**
XX
ROAD
WORK
1500 FT
Constructed Under TCZ Plan Of Index No. 603.
LIMIT
1 MILE
**
**
SPEED
500'
640'
500'
1640' 500'
500'
1500'
WORK
SPEED
LIMIT
XX
**
***
SPEEDING FINES
END
ROAD WORK
SPEED
DOUBLED
LIMIT
WHEN WORKERS
XX
PRESENT
ROAD WORK
WORK
LIMIT
1 MILE
500' 500'
Temporary Structure
ROAD
ROAD
SPEED
Transition
*
**
50' Pavement
**
Temporary Diversion
R
640'
500' 1640' 500'
Varies
(To Be Replaced)
NEXT X MILES
1500 FT
XX
Temporary Guardrail (See General Note No. 4)
SPEEDING FINES
ROAD
DOUBLED
WORK
1
WHEN WORKERS
PHASE I
MILE
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
PRESENT
SPEED
ROAD
LIMIT
WORK
XX
1500 FT
2. Construct temporary structure, approaches, guardrail and install crash cushions
SPEED
ROAD
LIMIT
if center truss is constructed.

END
CLOSED
ROAD WORK
ROAD
MILE
XX
ROAD
ROAD
3. The signing shown in the Phase I diagram is required whenever equipment
WORK
1 MILE
**
SPEED
PRESENT
WORK
1
2
**
WHEN WORKERS
**
1. Maintain two-lane two-way traffic over existing facility.
CLOSED
LIMIT
workers or their activities are within 15' of the existing pavement edge.
XX
500'
ROAD WORK
500'
500' 1000' 500'
NEXT X MILES
500'
Temporary
Temporary
Structure
Guardrail
250'
*
**
**
500' 500'
SPEED
SPEED
WORK
LIMIT
XX
LIMIT
ROAD WORK
XX
XX
Temporary
White Reflectorized
250'
Diversion
SPEEDING FINES
1
2
WHEN WORKERS
MILE
Pavement Markings
Temporary
ROAD
WORK
DOUBLED
SPEED
END
NEXT X MILES
LIMIT
1 MILE
**
***
ROAD WORK
ROAD
500' 1640' 500'
100'
640' 500' 1000'
Existing Structure (To Be Replaced)
500' 1640' 500'
640'
100'
ROAD
Guardrail
WORK
1500 FT
PRESENT
Acrow Bridge Used
Sign shall be placed in advance

of all movable and non-movable
steel deck bridges.
* Required For Projects >2 miles
Pavement Markings
Omit When Bailey Or
Sign Used When Bailey Or Acrow Bridge Has Center Truss.
Also Install Crash Cushion At Each End If Center Truss is Constructed.
See SUPERELEVATION Index No. 600.

PHASE II
1. Resign and mark as shown in Phase II plan.
SYMBOLS
2. Reroute traffic to diversion and maintain two-way traffic on diversion. Install

Type III
LEGEND
barricades.
11:
39:
03 AM
Type III Barricade
3. Construct proposed structure and reconstruct or resurface existing approaches.
Phase I
Phase II
Work Zone Sign
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
PHASE III and General Notes (See Sheet 2)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TWO-LANE TWO-WAY,
DESIGN STANDARDS
RURAL STRUCTURE REPLACEMENT
NO.
650
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
PHASE III
1. Reroute traffic to final alignment and maintain two-way traffic.
2. Remove all temporary construction items.
GENERAL NOTES
1. All signing, pavement marking, and barricades necessary for maintenance of traffic shall conform to Index No. 600.
2. For speed sign applications, see Index No. 600.
3. For lane width requirements see Index No. 600. When one-way one-lane operations are necessary, a minimum width of 12' shall be
maintained and traffic controlled in accordance with Index Nos. 603, 606 or 607. Minimum width for the diversion shoulders is 6'.
4. Method of attaching temporary guardrail to the diversion structure to be approved by the Engineer. Cost of temporary guardrail
systems, including end anchorage assemblies, transitions and attachment to temporary structures, are to be included in the contract unit
price for Guardrail (Temporary) LF.
5. Provisions approved by the Engineer shall be made for the removal of storm water from the roadway(s) during construction.
6. Only temporary crash cushions approved by the Department shall be used unless specified devices called for in the plans.
7. Where the temporary structure is not required, the diversion may be constructed in accordance with Index No. 608, unless otherwise
stipulated in the plans.
8. For reflective raised pavement marker application, see Index Nos. 600 and 17352.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
39:
04 AM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TWO-LANE TWO-WAY,
DESIGN STANDARDS
RURAL STRUCTURE REPLACEMENT
NO.
650
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
BUFFER LENGTH (FEET)

Construction
(ft.)
(ft.)
60-70
540
550
55
350
430
Zone Speed
MPH
END
ROAD WORK
WHEN WORKERS
Single Or Dual Overpassing Bridge(s)
50
170
XX
CTR
ROAD
SPEED
ROAD WORK
(See Chart
300
ROAD
Upper Left)
L
L = WS
15
1:
(Length Of Need)
100'
SPEED
500'
500'
500'
1 MILE
LIMIT
XX
**
L = WS
Crash Cushion
Varies
WORK
LIMIT
WORK
NEXT X MILES
1500FT
***
500'
WORK
1000 FT
SPEED
LIMIT
PRESENT
ROAD
(Normal Or Skewed- Normal Single Bridge Shown)
XX
**
500'
640'
2640'
C. C.
See Chart
**
100'
Upper Left
Varies
L = WS

1:
15
Yellow Reflectorized Pavement Markings
C. C.
Va
ri
(
40
e
'M s
i
n.
)
Crash Cushion
20
1:
1:
20
100'
Work Area
L = WS
L = WS
100'
C. C.
L
Crash Cushion
2640'
640'
500'
500'
500'
500'
Work Area
100'
500'
200' Minimum
**
500' Desirable
***
ROAD WORK
END
NEXT X MILES
ROAD WORK
LIMIT
**
ROAD
SPEED
1000 FT
XX
WORK
ROAD
SPEED
WORK
LIMIT
1 MILE
XX
**
SPEED
LIMIT
Varies
24'
32'
XX
2'
4' 4'
10'
2' Min.
SPEEDING FINES
24'
4'
4' 2'4'
24'
4'
ROAD
DOUBLED
WORK
WHEN WORKERS
1500 FT
PRESENT
CTR
TYPICAL FOR 64' MEDIAN

SECTION AA
SYMBOLS
Work Area
GENERAL NOTES
1. S=Posted speed limit (mph).
CONDITIONS
4. All existing pavement markings within the
* Required For Projects > 2 miles
realignment which conflict with the revised

2. Within the lateral transitions, the maximum

traffic pattern are to be removed and new
REQUIRE THE CLOSURE OF ONE
Work Zone Sign
spacing between Type I or Type II barricades or
pavement markings used for marking edge lines
ROADWAY AND THE OPPOSING
vertical panels or drums shall be based on the
and lane lines.
ROADWAY IS CONVERTED TO
speed limit as follows: 15' up to 25 MPH; 30' for
11:
39:
05 AM
30-40 MPH; 50' for 45 MPH or greater.

TEMPORARY TWO-WAY TRAVEL BY

5. When side roads, cross roads or interchanges
Barricades, vertical panels, and drums shall not
within the TTC zone, additional TTC devices shall
be intermixed in lateral transitions.
be placed in accordance with other applicable
TCZ Indexes
3. For speed sign applications, see 'Regulatory

Speed in Work Zones' Index No. 600.
12/3/2015
WAY OF CROSSOVERS.

6. For general TCZ requirements and additional
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
information, refer to Index No. 600.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE DIVIDED,
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAINTENANCE AND CONSTRUCTION
NO.
651
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
When Other Construction Or Maintenance Operations Occur

Within 1 Mile, Sign(s) To Be Omitted And Signing To
Be Coordinated In Accordance With Index No. 600.
END
ROAD WORK
B
L=WS
100'
500' Desirable (200' Min.)

Edge Of Existing Paved Shldr. & MOT Travel Way
t
n
e
g
n
a
200'T
Curve 1
Curve 2

Work Area
100'
See Sheet 1
Work Area
Crash Cushion
For Signing And
See Sheet 1 For Signing And
Barricade
Barricade Placement
Placement
APPROACH END
B
500' Desirable (200' Min.)
L=WS
L=WS
Edge Of Existing Paved Shldr. & MOT Travel Way
Yellow Reflectorized
500'
*
Curve 4
Curve 3
(200' Min.)
Crash Cushion
Pavement Markings
200'T
a
n
g
e
n
t
Desirable
100'
Y
e
l
l
o
w Re
f
l
e
c
t
o
r
i
ze
d Pa
v
e
me
n
tMa
r
k
i
n
g
s
1
:
1
5
B
Work Area
100'
TRAILING END
END
*Length of barrier wall needed for protection of work area and/or other hazards
CURVILINEAR ALIGNMENT CROSSOVER
ROAD WORK
to be shown in the plans. For complimentary information on barrier walls and

work area see Sheet 1. See Index No. 600 for clear zone requirements.
24'
32'
10'
Occur Within 1 Mile, Sign(s) To Be Omitted And Signing

2'
To Be Coordinated In Accordance With Index No. 600.
4' 4'
BUFFER LENGTH (ft)

Construction
64' Median
MINIMUM RADII FOR NORMAL CROSS SLOPES
88' Median
11:
39:
06 AM
Zone Speed
Construction
Minimum Radius (ft)
Zone Speed
MPH
MPH
70
607
588
582
545
0
.
0
2
Curves 1 & 4
Curves 2 & 3
70
22,918 (0 15')
4,584 (1 15')
65
581
562
552
514
65
22,918 (0 15')
3,820 (1 30')
60
562
543
531
492
60
22,918 (0 15')
3,274 (1 45')
55
337
369
330
350
55
11,459 (0 30')
2,546 (2 15')
50
201
286
200
276
50
11,459 (0 30')
2,292 (2 30')
45
115
164
115
163
45
1,080 (5 18')
700 (8 11')
40
104
149
104
148
40
830 (6 54')
550 (10 25')
35
91
134
91
132
35
620 (9 14')
410 (13 58')
30
78
118
78
115
30
450 (12 44')
285 (20 06')
NOTE:
24'
8'
0
.
0
2
1
4:
6:
1
TYPICAL FOR 64' OR 88' MEDIAN (64' SHOWN)
SECTION AA
Varies
2'
24'
32'
4' 4'
10'
2' Min.
4'
24'
4'2'4'
24'
4'
0
.
0
5
Diversions with speeds of 50 mph or greater are considered high speed facilities;
TYPICAL FOR 64' OR 88' MEDIAN (64' SHOWN)
curvature and superelevation criteria for open highway conditions apply.

12/3/2015
(WITH OR WITHOUT OVERPASSING ROADWAY-OVERPASSING SHOWN)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
SECTION BB
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MULTILANE DIVIDED,
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAINTENANCE AND CONSTRUCTION
NO.
651
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
TRAFFIC PACING GUIDE
NOTICE
Traffic pacing is a traffic control technique to slow but not stop traffic to facilitate short duration work operations without an elaborate and difficult
This Index applies to Limited Access Facilities.
detour or diversion. Traffic Control Officers pace or slow the traffic to a speed that provides approximately 20-30 minutes to perform the overhead
construction. The Department has frequently used this technique for setting bridge beams, overhead sign structures and replacing overhead sign panels.
This Index represents the minimum requirements for traffic pacing operations on
the State Highway System.
The traffic pacing begins with approval of the exact date of the activity that shall be made two weeks in advance. The District Public Information
Office, the District Traffic Operations Engineer, Local Emergency Management Agencies and Project Personnel shall be notified of the location, date and
A site specific traffic control plan shall be developed for each pacing operation.
time. Advance notification to the public shall begin at least one week in advance by using Changeable Message Signs.
The day of the traffic pacing operation, the Changeable Message Sign messages shall be revised to indicate the activity will occur that night or day.
TRAFFIC PACING GENERAL NOTES
The traffic pacing operation begins with a Traffic Control Officer Supervisor at the work site initiating the pacing operation in accordance with pacing
details shown on sheet 2. The intent is to keep traffic moving unless there is an emergency.
1. Install ROAD CLOSED (W20-3) signs approximately 1000' prior to the work area. These signs shall remain
covered until the pacing operation begins and covered when the pacing operation has ended.
2. Prior to requesting that the traffic control officer supervisor initiate the pacing operation, the contractor
shall ensure that the necessary equipment is properly positioned (off the roadway) for the construction
activity requiring the traffic pacing operation.
3. Truck mounted attenuator(s) with changeable message sign(s) are required to protect workers and/or
CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGNS
equipment positioned in a travel lane(s) at the work area during the pacing operation from an errant
(Typical Placement and Messages)
vehicle. If no workers and/or equipment are positioned in a travel lane(s) at the work area, truck mounted
attenuator(s) are not required.
4. A traffic control officer supervisor shall be stationed at the work area continuously throughout the pacing
operation to insure radio communications between the contractor and/or the project administrator, and all
the police vehicles involved in the pacing operation.
Work Area
5. When more than one pacing operation is required in one work period the contractor shall allow sufficient
time between pacing operations to permit traffic to return to normal speeds and flow. Additional time may
Median
be required between pacing operations to allow traffic to resume normal speeds and flow upstream of the
work area as determined by the project administrator or traffic control officer supervisor.
1
2L
1 MILE
1
2L
TRAFFIC CONTROL PLANS OR TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
1. The specific activities and locations, along with allowable times of day and days of the week, when
pacing will be allowed should be clearly detailed in the traffic control plans or technical specification. If
there are specific holiday or special event dates that, due to anticipated traffic congestion, pacing
L = Length of Traffic Pacing Operation
operations should not be allowed, these dates should also be spelled out in plans or specifications. When
detailing the specific activities and locations of pacing activities, identify the minimum number of traffic
control officers needed for each function and location of the pacing operation. If there are certain work
activities that need to be completed prior to the contractor starting the work anticipated during the
pacing operation, the activities should be clearly detailed in the plans or technical specification.
CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN MESSAGE
2. When developing a pacing plan, failsafe "stop points" should be identified for those work operations in
which a construction problem could create a condition that could not be immediately cleared. A failsafe
(MAINLINE AND RAMPS)
stop point is the last safe egress from the highway facility prior to traffic coming upon the work that is
being completed during the operation. In the unlikely event that the work is not completed during the time
Symbols
estimated for the pacing, the plans or specification should direct the pacing to not proceed past the
ONE WEEK PRIOR TO
EXPECT
MMM
PACING OPERATION
DELAYS
DD-DD
ON
X AM - X AM
ROAD
EXPECT
WORK
PERIODIC
TONIGHT
DELAYS
SLOW
BE
TRAFFIC
PREPARED
AHEAD
TO STOP
failsafe stop point until the highway is cleared. In the event of major construction problem that cannot
be immediately cleared, traffic can then be diverted off the facility.
3. The traffic control plans or technical specification should require the contractor to submit a pacing plan
Marked Police Vehicle with Flashing Blue Lights
DURING DAY
OF PACING OPERATION
11:
39:
06 AM
PCMS, Portable Changeable Message Sign
To be placed the day of pacing operation

Lane Identification and Direction of Traffic
in advance of the operation. The pacing plan should outline the contractors expected equipment and
personnel, outline the operation, and include a contingency plan should any of the contractor's critical
equipment break down. If the project includes a damage recovery clause, the traffic control plan or
technical specification should be clear that the damage recovery applies to the pacing operation as well.
DURING PACING
OPERATION
4. Changeable message signs shall be displayed one week prior to work using messages described in the
traffic pacing plan. The number and location of changeable message signs shall be called out in the
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
traffic control plans.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC PACING
NO.
655
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
MAINLINE PACING DETAILS

(1 DIRECTION OF FOUR LANE ROADWAY EXAMPLE)
RAMP PACING DETAILS
Median
Median
3
4
ONE LANE RAMP
Police Vehicle
Pace Setting
Lead Police
Police Vehicle
Pace Setting
Lead Police Vehicle
Located On Shoulder
Police Vehicles
Vehicle
Located On Shoulder
Police Vehicles
Located Approx. 500'
At Beginning Of
At Beginning Of
Pacing Operation
Pacing Operation
Before Work Area

On Shoulder
STAGE THREE
STAGE ONE
1. The two pace setting police vehicles shall begin to slow to the pacing speed
1. Four police vehicles located upstream of the work area at the

beginning location of the traffic pacing operation with flashing
(20 mph is preferred, 10 mph minimum), for the duration of the traffic
pacing operation.
blue lights off.
TWO LANE RAMP

2. The lead police vehicle (flashing blue lights off) shall match the speed of
the last vehicles ahead of the pacing vehicles and continue following traffic
until a point approximately 500' in advance of the work area. The lead police
vehicle shall then come to a complete stop on the right shoulder and turn on
its flashing blue lights. If required, crash truck(s) with rear mounted impact
RAMP CLOSURE DETAIL
attenuator(s) and changeable message sign(s) shall move into the travel
1. Once notified by the on site traffic control officer supervisor to begin
lanes approximately 200 ft. upstream of the work area with the impact
the traffic pacing operation each police vehicle at the indicated ramp
attenuators down and operating once traffic has cleared the work area.
shall turn their flashing blue lights on and position the vehicle across
the ramp lane(s) to close ramp access.
2. Once the pacing operation passes the closed on ramp the police vehicle
Median
Median
on the ramp shall turn off the flashing blue lights and move from the
ramp lane(s) to allow traffic to enter the mainline pacing operation.
2
1
3
4
Police Vehicle
Pace Setting
Lead Police Vehicle
Located On Shoulder
Police Vehicles
(Flashing Blue Lights
At Beginning Of
Off) At The End Of
Pacing Operation
Regular Traffic
Police Vehicle
Lead Police Vehicle
Pace Setting
Located On Shoulder
Located Approx. 500'
Police Vehicles
At Beginning Of
Before Work Area
Pacing Operation
On Shoulder
GENERAL NOTES
1. Each Traffic Control Officer shall have a marked vehicle with flashing blue lights,
for the pacing operation. The location and number of officers at each location will
STAGE TWO
1. Once the police vehicles are in place and the traffic control officer
be as follows:
STAGE FOUR
1. When the pace setting police vehicles are within approximately two miles of the
No. Of Traffic
supervisor at the work area notifies all officers to begin the traffic
work area they shall notify the onsite traffic control officer supervisor who will
Control Officers
pacing operation, the last three police vehicles shall turn on their
immediately inform the contractors on site supervisor of their location. Once the
With Vehicles
flashing blue lights. The first three police vehicles shall enter the
contractors on site supervisor has been notified of the pacing vehicles location,
travel lanes with the second and third police vehicles immediately
the contractor shall begin to clear the travel lanes of all equipment and debris in
forming a side by side "pacing operation" of all lanes behind the lead
order to reopen all travel lanes.
Function
1 min.
Supervisor
1 Lead Vehicle
Varies
crash truck(s) shall be moved from the travel lanes and the two pace setting police
1 for each
Pacing
vehicles shall clear the work area and immediately move to the right shoulder or
travel lane
Operation
police vehicle (flashing blue lights off).
Location
Work Area
Mobile operation
2. In case of emergency the pace setting police vehicles shall come to a complete
stop once they reach the lead police vehicle. If no emergency is encountered, the
Mobile operation beginning x miles

upstream and terminating at the work
area
11:
39:
08 AM
an area designated by the traffic control officer supervisor and turn off the
flashing blue lights. Once the two pace setting police vehicles pass the work area,
1 Stationed at the
Advanced Warning
the traffic control officer supervisor shall instruct the lead and last police
to Motorist
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
vehicles to turn off their flashing blue lights.
Pacing Operation
Operation
1 for each
Entrance Ramp
entrance ramp
Roadblocks
DESCRIPTION:
One at each of the entrance ramps

upstream of the work area
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
Stationed at the Beginning of
Beginning of Pacing
TRAFFIC PACING
NO.
655
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Work Area
Median
L
c
L
w
Begin Traffic
Pacing Operation
TRAFFIC PACING DISTANCES

(L) miles
S
= Regulatory speed (mph)
r
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS:
S
p =20; pcphpl 1,750
t
S
p
= Pacing speed (mph)
t
w
= Work duration (min)
S
r
5
The design shall evaluate the actual distance required for the
pacing operation based on site specific features such as: roadway
geometrics, pacing speeds, regulatory speeds, interchange
10
(min)
15
20
25
30
70
2.3
4.7
7.0
9.3
65
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
spacing, work duration, availability of traffic control officers,

traffic volumes and maximum queue length.
= Total pacing distance in miles

t
w
L =
The starting point of a traffic pacing operation must consider the
60
Sp
L
c
= distance paced vehicles must travel
speed have cleared the work zone
2.8
5.6
8.3
t is the total time allowed for work activity in minutes. This time starts
w
just after the last vehicle traveling at the pre-pacing regulatory speed
clears the work area and ends just as the pacing operation reaches the
Demand volume may not exceed 1,750 pcphpl (passenger cars per hour
Sr-Sp
It may be necessary to install temporary barrier walls to protect
per lane) without a site specific design. Traffic counts can be obtained
pre-positioned and assembled materials in the right of way.

L
w
The minimum speed allowed for a pacing operation is 10 mph with
from the Office of Planning, or you may need to collect traffic counts.
= distance paced vehicles

travel while work is performed
Hourly directional traffic volumes must be converted to pcphpl using the

following:
20 mph the preferred speed.

Lw =
1
2
hour (30 min).
The maximum practical pacing operation length is 10 miles.
t
w
xS
60
pcphpl =
Hourly Directional Volume
x Heavy Vehicle Factor
# Lanes (each direction)

F
= Heavy Vehicle Factor
HV
F
= 1 +
HV
P
t
REVISIO N
50
x Sp
60
L =
c
11:
39:
09 AM
equipment, materials, and personnel.
t
w
pacing operation begins.
12/3/2015
work area. twmust include the time required to clear the roadway of
All material to be installed shall be on-site before the traffic
07/01/09
10.0
7.9
NOTES FOR TABLE:
before the vehicles at regulatory
work site to position a crane(s) and the materials to be lifted.
LAST
7.5
5.2
Sr-Sp
L = Lc + Lw
facility.
REVISION
5.0
2.6
* Site Specific design required.
of entrance ramps, horizontal and vertical alignment of the
The maximum allowed work duration is
2.5
p
+1
following factors: the speed of the pacing vehicles, the location
In some instances, it may be necessary to close a lane at the
60
55
For additional guidance for site specific designs refer to the Plans
P
t
x 0.5
Preparation Manual, Volume 1 Chapter 10.
100
= % Trucks
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC PACING
NO.
655
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
GENERAL NOTES
SYMBOLS
1. Route pedestrian traffic around work areas when construction
Work Area
Channelizing Device (See Index 600)
7. Provide a 5' wide temporary walkway, except where space restrictions warrant
activities encroach on the sidewalk for more than 60 minutes
a minimum width of 4'. Provide a 5' x 5' passing space for temporary walkways
using the devices and remedies shown on this Index. Use project
less than 5' in width at intervals not to exceed 200'.
specific designs for scenarios not included on this Index.

Work Zone Sign
CR
8. Provide a cross-slope with a maximum value of 0.02 for all temporary

2. For spacing of traffic control devices and general TCZ
Required Locations For Either Temporary
walkways.
requirements refer to Index 600. The maximum spacing between
Or Permanent Curb Ramps.
barricades, vertical panels, drums or tubular markers is 25'.
9. Temporary walkway surfaces and ramps must be stable, firm, slip resistant, and
kept free of any obstructions and hazards such as holes, debris, mud,
3. Use delineators on longitudinal channelizing devices separating
construction equipment and stored materials.
the work area from vehicular traffic.
with Mounted Work Zone Sign
10. Remove temporary walkways immediately after reopening of the sidewalk, unless
4. Cover or deactivate pedestrian traffic signal
otherwise noted in the plans.
display(s) controlling closed crosswalks.

11. Meet the requirements of Index 304 for temporary curb ramps.
5. Post mounted signs located near or adjacent to a sidewalk must
have a 7' minimum clearance from the bottom of sign to the
12. Place pedestrian longitudinal channelizing device(s) across the full width of the
surface of the sidewalk.
closed sidewalk. For temporary walkways, similar to the Sidewalk Diversion,

place LCD's to delineate both sides of the temporary walkway.
6. When construction activities involve sidewalks on both sides of

the street, stage the construction so that one sidewalk is in
service at all times. If this is not feasible and both sidewalks
must be closed, as determined by the Engineer, provide a detour
DETOUR
to guide pedestrians around the construction zone.
CR
CR
CROSS HERE
AHEAD
DETOUR
20:
1
Taper
20:
1
Taper
CROSS HERE
W ork Area
WORK
W ork Area
AHEAD
SI
DEW ALK CLOSED
CLOSED
ROAD
SIDEWALK
CLOSED
SIDEWALK
C LO SED
CR
PEDESTRIAN
DETOUR
AHEAD
SIDEWALK
CLOSED
20:
1
Taper
CR
20:
1
A r e a
Taper
A e r a
SID EW ALK
WALKWAY
DETOUR
SIDEWALK CLOSED
W o r k
SI
DEWALK CLOSED
USE OTHER SI
DE
W o r k
DETOUR
PEDESTRIAN
WALKWAY
CR
DETOUR
DETOUR
DETOUR
ROAD
CR
DETOUR
DETOUR
USE OTHER SIDE
DETOUR
11:
39:
10 AM
DETOUR
SIDEWALK CLOSED
ROAD
ROAD
WORK
WORK
AHEAD
AHEAD
WORK
AHEAD
12/3/2015
CROSSWALK CLOSURE AND
SIDEWALK DETOUR
SIDEWALK DIVERSION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
PESESTRIAN DETOUR
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PEDESTRIAN CONTROL FOR CLOSURE OF SIDEWALKS
NO.
660
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Access Opening
900'
90
TRUCKS
ENTERING
4'
4'
D
300' Taper
40' Taper
40' Taper
HIGHWAY
Existing Shoulder Pavement
Access Lanes
ENTERING
50' R
12'
12'
TRUCKS
Full Length Of Access Lanes
50' R
16' 16'
Lanes
Double 6" White Stripes
Travel
Existing
HIGHWAY
350' Taper
Taper
x
To R/W
Side Drain Pipe Use Mitered End Sections

If Within Clear Zone (Index No. 273)
Exist. Fence
x
/-/-/
Temporary Gate Posts
Exist. LA R/W
/-/-/
/-/-/
Fence Gate Type A

(Double 12') (24' Opening)
PLAN
GENERAL NOTES
1. Access openings across limited access right of way and use of this Index are
prohibited unless specifically permitted in the Contract Plans or Special

D
2% or less
590
1540
3 to 4% Upgrade
530
2310
3 to 4% Downgrade
710
925
Grade
7. Access openings in the limited access fence shall have gates which are to be
locked during nonwork hours or periods when the access is not in active use.
Provisions. When permitted in the Contract Plans or Special Provisions and prior
to construction of any opening, the Contractor must submit, in writing, a request
identifying specific locations for approval by the Engineer.
2. No more than two (2) access openings will be allowed on each project.
8. The contractor shall take all precautions necessary to insure against entrance
by livestock or unauthorized persons or vehicles.
9. The contractor shall not vary from the plan detail without approval of the
Engineer.
3. Access openings shall be located only in areas having adequate sight distance
and shall not be located within 1.5 miles of interchanges nor within 2000 ft. of
10. Gates shall be removed and access opening locations shall be restored to
acceleration-deceleration lanes at rest areas, other access openings or other
preconstruction condition immediately upon completion of activities utilizing the
highway service areas.
materials being transported through the openings whether or not the project is
completed.
4. Access openings shall not be constructed directly opposite temporary median

crossovers nor within 2000 ft. of temporary median crossovers.
12' Existing
for terminating use of all openings. Upon notification by the Engineer, the
Shoulder
Existing Roadway
11. Failure to comply with any provision of the access opening plan shall be cause
5. Access openings shall be within the project limits and shall not be used for
Existing Paved
Shoulder
Widening
contractor shall cease hauling and begin restoration of affected areas. Under
transporting materials to or from any other project. The
this condition expense of removal, restoration and of additional hauling
acceleration-deceleration surfaces shall be paved. RAP material is acceptable
distances shall be borne by the contractor.
for driveway surfacing.

12. No guardrail or barrier wall will be removed for access openings.
Match Slope Of
2' Extended Shoulder
6. Any Motorist Aid Call Boxes affected by the temporary access openings shall be
relocated outside the limits of access lanes and remain in use during
Existing Shoulder
1:4 Or Flatter
13. Construction and removal of the access and restoring the area to
construction. Upon removal of access lanes, call boxes shall be returned to their
preconstruction condition shall be included in the cost of Maintenance Of
previous location. Temporary relocation and restoration of call boxes shall be at
Traffic, LS.
the contractor's expense.
11:
39:
11 AM
SECTION AA
Work Zone Sign
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
SYMBOLS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
LIMITED ACCESS TEMPORARY OPENING
NO.
665
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Beginning of
Conc. Barrier
PCMS
Device Spacing
Beginning of
25' Typ.
Work Area
PASS
SUN
MPH
2
5
250'
PASS
ONL
Y
250'
SUN
1000'
Gore Striping
A AW
SPEEDING FINES
PLAZA
DOUBLED
WORK
WHEN WORKERS
1000 FT
PRESENT
PLAZA
WORK
500'
Taper Length=L
500 FT
Varies
See Table I
**
*
If There is No Room in the
** Install temporary Speeding Fines Doubled sign
Median for the PCMS, Then
only if there is not an existing permanent
Locate it on the Outside of the
"Speeding Fines Doubled Through Toll Plaza"
Roadway only.
sign or an existing "Speeding Fines Doubled
DEDICATED LANE(S) IN CENTER
When Workers Present" sign in place.
PCMS*
Device Spacing
25' Typ.
MPH
PASS
MPH
2
5
PASS
MPH
2
5
ONL
Y
PASS
2
5
ONL
Y
PASS
SUN
ONL
Y
PASS
SUN
Beginning of
SUN
PASS
SUN
Lane Striping
SUN
SUN
Beginning of
Work Area
A AW
Gore Striping
1000'
250'
250'
500'
Varies
Taper Length=L
See Table I
SPEEDING FINES
PLAZA
DOUBLED
WORK
WHEN WORKERS
1000 FT
PRESENT
Beginning of
PLAZA
WORK
Conc. Barrier
DEDICATED LANE(S) ON INSIDE
500 FT
(SINGLE LEFT LANE CLOSURE)

**
SYMBOLS
Work Area
GENERAL NOTES
PCMS DISPLAY A
MESSAGE 1:
Work Zone Sign
SUNPASS
Table I - Taper Length (L)
MESSAGE 2: USE
LANE(S)
CASH
CLOSED
LANES
Dedicated
Number of
Number of
Taper
Lane
Dedicated
Dedicated Lanes
Length
PCMS
2. This Plan is for Lane Closures that exceed three hours.
Display
Location
1. This Plan is to be used at Mainline Plazas Only.
Lanes
Closed
(Feet)
200
200
350
350
PCMS DISPLAY B
3. Plaza canopies which have existing DMS signs on the canopies shall display
the message "LANE CLOSED" for the duration of this closure.
2
MESSAGE 1:
Advance Warning Vehicle Equipped with

11:
39:
12 AM
A AW
SUNPASS
MESSAGE 2: CLOSED
ONLY
AT
LANE(S)
PLAZA
Center
3
350
350
350
350
350
Advance Warning Arrow Board and

PCMS DISPLAY C
Inside***

MESSAGE 1:
SUNPASS
ONLY
MESSAGE 2: KEEP
LEFT/RIGHT
*** See Index 667 Sheet 2 for Right or Center Inside Dedicated Lane
LANE(S)
4. A truck/trailer mounted attenuator is required.
5. Lane use control lights, signs, or signals over toll lanes shall be switched to
the appropriate symbol, message, or correct color prior to the start of any
lane closure. They should also be switched at project completion.
6. At least 48 hours prior to any closure, other than emergencies, the plaza
manager shall be notified for security and staffing.
12/3/2015
Closed, or Two or More Inside Dedicated Lanes Closed Configurations.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DEDICATED LANES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TOLL PLAZA TRAFFIC CONTROL STANDARDS
NO.
667
SHEET
NO.
1of 6
Beginning of Plaza
PCMS*
Maintain Full Lane
Beginning of
Width (Minimum 12')
Lane Striping
Throat Opening
ONLY
25
MPH
SUN
PASS
PASS
ONLY
25
MPH
SUN
PASS
PASS
ONLY
25
SUN
PASS
MPH
PASS
Device Spacing
500'
SUN
250'
SUN
250'
SUN
1000'
Work
A AW
Area
10' Typ.
PLAZA
WORK
Varies
PLAZA
1000 FT
Varies
100' Taper
WORK
**
500 FT
Beginning of
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
Conc. Barrier
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
CENTER OR RIGHT DEDICATED LANE CLOSED
If There is No Room in the Median for the PCMS,

PCMS DISPLAYS
Then Locate it on the Outside of the Roadway only.
** Install temporary Speeding Fines Doubled sign only if

there is not an existing permanent "Speeding Fines
MESSAGE 1: CENTER
MESSAGE 2: CLOSED
MESSAGE 1:SUNPASS
Doubled Through Toll Plaza" sign or an existing "Speeding
SUNPASS
AT
ONLY
Fines Doubled When Workers Present" sign in place.
LANE
PLAZA
LANE(S)
MESSAGE 2: KEEP
LEFT
Beginning of Plaza
PCMS*
Beginning of
Throat Opening
Lane Striping
Work Area
ONLY
25
MPH
SUN
PASS
ONLY
25
MPH
SUN
PASS
PASS
ONLY
25
MPH
SUN
PASS
500'
PASS
500'
PASS
1640'
SUN
1000'
SUN
1140'
SUN
500'
A AW
Device Spacing
25' Typ.
PLAZA
WORK
1 MILE
LANE
CLOSED
1/2 MILE
**
LEFT LANE
Beginning of
CLOSED
1000 FT
Conc. Barrier
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
840' Taper
Varies
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
SYMBOLS
TWO OR MORE DEDICATED LANES CLOSED
Work Area
GENERAL NOTES

Work Zone Sign
Single Left Lane Closed Configuration.

PCMS DISPLAY
2. This Plan is for Lane Closures that exceed three hours.

MESSAGE 1: SUNPASS
LANES
CLOSED
11:
39:
12 AM
5. See INDEX 667 sheet 1 for Two or More Inside Dedicated Lanes
6. Lane use control lights, signs, or signals over toll lanes shall be
MESSAGE 2: USE
CASH
LANES
3. Plaza canopies which have existing DMS signs on the canopies
switched to the appropriate symbol, message, or correct color
shall display the message "LANE CLOSED" for the duration of
prior to the start of any lane closure. They should also be
this closure.
switched at project completion.

A AW

7. At least 48 hours prior to any closure, other than emergencies,

the plaza manager shall be notified for security and staffing.
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
INSIDE DEDICATED LANES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
667
SHEET
NO.
2 of 6
If there is no room in the median for the PCMS

then locate it on the outside of the roadway only.
Beginning of Physical Split
MEDIAN
PCMS*
Between Open Road

Tolling and Cash Lanes
Device Spacing 25' Typ.
AA
W
Type III Barricades

500'
1140'
1000'
1640'
500'
500'
**
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
PLAZA
WORK
WHEN WORKERS
RIGHT LANE
RIGHT LANE
PRESENT
CLOSED
CLOSED
1 MILE
MILE
840' Taper
Varies
Work Area
1000 FT
ALL LANES CLOSED***
** Install temporary Speeding Fines Doubled sign only if there is not an existing
permanent "Speeding Fines Doubled Through Toll Plaza" sign or an existing
***
Inverted for Inside Open Road

Tolling Lanes Configuration
"Speeding Fines Doubled When Workers Present" sign in place.
GENERAL NOTES
2. This Plan is for lane closures of any time length.
3. Plaza canopies which have existing DMS signs on the canopies
SYMBOLS
shall display the message "LANE CLOSED" for the duration of

this closure.
Work Area
PCMS DISPLAYS
4. For planned lane closure, a portable changeable message sign
shall be placed and shall display the message shown at a
Work Zone Sign
PCMS DISPLAY PRIOR TO CLOSURE

MESSAGE 1: SUNPASS
MESSAGE 2:
"DATE(S)"
ONLY
is less than one week, place portable changeable message sign

immediately using "prior to closure" messages.
LANES
minimum of one week prior to closure. If planned lane closure

CLOSED

PCMS DISPLAY DURING CLOSURE
6. Lane closure configurations applicable to 2 or 3 lane open road

A AW
MESSAGE 1: SUNPASS
MESSAGE 2:
USE
LANES
CASH
CLOSED
LANES
tolling plazas.
11:
39:
14 AM

Type III Barricades and "RAMP CLOSED" sign
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
OUTSIDE OPEN ROAD TOLLING LANES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
667
SHEET
NO.
3 of 6
If there is no room in the median for the PCMS sign,
** Install temporary Speeding Fines Doubled sign only if there is not an existing
then locate it on the outside of the roadway only.
permanent "Speeding Fines Doubled Through Toll Plaza" sign or an existing

"Speeding Fines Doubled When Workers Present" sign in place.

Beginning of Plaza
Throat Opening
MEDIAN
A AW
PCMS*
Work Area

M
M/ETC
500'
1140'
1000'
1640'
500'
500'
840'
Taper
PLAZA
WORK
Varies
**
1 MILE
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
LEFT LANE
LEFT LANE
CLOSED
CLOSED
1/2 MILE
1000 FT
RIGHT LANE OPEN
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT

Work Area
Beginning of Plaza
MEDIAN
Throat Opening
PCMS*
A AW

M
M/ETC
500'
1140'
1000'
1640'
500'
500'
840'
1680'
840'
Taper
Tangent
Transition
PLAZA
WORK
Varies
**
1 MILE
LEFT LANE OPEN
SPEEDING FINES
DOUBLED
LEFT LANE
LEFT LANE
CLOSED
CLOSED
1/2 MILE
1000 FT
GENERAL NOTES
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
1. This Plan is to be used at Mainline Plazas only.
2. This Plan is for lane closures of any time length.
SYMBOLS
PCMS DISPLAYS
Work Area
3. Plaza canopies which have existing DMS signs on the canopies shall display the message "LANE CLOSED" for
PCMS DISPLAY PRIOR TO CLOSURE

Message 1:
Work Zone Sign
ONE
Message 2:
LANE
the duration of this closure.
4. For planned lane closure, a portable changeable message sign shall be placed and shall display the
SUNPASS
OPEN
messages shown at a minimum of one week prior to closure. If planned lane closure is less than one week,
ONLY
"DATE(S)"
place portable changeable message sign immediately using "prior to closure" messages.
11:
39:
14 AM


PCMS DISPLAY DURING CLOSURE
A AW

Message 1:
SUNPASS
Message 2:
OPEN
ONLY
USE
LANE
CAUTION
6. Lane closure configurations applicable to 2 or 3 lane open road tolling plazas.
7. At least 48 hours prior to any closure, other than emergencies, the plaza manager shall be notified for
12/3/2015
security and staffing.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
INSIDE OPEN ROAD TOLLING LANES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
667
SHEET
NO.
4 of 6

Beginning of Gore Striping
Beginning of Lane Striping
Work Area
12' Min.
100'
Back of Attenuator Truck
50' Taper
100'
100'
A AW
Varies
*
**
SPEEDING FINES
PLAZA
DOUBLED
WORK
WHEN WORKERS
CLOSED
AHEAD
PRESENT
AHEAD
CENTER LANE
If the closed lane is not a dedicated lane, the 50'

taper may begin at the back of the attenuator truck.
EXHIBIT A
DEDICATED, CASH, OR MIXED-USE LANES IN CENTER - ONE LANE CLOSED
(This same plan can be used for any non-dedicated lane even if they are
not in the center of the plaza)
** Install temporary Speeding Fines Doubled sign only if
there is not an existing permanent "Speeding Fines
Doubled Through Toll Plaza" sign or an existing
"Speeding Fines Doubled When Workers Present"
sign in place.
Beginning of Gore Striping
Beginning of Plaza
Throat Opening
Beginning of Lane Striping
A AW
Work Area
100'
100'
100'
Taper Varies
Varies
**
SPEEDING FINES
PLAZA
DOUBLED
WORK
WHEN WORKERS
CLOSED
AHEAD
PRESENT
AHEAD
LEFT LANE
EXHIBIT B
DEDICATED LANE INSIDE OR OUTSIDE - ONE LANE CLOSED
SYMBOLS
(Outside Lane Closure is a Mirror Image of this Exhibit)
GENERAL NOTES
1. This Plan is for lane closures that exceed three hours.
2. If the closed lane is a dedicated lane, Exhibit A shall be used at Ramp

Plazas only. If the closed lane is a cash or mixed-use lane, Exhibit A may
Work Area
be used at Ramp or Mainline Plazas.

4. Exhibit B shall be used at Ramp Plazas only.
Work Zone Sign
5. Lane use control lights, signs, or signals over toll lanes shall be switched
11:
39:
15 AM
to the appropriate symbol, message, or correct color prior to the start of

any lane closure. They should also be switched at project completion.

A AW

6. At least 48 hours prior to any closure, other than emergencies, the plaza
and Truck/Trailer Mounted Attenuator
12/3/2015
manager shall be notified for security and staffing.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
MAINLINE PLAZAS & RAMP PLAZAS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
667
SHEET
NO.
5 of 6
Work Area
A AW
300'
Varies
50'
Taper
PLAZA
WORK
AHEAD
WORK DONE WITHIN TRAVEL LANE - ONE LANE CLOSED
300'
50'
Taper
GENERAL NOTES
PLAZA
1. This Plan is for lane closures that are three hours or less.
WORK
AHEAD
2. This Plan is to be used at Ramp or Mainline Plazas.
WORK NOT DONE WITHIN TRAVEL LANE - ONE LANE CLOSED
3. This plan can be used for any lane, with appropriate

modifications, even if it is not in the center of the Plaza.
SYMBOLS
4. Lane use control lights, signs, or signals over toll lanes shall
Work Area
be switched to the appropriate symbol, message, or correct

color prior to the start of any lane closure.
They should also
be switched at project completion.
Work Zone Sign


6. A Truck/Trailer Mounted Attenuator is required for all aerial
11:
39:
16 AM

work operations (lift truck). For non-aerial operations, the
A AW

Truck Mounted Attenuator or additional devices may be required
12/3/2015
by the Engineer based on the work being performed.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SHORT-TERM CLOSURES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
667
SHEET
NO.
6 of 6
Limits of Speed Reduction - 3 Miles Maximum

Median
Limits of Lane Closure - 2 Miles Maximum
Work Area
1000'
500'
500'
PCMS
1640'
500'
1140'
1000'
Taper Length=L
Buffer Space
See Table II
See Table II
500'
500'
RSDU
PRS
See
END
SPEED
LIMIT
ROAD WORK
xx
Note
No. 6
ROAD
SPEEDING FINES
WORK
RIGHT LANE
See Table I
See Table I
CLOSED
1 MILE
DOUBLED
1/2 MILE
WHEN WORKERS
PRESENT
GENERAL NOTES
Table I
1. If the posted speed (speed limit that existed prior to construction) is 65 MPH or greater,
Device Spacing
TYPICAL PCMS DISPLAY
reduce the posted speed by 10 MPH using the Portable Regulatory Sign (PRS). If the

With speed reduction:
Message 1: WORKERS PRESENT AHEAD
Message 2: SPEED REDUCED NEXT 3MI
Posted
Cones or
Type I or Type II
Speed
Tubular
(mph)
Markers
Panels or Drums
posted speed is 55 MPH or 60 MPH, display 55 MPH using the PRS. Use the messages
provided in the TYPICAL PCMS DISPLAY. Taper lengths, buffer space and device spacing
shall be selected using the posted speed, not the reduced speed.
2. All Arrow Boards, Portable Changeable Message Signs, Portable Regulatory Signs and
Without speed reduction:
Taper
Tangent
Taper
Tangent
Message 1: WORKERS PRESENT AHEAD

55 to 70
25
50
50
100
Message 2: NEXT 3 MILES
Radar Speed Display Trailers, shall be turned off and moved outside the clear zone or
be shielded by a barrier or crash cushion when not in use.
3. Work operations shall be confined to one traffic lane, leaving the adjacent lane(s) open
to traffic.
Table II
4. When work is performed in the median lane on divided highways, the barricading plan
is inverted and left lane closed and lane reduction signs substituted for the right lane
Posted
SYMBOLS
Taper Length
Space
closed and lane reduction signs.
Speed
Dist.
Notes
(ft.)
(ft.)
(Merge)
55
495
660
60
570
720
(mph)
Work Area
Buffer
65
645
780
70
730
840
control devices normally placed in the median (as shown) shall be omitted.
6. When paved shoulders having a width of 8 ft. or more are closed, channelizing devices
L = WS
Work Zone Sign
5. When work is being performed on a multilane undivided roadway, the signs and traffic
shall be used to close the shoulder in advance of the merging taper to direct vehicular
traffic to remain within the travel way. See Index No. 612 for shoulder taper formulas.

When Buffer Space cannot be attained due to
CONDITIONS
geometric constraints, the greatest attainable length

(1) PCMS= Portable Changeable(Variable) Message Sign
The MAS shall be used if all the following conditions exist:
11:
39:
16 AM
shall be used, but not less than 200 ft.
(2) PRS= Portable Regulatory Sign- Speed Limit When Flashing
(2) RSDU= Radar Speed Display Unit
For lateral transitions other than 12', use formula for
MULTILANE FACILITY
L shown in the notes column.
POSTED SPEED LIMIT IS 55 MPH OR GREATER
Where:
L= Length of taper in feet
12/3/2015
W= Width of lateral transition in feet
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
S= Posted speed limit (mph)
WORK ACTIVITY REQUIRES A LANE CLOSURE FOR MORE THAN

5 DAYS (CONSECUTIVE OR NOT)
WORKERS ARE PRESENT AND NOT PROTECTED BY BARRIER
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MOTORIST AWARENESS SYSTEM
NO.
670
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Auxiliary Lane, or Ram p
Edge of Traveled W ay,
START
Clear Zone*
Traversable
Recoverable Terrain
Nonrecoverable
Recoverable Terrain
Terrain
10' min.
Shoulder
STEP 1
Obtain the
design speed.
STEP 2
ROADSIDE TERRAIN
FIGURE 1
Select the minimum

recoverable terrain from
Table A based on the lane
type and design speed.
*Roadside
Slopes shown in Figure 1 are for Maintenance and
Permitting purposes when establishing Clear Zone requirements. For

FDOT Standard Roadside Slopes, refer to PPM, Volume 1, Chapter 4.
TABLE A
MINIMUM RECOVERABLE TERRAIN (ft)
STEP 4A
STEP 3
No
&
(mph)
Multilane
Single Lane
Ramps
Ramps
<45
18
10
45
24
14
50
24
14
Figure 1,
restricting
determine the
conditions in
clear zone.
Auxiliary Lanes
&
As shown in
Does the facility

meet ALL the
Travel Lanes
Design Speed
Table B?
DEFINITIONS
Roadside Terrain includes all surfaces along the roadway adjacent to the
traveled way. For the purpose of establishing clear zones and horizontal
clearance requirements, roadside terrain is defined as recoverable,
traversable, traversable nonrecoverable, nontraversable, and hazardous as
follows:
Yes
55
30
18
>55
36
24
Clear Zone is the relatively flat unobstructed area that is to be provided

for safe use by errant vehicles, and must be wide enough so that the sum
STEP 4B
of all the recoverable terrain within is equal to or greater than the value
obtained in STEP 2. Recoverable terrain provided beyond nonrecoverable
terrain must be a minimum of 10 feet. Areas beyond nontraversable and
STEP 5
hazardous terrain cannot be used as recoverable or traversable

Based on the object,
Based on the object,
obstruction, or condition,
obstruction, or condition,
use the restricted column
use the nonrestricted
of Table C to determine
column of Table C to
the horizontal clearance
determine the horizontal
requirement.
clearance requirement.
nonrecoverable terrain.
Horizontal Clearance Requirements are shown in Table C and are the
required offsets to an object from a specified point on the roadway.
TABLE B
RESTRICTING CONDITIONS
Recoverable when it is safely traversable and on a slope that is 1v:4h or

flatter.
8:
56:
07 AM
Traversable when the slope is 1v:3h or flatter.

1.
The facility is an urban facility.
Traversable Nonrecoverable when it is safely traversable and on a slope
2.
The facility's design speed is 45 mph or less.
that is steeper than 1v:4h but not steeper than 1v:3h.
3.
The facility is predominantly a curbed facility.
4.
The distance from the traveled way to the R/W
Nontraversable when it is not safely traversable or on a slope that is
line is less than the value obtained in STEP 2.
steeper than 1v:3h.
END
Hazardous when a slope is steeper than 1v:3h and deeper than 6 feet as
12/3/2015
shown in Figure 2.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
PROCESS FOR DETERMINING HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ROADSIDE OFFSETS
NO.
700
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
TABLE C
GENERAL NOTES
CATEGORY
Item
No.
HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS
OBJECTS,OBSTRUCTIONS OR CONDITIONS
Restricted (See Table B)
Nonrestricted
1.
When shielding an object and sidewalks are

present, an unobstructed sidewalk width of at least
Above ground fixed hazards:Allroadside objects,

obstructions or conditions other than those listed below
Locate as close to the RightOf Way as practicaland
Locate outside the clear zone as close to
thatexceed 4 inches in heightand pose a hazard to
not less than 4 feetfrom face of curb.
the RightOf Way as practical.
4 feet must be provided.

2.
errantvehicles and vehicle occupants.
GENERAL
When site specific conditions prohibit meeting the

lateral offset requirements in TABLE C, the object,
Drop-off hazards:Any pointalong a roadside slope

2
steeper than 1v:3h that is deeper than 6 feetbelow the

hinge point.See Figure 2.
obstruction or condition must be crashworthy or

Locate the point that is 6 feetbelow the hinge point
Treat as roadside slopes in accordance
mitigated, possibly by shielding. Otherwise, see the
no less than 22 feetfrom the edge of traveled way.
with Design Standard,Index 400.
PPM, Volume 1, Chapter 4.
AllFDOT approved guardrails,guardrailend terminals,

3
crash cushions,and concrete barriers (temporary or
Locate as shown in the Design Standards.
permanent).
4
Design Standard,Index 532

Mailboxes
Locate in accordance with Design Standard,Index 532.
NotShown in Design Standard,
Not to be used.
Index 532
Outside roadways:Locate no less than 4 feetfrom

Expected to become greater
than 4 inches in diameter
(measured 6 inches above the

ground).
face of curb in accordance with Design Standard,

Index 546.
the RightOf Way as practicaland in
Inside medians:Locate no less than 6 feetfrom the

edge of traffic lane and in accordance with Design
Trees
Locate outside the clear zone as close to

accordance with Design Standard,index
546.
Standard,Index 546.
ROADWAY
Notexpected to become greater
than 4 inches in diameter
(measured 6 inches above the

ground).
Behind guardrail.
Locate no less than 5 feetfrom the back of the guardrailpost.
Design Speeds of 50 mph and greater:

Locate as close to the RightOf Way as
practicaland not less than 60 feetfrom
Canals
Locate as close to the RightOf Way as practicaland
Unshielded
the edge of traveled way.
not less than 40 feetfrom the edge of traveled

Design speeds less than 50mph:Locate as
way.
close to the Right of Way as practicaland

not less than 50 feetfrom the edge of
traveled way.
10
Culvertwing walls,
less than or equal6 feet deep.
Locate no less than 4 feetfrom face of curb.
Locate outside the clear zone.
endwalls,retaining
sections
greater than 6 feet deep.
Treat as drop-off hazard;See Item No.2.
12
Mitered end sections.
Locate as shown in Design Standard,Index 273 and Index 273.
13
Frangible or breakaway sign supports.
14
Overhead sign supports and other nonfrangible signs.
Locate no less than 4 feetfrom face of curb.
Locate outside the clear zone
Traffic infraction detectors,signalcontroller cabinets,
Locate no less than 4 feetfrom face of curb and not
Locate outside the clear zone and not in
signalpoles,strain poles and mast arms
in medians.
medians.
15
Locate 20 feetfrom travellanes or 14

16
Conventional lighting (frangible).
LIGHTING
on barrier walls in medians.
18
19
Highmastlighting
Notapplicable
Bridge piers and abutments:Above ground vertical
Locate not less than 16 feetfrom edge of traveled
structures.
way.
Fire hydrants with bases no higher than 4 inches above

ground.
Locate not less than 2 feetfrom face of curb.
May be clear zone width when the clear
20
Aboveground fixed Utilities (AFUs).
Curb May Or May Not

Be Present
Hinge Point

Locate as close to the RightOf Way as
practical.
Slope Steeper Than 1v:3h
New AFUs are to be outside the Clear
UTILITIES
8:
56:
08 AM
feetfrom auxiliary lanes. Not in medians.

zone is less than 20 feet.
17
STRUCTURES
Locate no less than 4 feetfrom face of curb and only
See Item 2 Of Table C

For Horizontal Clearance Requirements
6'
TRAFFIC CONTROL
DEVICES
walls and flared end

11
Edge Of Traveled W ay
DRAINAGE
New AFUs placed no closer than 4 feetfrom the
Zones established using Table A
face of curb and as close to the R/W as practical.
Recoverable Terrain and as close to the
Greater than 6' Below Hinge Point
R/W line as practical.
DROP-OFF HAZARDS
RAILROADS
21
Railroad crossing traffic controldevices.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
FIGURE 2
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ROADSIDE OFFSETS
NO.
700
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Approach Slab
Bridge
Gutter Transition
Locate Fence Along Slope Where
Top Of Fence Approx. Equals
Tops Of Headwall.
3 Strands Barbed Wire
3
8"
Expansion Or Chemical Concrete
Anchor Eyebolt Or Studs And Eyenuts.

1
2"
Embedment 2
Slope Pavement
Min. (3 Reqd.)
This Post To Be Located Approx. In Line
Terminate Fence Where Culvert
With End Bent. Set Post At Edge Of
Wing Height Approx. Equals
Slope Pavement.
Fence Height
Toe Of Slope
Varies, As Directed By The Engineer

Proposed Fence
Proposed Fence
6"
LA R/W Line
PLAN
PICTORIAL VIEW
Shoulder Line
Slope Pavement
Proposed Fence
Toe Of Slope
Natural Ground
Construct Flush Against Footing
3' Min.
ELEVATION
FENCING TERMINALS AT BRIDGE ENDS
Fence Locations At Cross Drains

With Excavated Outfall Ditches
(ROADWAY)
30
Or As Shown In Plans.
PLAN
(For Heights Of Headwall Greater Than 4')
Bridge
Approach Slab
FENCING TERMINALS AT BOX CULVERTS

Shoulder Line
Gutter Transition
20'M in.
14' Max.
Proposed Fence
Natural Ground
Toe Of Slope
FENCING DETAIL AT CULVERT
11:
42:
03 AM
Proposed Fence
(For Heights Of Headwalls 4' Or Less.)

LA R/W Line
6"
PLAN
ELEVATION
Note: When height of headwall is 4' or less
(drainage pipe 36" or less) the fence
FENCING TERMINALS AT BRIDGE ENDS
shall not be tied to the headwall, but shall
12/3/2015
span the lateral ditch.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
(STREAM CROSSING)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FENCE LOCATION
NO.
800
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
6'
10'
300'M in.
End LA R/W Line & Fence
NOTE: LA R/W along the crossroad will extend a minimum

300' beyond the end of the acceleration or deceleration
taper, with the taper most remote from the project
establishing the end for both sides of the roadway. In the
absence of a taper the radius point of the ramp return will
be used with the above criteria.
For interchange quadrants having no ramp the LA R/W
will extend along the crossroad to a point opposite the
limit of LA R/W established by the ramp taper or
Cross Street
INSET A
radius point as noted above.
50' Min. Overlap
30' Min.
Crossroad
See Inset A
6"
LA R/W Line
Local
Sidewalk
Street
LA R/W Line
45
See Note B
Fence Type "B"
6"
Ramp
Fence Type "B"
6"
6"
Bridge Over Crossroad
50' Min. Overlap

45
See Note A
Ramp
6"
Fence Type "B"

Radius Point
Varies
LA R/W Line
Note A - The indicated distance shall be sufficient to provide satisfactory

End LA R/W Line & Fence
sight distance for the traffic from the ramp.
See Note Above
100'M in.
6"
Fence
Note B - The indicated distance shall be identical to the above noted

APPLIES TO BRIDGE OVER CROSSROAD AND CROSSROAD OVER FREEWAY (BRIDGE OVER CROSSROAD SHOWN)
dimension, if practical.
End Fence &
LA R/W Line
FENCING TERMINALS AT RURAL INTERCHANGES

FENCING TERMINALS AT URBAN INTERCHANGES
6" Where Footing Permits
Varies
Retaining Wall
Varies
Fence
LA R/W Line
PLAN
Terminate Fence Where Wall Height
11:
42:
03 AM
Approximately Equals Fence Height.
Ground Line
12/3/2015
ELEVATION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
FENCING TERMINALS AT RETAINING WALLS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FENCE LOCATION
NO.
800
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
GENERAL NOTES
1.
10. The woven wire shall be attached to steel and concrete posts by a minimum of five tie wires. The single
This fence to be provided generally in rural areas. For supplemental information see Section 550
wire ties shall be applied to the top, bottom and three intermittent line wires. The ends of each tie wire
of the FDOT Specifications.
shall have a minimum of two tight turns around the line wire. Tie wires shall be steel wire not less than
2.
Fabric shall be woven wire, either galvanized steel, meeting the requirements of ASTM A116, No. 9 Grade 60,
0.120" diameter, zinc coating Class 3, soft temper, in accordance with ASTM A641.
Design Number 1047-6-9, with Class 3 zinc coating; No. 12 Grade 175, Design Number 1047-6-12 , with a
11. Steel Barbed Wire can be either of the following types:
10 gage top and bottom wire and with Class 3 zinc coating; or aluminum coated steel, meeting the
requirements of ASTM A584, No. 9 Farm, Design Number 1047-6-9, with a minimum coating weight of 0.40 oz./ft..
For additional information see payment note below.
Type I:
1
2
This type shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A121, with two strands of 12
gage wire;
four-point barbs, wire size 14 gage, twisted around both line wires; and, Class 3 coating,
Design No. 12-4-5-14R.
3.
Fence shall be installed with wire side to private property except on horizontal curves greater than 3
Type IIA: This type same as Type I except the two strand wires are twisted in alternating directions between
the fence shall be installed so as to pull against all posts.
consecutive barbs.
Type IIB: This type shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A121 with two strands of 15 gage high tensile
4.
Posts may be either timber, steel, recycled plastic or concrete. Unless a specific post material is called
for in the plans, the Contractor may elect to use either a single material or a combination of timber,
Aluminum Barbed Wire shall be fabricated of two strands of 0.110-inch wire with 0.08-inch diameter four-point
and end post assemblies of a different material. Line posts of only one optional material and pull post
assemblies of only one optional material will be permitted between corner and end post assemblies. Within
individual corner and end post assemblies only one optional material will be permitted.
5.
Timber posts shall meet the material requirements of Specification Section 954. Timber line posts are to be
minimum 4" diameter. Timber corner, pull, approach and end posts are to be a minimum 5" diameter. Timber
braces are to be minimum 4" diameter.
(A)
1
4"
Staples for line posts to be 1
length.
1
2"
minimum length; for approach, corner and pull posts 1
At approach, corner and pull posts, staple every line wire.
in top half and alternate line wires in bottom half.
wire; four-point barbs, wire size 16 gage twisted around both line wires; and Class 3 coating,
Design No. 15-4-5-16R.
steel, recycled plastic or concrete materials. Line posts of one material may be used with corner, pull
1
2",
barbs spaced at approximately 5
and at a maximum spacing of 6". The wire for the strands and
for the barbs shall be of ASTM B211M Alloy 5052-H38 or equal.

12. The woven wire shall be stretched only until one-half the tension curl has been pulled out of the line wires.
13. Posts to be set by driving or digging. If by digging, the posts shall be set at the center of the hole and the
soil tamped securely on all sides.
minimum
At line posts, staple every line wire
14. Longer posts than those indicated above may be required by the plans or for deeper installations.
Staples shall be driven diagonally across the line wire
with the points in separate grains.
15. Concrete bases for angular steel posts (pull, corner, end and approach) shall be Class NS as specified in Section
(B) Connections between timber posts and braces to be provided by dowels as shown in fastener details.
347. Materials for Class NS concrete may be proportioned by volume and/or by weight.
(C) Wire to be wrapped and tied, as shown in the splice details, at the following locations:
6.
(a)
All end posts,
(b)
Corner post, including the assemblies at vertical breaks of 15 or more and
(c)
Pull posts where the wire is not spliced and pulled through the assembly;
see General Note 18.
Steel posts and braces shall be standard steel posts, galvanized at the rate of 2 oz./ft., together with
16. Pull post assemblies shall be installed at approximately 330' centers except that this maximum interval may be
reduced by the Engineer on curves where the radius is less than 3.
17. Corner post assemblies are to be installed at all horizontal and vertical breaks in fence of 15 or more.
necessary hardware and wire clamps and meeting the following requirements:
(A) Line posts: 8' long; 1.33 lbs./ft.; roll formed studding; anchor plate attached (23 in.).
1
1
1
2"x2 2"x 4"
(B) Approach posts: 2
18. A maximum length of 1320' of wire may be installed as a unit. For pulls through a pull post assembly the fabric
angles, 8' long; fabricated for attaching brace; with necessary
shall be spliced by crimping sleeves only. Pulls through a corner post assembly will not be permitted.
hardware, clamps, etc.

(C) Pull, end and corner posts:
1
1
1
2 2"x2 2"x 4"
19. Unless otherwise called for in the plans gates shall be commercially available metal swing gates assembled and
angles, 8' long; fabricated for attaching brace; with
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications as approved by the Engineer. Chain link swing
necessary hardware, clamps, etc.

1
4"
(D) Braces: 2"x2"x
gates in accordance with Index No. 802 may be substituted for metal swing gates as approved by the Engineer.
angles with necessary hardware and fabricated for attaching to post.
(E) The pull, corner, approach and end posts are to be set in concrete as per detail. (Also see General
Note No. 15)
7.
single or double, all necessary hardware for installation and any additional length and/or size for posts at the
opening. Gates shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Fence Gates, EA.
Recycled plastic posts shall meet the following material requirements: Line posts shall have a minimum section
of 4" round or 4" square. Plastic posts shall not be used as corner, pull, end or approach posts unless such use is
specifically detailed in the plans. The straightness of the post shall comply with 954-5 for timber post. The
flexural strength shall meet the requirements of the latest edition of the Southern Pine Inspection Bureau's Standard
Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber for No. 2SR Stress Rated Grade Timber. Plastic posts can be set by either
digging and tamped backfill or by driving into full depth preformed holes
Gate size is full opening width whether single leaf or double leaves. Payment for gates shall include the gate,
1
4"
to
1
2"
20. For construction purposes, assemblies are defined as follows: End post assemblies shall consist of:
one end post, one approach post, two braces, four diagonal tension wires and all necessary fittings and hardware.
Pull post assemblies shall consist of: one pull post, two braces, four diagonal tension wires and necessary fittings
and hardware. Corner post assemblies shall consist of: one corner post, two approach posts, four braces, eight
diagonal tension wires and all necessary fittings and hardware.
smaller than cross section of post.
Staples for fabric and barbed wire connection to plastic line posts shall be the same size, count and location as
that for timber posts.
21. All posts, braces, tension wires, fabric, tie wires, Class NS concrete, and all miscellaneous fittings and hardware
to be included in the cost for Fencing, LF. Fencing shall be inclusive of the lengths of pull, end and corner post
8.
The Contractor, at his option, may use any suitable precast or prestressed concrete posts; however, approval by the
assemblies, but exclusive of gate widths.
Engineer, of posts not shown on this index, will be required prior to construction of the fence. Precast posts shall
be Class I concrete. Prestressed posts shall be Class III concrete. Lengths of concrete post to be as indicated for
timber posts.
9.
Aluminum post, braces and accessory framing hardware shall not be used unless the plans specifically detail their
application or the Engineer specifically approves their incorporation in fence construction or repair. Aluminum
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
42:
04 AM
framed gates are permitted as described in General Note 19.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FENCE TYPE A
NO.
801
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
"
-0
8'
1
n.
2" M i
14' Maximum Spacing For Line Posts
8'-0"
8'-0"
2"
One Strand Barbed Wire
Brace
ce
ra
B
Brace
4"
8'
-6" M in.
1
2"
6"
5"
1
2"
4
3
8'
-0" M in.
1
2"
Woven Wire Farm Fence

With Flexible Joint And
Hump OrTension Curl.
6"
8'
-6" M in.
8"
7"
1
2"
3'
-10
1
2"
58
Note No. 2
8'
-0" M in.
See General
Brace
8'
-6" M in.
Brace
"
-0
8'
8'-0"
7"
8'-0"
Illustrates Angle In Fence Alignment
Brace
At The Rate Of 1.8
Twisted To Singing
Tightness, Steel Wire,
Soft Temper, Galvanized
At The Rate Of 1.8
3"
oz./ft.; ASTM A641.
APPROACH POST
oz./ft.; ASTM A641.

Note: Timber Post Illustrated.
(Typical)
PULL POST
LINE POST
(Typical)
LINE POST
LINE POST
APPROACH POST
CORNER OR END POST
Post
1"
LINE POST
Two No. 9 Gage Wires
3'
-3" M in.
Soft Temper, Galvanized
One Strand Barbed Wire
3'
-3" M in.
Tightness, Steel Wire,
Ground Line
2'
-9" M in.
Twisted To Singing
2'
-9" M in.
Two No. 9 Gage Wires
3'
-3" M in.
3"
R/W Line
6" Or As Indicated
2'
-9"
In Plans
Post
Wire Fabric
6"
Private Property
12"
FENCE POSITION AT LOCATIONS

WITHOUT FRONTAGE ROADS
(Pull, Corner, End And

Approach Posts)
(REFER TO DETAIL PLANS FOR FENCE POSITION AT
CONCRETE BASE FOR

ANGULAR STEEL POST
LOCATIONS WITH FRONTAGE ROADS)
DESIGN NOTE
11:
42:
05 AM
This index details fencing that is constructed with farm

1
2"
fabric 46
(47" nominal) in height and with specific
ground clearance and specific barbed wire spacings. For

fencing of different height or installation details, the fence
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
shall be fully detailed in the Contract plans.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FENCE TYPE A
NO.
801
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Brace
3
8"
1
2"
Brace
Brace
Post
3
8"
PRESTRESSED POST
No. 7 Gage Galv.
Post
Post
1
4"
Rad.
Wide
Chamfer Or
All Edges
4"
1
1 2"
1
2"
Metal Strap
4"
4"
No. 7 Gage Galv.
Length As Required
Carriage
Bolt
Stressed Relieved Cable Centered
1
2"
Metal Strap 2
Wide
Metal Strap
1
2"
1
1 2"
3
8"
Carriage
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
3
4"
Hole
3
4"
1
2"
Off Center Each End
1
2"
Bolt
Wide
4"
4"
5"
No. 7 Gage Galv.
4"
4"
1
2"
7'-8"
BRACE TO BRACE
ON LINE
BRACE AND POST
Chamfer Or
1
4"
Rad.
All Edges
BRACE TO BRACE
AT CORNER
PRESTRESSED BRACE
3
8"
Stressed Relieved Cable Centered
1
4"
FASTENER FOR CONCRETE POST AND BRACES

Length As Required
No. 3 Bars (4 Reqd.)

1
4"
4"
2"
#3 Bars
2"
4"
1
2"
PRECAST POST
1"
1
4"
Rad.
1"
1
2"
Brace
Chamfer Or
All Edges
1
2"
x 9" Galv. Dowel
x 4" Galv. Dowel

1
2"
3
4"
Hole
3
4"
Off Center Each End
3
4"
1
2"
No. 3 Bars (2 Reqd.)
1
4"
5"
Brace
Post
Brace
2"
#3 Bars
2"
7'-8"
Post
1
2"
PRECAST BRACE
FASTENER FOR TIMBER POST AND BRACE
ALTERNATE CONCRETE POSTS AND BRACES
Wire C
Corner
Wire B
Wire A
11:
42:
06 AM
Horizontal Wires
Wire B
Splice
Wire A
CORNER POSTS
Horizontal Wires
END AND PULL POSTS
Each horizontal wire to be wrapped around corner, end and

pull posts and tied to same wire. See General Notes 5 and 17.
Timber post illustrated. These methods also apply to steel
and concrete post illustrations.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
SPLICES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FENCE TYPE A
NO.
801
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Corner
.
ax
M
'
0
1
.
ax
M
'
0
1
End
10' Max.
10' Max.
10' Max.
10' Max.
s
er
nt
Ce
2'
Varies: 2' Max. 6" Min.
Post Cap
Ties @ 2' Centers
Tension Wire
Post Cap
Varies: 2' Max. 6" Min.
Ties @ 2' Centers

Tension Wire
es
Ti
Rail (Brace)
Ties @ 2' Centers
Rail (Brace)
6'(
Std.
)
Chain Link Fabric

No. 9 Gage 2"
Mesh, Twisted
3
3
16"x 4"
And Barbed
Tension
Bar Each Side
Top and
Truss Rod
Bottom Selvage
Ties @ 12" Centers

3
3
16"x 4"
Tension
Bar Each Side
Chain Link Fabric No. 9 Gage

2" Mesh, Twisted And Barbed
Truss Rod
Top And Bottom Selvage

Ground Line
Above Ground
Equally
At All Posts (Typical)
6"
Spaced ( 15")
12"
LINE POST
LINE POST
Tension Wire
LINE POST
3'
5 Per Bar
Ties @ 2' Centers
Tension Bands
LINE POST
10"
6"
Crowned 1"
2'
1
2"
Concrete Base
Tension Bands,
3
4"
5 Per Bar Equally Spaced (15")
6"
10"
3
x 4"
3" 1
14 Ga.
3'
Ties @ 2' Centers
6"
Tension Wire
2'
14 Ga. x
12"
LINE POST
PULL POST
Note: Tubular Post Illustrated
CORNER OR END POST
GENERAL NOTES
1.
This fence to be used generally in urban areas.
C. Rail options:
2.
For supplemental information refer to Section 550 of FDOT Standard Specifications.
3.
Chain link fabric, post, truss rods, tension wires, tie wires, stretcher bars, gates and all miscellaneous
1
4"
(1) Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40- 1
nominal dia. zinc galvanized at the rate of 1.8 oz./ft.:
ASTM A53 Table X 2, ASTM F1083, and AASHTO M111.

1
4"
(2) Aluminum coated steel pipe; ASTM A53 steel, X 2 Tables Schedule 40; 1
fittings and hardware shall meet the requirements of AASHTO and ASTM signify current reference.
(3) Aluminum alloy pipe4.
nominal dia.: ASTM B241 or B221, Alloy 6063, T6.
or undepleted stock of discontinued A446/A446M base materials; ASTM F669 Group IV
A. Line post options:

1
2"
(1) Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40- 1
nominal dia. zinc galvanized at the rate of 1.8 oz./ft.:

1
2"
(2) Aluminum coated steel pipe: ASTM A53, Table 2 (Grade A or B): Schedule 40- 1
nominal dia., 1.90" OD;
5
8":
7
8"X
5
8":
ASTM F1043.
5
8"
Detail.
D. Chain link fabric options (2" mesh with twisted and barbed selvage top and bottom for all options
Galv.: 1.8 oz/ft. zinc: AASHTO M111; OR , 0.9 oz./ft. zinc-5% aluminum-
(7) Resistance welded steel pipe; 50,000 psi min. yield strength ASTM A569/A569M, A653/A653M
1
2"
(Alternative Design); fence industry 2" OD, 1
NPS, 1.900" dec. equiv., 0.120" min. wall
thick. and min. wt. 2.28 lb./ft.; with ASTM F1043 metric equivalent internal coating Types A,
B, C or D and external coating Types A, B, or C; the chromate conversion coating of external
Type B shall have a thickness of 15g/in. min. and the polymer film topcoat shall have a
thickness of 0.0003" min.; internal and external coatings are not restricted to the combinations
of Table 2, ASTM F1043.
(1) Galvanized steel pipe, Schedule 40- 2" nominal dia. zinc galvanized at the rate of 1.8 oz./ft.:
ASTM A53 Table X 2, ASTM F1083, and AASHTO M111.
(2) Aluminum coated steel pipe: ASTM A53 steel, X 2 Tables: Schedule 40; 2" nominal dia.,
2.375" OD; coated at the rate 0.40 oz./ft.: AASHTO M111.
nominal dia.: ASTM B241 or B221, Alloy 6063,T6.
at the rate of 0.40 oz./ft.

(3) AASHTO M181 Type IV- Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Steel, No. 9 guage (coated core wire
diameter), core wire-zinc coated steel. PVC coating: M181 Class A (either extruded or extruded
and bonded) or Class B (bonded).
See table right.
Unless the plans call for M181 standard
colors medium green, dark green or black the coating color shall be soft gray matching that of
No. 36622 of Federal Standard 595a.

1
2 2"
(1) Steel wire No. 7 gage zinc galvanized at the rate of 1.2 oz./ft.: AASHTO M181.
(2) Aluminum alloy wire with a diameter of 0.1875" or larger conforming to the requirements
of ASTM B211, Alloy 5056 Temper H38, or, Alclad Alloy 5056 Temper H192.
(3) Aluminum coated steel wire No.7 gage coated at the rate of 0.040 oz./ft.: AASHTO M181.
F. Tie wire and hog ring options:
(4) Resistance welded steel pipe; 50,000 psi min. yield strength ASTM A569/A569M, A653/A653M
(Alternative Design); fence industry
rate of 1.8 oz/ft. (M181 Class D 2.0 oz./ft. modified to 1.8 oz./ft.).
(2) AASHTO M181 Type II -Aluminum Coated Steel, No. 9 gage (coated wire diameter), coated
E. Tension wire options:
B. Corner, end, and pull post options:
1
2"
except as described in Note No. 10):

(1) AASHTO M181 Type I - Zinc Coated Steel, No. 9 gage (coated wire diameter), coated at the
mischmetal: ASTM F1043 and Detail.
(3) Aluminum alloy pipe- 2
D and external coating Types A, B, or C; the chromate conversion coating of external Type B
Zinc Galv. 1.8 oz./ft.: AASHTO M111 and Detail.
(5) Aluminum alloy H-Beam- 1

1
NPS, 1.660" dec. equiv., 0.111" min. wall thick.
0.0003" min.; internal and external coatings are not restricted to the combinations of Table 2,
(3) Aluminum alloy pipe- 2" nominal dia.: ASTM B241 or B221, Alloy 6063, T6.
7
8"x
1
4"
OD, 1
shall have a thickness of 15g/in. min. and the polymer film topcoat shall have a thickness of
coated at the rate 0.40 oz./ft.: AASHTO M111.

(4) Steel H-Beam- 1
5
8"
(Alternative Design); fence industry 1
and min. wt. 1.836 lb./ft.; with ASTM F1043 metric equivalent internal coating Types A, B, C or
ASTM A53 Table 2 (Grade A or B), ASTM F1083, and AASHTO M111.
7
8"X
1
1 4"
(4) Resistance welded steel pipe; 50,000 psi min. yeild strength ASTM A569/A569M, A653/A653M
Fence Component Options:
(6) Steel C- 1
nominal dia.,
1.660" OD; coated at the rate 0.40 oz./ft.: AASHTO M111.
OD, 2" NPS, 2.375" dec. equiv., 0.130"min. wall
thick. and min. wt. 3.117 lb./ft.; with ASTM F1043 metric equivalent internal coating Types A, B,
(1) Steel wire No.9 gage zinc galvanized at the rate of 1.2 oz./ft.
(2) Aluminum alloy wire with a diameter of 0.1443" or larger conforming to the requirements of
ASTM B211, Alloy 5056 Temper H38, or, Alclad Alloy 5056 Temper H192.
(3) Aluminum coated steel wire No. 7 gage coated at the rate of 0.040 oz./ft.
C or D and external coating Types A, B, or C; the chromate conversion coating of external

11:
42:
06 AM
Type B shall have a thickness of 15g/in. min. and the polymer film topcoat shall have a
thickness of 0.0003" min.; internal and external coatings are not restricted to the combinations
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
of Table 2, ASTM F1043.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FENCE TYPE B
NO.
802
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
GENERAL NOTES CONTINUED

5.
Unless a specific material is called for in the plans the Contractor may elect to use either a single
type of material or a combination of material types from the component options listed in note 4.
Combinations of optional materials are restricted as follows:
(a) Only one fabric optional material will be permitted between corner and/or end post assemblies.
(b) Only one line post optional material will be permitted between corner and/or end post assemblies.
(c) Pull post assemblies shall be optional materials identical to either the linepost optional material
or the corner and end post assembly optional material; but, pull post assemblies shall be the same
optional material between any set of corner and/or end post assemblies.
6.
Concrete for bases shall be Class NS concrete as specified in Section 347 of the Standard Specifications
or a packaged, dry material meeting the requirements of a concrete under ASTM C-387. Materials for
Class NS concrete may be proportioned by volume and/or by weight.
7.
Line post shall be 8'-6" long (Standard). Line post are to be set in concrete as described above or
by the following methods:
(a) In accordance with special details and/or as specifically described in the contract plans and
TYPE IV VINYL COATED FABRIC
specifications.
(b) In accordance with ASTM F567 Subsections 5.4 through 5.10 as approved by the Engineer.
AASHTO M181 Table 4 Redefined As Follows
Line post installed in accordance with Section 5.8 shall be 9'-6" long.
(c) Post mounted on concrete structure or solid rock shall be mounted in accordance with the base
PVC Thickness Range
plate detail "Fence Mounting On Concrete Endwalls And Retaining Wall", Sheet 3; or, by embedment
Specified Diameter
in accordance with ASTM F567 Subsection 5.5.
Of Metallic Coated
End, pull and corner post assemblies shall be in concrete as detailed above for all soil conditions other than
Core Wire
Minimum Weight
Of Zinc Coating
M181 Class A
(Extruded Or Extruded
And Bonded Coating)
solid rock. Post within assemblies that are located on concrete structures or solid rock shall be set by
M181 Class B
(Bonded Coating)
base plate or by embedment as prescribed under (b) above for line post.
in.
mm
gage
oz./ft.
g/m
0.148
3.77
0.30
92
in.
mm
in.
mm
0.015
0.38
0.006
0.15
Line and assembly posts for 6' fence which must be lengthened due to a variation in the normal ground
clearance, shall be set an additional 3" in depth for each 1' of of additional ground clearance.
8.
Pull post shall be used at breaks in vertical grades of 15 or more, or at approximately 350' centers
to
0.025
to
0.64
to
0.010
to
0.25
except that this maximum interval may be reduced by the Engineer on curves where the curve is
greater than 3.
9.
Corner post are to be installed at all horizontal breaks in fence at 15 or more and as required at vertical
DESIGN NOTE
breaks over 15 as determined by the Engineer.

10. When fence has an installed top of fabric height less than 6' knuckled top and bottom selvages shall
This index details fencing that is constructed with chain link fabric 6' (nominal) in
be used unless the plans specifically identify locations for twisted selvage fabrics.
height and with specific ground clearance.

11. Unless sliding gates or special gates are called for in the plans, all gates shall be chain link swing gates
meeting the material requirements described and as approved by the Engineer. Payment shall include the
For fencing of different height or installation details, the fence shall be fully detailed
in the Contract plans.
gates, single or double, all necessary hardware for installation and any additional length and/or size for
posts at the opening. Gates shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Fence Gates, EA.
12. For construction purposes corner post assemblies shall consist of one corner post, two braces, two truss
rods, and all necessary fittings and hardware as detailed. End post assemblies shall consist of one end post,
one brace, one truss rod and all necessary fittings and hardware as detailed.
13. In areas where there are physical constraints outside the right-of-way which restricts the fence construction,
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
42:
07 AM
the fabric may be installed on the inside of the posts..
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FENCE TYPE B
NO.
802
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
1.625"
1.625"
0.562"
0.562"
"
In Plans
0.105"
0.121"
1
4"
R Typ.
"
4
Wire Fabric
R Typ.
Galv. Wt. Per. Ft.= 2.34# 5%
Galv. Wt. Per. Ft.= 1.85# 5%
Yield PSI (Min.) 45,000
Yield PSI (Min.) 45,000
STANDARD WALL
"
2
1
"
"
4
45
FENCE POSITION AT LOCATIONS

WITHOUT FRONTAGE ROADS
0.
232"
0.
107"
0.113"
m
o
N
1 2
OPTIONAL "C" LINE POST
m
o
N
Private Property
THINWALL
5
1
1 8" 16"
6" Or As Indicated
Post
1
4"
m
o
N
1 2
0.
750"
1.
875"
0.
750"
1.
875"
R/W Line
(REFER TO DETAIL PLANS FOR FENCE POSITION AT

LOCATIONS WITH FRONTAGE ROADS)
0.
107"
1.
411"
7
32"
Restraint Side Unless

Otherwise Called For In
Plans (See Notes)
NOTES
0.
232"
1
16"
7
8"
1.
661"
Fence To Be Mounted On
STEEL
Attachments to be used only when called for in the plans.

Attachments to extend in direction of restraint. Unless otherwise
ALUMINUM
called for in plans, direction of restraint will be as follows:
Area (Sq. In.)
724
724
Weight (Lb./Ft.)
2.72 5% (Galv.)
0.91 5%
Surface Area (SF/Ft.)
0.776
0.776
Tensile Strength (psi Min.)
80,000
30,000
Yielding Point (psi Min.)
48,000
25,000
(a.) Outward on limited access right of way line.

(b.) Outward on controlled access right of way line.
(c.) Outward from utilities and hazardous facilities located
within highway right of way.
(d.) Outward from lateral ditches, outfalls, retention basins,
canals, borrow areas and similar support facilities.
(e.) Inward on pedestrian ways.
Axes
1-1
2-2
Axes
1-1
The cap-arm shall be designed to provide a drive fit over the top
2-2
Moment Of Inertia
0.428 0.101
0.428 0.101
Section Modulus
0.456 0.124
0.456 0.124
0.779 0.373
0.779 0.373
Rad. Of Gyration
of posts and to exclude moisture in posts with tubular sections.
OPTIONAL 178"x 158" H-BEAM LINE POST

7
8"
Dia. Hole For
3
4"Anchors,
BARB WIRE ATTACHMENT
Nuts And Washers (2 Reqd.)

Steel
3
8"
(ASTM A36) Galvanized or
Aluminum
3
8"
Post
Alloy 6061-T6
1
4
Fence And Wall

Dia. Hole For
1
2"
Galvanized Anchors,
Nuts And Washers
5"
Post to be plumbed by grout shim under base plate.
3.
Anchors (Galvanized Steel):

1
2"
1
2"
Embedment:
1
8"
Headed Bolts, U-Bolts or Cluster Plates.

Fence And Wall
2.
12" Cast In Place, 10

1
1 4"
Adhesive Anchors, 6" Min. Embedment.*

*Adhesive anchors shall be headless anchor bolts set in drilled
Steel
4"
As Adjacent Side
8"
1
5 2"
1
2"
(ASTM A36) Galvanized or
1
Aluminum 2"
Dimensions Same
holes with an Adhesive Material System in accordance with

Specification Sections 416 and 937; drilled holes shall be
Alloy 6061-T6
1
8"
larger in diameter than the anchor bolt.
8"
Expansion Bolts Not Permitted.
TOP VIEW
FOUR ANCHOR PLATE OPTION
12/3/2015
11:
42:
08 AM
Base plate identical for line, pull, end and corner posts and shall be
considered an integral part of the respective posts for basis of payment.
3
4"
(4 Reqd.)
BASE PLATE AND ANCHOR NOTES:

1.
3"
9
16"
6"
1
8"
Post
1
2"
1
4
TOP VIEW
TWO ANCHOR PLATE OPTION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
FENCE MOUNTING ON CONCRETE ENDWALL AND RETAINING WALLS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FENCE TYPE B
NO.
802
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
2" Nom. Dia. Pipe

2.375" OD 3.65
Fence (Not Included)
#/Ft. (Top &

Back Frame (No Fabric)
Bottom Members)
4" Support Post
Varies
Sch. 40 Steel
1
2"
Pipe 3
Gate Frame
4" Support Post Sch. 40

1
2"
See Detail B
Nom.
Dia. 4" OD 9.11
Truss Rods
#/Ft. 12' Long
Welded At
Steel Pipe 3
Barb Wire As Required
Nom. Dia. 4"
OD 9.11 #/Ft. 12' Long

2" OD Pipe
Upper Corners
Vertical Member
3"
3" Latch Post Sch.

1
2"
40 Steel Pipe 2
2" OD Pipe Vertical
#7 Ga. Tension Wire
Nom. Size 2.875" OD
Members
(Top & Bottom) Hog
5.79 #/Ft. 12' Long
Ring To Fabric
(To Be Furnished
6'
-6"
3
8"Dia.
Truss
Truss Rods
Gate)
Detail A
14" OC (Typ.)
Bar
Latch & Catch As Required
3"
1
3
4"x 4"Tension
Truss Rods
And Installed With
1" Wide Bands @
Rods
Slot For Rods
6"
2" Pipe Sch.

1
2"
40 1
Nom.
Size 1.9" OD
3'
-6"
3'
-6"
Clear
6"
DETAIL A
Concrete Shall Be Crowned
Welded Plate With Hole For
1" Above Natural Ground
Truss Rod. Truss Rod
At All Posts.
Threaded For
3
8"
Nut.
2.72 #/Ft. (At

Each End &
Overall Frame)
6"
Points In
18"
Dia.
Gate Opening Between Posts
18" Dia. (Typ.)
GENERAL NOTES
FRONT ELEVATION
1.
Heavy Duty Rollers
Extruded, rolled or formed components that provide equal strength and stability
may be used in lieu of the pipe components shown; and, internal rollers may be
used in lieu of the external roller units shown.
Gate components shall meet or exceed the protective coatings specified on Index No. 802.
GATE OPENING
GATE FRAME
BACK FRAME
2.
Barb Wire Arm
12'
12'-3"
6'
16'
16'-3"
8'
20'
20'-3"
10'
24'
24'-3"
12'
Steel gate frame shall be fabricated prior to galvanizing, except that truss rods may be
fabricated following frame galvanizing provided surfaces damaged during welding are
galvanized in accordance with Section 24 of AASHTO M36; or, fabricated from pipe
As Required
components with protective coating meeting the requirements of Index No. 802 that are
tolerant of welding (low burn back), and a protective coating applied to the weld and
Arm Clamp
damaged pipe surfaces that is equivalent to the protective coating of the fabricated pipe
stock.
4" OD
Support Post
3.
All fabric shall be knuckled top and bottom selvages.
4.
Concrete for bases shall be either Class NS concrete as specified in Section 347 of the Standard
Specifications or a packaged, dry material meeting the requirements of a concrete under
ASTM C-387. Materials for Class NS concrete may be proportioned by volume and/or by weight.
Roller
5.
Gate
Cost of all gate components shall be included in the contract unit price for Sliding Fence
Gate (Cantilever), EA.
5
8"
Spacer Bar
1"
9
16"
Dia. Predrilled
Mounting Hole One End
3
16"
Bar
Cut Bar To Length

11:
42:
09 AM
And Drill Bottom

Hole In Field. Regalvanize
Cut And Drilled Surfaces.
TYPICAL FRAME - 24' Opening
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
SUPPORT POST
DETAIL
ROLLER SPACER
BAR
TYPICAL FRAME - 12', 16' & 20' Opening
DETAIL B
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CANTILEVER SLIDE GATE TYPE B FENCE
NO.
803
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Post Spacing (See Note 1)
Equal Spaces @ 10'-0" Max. (Posts may be shifted minimally to meet required clearances)
End Post Assembly
End Post
Post Cap (Typ.)
Tie tension wire to post with
Line Post
Varies (1'-0" Max.)
(triple wrap required at both
2'-0" Centers
ends of tie wire) (Typ.)
Post Cap (shown)

or Loop Cap
Top of Chain Link Fabric
3"
Tension Wire
No. 9 gage zinc coated tie wire

Hog Rings @
Post (Typ.)
Horizontal
Rail (Typ.)
Chain Link Fabric
Ties @ 2'-0"
Tension Bands (5
Post &
6'
-0"
(See Note 2)
6'
-0"
Brace Rail
Centers
required per Tension
Concrete
Parapet
Traffic Railing
Bar ~ Space Equally
4"
required
@ 1'-3" Maximum
Ties @ 1'-0"
Centers) (Typ.)
Top of Traffic
Centers (Typ.)
(Type Varies)*
Top of
Railing *
Concrete
4"
Tension Bar
Parapet
A
Traffic Railing
Traffic Railing (Type varies,
Pipe Clamp
32" F-Shape shown)
Connection (Typ.)
Varies
Tension Wire
See
(Type varies, 32"
2'
-3"
Hog Rings @ 2'-0" Centers
F-Shape shown)
Detail "B"
Concrete
See Detail "A"
Parapet
Bridge Deck (shown)
Bridge Deck (shown)
or Raised Sidewalk
or Raised Sidewalk
1'-0"
1'-0" Minimum from free end
ELEVATION OF OUTSIDE FACE OF RAILING
of concrete (Typ.)
Minimum from Expansion
TYPICAL SECTION
Joint (shown) and Open Joint
(Traffic Railing Shown, Concrete Parapet Similar (See Note 3))
in Barrier or Parapet (Typ.)
TYPICAL SECTION
ON TRAFFIC
ON CONCRETE
RAILING BARRIER
PARAPET
NOTES:
1.
* Fencing shall not anchor to the top of Traffic Railings.
A Pull Post Assembly is required at maximum intervals of 500'-0". See Sheet Nos. 3 of 4.
2. Brace rails are only required for vertical fence installations on Traffic Railing.
3. Provide horizontal rails for vertical fence installations on Concrete Parapets in lieu of tension wire.
Locate horizontal rails as shown in the Typical Section for Concrete Parapets at right.
FENCING NOTES
FENCE INSTALLATION:
Install posts plumb (within a tolerance of 1"). Use shim plates as required to achieve plumb. The required quantity and
thickness of shim plates will be determined in the field. Install chain link fence in accordance with ASTM F 567 as applicable.
TRAFFIC RAILING DETAILS:
See Superstructure Sheets for Traffic Railing Barrier details.
CONCRETE PARAPET DETAILS:
See Index No. 820 - Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing for Concrete Parapet details. Provide fencing in lieu of aluminum bullet railing
as shown on Index No. 820.
LIMITS OF FENCING:
shown in the plans.

PAYMENT:
Payment will be made under Fencing, Type R. Payment includes posts, horizontal and expansion rails, brace rails and bands,
rail ends, combination rail ends, boulevard clamps, chain link fabric, tension wire, ties, hog rings, tension bars and bands, post
CROSS REFERENCE:
For Table of Fence Components, Table of Post Attachment Components, View A-A and Detail "A"
and loop caps, pipe clamps, base plates, anchor rods, bolts, nuts, washers, shim plates, spacers, neoprene pads, miscellaneous
see Sheet No. 2.
fence fittings and hardware and all incidental materials and labor required to complete installation of the fence.
For Pull Post Assembly Detail for Traffic Railing Barriers see Sheet No. 3.
12/17/2015
11:
35:
16 AM
Limits of fencing are from begin of approach slab at Begin Bridge to end of approach slab at End Bridge, unless otherwise
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
For Pull Post Assembly Detail for Concrete Parapets and Detail "B" see Sheet No. 4.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
BRIDGE FENCING (VERTICAL)
NO.
810
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
TABLE OF POST ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
TABLE OF CHAIN LINK FENCE COMPONENTS

ASTM
COMPONENT
Posts
F 1083
Chain Link Fabric
A 392
ASTM
COMPONENT
COMPONENT INFORMATION
DESIGNATION
Galvanized Steel Pipe - 3" NPS, Schedule 40 (3.500" Outside Diameter,
A 36 or
Pipe Clamps
0.216" Wall Thickness)

Zinc Coated Steel - No. 9 gage (coated wire diameter), Class 2 Coating
A 36 or
Base Plates
A 36 or
Aluminum Coated Steel - No. 9 gage (coated wire diameter)
A 709 Grade 36 or
Shim Plates
B 209 Alloy 6061-T6
core wire diameter) ~ Specify the color of the polymer coating in the General Notes
or B 221 Alloy 6063-T5
F 626
Zinc Coated Steel Wire - No. 9 gage
Brace Bands
F 626
No. 12 Gage (Min. thickness) x " (Min. width) Steel Bands (Beveled or Heavy)
Tension Bars
F 626
F 626
Miscellaneous Fence
F 626
Components
Horizontal Rails
F 1083
Expansion Rails
F 1083
Bolts
A 307
Spacers
" (Min. thickness) x " (Min. width) x 5'-10" (Min. height) Steel Bars
No. 14 Gage (Min. thickness) x " (Min. width) Steel Bands
Zinc Coated Steel ~ (includes post or loop caps, horizontal and brace rail ends,
combination rail ends, boulevard clamps and all other miscellaneous fittings & hardware)
Galvanized Steel Pipe - 2 " NPS, Schedule 40 (2.875" Outside Diameter,
Connection
Tie Wires
Connection
F 668
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Steel - No. 9 gage Zinc Coated Wire (metallic-coated
Base Plate Pipe Clam p
and Concrete Parapets
Traffic Railing Barriers
A 491
bottom selvage)
Tension Bands
Concrete
" Steel
A 709 Grade 36
top and knuckled
Parapets
" Steel
A 709 Grade 36
(2" mesh with twisted
Adhesive Anchor Rods
F 1554 Grade 36
C-I-P Anchor Rods
F 1554 Grade 36
F 1554 Grade 36
C-I-P Anchor Rods
F 1554 Grade 36

Bolts
A 307
Nuts
A 563
Washers
F 436

" x 4" Hex Head Bolts for Expansion Rail Connections
Nuts
A 563
Hex Nuts for Expansion Rail Connections
Washers
F 436
Flat Washers for Expansion Rail Connections
Neoprene Pads
Plate thicknesses as required; Holes in shim

plates will be "
1" for all materials

Fully threaded Headless Anchor Rods ~ " x 6"
(no spacer) or " x 7" (with spacer)

Hex Head Anchor Rods ~ " x 6" (no spacer)
or " x 7" (with spacer)
Fully threaded Headless Anchor Rods ~

" x 14 "
Hex Head Anchor Rods ~ " x 14 "

" x 4 " Hex Head Bolts for Pipe Clamp
Connections to Posts
Hex Nuts for Pipe Clamp and Base Plate
Connections
Flat Washers for Pipe Clamp and Base Plate

Connections
In accordance with Specification Section 932
Type II (Zinc Coated Steel Wire) - No. 7 gage, Class 4 Coating

Tension Wire
Barriers
Traffic Railing
DESIGNATION
A 824 & A 817
Type I (Aluminum Coated Steel Wire) - No. 7 gage
Hog Rings
F 626
Brace Rails
F 1083

POST ATTACHMENT NOTES

Pipe Clamp Connection
(see Detail on Sheet No.
ANCHOR RODS, NUTS AND WASHERS:
3) (Typ.)
After the nuts have been tightened, distort the Anchor Rod threads to prevent
6"
(
Typ.
)
3"
removal of the nuts. Coat distorted threads and exposed trimmed ends of anchors
" Anchors
with a galvanizing compound in accordance with Specification Section 562.
Post
(Adhesive-Bonded
COATINGS:
Anchors shown, C-I-P
Hot-dip galvanize all Nuts, Washers, Bolts, C-I-P Anchor Rods, Adhesive Anchors
4" Min.
" Bolt
Anchor Rods similar)
and Fence Framework (Posts, Internal Sleeves, Shim Plates, Base Plates, Pipe
Clamps and Spacers) in accordance with Specification Section 962. Hot-dip
galvanize Fence Framework after fabrication.
ADHESIVE-BONDED ANCHORS AND DOWELS:
Adhesive Bonding Material Systems for Anchors and Dowels will comply with
1'
-0"
Pipe Clamp
installation.
WELDING:
All welding will be in accordance with the American Welding Society Structural
45
11:
35:
17 AM
Specification Section 937 and be installed in accordance with Specification

Section 416. Cutting of reinforcing steel is permitted for drilled hole
1" M in.
Post
Welding Code (Steel) ANSI/AWS D1.1 (current edition). Weld metal will be E60XX
9 " x 3" x " Thick
or E70XX. Nondestructive testing of welds is not required.
Neoprene Pad
CROSS REFERENCE:
1" Spacer must be manufactured
For location of View A-A and Detail "A" see Sheet No. 1.
12/17/2015
from an incompressible material

(i.e., steel or aluminum)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
VIEW A-A
DETAIL "A"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
810
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
3'-0" + Expansion Joint Opening
Pull Post Assembly (required at maximum intervals of 500'-0")
Line
(See Note 2)
Post
Line Post
Pull Post
Hog Rings @
Pull Post
2'-0" Centers
Bulge Chain Link Fabric
Post Cap
Tension
(Typ.)
Wire
to allow for joint movement
Varies (1'-0" Max.) (Typ.)
Chain Link
Fabric
Ties @ 1'-0"
Brace Rail
Centers (Typ.)
NOTES:
Brace Rail
1. For treatment at bridge ends, see Sheet No. 1.

2. The 3'-0" dimension shown is for expansion joint
Ties @ 2'-0"
Ties @ 2'-0"
openings 9" or less. If the expansion joint opening
Centers
Centers
exceeds 9", increase this dimension by the difference
Tension Bands (5 required
between the expansion joint opening and 9".
per Tension Bar ~ Space
Equally @ 1'-3" Maximum

Tension Bar (one each
Centers) (Typ.)
side of pull post)
Tension Wire

32" F-Shape shown)
Tie tension wire to post with No. 9
Pipe Clamp
gage zinc coated tie wire (triple wrap
Connection
required at both ends of tie wire) (Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bridge Deck (shown)
Bridge Deck (shown)
or Raised Sidewalk
or Raised Sidewalk
Expansion Joint Opening

1'-6"
1'-6"
PULL POST ASSEMBLY DETAIL FOR TRAFFIC RAILING

EXPANSION ASSEMBLY DETAIL
(Required only at expansion joint locations
where total movement exceeds 6")
2 ~ " C-I-P Anchor Rods or
" Pipe
Adhesive-Bonded Anchors (shown)
Clamp
1" Spacer
Outside Edges of Post
set in drilled holes with Heavy
Depth
" Anchors
(Typ.)
1 " 1 "
" Holes for
3"
Neoprene Pad
1 " 1 "
9 " x 3" x " Thick
3"
Hex Nuts and Washers

" Holes for
" Anchors
(Typ.)
1 "
4" Em bedm ent
Traffic Railing
Pipe Clamp
1 " 1"
Post and " Holes

R = 1 "
11:
35:
18 AM
1 "
3"
3"
1" 1 "
1 "
6 "
1 "
for " Bolt with Hex

Nut and Washer
Post
4"
1 "
1 "
6 "
1 "
9 "
9 "
SPACER DETAIL
PIPE CLAMP DETAIL
PIPE CLAMP CONNECTION DETAIL
(Must be manufactured from

an incompressible material
(Connection without spacer shown,
(i.e., steel or aluminum))
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
Connection with spacer similar)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
810
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4

Line
(See Note 2)
Post
Line Post
Pull Post
Post Cap (shown)

or Loop Cap (Typ.)
Ties @ 2'-0" Centers
Pull Post
Tension Bar (one
Expansion
Bulge Chain Link
each side of pull
Rails
Fabric to allow
Horizontal Rail
for joint movement
post) (Typ.)
NOTES:
Chain Link
1. For treatment at bridge ends, see Sheet No. 1.
Fabric

Ties @ 1'-0"
Centers) (Typ.)
Centers (Typ.)
3. This Dimension is the expansion joint opening plus

".
Expansion rails are required at expansion joint
locations where the total movement exceeds 1", but

is less than or equal to 6".
Expansion rails are part
of expansion assemblies when the total movement

exceeds 6". Install expansion rails midway between
the fence posts spanning the expansion joint.
4. Install nuts for expansion rails finger-tight.
Ties @ 2'-0" Centers
Horizontal Rail
Nuts will
fully engage bolts with a minimum of one bolt thread

Concrete Parapet
Rail Ends with Brace Bands (shown)
extending beyond the nuts.
or Combination Rail Ends with Brace
Distort the first thread
Bands or Boulevards Clamps (Typ.)
Bridge Deck (shown)
or Raised Sidewalk
1'-6"
1'-6"
PULL POST ASSEMBLY DETAIL FOR CONCRETE PARAPETS

Post
Post
Base Plate
CROSS REFERENCE:
1" Holes for "
6" x 8" x " Thick
For location of Detail "B" see Sheet No. 1.
Anchors (Typ.)
3"
Neoprene Pad
6"
Varies (See Note 3)

9"
3"
Concrete Parapet
1'
-0" Em bed. Depth
Varies
9"
Post
5"
4"
" Bolt with Hex Nut

and Washer (See Note 4)
" Base Plate

2 ~ " C-I-P Anchor
1"
Rods or Adhesive-Bonded
5 "
1"
11:
35:
19 AM
Anchors (shown) set in

drilled holes with Heavy
8"

Horizontal Rail
BASE PLATE DETAIL
EXPANSION RAIL DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DETAIL "B"
Expansion Rail
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
810
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
Post Spacing (See Note 1)
545'00" ~ ( 3" along inside post)
End Post
End Post Assembly
Line Post
4500'00" ~
Post Cap (shown)
Post Cap (shown)
Expansion Rails when required (Typ.)
or Loop Cap (Typ.)
Horizontal Rails
Tension Bar
( 1'-11 " along
or Loop Cap
inside post)
(See Detail on Sheet No. 2 of 3)

Outside Edge
of Post
Post (Typ.)
5"
R = 2'-6"
Horizontal
Ties @ 2'-0"
Tension Bands (5
Centers (Typ.)
Rail (Typ.)
Chain Link Fabric
required per Tension

Bar ~ Space Equally
Centers) (Typ.)
10'
-0"
@ 1'-3" Maximum
Ties @ 1'-0"
Post &
8'
-0"
Centers (Typ.)
Concrete Parapet
Top of
Concrete
(Type varies) *
Parapet
4"
4"
Traffic Railing
2'
-3"
See
Concrete Parapet
Detail "A"
Concrete
Parapet
Bridge Deck (shown)

Bridge Deck (shown)
or Raised Sidewalk
or Raised Sidewalk

TYPICAL SECTION
1'-0" Minimum from Expansion
ELEVATION OF OUTSIDE FACE OF PARAPET
of concrete (Typ.)
Joint (shown) and Open

Joint in Parapet (Typ.)
NOTES:
* Fencing shall not anchor to the

top of Traffic Railings.
1. A Pull Post Assembly is required at maximum intervals of 500'-0". See Sheet No. 2 of 3.
FENCING NOTES
FENCE APPLICATION:
This bridge fence can only be used on sidewalk installations separated from traffic by a traffic railing.
FENCE INSTALLATION:
Install posts plumb (within a tolerance of 1"). Use shim plates as required to achieve plumb. The required quantity
and thickness of shim plates will be determined in the field. Install chain link fence in accordance with ASTM F 567 as
applicable.
See Index No. 820 - Pedestrian/Bicycle Bullet Railing for Concrete Parapet details. Provide fencing in lieu of aluminum bullet
railing as shown on Index No. 820.
LIMITS OF FENCING:
10:
20:
28 AM
shown in the plans.
PAYMENT:
Payment will be made under Fencing, Type R. Payment includes posts, horizontal and expansion rails, brace bands, rail ends,
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
CROSS REFERENCE:
anchor rods, bolts, nuts, washers, shim plates, neoprene pads, miscellaneous fence fittings and hardware and all incidental
For Table of Fence Components and Pull Post Assembly Detail see Sheet No. 2 of 3.
materials and labor required to complete installation of the fence.
For Table of Post Attachment Components and Detail "A" see Sheet No. 3 of 3.
REVISIO N
12/21/2015
combination rail ends, boulevard clamps, chain link fabric, ties, tension bars and bands, post and loop caps, base plates,
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
BRIDGE FENCING (CURVED TOP)
NO.
811
SHEET
NO.
1of 3

Line
Pull Post
Post

Pull Post
Line Post
Post Cap
Tension Bar (one
(Typ.)
each side of pull
(See Note 4)
Expansion Rails
Horizontal Rails
post)

NOTES:
1. This Dimension is the expansion joint opening plus ".
Ties @ 2'-0"
Expansion rails are required at expansion joint locations
Centers (Typ.)
where the total movement exceeds 1", but is less than
or equal to 6".
Expansion rails are part of expansion
assemblies when the total movement exceeds 6".
Install expansion rails midway between the fence
Centers) (Typ.)
Chain Link
posts spanning the expansion joint.
Fabric
2. Install nuts for expansion rails finger-tight.
Nuts will
fully engage bolts with a minimum of one bolt thread

Ties @ 1'-0"
extending beyond the nuts.
Centers (Typ.)
the outside of the nut to prevent loosening.
Distort the first thread on
3. For treatment at bridge ends,
see Sheet No. 1 of 3.

Concrete Parapet
Bridge Deck (shown)
1'-6"

COMPONENT
ASTM
DESIGNATION
or Raised Sidewalk
PULL POST ASSEMBLY DETAIL
Posts
F 1083
Galvanized Steel Pipe - 3 " NPS, Schedule 40 (4.000" Outside Diameter, 0.226" Wall Thickness)
Horizontal Rails
F 1083
Galvanized Steel Pipe - 3" NPS, Schedule 40 (3.500" Outside Diameter, 0.216" Wall Thickness)
Expansion Rails
F 1083
Galvanized Steel Pipe - 2 " NPS, Schedule 40 (2.875" Outside Diameter, 0.203" Wall Thickness)
Bolts
A 307
" x 4" Hex Head Bolts for Expansion Rail Connections
Nuts
A 563
Hex Nuts for Expansion Rail Connections
Washers
F 436
Flat Washers for Expansion Rail Connections
Chain Link Fabric
A 392
A 491
1'-6"

Varies
Varies (See Note 1)

9"
9"
5"
(2" mesh with twisted

top and knuckled
bottom selvage)
4"
" Bolt with Hex Nut

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Steel - No. 9 gage Zinc Coated Wire (metallic-coated core wire
F 668
diameter) ~ Specify the color of the polymer coating in the General Notes
Tie Wires
F 626
Brace Bands
F 626
No. 12 Gage (Min. thickness) x " (Min. width) Steel Bands (Beveled or Heavy)
Tension Bars
F 626
10:
20:
32 AM
Expansion Rail
Horizontal Rail
Height = Post Length along inside Post - 2" Max.

Tension Bands
F 626
Miscellaneous Fence
Components
No. 14 Gage (Min. thickness) x " (width) Steel Bands

Zinc Coated Steel ~ (includes post or loop caps, horizontal and brace rail ends, combination rail
F 626
ends, boulevard clamps and all other miscellaneous fittings and hardware)
LEGEND: NPS = Nominal Pipe Size
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/21/2015
" (Min. thickness) x " (Min. width) x Variable Height Steel Bars ~
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
811
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3

COMPONENT
Base Plates
ASTM
DESIGNATION
A 36 or
After the nuts have been tightened, distort the Anchor Rod threads to prevent removal of the nuts. Coat distorted threads and
" Steel
exposed trimmed ends of anchors with a galvanizing compound in accordance with Specification Section 562.
A 709 Grade 36
COATINGS:
A 36 or
A 709 Grade 36 or
Shim Plates
B 209 Alloy 6061-T6
Hot-dip galvanize all Nuts, Washers, Bolts, C-I-P Anchor Rods, Adhesive Anchors and Fence Framework (Posts, Internal Sleeves, Shim
Plate thicknesses as required, Holes in shim
Plates and Base Plates) in accordance with Specification Section 962. Hot-dip galvanize Fence Framework after fabrication.
plates will be "
Adhesive Bonding Material Systems for Anchors and Dowels will comply with Specification Section 937 and be installed in accordance
F 1554 Grade 36
Fully threaded Headless Anchor Rods ~ " x 14 "
with Specification Section 416. Cutting of reinforcing steel is permitted for drilled hole installation.
WELDING:
C-I-P Anchor Rods
F 1554 Grade 36
All welding will be in accordance with the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code (Steel) ANSI/AWS D1.1 (current edition).
Weld metal will be E60XX or E70XX. Nondestructive testing of welds is not required.
Nuts
A 563
Hex Nuts for Base Plate Connections
Washers
F 436
Flat Washers for Base Plate Connections
Neoprene Pads
Post
Post
6" x 9" x " Thick
1" Holes for "
Neoprene Pad
Anchors (Typ.)
3"
6"
Concrete Parapet
1'
-0" Em bed. Depth
3"
Base Plate
Post
" Base Plate
2 ~ " C-I-P Anchor
1"
6 "
1"

9"
DETAIL "A"
10:
20:
33 AM
BASE PLATE DETAIL
CROSS REFERENCE:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/21/2015
For location of Detail "A" see Sheet No. 1 of 3.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
811
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Post Spacing
(See Note 1)
End Post Assembly
End Post
Line Post
Ties @ 2'-0"
Horizontal Rails
Top of Chain Link Fabric
Outside Edge of Post
Centers (Typ.)
Internal Sleeve
Horizontal Rails ~ 4 Equal
portion of Hoop Post (Typ.)

Post (Typ.)
Internal Sleeve for connection
Post B
of Tangent Post (Post A or
Centers (Typ.)
Expansion Rails when

Horizontal Rail
required (Typ.) (See

Detail on Sheet 2)

1'
-0"
Post A
Top of Traffic
Railing Barrier
4"
Top of
Tension Wire
Horizontal
Concrete
Rail
Parapet
Traffic Railing
Barrier (Type
Concrete Parapet
Post C
Clear Width = 5'-0" (Min.)
varies, 32" F-
Shape shown)
A
See Detail "A"
4"
Ties @ 1'-0"
Tension Bar
See
2'
-3"
Centers) (Typ.)
Begin Hoop Post B (Typ.)
2" Cl. M ax.
@ 1'-3" Maximum
End Tangent Post A or C/
Varies
Chain Link Fabric
(Space Equally
Tangent Length ~ 6'

-7" (
See Note 2)
Tension Bands
9'
-5 " (
See Note 2 & 4)
Post C) to Hoop Post (Post B)
R
=
(S
2'
ee
-1
No 0
"
te
4)
(See Detail "E")
Spaces along curved
Detail "B"
Concrete
Post &
Parapet
Concrete
Parapet
Bridge Deck
Inside Face of
Gutter Line
Concrete Parapet
Coping

1'-0" Minimum from
Sidewalk ~ 5'-5" (See Note 4)
9 "
Expansion Joint (shown)
ELEVATION AT INSIDE FACE OF CONCRETE PARAPET
of concrete (Typ.)
and Open Joint in Barrier

7'-7" (See Note 3)
or Parapet (Typ.)
NOTES:
1. A Pull Post Assembly is required at maximum intervals of 500'-0". See Sheet No. 3 of 4.
TYPICAL SECTION
2. Dimension is measured along Inside Face of Concrete Parapet.

3. Dimension shown is for 32" F-Shape Traffic Railing Barriers as shown in Index No. 420.
Adjust as required for other Traffic Railing Barriers and sidewalk widths.
4. For sidewalk clear widths greater than 5'-0", increase the radius and height of the curved
portion of the Hoop Post at the rate of 6" for every one foot increase in sidewalk width.
FENCING NOTES
FENCE INSTALLATION:
Install posts plumb (within a tolerance of 1 "). Use shim plates as required to achieve plumb. The required quantity
and thickness of shim plates will be determined in the field. Install chain link fence in accordance with ASTM F 567 as
applicable.
TRAFFIC RAILING BARRIER DETAILS:
See Superstructure Sheets for Traffic Railing Barrier details.
See Index No. 820 - Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing for Concrete Parapet details. Provide fencing in lieu of aluminum bullet
railing as shown on Index No. 820.
LIMITS OF FENCING:
shown in the plans.

PAYMENT:
Payment will be made under Fencing, Type R. Payment includes posts, horizontal and expansion rails, brace bands, rail ends,
CROSS REFERENCE:
combination rail ends, boulevard clamps, chain link fabric, tension wire, ties, hog rings, tension bars and bands, pipe clamps,
For Table of Fence Components and Table of Post Attachment Components see Sheet No. 2.
base plates, anchor rods, bolts, nuts, washers, shim plates, spacers, neoprene pads, miscellaneous fence fittings and
For Pull Post Assembly Detail, View A-A and Detail "A" see Sheet No. 3.
hardware and all incidental materials and labor required to complete installation of the fence.
For Detail "B" and "E" see Sheet No. 4.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
38:
14 AM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
BRIDGE FENCING (ENCLOSED)
NO.
812
SHEET
NO.
1of 4

COMPONENT
ASTM
ASTM
COMPONENT
DESIGNATION

Posts
F 1083
A 36 or
Pipe Clamps
Horizontal Rails and

Internal Sleeves
Galvanized Steel Pipe - 2 " NPS, Schedule 40 (2.875" Outside Diameter,

F 1083
A 36 or
Base Plates
F 1083
" Steel
A 709 Grade 36
" Steel
A 709 Grade 36

Expansion Rails
DESIGNATION
A 36 or
A 709 Grade 36 or
Shim Plates
A 392
A 491
B 209 Alloy 6061-T6
Plate thicknesses as required; Holes in shim

plates will be "
Chain Link Fabric
core wire diameter) ~ Specify the color of the polymer coating in the General Notes
Type II (Zinc Coated Steel Wire) - No. 7 gage, Class 4 Coating

Tension Wire
A 824 & A 817

Type I (Aluminum Coated Steel Wire) - No. 7 gage
Tie Wires
F 626
Hog Rings
F 626
Brace Bands
F 626
Tension Bars
F 626
Connection
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Steel - No. 9 gage Zinc Coated Wire (metallic-coated
F 668
Spacers
Connection
bottom selvages)
Base Plate Pipe Clam p
(2" mesh with knuckled
F 1554 Grade 36
C-I-P Anchor Rods
F 1554 Grade 36
F 1554 Grade 36
C-I-P Anchor Rods
F 1554 Grade 36
Bolts
A 307
Nuts
A 563
Washers
F 436
No. 12 gage (Min. thickness) x " (Min. width) Steel Bands (Beveled or Heavy)
" (Min. thickness) x " (Min. width) x Variable Height Steel Bars ~
Height = Tangent or Hoop Length - Barrier or Parapet Height - 2" max.
Tension Bands
F 626
Miscellaneous Fence
Components
No. 14 gage (Min. thickness) x " (Min. width) Steel Bands

Zinc Coated Steel ~ (includes horizontal rail ends, combination rail ends, boulevard
F 626
Neoprene Pads
1" for all materials

Fully threaded Headless Anchor Rods ~ " x 6"
(no spacer) or " x 7" (with spacer)
Hex Head Anchor Rods ~ " x 6" (no spacer)
or " x 7" (with spacer)
Fully threaded Headless Anchor Rods ~
" x 14 "
" x 4 " Hex Head Bolts for Pipe Clamp
Connections to Posts
Hex Nuts for Pipe Clamp and Base Plate
Connections
Flat Washers for Pipe Clamp and Base Plate
Connections
clamps and all other miscellaneous fittings and hardware)

" x 4" Hex Head Bolts for Internal Sleeve connections
Bolts
A 307
Nuts
A 563
Hex Nuts for Internal Sleeve and Expansion Rail connections
Washers
F 436
Flat Washers for Internal Sleeve and Expansion Rail connections
" x 4" Hex Head Bolts for Expansion Rail connections
Varies
Varies (See Note 1)
9"
9"

5"
4"
" Bolt with Hex Nut


After the nuts have been tightened, distort the Anchor Rod threads to prevent
removal of the nuts. Coat distorted threads and exposed trimmed ends of anchors
COATINGS:
Hot-dip galvanize all Nuts, Washers, Bolts, C-I-P Anchor Rods, Adhesive Anchors
and Fence Framework (Posts, Internal Sleeves, Shim Plates, Base Plates, Pipe
Clamps and Spacers) in accordance with Specification Section 962. Hot-dip
galvanize Fence Framework after fabrication.
Horizontal Rail
Expansion Rail
Adhesive Bonding Material Systems for Anchors and Dowels will comply with
Specification Section 937 and be installed in accordance with Specification
NOTES:
11:
38:
15 AM
1. This Dimension is the expansion joint opening plus ". Expansion rails are
required at expansion joint locations where the total movement exceeds 1", but
is less than or equal to 6". Expansion rails are part of expansion assemblies
Section 416. Cutting of reinforcing steel is permitted for drilled hole

installation.
WELDING:
when the total movement exceeds 6". Install expansion rails midway between the
All welding will be in accordance with the American Welding Society Structural
fence posts spanning the expansion joint.
Welding Code (Steel) ANSI/AWS D1.1 (current edition). Weld metal will be E60XX
2. Install nuts for expansion rails finger-tight. Nuts will fully engage bolts with a
12/17/2015
or E70XX. Nondestructive testing of welds is not required.
minimum of one bolt thread extending beyond the nuts. Distort the first thread
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
812
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4

Line Post
Pull Post
Ties @ 2'-0"
Centers (Typ.)
Horizontal Rails
(See Note 2)
Pull Post
Line Post
Tension Bar (on each
side of pull post) (Typ.)
Expansion Rails
NOTES:
1. For treatment at bridge ends, see Sheet 1.

2. The 3'-0" dimension shown is for expansion
Chain Link
joint openings 9" or less.
Fabric
joint opening exceeds 9", increase this
If the expansion
dimension by the difference between the

expansion joint opening and 9".
Tension Bands (Space

Rail Ends with Brace Bands (shown) or
Centers) (Typ.)
Ties @ 1'-0"
Combination Rail Ends with Brace Bands
Centers (Typ.)
or Boulevards Clamps (Typ.)
Tension Wire
Tie tension wire to post with No. 9

Traffic Railing Barrier (Type
gage zinc coated tie wire (triple wrap
varies, 32" F-Shape shown)
required at both ends of tie wire) (Typ.)
Bridge Deck
PULL POST ASSEMBLY DETAIL
1'-6"
1'-6"
(Traffic Railing Barrier Shown, Concrete Parapet Similar)

Pipe Clamp Connection
(see Detail) (Typ.)
Depth
set in drilled holes with Heavy

9 " x 3" x " Thick
Neoprene Pad
" Anchors
(Adhesive-Bonded
Anchors shown, C-I-P
4" Min.
Anchor Rods similar)
" Bolt
1 "
Post
Post
Adhesive-Bonded Anchors (shown)
1'
-0"
6"
4" Em bedm ent
2 ~ " C-I-P Anchor Rods or
(
Typ.
)
3"
Pipe Clamp
Pipe Clamp
Post and " Holes

R = 1 "
for " Bolt with Hex

Nut and Washer
Post
1 "
3"
3"
1 "
9 " x 3" x " Thick

Neoprene Pad
1" Spacer must be
11:
38:
16 AM
manufactured from an
VIEW A-A
incompressible material
PIPE CLAMP CONNECTION DETAIL
(i.e., steel or aluminum)
(Connection without spacer shown,

Connection with spacer similar)
DETAIL "A"
12/17/2015
CROSS REFERENCE:
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
For location of View A-A and Detail "A" see Sheet No. 1 of 4.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
812
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
" Pipe
See Detail "C"
Clamp
" Holes for

" Anchors
(Typ.)
6 "
1 "
9 "
(See Note 3)
1 " 1 "
2'
-7
N
ot "
e
2)
=
R
ee
(S
2'
-10 "
1'
-0" (
Typ.
)
PIPE CLAMP DETAIL

1" Spacer
3"
(
See Note 2)
1" 1 "
2'
-11 "
1 "
4"
(
Tangent)
1 " 1"
See Detail "C"

Dim . H (
See Table Below)
3"
1 " 1 "
Outside Edges of Post
" Holes for
See Detail "D"
" Anchors
(Typ.)
5'-9 "
1 "
6 "
1 "
POST A DETAIL
POST B DETAIL
POST C DETAIL
9 "
SIDEWALK
Post
SPACER DETAIL
(Must be manufactured from an incompressible
(See Note 1)
2% Left
5'-614"
1. Values shown for Dim. H are for a 5'-0" clear sidewalk width.
Adjust as required for clear sidewalk widths greater than 5'-0".
Post
Base Plate
NOTES:
DIM. H
CROSS-SLOPE
material (i.e., steel or aluminum))
2. For clear sidewalk widths greater than 5'-0" increase radius

and height by 6" for every one foot increase in sidewalk width.
3
4"
1" Holes for "
3. Spacer plate thickness shown is for the 32" F-Shape Traffic
5'-3
2% Right
Railing shown in Index No. 420. Adjust thickness as required
6" x 8" x " Thick
Anchors (Typ.)
for other Traffic Railings.
Neoprene Pad
1"
8"
BASE PLATE DETAIL
2"
6"
2"
1'
-0"
Post A or
Post C
Bolts
DETAIL "B"
2"
6"
for "
DETAIL "C"
" Holes for
" Holes
" Bolts (Typ.)

3"
5 "
for " Bolts
1"
1"
11:
38:
17 AM
" Holes
2 ~ " C-I-P Anchor
2"
" Base Plate
Internal Sleeve
Internal Sleeve
Post B
2"
Post
1"
3"
Concrete Parapet
1'
-0" Em bed. Depth
6"
3"
3"
DETAIL "D"
DETAIL "E"
(INTERNAL SLEEVE DETAIL)
12/17/2015
CROSS REFERENCE:
LAST
REVISION
01/01/06
REVISIO N
For location of Details "B" and "E" see Sheet No. 1.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
812
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
3
4"
Intermediate
1
2"
Deck Joint *
V-Groove in both faces and
top of Concrete Parapet (Equally
Open Joint **
Coping (Typ.)
Pedestrian/Bicycle
1'-0"
Sidewalk
1
2"
9"
Limits of Sidewalk
Inside face of
Bridge Deck/Sidewalk
1
2"
Traffic Railing required
Approach Slab
Concrete Parapet
(Type Varies, 32" F Shape
shown, see Structures Plans,

PLAN
Rail
(Rails, Posts & Reinforcing Steel not shown for clarity)
3"
Intermediate Open Joints shall be provided at locations
@ 1'-0"
Joints for the Traffic Railing.

6"
3
4"
Superstructure
1'-0" Min.,
1'-0" Min.
* 30'-0" (Maximum)
Rail Splice/Exp. 1'-9" (12")
Assembly Spacing
Post
1'-0" Min.
Spacing
(See Index 822)
(Typ.)
Construction
Joint Reqd.
Bridge Deck
6" Min.
Intermediate
2" Cover
Rail Expansion Assembly
(Typ.)
~
3
4"
Bars
4S
6"
with Post "B" or "D"
1'-9" Max.
6"
V-Groove
9"
1
2"
2'
-3"
Spacing
1
2"
112"
8"
Deck Joint *
Open Joint **
1'
-3"
7'-0" Max.
8'-0" Maximum
(Typ. all Posts)
1'
-3"
Support
7'-0" Max.
(
M in.
)
3
4"
coinciding with
or "D"
Bars 4P
Concrete Parapet
Parapet
**
Post "B"
Inside face of

Begin or End
top of Concrete Parapet (Equally
1
2"
Approach Slab
SECTION A-A
(Typical Section Thru Bridge Deck Shown,
Section Thru Approach Slab Similar)
Approach Slab
Begin or End Bridge
See Detail "A" for Pre-cured Silicone Sealant
Pre-cured Silicone
INTERMEDIATE JOINT SEAL NOTE:

* See Structures Plans, Superstructure Sheets for actual dimensions
Sealant (4" wide)
1. At Intermediate Open Joints, seal the lower
and joint orientation. Open Parapet Joints at Deck Expansion Joint
6" portion of the open joint with Pre-cured
Silicone Sealant in accordance with Section

932 of the Specifications.
Bridge or End Bridge shown. Deck Joint at Pier or Intermediate
6"
locations shall match the dimension of the Deck Joint. For treatment
of Railings on skewed bridges see Index 420. Deck Joint at Begin
2. Apply sealant prior to any Class V finish
Bent similar.
coating and remove all curing compound

2"
and loose material from the surface prior
ESTIMATED CONCRETE PARAPET

ALTERNATE REINFORCING (WELDED WIRE REINF.) DETAILS
QUANTITIES
ITEM
UNIT
to application of bonding agent.
3. The cost of the Pre-cured Silicone Sealant
QUANTITY
NOTE: Place wire panels to minimize the end

End Overhangs greater
4"
are not permitted.

1"
than
3
4 4"
D19.7 (Typ.)
4"
overhang.

MARK
SIZE
LENGTH
5'-5"
As Reqd.
D19.7 (Vertical)
Reinforcing Steel
LB/FT
for the Concrete Parapet.
a 2% cross slope)
CONCRETE PARAPET: Concrete parapet shall be placed vertical
RAIL AND POST DETAILS: For Rail, Post, Rail Splice/Expansion
2'
-7"
3. All reinforcing steel at the open joints shall have a 2"

joints.
(WWR)
or 812 in lieu of Posts and Rails on Index 822.
Bar splices for Bars 4S shall be a minimum of 1'-9".
unit price for 27" Concrete Parapet (Pedestrian/Bicycle), LF,

and Rails shall be paid for under Aluminum Bullet Railings,
LF.
(WWR) may be used in lieu of all Bars 4P and 4S. WWR must
consist of Deformed wire meeting the requirements of
BAR 4P
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
Assembly fabrication and installation details see Index 822.

BRIDGE FENCING: For Bridge Fencing see Index 810, 811
PAYMENT: Concrete parapet shall be paid for under the contract
minimum cover.
5. At the option of the Contractor Welded Wire Reinforcement
07/01/15
PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE RAILING NOTES:
be the same as detailed above for a 8" deck.
As Reqd.
SPLICE DETAIL
LAST
6.29
2. The reinforcement for the parapet on a retaining wall shall
(Typ.)
REVISION
0.056
and top surface shall be level transversely.

4"
2'
-7"
1'
-3"
D19.7 (Horizontal)
1'
-3"
(Typ.)
1'
-0"
Lap
11:
38:
47 AM
1'-0"
1'
-3"
Longitudinal Wire)
CY/LF
(The above quantities are based on a deck with
D19.7 (Lap Splice Each
1'-9" Min.
Concrete
shall be included in the Contract Unit Price
BAR 4S
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
27" CONCRETE PARAPET WITH
DESIGN STANDARDS
PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE BULLET RAILING
NO.
820
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
1'-0" Min.,
7'-0" Max.
7'-0" Max.
8'-0" Maximum
1'-0" Min.
Pedestrian/Bicycle
Railing with Post "C"
(Typ. all Posts)

6" Min.
Rail Splice/Exp.
Height Bicycle Rail with Post "B"
Post
1'-0" Min.
Spacing
Tapered End Transition
1'-9" (12")
Assembly Spacing
Additional Rail required for Special
1'-9" Max.
Rail Splice
(Typ.)
Assembly
See Note 1
1'-9" (12") 1'-0"
(Typ.)
Max.
2
Rail Expansion
Assembly
3
4"
Intermediate
1
2"
Deck Joint
V-Groove
Open Joint
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Begin or End Bridge
ELEVATION OF INSIDE FACE OF TRAFFIC RAILING WITH PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE BULLET RAILING
Gutter Line
NOTES:
Bicycle Lane
1. Where Bullet Railing continues on retaining wall mounted Traffic Railings
Top of Rail
or other Traffic Railings, the Tapered End Transition shall be located

at the terminus of the Bullet Railing.
CROSS REFERENCES:
Railing
42"
Pedestrian/Bicycle
Post "C"
Railing
48"
Special H eight Bicycle
Post "B"
32" F Shape Traffic

1. Work in conjunction with Index 822.
Railing
2. For Traffic Railing Details, Reinforcement and Notes see Index 420.
SECTION A-A
TYPICAL SECTION THRU BRIDGE DECK
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
39:
02 AM
(APPROACH SLAB SIMILAR)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
BRIDGE ALUMINUM PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE BULLET
DESIGN STANDARDS
RAILING FOR TRAFFIC RAILING (32" F SHAPE)
NO.
821
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
5"
1
4"
15
16"
1
2"
Round over top

5"
1
4"
1
2"
Holes
Rail
& Washer
Round over top

1
4"
(Typ.)
1
2"
(Index
Post ~ WF 5 x 6.49
No. 821)
7
16"
x 1" Stainless
Steel Hex Cap Screw
(Typ.)
1
4"
1
1 2"
1
2"
(Index
x 6" x 6"
Base Plate
No. 423)
1
2"
1
8"
x 6" x 6"
Base Plate
Resilient or
Neoprene Pad
2 ~
1
2"
1
8"
Resilient or
washers or See Detail "A".
Neoprene Pad
x 6" x 6"
Base Plate
812"
Post ~ WF 5 x 6.49
2"
1
2"
x 10" C-I-P Hex Head
Anchor Bolts with hex nuts &
4"
1
3
4"
(
M in.
)
1'
-6"
Post ~ WF 5 x 6.49
1
4"
Holes
1
8 2"
10 "
No. 820)
(Typ.)
1'
-9"
7
16"
10"
3"
114"
Holes
(Typ.)
4" (Index
3
8"
Rail Clamp Bar
corners
1'
-1"
& Washer
(Typ.)
7 "
Steel Hex Cap Screw
1
4"
2"
corners
1
4"
Round over top
x 1" Stainless
1
2"
15
16"
114"
3"
(Typ.)
7"
2"
1
4"
3"
corners
3
4"
3
8"
(Index No. 423)
& Washer
1
4"
Rail
9"
414" (Index No. 821)
x 1" Stainless
Steel Hex Cap Screw
Rail
15
16"
7
16"
3
8"
Rail Clamp Bar
1
4"
1'
-4" ~ Post "
B"
1
2"
1
4"
Rail Clamp Bar
114"
114"
5"
212"
Face of Traffic Railing
2 ~ " x 10" C-I-P Hex Head

Resilient or
Neoprene Pad
2 ~ " x 10" C-I-P Hex Head
1
8 2"
1
8"
SECTION E-E
ELEVATION
(RAIL NOT SHOWN)
OF POST "C"
SECTION D-D
(RAILS NOT SHOWN)
ELEVATION OF POST "B"
POST "C" DETAILS FOR PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE RAILING
POST "B" DETAILS FOR SPECIAL HEIGHT BICYCLE RAILING ON
ON TRAFFIC RAILINGS (INDEX 423 AND 821)
TRAFFIC RAILINGS (INDEX 423 AND 821)

AND FOR PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE
SECTION C-C
RAILING ON CONCRETE PARAPETS (INDEX 820)
ELEVATION
(RAILS NOT SHOWN)
NOTE: After nuts have been tightened, the bolt threads shall be deformed
OF POST "D"
to prevent removal of nuts. Tack welding of nuts to anchor bolts, to

prevent theft, is permitted. Coat deformed or tack welded threads
POST "D" DETAILS FOR SPECIAL HEIGHT BICYCLE RAILING

ON CONCRETE PARAPET (INDEX 820)
3"
3
4"
3"
CROSS REFERENCES:
x 11" Adhesive Anchors Cutting of
reinforcing steel is permitted.
7
8"
Holes for
1
2"
2"
Anchor Bolts (Typ.)
1
2"
2 ~
6"
Index 820.
1
2"
Index 423 or 821.
For Rail Details see Sheet 2.
H-Beam Post ~
3
16"
For Railing Notes and Tapered End

Transition Details see Sheet 3.
Rail
1
2"
1
2"
3"
1
2"
6"
11:
39:
28 AM
For Post "B" & Post "C" spacing see
3"
1
2"
Post
(
M in.
)
9"
For Post "B" and Post "D" spacing see
Rail Clamp Bars
1
2"
WF 5 x 6.49
3
8"
x 1" Stainless Steel Hex
Cap Screws and Washers
DETAIL "A"
ALTERNATE ANCHOR BOLT
SECTION F-F
BASE PLATE DETAIL
RAIL TO POST CONNECTION DETAIL
12/17/2015
(Concrete Parapet Shown,
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
Traffic Railings Similar)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
BRIDGE ALUMINUM PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE
DESIGN STANDARDS
BULLET RAILING DETAILS
NO.
822
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
3
32"
4"
Insert Bar to match
Insert Bar (Type 1) *

1
2"
1
4"
Major Axis of
inside face of Rail
5
8"
7
32"
Tack Weld two places

each end (Typ.)
Rail Profile
Elliptical Profile
1
8"
1
8"
Stop Pins
9
16"
R
1
8"
7
8"
Rail Profile
Round over edge ( 16"
Dia.
2" X " X 1'-0" Flat Bar. *
1
4"
R)
SECTION C-C
Typical each side
RAIL SPICE/EXPANSION
23
32"
Minor Axis of
BAR ASSEMBLY
30'
1
Rail Profile
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B - RAIL SPLICE/EXPANSION BAR
TYPICAL SECTION THRU RAIL
11
16"
1
4"
3
4"
1
8"
2
Insert Bar (Type 2)
INSERT BAR DETAIL (TYPE 1)
(Except
Rail Profile
Rail Splice/Expansion Bar
as noted)
Minor Axis of
Major Axis of
1
4"
13
16"
3
32"
1
16"
3
16"
11332"
11332"
1
8"
1
16"
2"
1
8"
(1'-0" Long)
to match inside face of Rail
3
16"
Insert Bar
9
16"
* Use of either Type 1 or Type 2 Insert

Bars is at the option of the Contractor.
1
1 4"
(Rail not shown for clarity)
4"
1
30'
3'-0" (Rail Splice/Expansion Bar)
1
4"
1
2"
1'-6"
1'-6"
1
16"
Rail Splice/Expansion Assembly
1
8"
1
8"
Major Axis of
1
8"
1
64"
Rail Profile
Rail Section
(2 required)
1"
Insert Bar
of Rail Splice/Expansion Bar)
(
Typ.
)
2 ~ Stop Pins (Locate at center
Rail Section
R
Outline of inside
face of Rail
C
Rail Splice/Expansion
1 " (Min.) Expansion (See Notes)
" (Min.) Splice

6"
6"
1
16"
Bar
1
64"
D
Minor Axis of
Rail Profile
NOTE: Provide for
Insert Bar
drive fit.
VIEW D-D
RAIL SPLICE/EXPANSION ASSEMBLY DETAIL
RAIL END CAP DETAIL
CROSS REFERENCE:
For Notes and Tapered End Transition Details,

See Sheet 3.
37
64"
5"
21
1
64"
4"
1
4"
3
4"
13
32"
9
16"
3
1
16"
4"
11:
39:
29 AM
25
32"
25
32"
7
16"
1
32"
13
32"
5
8"
3
16"
3
32"
1
16"
1
4"
12/17/2015
1
4"
13
64"
Post
Drill & tap hole to

accept
3
8"
Stainless Steel
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
VIEW E-E
RAIL CLAMP BAR DETAIL
Fasteners
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
822
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
1'-3"
Compound Miter
3" Min. ~ 1'-0" Max.
Transition (Option 2)
Seal Weld Bullet Rail

Post
Base Plate
()
1'
-3
~
7" "
~B Upp
er
ot
t
Ra
om
i
l
Ra
i
l
1'-3"
Double Miter
6"
Seal Weld Bullet Rail (Options 1 & 2)
Transition (Option 1)
Concrete Traffic
Railing or Parapet
()
Bar (Option 1) (web &
()
inside flanges)
Angle Varies
()
(web & inside flanges)
()
Seal Weld Bullet Rail (Option 1)

Face of Traffic
DOUBLE MITER TRANSITION (OPTION 1)
H
Rail Splice/Expansion Bar (Option 1)
H
Bar (Inside)
1
8"
Mitered Rail
Splice/Expansion Bar
Railing or Parapet
Max. Gap
(Slip Connection)
27
()
153
Bullet Rail
3"
"
6
Rail Splice/Expansion Bar (Options 1 & 2)
Anchor Bolts
(See Sheet 1 for
typical details)
3" Min. ~ 1'-0" Max.

Seal Weld Bullet Rail
Post
Base Plate
()
Concrete Traffic
Concrete Traffic
Railing or Parapet
Railing or Parapet
3"
ELEVATION OF TAPERED END TRANSITION
Angle Varies
(Single Rail Shown, Double or Triple Rail Similar)

G
G
Face of Traffic
COMPOUND MITER TRANSITION (OPTION 2)
Railing or Parapet
PARTIAL PLAN OF TAPERED END TRANSITIONS

(Single Rail Shown, Double or Triple Rail Similar)
RAILING NOTES:
PAYMENT: Payment for the railing includes Rails, Posts, Rail Splice/Expansion Assemblies, Rail Clamp Bars, Rail End Caps,
Anchor Bolts, Nuts, Resilient Pads, Screws and Washers and all incidental materials and labor required to complete the
installation.
POST ASSEMBLY: Fabricated wrought aluminum; Post - ASTM B221, alloy 6061-T6, or alloy 6351-T5; Base Plate ASTM B209, alloy 6061-T6.
WELDING: Welding of aluminum components shall be in accordance with ANSI and AWS D1.2 "Structures Welding Code 1'
-3
"
~U
7"
pp
~B
er
ot
t
Ra
om
l
Ra i
i
l
Rail
be press-fit Aluminum or Stainless Steel pins or tubes, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
RAIL CLAMP BAR: Aluminum; ASTM B221, alloy 6061-T6, or alloy 6351-T5.
STAINLESS STEEL FASTENERS: " Hex Cap Screws and Washers shall be ASTM F-593, alloy group 2 (316).
27
Splice/Expansion Bar
Aluminum".
RAIL AND RAIL SPLICE/EXPANSION ASSEMBLIES: Aluminum; ASTM B221, alloy 6061-T6, or alloy 6351-T5. Stop Pins shall
ANCHOR BOLTS: Anchor bolts shall be in accordance with ASTM A36 or ASTM F1554, Grade 36. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and
()
Washers shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with Specification Section 962.
RAIL END CAP: ASTM B26 sand cast aluminum alloy 356.0-F.
RAIL INSTALLATION: Set Rail Posts normal to Profile Grade longitudinally and vertical transversely. Post spacings
VIEW G-G TRANSITION BASE PLATE
that land on barrier or parapet obstacles such as armor expansion plates etc. shall be adjusted to clear obstacles
by 9" without exceeding maximum post spacing. Post shall be uniformly spaced with reasonable consistency. Set
(Bullet Rail not shown for Clarity)
Posts on " thick resilient or neoprene pads in accordance with Specification Section 932. The pad dimension
shall be the same as the post base plate. Provide rail expansion assembly in panels between posts on either side
of Bridge Expansion Joints. Rail expansion assembly is similar to the rail splice assembly with increased space at
()
1
2"
assembly to allow for movement equal to 1.5 times the bridge joint opening or 1" greater than the expected joint
movement. Take care to ensure rails are set with the proper openings. Remove any burrs or sharp edges on rails
and posts to prevent injury.
RAIL SPLICE ASSEMBLIES: Rails shall be continuous over a minimum of 3 posts, except that lengths less than 12'
need only be continuous over 2 posts. Space splices at 40'-0" maximum on centers. Splice all rails in any railing
11:
39:
29 AM
2"
4"
Varies
6"
Angle
section about the same center line.

RESILIENT AND NEOPRENE PADS: Resilient and Neoprene Pads shall be in accordance with the Specifications except
" Holes for

1
4"
Bar (centered on
that testing of the finished pads is not required. Neoprene pads shall be durometer hardness 60 or 70.
Anchor Bolts (Typ.)
Base Plate)
SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit typical details for straight alignments and complete details for end terminations or curved
alignments with radii < 40', including post and rail splice/expansion assembly locations of the proposed railing for
8"
the Engineer's approval prior to fabrication.

CROSS REFERENCE:
12/17/2015
VIEW H-H TRANSITION BASE PLATE
For Post Details see Sheet 1.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
(Bullet Rail not shown for Clarity)
For Rail Details see Sheet 2.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
822
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
" Intermediate
Open Joint **
Deck Joint *
top of Railing (Equally spaced

Coping (Typ.)
Pedestrian/Bicycle
Spacing Bars 4S
8"
8"
Sidewalk
Bars 3R
2" Cover
@ 6" sp.
(Typ.)
Approach Slab
(Pairs)
Traffic Railing required
of Railing
(Type Varies, 32" F Shape

shown, see Structures Plans,

PLAN
6"
3"
Inside face
1'
-0"

* See Structures Plans, Superstructure Sheets for actual dimensions
Bars
Bridge or End Bridge shown. Deck Joint at Pier or Intermediate
1'
-9"
3'
-6"
of Railings on skewed bridges see Index No. 420. Deck Joint at Begin
Bent similar.
2" Cover
4S
(Sides)
(Typ.)
Textured Surface
when shown in
Superstructure
Support
Spacing " V-Groove
3 sp. @
locations shall match the dimension of the Deck Joint. For treatment
9"
" Chamfer
and joint orientation. Open Railing Joints at Deck Expansion Joint
the plans.
* 30'-0" (Maximum)
Textured Surface
top of Railing (Equally spaced
when shown in the plans.
(Max. " amplitude)
6"
" Chamfer
Deck Joint *
Open Joint **
(
M in.
)
" Intermediate
6"
9"
(Max. " amplitude)
Construction
Joint Reqd.
Bridge Deck
1"
8"
Begin or End
Approach Slab
9"
SECTION A-A
(Typical C-I-P Section Thru Bridge Deck Shown,

Approach Slab
Begin or End Bridge
See Detail "A" for Pre-cured Silicone Sealant
Section Thru Approach Slab Similar)
** " Intermediate Open Joints shall be provided at locations
coinciding with " Joints for the Traffic Railing.
RAILING NOTES:
1. Railing shall be placed vertical and top surface shall be level transversely.

Pre-cured Silicone
1. At Intermediate Open Joints, seal the lower 6" portion of the open joint with
Pre-cured Silicone Sealant in accordance with Specification Section 932.
6"
Sealant (4" wide)
2. Apply sealant prior to any Class 5 Finish Coating and remove all curing compound
(Typ.)
D9.9 wire
or #3 Bar
may be
tied.
4"
(WWR)
(2 Pieces Reqd.)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
2. The reinforcement for the railing on a retaining wall shall be the same as detailed
above for an 8" deck.
4. Bar splices for Bars 4S shall be a minimum of 1'-4".
5. At the option of the Contractor Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) may be used in
ESTIMATED CONCRETE RAILING
4"
SPLICE DETAIL
As Reqd.
3"
Pin
2"
D9.9 (Vertical) (Typ.)
5'-2"
2"
D9.9 (Horizontal)
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
39:
48 AM
Lap
6"

R
D9.9
(Typ.)
Price for the Railing.
LENGTH
BAR 3R
3'
-10"
1'-4" Min.
SIZE
3. The cost of the Pre-cured Silicone Sealant shall be included in the Contract Unit
9"
Longitudinal Wire)
MARK
3'
-10"
(Lap Splice Each
7 Spaces @
D19.7 or #4 Bar
6"
6"
joints.
and loose material from the surface prior to application of bonding agent.
2"
3"
9"
vertical wire is within 4" of open
2"

NOTE: Place wire panels to ensure
lieu of all Bars 3R and 4S. Welded Wire Reinforcement shall conform to
QUANTITIES
ITEM
As Reqd.
BAR 4S
UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete
CY/LF
0.079
Reinforcing Steel
LB/LF
13.12
(The above quantities are based on a deck with

a 2% cross slope)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
42" CONCRETE PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE RAILING
NO.
825
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Bolts & Post
Bolts & Post
1
2"
Flat Washer under Nut &

Plate Washer under Head
8"
4"
4"
Head Bolt with Hex
Plate Washer
Nut & Flat Washers
Bridge Coping
1
2"
1
4"
Neoprene or Resilient Pad

Bottle-Guard (See
Curb with "x"
Detail on Sheet 2)
4"
9"
Em bed.
3"
Bars 4S
y
wa
a
.(
x
% Ma
e2
p
o
Sl
)
f
f
o
p
o
r
m d
o
r
f
Bars 4P
@ 1'-0" sp.
1'-0" Min.
Const. Joint permitted
under Head & Nuts
Coping
1
2"
(Sheet 2)
SCHEME 2 -
(Thru-Bolt Option)
TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH
CURB MOUNTED RAILING
SIDE MOUNTED RAILING (RETROFIT)
(Adhesive Anchor Option shown - SCHEME 1A)

Intermediate
Section
SCHEME 1B - DETAILS
TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH DECK MOUNTED RAILING
3
4"
See Typical
Embedment
Bridge
SCHEME 1 -
M in.
2" Cover (
Typ.
)
Bolt with double Hex Nuts,
SCHEME 3 -
Deck Joint *
top of Concrete Curb (Equally
Open Joint **
Coping (Typ.)
Inside face of
Approach Slab
Concrete Curb
PLAN
(Scheme 2 shown, other Schemes similar, Reinforcing Steel not shown for clarity)
Spacing 12" V-Groove
* 30'-0" (Maximum)
Intermediate
48" Special Height Bicycle Railing
5'-7" (Max.) ~ Type "B" Post Only
Begin or End
Open Joint
Rail Field Splice Joint (Typ.)
See Detail "B", Sheet 3
Min.
Approach Slab
42" Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing
5'-7" (Max.) ~ Type "A" Post or

7'-3" (Max.) ~ Type "B" Post
6" Min.
Min. 6"
7" Min.
Post (Typ.)
1'-0"
Post
Post
Index No. 852 Railing shown,
see Contract Plans for actual
Rail Expansion Joint (Typ.)
railing continuation or termination
* See Structures Plans, Superstructure Sheets for actual
Type 1 - Picket Infill Panel shown
dimensions and joint orientation. Open Curb Joints at

Deck Expansion Joint locations shall match the dimension
Infill Panel Type
Varies (See Plans)
4" Max. Gap
Concrete
of the Deck Joint. For treatment of Railings on skewed
6" Max.
bridges see Index No. 420. Deck Joint at Begin Bridge
@ 70F ***
Curb
or End Bridge shown. Deck Joint at Pier or Intermediate

Bent similar.
11:
41:
34 AM
Deck Joint *
3
4"
1
2"
Intermediate
Open Joint **
2 for Pre-cured
*** Clear opening between adjacent pickets or panel at Rail
Min.
Front Face of Backwall
1'-0"
Expansion Joints, above Deck Expansion Joints with a total

Approach Slab
thermal movement greater than 4", must be reduced to 3".
Silicone Sealant
(Scheme 2 shown with Post "A", other Schemes similar, Reinforcing Steel not shown for clarity)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
See Detail "A", Sheet
V-Groove in both faces &
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
BRIDGE PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE RAILING
DESIGN STANDARDS
(STEEL)
(
Deck)
" ASTM A307 Hex Head
42" ~ Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing
to be removed
" ASTM A307 Hex

Thru-Bolt
48" ~ Special H eight Bicycle Railing
Existing railing
Railing
(See Plans)
Railing
H eight Bicycle Railing
3'
-0" for Steel Ped.
/Bicycle
(
M in.
)
3'
-6" for Steel Special
Pedestrian/Bicycle
chamfers
6"
Hole
length
Drilled
+3"
Bolt
Core
No. 852, Steel
7"
9"
.
x
% Ma
e2
p
o
Sl
)
g
n
i
p
m Co
o
r
yf
wa
a
(
Deck
Bridge Deck Sidewalk
1"
thickness
WASHER DETAIL
Varies
6"
Thru-Bolt (
Option B)
Detail on Sheet 2)
Adhesive Anchor (
Option A)
Bottle-Guard (See
THRU-BOLT PLATE
6" M in.
Railing
Modified height Index
" (Galv. Steel)
11" M in.
Index No. 852, Steel
F-Shape shown, see Plans)
(centered)
Em bed.
Schemes (Type Varies, 32"
Pedestrian/Bicycle
Hole
1
2"
1
16"
1
Traffic Railing required for all
Bolts & Post

Index No. 852, Steel
NO.
851
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
4"
15
16"
4"
Holes
for Anchor Bolts
3"
MARK
SIZE
2'-0"
As Reqd.
" x 2 "
LENGTH
Long Slotted Hole
D19.7 or #4 Bar (Lap

Splice Each Longitudinal Wire)
Stiffener
1
2"
As Reqd.
1
2"
2" (Typ.)
L8 x 6 x
Index No. 852 Railing
under Nut and Plate Washer under Head
BAR 4P
REINFORCEMENT (WWR)
Fill void with
BAR 4S
non-shrink grout
1
8"
Bottle Guard
CURB REINFORCING STEEL NOTES:
6" Min.
Pre-cured Silicone
2. The reinforcement for the curb on a retaining wall shall be
Sealant (4" wide)
L8 x 6 x 12"
(Typ.)
4"
(Typ.)
4. Bars 4S may be continuous or spliced at the construction joints.

2"
2 ~
5. At the option of the Contractor Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR)

may be used in lieu of all Bars 4P and 4S. WWR must consist of
x 1'-2" Headless Anchor
LB/LF
4.01
1'-0" Min.
Self Locking Hex Nuts & Flat Washers
112"
4"
4"
112"
(Max.) Weld
Termination (Typ.)
1"
1
2"
Specifications Section 416 and 937.
" Core
1
8"
Drilled Hole
212"
3"
212"
1
4"
3"
Stiffener
7
8"
At Intermediate Open Joints, seal the lower 6" portion of the open joint with
11"
Reinforcing Steel
" Stiffener
Embedment
QUANTITY
0.0124
Cope
Material System in accordance with

QUANTITIES (SCHEME 2)
1
2"
1
8
Bolt set with an Adhesive Bonding
Deformed wire meeting the requirements of Specification Section 931.
ESTIMATED CONCRETE CURB
3
4"
Bridge Deck
1"
4"
Thick Resilient or
Neoprene Pad (8" x 11")
the same as detailed for an 8" deck.
CY/LF
Bolt & Post
Angle Assembly
Self Locking Hex Nut, Flat Washer
WELDED WIRE
Concrete
PLATE WASHER DETAIL
1
2"
Bolt, Rail Post &
1 ~ " x 3" ASTM A307 Bolts with
D19.7 (Vertical)
(Typ.)
UNIT
PLAN VIEW
SPLICE DETAIL
ITEM
5
16"
Angle Assembly
10"
D19.7 (Horizontal)
1
4"
4"
10"
(Typ.)
1"
1'-0"
Lap
(Centered)
D19.7 (Typ.)
9"
1'-9" Min.
4"
" Hole
Bolt & Post
are not permitted.
378"
3
4"
greater than 4
1
8"
NOTE: Place wire panels to minimize the end overhang. End Overhangs
2"
6"
Apply sealant prior to any Class V finish coating and remove all curing compound
SCHEME 2 - CONCRETE CURB DETAILS
ELEVATION VIEW
TYPICAL SECTION
SCHEME 3 - SIDE-MOUNTED SUPPORT BRACKET DETAILS
Bottom Rail
Bottom Rail
Rail, Bottle-
Rail, Bottle-Guard
Guard and Screws
and Screws
CROSS REFERENCE:
See Sheet 3 for Bridge Railing Notes.
Bottle Guard
#10 x " Pan Head
#10 x " Pan Head
Bottle Guard
Screws (18-8 SS)
Screws (18-8 SS)
1" x 1" x "
@ 2'-0" sp.
@ 2'-0" sp.
1" x 2" x "
"
"
"
TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH BOTTOM RAIL
(Post Not Shown for Clarity)
SCHEME 1 - BOTTLE GUARD DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
41:
35 AM
"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
(STEEL)
NO.
851
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
6" **
8"
6" **
6" ***
6" Min.
6"
3" Min.
Field Splice Slip Joint
3" Min.
6"
3" Min.
Top Rail or
Handrail
BRIDGE RAILING NOTES:
Varies **** ~ Deck Expansion Joint

1
4"
( 14") ~ Field Splice Slip Joint or
Posts
APPLICABILITY NOTE: Railing is limited to use on bridges with an expansion joint thermal
Set Screws *
Curb Intermediate Open Joint
2" 1"
Pickets (Typ.)
Top Rail or
6" Max. @ maximum
Handrail Section
movement
2"
Intermediate or
movements not exceeding 5". Scheme 3 is limited to bridge retrofit applications where
additional sidewalk width is required.
Bottom Rail section

RAILING DETAILS: For Railing fabrication and installation details and notes see Index No. 852,
except that railing shall be fabricated and installed normal to the Profile Grade longitudinally
and vertical transversely, unless otherwise shown in the Contract Plans.

*
Steel Sleeve:
BOTTLE-GUARD (Schemes 1 & 3): L-Shape shall be in accordance with ASTM A36.
2.50 OD x 0.125 Wall for top rail

Round over both ends 1" NPS (Sch. 40) for handrails
Posts
of rails 18" (Typ.)
SQUARE RAILS - INTERMEDIATE OR BOTTOM RAIL
CONCRETE CURB (Scheme 2): Construct concrete curb vertical with the top surface finished
level transversely. Concrete class shall be the same as the bridge deck.
Set Screws along outside face of railing. Set screws must be

set flush against the rail surface. A " plug weld may be
substituted for the two set screws at expansion joints.
** Embedded length may be 4" for plug welded connection.
**** Expansion Joint opening shall match the clear opening in the deck joint
but not greater than 3".
Expansion Joint
1'-2"
Field Splice & Typ. Post
3"
(bottom only)
accordance with ASTM A36. Welding shall be in accordance with the American Society of
Steel Sleeve:
E60XX or E70XX. Nondestructive testing of welds is not required. The bracket shall be
1.50 OD x 0.125 Wall
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with Specification Section 962.
for intermediate
and bottom rails
"R (Typ.)
SIDE MOUNTED SUPPORT BRACKET (Scheme 3): L-Shape and Stiffener Plate shall be in
Structural Welding Code (Steel) ANSI/AWS D1.1 (current edition). Weld metal shall be
" Slit
*** Increase handrail sleeve embedment to 8" for Expansion Joint openings
greater than 2".
1'-5"
Connection
(
Typ.
)
* " x " Pan Head Stainless Steel (Type 316 or 18-8 Alloy)
1" Slot
ROUND RAILS - TOP RAIL OR HANDRAIL
PAYMENT: Railing shall be paid per linear foot (Item No. 515-2-abb) for the steel railing
1" Picket Slot
and include the cost of support brackets (Scheme 3). Concrete and reinforcing steel quantities
(Expansion sides only)
for the concrete curb (Scheme 2), will be included in the bridge deck plan quantity pay items.
INTERMEDIATE OR BOTTOM RAIL - Steel

SLEEVE DETAIL (Bottom Side Shown)
Payment will be plan quantity measured as the length along the center line of the top rail,
and includes rails, posts, pickets, rail splice assembly, base plates, bottle-guards, anchor bolts,
nuts, washers, resilient or neoprene pads and all incidental materials and labor required to
complete installation of the railing.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
41:
36 AM
DETAIL "B" EXPANSION JOINT (FIELD SPLICE SIMILAR)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
(STEEL)
NO.
851
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
NOTES
DESIGN LOADS, GEOMETRY AND APPLICABILITY:
See the Instructions for Design Standards for the design loads, geometry and applicability requirements.
GENERAL:
Adequate foundation support shall be provided for anchorage and stability against overturning (See Sheet 8).
See Index No. 851 for special requirements and modifications for use on bridges. The railing shown on these
drawings requires a handrail for ramps steeper than a 5% grade to conform with the requirements of the
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
RAILS, PANELS AND POSTS:
Pipe Rails and Pickets shall be in accordance with ASTM A500 Grade B, C or D, or ASTM A53 Grade B for standard
weight pipe (Schedule 40) or ASTM A36 for bars. Structural Tube shall be in accordance with ASTM A500 Grade A,
B, C or D, or ASTM A501. Perforated panels (Type 5), U-Channels and filler plates shall be ASTM A36 or A1011
(Grade 36). Posts and End Rails shall be fabricated and installed plumb, 1" tolerance when measured at 3'-6"
above the foundation. Pickets and vertical panel elements shall be fabricated parallel to the posts, except that Type
2, 3 & 5 panel infills may be fabricated parallel to the longitudinal grade. Corners and changes in tangential
longitudinal alignment shall be made continuous with a 9" bend radius or terminate at adjoining sections with mitered
end sections when handrails are not required. For changes in tangential longitudinal alignment greater than 45,
posts shall be positioned at a maximum distance of 2'-0" each side of the corner and shall not be located at the
corner apex. For curved longitudinal alignments the top and bottom rails and handrails shall be shop bent to match
the alignment radius.
BASE PLATES AND RAIL CAPS:
Base Plates and Rail Cap Plates shall be in accordance with ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36.
SHIM PLATES:
3D VIEW OF RAILING WITH TYPE 1 - PICKET INFILL PANEL
Shim Plates shall be aluminum in accordance with ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 or 6063. Shim plates shall be used for
foundation height adjustments greater than " between 3 posts and localized irregularities greater than " beneath
(42" Height shown, 48" Height Similar)
base plates. Field trim shim plates when necessary to match the contours of the foundation. Beveled shim plates
may be used in lieu of trimmed flat shim plates shown. Stacked shim plates must be bonded together with adhesive
bonding material and limited to a maximum total thickness of ", unless longer anchor bolts are provided for the
TABLE 1 - RAILING MEMBERS

OUTSIDE
exposed thread length.
WALL
MEMBER
DESIGNATION
DIMENSION
THICKNESS
Post "A"
HSS2x1x
2.50" x 1.50"
0.125"
Headless anchor bolts for Adhesive. Anchors shall be threaded full length. Cutting of reinforcing steel is permitted
Post "B"
HSS2x1x
2.50" x 1.50"
0.188"
for drilled hole installation. Expansion Anchors are not permitted. All anchor bolts shall have single self-locking
2" NPS (Sch. 10)
2.875"
0.120"
HSS3.000x0.120
3.000"
0.120"
2" NPS (Sch. 10)
2.875"
0.120"
ANCHOR BOLTS:
Anchor bolts shall be in accordance with ASTM F1554 (Grade 36 for " and Grade 55 for " 4~Bolt Anchorage.)
hex nuts. Tack welding of the nut to the anchor bolt may be used in lieu of self-locking nuts. All nuts shall be in
accordance with ASTM A563 or ASTM A194. Flat Washers shall be in accordance with ASTM F436 and
Top Rail
End Hoops
HSS3.000x0.120
3.000"
0.120"
HSS2.500x0.125
2.500"
0.125"
2.00" x 2.00"
0.188"
1.500"
0.125"
Plate Washers (for long slotted holes only), shall be in accordance with ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36.
After the nuts have been snug tightened, distort the anchor bolt threads to prevent removal of the nuts.
Distorted threads and tack welds shall be coated with a galvanizing compound in accordance with the
Specifications.
Top Rail Joint/Splice Sleeves

Intermediate & Bottom Rail
Int. & Bottom Rail Post Connection Sleeve
HSS2x2x
HSS1.500x0.125
(1)
(1)
RESILIENT AND NEOPRENE PADS:

Resilient and Neoprene pads shall be in accordance with Specification Section 932 except that testing
of the finished pads shall not be required. Neoprene pads shall be durometer hardness 60 to 80.
JOINTS:
1" NPS (Sch. 40)
1.315"
0.133"
HSS1.500x0.125
1.500"
0.125"
1" NPS (Sch. 40)
1.900"
0.145"
Handrail Joint/Splice Sleeves
Handrails
Grind welded joints as necessary to remove burs and weld splatter, additionally remove any sharp edges on
rails to prevent injury. Grind all plug welds smooth. Expansion joints shall be spaced at a maximum 40'-0".
Field splices similar to the expansion joint detail may be approved by the Engineer to facilitate handling,
but top rail must be continuous across a minimum of two posts. For intermediate and bottom horizontal rails
Handrail Support Bar
" Round Bar
0.750"
N/A
Pickets (Type 1 Infill Panel)
" Round Bar
0.750"
N/A
Infill Panel Members (Types 2 - 5)
Varies (See Details)
Varies
Varies
the screwed joints shown on Sheet 4 may be substituted with alternate joints shown on Sheet 3 Detail "K".
WELDING:
All welding shall be in accordance with the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code (Steel)
ANSI/AWS D1.1 (current edition). Weld metal shall be E60XX or E70XX. Nondestructive testing of welds
is not required.
TABLE 1 NOTES:
COATINGS:
(1) 0.125" wall thickness permitted for rails with post spacings less than 5'-8",
The steel railing shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with Section 962 of the
except that Post Connection Sleeve must be 1" NPS (Sch. 40).
Specifications. All nuts, bolts and washers shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with Specification
Section 962.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
Details addressing project specific geometry (line & grade) showing post and expansion joint
locations, post and panel type, anchor bolt installation "Case" or lengths, must be submitted by the
Contractor for the Engineer's approval prior to fabrication of the railing. Shop drawings shall be in
accordance with the Specifications.
PAYMENT:
Railing shall be paid for per linear foot (Item No. 515-2-abb). Payment will be plan quantity measured as
11:
41:
55 AM
the length along the center line of the top rail, and includes rails, posts, pickets, panels, rail splice assembly,
base plates, anchor bolts, nuts, washers, resilient or neoprene pads and all incidental materials and labor
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
required to complete installation of the railing.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE RAILING
NO.
852
SHEET
NO.
1of 8
48" Special Height

1'-5"
Post Spacing
(Typ.)
Post
End Hoop
Bicycle Railing (SHBR)
42" Pedestrian/Bicycle
Post
0" Min. ~ 1" Max.
Railing (PBR)
Post
Post
Top Rail
see Detail "B", Sheet 4
(Pickets Shown)
7" (Typ.)
Top of
Intermediate Rail
Equal Clear Openings at Posts
See Detail "A",
2" Min. ~ 5" Max. (Typ.)
Sheet 4
Foundation
Bottom & Intermediate Rail
Top of Sidewalk
3" Clear Opening
(See Geometry Notes,
Joint *
1'-0"
6" V-Groove or
Expansion
or Bikeway
Ground Line
2'
-7" (
PBR)
Max.
3'
-1" (
SH BR)
9"R
Railing
Post
See Data Table in Plans
Post (Typ.)
Bicycle Railing
5"
Infill Panel Type Varies,
48" Special H eight
Gap
5"
5"
Sheet 1)
Minimum from free end of concrete
Min.Construction
Joint Offset **
and expansion joints (Typ.)

Note: Non-continuous corners are permitted
Rail expansion joints to be located in panels above
when handrails are not required.
structure expansion joints * (35'-0" maximum spacing).
ELEVATION
EXPANDED ELEVATION AT CORNERS
(Showing Outside Face of Railing with Type "A" Posts)
TYPICAL RAILING DETAILS & RAILINGS ON GRADES 0% TO 5%
DETAIL FOR NON-CONTINUOUS

RAILING AT CORNERS
(Type 1 - Picket Railing Shown, Other Types Similar)

NOTES:
* Keyed construction joints in Index No. 6011 Gravity
Post
Wall are not considered to be expansion joints.
Horizontal handrail
Handrail ~ 1 " NPS Sch. 40
Post Spacing
(Typ.)
(SHBR)
for post, rail & picket or
(PBR)
infill panel details
1'-6"
Min.
Post
M ax.
2'
-6"
Bottom Landing
30'-0" Max. for Slopes > 6.25%

40'-0" Max. for Slopes 6.25%
5'-0" Min.
Intermediate Landing
5'-0" Min.
Top Landing
RAMP REQUIREMENTS
LANDING REQUIREMENTS
Ramp
For slopes greater than 5%:
Max. ramp slope = 8.33%
ELEVATION
11:
41:
58 AM
Top of
Sidewalk
Ramp
6'-0" Min.
M ax.
3"
e
d
a
Gr
2'
-6"
3"
2'
-10"
5"
(Typ.)
2'
-10"
Railing
42"
Pedestrian/Bicycle
of railing
termination limits
Bicycle Railing
termination limits
Min.
See "Typical Railing Details"
continuation or
48" Special H eight
continuation or
5"
extension at landing
Post
of railing
1'-6"
continuous at landings between runs)
not require a 6" minimum offset.
See Plans for
See Plans for
Handrail required for ramps (Handrail
** Contraction joints (Tooled or Saw Cut) in sidewalks do
Max. landing slope = 2%

Max. landing cross-slope = 2%
Max. ramp cross-slope = 2.0%
(Showing Inside Face of Railing with Type "A" Posts)
12/17/2015
RAILINGS ON GRADES STEEPER THAN 5%
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
852
SHEET
NO.
2 of 8
7'-3" (Max.) ~ Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing
Post
Varies ~ Equal spacing

5'-0" Max. on Steps
Post
Post
(Typ.) see Detail,

Sheet 4
1'-6" Min. Handrail
Equal to one
Extension
tread length
See "Typical Railing Details",
1
8
& picket details
Seal
Weld
Bottom
Top Rail
3'
-6"
6"
)
.
yp
(T
Sheet 2 for post, rail
Post
Leveling Channel
Rail (Typ.)
" Top
Cap
Rail Cap
Rail Termination (End Cap) or
3'
-6"
2'
-10"
Round over
corners "
Post
1"
Post
(Typ.)
J
1"
VIEW J-J
Splice when rail continues on
3"
(shown dotted)
)
p.
Ty
(
" Vent/Weep
Cut rail sleeve to match inside
hole for welded
face of post or weld rail
connection
directly to post
DETAIL "K" - ELEVATION VIEW
TOP RAIL TERMINATION
BOTTOM RAIL CONNECTION
Post
(Intermediate Rail Similar)

See Index No. 521
8"
)
.
yp
(T
DETAIL "J" - ELEVATION VIEW
5"
1'-6"
0" Min.
Min.
1" Max.
RAIL TERMINATION DETAILS
or Contract Plans
RAILING CONTINUATION BEYOND STEPS OR STAIRS
Steel Handrail required for three
(Bottom shown, Top similar)
1'-0"
or more steps (Handrail and cheekwalls

continuous at landings)
1
2"
Handrails ~ 1
NPS (Sch. 40) pipe
"
Post
Equal to one
1 "
tread length
Handrail Continuous
2'
-10"
At Landing
3
16
& picket details

Flatten handrail termination
to 1" Max. width.
3'
-6"
2'
-10"
for Step Details
3"
Concrete sidewalk to extend 6" Min. behind railing
" Vent/Weep hole
Varies ~ Approx.
in bottom of handrail
Equal spacing
R 6"
(Typ.)
Length of Landing 5' Min.

Top Landing
2'
-10"
HANDRAIL TERMINATION
Handrail termination
3'
-6"
5'-0" Max. on Steps
DETAIL "L" - PLAN VIEW
1'-6"
(Typ.) See Detail "L"
Top Rail termination

Rail Termination (End Cap)
3"
1'-6" Min. Handrail
or Contract Plans
tread width
2"
5'-0" Min.
Length Of Landing
for Step Details
ELEVATION
11:
41:
59 AM
Equal to one
Bottom Rail
termination,
see Detail "K"
Elevated Stairs similar)
9" Min. thick wall
Not considered an
6'-0"
12/17/2015
2"
(At-Grade Steps shown,

1'-0"
2'
-10"
Extension
1'
-6"
Handrail
cheekwall
1'
-6"
+
2'
-10"
3'
-6"
"
9
.)
yp
(T
See Index No. 521
Min.
R 6"
(Typ.)
1'-6" Min.
Bottom of
2'
-10"
Equal to one
tread length
5"
Handrail Termination,
See Detail "L"
6'
-0" M ax. for one run of steps
Extension
Min.
see Detail "J"
Bottom Landing
expansion joint
1'-0"
for railing fabrication (Typ.)
Min.
ALTERNATE HANDRAIL END TREATMENT OR

MOUNTING LOCATION FOR SLOPED WALLS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
RAILINGS ON STEPS & STAIRS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
852
SHEET
NO.
3 of 8
3
4"
Post
3"
1"
" Plate
"
Leveling Channel
3"
Hole
2" x 2" x
1 "
1"
R 1"
Level
wall
1" Max.
1"
" Bar
1
4"
3
16
1"
SECTION B-B
1"
Base Plate B
Cope to
& Anchor Bolt
clear welds
TOP VIEW
(Handrail Connection)
permitted
1
2"
of Base Plate
Post
Top Rail
1
2"
SHIM PLATE DETAIL

Match slope
Handrail
Hole
Front &
DETAIL
& Bar
1"
PLATE WASHER
Handrail
SIDE VIEW
maintain plumb posts) (Typ.)
Post
Venting
" Min. (Beveled)
(Top Rail Connection)

2 "
3
4"
(centered)
" Steel (Flat)
SECTION A-A
3"
" Hole
48" Special H eight Bicycle Railing
3"
7 "
Single Bolt Anchorage
of post as required to
Post
9"
R
Back of
Post (Typ.)
"
Venting
Mitered Section
Hole
(Typ. All Rails)
permitted
B
3'
-6"
at top of Posts
Post (Bevel bottom & top

5"
"
2"
"
Handrail
2" (Typ.)
Intermediate Rail
Bottom Rail
" Venting
Flatten end of
Hole
End Hoop to 1"
Max. width
LEVELING CHANNEL DETAIL
3" (
Typ.
)
" Venting Hole
1'-5"
2'
-10"
3
4"
5"
4~Bolt Anchorage
2 " (
Typ.
)
& Post
3
4"
Top Rail
(
Vertical Typ.
)
8"
Top Rail
Set Screw *
(Typ.)
Stairs shown,
Intermediate Rail
"
(
Typ.
)
Steep Ramp
D
Intermediate
Base Plate &

Anchor Bolt Hole
" Venting Hole
3"
1
4"
Base Plate
Not Shown for Clarity)

NOTES:
Post &
Bolt Hole
Base Plate A (Ramps - Bolts normal) use 1" Holes
for Single Anchor Bolts with Flat Washers for slopes 8.33%.
Post
Anchorage:
" Thick
" Holes for
Resilient or
" Bolts (Typ.)
3
1 8"
5
2 8"
5
2 8"
Optional 4~Bolt
Post
178"
Anchorage:
258"
258"
178"
" Holes for
8"
Neoprene Pad
3
1 8"
Anchor Bolts with Beveled Plate and Washers for slopes
3
4"
Optional 4~Bolt
3
4"
Base Plate B (Stairs - Bolts plumb) use 1" Holes for Single
Rail Sleeve
Base Plate
6"
Bolt Hole
Bottom
3"
Post &
Bottom Rail
5
8"
(Pickets/Panels and 4~Bolt Anchorage
Plate
Post
3"
214" 214"
Post & Anchor Bolt
Base
3"
" Base
(Typ.)
1
4"
(Intermediate Rail Connection)
DETAIL "A" - RAIL CONNECTIONS
" Venting Hole
Post to
(Typ.)
6"
3
4"
Base
Base Plate B ~ for slope > 8.33%
Anchor Bolt Hole
Post to
SECTION C-C
Base Plate A ~ for slopes 8.33%
Base Plate &
3
4"
Rail Sleeve
Post
similar
Leveling Channel
shown dashed
9"
" Bolts (Typ.)
> 8.33% to 15%; use " x 1" Slotted Holes with
(see Detail)
Leveling Channel for slopes > 15%.

* " x " Pan Head Stainless Steel (Type 316 or 18-8
Alloy) Set Screws. Screws must be set flush against the
BASE PLATE A
Anchor Bolt
BASE PLATE B
outside face of rails & posts and underside of handrails.

" plug welds may be substituted for the Set Screws.
SECTION D-D
SECTION G-G - BASE PLATE DETAILS
Do not provide Set Screws for Rails at free end of
(Bottom Rail Connection -
Expansion Joints.
Single Anchor Bolt Shown)

6" **
6"
Top & Handrails

Posts
2" 1"
" ( ") ~ Expansion Joint

" ( ") ~ Field Splice Slip Joint
1'-1"
" (") ~ Expansion Joint
Steel Sleeve through 1"
1" Hole (Bottom Rail Single
holes in posts
" (") ~ Field Splice Joint
Anchor Bolt Option)
2"
Steel Sleeve:
Pickets (Typ.)
Set Screws *
Rail or Handrail
Intermediate or
1.50 OD x 0.125 Wall

Intermediate or
Bottom Rail
for Intermediate and
Bottom Rail
Bottom Rails
11:
42:
00 AM
" R Cope Permitted
Rail or Handrail
Round over
Section
both ends
Posts
of rails " (Typ.)
Steel Sleeve
Set Screws *
3"
(Typ.)
1" Hole
VIEW F-F
INTERMEDIATE OR BOTTOM RAIL -
(Bottom Rail Option)
(Top Rail at Expansion Joint Shown)
(Bottom Rail at Expansion Joint Shown)
STEEL SLEEVE DETAIL (Bottom Side Shown)
12/17/2015
CROSS REFERENCE:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DETAIL "B" - EXPANSION JOINT (FIELD SPLICE SLIP JOINT SIMILAR)
For location of Details "B", See Sheet 2.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
852
SHEET
NO.
4 of 8
Intermediate Rail
6" O.C. (Max.)
Picket Spacing *
" Max.
(Typ.)
Picket
" Max. Hole for Ramps,

" Max. Hole for Stairs.
(Optional weld at end picket)

3
4"
10
Picket
10
3
4"
(
Typ.
)
4"
(Shown dashed)
Picket ~ " Bar (Typ.)
Post
DETAIL "1A"
(Top of Picket Connection)
See Detail "1A"
Optional weld
Optional weld
at end picket
Post & Anchor Bolt
3'
-1" ~ (
SH BR)
at end picket
2'
-7" ~ (
PBR)
Post
Bottom Rail

End Permitted
(Optional weld at end picket)
(Shown dashed)
Base Plate
" Thick Resilient

or Neoprene Pad
3" Nominal Opening
See Detail "1B"
A
2" Min. ~ 5" Max. (Typ.)
2" Min. ~ 5" Max. (Typ.)
Anchor Bolt
DETAIL "1B"
SECTION A-A
(Bottom of Picket Connection)

TYPE 1 - PICKET INFILL PANEL
PICKET NOTES:
* Picket Spacing of 6" centers is based on a " Bar for standard applications.
When shown in the Contract Plans a 4" picket spacing may be required. If an
alternate design is used, maintain a maximum clear opening of 5" for
standard installations and 3" for special conditions.
Chain-Link Fence
Ties @ 1'-0" center
Fabric tied to
(Post and End Rail)
inside face of
3
4"
10
10
3
4"
railing
TABLE 2 - CHAIN-LINK PANEL COMPONENT MATERIALS

COMPONENT
Chain-Link Fence
ASTM
Zinc-Coated Steel - No. 9 gage (coated
A 392
Fabric (2" mesh with

twisted bottom and
3'
-1" (
SH BR)
1
PBR)
4" (
2'
-7
wire with knuckled top and twisted bottom selvage)
wire diameter), Class 2 Coating

Aluminum-Coated Steel - No. 9 gage
A 491
knuckled top selvage)
Chain-Link Fence Fabric (2" Mesh x No. 9 Gage
(coated wire diameter)

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Steel - No.
9 gage Zinc-Coated Wire (metallic-coated
F 668
core wire diameter) ~ See Plans for

specified color of PVC.
Tie Wires
F 626
Tension Bars
F 626
Zinc-Coated Steel Wire - No. 9 gage with

coating to match Chain-Link Fence Fabric.
3
16"
(Min. thickness) x
3
4"
(Min. width)
x 2'-3' (Min. height) Steel Bars

Miscellaneous Fence
Components
F 626
Zinc-Coated Steel
Ties @ 2'-0" center (Intermediate & Bottom Rail)
SECTION A-A
CHAIN-LINK PANEL NOTE:

Chain-Link Fence Fabric shall be continuous along limits of railing.
11:
42:
01 AM
Splicing of Chain-Link panels using Tension Bars at 20'-0" minimum

increments is permitted.
TYPE 2 - CHAIN-LINK (Continuous Infill Panel)

NOTES:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
1. See Plans for Infill Panel option required.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
852
SHEET
NO.
5 of 8
(
SH BR)
#10x" Pan
Head Screws
Channel xx
(18-8 SS) @
(Border)*
2'-0" sp.
"
10 "
10 "
Rail
Channel 1x1x (Arc)*
"
Joint
" Square Bar (Rays)*
Bar (Rays)
Rail Expansion
5"
(
PBR)
" Square
Panel
"x" Filler
Strips*
Channel xx*
See Detail "3A"
"
Front &
4'
-3" R
(Typ.)
3'
-1"
2'
-7"
5"
)
.
yp
T
(
" Square
Bar (Rays)
See Detail "3C"
Back Face
#10x" Pan Head
Top of
Screws (18-8 SS)
all Rays
@ 2'-0" sp.
DETAIL "3A"
DETAIL "3B"
INTERMEDIATE RAIL/RAY
BOTTOM RAIL/RAY CONNECTION
CONNECTION
"x" Punched
Bar (Rays)
Holes @ 5" sp.
Bar (Rays)
Channel 1x1x
"R
-3
1'
Radial Center
" Square
" Square
" (Sun Segment)*
See Detail "3B"
(Arc)*
Channel 1x1x
Seal Weld mitered
SECTION A-A
"
" Square
1'-614"
Bar (Rays)
at Side Channel
M ax.
Expansion Joints
Rays
Notch Arc
(Arc)*
corners at Rail
Similar
Expansion Joint
Opening
"x" Punched
3 ~ #10x" Pan
Holes @ 5" sp.
Head Screws
Post
TYPE 3 - SUNSHINE INFILL PANEL
Post
(18-8 SS) @
1'-0" sp.
DETAIL "3D"
DETAIL "3E"
ARC/POST CONNECTION
PANEL END CONNECTION
(Continuous Top Rail)
AT POST WITH EXPANSION JOINT
* Arc, Rays and Sun Segment may be formed in a single panel from
" plate (ASTM 36 or A709 - Grade 36) pattern cut with laser or
plasma CNC, welded to a 1x1x Angle Border or the xx
Channel 1x1x
Channel Border shown.
(Arc)*
DETAIL "3C"
"
Filler Strip
(Typ.)
Head Screws
(18-8 SS) @
1'-0" sp.
Head Screws
Channel xx
(18-8 SS) @
(Cut or Cast)
5
2
Channel xx
See Detail "4A"
"
"
Infill Panel
"
2'-0" sp.
"
Panel Mullion
" Infill Panel
1" (SHBR)
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
1'-2" (PBR)
Panel Width
1'-5" (SHBR)
(Typ.)
"
3" (SHBR)
M in.
1" (PBR)
SECTION A-A
Lengthen border and trim
TYPE 4 - BROADWAY INFILL PANEL
top & bottom of panels to

match grade.
1" M ax. (
Ram p)
4" Max.
2" (PBR)
1" (
SH BR)
"
1" (
PBR)
8" R (PBR)
10" R (SHBR)
"
1" M ax. (
Ram p)
DETAIL "4A"
PANEL/RAIL CONNECTION
End Panel 1"
1"
Strip
" Infill Panel
SECTION C-C
PANEL/SPLICE CONNECTION
)
R )
B
R
(P B
R SH
(
"
-8 R
'
2 4"
'
3
"x" Filler
(Typ.)
1"
9" M ax. (
Stairs)
6 "
8 "
1" (
SH BR)
3
8"
" Infill Panel
Gap Varies
12/17/2015
#10x" Pan
of Rail
1'
-0 "
11:
42:
02 AM
1"
11
16"
6 "
1" (
PBR)
Inside Face
2'
-6" (
SH BR)
2'
-0" (
PBR)
Panel H eight
3 ~ #10x" Pan
(
Typ.
)
"x"
RAY/ARC CONNECTION
(Top Shown, Bottom Similar)
3 ~ #10x"
Gap Varies
Pan Head Screws
4" Max.
(18-8 SS) @ 1'-0" sp.

"x" Filler
Strip
" Infill
Panel
Post
NOTES:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
1. See Plans for Infill Panel Option required.
PANEL ADJUSTMENT FOR RAILINGS
SECTION B-B
ON GRADES
PANEL END CAP
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
852
SHEET
NO.
6 of 8
of Post
Inside Face
#10x" Pan
of Rail
Rail Expansion
Channel xx
"
Channel xx
Perforated Panel
(0.04" Min.)
(18-8 SS) @
Expansion
2'-0" sp.
Joint
"x" Filler
(Typ.)
Head Screws
(18-8 SS) @
1'-0" sp.
Opening
Channel xx
Strip
"
"x" Filler
(Typ.)
Strip
Panel Mullion
Perforated Panel
Perforated Panel
(0.04" Min.)
(0.04" Min.)
DETAIL "5A"
DETAIL "5B"
(Expansion Joint Shown, Sides Similar)
See Detail "5A"
2'
-6" (
Panel H eight)
Perforated Panel
"
(0.04" Min.)
"
"
"
"
"
"
Perforated Panel
(0.04" Min.)
(
Typ.
)
2'
-0" (
Panel H eight)
#10x" Pan
Head Screws
Joint
1
8"
Inside Face
3 ~ #10x" Pan
Head Screws
(18-8 SS) @
1'-0" sp.
3'-0" Max.
3'-0" Max.
(Panel Width)
SECTION A-A
"
(Panel Width)
A
Seal welding mitered
"x" Filler
Strip (Typ.)
3
4"
3
4"
Panel Mullion
corners is permitted
"
112"
TYPE 5 - PERFORATED INFILL PANEL
REPEATING PATTERN DETAIL
SECTION C-C
FOR PEFORATED PANEL
11:
42:
02 AM
NOTES:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
1. See Plans for Infill Panel Type required.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
852
SHEET
NO.
7 of 8
3
4"
See Section "A-A"
5'-0" Std. ~
Sheet 4
3'-0" Min. Clear
3"
Between Handrails
Post
Optional
4~Bolt
Anchorage
y
wa
a
.(
x
% Ma
e2
p
o
Sl
)
f
f
o
p
o
r
m d
o
r
f
(shown
See Detail "C"

(Typ.)
4" (Case IIa)

1
2"
(Case IIb)
Sl
o
p
e2
% Ma
x
.(
a
wa
y
f
r
o
m d
r
o
p
o
f
f
)
45
step nosing
5" Min.
5" Min.
Varies
Min. #4 Bar (Typ.)
(Continuous)
Reinforced
Concrete Structure
9"
Varies
NPS (Sch. 40) Handrail
Step Cheekwall
Drop-off (
Varies)
1'
-0"
dashed)
Top of
2'
-10"
Bolts & Post
1
2"
M easured from Step Nosings
6"
Thickened Edge
4" Sidewalk with
2'
-10" (
Typ.
) **
Bolts & Post
Bolts & Post
TYPICAL SECTION ON STEPS & STAIRS
TYPICAL SECTION FOR 4~BOLT ANCHORAGE
(Case III)
(Case IV)
(3' Min. Required for

Stability of Railing)
8"
Min. Width at
Top of Wall
TYPICAL SECTION ON CONCRETE SIDEWALK
TYPICAL SECTION ON RETAINING WALL
(Case I)
(Case II)
1 ~
" C-I-P Hex Head Anchor Bolts,
or 1 ~
Post & Anchor Bolts
" Headless Anchor Bolts set with an Adhesive

Bonding Material System in accordance with
Post
Specification Sections 416 and 937. Self-Locking
ANCHOR BOLT TABLE
Bottom Rail
Hex Nut & Washer.
Place Anchor Bolts perpendicular to Base for
DIMENSIONS
Washers or Leveling Channel

CASE
Grades 8.33% (Ramps) with flat washer.
Optional 4~Bolt Anchorage
Place anchor bolts plumb for grades > 8.33
ANCHOR LENGTH
STRUCTURE
A
TYPE
(shown dashed)
C-I-P Hex
Edge Dist. Edge Dist. Embedment Head Bolt
ANCHOR
Adhesive SIZE
Anchor
(Stairs) with flat washer & beveled washer,

or leveling channel.
Edge Shim (8" long
Base Plate
Shim Plates as required

2"
wide x thickness
as reqd.)
or Neoprene Pad
IIa
when required for

height adjustment
"
C"
Base Plate
Full size Shim Plates
Unreinforced
Concrete
" Thick Resilient
M in. Em bedm ent
3
4"
Reinforced Concrete
1
2"
11"
"
1
2"
11"
"
1'-2"
"
11"
"
7"
"
6"
1'-2"
9"
10
4"
4"
9"
10
1'-0" *
1'-1
10
Minimum 2 ~ #4 Bars in Top of

Structure for Case IIa, III & IV
IIb
Gravity Wall
Index No. 6011
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
@ top
Minimum #4 Bars @ 1'-0"

(Max.) spacing for Case IIa
"A"
"B"
(Min.)
(Min.)
Inside Face of Concrete
1
2"
1
2"
III
Step Cheekwall
9"
IV
Varies
5"
5"
5"
1
2"
6"
Structure or Sidewalk
1
2"
(Min.) wide
bed of Adhesive
1
8"
(See Concrete Structure
Thick Resilient
Plans for actual dimensions
or Neoprene Pad
Bonding Material
and reinforcing details)
DETAIL "C"
FOR CROSS SLOPE CORRECTION)
(Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts shown,
(Used in lieu of Beveled Shim Plates)
Adhesive Anchors similar)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DETAIL "D" (OPTIONAL SHIMMING DETAIL
12/17/2015
11:
42:
05 AM
* Embedment length "C" may be reduced to 9" for the 42" height
railings for Case IIb, when the post spacing does not exceed 5'-0".
** When required; measured from top of sidewalk.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
852
SHEET
NO.
8 of 8
Bolts & Post
Bolts & Post
1
2"
2" Cover (
Typ.
)
Bolt with double Hex Nuts,

Flat Washer under Nut &
Plate Washer under Head
8"
4"
4"
Head Bolt with Hex
Plate Washer
Nut & Flat Washers
Bridge Coping
1
2"
1
4"

Bottle-Guard (See
Curb with "x"
Detail on Sheet 2)
4"
9"
Em bed.
3"
Bars 4S
y
wa
a
.(
x
% Ma
e2
p
o
Sl
)
f
f
o
p
o
r
m d
o
r
f
Bars 4P
@ 1'-0" sp.
1'-0" Min.
under Head & Nuts
Coping
1
2"
(Sheet 2)
SCHEME 2 -
(Thru-Bolt Option)
CURB MOUNTED RAILING
SIDE MOUNTED RAILING (RETROFIT)
(Adhesive Anchor Option shown - SCHEME 1A)

Intermediate
Section
SCHEME 1B - DETAILS
TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH DECK MOUNTED RAILING
3
4"
See Typical
Embedment
Bridge
SCHEME 1 -
M in.
" ASTM A307 Hex Head
SCHEME 3 -
Deck Joint *
Open Joint **
Coping (Typ.)
Inside face of
Approach Slab
Concrete Curb
PLAN
(Scheme 2 shown, other Schemes similar, Reinforcing Steel not shown for clarity)
Spacing
* 30'-0" (Maximum)
1
2"
V-Groove
Intermediate
Begin or End
5'-8" (Max.) ~ Special
Open Joint
Min.
7'-3" (Max.) ~
Min. 6"
Post (Typ.)
1'-0"
Approach Slab
Post Spacing
Height Bicycle Railing
Rail Field Splice Joint (Typ.)
6" Min.
Post
7" Min.
Post
Index No. 862 Railing shown,
see Contract Plans for actual
railing continuation or termination
* See Structures Plans, Superstructure Sheets for actual
Type 1 - Picket Infill Panel shown
dimensions and joint orientation. Open Curb Joints at

Deck Expansion Joint locations shall match the dimension
Infill Panel Type
Varies (See Plans)
4" Max. Gap
Concrete
6" Max.
@ 70F ***
Curb
of the Deck Joint. For treatment of Railings on skewed

bridges see Index No. 420. Deck Joint at Begin Bridge
or End Bridge shown. Deck Joint at Pier or Intermediate
Bent similar.
11:
42:
38 AM
Deck Joint *
3
4"
1
2"
Intermediate
Open Joint **
2 for Pre-cured
*** Clear opening between adjacent pickets or panel at Rail
Min.
1'-0"
Expansion Joints, above Deck Expansion Joints with a total

Approach Slab
thermal movement greater than 4", must be reduced to 3".
Silicone Sealant
(Scheme 2 shown with Post "A", other Schemes similar, Reinforcing Steel not shown for clarity)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
See Detail "A", Sheet
V-Groove in both faces &
DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

(ALUMINUM)
(
Deck)
to be removed
Existing railing
Railing
" ASTM A307 Hex

Thru-Bolt
Pedestrian/Bicycle
(See Plans)
Railing
H eight Bicycle Railing
3'
-0" for Alum inum Ped.
/Bicycle
(
M in.
)
3'
-6" for Alum inum Special
No. 862, Aluminum
chamfers
6"
Hole
length
Drilled
+3"
Bolt
Core
Railing
Modified height Index
7"
9"
.
x
% Ma
e2
p
o
Sl
)
g
n
i
p
m Co
o
r
yf
wa
a
(
Deck
Bridge Deck Sidewalk
1"
thickness
WASHER DETAIL
Varies
6"
Thru-Bolt (
Option B)
Detail on Sheet 2)
Adhesive Anchor (
Option A)
Bottle-Guard (See
THRU-BOLT PLATE
6" M in.
" (Galv. Steel)
11" M in.
Index No. 862, Aluminum
F-Shape shown, see Plans)
(centered)
Em bed.
Schemes (Type Varies, 32"
Pedestrian/Bicycle
Hole
1
2"
1
16"
1
Traffic Railing required for all
Bolts & Post

Index No. 862, Aluminum
NO.
861
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
4"
15
16"
4"
Holes
for Anchor Bolts
3"
MARK
SIZE
2'-0"
As Reqd.
" x 2 "
LENGTH
Long Slotted Hole
D19.7 or #4 Bar (Lap

Splice Each Longitudinal Wire)
Stiffener
1
2"
1
2"
2" (Typ.)
L8 x 6 x
(Typ.)
REINFORCEMENT (WWR)
Index No. 862 Railing

Fill void with
BAR 4S
non-shrink grout
1
8"
Bottle Guard
CURB REINFORCING STEEL NOTES:
6" Min.
Pre-cured Silicone
2. The reinforcement for the curb on a retaining wall shall be
Sealant (4" wide)
L8 x 6 x 12"
(Typ.)
4"
(Typ.)
4. Bars 4S may be continuous or spliced at the construction joints.

2"
2 ~
5. At the option of the Contractor Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR)

may be used in lieu of all Bars 4P and 4S. WWR must consist of
3
4"
1
2"
1
8
x 1'-2" Headless Anchor
Self Locking Hex Nuts & Flat Washers
112"
4"
4"
112"
212"
3"
Stiffener
7
8"
At Intermediate Open Joints, seal the lower 6" portion of the open joint with
4.01
1
4"
11"
QUANTITY
LB/LF
" Core
1
8"
Drilled Hole
212"
ESTIMATED CONCRETE CURB
Reinforcing Steel
(Max.) Weld
Termination (Typ.)
1"
1
2"
Specifications Section 416 and 937.
3"
0.0124
1'-0" Min.
Embedment
Material System in accordance with
QUANTITIES (SCHEME 2)
Cope
" Stiffener
Bolt set with an Adhesive Bonding
Deformed wire meeting the requirements of Specifications Section 931.
Bridge Deck
1"
4"
Thick Resilient or
Neoprene Pad (8" x 11")
the same as detailed for an 8" deck.
UNIT
Bolt & Post
Angle Assembly
under Nut and Plate Washer under Head
BAR 4P
WELDED WIRE
CY/LF
PLATE WASHER DETAIL
1
2"
Bolt, Rail Post &
1 ~ " x 3" ASTM A307 Bolts with

Self Locking Hex Nut, Flat Washer
SPLICE DETAIL
ITEM
PLAN VIEW
As Reqd.
D19.7 (Vertical)
Concrete
5
16"
Angle Assembly
10"
D19.7 (Horizontal)
1
4"
4"
10"
(Typ.)
1"
1'-0"
Lap
(Centered)
D19.7 (Typ.)
9"
1'-9" Min.
4"
" Hole
Bolt & Post
are not permitted.
378"
3
4"
greater than 4
1
8"
NOTE: Place wire panels to minimize the end overhang. End Overhangs
2"
6"
ELEVATION VIEW
TYPICAL SECTION
Apply sealant prior to any Class V finish coating and remove all curing compound
SCHEME 2 - CONCRETE CURB DETAILS
SCHEME 3 - SIDE-MOUNTED SUPPORT BRACKET DETAILS
Bottom Rail
Bottom Rail
Rail, Bottle-
Rail, Bottle-Guard
Guard and Screws
and Screws
CROSS REFERENCE:
See Sheet 3 for Bridge Railing Notes.
Bottle Guard
#10 x " Pan Head
#10 x " Pan Head
Bottle Guard
Screws (18-8 SS)
Screws (18-8 SS)
1" x 1" x "
@ 2'-0" sp.
@ 2'-0" sp.
1" x 2" x "
"
"
"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
42:
39 AM
"
DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

(ALUMINUM)
NO.
861
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
6" **
8"
6" **
6" ***
6" Min.
7"
3" Min.
Field Splice Slip Joint
3" Min.
7"
3" Min.
Top Rail or
Handrail
BRIDGE RAILING NOTES:
Varies **** ~ Deck Expansion Joint

1
4"
Set Screws *
( 14") ~ Field Splice Slip Joint or
Posts
Pickets (Typ.)
Curb Intermediate Open Joint
2" 1"
APPLICABILITY NOTE: Railing is limited to use on bridges with an expansion joint thermal
movements not exceeding 5". Scheme 3 is limited to bridge retrofit applications where
Top Rail or
6" Max. @ maximum
Handrail Section
movement
2"
Intermediate or
additional sidewalk width is required.
Bottom Rail section

RAILING DETAILS: For Railing fabrication and installation details and notes see Index No. 862,
except that railing shall be fabricated and installed normal to the Profile Grade longitudinally
and vertical transversely, unless otherwise shown in the Contract Plans.

*
Aluminum Sleeve:
BOTTLE-GUARD (Schemes 1 & 3): L-Shape shall be in accordance with ASTM B209, Alloy 6063-T5
2.50 OD x 0.125 Wall for top rail

Round over both ends 1" NPS (Sch. 40) for handrails
Posts
of rails 18" (Typ.)
or 6061-T6.

CONCRETE CURB (Scheme 2): Construct concrete curb vertical with the top surface finished
(Type 316 or 18-8 Alloy) Set Screws along outside face of railing.
Set screws must be set flush against the rail surface. A " plug weld
may be substituted for the two set screws at expansion joints.
Expansion Joint
1'-2"
Field Splice & Typ. Post
3"
(bottom only)
accordance with ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6. Welding shall be in accordance with the American
Aluminum Sleeve:
Society of Structural Welding Code (Aluminum) ANSI/AWS D1.2 (current edition). Filler metal
1.50 OD x 0.125 Wall
shall be either ER4043, ER5183, ER5356 or ER5556. Nondestructive testing of welds is
for intermediate
not required.
and bottom rails

1" Picket Slot
greater than 2".

**** Expansion Joint opening shall match the clear opening in the deck joint
level transversely. Concrete class shall be the same as the bridge deck.
SIDE-MOUNTED SUPPORT BRACKET (Scheme 3): L-Shape and Stiffener Plate shall be in
" Slit
*** Increase handrail sleeve embedment to 8" for Expansion Joint openings
but not greater than 3".
1'-5"
Connection
(
Typ.
)
* " x " Pan Head Aluminum (Alloy 7075-T73) or Stainless Steel
1" Slot
"R (Typ.)
PAYMENT: Railing shall be paid per linear foot (Item No. 515-2-abb) for the aluminum railing
(Expansion sides only)
and include the cost of support brackets (Scheme 3). Concrete and reinforcing steel quantities
INTERMEDIATE OR BOTTOM RAIL - ALUMINUM

SLEEVE DETAIL (Bottom Side Shown)
for the concrete curb (Scheme 2), will be included in the bridge deck plan quantity pay items.
Payment will be plan quantity measured as the length along the center line of the top rail,
and includes rails, posts, pickets, rail splice assembly, base plates, bottle-guards, anchor bolts,
DETAIL "B" EXPANSION JOINT (FIELD SPLICE SIMILAR)
nuts, washers, resilient or neoprene pads and all incidental materials and labor required to
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
42:
40 AM
complete installation of the railing.
DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

(ALUMINUM)
NO.
861
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
NOTES
DESIGN LOADS, GEOMETRY AND APPLICABILITY:
See the Instructions for Design Standards for the design loads, geometry and applicability requirements.
GENERAL:
Adequate foundation support shall be provided for anchorage and stability against overturning (See Sheet 8). See Index
No. 861 for special requirements and modifications for use on bridges. The railing shown on these drawings requires a
handrail for ramps steeper than a 5% grade to conform with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
RAILS, PANELS AND POSTS:
Structural Extrusions, Tube, Pipe and Bar shall be in accordance with Table 1 and ASTM B221 or ASTM B429. Top, bottom
and intermediate rail corner bends with maximum 4'-0" post spacing, may be Alloy 6063-T6. Perforated panels (Type 5)
shall be Alloy 3003-H14. Posts shall be fabricated and installed plumb, 1" tolerance when measured at 3'-6" above the
foundation. Pickets and vertical panel elements shall be fabricated parallel to the posts, except that Type 2, 3 & 5 panel
infills may be fabricated parallel to the longitudinal grade. Corners and changes in tangential longitudinal alignment
shall be made continuous with a 9" bend radius or terminate at adjoining sections with mitered end sections when
handrails are not required. For changes in tangential longitudinal alignment greater than 45, posts shall be positioned
at a maximum distance of 2'-0" each side of the corner and shall not be located at the corner apex. For curved
longitudinal alignments the top and bottom rails and handrails shall be shop bent to match the alignment radius.
BASE PLATES AND RAIL CAPS:
Base Plates and Post Cap plates shall be in accordance with ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6.
SHIM PLATES:
3D VIEW OF RAILING WITH TYPE 1 - PICKET INFILL PANEL
Shim Plates shall be aluminum in accordance with ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 or 6063. Shim plates shall be used for foundation
(42" Height shown, 48" Height Similar)
height adjustments greater than " between 3 posts and localized irregularities greater than " beneath base plates. Field
trim shim plates when necessary to match the contours of the foundation. Beveled shim plates may be used in lieu of
TABLE 1 - RAILING MEMBERS

(1)
trimmed flat shim plates shown. Stacked shim plates must be bonded together with adhesive bonding material and limited to
DESIGNATION
a maximum total thickness of ", unless longer anchor bolts are provided for the exposed thread length.
OUTSIDE
WALL
DIMENSION
THICKNESS
MEMBER
ALLOY
Posts (Type "A" & "B")
6061-T6
RT 2x2x.250
2.00" x 2.00"
0.250"
Posts (Type "C")
6061-T6
Extrusion 1x2x.125
1.50" x 2.50"
0.125"
installation. Expansion Anchors are not permitted. All anchor bolts shall have single self-locking hex nuts. Tack welding of
Top Plate (Type "C")
6061-T6
Extrusion (See Details)
2" x 7"
Varies
the nut to the anchor bolt may be used in lieu of self-locking nuts. All nuts shall be in accordance with ASTM A563 or ASTM
2" NPS (Sch. 10)
2.875"
0.120"
Top Rail
6061-T6
3" Round Top Cap Rail
3.000"
0.125"
2" NPS (Sch. 10)
2.875"
0.120"
3.00 OD x 0.125 Wall
3.000"
0.125"
2.50 OD x 0.125 Wall
2.500"
0.125"
Top Cap Rail Inner Sleeve
2.800"
0.090"
RT 2x2x.250
2.00" x 2.00"
0.250"
ANCHOR BOLTS:
Anchor bolts shall be in accordance with ASTM F1554 (Grade 36 for " and Grade 55 for " 4~Bolt Anchorage). Headless
anchor bolts for Adhesive Anchors shall be threaded full length. Cutting of reinforcing steel is permitted for drilled hole
End Hoops
A194. Flat Washers shall be in accordance with ASTM F436 and Plate Washers (for long slotted holes only), shall be in
accordance with ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36. After the nuts have been snug tightened, distort the anchor bolt threads
6063-T5
to prevent removal of the nuts. Distorted threads and tack welds shall be coated with a galvanizing compound in accordance
with the Specifications.

Resilient and Neoprene pads shall be in accordance with Specification Section 932 except that testing of the finished pads
Top Rail Joint/Splice Sleeves
6063-T5
Intermediate & Bottom Rail
6061-T6
Int. & Bottom Rail Post Connection Sleeve
(2)
shall not be required. Neoprene pads shall be durometer hardness 60 to 80.

JOINTS:
Grind welded joints as necessary to remove burs and weld splatter, additionally remove any sharp edges on rails to
prevent injury. Grind all plug welds smooth. Expansion joints shall be spaced at a maximum 40'-0". Field splices similar
(3)
6063-T5
1.50 OD x 0.125 Wall
1.500"
0.125"
to the expansion joint detail may be approved by the Engineer to facilitate handling, but top rail must be continuous across
6063-T5
1" NPS (Sch. 40)
1.315"
0.133"
a minimum of two posts. For intermediate and bottom horizontal rails the screwed joints shown on Sheet 4 may be
6063-T5
1.50 OD x 0.125 Wall
1.500"
0.125"
Handrail Joint/Splice Sleeves
substituted with alternate joints shown on Sheet 3 Detail "K" for Post Type "A" & "B".
WELDING:
Handrails
6061-T6
1" NPS (Sch. 40)
1.900"
0.145"
6061-T6
" Round Bar
0.750"
N/A
Pickets (Type 1 Infill Panel)
6061-T6
" Round Bar
0.750"
N/A
All welding shall be in accordance with the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code (Aluminum) ANSI/AWS D1.2
(current edition). Filler metal shall be either ER5183, ER5356 or ER5556. Nondestructive testing of welds is not required.
Filler metal for plug welds and bend splices may be ER4043.
COATINGS:
Infill Panel Members (Types 2 - 5)
6063-T5
Varies (See Details)
Varies
Varies
The aluminum railing shall be mill finish unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. All nuts, bolts and washers
shall be galvanized in accordance with Specification Section 962.
TABLE 1 NOTES:
SHOP DRAWINGS:
(1) Alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T52 & T6 may be substituted for Alloy 6063-T5.
Details addressing project specific geometry (line & grade) showing post and expansion joint locations, post and panel
(2) 0.188" wall thickness permitted for rails with post spacings less than 5'-9".
type, anchor bolt installation "Case" or lengths, must be submitted by the Contractor for the Engineer's approval prior to
(3) 1" NPS (Sch. 40) non-slit rail sleeves may be substituted when welded
fabrication of the railing. Shop drawings shall be in accordance with the Specifications.
connection Detail "K" is utilized.
"
"
"
PAYMENT:
Payment includes rails, posts, pickets, panels, rail splice assembly, base plates, anchor bolts, nuts, washers, resilient or
"
neoprene pads and all incidental materials and labor required to complete installation of the railing.
See Screw
Slot Detail
"
2"
2"
3" ROUND TOP CAP RAIL
LAST
01/01/16
R
"
1"
R
"
)
p.
Ty
(
)
.
yp
T
(
or Square Corner
"R
"R
)
p.
Ty
(
"
R
2 "
(Typ.)
2"
2"
1"
TOP CAP RAIL INNER
ALTERNATIVE BOTTOM &
SPLICE SLEEVE
INTERMEDIATE RAIL SECTION
ALTERNATE TOP RAIL SECTION
REVISION
" Max. Radius
"
"
1"
"
"
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
42:
59 AM
"R
1
.
09
0"
"
"R
-6
1'
2"
0.
1
(
T 25
yp "
.
)
FOR TYPE 3, 4 & 5 RAILINGS
"R )
p.
Ty
(
POST TYPE "C"
OPTIONAL TOP PLATE
SCREW SLOT SECTION
SCREW SLOT DETAIL
EXTRUSION SECTION (POST TYPE "C")
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ALUMINUM PEDESTRIAN/BICYCLE RAILING
NO.
862
SHEET
NO.
1of 9
48" Special Height

1'-5"
Post Spacing
(Typ.)
5'-8" (Max.) ~ Type "B" or "C" Post

Post
End Hoop
Post
Bicycle Railing (SHBR)
0" Min. ~ 1" Max.
Railing (PBR)
Post
Post
Top Rail
see Detail "B", Sheet 4
(Pickets Shown)
7" (Typ.)
Top of
Intermediate Rail
See Detail "A",
2" Min. ~ 5" Max. (Typ.)
Sheet 4
Foundation
Bottom & Intermediate Rail
Top of Sidewalk
3" Clear Opening
(See Geometry Notes,
Joint *
1'-0"
6" V-Groove or
Expansion
or Bikeway
Ground Line
2'
-7" (
PBR)
Max.
3'
-1" (
SH BR)
9"R
Railing
Post
See Data Table in Plans
Post (Typ.)
Bicycle Railing
5"
Infill Panel Type Varies,
48" Special H eight
Gap
5"
5"
Sheet 1)
Min.Construction
Joint Offset **

Note: Non-continuous corners are permitted
when handrails are not required.
ELEVATION
EXPANDED ELEVATION AT CORNERS
(Showing Outside Face of Railing with Type "A" Posts)
DETAIL FOR NON-CONTINUOUS

RAILING AT CORNERS

NOTES:
Post
Horizontal handrail
Handrail ~ 1 " NPS Sch. 40
Post Spacing
(Typ.)
(SHBR)
for post, rail & picket or
(PBR)
infill panel details
1'-6"
Min.
Post
M ax.
2'
-6"
Bottom Landing

5'-0" Min.
5'-0" Min.
Top Landing
RAMP REQUIREMENTS
Ramp
ELEVATION
11:
43:
02 AM
Top of
Sidewalk
Ramp
6'-0" Min.
M ax.
3"
e
d
a
Gr
2'
-6"
3"
2'
-10"
5"
(Typ.)
2'
-10"
Railing
of railing
termination limits
Bicycle Railing
termination limits
Min.
continuation or
48" Special H eight
continuation or
5"
extension at landing
Post
of railing
1'-6"
continuous at landings between runs)
do not require a 6" minimum offset.
See Plans for
See Plans for
Handrail required for ramps (Handrail
** Contraction joints (Tooled or Saw Cut) in sidewalks

(Showing Inside Face of Railing with Type "A" Posts)
12/17/2015
RAILINGS ON GRADES STEEPER THAN 5%
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
862
SHEET
NO.
2 of 9
7'-3" (Max.) ~ Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing
Post
Leveling Channel
(Typ.) See Detail,
Post
Sheet 4
5'-0" Max. on Steps

Post
Post
1'-6" Min. Handrail
Equal to one
Extension
tread length
1
8
Seal
Weld
1" NPS (Sch. 40) permitted
Top Rail

3'
-6"
6"
)
.
yp
(T
& picket details
" Top
Cap
Rail Cap
corners "
Post
(shown dotted)
Cut rail sleeve to match inside
J
1"
VIEW J-J
Splice when rail continues on
)
p.
Ty
(
Post
(Typ.)
2'
-10"
3'
-6"
Rail Termination (End Cap) or
3"
Round over
Bottom
face of post or weld rail
Rail (Typ.)
directly to post
TOP RAIL TERMINATION
BOTTOM RAIL CONNECTION

(Intermediate Rail Similar)
Post
8"
)
.
yp
(T
DETAIL "K" - ELEVATION VIEW

R
DETAIL "J" - ELEVATION VIEW
5"
1'-6"
0" Min.
Min.
1" Max.
RAIL TERMINATION DETAILS

See Index No. 521
for Step Details
3'
-6"
Concrete sidewalk to extend 6" min. behind railing
2'
-10"
or Contract Plans
Aluminum Handrail required for three
RAILING CONTINUATION BEYOND STEPS OR STAIRS
1'-0"
or more steps (Handrail and cheekwalls
3"
Handrails ~ 112" NPS (Sch. 40) pipe

Equal to one
"
Post
tread length
1 "
At Landing
2'
-10"
Handrail Continuous
& picket details
R 6"
(Typ.)
DETAIL "L" - PLAN VIEW

Top Landing
5'-0" Max. on Steps
2'
-10"
Handrail termination
3'
-6"
3
16
1'-6"
(Typ.) See Detail "L"
Top Rail termination

Rail Termination (End Cap)
3"
1'-6" Min. Handrail
See Index No. 521

or Contract Plans
Extension
Equal to one
tread width
3"
for Step Details
ELEVATION
2"
1'
-6"
5' -0" Min.

Length Of Landing
2'
-10"
Handrail
cheekwall
Bottom Rail
termination,
1'
-6"
+
both sides
2'
-10"
3'
-6"
"
9
.)
yp
(T
9" (Min.) Wide cheekwall
11:
43:
03 AM
R 6"
(Typ.)
1'-6" Min.
Bottom of
2'
-10"
Equal to one
tread length
5"
See Detail "L"
6'
Extension
Min.
see Detail "J"
see Detail "K"
Elevated Stairs similar)
1'-0"
Min.
9" Min. Wall Thickness
Not considered an
6'-0"
12/17/2015
2"
(At-Grade Steps shown,
Bottom Landing
expansion joint
1'-0"
for railing fabrication (Typ.)
Min.
ALTERNATE HANDRAIL END TREATMENT OR

MOUNTING LOCATION FOR SLOPED WALLS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
RAILINGS ON STEPS & STAIRS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
862
SHEET
NO.
3 of 9
8"
Top Rail
3
4"
& Post
3
4"
5"
4~Bolt Anchorage
Optional Top Rail
(
Vertical Typ.
)
shape shown dashed

3
4"
1
" Hole
"
Leveling Channel
3"
1
4"
1"
2" x 2" x
Level
wall
1" Max.
1"
1 "
" Bar
1"
1"
Base Plate B
Cope to
& Anchor Bolt
clear welds
SECTION B-B
TOP VIEW
SIDE VIEW
7 "
of Post (Typ.)
Mitered Section
(Typ. All Rails)
1"
Handrail
2" (Typ.)
Intermediate Rail
Bottom Rail
Flatten end of
End Hoop to 1"
Max. width
D
Stiffener
Set Screw *
(Typ.)
Stairs shown,
for Type "B" Post
Intermediate Rail
3'
-6"
B
C
1
4"
LEVELING CHANNEL DETAIL
9"
R
2'
-10"
of Base Plate
Hole
R 1"
Top Rail
3" (
Typ.
)
SHIM PLATE DETAIL

Match slope
Post
maintain plumb posts) (Typ.)
2 " (
Typ.
)
DETAIL
Handrail
Type "A" Post
Front & Back
& Bar
1"
Type "B" Post
PLATE WASHER
Handrail
2 "
of post as required to
1
2"
" Min. (Beveled)
(Top Rail Connection)
Post
Post
(centered)
" Steel (Flat)
SECTION A-A
Post (Bevel bottom & top

5"
" Plate
3"
Post
3"
1"
1
2"
3"
Single Bolt Anchorage
3
4"
1'-5"
Top Rail
Base Plate &

Anchor Bolt Hole
1
4"
Rail Sleeve
Post
Post to
Post "B" (shown dotted
Base
- outside face)
(Front
" Base
Plate
" Holes for
1
8"
7
8"
7
8"
NOTES:
6"
Base Plate
Post &
Bolt Hole
1
8"
Base Plate A (Ramps - Bolts normal) use 1" Holes for
114"
Single Anchor Bolts with Flat Washers for slopes 8.33%.

Base Plate B (Stairs - Bolts plumb) use 1" Holes for
1
Leveling Channel
Post
5
8"
7
8"
Optional 4~Bolt
" Bolts (Typ.)
Neoprene Pad
Post "B" (shown dotted)
Single Anchor Bolts with Beveled Plate and Washers for
BASE PLATE A
SECTION D-D
shown dashed
9"
" Holes for

Anchor Bolt
5
8"
(see Detail)
Anchorage:
8"
7
8"
with Leveling Channel for slopes > 15%.
* " x " Pan Head Aluminum (Alloy 2024-T4 or 7075-T73)
3
4" R
Base Plate
Post
Anchorage:
Resilient or
(Pickets/Panels and 4~Bolt Anchorage Not Shown for Clarity)
slopes > 8.33% to 15%; use " x 1" Slotted Holes
Optional 4~Bolt
" Thick
(Showing Inside Face of Railing)
Stiffener for
1'
-0"
Bottom
1
4"
3"
Bottom Rail
5
8"
6"
Bolt Hole
Post
DETAIL "A" - RAIL CONNECTIONS
3"
3
4"
214" 214"
Post &
Base
3"
Post & Anchor Bolt
3"
(Sides)
(Intermediate Rail Connection)
Base Plate B ~ for slope > 8.33%
Anchor Bolt Hole

Post to
& Back)
Base Plate A ~ for slopes 8.33%
Base Plate &
3
4"
SECTION C-C
Rail Sleeve
Stiffener for
6"
Intermediate
similar
(
Typ.
)
"
Steep Ramp
or Stainless Steel (Type 316 or 18-8 Alloy) Set Screws.

Screws must be set flush against the outside face of rails
" Bolts (Typ.)
1
4"
BASE PLATE B
& posts and underside of handrails. A single tack weld
(" max. length) at top of the sleeve for each post may
be substituted for the Set Screws. Do not provide Set
SECTION G-G - BASE PLATE DETAILS
Screws for Rails at free end of Expansion Joints.
(Bottom Rail Connection Single Anchor Bolt Shown)

6" **
POST "B" STIFFENER

6"
Posts
2" 1"
" ( ") ~ Expansion Joint

" ( ") ~ Field Splice Slip Joint
DETAIL
Top & Handrails
1'-1"
" (") ~ Expansion Joint
1" Hole (Bottom Rail Single
Aluminum Sleeve through
1" holes in posts.
" (") ~ Field Splice Joint
Anchor Bolt Option)
2"
Pickets (Typ.)
Set Screws *
Rail or Handrail
" Slit (Bottom Side Only)
Intermediate or
Intermediate or
Bottom Rail
Aluminum Sleeve:
Bottom Rail
1.50 OD x 0.125 Wall

for Intermediate and
Round over
Rail or Handrail
both ends
Section
Posts
of rails " (Typ.)
Aluminum Sleeve
Set Screws *
3"
(Typ.)
1" Hole
(Top Rail at Expansion Joint Shown)
(Bottom Rail Shown at Expansion Joint Shown)
LAST
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DETAIL "B" - EXPANSION JOINT (FIELD SPLICE SLIP JOINT SIMILAR)
REVISION
(Bottom Rail Option)

12/17/2015
11:
43:
04 AM
Bottom Rails (See Optional

" R Cope Permitted
VIEW F-F
INTERMEDIATE OR BOTTOM RAIL ALUMINUM SLEEVE DETAIL (Bottom Side Shown)
CROSS REFERENCE:
For location of Details "B", See Sheet 2.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
Detail "K" on Sheet 3)
NO.
862
SHEET
NO.
4 of 9
Screw Slots
Base Plate &
Base Plate &
Anchor Bolt Hole
3"
Bolt Hole
6"
3"
1"
Post &
Post Type "C"

(Typ.)
1"
1"
3"
Base Plate
6"
Bolt Hole
Anchor Bolt Hole

"
3"
1"
Post &
See Detail "H"
Base Plate
" Base
Post
Plate
3
8"
5
8"
5
8"
Post
3
8"
5
8"
7
8"
7
8"
5
8"
Base Plate A~"
"
2"
2"
"
Base Plate B~1"
8"
"
1"
9"
Base Plate A
Base Plate B
BASE PLATE A
(Min. " deep, " Max.)
9"
BASE PLATE B
Countersunk holes for

Self-Tapping Screws
8"
SECTION H-H
(Screws Not Shown for Clarity)
BASE PLATE DETAILS FOR TYPE "C" POST
Countersunk Holes
Post & Rail
Countersunk Holes
for " x 1" Self-
Top Rail
1 - 3
Optional Intermittent
1 - 3
weld in-lieu of SelfTapping screws
for " x 1" Min.
Tapping Screws (Typ.)
I-1
I-2
between posts.
Top Rail
Set Screws (Typ.)
Countersunk Holes
Tapping Screws (Typ.)
1" 1"
1"
1"
1"
2"
" M in.
" "
" Countersink
2 "
1"
" "
1"
for " x 1" Self-
Top Plate
1"
Post &
" R Corners
(Typ.)
Top Plate
Countersunk Holes
for " Self-Tapping
Screws (Typ.)
Post Type "C"
1" 1"
(Typ.)
I-1
I-2
7"
PLAN
SECTION "I-1"
SECTION "I-2"
VIEW "I"
TOP PLATE DETAILS FOR TYPE "C" POST

(Screws Not Shown For Clarity)
11:
43:
05 AM
See Sheet 4 for Notes.

Length varies for beveled posts on grades. Holes must be
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
drilled plumb to align with screw slot.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
862
SHEET
NO.
5 of 9
6" O.C. (Max.)
Picket Spacing *
" Max.
Intermediate Rail
(Typ.)
Picket

3
4"
10
Picket
10
3
4"
(
Typ.
)
4"
(Shown dashed)
Post
DETAIL "1A"
(Top of Picket Connection)
See Detail "1A"

Optional Welded
Optional Welded
Connection at end picket
Post & Anchor Bolt
3'
-1" ~ (
SH BR)
Connection at end picket
2'
-7" ~ (
PBR)
Post
Bottom Rail

End Permitted
(Shown dashed)
Base Plate
" Thick Resilient

or Neoprene Pad
See Detail "1B"
3" Nominal Opening
Anchor Bolt
2" min. ~ 5" max. (Typ.)
2" min. ~ 5" max. (Typ.)
DETAIL "1B"
SECTION A-A
(Bottom of Picket Connection)

TYPE 1 - PICKET INFILL PANEL
PICKET NOTES:
* Picket Spacing of 6" centers is based on a " Bar for standard applications.
When shown in the Contract Plans a 4" picket spacing may be required. If an
alternate design is used, maintain a maximum clear opening of 5" for
standard installations and 3" for special conditions.
Chain-Link Fence
Ties @ 1'-0" center
Fabric tied to
(Post and End Rail)
inside face of
3
4"
10
10
3
4"
railing
TABLE 2 - CHAIN-LINK PANEL COMPONENT MATERIALS

COMPONENT
Chain-Link Fence
ASTM
Zinc-Coated Steel - No. 9 gage (coated
A 392
Fabric (2" mesh with

twisted bottom and
3'
-1" (
SH BR)
1
PBR)
4" (
2'
-7
wire with knuckled top and twisted bottom selvage)
wire diameter), Class 2 Coating

Aluminum-Coated Steel - No. 9 gage
A 491
knuckled top selvage)
Chain-Link Fence Fabric (2" Mesh x No. 9 Gage
(coated wire diameter)

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Steel - No.
9 gage Zinc-Coated Wire (metallic-coated
F 668
core wire diameter) ~ See Plans for

specified color of PVC.
Tie Wires
F 626
Tension Bars
F 626
Zinc-Coated Steel Wire - No. 9 gage with

coating to match Chain-Link Fence Fabric.
3
16"
(min. thickness) x
3
4"
(min. width)
x 2'-3' (min. height) Steel Bars

Miscellaneous Fence
Components
F 626
Zinc-Coated Steel
Ties @ 2'-0" center (Intermediate & Bottom Rail)
SECTION A-A
CHAIN-LINK PANEL NOTE:

Chain-Link Fence Fabric shall be continuous along limits of railing.
11:
43:
05 AM
Splicing of Chain-Link panels using Tension Bars at 20'-0" minimum

increments is permitted.
TYPE 2 - CHAIN-LINK (Continuous Infill Panel)

NOTES:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
1. See Plans for Infill Panel option required.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
862
SHEET
NO.
6 of 9
Panel
"
#10x" Pan
Head Screws
Channel xx
(18-8 SS) @
(Border)*
2'-0" sp.
"
10 "
10 "
Rail
Channel 1x1x (Arc)*
Joint
" Square Bar (Rays)*
Bar (Rays)
Rail Expansion
5"
(
PBR)
(
SH BR)
" Square
"x" Filler
Strips*
Channel xx*
"
See Detail "3A"
Front & Back
(Typ.)
" Square
4'
-3" R
3'
-1"
2'
-7"
5"
)
p.
Ty
(
Face Top of
#10x" Pan
all Rays
Bar (Rays)
Head Screws
(18-8 SS) @
See Detail "3C"
2'-0" sp.
DETAIL "3A"
DETAIL "3B"
INTERMEDIATE RAIL/RAY
BOTTOM RAIL/RAY CONNECTION
CONNECTION
"x" Punched
Bar (Rays)
Holes @ 5" sp.
Bar (Rays)
Channel 1x1x
See Detail "3B"
(Arc)*
Seal Weld mitered
Channel 1x1x
SECTION A-A
corners at Rail
Rays
Notch Arc
(Arc)*
"
Expansion Joints
" Square
1'-614"
Bar (Rays)
Similar
Expansion Joint
Opening
"x" Punched
3 ~ #10x" Pan
Holes @ 5" sp.
TYPE 3 - SUNSHINE INFILL PANEL
at Side Channel
M ax.
"R
-3
1'
Radial Center
" (Sun Segment)*
" Square
" Square
Head Screws
Post
Post
(18-8 SS) @
1'-0" sp.
* Arc, Rays and Sun Segment may be formed in a single panel from
DETAIL "3D"
DETAIL "3E"
ARC/POST CONNECTION
(Continuous Top Rail)
AT POST WITH EXPANSION JOINT
Channel 1x1x
Channel Border shown.
(Arc)*
DETAIL "3C"
Panel Mullion
" Infill
RAY/ARC CONNECTION
"
Panel
"
1" (
SH BR)
1" (
PBR)
Panel H eight
(
Typ.
)
" plate (ASTM B209 Alloy 6061-T6 or T651) pattern cut with laser or
plasma CNC, welded to a 1x1x Angle Border or the xx
" Infill Panel
#10x" Pan
of Rail
Head Screws
Channel xx
"
"
(18-8 SS) @
(Cut or Cast)
5
2
Inside Face
Channel xx
See Detail "4A"
2'-0" sp.
1"
"
"x" Filler
" Infill Panel
Gap Varies
4" Max.
" Infill Panel
"
2" (PBR)
1" (PBR)
3" (SHBR)
1" (SHBR)
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
1" (
PBR)
"
1'-2" (PBR)
Panel Width
1'-5" (SHBR)
(Typ.)
SECTION A-A
Lengthen border and

trim top & bottom of
TYPE 4 - BROADWAY INFILL PANEL
panels to match grade.
1" M in. (
Ram p)
8" R (PBR)
10" R (SHBR)
9" M ax. (
Stairs)
1" M in. (
Ram p)
)
R )
B
R
(P B
R SH
(
"
-8 R
'
2 4"
'
3
"
1" (
SH BR)
DETAIL "4A"
End Panel 1"
M in.
6 "
1'
-0 "
8 "
Strip
SECTION C-C
1"
11
16"
11:
43:
06 AM
1"
2'
-0" (
PBR)
2'
-6" (
SH BR)
3
8"
6 "
(Typ.)
3 ~ #10x"
Gap Varies
Pan Head Screws
4" Max.
(18-8 SS) @ 1'-0" sp.

"x" Filler
Strip
" Infill
Panel
12/17/2015
Post
NOTES:
PANEL ADJUSTMENT FOR RAILINGS

ON GRADES
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
1. See Plans for Infill Panel Option required.
SECTION B-B
PANEL END CAP
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
862
SHEET
NO.
7 of 9
of Post
Inside Face
#10x" Pan
of Rail
Channel xx
Channel xx
Perforated Panel
(18-8 SS) @
Expansion
2'-0" sp.
Joint
"x" Filler
(Typ.)
Strip
Perforated Panel
1'-0" sp.
"
Channel xx
"x" Filler
(Typ.)
Strip
Perforated Panel
Perforated Panel
(0.04" Min.)
DETAIL "5A"
DETAIL "5B"
(Expansion Joint Shown, Sides Similar)
See Detail "5A"
2'
-6" (
Panel H eight)
(18-8 SS) @
Panel Mullion
(0.04" Min.)
(0.04" Min.)
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
2'
-0" (
Panel H eight)
Head Screws
Opening
"
(0.04" Min.)
#10x" Pan
Head Screws
Panel Mullion
Perforated Panel
"
(0.04" Min.)
(Panel Width)
"
3'-0" Max.
(Panel Width)
"
"
3'-0" Max.
(
Typ.
)
Inside Face
SECTION A-A
"x" Filler
Strip (Typ.)
corners is permitted
"
"
1"
REPEATING PATTERN DETAIL
SECTION C-C
FOR PEFORATED PANEL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
11:
43:
07 AM
TYPE 5 - PERFORATED INFILL PANEL
"
Seal welding mitered
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
862
SHEET
NO.
8 of 9
1
2"
See Section A-A
5'-0" Std. ~
Sheet 4
3'-0" Min. Clear
3"
Bolts & Post
Between Handrails
Optional
4~Bolt
Anchorage
y
wa
a
.(
x
% Ma
e2
p
o
Sl
)
f
f
o
p
o
r
m d
o
r
f
(shown
See Detail "C"

(Typ.)
4" (Case IIa)

4 " (Case IIb)
Sl
o
p
e2
% Ma
x
.(
a
wa
y
f
r
o
m d
r
o
p
o
f
f
)
45
step nosing
5" Min.
5" Min.
Anchorage (shown
dashed)
Varies
Min. #4 Bar (Typ.)
(Continuous)
Reinforced
Concrete Structure
9"
Varies
Optional 4~Bolt
Step Cheekwall
Drop-off (
Varies)
1'
-0"
dashed)
Top of
2'
-10"
Bolts & Post
1 " NPS (Sch. 40) Handrail
6"
Thickened Edge
4" Sidewalk with
2'
-10" (
Typ.
) **
Bolts & Post
Post
TYPICAL SECTION ON STEPS & STAIRS
TYPICAL SECTION FOR 4~BOLT ANCHORAGE
(Case III)
(Case IV)

8"
Min. Width at
Top of Wall
TYPICAL SECTION ON RETAINING WALL
(Case I)
(Case II)
1 ~
" C-I-P Hex Head Anchor Bolts,
or 1 ~
Post & Anchor Bolts
" Headless Anchor Bolts set with an Adhesive

Bonding Material System in accordance with
Post
Specification Sections 416 and 937. Self-Locking
ANCHOR BOLT TABLE
Bottom Rail
Hex Nut & Washer.
Place Anchor Bolts perpendicular to Base for
CASE
or leveling channel.
Base Plate
or Neoprene Pad
IIa
when required for

height adjustment
bed of Adhesive
"
C"
"B"
"C"
C.I.P Hex
Reinforced Concrete
ANCHOR
Adhesive SIZE
Anchor
6"
1'-2"
9"
10 "
11"
"
4"
4"
9"
10 "
11"
"
1'-0" *
1'-1 "
1'-2"
"
Minimum 2 ~ #4 Bars in Top of

Structure for Case IIa, III & IV
IIb
Gravity Wall
Index No. 6011
4 "
3 "
@ top
Minimum #4 Bars @ 1'-0"

(Max.) spacing for Case IIa
"A"
"B"
(Min.)
(Min.)
Inside Face of Concrete
III
Step Cheekwall
4 "
4 "
9"
10 "
11"
"
IV
Varies
5"
5"
5"
6"
7"
"
Structure or Sidewalk
" Thick Resilient
(See Concrete Structure

Plans for actual dimensions
or Neoprene Pad
Bonding Material
* Embedment length "C" may be reduced to 9" for the 42" height
railings for Case IIb, when the post spacing does not exceed 5'-0".
and reinforcing details)

** When required; measured from top of sidewalk (Typ.)
DETAIL "C"
(Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts shown,
Adhesive Anchors similar)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DETAIL "D" (OPTIONAL SHIMMING DETAIL
12/17/2015
11:
43:
09 AM
1" (Min.) wide
M in. Em bedm ent
Base Plate
Unreinforced
Concrete
" Thick Resilient
2"
as Reqd.)
"A"
Edge Dist. Edge Dist. Embedment Head Bolt
Shim Plates as required
x " wide x thickness
TYPE
(shown dashed)
(Stairs) with flat washer & beveled washer,
ANCHOR LENGTH
STRUCTURE
Optional 4~Bolt Anchorage
Place anchor bolts plumb for grades > 8.33
Edge Shim (8" long
DIMENSIONS
Washers or Leveling Channel
Grades 8.33% (Ramps) with flat washer.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
862
SHEET
NO.
9 of 9
NOTES
PIPE RAILING & POSTS:
Structural Tube, Pipe and Bar shall be in accordance with ASTM B221 or ASTM B429, Alloy 6061-T6.
End Rail 90 bends and corner bends with maximum 4'-0" post spacing, may be Alloy 6063-T6. Posts
and End Rails shall be fabricated and installed plumb, 1" tolerance when measured at 3'-6" above
the foundation. Corners and changes in tangential longitudinal alignment, may be made continuous with
a 9" bend radius or terminated at adjoining sections with a standard end hoop when handrails are not
required. For changes in tangential longitudinal alignment greater than 45, posts shall be positioned at
a maximum distance of 2'-0" each side of the corner and shall not be located at the corner apex.
For curved longitudinal alignments the top and bottom rails and handrails shall be shop bent to match
the alignment radius.
RAILING MEMBER DIMENSIONS TABLE

OUTSIDE
WALL
DIMENSION
THICKNESS
2" NPS (Sch. 40)
2.375"
0.154"
2" NPS (Sch. 40)
2.375"
0.154"
1" NPS (Sch. 40)
1.900"
0.145"
1" NPS (Sch. 40)
1.315"
0.133"
1.50 ODx0.125 Wall
1.500"
0.125"
Handrails
1" NPS (Sch. 40)
1.900"
0.145"
1" Round Bar
1.000"
N/A
MEMBER
DESIGNATION
Posts
Rails
Rail Joint/Splice Sleeves
Handrails Joint/Splice Sleeves
BASE PLATES:
Base Plates shall be in accordance with ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6.
SHIM PLATES:
Shim Plates shall be aluminum in accordance with ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 or 6063. Shim plates shall be
used for foundation height adjustments greater than
greater than
1
8"
1
4"
between 3 posts and localized irregularities
beneath base plates. Field trim shim plates when necessary to match the contours of
the foundation. Bevelled shim plates may be used in lieu of trimmed flat shim plates shown. Stacked
shim plates must be bonded together with adhesive bonding material and limited to a maximum total
thickness of
1
2",
unless longer anchor bolts are provided for the exposed thread length.
COATINGS:
The aluminum railing shall be mill finish unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. All nuts,
bolts and washers shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with Section 962 of the Specifications.
ANCHOR BOLTS:
Anchor bolts shall be in accordance with ASTM F1554 Grade 36. Headless anchor bolts for Adhesive
Anchors shall be threaded full length. Cutting of reinforcing steel is permitted for drilled hole installation.
All anchor bolts shall have single self-locking hex nuts. Tack welding of the nut to the anchor bolt may
be used in lieu of self-locking nuts. All nuts shall be in accordance with ASTM A563 or ASTM A194. Flat
Washers shall be in accordance with ASTM F436 and Plate Washers (for long slotted holes only), shall be
in accordance with ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36. After the nuts have been snug tightened, the
anchor bolt threads shall be distorted to prevent removal of the nuts. Distorted threads and tack welds
shall be coated with a galvanizing compound in accordance with the Specifications.
Resilient and Neoprene pads shall be in accordance with Specification Section 932, except that testing
of the finished pads shall not be required. Neoprene pads shall be durometer hardness 60 or 70.
JOINTS:
All fixed joints are to be welded all around and ground smooth. Expansion Joints shall be spaced at
a maximum of 30'-0". Field splices similar to the expansion joint detail may be approved by the
Engineer to facilitate shipping and handling, but rails must be continuous across a minimum of two
posts. Only use the Continuity Field Splice (Detail "E") to make the railing continuous for unforeseen
field adjustments.
WELDING:
All welding shall be in accordance with the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code (Aluminum)
ANSI/AWS D1.2 (current edition). Filler metal shall be either ER5183, ER5356 or ER5556. Nondestructive
testing of welds is not required.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
locations must be submitted by the Contractor for the Engineer's approval prior to fabrication of the
11:
42:
10 AM
railing. Shop drawings shall be in accordance with the Specifications.

PAYMENT:
Guiderail shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Pipe Guiderail (Aluminum), LF (Item No.
515-1-2). Payment for the Guiderail will be plan quantity measured as the length along the center
line of the top rail, and includes rails, posts, rail splice assembly, base plates, anchor bolts, nuts,
washers, resilient or neoprene pads and all incidental materials and labor required to complete
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
installation of the Guiderail.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ALUMINUM PIPE GUIDERAIL
NO.
870
SHEET
NO.
1of 5
6'-0" (Max.) ~ Equal Panels
1'-6"
Post
Post Spacing
(Typ.)
Varies (4" Min.,
(Typ.)
Continuity Field Splice
1'-6" Max.) (Typ.)
Post
(as required) see Detail "E"

1'-6"
Post
Rail ~ 2" NPS
Sch. 40 (Typ.)
Sheet 4 (Typ.)
(Typ.)
see Detail "D" Sheet 4
NOTES:
See Detail "C"
NPS = Nominal Pipe Size
3'
-6"
Sheet 4
STRUCTURES EXPANSION JOINTS NOTE:
Top of Sidewalk
or Bikeway
9"

CROSS REFERENCE:
Ground Line
For Details "C", "D" and "E", see Sheet 4.
ELEVATION

Post
1'-6"
Min.
See Plans for

continuation or
1'-6"
(Typ.)
Post Spacing
(Typ.)
See Plans for

Post
continuation
or termination
termination limits
Handrail
Handrail ~ 1" NPS
for post & rail details
Sch. 40 (Typ.)
of railing
Post
1'-6"
Min.
limits of railing
2'
-10"
Handrail
Top of

6'-0" Min.
Bottom Landing
Ramp
M ax.
2'
-6"
M ax.
e
d
a
Gr
2'
-6"
2'
-10"
3'
-6"
Sidewalk

5'-0" Min.
Ramp
Top Landing
5'-0" Min.
RAMP REQUIREMENTS
ELEVATION
11:
42:
17 AM
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
RAILINGS ON GRADES STEEPER THAN 5% TO 8.33%
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
870
SHEET
NO.
2 of 5
Post
Post
Post
2
"
6'-0" Max. on Steps
Post
Equal to one
3'
-6"
tread length
1"
CJP
Handrail
DETAIL "A" - PLAN VIEW

3'
-6"
Post
Handrail
See "Typical Railing
1'-6"
1'-6"
Min.
(Typ.)
Details", Sheet 2 for
2"
post & rail details
2'
-10"
or Contract Plans
for Step Details
Sheet 2 for post & rail details
9"
Min.
3'
-6"
2"
RAILING CONTINUATION BEYOND STEPS

3'
-6"
See Index No. 521
Equal to one
tread length
Handrail Continuous
At Landing
Handrail
Handrail
Top Landing
2" Min.
(Typ.)
Aluminum Handrail required

for three or more steps

6'-0" Max. on Steps
(Handrail and cheekwalls

9" Min. Wide
Handrail ~ 1" NPS (Sch. 40)
cheekwall both sides
Handrail Termination
2"
2'
-10"
3'
-6"
See Index No. 521

or Contract Plans
See Detail "A" (Typ.)
for Step Details
Handrail
1'-6"
Min.
2"
tread length
2'
-10"
Handrail
Bottom of
Equal to one
cheekwall
tread width
2" Min.
(Typ.)
2"
2"

2'
-10"
See Index No. 521
2'
-10"
3'
-6"
R
(T
9
y
p "
.)
Length of Landing
9" Min. Wide
1'
-6"
5'-0" Min.
2'
-10"
"
9 )
.
R
yp
(T
6'
Equal to one
or Contract Plans
ELEVATION
(At-Grade Steps)
11:
42:
18 AM
2"
for Step Details
2"
9"
Min.
6'-0"
Bottom Landing
9"
ALTERNATE END TREATMENT
12/3/2015
Min.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
GUIDERAIL ON STEPS & STAIRS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
870
SHEET
NO.
3 of 5
9
16"
" (Max.) Holes for
7
16"
" Anchorage Bolts with
Guiderail &
3
4"
Bolt Holes
Bolt Holes
Guiderail
1
2"
R 1
1
4
1
4"
3
4"
3
4"
Post
1
4"
3
4"
1
4
Post
1
4"
3
4"
3
4"
1
4"
CJP
CJP
"
9
.)
p
y
(T
1
4
1
2"
3"
Handrail
6"
Post
6"
3"
& Rod
Top Rail ~ 2"

NPS, Sch. 40
" Base Plate
" Base Plate
1
1
4" 2 4"
Handrail
1
2"
Post
Flat Washers (Typ.)
Flat Washers (Typ.)

1
1'-6"
7
16"
Holes (Max.) for
Anchorage Bolts with
Post ~ 2"
SECTION B-B
8"
SECTION C-C
BASE PLATE DETAIL
(2~Bolt Anchorage)
SECTION C-C
BASE PLATE DETAIL
(4~Bolt Anchorage)
4"
Bottom Rail ~
Guiderail &
2" NPS, Sch. 40
3"
3
4"
1
2"
Plate
Post
Bolt Holes
6"
1"
3"
1
2"
6"
" Base
3"
" Hole
Plate
2"
(centered)
1
2"
3
4"
1
2"
CJP
1
4
1
2"
1
8"
CJP
1
4"
1
8"
1
8"
3
8"
3
8"
1
8"
" x 1" Long Slotted
Holes for Anchor Bolts

" Steel
11"
Plate
with Plate Washers (Typ.)

or " (Max.) Holes
for Anchor Bolts with
Flat Washers (Typ.)
SHIM PLATE DETAIL

(2~Bolt Anchorage)
SHIM PLATE DETAIL

(4~Bolt Anchorage)
ALTERNATE BASE
PLATE DETAIL
(Recommended for Steep Slopes)
PLATE WASHER
DETAIL
Bevel bottom of post as required

to maintain plumb posts (Typ.)
DETAIL "C" - RAIL CONNECTIONS

(Handrail and 4~Bolt Anchorage Not Shown)
1'-0"
1
4"
3
4"
6"*
Pan Head
6"
Aluminum (Alloy 2024-T4 or

3"
7075-T73) or Stainless Steel
1
2"
3"
1
4"
(Type 316 or 18-8 Alloy) Set
1
4")
1
4")
~ Expansion Joint
~ Field Splice Slip Joint
Screw. Set Screw must be

set flush against outside face
Rail or Handrail Section
Top Rail
of rail (Typ.)
B
Aluminum Sleeve:
1
2"
Match Grade of
NPS (Sch. 40) for Rails
Ramp or Stairs
1" NPS (Sch. 40) for Handrails
Rail or
Post
Round over both ends
Handrail Section
of rails
1
8"
(Typ.)
* At the Contractor's option, embedded length may
be 4" when a
DETAIL "D" - EXPANSION JOINT

(FIELD SPLICE SLIP JOINT SIMILAR)
the
1
4"
3
4"
plug weld is substituted for
set screw.
Bottom Rail
Handrail
1'-8"
1
4"
3
4"
Pan Head
1
4"
Aluminum (Alloy 2024-74 or

7075-T73) or Stainless Steel
(Type 316 or 18-8 Alloy) Set
Match Grade of
Max. Gap
Ramp or Stairs
1
8"
1
2"
3 Sp. @ 2
1
4"
3 Sp. @ 2
1
2"
1
8"
Screws. Set Screws must

1
penetrate the full wall thickness
1
4"
Rail or Handrail
against outside face of rail (Typ.)
Section
11:
42:
19 AM
of the inner sleeve and set flush
Aluminum Sleeve:
Section
of rails
12/3/2015
Rail
1
8"
(Typ.)
1
1 2"
CROSS REFERENCE:
LAST
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DETAIL "E" - CONTINUITY

FIELD SPLICE
REVISION
DETAIL "B" - RAIL AND HANDRAIL

(Showing Sloped Condition for Ramps with 2~Bolt Anchorage)
For locations of Details "C", "D" and "E", see Sheet 2.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
870
SHEET
NO.
4 of 5
or Neoprene Pads
3
4"
1
4"
1
Typ.
) Resilient
8" (
4"
3
4"
NPS, Sch. 40
8"
1" Bar
Guiderail &
Between Handrails
Anchor Bolts
1'
-9"
5'-0" Std. ~ 3'-0" Min. Clear
Guiderail & Anchor Bolts

1
2"
3'
-6"
Optional 4~Bolt
1'
-9"
4" Sidewalk with

Thickened Edge
or Neoprene Pad (Typ,)
1
4 2"
0" Standard
Varies
2"
(
M in.
)
Step Nosing
Optional 4~Bolt
Anchorage
(Shown Dashed)
** Steel Anchors
3"
Back Face of
6"
6"
** 2~Bolt
Top of
Sidewalk
Gravity Wall
8"
4~BOLT ANCHORAGE DETAIL
Step Cheekwall
9"
** Steel Anchors

Edge Shim
Sl
o
p
e2
% Ma
x
.(
a
wa
y
f
r
o
m d
r
o
p
o
f
f
)
Steel Anchorage
Drop-off (
Varies)
1'
-0"
** 2 or 4~ Bolt
45
Steel Anchorage
6"
y
wa
a
.(
x
% Ma
e2
p
o
Sl
)
f
f
o
p
o
r
m d
o
r
f
(
M in.
)
2"
2" for Ramps
Nosing or
4"
requiring handrails
Thick Resilient
9"
Width of Structure at
(Min.)
6" Embedment Depth
TYPICAL SECTION ON
STEPS & STAIRS
TYPICAL SECTION ON GRAVITY WALL

(Other Retaining Walls Similar)
2 ~ " Anchor Bolts (**) with
(8" long x
Post
Self-Locking Hex Nuts & Washers.
" wide x
(
M in.
)
1
8"
2"
Top of Step
for Ramps
2"
1
2"
(
M in.
)
2'
-10"
(Shown Dashed)
1" Bar
plates (as required) (Typ.)

6" Standard,
3'
-6"
Anchorage
Base Plate with Shim
Guiderail
Post
thickness
6"
1
8"
6"
as reqd.)
1
8"
Min. Beveled
Build-up (Typ.)
(Min.)
Min. Beveled
Build-up (Typ.)
Epoxy Mortar (Type F) in
(Min.)
Epoxy Mortar (Type A, B or F) in

accordance with Specification
Section 926

Section 926
4"
3" Core Drilled

Hole ("), clean
3" Min. Embedment
3" Core Drilled
with Specification
Hole ("), clean

when required for
with Specification
height adjustment
Section 416
Section 416
Seal base of hole (Option 2 & 3)

and end of post (Option 2) prior to
1
2"
6"
hole in accordance
1
2"
hole in accordance
(
M in.
)
Base Plate
epoxy filling to prevent leakage

(Min.) wide
bed of Adhesive
1
8"
Thick Resilient
Seal end of post with a
or Neoprene Pad
plastic or aluminum plug
Bonding Material
6" foundation embedment

permitted (Option 3)
SIDEWALK ANCHORAGE DETAIL

OPTION 1

OPTION 2 & 3
NOTES:
11:
42:
20 AM
DETAIL "F" (OPTIONAL SHIMMING DETAIL

**
2 ~ " x 8" or 4 ~ " x 6" Steel Anchors:

Galvanized Steel Bolts (As Shown) (C-I-P); Galvanized U-Bolts
Permitted (C-I-P); Galvanized Adhesive Anchors Permitted
(***); Expansion Anchors Not Permitted.
*** Adhesive anchors shall be fully threaded headless anchor bolts

set in drilled holes (manufacturer recommended diameter) with
12/3/2015
an Adhesive Bonding Material System in accordance with

Specification Section 937 and installed in accordance with
Specification Section 416. The minimum embedment is 6" for
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
2~Bolt Anchorage or 4" for 4~Bolt Anchorage.

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
870
SHEET
NO.
5 of 5
NOTES
PIPE RAILING & POSTS:
Pipe Rails and Posts shall be in accordance with ASTM A53 Grade B for standard weight pipe and
ASTM A500 Grade B, C or D or ASTM A501 for structural tube. Bars for handrail supports shall be
ASTM A36. Posts and End Rails shall be fabricated and installed plumb, 1" tolerance when measured
at 3'-6" above the foundation. Corners and changes in tangential longitudinal alignment, may be made
continuous with a 9" bend radius or terminated at adjoining sections with a standard end hoop when
handrails are not required. For changes in tangential longitudinal alignment greater than 45, posts
shall be positioned at a maximum distance of 2'-0" each side of the corner and shall not be located
at the corner apex. For curved longitudinal alignments the top and bottom rails and handrails shall be
shop bent to match the alignment radius.
RAILING MEMBER DIMENSIONS TABLE
OUTSIDE
WALL
DIMENSION
THICKNESS
2" NPS (Sch. 40)
2.375"
0.154"
2" NPS (Sch. 40)
2.375"
0.154"
1" NPS (Sch. 40)
1.900"
0.145"
1" NPS (Sch. 40)
1.315"
0.133"
HSS1.500x0.125
1.500"
0.125"
Handrails
1" NPS (Sch. 40)
1.900"
0.145"
1" Round Bar
1.000"
N/A
MEMBER
DESIGNATION
Posts
Rails
Rail Joint/Splice Sleeves
Handrails Joint/Splice Sleeves
BASE PLATES:
Base Plates shall be in accordance with ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36.
SHIM PLATES:
Shim Plates shall be aluminum in accordance with ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 or 6063. Shim plates shall be
used for foundation height adjustments greater than " between 3 posts and localized irregularities greater than "
beneath base plates. Field trim shim plates when necessary to match the contours of the foundation (See Sheet 5 for
additional details). Beveled shim plates may be used in lieu of trimmed flat shim plates shown. Stacked shim plates
must be bonded together with adhesive bonding material and limited to a maximum total thickness of b", unless longer
anchor bolts are provided for the exposed thread length.
COATINGS:
The railing shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with Section 962 of the Specifications.
All nuts, bolts and washers shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with Section 962 of the Specifications.
ANCHOR BOLTS:
Anchor bolts shall be in accordance with ASTM F1554 Grade 36. Headless anchor bolts for Adhesive
Anchors shall be threaded full length. Cutting of reinforcing steel is permitted for drilled hole installation.
All anchor bolts shall have single self-locking hex nuts. Tack welding of the nut to the anchor bolt may
be used in lieu of self-locking nuts. All nuts shall be in accordance with ASTM A563 or ASTM A194. Flat
Washers shall be in accordance with ASTM F436 and Plate Washers (for long slotted holes only), shall be
in accordance with ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36. After the nuts have been snug tightened, distort the
anchor bolt threads or disfigure the top of stud to prevent removal of the nuts. Distorted threads and tack
welds shall be coated with a galvanizing compound in accordance with the Specifications.
Resilient and Neoprene pads shall be in accordance with Specification Section 932, except that testing
of the finished pads shall not be required. Neoprene pads shall be durometer hardness 60 or 70.
JOINTS:
All fixed joints are to be welded all around and plug welds ground smooth. Remove burs and weld splatter,
additionally remove any sharp edges on rails to prevent injury. Expansion Joints shall be spaced at a
maximum of 30'-0". Field splices similar to the expansion joint detail may be approved by the Engineer to
facilitate shipping and handling, but rails must be continuous across a minimum of two posts. Only use the
Continuity Field Splice (Detail "E") to make the railing continuous for unforeseen field adjustments.
WELDING:
All welding shall be in accordance with the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code (Steel)
ANSI/AWS D1.1 (current edition). Weld metal shall be E60XX or E70XX. Nondestructive testing of
welds is not required.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
locations must be submitted by the Contractor for the Engineer's approval prior to fabrication of the
11:
42:
20 AM
railing. Shop drawings shall be in accordance with the Specifications.

PAYMENT:
Guiderail shall be paid for under the contract unit price for Pipe Guiderail (Steel), LF (Item No.
515-1-1). Payment for the Guiderail will be plan quantity measured as the length along the center
line of the top rail, and includes rails, posts, rail splice assembly, base plates, anchor bolts, nuts,
washers, resilient or neoprene pads and all incidental materials and labor required to complete
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
installation of the Guiderail.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL PIPE GUIDERAIL
NO.
880
SHEET
NO.
1of 5
Post
1'-6"
Post
Post
Post Spacing
(Typ.)
Varies (4" Min.,

1'-6" Max.) (Typ.)
(Typ.)
Continuity Field Splice

see Detail "D" Sheet 4
1'-6"
(as required) see Detail "E"
(Typ.)
Sheet 4 (Typ.)
Rail ~ 2" NPS

Sch. 40 (Typ.)
NOTES:
See Detail "C"
NPS = Nominal Pipe Size
3'
-6"
Sheet 4
STRUCTURES EXPANSION JOINTS NOTE:

Top of Sidewalk
or Bikeway
9"

CROSS REFERENCE:
For Details "C", "D" and "E", see Sheet 4.
Ground Line
ELEVATION

Post
Handrail
1'-6"
Post
Min.
Post
See Plans for

continuation or
1'-6"
See Plans for

continuation or
(Typ.)
Post Spacing
(Typ.)
termination
Handrail ~ 1" NPS
for post & rail details
Sch. 40 (Typ.)
termination
limits of railing
limits of railing
1'-6"
2'
-10"
Min.
Top of

6'-0" Min.
Bottom Landing
Ramp
M ax.
2'
-6"
M ax.
e
d
a
Gr
2'
-6"
Handrail
2'
-10"
3'
-6"
Sidewalk

5'-0" Min.
Ramp
Top Landing
5'-0" Min.
RAMP REQUIREMENTS
ELEVATION
11:
42:
21 AM
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
RAILINGS ON GRADES STEEPER THAN 5% TO 8.33%
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
880
SHEET
NO.
2 of 5
Post
Post
Post
2
"
6'-0" Max. on Steps
Post
Equal to one
3'
-6"
tread length
1"
CJP
Handrail
DETAIL "A" - PLAN VIEW

3'
-6"
Post
Handrail
See "Typical Railing
1'-6"
1'-6"
Min.
(Typ.)
Details", Sheet 2 for
2"
post & rail details
2'
-10"
or Contract Plans
for Step Details
Sheet 2 for post & rail details
9"
Min.
3'
-6"
2"
RAILING CONTINUATION BEYOND STEPS

3'
-6"
See Index No. 521
Equal to one
tread length
Handrail Continuous
At Landing
Handrail
Handrail
Top Landing
2" Min.
(Typ.)

Steel Handrail required for three or more
6'-0" Max. on Steps
steps (Handrail and cheekwalls continuous

9" Min. Wide
at landings) Handrail ~ 1" NPS (Sch. 40)

2"
3'
-6"
2'
-10"
Handrail Termination
See Index No. 521

or Contract Plans
for Step Details
Handrail
1'-6"
Min.
2"
tread length
2'
-10"
Handrail
Bottom of
Equal to one
cheekwall
tread width
2" Min.
(Typ.)
2"
2"

2'
-10"
See Index No. 521
2'
-10"
3'
-6"
R
(T
9
y
p "
.)
Length of Landing
9" Min. Wide
1'
-6"
5'-0" Min.
2'
-10"
"
9 )
.
R
yp
(T
6'
Equal to one
or Contract Plans
ELEVATION
(At-Grade Steps)
11:
42:
22 AM
2"
for Step Details
2"
9"
Min.
6'-0"
Bottom Landing
9"
ALTERNATE END TREATMENT
12/3/2015
Min.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
GUIDERAIL ON STEPS & STAIRS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
880
SHEET
NO.
3 of 5
9
16"
" (Max.) Holes for
7
16"
" Anchorage Bolts with
Guiderail &
Post
3
4"
Bolt Holes
Bolt Holes
6"
Handrail
1
2"
R 1
1
4
1
4"
3
4"
3
4"
Post
1
4"
3
4"
1
4
Post
1
4"
3
4"
3
4"
1
4"
CJP
CJP
"
9
.)
p
y
(T
1
4
1
2"
3"
Guiderail
6"
3"
& Rod
Top Rail ~ 2"

NPS, Sch. 40
" Base Plate
" Base Plate
1
1
4" 2 4"
Handrail
1
2"
Post
Flat Washers (Typ.)
Flat Washers (Typ.)

1
1'-6"
7
16"
Holes (Max.) for
Anchorage Bolts with
Post ~ 2"
SECTION B-B
8"
SECTION C-C
BASE PLATE DETAIL
(2~Bolt Anchorage)
SECTION C-C
BASE PLATE DETAIL
(4~Bolt Anchorage)
4"
Bottom Rail ~
Guiderail &
2" NPS, Sch. 40
3"
3
4"
1
2"
Plate
Post
Bolt Holes
6"
1"
3"
1
2"
6"
" Base
3"
" Hole
Plate
2"
(centered)
1
2"
3
4"
1
2"
CJP
1
4
1
2"
1
8"
CJP
1
4"
1
8"
1
8"
3
8"
3
8"
1
8"
" x 1" Long Slotted
Holes for Anchor Bolts

" Steel
11"
Plate
with Plate Washers (Typ.)
or Neoprene Pads
3
4"
1
4"
1
Typ.
) Resilient
8" (
4"
3
4"
NPS, Sch. 40
8"
1" Bar
or " (Max.) Holes

for Anchor Bolts with
Flat Washers (Typ.)
SHIM PLATE DETAIL

(2~Bolt Anchorage)
SHIM PLATE DETAIL

(4~Bolt Anchorage)
ALTERNATE BASE
PLATE DETAIL
(Recommended for Steep Slopes)
PLATE WASHER
DETAIL
Bevel bottom of post as required

to maintain plumb posts (Typ.)
DETAIL "C" - RAIL CONNECTIONS

(Handrail and 4~Bolt Anchorage Not Shown)
1'-0"
6"*
" x " Pan Head
6"
Stainless Steel (Type 316

3"
or 18-8 Alloy) Set Screw.
3"
1
4"
Set Screw must be set
1
2"
1
4")
1
4")
~ Expansion Joint
~ Field Splice Slip Joint
flush against outside face

of rail (Typ.)
Rail or Handrail Section
Top Rail
B
Match Grade of
Steel Sleeve:
1
2"
Rail or
Handrail Section
Ramp or Stairs

Post

of rails
1
8"
(Typ.)
* At the Contractor's option, embedded length may

be 4" when a " plug weld is substituted for
DETAIL "D" - EXPANSION JOINT

(FIELD SPLICE SLIP JOINT SIMILAR)
the " set screw.
Bottom Rail
Handrail
1'-8"
" x " Pan Head
1
4"
Stainless Steel (Type 316

or 18-8 Alloy) Set Screws.
Set Screws must penetrate
1
8"
Ramp or Stairs
1
2"
Match Grade of
Max. Gap
3 Sp. @ 2
1
2"
3 Sp. @ 2
1
8"
the full wall thickness of the

1
4"
inner sleeve and set flush
1
4"
against outside face of rail

Rail or Handrail
(Typ.)
11:
42:
23 AM
Section
Rail
Section
of rails
1
8"
(Typ.)
Steel Sleeve:
1
2"
DETAIL "B" - RAIL AND HANDRAIL

(Showing Sloped Condition for Ramps with 2~Bolt Anchorage)
12/3/2015

CROSS REFERENCE:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DETAIL "E" - CONTINUITY

FIELD SPLICE
For locations of Details "C", "D" and "E", see Sheet 2.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
880
SHEET
NO.
4 of 5
Guiderail &
Between Handrails
Anchor Bolts
1'
-9"
5'-0" Std. ~ 3'-0" Min. Clear

1
2"
3'
-6"
Optional 4~Bolt
1'
-9"
4" Sidewalk with

Thickened Edge
or Neoprene Pad (Typ,)
1
4 2"
0" Standard
Varies
2"
(
M in.
)
Top of
Step Nosing
Sidewalk
Optional 4~Bolt
Anchorage
(Shown Dashed)
** Steel Anchors
3"
8"
Back Face of
6"
6"
** 2~Bolt
Sl
o
p
e2
% Ma
x
.(
a
wa
y
f
r
o
m d
r
o
p
o
f
f
)
Steel Anchorage
Drop-off (
Varies)
1'
-0"
** 2 or 4~ Bolt
45
Steel Anchorage
6"
y
wa
a
.(
x
% Ma
e2
p
o
Sl
)
f
f
o
p
o
r
m d
o
r
f
(
M in.
)
2"
2" for Ramps
Nosing or
4"
requiring handrails
Thick Resilient
Gravity Wall
4~BOLT ANCHORAGE DETAIL
Step Cheekwall
9"
** Steel Anchors

9"
Width of Structure at
(Min.)
6" Embedment Depth
TYPICAL SECTION ON
STEPS & STAIRS
TYPICAL SECTION ON GRAVITY WALL

(Other Retaining Walls Similar)
2 ~ " Anchor Bolts (**) with

Edge Shim
(
M in.
)
1
8"
2"
Top of Step
for Ramps
2"
1
2"
(
M in.
)
2'
-10"
(Shown Dashed)
1" Bar
plates (as required) (Typ.)

6" Standard,
3'
-6"
Anchorage
Base Plate with Shim
Guiderail
Post
Post
Self-Locking Hex Nuts & Washers.
(8" long
x " wide
1
8"
x thickness
Build-up (Typ.)
as reqd.)
6"
6"
Min. Beveled
(Min.)
1
8"
Epoxy Mortar (Type F) in
Min. Beveled
(Min.)
Build-up (Typ.)
Epoxy Mortar (Type A, B or F) in

Section 926
Section 926
3" Core Drilled
Section 416
Section 416
Seal base of hole (Option 2 & 3)

and end of post (Option 2) prior to
6"
height adjustment
with Specification
with Specification
1
2"
when required for
hole in accordance
Hole ("), clean

hole in accordance
Hole ("), clean

4"
3" Core Drilled

3" Min. Embedment
(
M in.
)
Base Plate
epoxy filling to prevent leakage

1
2"
(Min.) wide
bed of Adhesive
" Thick Resilient
Seal end of post with
or Neoprene Pad
a plastic or galvanized
steel plug
Bonding Material
DETAIL "F" (OPTIONAL SHIMMING DETAIL

OPTIONAL SIDEWALK ANCHORAGE DETAIL
6" foundation embedment

permitted (Option 3)

OPTION 2 & 3
NOTES:
11:
42:
24 AM
**2 ~ " x 8" or 4 ~ " x 6" Steel Anchors:

Galvanized Steel Bolts (As Shown) (C-I-P); Galvanized U-Bolts
Permitted (C-I-P); Galvanized Adhesive Anchors Permitted
(***); Expansion Anchors Not Permitted.
*** Adhesive anchors shall be fully threaded headless anchor bolts
set in drilled holes (manufacturer recommended diameter) with
12/3/2015
an Adhesive Bonding Material System in accordance with

Specification Section 937 and installed in accordance with
Specification Section 416. The minimum embedment is 6" for
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
2~Bolt Anchorage or 4" for 4~Bolt Anchorage.

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
880
SHEET
NO.
5 of 5
NOTES
1.
Work this Index with the Noise Wall Data Tables, and Wall Control Drawings in the Plans.
A. Prestressed concrete posts with equivalent strength resistance may be substituted for
10. Provide Fiber Reinforced Neoprene pads with a Durometer Hardness between Grade 50 and 80;
conventionally reinforced precast posts shown in this standard, when approved as part
or Plain Neoprene Pads with a minimum Durometer Hardness of Grade 50 in accordance
of a Producer's Quality Control Plan.
B. Producer shop drawings for prestressed concrete post designs must be approved by the
A.
For Collar Bearing Points provide:

1.
State Structures Design Office prior to inclusion in the Quality Control Plan.
2.
2.
Construct Noise Walls in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 534,
4x 4x Fiber Reinforced Pads;
Plain Pads with a may be substituted for Fiber Reinforced Pads when
sufficient bearing area is available on the concrete collar for the
and Augers Cast Piles in accordance with Specification Section 455.
following:
a.
3.
b.
20 Post Spacing and Wall Height < 17 feet:
4x 4x
Control Drawings.
c.
20' Post Spacing and Wall Height 17 feet:
4x 5x
B.
4.
10 Post Spacing: 4x 4x
Field verify the location of all overhead and underground services shown in the Wall
Wall Height is the nominal height of the walls above finished grade. The Wall
At panel bearing points between stacked panels, use Plain or Fiber Reinforced
Neoprene Pads.
Embedment Depth for design is 1-0. The actual embedment depth may vary plus or
minus 6 along the length of the wall.
5.
Post Spacing in this Index are nominal, and are measured from centerline to centerline
of the auger cast piles. Actual post spacing may vary as shown in the Wall Control Drawings.
6.
Panels:
A.
The sum of the individual stacked panel heights is the Wall Height plus 1-0
(embedment depth).
B.
Where special graphics are required, locate the horizontal panel joints
outside of the graphics. Where possible, hold horizontal panel joints at a
constant elevation.
C.
Side Installed Panels are only permitted when reduced overhead clearance
between posts prohibits installing panels from the top.
1.
For Flush Face panels, install panel into posts from the roadway (front
face) of the wall. Recessed panels may be installed from the back face
of the wall.
2.
After panels are installed and centered between posts, grout between
both panel ends and the adjoining posts (see Sheets 4 and 5 for details).
D. Individual panel heights should be between 6-0 and 12-0 tall. The minimum panel
height is 4-0 and may be used where overhead clearance is limited, or where
graphic panels are required on shorter walls.
7.
Concrete And Grout:
A.
Concrete Class and Compressive Strength for:

1.
Precast Panels, Posts, and Post caps: Class IV (fc' = 5500 psi)
2.
Cast-In-Place Collars: Class IV (fc' = 5500 psi)
B. Minimum Compressive Strength for form removal and handling of posts and panels:
1.
2,500 psi for horizontally cast post and panels
2.
2,000 psi for vertically cast panels or when tilt-up tables are used for
horizontally cast panels.
A.
Grout for Auger Cast Piles:
1.
2.
8.
Maximum Working Compressive Strength = 2,000 psi

Minimum 28 day strength = 5,000 psi
Reinforcing Steel:
A.
In addition to the requirements of Specification Section 415, tie post and pile
stirrups at the following locations as a minimum:
1.
Post Stirrups Tie at all four corner bars and at every third interior bar
intersection.
2.
Pile Stirrups Tie to the main vertical reinforcing at alternate intersections

for circular configurations and at the four corners and at every third
interior bar intersection for rectangular configurations.
B.
9.
Casting Tolerances for precast panels and posts:

A.
Overall Height and Width: +/-
B.
Thickness: +/-
C.
Plane of side mold: +/-
D.
Openings: +/-
1/16
E.
Out of Square: 1/8per 6 ft., but not more than 3/8total along any side
F.
Warping: 1/16per foot distance to nearest corner
G.
Bowing: 1/240 panel dimension
H.
Surface Smoothness for Type ASmooth Surface Texture Option: +/- 1/16
12/17/2015
12:
42:
14 PM
Provide 2" concrete cover unless noted otherwise.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
GENERAL NOTES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
NO.
5200
SHEET
NO.
1of 16
Type "A"
Type "F"
SMOOTH
PEA GRAVEL
"
Random " - "

Gravel Texture
Type "G"
Type "B"
VERTICAL FRACTURED FIN
ASHLAR STONE
" Back Face
Varies
1" o.c.
1" Front Face
" to 1"
Typ.
"
Type "C"
Type "H"
SPLIT FACE RUNNING BOND BLOCK
TRAPEZOID VERTICAL FINS W/ FRACTURED
" Mortar
"
Joint
Amplitude
FACE (COLORADO DRAG AGGREGATE)

1"
4" o.c.
8" x 16"
1:15 Min.
Running Bond Block
Bevel
Type "D"
Type "I"
FRACTURED GRANITE
CUT CORAL BLOCK (RUNNING BOND)
" Depth
" Mortar
"
Joint
Amplitude
Running
Bond Block:
12" x (12", 14", 16" & 12")
6" x (21", 10" & 23")

12" x (9", 10", 21" & 14")
6" x (16", 14" & 24")
(1st course)
(2nd course)
(3rd course)
(4th course)
Type "E"
WIRE-CUT BRICK
" Max.
" Depth
NOTES:
Mortar Joint
1. Surfaces shall be formed, rolled, or pressed using form
liners in accordance with the Plans and Specifications
for Class 3 Surface Finish.
2 " x 7 "
Running Bond Brick
2. See Noise Wall Data Tables for project aesthetic
12/23/2015
8:
59:
09 AM
requirements.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
TEXTURE OPTIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5200
2 of 16
Fo
r
m Ro
l
l
e
r
Post
Symmetric about Panel
Back Face Panel Texture

(Formed, Rolled or Pressed
10'-0" Max.
Top of Wall
into Plastic Concrete)

Precast wall panel
Example Graphic
Front Face Panel

Texture (Formed)
Varies (
12'
-0" M ax.
, 4'
-0" M in.
)
Top Panel
Type SE-2
Se
c
o
n
dl
a
y
e
rs
u
r
f
a
c
ef
o
rr
e
c
e
s
s
e
d
g
r
a
p
h
i
cd
e
s
i
g
n(
o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
)
Single layer flat surface attached to form liner for casting
" Max.
smooth areas of wall design. See plans for project specific

Sealed cavity
graphic drawings. Joints between flat surface and form liner

to be sealed watertight.
Horizontal
joint between
stacked panels
Form liner
TYPICAL FORMING DETAIL

(Front Face Panel Texture Type "H" shown)
(Back Face Panel Texture Type "D" shown)
Bottom Panel
Varies (
12'
-0" M ax.
, 4'
-0" M in.
)
(Post Forming Details Similar)
NOTES:
1. Submit specific form liner samples for

approval by the Engineer.
2. Textures and graphics shown are for demonstration

purposes only. See Noise Wall Data Tables in the
plans for project specific texture and graphic requirements.
HALF ELEVATION
12:
42:
18 PM
(Front Face Post and Panel Texture Type "H" shown)

(Graphic Type SE-2 shown)
12/17/2015
(Two stacked panels shown, three stacked panels similar)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
GRAPHICS & TEXTURE DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5200
3 of 16
Post & Pile
Post & Pile
Precast Cap
(Type "B"
Post Spacing (S)
Step
Precast Post Cap (when required)

S/4
Top of post
(6" Min.
1" Polyethylene
Top of wall elevation
S/4
shown)
Top of Wall Elevation
1'-6" Max.)
2"
Rod (continuous)
Top Panel
(
M in.
)
Neoprene Pads
Varies
Top Panel
2 ~ 1 " x 6" x " Neoprene Pads (shown)
Top Panel
or 1 ~ 4" x 6" x " Neoprene Pad
B
Bottom Panel
SECTION A-A
WITH POST CAP
A
Post
(Typ.)
Bottom of wall elevation
Finished Grade
Post & Pile
2 ~ 1 " x 6" x " Neoprene Pads (shown)
6" Min.
Step
or 1 ~ 4" x 6" x " Neoprene Pad
(Wall Embedment
Depth)
"
1 "
1'-6" Max.
Top of wall and
Varies
post elevation
(6" Min.
6"
V-Groove &
1'-6" Max.)
1" Polyethylene
2 "
Auger Cast
Pile (Typ.)
Rod
Showing Post without Post Cap
Showing Post with Post Cap
TYPICAL ELEVATION
"
Half Elevation
1 "
1"
Top Panel
Half Elevation
1" Polyethylene
Rod (continuous)
R/W Line
Top Panel
Neoprene Pad
Non-roadway face
of wall, Back
Varies
* 4"
Post & Pile
4'
-0" M in.
Post & Pile
* 1"
* 4"
* 1"
SECTION B-B
WITHOUT POST CAP
Fill with
Non-Shrink
Grout
ELEVATION STEP AT TOP OF WALL
Face of Panel
Post & Pile
Roadway face of wall,
Bottom Panel
Front Face of Post
Step
L (Top-Installed)
Varies
L (Side-Installed)
* Nominal embedment (not including
PLAN
Min. ~ 4" Max.
Neoprene Pads (Typ.)
Varies
Post & Pile
4'
-0" M in.
* 4"
Face of Panel
1
2"
(See Sheet 1, Note 10)
Post & Pile
of wall, Back
1'-6" Max.)
R/W Line
(Showing Flush Panel)
Non-roadway face
(no step)
(6" Min.
tolerances)
Bottom Panel
* 4"
* 2"
Fill with
* 2"
Non-Shrink
Grout
12:
42:
18 PM
Auger Cast Pile
Roadway face of wall
12/17/2015
Front Face of Post

L (Top-Installed)
L (Side-Installed)
ELEVATION STEP AT BOTTOM OF WALL

Note:
See the plans for required post spacings (S).
PLAN
TYPICAL DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
(Showing Recessed Panel)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5200
4 of 16
1'-3"
9 "
1"
5 "
Max.
"
Texture Back Face
5 "
Reinforcing Mat
"
* Vertical Steel ~ #4 Bars @ 10"
NOTE:
SECTION D-D
At the Contractors Option, Smooth or
Deformed Welded Wire Reinforcement
M ax.
(As=0.24 in./ft.) (Typ.)
1"
Panel H eight (
H)
(
See Sheet 1, Note 6)
=
R
5"
Formed, rolled or pressed
R= "
2 "
See Detail "A"
5"
2 "
Panel Length (L) (19'-2" Max.)
4 "
(Showing Flush Type Panel)
Formed Texture
Front Face
"
may be used (equal area).
DETAIL "A" - TOP-INSTALLED

See Detail "B"
(Typical both ends)
Horizontal Steel ~ #4 Bars @ 8" (As=0.30 in./ft.) (Typ.)
1'-3"
9 "
2 "
Max.
TYPICAL PANEL ELEVATION
Texture Back Face
in the top of panels only and transported maintaining the vertical orientation. If these criteria are met,
=
R
Reinforcing Mat
"
5"
then tilted upright using tilt-tables prior to lifting from form. In this case, pick points must be placed
5 "
SECTION D-D
(Showing Recessed Type Panel)
Formed, rolled or pressed
R= 1"
2 "
5"
"
* In lieu of utilizing the standard pick up points below, panels may be cast vertically or cast horizontally
1"
5 "
the vertical steel may be reduced to #4 Bars @ 1'-3" (As=0.16 in./ft.).

Texture
Non-Roadway
M ax.
Front Face
0.207 L
0.586 L
0.207 L
Texture
Face (Back Face)
1"
Panel Length (L)
4"
Formed Texture
Front Face
"
(Typical both ends)
Max.
"
Continuous V-Groove
2 "
Reinforcing Mat
R=
1
2"
2 "
5"
DETAIL "A" - SIDE-INSTALLED
1"
5"
Max.
0.
586 H
Panel H eight (
H)
0.
207 H
"
(Not required for
Pick up points
Bottom Panel)
6" Typ.
Formed Texture
Front Face
2 Sp. @ " = 1"
DETAIL "B" - TOP-INSTALLED
2 Sp. @ 2" = 5"
5"
SECTION C-C
12:
42:
19 PM
Notes:
STANDARD PICK UP POINTS FOR PANELS

(Panels shall be rotated about long axis only)
1. See Sheet 3 for allowable methods
2 "
(Typical both ends)

Reinforcing Mat
R = 1"
2 "
0.
207 H
" Chamfer (Typ.)
of applying textures.
2. See plans for panel type and
aesthetic requirements.
3. For equal post spacing, side-installed
5" Typ.
Formed Texture
Front Face
12/17/2015
panel length will be shorter than

top-installed Panel length.
DETAIL "B" - SIDE-INSTALLED
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
(Typical both ends)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TYPICAL PANEL DETAILS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5200
5 of 16
See Detail "D" for
See Detail "C" for
panel dimensions
panel dimensions
2
2
Typical Post
See Detail "E"
90-
See Detail "E"
90-
See Detail "E"
See Detail "E"
Typical post
CASE 1
CASE 2
(Exterior Angle)
(Interior Angle)
Working Point
CASE 1
CASE 2
(Interior Angle)
(Exterior Angle)
Working Point
4"
5 "
90+
5"
5 "
4"
90-
5"
5"
5"
Typical Post
Typical Post
5"
5"
9"
9"
Chamfer as
Required
DETAIL "D"
DETAIL "C"
DETAIL "E"
(Back Face Chamfer Shown
NOTE:
NOTE:
The shop drawings shall include specific pivoting details of
The shop drawings shall include specific pivoting details of
panel ends at locations where the deflection angle (2) between
panel ends at locations where the deflection angle (2) between
panels exceeds 7.
panels exceeds 20.
PIVOTING DETAILS
PIVOTING DETAILS
(Flush Type Panel)
(Recessed Type Panel)
12/17/2015
12:
42:
20 PM
Front Face Chamfer Similar)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
TYPICAL PANEL DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
NO.
5200
SHEET
NO.
6 of 16
9'-2" L 15'-2"
L/2
L/2
(One Grate)
15'-2" < L 19'-2"
L/3
L/3
L/3
F
H
" hole for
1'
-114"
Outside
* Varies
(1" Min. Cover
Anchors (Typ.)
258" X 18"
2" X
L 2" X 2" X 14" (Typ.)
to Face of Panel)
C 1'-4"
Expansion
45
(Typ.)
Bottom Panel
Bar A2 (Typ.)
B 1'-1"
3
16
(Typ.)
Bottom of
A 10"
Expansion Anchor
3
4"
3'-4"
Opening
1
4"
3'-7
10" Opening
3'-4"
Opening
1
Typ.
)
2" (
(Typ.)
(Two Grates)
2"
3
4"
1
4"
3'-3
1
8"
Bar
Louvers (Typ.)
(Outside)
D 1'-8"
* Hole Types A, B, C and D refer to distance from bottom of panel

to center of opening. See Wall Control Drawings in the plans.
DRAINAGE HOLES TYPES A, B, C & D
GRATING DETAIL
SECTION G-G
(Front Face of Wall Shown)

(Two Holes Shown,
One Hole Similar)
1'
-2 "
1
0
"
1'-4"
Precast Panel
See Grating Detail
Front Face
"
0
1
Grade behind wall
1'-4"
Varies
to drain to holes.
BAR A2 (Pair)
Bottom of
Bar Length = 4'-4"
Bottom Panel
BAR BENDING DETAILS (#3 Bars)
SECTION F-F
GRATING NOTES:
12:
42:
20 PM
1. Grating shall be ASTM A36 steel welded in accordance with the current edition of ANSI/AWS D1.1
Steel Welding Code. Hot-dip galvanize grate after fabrication in accordance with Specification
Section 962.
2. Expansion Anchors: Use " x 3" ASTM A307, vandal resistant, hot-dip galvanized expansion anchors
to connect grates to panels.
12/17/2015
3. Grating mounted to back face of wall.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DRAINAGE HOLE DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
NO.
5200
SHEET
NO.
7 of 16
3"
Bars B
3 "
1
2"
4"
1'
-4
1
4"
1
2"
3
4"
Bars A
Bars P2
1
4"
4 Equal sp.
Bars B
Bars A
Bars B
Front Face Post
M ax.
Texture (Formed)
2" Cover
(Typ.)
TYPICAL POST SECTION
SECTION K-K
(H Section)
(Collar Section)
6"
1'-6"
3"
Collar)
1'
-6"
6"
(Elev. A)
4"
Roadway Face of wall
3"3"Bars P2 3"3" 712"
M ax.
Collar
(
Precast
Collar)
1'
-6"
(
Precast
(Elev. A)
Top of
1
2"
1
4"
(Typ.)
1
4"
(Typ.)
1
2"
Bars B
3"3"Bars P2 3"3" 712"
Collar
1'-1"
to plans)
Post
Top of
1
3 2"
(Texture according
"
M ax.
R=
3
4"
1'-6"
5"
Back Face of Post
M ax.
1'-8"
& Wall
1'
-4
(Typ.)
Post
M ax.
1
2"
Bars P1
712" M ax.
Staggered
Dim . A
Bars P1 @
*Post Length (
H Section)
Bars P1 @
(Typ.)
(
See Note 1)
3"
Bars P1
M ax.
1
2"
712" M ax.
* Top of Wall
Staggered
Dim . A
(
See Note 1)
*Post Length (
H Section)
* Top of Wall
2 Equal sp.
3"
Bars B
Bars A
(Typ.)
Bars A
Bars P1 (Staggered)
Bars P2
Bars A
Bars A
Bars P2 @
Bars B
Bars B
2" Cover
(Typ.)
Bars P2
SECTION H-H
SECTION L-L
(Typ.)
1'-6"
2"
Bars P2
Bars A
3 equal sp.
4'
-6"
Bars A
1'
-0" M ax.
3"
Bars P2 @
Pile Length m inus 6" (

See Note 2)
Bars B
6'
-0"
4 Equal sp.
3"
Bars B
LOW CLEARANCE OPTION

* Extend Post 2" above top of high side wall panel when post caps are
shown in plans. See Sheet 4, "ELEVATION STEP AT TOP OF WALL".
Bars A
Bars P1 (Staggered)
Bars A
Bars B
2" Cover
12:
42:
21 PM
(Typ.)
SECTION J-J
NOTES:
2"
1. For Post Reinforcing see Sheets 15 and 16.

2. For Pile Lengths Tables see Sheets 15 and 16.
12/17/2015
TYPICAL POST
STANDARD POST REINFORCEMENT
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
(Standard Post Shown, 45 Corner Posts Similar)
STANDARD POST DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5200
8 of 16
* Top of Wall
* Top of Wall
Post & Pile
Post & Pile
10"
Post & Pile
Post
* Extend Post 2" above top of high side wall panel when
Precast Post
post caps are shown in plans. See Sheet 4, "ELEVATION

Precast Post
30" or 36"
STEP AT TOP OF WALL".
Auger Cast Pile
Post,
Top of Precast
Collar, Elev. A
Finished Grade
Finished Grade
0" M in to
Top of Auger Cast Pile
1 " M ax.
Pile & Wall
Top of
Projected Location
Precast Collar,
of Bearing Pad (Typ.)
Elev. A
6"
P
N
M ax.
8"
1
2" M ax.
4"
Cover
0" M in to
(See Sheet 1, Note H)
Post & Pile
N
SECTION M-M
30" Auger
Cast Pile
Bars P3 (Typ.)
36" Auger
Cast Pile
Exposed Precast Post

Reinforcement (Typ.)
Pile Length (
See Note 1)
Cast Pile
1'
-0" M ax.
30" Auger
Bars P3 @
Pile Length (
See Note 1)
Post, Pile & Wall
Post & Pile
"
4
r
ve )
o n.
C
i
(M
10"
Collar
36" Auger
Cast Pile
Post,
SECTION N-N
10 - #9 Bars (Typ.),
Pile, & Wall
See Section P-P
6"
6"
12:
42:
22 PM
2"
er
v
Co
4"
10 - #9 Bars
1. For Pile Length Tables, see Sheets 15 and 16.
Bottom of Augered
Bottom of Augered
Bars P3
NOTE:
spaced equally
Hole per Plan
around Bar P3
Hole per Plan
TYPICAL POST
SECTION P-P
(Typ.)
12/17/2015
Low Clearance Option

STANDARD POST PLACEMENT IN AUGER CAST PILE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
(H-Post Shown, 45 Corner Posts Similar)
POST PLACEMENT & PILE REINFORCING STEEL DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5200
9 of 16
Post,
2"
Post,
Wall & Pile
4
"
"
3 4
Wall & Pile
4
"
Post,
4
'1
1
'01
Wall & Pile
Bars P8
(See Note 2)
Post
Post
Bars D
22.5
Bars E
67.5
45
22.5
Bars D
45
Pile
2" Cover
67.5
& Pile
3
4"
Bars A (Typ.)
Chamfer (Typ.)
8"
51
51
(Typ.)
Post
67.5
& Pile
4"
3"
Post
2" Cover
Pile
10 1
(Typ.)
3"
Pile
Post & Pile
8"
9"
45
Bars B (Typ.)
"
4
3
8"
3
8"
(See Note 2)
30" Auger
3
4"
1'-4
SECTION H-H
Cast Pile
SECTION K-K
"
Wall & Pile
2"
4
"
"
1 4
1 2
"
1 4
4
"
Post,
"
3 4
"
"
1 4
1
'01
Wall & Pile
SECTION N-N
3 4
4
'1
1 2
Post,
r
e
v
.)
o
in
C
(M
Bars A (Typ.)
Bars P7 (Pairs)
"
36" Auger
Cast Pile
" Radius (Typ.)
45
Post
Bars D
Texture
Bars E
45
(when required)
67.5
Texture
Bars B
22.5
(when required)
Post & Pile
2" Cover
8"
8"
4"
3"
Post
Bars D
& Pile
er
v
Co
4"
Bars B (Typ.)
Bars P7 (Pairs)
Pile
67.5
10 1
Chamfer (Typ.)
(See Note 2)
51
3"
1
2"
Bars A (Typ.)
51
3
4"
45
Bars P8
(Typ.)
9"
Pile
Bars A
67.5
(See Note 2)
1
4"
1
4"
1
4"
3
4"
10 - #9 Bars
1
2"
1
2"
Bars P3
spaced equally
around Bar P3
Bars E
3
4"
1'-4
SECTION J-J
SECTION L-L
(Typ.)
SECTION P-P
12:
42:
23 PM
1. Reference Sheets 8 & 9 for location of Sections.

Space Bars P7 as shown for Bars P1.
Space Bars P8 as shown for Bars P2.
2. Match texture thickness with appropriate Panel face.
3. For Post Reinforcing, see sheets 15 & 16.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
4. For Pile Length Tables, see sheets 15 & 16.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5200
10 of 16
3"
3"
* Top of Wall
* Top of Wall
#4 Bars
Texture (when required)
6"
Bars P5 (Pairs)
Chamfer (Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bars A (Typ.)
#4 Bars
3
8"
1
4"
Chamfer
1
4"
Bars A
Bars A
and Bars B
and Bars B
1'
-8"
R= 12" (Typ.)
3
8"
Wall & Pile
1
4"
Bars B
Bars B (Typ.)
(Pairs) (Typ.)
7 " M ax.
Dim . A
3
8"
#4 Bars (Typ.)
Begin
*Post Length
*Post Length
3
8"
2" Cover
3
4"
Bars P5
(Pairs) (Typ.)
1
4"
Bars A
Bars P5 (
Pairs) @
Bars B
Bars P5 (
Pairs) @
Bars P5
7 " M ax.
Bars A
Begin
(
See Note 1)
6"
(
See Note 1)
Dim . A
1'-8"
1
4"
1
2"
1
4"
3
4"
1
2"
(Typ. Both
Top of
Sides)
C-I-P Collar
Top of
(Elev. A)
Auger
Wall & Pile
Cast Pile
(Typ.)
3"3"
Bars P4
(Typ.)
Bars P4
5 equal sp.
3"
and Bars B
SECTION R-R
Bars A
(Typ.)
Bars B
(Typ.)
Bars P4 @
Bars P4
Bars A
6'
-0"
SECTION S-S
2"
*Pile Length m inus 1'

-3" (
See Note 2)
and Bars B
Bars P4 @
Bars A
1'
-0" M ax.
3"3"
9"
(Elev. A)
caps are shown in plans. See Sheet 4, "ELEVATION STEP
1. For Post Reinforcing, see Sheets 15 and 16.
AT TOP OF WALL".
2"
12:
42:
23 PM
* Extend Post 2" above top of high side wall panel when post
3. Reduce typical panel length or adjust pile spacing at each 90 Corner Post.
4. Match texture thickness, with appropriate Panel face.
12/17/2015
TYPICAL POST
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
(Post Surface Features Not Shown For Clarity)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5200
11of 16
* Top of Wall
3'-6"
Typical Post
Wall & Pile

9"
1'-0"
1'-8"
11"
8"
Bearing Pad (Typ.)
Finished
Bars P6 (Pairs)
Elev. A (see Note 2)
30" Auger Cast Pile

1'
-6"
Wall & Pile
1'
-8"
Bars P6
11 "
(Pairs)
3'
-6"
3"
1'
-0"
6"
(Typ.)
sp.
2 Equal
1'
-0 "
Top of Collar,
4" Cover
8 "
Grade
4" Cover
9 "
(Typ.)
Projected Location of
Bearing Pad (Typ.)
Pile Length (
see Note 1)
Exposed Precast
(See Sheet 1, Note H)
Post Reinforcement
30"
Auger
Cast Pile
Wall & Pile
Tie Bars (Typ.)

(Min. #3 Bars)
SECTION T-T
C-I-P COLLAR
U
Wall & Pile

30" Auger
Cast Pile
Wall & Pile
s
ie
r
a
V
NOTES:
12:
42:
24 PM
6"
2. Trowel Finish top of Collar to allow placement of Bearing Pads.
Bottom of Augered
caps are shown in plans. See Sheet 4, "ELEVATION STEP
Hole per Plan
AT TOP OF WALL".
SECTION U-U
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
ELEVATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5200
12 of 16
11"
* Top of Wall
8"
36"
Wall & Pile
Auger Cast Pile
8 "
Clearance Post
Wall & Pile
Finished
Elev. A (See Note 2)
6"
6"
2"
7"
3"
11 "
Top of Auger Cast Pile,
Grade
Projected Location
of Bearing Pad (Typ.)
W
Wall & Pile
SECTION V-V
Exposed Precast
36" Auger
Bars P3 @
Cast Pile
Pile Length (
See Note 1)
1'
-0" M ax.
Post Reinforcement (Typ.)
Wall & Pile
36"
Auger Cast Pile
Wall & Pile

10 - #9 Bars (Typ.),
See Section W-W
2"
er
v
Co
4"
6"
NOTES:
12:
42:
25 PM
Bottom of Augered
2. Trowel Finish top of auger cast pile to allow placement of Bearing Pads.
Bars P3
Hole per Plan
10 - #9 Bars
ELEVATION
spaced equally
caps are shown in plans. See Sheet 4, "ELEVATION STEP AT
around Bar P3
TOP OF WALL".
(Typ.)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
SECTION W-W
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5200
13 of 16
1"
Interior Cap
1"
2'-3"
1"
Corner Cap
212"
212"
2 sp. @ 1'-0" (Corner Cap)
212"
Corner Cap
No. 4 Bars
2" Cover
1 "
1"
1'
-0" (
Corner Cap)
2 sp. @
1
2"
8"
2 sp. @ 10" (Interior Cap)
N
o
.
212"
1"
3
4"
1" Recess
Chamfer (Typ.)
3"
1'-7"
3"
Interior Cap
3"
1'-11"
3"
Corner Cap
PICTORIAL VIEW
10" (
Interior Cap)
3"
3"
2'-3"
1"
7"
9"
7"
1"
Interior Cap
1"
8"
11"
8"
1"
Corner Cap
12" R (all sides)
3" 1" 3"
1'-11" (Corner Cap)
1"
TYPE "A" CAP DETAILS
3"
Interior Cap
1
2"
1'-7" (Interior Cap)
1"
SECTION C-C
p
a
c
in
g
4
B
a
r
s
3"
Bottom of Cap
2 sp. @
1" Recess in
1
2"
3"
1'
-7" (
Interior Cap)
1'
-11" (
Corner Cap)
3"
2'
-3"
1"
Corner Cap
1'
-11"
1"
Interior Cap
2'
-5"
Corner Cap
Interior Cap
2'
-1"
(Typ.)
3"
3"
1"
No. 4 Bars
1'-11"
1"
1'-11"
1
2"
1"
1"
3"
Corner Cap
5"
Interior Cap
2'-5"
Chamfer (Typ.)
1"
3
4"
2'-1"
No. 4 Bars
2" Cover
(Type "A" Cap Shown, Type "B" & "C" Caps Similar)
1"
1"
1'-11"
1"
Interior Cap
2'-3"
1"
Corner Cap
1"
Chamfer (Typ.)
1" Recess
3"
1'-7"
3"
Interior Cap
3"
1'-11"
3"
Corner Cap
No. 4 Bars
SECTION C-C
3"
PICTORIAL VIEW
TYPE "B" CAP DETAILS

2" Cover
3
4"
Chamfer (Typ.)
3"
1'-7"
3"
Interior Cap
3"
1'-11"
3"
Corner Cap
11"
1"
Interior Cap
1"
1'-1"
1'-1"
1"
Corner Cap
mortar bed
Precast Cap (center
(ASTM C 1329, Type S)
No. 4 Bars
2" Cover
1"
cap about post)

Top of post
" Chamfer (Typ.)
1 "
1
4"
10"
Set cap on
11"
5"
VIEW A-A SHOWN, VIEW B-B SIMILAR
1"
3" 1"
1" Recess
1 "
1"
3
4"
1 "
1"
PLAN VIEW
Precast Post
1" Recess
3"
1'-7"
3"
Interior Cap
3"
1'-11"
3"
Corner Cap
Panel
Precast Wall
(
M in.
)
2"
12:
42:
25 PM
Top of
Panel
SECTION C-C
Precast Wall
TYPE "C" CAP DETAILS
CAP PLACEMENT DETAIL
12/17/2015
PICTORIAL VIEW
Panel
(Type "B" Cap Shown, Type "A" & "C" Caps Similar)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
PRECAST POST CAPITAL

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5200
14 of 16
BAR BENDING DETAILS

Pile, Post & Wall
All bar dimensions in bending diagrams are out-to-out. All bars not shown in the bending diagrams are straight.
8"
3
4"
6"
1
2"
78
1
2"
55
(
See Table Below)
BAR P2
3
8"
BAR P3
Bar Length = 8'-7"
Bar Length = 5'-5"
90 CORNER POST (#4 Bars)
BAR P7
CAST-IN-PLACE COLLAR (#5 Bars)
Bar Length = 3'-0"

3
4"
11
2'-10"
7
8"
4"
93
75
112.5
BAR P5
BAR P6 (Pair)
Bar Length = 4'-0"
Bar Length = 4'-8"
135
1
2"
934" 678"
3"
BAR P4
"
2'
-10"
45
1
2"
1 4
Bottom of Auger Cast Pile
1'
-4"
1
2"
8"
3
4"
11
1134"
Pile Length
R=1
'
2
"
2"
1'-2"
BAR P1
(
See Table Below)
1
'
-5
1
1
'1
Pile Length
1'
-034"
3
4"
8"
1
2"
PILE/POST ELEVATION
1
'
-3
"
Elev. A
4
Bottom of Auger Cast Pile
45 CORNER POST (#4 Bars)
412"
Bar Length = 2'-5"
PILE (Low Clearance) (#4 Bars)
1'-3"
1'
-0
1
2" M ax.
Post Length
(
See Table Below)
Grade
1'
-6
Elev. A
1
n.
2" M i
Finished
Grade
W all H eight *
Finished
(
See Table Below)
W all H eight *
Post Length
STANDARD POST (#4 Bars)
1'
-0"
2'
-10"
Pile & Post
412"
Bar Length = 8'-6" Each
1'-114"
VIEW A-A
278"
BAR P8
* See Sheet 1, Note 4.
Bar Length = 5'-3"
TABLE 1A - TABLE OF POST REINFORCING STEEL

WIND SPEED = 110 MPH
POST LENGTHS
10'-0" POST SPACING
10'-0"
20'-0"
WALL
POST SPACING
POST SPACING
HEIGHT
WALL
HEIGHT
(Feet)
TABLE 1B - PILE LENGTHS (Feet) - WIND SPEED = 110 MPH
WITHOUT
WITH
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
CAP
CAP
SIZE
SIZE
DIM
SIZE
SIZE
'A'
DIM
SIZE
SIZE
'A'
DIM
SIZE
SIZE
'A'
20'-0" POST SPACING
CORNER POSTS
H-POSTS
H-POSTS
CORNER POSTS
(Feet)
SOIL 1
DIM
'A'
SOIL 2
SOIL 1
SOIL 2
SOIL 1
SOIL 2
SOIL 1
SOIL 2
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
12
1
13'-0 2"
1
13'-2 2"
#3
#3
9'-8"
#4
#4
11'-5"
#5
#5
11'-2"
#5
#5
9'-2"
12
12
11
10
10
11
10
10
15
14
14
13
15
14
13
12
13
14'-012"
14'-212"
#4
#4
13'-5"
#4
#4
11'-5"
#5
#5
11'-2"
#5
#5
9'-2"
13
12
11
11
10
12
11
10
10
16
15
14
13
15
14
14
13
14
15'-0
15'-2
1
2"
#4
#4
13'-5"
#4
#4
11'-5"
#5
#5
11'-2"
#6
#6
10'-9"
14
13
12
11
10
12
11
11
10
17
15
15
14
16
15
14
13
15
16'-012"
16'-212"
#4
#4
13'-5"
#4
#4
11'-5"
#6
#6
12'-9"
#6
#6
10'-9"
15
13
12
11
11
13
12
11
10
17
16
15
14
17
15
15
14
16
17'-012"
17'-212"
#4
#4
13'-5"
#5
#5
14'-2"
#6
#6
12'-9"
#6
#6
10'-9"
16
13
12
12
11
13
12
12
11
18
17
16
15
17
16
15
14
17
18'-0
1
2"
#4
#4
13'-5"
#5
#5
14'-2"
#6
#6
12'-9"
#7
#7
12'-4"
17
14
13
12
11
14
13
12
11
19
17
16
15
18
17
16
15
18
#7
#7
14'-4"
#7
#7
12'-4"
18
14
13
13
12
14
13
12
12
19
18
17
16
19
17
16
15
1
2"
1
2"
18'-2
19'-0
1
2"
19'-2
1
2"
#5
#5
16'-2"
#5
#5
14'-2"
19
1
20'-0 2"
1
20'-2 2"
#5
#5
16'-2"
#5
#5
14'-2"
#7
#7
14'-4"
#8
#8
13'-10"
19
15
14
13
12
14
13
13
12
20
18
17
16
19
18
17
16
20
21'-0
1
2"
#5
#5
16'-2"
#6
#6
15'-9"
#8
#8
16'-10"
#8
#8
13'-10"
20
15
14
14
13
15
14
13
12
20
19
18
17
20
18
17
16
21
22'-0
1
2"
#5
#5
16'-2"
#6
#6
15'-9"
#8
#8
16'-10"
#8
#8
13'-10"
21
16
15
14
13
15
14
14
13
21
19
18
17
20
19
18
17
22
23'-0
1
2"
#6
#6
18'-9"
#6
#6
15'-9"
#8
#8
16'-10"
#8
#9
13'-3"
22
16
15
14
13
16
15
14
13
21
20
19
17
21
19
18
17
1
2"
21'-2
1
2"
22'-2
1
2"
23'-2
12:
42:
26 PM
TABLE NOTE:
2. See Contract Plans for project wind speed.

3. Soil 1 = Loose Granular Soil, N = 4 to 9.
12/17/2015
Soil 2 = Medium Dense Granular Soil, N = 10 to 40.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
PILE DEPTH & REINFORCING SUMMARY

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
NO.
5200
SHEET
NO.
15 of 16

POST LENGTHS
10'-0" POST SPACING
10'-0"
20'-0"
WALL
POST SPACING
POST SPACING
HEIGHT
WALL
HEIGHT
(Feet)
WITHOUT
WITH
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
CAP
CAP
SIZE
SIZE
DIM
SIZE
SIZE
DIM
'A'
SIZE
SIZE
DIM
'A'
SIZE
SIZE
CORNER POSTS
H-POSTS
H-POSTS
CORNER POSTS
(Feet)
'A'
SOIL 1
SOIL 2
SOIL 1
DIM
'A'
20'-0" POST SPACING
SOIL 2
SOIL 2
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
12
1
13'-0 2"
1
13'-2 2"
#4
#4
10'-5"
#4
#4
9'-5"
#5
#5
9'-2"
#6
#6
8'-9"
12
13
12
12
11
13
12
11
11
18
16
16
14
17
16
15
14
13
14'-012"
14'-212"
#4
#4
10'-5"
#4
#4
9'-5"
#6
#6
10'-9"
#6
#6
8'-9"
13
14
13
12
11
13
12
12
11
18
17
16
15
18
17
16
15
14
15'-0
15
1
2"
15'-2
16'-0
1
2"
16
1
17'-0 2"
17
18'-0
18
19'-012"
19
20'-0
20
1
2"
1
2"
#4
#4
10'-5"
#5
#5
12'-2"
#6
#6
10'-9"
#7
#7
10'-4"
14
14
13
12
12
14
13
12
12
19
18
17
16
19
17
16
15
16'-2
1
2"
#5
#5
13'-2"
#5
#5
12'-2"
#7
#7
12'-4"
#7
#7
10'-4"
15
15
14
13
12
14
13
13
12
20
18
17
16
19
18
17
16
1
17'-2 2"
#5
#5
13'-2"
#5
#5
12'-2"
#7
#7
12'-4"
#8
#8
11'-10"
16
15
14
13
13
15
14
13
12
21
19
18
17
20
18
18
16
18'-2
1
2"
#5
#5
13'-2"
#6
#6
13'-9"
#7
#7
12'-4"
#8
#8
11'-10"
17
16
15
14
13
15
14
13
13
21
20
19
17
21
19
18
17
19'-212"
#6
#6
15'-8"
#6
#6
13'-9"
#8
#8
13'-10"
#8
#8
11'-10"
18
16
15
14
13
16
15
14
13
22
20
19
18
21
20
19
17
1
2"
#6
#6
15'-8"
#6
#6
13'-9"
#8
#8
13'-10"
#8
#9
11'-3"
19
17
16
15
14
16
15
14
13
22
21
20
18
22
20
19
18
#9
13'-3"
#9
#9
12'-3"
20
17
16
15
14
17
16
15
14
23
21
20
19
23
21
20
19
1
2"
20'-2
21'-0
1
2"
21'-2
1
2"
#6
#6
15'-8"
#7
#7
15'-4"
#8
21
1
22'-0 2"
1
22'-2 2"
#6
#6
15'-8"
#7
#7
15'-4"
#9
#8
15'-10"
#9
#10
11'-7"
21
18
17
16
15
17
16
15
14
24
22
21
19
23
22
21
19
22
23'-012"
23'-212"
#7
#7
18'-4"
#7
#7
15'-4"
#9
#10
14'-7"
#10
#9
14'-3"
22
18
17
16
15
18
17
16
15
24
23
21
20
24
22
21
20

POST LENGTHS

10'-0" POST SPACING
WALL
10'-0"
20'-0"
WALL
HEIGHT
POST SPACING
POST SPACING
HEIGHT
(Feet)
20'-0" POST SPACING
CORNER POSTS
H-POSTS
H-POSTS
CORNER POSTS
(Feet)
WITHOUT
WITH
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
BARS
CAP
CAP
SIZE
SIZE
DIM
SIZE
SIZE
'A'
DIM
SIZE
SIZE
'A'
DIM
SIZE
SIZE
'A'
SOIL 2
SOIL 1
DIM
'A'
SOIL 2
SOIL 1
SOIL 2
SOIL 1
SOIL 2
SOIL 1
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
30"
36"
12
13'-012"
13'-212"
#4
#4
9'-5"
#5
#5
10'-2"
#7
#7
10'-4"
#7
#7
8'-4"
12
15
14
13
12
14
13
13
12
20
19
18
16
19
18
17
16
13
14'-012"
14'-212"
#5
#5
11'-2"
#5
#5
10'-2"
#7
#7
10'-4"
#7
#7
8'-4"
13
16
14
14
13
15
14
13
12
21
19
18
17
20
19
18
16
1
15'-2 2"
#5
#5
11'-2"
#5
#5
10'-2"
#8
#8
11'-10"
#8
#8
9'-10"
14
16
15
14
13
16
14
14
13
22
20
19
18
21
19
18
17
1
2"
#5
#5
11'-2"
#6
#6
11'-9"
#8
#8
11'-10"
#8
#8
9'-10"
15
17
15
15
14
16
15
14
13
22
21
20
18
22
20
19
18
1
2"
#6
#6
13'-9"
#6
#6
11'-9"
#8
#9
11'-3"
#8
#9
9'-3"
16
17
16
15
14
17
16
15
14
23
21
20
19
22
21
20
18
1
2"
#6
#6
13'-9"
#7
#7
13'-4"
#9
#8
12'-10"
#9
#8
10'-10"
17
18
17
16
15
17
16
15
14
24
22
21
19
23
22
20
19
20
24
22
21
20
21
25
23
22
20
14
1
15'-0 2"
15
16'-0
16
17'-0
17
18'-0
18
19
1
2"
16'-2
1
2"
17'-2
1
2"
18'-2
19'-0
1
2"
19'-2
1
2"
#6
#6
13'-9"
#7
#7
13'-4"
#9
#10
11'-7"
#9
#10
9'-7"
18
19
17
16
15
18
17
16
15
25
23
22
1
20'-0 2"
1
20'-2 2"
#7
#7
15'-4"
#7
#7
13'-4"
#10
#9
14'-3"
#10
#9
12'-3"
19
19
18
17
16
18
17
16
15
25
23
22
15'-0" POST SPACING

20
21
21'-0
1
2"
21'-2
1
22'-0 2"
22'-2
1
2"
23'-2
23'-0
22
12:
42:
27 PM
SOIL 1
SOIL 2
SOIL 1
15'-0" POST SPACING
1
2"
#7
#7
15'-4"
#8
#8
14'-10"
#9
#9
15'-3"
#9
#9
12'-3"
20
20
18
17
16
19
18
17
16
23
21
20
19
23
22
20
19
1
2"
#7
#8
14'-10"
#8
#8
14'-10"
#10
#9
15'-3"
#10
#9
14'-3"
21
20
19
18
17
20
18
17
16
24
22
21
19
24
22
21
20
1
2"
#7
#8
14'-10"
#8
#8
14'-10"
#10
#10
16'-7"
#10
#10
13'-7"
22
21
19
18
17
20
19
18
17
24
23
21
20
24
23
21
20
TABLE NOTE:
2. See Contract Plans for project wind speed.

3. Soil 1 = Loose Granular Soil, N = 4 to 9;
12/17/2015
Soil 2 = Medium Dense Granular Soil, N = 10 to 40.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
PILE DEPTH & REINFORCING SUMMARY

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST NOISE WALLS
NO.
5200
SHEET
NO.
16 of 16
3
4"
1
2"
Intermediate
Deck Joint *
top of Railing/Noise Wall (Equally
Open Joint **
Coping (Typ.)
Railing End Transition required when
Railing/Noise Wall shown
Guardrail called for in Roadway Plans
continuing on Roadway
Gutter Line
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Guardrail (when called for in Roadway Plans)
PLAN (BRIDGE MOUNTED RAILING/NOISE WALL SHOWN,
CROSS REFERENCE:
WALL OR FOOTING MOUNTED RAILING/NOISE WALL SIMILAR)
For Detail "B" and V-Groove Lettering Detail see

Sheet 2.
Superstructure
For Section C-C and Detail "A" see Sheet 5.
Support
For Wall mounted Railing/Noise Wall Details see Index No. 5212.
For Footing mounted Railing/Noise Wall Details see Index
Spacing
* 10'-0" Maximum
1
2"
Nos. 5213 (T-Shaped), 5214 (L-Shaped) or 5215 (Trench).
V-Groove
Railing/Noise Wall shown

3
4"
1
2"
Intermediate
V-Groove in both faces and top of
continuing on Roadway
Deck Joint *
Railing/Noise Wall (Constructed plumb

Open Joint **
and equally spaced between open joints)
Noise Wall End Taper (see Sheet 3) required when Noise Wall
is terminated on a Bridge or Approach Slab, or within the clear
zone of the Roadway. See Plans for location of End Taper.
14'-8"
6" Min.
5"
3
4"
V-Groove
See Detail "B"
Guardrail (when called
for in Roadway Plans)
NAME OR DATE
BRIDGE NUMBER
3"
2"
3"
10"
(10" Thick wall section for Noise Wall End Taper, see Section C-C)
for Pre-cured
Silicone Sealant
Top of Shoulder, Sidewalk

at Railing Face

Begin or End Bridge
Bridge Deck
See Detail "A" for Railing End Transition
when Guardrail called for in Roadway Plans
T-Shaped Spread Footing Shown,
ELEVATION OF INSIDE FACE OF RAILING/NOISE WALL (BRIDGE MOUNTED RAILING/NOISE WALL SHOWN,
WALL OR FOOTING MOUNTED RAILING/NOISE WALL SIMILAR) (Reinforcing Steel not shown for clarity)
L-Shaped Spread Footing , Trench

Footing Similar and Junction Slab similar
* On Bridges see Superstructure and Approach Slab Sheets for actual dimensions and joint orientation. Open
Railing/Noise Wall Joints at Deck Expansion Joint locations shall match the dimensions of the Deck Joint.
For treatment of Railing/Noise Walls on skewed bridges see Index No. 420. Deck Joint at Begin Bridge
**
3
4"
Intermediate Open Joints shall be constructed plumb and provided at :
(1)
- Superstructure supports where slab is continuous.
(2)
- Construction Joints for Junction Slabs and Footings.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
12:
46:
25 PM
or End Bridge shown, Deck Joint at Pier or Intermediate Bent, Junction Slab or Footing similar.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC RAILING/NOISE WALL (8'-0")
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5210
1of 5
TRAFFIC RAILING/NOISE WALL NOTES
CROSS-SLOPE
and Footing mounted Railing/Noise Wall, concrete shall be Class II for slightly aggressive environments and
MARK
SIZE
5'-7"
7'-9"
S1
As Reqd.
S2
7'-3"
5'-1"
7'-7"
Class IV for moderately or extremely aggressive environments.

NAME, DATE AND BRIDGE NUMBER : For Railing/Noise Wall on bridges, the Name and Bridge Number shall
be placed on the Traffic Railing so as to be seen on the driver's right side when approaching the bridge. The Date
shall be placed on the driver's left side when approaching the bridge. The Name shall be as shown in the General Notes
in the Structures Plans. The Date shall be the year the bridge is completed. For a widening when the existing railing
is removed, use both the existing date and the year of the widening. Black plastic letters and figures 3" in height may
be used, as approved by the Engineer, in lieu of the letters and figures formed by " V-Grooves. V-Grooves shall
be formed by preformed letters and figures.
BARRIER DELINEATORS: Barrier Delineators shall meet Specification Section 993. Install Barrier Delineators 2'-4"
above the riding surface at the spacing shown in the table below. Barrier Delineator color (white or yellow) shall
HIGH GUTTER
0% to 2%
90
90
90
90
2% to 6%
93
87
87
93
6% to 10%
96
84
84
96
90
90
90
90
LENGTH
BRIDGE
CONCRETE : For Railing/Noise Wall on bridges see General Notes. For Wall
LOW GUTTER
BRIDGE
they shall not be constructed perpendicular to the roadway surface. Slip forming is not permitted.
M OUNTED
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS : The Traffic Railing/Noise Wall and joints shall be constructed plumb,
WALL & FOOTING

MOUNTED
V (Bridge
and Wall)
V (Footing)
5S1
Length as Required
5S2
7'-3"
match the color of the near edgeline. The cost of the Barrier Delineators shall be included in the Contract Unit
6 "
Price for the Traffic Railing/Noise Wall.
BARS 5S1 & 5S2

3"
Portion of
Bar 5V
1
'
-2
"
Discard
2'
-4"
Portion
5430'
Distance Spacing (Ft.)
< 4'
40'
6"
2. Apply sealant prior to any Class V
Bridge & W all m ounted
(
Index No. 5213)
End Taper)
5 "
Footing m ounted
BAR 5P
Silicone Sealant in accordance
(
Index Nos. 5210 & 5212)
STIRRUP
(Field Cut for
Sealant (4" wide)
BAR 5R
the open joint with Pre-cured
seal the lower 6" portion of
(
Index No. 5213)
Pre-cured Silicone
1. At Intermediate Open Joints,
10"
Footing m ounted
5 "
(
Index Nos. 5210 & 5212)
None Required
(
Index No. 5213)
> than 8'
80'
Footing m ounted
4' to 8'
(
Index Nos. 5210 & 5212)
to Face of Railing
9"
2'
-0"
Edge of Travel Lane
2'
-4"
SPACING
3'
-7"
2'
-5"
BARRIER DELINEATOR
3'
-7"
7'
-9"
to be used
finish coating and remove all curing
END STIRRUP BAR 5V
compound and loose material from

2"
the surface prior to application of
STIRRUP BAR 5V
bonding agent.
To Be Field Cut (One Required

3. The cost of the Pre-cured Silicone
Sealant shall be included in the Contract
3. Bars 5R shall be one continuous or lap spliced bar. No mechanical couplers are permitted.
Unit Price for the Traffic Railing.
4. Bars 5S1 may be continuous or spliced at the construction joints. Lap splices for Bars 5R and 5S1
DETAIL "B" - SECTION AT INTERMEDIATE OPEN JOINT
5. The Contractor may use Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) when approved by the Engineer. WWR
must consist of deformed wire meeting the requirements of Specification Section 931.
ESTIMATED TRAFFIC
6. See Index Nos. 5214 and 5215 for Bars 5V and 5T in L-shaped and Trench footings.
12:
46:
26 PM
ITEM
QUANTITY
Concrete (Railing)
CY/LF
0.104
Concrete (Noise Wall)
CY/LF
0.145
Reinforcing Steel (Typical)
LB/LF
78.57
45
45
CROSS REFERENCE:
Paint Recessed Surfaces Black
Additional Reinf. @ Open Joint
LB
430.24
SECTION THRU RECESSED "V" GROOVE TO
(The above quantities are based on the bridge mounted typical
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
For locations of Detail "B",

see Sheet 1.
FORM INSCRIBED LETTERS AND FIGURES
section, 2% deck cross slope and railing on low side of deck.)
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
UNIT
"
RAILING/NOISE WALL QUANTITIES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5210
2 of 5
4" (Space may be increased to 6" to
lap Bars 5P & 5R on opposite side

of remaining Bars 5V, as required)
43'-0" End Taper
of Open Joint
3"
6" Spacing (Typ.)
3 "
5 "
18 sp. @ 4" = 6'-0"
18 sp. @ 4" = 6'-0"
(Typical at open joints)
4 sp. @ 6"
6" Spacing (Typ.)
Bars 5S2
Bars 5R (Typ.)
5P & 5R
only
Begin Bars 5R
Bars 5S1
Spacing Bars
2 " Min.
Bars 5P
Field bend top Bars
Bars 5S1 *
Bars 5S2
each face, paired
5S1 as required
with Bars 5P
32" F-Shape Traffic Railing continued

on Bridge, Approach Slab and Retaining
5'
-4"
Wall, or Barrier Wall continued on Roadway.
Construction
Joint Reqd. **
" Open
3'-0" **
" V-Groove
Joint
Bars 5R
Bars 5P
(Typ.) *
2'
-8"
(Typ.)
4" **
(
Top)
2" Cov
er
Bars 5R *
Bars 5P
Bars 5V
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bars 5S2
Bars 5S2
" Int. Open Joint

2 "
Bars 5V @ 6" Spacing (Typ.)
or Deck Joint
Bars 5V (Typ.)
Junction Slab shown, Footing similar
Junction Slab shown, Footing similar
Bars 5V @ 6" Spacing (Typ.)
6" Spacing (Typ.)
3" Min.
Spacing
Bars 5V ***
ELEVATION OF RAILING/NOISE WALL REINFORCING STEEL
ELEVATION OF RAILING/NOISE WALL END TAPER (ADJACENT TO TRAFFIC RAILING
(INTERMEDIATE OPEN JOINT SHOWN, DECK JOINT SIMILAR)
SHOWN, GUARDRAIL ATTACHMENT SIMILAR SEE DETAIL "A", SHEET 5)
(Bars 5S1 in Railing not shown for clarity)
12:
46:
27 PM
NOTES:
*
Field Cut Bars 5R & 5S1 to maintain clearance.
**
Terminate " V-groove at construction joint & cast top of

railing with End Taper.
*** Bar spacing shown for Bars 5V applies only to bridge mounted
Railing/Noise Wall. See Index No. 5212 for spacing of Bars 5V
in junction slabs and Index Nos. 5213 (T-Shaped), 5214 (L-Shaped)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
or 5215 (Trench) for Bars 5V spacing in footings.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5210
3 of 5
Spacing Bars 5S1 & 5S2

1 "
1'
-0"
2 "
8 "
2" Cover
10"
CROSS REFERENCE:
9 ~ Bars 5S2
For locations of Section A-A see Sheet 1.
at each side
NOTES:
of open joints,
2" Cover
shown as (
For location of View B-B, see Sheet 5.
1. Bottom Bars 5S1 and End Bar 5V are not present in
L-Shaped (Index No. 5214) or Trench (Index No. 5215)
(Typ.)
Footings. For Bridge Mounted installations, see the

2" Cover
10 sp. @
5'
-4"
6" = 4'
-11 "
1 "
Bars 5R
Superstructure Sheets for Deck Steel.
Varies (1 " Max.)
Bars 5S1 (Typ.)
Thickened section required
8'
-0"
for Textured Form Liner,

1'-6"
when called for in the Plans

1'-2"
(See Plans for details)

7"
10 "
2"
3" Cover
Overlay
Textured Form
for in the plans
1 "
Bars 5P
shown (See Detail "A"

Riding
for bar spacings)

1 "
Const. Joint
Asphalt
Em bed.
6" M in.
Coping
2 "
Rotate Bars 5V as
Surface
Overlay
Approach
Deck
Cut) (See Note 1)
(1" Max. amplitude)
Required
Bridge
Bars 5S1 (Typ.)
End Bar 5V (Field
Bars 5S1
(See Note 1)
8" Min. Bridge Deck

6"
6 "
Dim. A
2" (
M ax.
)
5"
Liner when called
3
"Co
v
e
r
(
Si
d
e
s
)
2'
-8"
Asphalt
2'
-6" (
M in. with
7 "
1"
10
"
R
Future
1"
3
"
1'
-0"
3 "
(Typ.)
Bars 5V
4"
Guardrail Bolts
Bars 5S1
1"
3 " 4 " 2"
2" Cover (Top)
" V-Groove
3"
2" (
M ax.
)
Overlay
10 "
Thrie Beam
Co
v
e
r
7"
Future Asphalt
1'
-10"
2'
-8" (
Traffic Railing)
2"
(
Top)
5"
2" Cov.
3"
6" Min.
Embed.
Bars 5P (See
Slab
Detail "A", Sheet 5
thickness, 10" Min. over
for bar spacings)
exterior girder if
Bars 5S1 (Field
Dim. A exceeds 1'-6"
Bend as Reqd.)
Edge of Approach
(See Note 1)
Slab (Coping)
Prestressed Concrete
12:
46:
27 PM
Beam or Steel Girder
VIEW B-B
END VIEW OF RAILILNG END TRANSITION FOR
SECTION A-A
GUARDRAIL ATTACHMENT AT END OF APPROACH SLAB
(Section Thru Bridge Deck Shown, Section Thru
(Flexible Pavement Approach Slab Shown, Rigid Pavement
Approach Slab, Junction Slab or Footing Similar)
Approach Slab, Junction Slab or Footing Similar)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
TYPICAL SECTION THRU TRAFFIC RAILING/NOISE WALL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5210
4 of 5
2'-8 "
6" spacing (Typ.)
3 sp. @ 5 "
6" spacing (Typ.)
Spacing Bars 5R
6 "
6"
Spacing Bars 5P
3"
DETAIL "A" NOTES:

= 1'-4 "
shown as (
Bars 5S1
1.
1 "
"
Bars 5R (Typ.)
Coping
bolt holes. Pair Bars 5R with Bars 5P as shown. Clearance of Bars 5P, 5R & 5V to guardrail bolt holes shall be
checked to prevent cutting of bars if holes are to be drilled. Shift bars locally where conflicts occur.
1'
-2"
1'
-6"
Bars
5P
Rotate Bars 5P & 5V in Railing End Transition to maintain cover. Begin placing Railing Bars 5P and 5V at
the railing end and proceed toward the guardrail (thrie beam) terminal connector to ensure placement of guardrail
2.
For Guardrail connection details see Design Standards Index No. 400.
3.
Omit Raililng End Transition if a 32" F-Shape Traffic Railing is used beyond the End Taper. See the Plan Sheets.
If Railing End Transition is omitted, space Bars 5P, 5R & 5V at 6" as shown above (Typ.).
4.
For L-Shaped (Index No. 5214) and Trench (Index No. 5215) footings, Bars 5V and 5T replace Bars 5V as shown at
left. Details and bar spacing shown apply except that it is not necessary to rotate Bars 5V and 5T to maintain
(Typ.)
cover and there is no field cut End Bar 5V.
Bottom Bars 5S1 are not present in L-Shaped or Trench Footings.
4"
Bars 5S1
5.
Approach Slab or Junction

Slab shown, Footing similar
Thrie Beam
1'-1 "
Guardrail Bolts
Begin or End
Approach Slab
3'-0"
PLAN - RAILING END TRANSITION

(Showing Bars 5P, 5R, and Bars 5S1) (Bars 5V,
Noise Wall & Reinforcement not shown for Clarity)
Outside Face of
Traffic Railing
1 "
3 sp. @ 5 "
6 "
6 "
3 "
Outside Face of
Spacing Bars 5V
Noise Wall
Coping
1'
-2"
B
Bars
1'
-6"
"
End Bar 5V
10"
"
Field Cut
Coping
Bars 5S1
8 "
1 "
= 1'-4 "
"
6" spacing (Typ.)
5V
(Typ.)
Gutter Line
Bars 5R
Field Bend to
(See Note 5)
maintain cover
4"
Bars 5S1 (Bottom)
(Typ.)
Inside Face
Slab or Junction Slab
of Soundwall
shown, Footing similar
Bundle 2 Bars 5V
& rotate as Reqd.
Approach Slab or Junction

Slab shown, Footing similar
Thrie Beam
Guardrail Bolts
SECTION C-C
1'-1"
THRU NOISE WALL END TAPER

Begin or End
Approach Slab
12:
46:
28 PM
3'-0"
PLAN - RAILING END TRANSITION

CROSS REFERENCE:
(Showing Bars 5V and Bars 5S1) (Bars 5P, 5R,
For location of Detail "A" see Sheet 1.
Noise Wall & Reinforcement not shown for Clarity)
For location of Section C-C see Sheet 1.
12/17/2015
For View B-B see Sheet 4.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
DETAIL "A"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5210
5 of 5
" Open Joint
T-Shaped
(See Note 5)
of Traffic Railing/Noise Wall
Spread Footing
Begin or End 8'-0" Traffic Railing/Noise Wall or End Taper (See Note 6)
" Open Joint

(See Note 5)
Coping
(See Note 5)
Begin or End 14'-0" Traffic Railing/Noise Wall
Spread Footing
(See Note 6)
T-Shaped Spread Footing
" Open Joint
T-Shaped
Outside Edge of Traffic Railing
Gutter Line
8'-0" Traffic Railing/Noise Wall continuing or
CROSS REFERENCE:
PLAN (Reinforcing Steel not shown for clarity)
For Section A-A, Detail "A" and Estimated
End Taper on Approach Slab or Roadway (shown)
TRAFFIC RAILING/NOISE WALL NOTES
(T-Shaped Spread Footing Shown, L-Shaped
Quantities, see Sheet 3.
Spread Footing and Trench Footing Similar)
For Expansion Joint Detail in Footing, see Index
1. This railing has been structurally evaluated to be equivalent or greater in strength to a safety
shape/Noise Wall combination railing which has been crash tested to NCHRP Report 350 TL-4 Criteria.
No. 5213, 5214 or 5215.
Spacing " Open Joint
Varies (50'-0" Minimum, 90'-0" Maximum) (See Note 5)
2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS:
Construct the Traffic Railing/Noise Wall and joints plumb; do not
construct the Traffic Railing/Noise Wall perpendicular to the roadway surface. Slip forming is not
30'-0" Maximum (See Note 6)
Spacing " V-Groove
permitted.
3. CONCRETE: Use Class II concrete for slightly aggressive environments. Use Class IV concrete for
" Open Joint
of Traffic Railing/Noise Wall
(See Note 5)
moderately or extremely aggressive environments. Concrete will be in accordance with Specification

" Open Joint
(See Note 5)
(See Note 6)
Section 346.
4. Construct " Open Joints plumb and perpendicular or radial to Gutter Line. Provide at 90'-0" maximum
intervals as shown. " Open Joint locations are to coincide with " Expansion Joints in footings.
5. Construct " V-Grooves plumb and provide at 30'-0" maximum intervals as shown. Space V-Grooves
equally between " Open Joints and/or Begin or End Traffic Railing/Noise Wall. V-Groove locations
are to coincide with V-Groove locations in footings.
6. 14'-0" Noise Wall End Taper is required when Railing/Noise Wall is adjacent to an 8'-0" Traffic
Railing/Noise Wall and may be used when an 8'-0" Traffic Railing/Noise Wall End Taper is provided
(see Index No. 5210 for details). See Roadway Plans for Traffic Railing/Noise Wall End Treatment.
14'-0" Noise Wall End Taper
7. Work this Standard Drawing with Index No. 5210 - Traffic Railing/Noise Wall (8'-0") and one or
(See Sheet 2 and Note 6).
more of the following:
See Plans for location of End Taper.
a. Index No. 5213 - Traffic Railing/Noise Wall T-Shaped Spread Footing,

b. Index No. 5214 - Traffic Railing/Noise Wall L-Shaped Spread Footing or
c. Index No. 5215 - Traffic Railing/Noise Wall Trench Footing.
Begin or End
8'-0" Traffic
Railing/Noise
Begin or End Traffic Railing/Noise Wall
Wall or
End Taper
(See Note 7)
" V-Groove
See Detail "A"

for Mortar Plug
Shoulder or
Shoulder or
Roadway Pavement
Roadway Pavement
12:
46:
58 PM
" Expansion Joint in footing (Typ.)
8'-0" Traffic Railing/Noise Wall continuing or

End Taper on Approach Slab or Roadway (shown)
ELEVATION OF INSIDE FACE OF TRAFFIC RAILING/NOISE WALL

12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
(T-Shaped Spread Footing Shown, L-Shaped Spread Footing and Trench Footing Similar)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5211
1of 3
Begin or End 14'-0" Traffic Railing/Noise Wall

of remaining Footing Reinforcement,
3 " Min.
6" Spacing
End Taper (required when adjacent to an 8'-0" Traffic Railing/Noise Wall)
Open Joint
as required)
4" Min.
18 sp. @ 4" = 6'-0"
18 sp. @ 4" = 6'-0"
6" Spacing
Field bend top Bars 5S1 as required

Bars 5S2
Bars 5S2
Bars 5R (Typ.)
Bars 5S1 (See Note 1)
Spacing Bars
5P & 5R
(See Note 4)
" Open Joint

Bars 5S1
3 "
18 sp. @ 4" = 6'-0"


of remaining Footing Reinforcement,
to maintain minimum cover
as required)
8'-0" Traffic Railing/Noise Wall
Begin or End 8'-0" Traffic
(See Note 1)
Railing/Noise Wall
" Open Joint
(
Top)
2" Cov
er
Bars 5R
6'
-0"
continued on Approach Slab or Roadway
(See Note 3)
Bars 5R (Typ.)
(See Note 1)
Bars 5S2
8'
-0"
14'
-0"
(See Note 3)
" V-Groove
Bars 5P
(Typ.)
Footing Reinforcement @ 6" sp.

Shoulder or
(Tie to Bars 5P or 5R as shown)
Bars 5S2
Bars 5S2
Roadway Pavement
(Typ.) (See Note 2)
Top of Footing
T-Shaped Spread Footing,
(Const. Joint
L-Shaped Spread Footing
Required)
or Trench Footing
Footing Reinforcement
Bars 5S2
@ 6" sp. (Tie to Bars 5P
(See Note 3)
or 5R as shown) (Typ.)
(See Note 2)
ELEVATION OF TRAFFIC RAILING/NOISE WALL END TAPER
12:
46:
59 PM
ELEVATION OF TRAFFIC RAILING/NOISE WALL REINFORCING STEEL
NOTES:
1. Field Cut Bars 5R & 5S1 in Noise Wall End Taper as required to maintain minimum cover.
2. See Index Nos. 5213, 5214 and 5215 for footing reinforcement.
3. " Open Joint may be omitted when 8'-0" Railing/Noise Wall End Taper is adjacent to a
14'-0" Traffic Railing/Noise Wall End Taper as shown on Sheet 1. See Index No. 5210 for
12/17/2015
reinforcement details and spacing. Bars 5S2 are not required when " Open Joint is omitted.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
4. Bar spacing shown is along the Gutter Line.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5211
2 of 3

10"
1 "
1'
-0"
2 "
8 "
2" Cover
Spacing Bars 5S1 & 5S2
MARK
SIZE
LENGTH
5'-7"
13'-9"
S1
AS REQD.
S2
7'-3"
5S1
Length as Required
5S2
7'-3"
BARS 5S1 & 5S2
1 "
Bars 5R
6 "
13'
-9"
2'
-5"
21 ~ Bars 5S2 at each

side of open joints,
shown as ( ) (Typ.)
2" Cover
22 sp. @
11'
-4"
6" = 10'
-11 "
3"
14'
-0"
2" Cover
Varies (1 " Max.)
Bars 5S1 (Typ.)
Thickened section required

5 "
for Textured Form Liner,

1'-6"
when called for in the Plans
BAR 5R
(See Plans for details)

Gutter
7"
10 "
STIRRUP
(Field Cut for
BAR 5P
End Taper)
Line
Outside Edge of Traffic Railing
5"
2"
2" Cover (Top)

2. All reinforcing steel at the open joints will have a 2" minimum cover.
Bars 5S1
Footing
3"
3" Cover
Textured Form Liner when called
5"
ESTIMATED TRAFFIC RAILING BARRIER/NOISE WALL QUANTITIES
Bars 5P
Top of Footing
DETAIL "A" -
(Const. Joint Required)
3
4"
SECTION AT OPEN JOINT
Footing Reinforcement
(See Note 1)
NOTES:
1. See Index Nos. 5213, 5214 and 5215 for footing reinforcement.
2.
T-Shaped Spread Footing,

12:
47:
00 PM
Engineer. WWR must consist of Deformed wire meeting

the requirements of Specification Section 931.
for in the plans (1" Max. amplitude)
3"
7"
7 "
1"
10
"
R
(See Note 2)
4. The Contractor may use Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) when approved by the
1"
(Typ.)
3
"Co
v
e
r
Bars 5V
for Bars 5R and 5S1 will be a minimum of 2'-2".

Mortar Plug
3"
Bars 5S2
3. Bars 5R may be continuous or spliced at construction joints. Lap splices
1'
-0"
" V-Groove
1"
3 " 3 "3 " 4 " 2"
1'
-10"
2'
-8" (
Traffic Railing)
2"
Coping
L-Shaped Spread Footing,
At " Open Joints, plug the lower 3" portion of the open joint by filling it with
mortar in accordance with Specification Section 400.
ITEM
QUANTITY
Concrete (Traffic Railing)
CY/FT
0.104
Concrete (Noise Wall, excluding any thickening)
CY/FT
0.302
LB/FT
103.43
LB
761.91
Reinforcing Steel (Railing/Noise Wall) (Typical,

excluding Footing Reinforcement)
Additional Reinf. @ Open Joint (Railing/Noise Wall)
or Trench Footing
UNIT
SECTION A-A
CROSS REFERENCE:
TYPICAL SECTION THRU TRAFFIC RAILING/NOISE WALL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
For locations of Section A-A and Detail "A", see Sheet 1.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5211
3 of 3
TYPE 2 Junction Slab shown
(See Note 10)
6" *
" V-Groove
Expansion Joint (See
(See Note 7
details on this sheet)
& Detail "A")
6'-0"
6" *
* 6" Chamfer only required on TYPE 1 Junction Slab.
10 ~ Bars 4S4 @ 8" sp.
1" Dowel Load

Bars 5S3
6" *
Transfer Devices
1" Dowel Load Transfer
(TYPE 1 only)
2" Cover
6" *
Bars 5B
TYPE 1 Junction Slab shown
Devices (See Section B-B
Sides (Typ.)
for details)
4 ~ Bars 5C
Top of
Bars 5B (Field
(Top of Slab)
Junction Slab
Cut as required
(Required only
to clear Barrier
when Approach
Key (See Note 5)
1"
Wall Inlet) (Typ.)
Barrier Wall Inlet (Grate
Slab is skewed)
Approved metal
not shown for clarity)
or fiber cap
(See Design Standard

Index No. 218 for
6"
Slab
Bars 5U2
details)
Bars 5A @ 6" sp.
(Tie to Bars 5V)
2" Cover
(Typ.)
Typ. all Sides
M in.M in.
Approach
3s
p.
@
4 " 3" 4 "
3"
Skewed
Optional Shear
Gutter Line
Bars 5A
"
(See Note 10)
Bars 5L @ 1'-0" sp.

(Tie to Bars 5A)
(Typ.)
3"
Bars 5S1
3"
Spacing
Bars 5V
6" Spacing
6" Spacing (See Note 11)
Bars 5V
to Bars 5V)
Joint Filler (See Detail "A")**
Joint Filler (Typ. all Sides)
1'-0"
** Stay-In-Place Plastic
Expansion Joint
2" Cover @
1'-0"
Coping
4"
V-Groove Spacing ~ 30'-0" Max. (See Note 7)
" Preformed Expansion
Junction Slab
Bars 5U1 (Tie
1" Preformed Expansion
(Typ.)
Bottom of
11 ~ Bars 5U1 @ 6" sp.
Preformed Bond Breakers
are permitted to form joints.
Expansion Joints
" Expansion Joint Spacing ~ (30'-0" Min., 90'-0" Max.)
EXPANSION JOINT DETAIL

Expansion Joint
(See Note 4)
(Junction Slab expansion joints are required at
" Open Joint
" open joints in Traffic Railing/Noise Wall)
PLAN
NOTES
JUNCTION SLAB ADJACENT TO SKEWED APPROACH SLAB AND WITH BARRIER WALL INLET
1.
1
2"
7'-0
1
2"
(TYPE 1) or 7'-6
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS:
Construct the expansion joints and face
of coping plumb.
(TYPE 2)
2.
CONCRETE: Use Class II concrete for slightly aggressive environments.

Use Class IV concrete for moderately or extremely aggressive environments.
(See Note 12)

4 "
Top of C-I-P Coping

in accordance with Specification Section 350.
3" Cover
1 "
See Note 6
@ 6" sp.
4"
1
2"
6"
Bars 5U1
Bars 5B2
4" Cover (Bottom)
Joint Filler (Typ.)
Bars 5B (Typ.)
Bars 5B2 (TYPE 2)
1
2"
7.
Provide two layers of 30 Lb. Roofing Felt on top and Expanded Polystyrene
V-GROOVES: Construct " V-Grooves plumb and provide at 30'-0" maximum
intervals as shown. Space V-Grooves equally between " Expansion Joints
and/or Begin or End Junction Slab. V-Groove locations are to coincide with
V-Groove locations in the Railing/Noise Wall.
8.
FILL REQUIREMENTS: Shoulder or Roadway Pavement or Fill is required

on top of the junction slab for its entire length on the traffic side of the
Railing/Noise Wall. See Section B-B for details.
9.
Actual location & width vary depending on type of Retaining Wall used.
10. Field cut Bars 5A and 5B as required to maintain minimum cover for
Compacted Sand
skewed Approach Slab.
2" Cover
11. Spacing shown is along the Gutter Line.

2" Cover
Retaining Wall (MSE Wall

See
6"
Shown, other Wall Types Similar)
Note 9
SECTION A-A
12/17/2015
Shear Keys in Junction Slab are required when GFRP bars are used for Dowel
(" thick) on sides.
Bars 5U2 (Rotate as required

to clear junction slab reinforcing)
12:
47:
27 PM
6.
2'
-3"
1'
-0"
Coping
5.
Transfer Devices and are optional with steel dowel bars. Tongue Slope on Shear
6"
6" M in.
Em bed.
Bars 4S4 @ 8" sp.
EXPANSION JOINTS: Construct " Expansion Joints plumb, and either perpendicular
or radial to Gutter Line. Provide at 90'-0" maximum intervals as shown.
Bars 5B
Bars 5S1 (See Note 12)
Bars 5S3 (TYPE 1)
4.
Spacing
2" M in.
)
for details)
DOWELS: Dowel Load Transfer Devices will be hot-dip galvanized ASTM A36
of 22ksi in accordance with ASTM D7617. Install Dowel Load Transfer Devices
and Grate (See

Index No. 218
Riding Surface
3.
smooth round bars or GFRP smooth round bars with a minimum shear strength
1
4" M ax.
Roadway Pavement
C-I-P 8'-0" Traffic Railing/Noise Wall
Bars 5V
Barrier Wall Inlet
Shoulder or
Concrete will be in accordance with Specification Section 346.
1'-6 " Min.
(TYPE 2)
Varies,
1
2"
1'-6
Gutter Line
4'-5 "
(
1'
-1
1'-012" (TYPE 1)
12. See Index No. 5210 for Bars 5V and 5S1. See Plans for Junction Slab
width (TYPE).
13. Work this Index with Index 5210 - Traffic Railing/Noise Wall (8'-0").
CROSS REFERENCE:
SECTION THRU JUNCTION SLAB, BARRIER WALL INLET AND RETAINING WALL
For Section B-B and Detail "A", see Sheet 2.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
(TYPE 1 Junction Slab Shown, TYPE 2 Similar)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
JUNCTION SLAB
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5212
1of 2

" V-Groove (Typ.)
LENGTH
MARK
5B
Length as Required
5C
4'-8"

SIZE
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
3. Lap splices for Bars 5B will be a minimum of 2'-0".

4. The Contractor may use Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) when approved
8'-0"
9'-0"
AS REQ'D.
AS REQ'D.
4'-8"
5'-8"
4'-5"
4'-5"
S3
10'-0"
N/A
S4
3'-1"
4'-0"
" Preformed Expansion Joint Filler
by the Engineer. WWR must consist of Deformed wire meeting the
requirements of Specification Section 931.
BARS 5B & 5C
2'-0"
6'-2" (TYPE 1)
DETAIL "A"
1'
-10"
8"
7'-2" (TYPE 2)
Match top slope of
Junction Slab
1" DOWEL
3'-9"
BAR 5A
5
4'-9"
4'-9"
U2
12'-10"
12'-10"
1'-2 "
DOWEL
1" Smooth Bar
2'-0"
BAR 5L
1'-2 "
Top of Junction Slab
2'-0"
1 "
(Const. Joint Reqd.)

8" (TYPE 1)
5'-9"
1'
-9"
5'-8"
Coping
6" M in.
1'-6"
3" Cover
Railing/Noise Wall
Bars 5S1 (Field Bent)
6"
1'
-6"
1'
-6"
3'
-7"
8'-0" Traffic
1'-112" (TYPE 2)
Bars 5V
1'-6"
(Rotated)
BAR 5S3 (TYPE 1 only)
BAR 4S4
BAR 5U1
Em bed.
U1
(Showing Locations of " V-Grooves

and " Preformed Expansion Joint Filler)
BAR 5U2
End Stirrup
Junction Slab
Bar 5V
6'-6" (TYPE 1) or 7'-6" (TYPE 2)
1" Dowel Load
Gutter Line
expansion joints (Typ.)
1 "
NOTE: See Index No. 5210, Detail "A" for details.
Bars 5A @ 6" sp.
Shoulder or Roadway
Top of Junction Slab (Const. Joint Req'd.)
Bars 5S1
(See Note 4)
Bars 5B @ 1'-0" sp. (Typ.)
1
2"
Two Layers 30 Lb. Roofing Felt
Expanded Polystyrene (" Side(s))
3
4"
2'
-3"
(
C-I-P Coping)
Bars 5L @ 1'-0" sp.

Optional Keyway
2" M in.
)
Joint
(
1'
-1" M ax.
3" Cover
Varies,
6"
Min.
(See Note 6)
6"
6"
Key @
6"
Shear
ITEM
1'
-0"
2" Cover
3
4"
QUANTITY
Optional
Spacing Bars 5B
Spacing
4 sp. @ 1'-0" = 4'-0"
See Note 3
1" Dowels
Spacing Bars 5B2
3"
UNIT
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
0.268
0.305
Concrete (Junction Slab)
CY/FT
LB/FT
30.91
34.04
LB
21.36
21.36
Additional Reinf. @ Expansion Joint
NOTES:
1. Match Cross Slope of Travel Lane or Shoulder.
2. Vary Junction Slab slope based on roadway cross slope to maintain
Retaining Wall (Varies)
12:
47:
30 PM
ESTIMATED JUNCTION SLAB QUANTITIES
Coping
M in.
(
Se
e No
t
e1
)
4 "
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
asphalt or See Note 5)
Bars 5V (See Note 4)

3
4"
2" Cover (Top)
Pavement (Full depth
6"
TRANSITION FOR GUARDRAIL ATTACHMENT
1'-6 "
(Showing Bars 5V and Bars 5S1)
Transfer Devices at
1'
-0"
PARTIAL END VIEW OF RAILING END
5'-0" (TYPE 1) or 6'-0" (TYPE 2)
6"
Min.
a minimum 6" asphalt depth at the edge of the slab as shown.

3. Actual width varies depending on type of Retaining Wall used.
4. See Index No. 5210 for Bars 5V and 5S1.
5. For Rigid Pavement (Concrete), Junction Slab may be thickened to
4 sp. @ 1'-0" = 4'-0" (TYPE 1)
match finished grade.
5 sp. @ 1'-0" = 5'-0" (TYPE 2)
6. If slip forming is used, submit shop drawings for approval
SECTION B-B
showing 3" side cover with adjusted Typical Section dimensions.
TYPICAL SECTION THRU JUNCTION SLAB AND RETAINING WALL
12/17/2015
CROSS REFERENCE:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
For location of Section B-B, see Sheet 1.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
JUNCTION SLAB
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5212
2 of 2
" V-Groove (See Note 6
and Detail "A")
Field Cut Bars 5B as required to

Expansion Joint (See Detail this sheet)
maintain minimum cover for skewed
approach slab
1" Dowel Load Transfer Devices
Bars 5B
Skewed
Approach
Bars 5B (Field
Bars 5U
Cut as required
Slab
Index No. 218 for details)
Field Bend Bars 5A as
to clear Barrier
Wall Inlet) (Typ.)
Devices (See Section
Top of
B-B for details)
Spread Footing
2" Cover
required to maintain
Typ. all Sides
minimum cover
Gutter Line
Bars 5S1
(See Note 8)
Approved metal
or fiber cap
Coping
" Open Joint
2" Cover
"
Bottom of
Sides (Typ.)
Spread Footing
B
Spacing
4"
3"
Bars 5V @ 6" sp.
Bars 5A (Typ.)
Joint Filler
(Tie to Bars 5A)
6" Spacing
(Typ.) (See Note 8)

Bars 5A
1'-0"
1'-0"
2 "
2" Cover @
11 ~ Bars 5A @ 6" Spacing

Expansion Joint
(Field cut to Clear Inlet)
Expansion Joints
" Expansion Joint Spacing ~
Expansion Joint
(50'-0" Min., 90'-0" Max.) (See Note 4)
PLAN
(Spread Footing expansion joints are required at
SPREAD FOOTING ADJACENT TO SKEWED APPROACH SLAB AND WITH BARRIER WALL INLET
8'-9"
NOTES
4'-4 "
4'-4 "
1. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS:
Construct the Spread Footing level transversely and expansion joints
plumb; do not construct the spread footing perpendicular to the roadway surface. Slip forming is not
1'-4 "
Barrier Wall Inlet and
Gutter Line
3'-0"
permitted.
2. CONCRETE: Use Class II concrete for slightly aggressive environments. Use Class IV concrete
Coping
for moderately or extremely aggressive environments. Concrete will be in accordance with
Grate (See Design

Standard Index No. 218
Bars 5V
for details)
(See Note 8)
14'-0" or 8'-0" Traffic Railing/Noise Wall
3. DOWELS: Dowel Load Transfer Devices will be ASTM A 36 smooth round bar and hot-dip galvanized
in accordance with Specification Section 962. Install Dowel Load Transfer Devices in accordance with
Top of Spread Footing

Sl
o
p
e
Bars 5B (Typ.) (See Note 9)
Va
r
i
e
s
4. Construct " Expansion Joints plumb and perpendicular or radial to Gutter Line. Provide at 90'-0"
maximum intervals as shown.
5. Provide and install Preformed Expansion Joint Filler in accordance with Specification Section 932.
1'
-0"
Bars 5A @ 6" sp.
1" Preformed
3"
Expansion
Bars 5B
Joint Filler
6. Construct " V-Grooves plumb and provide at 30'-0" maximum intervals as shown. Space V-Grooves
equally between " Expansion Joints and/or Begin or End Spread Footing. V-Groove locations are to
coincide with V-Groove locations in the Railing/Noise Wall.
7. FILL REQUIREMENTS: Shoulder or Roadway Pavement or Fill is required on top (1'-0" minimum depth)
(Typ.)
for the entire length of the spread footing on both sides of the Railing/Noise Wall. See Section B-B
Bars 5U (Rotate
for details.
1'
-0"
as required to clear
footing reinforcing)
8. See Index No. 5210 for Bars 5V and 5S1.

9. Place 6 ~ Bars 5B inside Stirrup Bars 5V as shown.
11. Work this Standard Drawing with one or both of the following:
12:
47:
46 PM
a. Index No. 5210 - Traffic Railing/Noise Wall (8'-0").

b. Index No. 5211 - Traffic Railing/Noise Wall (14'-0").
Bars 5S1
(See Note 8)
Bottom of Spread
Footing (Level
SECTION A-A
3" Cover (Bottom)

Transversely)
12/17/2015
SECTION THRU SPREAD FOOTING AND BARRIER WALL INLET
CROSS REFERENCE:
For Section B-B and Detail "A", see Sheet No. 2.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
(Bars 5P, 5R and 5S1 in Traffic Railing/Noise Wall not shown for clarity)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TRAFFIC RAILING/NOISE WALL
DESIGN STANDARDS
T-SHAPED SPREAD FOOTING
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5213
1of 2

7'-0"

MARK
SIZE
6'-8"
AS REQD.
11'-0"
DOWEL
1" Smooth Bar
2'-0"
5A
6'-8"
5B
Length as Required
2'-7"
LENGTH
1'-4 "
3'-0"
Coping
Gutter Line
Bars 5V (See Note 3)
BARS 5A & 5B
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
(
Se
e No
t
e1
)

Riding Surface
Spacing Bars 5B
Sl
o
p
e
Roadway or
Bars 5B (Typ.)
Shoulder
(See Note 2)
3"
6"
1'
-0"
2'-0"
3"
2'
-8"
Va
r
i
e
s
Fill
Pavement
Bars 5B (Typ.)
BAR 5U
6"
1'
-0"
5'-8"
1" DOWEL
6"
Bars 5S1
(See Note 3)
Bars 5A @ 6" sp.
at expansion joints (Typ.)
3" Cover (Bottom)

Bottom of Spread Footing (Level Transversely)

4. The Contractor may use Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) when approved by the Engineer.
Spacing 1"
6"
6 sp. @ 1'-0" = 6'-0"
6"
Dowels
Spacing
1'-0 "
3 "
2 sp. @ 1'-0" = 2'-0"
2'-5"
2 sp. @ 1'-0" = 2'-0"
3 "
Bars 5B

(Const. Joint Req'd.)
SECTION B-B
14'-0" or 8'-0" Traffic
TYPICAL SECTION THRU SPREAD FOOTING
3" Cover
Railing/Noise Wall
Bars 5V (Rotated)
Coping
NOTES:
2.
Place 6 ~ Bars 5B inside Stirrup Bars 5V as shown.
3. See Index No. 5210 for Bars 5V and Bars 5S1.

Bars 5B (Field
Bent) (Typ.)
" V-Groove
ESTIMATED T-SHAPED SPREAD FOOTING QUANTITIES
Spread Footing
12:
47:
47 PM
ITEM
Bars 5S1 (Field
End Stirrup
Bent) (Typ.)
Bar 5V
UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete (Footing)
CY/FT
LB/FT
51.80
LB
37.38
0.311

Note: The reinforcing steel quantity accounts for the difference between
PARTIAL END VIEW OF RAILING END
the shorter Stirrup Bars 5V for junction slabs or bridges and
DETAIL "A"
the longer Stirrup Bars 5V for spread footings.
(Showing Bars 5V, Bars 5S1 and Bars 5B inside
12/17/2015
of Stirrup Bars 5V)

07/01/13
REVISIO N
LAST
REVISION
CROSS REFERENCE:
For location of Section B-B, see Sheet 1.
NOTE: See Index No. 5210, Detail "A" for details.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
T-SHAPED SPREAD FOOTING
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5213
2 of 2
" V-Groove (See Note 6 and Detail "A")

Expansion Joint (See Detail on Sheet No. 3)
Field Cut Bars 5L & 5B as required
to maintain minimum cover for
skewed approach slab
1" Dowel Load

Bars 5B
2" Cover
Bars 5S3
Transfer Devices
Sides (Typ.)
Bars 5U3
4 ~ Bars 5C (Top of Slab) (Required

Bars 5B (Field
only when Approach Slab is skewed)
Cut as required
to clear Barrier
Wall Inlet) (Typ.)
3"
4s
p.
@
Skewed
Approach
6"
Slab
2" Cover
Typ. all Sides
Gutter Line
Bars 5U2 @ 6" sp.

Bars 5V (Typ.)
Coping
Spacing
3"
3"
6" Spacing
(Tie to Bars 5U1)
Bars 5U1 @ 6" sp.
Bars 5T
Bars 5S4 (Tie
(Tie to Bars 5V
(Typ.)
to Bars 5U1)
(Typ.)
& 5T) (Typ.)
Bars 5V & 5T
4"
11 ~ Bars 5S3 &
2" Cover @
Bars 5S4 @ 6" sp.
Expansion Joints
" Expansion Joint Spacing ~

Expansion Joint
(50'-0" Min., 90'-0" Max.) (See Note 4)

" Open Joint
PLAN - OPTION B
SPREAD FOOTING ADJACENT TO SKEWED APPROACH SLAB AND WITH BARRIER WALL INLET
(Option A Similar)
NOTES
1. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: Construct the Spread Footing level transversely and expansion joints plumb;
do not construct the spread footing perpendicular to the roadway surface. Slip forming is not permitted.
2. CONCRETE: Use Class II concrete for slightly aggressive environments. Use Class IV concrete for moderately
or extremely aggressive environments. Concrete will be in accordance with Specification Section 346.
3. DOWELS: Dowel Load Transfer Devices will be ASTM A 36 smooth round bar and hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with Specification Section 962. Install Dowel Load Transfer Devices in accordance with Specification
Section 350.
4. Construct " Expansion Joints plumb and perpendicular or radial to Gutter Line. Provide at 90'-0" maximum
intervals as shown.
5. Provide and install Preformed Expansion Joint Filler in accordance with Specification Section 932.
6. Construct " V-Grooves plumb and provide at 30'-0" maximum intervals as shown. Space V-Grooves equally
between " Expansion Joints and/or Begin or End Spread Footing.
V-Groove locations are to coincide with
V-Groove locations in the Railing/Noise Wall.

7. FILL REQUIREMENTS: Shoulder or Roadway Pavement and Fill is required on the traffic side of the spread
footing for a distance of 4'-0" and the full length of the spread footing (3'-0" minimum depth) on the backside
of the spread footing for Option A.
Fill is required for a distance of 4'-0" on the backside of the spread
12:
49:
27 PM
footing and the full length of the spread footing (3'-0" minimum depth) on the traffic side of the spread
footing for Option B. See Typical Sections on Sheet Nos. 2 and 3 for details.
For Detail "A", see Sheet 3.

For Section A-A and Estimated
Quantities, see Sheet 4.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
CROSS REFERENCE:
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
L-SHAPED SPREAD FOOTING
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5214
1of 4
7'-0"
Roadway or Shoulder Pavement
1'-4 "
5'-7"
and Fill (4'-0" Min.)

Coping
Gutter Line
Bars 5V @ 6" sp. (lap

with Bars 5U1 as shown)
Bars 5T @ 6" sp. (lap
Spacing 1" Dowels

Riding Surface
Spacing Bars 5B
Sl
o
p
e
(See Note 1)
1'
-0"
8 "
3"
4'- 4 "
Fill
1'
-0"
1'
-0" = 2'
-0"
2 sp. @
3'
-0"
3"
Va
r
i
e
s
7'-0"
Gutter Line
Bars 5B (Typ.)
1'-4 "
5'-7"
(See Note 2)
Coping
Optional Const.
Bars 5U1 @ 6" sp.
Joint (See Note 4)
Bars 5B
Bars 5U2
(Typ.)
@ 6" sp.
1'
-0"
6"
14'-0" or 8'-0" Traffic

Railing/Noise Wall
Sl
o
p
e
6"
Va
r
i
e
s
1" Preformed
Expansion
at expansion joints (Typ.)
(See Note 4)
Joint Filler
3" Cover (Bottom)
Optional 3" Lip
Barrier Wall Inlet

and Grate (See
Design Standard
Index No. 218
Spacing 1"
6"
6 sp. @ 1'-0" = 6'-0"
for details)
6"
Dowels
Spacing
1'-9"
5 sp. @ 1'-0" = 5'-0"
3"
12:
49:
28 PM
Bars 5B
TYPICAL SECTION THRU SPREAD FOOTING - OPTION A
TYPICAL SECTION THRU SPREAD FOOTING AND BARRIER WALL INLET - OPTION A
(Reinforcing Steel not shown for clarity (See Note 3))
NOTES:
2. Place 10 ~ Bars 5B inside Bars 5U1 as shown.
3. For Reinforcing Steel spacing, see Typical Section Thru
12/17/2015
Spread Footing - Option A this Sheet.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5214
2 of 4

7'-0"
5'-7"
1'-4 "
Devices (See Typical
Expanded Shoulder/Fill (4'-0" Min.)
Section for details)

Coping
Gutter Line

Bars 5T @ 6" sp. (lap

Spacing 1" Dowels

Riding Surface
Spacing Bars 5B
Sl
o
p
e
Approved metal
Va
r
i
e
s
or fiber cap (Typ.)
3"
(See Note 1)
8 "
3"
2 sp. @
Bars 5B (Typ.)
1'
-0"
Fill
(See Note 2)
"
3'
-0"
Shoulder Pavement
1'
-0" = 2'
-0"
1'
-0"
Roadway or
Joint Filler
1'-0"
1'-0"
Expansion Joint
Bars 5B
Bars 5U1
(Typ.)
Bars 5U2 @ 6" sp.
Optional Const.
@ 6" sp.
Joint (See Note 3)
(Spread Footing expansion joints are required at
6"
1'
-0"
6"
3" Cover (Bottom)

Devices at expansion joints (Typ.)
Optional 3" Lip
(See Note 3)
" V-Groove
Spacing 1"
6"
6 sp. @ 1'-0" = 6'-0"
" V-Groove
6"
Dowels
Spacing
3"
5 sp. @ 1'-0" = 5'-0"
1'-9"
Bars 5B
TYPICAL SECTION THRU SPREAD FOOTING - OPTION B
DETAIL "A"
(Option A Shown, Option B Similar)
12:
49:
29 PM

NOTES:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5214
3 of 4

7'-0"
1'-1 "
4'-5 "
1'-4 "
Gutter Line
Coping
14'-0" or 8'-0" Traffic
Railing/Noise Wall
Bars 5T @ 6" sp.
(lap with Bars 5U1
Sl
o
p
e
as shown)
Va
r
i
e
s
3"
Barrier Wall Inlet and Grate
MARK
SIZE
LENGTH
AS REQD.
5'-6"
S3
3'-10"
S4
4'-3"
4'-3"
U1
8'-0"
U2
13'-11"
U3
12'-10"
3'-10"
DOWEL
1" Smooth Bar
2'-0"
5B
Length as Required
5C
5'-6"
BARS 5B & 5C
2'-0"
1" DOWEL
Bars 5B (Typ.)
Joint Filler
(See Note 1)
Bars 5B (Typ.)
7"
No. 218 for details)
3'
-7"
(See Design Standard Index
Bars 5U1 @ 6" sp.

Bars 5U3 (Rotate
Bars 5S3
as required to clear
@ 6" sp.
footing reinforcing)
Optional Const.
Joint (See Note 3)
6'-8"
5'-8"
BAR 5U2
BAR 5U3
Bars 5S4 @ 6" sp.
10"
10"
Optional 3" Lip
(See Note 3)
1
'
-2
"
6"
3" Cover (Bottom)
7"
6"
5430'
BAR 5S3
3'
-7"
4'
-3"
SECTION A-A
TYPICAL SECTION THRU SPREAD FOOTING AND BARRIER WALL INLET - OPTION B
2'
-8"
1'-0 "
NOTES:
6"
2. For Reinforcing Steel spacing, see Typical Section Thru

Spread Footing - Option B on Sheet 3.
7"
6"
ESTIMATED L-SHAPED SPREAD FOOTING QUANTITIES
12:
49:
30 PM
ITEM
UNIT
BAR 5S4
QUANTITY
Concrete (Footing)
CY/FT
0.414
LB/FT
85.53
LB
48.06
BAR 5V
BAR 5U1

CROSS REFERENCE:
(Subtract 12.69 lb/ft from typical reinforcing steel quantity shown on
For location of Section A-A, see Sheet 1.
Index No. 5210 to account for the absence of Stirrup Bars 5V and
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
4. Lap splices Bars 5T and 5V with 5U1 will be a minimum of 2'-2".

5S1 in L-Shaped Spread Footings.)
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
BAR 5T
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5214
4 of 4
NOTES
Roadway or Shoulder Pavement

1.
1'-4 "
Expanded Shoulder/Fill
and Fill (4'-0" Min.)
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS: Construct the Trench Footing and expansion

joints plumb; do not construct the Trench Footing perpendicular to the roadway
(4'-0" Min.)
Coping
Gutter Line
surface. Slip forming is not permitted.
A (14'-0" NW)
14'-0" or 8'-0" Traffic
Use Class VI concrete for moderately or extremely aggressive environments.
6'-1"
CONCRETE: Use Class II concrete for slightly aggressive environments.
Railing/Noise Wall
Concrete will be in accordance with Specification Section 346.

3.
8'-1"
DOWELS: Dowel Load Transfer Devices will be hot-dip galvanized ASTM A36 smooth
with Bars 5A as shown)
round bar or GFRP smooth round bars with a minimum shear strength of 22ksi in
B
accordance with ASTM D7617.
AS REQD.
Bars 5T @ 6" sp.
Spacing 1" Dowels
Install Dowel Load Transfer Devices in accordance with Specification Section 350.
4.
4'-3"
as shown)
Spacing Bars 5B
Provide at 90'-0" maximum intervals as shown.

V
3'-10"
DOWEL
1" Smooth Bar
2'-0"
5.
Shear Keys in footing are required when GFRP bars are used for Dowel Transfer
Riding Surface
Devices and are optional with steel dowel bars. Tongue Slope on Shear Key must
(See Note 8)
Top of Trench
Sl
o
p
e
Footing (Const.
Va
r
i
e
s
Joint Required)
6.
2'-0"
Length as Required
Construct " V-Grooves plumb and provide at 30'-0" maximum intervals as
shown. Space V-Grooves equally between " Expansion Joints and/or Begin or
9"
5B
(lap with Bars 5A
Construct " Expansion Joints plumb and perpendicular or radial to Gutter Line.
End Trench Footing. V-Groove locations are to coincide with V-Groove locations
Bars 5V and 5T ~
2.
in the Railing/Noise Wall.
8.
Match Cross Slope of Travel Lane or Shoulder.
9.
Spacing shown is along the Gutter Line.
LEGEND: NW = Traffic Railing
8'
-0" SW ~ 6'
-1"
Barrier/Noise Wall
ESTIMATED TRENCH FOOTING QUANTITIES

5430'
QUANTITY
LB/FT
56.84
69.36
LB
21.36
21.36
(Subtract 12.69 lb/ft from typical reinforcing steel quantity

" Preformed
shown on Index No. 5210 to account for the absence of
Expansion Joint
Stirrup Bars 5V and 5S1 in Trench Footings.)
Filler
Top of Trench
BAR 5A
BAR 5T
BAR 5V
Footing
" V-Groove
(Typ.)
2. All reinforcing steel at the open joints will have a 2"

minimum cover.
Optional Shear
Transfer Devices
Key (See Note 5)

Devices at expansion joints
(Typ.) (See Note 3)
2" Cover (Top)
3" Cover (Bottom & Sides)
(See Typical Section
4. Lap splices Bars 5T and 5V with 5U1 will be a
5. The Contractor may use Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) when

approved by the Engineer. WWR must consist of Deformed wire
meeting the requirements of Specification Section 931.
Bars 5A @ 6" sp.
and Note 3)
DETAIL "A"
minimum of 2'-2".
Optional Shear Key

(See Note 5)
(Showing Locations of "
Approved metal
V-Grooves and " Preformed
or fiber cap
Expansion Joint Filler)
3 "
10"
3"
Expansion Joint (See Detail this sheet)
Gutter Line
Bars 5A @ 6" (Lap with
Bars 5V & 5T) (Typ.)
1" Dowel Load
1'
-0" = 6'
-0"
Bars 5B (Typ.)
8'
-0" NW ~ 6 sp. @
0.439
CY/FT
1'
-0" = 8'
-0"
14'-0" NW
0.336
Concrete (Footing)
14'
-0" NW ~ 8 sp. @
8'-0" NW
8'
-0" NW ~ 6'
-6"
UNIT
14'
-0" NW ~ 8'
-6"
2'
-8"
ITEM
4'
-3"
14'
-0" SW ~ 8'
-1"
1
'
-2
"
1'
-0" = 3'
-0"
1" DOWEL
8'
-0" NW ~ 3 sp. @
BAR 5B
1'
-0" = 3'
-0"
FILL REQUIREMENTS: Fill is required a distance of 4'-0" on both sides for

the entire depth of the trench footing. See Typical Section for details.
14'
-0" NW ~ 3 sp. @
7.
2'
-4" M in. Em bedm ent
A (8'-0" NW)
LENGTH
2 "
SIZE
2 "
MARK
1" Dowel Load

Bars 5V (Typ.)
Trench Footing
Transfer Devices
1
2"
Bottom of
"
Trench Footing
3"
Bars 5T (Typ.)
Joint Filler
3 "
12:
49:
53 PM
Spacing
3"
6" Spacing
1'-0"
1'-0"
Bars 5V & 5T
2" Min. Cover @

Expansion Joint
Expansion Joints
90'-0" Max.) (See Note 4)

12/17/2015
Expansion Joint
LAST
07/01/14
REVISIO N
PLAN
3" Min.
8 "
" Expansion Joint Spacing ~ (50'-0" Min.,
REVISION
3 "
Bars 5B
3 "
Coping
TYPICAL SECTION THRU TRENCH FOOTING
(Trench Footing expansion joints are required at
(Bars 5P, 5R and 5S1 in Traffic Railing
Barrier/Noise Wall not shown for clarity)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRENCH FOOTING
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5215
1of 1
GENERAL NOTES:
MASONRY OPTION NOTES (CONT.):
1. Construct Perimeter Walls in accordance with Specification Section 534.
D. All cells with horizontal or vertical reinforcing bars most be fully grouted.
2. Choice of either Precast Option or Masonry Option is at the discretion of the Contractor.
E. Use reinforcing bar positioners to maintain vertical and horizontal bar placement.
Contractor must also select the desired foundation type. Modifications to this Index is restricted
F.
to those required for geometric needs only.
G. Joint Reinforcement: Use W 1.7 (9mm) galvanized ladder reinforcing spaced at 16 vertically. Provide special accessories
3. Post spacing is measured from centerline to centerline of foundation element. For this Index,
Fully grout first three courses of the wall.
for corners, intersections, etc. Joint reinforcing shall be continuous except it shall not pass through vertical masonry
control joints. Lap joint reinforcing a minimum of 6.
posts and foundation elements have been designed for 20 ft. spacings. Use post spacings
less than 20 feet only at changes in horizontal alignment, wall terminations or to accommodate
H. Construct expansion joints in the foundation at 90 foot maximum intervals, and directly below a wall control joint.
steep grades.
I. Dowel Load Transfer Devices will be ASTM A 36 smooth round bars hot-dip galvanized in accordance with Specification
4. See "Perimeter Wall Data Tables" in the plans for project requirements.
Section 962. Install Dowel Load Transfer Devices in accordance with Specification Section 350.
5. Field verify the locations of all overhead and underground utilities shown in the Wall Control
Drawings.
J. For spread footings, use a walk-behind compactor of at least 600 lbs. in weight. Obtain a minimum density of 95% of the
maximum dry density as determined by FM 1 T-180. Perform soil density tests at 100 foot intervals.
K. Protect walls during construction from soil, grout or mortar stains. Clean wall as work progresses by dry brushing to
remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
PRECAST OPTION NOTES:
L. Use soap and potable water to clean walls. If stain removal is necessary, use a cleaning method indicated in NCMA
6. WALL NOTES:
M. During construction, cover tops of walls, with waterproof sheeting at the end of each days work, or when construction is
TEK 8-2A applicable to the type of stain on the exposed surface.
A. Walls may consist of either a single height panel or two stacked panels. Minimum panel
height is 4'-3".
not in progress. Extend sheeting a minimum of 2 feet down each side and secure in place.
N. Comply with Hot Weather Requirements in ACI 530.1.
B. Only when reduced overhead clearance between posts prohibits installation of panels from
the top, side-installed panels are allowed. After panel is centered between posts, grout
between panel ends and posts.
13. MATERIALS:
A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): Provide normal weight blocks.
B. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Class II (fc = 3400 psi)
7. CONCRETE AND GROUT:
C. Mortar: Type S meeting requirements of ASTM C1329
A. Cast-in-Place and Precast Concrete: Class IV (f'c = 5500 psi)
D. Grout: Type S; coarse grout.
B. Grout for Auger Cast Piling: Minimum 28 Day Strength = 5500 psi
E. Aggregate for Grout: Meet the requirements of ASTM C404 or Specification Section 901 size 8 or 89.
C. Minimum Compressive Strength for Form Removal and Handling of Posts, Panels and
Precast Spread Footings:

i.
ii.
2,500 psi for horizontally cast post, panels and precast spread footings.
14. STORAGE OF MATERIALS:

A. Store CMUs on elevated platforms in a dry location or under cover.
2,000 psi for vertically cast panels or when tilt-up form tables are used for
horizontally cast panels.
If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials
8. REINFORCING STEEL:
that have become damp or exceded the manufacturers shelf life.
A. Concrete Cover: 1" unless otherwise noted.
C. Store masonry accessories and reinforcing to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.
B. In addition to the requirements of Specification Section 415, tie post and pile stirrups at
the following locations as a minimum:
i.
ii.
Post Stirrups - Tie at all four corner bars and at every third interior bar intersection.
Pile Stirrups - Tie to the main vertical reinforcing at alternate intersections.
9. NEOPRENE PADS:
Post Spacing (S)
Special Post Spacing
(20'-0" Max.)
(See General Note 3)
A. Neoprene Pads for Collar or Pedestal Bearing Points and between stacked panels
Top of Wall Elevation
may be either Plain Pads or Fiber Reinforced Pads, with a durometer hardness
2" min.
(Typ.)
between Grade 50 and Grade 80 in accordance with Specification Section 932-2.
1'-4"
max.
10. CASTING TOLERANCES:

Overall Height & Width:
B.
Thickness:
+/- "
+/- "
E.
Out of Square:
F.
Warping:
" per 6 ft., but not more than " total along any side
" per foot distance to nearest corner
1/240 panel dimension
11. PILING:
Construct Auger Cast Piling in accordance with the Plans and Specification Section 455.
(
8'
-0" m in.
)
Plane of side mold:

Openings:
W all H eight
C.
D.
G. Bowing:
+/- "
+/- "
Panel H eight (
H)
A.
Finished
Grade
6" Min.
6" Min.
MASONRY OPTION NOTES:
Single Height
Panel
12. WALL NOTES:
Bottom of Wall
A. Inspect construction in accordance with the International Building Code
Elevation
(IBC) Section 17.

B. Construct masonry walls with 8x8x16 block using a running bond pattern and concave
12:
50:
26 PM
tooled joints.
C. Make all elevation changes (steps) in footing and top of wall using full height blocks.
Make top of wall steps at pilasters exclusively. Footing steps may be made
between pilasters as necessary to maintain minimum soil cover.
GENERAL WALL ELEVATION

12/17/2015
(Precast Option with SIngle Height Panel Shown, Others Similar)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
GENERAL NOTES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERIMETER WALLS
NO.
5250
SHEET
NO.
1of 10
Typical Cap
1"
2'-3"
1"
*Corner Cap
1'-9" (*Corner Cap)
4"
2"
2 sp. @ 10" (Typical Cap)
2"
2"
2 sp. @ 1'-0" (*Corner Cap)
2"
1"
1'
-0" (
*Corner Cap)
10" (
Typical Cap)
2" Cover
" Chamfer (Typ.)
1" Recess
4"
1'-5"
4"
Typical Cap
4"
1'-9"
4"
*Corner Cap
PICTORIAL VIEW
2 sp. @
2 sp. @
*Corner Cap
2 "
2 "
1"
7"
9"
7"
1"
Typical Cap
1"
8"
11"
8"
1"
*Corner Cap
1'-0" R (all sides)
3" 1" 3"
4"
8"
4"
1'-5" (Typical Cap)
1"
TYPE "A" CAP DETAILS
N
o
.
4"
2'-3"
SECTION B-B
p
a
c
in
g
4
B
a
r
s
Bottom of Cap
1"
*Precast Option only
1" Recess in
Typical Cap
No. 4 Bars
4"
4"
1'
-5" (
Typical Cap)
1'
-9" (
*Corner Cap)
4"
4"
2'
-3"
1"
*Corner Cap
2'
-5"
1'
-11"
1"
*Corner Cap
Typical Cap
Typical Cap
2'
-1"
(Typ.)
1"
1 "
1"
2 "
1'-11"
2 "
1"
No. 4 Bars
1'-11"
1"
*Corner Cap
1"
3"
2'-5"
5"
Typical Cap
1"
1"
" Chamfer (Typ.)
2'-1"
No. 4 Bars
2" Cover
1"
1'-11"
1"
1"
2'-3"
1"
No. 4 Bars
" Chamfer (Typ.)

1" Recess
4"
1'-5"
4"
Typical Cap
4"
1'-9"
4"
*Corner Cap
Typical Cap
*Corner Cap
1"
B
SECTION B-B
3"
PICTORIAL VIEW
TYPE "B" CAP DETAILS
2" Cover
1 "
1"
1 "
1"
PLAN VIEW
1" Recess
" Chamfer (Typ.)
4"
1'-5"
4"
Typical Cap
4"
1'-9"
4"
*Corner Cap
1"
11"
11"
1"
Typical Cap
1"
1'-1"
1'-1"
1"
*Corner Cap
10"
Set cap on " Mortar
3" 1" 5"
VIEW A-A
No. 4 Bars
2" Cover
Top of post
1 "
cap about post/pilaster)
1"
Precast Cap (center
Bed (ASTM C 1329, Type S)
Precast Post
" Chamfer (Typ.)

1" Recess
4"
1'-5"
4"
Typical Cap
4"
1'-9"
4"
*Corner Cap
(
M in.
)
2"
12:
50:
27 PM
Top of
Wall
SECTION B-B
PICTORIAL VIEW
Wall
TYPE "C" CAP DETAILS
CAP PLACEMENT DETAIL

12/17/2015
(Type "B" Post Cap with Precast Option Shown)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
POST CAP DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERIMETER WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5250
2 of 10
Post/Pilaster
Post/Pilaster
Post/Pilaster Spacing (S)
Edge of Post/
Pilaster
Finished Grade
Grade to drain
Drainage Holes
4" Holes
Varies *
4" Hole
Bottom
Bottom
of Wall/Panel
of Wall/Panel
2'-0"
2'-0"
1'-4"
SECTION C-C
(Min.)
(Min.)
(Min.)
(Precast Option Shown, Masonry Option Similar)

Type A:
8"
Type B: 1'-0"
Type C: 1'-4"
Type D: 1'-8"
DRAINAGE HOLES TYPES A, B, C & D

* Hole Types A, B, C, & D refer to distance from
12:
50:
27 PM
bottom of panel/wall to center of the pipe.
NOTES:
1. Drainage holes may be formed with 4" NPS PVC pipe that
may remain in place.
2. See Wall Control drawings for number, Type and location/
12/17/2015
spacing of drainage holes.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
DRAINAGE DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERIMETER WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5250
3 of 10
See Detail "A"

Post & Pile
Post & Pile

Post Spacing (S)
S/4
Wall
Precast Post Cap (Typ.)
(20'-0" Max.)
Neoprene Pads
S/4
(See Sheet 2)
Top of wall
Top Panel
elevation
Chamfer as
Wall
Post
(Typ.)
Required
Front Face
DETAIL "A"
Finished Grade
Typical Post
(Back Face Chamfer Shown
Bottom of
Post
wall elevation
6" Min.
Front Face Chamfer Similar)
PIVOTING JOINT DETAILS
Precast Cap
2'-0" Max.
Top of Post
Bottom Panel
Auger Cast
(Type "C" Shown)
NOTE: Shop Drawings shall include specific pivoting point
Pile (Typ.)
details of panel ends at locations where the deflection
Top of Wall
Step Varies
Elevation
angle (2) between panels exceeds 20.
2"
3" x 4" x " Neoprene Pad

"
4 "
TYPICAL ELEVATION
(Front Face Shown, Textured Finish not Shown for Clarity)
(
M in.
)
(1'-4" Max.)
3"
Top Panel
Top Panel
4"
4 "
Front Face
ELEVATION STEP AT TOP OF WALL

Neoprene Pad
"
(Precast Panel Cap not Shown)

Front Face
SECTION D-D
SECTION E-E
3"
(Typ.)
Non-roadway face of wall/
Bottom Panel
R/W Line
5" (Typ.)
Post & Pile
Back Face of Panel

Bottom Panel
Varies
3" *
Post
4'
-0" M in.
Post
3" *
Post
1" *
Step Varies
1" *
(1'-4" Max.)
4" x 3" x "

Neoprene Pads
" Chamfer (Typ.)

" Min. ~ 4" Max.
Fill with Non-Shrink Grout

Auger Cast Pile
Roadway face of wall/
Front Face of Panel
L (Top-Installed)
S
* Nominal embedment (not including tolerances)
ELEVATION STEP AT BOTTOM OF WALL
12/17/2015
12:
50:
28 PM
TYPICAL PLAN
L (Side-Installed)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
PRECAST OPTION - TYPICAL DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERIMETER WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5250
4 of 10
F
Panel Length (L) (19'-2" Max.)
L
See Detail "B"
G
Panel H eight (
H)
* Vertical Steel ~ #4 Bars @ 10"

(As=0.24 in./ft.) (Typ.)
SECTION G-G
NOTE:
At the Contractors Option, Smooth or
Deformed Welded Wire Reinforcement
may be used (equal area).
Horizontal Steel ~ #4 Bars @ 7" (As=0.32 in./ft.) (Typ.)
F
TYPICAL PANEL ELEVATION
* In lieu of utilizing the standard pick up points below, panels may be cast vertically or cast horizontally
Reinforcing Mat
4 "
in the top of panels only and transported maintaining the vertical orientation. If these criteria are met,
the vertical steel may be reduced to #4 Bars @ 1'-3" (As=0.16 in./ft.).
Panel Length (L)
R= "
0.207 L
0.586 L
0.207 L
2" 2"
then tilted upright using tilt-tables prior to lifting from form. In this case, pick points must be placed
4 "
Texture
Formed Texture
Front Face
Typ.
DETAIL "B" - TOP-INSTALLED

(Typ. Both Ends)
4"
0.
207 H
Front Face
"
0.
586 H
Pick up points
12:
50:
29 PM
R= 1"
0.
207 H
4 "
Reinforcing Mat
2" 2"
Panel H eight (
H)
Max.
" Chamfer (Typ.)
STANDARD PICK UP POINTS FOR PANELS
SECTION F-F
Formed Texture
Front Face
DETAIL "B" - SIDE-INSTALLED

(Typ. Both Ends)
12/17/2015
(Panels shall be rotated about long axis only)
4"
Typ.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
PRECAST OPTION - TYPICAL PANEL DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERIMETER WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5250
5 of 10
1'-4"
Top of Wall
Top of Post
3"
1'-6"
4 "
1'
-2 "
5"
1"
M ax.
4 "
1'
-2 "
4 "
"
M ax.
Bars P2
" chamfer
(Typ.)
TYPICAL POST SECTION
SECTION I-I
(H Section)
Precast Collar
M ax.
1'-6"
1'-4"
3"
2"
6"
6"
6"
(Typ.)
" Chamfer (Typ.)
(
Typ.
)
6"
3"
2"
Bars A
1'
-2 "
1
2"
712" M ax.
Staggered
Bars A
Texture (Formed)
Bars P1 (Pairs)
Bars A
10 " Sp.
1'
-0" M ax.
Bars P2 @
(Typ.)
Wall (Typ.)
Roadway face of wall
Bars A
Bars P2
Bars A
1 " Cover
1 " Cover
(Typ.)
6"
Post &
Front Face Post
Bars P2 @
4'
-0"
Post
Post
3" Champfer
(Typ.)
SECTION H-H
SECTION I-I
(H Section - Above Collar)
(for Low Clearance Option)
TABLE 1
Bars P2
Wind
3"
Pile Length m inus 6" (

See Table 1)
Bars P2
(Typ.)
Bars A
Exposed Bars A
Bars A
Bars P1 @
R= "
1'
-2 "
Collar)
Collar
6"
6"
3"3"Bars P2 3"3" 712"
4"
7"
2"
Post Length (
H Section) (
See Note 1)
M ax.
M ax.
(Typ.)
Top of
1'
-6"
Bars P1
(
Precast
Collar)
1'
-6"
(
Precast
Collar
712" M ax.
Top of
Staggered
Bars P1 @
6"
(Typ.)
Bars P1
3"3"Bars P2 3"3" 712"
Post Length (
H Section) (
See Note 1)
2"
1
2"
4"
"
Top of Post
3"
Top of Wall
Speed
(MPH)
(Typ.)
Pile
Length
Bars A
Bars P1
thru P6
Bars S1
110
11'-6"
#5
#3
#4
130
13'-6"
#6
#3
#4
150
15'-0"
#7
#3
#4
Bars P2
BAR BENDING DETAILS
NOTES:
Bars A
1. See Shop Drawing for Post Lengths.
8"
11"
4 "
(Typ.)
12:
50:
29 PM
2"
11"
1'
-2 "
SECTION J-J
8"
TYPICAL POST
BAR P1
BAR P2
STANDARD POST REINFORCEMENT

12/17/2015
Bar Length = 2'-3"
Bar Length = 5'-0"
All bar dimensions in bending diagrams are out-to-out.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
All bars not shown in the bending diagrams are straight.
PRECAST OPTION - STANDARD POST DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERIMETER WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5250
6 of 10
BAR BENDING DETAIL

Post
Top of Wall per Plan
Top of Wall
Projected location of
30" Auger
4" x 3" x " Neoprene
Cast Pile
1'-0"
Bearing Pad (Typ.)

2"
2"
per Plan
Post, Collar and
Post, Collar and
Auger Cast Pile
R=1
1
"
Auger Cast Pile
Wall & Bearing

Pad (Typ.)
Precast Post
Precast Post
BAR S1
H
Bar Length = 6'-9"
(T
y
p
.)
Bearing Pad
Top of Precast
1 " M ax.
0" M in. to
5"
Finished Grade
Finished Grade
7"

7"
Top of
Precast Collar,
SECTION H-H
Elev. A
M in.
1 " M ax.
0" M in. to
Collar, Elev. A
(Reinforcing not Shown for Clarity)

6 ~ #8 Bars Spaced
Bars S1
Equally Around
~ 2 Sp. @ 6"
Bar S1 (Typ.)
30" Auger
Post & Pile

30" Auger
Cast Pile
Cast Pile
Post & Pile
Bars A
Post
& Pile
Bars S1 (Typ.)
r
ve
Co
4"
30" Auger
30" Auger
Cast Pile
Bars S1 @
Cast Pile
Exposed Precast Post

Reinforcement (Typ.)
6 ~ #8 Bars (Typ.)
Pile Length (
See Note 1)
1'
-0" M ax.
Pile Length (
See Note 1)
Bars P2
" chamfer
Bars S1
7
'
6
"
(Typ.)
SECTION I-I
SECTION I-I
(Typical Post Option)
(Low Clearance Option)
30" Auger
6 ~ #8 Bars Spaced
Cast Pile
Equally Around
30" Auger
Cast Pile
Bar S1 (Typ.)
Bars A
Bars A (Typ.)
Bars P2
Bars P2
12:
50:
30 PM
6"
6"
2"
Bars S1
Bottom of Augered
Bottom of Augered
Hole per Plan
SECTION J-J
SECTION J-J
(Typical Post Option)
(Low Clearance Option)
Notes:
Hole per Plan
1. For Reinforcing Steel Sizes and Pile Lengths, see Table 1, Sheet 6.
TYPICAL POST
2. For Corner Posts, see Sheet 8.

3. For Typical Post Section Dimensions, see Sheet 6.
12/17/2015
STANDARD POST PLACEMENT IN AUGER CAST PILE
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
PRECAST OPTION - POST PLACEMENT & PILE REINFORCING STEEL DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERIMETER WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5250
7 of 10
1'-6"
Wall & Auger Cast Pile

1'-6"
Texture (Typ.)
7"
(" thick Max.
10 "
4"
Auger Cast Pile

3
8"
when required)
5
8"
4"
3
8"
10
Bars S1
1 " Cover (Typ.)
30" Auger
Bars A (Typ.)
(Shown Solid)
R = " (Typ.)
"
Bars A
4"
Cast Pile
4"
5
8"
3
8"
Wall & Auger
Bars A
(Typ.)
8 ~ #6 Bars
"
4 "
Spaced Equally
Bars S1 @ 12" Max.
4"
(See Note 3)
12" M ax.
4"
2"
Bars C
#4 Bars (Typ.)
" Chamfer (Typ.)
Bars P6
at 6"
Bars S1
4 "
5"
3"
5"
Bearing Pad
3 "
4 "
(
Typ.
)
"
10 "
1'
-6"
Projected
Location of
4 "
& Auger Cast Pile
(See Note 3)
4 "
"
Elev. A
7 "
Wall
Cast Pile
4
"
(T C
o
y
ve
p
.
r
)
Bars P3
5"
4 "
3"
(Typ.)
Bars P6
ELEVATION VIEW
SECTION I-I
(Low Clearance Shown)
SECTION H-H
(See Note 3)
SPECIAL POST FOR 90 CORNERS
1
03
4"
"
"
10 "
"
10 "
(T
y
p
.)
"
10"
1'-2"
3 4
2
'1
"
1
0
"
"
r
e
v
o
C
.)
p
y
(T
when required)
"
thick Max.
BAR BENDING DETAILS
2
'1
"
& Pile
Texture ("
" Chamfer (Typ.)
Wall
"
Post
6730'
Texture (" thick Max.
Bars A
when required)
BAR P3
(90 Corner)
(Typ.)
6730'
4 "
(Typ.)
Bars P5
Projected Location
1'-2 "
3
4"
1'-2
1'-2 "
SECTION H-H
1. For Reinforcing Steel Sizes, and Foundation Dimensions, see Table 1 Sheet 6.
SECTION I-I
2. For location of Section H-H and I-I, see Sheet 6.
4"
"
11
4"
of Bearing Pad
NOTES:
12:
50:
31 PM
8
"
"
9
8
"
Bars A
"
8
5"
"
4
8
4 "
4 "
Bar Length = 4'-2"
11
"
61
"
BAR P6
(90 Corner)
Cast Pile
10
(Typ.)
R = " (Typ)
Bar Length = 3'-3"
30" Auger
8
"
Bars A
4
"
4
"
4 "
Bars A (Typ.)
3
4"
Post
(
Typ.
)
7 "
Bars P4 (Pairs) @
6"
Pile
7" max. spacing
4"
4"
45
3 "
2230'
BAR P4
BAR P5
(45 Corner)
(45 Corner)
Bar Length = 2'-3"
Bar Length = 4'-6"
(Precast Collar)
3. The Bearing area beneath Neoprene Pads is formed by top of Auger Cast Pile Grout.

12/17/2015
SPECIAL POSTS FOR 45 CORNERS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
PRECAST OPTION - SPECIAL CORNER POSTS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERIMETER WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5250
8 of 10
Pilaster Spacing (S)
Precast Post Cap (Typ.)
(20'-0" Max.)
Pilaster
(See Sheet 2)
Control Joint
(Typ.)
2" Min.
1'-4"
Top of Bond Beam
Mortar Cap
(Typ.)
(
8'
-0" M in.
)
Mortar Cap
W all H eight
Max.
Finished
Finished Grade
2'
-0" M ax.
6" M in.
Grade
Finished Grade
Wall
6" Min.
2'-0" Max.
1
(Typ.)
W/2
1'
-4"
3" Min.
Footing Expansion
1'-4"
Joint, see Sheet 10.
(Typ.)
TYPICAL ELEVATION
SECTION K-K
(T-Footing Shown, Trench Footing Similar)
(Shown at Cell Without Vertical Reinforcing)
BAR BENDING DETAIL
Table 2
Foundations
Masonry Walls
(8x8x16)
Bars
F1 & F2
T-Footing
Width
(W)
Trench
Footing
Depth (D)
Bars V1
SV
Spacing
110
#5
2'-8"
#5
4'-4"
5'-6"
130
#5
2'-0"
#5
5'-0"
6'-4"
150
#5
1'-4"
#5
6'-0"
7'-0"
3'
-2" (
M in.
)
Wind
Speed
Category
W/2
Joint Stabilizing Anchor
Notes:
2'-0"
1. End vertical reinforcing bars 1" from top of bond beam blocks and horizontal bars
1" from edge of control joints.
BAR F1
2. Do not continue horizontal #4 Bond beam reinforcing through control joint.
Length = 5'-2"
joints. Install per manufacturers instructions.
5.
See Sheet 10 for Bar placement details.
6.
For Pilaster Cap Details, see Sheet 2.
All bar dimensions in bending
"
4. Seal Control Joints with backer rod and Type "A" silicone sealant (top and both sides).
SECTION M-M
PILASTER REINFORCING AND
diagram are out to out.

All bars not shown in the
bending diagrams are straight.
WALL CONTROL JOINT DETAIL
12/17/2015
12:
50:
32 PM
3. Use stainless steel joint stabilizing anchors spaced at 16" vertically at all control
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
MASONRY OPTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERIMETER WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5250
9 of 10
See Detail C
See Detail C
See Detail D
See Detail D
Solid 8"x4"x16" block (Typ.)
Solid 8"x4"x16"
Slope Mortar Cap to drain
Slope Mortar Cap to drain
Bond Beam (Typ.)
Bond Beam (Typ.)
block (Typ.)
Bars V1 Paired with
Bars V1 Paired
Bars F1 (Typ.)
with Bars F2
#4 Bars Sp. at
4"
4"
#4 Bars Sp. at
4"
#4 Bars
4" Cover
(Typ.)
#4 Bars Sp. at
1'-0" (Max.)
(top & bottom)(Typ.)
4"
#4 Bars Sp. at
4"
1'-0" (Max.)

W
SECTION K-K
SECTION L-L
TYPICAL WALL SECTION
PILASTER SECTION
WITH T-FOOTING
WITH T-FOOTING
2'
-6" Lap
3" Cover
1'-2"
(Max.)
4" Cover
8"
Joint (Typ.)
8"
3" Cover
Transfer Device
at 1'-0"
3" Cover
Top of Footing
6" (Max.)
Dowel Load
#5 Bars Sp.
(Typ.)
Pilaster
Wall Control
#5 Bars @ 1'-0"
2'
-0"
2'-0"
1'-0" (Max.)
1'-0" (Max.)
(top & bottom) (Typ.)
1'-0"
(Typ.)
Each Face
4"
1'-0"
(Typ.)
# 4 Bars Sp. at 1'

-0" (
M ax.
)
4" Cover
Depth (
D)
2'-0"
(Typ.)
1'
-4"
1'
-4"
3" Cover
3" Cover
2'
-0" (
M in.
)
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
8"
Bars F1
1'-0" (Typ.)
2'
-0"
#5 Bars Sp. at
3" Cover
Transfer Device
Each Face
Dowel Load
1'-0" (Typ.)
# 4 Bars Sp. at 1'

-0" (
M ax.
)
#5 Bars Sp. at
Bars F2
2'
-0" (
M in.
)
@ SV (Typ.)
2'
-6" Lap
Bars F2 Spaced
@ SV (Typ.) (Alternating)
Depth (
D)
#4 Bars (Typ.)
Bars F1 Spaced
2'
-6" Lap
2'
-6" Lap
(Typ.)
1" Dowel Load
4" Cover
1'-4"
1'-4"
Transfer Devices
SECTION K-K
SECTION L-L
TYPICAL WALL SECTION
TYPICAL PILASTER SECTION
WITH TRENCH FOOTING
WITH TRENCH FOOTING
(See Typical
Bars V1
Bars F1
Top of
#5 Bars @
Footing
1'-0" (Typ.)
2'
-6" M in.
Sections
for details)
Approved metal
or fiber cap
"
8"x4"x16"
Solid Block
Joint Filler
1'-0"
3" Cover
1'-0"
(Typ.)
Slope Mortar
1'
-4"
(Typ.)
Expansion Joint
"
1 " Clear
Bars V1
Cap to Drain
4" Cover
EXPANSION JOINT DETAILS

12:
50:
32 PM
Bars V1
#4 Bars
(Typ.)
1'-6"
Footing Expansion
Joint & Dowel Load
(Min. Lap)
REINFORCING AT PILASTER WITH EXPANSION JOINT

(Step Shown, without Step Similar)
LAST
01/01/14
REVISIO N
(T-Footing Shown, Trench Footing Similar)
REVISION
Notes:
1. For location of Sections K-K and L-L see Sheet 9.
1'-4"
Transfer Device Shown

12/17/2015
"
1 " Clear
(Typ.)
2. Provide and install " Preformed Expansion Joints with 2 ~ 1" Dowel Load
Transfer Devices at 90' Max. as shown. See Sections L-L for placement details.
#4 Bars
#4 Bars
4"
4"
3. For Reinforcing sizes and spacings, see Table 2, Sheet 9.

4. Pairs F1, V1 are required in the wall cells on both sides of pilasters, plus a
DETAIL C
DETAIL D
pair in each pilaster cell. Space wall reinforcing per Table 2, Sheet 9.
MASONRY OPTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERIMETER WALLS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
5250
10 of 10
Bars G2 (evenly spaced)

W
Backfill
Bars F
4" Min.
Bars A (F.S.)
Front Face
of Wall
Bars A (paired with Bars J)
Wall Cover
(Typ.)
H eight
H eight
Bars F (N.S.)
Bars G2 (evenly
spaced)
Slope
NOTE:
Bkwall
See Plans for Retaining Wall Data
Bars J & K
Bars K (F.S.)
D
soil
(1'-0" Min.)
Const. Jt.
L
Footing Cover (Typ.)

D
*D
key
D
*D
key
Bars H
toe
Bars J (F.S.)
Bars M (N.S.)
Bars Z (N.S.)
Bars H
Const. Jt.
(Showing Near Side)
Bars G1
Bars G1
Bars Z
(Showing Far Side)
L
toe
Footing Cover (bottom only)
*L
key
Bars M (paired with Bars F)
L
foot
VIEW A-A
(Shear key shown dashed)
* Shear Key is required only when
specified in the Plans.
TYPICAL SECTION
NOTES
DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS:
Design according to FDOT Structures Manual (current edition).
TRAFFIC RAILINGS OR PARAPETS:
Total Length
If there is a Traffic Railing or Parapet on the wall, align Wall Joints with V-Grooves, and Wall Expansion Joints
with Barrier Open Joints.
1'-0" Lap Splice (Typ.)

FOUNDATION: Prepare the soil below the footing in accordance with the requirements for spread footings in Specification
Section 455.
BARS G1
Slope
Bkwall
12:
51:
36 PM
90
BARS J & K
BARS M
12/17/2015
NOTE:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
All bar dimensions are out-to-out
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
C-I-P CANTILEVER RETAINING WALL
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6010
1of 2
**Wall joint spacing 25 ft. maximum and
5' minimum. At minimum, every fourth

Wall Joint
wall joint to be an expansion joint.
**Wall Joint Spacing
" V-Groove across top and down
See Plans for actual wall joint spacing
(required at footing step)
front face of wall at joint (Typ.).
and expansion joint location.
Extend V-Groove down back of wall

to 6" min. below ground.
Top of Footing
(keyway not required)
A
"
V step
1'-0"
Ground Line
45 (Typ.)
(
2'
-0" M ax.
)
(see 'V-Groove Detail')
V-GROOVE DETAIL
Optional Shear Key
Bars R
Top of Footing
(paired with
Level (Typ.)
Bars G1)
DETAIL A
3" PVC Drain Pipe at

10 ft. max. spacing (Typ.)
See 'Detail A'
At Contractor's option,
See 'Typical Backfill Detail'
Suface Treatments may

terminate 6" below ground line
Traffic Railing (Index No. 420,
1 "
Index Series 6100)
Front Face
CIP Wall
Bars D @ 1'-0"
(Max. spacing)
*3 "
Stem Offset (in.) = H(Ft.)/16
Front Face
of Wall
M
"
4
"
(see 'V-Groove Detail')
"
of Wall
Varies
.
in
STEM OFFSET VALUES
SECTION A-A
to drain and prevent ponding
Bars D @ 1'-0"
*3 "
during backfilling.
See Roadway Plans for
drainage requirement
Varies
front face and back face of wall.
"
" from back to front of wall
(Max. spacing)
Bar D
"
3" PVC Drain Pipe. Slope down

and extend " beyond both
Plastic sleeve
9"
Limits of Excavation
Attach Type D-5 (see Specification Section 985) Geotextile

fabric, 1'-0" wide and full height of fill, to the back of
SECTION A-A
1" Cl.
TYPICAL CORNER JOINT DETAIL
" Preformed Joint Filler
4"
and longitudinally as necessary
for 42" Vertical Shape Traffic Railing, see Index No. 422)
"
Slope backfill layers transversely
for 32" Vertical Shape Traffic Railing, see Index No. 423;
(field bend)
1 "
2"
of Wall
(for 32" F-Shape Traffic Railing (as shown), see Index No. 420;
Bars D
Wall Joint**
Front Face
(32" F-Shape Shown, other Traffic Railings similar)
Front Face of Wall
9"
Bar D
WALL JOINT DETAIL
( for H < 20 Ft.)
TRAFFIC RAILING/JUNCTION SLAB DETAIL
Bar D
s
ie
r
a
V
H eight Varies
" V-Groove (Typ.)
4"
Stem as constructed
Vertical Line
Varies
Junction Slab (See
Top of
of Wall
9
"
Stem Offset
4"
Top of Coping
Wall Joint**
Front Face
FRONT ELEVATION
for Traffic Railing type)
2"
32" F-Shape shown, see Plans
wall with an adhesive approved by the Engineer.
Drain shall be continuous 1.5' x 1.5' clean, broken

Inside ends of weep holes
stone or gravel, graded and placed to allow free
shall be covered with 1.0
drainage. Place Type D-3 (see Specification
square foot of galvanized
Section 985) geotextile fabric, around the
mesh with " openings
perimeter to prevent fill from washing out.
* Key to stop at top of footing and 6" from top of wall. Joint
across footing and top of wall to be a straight line.
** Stay-In-Place Plastic Preformed Bond Beakers are permitted

to form joints.
12/17/2015
12:
51:
37 PM
Final Groundline
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
TYPICAL BACKFILL DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
C-I-P CANTILEVER RETAINING WALL
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6010
2 of 2
lo
p
e
V
a
a
x
r
.
1 ie
:1 s
8"
(Typ.)
HEIGHT
8"
Varies
REINF.
6"
3" Cl.
3" Cl.
Keyway
SCHEME
(LB.)
3 **
HOLES
2. Concrete for Gravity Wall shall be Class NS per Section 347.
& DRAIN
Concrete for Scheme 3 Junction Slab and Traffic Railing shall
REQD.
be Class II per Section 346, unless otherwise specified in

the plans.
0.08
0.11 (0.20*)
0.03
3 (4*)
No
2'
0.14
0.20 (0.32*)
0.09
4 (5*)
No
3'
0.22
0.32 (0.47*)
0.29
5 (6*)
Yes
3. Reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of Specification

Section 931 (Grade 40 or 60). Smooth or Deformed Welded Wire
Bar A
Bar B
SCHEME
STEEL
reinforced concrete retaining wall.
Reinforcement (WWR) may be substituted on an equal area basis.

Do not increase bar/wire spacing for Grade 60 reinforcing steel
or WWR.
(Typ.)
4'
0.32
0.47 (0.65*)
0.43
6 (7*)
Yes
5'
0.43
0.65 (0.85*)
0.60
7 (8*)
Yes
4. When required, for adjunct guiderail, see Index No. 870 or 880
as appropriate. For adjunct Type B fence see Index No. 802.
12
5. Joint seal to be two layers of 30# smooth roofing paper or

ESTIMATED QUANTITIES NOTES:
6"
)
p.
Ty
(
Ground
Type D-5 geotextile fabric in accordance with Specification
For Scheme 3 Junction Slab and Traffic Railing see the
Section 985. Mop all contact surfaces of concrete and roofing
referenced Design Standards for estimated quantities.
paper or geotextile fabric with cut-back asphalt. Stop roofing
Bars A &
Quantity for 2'-0" Toe Depth in Scheme 2.
paper or geotextile fabric 6" below top of wall.
** Quantity for Scheme 3 assumes 1'-3" thick
B @ 1'-6"
6. Provide a continuous 1'x1' clean gravel or crushed rock drain for
coping above Gravity Wall.
wall heights 3 ft. and higher. Wrap drainage layer as shown, with
Ctrs. (Max.)
Type D-3 geotextile fabric in accordance with Specification Section
Weep
985. Provide 8"x8" galvanized mesh with " openings, at the inside
Hole
(
Toe
end of the PVC Drain Pipe. Provide 2" PVC Drain Pipe (Sch. 40)
Depth)
of 30# Smooth
WEEP
1'
Varies
1" Cl.
Varies
4"
One layer
General Note 5)
1'
-0"
"
(
Joint Seal, see
1 "
9"
3"
4"
Surface
"
SCHEME
Joint Seal
H eight (
5'
-0" M ax.
)
General Note 5)
1'
-0"
(
Joint Seal, see
3" Cl.
(
Typ.
)
9"
M ax.
Bars B @
1'
-6" sp.
Bars A (Typ.)
M ax.
(
30'M ax.
, 5'M in.
)
W all Joints equally spaced
CLASS NS CONCRETE (CY)
(FT.)
(Typ.)
reinforced concrete retaining walls, except walls of proprietary

designs, shall have the same face texture and finish as the
PER LINEAR FOOT OF WALL
3"
" Chamfer
" V-Groove
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES FOR C-I-P WALL
Bars B
GENERAL NOTES
1. C-I-P Gravity Walls constructed as extensions of
at 10 ft. max. spacing (when Drainage Layer is required). Locate
Drainage Layer
outermost edge of Drain Pipe a minimum of 2'-0" from wall joints.
And PVC Drain

7.
(See Note 6)
Cost of reinforcing steel, face texture, finish, joint seal,
drain pipes, drainage layer, galvanized mesh and geotextile
Roofing Paper
fabric to be included in the Contract Unit Price for Concrete
or preformed
6" Cl. ( 2"
Prepare Foundation Per
plastic bond
Tolerance)
Spec. 455 (Spread Footings)
Class NS, Gravity Wall. Cost of concrete for Junction Slab in

Scheme 3, to be included in Contract Unit Price for Concrete
breaker (Typ.)
Traffic Railing Barrier With Junction Slab. Adjunct railings or
KEYWAY & WALL JOINT DETAIL
TYPICAL SECTION
(TOP VIEW)
C-I-P CONCRETE GRAVITY WALL
fences to be paid for separately.

MARK
SIZE
As Reqd.
LENGTH
As Reqd.
Traffic Railing (Index No. 420,

32" F-Shape shown, see Plans
for Traffic Railing type)
Upper Slope
Upper Slope
See General
BAR BENDING DIAGRAM
See General
Soil Reinforcement
Note 4
when required
(See Plans)
3"
Junction Slab (See
Scheme 3
Index Series 6100)
Scheme 1 & 2
then 2'-0" Min.)
2'-0" For Slopes > 1:1
1'-0"
H eight
(
5'M ax.
)
for Wall Height 2'-0"

2'-0" Min. to SHW
BAR A
9
12
for Wall Height > 2'-0"
9
12
1'-0" Min. to SHW
es
ri
Va
e
op
2
Sl .1:
r
x
e
a
w
M
Lo
See Plans
1'-0" Min. to SHW
See Plans
es
ri
Va
e
op
2
Sl .1:
er
ax
w
M
Lo
1'-0" For Wall Height 2'-0"

See Plans
2'-0" For Wall Height > 2'-0"
BAR B
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
12:
51:
52 PM
1'-0" For Slopes 1:1
12
es
ri
Va
e
op
2
Sl .1:
r
x
e
a
w
M
o
L
to Max. 1:1
H eight + Toe Depth - 9"
with wall heights > 3',
to Max. 1:1
(
5'M ax.
)
steeper than 1:2
Slopes up
H eight
(Except for slopes
H eight
1'-0" Min. to SHW
(
5'M ax.
)
(29'-8" Max.)
Slopes up
R
"
1
Wall Joint spacing - 4"
H eight + Toe Depth - 2'

-0"
Note 4
SCHEME 1
SCHEME 2
SCHEME 3
(No Traffic Loading Effects &
(With Traffic Loading or
(With Traffic Railing)
Upper Slopes 1:1)
Upper Slopes > 1:1)
1. All bar dimensions are out to out.

2. Lap splices for Bars A must be a
minimum of 1'-6".
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NOTES:
GRAVITY WALL
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6011
1of 1
Traffic Railing
NOTES
DESIGN CRITERIA:
1. Design is based on the assumption that the material contained within the
Junction Slab
Top of
reinforced soil volume, methods of construction and quality of prefabricated
Shoulder or
(See Index Series
Coping Elevation
Roadway Pavement
6100)
materials are in accordance with Specification Section 548 and Chapter 3

of the FDOT Structures Design Guidelines.
Concrete Coping
SOIL PARAMETERS:
10'-0" Min. C.I.P. Coping
12'-0" Min. Precast Coping/Traffic Railing
1. See Wall Control Drawings for soil characteristics of foundation material to be

used in the design of the wall system.
Soil Reinforcement (Typ.)
2. The Contractor will provide soil design parameters for backfill material based
on the actual soil characteristics utilized at the site.
12"
2'-0"
6"
Coping
Transition
MATERIALS:
Surface treatment when
Top of Coping
required (See Construction

Limits of
Note 9)
1. See Specification Section 548 for material requirements.
Coping
2'
-3"
Precast
2. For location and alignment of retaining walls, see Wall Control Drawings.
Coping
the Wall Company's instructions.
2'
-0"
1. Walls will be constructed in accordance with Specification Section 548 and
C.
I.
P.
Soil Volume
CONSTRUCTION:
1'-0" Min.
See Plans
Proposed Final
Ground Line
3. If required, locate manholes and drop inlets as shown on wall elevations.

4. Refer to Wall Control Drawings of individual walls for minimum reinforcement
strip/mesh length, factored bearing resistance's, minimum wall embedment
3"
" Preformed
and anticipated long term and differential settlements.
needed during construction.

6. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the location of any
guardrail posts behind retaining wall panels. Prior to placement of the top
Top of
Joint Filler
5. The Contractor is responsible for controlling water during storm events as
Leveling Pad
Provide Supplemental
2'-0" Min.
#4 Bar with 3" concrete
Elevation
Interior Face of
cover
Concrete Leveling Pad
Concrete Facing Panels
layer of soil reinforcement, individual reinforcing strips/mesh may be
skewed (15 maximum) to avoid the post locations if authorized by

the Engineer. No cutting of soil reinforcement is allowed unless shown
on Shop Drawings and approved by the Engineer. Any damage done to
the soil reinforcement due to installation of the guardrail will be repaired
ELEVATION VIEW OF
TYPICAL MSE RETAINING WALL SECTION
COPING HEIGHT TRANSITION
WITH A TRAFFIC RAILING
(Railing Not Shown For Clarity)
(Showing Limits of the Reinforced Soil Volume)
by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Repair method will be

7.
If existing or future structures, pipes, foundations or guardrail posts

within the reinforced soil volume interfere with the normal placement of
soil reinforcement and specific directions have not been provided on the
plans, the Contractor will notify the Engineer to determine what course
of action shall be taken.
8.
The Contractor is responsible for gradually displacing upper layer(s) of

soil reinforcement downward (15 maximum from horizontal) to avoid
cutting soil reinforcement and conflicts with paving and subgrade preparation.
The Contractor's attention is directed especially to situations where roadway
FDOT MSE RETAINING WALL CLASSIFICATION TABLE
superelevation and/or soil mixing are anticipated.

9.
Durability Requirements
For concrete facing panel surface treatment, see Wall Control Drawings.
Extend surface treatment a minimum of 6" below final ground line.
Other Allowable FDOT Wall Types
Applicable
Concrete
Concrete
Pozzolan
Soil
FDOT Wall
Cover
Class
Additions?
Reinforcement
Type *
(in.)
for Panels
**
Type
10. Drive piles located within the soil volume prior to construction of the
retaining wall, unless a method to protect the structure, acceptable to both
the Engineer and Wall Company, is proposed and approved in writing. The
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
portion of piles or drilled shafts extensions within the soil volume will be
wrapped with polyethylene sheeting in accordance with Specification
Type 2A
II
No
Metal
Type 2B
IV
No
Metal
Type 2C
IV
No
Metal
Type 2D
IV
Yes
Metal
Type 2E
IV
No
Plastic
Type 2F
IV
Yes
Plastic
Section 459.
11. A structural extension of the connection of the retaining wall panel to soil
reinforcement will be used whenever necessary to avoid cutting or excessive
skewing (greater than 15) of the soil reinforcement around obstructions
(i.e., piles, pipes, manholes, drop inlets, etc.).
12. Steps in leveling pads will occur at MSE Wall panel interfaces. Panels will not
cantilever more than 2" past the end of the upper tier leveling pad.
13. The top of the leveling pad or footing will be 2'-0" minimum below final
* See Data Table in Contract Plans.
ground line.
14. Top of leveling pad elevations shown in the Wall Control Drawings are maximum
** Silica fume, metakaolin or ultrafine fly ash.
the panel layout shown in the shop drawings.

15. The height of panels in the bottom course of MSE Walls must not be less
than half the height of a standard panel.
16. Work this Index with Index 6100 & 6200 Series.
SHOP DRAWING REQUIREMENTS:

See Specification Section 548 for shop drawing requirements.
GENERAL NOTES AND DETAILS

LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
12:
52:
10 PM
elevations. The constructed leveling pad elevations may be deeper based on
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PERMANENT MSE RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6020
1of 1
NOTES
DESIGN CRITERIA:
1. Design is based on the assumption that the material contained within the
reinforced soil volume, methods of construction and quality of prefabricated
materials are in accordance with Specification Section 548 and FDOT

Structures Design Guidelines Section 3.13.2.
Secondary Reinforcement
2. It is the responsibility of the Engineer to determine that the factored

Top of Wall
bearing pressure shown for the wall does not exceed the factored
as required
bearing resistance of the foundation for that specific wall location.

3. The Wall Company is responsible for internal stability of the wall. External
stability design, including foundation and slope stability, is the responsibility
Primary Reinforcement
of the Engineer.
4. If present, consider in design and analysis and locate manholes and drop
Reinforced
inlets as shown on wall elevations.
Fill
SOIL PARAMETERS:
1. See wall control drawings for soil characteristics of foundation material
Geotextile Wrap
to be used in the design of the wall system. The Contractor must provide
soil design parameters for backfill material based on the actual soil
Wire Facing
characteristics utilized at the site.
or Basket
Provide the values of unit weight,
Limits of
Soil Volume
cohesion and internal friction angle in the Shop Drawings.
MATERIALS:
1.
Provide soil reinforcement in accordance with Specification Section 548.
2.
For additional material notes, see Wall Company General Notes.
4"-0" Min.
CONSTRUCTION:
1.
1"-0" Min.
Walls must be constructed in accordance with Specification Section 548 and

Foundation Soil
the Wall Company's instructions.

2.
3.
For location and alignment of retaining walls, see Wall Control Drawings.
Soil Reinforcement Length
Refer to Plan and Elevation sheets of individual walls for minimum

reinforcement strip/mesh length, factored bearing resistance's, minimum
wall embedment and anticipated long term and differential settlements.

4.
TYPICAL RETAINING WALL SECTION
If existing or future structures, pipes, foundations or guardrail posts within

the reinforced soil volume interfere with the normal placement of soil
(Showing Limits of the Reinforced Soil Volume)
reinforcement and specific directions have not been provided on the

plans, the Contractor must notify the Engineer to determine what course
of action should be taken.
5.
The Contractor is responsible for gradually deflecting upper layer(s) of

soil reinforcement downward (15 maximum from horizontal) to avoid
cutting soil reinforcement and conflicts with paving and subgrade

preparation. The Contractor's attention is directed especially to
Varies (See Index No. 414
situations where roadway superelevation and/or soil mixing are

2'-0" Min.
anticipated.
and Wall Control Drawings)
Type K Temporary
Traffic Railing
Dropoff
(See Index No. 414

for Details)
45
Front Face of
Temporary
12:
52:
33 PM
Retaining Wall
TEMPORARY TRAFFIC RAILING
12/17/2015
PLACEMENT DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TEMPORARY MSE RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6030
1of 1
Bulkhead Cap
SHEET PILE DESIGN CRITERIA AND NOTES
(See Bulkhead Plans

for actual Cap outline)
DESCRIPTION:
This Design Standard includes details for five types of piles with two thicknesses.
Types "B1", "B2", "C1" and "C2" piles (corner piles) are of reinforced concrete construction, and Type "A" is of
Compacted Fill
the requirements of the contract documents.
(
M in.
)
1'
-0"
prestressed concrete construction. The piles shall be manufactured, cured and installed in accordance with
MATERIALS: (for materials not listed refer to the Specifications)

CONCRETE
Class:
V (Special) for slightly and moderately aggressive environments

V (Special w/ Silica Fume) for extremely aggressive environment
Plastic Filter Fabric

(Continuous)
Sheet pile
Unit weight:
150 pcf
Modulus of Elasticity:
Based on the use of Florida limerock concrete
REINFORCING STEEL
ASTM A615 Grade 60
PRESTRESSING STEEL
ASTM A416 Grade 270 (Low-Relaxation Strand)
Existing Ground
(Mud Line)
CROSS REFERENCES:
DESIGN PARAMETERS:
For Dimensions L and X see Sheet
Type "A"
1'
-8"
Pile Wall Data Table in Structures Plans.
Concrete Compressive Strength at release of prestressing:
4000 psi minimum
Uniform compression after prestressing losses:
1000 psi minimum
Pick-up, Storage and Transportation:
0.0 psi tension with 1.5 times pile self weight
Types "B1", "B2", "C1" & "C2"
Bottom of Dim. X
Pick-up, Storage and Transportation:
Minimum compressive strength f'ci 4000 psi required.
and Filter Fabric
ENVIRONMENT:
The pile designs are applicable to all Environments.
SECTION THRU BULKHEAD

PLASTIC FILTER FABRIC:
(Showing Plastic Filter Fabric)
The plastic filter fabric shall extend to the bottom of the "X" dimension.
PILE PICK-UP AND HANDLING:

Type "A"
Grout (Typ.) (See Specifications)
Pick-up of pile may be either a single point pick-up or a two point pick-up as shown below.
Types "B1", "B2", "C1" & "C2"
2'-6"
Two point pick-up for lifting out of forms & two point support for storage & transportation.
Type "A" (Typ.)
Single point pick-up for installation only.
PILE FIT-UP:
90
The 2'-6" Sheet Pile dimension is nominal. This dimension may be shortened by the Manufacturer up to " to
allow for Sheet Pile fit-up in its final position. Minimum Sheet Pile width is 2'-5". No changes shall be made
to the tongues or grooves.
Type "A"
Type "A"
Type "C1"
Type "A"
Starter Pile
Type "B1" or "B2"
Plastic Filter Fabric
or "C2"
DETAIL "A"
(Cap and Anchoring System Not Shown)
(Section Taken Above Dimension X)
NOTE: Detail "A" shows a Part-Plan View of an assumed bulkhead.
See Bulkhead plans for actual Plan View.
1'-3"
Pile and Cap
Starter Pile
Single Point
2 Point Pick-up, Tie Down and Support Points
Pick-up
0.21 L
0.58 L
0.21 L
1'-3"
T
1
y
C
o pi '-3
r
"
n ca
e
l
r
f
o
P
il r
e
s
12:
53:
09 PM
DETAIL "A"
PILE STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION SUPPORT DETAILS
(Section Taken Below Dimension X)

12/17/2015
Type "C2" Shown,
Type "B2" Shown,
Type "C1" Opposite Hand
Type "B1" Opposite Hand
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
NOTES AND DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRECAST CONCRETE SHEET PILE WALL
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6040
1of 4
4" (Typ.)
11"
(Typ.)
Slope only on the tongue side
10"
Prestressed
Bars
S1
S2
Bar S5
Bar S4
"
0
'1
Bars
45
Varies
1'
-0 "
11"
Pick-up Strand(S)
Strands
(
Typ.
)
DIMENSION A
B
1'
-3"
2 ~ Bars A
(
M in. Lap)
(Typ.)
BAR A
4 "
1'-9 "
S3
2'-2"
S4
1'-6 "
S5
1'-10 "
S6
11"
S7
1'-7"
T=10 in.
4"
T=12 in.
6"
7"
2-PIECE
6 sp. @ 4"
1'-11 "
DIMENSION B
B
S1
S2
Spaced at 1'-0" Maximum
3"
6 sp. @ 4"
1-PIECE
BAR S
Spacing for
Bars S
NOTES:
1. Intermediate Prestress Strands not shown in Elevations and Sections.
TYPICAL PILE
2. All bar dimensions are out-to-out.

3.
SHEET PILE DIMENSIONS
T(in.)
11"
10
12
Y(in.)
Z(in.)
Bars A are #5 and Bars S are #4.
4. At the Contractor's option Bars S may be fabricated as a two piece bar

as shown in the Bar Bending Diagram.
5. The Contractor may use Deformed Welded Wire Reinforcement meeting
the requirements of Specification Section 931 in lieu of Bars A and
(Typ.)
Bars S if the wire size and spacing provide the same area of
reinforcing steel per foot as the Bars shown.
10"
(Typ.)
2"
D
Bars S2
3" Cover
(Typ.)
Bars A
(
Strands)
3" Cover
T
See Detail "D"
n sp. @
Bars S1
n sp. @
n sp. @
2'
-6"
1'
-0 "
Bar S7
Bar S6
Bars A
2'
-6"
S2
D
S3
See Detail "E"
2'
-6"
2"
Strand(S)
Bars
(
Strands)
11"
(
Typ.
)
Pick-up
Bars
2" Cover
T
See Detail "D"
(
Strands)
Strands
2" Cover
(Typ.)
Prestressed
2 ~ Bars A
2" Cover
6. For Dimensions L and X see Sheet Pile Data Table in Structures Plans.
Bars S3
3" Cover
(Typ.)
Spaced at 1'-0" Maximum
6 sp. @ 4"
3"
SECTION A-A
Y
3 "
MAXIMUM
Thickness
(in.)
T=10 in.
0.5
T=12 in.
0.6
D
(in.)
3
TOTAL # OF
SECTION
* STRESS
MODULUS (in.)
(psi)
14
500
1150
STRANDS
28'-0"
0.6
27'-0"
10
500
1160
0.5
31'-0"
16
720
1100
30'-0"
12
720
1160
"
"
4"
3"
2"
SECTION C-C
"
2"
12:
53:
10 PM
STRAND DIA.
SECTION B-B
2"
" 2 "
Wall
2"
Spacing for
Bars S
STARTER PILE
2"
2"
6 sp. @ 4"
Cover
4 "
7"
Cover
2 ~ Bars A
Cover
Bars A
12/17/2015
* Unit Prestress after losses.
DETAIL "D"
DETAIL "E"
(Typical Tongue)
(Typical Groove)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
TYPE "A" STANDARD SECTION

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6040
2 of 4
See Detail "D"

L
Bars A1
11" Slope is to
11"
this point
Bars A3
2'-2"
Bars A2
Bars A3
Bars A3
Bars A1
Bars A2
Bars A2
Bars A1
7"
Bars A3
Bars A4
Bars A3
Bars A4
Bars A4
Bars S1
"
-3
1'
Slope only on
Bars A4
Bars A4
tongue side
Bars S2
Bars A4
S2
Bars A4
Bars A4
S1
Bars A4
4"
Bars A4
Bars A4
Pick-up Strand(s)
Bars A4
3" Cover
Bars S3
(Typ.)
See Detail "D"
3" Cover
1'
-3
"
(Typ.)
Bars S4
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
T
Bars A4
10"
3
"
"
VIEW C-C
6 sp. @ 4"
Spaced @ 1'-0" Maximum
6 sp. @ 4"
3"
Spacing for
2
"
2"
4"
"
Bars S
(TYPE "B1" PILE SHOWN, TYPE "B2" PILE OPPOSITE HAND)
STIRRUP DIMENSIONS (T = 10")
T (in.)
2"
Co
ve
r
ELEVATION

10
12
Y (in.)
Z (in.)
Bars S
Bars A2
STIRRUP DIMENSIONS (T = 12")

Bars A1 or A4
BAR MARK
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
BAR MARK
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
R8
9 "
1'-6 "
2 "
5"
4 "
5 "
4"
S1
11 "
10"
1'-6"
3 "
7"
4 "
5 "
6"
9 "
1'-8 "
2 "
4 "
5 "
5 "
4"
S2
1'-1 "
10"
1'-8"
3 "
6 "
5"
5 "
6"
30
"
2
11"
1'-1 "
2"
r
ve
Co
S1
S2
30
S3
11"
8"
1'-6"
1"
5"
4 "
4 "
5"
S3
11 "
8"
1'-5 "
2"
7"
4 "
4 "
7"
S4
11"
4"
1'-1 "
1 "
5"
3 "
2 "
6"
S4
11 "
4"
1'-1"
2"
7"
3 "
2 "
8"
S1
11 "
8"
1'-4"
4"
5 "
6 "
8"
4"
S1
1'-0"
8 "
1'-3"
5"
7 "
6"
8 "
5"
"
S2
1'-1 "
8"
1'-5 "
4"
4 "
7 "
8"
4"
S2
1'-2"
8 "
1'-5 "
5"
6 "
7"
8 "
5"
45
"
3"
45
11 "
S3
6 "
1'-4"
2"
3"
6 "
6 "
5 "
5 "
5"
3 "
7"
5 "
1'-0"
7"
1'-4"
3"
7 "
6 "
7"
7"
S4
1'-0"
3 "
11 "
3 "
7 "
5"
3 "
9"
S1
1'-0 "
6"
11 "
7"
8"
6 "
10 "
4"
S2
1'-2 "
6"
1'-2"
7"
6 "
8"
10 "
4"
S3
Z
4"
T
T
T
S4
11 "
3 "
1'-0"
S1
1'-0"
6"
1'-0 "
5"
6"
7"
10"
3"
1'-2 "
5"
4 "
8 "
10 "
3"
6"
1'-2"
S2
60
60
4 "
1'-0"
S3
3"
6"
8"
8 "
5"
S3
1'-0 "
5"
1'-1 "
4"
8"
8"
9"
7"
10"
4 "
6"
5 "
4"
7 "
S4
1'-0 "
2 "
9 "
5 "
8"
5 "
4"
9"
2 "
1'-0"
S4
1'-1 "
DETAIL "D"
(TYPE "B1" PILE SHOWN, TYPE "B2" PILE OPPOSITE HAND)
NOTES:
R6
4"
R5
R6
(
Typ.
)
4"
(
Typ.
)
1. This drawing includes details for precast concrete corner piles for 10"
R5
R5
and 12" thick sheet pile systems. The details apply equally to both thicknesses.
R6
2. The bar configurations shown in Sections A-A and B-B shall be used for
angles between 15 and 75. For angles not shown, the reinforcing bar
R3
R1
R3
R1
R3
Varies
4.
5. Values for Stirrup Dimensions are shown for equal to 30, 45 & 60 only.
12/17/2015
R7
R8
R2
R7
R8
45
R4
R4
R4
R2
R2
6. At the Contractor's option Bars S may be fabricated as a 2 piece bar with
"
0
'1
12:
53:
11 PM
R1
dimensions may be interpolated or extrapolated from the stirrup dimensions shown.

R7
BAR A2
R8
a minimum lap length of 1'-6", as shown in Bar Bending Diagrams.

7. If Type "B1" or "B2" pile is used as a Starter Pile show tongue on both sides of pile
from Dim. X down. Show dimensions for Bars S2, S3 & S4 in shop drawings.
8. If tongue must be on the opposite side from that shown all dimensions and Bars A,
S2, S3 and S4 will be the same but opposite hand.
9. For Dimensions L, X and Angle , see Sheet Pile Data Table in Structures Plans.
1 - PIECE
2 - PIECE
BARS S3 & S4
TYPE "B1" AND "B2" - VARIABLE ANGLE CORNER PILE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
BARS S1 & S2
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6040
3 of 4
here if T=12"
Bars A1
2 ~ Bars A2
10"
Bar A4
(Typ.)
Bars S3
See
Section C-C
* Bar A4
* Bar A4
Bar A6
Bar A6
Pick-up
Bars A2
** Bar A4
** Bar A4
Bar A5
1'
-9"
Bar A5
1'
-8"
1'
-9"
1'
-8"
Bars S1
Bars S4
S2
3" Cover
Bars A1
Bars S5
2"
(
Typ.
)
2'-2"
This A4 bar ends
For 12" Pile
10 "
1'-4"
For 10" Pile
Strand(s)
For 12" Pile
For 10" Pile
(Typ.)
1'-9"
Bars A3
Bars A5
3"
1'-8"
Bars S2
Bars A3
Bars A3
7"
2" (Typ.)
3" Cover
See Section C-C
Bars S1
END VIEW
4"
Spaced @ 1'-0" Maximum
6 sp. @ 4"
3"
6 sp. @ 4"
Spacing for
SECTION A-A
1'-8"
For 10" Pile
1'-9"
For 12" Pile
SECTION B-B
Bars S
ELEVATION
(TYPE "C1" PILE SHOWN, TYPE "C2" PILE OPPOSITE HAND)
* This Bar A4 shall be 1'-2" shorter than other A4 bars for T = 12".
Bars A2
** This Bar A4 (not shown in elevation) is included only if T = 12".
T
Bar A4
3 "
Bar S2
Y
Bar S3
Bar A5
2 "
Bar S4
T (in.)
BAR MARK
R1
S1
7"
5 "
7"
S2
7"
8"
4 "
R2
R3
R2
STIRRUP DIMENSIONS
"
R2
"
R3
10
Bar A6
R1
4 "
S5
4 "
5 "
4 "
S1
9"
4 "
9"
Bars S2
S2
9"
7"
6 "
S3
8"
6"
6 "
1'-3"
5"
For 12" Pile
1'-3"
6"
6"
5"
For 10" Pile
For 10" Pile
Bulkhead
For 12" Pile
3"
"
2"
Bar A4
S4
7 "
5 "
6 "
S5
6 "
4 "
6 "
Varies
1'-2"
45
"
0
'1
4"
Bars A2
Bar A6
0" A5
12
2 " A4
Bars A3
STIRRUPS S
3 "A3
SECTION D-D (T=10")

"
4 "
6 "
4 "A2 & A6
** Bar A4
7"
5 "
90
1'
-3"
1'
-3"
Bars A2
6"
S4
4"
*Bar A4
Bar A5
S3
4"
Bar S5
A3
2"
2"
Bars
(Bars A2 only)
BARS A
Bar S2
Bar S3
Bar A5
Note: All Bar dimensions are out-to-out.

Bar S4
Bar A4
Bars
T (in.)
10
12
Y (in.)
Z (in.)
A3
SECTION C-C (T=10" or 12")
Bar A6
NOTES:
Bar S5
2.
3. This drawing includes information for precast Corner Piles for 10" and 12"
thick Sheet Pile systems. The details apply to both thicknesses but the bar
configurations change slightly according to the thickness values used.
4. If Type "C1" or "C2" pile is used as a Starter Pile show tongue on both sides of
12:
53:
12 PM
pile from Dim. X down. Show dimensions for Bars S2, S3, S4 & S5 in
shop drawings.
5. If tongue must be on opposite side (Groove Side) from that shown,
all dimensions and reinforcement shall follow the corresponding Tongue
or Groove side.
12/17/2015
SECTION D-D (T=12")
6. For Dimensions L and X see Sheet Pile Data Table in Structures Plans.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
TYPE "C1" AND "C2" - RIGHT ANGLE CORNER PILE

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6040
4 of 4
" Open Joint

)
.
n
"Mi
0
'
0
1
l (
a
c
i
p
"Ty
0
'
0
3
~
g
n
i
c
a
tSp
n
i
o
nJ
e
"Op
Top of C-I-P
" Open Joint
sp. (lap with Dowel
Coping)
Slope of C-I-P
2" Min. Cover (Typ.)
Bars 4B (follows top of

Retaining Wall Panel) (Typ.)
Drainage Ditch when
Coping
Bars 4A (follows
Bars 4U1 @ 1'-6" Max.
Dim. A
required (See Wall Control

Bars 4U1
Drawings for details)
" Chamfer
Bars 4D) (Typ.)
Bars 4A
(Typ.)
Varies
(1'-3" Max.,
(Typ.) (See
2" Min.)
2'
-0"
Dowel Bars 4D
Note 2)
Bars 4B shown as (
Top of Retaining
Dowel Bars 4D
Wall Panel (Typ.)

Clearance
Bottom of
(See Note 2)
6"
Varies
C-I-P Coping
Retaining Wall Panel

Retaining Wall
(See Wall Company
Panels (Typ.)
Drawings for Details)
Smooth or Textured Face of Panel
PRECAST AND C-I-P COPING NOTES:

1.
Provide Class II concrete for slightly aggressive environments
SECTION A-A
or Class IV for moderately or extremely aggressive environments.
C-I-P COPING - PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW

2.
Panel width
C-I-P COPING
Dowel Bars 4D extend 11" above the top of retaining
Dim. A
+ 6"
wall panel. Field cut as necessary to maintain 2" minimum
Panel width
cover. See Wall Company Drawings for number and spacing
Dim. B
of Dowel Bars 4D.

3.
" Open Joint
+ 1'-0" Min.
Payment for Dowel Bars 4D, Buildup Concrete and Coping will
be made under Retaining Wall System (Permanent).
Dim. B

" Open Joint
Drainage Ditch when
Top of Retaining
Control Drawings
Bars 4U2
r
2" Cove
Bars 4A
for details)
(Typ.)
" Chamfer (Typ.)
1'
-3"
2" Cover
Min.
2'
-0"
Varies
Coping
required (See Wall
Wall Panel (Typ.)
Buildup Concrete
Top of Precast
(
1'
-1" M ax.
)
)
.
n
"Mi
0
'
5
g(
n
i
p
tCo
s
a
c
e
lPr
a
c
i
p
y
T
"
0
'
0
1
Top of C-I-P
C-I-P Buildup Concrete

(1'-1" Max.)
Provide 3 " x 3 " preservative
treated timber blocking @ 5' Max.
Spacing for gaps > 1"
Bars 4U2 @
1'-4" sp. (Typ.)
Varies (1'-3" Max.,
Bars 4A
Clearance
Dowel Bars 4D
"
(See Note 2)
Varies

Bottom of
2" Min.)
(See Note 2)
Precast Coping
6"
6"
Min.
Min.
" Std.
(
" Min. ~ 2 " Max.)
Retaining Wall
Panels (Typ.)
(See Wall Company
12:
53:
43 PM
Smooth or Textured Face of Panel
SECTION B-B
PRECAST COPING
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
PRECAST COPING - PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MSE WALL COPING (PRECAST OR C-I-P)
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6100
1of 2
REINFORCING STEEL BENDING DIAGRAMS - PRECAST AND C-I-P COPINGS

Dim. B
MARK
SIZE
LENGTH
##S
(L)
or M
LENGTH
##
(L)
Drainage Ditch when
required (See Wall
3. Bars 4A may be continuous or spliced at the construction joints. Lap splices for Bars 4A will
Control Drawings
Bars 4U2
Bars 4A
be a minimum of 1'-8".
A
AS REQD.
AS REQD.
AS REQD.
AS REQD.
2'-0"
2'-0"
3
4"
for details)
(Typ.)
Chamfer (Typ.)
Varies
Recess Varies
(L)
(1'-3" Max., 2" Min.)

2'
-0"
## S = Slightly Aggressive
M = Moderately Aggressive
Panel width + 4"
Panel width + 4"
U2
Dim. B - 4"
Dim. B - 4"
U3
Dim. C - 4"
Dim. C - 6"
7" M in.
Varies
(L)
(L)
Ground
Line
6"
Field cut as
required to maintain
2" minimum cover
BARS 4A & 4B
DOWEL BAR 4D
BAR 4U1
BAR 4U2
BAR 4U3
6"
Min.
2'
-0" M in.
1'
-8"
1'
-8"
(
L)
Length as Required (L)
4B
Dowel Bars 4D
Varies
Length as Required (L)

2'
-0"
4A
E = Extremely Aggressive
Varies
U1
(Match
Precast
Dimensions)
Leveling Pad for
(See Wall Company
MSE Wall Shown
C-I-P COPING USED WITH PRECAST COPING

Note: When precast coping units do not fit the entire length of the retaining
wall, use this similar C-I-P coping for short portions between precast
coping units. This C-I-P coping may also be used for vertical copings.
Field bend Bars 4A

Dim. C
to maintain minimum
* For Slightly and Moderately
cover for Extremely
Aggressive environments
Aggressive Environments
Top of Coping
Top of Retaining
* 2" Cover (Top & Sides)
Wall End Panel
** For Extremely Aggressive
** 3" Cover (Top & Sides)
environments.
3
4"
Spacing
Bars 4B (Horizontal) (Field
Retaining Wall
cut as required to maintain

minimum cover)
Bars 4A (follows Slope
Chamfer (Typ.)
Bars 4B
Begin or End
Panel width
of C-I-P Coping Enclosure)
Dim. B
Bars 4A (Typ.)
+ 1'-0" Min.
Panel width
Bottom of Coping
Bars 4B shown
as (
(Typ.)
Bars 4U3
Bars 4U3 @ 1'-6"
Edge of Retaining
Max. sp. (Typ.)
4" Cover
Leveling Pad for
(Bottom)
12:
53:
44 PM
Bars 4B (Horizontal)
1
2"
6"
Wall End Panel
2'
-0" M in.
Drawings for details)
+ 6"
Varies
(See Wall Company
Coping Enclosure
1'
-6" M ax.
Retaining Wall End Panel

Edge of C-I-P
Eq. sp. @
Dim. C
3" Min. Overlap
MSE Wall Shown
SECTION C-C
Varies
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
C-I-P COPING ENCLOSURE DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MSE WALL COPING (PRECAST OR C-I-P)
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6100
2 of 2
8"
5'-4" (Typ.) ~ Additional
Devices (See Typical Sections
Bars 3D @ 8" sp. (42" F-Shape)
(See Note 1)
for details)
(Shown Dashed)
Top of
Bars 5B2
Junction Slab
4 ~ Bars 5F
Bars 3D
" V-Groove (See
2" Cover
Bars 5C @ 8" sp.
(Shown Dashed)
Note 8 & Detail "A")
Sides (Typ.)
(Typ.)
Approved metal
(Required only
or fiber cap
when Junction
1" Dowel Load
Bars 4A @
"Expansion Joint Detail"
4" (Typ.)
this sheet and Detail "A")
(Top of Slab)
4 "
3"M in.
1"
Transfer Devices
Bars 3D
(Typ. at
M in.
4 "
Slab is skewed)
Expansion
Joints)
Optional
2'
-0" M in.
(See Note 6)
3"
Bottom of
Junction Slab
Joint Filler**
Approach Slab
(See Note 13)
1'-0"
3s
p.
@
6"
Lap Splice
"
Shear Key
Gutter Line
1'-0"
Expansion Joint
Bars 4L @ 8" sp.
(Typ.)

(Junction Slab expansion joints are to coincide
Field cut reinforcing as required
with " open joints in Traffic Railing)
to maintain minimum cover (Typ.)
3"
Spacing Bars 5V2
** Stay-In-Place Plastic Preformed Bond Breakers
" Open Joint
Bars 5V2 (Typ.)
Bars 5S
Coping
Bars 5B1
in Precast Coping
8" Spacing (Typ.) (See Note 10)

2" Cover @
" V-Groove Spacing
2" Cover @
30'-0" Max. (See Note 8)
Expansion Joints
Open Joints
Begin or End Retaining Wall
" Open Joint in Precast
" Expansion Joint Spacing ~ 30'-0" Min. (32" F-Shape), 60'-0" Min. (42" F-Shape), 90'-0" Max. (See Note 5)
Coping and C-I-P Traffic
and Precast or C-I-P Coping
Railing to coincide with "
" Open Joint
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW FOR F-SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILING
Expansion Joint in Junction

Slab.
(Skewed Approach Slab Shown, Perpendicular Approach Slab Similar)

(Precast Coping Shown, C-I-P Coping Similar) (Traffic Railing not Shown for Clarity)
JUNCTION SLAB NOTES:
1.
When a 42" F-Shape Traffic Railing is used with precast copings, provide Bars 3D @ 8" spacing
" Open Joint in
between Bars 5C within 6'-0" of Expansion Joints.

2.
Construct the expansion joints, V-Grooves and face of coping plumb.
Top of
3.
Provide Class II concrete for slightly aggressive environments or Class IV for moderate or extremely
Traffic
aggressive environments.
Precast Traffic Railing
)
.
n
"Mi
0
'
5
y(
l
n
gO
n
i
p
tCo
s
a
c
e
lPr
a
c
i
p
y
"T
0
'
0
1
s*
n
o
i
t
c
S
g e
n
i
p
g & Co
n
i
l
i
c Ra
i
f
f
a
r
tT
s
a
c
e
m Pr
mu
i
n
"Mi
0
'
2
1
Top of Precast Coping
Railing
Wall Panel (Typ.)

horizontal.
7.
8.
Provide and install Preformed Expansion Joint Filler in accordance with Specification Section 932.
Construct " V-Grooves in junction slabs and C-I-P copings at 30'-0" maximum intervals as shown.
Space V-Grooves equally between " Expansion Joints and/or Begin or End Junction Slab. V-Groove
locations are to coincide with V-Groove locations in the Traffic Railing.
9.
3"
Top of Retaining
(See Note 5)
1'
-0"
Shear Keys in Junction Slab are required when GFRP bars are used for Dowel Transfer Devices and are
Varies
base of traffic railings to contain runoff.

6.
Mortar Plug
2" Cover M in.
Buildup Concrete
-3"
2'
Gutter Line. Provide at 90'-0" maximum intervals as shown. Provide 3"x3" Mortar plugs in open joints at the
Top of C-I-P
(
11" M ax.
)
Construct " Expansion Joints in junction slabs and C-I-P copings plumb and perpendicular or radial to the
Varies
Transfer Devices in accordance with Specification Section 350.

5.
Coping
round bars with a minimum shear strength of 22 ksi in accordance with ASTM D7617. Install Dowel Load
Traffic Railing
Dowel Load Transfer Devices will be hot-dip galvanized ASTM A 36 smooth round bar, or GFRP smooth
Precast
4.
Precast Coping and
Shoulder or Roadway Pavement is required on top of the junction slab for its entire length on the traffic
side of the Traffic Railing. See Typical Sections on Sheet Nos. 2 and 3 for details.
Clearance
10.
11.
For Precast Coping only, provide Dowel Bars 4D embedded 1'-0" and extend 9" above the top of MSE wall panels.
Varies
Field cut as necessary to maintain 2" minimum cover to the top of the buildup concrete. See Wall Company
12:
54:
03 PM
Drawings for number and spacing of Dowel Bars 4D.

12.
Dowels 4D (Typ.)
Precast Coping
(See Note 11)
Work this Index with the following:

Index No. 420 - Traffic Railing - (32" F-Shape)
Retaining Wall (MSE Shown,
Index No. 425 - Traffic Railing - (42" F-Shape).

13.
Other Types Similar) (Typ.)
The following Indexes contain details of the intersection of the retaining wall at approach slabs:
Index No. 20900 - Approach Slabs (Flexible Pavement Approaches)
(Precast Coping and Junction Slab Reinforcing not Shown for Clarity)
Index No. 20910 - Approach Slabs (Rigid Pavement Approaches)
* C-I-P End Section must

be 12'-0".
(Precast Coping Shown, C-I-P Coping Similar)
CROSS REFERENCE: For Detail "A", see Sheet 2.
F-SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILINGS

LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
Bottom of
DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX
WALL COPING WITH TRAFFIC RAILING/JUNCTION

SLAB
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6110
1of 6
1
2"
6'-6
5'-0"
(C-I-P Junction Slab)
212"
2"
Bars 4N @ 8" sp.

1" C-I-P F-Shapes
1
2"
(Tied to Bars 5P)
3
4"
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
(
Se
e No
t
e1
)
PARTIAL END VIEW OF TRAFFIC RAILING END
3
4"
@ 8" sp.
2'
-8"
1
4"
Top of
Coping
Bars 5S
1
2"
1'
-0"
6"
Key @
Min
Bars 4L @ 8" sp.
3" Cover
2'
-3"
Shear
2" Cover
6"
NOTE: See Index No. 420 and Index No. 425, Detail "A" for details.
Optional
6"
1'
-0"
(See Note 2)
(Showing Bars 5V and Bars 5S)
3
4"
6" Min.
Slope Permitted (See Note 8)
ITEM
UNIT
Concrete (Precast Coping Only)
Two Layers 30Lb. Roofing Felt
QUANTITY
CY/LF
Varies (2" min.)
2" Min. Cover

Optional widening & extension for Precast Coping (See Note 6)
0.083
CY/LF
1'-3"
Spacing 1"
Concrete (C-I-P Junction Slab)

Reinforcing Steel (Precast Coping & Traffic
Railing)
CY/LF
3 sp. @ 1'-0" = 3'-0"
Dowels
0.185
6"
Spacing
6"
Bars 5S
1"
LB/LF
Smooth or Textured
52.67
LB/LF
12.52
LB
21.36
(MSE Walls only)
"
" Min. ~ 2" Max. Gap (See Note 7)
Face of Wall
Spacing
Reinforcing Steel (C-I-P Junction Slab) (Typ.)
Dowel Bars 4D (MSE Walls only)
0.169
Spacing Bars 5B1
514"
Retaining Wall (Type Varies)
Concrete (Precast Barrier & Coping)
5 "
Utility Conduit
permitted
Bars 5B2 @ 1'-0" sp. (Typ.)
6"
1'
-114"
Joint
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES FOR PRECAST COPING
12'
-0" M in. Length)
1'
-0"
1
4"
Bars 5V2
(
Precast Traffic Railing
(
Precast Coping)
substituted)
2" Cover (Top)
7"
3"
(Bars 5V2 may be
1
4"
10
"R
Sections*
1
4"
for C-I-P
Bars 4A @ 4" sp.

Shoulder or Roadway
Joint Permitted
End Stirrup Bar 5V
2
"Co
v
e
r
Construction
Transfer Devices at
Precast Coping
(Typ.)
1'
-10"
8"
1" Dowel Load
(Rotated)
Bars 5S
@ 8" sp.
Bars 3D)
6"
Bars 5V
Bars 5P
(Tied to alternate Bars 4A)

(See Note 1, Sheet 1 for
Min. Embed. (42" F-Shape)
Coping
Bars 5S (Field Bent)
Bars 5C @ 8" sp.
1
2"
Min. Embed. (32" F-Shape)
3" 4
4 "
Railing
3" Precast 32" F-Shape

Traffic
1
2"
834"
5"
8"
(42" F-Shape)
2"
(32" F-Shape)
1'-5"
Cover
1'-2 "
4 sp. @ 1'-0" = 4'-0" (5B2)
3"
2 sp. @ 1'-0" (5B1)
3"
Bars 5B
TYPICAL SECTION THRU PRECAST* 32" F-SHAPE

Additional Reinf. @ Expansion Joints (Steel Dowels)
TRAFFIC RAILING AND COPING WITH C-I-P JUNCTION SLAB

* C-I-P Traffic Railing and Coping Sections using precast dimensions
(The above concrete quantities are based on a max. superelevation of 6.25%
and reinforcement are permitted at End Sections, Drainage Inlets and
and a 32" F-Shape Traffic Railing.
Light Pole Pedestals if slip forming is not used.

NOTES:
2. Vary Junction Slab slope based on roadway cross slope to maintain a minimum 6" asphalt
depth at the edge of the slab as shown.
" V-Groove (Typ.)
3. For Rigid Pavement (Concrete), Junction Slab may be thickened to match finished grade.
" V-Groove (Typ.)
4. Minimum length of Junction Slab between expansion joints is 30'-0".

5. At the Contractor's option, mechanical couplers may be used to splice reinforcing.
Complete details, including reinforcement lengths are required in the Shop Drawings.

Joint Filler

Joint Filler
Provide mechanical couplers in accordance with Specification Section 415. Mechanical

couplers shall develop 125% of the bar yield strength.
12:
54:
04 PM
6. Contractor to maintain stability of precast coping/traffic railing prior to junction slab

completion. In the Shop Drawings, show reinforcement for optional extension required
for stability, shipping and handling. Maintain 2" minimum concrete cover.
C-I-P COPING
PRECAST COPING
7. When the air gap between the precast coping extension and retaining wall exceeds 2",
fill gap with full depth Expanded Polystyrene to provide a maximum 2" air gap.
8. Angle varies ~ 0 min., 20 max.
12/17/2015
DETAIL "A"
(Showing Locations of " V-Grooves and " Preformed Expansion Joint Filler)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

SLAB
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6110
2 of 6
6'-6" (32" F-Shape)
3'-9"
6'-9" (42" F-Shape)
2"
" (32" F-Shape)
1'-0"
(42" F-Shape)
N/A
4'-8"
4'-8"
4'-8"
4'-8"
4'-5"
4'-5"
4'-5"
N/A
5'-7"
5'-7"
5'-7"
11'-6"
AS REQD.
9'-6"
S1
N/A
AS REQD.
9'-6"
512"
V2
1" Dowel
Smooth
5'-10"
5'-10"
5'-10"
2'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
(
Se
e No
t
e1
)
Optional
Shear
Key @
6"
Min
Length as Required
4'-8"
Precast Coping, ~ 11'-6" (with
32" F-Shape), 9'-6" (Coping Only)
8S1
C-I-P Coping ~ Length as Required
45
of Junction Slab
1'
-1 "
10"
1"
1
2"
3 sp. @ 1'-0" = 3'-0"
Dowels
Spacing
3"
4 sp. @ 1'-0" = 4'-0"
3 "
5B1 ~ Precast,
5B2 ~ C-I-P Coping
6"
Smooth or Texture
Face of Wall
2 sp. @ 1'-0"
3"
Optional Keyway
Bars 5B2
TYPICAL SECTION THRU C-I-P TRAFFIC RAILING

WITH C-I-P JUNCTION SLAB AND C-I-P COPING
Buildup for
(PRECAST COPING SIMILAR WITH C-I-P BUILDUP)
stepped MSE
Wall Panels
45

2. Vary the Junction Slab slope based on the roadway cross slope to
10"
1'-0"
6"
STIRRUP BAR 4N
6"
Bars 5S
(32" F-Shape)
maintain a minimum 6" asphalt depth at the edge of the slab.
Expanded
(42" F-Shape)
11" max.)
Coping
6"
finish grade.
BUILDUP FOR STEPPED MSE WALL PANELS

AND C-I-P COPING
32" F-Shape or 60'-0" for 42" F-Shape.
STIRRUP BAR 5V2
(0" min.,
Polystyrene (")
3. For Rigid Pavement (Concrete), Junction Slab may be thickened to match
4. Minimum length of Junction Slab between expansion joints is 30'-0" for
BAR 4A
Spacing
Spacing Bars
(C-I-P)
514" (Precast)
NOTES:
1'
-10"
Match top slope
412"
g~
n
i
p
tCo
s
a
c
e
Pr
)
& 6
5
e
t
o
eN
Se
"(
9
'
3
"
2
'
g ~6
n
i
p
P Co
I
C-
5430'
5"
1'-3"
Spacing 1"
1" DOWEL
BARS 5B, 5C, 5F & 5S
1
2"
" Min. ~ 2" Max. Gap (See Note 7)
6"
2'-0"
8 "
Optional widening & extension for Precast Coping (See Note 6)

Retaining Wall (Type Varies)
3'
-1 " (
42" F-Shape)
Precast ~ 4'-8" (See Sheet 1, Note 1)
5S
(See Note 9)
option
Precast Coping ~ 4'-8" (See Note 7)
5F
2" Cover
See Note 8
Expanded Polystyrene (" Side) (for C-I-P only)
2'
-8 " (
32" F-Shape)
3D
Top of
Coping
Two layers 30Lb. Roofing Felt
Contractor's
1
'
-2
"
1
(3
'
-5
2
"
"
(4
F
)
2
"
F
)
5C
3
4"
Bars 5B2 @ 1'-0" sp. (Typ.)
9
"
5B2
Bars 5S
Bars 4L @ 8" sp.
STIRRUP BAR 5P
9'-6" (Precast Coping only),

11'-6" (Precast Traffic Railing)
Bars 5V2
@ 8" sp.
1
4"
10
"R
3" Cover
Joint
Bar
5B1
134"
6" Min.
(See Note 2)
1'
-0"
N/A
2" Cover (Top)
Construction
Joint Reqd.
6"
2'-6"
Bars 4A @ 4" sp.
1'
-0"
3'
-3" (
42" F-Shape)
2'
-5" (
32" F-Shape)
30'
-0" M in. Length)
4'-8"
3'
-6" (
42" F-Shape)
(
C-I-P Traffic Railing
Transfer Devices at
(
C-I-P or Precast Coping)
4'-8"
2'
-3"
N/A
2" M in.
4'-8"
2" m in.
)
or 8S1 (Typ.)
3
"Co
v
e
r
(
1'
-1" m ax,
1" Dowel Load
1
1 4"
AS REQD.
3
4"
AS REQD.
Varies
AS REQD.
M in.
1
1
2" 3 4"
B2
Bars 5S
3" 4
Sheet 1 for Bars 3D)
8"
Bars 5C @ 8" sp. (See Note 1,
(42" F-Shape) 3"
3
4"
3"
(32" F-Shape)
9'-6"
N/A
Bars 5P
@ 8" sp.
6"
11'-6"
Bars 4A or for Precast Coping
2"
(42" F-Shape)
M ax.
B1
(32" F-Shape)
6"
9"
5 "
5'-7"
1'
-1"
8'-0"
2'
-8" (
42" F-Shape)
5'-7"
1'
-10" (
32" F-Shape)
Spacing Bars 8S1 (42" F-Shape)
8 "
BARS 4L
Precast
7"
C-I-P
Spacing Bars 5S (32" F-Shape)
2'
-8" (
32" F-Shape)
Shoulder or Roadway
6 "
2"
COPING
PRECAST
COPING &
32" F-SHAPE
SIZE
3"
MARK
1'
-0"
3"
3 "
(C-I-P Junction Slab)
3 " 9" 8"
LENGTH
3
4"
10
5"
8"
8"
5'-0"
Cover
5. See Index No. 420 & 425 for additional Traffic Railing Details.
6. Contractor to maintain stability of precast coping prior to junction
slab completion. In the Shop Drawings, show reinforcement for
2. All reinforcing steel at expansion and open joints will have a 2" minimum cover.
optional extension required for stability, shipping and handling.

Maintain 2" minimum concrete cover.
12:
54:
05 PM
3. Lap splices for Bars 5B & 5S will be a minimum of 2'-0".

4. For Precast Copings only, lap splice Bars 4A with Bars 5C. Lap splices will be a minimum of 2'-0".
7. When the air gap between the precast coping extension and retaining
5. The Contractor may use either full length Bars 4A or lap splice with Bars 5C at alternate Bars 4A
wall exceeds 2", fill gap with full depth Expanded Polystyrene to
provide a maximum 2" air gap.
for C-I-P Copings.

6. Dimension shown is for lap splice option. For mechanical coupler option, this dimension is 1'-4"
ITEM
Concrete (Traffic Railing not Included)
Reinforcing Steel (Typical) excluding

Bars 5V2 and 5S (Typ.)
8. Angle varies ~ 0 min., 20 max.
UNIT
QUANTITY
CY/LF
0.268
LB/LF
30.89
LB/LF
21.36
9. If slip forming is used, submit shop drawings for approval showing 3"
(32" F-Shape) or 1'-7" (42" F-Shape).

7. Dimension shown is for lap splice option. For mechanical coupler option, this dimension is 4'-8".
side cover with the Typical Section dimensions adjusted.

(Steel Dowels)
must consist of deformed wire meeting the requirements of Specification Section 931.
(The above concrete quantities are based on a max. superelevation
9. Contractor may use a single #5 stirrup in lieu of two bars for 5P and 5V2.
of 6.25%, beneath a 32" F-Shape Traffic Railing on an MSE Wall).

LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES FOR C-I-P COPING
DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

SLAB
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6110
3 of 6
4 ~ Bars 5F
" V-Groove
Bars 5C @ 8" sp.
3"
3s
p.
@
(Top of Slab)
(Required only
Bars 5B2
6"
2" Cover
(Tie to Bars 4A)
4L Bars @
(See Detail "A"
Sides (Typ.)
(Typ.)
8" sp. (Typ.)
& Note 7, Sheet 1)
Expansion Joint (See Expansion
1" Dowel Load
Joint Detail & Detail "A")
Transfer Devices
when Junction
Slab is skewed)
Field cut reinforcement

minimum concrete
2'
-0" M in.
Approach Slab
(See Note 12
Sheet 1)
Begin or End
Skew Bars 7P1 &
Bars 4L @ 8" (Typ.)
Approach Slab
4V1 as required
Bars 4A @ 4" (Typ.)
" Open Jt.
5'-0" End Post
Varies
Bars 7P1 & 4V1 (Typ.)

Gutter Line
Bars 5B1
Coping Line
Lap Splice
cover (Typ.)
Bars 7P1 &

4V1 (Typ.)
2'-6" (Typ.)
5'-0" Interior Post (Typ.)
2'-6" (Typ.)
(2'-6" Min., 5'-0" Max.)
Varies ~ 5'-0" (Typ.)
5'-0" End Post
5'-0" End Post
(2'-6" Min., 5'-0" Max.)
@ Expansion Joint
@ Expansion Joint
2" Cover @
" V-Groove Spacing ~ 30'-0" Max. (See Note 7, Sheet 1)
" Open Joint in Precast
Open Joints
Coping and C-I-P Traffic

Railing to coincide with "
" Expansion Joint Spacing ~ 30'-0" Min., 90'-0" Max. (See Note 5, Sheet 1)
Expansion Joint in Junction
Slab.
PLAN VIEW
(Skewed Approach Slab shown, Perpendicular Approach Slab similar)
(Precast Coping shown, C-I-P Coping similar)
CROSS REFERENCES:
1. For Detail "A" see Sheet 2.
(Traffic Railing reinforcement not shown, except for Bars 7P1 & 4V1)
2. For "Expansion Joint Detail" see Sheet 1.

3. For "Junction Slab Notes" see Sheet 1.
Bars 5B2
Bars 5C @ 8" sp.
Bars 5C @ 8" sp.
(Tie to Bars 4A) (Typ.)
(Tie to Bars 4A) (Typ.)
Bars 5B2
Guardrail
Gutter Line
Gutter Line
4 " Taper
(Typ.)
Face of Curb
Bars 4L (Typ.)
Bars 4A (Typ.)
Begin or End
Retaining Wall
Coping and
12:
54:
06 PM
Traffic Railing
Bars 4L
Bars 5B1
Bars 4A
3'-0" Taper
(Inside Face)
3'-0" Taper
Bars 4P5 (Typ.)

Coping Line
2'-6" (Typ.)
5'-0" Interior Post (Typ.)
Bars 4R3 (Typ.)

Coping Line
2'-6" (Typ.)
(Inside Face)
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF COPING WITH CURB
(Traffic Railing reinforcement not shown, except for Bars 7P1 & 4V1)
(Traffic Railing reinforcement not shown, except for Bars 4P5, 4R3, 7P1 & 4V1)
12/17/2015
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF GUARDRAIL TRANSITION AT BEGIN OR END RETAINING WALL
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
CORRAL SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILINGS

DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

SLAB
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6110
4 of 6
Interior Post (Const.

"
4
11"
"
5
8"
"
3
'
6
"
1
'
1
.
p
5s
.
p
5s
"
3
'
7
Guardrail Thrie Beam
1
6 4"
Joint permitted in rail)
A)
s4
r
e Ba
t
a
n
r
e
t
l
oa
et
i
T
(
"
d@ 8
e
c
a
p
V1 s
P1 & 4
s7
r
Ba
"
5
.
p
2s
A
C
clear precast opening
Top of C-I-P
"
@ 8
Bars 4S3
Shift Bars 4A & 4L to
W-Beam similar
)
b
r
Cu
P5 (
s4
r
g Ba
n
i
c
a
Sp
.
p
2s
"
6
'
6
"
@ 8
attachment shown,
"
5
"
@ 4
"
@ 4
n
o
i
t
i
s
n
a
r
lT
i
a
r
d
r
a
Gu
g
n
i
c
a
p
S
t
l
o
B
u
r
h
T
V1
P1 & 4
s7
r
g Ba
n
i
c
a
Sp
Traffic Railing
" V-Groove
Curb (Precast
)
.
p
y
T
P1 (
s7
r
Ba
permitted for
or C-I-P)
)
.
p
y
T
V1 (
s4
r
Ba
C-I-P Curb
Bars 4P5 (Typ.)
Bars 4R3
C-I-P
Transition
-3"
2'
s
e
i
r
Va
Bars 4A (Typ.)
Begin or End
Bars 4L (Typ.)
)
.
n
"Mi
6
'
2
s(
e
i
r
Va
Retaining Wall
r
e
p
a
"T
0
'
3
Coping, and
)
e
c
e Fa
d
i
s
n
I
(
Traffic Railing
4"
"
4
r
e
p
a
"T
0
'
3
)
.
x
"Ma
6
'
2
)
e
c
e Fa
d
i
s
n
I
(
)
L
s4
r
Ba
(
"
8
@
.
p
s
4
1
&
A)
s4
r
Ba
"(
.@ 4
p
8s
2
4"
t
s
r Po
o
i
r
e
t
n
I
)
L
s4
r
Ba
"(
.@ 8
p
4s
A)& 1
s4
r
a
B
(
"
4
@
.
p
s
8
2
4"
g
n
i
p
tCo
s
a
c
e
lPr
a
c
i
p
y
"T
0
'
0
1
b
r
h Cu
t
wi
.
p
"s
L@ 8
s4
r
.& Ba
p
"s
A@ 4
s4
r
Ba
g
n
i
p
n Co
o
i
t
i
s
n
a
r
nT
i
g
"Be
0
'
0
1
4"
"
6
'
2
"
6
'
2
)
.
p
y
T
"(
0
'
5
"
6
'
2
,
.
n
"Mi
0
'
0
(
" Open Joint

in Precast Coping
and Precast Curb
g
n
i
p
n Co
o
i
t
i
s
n
a
r
dT
)En
.
n
"Mi
6
'
8
s(
e
i
r
Va
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW OF OUTSIDE FACE OF COPING

(End Transition and Typical Precast Coping with Curb shown, C-I-P Coping similar)
Expansion Joint or
Interior Post (Const.

"
6
Begin/End Approch Slab

" Open Joint in
V1
P1 & 4
s7
r
g Ba
n
i
c
a
Sp
o
st
r
a
eb
t
a
n
r
e
t
l
ea
i
T
(
)
L
r4
Ao
s4
r
Ba
"
4
V1
P1 & 4
s7
r
Ba
Coping & Traffic Railing
"
.@ 8
p
6s
.
p
5s
"
@ 4
Joint permitted in rail)
.
p
5s
"
@ 4
Top of C-I-P
Traffic Railing
A
)
.
p
y
T
P1 (
s7
r
Ba
)
.
p
y
T
V1 (
s4
r
Ba
Post (Precast or C-I-P)

Bars 4S3 (Typ.)
Bars 4S3 (Typ.)
Post (Precast or C-I-P) (Typ.)
Bars 4L (Typ.)
Bars 4A (Typ.)
)
.
p
y
T
"(
0
'
s~ 5
e
i
r
Va
)
.
x
"Ma
0
'
,5
.
n
"Mi
6
'
2
(
)
.
p
y
T
"
6
'
7
(
s
e
i
r
g Va
n
i
n
e
p
tO
s
d Po
En
)
.
x
"Ma
6
'
,7
.
n
"Mi
0
'
5
(
"
6
'
2
)
t
n
i
o
.J
p
l@ Ex
a
c
i
p
y
T
(
)
t
n
i
o
.J
p
l@ Ex
a
c
i
p
y
T
(
)
.
n
"Mi
6
'
7
t(
n
i
o
nJ
o
i
s
n
a
p
lEx
a
c
i
p
y
" Open Joint
"T
0
'
0
1
b
r
tCu
u
o
h
t
i
w
g
n
i
p
o
C
t
in Precast Coping
s
a
c
e
Pr
.
x
"Ma
0
'
0
,9
.
n
"Mi
0
'
0
g~ 3
n
i
c
a
p
s
t
n
i
o
J
n
o
i
s
n
a
p
"Ex
12:
54:
07 PM
t
s
d Po
"En
0
'
5
t
s
d Po
"En
0
'
5
4"
)
.
p
y
T
"(
0
'
s~ 5
e
i
r
Va
)
.
x
a
M
"
0
'
5
,
.
n
i
M
"
6
'
2
(
4"
)
L
s4
r
Ba
"(
.@ 8
p
4s
A)& 1
s4
r
Ba
"(
.@ 4
p
8s
2
t
s
r Po
o
i
r
e
t
n
I
4"
)
L
s4
r
Ba
"(
.@ 8
p
4s
A)& 1
s4
r
Ba
"(
.@ 4
p
8s
2
)
.
n
"Mi
6
'
7
t(
n
i
o
nJ
o
i
s
n
a
p
lEx
a
c
i
p
y
"T
0
'
0
1
b
r
tCu
u
o
h
t
i
w
g
n
i
p
o
C
t
s
a
c
e
Pr
.
x
"Ma
0
'
0
,9
.
n
"Mi
0
'
0
g~ 3
n
i
c
a
p
ts
n
i
o
nJ
o
i
s
n
a
p
"Ex
"
6
'
2
"
6
'
2
)
.
p
y
T
"(
0
'
5
"
6
'
2
g
n
i
p
tCo
s
a
c
e
lPr
a
c
i
p
y
"T
0
'
0
1
b
r
u
C
t
u
o
h
t
i
w
" Open Joint
in Precast Coping
& Precast Curb
NOTE: Wall Panels not shown for clarity.
CROSS REFERENCES:
1. For Sections A-A, B-B, C-C & D-D, see
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW OF OUTSIDE FACE OF COPING
12/17/2015
(Precast Coping at Expansion Joint and Typical Precast Coping without Curb shown, C-I-P Coping similar)
Sheet 6.
2. For Junction Slab Notes, see Sheet 1.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

SLAB
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6110
5 of 6
1'-6"
1'-6"
Coping
Gutter Line
1'-6"
Coping
Gutter Line
Coping
Gutter Line
Bars 4S3
Const.
(See Note 4)
Joint
1'-2"
permitted
(Corral Shape)
4"
Bars 7P1
(See Note 4)
1 "
1 "
Curb
Bars 4S3
Sealant Detail"
Joint
1'-2"
Bars 4P5 (See Note 4)
See "Curb Joint
Const.
(See Note 4)
(
Rail)
C-I-P Only
Traffic Railing -
(Corral Shape)
C-I-P Only
1 "
Index No. 424
Traffic Railing -
(
Post & Rail)
(See Note 4)
(
Rail)
Bars 7P1
Index No. 424
(
Post)
4"
Precast
(Corral Shape)
or C-I-P
Traffic Railing -
C-I-P Only
Index No. 424
1'-2"
required
6" Precast
3 "
or C-I-P Curb
Bars 4A
6"
Bars 4A
Bars 4A
Embed.
6"
6"
Embed.
Embed.
Bars 5C
Bars 4V1
Bars 5B2
(See Note 4)
Bars 5B2
Bars 5B1 (Typ.)
Bars 4L
Bars 5C
Bars 5B2
Bars 4V1
Bars 4R3
(See Note 4)
(See Note 4)
Bars 4L
Bars 4L
See Sheet 2
Bars 5B2 (Typ.)
for Junction Slab and

Bars 5B1 (Typ.)
See Sheet 3
Precast Coping Details
for Junction Slab and
See Sheet 2 or 3
C-I-P Coping Details
for Junction Slab

Trim Bars 4P5 as
and Coping Details
required to clear
Const. Joint
1'-6" Min.
1'-6" Min.
(See Note 3)
SECTION A-A
SECTION A-A
(See Note 3)
(TYPICAL SECTION C-I-P COPING WITHOUT CURB)
(TYPICAL SECTION PRECAST COPING WITHOUT CURB)
SECTION B-B
1'-6"
1'-6"
(TYPICAL SECTION WITH CURB)
Coping
Gutter Line
Coping
Gutter Line

Index No. 424
Traffic Railing -
Index No. 424
(Corral Shape)
7 "
4"
1 "
1 "
Bars 7P1
(See Note 4)
C-I-P Only
(See Note 4)
C-I-P Only
4 "
Bars 7P1
(
Transition)
(Corral Shape)
(
Transition)
Traffic Railing -
Top of Curb
Low Modulus
Silicone Sealant
(Type A)
" (Typ.)
JOINT NOTE:
Joint sealant required at

4" Taper
4" Taper
Const.
Joint
11"
1'-2"
Const.
all expansion joints and
Joint
between precast and
required
C-I-P curb openings.
required
Bars 4A
Joint Filler (See Detail "A"
Bars 4A
Sheet 2)
6"
Embed.
1" Foam
Bars 5C
Bars 5C
Bars 4V1
Bars 5B2
(See Note 4)
Backer Rod
Bars 4V1
Bars 5B2
2"
(See Note 4)
Bars 4L
Min.
Bars 4L
Bars 5B1 (Typ.)

Bars 5B1 (Typ.)
See Sheet 2 or 3
See Sheet 2 or 3
for Junction Slab
for Junction Slab
and Coping Details
and Coping Details
CURB JOINT SEALANT DETAIL
12:
54:
08 PM
NOTES:
1. See Sheets 2 & 3 for Junction Slab and additional Coping details.
2. Slip Forming of C-I-P Traffic Railing is not permitted.
1'-6" Min.
1'-6" Min.
(See Note 3)
12/17/2015
(See Note 3)
SECTION C-C
END VIEW D-D
(TYPICAL SECTION TRANSITION COPING)
(TYPICAL SECTION TRANSITION COPING)
4. See Index No. 424 for Traffic Railing details and Bars 7P1, 4P5,
4R3, 4S3 & 4V1. Bars 5R2 and 5U are not required in Retaining
Wall Coping.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

SLAB
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6110
6 of 6
" V-Groove (See
Bars 5B2
Devices (See Typical Sections
Top of Raised
for details)
Sidewalk
1"
Note 8 & Detail "B")
2" Cover
Sides (Typ.)
Bars 4C @ 6" sp. (See Note 1)
1" Dowel Load
(tie Bars 4C to Bars 5A) (Typ.)
Transfer Devices
"Expansion Joint Detail "

this sheet and Detail "B")
4 ~ Bars 5F
4 "
(Top of Slab)
Approved metal
(Required only
or fiber cap
when Raised
Sidewalk is
3"
Optional Shear
Approach Slab
Key (See Note 6)
(See Note 13)
3s
p.
@
6"
Lap Splice
2'
-0" M in.
3" M in.
skewed)
Edge of
Precast Coping
Gutter Line
Bar 5T
"
Bottom of
Raised Sidewalk
Bars 5L @ 1'-0" sp.
Joint Filler**
1'-0"
(Typ.)
1'-0"
Field cut reinforcing
Expansion Joint
Begin or End Retaining Wall

& Precast or C-I-P Coping
Spacing Bars
" Open Joint
Alternating Bars
in Precast Coping
5T and 5X @
6" Spacing (Typ.) (See Note 9)
" V-Groove Spacing
Coping
Bars 5B1
1'-0" sp. (Typ.)
minimum cover (Typ.)
5"
5T and 5X
(Raised Sidewalk expansion joints are to coincide

with " open joints in Traffic Railing)
Bars 5S
Bars 5A @ 6" sp.
2" Cover @
2" Cover @
Open Joints
Expansion Joints

" Expansion Joint Spacing ~ 30'-0" Min. (32" Vertical Shape), 60'-0" Min. (42" Vertical Shape), 90'-0" Max. (See Note 5)
** Stay-In-Place Plastic Preformed Bond Breakers
" Open Joint in

" Open Joint
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW FOR VERTICAL SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILING
Precast Coping and
1.
to coincide with "
Expansion Joint in
When a 42" Vertical Shape Traffic Railing is used with a precast coping, increase
Bars 4C to Bars 5C or provide Bars 4C @ 4" spacing within 6'-0" of Expansion Joints.
" Open Joint
2.
Construct the expansion joints, V-Grooves and face of coping plumb.
3.
Provide Class II concrete for slightly aggressive environments or Class IV for moderately
in Precast Coping
or extremely aggressive environments.

4.
(Precast Coping Shown, C-I-P Coping Similar) (Traffic Railing not Shown for Clarity)
RAISED SIDEWALK NOTES:
Top of C-I-P
)
.
n
"Mi
0
'
5
y(
l
n
gO
n
i
p
tCo
s
a
c
e
lPr
a
c
i
p
y
"T
0
'
0
1
n*
o
i
t
c
e
S
g
n
i
p
o
C
d
n
ga
n
i
l
i
c Ra
i
f
f
a
r
tT
s
a
c
e
.Pr
n
"Mi
0
'
2
1
Traffic Railing
Raised Sidewalk.
Dowel Load Transfer Devices will be hot-dip galvanized ASTM A 36 smooth round bar, or
Wall Panel (Typ.)
Construct " V-Grooves in raised sidewalk and C-I-P coping at 30'-0" maximum intervals as
-3"
2'
8.
shown. Space V-Grooves equally between " Expansion Joints and/or Begin or End Raised
Sidewalk. V-Groove locations are to coincide with V-Groove locations in the Traffic Railing.
9.
1'
-0"
Top of Retaining
Provide and install Preformed Expansion Joint Filler in accordance with Specification
Section 932.
Varies
7.
2" Cover M in.
Devices and are optional with steel dowel bars. Tongue Slope on Shear Key must be constant
Coping
Top of recessed
Shear Keys in Junction Slab are required when GFRP bars are used for Dowel Transfer
(
11" M ax.
)
6.
Varies
Construct " Expansion Joints in raised sidewalk and C-I-P copings perpendicular
or radial to the Gutter Line. Provide at 90'-0" maximum intervals as shown.
Precast
D7617. Install Dowel Load Transfer Devices in accordance with Specification Section 350.
5.
C-I-P Traffic
Railing
GFRP smooth round bars with a minimum shear strength of 22 ksi in accordance with ASTM
10. For Precast Coping only, provide Dowel Bars 4D embedded 1'-0" and extend 9" above the top
of MSE wall panels. Field cut as necessary to maintain 2" minimum cover to the top of the
Clearance
buildup concrete. See Wall Company Drawings for number and spacing of Dowel Bars 4D.
Varies
11. Finish Sidewalks in accordance with Specification Section 522.

12. Work this Index with the following:
Index No. 422 - Traffic Railing - (42" Vertical Shape)
Bottom of
Dowels 4D (Typ.)
Precast Coping
(See Note 10)
Index No. 423 - Traffic Railing - (32" Vertical Shape)
12:
54:
35 PM
13. The following Indexes contain details of the intersection of the retaining wall at approach
slabs:
shown, other types similar)
(Precast Coping & Raised Sidewalk Reinforcing not Shown for Clarity)
CROSS REFERENCE: For Detail "B", see Sheet 2.
* C-I-P End Section must be 12'-0".
VERTICAL SHAPE TRAFFIC RAILINGS

LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX
WALL COPING WITH TRAFFIC RAILING/RAISED

SIDEWALK
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6120
1of 3
1'-3"
11"
42" Vertical Shape
7'-9"
32" Vertical Shape

5'-11" (C-I-P Raised Sidewalk) (See Note 2)
1'-10"
(Shown dashed)
(Precast Coping)
C-I-P Traffic
4" Taper
Railing
Transition Bars 5X
9"
1'-1"
32" Vertical Shape
7"
1'-3"
42" Vertical Shape

Bullet Railing (Not required for 42"
Coping
(
C-I-P or Precast Traffic Railing)
(Alternate with Bars
(32" Vertical Shape shown)
5T) (See Note 3)
(42" Vertical Shape similar)

Transition
Precast Coping
PARTIAL END VIEW OF TRAFFIC RAILING END
Top of Travel
Lane or Shoulder
(Showing Bars 5S, Bars 5T and Bars 5X)
Top of
Precast Coping
Coping
(
6" M ax.
)(
See Note 2)
Curb H eight Varies
Bars 5T
1" Dowel Load
Transfer Devices
Bars 5T @ 1'-0" sp.
at Expansion Joints
Bars 5A @ 6" sp.

Bars 4C @ 6" sp.
5X) (See Note 3)
(lap with Bars 4C)
(lap with Bars 5A)
5"
Bars 5S
(See Note 3)
Ft
/
2 Ft
0
:.
e
p
o
Sl
2"
Top of
See Note 4
3'
-6" ~ 42" Vertical Shape
Bars 5X @ 1'-0" sp.
C-I-P or Precast Traffic Railing
2'
6" M in.
Bars 5S
Em bed.
Vertical Shape Pedestrian Railing)

Gutter Line
Coping
UNIT
1'-0" sp. (Typ.)
QUANTITY
Bars 5L @ 1'-0" sp.

Level
Optional Shear
Concrete (Precast Coping)
CY/LF
(2" min.)
CY/LF
Dowel Bars 4D
0.095
(MSE Walls only)

Spacing
Concrete (C-I-P Raised Sidewalk)
Varies
Optional extension for Precast Coping
Key @ Joint
6"
C.I.P Buildup Concrete
5 sp. @ 1'-0" = 5'-0"
Spacing
(MSE Walls only)
Bars 5B1
1" Dowels
0.232
1'
-1"
Bars 5B2 @
Expansion Joint Filler
2'
-3" Precast Coping
ITEM
" Preformed
(Typ.)
6"
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES FOR PRECAST COPING
2" Min. Cover
6"
Bars 5B1
3" Cover
5 "
6"
M in.
1'
-1 "
9"
NOTE: See Index No. 422 and Index No. 423, Railing End Detail for details.
Retaining Wall
Spacing
Reinforcing Steel (Precast Coping) excluding

Bars 5T, 5X and 5S (Typ.)
LB/LF
23.90
LB/LF
13.50
LB
32.04
6"
5 sp. @ 1'-0" = 5'-0" (5B2)
8"
2 sp. @ 8"
" Min. ~ 2" Max.

Reinforcing Steel (C-I-P Raised Sidewalk) (Typ.)
Additional Reinf. @ Expansion Joints (Steel Dowels)
3"
(Type Varies)
= 1'-4" (5B1)
Bars 5B2
(See Note 7)
1
4"
"
Smooth or Textured
Face of Wall
The above concrete quantities are based on a Type D
TYPICAL SECTION THRU PRECAST COPING WITH C-I-P RAISED SIDEWALK
Concrete Curb (See Note 2).
AND RETAINING WALL AT EXPANSION JOINTS
NOTES:
2. Match roadway curb shape (Type) and height. See Roadway Plans and Index No. 300. 5'-11" dimension is based
" V-Groove (Typ.)
on a 32" Vertical Shape Traffic Railing with a Type D curb adjacent to a 6'-0" wide sidewalk. Adjust this
" V-Groove (Typ.)
dimension as required for other curb types or transitions at Begin or End Retaining Wall.
3. See Index No. 422 and Index No. 423 for Bars 5S, 5T & 5X and Bullet Railing details. Adjust vertical dimension
of Bars 5T and 5X, see Reinforcing Steel Note 5.
4. Trim end of Bars 5T and 5X to clear construction joint for 42" Vertical Shape Traffic Railing.
Joint Filler
Joint Filler
5. At the Contractor's option, mechanical couplers may be used to splice reinforcing. Complete details, including
12:
54:
36 PM
reinforcement lengths are required in the Shop Drawings. Mechanical couplers shall develop 125% of the bar
yield strength.
6. Contractor to maintain stability of precast coping prior to junction slab completion.
7. When the air gap between the precast coping extension and retaining wall exceeds 2", fill gap with full
PRECAST COPING
depth Expanded Polystyrene to provide a maximum 2" air gap.
C-I-P COPING
12/17/2015
DETAIL "B"
(Showing Locations of " V-Grooves and " Preformed Expansion Joint Filler)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

SIDEWALK
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6120
2 of 3
REINFORCING STEEL BENDING DIAGRAMS - RAISED SIDEWALK
7'-9"

LENGTH
5B2
Gutter Line
Length as Required
Bars 5X @ 1'-0" sp.
9'-6"/11'-6"
B2
AS REQD.
5'-5"
Precast Coping Option ~ 5'-5"
5F
5'-0"
5'-0"
AS REQD.
N/A
BARS 5B1, 5B2, 4C & 5F
5'-0"
2'-0"
L
4'-5"
Top of
4'-5"
C-I-P
Smooth Bar
1" Dowel
2'-0"
Coping
2'-0"
1'
-1 "
1" DOWEL
Precast Coping ~ 3'-11"

(See Note 6)
5T) (See Note 2)
(42" Vertical Shape similar)
(See Note 7)
N/A
(32" Vertical Shape shown)
Coping
Top of C-I-P Coping

Bars 5T @ 1'-0" sp.

5X) (See Note 2)
Bars 5A @ 6" sp.

Top of Travel
5"
Lane or Shoulder
Bars 5S
Bars 5B2 @ 1'-0" sp. (Typ.)
2"
(See Note 2)
Top of
Ft
/
2 Ft
0
:.
e
p
o
Sl
Coping
2" Cover
3'-9"
(Top & Sides)

(See Note 3)
6"
4C
(
6" M ax.
)(
See Note 1)
B1
9'-1"
Curb H eight Varies
5'-9"
6"
(
M in.
)
3" Cover
Expansion Joints (Typ.)

Expanded Polystyrene (" Side)
Optional Shear
Level
6"
Spacing
BAR 5L
1'
-1"
Joint Filler
6"
Expansion
Transfer Devices at
Key @ Joint
BAR 5A
Bars 5L @ 1'-0" sp.
1" Dowel Load
5 "
1'
-10"
90
8"
C-I-P Coping ~ 7'-3"
" Preformed
(
C-I-P Traffic Railing)
RAILING
Bullet Railing
Precast Traffic Railing/Coping ~ 11'-6"
COPING/ COPING
3'
C-I-P
42" Vertical Shape
2'
PRECAST
5B1
32" Vertical Shape
1'-3"
5 sp. @ 1'-0" = 5'-0"
2'
-3" C-I-P Coping
SIZE
1'-1"
6'-6"
9"
MARK
6'-8"
Spacing
1" Dowels
Bars 5B2
Retaining Wall
Varies
(Type Varies)
6"
Spacing
2. All reinforcing steel at expansion joints will have a 2" minimum cover.
Bars 5B2
7 sp. @ 1'-0" = 7'-0"
6"

4. Lap splice Bars 5A with Bars 4C. Lap splices will be a minimum of 2'-0".
Smooth or Textured
Face of Wall
TYPICAL SECTION THRU C-I-P COPING AND RAISED SIDEWALK
5. See Index No. 422 and Index No. 423 for Bars 5S, 5T and 5X. Adjust vertical
(1'-1" Max., 2" Min.)
3"
AND RETAINING WALL AT EXPANSION JOINTS
dimensions of Stirrup Bars 5T and 5X to 3'-0" for 32" Vertical Shape or 3'-10"
for 42" Vertical Shape.
Optional Keyway
6. Dimension shown is for lap splice option. For mechanical coupler option, this dimension
is 1'-8".
Buildup for
7. Dimension shown is for lap splice option. For mechanical coupler option, this dimension
stepped MSE
is 5'-8", and reinforcing size must be increased to #5 bars (Bars 5C).

2" M in.
2"
45
M in.
6"
WWR must consist of deformed wire meeting the requirements of Specification Section 931.
M ax.
Wall Panels
Expanded
(0" min.,
11" max.)
Polystyrene (")
ESTIMATED QUANTITIES FOR C-I-P COPING
Coping
6"
BUILDUP FOR STEPPED MSE WALL PANELS

ITEM
Concrete
UNIT
QUANTITY
CY/LF
0.326
AND C-I-P COPING
NOTES:
12:
54:
37 PM
1. Match roadway curb shape (Type) and height. See Roadway Plans and Index No. 300. 6'-8" dimension is based
Reinforcing Steel (Typical) excluding
Bars 5T, 5X and 5S (Typ.)
35.03
as required for other curb types or transitions at Begin or End Retaining Wall.
2. See Index No. 422 and Index No. 423 for Bars 5S, 5T & 5X and Bullet Railing details. Adjust vertical dimension of
Additional Reinf. @ Expansion Joints

(Steel Dowels)
LB
Bars 5T and 5X, see Reinforcing Steel Note 5.
32.04
3. If slip forming is used, submit shop drawings for approval showing 3" side cover with the Typical Section dimensions adjusted.
The above concrete quantities are based on a Type D

Concrete Curb on a level Retaining Wall (See Note 1).

LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
on a 32" Vertical Shape Traffic Railing with a Type D curb adjacent to a 6'-0" wide sidewalk. Adjust this dimension
LB/LF
DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX

SIDEWALK
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6120
3 of 3
Bars 5B2
" V-Groove (Typ.)
" V-Groove (See
2" Cover
Bars 5A @ 1'-0" sp.
Note 3 & Detail "C")
Sides (Typ.)
(tied to Bars 5L (Typ.)
Approach Slab
(See Note 8)
" Preformed
2'
-2" M in.
" V-Groove (Typ.)
" Preformed
Lap Splice
PRECAST COPING
Edge of
Precast
Coping
C-I-P COPING
DETAIL "C"
(Showing Locations of " V-Grooves and
" Open Joint
" Preformed Expansion Joint Filler)
Spacing Bars 4P 5 "
Field cut reinforcing as required
" Open Joint
to maintain minimum cover (Typ.)
in Precast Coping
1'-0" Spacing (Typ.) (See Note 4)
" V-Groove Spacing
Bars 5L @ 1'-0" sp.
Bars 4P1 (Typ.)
Coping
Bars 5B1
(tied to Bars 5U1) (Typ.)

Bars 5U1 @ 1'-0" sp.
(tied to Bars 4P) (Typ.)
2" Cover @
2" Cover @
Open Joints
Expansion Joints
Begin or End Retaining
" Expansion Joint Spacing ~ 50'-0" Min., 90'-0" Max. (See Note 1)
Wall, Precast Coping/
Parapet or C-I-P Coping
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW

(Precast Coping Shown, C-I-P Coping Similar) (Concrete Parapet not Shown for Clarity)
PRECAST COPING/PARAPET AND SIDEWALK NOTES:
" Open Joint in
Precast Coping and

" Open Joint in
1. Provide Class II concrete for slightly aggressive environments or
Concrete Parapet
)
.
n
"Mi
0
'
5
t(
e
p
a
r
e Pa
t
e
r
c
n
g & Co
n
i
p
tCo
s
a
c
e
lPr
a
c
i
p
y
"T
0
'
0
1
Precast Coping and
Class IV for moderately or extremely aggressive environments.
Concrete Parapet
2. Construct " Expansion Joints in sidewalk and C-I-P coping plumb and
to coincide with
" Expansion Joint
in Sidewalk
either perpendicular or radial to the Gutter Line. Provide Expansion

Top of Precast
Joints at 90'-0" maximum intervals as shown.
Concrete Parapet
3. Provide and install Preformed Expansion Joint Filler in accordance with
Wall Panel (Typ.)
11" above the top of MSE wall panels. Field cut as necessary to maintain
2" minimum cover to the top of the buildup concrete. See Wall Company
Parapet
Concrete
-3"
2'
Drawings for number and spacing of Dowel Bars 4D.

7. Work this Index with Index No. 410 - Concrete Barrier Wall
Top of C-I-P
Buildup Concrete
Coping
Top of Retaining
-0"
2'
6. For Precast Coping only, provide Dowel Bars 4D embedded 1'-0" and extend
Coping
Precast
Top of Precast
(
1'
-1" M ax.
)
are to coincide with V-Groove locations in the Concrete Parapet.
Varies
at 30'-0" Maximum intervals equally spaced between " Expansion Joints

and/or Begin or End Sidewalk. For C-I-P Coping only, V-Groove locations
2" Cover M in.
4. Construct " V-Grooves in sidewalk and C-I-P coping. Space V-Grooves
Precast
1'
-0"
8. For C-I-P Coping only, work this Index with Index No. 820 - Pedestrian/Bicycle
Railing.
9. Finish Sidewalks in accordance with Specifications Section 522.
10. The following Indexes contain details of the intersection of the retaining
Bottom of
Precast Coping
wall at approach slabs:

Clearance
Retaining Wall
Varies
(MSE Wall shown
Dowel Bars 4D
other types similar)
2:
28:
47 PM
(Typ.) (See Note 6)
12/17/2015
(Precast Coping and Sidewalk Reinforcing not Shown for Clarity)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WALL COPING/PARAPET WITH C-I-P SIDEWALK
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6130
1of 2
REINFORCING STEEL BENDING DIAGRAMS - COPING/PARAPET AND SIDEWALK

Coping Line
Sidewalk
5'-0" Min. Clearance

8"
1 "
Spacing Bars 4S1
MARK
SIZE
PRECAST
C-I-P
COPING
COPING
VARIES
N/A
1'-0" sp.
(Typ.)
Lap Splice
Riding Surface
6" Sidewalk
See Detail "D"
Bars 5B1 (Typ.)
Top of Coping
9"
(See Note 5)
Bars 5L @
1'-0" sp.
Bars 5B2
@ 1'-0" sp.
Spread Footing (See
Bars 5U1 @
Max. (Typ.)
1'-0" sp.
1'
-3"
Fill
3" 2 sp. @
10"
Dowels 4D
B1
9'-6"
B2
AS REQD.
2'-0"
P1
5'-5"
N/A
S1
9'-6"
N/A
U1
Varies
15 Max.
(Typ.)
(Depth Varies ~ 1'-1" Max.)

"
ensure Soil Reinforcement is placed a

" Std.
(
" Min. ~ 2 " Max.)
4S1

(See Wall Company
6"
Min.
TYPICAL SECTION THRU PRECAST COPING/PARAPET WITH C-I-P SIDEWALK
6"
N/A
VARIES
BARS 5A, 5B1, 5B2 & 4S1
N/A
7"
See Note 3
Subbase.
Length as Required
4"
Spacing Bars 5B1
minimum of 2" below the Stabilized
5B2
AS REQD.
VARIES
(1'-3" Max., 2" Min.)
It is the Contractor's responsibility to
N/A
VARIES
Varies
Varies (2" Min.)
Stabilized Subbase
Panel width
+ 1'-0"
1'
-8"
(Typ.)
2'
-0"
(
Se
e No
t
e2
)
2'-2" Min.
6" 3"
Bars 5A @
5B1
2'
-7"
Bars 4S1
2" Cover
C-I-P Coping
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
Recess
Barrier Wall
Roadway Pavement
1'
-0"
Back of Concrete
Precast Coping
2'
-3" ~ Precast
1'-0" sp.
Concrete Parapet
(
See Note 4)
Bars 4P1 @
Shoulder or
Precast Coping ~ Varies
1'
-8"
Barrier Wall
Precast Coping
3"
Concrete
Gutter Line
5A
LENGTH
Smooth or
Min.
See Note 1
BAR 5L
Textured Face
BAR 5U1
BAR 4P1
of Wall
AND RETAINING WALL (MSE Wall Shown, other Wall Types Similar)

2. All reinforcing steel at expansion joints will have a 2" minimum cover.
3. Lap splices for Bars 5B2 will be a minimum of 2'-2".
Concrete
4. For Precast Coping only, lap splice Bars 5L with Bars 5A. Lap splices will be a minimum
Barrier Wall
Coping
of 2'-2".
5. For C-I-P only, see Index No. 820 for Bars 4P and 4S.
Sidewalk ~ 5'-0" Min. Clearance
Gutter Line
Bars 4P @
1'-0" sp.
C-I-P Concrete Parapet
Barrier Wall
(See Index No. 820 & Note 4)
(
Se
e No
t
e2
)
(Typ.)
Top of C-I-P Coping/Sidewalk

Bars 5L @ 1'-0" sp.
1 "
Riding Surface
6" Sidewalk
See Detail "D"
(See Note 5)
Top of Coping
Barrier Wall
(Typ.)
2" Cover
Varies (2" Min.)
(See Note 6)
15 Max.
6"
2:
28:
48 PM
(Typ.)
It is the Contractor's responsibility to
ensure Soil Reinforcement is placed a
(Top) & Expanded Polystyrene
minimum of 2" below the Stabilized
shown hatched (" Side)
Min.
2'
-0"
Seal with Poured
PRECAST COPING/PARAPET AND SIDEWALK NOTES:
Rubber or Low
1. Actual width varies depending on type of Retaining
Modulus Silicone
Sealant
Wall used.
3. Gradually deflect/displace Soil Reinforcement downward
as required. Soil Reinforcement is shown deflected
downward for illustrative purposes only and is not to
Sidewalk
scale. See Wall Company Drawings for details.

4. 27" Concrete Parapet shown, 42" Concrete Pedestrian/Bicycle
Railing similar. Complete details and dimensions of Concrete
Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing are required in the Shop Drawings.
Varies (1'-3"
" Preformed
Max., 2" Min.)

5. Match cross slope of connecting sidewalk or as

shown in the Wall Control Drawings.
6. If slip forming is used, submit shop drawings for

(See Wall Company
DETAIL "D"
approval showing 3" side cover with adjusted Typical

Section dimensions.
Subbase.
12/17/2015
Bars 5B2
Stabilized Subbase
1'-0" sp. Max.

See Note 3
5"
Recess
6"
Bars 5B2 @
Spread Footing (See
1'
-3" M ax.
6"
6"
45
Fill
Spacing
10"
Back of Concrete
"
2" Cover
C-I-P Coping
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
Varies
Roadway Pavement
3" M in.
Shoulder or
Back of Concrete
TYPICAL SECTION THRU C-I-P COPING WITH C-I-P SIDEWALK
Se
e No
t
e1
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
AND RETAINING WALL (MSE Wall Shown, other Wall Types Similar)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WALL COPING/PARAPET WITH C-I-P SIDEWALK
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6130
2 of 2
LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL NOTES:
1. The pedestal and junction slab are designed to resist the following working loads from the light
pole applied at the top of the Pedestal:

Axial Deadload
1.560 kip
Wind load Moment about Transverse Axis (*)
40.60 kip-ft
Wind load Moment about Longitudinal Axis (*)
28.30 kip-ft
Dead load Moment about Longitudinal Axis (*)
1.690 kip-ft
Maximum Shear
1.380 kip
Torsion about Pole Axis
3.560 kip-ft
(*)
- Axis refers to Bridge Axis.
2. See Index No. 21200 for anchor bolt design and notes.
6'-5" Min. (EJB Side) (See Note 8)
4'-6" Min. (See Note 8)
3. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring the anchor bolt design is compatible with the light
pole base plate. Modifications to the anchor bolt design shown must be signed and sealed by the
Varies (Transition to
1'-9" Thick Junction Slab)
Junction Slab
Contractor's Specialty Engineer and submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to construction.
4. Install Anchor Bolts plumb.
5. For conduit, EJB and expansion/deflection fitting details, see Utility Conduit
Junction Slab
7'-6" (Length of 1'-9" Thick Junction Slab)
Detail Drawings.
6. The cost of anchor bolts, nuts, washers and anchor plates will be included in the Bid Price for
Light Poles. Include the cost of all labor, concrete and reinforcing steel required for construction
12 Bars 4J & 4M1 (Top & Bottom) @ 8"
of the pedestals, EJB and miscellaneous hardware required for the completion of the electrical
system in the Bid Price for either the Traffic Railing or Concrete Parapet that the pedestal is
Bars 5B3
behind.
7. Field Cut Bars 4M2 as required to maintain clearance.
8. Slip Forming Method of construction requires the Engineer's approval within the limits shown.
9. Reinforcing shown for light pole pedestals is in addition to typical reinforcing for Junction
& 4M1
Slabs and Raised Sidewalks.

10. Work this Index with the following as appropriate:
Index No. 5212
Index No. 6110
Index No. 6120

Index No. 6130
11. Pedestal may be precast in one section with Coping. Minimum Precast Coping section length is
(See Note 5)
Optional
Construction
Joint
C-I-P
Construction
2 ~ 2" Conduits
12. For Estimated Quantities, see Sheet No. 6.

13. Unless otherwise noted, Traffic Railing (32" F-Shape) is shown in all Views and Sections. The
Pedestal details for other traffic railings or pedestrian/bicycle railings are similar.
Gutter Line (shown)

or Front Face of
Concrete Parapet
1'
-8"
Joint
10 ft. or 12 ft for combination Precast Traffic Railing and Coping section.
4G4 & 4G5 (

pairs)
EJB
Spacing for Bars
Bars 5B3 spaced @
1'
-0"
Bars 4J
Traffic Railing or
Concrete Parapet
1 ~ 1 " Conduit
1
2"
Bars 4H
Anchor Bolt Circle
2" Cover (Typ.)
1'-1 " (See Note 8)
Coping
1'
-1 "
Light Pole
2'
-6"
Bars 4M2 (See Note 7)
Bars 4G4 (pairs)
3 sp. @
Bars 4G1 (pairs)
Bars 4G3 (pairs) (Typ.)
C-I-P Pedestal
6"
Bars 4G5 (pairs)

2 sp. @ 6"
Spacing for Bars
2 sp. @ 6"
1'-1"
5"
5 sp. @ 6"
5"
1'-1"
4G1, 4G2, 4G3 & 4M2

2'-6"
2'-6"
2'-6"
Expansion Joint in
1:
08:
28 PM
Pedestal & Light Pole
Junction Slab, Raised

4'-6" Min.
Sidewalk or Sidewalk
PLAN VIEW
12/21/2015
(Junction Slab reinforcing not shown for clarity)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
(Junction Slab Shown, Raised Sidewalk or Sidewalk Similar)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
COPING MOUNTED LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6200
1of 3
9'-0" (Index 6000 Series and Index 5212 TYPE 1)

10'-0" (Index 5212 TYPE 2)
1'-6 "
5'-0" (Index 6000 Series and Index 5212 TYPE 1)
2'-6"
6'-0" (Index 5212 TYPE 2)

1'-4 "
1'-1 "
Coping
Gutter Line (shown)
Light Pole
or Front Face of
Concrete Parapet
1 " Conduit
2" Conduits
Top of Junction Slab
(See Note 6)
Bars 5V2 or 5V
(Const. Joint Required
(See Note 8)
for C-I-P Traffic Railing)
Riding Surface
Shoulder or
Top of Coping
Slope Pedestal Surface
(See Note 6)
Bars 5S or 5S1
Roadway Pavement
Longitudinally with Profile Grade
(See Note 8)
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
Bars 4G1 (pairs)
1 "
(
Se
e No
t
e6
)
Top of Coping
Bars 4G4 (pairs)
1 "
Bars 4H2
2'
-0"
Bars 4L
" Drip Groove
Min.
6"
6"
Bars 5B3
(Typ.)
Pedestal
6"
M in.
1'
-9"
(
See Note 2)
Elevation
6"
Bars 4G5
(pairs)
@ 8" sp.
Bars 5B3
Spacing
Bars 4M1
4" Cover (Bottom)
3"
Bars 4H1
(1'-1" Max., 3" Min.)
Construction
Bars 4M2 @ 6" sp.
Joint Permitted
Bars 4J @ 8" sp. (tie to alternate Bars 4A
Bars 4A
in Junction Slab) (See Note 5)

Retaining Wall
3" Min.
Varies
C-I-P
(Type Varies)
Expanded Polystyrene shown
4 sp. @ 1'-0" = 4'-0"
Spacing
hatched (" Each Side)
Bars 5B3
See
6"
Note 7
Smooth or
Textured Face
of Retaining Wall
TYPICAL SECTION AT LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL

NOTES:
1.
Provide Concrete Class to match adjacent coping.
2.
For junction slabs, increase the 1'-0" depth dimension to 1'-9".
3.
For sidewalks see Index No. 6130 for C-I-P Coping, but increase 6" depth dimension to 1'-6".
4.
The minimum length of the Junction Slabs, raised sidewalks and sidewalks is 30'-0",
measured along the Gutter Line.
1:
08:
30 PM
5.
Bars 4J are only required when pedestals are behind a Traffic Railing or Traffic Railing/
Noise Wall.
6.
Top of junction slab may be thickened to match finished grade of concrete pavement or
shoulder, or top of sidewalk or raised sidewalk (See Notes 3 & 4).
Actual width varies depending on type of retaining wall used.
8.
See Index No. 6110 for Bars 5V2 and 5S, or Index 5212 for Bars 5V and 5S1.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/21/2015
7.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6200
2 of 3
REINFORCING STEEL BENDING DIAGRAMS - LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL

5'-0" Max. (Left or Right)
B3
7'-2"
G1
16
5'-8"
G2
4'-8"
G3
4'-2"
G4
8'-10"
G5
7'-4"
H1
9'-8"
H2
13'-8"
12
6'-0"
M1
12
5'-10"
M2
10
3'-8"
2'-6"
2'-7"
7'-6" (Length of 1'-9" Thick Junction Slab)
Junction Slab
Minimum Limits of C-I-P Coping
2'-6"
4G1
2'-0"
4G2
1'-9"
4G3
3'-8"
4G4
2'-11"
4G5
ELEVATION VIEW
(Junction Slab Reinforcing & Bars 4J not Shown for Clarity)
1 " Conduit
4G4 & 4G5
Junction Slab
2'-4"
2'-7"
BAR 4H1

4G1, 4G2 & 4G3
BAR 4H2
4M1
5'-0"
4M2
2'-2"
4M 2
2'
-0"
3"
Wall Coping
2'-7"
4M 1
2'-6"
Bottom of MSE
(See Note 1)
2'-4"
10"
2'-6"
Bars 4M2
2'-7"
1'
-5 "
2" Cover (Top & sides)
7 "
Bottom of Thickened Junction Slab
BARS 5B3 & 4J
1'
-6"
(pairs) (Typ.)
4" Cover (Bottom)
Bars 4H1
Bars 4G4
Bottom of Pedestal
6'-0"
2'
-7"
45 (Typ.)
Varies
2 "
Junction Slab
3 sp.
(pairs)
Coping)
Bars 4G1
Top of recess
& Bottom of
6"
Bars 4H2
2'
-3"
See Detail "A"
2" Conduit
(
C-I-P/Precast
1 " Conduit
(
Pedestal)
Spacing Bars 4H
EJB
4J
2'
-0"
SIZE
7'-2"
2'
-7"
NO. REQD. LENGTH
MARK
and Light Pole
5B3
2'
-7"
Top of Traffic Railing
2'
-0"
Pedestal
2'
-7"
BARS 4G1, 4G2, 4G3,
Light Pole
Wire Screen
NOTES:
(See Spec. 649-6)
1. Field Cut Bars 4M2 as required to maintain minimum cover.
2" Conduit
Light Pole Base
4G4 & 4G5
will not exceed anchor bolt diameter.
Leveling Nut
(See Note 2)
Dia. M ax.
1 ~ Bolt
Plate (Level)
BAR 4M1 & 4M2
2. Maximum clearance between leveling nut and top of pedestal
2. Lap splices for Bars 4G1, 4G2 & 4G3 will be a minimum of 1'-4". Lap
splices for Bars 4G4 & 4G5 will be a minimum of 1'-8".
3. The Contractor may use Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) when
approved by the Engineer. WWR must consist of deformed wire meeting
ITEM
the requirements of Specification Section 931.
UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete (Pedestal)
CY
0.926
Concrete (Thickened Junction Slab)
CY
1.222
Reinforcing Steel
LB
349
Washer
Slope Pedestal
(Typ.)
Surface Longitudinally
with Profile Grade
Anchor Plate
1:
08:
30 PM
Anchor Bolts
(The quantities above are for one C-I-P Light Pole Pedestal. The
concrete quantity for the thickened junction slab is based on a 5'-0"
length, 9" increase in thickness and a 5" wide retaining wall panel.
12/21/2015
Adjust thickened concrete quantity as required.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
DETAIL "A"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6200
3 of 3
Expansion Joint in
Barrier Wall Inlet
Sidewalk or Sidewalk,
Traffic Railing or
required to clear Barrier
6'-0"
Bars 5S3
MARK
REQD. SIZE
LENGTH
Concrete Parapet
6"
6"
Bars 5C (Top)
4"
S2
12
3'-1"
S3
10'-0"
U2
VARIES
U3
12'-10"
4 "
Wall Inlet) (Typ.)
8"
6"
6"
C-I-P Coping and
12 ~ Bars 4S2 @ 8" sp.
Bars 5B2 (Field Cut as
REINFORCING STEEL BENDING DIAGRAMS - DRAINAGE
Junction Slab, Raised
10'-0" Min.

Bars 5U3
5'
-0"
1'
-6"
1'
-6"
(Typ.)
STIRRUP BAR 4S2
(See Index No. 218 for

details)
1'-6"
5'-9"
1'-6"
Varies
2" Cover
Bars 4L (Bottom)
(Typ. all Sides)
BAR 5S3
(Typ.)
1'
-9"
3'
-7"
Gutter Line
Bars 4A (Top)
(Typ.)
5'-8"
Bars 5S
Coping
Bars 5V2 (Typ.)
8 ~ Bars 6U2
BAR 5U3
Bars 6U2
BAR 6U2
@ 8" sp. (See Note 1)

PLAN VIEW
(Junction Slab Shown, Raised Sidewalk Similar)
2. All reinforcing steel at open joints will have a 2" minimum cover.
3. See Index Nos. 6110, 6120 & 6130 for Bars 4A (or 5A), 5B, 5C and 4L (or 5L).
7'-0" (See Note 2)
4. The Contractor may use Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) when approved by the
Engineer. WWR must consist of Deformed wire meeting the requirements of
Gutter Line
1'-0"
Shoulder or
4'-5 "
1'-6 " Min.
(See Note 2)
Roadway Pavement
Barrier Wall Inlet
Bars 5V2
(32" F-Shape shown,
(See Note 4)
42" F-Shape similar)
NOTES:
and Grate (See

Index No. 218
Riding Surface
for details)
1. Spacing shown is along the Gutter Line. Spacing shown is for C-I-P
4 "
Top of C-I-P Coping

3" Cover
Junction Slab. For C-I-P Raised Sidewalks or Sidewalks, match bar
Spacing
1 "
spacing and size shown in Typical Sections (i.e., 11 ~ Bars 5U2 and
Bars 5B2
15 ~ Bars 4S2 @ 6" spacing for Raised Sidewalks).
2. Dimensions shown are for junction slab. Increase width as required
5"
Bars 5S (See Note 4)
Bars 4S2 @ 8" sp.
for C-I-P Raised Sidewalk and Sidewalks.
3. Actual location & width vary depending on type of Retaining Wall used.
4. See Index No. 6110 for Bars 5V2 and 5S.
Bars 5B2
Joint Filler (Typ.)
4" Cover (Bottom)
1:
08:
57 PM
(" Each Side).

6. Locate Barrier Wall Inlet a minimum of 10'-0" away from
Expansion Joints in Junctions Slab, Raised Sidewalk or Sidewalk,
C-I-P Coping and Traffic Railing or Concrete Parapet.
7. Work this Index with the following as appropriate:
Index No. 6110
Index No. 6120
Index No. 6130
Compacted Sand
Shown, other Wall Types Similar)

2" Cover
2" Cover
See
SECTION A-A
SECTION THRU JUNCTION SLAB, BARRIER WALL INLET AND RETAINING WALL
12/21/2015
3" M in.
)
Bars 5B2 (Typ.)
4"
2'
-3"
6"
@ 8" sp.
Bars 5S3
Varies
Bars 6U2
(
1'
-1" M ax.
,
to clear junction slab reinforcing)
Recess
Bars 5U3 (Rotate as required
5. Two Layers 30Lb. Roofing Felt (Top) & Expanded Polystyrene shown hatched
1'
-6"
See Note 5
3 sp. @
1'
-0"
Coping
6"
Note 2
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
(Junction Slab Shown, Raised Sidewalk Similar)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
JUNCTION SLAB AT DRAINAGE INLET OPENINGS
SHEET
NO.
NO.
6201
1of 1
L = Length
GENERAL NOTES:
1. Verify Column lengths in the field prior to fabrication.
2. Shop drawings:
with this Index and support posts do not exceed the length shown in the plans by more than
2-0.
B. Sign Panels: Horizontal panel splices are allowed at interior wind beams for sign panels with
Golf
D = Depth
A. Column/Sign Posts: Sign Support Shop drawings are not required when fabricated in accordance
Course
Dr
Sign (Typ.)
EAST
a depth (D) greater than 10 feet. Shop drawings required for panel splice details.
Column (Typ.)
C. When shop drawings are required; obtain approval prior to fabrication.
3. Materials:
A. Sign Panel Mounting Materials:
a. Aluminum Bars, and Extruded Shapes: ASTM B221, Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 6351-T5
b. Aluminum Structural Shapes: ASTM B308, Alloy 6061-T6
7'
-0" (
M in.
)
a. Steel Plates and Structural Shapes: ASTM A36 or ASTM A709, Grade 36
b. Steel Weld Metal: E70XX
c. Brass Shims: ASTM B36
C. Aluminum Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
a. Flat Head Machine Screws (bolts): ASTM F 468, Alloy 2024-T4
b. Hex Nuts: ASTM F467, Alloy 6061-T6 or 6262-T9
8'
-0" (
M ax.
)
21%L
B. Sign Support Structure Materials:
14.5%L
58%L
35.5%L
21%L
35.5%L
14.5%L
Two Post
Three Post
Column (See Note #1)
c. Washers: ASTM B221, Alloy 7075-T6

D. Stainless Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers Alloy Group 2, Condition A, may be substituted for the
Aluminum bolts and screws as follows:
Base Connection
(See Sheet 2)
a. Bolts: ASTM F593, CW1 or SH1

b. Nuts: ASTM F594,
E. High Strength (H.S.) Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
a. Galvanized Hex Head Bolts: ASTM A325, Type 1
b. Galvanized Nuts: ASTM A563 Hex, Grade DH
c. Galvanized Washers: ASTM F436
F. Concrete:
Class I.
G. Reinforcing Bars or Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR): Specification Section 415

4. Coatings:
Foundation
(See Sheet 2)
A. Aluminum Fasteners: Anodic coating (0.0002 inches min.) and chromate sealed
B. Galvanize High Strength Steel Bolts Nuts and Washers: ASTM F2329
C. Galvanize all other steel items (excluding stainless steel): Hot-dip ASTM A123
D. Treat damaged galvanizing in accordance with Specification Section 562
5. Fabrication:
A. All Base Connections and Stub Column materials are steel unless otherwise
FRONT ELEVATION
specified.
Column (Typ.)
B. Drill or sub-punch and ream holes in Fuse Plates and Hinge Plates
C. Weld Base Plate to Stub & Post or if using the Alternate Connection Detail weld Base Plate and
Wind Beam (Typ.)
(See Sheet 3)
Stiffeners to Post and Stub (Sheet 2)

D. Hot dip galvanize after fabrication; Remove all drips, runs or beads on baseplate within washer
contact areas
6. Construction:
A. Install the Sign Structure foundation in accordance with Specification Section 455. Orient Stub
Backing Strip
(See Sheet 3)
Sign (Typ.)
Post according to direction of traffic (Sheet 2)

B. Tighten all high strength bolts except Base Bolts in accordance with Specification Section 700.
Tighten Base Bolts in accordance with Instruction Notes on Sheet 2.
C. Assemble Post to Stub with Base Bolts and three flat washers per bolt (Base Connection Detail
Sheet 2).
11:
43:
52 AM
Fuse & Hinge Plate

(See Sheet 3)
Column (See Note #1)
12/3/2015
BACK ELEVATION
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
MULTI-COLUMN SIGN ASSEMBLY

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MULTI-COLUMN GROUND SIGN
NO.
11200
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
FOUNDATION DATA
Section*
Golf
Course
Dr
EAST
Dia.
Depth
BASE CONNECTION DATA
Stub
Reinf.
Column
Length Bars V
SHIM
Torque
(lbf*in)
S 3x5.7
2'-0"
4'-0"
3'-0"
10-#6
4"
7"
3/4"
2"
5/16"
1"
1/2"
1/4"
W 6x12
2'-0"
6'-0"
3'-0"
10-#6
4"
10"
3/4"
2"
3/8"
1-5/8"
5/8"
1/4"
270 45 1-3/8" 11/16"
W 8x18
2'-4"
7'-6"
4'-0"
8-#8
5-1/4" 12-1/2"
7/8"
2-3/4"
7/16"
1-3/4"
3/4"
3/8"
445 75 1-3/4" 13/16"
W 8x24
2'-4"
8'-6"
4'-0"
8-#8
6-1/2" 12-1/2"
7/8"
3-1/4"
7/16"
1-3/4"
3/4"
3/8"
445 75 2-1/8" 13/16"
W 10x33
2'-4"
10'-3"
4'-0"
8-#8
8"
16"
1-1/4" 4-3/4"
9/16"
2"
1"
1/2"
580 90 2-3/8" 1-1/16"
W 12x45
2'-8"
11'-3"
5'-0"
10-#8
10"
18"
1-1/4"
9/16"
2"
1"
1/2"
580 90 2-3/4" 1-1/16"
6"
90 20
1-1/4"
9/16"
* Designations: (Normal Depth in inches) x (weight in pounds per linear foot).

See Base
Plate Detail
H.S. Base Bolt With 3

Washers & Hex Nut
on Each Bolt. See
Table for Bolt Dia. &
Torque. See Assembly
Of Base Instructions.
Washer (Typ.)
W1
Stub Column
A
Remove All
Galvanizing
Runs Or Beads
In Washer Area
Plate Thickness=0.0149" (28 Guage)
Shims As Required
Base Bolt
Dia. = L
3"
Stub
Column
3" Cover
Of Foundation
& Stub Column
1. At the Contractors option, the #4 tie bars at 12 o.c. may be
Washer (Typ.)
Foundation
3" (
Typ.
)
4" (
M ax.
)
Bottom Base Plate
See Base
Connections
For Details
FOUNDATION NOTES:
L/2
A
PLAN
BOLT KEEPER PLATE DETAIL
Washer (Typ.)
(
Typ.
)
#4 Bars @ 12" Centers

(See Foundation Note #1)
SECTION A-A
Bolt Keeper Plate

Shims As
Required
3" Cover (Typ.)
R (Typ.)
30
Top Base Plate
Foundation
W1
Column
A
Bars V Evenly
Spaced (See
Table For Size
& Number)
(See Table)
Diameter
Base
Connection
Detail
R (Typ.)
30
See Instructions
Thickness=t
1
Note #1B
SIDE ELEVATION
FRONT ELEVATION
BASE PLATE DETAIL
SHIM DETAIL
(Brass)
Finished
Grade
BASE CONNECTION
Depthof
replaced by D10 Spiral Wire @ 6 pitch, with three flat
and the Nut.
H.S. Base Bolt

Dia. = L
Shims As
Required
b
Column
Plate Thickness=0.0149"
(28 Guage)
SECTION B-B
Washer (Typ.)
Thickness=t
a/2
W
Washer (Typ.)
1
2"
Stiffener Plate
Bottom Base Plate
b
Bars V (See
Table For
Size & Number)
shims per column.
1 "
2
Stub
Column
1
2"
h
SIDE ELEVATION
2. H.S. Base Bolt L2 Tightening Instructions:
FRONT ELEVATION
BASE PLATE DETAIL
STIFFENER PLATE DETAIL
#4 Bars @ 12" Centers

(See Foundation Note #1)
A. Tighten Base Bolts to the maximum possible with a 12
ALTERNATIVE BASE CONNECTION DATA
to 15 wrench (this will bed the washers and shims and

4" Cover
clear the bolt threads).

Class I
Concrete
wrench to tighten bolts to the torque prescribed in the

Table. Over tightened Base Bolts will not be permitted.
3" Cover
Section*
W 6x12
4-3/4" 1-1/8" 1-3/16"
W 8x18
5-3/4" 1-1/2"
2-1/2"
2"
L2
Torque
(lbf*in)
1/2"
5/8" 270 45
R
3/8"
g
5-1/8"
1-3/8"
2-3/4"
2-3/16"
5/8"
3/4" 445 75 7/16" 6-1/4"
W 8x24
7"
1-3/4"
1-3/8"
3-1/2"
2-3/8"
3/4"
3/4" 445 75 7/16"
W 10x33
8"
2"
1-9/16"
4"
2-3/4"
3/4"
1"
W 12x45
8"
2"
1-9/16"
4"
3"
3/4"
1"
h
2"
1/4"
2-3/16"
1/4"
8"
2-3/8"
5/16"
580 90 9/16"
8"
2-3/4"
5/16"
580 90 9/16"
8"
3"
5/16"
D. Burr threads at junction with nut to prevent nut

loosening. Treat damaged galvanizing.
* Designations: (Normal Depth in inches) x (weight in pounds per linear foot).
ELEVATION
FOUNDATION
12/3/2015
11:
43:
53 AM
R (Typ.)
Bolt
Keeper
Plate
Foundation
thick (28 gauge) and 2-0.0329" thick (21 gauge) brass
C. Under the supervision of the Engineer, use a calibrated
30
Washer (Typ.)
B. Shim as required to plumb column. Provide 2-0.0149"
B. Loosen each Base Bolt one turn.
Top
Base
Plate
R (Typ.)
1
2"
and place the third washer between the Top Base Plate
Depth
the Bolt Keeper Plate; add the Top Base Plate section
Shims As
Required
(
See Table)
place the next washer between the Bottom Base Plate and
1
2"
A. Place one washer on each Base Bolt between the Bottom

Base Plate and the head of high strength Base Bolt;
1. Assembly of Base Instructions:
Stiffener
Plate
Stub Column
Remove All
Galvanizing
Runs Or Beads
In Washer Area
INSTRUCTIONS NOTES:
Section
for foundation reinforcing.
Column
3"
(
Typ.
)
2. The Contractor may use Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR)
(
See Table)
Stub Colum n Length
Base Plate
H.S. Base Bolt With 3

Washers & Hex Nut
on Each Bolt. See
Table for Bolt Dia. &
Torque. See Assembly
Of Base Instructions.
turns at the top and one flat turn at the bottom in
ALTERNATIVE BASE CONNECTION
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
FOUNDATION AND BASE CONNECTION DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11200
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
1
4"
Wind Beam
Flat Head
Bolt With 4 Nuts

And Washers
Sign Panel
Splice
Panel Splice
FUSE (HINGE) PLATE DATA

Sign Panels
Butt Together
Sign Face
Section*
2"
Alum. Hex
Nut (Typ.)
Alum. Backing Strip

(0.125" Thick)
4"
PLAN VIEW
Fuse & Hinge Plate
1
4"
Flat Head
Bolt With 4 Nuts

And Washers
t
2
D
1
L
1
S 3x5.7
7-1/4"
2-3/8"
1-1/4"
1/2"
9/16"
3/8"
7/16"
9/16"
1/2"
W 6x12
7-1/4"
4"
1-1/4"
7/8"
15/16"
3/8"
13/16"
11/16"
5/8"
W 8x18
8-1/4"
5-1/4"
1-3/8"
1-1/8"
1-1/4"
3/8"
1"
13/16"
3/4"
W 8x24
8-1/4"
6-1/2"
1-3/8"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1/2"
1"
13/16"
3/4"
W 10x33
9-1/4"
8"
2"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
5/8"
1-1/8" 1-1/16"
1"
W 12x45
11"
8"
2"
1-3/4"
1-3/4"
3/4"
1-5/16" 1-1/16"
1"
* Designations: Normal Depth in inches.

Backing Strip
b
d
3
8"
Thickness=t2
Match Column
Flange
Thickness
Column
D2 Hole (Typ.)
3
8"
a/2
1"
b
d
1"
Column Hinge
D1 Hole (Typ.)
Wind Beam
a/2
Panel Splice

ELEVATION
See Sign Panel
Splice Details
BACK ELEVATION
D2 Holes
For L1 H.S.
Bolts (Typ.)
SIGN PANEL SPLICE

e
D2 Holes
For L1 H.S.
Bolts (Typ.)
Sign Face
1'-0" (Max.)
(Typ.)
2"
1
2"
1'-0" (Max.)
H.S.
Bolts (Typ.)
(Typ.)
Two W ind Beam s

- 21.
0% D
Three W ind Beam s - 14.
5% D
Four W ind Beam s - 10.
7% D
Five W ind Beam s - 8.
5% D
Wind Beam
(Typ.) See
Tables For
Size and
No. Of Beams
Than Two W ind Beam s
Backing
Strip (Typ.)
Equal Spacing For M ore
See DETAIL 'A'
Wind Beam (Typ.)
NUMBER OF WIND BEAMS

FOR GIVEN DEPTH & WIND SPEED
Max.
Depth
Wind
No.
Beams
Max.
Depth
7'-0"
150
6'-0"
110
12'-0"
150
10'-4"
110
16'-4"
150
14'-0"
110
20'-8"
150
17'-8"
Wind
No.
Beams
110
130
6'-8"
130
11'-4"
130
15'-4"
130
19'-0"
HINGE PLATE
FUSE PLATE
FUSE & HINGE PLATE
Column
Column
Fillet Depth + 116"
Column
Not Cut
Fuse Plate
Column
Fuse Plate
Hinge
Plate
SIZE OF WIND BEAMS

Length Of Sign (Feet)
Size Of Zee**
2 Posts
Zee 134" x 134" x 1.09
Saw Cut Column

Flange And Web
(See Sheet 1,
Note #5D)
0 to 17'-4"
x 2.33
11'-1" to 19'-0" 17'-5" to 29'-6"
Zee 3 x 21116" x 3.38
19'-1" to 20'-8" 29'-7" to 31'-6"
Zee 3 x
2"
21116"
3 Posts
0 to 11'-0"
** Zee Beams are aluminum. No steel equivalent available

Designation gives (Member Depth) x (Flange Width) x (lb/ft)
H.S. Bolt
Diameter=L1
(Typ.)
H.S. Bolt
Diameter=L1
(Typ.)
Washer (Typ.)
Washer (Typ.)
Separate
Beams
Required
See DETAIL 'B'
1
4"
Column
(Typ.)
Backing
Strip (Typ.)
Flat Head Bolt
With Nut and Washer
Sign (Typ.)
Column Hinge
@ Bottom
of Sign 2"
Fuse (Hinge) Plate
Wind Beam (Typ.)
1
2"
2~
11:
01:
13 AM
See Plans For

Column Size
Sign Face
BACK ELEVATION
Column
Match
Column
Flange
Thickness
t
2
H.S. Steel
Bolts With Nuts and

Lock Washers
Column
t
2
Side Elevation
Side Elevation
TYPICAL HINGE
OPTIONAL HINGE
SIDE ELEVATION
(See Fabrication Notes on Sheet 1)
12/9/2015
MULTI-COLUMN SIGN BACK PANEL
DETAIL 'A'
DETAIL 'B'
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
WIND BEAM, BACKING STRIP & FUSE/HINGE PLATE DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11200
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Number & Location Of Panel Splices To

Be Determined By The Sign Face
Supplier. See Detail Of Sign Face Splice
Number Of Zee 3x2.69x2.33

Horiz. Wind Beams For
Sign Depth And Wind
Zee 3x2.69x2.33 Alum. Wind

Beams See Table For Number
6"
Wind
M.P.H.
No. Beams
Number Of I6x4.69 or Zee 5x3.25x4.01

Vertical Hanger Beams For Sign Length
2 Hangers
3 Hangers
4 Hangers
5 Hangers
6 Hangers
Max Length
Max Length
Max Length
Max. Depth
Max Length
Max Length
150
5'
15'
30'
45'
150
9'
15'
30'
45'
150
12'
15'
22'
30'
38'
45'
150
15'
15'
22'
30'
38'
45'
150
18'
15'
22'
30'
38'
45'
130
5'
15'
30'
45'
130
9'
15'
30'
45'
130
12'
15'
22'
30'
38'
45'
130
15'
15'
22'
30'
38'
45'
130
18'
15'
22'
30'
38'
45'
110
5'
15'
30'
45'
110
9'
15'
30'
45'
110
12'
15'
30'
38'
45'
110
15'
15'
30'
38'
45'
110
18'
15'
30'
38'
45'
7.
0% D
=
Six W ind Beam s
10.
7% D
8.
5% D
=
=
Four W ind Beam s
Five W ind Beam s
21% D
splice is allowed at an interior

Zee support, shop drawings
than 10'-0", a horizontal panel
NOTE:
If the Sign Panels are deeper
Three W ind Beam s
2" (Typ.)
Two W ind Beam s
Depth D
Equal Spacing For
H orizontal W ind Beam s
Hangers See Table For Number
14.
5% D
I6x4.69 or Zee 5x3.25x4.01 Aluminum
shall be required.
Sign
Face 18"
Thick
Equal Spacing For Vertical Hangers*
X
X
Length L
*Note:
Two Hangers
21% L
Three Hangers
14.5% L
Four Hangers
Five Hangers
Six Hangers
=
=
=
10.7% L
8.5% L
7.0% L
1
4"
Alum. Flat Head Machine
Screws With Lock Nuts And Flat

Washers. Screws Shall Be
Spacing of vertical hangers may be varied slightly or as necessary

to clear the truss struts and diagonals at panel points.
Spaced at 12" Centers Maximum
GENERAL NOTES
1. Work this Index with Index 11200.
ON FOR OVERHEAD TRUSS

EVATI
GN FACE EL
CAL SI
TYPI
2. Shop Drawings:
Zee 3x2.69x2.33
Aluminum
Wind Beam
6"
Varies, 5'
Maximum Cantilever
Panel Splice
Sign Face 18" Thick
Sign Face
Sign Panels Butt Together
2"
Top Truss
A. Aluminum:
a. Bars, and Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221,
Alloy 6061-T6 or Alloy 6351-T5
b. Structural Shapes: ASTM B308, Alloy 6061-T6
c. Flat Head and Hex Head Machine Bolts:
C
ON CSECTI
1"
Panel Splice
5
8"
Aluminum Hex Head
I6x4.69 or
Bolt With Lock Nuts & Flat Washers
Zee 5x3.25x4.01
Alloy 6262-T9
e. Washers: ASTM B221, Alloy 7075-T6
Alum. Hanger
(SHOWING ATTACHMENT OF SIGN FACE PANEL TO VERTICAL HANGER
SUPPORTS, VERTICAL I SHAPE HANGER AS SHOWN, Zee SHAPE OPTIONAL)
B. Steel Materials:
a. U-Bolts: ASTM A449 or ASTM A193 B7
b. Nuts: ASTM F563, 2 per leg
c. Washers: ASTM F436
LA
DETAI
4. Coatings:
A. Aluminum Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Anodic
Bottom Truss Chord
(0.0002 inches min) and chromate sealed.

B. Galvanized Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
ASTM F2329
1"
3
8"
1
2"
3
8"
See Detail A
ASTM F468, Alloy 2024-T4

d. Hex Nuts: ASTM F467, Alloy 6061-T6 or
Bolt Wind Beam To Vertical

Hanger With
M ax. Spacing - 12'
Thick
c. to c. Chords)
Depth of Truss (
1
8"
Thick
U-Bolt W ith Double Nuts
1
8"
And Flat W asher ASTM A449 or

ASTM A193 B7 Galvanized
according to ASTM F2329
Backing Strip
B. Splice must be located at an interior Zee

Support and only allowed on signs greater
than 10-0.
3. Materials:
Sign Face
4"
A. Required for Sign Panels deeper than 10-0

with a horizontal panel splice.
D/2
11:
34:
43 AM
Pairs Of
1
4"
D/2+112"
Aluminum
Flat Head Machine

Screws Spaced At
12" Centers Maximum
12/9/2015
BACKING STRIP DETAIL
WN)
T SHO
NG NO
I
GHT
I
L
(
ON
GN & TRUSS CONNECTI
L OF SI
CAL DETAI
TYPI
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
DETAILS OF SIGN FACE & TRUSS CONNECTION

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL OVERHEAD SIGN STRUCTURES
NO.
11300
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
NOTES:
1. Work this Index in conjunction with CANTILEVER SIGN STRUCTURE
DATA TABLES in the Plans and Index 11300.
2. Handholes are required at pole base for DMS Structures. Refer
to Index 18300 for Handhole Details.
Uprignt-Truss Connection
(See Sheet 3)
3. Shop Drawings are required.

Splice Connection
(See Sheet 5)
Obtain Shop Drawing approval prior to fabrication. Include the following:

A. Upright Pipe height ('A'). Verify dimension in the field prior to submittal.
Back Truss Chord
Top Front Truss Chord
B. Foundation elevations: Ensure minimum vertical clearances of
Truss &
Back Truss Chord
the sign panel over the roadway.

C. Height of the foundation above adjacent ground.
D. Anchor bolt orientation with respect to centerline of truss and
the direction of traffic.
E. Chord Splices
F. Handholes at pole base (when required).
4. Materials:
A. Sign Structure:
a. Upright and Chords (Steel Pipe): API-5L-X42, 42 ksi yield
or ASTM A500, Grade B (Min.)
b. Steel Angles and Structural Plates and Bars: ASTM A709 Grade 36
Truss Web Angles (Typ.)
Truss Plug
(See Sheet 5)
Bottom Front Truss Chord

(See Sheet 4)
a. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325 Type 1

b. Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade DH Heavy-Hex
c. Washers: ASTM F436 Type 1, one under turned element
'F' Upright Pipe
C. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers

a. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 55
b. Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade A Heavy-Hex (5 per bolt)
c. Plate Washers: ASTM A36 (2 per bolt)
D. Concrete:
a. Spread Footing Concrete: Class IV
'
A'(
See Note # 3A)
c. Weld Material: E70XX

B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
b. Drilled Shaft concrete: Class IV (Drilled Shaft)

E. Reinforcing Steel: Specification Section 415
5. Fabrication:
A. Welding: Specification Section 460-6.4
B. Chord Splices: "SD" Panel from upright is the closest panel in which
Back Rake Top of Pipe 'F'

before Truss installation
by using Leveling Nuts
at Base Plate
Base Plate Connection

(See Sheet 2)
Bottom of Plate
a chord splice may be used. See Plans for CANTILEVER SIGN STRUCTURE
DATA TABLE. Minimum splice spacing is two truss panel lengths apart.
C. Upright splices: Not allowed
D. Structural bolt hole diameters: Bolt diameter plus 116"
E. Anchor bolt hole diameters: Bolt diameter plus 12"
F. Hot Dip Galvanize after fabrication.
Foundation
(See Sheet 2)
G. Shop assemble the entire structure after galvanizing to validate/document

alignment and clearance for bolted connections as well as contact between
connecting plates. Take remedial action, if necessary, prior to shipment.
H. Disassemble, as necessary, and secure components for shipment.
6. Coatings:
Final Upright Position
Initial Upright Position
A. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM F2329

B. All other steel, including Plate Washers, hot dip galvanize: ASTM A123
7. Construction:
A. Construct foundation in accordance with Specification Section 455, except
payment is included in the cost of the structure.
ISOMETRIC VIEW
B. Prior to erection, record the as-built anchor locations and submit to

the Engineer.
C. Place backfill above spread footings prior to installation of the sign
panels. Do not remove or reduce backfill without prior approval of
the Engineer.
D. Tighten nuts and bolts in accordance with Specification Section 700.
Split-Lock Washers are not permitted.
CAMBER DIAGRAM
E. Install Aluminum Sign Panels as shown on the Elevation drawing.
CANTILEVER SIGN ASSEMBLY
F. Place structural grout pad with drain between top of foundation and
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
44:
00 AM
bottom of baseplate in accordance with Specification Section 649-7.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CANTILEVER SIGN STRUCTURE
NO.
11310
SHEET
NO.
1of 5
1
Typ.
)
4" (
'FA'
'FJ' Bars @ 1'-0" Top
6" (Typ.)
Cut Corner
3" Cover (Typ.)
W eld Size +
'FG' Bars @ 1'-0" Bottom
'FB'
Shaft Dia.
2'-2" Lap (Min.)
d
ce
pa
S
E aually
(T
2'
-2"
La
p
Center Of
Bolts (Typ.)
(Typ.)
'BF'
DETAIL 'A'
'BA' Anchor
DETAIL 'B'
Bolts (Typ.)
'FC' Bars Equally
'F' OD + 8 Bolt Dia.
Spaced (Typ.)
L
F
'
3" Cover (Typ.)
1
4"
#5 Tie Bar
'BA' Anchor
Weld Size +
Drilled Shaft
ar
s
Of Footing
Footing
'
1'
-0" Top
)
.
p
y
r
ve
Co
)
.
6"
yp
(T
'
FF'Bars @
'
FB'
Foundation
'
FH 'Bars @
Base Plate
Connection
1'
-0" Bottom
Concrete Pedestal
'BG'
CSL Tube (Typ.)
#5 Ties (Closed Ties)
CANTILEVER ASSEMBLY
PLAN
2 x Bolt Dia.
'F' OD + 4 Bolt Dia.
2 x Bolt Dia.
PLAN
Directions of Travel
Center Of Foundation
And Upright Pipe
'BB' Equally
'FA'
Spaced Anchor
Foundation
'FA'-'FD'
2
Elevation
(See Note #2)
5"
3" Cover (Typ.)
'BA" Anchor
#5 Ties
Bolt (Typ.)
'FB'
Shaft Dia.
(
Top)
'FD' (Dia.)
4" Cover
'FA'-'FD'
2
(Typ.)
Drilled Shaft
'BA' Anchor
Bolts (Typ.)
3
8"
'
FE'
2'-0" (Min.)
3"
#5 Ties
@ 'FK'
Cover
Construction Joint
(See Note #1)
'BD' Plates Equally
Plate Washer
1
4 2"
Bolts (Typ.)
6 Spa. @ 4"
'BH'
Spaced Between
Square Or
Anchor Bolts
Round (Typ.)
(See Note #3)
Bolt Circle
#5 Tie Bars
Concrete Pedestal
6 Spaces @ 4"
Or Drilled Shaft
Structural Grout Pad
Finished
PLAN
'
FC'
Grade
Double Nut (Typ.)
Concrete
Pedestal
clearance for accessibility considerations.
5. Wrap fillet weld around the stiffner
( 8" Min.)
#5 Ties
1
8"
1
M in.
)
2" (
Leveling
Nut (Typ.)
(1" Max.)
Finished Grade
#5 Tie Bars
2 Bolt Dia.
Remaining
Spaces @
2 Bolt Dia.
Concrete
Pedestal
12" Max.
Anchor Bolt
Footing
6" Cover
'FC' Bars
(Typ.)
11:
44:
02 AM
See DETAIL 'A'
Drain Hole
7"
termination on the tube wall.
Structural
Grout Pad
(See Spec.
649-7)
'
BK'
Structural Grout Pad does not provide adequate
See DETAIL 'B'
Equally
'BA' Bolts (Typ.)

1"
to be less than 3" where the footprint of the
#5 Tie Bars
FF Spaces @ FG"
2'-0" (Min.)
'
FE'
4. Structural Grout Pad dimension may be modified
Foundation
Elevation
(See Note #2)
'
FC'
top elevation of the drill shaft to the finished

grade, unless specified otherwise in the plans.
Directions of Travel
3. Install Drilled Shaft with a 2'-0" minimum from
'BD'
Spaced
FRONT ELEVATION
ELEVATION
FOOTING AND PEDESTAL
Double
Nuts (Typ.)
DRILLED SHAFT
12/3/2015
(Alternate Foundation)
LAST
01/01/16
REVISIO N
FOUNDATION
REVISION
(
1) Bolt Diam eter (
M ax.
)
2. See Traffic Plans for elevation at top of Foundation.
Gap = Upright
'FD' (Dia.)
'FB'-'FD'
2
1"
'FB'-'FD'
2
'
BE'
minimum amplitude prior to pour.
3"
(See Note #4)
'
BC'
1
4"
'
FA'
1. Construction joint allowed, roughen surface
Thickness +
1"
1
)
M in.
4" (
#5 Tie Bars
FD Spaces @ FE"
Shaft Length
4"
SIDE ELEVATION
Cover
(See Note #5)
NOTES:
to
(Typ.)
'BJ'
'F' Upright Pipe
ELEVATION
BASE PLATE CONNECTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11310
SHEET
NO.
2 of 5
Upright Pipe
1
4"
Upright Pipe
Upright-Truss Connection
Upright Cap
(See Sheet 5)
(Typ.)
1"
'TG'
(See Note #1)
45
'TJ'
(Typ.)
See DETAIL 'C' (Typ.)

1.5 x 'D' OD
Top
Truss
Chord
2 Equal
Rows Of
Bolts
1"
Top Truss Chord
'TD'
'TF'
(Typ.)
'TH'
(Typ.)
Back
Truss
Chord
Truss Web Angles

Back
Truss
Chord
CANTILEVER ASSEMBLY
Top Or Bottom
Truss Chord
Plate
(Typ.)
'TH'
Bottom
Truss
Chord
Upright Pipe
'
F'OD + 2"
Bottom Truss Chord
3
4"
(Typ.)
'TE' Gusset
Plates (Typ.)
'TB' OR 'TC'
2
-1
1
2"
X 3
'TE' Gusset
Plates (Typ.)
45
'
F'OD + 2" + (
1.
5 x '
D'OD)
1
2"
Back
Truss
Chord
'
TD'
'
C'(
Truss Depth)
'D' OD + 7"
'D' OD + 7"
Back
Truss
Chord
Truss
Chord
1" (Typ.)
'TA' Bolts
(See Note #2)
2 Eq. Spa.
2 Eq. Spa.
Bolts
Bolts
2 Eq. Spa.
2 Eq. Spa.
'D' OD + 7"
2
Gusst Plates (Typ.)

1
4"
'C' x Cos 30
2
'C' x Cos 30
2
For An Odd Numbers Of Bolts Per Row
312" For An Odd Numbers Of Bolts Per Row
FRONT ELEVATION
SECTION A-A
UPRIGHT-TRUSS CONNECTION DETAIL

(Web Members From Back Truss Chord Omitted For Clarity)
1"
'
TD'
(With Gusset Plates And Web Angles Omitted For Clarity)
1
2"
SIDE ELEVATION
Gusset Plate
NOTES:
10:
12:
23 AM
1. Wrap fillet weld around the stiffner termination on the tube wall.
2. Truss Chord Bolts:
A. Top and Bottom: Install 'TC' hex head bolts with self-locking nuts.
B. Back: Install 'TB' hex head bolts with self-locking nuts.
Chord And
Bottom Of Plate
Truss Web Angles
1/13/2016
Top Truss Chord
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
DETAIL 'C'
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11310
SHEET
NO.
3 of 5
Truss
1'-0"
'N' -1 Panel
Panel/2
See DETAIL 'E'
'F' OD/2 + 1"
'
C'
'D' Back Truss Chord
Plugs
See DETAIL 'D'
Similar to DETAIL 'E'

'E' Truss Web
Angles (Typ.)
'D' Top Truss Chord
See DETAIL 'F'
Section B-B (Section C-C Similar)

Upright Pipe
(See Note #1)
CANTILEVER ASSEMBLY
7"
Span Length, Comprised Of 'N' Equal Panels
'E' Truss Web

Angles (Typ.)
Similar to DETAIL 'H'
See DETAIL 'G'
'
C'
See DETAIL 'I'
'D'
'
C'
'D' .
Truss
Chords
See Plug Detail

(Sheet 5) (Typ.)
30
'D' Back
Truss Chord
'E'
Gusset (Typ.)
30
'D'
'B' Panel Length (Typ.)
DETAIL 'H'
'F' OD/2 + 1"
FRONT ELEVATION
SIDE ELEVATION
(See Note #2)
TRUSS
Truss Chord (Typ.)
TRUSS NOTES:
1. Out-of-plane members are not shown for clarity.
See Upright-Truss
Connection Detail
(Sheet 3)
'GB' Hex Head Bolts With

Self-Locking Nuts (Typ.)
2. Back truss chord and attached angles are not

'GA' 'GD' x 6"
shown for clarity.
'GA' 'GH' x 'GG'
6"
EB
'GA' 'GD' x 'GC'
3. Wrap fillet weld around plate termination on

the tube wall.
See Plug Detail

(Sheet 5)
Plate Is Skewed
To Plane Of View
4. Chord Splices not shown.

'E' Truss Web Angles (Typ.)
DETAIL 'D'
DETAIL 'E'
DETAIL 'F'
A
E
Distance
'E' Truss Web Angles (Typ.)
Bolt Size
3
4"
3
4"
1
2 4"
1
1 8"
5
8"
3"
1
2"
1
2"
See Plug Detail

(Sheet 5)
Chord (Typ.)
B
E
See Upright-Truss
Connection Detail
(Sheet 3)
'GK'
1
4"
(Typ.)
(See Note #3)
'GA' (Typ.)
EB
'GB' " Hex Head Bolts With

Self-Locking Nuts (Typ.)
'GA' 'GF' x 'GE'
EB
1
2"
7
8"
EB
11:
44:
05 AM
1"
EB
EA
EA
'GA' 'GF' x 'GJ'
12/3/2015
6"
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
DETAIL 'G'
DETAIL 'H'
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DETAIL 'I'
NO.
11310
SHEET
NO.
4 of 5
Upright Cap
Splice Connections
Splice (See Note #2)

'SC' Bolt 'SB' Required
(See Note #1)
Gap Between Pipes
1
8"
Max.
'SA'
Truss Chord
Truss Plugs
Distance
Bolt Size
A
3
4"
1"
7
8"
3
4"
1
2"
1
4"
Truss Chord
B
1
2"
3"
1
2"
'SC' Bolt (Typ.)

A
FRONT ELEVATION
CANTILEVER ASSEMBLY
SIDE ELEVATION
SPLICE CONNECTION DETAIL
'F' OD +
1
2"
SPLICE CONNECTION NOTES:

1. Only 6 bolts are shown in detail for clarity.
(One Half Each Side Of Splice)
2. Splices are not allowed for truses less
Upright Pipe
than or equal to 40', Splice optional

for trusses greater than 40'.
3
16"
Of Plug
1
2"
L1
1
2"
x 1
1
4"
9
16"
1
8"
Hole; Tack Weld
1
2"
Hex Nut
(Chase Threads After Galvanizing)
'D' OD/2
PLAN
1
4"
Bar
1
2"
(Min.)
1
8"
1
4"
Thick Neoprene
Gasket (Glued To Cap)
Plate (Cap)
1
2"
1
4"
TRUSS PLUG DETAIL
1
2"
11:
44:
06 AM
L1
1
2"
1
2"
x 1
1
4"
Hex Head Bolt With
Rubber Washer (Top)

Upright Pipe And Cap
12/3/2015
ELEVATION
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
UPRIGHT CAP DETAIL

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11310
SHEET
NO.
5 of 5
Span (Even Number of Panels)
Upright-Truss Connection
Span (Odd Number of Panels)

Truss
Top Truss Chord
Splice Connection
Back Truss Chord
Bottom
*'
C'
Truss
l
e
n
e Pa
On
Truss Chord
Right Upright Pipe 'J'
ISOMETRIC VIEW
* NOTE: Verify these dimensions prior to fabrication of Uprights.

*'
B'
Left Upright Pipe 'H'
SPAN SIGN STRUCTURE NOTES
Bottom of Plate
1. Work this Index in conjunction with SPAN SIGN STRUCTURE DATA TABLES in the Plans and Index 11300.
2. Handholes at the pole base are required for DMS Structures. Refer to Index 18300 for Handhole Details.
3. Shop Drawings are required. Obtain Shop Drawing approval prior to fabrication. Include the following:
A. Field verification of all upright heights.
B. Foundation elevations: Ensure minimum vertical clearances of the sign panel over the roadway.
C. Height of the foundation above adjacent ground.
D. Anchor bolt orientation with respect to centerline of truss and the direction of traffic.
E. Method to be used to provide the required parabolic camber (see Camber Diagram).
F. Handholes at pole base (when required).
Drilled Shaft
4. Materials:
Bottom of Plate
A. Sign Structure:
a. Upright and Chords (Steel Pipe): API-5L-X42, 42 ksi yield or ASTM A500, Grade B (Min.)
b. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A709 grade 36
c. Weld Material: E70XX
B. Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
a. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A325, Type 1
b. Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade DH Heavy-Hex
c. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, one under turned element
C. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers
a. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 55.
b. Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade A Heavy-Hex (5 per bolt)
D. Concrete: Class IV (Drilled Shaft)

E. Reinforcing Steel: Specification Section 415
'K'
5. Fabrication:
B. Chord Splices: Minimum splice spacing is three truss panel lengths apart and three truss panel lengths from the
uprights. Chord Splices may be either the Standard Splice or the Alternate Splice but not both on the same
structure.
1
2
C. Upright splice: Not allowed
1
2
Span
Span
D. Structural bolt hole diameters: Bolt diameter plus 116".

E. Anchor bolt hole diameters: Bolt diameter plus 12".
CAMBER DIAGRAM
F. Hot Dip Galvanize after fabrication.

G. Shop assemble the entire structure after galvanizing to validate/document alignment and clearance for bolted
connections as well as contact between connecting plates. Take remedial action, if necessary, prior to
shipment.
H. Disassemble as necessary and secure components for shipment.
6. Coatings:
A. Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM F2329
B. All other steel, including Plate Washers, hot dip galvanize: ASTM A123
11:
44:
07 AM
7. Construction:
A. Construct foundation in accordance with Specification Section 455 Drilled Shaft, except payment is included in
the cost of the structure.
B. Prior to erection, record the as-built anchor locations and submit to the Engineer.
C. Provide a parabolic camber with the maximum upward deflection as shown on the Camber Diagram.
D. Tighten nuts and bolts in accordance with Specification Section 700. Split-Lock Washers are not permitted.
E. Install Aluminum Sign Panels as shown on the Elevation drawing.
12/3/2015
F. After installation, place wire screen between top of foundation and bottom of baseplate in accordance with
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
Specification Section 649-6.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SPAN SIGN STRUCTURE
NO.
11320
SHEET
NO.
1of 5
See Upright Cap Detail
B
Termination on the Tube Wall (Typ.).
Anchor Bolts
Center of Drilled Shaft
Equally Spaced
Upright Pipe
1"
Wrap Fillet Weld Around Stiffner
'CB' For Right Upright
1
4"
'BB' For Left Upright
'LF' For Left Upright
and Upright
'RF' For Right Upright
For Left Upright
(Typ.)
45
1.5 x 'F' OD
Bolt Circle
1"
See Detail D
2 Equal Rows
'BD' Stiffner Plates

Equally Spaced between
'LH' For Left Upright
of Bolts
(Typ.)
'RH' For Right Upright
Anchor Bolts
'LC' Or 'RC' Plate (Typ.)
Top Truss Chord

'BH' For Left Upright
'CH' For Right Upright
Truss Web Angles

'
E'(
Truss Depth)
A
For Right Upright
'CD' Stiffner Plates
Equally Spaced between
Upright Pipe
Anchor Bolts
(Typ.)
" Plate Washer (Typ.)

'LG' or 'RG'
2 x Bolt
2 x Bolt
Diameter
Diameter
Back Truss Chord
Truss
Chord
(Typ.)
Bottom Truss Chord 'F'
'H' or 'J' OD + 4 Bolt Dia.
'LE' For Left Upright

'RE' For Right Upright
See Detail D
(Typ.)
'H' or 'J' OD + 8 Bolt Dia.
45
PLAN VIEW
'LD' or 'RD' Plate
'LG' or 'RG'
1"
BASE PLATE
'F' OD + 7"
Gusset Plates
3
4"
(Typ.)
'BG' Left Upright

B
'CG' Right Upright
'F' OD + ('H' or 'J ') OD

+
1
5 4"
1
2"
10" for Truss Depths less than 7'-0"

1'-2" for Truss Depths 7'-0" or Greater
For An Odd Number Of Bolts Per Row
VIEW B-B
For An Even Number Of Bolts Per Row
Web Members From Back Truss

Chord Omitted For Clarity
Cope
UPRIGHT-TRUSS CONNECTION DETAIL

RIGHT UPRIGHT SHOWN
(LEFT UPRIGHT SIMILAR)
1
Typ.
)
4" (
'F' OD + 7"
-1
'CF' Right Upright
'BE' Left Upright

'CE' Right Upright
'BC' Left Upright
'BJ' Left Upright
3
8"
Washer
1
2"
Chord &
'CA' Bolt, Right Upright

Double Nuts
(Typ.)
(
1) Bolt
diam eter (
M ax.
)
2 Bolt Dia.
'
FF'Right Upright
2 Bolt Dia.
'
DF'Left Upright
Bottom of
Anchor Bolt
'BA' Bolt, Left Upright
11:
44:
08 AM
('H' or 'J') OD + 2"
Sq. or Round (Typ.)
see Spec. 649-6
Truss Web Angle
Chord &
Gusset
12/3/2015
REVISIO N
07/01/15
'LA' or 'RA' Bolts
DETAIL D
2 Eq. Sp.
Abbreviation
LAST
'LB' or 'RB' Hex Head Bolts

w/ Self-Locking Nuts
2 Eq. Sp.
NOTE:
SECTION A-A
REVISION
Bolts
SECTION C-C
1"
Drilled Shaft
1.5 x 'F' OD +
'CJ' Right Upright
Leveling Nuts
Wire Screen
1"
'
LC' Or '
RC'
on the Tube Wall. (Typ.)
1"
'CC' Right Upright
the Stiffener Termination
Upright Pipe
1
2"
(Typ.)
Wrap Fillet Weld Around
1
4"
Weld size +
Bottom Truss Chord
('H' or 'J') OD + 2"
M in.
1"
'CD' Right Upright
1
2"
x 3
" M in.
'BD' Left Upright
1
4"
'LB' or 'RB'
'BF' Left Upright
Gap = Upright Thickness + "
W eld size +
(as shown)
(With Gusset Plate and

Angles omitted for clarity)
OD ~ Outside Diameter
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SPAN SIGN STRUCTURE
NO.
11320
SHEET
NO.
2 of 5
'D'-1 Panels
'GC'
'GC'
Span (Even Number of Panels)
'F' OD Back Truss Chord
See Plug Detail (Typ.)
'
E'
See Detail H
'
E
'
'F'
0
3
See Detail M
Similar to Detail H
'
E'
'G' Truss Web Angles (Typ.)
Top Truss Chord
VIEW F-F
Upright Pipe
'F'
'G'
VIEW G-G Similar
Upright Pipe
(Out-of-Plane Members not shown for clarity)

'H' OD
+ 1"
2
'J' OD
Span Length, 'A', comprised of 'D' Equal Panels
Gusset
0
3
+ 1"
2
1
2
Span (Even Number

The Number Of Panels For An Even Number Of Panels
of Panels)
E
'F'
See Detail L
'F'
See Detail K
SECTION E-E
'
E'
See Detail I
See Detail J
1
2
'F'

The Number Of Panels Rounded Down To The Closest
E
Whole Number For An Odd Number Of Panels
FRONT OF TRUSS ELEVATION

(Back Truss Chord and attached Angles not shown for clarity)
2 ~
1
2"
Bolts (Typ.)
1
2"
1
1
5
2"x3 2"x 16"
3
4"
1
2"
U-Bolt w/ Self-Locking Nuts (Typ.)
Aluminum Zee Sign Hanger
1
2"
Attach Luminaire to angle with
U Bolt
4 ~
1
2"
bolts at each location
11:
44:
08 AM
where required
1
2"
1
5
2"x 16"
x3
(For attachment of
Provide this Detail for Back Mounted Signs
Luminaire Support)
at all Sign Hanger Locations
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
BACK-SIDE SIGN MOUNTING DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SPAN SIGN STRUCTURE
NO.
11320
SHEET
NO.
3 of 5
E
B
See Upright-Truss
Connection Detail
Chord (Typ.)
Truss Chord 'F' (Typ.)
Chord
3
8"
for 1
1
2"
for 1" Bolts
4
3
3" for
EB
'GA' 'GD' x 'GC'
1
4"
for
3
4"
Bolts
1
4"
for
5
8"
Bolts
1
4"
Bolts
'GA' 'GF' x 6"
3
16"
3
4"
See Detail I
For Edge
Truss Web
Distance
Angles (Typ.)
1
2"
1
4"
DETAIL H
1
1 8"
DETAIL I
Bolts
1
2"
7
8"
Bolts
for 1
EA
'GA' 'GF' x 'GK'

Upright
for 1" Bolts

for
7
8"
Bolts
for
3
4"
Bolts
for
5
8"
Bolts
EB
DETAIL J

'GA' 'GF' x 'GG'
A
E
'GB' Hex Head Bolts
w/ Self-Locking Nuts, (Typ.)
Wrap Fillet Weld Around Plate
Upright
Termination on the Tube Wall (Typ.).
'GL'
B
E
w/ Self-Locking Nuts, (Typ.)
'GA' 'GJ' x 'GH'
'GB' Hex Head Bolts
EB
See Upright-Truss
EB
Connection Detail
'GA' 'GF' x 'GE'
Centroids of Angles
and Chords Intersect
Plate is skewed to
(Typ.)
DETAIL K
DETAIL L
1
2"
DETAIL M
plane of view
Min.
3
16"
Upright Pipe
1
2"
9
16"
1
2"
x 1
1
4"
Plate (Cap)
1
8"
Thick Neoprene
1
8"
Gasket (Glued to Cap)
Hole
Tack Weld
1
4"
1
2"
'F' OD
2
Hex Nut
(Chase Threads after Galvanizing)
('J' or 'H') OD +
1
2"
1
4"
Bar
SECTION O-O
SECTION N-N
(Showing Cap plate only)

Plate (Cap)
1
2"
1
4"
PLUG DETAIL
1
4"
N
1
2"
(Each end of Back Truss Chord)

N
Hex Head Bolt
11:
44:
09 AM
w/ Rubber Washer (Top)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
UPRIGHT CAP DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SPAN SIGN STRUCTURE
NO.
11320
SHEET
NO.
4 of 5
'PA'
'PA'
Q
#5 Ties
2'-2" Lap
Chord
'PB'
Sp
a
ce
ars Equ
al
C' B
ly
'F
Q
Bolt Circle
CSL Tube (Typ.)
or
Chord
r
e
v
6"Co
)
.
p
Ty
(
'
Anchor Bolts, (Typ.)
'D
C
Flange
See Section A-A
6 Bolts Shown
'PF' Bolts Required
Flange
Evenly Spaced
ELEVATION
ALTERNATE SPLICE CONNECTION
SECTION P-P
PLAN VIEW
DRILLED SHAFT
See Section A-A
Elev. Top of Foundation
(Typ.)
(One Half Each

Side of Splice)
Maximum Gap
1
8"
4"
(
Right Upright)
FE"
DE"
(
Left Upright)
DD Spaces @
FD Spaces @
12" M ax.
Spaces @
Rem aining
Bolts
Bars
3
4"
# 5 Tie
Bolts
for
'DC' @ Left Upright

'FC' @ Right Upright
6" Cover
7
8"
(Typ.)
for
Splice
Bolts
3
4"
Drilled Shaft
7"
1
2"
Grade
for 1" Bolts
3" for
2
for
7
8"
Bars
1
4"
Truss Chord
for 1" Bolts
# 5 Tie
1
1 2"
Left Upright
3
4"
Right Upright
SECTION Q-Q
1
16"
'
DA'@
'PC' +
1
3 2"
Finished
'PC'
'
FA'@
Between Pipes
(Typ.)
'SB' Required
6 Spaces
'SC' Bolts
# 5 Tie
Bars
5"
'PD'
Chord
2'
-0" M in.
4"
shown for clarity
(
Top)
NOTE: Only 6 Bolts
Cover
See Traffic Plans
otherwise in plans
Anchor Bolts, (Typ.)
'PE' Dia. Bolts (Typ.)
unless specified
Flange
Bolts
R
'SA'
'DB' Left Upright
'FB' Right Upright
SECTION R-R
ELEVATION
DRILLED SHAFT
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
44:
10 AM
ELEVATION
SPLICE CONNECTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SPAN SIGN STRUCTURE
NO.
11320
SHEET
NO.
5 of 5
STEP 1: Calculate the area and the centroid for an individual sign or a sign cluster. Note that the centroid and areas have been calculated
for frequently used sign clusters. These are shown on Sheet No. 6, 7 & 8 of 9.
Centroid
5
NORTH
Size
H x V
Local
'Y
n'
(in. x in.)
(in.)
'A'
n
'X'
n x 'A'
n
'Y'
n x 'A'
n
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
7.5
315
-4,252.5
2,362.5
315
+4,252.5
2,362.5
576
-7,776
16,128
436
5,886
12,208
Global
'X
n '
Global
'Y
n'
(in.)
EAST
4
'
C'
Centroid of Sign Cluster

COUNTY
'
H'
'
B'
Bottom of Sign Cluster
21 x 15
7.5
21 x 15
7.5
'
A'
24 x 24
24 x 24
-10.5-1.5-1.5
= -13.5
10.5+1.5+1.5
= 13.5
-12-1.5
12
12
Edge of Pavement Elevation

5
Mounting Elevation
24 x 12
24 x 12
7.5
15+1+12=
= -13.5
28
12+1.5
15+1+12=
= 13.5
28
-12-1.5
15+1+24+
= -13.5
1+6=47
12+1.5
15+1+24+
= 13.5
1+6=47
SHEET NO.
288
TOTALS
('A ')
n
= 2,218 in. = 15.4 ft.

( 'X' x 'A' )
n
n
'X' =
c
'A'
n
('X ' x 'A ') = -1,890 in. = -1.09 ft.

n
n
= -0.1 ft.
'Y' =
c
( 'Y' x 'A' )
n
n
'A'
n
('Y ' x 'A ')

n
n
-3,888
13,536
288
3,888
13,536
2,218
-1,890
60,133
= 60,133 in. = 34.8 ft.
CONTENTS
General Notes and Example
Centroid and Height
Column and Foundation Tables
Slip Base and Foundation Details
Driven Post and Soil Plate Details
Connection and Wind Beam
7, 8 & 9
Frequently Used Sign Clusters
= 2.26 ft.
STEP 2:Determine the height 'H' from groundline for the individual sign or the cluster.
Assume: Bay County, Wind Speed = 130 mph, 'A' = 1 ft.,
Calculated:
X'= -0.1 ft., 'Y'

c =
c
'B' = 7 ft.
'C' 2.26 ft.
GENERAL NOTES:
Since X' = -0.1

< 6", it is not a cantilever sign, only dark-bold lines in the table will be referenced to.
c
1. Design Wind Speed is determined by County (see WIND SPEEDS BY COUNTY)

'H' = 'A' + 'B' + 'C' = 10.26 ft. ==>
USE 11 ft.
('A ')
n
= 15.4 ft.
==> USE 16 ft.
2. Maximum sign area (single or cluster) is 30 sf.

3. Maximum sign width (X) single or cluster (including rotated sign panels) is 60 inches.
STEP 3:Select the appropriate Aluminum Column (Post) Selection Tables by Wind Speed and find the intersection point. See Sheet 3.
4. Shop drawings: Not required.
Aluminum Column (Post) Selection Table
5. Aluminum Sign, Wind Beams and Column (Post) Materials:
(Wind Speed - 130 MPH)
'H' = 11 ft.,
'H' (ft.)
8
0
10
11
1
12
13
14
15
a. Aluminum Plates: ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6
For WIND SPEED = 130 MPH,
b. Aluminum Bars and Extruded Shapes: ASTM B221, Alloy 6061-T6
Area = 16 ft.
c. Aluminum Structural Shapes: ASTM B308 Alloy 6061-T6

16
17
18
19
d. Cast Aluminum: Alloy 356-T6
- Refer to the 130 mph Aluminum Column (Post) Selection
20
e. Aluminum Weld Material: ER 5556
Table, as copied from Sheet 3 and shown here.
2
3
- Using the 16 ft. area on the left hand side of the table,
6. Sign Mounting Bolts (Screws), Nuts and Washers:
go across to the 11 ft. height and find the cell marked
a. Aluminum Button Head and Flat Head Bolts (Screws): ASTM F 468 Alloy 2024-T4
with X.
b. Aluminum Hex Nuts: ASTM F467 Alloy 6061-T6 or 6262-T9
c. Aluminum Washers: ASTM B221, Alloy 7075-T6
- find the symbol 4 which the dark-bold line under the

X cell leads to.
TOTAL PANEL AREA (

SF)
7
8
- In the Column (Post) and Foundation Table, the symbol4
d. Galvanized Steel U-Bolts: ASTM A 307 Grade A

e. Galvanized Hex Nuts: ASTM A 563
concludes
that the design requires a 4.0" diameter and 0.25" thick

Aluminum Column (Post) and a 2.0' diameter and 4.0' deep
10
Concrete Foundation.
11
7. Stainless Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washers may be used in lieu of the Aluminum
button head and flat head Bolts (Screws) as follows:
a. Stainless Steel Bolts (Screws): ASTM F 593 Alloy Group 2, Condition A, CW1 or SH1
b. Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM F594
12
8. Sign Column (Post) Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
13
14
a. Galvanized Bolts (Sleeve): ASTM A307 with Galvanized Hex Nuts and Washers
b. Aluminum Bolts (Sleeve): ASTM B221, Alloy 6061-T6 or 2024-T4 with Hex Nuts and Washers.
15
16
17
= If CANTILEVER SIGN configuration (see Cantilever
c. Galvanized High Strength Hex Head Bolts (Base Bolts): ASTM A325 Type 1
Sign Details) falls in this region, use next larger
d. Galvanized Hex Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade DH
Column (Post) size than that indicated.
e. Galvanized Washers: ASTM F436
18
9. Coatings:
19
a. Aluminum Fasteners: Anodic coating (0.0002 inches min.) and chromate sealed
20
b. High Strength Steel Bolts Nuts and Washers: ASTM F2329
11:
44:
11 AM
21
c. All other steel items (excluding stainless steel): Hot-dip Galvanize - ASTM A123
d. Repair damaged galvanizing in accordance with Specification Section 562
STEP 4:Design the Column (Post) and the foundation according to the dark-bold lines or shaded area (if cantilever sign) in the Aluminum Column
(Post) Selection Tables and Column (Post) and Foundation Table. For sign assemblies with signs oriented in two directions, only the sign
12/3/2015
with the largest area should be analyzed to determine the Column (Post) requirements.
GUIDE TO USE THIS STANDARD
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
NOTES AND EXAMPLE

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SINGLE COLUMN GROUND SIGNS
NO.
11860
SHEET
NO.
1of 9
'X'
n
'X'
n
'X'
c
EAST
Centroid of Sign Cluster
EAST
COUNTY
'
C'
NORTH
NORTH
1" (Typ.)
Bottom of Sign Cluster
'
B'
'
Y'
n
'
Y'
n
'
H'
(See Note 3)
'
Y'
n
Edge of Pavement Elevation
'
Y'
n
'
Y'
n
'
A'
'
Y'
c
'
Y'
n
COUNTY
Mounting Elevation
Aluminum Column (Post)
SIGN CLUSTER
'X' =
c
( 'X' x 'A' )
n
n
'A'
n
'C' = 'Y' =
c
TYPICAL SECTION
( 'Y' x 'A' )
n
n
'A'
n
X
X/2
'A' = Height of the mounting elevation to the edge of pavement elevation
X/2
X/2
0.71a
'A' = Area of individual sign

n
'B' = Height of the edge of pavement elevation and the bottom of the sign or cluster
Sign
0.
71a
Centroid
h/2 = Individual sign center
Sign
Sign
h/2
= Individual sign height
0.
61h
h
h/2
Sign
Sign
'C' = Height from the bottom of the sign or cluster to the centroid of the sign or cluster
Centroid
Centroid
Sign
Centroid
Sign
Sign
'H' = Height of sign or cluster centroid from groundline

X
STOP
= Individual sign width
YIELD
RECTANGLE
DIAMOND
'X' = Centroid horizontal location of sign or cluster from Aluminum Column (Post)
c
X
'Y' = Centroid height of sign or cluster from bottom of sign cluster

c
X/2
X/2
X/2
X/2
'X' = Individual sign centroid horizontal location from Aluminum Column (Post)
n
'Y' = Individual Sign centroid height from bottom of sign cluster
n
h
Centroid
0.
48h
0.
38h
Centroid
Sign
Sign
h
Sign
h
h/2
2. Do not exceed an area of 30 SF or a width of 60 inches for a sign or a sign cluster.
Sign
1. For 'A' & 'B' see Index No. 17302 and Roadway Plans.
0.
55h
NOTES:
Centroid
Centroid
11:
44:
12 AM
3. Vertical sign spacing (1" shown on Sign Cluster detail) also applies to rotated signs.
RAILROAD
Sign
SCHOOL
Sign
SHIELD
12/3/2015
CALCULATION OF SIGN CLUSTER CENTROID
Sign
Sign
COUNTY
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
CENTROID AND HEIGHT

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11860
SHEET
NO.
2 of 9
ALUMINUM COLUMN (POST) SELECTION TABLE
(WIND SPEED = 110 MPH)
'H' (FT)
8
10
11
12
13
14
'H' (FT)
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
14
15
'H' (FT)
16
17
18
19
20
9
10
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
17
18
19
20
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
23
24
24
25
25
25
26
26
26
27
27
27
28
28
28
22
23
24
29
29
30
16
15
23
15
12
22
30
14
13
22
29
13
11
TOTAL PANEL AREA (

SF)
TOTAL PANEL AREA (

SF)
12
12
10
13
11
7
4
10
10
11
9
1
TOTAL PANEL AREA (

SF)
20
30
If CANTILEVER SIGN configuration (see Cantilever Sign Details) falls

in this region, use next larger Column (Post) size than that indicated.
COLUMN (POST) AND FOUNDATION TABLE
4'-0" Max.
Foundation Alternatives
Column (Post)
6" Min.
Size
6" Min.
Diameter
(NPS) (in)
Sign
Aluminum
Column (Post)
CANTILEVER SIGN
Driven Post *
Wall
Thk.
(in)
Diameter
without
with
Soil Plate
Soil Plate
2.5
2.0
2.0
4.5
WIND SPEEDS BY COUNTY:
Concrete (Class I)
Embedment Depth (ft)

(ft)
Embedment
Stub
Depth
Length
(ft)
(ft)
2.0
2.0
2.5
5.0
3.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
3.5
2.0
2.5
2.5
3.5
6.0
4.5
2.0
3.0
3.0
4.0
---
---
2.0
4.0
3.0
4.5
---
---
2.0
4.0
3.0
5.0
---
---
2.0
4.5
3.0
6.0
---
---
2.0
5.0
3.0
8.0
---
---
2.0
5.5
3.0
Alachua, Baker, Bradford, Clay, Columbia, Gadsden,

Gilchrist, Hamilton, Hardee, Jackson, Jefferson,
Lafayette, Lake, Leon, Madison, Marion, Polk, Putnam,
NOTE:
110 MPH
Sumter, Suwannee and Union counties.

130 MPH
Bay, Brevard, Calhoun, Charlotte, Citrus, De Soto,
Dixie, Duval, Flagler, Franklin, Glades, Gulf, Hendry,
Hernando, Highlands, Hillsborough, Holmes, Lee, Levy,
Liberty, Manatee, Nassau, Okaloosa, Okeechobee, Orange,
Osceola, Pasco, Pinellas, Sarasota, Seminole, St. Johns,
Taylor, Volusia, Wakulla, Walton and Washington counties.
150 MPH
Broward, Collier, Escambia, Indian River, Martin, Miami-Dade,
Monroe, Palm Beach, Santa Rosa and St. Lucie counties.
1. For cantilever sign installations see Index 17302.

2. For cantilever signs with widths greater than 4' see Index 11861.
* INSTALLING FRANGIBLE COLUMN SUPPORTS:
11:
44:
12 AM
Columns (posts) may be installed by driving the post or the posts may be
set to the depth indicated in preformed holes backfilled with suitable
material tamped in layers not thicker than 6" (to provide adequate
12/3/2015
compaction) or filled with flowable fill or bagged concrete.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
COLUMN AND FOUNDATION TABLES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11860
SHEET
NO.
3 of 9
3
8"
I.D.
2"
1"
1"
L/2
Bolt Hole
NOTES:
'W'
'
L'
'
H'
/2
9
16"
'
L'
1
1 2"
'
H'
1
1 2"
'
H'
/2
Aluminum Sleeve
Hole Size 'D'
1. Foundation Notes for Frangible Slip Base:
'
T'
A. Place Stub into concrete to diameter and depth shown in POST AND FOUNDATION TABLE
using Class I Concrete.
'L'
2. Slip Base Fabrication Notes:
'L'
'
L'
Base Plate
1" (
Typ.
)
9
16"
Bolt Hole
ELEVATION
Provide 2- 0.0149" Thick (28 guage)
28 Ga. Thick Aluminum Strip
and 2- 0.0329" Thick (21 guage)
2 Reqd. Per Base
Brass Shims Per Post
SHIM DETAIL
A. The difference between the O.D. of the post and I.D. of the Sleeve must be 116 or less.
B. Base Plate to Sleeve and Base Plate to Stub may be welded or cast.
C. For cast base plates bolted to foundation stubs, use a foundation stub the same size as
the sign column (Post).
3. Slip-Base Assembly Instructions:
A. Assemble Slip Base connections in the following manner:
1. Insert Post into Sleeve and connect using 2 ~ 12 diameter Sleeve Bolts.
'R'
2. Assemble top base plate to bottom Base Plate using Base Bolts (High strength) with

Shims As Reqd.
3 washers per bolt. (See Detail 'A'):
(See Note 3.E)
a. Place one washer on each Base Bolt between the bottom Base Plate and the Base
15 (Typ.)
1" (Typ.)
Bolt head.
b. Place the next washer between the Bottom Base Plate and the Bolt Keeper Plate.
PLAN
c. Add the top base plate section.

d. Place the third washer between the Top Base Plate and the Nut.
SLEEVE & BASE PLATE DETAILS
1
2"
Sleeve Bolt
B. Orient the Bolt Keeper Plates in the Direction of Traffic.
Aluminum Sleeve
Stub Base Plate
C. Use brass shims to plumb the post.
High Strength
Hole Size 'D'
Base Bolt (Typ.)

D. Tighten Base Bolts as follows:
1. Tighten Base Bolts to the maximum possible with a 12 to 15 wrench (this will bed
Shims As Reqd.
Stub Length
the washers and shims and clear the bolt threads).
(See Note 3.C)
High Strength Washer
2. Loosen each Base Bolt one turn.

3. Under the supervision of the Engineer, use a calibrated wrench to tighten bolts to
Bolt Keeper
the torque prescribed in the SLIP BASE DETAILS Table. Over tightened Base Bolts
Plate (Typ.)
Finished Grade
4" M ax. To
'W'
are not permitted.

4. Distort bolt threads at the junction with nuts to prevent loosening. Repair damaged
Aluminum Base
galvanizing.
Plate (Typ.)
E. Place galvanized steel shims between the Sleeve and Post to obtain a tight fit between the
Aluminum Stub
Post and Sleeve.
Stub Size Equals Min.

Sleeve Size Or Larger
DETAIL 'A'
See Detail 'A'
4" M ax.
4" M ax.
STUB DETAIL
See Detail 'A'

Concrete Sidewalk,
Median, Etc.
Finished Grade
SLIP BASE DETAILS
Column (Post) Size
12/3/2015
11:
44:
13 AM
Footing Depth
Aluminum Stub
Provide Bond Breaker

Between Adjacent
Concrete Surfaces
4
1
2
Aluminum Stub
2'-0" Dia.
2'-0" Dia.
SLIP BASE AND FOOTING DETAIL

(Non-Frangible Column)
SLIP BASE AND FOOTING DETAIL IN CONCRETE

(Non-Frangible Column In Crossovers, Medians & Sidewalks)
Wall
Sleeve
Sleeve
Weld Base Plate Radius
(NPS) (in) Thk. (in) I.D. (Max.) Height 'H' 'W'

1
4
'L'
'T'
'R'
Base Bolt
Size Length
29
345
11
16
138"
11
"
16
1
4
29
345
11
16
138"
11
"
16
1
4
29
345
11
16
138"
11
"
16
554
13
16
134"
13
"
16
640
15
16
238" 1116"
5
8
3
4
11
32
5
8
9
16
5
8
7
8
11
32
5
8
1
16
5
8
7
8
11
32
5
8
11
16
13
32
3
4
1
3 2
10
3
4
15
32
7
8
3
3 4
1
4
1
4
1
6 16
5
16
1
8 16
9
11
SHIM
in.-lbs
1
4
Base Plate Torque

ft-lbs
1
16
4
3" M in.
3" M in.
Footing Depth
Dia.
46
53
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
SLIP BASE AND FOUNDATION DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11860
SHEET
NO.
4 of 9

(Driven in Center
to Full Embedment)
2" Grout
Provide 18" Dia.

Removable
Form or PVC
(
See Sheet 3)
Em bedm ent Depth
Concrete Sidewalk,
Median, Etc.
Aluminum Soil Plate
NOTES:
1. Align Soil Plate bottom at
2
3
of embedment depth.
2. Slot up to 1" long is allowed to accommodate various Column (Post) sizes.
1'-6" Dia.
3. Rectangular soil plate of size 1'-2" x 1'-0" may be used as an alternative.
DRIVEN POST DETAIL

(Frangible Post In Crossovers, Medians & Sidewalks)
1'-2"
(Driven in Center
to Full Embedment)
Concrete Sidewalk,
Median, Etc.
8"
3" M in.
Bolt Holes
(Hole Spacing to match U-Bolts)

(Washers as required)
(
See Sheet 3)
6"
9
16"
Em bedm ent Depth
1'
-0"
6"
Thickness = 14"
Column (Post) Stub
ALUMINUM SOIL PLATE DETAIL
1'-6" Dia.
10:
08:
47 AM
CONCRETE/STUB DETAIL
(Frangible Post In Crossovers, Medians & Sidewalks)
Note: Concrete foundation may be Class Non Structural
1/13/2016
if poured monolithically with sidewalk or separator.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DRIVEN POST AND SOIL PLATE DETAIL

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11860
SHEET
NO.
5 of 9
Wind Beam Length
U-Bolt With
Nut, Flat Washer
And Lock Washer
3
4
3
4
x 1
Wind Beam - Aluminum Zee
3
4"
1
n.
2" M i
1
2"
1
4"
0" M in.
Aluminum
Column (Post)
6" (
Typ.
)
Align Top Of Signs
(8" Min.)
x 1.09
Bracket Connection
(3#8" Button Head Bolt)
6" (Single Sign)
8" Aluminum Button Head

Bolt with Nut and Washer (Typ.)
1'-0" Max.
(9" Double Sign)
1" Min.
1
2"
Min.
(Along Bracket Connection)
5" Max.
1" Min.
6" Max.
Sign Face
Sign Face
Sign Face
WIND BEAM CONNECTION NOTES:

1.
5
16"
Stainless Steel Hex Head Bolts with Flat Washer under Head and Lockwasher
under Nut may be used in lieu of
3
8"
Aluminum Button Head Bolts.
Aluminum
2. Use Nylon washers (provided by the sheeting supplier) under the button bolt heads to
protect sign sheeting.
Aluminum
Column
Column
(Post)
(Post)
3. Slots up to 1 long are allowed in wind beams to accommodate U-Bolts for varying
Column (Post) diameters.
Wind Beam
(See Wind Beam Connection Note #4)
4. Wind beams may be oriented in either direction.
BACK-TO-BACK SIGN NOTE:

WIND BEAM CONNECTIONS DETAILS
BRACKET DETAIL
SECTION A-A
Use the area and the centroid location of the largest

sign to determine aluminum column (post) size.
BACK-TO-BACK SIGN DETAIL
Sign
Wind Beam
Sign
STOP
Sign
(Note 3)
Wind Beam
Sign
Sign
YIELD
6"
6"
6"
Wind Beam
Sign
(Note 1)
6"
Wind Beam
Sign
(Note 2)
6"
6"
Sign
(Note 1)
6"
6"
L/2
RECTANGLE
WIND BEAM PLACEMENT NOTES:
DIAMOND
1. Install an additional third wind beam along the for signs

with heights greater than 30" and less than 72".
For
rectangular signs greater than 72" maintain a maximum wind

beam spacing of 2'-6", with the additional wind beams spaced
evenly between the top and bottom wind beams. For rectangular
signs up to 12" in height, use only one wind beam at Sign.
Sign
Sign
(Note 2)
6"
6"
6"
6"
2. Install an additional third wind beam along the for Yield and
Sign
Sign
School signs greater than 36".

3. Install an additional third wind beam along the for Diamond
11:
44:
15 AM
Sign
12/3/2015
RAILROAD
Sign
Wind Beam
Sign
SCHOOL
SHIELD
6"
Wind Beam
6"
Wind Beam
6"
6"
signs 30" or greater.
Wind Beam
Sign
COUNTY
WIND BEAM PLACEMENT DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
CONNECTION AND WIND BEAMS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11860
SHEET
NO.
6 of 9
ONE WAY
Size
Area
36x12
3.00 SF
Total Area
ONE WAY
6.31 SF
STOP
ONE WAY
24x24
3.31 SF
Size
Area
36x12
3.00 SF
Total Area
STOP
ONE WAY
5.18 SF
Size
Area
36x12
Size
Area
36x12
3.00 SF
27
Centroid
30x30
5.18 SF
13.18 SF
7.46 SF
Size
Area
36x12
3.00 SF
30x24
5.00 SF
Total Area
1.92 Ft.
Size
Area
Centroid
ONE WAY
36x12
3.00 SF
STOP
36x36
7.46 SF
2.10 Ft.
Total Area
15.46 SF
Total Area
27
21x15
2.19 SF
Size
Area
30x24
5.00 SF
21x15
2.19 SF
Size
Area
EAST
24x12
2.00 SF
27
24x24
4.00 SF
21x15
2.19 SF
Size
Area
24x12
2.00 SF
30x24
5.00 SF
21x15
2.19 SF
Size
Area
30x15
3.13 SF
30x24
5.00 SF
21x15
2.19 SF
Size
Area
EAST
24x12
2.00 SF
BUSINESS
24x12
2.00 SF
24x24
4.00 SF
21x15
2.19 SF
BUSINESS
6.19 SF
1.73 Ft.
Total Area
Centroid
7.19 SF
1.81 Ft.
Total Area
Centroid
8.19 SF
2.26 Ft.
Total Area
Centroid
9.19 SF
2.27 Ft.
Total Area
Centroid
10.32 SF
2.49 Ft.
Total Area
Centroid
10.19 SF
2.80 Ft.
OR
Area
Total Area
21x15
27
2.19 SF
1.60 Ft.
2.48 Ft.
27
Total Area
Centroid
Centroid
13.25 SF
Area
4.00 SF
Centroid
3.15 Ft.
5.00 SF
6.19 SF
Size
24x24
Total Area
DIVIDED
JCT
16.25 SF
48x48
Centroid
HIGHWAY
Size
STOP
Area
2.87 Ft.
3.00 SF
36x36
Size
DIVIDED
30x24
ONE WAY
Centroid
HIGHWAY
10.46 SF
STOP
Total Area
1.75 Ft.
STOP
8.18 SF
30x30
Centroid
Centroid
24x24
4.00 SF
Size
Area
21x15
2.19 SF
Total Area
Centroid
EAST
BUSINESS
OR
STOP
24x24
JCT
3.31 SF
6.31 SF
301
DIVIDED
24x18
7.19 SF
1.71 Ft.
3.00 SF
30x24
1.52 Ft.
301 301
5.00 SF
HIGHWAY
Size
Area
Total Area
Size
Centroid
BUSINESS
STOP
30x30
OR
EAST
24x12
Area
OR
27
27
5.00 SF
Size
Area
1.53 Ft.
2.19 Ft.
DIVIDED
EAST
BUSINESS
6.00 SF
10.18 SF
Centroid
2.00 SF
5.18 SF
30x24
Total Area
24x24
4.00 SF
301 301
HIGHWAY
Total Area
Size
Area
24x12
2.00 SF
Total Area
BUSINESS
OR
EAST
7.00 SF
STOP
36x36
Centroid
Centroid
1.45 Ft.
7.46 SF
12.46 SF
2.55 Ft.
301 301
30x24
5.00 SF
DIVIDED
30x24
5.00 SF
Size
Area
Total Area
Centroid
HIGHWAY
11:
44:
16 AM
BUSINESS
OR
EAST
30x15
3.13 SF
8.13 SF
30x24
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
301 301
1.66 Ft.
27
5.00 SF
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11860
SHEET
NO.
7 of 9
EAST
Size
Area
24x12
2.00 SF
Total Area
Centroid
Size
Area
18x18
1.71 SF
56
24x12
301
3.90 SF
Area
TO
30x15
3.13 SF
EAST
30x15
3.13 SF
1.26 Ft.
2.00 SF
11.19 SF
30x24
Size
Centroid
LEON
COUNTY
BUSINESS
Total Area
2.76 Ft.
21x15
2.19 SF
INTERSTATE
295
5.00 SF
Size
Area
24x24
3.03 SF
Total Area
2.19 SF
56
COUNTY
Size
Area
EAST
30x15
3.13 SF
BUSINESS
30x15
3.13 SF
Total Area
5.22 SF
21x15
Size
JCT
3.16 Ft.
21x15
Area
Total Area
30x30
75
4.76 SF
COUNTY
5.00 SF
6.95 SF
21x15
2.19 SF
Size
Area
TO
24x12
2.00 SF
EAST
24x12
2.00 SF
1.97 Ft.
JCT
2.19 SF
Area
Total Area
Total Area
Centroid
Centroid
1.57 Ft.
1.71 SF
75
Size
Area
21x15
2.19 SF
9.39 SF
INTERSTATE
COUNTY
JCT
Total Area
24x24
2.87 Ft.
3.20 SF
Size
Area
Total Area
Centroid
21x15
2.19 SF
6.18 SF
1.67 Ft.
30x24
3.99 SF
Size
Area
Total Area
Centroid
TO
24x12
2.00 SF
INTERSTATE
INTERSTATE
5.20 SF
1.67 Ft.
75
75
24x24
3.20 SF
Size
Area
Total Area
Centroid
24x12
2.00 SF
5.99 SF
1.60 Ft.
Total Area
Centroid
7.12 SF
1.81 Ft.
Total Area
Centroid
10.33 SF
2.27 Ft.
2.19 SF
Area
Size
Area
21x15
2.19 SF
Total Area
Centroid
TO
24x12
Total Area
Centroid
EAST
TO
EAST
24x12
INTERSTATE
10.18 SF
1.87 Ft.
295
30x24
INTERSTATE
295
295
2.00 SF
INTERSTATE
6.95 SF
OR
2.00 SF
2.84 Ft.
30x24
3.99 SF
Size
Area
30x15
3.13 SF
3.99 SF
EAST
LEON
56
1.75 Ft.
3.03 SF
COUNTY
30x30
5.39 SF
1.72 Ft.
Size
JCT
EAST
3.20 SF
LEON
56
24x24
OR
Centroid
21x15
5.22 SF
24x24
2.19 SF
Centroid
INTERSTATE
295
LEON
18x18
21x15
Total Area
2.19 SF
3.90 SF
56
Area
Centroid
LEON
56
30x24
Size
INTERSTATE
13.45 SF
301
2.19 SF
3.26 Ft.
2.19 SF
JCT
Size
21x15
12.44 SF
1.62 Ft.
Centroid
21x15
3.99 SF
Centroid
Centroid
LEON
21x15
30x24
Total Area
4.76 SF
TO
OR
INTERSTATE
COUNTY
11:
44:
16 AM
21x15
2.19 SF
INTERSTATE
295
295
EAST
TO
30x24
3.99 SF
Size
Area
30x15
3.13 SF
OR
INTERSTATE
75
75
36x36
7.20 SF
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
INTERSTATE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11860
SHEET
NO.
8 of 9
EAST
TO
Size
Area
30x15
3.13 SF
OR
INTERSTATE
Total Area
Centroid
12.12 SF
2.18 Ft.
Size
Area
30X30
4.69 SF
INTERSTATE
295
295
TO
EAST
45x36
24X12
Size
Area
24x12
2.00 SF
Total Area
Size
Centroid
30X30
INTERSTATE
75
75
Centroid
6.69 SF
1.61 Ft.
Area
Total Area
TO
3.20 SF
7.39 SF
6.25 SF
Centroid
9.25 SF
2.51 Ft.
2.19 SF
Size
Area
24x12
2.00 SF
Total Area
24X18
3.00 SF
Size
Area
1.77 Ft.
36X36
9.00 SF
OR
30X18
21x15
XXX
FEET
Total Area
Centroid
14.00 SF
3.06 Ft.
4.69 SF
2.30 Ft.
Centroid
OR
INTERSTATE
30X30
Total Area
Centroid
3.75 SF
X
MILES
EAST
Area
OR
X
MILES
2.00 SF
8.44 SF
24x24
Size
8.99 SF
OR
INTERSTATE
Total Area
Size
Area
36X36
6.75 SF
30X18
3.75 SF
Size
Area
30X30
6.25 SF
Total Area
Centroid
10.50 SF
2.06 Ft.
Total Area
Centroid
8.25 SF
2.28 Ft.
Total Area
Centroid
12.75 SF
2.84 Ft.
Total Area
Centroid
10.25 SF
2.74 Ft.
Total Area
Centroid
15.25 SF
3.29 Ft.
XXX
FEET
30X24
5.00 SF
INTERSTATE
295
295
30x24
3.99 SF
21x15
2.19 SF
Size
Area
30x15
3.13 SF
8.18 SF
Total Area
2.31 Ft.
Centroid
OR
AHEAD
EAST
TO
24X12
2.00 SF
Size
Area
36X36
9.00 SF
OR
INTERSTATE
INTERSTATE
295
295
30x24
3.99 SF
9.31 SF
2.55 Ft.
OR
21x15
2.19 SF
Size
Area
30x30
4.69 SF
AHEAD
Total Area
6.69 SF
200 FT
24x12
2.00 SF
Size
Area
Total Area
3.75 SF
Size
Area
30X30
6.25 SF
1.61 Ft.
OR
AHEAD
30X18
Centroid
Centroid
35
24X24
4.00 SF
Size
Area
36X36
9.00 SF
MPH
30x30
4.69 SF
8.44 SF
1.77 Ft.
OR
200 FT
11:
44:
17 AM
AHEAD
30x18
3.75 SF
Size
Area
36x36
6.75 SF
Total Area
Centroid
35
30X30
6.25 SF
MPH
10.50 SF
2.06 Ft.
12/3/2015
OR
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
AHEAD
200 FT
30x18
3.75 SF
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11860
SHEET
NO.
9 of 9
Sign (See Table)
GENERAL NOTES:
1. Refer to FDOT Design Standards Index No. 11860 for additional notes, assembly of base connection and material
specifications not given in this Index.
2. Sleeve Bolts: ASTM A-307,
1
2"
galvanized steel bolt (with lock nuts) or ASTM B-211 Alloy 2024-T4 or 6061-T6.
3. Place galvanized steel shims between the Sleeve and Post to obtain a tight fit between the Post and Sleeve.
Column
11
16"
4. Wind Beam and Vertical Brace: Aluminum Z 3" x 2
x 3.38. Install Vertical Brace on 7'-0" to 8'-0" signs only.
5. Provide 2- 0.0149" Thick (28 guage) and 2- 0.0329" Thick (21 guage) Brass Shims Per Post. Used brass shims to
7'
-0" M in.
9'
-0" M ax.
plumb the post.
Right Of Way
See DETAIL 'A'

(See Sheet 2)
COLUMN SELECTION AND FOOTING SIZE TABLE
Sidewalk
Sign Size
Column Size
Sleeve Size
U-bolt
Base Bolt
Torque
Base Plate
Footing
Height x Length
Diameter x Thickness
Diameter x Thickness
Diameter
Diameter x Length
lbs./in
Thickness
Depth
4'-0" x 5'-0"
4.5" x 0.337"
5.563" x 0.5"
4'-0" x 6'-0"
(Schedule 80)
(Schedule 120)
4'-0" x 7'-0"
5.563" x 0.375"
6.625" x 0.432"
4'-0" x 8'-0"
(Schedule 80)
(Schedule 80)
1
2"
5
8"
1
2"
x 3
270
+
-
1"
45
6'-0"
6'-6"
5
8"
3
4"
x 4"
445
+
-
1
8"
75
7'-0"
Foundation
(For Detail
See Sheet 2)
TYPICAL SECTION
5'-0"Min. to 8'-0" Max.
1'-0" Min.
Brace
0" M in.
2 Equal Spaces
Sign
B
Wind Beam
(See Note #4)
Sign Face
Sign Face
3
8"
Dia. Bolts (Typ.)
6"
1
n.
2" M i
1
2"
(Typ.)
10"
3
1 8"
4'
-0" (
M ax.
)
3"
3"
Column
SECTION A-A
Wind Beam
3
8"
(
Typ.
)
Neoprene Pad
Dia. Aluminum
Hex Head Bolts
Neoprene Pad
Stainless Steel U-bolt

Column
With Stainless Steel
With Nuts and
Nuts and Washer
Washer (Typ.)
And Wind Beam (Typ.)
SIGN DETAIL
REVISIO N
1
8"
Required Between Column
Vertical Brace (See Note #4)

12/3/2015
(
Typ.
)
3
8"
(
Typ.
)
3
8"
3
8"
8" x 3" x
1
4"
Sign Face
1
2"
U-bolt (See Table)
07/01/15
1
4"
6"
11:
44:
18 AM
10"
(Typ.)
1" (Min.) (Typ.)
Nylon Washers
(Min.)
1
4"
1
2"
With Nuts and
3
4"
(Min.)
1'-0" (Max.)
LAST
Wind Beam
1
2"
3
4"
(
Typ.
)
1
2"
Bolt Spa.
Dia. Aluminum
Button Head Bolts
Wind Beam
REVISION
3
8"
Vertical
Brace
Column
SECTION B-B
DESCRIPTION:
(See Table)
SECTION C-C
INDEX
FY 2016-17
SINGLE COLUMN CANTILEVER
DESIGN STANDARDS
GROUND MOUNTED SIGN
NO.
11861
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
3"
1
2"
Sleeve (See Table Sheet #1)
1
2"
Column
9
16"
Bolt Hole
2"
11
16"
1"
1"
Right Of Way
9"
Base Plate Thickness

(See Table Sheet #1)
ELEVATION
13
16"
Dia. Hole
9"
Base Plate
See DETAIL 'A'

4" M ax.
28 Ga. Thick Aluminum Strip

2 Required Per Base
1" (
Typ.
)
9"
9
16"
Finished Grade
Bolt Hole
Base Bolt
Radius +
1" (Typ.)
1
16"
15 (Typ.)
PLAN
Column
Shims As Reqd.
Sleeve Bolt
(See Note #2)
High Strength
Base Bolt (Typ.)
(See Table Sheet #1)
Shims As Reqd.
Bolt Keeper Plate (Typ.)
2'-0" Dia.
Min. Sleeve Size
BASE AND FOUNDATION DETAIL
STUB DETAIL
4" M ax. To
Stub
Stub Size Equals
(See Note #5)
High Strength Washer
Finished Grade
3" M in.
11
16"
Sleeve
Base Bolt
Base Plate
Stub
Base Plate (Typ.)
Stub
DETAIL 'A'
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
44:
18 AM
(See Note #3)
1
2"
Stub Length
Foundation Depth
(
See Table Sheet 1)
SLEEVE & BASE PLATE DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
SINGLE COLUMN CANTILEVER
DESIGN STANDARDS
GROUND MOUNTED SIGN
NO.
11861
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
GENERAL NOTES
1. ALUMINUM: Aluminum materials shall meet the requirements of Aluminum Association
Alloy 6061-T6 (ASTM B209, B221, B308 or B429), except as noted.
2. Sign panel, wind beam and columns shall be installed in accordance with Index 11860
and Section 700 of the Specifications.
3. Height and offset to sign column shall be in accordance with Index 17302.
4. When aluminum column (posts) are installed with a frangible pedestal pole bases, engage
all threads on the pedestal pole base and pipe unless the pipe is fully seated into base.
5. Aluminum poles and transformer bases shall meets the requirements of Section 646 of
the Specifications.
6. A concrete slab shall be installed around all flashing beacon assemblies installed on
slopes 6:1 or greater. Minimum dimension of slab shall be 4'-0" by 5'-0".
7. A concrete slab shall be installed around all pull boxes. Minimum dimension of slab shall
be 4'-0" by 4'-0". In urban areas where space is limited slab dimensions may be adjusted
as shown in the plans.
WARNING
WARNING
SIGN
SIGN
8. For beacon assemblies connected to conventional power, provide single pole non-fused
watertight breakaway electrical connectors in the frangible pedestal pole base.
9. Connection of controller cabinet and solar panel to the column shall be in accordance
with manufacturers recommendations.
10. Holes drilled in sign column for wire entry shall use a bushing or rubber grommet to
protect conductors.
11. Orient solar panel to face South for optimal exposure to sunlight.
#6 TW Green
Ground Wire
Breakaway
Electrical
Connectors
Strain
Relief
Fittings
3
4"
X 18"
Anchor Bolts
#6 TW Green
Ground Wire
Pull Box
Strain
Relief
Fittings
Circuit Conductors
In Schedule 40 PVC
Conduit. Circuit
Conductors And Conduit
Size As Shown In Plans.
(Typical)
12" Bed Of Pearock Or
Crushed Stone For Drainage.
To Power Service Point
U.L. approved Ground Rod

9:
34:
47 AM
5
8"
diameter 20' long copper
12/7/2015
clad with approved ground

connection (At all pull boxes)
SOLAR POWERED BEACON
CONVENTIONAL POWERED BEACON
POLE WIRING DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
12/15/14
REVISIO N
CONVENTIONAL POWERED BEACON
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ROADSIDE FLASHING BEACON ASSEMBLY
NO.
11862
SHEET
NO.
1of 7
7'-0"
1'
2'
2'
13"
11"
2'
5'
-0"
Solar Panel (Optional)
Pull Box
Column Foundation
Nominal 4" (Sch. 40) Aluminum
CONCRETE SLAB DETAIL
WARNING
SIGN
5'
-0"
Cabinet For Flasher

Controller, Solar
Control Unit And
Batteries.
3
4"
X 18" Anchor Bolts
Concrete Slab
Pull Box
NOTES
1. All flashing beacon assemblies with solar panels, controllers and
batteries weighing more than 170 lbs. shall utilize a separate pole
for mounting the solar panel, controller and batteries.
2. The auxillary pole shall be installed outside the recoverable terrain
distance and as near the right of way as possible.
The recoverable
11:
44:
20 AM
terrain distance shall comply with Design Standard Index 700.

3. Auxilliary pole shall be the same length as the column for the beacon
assembly.
3. Payment for the separate pole, foundation, conduit and wiring shall
be included in the cost of the electronic warning sign with flashing
beacon.
12/3/2015
SOLAR POWERED BEACON WITH AUXILLIARY POLE FOR
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SOLAR PANEL, CONTROLLER AND BATTERIES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11862
SHEET
NO.
2 of 7
STANDARD WARNING SIGN COLUMN SIZE

12" Yellow Flashing Beacon
Solar Battery Compartment

Wind Speed
Sign Height
Column Size
110
7'
4"
Footing Depth
130
7'
4.5"
4'
150
7'
5"
4.5'
110
8.5'
4.5"
4'
130
8.5'
5"
4.5'
150
8.5'
6"
5'
4'
Beacon Controller
Beacon Controller
Sign (48" x 48")
WARNING
Control Unit and Battery Com partm ent
9'
-6"
See Index 17302
M inim um Clearance for Controller, Beacon
12"
SIGN
See Table
NOTES
1. Details show a typical warning sign with two flashing beacon heads.
When only one beacon is required, install upper beacon.
2. Sign column slip base shall be in accordance with Design Standard
Index 11860.
11:
44:
21 AM
3. Beacon and beacon controllers shall be listed on Approved Products

List (APL).
12/3/2015
2' Dia.
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
LAST
REVISION
12/15/14
REVISIO N
SOLAR POWERED WARNING SIGN DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11862
SHEET
NO.
3 of 7
1"
12"
3"
12"
1"
4.
5"
Varies

and Controller
W11-2
(36" x 36") or
(30" x 30")
Back to Back Sign Shown
For Clarity Of Installation.
Refer To Plans For Where
Back To Back Is Required.
DETAIL A
Rectangular Rapid
Flashing Beacon
Detail A
W16-7P
R10-25
7'
-0"
Push Button
PUSH
BUTTON TO
TURN ON
WARNING
LIGHTS
Approach Traffic
3
4"
X 18" Anchor Bolts
NOTES
4'
-0"
1. Rectangular Rapid Flashing Beacon (RRFB) shall always be installed

in pairs, one on either side of approach traffic.
2. Controller shall be installed on the backside of post from approach
traffic.
3. All RRFB equipment and hardware shall be listed on the Approved
11:
44:
21 AM
Products List (APL).

4. The W11-2 sign shall be 30" X 30" for single lane facilities
and a 36" X 36" sign for multi-lane facilities.
12/3/2015
2' Dia.
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
RECTANGULAR RAPID FLASHING BEACON DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11862
SHEET
NO.
4 of 7
12"

(Optional)
12"
M in.

(Optional)
Beacon Controller
SCHOOL
SPEED
LIMIT
S5-1 (24" x 48")
20
WHEN
12"
FLASHING
7'
-0"
3
4"
X 18" Anchor Bolts
NOTES
4'
-0"
1. Details show a typical school zone sign with two flashing beacon
heads. When only one beacon is required, install upper beacon.
2. The pedestal base shall be required for both solar powered and
conventional powered applications.
Optional Conduit
3. Beacons and beacon controllers shall be on the Approved Products
11:
44:
22 AM
List (APL).
12/3/2015
2' Dia.
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SCHOOL REGULATORY SIGN DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11862
SHEET
NO.
5 of 7
12"

(When Required)
12"

(When Required)
Beacon Controller
(When Required)
SCHOOL
SPEED
LIMIT
S5-1 (24" x 48")
WHEN
FLASHING
Your Speed Display With Controller
Clearange Restrictions)
5'
-0"
(
See Note 4 For
YOUR
SPEED
1"
20
3
4"
X 18" Anchor Bolts
NOTES
4'
-0"
2. Speed feedback display, beacons, beacon controllers and installation
hardware shall be on the Approved Products List (APL).
3. Speed feedback display shall indicate 15" numeral heights for posted
11:
44:
24 AM
speeds less than 45 mph and 18" heights for posted speeds 45 mph
or greater.
4. Only speed display units weighing 62 lbs. or less may be mounted with
a 5'-0" clearance. Speed display units weighing more than 62 lbs. shall
2' Dia.
12/3/2015
be mounted with a 7'-0" clearance.
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SCHOOL REGULATORY WITH SPEED FEEDBACK DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11862
SHEET
NO.
6 of 7
12"

(When Required)
12"

(When Required)
Beacon Controller
(When Required)
SPEED
LIMIT
YOUR
SPEED
1"
XX
R2-1 (24" x 30")
Your Speed Display
5'
-0"
3
4"
X 18" Anchor Bolts
NOTES
4'
-0"
2. Speed feedback display, beacons, beacon controllers and installation
hardware shall be on the Approved Products List (APL).
3. Speed feedback display shall indicate 15" numeral heights for posted
11:
44:
25 AM
speeds less than 45 mph and 18" heights for posted speeds 45 mph
or greater.
4. Only speed display units weighing 62 lbs. or less may be mounted with
a 5'-0" clearance. Speed display units weighing more than 62 lbs. shall
2' Dia.
12/3/2015
be mounted with a 7'-0" clearance.
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
REGULATORY SIGN WITH SPEED FEEDBACK DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11862
SHEET
NO.
7 of 7
Sign Or Sign Cluster
NOTES:
1. Work with Index 11860.
2. Shop Drawings: Not required.
Dim ension C
3. Materials:
A. Steel Plate: ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36

B. Steel Pipe (Support Post): ASTM A501 Schedule 40
C. Galvanized U-Bolts, Nuts and Plate Washer
a. U-Bolts: ASTM A449
b. Hex Nuts: ASTM A 536 Lock Nuts
Sign Centroid
0" (Min.)
c. Plate Washer: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36 or 50

D. Galvanized Anchor bolts, Nuts and Washers:
a. Anchor Rod: ASTM F1554 Grade 55 fully threaded (for Adhesive Anchors)
b. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 55 Grade A Hex
Bottom Of Sign
Or Sign Cluster
c. Nuts: ASTM A563 Heavy Hex Locking

d. Washers: ASTM F436
E. Adhesive Anchor Bonding Material: Specification Section 931 Type HV Adhesive.
F. Weld Material: E70XX
G. Snap-In Post Cap: UV and weather-resistant glass-filled polyester cap
4. Coating:
A. U-Bolts, Threaded Rods, Nuts and Washers: ASTM F2329

B. Other Steel: ASTM A123
5. Fabrication:
A. Weld: Specification Section 460-6.4
SIGN LIMITATIONS TABLE
B. Hot dip galvanize after fabrication
A. Locate Sign Support a minimum of 5 feet from an open joint or
MAX. SIGN AREA
MAX. SIGN CENTROID HEIGHT
(MPH)
(SF)
(DIM. A + DIM. C)
110
30
9'-10"
130
25
9'-7"
150
20
9'-7"
transition (sign stationing may be adjusted to accommodate this

requirement.
B. Base plate must be flush with back of Traffic Railing
C. Anchors in Traffic Railings:
a. Install Adhesive Anchors in accordance with Specification
Dimension A = Distance from centerline of the Support Post to the bottom
Sign Post (5" NPS

Schedule 40 Aluminum)
Dim ension A
6. Construction:
MAX. WIND SPEED
of the sign or sign cluster.
section 416 except perform field test on one anchor per sign
support location.
Dimension C = Vertical distance from the bottom of the sign or sign cluster
to the Centroid of the sign or sign cluster.
b. Use templates and tie anchors as necessary to maintain correct

placement of C-I-P Embedded Anchors
c. Do not drill into existing conduit
D. Temporary Signs on Permanent Traffic Railings: Same as
Permanent except Field testing of anchors is not required
Traffic Railing
E. Temporary Signs on Temporary Railings/Barriers:

a. Install Sign Supports at the midpoint along the length of a single segment
b. Avoid drilling through existing reinforcement; use of metal detector not
required
c. Field testing of anchors is not required
7. Removal of Temporary Signs on Permanent Traffic Railings:

Base Plate
A. Cut anchor rods flush with the top of the railing
End Plate
B. Coat anchors with Type F-1 epoxy to prevent corrosion

a. Extend coating 2 inches beyond edge of cut anchor rods
Support Post
b. Epoxy coating 1/16 thick minimum

8. Payment:
Include the cost of all materials and labor in the cost of the single
post sign assembly.
11:
44:
25 AM
Support Post (5" NPS

Schedule 40 Steel Pipe)
Bridge Deck
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
SIGN SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SINGLE POST BRIDGE MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORT
NO.
11870
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
1
2"
1'-8
Traffic Railing
(See Note #3)
Bridge Deck
(See Note #4)
3
4"
Adhesive Bonded
Anchor Shown (8" Min.

Embedment) (Typ.)
(See Notes #1 or #2)
Sign Post
3
4"
Adhesive Bonded Anchors

8"
With Heavy Hex Head Bolts

And Washers (See Note #1)
Back Face
Of Railing
(Min.)
Support Post
Support Post
1
2"
U-Bolt
Varies (5" Min., 1'-0"

Max.) (See Note #1)
Plate Washer
Coping Line
5" NPS Schedule 40 Aluminum
Base Plate
1
1
3 2"
2"
Traffic Railing
(See Note #3)
Sign Post
1
2"
End Plate
Weep Hole
Base Plate
1
1
1
2"x2 2"x 4"
L 2
Bridge Deck
(See Note #4)
Support Post
Traffic Railing
ADHESIVE BOND
Plate Washer
1
2"
Sign Suppor Bracket
Weep Hole
End Plate
1
2"
1'-8
Traffic Railing
(See Note #3)
Sign Post
Sign Post
1
1
1
2"x2 2"x 4"
L 2
Bridge Deck
1
2"
U-Bolt With Locking
Hex Nuts & Plate Washer
Sign Post
PLAN
3
4"
Through Bolt With

8"
Heavy Hex Head Nuts And

Washers (See Note #1)
Support Post
1
2"
U-Bolt
Support Post
Varies (5" Min., 1'-0"

Max.) (See Note #1)
Sign Post
(Min.)
Base Plate
1
1
3 2"
2"
Plate Washer
End Plate
Traffic Railing
(See Note #3)
1
1
1
2"x2 2"x 4"
L 2
NOTES:
Bridge Deck
(See Note #4)
1. Existing Traffic Railings:
A. Locate existing conduit prior to drilling and adjust placement
THROUGH BOLTING
of base plate as necessary to avoid damaging existing conduit.

Base plate must be flush with back of traffic railing.
Maintain
a minimum cover 2" from face of traffic railing to tip of
TYPICAL SECTION - EXISTING RAILING
Adhesive Anchor.
B. For concrete parapets less than 10" thick, through bolt

3
4"
Heavy Hex Head Bolts with Nuts and Washers in
Support Post
1
2"
1'-8
Base Plate
Traffic Railing
(See Note #3)
lieu of Adhesive Bonded Anchors. Bolt heads shall not

1
2"
protrude more than 1
beyond traffic face of railing.
1
2"
End Plate
Sign Post
U-Bolt With
Locking Hex Nuts

& Plate Washer
C. For through bolting, cut front face of the traffic railing so that
washer is flush with the concrete.
2"
(Min.)
Bolt coupler threads free of concrete.
Support Post
Bridge Deck
(See Note #4)
8"
3. 32" F-Shape Traffice Railing shown, other Traffic Ralings
Base Plate
Support Post
1
2"
U-Bolt
Plate Washer
4. Bridge Deck shown, Approach Slab and Retaining Wall are
End Plate
similar.
1
1
1
2"x2 2"x 4"
L 2
ELEVATION
12/3/2015
11:
44:
26 AM
and Parapets are similar.
8"
1
1
3 2"
2"
1
1
1
2"x2 2"x 4"
L 2
Sign Post
Hex Head Bolts With
A. Optional Couplers are shown for slipforming; keep Anchor
3
4"
Coupler Nuts Shown (Hex

Head Bolts Without Coupler
Nuts Similar) (See Note #2)
2. New Traffic Railings:
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
SIGN SUPPORT BRACKET
Bridge Deck
(See Note #4)
TYPICAL SECTION - NEW CONSTRUCTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11870
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
1
2"
1'-8
3
4"
3
4"
1'-7"
Support Post (5" NPS

Schedule 40 Steel Pipe)
Base Plate
End Plate
1
2"
Hole (Typ.)
5" NPS Schedule 40 Aluminum
Traffic Railing
Base Plate
1
2"
Sign Support
Weldment Detail
Weep Holes
1" Hole (Typ.)
End Plate and

U-Bolt Plate Washer
1
1
1
2"x2 2"x 4"
L 2
Bridge Deck

SIGN SUPPORT WELDMENT DETAIL
9"
1
2"
1
10"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
3
4"
3
4"
1
2"
1
2"
Hole
1
1
2"
Hole
Hole
1
2"
1"
9
16"
Hole (Typ.)
1" Hole
(Typ.)
1
2"
2"
1
4"
1"
1
2"
8"
1
6 16"
1" Hole
(Typ.)
Hole
1
2"
1
2"
10"
1'
-0"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
3"
1
2"
1
2"
3"
11:
44:
27 AM
1" Hole (Typ.)
9
16"
FRONT
Hole (Typ.)
SIDE
FRONT
BASE PLATE
SIDE
Slotted
Hole (Typ.)
FRONT
SIDE
END PLATE
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
U-BOLT PLATE WASHER
9
16"x1"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
11870
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Snap-In Post Cap
NOTES:
Snap-In Post Cap
2'-0"
1. Work with Index 11860.

2. Shop Drawings: Not required.
3. Materials:
Sign Panel H eight
A. Steel Plate: ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36

B. Steel Pipe (Support Post): ASTM A501 Schedule 40
Sign Panel (See
Index 11860)
C. Galvanized U-Bolts, Nuts and Plate Washer

a. U-Bolts: ASTM A449
b. Hex Nuts: ASTM A 536 Lock Nuts
c. Plate Washer: ASTM A 36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36 or 50
D. Galvanized Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
a. Anchor Rod: ASTM F1554 Grade 55 fully threaded (for Adhesive Anchors)
b. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 55 Grade A Hex
c. Nuts: ASTM A563 Heavy Hex Locking
Sign Panel (See

Index 11860)
d. Washers: ASTM F436

E. Adhesive Anchor Bonding Material: Specification Section 931 Type HV Adhesive
F. Weld Material: E70XX
G. Snap-In Post Cap: UV and weather-resistant glass-filled polyester cap
Post Length
4. Coating:
A. U-Bolts, Threaded Rods, Nuts and Washers: ASTM F2329
B. Other Steel: ASTM A123
C. Anchors in Traffic Railings:

a. Install Adhesive Anchors in accordance with Specification section 416 except
perform field test on one anchor per sign support location
b. Use template and tie anchors as necessary to maintain correct placement of C-I-P
Embedded Anchors
c. Do not drill into existing reinforcing
testing of anchors is not required
E. Temporary Signs on Temporary Railings/Barriers:
a. Install Sign Supports at the midpoint along the length of a single segment
b. Avoid drilling through existing reinforcement; use of metal detector not required.
c. Field testing of anchors is not required
Saw Cut
1'
-0"
1
4"
A. Cut anchor rods flush with the top of the railing
Groove In
B. Coat anchors with Type F-1 epoxy to prevent corrosion
Barrier
a. Extend coating 2 inches beyond edge of cut anchor rods

b. Epoxy coating 1/16thick minimum
Anchor
7. Removal of Temporary Signs on Permanent Traffic Railings:
Em bedm ent
1" (
M ax.
)
D. Temporary Signs on Permanent Traffic Railings, Same as Permanent except field
1
4"
Saw Cut
Groove In
Barrier
Em bedm ent
stationing may be adjusted to accommodate this requirement

B. Base plate must be flush with top of Railing
1'
-0"
A. Locate Sign Support a minimum of 5 feet from an open joint or transition (sign
Steel Sign Post &

Base Plate Weldment
Anchor
6. Construction:
7'
-0" (
M easured at edge of adjacent Travel W ay)
Steel Sign Post &

Base Plate Weldment
B. Hot dip galvanize after fabrication
1" (
M ax.
)
A. Weld: Specification Section 460-6.4
Edge Of Travel W ay
5. Fabrication:
8. Payment:
Include the cost of all materials and labor in the cost of the single post sign assembly.
Concrete Barrier
Concrete Barrier
TABLE 1 - SIGN PANEL AND POST SIZING

Wind Speed (MPH)
70 - All Temporary Signs
Max. Sign Area (SF)
Post (NPS)
24
3.0"
< 13.5
3.0"
13.5 < Sign < 20
3.5"
< 13.5
3.5"
13.5 < Sign < 20
4.0"
11:
44:
28 AM
110 & 130
150
PARALLEL TO
PERPENDICULAR TO
DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC
DIRECTION OF TRAFFIC
(Index 410 Standard "Full Wall" Median Barrier shown; others similar)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
ELEVATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
SINGLE POST MEDIAN BARRIER
DESIGN STANDARDS
MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORT
NO.
11871
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
1'-9"
NOTES:
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1" Bevel Each
1. Place anchor rods in a staggered or linear pattern as necessary to avoid reinforcing.
End Of Plate
1
8"
2. Use a staggered pattern for all temporary barriers.
Anchor
1
2"
Vent Hole
1
2"
1
2"
7"
Rod Hole (Typ.)
TABLE 2 - BASE PLATE TYPE AND ANCHOR ROD SIZING

Index No.
PLAN
1"
45 Bevel (Typ.)
410
Cantilever or L-Wall
When Clear Space between Dual Bridge

Traffic Railing is 4'-0"
All Applications
Temporary Signs
421
All listed above
Plus 414 & 415
BASE PLATE TYPE A
Base Plate Type
Full Wall
420 & 425
ELEVATION
Type/Application
410
Anchor Rod
1"
3
4"
(Linear Anchor Rod Pattern)
1'-9"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1" Bevel Each

End Of Plate
1
8"
Anchor
Base Plate (See Table 2)
Rod Hole (Typ.)

Vent Hole
1
8"
CJP
Anchor
W /2
1
2"
Rod Hole (Typ.)
W /2
45 Bevel (Typ.)
PLAN
45 Bevel (Typ.)
Sign Post
(See Table 1)
Vent Hole
1"
1
2"
L/2
L/2
ELEVATION
L
BASE PLATE TYPE B

(Staggered Anchor Rod Pattern)
PLAN
1'-7"
3"
7
8"
7
8"
x 2
4"
4"
3"
1
2"
1" Bevel Each

End Of Plate
Slotted
1
2"
Anchor Rod Hole (Typ.)
Vent Hole
11:
44:
29 AM
CJP
Base Plate (See Table 2)
45 Bevel (Typ.)
PLAN
1"
45 Bevel (Typ.)
1
2"
0
9
1
2"
5"
Sign Post (See Table 1)
L/2
L/2
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
BASE PLATE TYPE C
SIGN SUPPORT WELDMENT DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
(Staggered Anchor Rod Pattern shown)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
SINGLE POST MEDIAN BARRIER
DESIGN STANDARDS
MOUNTED SIGN SUPPORT
NO.
11871
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Bolt Sign to Zee Using
1
4"
Aluminum Flat Head Bolts, Nuts and

Lock Washers (Typ.) 12" Max Spacing
"L"
58 % "L"
1
Sign ( 8" Thick Min.)

6"
2'
-6"
1'-6"
Zee 1.75 x 1 .75 x 1.08
6"
Zee 3 x 2.69 x 2.33
30
5"
ELEVATION
Alum inum H ex H ead
Mounting of Exit Numbering Panels To Highway Signs
5
8"
side for right exit and to the left for left exit.
Bolts W ith Nuts and Lockwashers.
Exit numbering panel shall be located to the right
W ith
NOTE:
Bolt Vertical H anger To W ind Beam s
GENERAL NOTES
MATERIALS:
All aluminum materials shall meet the requirements of the Aluminum Association Alloy 6061-T6 and
also the following ASTM specifications for the following: Sheets and plates B209; extruded shapes
B221 and standard structural shapes B308.
SECTION AA
ALUMINUM BOLTS, NUTS & LOCK WASHERS:

Aluminum bolts shall meet the requirements of the Aluminum Association Alloy 2024-T4 (ASTM F468).
The bolts shall have an anodic coating of at least .0002" thick and be chromate sealed. Lockwashers
shall meet the requirement of Aluminum Association Alloy 7075-T6 (ASTM B221). Nuts shall meet the
requirement of Aluminum Association Alloy 6262-T9 (ASTM F467) or 6061-T6.
SIGN FACE:
All sign face corners shall be rounded. See sign layout sheet for dimension "L" and sign face
LAST
REVISION
10/09/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
44:
31 AM
details. For mounting details refer to Index No. 11300.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MOUNTING EXIT NUMBER PANELS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TO HIGHWAY SIGNS
NO.
13417
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Bolt Sign to Zee Using
1
4"
Aluminum Flat Head Bolts, Nuts and

Lock Washers (Typ.) 12" Max Spacing
"L"
58 % "L"
1
Sign ( 8" Thick Min.)

6"
2'
-6"
1'-6"
Zee 1.75 x 1 .75 x 1.08
6"
Zee 3 x 2.69 x 2.33
30
5"
ELEVATION
Alum inum H ex H ead
Mounting of Exit Numbering Panels To Highway Signs
5
8"
side for right exit and to the left for left exit.
Bolts W ith Nuts and Lockwashers.
Exit numbering panel shall be located to the right
W ith
NOTE:
Bolt Vertical H anger To W ind Beam s
GENERAL NOTES
MATERIALS:
All aluminum materials shall meet the requirements of the Aluminum Association Alloy 6061-T6 and
also the following ASTM specifications for the following: Sheets and plates B209; extruded shapes
B221 and standard structural shapes B308.
SECTION AA
ALUMINUM BOLTS, NUTS & LOCK WASHERS:

Aluminum bolts shall meet the requirements of the Aluminum Association Alloy 2024-T4 (ASTM F468).
The bolts shall have an anodic coating of at least .0002" thick and be chromate sealed. Lockwashers
shall meet the requirement of Aluminum Association Alloy 7075-T6 (ASTM B221). Nuts shall meet the
requirement of Aluminum Association Alloy 6262-T9 (ASTM F467) or 6061-T6.
SIGN FACE:
All sign face corners shall be rounded. See sign layout sheet for dimension "L" and sign face
LAST
REVISION
10/09/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
44:
31 AM
details. For mounting details refer to Index No. 11300.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
MOUNTING EXIT NUMBER PANELS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TO HIGHWAY SIGNS
NO.
13417
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
CASE I
CASE II
CASE III
For Use On Freeway And
For Use In All Rural Roads And
For Use On All Roads With
Expressway Systems For Signs On Mainline.
On Freeway And Expressway Ramps.
Signs Mounted Behind Sidewalk.
GENERAL NOTES:
1. The typical sections shown hereon serve as a guide for
locating the traffic signs required under various roadside
conditions. For size and details of sign construction and
footing, refer to the appropriate standard index drawing
for roadside sign.
2. It shall be the CONTRACTORS responsibility to verify the
length of sign supports in the field prior to fabrication.
2'
Travel Way
Std.
Sidewalk
degrees away from the traffic flow (see illustration).
8'M ax.
Std.
7'M in.
40'
8'M ax.
Travel Way
7'M in. *
Mainline
8' M ax.
7' M in.
3. Ground signs shall be installed at an angle of 1 to 4

2' Min.
12' Min.
Shoulder mounted signs shall be rotated counterclockwise

and median mounted signs rotated clockwise.
Signs on curves shall be mounted as noted above from
the perpendicular to the motorist line of sight.
Curb & Gutter

Travel Way
Paved Shoulder
R/W
e
c
n Fa
g
Si
For Median Installation:
14' Horizontal Clearance Standard On All Freeway And
If Median Width Does Not Allow Std. Offset
Expressway Ramps.
Angle From Center

Of Roadway
From Both Roadways, Center Sign In Median.

* 4' For Wrong Way Signs
On Interstate Exit Ramps
CASE IV (MERGE SIGN)
CASE V
CASE VI
For Use On All Rural, Freeway And Expressway Systems.
For Use In Business Or Residential Areas Only.
For Use On All Roadways
visibility in business or residential sections with no curb
With Signs Behind Guardrail.
and speeds of 30 MPH or less.
4. The setback for stop and yield signs may be reduced to

3' minimum from the driving lane if required for
5. The mounting heights are measured from the bottom of

the sign panel to a horizontal line extended from the edge
of the driving lane. If the standard heights cannot be met,
14' Min.
the minimum heights are as follows:
Ramp
Travel Way
Travel Way
Guardrail
8'M ax.
8'M ax.
2'
Min.
7'M in.
8'M ax.
7'M in.
2' Min.
7'M in.
14' Min.
Expressway & Freeway Systems
7'
Other Roadway Systems

Rural
5'
Urban (including residential with

parking and /or pedestrian activity)
7'
If a secondary sign is mounted below the major sign, the

major sign shall be at least 8' and the secondary sign
at least 5' for expressway & freeway systems and for
other systems the height to the secondary sign shall be
at least 5' for rural and 7' for urban sections.
(Mainline)
Travel
6. Sign supports should never be placed in the bottom of
Way
ditches where erosion might affect the proper operation

of the breakaway feature.
7. Sign supports shall not reduce the accessible
route /continuous passage to less than 4' min. clear
MILE
CASE VII (REST AREA & EXIT GORE SIGNS)
CASE VIII
Sign On Island or Curbed Median
For Use On All Freeway And Expressway Systems
width as required by the Americans with Disabilities

Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines.
CASE IX (MILE POST MARKER)

4
For More Information
Refer To Section 2H
Of The Manual On
Uniform Traffic
Control Devices
16'
14' Min.
Ramp
or Island
Travel Way
4'
Curbed Median
4'M in.
6' Min.
8'M ax.
7'M in.
8'M ax.
7'M in.
11:
44:
32 AM
2'*
Marker
Travel Way
12/3/2015
* For Separators < 6', Center The Sign Within The Separator.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
(Mainline) Travel Way
Center Sign Column On Island
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TYPICAL SECTIONS FOR PLACEMENT
DESIGN STANDARDS
OF SINGLE & MULTI-COLUMN SIGNS
NO.
17302
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
D8-3
D8-2
FTP-83-08
D8-1
FTP-1-06
W4-1
1500' Min.
1890'
1890'
Note:
Signs D8-3 to be placed at or near
W4-1
1890'
1890'
the theoretical gore.
1500' Min.
4 - LANE DIVIDED INSTALLATION
D8-3
FTP-1-06
D8-2
FTP-83-08
D8-3
R1-2
D8-1
1640'
1000'
700'
1640'
R1-1
2640'
D8-1
FTP-2-06
FTP-3-06
300'
2640'
D8
2
FTP1
0
6
2 - LANE INSTALLATION
D8
1
D8-3
FTP-2-06
D8-1
FTP-3-06
D8-3
1
5
0
0
'Mi
n
.
W4-1
1
8
9
0
'
1
8
9
0
'
2500'
1500'
W4-1
D8-3
FTP-1-06
D8-1
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
44:
35 AM
1260'
MEDIAN INSTALLATION
WEIGH STATION SIGNING
D8-2
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TYPICAL SIGNING FOR TRUCK WEIGH
DESIGN STANDARDS
& INSPECTION STATIONS
NO.
17328
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
D8-3
FTP-5-06
FTP-6A-06
FTP-7A-06
FTP-9A-06
W4-1
1500' Min.
1890'
1890'
Note:
W4-1
1890'
1890'
Signs FTP-9B-06 to be placed at or near
1500' Min.
the theoretical gore.
4 - LANE DIVIDED INSTALLATION
FTP-6A-06
FTP-9A-06
FTP-7A-06
D8-3
R1-2
FTP-5-06
1640'
1000'
700'
1640'
R1-1
2640'
FTP-5-06
FTP-6A-06
FTP-7A-06
FTP-9A-06
300'
2640'
FTP7
B0
6
2 - LANE INSTALLATION
FTP6
B0
6
FTP5
0
6
FTP-9B-06
FTP-6B-06
FTP-5-06
FTP-7B-06
1
5
0
0
'
FTP-9B-06
W4-1
Mi
n
1
8
9
0
'
1
8
9
0
'
W4-1
2500'
1500'
11:
44:
35 AM
1260'
MEDIAN INSTALLATION
12/3/2015
FTP-7B-06
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
FTP-5-06
FTP-9B-06
FTP-6B-06
INSPECTION STATION SIGNING
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TYPICAL SIGNING FOR TRUCK WEIGH
DESIGN STANDARDS
& INSPECTION STATIONS
NO.
17328
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Approach
Speed (MPH)
Distance
A (FT.)
Single-Lane
Approach
Two-Lane
200
Approach
2'
325
8'
46 To 55
8'
8'
AHEAD
W16-9P
9'-8"
S1-1
8'
300
9'-8"
AHEAD
2'
9'-8"
W16-9P
2'
36 To 45
8'
250
2'
Line
26 To 35
8'
Edge
8'
25 or Less
S1-1
9'-8"
4"
Multi-Lane
Approch
(Three or More)
Single-Lane Pavement Marking
2'
33 s.f.
Note:
8'
R1-1
9'-8"
9'-8"
9'-8"
2'
W16-7
STOP
S1-1
8'
8'
Pavement Marking Should Not Extend Into Opposing Lane.
PAVEMENT MARKINGS
R1-1
STOP
S1-1
"No Right Turn On Red" Signs may be
W16-7
Notes:
erected as deemed necessary by the

local traffic engineers.
Signs shall be erected in accordance with index No. 17302.

A
When computing pavement messages quantities do not include transverse lines.
School crosswalk widths at intersections shall be 6' minimum 10' standard without
public sidewalk curb ramps 10' minimum with public sidewalk curb ramps. The
width is measured from inside of line to inside of line,
For additional marking information, see Index 17346, Sheet 2.
S1-1
S1-1
11:
44:
36 AM
AHEAD
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES FOR A SCHOOL

CROSSWALK AT A SIGNALIZED INTERSECTION
12/3/2015
1.
W16-9P
AHEAD
2.
W16-9P
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES FOR A SCHOOL

CROSSWALK AT A STOP CONTROLLED INTERSECTION
Note:
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
Special speed restrictions are not normally applicable to these two cases.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SCHOOL SIGNS & MARKINGS
NO.
17344
SHEET
NO.
1of 6
3. TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES FOR REDUCED SPEED

ZONE AT A SCHOOL CROSSWALK 2 LANES-2 WAY
TRAFFIC (40 MPH OR LESS) (MIDBLOCK OR ON THRU
STREET AT AN INTERSECTION)
5. TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES FOR A SCHOOL CROSSWALK

WITHOUT A SPEED REDUCTION (2 LANE-2 WAY TRAFFIC)
4. TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES FOR REDUCED SPEED ZONE

AT A SCHOOL CROSSWALK 2 LANES-2 WAY TRAFFIC
(45 MPH OR GREATER) (MIDBLOCK OR ON THRU STREET
AT AN INTERSECTION)
AHEAD
AHEAD
W16-9P
W16-9P
S1-1
W16-9P
AHEAD
S1-1
S4-5
00
LIMIT
S1-1
SPEED
SCHOOL
S5-1
FLASHING
100'
WHEN
S5-1
FTP-34-06
FLASHING
LIMIT
FTP-34-06
SCHOOL
0:00 - 0:00
DAYS
SCHOOL
SCHOOL
0:00 - 0:00
SCHOOL
DAYS
SCHOOL
6" Yellow Skip
If No Passing Zone)
ZONE
SPEED
0:00 - 0:00
0:00 - 0:00
LIMIT
SPEED
SCHOOL
100'
OR
00
OR
ZONE
(Or 6" Dbl Yellow
SCHOOL
SPEED
LIMIT
SCHOOL
FTP-35-06
00
SPEED
LIMIT
FTP-30-06
6" Yellow Skip
END
WHEN
END
00
FTP-35-06
Traffic Flow
00
FTP-30-06
FTP-38-06
12" White
Traffic Flow
100'
Crosswalk
Traffic Flow
Traffic Flow
Special Emphasis
S1-1
W16-7
24" White
24" White
S1-1
DOUBLED
100'
If No Passing Zone)
FTP-38-06
Traffic Flow
(Or 6" Dbl. Yellow
100'
12"White
DOUBLED
FINES
FINES
10'
SPEEDING
SPEEDING
S1-1
10'
10'
W16-7
W16-7
W16-7
12"
24"
SPEEDING
100'
FINES
White
White
S1-1
W16-7
DOUBLED
200'
Crosswalk
FINES
100'
FTP-38-06
SCHOOL
SCHOOL
S1-1
FTP-34-06
FTP-34-06
LIMIT
00
DAYS
0:00 - 0:00
00
OR
LIMIT
00
FTP-35-06
SCHOOL
DAYS
0:00 - 0:00
S1-1
W16-7
0:00 - 0:00
FTP-30-06
WHEN
END
END
00
OR
SCHOOL
ZONE
SPEED
SPEED
LIMIT
SCHOOL
ZONE
SCHOOL
SPEED
SPEED
LIMIT
Y
SCHOOL
Crosswalk
DOUBLED
SCHOOL
Special Emphasis
Traffic Flow
FTP-38-06
Special Emphasis
SPEEDING
FLASHING
0:00 - 0:00
S5-1
100'
FTP-35-06
FTP-30-06
WHEN
FLASHING
SCHOOL
S5-1
SPEED
LIMIT
11:
44:
37 AM
00
APPROACH
DISTANCE IN FEET
SPEED MPH
25 or Less
200'
100' Min.
250'
100' Min.
36 To 45
300'
100'
46 To 55
325'
125'
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
S1-1
26 To 35
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
AHEAD
SCHOOL CROSSWALK
Midblock crosswalks shall be a minimum of 10'.
See Index No. 17346.
S4-5
S1-1
S1-1
AHEAD
W16-9P
W16-9P
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
AHEAD
NO.
17344
W16-9P
SHEET
NO.
2 of 6
8. TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES FOR SIGNALIZED

MIDBLOCK SCHOOL CROSSWALK
7. TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES FOR A REDUCED SPEED ZONE

AT A SCHOOL CROSSWALK WITH OVERHEAD OR GROUND
MOUNTED FLASHING BEACON SPEED LIMIT SIGNS (4 LANES
DIVIDED-2 WAY TRAFFIC)
6. TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES FOR A REDUCED SPEED

ZONE AT A SCHOOL CROSSWALK WITH OVERHEAD
FLASHING BEACON SPEED LIMIT SIGNS (4 LANES
UNDIVIDED-2 WAY TRAFFIC) (MIDBLOCK OR ON THRU
STREET AT AN INTERSECTION)
AHEAD
AHEAD
W16-9P
AHEAD
W16-9P
FTP-32-06
S1-1
W16-9P
END
S1-1
END
SCHOOL
SCHOOL
S1-1
ZONE
S5-1
ZONE
FLASHING
WHEN
FTP-34-06
00
WHEN
SCHOOL
MPH
FLASHING
00
SPEED
LIMIT
FLASHING
00
WHEN
B
Traffic Flow
FTP-31-06
MPH
SCHOOL
ZONE
OR
SCHOOL
ZONE
FTP-38-06
S1-1
100'
Traffic Flow
FTP-31-06
DOUBLED
FINES
Special Emphasis
W16-7
12"
W16-7
White
100'
12"
S1-1
Special Emphasis
10'
10'
White
12" White
40'
6" W hite Skip
S1-1
W16-7
SPEEDING
6" W hite Skip
FTP-38-06
DOUBLED
100'
6" Dbl. Yellow
FINES
SPEEDING
100'
40'
10'
W16-7
S1-1
24"
White
24"
24"
100'
White
Traffic Flow
S1-1
SPEEDING
100'
FINES
DOUBLED
Special Emphasis
White
SPEEDING
S1-1
FINES
100'
DOUBLED
W16-7
FTP-38-06
FTP-38-06
Y
100'
SCHOOL ZONE
00
WHEN
FTP-32-06
SCHOOL ZONE
SPEED
LIMIT
FLASHING
00
FTP-31-06
MPH
FLASHING
SCHOOL
ZONE
END
WHEN
SCHOOL
OR
ZONE
SCHOOL
00
MPH
Traffic Flow
W16-7
FTP-31-06
WHEN
FLASHING
END
S5-1
FTP-34-06
S1-1
S1-1
DISTANCE IN FEET
SPEED MPH
A
25 or Less
200'
100' Min.
26 To 35
250'
100' Min.
36 To 45
300'
100'
46 To 55
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
325'
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
44:
38 AM
S1-1
APPROACH
AHEAD
W16-9P
AHEAD
W16-9P
AHEAD
W16-9P
* NOTE- CONDITION 7:
SCHOOL CROSSWALK
Where engineering judgement determines the overhead structure is not
Midblock crosswalk shall be a minimum of 10'.
suitable or cannot be installed due to site restrictions, S5-1 with flashing
See Index No. 17346.
beacons on each side of the road may be substituted for the overhead structure.
125'
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17344
SHEET
NO.
3 of 6
9.TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES AT SCHOOL ENTRANCES

WITH LOW VOLUMES OF WALKING STUDENTS
10. TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES FOR A TYPICAL

SCHOOL ZONE FRONTING THE SCHOOL PROPERTY
11. SCHOOL BUS STOP
S1-1
S5-1
FLASHING
24"X24"
END
WHEN
FTP-35-06
ZONE
00
SPEED
LIMIT
LIMIT
FTP-30-06
SCHOOL
00
W13-1
FTP-34-06
0:00 - 0:00
M.P.H.
00
0:00 - 0:00
DAYS
SPEED
OR
SCHOOL BUS STOP
SCHOOL
SCHOOL
SCHOOL
ENTRANCE
SCHOOL
or unprotected activity
as defined by local
school board through
the local traffic
engineers.
FINES
Note:
DOUBLED
Roll out school signs
FTP-38-06
shall not be utilized

to control traffic
where a school bus, when stopped to pick up or discharge passengers,

is not visible for a distance of 500' in advance. It shall have a min.
size of 30"x 30". It is not intended that these signs be used
500'
SPEEDING
The school bus stop ahead sign is to be used in advance of locations
Curve
Crest Of Vertical
Note:
VARIES
FTP-33-06
750' for Rural
30"X30"
100'
School zone limits
whenever a school bus stops to pick up or discharge passengers. These

signs are intended for use only where terrain and roadway features
limit the approach sight distance and where there is no opportunity
to relocate the stop to another location with adeguate visibility.
through an established
school zone.
100'
HORIZONTAL CURVE
ZONE
SCHOOL
750' for Rural
END
FTP-33-06
30"X30"
750'
SCHOOL
ENTRANCE
For Rural
FTP-34-06
Y
SCHOOL
SCHOOL
SPEED
SPEED
LIMIT
OR
00
00
00
LIMIT
FTP-35-06
SCHOOL
BUS STOP
AHEAD
SCHOOL
0'
50
SCHOO
L BUS
STOP
DAYS
0:00 - 0:00
0:00 - 0:00
S3-1
FTP-30-06
VERTICAL CURVE
WHEN
FLASHING
M.P.H.
S5-1
W13-1
Limit Sign when a reduced

speed limit has been approved.
24"X24"
11:
44:
40 AM
Location of School Speed
S1-1
These signs are intended for use only at those few locations
where the school entrance is not evident to the motorist, and
must be approved in advance by the responsible traffic
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
engineering authority.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17344
SHEET
NO.
4 of 6
3
8"
6"
-BOLT
3"
6"
Catenary Wire
Lock Nut
Signal Head
2"
Alum. Zee - 3" X 2.33"
1
4"
Alum. Zee - 3" X 2.33"

Bolts For
Mounting Sign
Wire Rope Clamp
1
4"
Lock Nut
-U Bolt
Cap
Drill
1'-6"
1'
1'
1'
1'
1'
7
8"
Hole
Sign Panel
1'-6"
1
2"
Pipe Cap
Flexible Conduit Or
90 Angle Connector
Messenger Wire
1
2"
1
3
8"
-BOLT
Catenary Wire
Wire Rope Clamp
Signal Cable & Clamps
CABLE ENTRY DETAIL
3
8"
" Bolts For
To Roadway
Entry Details
19'M ax.
See Cable
-U-BOLT
Wire Rope Clamp
Mounting Sign
17'
-6" M in.
To Flasher Unit
Pipe
Nominal, 1.900 O.D.
MOUNTING DETAIL
REAR VIEW
0.125"
Bulb Replacement Shall
Be From The Front.
See Mounting Detail
1
4"
Alum. Zee - 3" X 2.33
Aluminum Round
Head Bolts with Nuts and

Lockwashers, bolts shall
be spaced @ 12" centers
4'-3"
max.
12" Signal Head

(Yellow Lens)
Sign Panel
12" Signal Head

(Yellow Lens)
1
4"
3"
Note
See Cable
Flashing beacon may be placed within or below panel
ZEE SECTION DETAIL
19'M ax.
Optional Location Of Flashing Beacon
SIDE VIEW
Flasher unit and cabinet to be placed
12/3/2015
To Roadway
11:
44:
40 AM
17'
-6" M in.
Entry Detail
on the strain pole supporting overhead

sign assembly or on service pole. The
flasher unit not to overhang private
property or sidewalk.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
FRONT VIEW
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17344
SHEET
NO.
5 of 6
0:00-0:00
0:00-0:00
FTP-34-06
FTP-35-06
FTP-30-06
FTP-33-06
* 12" Signal Head

(Yellow Lens)
FTP-31-06
OVERHEAD STANDARD
* Flashing Beacon May Be Placed Within Or Below Panel
2'
-0"
W16-7
AHEAD
2'-0"
W13-1
S1-1
W16-9P
SPEED LIMIT ASSEMBLY

12" Signal Head
FTP-32-06
(Yellow Lens)
SCHOOL
SPEED
LIMIT
00
SCHOOL
BUS STOP
AHEAD
FTP-38-06
Notes:
S5-1
1.
Standard size signs should be used whenever possible. Minimum sizes

may be used only on low volume, low speed (less than 35 mph) streets.
S4-5
S3-1
Ground Mount Standard
Special sizes should be used on expressway facilities where special

emphasis is needed.
11:
44:
41 AM
2.
The value of the actual school zone speed limit shall be determined by
Note:
the District Traffic Operations Engineer in cooperation with local school
Existing ground mount school speed limit signs utilizing a single 8" min.
superintendents. In no case shall it be less than the 15 mph min. as set
size beacon or two 6" min. size beacons inside the sign border are considered
by law.
meeting the standard. However, replacement or upgrading of these school

speed limit signs shall conform to the above standard. Numerical speed limit
See Index No. 17355 for sign details.
4.
When fluorescent yellow-green background color is used, a systematic
12/3/2015
3.
displayed shall be established by appropriate regulatory authorities.
approach featuring one background color within a zone or area should

be used. The mixing of standard yellow and fluorescent yellow green
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
background within a zone should be avoided.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17344
SHEET
NO.
6 of 6
6" Yellow
30'
10'
White-Red Reflective
Refer To Detail A
Shoulder Line
Shoulder Pavement
Pavement Markers Every 20'
6" White Skip Line

12" White
6" White
Shoulder Pavement
White-Red reflective
Yellow-Red Reflective
Pavement Markers
Markers Every 40'.
Shall Begin at the Transition.
Shoulder Line
Maintain Full Ramp

Width (15' Typical)
6" Yellow
RAM
P
6" White Edge Line
Edge Line
Markers Every 40'.
Shoulder Line
NOTE:
Reflective pavement markers
are installed adjacent to the
edge line.
NORMAL TAPERED EXI

T
(TWO THRU LANES)
6" Yellow Line Along Left

Edge of Travelway
6" White
30'
10'
Shoulder Line
Shoulder Pavement
12" White
6" White Skip Line
Shoulder Pavt.
t
n
me
e
v
r Pa
e
d
l
u
o
Sh
Refer To Detail A
Shoulder Line
Maintain Full Ramp
Width (15' Typical)
6" White Edge Line
White-Red Reflective Pavement

Markers Every 40'.
RAM
P
Yellow-Red Reflective
DETAIL A
6" Yellow Edge Line
Markers Every 40'.

Shoulder Line
"S" MPH 30 35 40
45
50 55
"X"
40
60
Ft. 20 20 40
60
Passenger Car, Daytime, Posted Speeds
NORMAL TAPERED EXIT ONLY

(TWO THRU LANES - THREE APPROACH LANES)
Or 85th Percentile (Use Higher Value)
11:
44:
42 AM
6" White
"X"
18" White
45
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Edge Of Pavt.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INTERCHANGE MARKINGS
NO.
17345
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
6" 3'-9' Dotted Line With White-Red Reflective
Pavement Markers At (24' Centers) Ends At Point

Where Lane Width And Ramp Width Are Equal (12')
6" White
6" Yellow
12" White
Shoulder Pavement
Shoulder Line
30' 10'
6" White Skip Line

Shoulder Pavement
6" Yellow Edge Line
p
Ram
Maintain Full Ramp Width
6" White Edge Line
Shoulder Line
(15' Typical)
White-Red Reflective Markers (Every

40') Shall Stop At End Of Transition
Yellow-Red Reflective Markers (Every 40') Shall

End At The Termination Of The Yellow Edge Line
NORMAL TAPERED ENTRANCE
6" Yellow
Shoulder Pavement
Shoulder Line

30' 10'
6" White Skip Line
Shoulder Pavement
6" Yellow
Edge Line
6" White Edge Line
mp
Ra
Shoulder Gutter
12" White
White-Red Reflective Pavement Markers
Maintain Full Ramp
End At The Termination Of The Yellow Edge Line
(Every 40') Shall End At The Theoretical Gore
Width (15' Typical)
11:
44:
42 AM
Yellow-Red Reflective Markers (Every 40') Shall
NORMAL TAPERED ENTRANCE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
WITH ADDED LANE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17345
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
12" Solid White Line Shall Extend

One Fourth The Length Of Acceleration
Lane From Gore Markings.
6" White 3' - 9' Dotted Line
End 6" Yellow Edge Line
With White-Red Reflective

Pavement Markers At
(24' Centers)
Yellow-Red Reflective Markers
(Every 40') Shall End At The
6" White Edge Line
300'
White-Red Reflective Markers (Every 40') Shall End
Termination Of The Yellow Edge Line
At The Termination Of The Acceleration Lane.

End 6" White Edge Line
6" Yellow Edge Line
6" White Skip Line
Begin 6" White Edge Line

6" White 3' - 9' Dotted Line
Begin 6" Yellow Edge Line
With White-Red Reflective

White-Red Reflective Markers (Every 40')
6" White Edge Line
Shall Begin At The Transition.
Pavement Markers At
(24' Centers)
PARALLEL ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION LANE
Shoulder Pavement
6" White 3' - 9' Dotted Line With White-Red
(24' Centers)
Pavement Markers At
Yellow-Red Reflective Markers
300' along the Length Of Deceleration
(Every 40') Shall Begin At
Lane From Gore Markings.
The Yellow Edge Line
Shoulder Line
8" Solid White Stripe With
Reflective Pavement Markers At
12" Solid White Line Shall Extend
24'
(20' Centers)
Shoulder Line
Varies
300 Feet
300 Feet
Varies
TYPICAL MARKINGS AT DUAL LANE EXITS
Note: Arrows indicate direction

of travel and are not shown
for pavement marking.
11:
44:
43 AM
Ex
i
tRa
mp
1
2
Mile
300 Feet
Lane Drop Markings 12" White 3' - 9'
12" Solid White Stripe With
Dotted Line With White-Red Reflective
Pavement Markers At (24' Centers)
Pavement Markers At
Shoulder Line
12/3/2015
(20' Centers)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
TYPICAL LANE DROP MARKINGS AT EXIT RAMPS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17345
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
Notes:
1. Post delineators spaced at 40' on curves of the entrance and exit of ramps.
The spacing on the tangent portion of the ramp section shall be 300'. All
White Arrow With
delineators are to be setback 4' from shoulder break. Post delineators should
White-Red Reflective Markers
not be discontinued in sections with guardrail.

23.5'
3'
2'-4"
g
cin
t
pa e A
'S
at
40 m in
r
T.
Te
P.
e
Th
10' 30'
6" White
6" Yellow
Direction Of Travel
WRONG WAY ARROW
' ng
0
ci
0
3 pa
S
6" White Skip Line
6"
Main Line
6" White
White Post Mounted
Begin Yellow-Red Markers
Delineator (40' Spacing)
At Beginning Of Yellow Line.
6" White
8" White
Begin White-Red Reflective Markers at Transition.
(40' Spacing)
4
0
' Sp
a
c
i
n
g
6" Yellow
e
an
nL
o
i
at
r
e
l
e
c
De
6"
Yellow
Yellow-Red Reflective Markers (Every 40')

Along The Left Edge Line Of The Ramps
Crossroad
8" Solid White

8"
Terminate White-Red Markers
w
o
l
l
e
"Y
6
White
At The P.T.
Full
e
t
i
"Wh
8
Lane Width
on
i
at
er
el
c
Ac
e
t
i
"Wh
8
1
6" White
White-Red Reflective Markers
Wrong Way Arrow To Be Placed At
ane
L
(Every 40')
24"
The Physical Gore Or 100' From
Stop Line
Theoretical Gore.
White
Yellow Post Mounted
End 6" Yellow

25'
30'
10'
8" White
Wrong Way Arrow To Be

Placed At End Of
Physical Gore Or 100'
From End Of Theoretical
Gore.
6" Yellow
6" White
End Yellow-Red Reflective Markers

At End Of Yellow Edge Line
6" White
White Post Mounted

400'
6" White
8" White
Wrong Way Arrow

100'+
-
11:
44:
43 AM
6" Yellow
6" White Skip Line
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
6" White
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17345
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
8'
8'
8'
8'
8'
8'
4"
(
Typ.
)
4"
23 S.F.
3'-4"
23 S.F.
20 S.F.
22 S.F.
20 S.F.
R2
PAVEMENT ARROW AND MESSAGE DETAILS NOTE: When
6"
R1
arrow and pavement message are used together, the arrow
R2
1'
3'-4"
3'-8"
shall be located down stream of the pavement message

and shall be separated from the pavement message by a
distance of 25' (Base of the arrow to the base of the
6'
-6"
4'
-6"
4'
9'
-6"
5'
4"
13'
3'
5'
5'
5'
7'
-9"
R1
R1
12'
-9"
7'
-6"
3'
4"
4'
16'
-6"
8"
5'
-3"
23'
-6"
2'
-8"
8"
20 S.F.
3'-4"
7'
10'
13 S.F.
26 S.F.
20 S.F.
24 S.F.
3'
22 S.F.
8'
34 S.F.
5'
(Typ.)
message). Stop message shall be placed 25' back of stop

line.
1'
1'
2
R
R1=3'-3.375"
R1=2'-11"
1'
3'
R2=2'-3.563"
R2=1'-11"
6'-4"
Turn Lane-Use Arrow
R1=3'-3.375"
U Turn
R2=2'-3.563"
Lane-Use
Through Lane-Use
(Left Turn Shown -
Arrow
Right Turn Similar
Arrow
by Opposite Hand)
Preferential Lane
Symbol
11 S.F.
12 S.F.
Turn and Through
27 S.F.
17 S.F.
DIMENSIONS ARE WITHIN 1"
Lane-Use
Arrow
2'-6"
29 S.F.
Wrong-Way
Arrow
PAVEMENT ARROW AND MESSAGE DETAILS
24 S.F.
Solid Edge Line or Lane Line
2'- 4' Dotted Guide Line

6"
6"
Solid Channelizing Line
Black Contrast and 20' Gaps
10' 10' 10' 10' 10' 10' 10' 10' 10' 10'
8", 12" or 18"
20'
6"
6'
6'
6'
6'
6'
6'
6'
10' Black Contrast
10' White Skip With 10'
6'-10' Dotted Extension Line
6' 6'
6'
10'10'
6'
20'
10' 10'
20'
10' 10'
6"
20'
10' 10'
10'
6"
3'-9' Dotted Interchange Line
Two-Lane Passing Prohibited Lines
CONTRAST MARKINGS
9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9'
6"
4"
3' 3'3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3'3' 3' 3' 3'
6"
3'-9' Dotted Lane Drop Line
Double Solid Lines

4"
9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9' 9'
12"
Yield Lines consist of five 3' 3'3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3' 3'3' 3' 3' 3'
6"
18" X 27" white triangles

which face traffic. Equally
12" Solid Pedestrian Crosswalk Line
space triangles within travel

10'-30' Skip Line
11:
44:
44 AM
24" Solid Stop Line
30'
12" or 24"
18"
30'
30'
30'
6"
lane. Add one additional

triangle using same spacing
when a bike lane is present.
10'
10'
10'
10'
10'
27"
YIELD LINES
LAST
REVISION
01/21/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TYPES OF PAVEMENT MARKING LINES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SPECIAL MARKING AREAS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
1of 14
Traffic Flow
10'
6" White
Edge of
Edge of
Travel Way
Travel Way
Travel Way
Travel Way
30'
6" Yellow Dotted (6'-10')

6" Yellow
Curb
Edge Line
Edge Line
6'-10'
Use Yellow Delineators On
Extension
Sides Facing Cross-Over
Median
Gutter
6'
6'
Use Green Delineators On Sides
Facing Away From Cross-over
Radius
Generally Top Of Post Should Be 4'
Point
Above The Edge Of Pavement Grade
Skip Line
Skip Line
Begin Extension At Radius Point

6" Yellow
Traffic Flow
6" White
FLUSH SHOULDER
ROADWAY
6" White Skip (10'-30')
6"
2"
PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND DELINEATORS FOR MEDIAN CROSS-OVER
CURB & GUTTER

ROADWAY
Gutter
(If Applicable)
Edge Line
Edge of Travel Way
PLACEMENT OF EDGE LINES

End at
Radius
Point
NOTE:
Paved
100'
Radius
Point
6" White
Markings applied to median noses shall be yellow in color.
Unpaved Rd.
Road
6" White
6" White
6" White
6" White Skip (10'-30')
6" Yellow
6" White
6" Yellow
6'
6'
6" Yellow
6" Yellow
Full Lane
6'
Delineator Post
Width
Grassed Median With Or
Full Lane
6'
Without Curb
Delineator Post
Width
Delineator Post
6" White
6" Yellow
6" White Dotted (6'-10')
6" White
6" Yellow
R3-4
See Detail
100'
11:
44:
45 AM
See Detail
M inor Road
6" White
Paved
Paved
Road
End at
Road
Radius
Point
12/3/2015
PAVEMENT MARKINGS FOR INTERSECTIONS

WITH MAJOR AND MINOR ROADS
Radius
LAST
REVISION
01/21/15
REVISIO N
Point
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
2 of 14
6" Yellow Skip
75' Min
50' Min
50'
8' 12'
6" Yellow Solid
8'
24" White
300' Max. Intervals Between Double Arrows

For use in congested urban areas where available storage
6" White
length between intersections is limited and a permanent
6" Dbl Yellow
SCHEME ONE
point of transition from the two-way turning lane to the

exclusive turning lane can not be determined.
Use Stop Line
At Signalized
Intersection
Only
Radius Point
10'
10'
25'
8'
8'
12'
25'
6" Yellow
6" White
24" White
6" Dbl Yellow

18"
45
Yellow
Min 75'
For use in rural & suburban areas where an adequate
300' Max. Intervals Between Double Arrows
storage lane length can be specifically determined.
(WITH SINGLE LANE LEFT TURN CHANNELIZATION)
SCHEME TWO
TWO WAY LEFT TURN LANE
12" White
12" White
For Crosswalk
For Crosswalk
S
i
de
w
al
k
p
am
R
12" White
Pu
b
i
Cu l
c
rb S
i
Ra de
m wa
l
p
k
6
10 'M
ni
' i
S
m
t
an um
da
rd
11:
44:
45 AM
For Crosswalk
12" White
12/3/2015
For Crosswalk
12" White
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
For Crosswalk
TYPICAL CROSSWALK MARKINGS FOR CURB RAMPS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
3 of 14
Bike Lane
12" White
Crosswalk
Lines
These markings may be used
for locations with restricted
left turn lengths, only when
called for in plans.
6'-10' Dotted
24" White
6" White
Stop Line
50'
50'
6" White
6" Yellow
2'-4' Dotted
6" Dbl Yellow
6" White
2'-4' Dotted
12" White
Crosswalk
6" White
Lines
12" White
6" White
Crosswalk
8" White
25'
Lines
25'
8" White
Median Edge
EFT
NE WAY L
OO
ES T
I
APPL
TURN LANE ALSO
50'
6" White
100'M ax
100'M ax
ONLY
6" White
6" White Skip
6" White Skip
NG
EFT TURN MARKI
CTED L
RESTRI
ONLY
RIGHT TURN LANE AND

ISLAND DETAILS
12" White
3'-9' Dotted
100'(
M in)
6" White
RIGHT TURN LANE DROP AND ISLAND DETAILS

LEFT TURN LANE DROP IS MIRROR IMAGE
6" White
2'-4' Dotted
6" White
100' Minimum or as determined

by L=WS
(L =
WS
60 <
45 mph) where
24" White Stop Line
12" White
W is the lateral offset in feet and

S is the 85th percentile speed in
miles per hour (speed limit)
4'M in.
4' Min.
For left turn storage lane detail
Varies
see Sheet 11 of this index.
24" White
Stop Line
NOTES:
Varies
Varies
(Side Street)
M in.
50'
1.
When public sidewalk curb ramps are present, refer

Index No. 17344 and Index No. 304 for crosswalk
50' Min.
widths.
2.
Double yellow longitudinal center lines on all

roadway approaches shall be extended back 100'
24" White Stop Line

6" Dbl Yellow
Width of crosswalk to equal width of the
4'M in.
for projects involving intersection improvements only.

3.
When specified, "stop" message shall be placed 25'

back of stop lines.
Varies
4' Min.
adjacent sidewalk, but not less than 6'

6" White
11:
44:
46 AM
24" White Stop Line
S
L
NE DETAI
I
E CENTER L
KS AND DOUBL
STOP BARS,CROSSWAL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TYPICAL INTERSECTION 2 THRU LANES

PLUS LEFT TURN LANE, WITH CROSSWALK
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
4 of 14
HIGHWAY
HIGHWAY
R6-3
R6-3
DIVIDED
DIVIDED
R1-1
R1-1
R6-1L
200'
R6-1R
R6-1R
R6-1L
R6-1L
R6-1L
24" White
R1-2
24" White
R6
1
R
R6
1
L
6" White
Nose Width
NOSE WIDTHS UNDER 30'
Nose Width
NOSE WIDTHS 30' AND GREATER

Nose Width
Nose Width
R6-1L
6" White
R6
1
R
24" White
R1-2
24" White
R6-1L
R6-1L
R6-1L
R6-1R
R6-1R
200'
R1-1
R6-1L
R1-1
Divided Highway signs (R6-3) may be on the

same structure with the STOP and ONE WAY
DIVIDED
FIGURE 1
signs or on a separate structure.
FIGURE 2
R6-3
DIVIDED
R6-3
HIGHWAY
HIGHWAY
ONE-WAY SIGNS 0N DIVIDED HIGHWAY INTERSECTIONS
l
e
v
a
f Tr
no
o
i
t
c
e
r
Di
6" Yellow Edge Line
Standard No-Passing
l
e
v
a
f Tr
no
o
i
t
c
e
r
Di
6" White Edge Line
6" Double Yellow
Median Or Island
20'
45
18" White
45
Gore Area
Beginning of Physical Gore
Va
r
i
e
s
45
18" Yellow
Va
r
i
e
s
To Be
De
t
e
r
mi
n
e
dI
n Fi
e
l
d
6" Double Yellow

POSTED (DAY)
SPEED LIMIT
8" Single White
6" Yellow Edge Line
11:
44:
46 AM
Di
r
e
c
t
i
o
no
f Tr
a
v
e
l
12/3/2015
PAVEMENT MARKINGS FOR TRAFFIC CHANNELIZATION AT GORE
LAST
07/01/13
REVISIO N
(TRAFFIC FLOWS IN SAME DIRECTION)
REVISION
To Be
De
t
e
r
mi
n
e
dI
n Fi
e
l
d
6" Yellow Edge Line
"Y"
Di
r
e
c
t
i
o
no
f Tr
a
v
e
l
ft.
MPH
30 OR LESS
10
35
20
40
20
45
30
50 OR MORE
40
PAVEMENT MARKING FOR TRAFFIC SEPARATION

(TRAFFIC FLOWS IN OPPOSING DIRECTIONS)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
5 of 14
TYPI
CAL TRANSI
TI
ON MARKI
NG
W 4-2L
W 6-2
W 6-3
NE
I
VE EDGE L
L BE THE SAME AS RESPECTI
OR SHAL
COL
DO NOT
R5-1
ENTER
45
8"
18"
Solid
Solid
250'
Point Where Pavement
6" White Edge Line
A
/4
Begin Taper
Begins To Narrow
6" Yellow Edge Line
250'
6" Yellow Skip
Median
8
0
'
R4-7
W 6-1
6" White Edge Line

White Delineators Shall Be Used Throughout
15:1 Taper (4:1 Min.,
The Transition Where 85th Percentile
Not Less Than 50')
LEFT ROADWAY CENTERED ON EXISTING ROADWAY
Approach Speeds Are Greater Than 50 mph
TRANSITION DISTANCE L
**W
(FEET)
120
135
150
165
180
195
210
35
165
185
205
225
245
265
285
40
215
45
360
240
405
270
295
450
495
320
540
350
585
POSTED (DAY)
"Y"
SPEED LIMIT
(FT.)
MPH
55
950
50
850
45
750
40
650
30
450
30 OR LESS
10
35
20
40
20
45
30
50 OR MORE
40
45
30
"A"
(FT.)
W 9-1
14
LANE
13
ENDS
12
RI
GHT
11
W 9-2
10
LEFT
MERGE
MPH
LANE ENDS
SPEED*
MPH
W 4-2
*S
375
630
50
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
55
440
495
550
605
660
715
770
60
480
540
600
660
720
780
840
65
520
585
650
715
780
845
910
25'
Direction of Travel
PAVEMENT MARKING DETAIL

NOTE:
W9-1 & W9-2 are supplemental to the W4-2 sign and
may be deleted if space is not available. The W9-1
W 4-2R
*Design Speed
W 6-2
W 6-3
L=WS (45 MPH or Greater)
WS
L=
(40 MPH)
60
should be used if only one supplemental sign is installed.
**Lateral offset
L
DO NOT
85th Percentile Approach Speeds*
ENTER
Throughout The Transition Where
R5-1
White Delineators Shall Be Used
250'
A
Begin Taper
80'
A
/4
Are Greater Than 50 mph.

6" Yellow Edge Line
6" Yellow Skip
6" White Edge Line
250'
R4-7
15:1 Std. Taper

(4:1 Minimum Not Less Than 50')
W6 - 1
11:
44:
47 AM
RIGHT ROADWAY CENTERED ON EXISTING ROADWAY
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
SCHEMES FOR TRANSI

TI
ON -2 L
ANE / 4 L
ANE ROADWAY
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
6 of 14
2 LANES
50'
DETAIL A
EXIT RAMP WITHOUT
AUXILIARY LANE
120'
LAYOUT FOR 1, 2 AND 3 DIGIT NUMBERS AND LETTERS
3 LANES
24'
3 LANES
24'
AUXILIARY LANE
50'
DETAIL B
EXIT RAMP WITH
AUXILIARY LANE
290'
NOTES:
1.
Messages shall meet requirements of Specification Section

971-6 and Section 711.
2.
The thickness of the preformed message shall be 125 mils.
3.
The message shall consist of white letters and numbers with

black contrasting material. The black material shall meet
the mat dimensions shown and have a minimum skid resistance
value of 55 BPN.
4.
The "EXIT NUMBER" position remains the same distance from the
beginning of taper regardless of the number of lines of information.
MESSAGE SIZE AND SPACING

4" X 4" squares
3"
3"
10"
22"
44"
20"
32"
54"
5"
106"
106"
106"
106"
106"
106"
11:
44:
48 AM
106"
12/3/2015
66"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
MAT DIMENSIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
7 of 14
Stop Bar Perpendicular To

Edge Of Travelway Or 8'
From & Parallel To Gate
Stop Bar Perpendicular To Edge

Of Travelway Or 8' From &
Parallel To Gate When Present
Min
8'
12
'
in
.
6" Yellow
12
'
in
.
When Present.
10'
24" White
24"
8'
6" Dbl. Yellow

24"
10'
Min
DO NOT
DO NOT
30"
STOP
T
h
e Ra
i
l
r
o
a
dT
r
a
f
f
i
c Co
n
t
r
o
lDe
v
i
c
e
I
sT
o Be L
o
c
a
t
e
d A Mi
n
i
mu
m O
f1
2
'
Fr
o
m T
h
e Ra
i
l
r
o
a
d Ce
n
t
e
r
l
i
n
e
. Se
e
I
n
d
e
x No
.1
7
8
8
2 Fo
r Pr
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n De
v
i
c
e
s
.
STOP
ON
TRACKS
30"
ON
TRACKS
R8-8
R8-8
For Use Near
For Use Near

10'
Min
Signalized Intersections
12' Min.
8'
8'
Signalized Intersections
10'
.
n
Mi
T
h
e Ra
i
l
r
o
a
dT
r
a
f
f
i
c Co
n
t
r
o
lDe
v
i
c
e
I
sT
ob
eL
o
c
a
t
e
d A Mi
n
i
mu
m O
f1
2
'
Fr
o
m T
h
e Ra
i
l
r
o
a
d Ce
n
t
e
r
l
i
n
e
. Se
e
I
n
d
e
x No
.1
7
8
8
2 Fo
r Pr
o
t
e
c
t
i
o
n De
v
i
c
e
s
.
12' Min.
24"
White
6" Yellow
24" White
6" Double Yellow
24" White
R
R
See notes 3, 4 & 5
See note 3, 4 & 5

for sign placement
24" White
for sign placement.
24" White
50'
White
50'
24"
W10-1
W10-1
RAI
L
ROAD CROSSI
NG AT 4
L
ANE ROADWAY
24"
RAI
L
ROAD CROSSI
NG AT 2L
ANE ROADWAY
NOTES:
1. Wh
e
nc
o
mp
u
t
i
n
gp
a
v
e
me
n
tme
s
s
a
g
e
s
,q
u
a
n
t
i
t
i
e
sd
on
o
ti
n
c
l
u
d
e
transverse lines.
Width May Vary

According To
12"
See Detail This Sheet For Placement Of
15'
Lane Width
2. Wh
e
nd
y
n
a
mi
cd
e
v
i
c
e
sa
r
en
o
tp
r
e
s
e
n
to
ra
r
et
ob
ei
n
s
t
a
l
l
e
d
,t
h
e
c
r
o
s
s
b
u
c
ks
h
a
l
lb
el
o
c
a
t
e
da
tt
h
ef
u
t
u
r
el
o
c
a
t
i
o
no
ft
h
e RR g
a
t
e
o
rs
i
g
n
a
la
n
dg
a
t
ei
na
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e wi
t
hI
n
d
e
x No
.1
7
8
8
2
.
Railroad Pavement Markings.
8'
Pavement
Message
White
6'
20'
6'
10'
3. Pl
a
c
e
me
n
to
fs
i
g
n W1
0
1i
na r
e
s
i
d
e
n
t
i
a
lo
rb
u
s
i
n
e
s
sd
i
s
t
r
i
c
t
,wh
e
r
e
l
o
ws
p
e
e
d
sa
r
ep
r
e
v
a
l
e
n
t
.T
h
e W1
0
1s
i
g
n ma
yb
ep
l
a
c
e
d a mi
n
i
mu
m
d
i
s
t
a
n
c
eo
f1
0
0
'f
r
o
m t
h
ec
r
o
s
s
i
n
g
.Wh
e
r
es
t
r
e
e
ti
n
t
e
r
s
e
c
t
i
o
n
so
c
c
u
r
b
e
t
we
e
nt
h
e RR p
a
v
e
me
n
tme
s
s
a
g
ea
n
dt
h
et
r
a
c
k
sa
na
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l
W1
0
1s
i
g
n& a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
lPa
v
e
me
n
tme
s
s
a
g
es
h
o
u
l
db
eu
s
e
d
.
4. Re
c
o
mme
n
d
e
dl
o
c
a
t
i
o
nf
o
r FT
P6
1
0
6o
r FT
P6
2
0
6s
i
g
n
,1
0
0
'u
r
b
a
n
& 3
0
0
'r
u
r
a
li
na
d
v
a
n
c
eo
ft
h
ec
r
o
s
s
i
n
g
.
45
"
16
5. A p
o
r
t
i
o
no
ft
h
ep
a
v
e
me
n
tma
r
k
i
n
gs
y
mb
o
ls
h
o
u
l
db
ed
i
r
e
c
t
l
yo
p
p
o
s
i
t
e
18" YELLOW
the W10-1 sign.

6" Yellow
15'
50' Min.
NOTE:
SPEED
Pavement Markings symmetrical about centerline
4"
12/3/2015
24"
11:
44:
48 AM
(Typ.)
89 s.f.
*Does not include 24" bars.
LAST
REVISION
10/09/14
REVISIO N
TYPICAL PAVEMENT MARKINGS FOR R/R CROSSING
PAVEMENT MARKINGS FOR TERMINATION

OF TWO WAY LEFT TURN AT R/R CROSSINGS
DESCRIPTION:
" A "
IN FT.
60
400
55
325
50
250
45
175
40
125
35
100
URBAN
85 MIN.
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MPH
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
8 of 14
GENERAL NOTES
1.
For traffic and pedestrian signal installation, refer to Index No. 17721 through 17890.
2.
For public sidewalk curb ramps, refer to Index No. 304.
3.
For pavement marking and sign installation, refer to Indexes 11200 through 17356.
4.
Crosswalk minimum widths: Intersection Crosswalk 6'. Midblock Crosswalk 10'.
5.
All crosswalk marking must be white.
6.
Longitudinal markings in Special Emphasis Crosswalk must be 24" wide and spaced to avoid
the wheel path of vehicles (see detail). Center the longitudinal markings at each lane line.
Place additional longitudinal markings at the center of each lane (1/2W). The maximum spacing
allowed between longitudinal markings is 60".
4' Min.
24" White
When the Crosswalk is skewed to the lane lines, the longitudinal markings should be parallel
to the lane lines.
24" Longitudinal Bars in Special Emphasis Crosswalk must be preformed thermoplastic.
12" Transverse lines in the Special Emphasis Crosswalk may be standard thermoplastic or
4' Min.
preformed thermoplastic.
12" White
24" White
SPECIAL EMPHASIS
MARKINGS
24" White
12" White
12" White
4'M in.
STANDARD
MARKINGS
24" White
24" White
W
60" Max.
Lane line
Lane line
24"
W
1
2W
.
n
i
4'M
Lane line
12"
W
12" White
Lane line
24" White
4' Min.
W
1
2W
Lane line
11:
44:
49 AM
SPECIAL EMPHASIS
CROSSWALK MARKING
DETAIL
12/3/2015
SPECIAL EMPHASIS AND STANDARD CROSSWALKS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
ON
NTERSECTI
ED I
L
GN CONTROL
ZED OR STOP SI
I
GNAL
SI
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
9 of 14
100' of 6"
W 11-2
Solid White
W 11-2
SCHEME 1
Crosswalk
with Warning Signing
AHEAD
W 16-7pL
W 11-2
W 16-7pL
W 11-2
W 16-9p
40'
100' of 6"
Solid White
100' of 6"
Solid White
40'
100' of 6"
Solid White
40'
W 11-2
W 16-7pL
W 11-2
SCHEME 3
Signalized
Crosswalk
W 11-2
A-SUGGESTED
DISTANCE (Ft.)
25 Or Less
200
26 To 35
250
36 To 45
300
1.
Plans shall indicate which crosswalk scheme is to be used.
2.
The details shown do not depict the signing and markings for
multi-lane roadways with divided medians. For these applications,
11:
44:
50 AM
R1-5bL
W 11-2
W 16-9p
W 16-7pL
STOP
FOR
HERE
AHEAD
SCHEME 2
Crosswalk
with Stop Signing
APPROACH
SPEED MPH
additional signs shall be installed on the median side. Minimum

width of Mid-Block Crosswalks is 10'.
3.
All mid-block crosswalks shall use special emphasis crosswalk

markings.
Crosswalk marking shall be preformed marking materials.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
4.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
10 of 14
15'
TURN LANES CURBED AND UNCURBED MEDIANS
25'
URBAN CONDITIONS
Taper 50'
Design
Begin Lane Line

L
Speed
Queue Length **
(mph)
SINGLE LEFT TURNS
** Queue Length Is Measured From

The Median Nose Radial Point Or,
When A Stop Bar Is Required, From
Clearance
Distance
Brake To
Total
Stop
Decel.
Distance
Distance
RURAL CONDITIONS
Clearance
Distance
35
70'
75'
145'
110'
40
80'
75'
155'
120'
45
85'
100'
185'
135'
50
105'
135'
240'
160'
55
125'
60
65
Brake To
Total
Stop
Decel.
Distance
Distance
Clearance
Distance
185'
290'
160'
225'
350'
195'
145'
260'
405'
230'
170'
290'
460'
270'
The Stop Bar.
15'
Taper 100'
25'
Begin Lane Line
Begin Lane Line

L
Queue Length
Less Than 100'

1 Arrow
(Measured From Stop Bar Location)

L
25'
6" White
Varies 100' To 150'
DOUBLE LEFT TURNS
2 Arrows
15'
24" White (Typ)
6" White
25'
Varies 150' To 200'
3 Arrows
15'
6" White
25'
Arrow should be evenly spaced between first and last arrow. Turn
lanes longer than 200' add one arrow for each 100' additional length.
25'
15'
The ONLY pavement message is required
25'
ARROW SPACING
Through Lane Becomes Exclusive Left Turn
for turn lanes, where the thru lane becomes

turn lane.
NOTES:
1.
The "Begin Lane Line" locations are based on the standard lengths
shown in Design Standard 301. These locations must be adjusted
on a case by case basis for turn lanes not meeting the standard
lengths.
2.
Yellow left turn edge marking may be used adjacent to raised curb or
grass medians if lane use is not readily apparent to drivers approaching
25'
15'
a left turn storage lane.

3.
Refer to Design Standard Index 301 for Roadway Details.
4.
This Index also applies to right turn lanes.
11:
44:
50 AM
Through Lane Becomes Optional Left Turn
LAST
REVISION
11/12/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
DOUBLE LEFT TURN MARKINGS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
11of 14
Public Sidewalk Curb Ramp
Sign No FTP-21-06
1.
8'
22'
22'
22'
UpStream
2.
Parking shall not be allowed within 20' of a crosswalk.
3.
All parking lane markings shall be 6" white.
4.
Parking lane lines shall be broken at driveways.
5.
Refer to Chapter 316,
DownStream
6" White
Drivers Eye Location
6"
2"
6"
WHITE
Fla.
Statutes,
for laws
governing parking spaces.
W H ITE
BLUE
BLUE
BLUE
W H ITE
For entrances to a one-way street, the

downstream restriction may be reduced to 20'.
Sidewalk
22'
(Signalized & Nonsignalized)
GENERAL NOTES
and FTP-22-06
6.
Where curb and gutter is used, the gutter pan width

may be included as part of the minimum width of
parking lane, but desirably the lane width should be in
6"
2"
6"
6"
2"
6"
addition to that of the gutter pan.
Sign No FTP-21-06
Public Sidewalk
and FTP-22-06
Sign No FTP-21-06
Curb Ramp
SPEED
and FTP-22-06
Sidewalk
MPH
Sidewalk
UP STREAM (A)
0-30
85'
35
100'
DOWN STREAM (B)

4 LANE
2 LANE
60'
70'
45'
TYPE I
50'
No Parking Zone -
9
0
18'
Yellow Curb (Optional)
6" White(Typ)
NOTES
8'
8'
12'
12'
5'
12'
12'
5'
9'
Sign No FTP-21-06
2.
20'
Distances applicable to intersecting street, major driveways and other
TYPE II
No Parking Zone -
driveways to the extent practical.
BLUE
Yellow Curb (Optional)
BLUE
BLUE
6"
6"
2"
6"
2"
6"
6"
2"
6"
2"
6"
6"
BLUE
BLUE
6
0
WHITE
Distances measured longitudinally along the street from driver location
Min.
W H ITE
Equally Spaced Per Aisle.
W H ITE
1.
9'
of entering vehicle to end of parking restriction.
3-6" White Diagonal
6"
2"
6"
9'
W H ITE
9'
3.
For nonsignalized intersections, the values above shall be compared

with the values for signalized intersections and the maximum restrictions
8'
implemented. These restrictions apply to both accessible and
20' 22'
nonaccessible parking.
Y
20'
TO
26'
6"
9'
BLUE
9'
6"
9'
2"
9'
All Spaces
22' Min. & 26' Max.
MINIMUM PARKING RESTRICTION FOR

NONSIGNALIZED INTERSECTIONS
TYPICAL
and FTP-22-06
TYPE III
Public Sidewalk Curb Ramp

No Parking Zone Yellow Curb (Optional)
"C"
9
'
9
'
9
'
"B"
5'
"E"
9
'
5
'
1
2
'
"
6" White
(Typ)
8' Min.
"D
"
A"
Sidewalk
*
FOR ACCESSIBLE MARKINGS - SEE ABOVE
SPEED LIMIT
SIGNALIZED
MPH
INTERSECTIONS
DISTANCE FROM
0-30
NOTES:
1.
2.
3'
"DIMENSIONS"

"A"
"B"
"C"
"D"
"E"
45
19'-1"
12'-9"
7'-0"
27'-0"
17'-0"
60
20'-1"
10'-5"
5'-9"
23'-2"
13'-10"
Dimensions are to the centerline of markings.
35
30'
CURB RADIUS (Y)
50'
PARKING RESTRICTION (FT.) FOR

SIGNALIZED INTERSECTION
4"
4"
4.53 s.f.
An Access Aisle is required for each accessible space when angle
2.7 s.f.
NOTES:
parking is used.
11:
44:
51 AM
3.
Criteria for pavement markings only, not public sidewalk curb ramp locations.
Use of pavement symbol in accessible
For ramp locations refer to plans.
parking spaces is optional, when used the

symbol shall be 3' or 5' high and white in color.
4.
1.
Parking restrictions measured from curb radius point.
2.
Restrictions for accessible parking are the same as

those applied to nonsignalized intersections.
Blue pavement markings shall be tinted to match shade 15180 of Federal

Standards 595a.
5.
The FTP-22-06 panal shall be mounted below the FTP-21-06 sign.
UNIVERSAL SYMBOL
OF ACCESSIBILITY
MINIMUM PARKING RESTRICTION FOR

LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
PAVEMENT MARKING FOR PUBLIC

SIDEWALK CURB RAMPS IN REST AREAS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
12 of 14
Std. Thermoplastic
Start
End
Thermoplastic
Radius
6" White Profiled
Markings
6" White Profiled
Radius
Markings
Paved Entrance
Thermoplastic
Side Road or
Std.
Thermoplastic
Traffic Flow
6" Yellow Profiled
Thermoplastic
6" Yellow Profiled

Thermoplastic
Traffic Flow
Std. Thermoplastic Markings
TYPICAL RURAL INTERSECTION WITHOUT TURN LANES
Std.
Thermoplastic
6" Double Yellow
6" White Profiled
6" Double Yellow
6" White Profiled
Profiled
Thermoplastic
Profiled
Thermoplastic
6" White Profiled
Std. Thermoplastic
6" White Profiled
Thermoplastic
Markings
Thermoplastic
Thermoplastic
C
R
Thermoplastic
Markings

Traffic Flow
Traffic Flow
6" White Profiled

Thermoplastic
C
R
Std.
6" Double Yellow
Thermoplastic
6" White Profiled
6" White Profiled
Markings
Thermoplastic
Thermoplastic
6" Double Yellow
6" White Profiled
Profiled
Thermoplastic
Thermoplastic
Profiled
Thermoplastic
Std.
Thermoplastic
Markings
TYPICAL RURAL INTERSECTION WITH TURN LANES
GENERAL NOTES:
1. Remove raised retroreflective pavement markers when in conflict with the
installation of the centerline profiled thermoplastic pavement markings. The cost of
removal is included in the cost of the profiled thermoplastic pavement marking.
2. Replacement of retroreflective pavement markers removed during the installation
11:
44:
52 AM
of the centerline profiled thermoplastic pavement markings will be paid for under Pay
12/3/2015
Item 706.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
PROFILED THERMOPLASTIC MARKINGS 2 LANE ROADWAYS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
13 of 14
REFERENCE:
See Profiled Thermoplastic Markings General Notes on Sheet 13.
Std.
Thermoplastic
Std.
Markings
Thermoplastic
Markings
6" White Profiled Thermoplastic
Std. Thermoplastic
Markings
Traffic Flow

6" Yellow Profiled Thermoplastic

Traffic Flow
Std.
Thermoplastic
Markings
Std. Thermoplastic
Markings
TYPICAL RURAL INTERSECTION
Traffic Flow
Traffic Flow

6" Yellow Profiled
6" Yellow Profiled
Thermoplastic
Thermoplastic
Traffic Flow
Traffic Flow
6" White Profiled

Thermoplastic
11:
44:
52 AM
Std.
Std. Thermoplastic
Markings
Markings
TYPICAL RURAL DIRECTIONAL INTERSECTION
12/3/2015
TYPICAL RURAL MEDIAN OPENING
Thermoplastic
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
PROFILED THERMOPLASTIC MARKINGS MULTI-LANE ROADWAYS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17346
SHEET
NO.
14 of 14
8.1 S.F.
9.0 S.F.
8'
-0"
6'
-0"
6'
-0"
4
"
4.2 S.F.
6'
-0"
4
"
h
it
e
9'
-4"
4
"
W
p
h
a
it
ce
e
6.3 S.F.
4"
4"
6"
2'-0"
4"
4"
3'-4"
Helmeted Bicyclist Symbol
3'-4"
Bike Lane Arrow
3'-4"
Railroad Crossing
(For Shared Use Path Only)
Shared Lane Marking (SLM)
NOTES:
1. All bicycle markings and pavement messages shall be White.
2. All bicycle markings shall be preformed thermoplastic.
3. Recommended placement of bicycle lane markings:
a) At the beginning of a bicycle lane, on the far side of major

intersections, and prior to and within the bicycle lane keyhole.
b) Along the roadway as needed to provide a maximum spacing

of 1,320 feet for posted speeds less than or equal to45 mph,
2,640 feet for a posted speed of 50 mph or greater.
4. Recommended spacing for shared lane marking (SLM): Immediately

11:
44:
53 AM
after intersections and at a maximum spacing of 500 feet.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
STANDARD PAVEMENT MARKING

MESSAGE LAYOUTS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
BICYCLE MARKINGS
NO.
17347
SHEET
NO.
1of 5
Center of
Lane Line
Center
of Line
C&G Lip or EOP
Lane Width
Lane Width
(See Plans)
6" White Solid Line
(See Plans)
C
L LANE
Edge Of Pavement
(Lip Of Gutter)
Center
in
Center
in Lane
Curb and Gutter W here Present
PARKING
Lane
TRAVEL
TRAVEL
LANE
LANE
6" White Solid Line
SCENARIO #1
SCENARIO #2
LANE WIDTH 14'
ADJACENT TO PARKING
12/3/2015
11:
44:
54 AM
6" White Solid Line
Curb and Gutter
Center
in Lane
LAST
REVISION
11/18/14
REVISIO N
SHARED LANE MARKINGS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
BICYCLE MARKINGS
NO.
17347
SHEET
NO.
2 of 5
6'
Center of Solid Line
Center of
and Dotted Line
Solid Line
6'
EOP
6'
2'-4'
Dotted
Line
5' Min. From

Curb Radius
Radius Curb
Return
Return or
Stop Line
150'
Lane Width
FAR SIDE OF INTERSECTION DETAIL

7'
Bike
Lane
6'
6'
PARKING SPACES
Lane
SID EW ALK
Shared
Curb and Gutter
3' Buffer
With 6" White
Diagonal Hatching
at 10' Spacing
6'
Buffered
Bike Lane
6'
6'
ONLY
See Plans For
Dimensions
6'
6"
6" White 2'-4' Dotted
6"
6'
at Curb Tapers
6" White
Solid Line
BUS
8"
8"
11:
44:
58 AM
STANDARD BUFFERED
TRAVEL
BIKE
LANE
LANE
BIKE LANE STRIPING
TRAVEL
BIKE
LANE
LANE
6" White
6" White
Solid Line
Solid Line
BUS BAY DETAIL

CURB AND GUTTER TYPICAL SECTION
ADJACENT TO PARKING
12/3/2015
APPROACH TO INTERSECTIONS DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
11/18/14
REVISIO N
BUFFERED BIKE LANES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
BICYCLE MARKINGS
NO.
17347
SHEET
NO.
3 of 5
Adjust Parking As
Needed For Clear
Sight Requirements
150'
6" White
6" White
2'-4' Dotted
2'-4' Dotted
Paved Shoulder
7' Buffered
Buffered Bike Lane
Bike Lane
(See Plans for Dimensions)
3' Buffer With 6" White

Diagonal Hatching
at 10' Spacing
Parking
Spaces
11:
44:
59 AM
Indicates Paved Shoulder
BIKE LANE ADJACENT TO ON STREET PARKING

NO RIGHT TURN LANE,
12/3/2015
INTERSECTION WITH NO RIGHT TURN LANE,

FLUSH SHOULDER WITH BUFFERED
BIKE LANE TYPICAL SECTION
LAST
REVISION
11/18/14
REVISIO N
BIKE LANE MARKINGS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
BICYCLE MARKINGS
NO.
17347
SHEET
NO.
4 of 5
ONLY
ONLY
RIGHT LANE
MUST
TURN RIGHT
30'
Min.
150' Min.
Measured
From
End of
Taper
50'
Min.
KH-2
INTERSECTION WITH
SEPARATE RIGHT TURN LANE,

RIGHT TURN DROP LANE,

KH-3
"TEE" INTERSECTION WITH
CURB & GUTTER TYPICAL SECTION
KH-4
INTERSECTION WITH
IN OR WITHIN ONE MILE OF AN URBAN AREA
FLUSH SHOULDER TYPICAL SECTION
KH-5
INTERSECTION WITH
SEPARATE RIGHT TURN LANE, IN RURAL AREA
FLUSH SHOULDER TYPICAL SECTION
12/3/2015
11:
44:
59 AM
KH-1
INTERSECTION WITH
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
KEYHOLE MARKINGS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
BICYCLE MARKINGS
NO.
17347
SHEET
NO.
5 of 5
CASE I
Type 1 Object Markers shall consist of nine yellow

reflectors mounted on a yellow reflective background or
4' Center To Center Minimum
CASE II
consist of a retroreflective panel of the same size.
8' Center To Center Maximum
Red Reflectors
CASE I
Yellow
CASE II
Reflectors
End of Road Markers shall consist of nine red

reflectors mounted on a red reflective background or
consist of a retroreflective panel of the same size.
W1-6
CASE I
NOTES:
4'M in.
1.
Yellow Reflectors
W14-1
This index applicable to residential and minor streets

only. Major streets to be evaluated on a case by case
basis.
DEAD
END
CASE I
2.
Yellow
"T"-intersection-Two-Way arrows and reflectors
Reflectors
are optional. The need should be based on a review
CASE II
W14-1
Red Reflectors
of each location.
W 1 -7
3.
For additional details on aluminum round post,

sign panel material and bolts, nuts and washers
see Index Nos. 11860.
4.
W1-6
DEAD
END
XXX FT
Case I Installation - The arrow panels and object
travel lane.
5.
Dead end sign shall be posted a sufficient advance

distance to permit the vehicle operator to avoid the
Supplemental sign with

distance panel, to be
"
8
1
R1-1
STOP
but not less than 12' from the edge of the
1
8
"
markers shall be located approximately 20',
used as needed
dead end by turning off, if possible, at the nearest

intersecting street.
6.
For pavement marking see Index No. 17346
7.
No guardrail is required unless special field

conditions require its use.
Reflective Buttons
Shall Have A
Zee Bracket
3" Minimum Diameter

CASE I
Wind Beam
CASE I
Yellow Reflectors
Yellow Reflectors
.080" Aluminum
Sign Panel
R6-1L
R6-1L
6" White
6" White
Nose Widths less than 30'
Nose Widths 30' and Greater
Object markers shall be installed on 2" x
1
8"
Aluminum Round Post.
R6-1L
3
8"
R1-2
R6
1
R
Aluminum Button Head Bolt with Nut and
Lockwasher or
24" White
15
16"
Stainless Steel Hex
Head Bolt with Flat Washer under Head and

R6-1L
R6-1L
R6-1L
installed in accordance with Index No. 11860.

R6-1L
11:
45:
01 AM
Lockwasher under Nut. Post foundation shall be
24" White
DIVIDED
200'
R6-1R
R6-1R
R1-1
R6-3a
HIGHWAY
R1-1
DIVIDED
12/3/2015
R6-3a
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
HIGHWAY
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC CONTROLS FOR STREET TERMINATIONS
NO.
17349
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
18"
18"
18"
** Note:
Two assemblies are required; one for each side
1 MILE
of the ramp, showing those services in each particular

direction from the ramp terminal.
Edge Of Pav't
24"
18"
they be placed within 100' of another sign.
30"
18"
conflict with existing signs and in no case should
8'
-0"
Ramp mounted signs shall be installed to avoid
24"
24"
DETAIL "A"
9"
(1 To 3 Symbols)
See
Detail "B"
Or
** One Post Service Signs
Detail "C"
See Detail "D"
DETAIL "D"
Proposed
50
0'
begining of deceleration lane.
EXIT
Proposed
Sign to be installed at
City
Approximate Position Of
Guide Sign
City
EXIT 0
Second Motorist Service Sign
Supplemental
EXIT
See
Guide Sign
Detail "A"
G
City
1 MILE
(Details "B" Or "C") For Interchanges

With Two Exit Ramps
800'
1000'
7'
24"
24"
800'
8'
NOTE
When approved for attachment to the
5'
30"
advance guide signs, up to 3 services
GENERAL NOTES
may be used for an exit. The symbol

signs shall be suspended from the
guide sign panel or existing wind
beams. Symbol signs are not to be
connected to existing sign posts.
1.
Only those services meeting criteria established by the Department and approved by the State
8'
Traffic Operations Engineer for each interchange shall be shown. Symbol signs for motorist
The mounting height of the advance
services shall always appear in the following order reading from left to right and top
7'
to bottom: Gas, Food, Lodging, Phone * , Hospital, Camping.
DETAIL "C"
guide sign shall be increased, where

necessary, to provide 8' between
the level of the pavement edge and
* The phone symbol shall not be shown whenever any Gas, Food, Lodging or Camping symbol appears.
DETAIL "B"
(4 Symbols)
the bottom of the guide sign, prior
11:
45:
01 AM
to mounting the supplementary panel.

2.
Symbols shall appear consecutively on the sign with no positions left blank or reserved
(4 To 6 Symbols)
for intermediate symbols not currently approved for a particular interchange.

All motorist service signs to have White Legend and Border with Blue Background.
4.
For mounting details see Index 11200 for Type "A" breakaway or Index 11860 for Type "C" Frangibility.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
3.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SIGNING FOR MOTORIST SERVICES
NO.
17350
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Sign No. FTP-10-06
Sign No. FTP-11-06
Sign No. FTP-12-06
Sign No. FTP-13-06
FTP-12-06
FTP-11-06
FTP-10-06
FTP-13-04
800'
4,480'
Note:
Roadway not drawn to scale

Distances shown are adequate for driver communication
but may be altered slightly if conditions require.
Notes:
1. Signs and sign structures shall be erected in accordance
with the details shown on Index No. 11200.
2. Sign FTP-12-06 shall be located on the Welcome Center
grounds in proximity to the building and as far from the
main line roadway as possible (2 signs back to back).
3. Sign FTP-10-06, 11-06, 12-06 shall be located as limited
access highways only.
Sign No. FTP-14-06
4. All legend to be Series E.
5. See Index No. 17355 for sign details.
Note: Sign FTP-14-06 shall be used as a supplemental guide sign at
11:
45:
02 AM
interchanges which have a Tourist Information Center approved
12/3/2015
for such signing (locate half-way between normal guide signs)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
FOR LIMITED ACCESS HIGHWAYS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WELCOME CENTER SIGNING
NO.
17351
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
SI
GN NO
.FT
P1
5
B0
6
SI
GN NO
.FT
P1
5
A0
6
SI
GN NO
.FT
P1
2
0
6
SI
GN NO
.FT
P1
5
C0
6
FTP-15A-06
FTP-15B-06
FTP-15C-06
FTP-12-06
2,240'
FTP-12-06
800'
2,240'
s
n
o
i
t
i
d
n
lCo
a
r
r Ru
m Fo
mu
i
x
'Ma
0
0
8
s
n
o
i
t
i
d
n
lCo
a
r
r Ru
m Fo
mu
i
n
'Mi
0
5
Notes:
1.
Signs and sign structures shall be erected in accordance

with the details shown on Index 11200.
2.
Sign FTP-12-06 shall be located on the Welcome Center grounds

in proximity to the building and as far from the Main Line
Roadway as possible (2 signs back to back).
3.
All legend to be Series E.
4.
One sign FTP-15A-06 or 15B-06 should be used depending on
12/3/2015
11:
45:
02 AM
speed, roadside development & geometric conditions.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
FOR PRIMARY HIGHWAYS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
WELCOME CENTER SIGNING
NO.
17351
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
40'
20'
10'
10'
Yellow
Black
40'
Black
Yellow
Black
Solid Yellow
15'
15'
40'
ALTERNATING SKIP LINE
SOLID LINE WITH SKIP
40'
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
White
15'
15'
Yellow
Yellow
SKIP LINE
40'
40'
SKIP LINE WITH TWO-WAY LEFT TURN LANE

40'
15'
10'
10'
Solid Yellow
20'
Yellow
Black
40'
White
10'
10'
SOLID LINE WITH ALTERNATING SKIP

'
5
1
Black
Double Yellow
Black
Yellow
Black
Yellow
40'
10'
20'
10'
ALTERNATING SKIP LINE WITH TWO-WAY LEFT TURN LANE
DOUBLE SOLID LINE

1.
Reflective Pavement Markers shall be spaced at 40' on all skip lane

lines and skip center lines. This spacing may be reduced to 20'
if specifically called for in the plans.
40'
White
11:
45:
03 AM
15'
2.
The spacing on solid lines and solid/skip combination lines shall be 40'.
3.
All RPM's shall be offset 1" from solid longitudinal lines.
4.
These spacings may be reduced for sharp curves if required.
5.
All RPM's shall be class "B".
LAST
REVISION
01/01/10
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
MULTILANE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF
DESIGN STANDARDS
REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
NO.
17352
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
NOTES
1. Set Raised Pavement Markers 1" from line.
2. Center the Raised Pavement Markers between chevrons.
l
e
v
a
f Tr
no
o
i
t
c
e
r
Di
6" White Edge Line
f
no
o
i
t
c
e
r
Di
18" White
l
e
v
a
Tr
6" Yellow Edge Line
6" Double Yellow
Gore Area
45
Median Or Island
45
Beginning of physical gore
45
8" Solid White

18" Yellow
Di
r
e
c
t
i
o
no
f Tr
a
v
e
l
6" Double Yellow
Di
r
e
c
t
i
o
no
f Tr
a
v
e
l
6" Yellow Edge Line
RPM PLACEMENT FOR TRAFFIC CHANNELIZATION AT GORE

(TRAFFIC FLOWS IN SAME DIRECTION)
6" Yellow Edge Line
RPM PLACEMENT FOR TRAFFIC SEPARATION

(TRAFFIC FLOWS IN OPPOSITE DIRECTION)
NOTE
Raised pavement markers (Bidirectional White/Red) should be used in all gores of this type
8" White
Direction of Travel
Raised Reflective
Marker
18"
White
1"
45
Edge Of Pavt.
Lane Lines
4"
PLACEMENT OF RPM'S ON SHOULDER MARKINGS
Right side of the roadway shown. For the left side of roadway, the pavement marking
is yellow and oriented opposite hand.
1"
For Placement Of RPM's On Ramps See Index 17345.
Bi-Directional White/Red RPM's

Install Markers At 20' Center To Center
Install Markers At 20' Center To Center
1"
11:
45:
03 AM
PLACEMENT OF RPM'S AT INTERSECTIONS

Reflective Pavt. Markers To
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Be Bidirectional Yellow
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TYPICAL PLACEMENT OF
DESIGN STANDARDS
REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT MARKERS
NO.
17352
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
4' Maximum Sign Width

18"or 30"
12"
12"
1" Min.
1" Min.
1" Min.
SINGLE POST SIGN EXAMPLES

4'-0"
16"
1" Min.
1'
-6"
16"
2'-1
Maximum
Combined
Sign Height
Sign Height
16"
4'-0"
2'
-6"
Combined
1" Min.
7'M in. (
10'M ax.
)
1
2"
Combined
6'-4"
16"
4'-3"
2'-1
Maximum
Sign Height
3'-8"
Maximum
16"
5'
30"
1
2"
16"
7'
12' Min.
12' Min.
6' Min.
Sign Panel
7'M in. (
8'M ax.
)
6' Min.
STEEL U-CHANNEL TRIPLE POST

DIRECT BURIAL
3'-6"
12' Min.
SINGLE POST
ALUMINUM
ROUND TUBE
6' Min.
TWO POST STEEL I BEAM

WITH SLIP BASE
MULTIPOST SIGN EXAMPLES
General Notes:
1'
-0"
6'-0"
DESIGN FOR TOURIST ORIENTED DIRECTIONAL SIGNS

(Options for Aluminum Round Tube, Steel I Beam and Steel U-Channel.)
Signs Must Comply With Rule 14-51, Florida Administrative Code.
2.
Text for Signs Shall Be 6" Type C Lettering.
3.
For Aluminum Round Tube Assembly and Foundation Detail, see
1'
-4"
6'-0"
1.
Single Post Configuration
Two Post Configuration
Three Post Configuration
Index 11860.
6'-0"
5.
For Steel I Beam Assembly and Foundation Detail, see Index 11200.
For Steel U-Channel Assembly and Foundation Detail, See Work Zone
Sign Supports in Index 600. Galvanize Steel U-Channel in accordance
1'
-4"
4.
No. of Signs
3-1/2" X 0.125"
(Total Area)
Aluminum Tube
Direct Burial
with ASTM 123.
4" X 0.125"
Aluminum Tube
Slip Base
S3X5.7
Steel I Beam
Slip Base
W6X12
Steel I Beam
Slip Base
3 lb/ft
4 lb/ft
Steel U-Channel
Direct Burial
Steel U-Channel
Lap Splice
11:
45:
04 AM
1'
-4"
6'-0"
12/3/2015
1'
-4"
6'-0"
10
OK
OK
NA
NA
NA
NA
16-20
NA
OK
NA
NA
NA
NA
14-16
NA
NA
OK
OK
OK
OK
22-24
NA
NA
OK
OK
NA
OK *
30-32
NA
NA
38
NA
NA
OK
NA
NA
NA
OK
NA
NA
* Limited to 22 s.f. Total Sign Area.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
NA
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TOURIST ORIENTED DIRECTIONAL SIGNS
NO.
17354
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
FREEWAY USE
OTHER THAN FREEWAY USE
11'-6"
10"
4'-0"
6"
6"
6"E
6"E
6"
6"
10"E
8"
6"E
1'
-6"
3'
-6"
8"
3'
-6"
6"
10"E
5'
-6"
4'-0"
7'-0"
6"E
6"E
6"
6"
10"E
6"E
6"E
10"
6"
6"
6"
34.3"
6.85"
11.5"
115"
6.85"
11.5"
7.5"
69"
5.8"
7.5"
36.4"
5.8"
6" Series E Legend
Green Background
FTP-1-06
10" Series E Legend
FTP-2-06
6" Series E Legend
FTP-3-06
6" Series E Legend
FTP-4-06
11'-6" X 5'-6"
White Background
7' X 3'-6"
White Background
4' X 3'-6"
Green Background
4' X 1'-6"
9" Radii 2" Border
Black Legend and Border
6" Radii 2" Border
6" Radii 2" Border
3" Radii 2" Border

Note:
FTP-4-06 to be
used with FTP-3-06
14'-0"
12'-0"
14'-6"
9"
13"
10"
10"E
10"E
12"E
10"
10"E
7'
-0"
10"
8"
10"E
7'
-6"
12"E
75"
8"
8"
10"E
12"E
8"
10"E
8"
12"
12"E
10"E
10"E
8"
13"
13"
10"E
10"E
9"
9"
10"
15"
138"
11"
15"
152"
46.3"
11"
81.4"
46.3"
10" Series E Legend
14.5"
115"
14.5"
White Background
FTP-5-06
12" and 10" Series E Legend
FTP-6A-06
On Interstate Station
FTP-6B-06
10" Series E Legend
FTP-7A-06
1O" Series E Legend
14' X 8'
Green Background
14'-6" X 7'-6"
Delete Pickups-Vans,
14'-6" X 7'-6"
White Background
12' X 7'
Green Background
12" Radii 2" Border
12" Radii 2" Border
and reduce Sign height
12" Radii 2" Border
11" Radii 2" Border
accordingly.
FREEWAY USE
FTP-9B-06-LEFT ARROW
17'-0"
14'-6"
6'-6"
12"
12"
7"
7"
12"
8"
15"E
24"
57.1"
12"E
10"E
31.3"
10.45"
10.45"
12"
11"
152"
10"E
12"
12"
14.15"
14.15"
175.7"
11"
FTP-7B-06
FTP-8-06
12' X 7'
6'-6"X 2'
11" Radii 2" Border
3" Radii 2" Border
Note:
10" Series E Legend
10" Series E Legend
FTP-8-06 to be
FTP-9A-06
10" Series E Legend
FTP-10-06
12", 10" and 15" Series E Legend
Green Background
Green Background
used with FTP-7A-06
14'-6" X 7'
Green Background
17' X 6'-6"
Blue Background
& FTP-7B-06.
11" Radii 2" Border
10" Radii 2" Border
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
11:
45:
06 AM
12/3/2015
81.4"
8"
8"
7'
-0"
10"E
10"
31.3"
12"E
10"E
51"
2'
-0"
10"E
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SPECIAL SIGN DETAILS
NO.
17355
SHEET
NO.
1of 11
12'-6"
16'-6"
7'
-6"
8"
12"E
9.5"
8"
6"E
8"
8"
13.7"
8"E
13.3"E
6"
8"E
8"
10"
7'
-0"
12"E
8"E
5'
-6"
12"
16'-0"
6'-0"
8"
13.3"E
10"
8"E
24.5"
10"E
20"
8"
13.7"
12"
8"
8.1"
11.15"
110"
32"
12.55"
11.15"
175.7"
7.6"
56.8"
166.9"
12.55"
7.6"
FTP-11-06
FTP-12-06
FTP-13-06
FTP-14-06
16'-6" X 7'-6"
12'-6" X 4'-6"
6' 0" X 5'-6"
16'-0" X 7'-0"
12" Radii 2" Border
7" Radii 2" Border
9" Radii 2" Border
11" Radii 2" Border
12" Series E Legend
8" Series E Legend
13.3 and 10" Series E Legend
Blue Background
Blue Background
Blue Background
Blue Background
2'-6"
3"
11'-0"
5"B
2.5"
8"E
5"B
3'
-0"
9"
4'
-6"
6"
8"E
6"
8"E
20"
12"E
2.5"
8"E
9"
9"
15"
8"
9"
30"
72"
56"
30"
20"
56"
3"
7.45"
117.1"
7.45"
3.75"
3.75"
22.5"
FTP-15A-06
FTP-15B-06
FTP-15C-06
FTP-16-10
11'-0" X 4'-6"
11'-0" X 5'-0"
11'-0" X 5'-6"
2'-6" X 3'-0"
7" Radii 2" Border
8" Radii 2" Border
9" Radii 2" Border
1.5" Radii 3/4" Border
8" Series E Legend
8" Series E Legend
5" Series B Legend
Blue Background
Blue Background
Blue Background
Green Background
White Legend, Border, and Florida Symbol
1'-0"
1'-0"
1'-0"
1'-6"
levels:GSCOLORFILL|GSBWFILL|GSOUTLINE
2"C
1.2"
FTP-20-06
1"
1"
1"C
1"
1"C
1"
1"C
1"
1"C
2"
Border
1" Series C Legend

11:
45:
07 AM
1.5"
FTP-19-06
2.4"
1' X 1'-6"
4" Radii
3
8"
Color
Background
Legend and Border
1.5"
1'
-6"
3.25"
11.5"
1.5"
FTP-21-06
1'-6"
1'-6" X 2'-6"
2" Radii
3
8"
Border
Color
Background
Legend and Border
1.5"C
1.5"C
1.5"
White Background
1.4"
1.4"
Bottom
Blue
White
Blue
White
White
Black
White
Black
3.85"
10.3"
3.85"
5.8"
3.1"
1"
1"
FTP-22-06
1"
1' X 6"
1" Radii
3
8"
Border
1" Series C Legend
Supplemental Panel
White Background
for the FTP-20-06
and FTP-21-06 signs
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Green Legend and Border
9.2"
Top
12"
3.1"
1.5"
1.5"C
1.5" Series C Legend
Top 4" Series D

Bottom
1"C
3.25"
1.5"C
Top
1"
2.5"
Border
Bottom 2" Series C
1"C
0'
-6"
Blue
of Text
1' X 1'-6"
3
Radii 8"
1" Spacing
13"
1'
-0"
2"C
1.2"
1.5"
1.5" Series C
Between Lines
W hite
1'
-6"
1'
-6"
of Text
Top
6"
1" Spacing
Between Lines
1.2"
panelStyle:handicap
constructPanels:36|24|18
constructPanelMode:0
panelRoundCorners:0
fine sign.ssi
All Letters
1" Series C
4"D
2.5"
1.5"
All Letters
Bottom
2.5"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17355
SHEET
NO.
2 of 11
3
4"
1
2"
20
3
4"
3
4"
1
2"
3
4"
20
24" x 24"
8"
30" x 24"
8"
30" x 24"
1-3
15"
48" x 36"
12"
48" x 36"
1
2"
9"
10
24"
1
2"
24" x 24"
8"
8"
1
2"
10"
24"
2"
1-2
20
41"
SIZE
10"
1
1 2"
PANEL
SERIES
SIZE
20
NUMERAL
DIGITS
1
2"
3
4"
3
4"
2"
Note:
3
4"
3
4"
5"
15"
1
2"
36"
2"
24"
30"
1. The 24" X 24" panel shall only be used for

a 3 digit route when the panel is to be
7"
used on a sign cluster with other 24" X 24"
2"
panels.
2. Florida Route Marker shall have Black Legend
with White Background.
48"
3 or 4 DIGITS
1 or 2 DIGITS
3. Stroke width of State Outline shall be 1".

4. 2" Radii, 58" Border.
INDEPENDENT USE OTHER THAN FREEWAY
INDEPENDENT USE FOR FREEWAY
K
C
S
H
0000
COUNTY
E
F
F
Notes :
E
Varies
1.
All Legend Series "D".
2.
Color: Yellow Legend and Border

on Blue Background.
1 OR 2 DIGITS
3 OR MORE DIGITS
3.
When used on a guide sign, marker

must be overlaid on a rectangular
Yellow Background as shown in chart.
DIMENSIONS
A
30"
24"
26"
12"
36"
30"
32"
15"
42"
36"
38"
15"
SIGN
B
1
8"
42"
3
4"
10"
4"
4"
8"
8"
1
2"
36"
1
2"
1
2"
3"
3"
12"
1
2"
1
8"
42"
3
4"
8"
4"
4"
12"
6"
48"
3
4"
8"
5"
12"
8"
A
1
4"
3
4"
1
4"
1
4"
1
4"
22"
5"
**
1
4"
4 DIGIT
1
4"
3
4"
1
4"
11"
POST MOUNTED
1
4"
1
4"
GUIDE SIGN USE
21
25
Notes:
1
4"
OVERHEAD
12/3/2015
REVISIO N
07/01/14
1
8"
7
8"
18
1
4"
1
2"
42"x 42"
3
8"
22"
3
4"
5"
48"x 48"
7
8"
29
5"
3
4"
5
8"
25
3
4"
1
4"
10
52"x 52"
M1
6 COUNTY ROUTE MARKER DETAI
L
FTP-18-06
FTP-17-06
LAST
4 DIGIT
for Guide Sign.
Numbers are series D.
FL
ORI
DA ROUTE MARKER
REVISION
Florida marker shall have Black Legend with White Background.
2. Stroke width of State outline to be 1

3.
3
4"
3 DIGIT
OVERHEAD
1.
3
8"
2 DIGIT
OVERHEAD
11:
45:
07 AM
25
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17355
SHEET
NO.
3 of 11
24"
0'-9"
1"
1'-0"
panelStyle:FTP-26-06.ssi
R 5 "
1"
1.5"
1"D
"
1"D
1"
1"
1"
1'
-0"
.5
3
2
5
1"D
24"
4
"
R5
"
2"
1.5"
1"
12"
1.55"
5.9"
8.9"
1.55"
1.55"
1.55"
2.
5
1
.5
"
1"D
4"
5 "
5 "
3"
1"
1"
5"
1"D
1"D
2
5
1"D
1"
1"
R 4"
1"
1'
-0"
R
R2
.
5
2
5
1"D
1"D
FTP-25-06
FTP-26-06
9" X 1'-0"
2"
3
Radii 8"
1'
Border
X 1'
2" Radii
3
8"
Border
1" Series D Legend
1" Series D Legend
White Background
White Background
FTP-23-06
2' X 2'
1.5" Radii
5
8"
Border
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF
ACCESS FOR HEARING LOSS
Blue Background
24"
18.4"
2.8"
2.8"
1"
1"
"
"
2
"
5"
4"
4"D
1'
-0"
24"
"
2'-0"
2'-0"
"
2"
4"
4"C
"
2"
4"
2" 31
4"
4"D
3'
-0"
20
R 2
1"
21
"
R 18 "
4"
4"
3"D
"
2"
2"
4"
2"
"
1"
2.1"
"
19.8"
2.1"
3"D
7"
5"
1"
1.8"
FTP-29-06
1
5"
14"
2" Radii
5"
FTP-24-06
5
8"
20.4"
1.8"
FTP-30-06
2'-0" X 3'-0"
Border
5
8"
4" Series C Legend
3" Radii
Yellow Background
White Background
Border
2' X 2'
1.5" Radii
5
8"
Border
Blue Background
INTERNATIONAL TDD SYMBOL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
2'-0" X 1'-0"
22
11:
45:
08 AM
1"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17355
SHEET
NO.
4 of 11
8'-0"
4"D
8"D
4"
3.5"
0.5"
4"
10"D
2
'6
"
5"
4'
-0"
3"
4"D
3'
-0"
8'-0"
9"
12.6"
12"E
5"C
4'
-0"
2'-0"
2"
10"
5"C
3"
4"
3"C
8"D
8"D
3"
15.8"
9"
5"
3"C
3"
Optional Location
3"C
3"
1.8"
20.4"
10.45"
6.5"
6.5"
27.4"
FTP-31-06
Border
Top 4" Series D Legend
Bottom 3" Series C Legend
8' X 4'
White Background
6" Radii
Series D Legend
3
4"
Border
2'-0"
Yellow Background Top
FTP-32-06
12" Series E and 8" Series D Legend
FTP-33-06
White Background Bottom
8' X 4'
White Background
2'-6" X 2'-6"
6" Radii
2" Radii
3
4"
Border
Yellow Background
Border
9'-6"
3'-0"
2'-0"
2.5"
5"
4"
8"
4"D
8"E
4"
8"
4"D
8"E
4"D
2.2"
0.5"
2.2"
4"
4"E
4"D
3'
-0"
4"E
3'
-0"
2'
-6"
3
4"
5" Series C Legend
2"
4"E
4"
8"
4"D
2.1"
4"
6'
-0"
2' X 3'
3" Radii
75.1"
1.8"
FTP-30A-06
5
8"
10.45"
of 12" Yellow Signal
8"E
8"
4"E
10"E
12"
8"E
5"
2.5"
1.8"
20.4"
1.8"
8"
2.8"
FTP-35-06
FTP-34-06
2' X 3'
2' X 2'-6"
3" Radii
5
8"
Border
30.4"
2.8"
7.6"
98.8"
FTP-36-06
FTP-37-06
3' X 3'
9'-6"X 6'
5" Radii
9" Radii 2" Border
4"Series D and E Legend
Bottom 4" and 10" Series E Legend
4" Series D Legend
8" Series E Legend
White Background
Yellow Background Top
Green Background
White Background
3" Radii
5
8"
Border
3'-0"
White Background Bottom
3'-6"
4'-0"
State Line Sign
2'-6"
6"
8"
5"
7.6"
5"
3"C
2"C
5"
6"D
4"D
4"
6"C
6"D
3.15"
5.6"
FTP-38-06
5.7"
3' X 2'-6"
4" Radii
3
4"
24.6"
5.7"
Border
6" Radii
3
4"
36.8"
4"C
6"
5"
35.7"
3.15"
3.1"
23.8"
3.1"
5.6"
Border
White Background
White Background
07/01/14
4"
6"C
4' X 4'
6" Series D Legend
LAST
4"C
5"
FTP-39-06
4" Series D Legend
REVISION
4"
8"
5"
REVISIO N
11:
45:
09 AM
6"C
6"D
4"D
12/3/2015
5"
7"
4"
4"C
3'
-0"
4'
-0"
2'
-6"
4"D
4'
-0"
7"
4"
Freeway Sign
FTP-40-06
3" and 6" Series C Legend
FTP-41-06
3'-6" X 4'
White Background
2'-6"X 3'
6" Radii
3
4"
Border
4" Radii
DESCRIPTION:
Border
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS

White Background
3
4"
NO.
17355
SHEET
NO.
5 of 11
4'-0"
9'-0"
4'-0"
3"
20"
Blue
6"
3"
21"
31"
1.5"
8"
3"
8"D
6"
4"C
4"
8"
3"
4"C
4"
4"C
8"D
6"D
4"
8"
3"
3"
13"
43.5"
1.5"
6"D
6"D
4"D
3"
4"
8"D
3'
-0"
Green
8"
4"D
4'
-0"
2"
2"EM
2"
2"EM
2"
2"EM
2"
Yellow
2'
-6"
4"
4"C
6'
-0"
8.5"
4'-0"
4"C
8"D
6"D
3"
4"
8"
4"
Blue
Black with
White stripe
38"
5"
91"
39.1"
4.45"
8.5"
4.45"
FTP-43-06
4'X 2'-6"
Bottom 2" Series EM Legend
4' X 4'
3" Radii
White Background
6" Radii
Top 4" Series C Legend
Blue Legend and Border
1" Border
3'-0"
Bottom 6" Series D Legend
FTP-44-06
8" Series D Legend
FTP-45-06
Blue Background
9' X 6'
White Background
4' X 3'
9" Radii
5" Radii
3
4"
Border
3"
Border
3'-6"
2"
3"D
2"D
3"
4"
4"
4"C
4"C
3"
4"C
3"
3"
5'
-0"
2"
2'
-6"
4'
-0"
White Background
3
4"
3'-6"
2'-0"
30"
4" Series C Legend
18"
5'
-6"
FTP-42-06
8.5"
5"
30"
30"
3"
3"
4"C
3"
4"C
4"
4"C
4"
2"
3"
4"C
2"D
3"D
4"
2"
3"
5.3"
26.2"
4.9"
FTP-46-06
4.9"
3' X 4'
5" Radii
FTP-47-06
3.25"
17.5"
3.25"
2' X 2'-6"
3
4"
Border
3" Radii
3" Series D Legend
5
8"
Border
2" Series D Legend
White Background
Green Florida Symbol
Black Legend, Border and Man Belt Symbol
White Background
Green Florida Symbol
Black Legend, Border and Man Belt Symbol
31.4"
5.3"
5.3"
31.4"
FTP-48-06
FTP-49-06
3'-6" X 5'
3'-6" X 5'-6"
6" Radii
6" Radii
4" Series C Legend
4" Series C Legend
Green Background
Green Background
White Legend, Border and Symbol
White Legend, Border and Symbol
4'-6"
5.3"
Municipality Name Optional
3'-6"
2'-0"
3"
4.5"
6"
4"E
5"C
4"C
4"
6"
3"
2'
-6"
2"
2
2
"
3"
2'
-0"
2"
2'
-0"
6
0
3"
4"E
5"C
4"C
3"
3"
5"C
6"
4"E
212"
11:
45:
09 AM
1
"
2
4.5"
312"
3"
4.5"
5.6"
4'-6" X
3" Radii
Detail for FTP-48-06 and FTP-49-06
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
45"
4.5"
30.8"
5.6"
4.4"
15.2"
4.4"
FTP-50-06
2'
3
4"
Border
4" Series C Legend
FTP-51-06
4" Series E Legend
FTP-52-06
Yellow Background
3'
White Background
2' X 2'-6"
2'
3" Radii
3
4"
Border
3" Radii
DESCRIPTION:
5" Series C Legend

White Background
Border
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
5
8"
NO.
17355
SHEET
NO.
6 of 11
2'-0"
4'-0"
6'-6"
2'-0"
7"
17"
4.5"
8.5"
8"D
30"
5"C
15"
21"
5.4"
1"
7.5"
9.5"
8"D
2.70"
3.75"
.5"
8.8"
3"
4'
-0"
17.75"
2'
-6"
5"C
6"
10.5"
5'
-0"
2'
-6"
3"
6"
3.5"
7" 6.5"
3.25"
4.5"
6"D
5"C
10"D
5"D
2.8"
7"
FTP-53-06
5"
14"
3" Radii
FTP-55L-06
4' X 5'
Border
FTP-54R-06 for
6" Radii
3
4"
3.5"
17"
3" Radii
6.75"
FTP-56-06
3.5"
2' X 2'-6"
(Right Turn Arrow)
Border
64.5"
6.75"
7"
34"
FTP-54L-06
5"
2' X 2'-6"
5
8"
7"
5.8"
4.5"
6'-6"X 4'
3
8"
Border
3
4"
FTP-55R-06 for
6" Radii
(Right Turn Arrow)
8" and 6" Series D Legend
or Transit Administrator
Border
Design Project Manager
5" Series C Legend
10" Series D Legend
5" Series D Legend
White Background
White Background
White Background
Blue Background
will supply correct 1-8XX
number.
6'-6"
6'-6"
3'-0"
3'-0"
7"
7"
3.5"
3.5"
8"D
8"D
4"C
4"C
6"
8"D
4"C
3"
6"
3"
3"C
6"D
3"C
4'
-0"
2'
-0"
4"C
6"
3"
4'
-0"
2'
-0"
3"
8"D
6"
6"D
3.5"
3.5"
7"
7"
4.35"
27.3"
65.1"
6.45"
4.35"
6.45"
27.5"
4.25"
4.25"
10.65"
FTP-56A-06
FTP-57-06
3' X 2'
FTP-58-06
6'-6" X 4'
56.7"
10.65"
FTP-59-06
3' X 2'
6'-6" X 4'
3" Radii
6" Radii
3" Radii
6" Radii
8"and 6" Series D Legend
Blue Background
Blue Background
Blue Background
Blue Background
number.
number.
number.
number.
3'-0"
3'-0"
3'-0"
3.5"
9.4"
4.5"
5"C
4"C
4"C
5"
2"
2'
-0"
2'
-0"
3"
4"C
5"
3"
2"
4"C
3"C
3"C
11:
45:
10 AM
24.2"
4.3"
FTP-60-06
FTP-61-06
3' X 2'
3' X 2'
4.6"
4.3"
7.3"
27.4"
34.2"
26.8"
4.6"
7.3"
FTP-65-06
3' X 1'-6"
3
4"
3
4"
FTP-62-06
2" Radii
3' X
4" Series D Legend
Yellow Background
2" Radii
number.
Yellow Background Black Legend and Border
3" Radii
3" Radii
4"and 3" Series C Legend
Blue Background
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
15.5"
5.9"
5.9"
07/01/14
4"D
3.5"
4.5"
LAST
3"
5"C
4"C
3.5"
REVISION
4"D
1'
-6"
3
'0
"
3.5"
Border
3'
3
4"
Border 4"and 5" Series C Legend
White Background
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
Border
NO.
17355
SHEET
NO.
7 of 11
3'-0"
4'-0"
3'-0"
4"
5"
3.5"
16"
12"
4"
5'
-0"
3"
4"D
4"
4'
-0"
1'
-6"
4"D
7"D
5"
5"D
4"
3.5"
4.6"
26.8"
4.6"
7"D
5"D
5"
4"
5"D
7"D
4"
5"
FTP-65-06
FTP-66-06
3' X 1'-6"
4'X 5'
2" Radii
3
4"
Border
2" Radii
FTP-67-06
3.7"
3
4"
40.6"
3.7"
3.5"
29"
3.5"
3' X 4'
Border
2" Radii
3
4"
Border
4" Series D Legend
7" Series D Legend
5" Series D Legend
White Background
Blue Background
Blue Background
Sign Mounting Holes Can Be Punched Or Field Drilled With
Sign Mounting Holes Can Be Punched Or Field Drilled With
No Obstruction To Text Or Symbols From Holes Or Bolts.
No Obstruction To Text Or Symbols From Holes Or Bolts.
DETAIL for FTP-66 AND FTP-67
2'-6"
0'-9"
3'-6"
0'-9"
4"
1"
1"
3"D
3.5"
3"
5"C
4.4"
4.6"
2"D
0.2"
2.6"
3"
2'
-6"
6"
1'
-6"
1'
-3"
2.6"
0.2"
3"
2'
-6"
0.2"
2"D
3"
08
5"C
3"
2"D
2"
0.2"
0.2"
3.5"
4"
0.2"
4.6"
7"C
2"D
2.6"
4.85"
4.85"
1"
4.4"
32.3"
FTP-68A-06
1.5" Radii
2.65"
FTP-68B-06
9" X 1'-3"
3
4"
Border
24.7"
FTP-70-06
2.65"
3'-6" X 2'-6"
1"
9" X 1'-6"
See Standard Highway
Series B Legend
Signs Manual, Sign
1.5" Radii
White Background
R10-3b For Letter Size
Spacing And Symbol Sizes.
2.25" Radii
3
4"
Border
See Standard Highway
FTP-69-06
Series B Legend
Signs Manual, Sign
2'-6" X 2'-6"
White Background
R10-3b For Letter Size
4" Radii
Spacing And Symbol Sizes.
3
4"
Border
3
4"
Border
5" Series C and 7" Series C Legend
White Background
Blue Background
5'-6"
5'-6"
3
'0
"
5"
12.3"
8"D
5"
8"C
6"C
6"
8"D
6"C
8"C
3"
6"
2'
-6"
3"
2'
-6"
4
'0
"
14.8"
6"
6"D
4"
5"
6"C
8"D
8"C
11:
45:
11 AM
12.3"
5"
13.5"
FTP-71-06
21.7"
13.5"
7.2"
51.6"
7.2"
4' X 4'
2" Radii
52.7"
6.65"
FTP-74-06
5'-6" X 2'-6"
3
4"
Border
18.3"
29"
4" Radii
18.3"
8" Series C Legend
FTP-72-06
Yellow Background
3' X 3'
2" Radii
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
6.65"
14.8"
3
4"
Border
6" Series C Legend
FTP-73-06
Yellow Background
5'-6" X 2'-6"
4" Radii
3
4"
Border
Border
6" Series D Legend
Blue Background
Blue Background
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
3
4"
8" Series D Legend
NO.
17355
SHEET
NO.
8 of 11
5'-6"
2'-0"
3'-0"
5'-6"
2"
1'
-3"
6"D
51.6"
7.2"
3.4"
3'
-0"
59.2"
3"
15"
9"
5"
3"
3.4"
3"
8"D
7.2"
2'
-0"
1'
-3"
6"
2"
2"
4"C
2"D
2"
2"
4"C
2"D
6"
4"
FTP-75-06
FTP-76-06
FTP-77-06
5'-6" X 1'-3"
5'-6" X 1'-3"
3' X 3'
1" Radii
1" Radii
5" Radii
6" Series D Legend
8" Series D Legend
4" Series C Legend
3" Radii
Blue Background
Blue Background
White Background with Blue Circle Background
2" Series D Legend
White Legend
White Legend
White Legend and Black Border
White Background with Blue Circle Background
4.9"
26.2"
4.9"
4.1"
FTP-78-06
3
4"
Border
15.8"
4.1"
2' X 2'
3
4"
Border
White Legend and Black Border
3'-0"
4'-0"
2'-0"
3"
3"
6"D
2"
10'-0"
6"D
4"D
3"
0.8"
28"
3"
0.8"
25"
2"
0.5"
16"
9.8"
12"D
47.2"
10"D
35.2"
8"
5'
-0"
2'
-6"
5'
-0"
4'
-0"
10"E
21.5"
6"D
22.4"
9.8"
20"
13"
8"
96.1"
11.95"
FTP-79-06
FTP-80-06
4' X 5'
6" Radii
3' X 4'
3
4"
Border
11.95"
FTP-81-06
2' X 2'-6"
5" Radii
3
4"
Border
3" Radii
3
4"
Border
6"and 10" Series D Legend
FTP-83-08
10" Series E Legend
Top Yellow Background with Black Legend and Black Border
10'-0" X 5'-0"
Green Background
Bottom White Background with Black Legend and Border
8" Radii
White Legend
2'-6"
2'-0"
3.75"
A
B
ARROW HEAD
3.125
3.625
6.375
.5
.625
E
A
20.5"
3'
-0"
5"D
4"
G
3'
-0"
13.2"
3
'0
"
3.5"
5"D
4"
5"D
11:
45:
12 AM
C
3.5"
ARROW BODY
2' X 3'
White Background
3.5"
3.5"
13.4"
22.5"
17"
6.25
3.125
3.125
D
3.125
9.25
20.5
FTP-84-09
5" Series D Legend
3' X 3'
Yellow Background
1.5" Radii
Black Legend
REVISIO N
2.75"
3.5" C
2.75"
3.5" C
2.75"
3.5" C
23.18"
FTP-85-13
DESCRIPTION:
3.5" Series C Legend

White Background
3
4"
Border

INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
2.75"
3.75"
1.875" Radii
07/01/14
3.5" C
13.4"
3' X 2'-6"
LAST
YIELD ON
FLASHING
YELLOW
3.5"
5" Series D Legend
REVISION
3.5" C
ARROW
5"D
FTP-82-08
1.5" Radii
12/3/2015
13.2"
LEFT TURN
NO.
17355
SHEET
NO.
9 of 11
4
'0
"
4
'0
"
18.65"
18.65"
6"C
6"C
5"
5"
6"C
6"C
5"
5"
6"C
6"C
18.65"
18.65"
18.35"
4' X 4'
Border
6" Series C Legend
MOT-2-06
Orange Background
4' X 4'
4
'0
"
2" Radii
3
4"
18.35"
2" Radii
MOT-3-06
Orange Background
3
4"
19.15"
Border
Black Arrows and Border
MOT-4-06
4' X 4'
Orange Background
2" Radii
3
4"
Border
Black Arrows and Border
27.6"
6" Series C Legend
4' X 4'
2" Radii
Orange Background
3
4"
Border
22.4"
6"D
6"C
6"D
22.4"
5
'0
"
MOT-1-06
28.6"
18.2"
5
'0
"
28.9"
5
'0
"
18.2"
4.5"
4.5"
4.5"
6"D
6"D
6"C
6"D
4.5"
4.5"
4.5"
4.5"
6"D
6"D
6"D
4.5"
4.5"
6"D
6"D
6"C
4.5"
6"D
27.6"
19.15"
22.4"
22.4"
17.3"
30.7"
23.1"
17.3"
36.1"
23.1"
24.8"
32.6"
24.8"
22.6"
MOT-5-06
4' X 4'
2" Radii
3
4"
Border
6" Series C Legend
MOT-6-06
Orange Background
5' X 5'
2" Radii
3
4"
Border
6" Series D Legend
MOT-7-06
Orange Background
5' X 5'
2" Radii
3
4"
Border
6" Series D Legend
MOT-8-06
Orange Background
5' X 5'
2" Radii
4
'0
"
5
'0
"
22.6"
6" Series D Legend
Orange Background
3
4"
Border
3'-0"
23.1"
37.1"
2'-0"
17.65"
2"
3"
4"
6"D
6"C
6"B
6"
1"
2'
-0"
6"D
6"C
4"
6"D
6"
4"
6"D
3.35"
2"B
6"B
2"
"
2"B
5.3"
6"C
6"
11:
45:
13 AM
23.1"
17.65"
4.7"
25.8"
30.7"
MOT-9-06
5' X 5'
2" Radii
3
4"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
Border
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
3.35"
3"
2"
25.8"
14.65"
36"
26.6"
3"
4.7"
MOT-10-06
6" Series C Legend
MOT-11-06
6" Series B Legend
MOT-12-06
Orange Background
4' X 4'
Orange Background
3' X 2'
Blue Background
2' X 1'
2" Radii
Border
3"
14.65"
6" Series D Legend
3
4"
18"
2" Radii
3
4"
Border
2" Radii
DESCRIPTION:
Border
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
2" Series B Legend

White Background
3
4"
NO.
17355
SHEET
NO.
10 of 11
4'-6"
4'-6"
5.25"
4"
6"C
3.8"
4
'0
"
6'-0"
19.65"
SLOW DOWN
4"C
4.5"
6"D
4"C
4"
6"C
3'
-0"
4'
-0"
4.5"
6"D
3.7"
2'
-6"
4"
6"C
MY DADDY
WORKS HERE
4"
4"
4"C
6"D
4.5"
5"(1)
4"
5"(1)
3.7"
5"(1)
6"C
3.8"
4"C
19.65"
5.25"
4"
8.2"
55.6"
8.2"
8.45"
4.9"
12.8"
MOT-13-06 Freeway Sign
6" Series C Legend
MOT-14-06 Arterial Sign
4" Series C Legend
MOT-15-06
6' X 4'
White Background
4'-6" X 3'
White Background
4' X 4'
2" Radii
6" Radii
Border
5" Radii
3
4"
Border
3
4"
39.7"
Border
12.8"
6" Series D Legend
MOT-16-06
Orange Background
4'-6" X 2'-6"
4" Radii
5" Kids Series Legend
3
4"
Orange Background
Border
2'
4'-0"
4'-6"
1'-8"
5"(1)
4"C
6"D
4.5"
5"(1)
6"D
4"
3"
6"C
4"C
3"
4.5"
6"D
4"C
2'
-0"
3.7"
3.7"
WORKS HERE
C
L
6"
2'
-6"
2'
-6"
SLOW DOWN
MY MOMMY
1'-8"
19.2"
4
'0
"
3.8"
4.9"
8.45"
37.1"
3
4"
44.2"
4"
5"(1)
4"C
6"
3.8"
19.2"
6"
4.9"
44.2"
4.9"
2.9"
17.6"
30.2"
18.2"
2.9"
17.6"
6.3"
MOT-17-06
5" Kids Series Legend
MOT-18-10
6" Series D Legend
MOT-19-11
4" Series C Legend
G20-1
4'-6" X 2'-6"
Orange Background
4' X 4'
Orange Background
2' X 2'-6"
White Background
2' X 4'
2" Radii
1.13" Radii
Red Legend and Border
1.5" Radii
4" Radii
3
4"
Border
3
4"
Border
3
4"
Border
35.4"
6.3"
Orange Background
3
4"
Border
4'-0"
C
L
6"
6"
4"
2'
-0"
6"C
4"
4"
3.8"
40.4"
G20-2
1.5" Radii
3.8"
Orange Background
2' X 4'

3
4"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
Border
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
45:
14 AM
6"C
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17355
SHEET
NO.
11of 11
Notes:
1.
Bottom edge of signs shall be approximately at the

same elevation.
Type C
Type B
Type D
2.
Type B & C attachments with one hanger shall have

1
2'.
wind beams for signs wider than 3
The beams
shall extend to within 6" of the sign edge.

Span Wire Clamp
Type A
Catenary Wire
3.
Type B & C attachments for signs 4' and wider

shall have 2 hangers. Signs 7' and wider shall have
wind beams that extend to within 6" of the sign edge.
1
2'
4.
Type D attachments shall be for signs 3
5.
Sign panels shall meet the requirements of Index 11200.
6.
Refer to section 634 of the Standard Specifications
Adjustable
wide or less.
For Road And Bridge Construction.
Hanger
7.
Messenger Wire
All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be passivated

stainless steel, AISI 300 series, commercial grade,
type 316.
TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS FOR SIGN PANEL(S)

MOUNTED ON SPAN WIRE
1
4"
Sign Face
Stainless steel round head bolts with
nuts and lock washers. Bolts shall be spaced
Adjustable Hanger
on 12" centers max.
3
8"
Stainless steel bolts
with nuts and lock washers.
Catenary Wire
Aluminum Zee 1.75 x 1.75 x 1.08
Catenary Wire
Messenger Wire
Wire Rope Clamp

SIGN MOUNTING DETAIL
Wire Rope Clamp
Sign Face ( No. 2 )

Sign Face ( No. 1 )
In Order To Ease Installation, Sign
1
4"
Face No. 2 Should Be Installed
19' M ax. Clearance
Shurlock Serrations
Messenger Wire

17'
-6" M in. Clearance
Stainless steel bolts with
nuts and lock washers.
After Mounting To Span Wire.
Wire Rope Clamp

See Index 17727 sheet 1
for pole attachment.
1
4"
Stainless steel round head bolts with

10" Min.
nuts and lock washers. Bolts shall be spaced

on 12" centers max.
The overlapped connection of adjustable hangers shall use a

minimum of 2 bolts with a minimum spaceing between bolts of 2".
ADJUSTABLE HANGER
FOR SIGN MOUNTING
11:
45:
14 AM
DETAIL OF OPPOSING
SIGNS SPAN WIRE MOUNTED
12/3/2015
TYPICAL SPAN WIRE INSTALLATION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/09
REVISIO N
TWO POINT ATTACHMENT

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SPAN WIRE MOUNTED SIGN DETAILS
NO.
17356
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Restricted Bridge
Road
Main Road
Cross
R12-5
R12-5
FTP-50-04
FTP-51-04
W16-3a
1320' Max.
R12-5
300'
800' Min.
See Note No. 2.
SIGN LOCATIONS TYPICAL
WEIGHT LIMIT
RESTRICTION AHEAD
FTP-50-06
WEIGHT
LIMIT
WEIGHT
LIMIT
8T
12T
R12-5 (24" X 36")
16T
X MILES
8T
12T
WEIGHT
LIMIT
R12-5 (24" X 36")
16T
8T
12T
R12-5 (24" X 36")
16T
WEIGHT
LIMIT
LAST EXIT
W 16-3A
11:
45:
15 AM
FTP-51-06
1.
See Standard Highway Signs for sign R12-5 and W16-3 details.
2.
Location of Sign No. 3 may require some field adjustment.
3.
The Cross Road is the last detour to route around the restricted bridge.
4.
Location of Sign No. 2 should be established from the Cross Road

the following approximate distances; Interstate-1 Mile Non- Interstate-1/2 Mile.
See Index 17355 for sign details.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
5.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
BRIDGE WEIGHT RESTRICTIONS
NO.
17357
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
1570'
NARROW
Type 2 Object Markers (YELLOW)
W5-2
Installed Behind Guardrail.
36" X 36"
BRIDGE
70'
4 Spaces @ 50'
OM3L
12" X 36"
Insert B
00
W13-1 (Optional)
M.
P
.
H.
24" X 24"
Black on Yellow
Begin
Bridge
Approach
6" Yellow
Slab
6" Skip White
OM3R
Insert A
W5-2
NARROW
36" X 36"
BRIDGE
12" X 36"
For Paved Shoulders
Black on Yellow
6" White
18" White @ 45
Every 50' For 1570'
White on Right and
Type 2 Object Markers (WHITE)
Yellow on Left.
00
70'
W13-1 (Optional)
24" X 24"
4 Spaces @ 50'
M.
P
.
H.
One-Way Traffic
1570'
See Note 2 Minimum of Three
OM3L
Type 2 Object Markers (Yellow)
12" X 36"
Black on Yellow
Begin
6" Solid White
Bridge
6" Solid Yellow
6" Skip Yellow
6" Double Yellow
6" Skip Yellow
Approach
Slab
6" Solid White
6" Solid Yellow
OM3R
For Paved Shoulders
12" X 36"
Insert A
Black on Yellow
18" White @ 45
Every 50' For 1570'
Type 2 Object Markers (WHITE)
W5-2
NARROW
36" X 36"
70'
BRIDGE
11:
45:
15 AM
4 Spaces @ 50'
00
M.
P
.
H.
W13-1 (Optional)
24" X 24"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
2-Way Traffic
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
RURAL NARROW BRIDGE TREATMENT
NO.
17359
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
INSERT A
OUTSIDE SHOULDER
INSERT B
MEDIAN SHOULDER
Rumble Striping For

Asphalt Roadways,
Profiled Thermoplastic
4 White Reflective
Shoulder Point
for Concrete Roadways
Markers Evenly Spaced

4" off 18" White Chevron
4"
Edge of Shoulder Paved
6"
Spacing
"
6
Edge of Travel Way
Edge of Shoulder Paved
18" White
W idth
Edge of Travel Way
Varies
W idth
Spacing
Varies
18" Yellow
4"
Shoulder Point
4 Yellow Reflective
Markers Evenly Spaced
4" off 18" Yellow Chevron
Rumble Striping For

Asphalt Roadways,
Profiled Thermoplastic
for Concrete Roadways
Direction of Travel
Direction of Travel
Shoulder Width
No. of RPM's
Spacing
2'
14"
3'
13"
4'
19"
5'
16.67"
NOTES:
1.
Roadways with Two-Way Traffic:

No passing zone should be extended 1570' in advance of narrow bridge.
2.
If the bridge or the approach is on a curve, delineators shall be installed

for a distance of 1570' in advance of narrow bridge on the outside
portion of the roadway. Spacing shall be 100' between delineators.
Delineators are to be placed not less than 2' or not more than 8' outside
the outer edge of pavement.
3. Object markers and delineators on both sides of roadway shall face traffic
11:
45:
16 AM
approaching bridge
4. The OM-3R & OM-3L object markers shall be installed 4' above the roadway
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
edge. The panels may be post mounted at the bridges.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
RURAL NARROW BRIDGE TREATMENT
NO.
17359
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Pole
Luminaire
Luminaire
Luminaire Cable
Breakaway Fuseholders
Strain Relief Fitting

(See Note #2)
PVC Conduit
PVC Conduit
Breakaway Fuseholders
Pull box
Surge Protective Device (SPD)
Length of Bracket Arm
SPD Ground Conductor
(See Note #2)

Equipment Ground Conductor
Breakaway fuseholders on Neutral side

with solid copper slug (Line To Neutral
Pole Ground Conductor
Service).
Slugs to be same size as 10

Luminaire Cable
Amp fuse.
Ground rod
Breakaway fuseholder on 480V
side with a 10 Amp slow blow
fuse for line to line service
Equipment Ground Conductor
both lines to be fused.
WIRING DIAGRAM
Pole setback 20'
unless otherwise noted on plans
Pull Box
Luminaire Cable
(See Metal
Pole Wire Detail)
Breakaway fuseholders
Edge of traveled
with solid copper slugs.
pavement or
Slugs to be same size
Breakaway fuseholders with solid copper slugs.
as 10 Amp fuse.
face of curb.
Slugs to be same size as 10 Amp fuse.

12" bed of Pearock
Access Panel
or crushed stone
for drainage.

Surge Protective Device (SPD)
(See Note #2)
#6 TW Green
#6 Solid Copper
Breakaway fuseholder on 480V side with
Ground Wire
Ground Rod
a 10 Amp slow blow fuse for line
Ground Wire (Bare)
to line service both lines to be fused.
L
E DETAI
METAL POL
Grounding Lug
Breakaway fuseholders on Neutral side

with solid copper slug (Line To Neutral
Service).
Slugs to be same size as 10
Amp fuse.
SURGE
#6 Solid
ARRESTER
Copper
Ground
PVC conduit with Type TC Cable
Wire
(Bare)
Circuit conductors in schedule 40 PVC

conduit. Circuit conductors and conduit
NOTES:
size as shown in plans. (Typical)

1.
Barrier wall or bridge mounted poles: The wiring shall be in

1" PVC conduit with #6 Solid

Copper Ground Wire (Bare)
12" bed of Pearock or crushed stone for drainage
2. Provide cable length to remove fuseholders from transformer

base, pole base or pullbox for maintenance. Remove slack
11:
46:
13 AM
#6 TW Green Bonding Ground

U.L. approved Ground Rod
5
8"
if the pole breaks away. Pull excess cable into pull box tighten
strain relief fittings or cable clamps at both ends of conduit
diameter 20' long copper
clad with approved ground connection (At all pull boxes)
from the luminaire cable to provide tension on the fuseholders
to prevent cable from slipping.

Strain Relief Fitting (See Note #2)
12/3/2015
METAL POLE WIRING DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
WIRING DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONVENTIONAL LIGHTING
NO.
17500
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
NOTES:
1.
Use compacted select material in accordance with Index 505.
2.
Concrete shall be Class NS with a minimum strength at 28 days of f'c=2.5 ksi.
3.
Outside edge of slab shall be cast against formwork.
4.
The pull box shown is 13" x 24"; others approved under
13"
Slabs to be placed around all Poles and Pull Boxes in rural locations.
In urban areas or where space is limited slab dimensions may be
Pull Box
adjusted as shown in the plans.

6.
5'
-0"
Section 635 of the Standard Specifications may be used.

5.
Concrete for slabs around pull boxes shall be included

in the price of pull box.
24"
5'-0"
SLAB DIMENSIONS
L BOX
PUL
ON
OCATI
L
6"
4"
SELECT MATERIAL
12/3/2015
11:
46:
14 AM
SECTION A-A
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
SLAB DETAILS FOR INTERMEDIATE PULLBOX LOCATIONS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17500
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
7'-6"
4'-6"
3'-0"
"
9
'
1
"
6
'
2
1'-4"
13"
NOTES:
2.
3.
4.
Slabs to be placed around all Poles and Pull Boxes. In urban areas or where
space is limited slab dimensions may be
adjusted as shown in the plans.
6.
2'
-6"
x
lBo
l
Pu
Concrete for slabs around poles and pull boxes shall be included
1
2"
in the price of pole or pull box.
Expansion
The expansion joint shall consist of " of closed-cell polyethelene foam

expansion material. The top " of expansion material shall be removed after
pouring the slab and sealed with an APL approved Type A sealant meeting the
requirements of Section 932.
3'
-0"
Joint (Sealed)
STREET SID E
7.
6'
-0"
24" Typ.
1.
5.
10"
Typ.
SLAB DIMENSIONS
1
2"
Expansion
Joint (Sealed)
SHAFT LOCATION
L BOX
PUL
ON
OCATI
L
6"
11:
46:
15 AM
4" SELECT MATERIAL
SECTION B-B
12/3/2015
SLAB DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
FOR POLE AND PULL BOX LOCATIONS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17500
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
GENERAL NOTES
BREAKAWAY FEATURE
1. Exothermically welded all grounding system connections . This includes all cables, ground
All ground mounted metal light poles, 50 feet in height or less, shall be mounted on
electrode and arrays. Do not exothermically bond grounding electrode to grounding electrode.
a frangible metal base. The base shall shall be one piece and be designed to
Method of Measurement and Basis of Payment as per Standard Specifications 620.
breakaway without the aid of any slipping or sliding surfaces. The design of the
breakaway feature shall be in accordance with the breakaway performance
requirements of the AASHTO 'Standard Specifications For Structural Supports For
2. Contact all utility companies prior to any underground work. The utility company are
Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals'. The contractor (supplier) shall
responsible for locating and identifying their facilities.
submit copies of test reports as evidence the breakaway feature meets the above
3. The contractor determines required date for the power company to install the power service
specifications and calculations to verify the design will meet the AASHTO wind
loading specified in the contract plans. No poles are to be installed prior to
at the pre-construction conference.
approval of submittal data.

4. The power company reserves the right to install the riser, switch gear and weatherhead on
power company poles at the expense of the contractor. Contact the power company for cost
Poles behind bridge rail or barrier wall mounted, shall be installed on non-frangible
or for authorization for an alternate procedure.
bases.
5. Paint any damaged portions of galvanized steel poles and bracket arms in accordance with
Standard Specifications 562.
6. Before final acceptance, contractor shall provide 2 sets of full size as built plans to the
maintaining agency.
7. Route conduit pole to pole, maintaining pole setback distance from edge of pavement. Any
cable routing in locations where guardrail is proposed shall be 2' in front of the standard
guardrail position.
8. Where guardrail is constructed, placed poles, which are considered above ground hazard,
a minimum of 5' behind the face of the guardrail.
9. Install pole foundations in accordance with Standard Specifications 715.
10. Make splices in pull boxes or the pole base, not inside the conduit. The wires at pull
boxes must be long enough to remove connectors to the outside of pull boxes to make
connectors accessible for changing fuses and trouble shooting the system.
11. Neutral wires to have white insulation. Do not use white or green insulated wires for
ungrounded conductors.
12. Make exposed or surfaced mounted conduit out of be rigid or intermediate metal. Provide
exposed runs of conduit within either expansion joints or flexible metal conduit sections
adequate to take care of vibrations and thermal expansions. Ground all metal conduit.
Hot-dip all steel conduit.
13. Mandrel test, clean inside and cap both ends of all conduit that remains empty as spares.
Leave the corrosion resistant pull/drag wire and place pull boxes to mark the location of
the ends of the conduits.
14. Located pull boxes at the end of conduits crossing roadways, and as necessary for the
completion of the project.
15. These plans represent minimum acceptable criteria. The inspection per these drawings
represent the minimum base of acceptance.
16. All material are Underwriters Laboratory approved, unless otherwise specified.
17. Install a pull box at each pole location. Place pull boxes at a maximum of 2' from pole
unless otherwise directed by the project engineer. Ground metal pull box covers.
See Standard Specifications 635.
18. At all pull boxes and pole bases, seal all ends of the conduit in accordance with Standard
Specifications 630.
19. All mounting heights are 2'-6" unless otherwise noted in plans.
20. A handhole is required in all poles. Locate handhole on the opposite side of approaching
traffic, with a cover fastened with stainless steel screws and at least 20 square inches at
the opening of the handhole.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
46:
15 AM
21. On joint use poles ground the luminaire and arm.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
HIGHWAY LIGHTING GENERAL NOTES
NO.
17501
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
HIGHMAST LIGHTING NOTES:

1. Poles are designed to support the following:
A. One (1) cylindrical head assembly with a maximum effective projected area of 6 sf (cd=1) and 340 lbs (Max.)
B. Eight (8) cylindrical luminaires with a maximum effective projected are of 3.0 sf (cd = 0.5) and 77 lbs each.
2. Shop Drawings: This Index is considered fully detailed, only submit shop drawings for minor modifications
not detailed in the Plans.
3. High Mast Structure Materials:
A. Poles and Backing Rings:
a. Less than
3
16":
ASTM A1011 Grade 50, 55, 60 or 65
b. Greater than or equal to
3
16":
ASTM A572 Grade 50, 55, 60 or 65
c. ASTM A595 Grade A (55 ksi yield) or Grade B (60 ksi yield)
B. Steel Plates: ASTM A709 or ASTM A36
C. Pole Caps: ASTM A1011 Grade 50, 55, 60, or 65 or ASTM B209
D. Weld Metal: E70XX
E. Stainless Steel Screws: AISI 316
F. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
b. Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade A Heavy-Hex (5 per anchor bolt)
c. Plate Washer: ASTM A36 (2 per anchor bolt)
G. Nut Covers: ASTM B26 (319-F)
H. Concrete: Class IV (Drilled Shaft)
I. Reinforcing Steel: Specification Section 415
4. Fabrication:
B. Poles:
a. Round or 16-Sided (Min.)
b. Pole Taper: Diameter changing at 0.14 inches per foot.
c. Two longitudinal seam welds (Max.).
d. Longitudinal seam welds within 6" of pole to base must be complete penetration welds.
e. Longitudinal seam welds at telescopic field joints must be complete penetration welds for the splice length
plus 6".
f. Circumferentially welded pole shaft, butt splices and laminated pole shafts are not permitted.
C. Holes for Anchor Bolts: Anchor Bolt diameter plus 12" (Max.), prior to galvanizing.
D. Hot Dip Galvanize after Fabrication.
E. Identification Tag: (Submit details for approval.)
a. 2x 4 (Max.) aluminum identification tag.
b. Locate on the inside of the pole and visible from the handhole.
c. Secure to pole with
1
8
diameter stainless steel rivets or screws.
d. Include the following information on the ID Tag:

1. Financial Project ID
2. Pole Type
3. Pole height
4. Manufacturers Name
5. Fy of Steel
6. Base Wall Thickness
5. Coating:
A. Galvanize Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM F2329
B. Hot Dip Galvanize all other steel items: ASTM A123
6. Construction:
A. Foundation: Specification Section 455 Drilled Shaft, except that payment is included in the cost of the Structure.
B. After Installation: Place wire screen between top of foundation and bottom of baseplate in accordance with
12/3/2015
11:
46:
16 AM
Specification Section 649-6.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
STANDARD POLE DESIGN NOTES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
HIGH MAST LIGHTING
NO.
17502
SHEET
NO.
1of 6
Luminaire Head
Luminaires
Length Section (
1)
POLE DESIGN TABLE*

SECTION 1(TOP)
Design
Wind
Speed
Joints
Splice Length (
1)
Telescopic Field
(8 Maximum)
110 mph
Pole Overall
Height (ft)
Wall
SECTION 2
Minimum
Tip Dia. Base Dia.
Length
Splice L.
(in.)
(in.)
Length
Thickness
(in.)
80
41'-9"
0.250
2'-0"
100
24'-3"
0.179
2'-0"
120
44'-6"
0.250
2'-0"
Wall
Thickness
(in.)
Minimum
Tip Dia. Base Dia.
Length
Splice L.
(in.)
(in.)
11.219
40'-0"
0.250
6.438
9.844
40'-0"
0.250
2'-6"
6.313
12.531
40'-0"
0.250
2'-9"
5.375
Round or 16-Sided
Pole (Faces not
shown for simplicity)
(see Note #4E)

Handhole Door
9.188
14.781
11.688
17.313
Joints
Splice Length (
2)
Wall
Thickness
(in.)
Minimum
Tip Dia. Base Dia.
Splice L.
(in.)
(in.)
40'-0"
0.250
13.875
19.500
40'-0"
0.313
16.375
22.000
80
41'-9"
0.250
2'-0"
5.344
11.188
40'-0"
0.313
10.375
16.000
100
24'-3"
0.179
2'-0"
6.938
10.344
40'-0"
0.250
2'-6"
9.656
15.281
40'-0"
0.313
14.375
20.000
120
45'-3"
0.250
2'-6"
9.281
15.625
40'-0"
0.250
3'-0"
14.719
20.344
40'-0"
0.313
19.375
25.000
80
42'-0"
0.250
2'-3"
7.344
13.219
40'-0"
0.313
12.375
18.000
100
24'-3"
0.250
2'-0"
8.219
11.625
40'-0"
0.313
2'-6"
10.781
16.406
40'-0"
0.375
15.375
21.000
120
46'-3"
0.250
3'-0"
12.469
18.938
40'-0"
0.313
3'-6"
17.938
23.563
40'-0"
0.375
22.375
28.000
* Diameter Measured Flat to Flat
Design
Wind
Speed
Length Section (
n)
Identification Tag
150 mph
16.000
10.375
BASE PLATE AND BOLTS DESIGN TABLE

Telescopic Field
0.
14 in/ft Taper, Typ.
Length Section (
2)
Overall H eight
130 mph
SECTION 3
110 mph
130 mph
150 mph
Base Plate
Wire screen
Pole Overall Base Plate

Height
Diameter
Base Plate
Thickness
Bolt
Circle
No.
Bolts
SHAFT DESIGN TABLE
Bolt
Diameter
Bolt
Embedment
(ft)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
80
30.0
3.0
23.0
1.75
38
100
33.5
3.0
26.5
1.75
42
120
36.0
3.0
29.0
1.75
45
80
30.0
3.0
23.0
1.75
43
100
34.0
3.0
27.0
1.75
50
120
41.0
3.5
33.0
2.00
80
32.0
3.0
25.0
1.75
100
37.0
3.0
29.0
2.00
53
120
46.0
3.5
37.0
10
2.25
57
Design
Wind
Speed
Pole Overall
Height
110 mph
Shaft
Diameter
Shaft
Length
Longitudinal
Reinforcement
80
4'-0"
13'-0"
14- #11
100
4'-6"
14'-0"
16- #11
120
4'-6"
16'-0"
16- #11
(ft)
80
4'-0"
14'-0"
14- #11
100
4'-6"
16'-0"
16- #11
52
120
5'-0"
17'-0"
18- #11
49
80
4'-6"
15'-0"
16- #11
100
4'-6"
17'-0"
16- #11
120
5'-0"
20'-0"
18- #11
130 mph
150 mph
2'-0" Min.
NOTE:
Line adjacent
to highmasts
12/3/2015
on Fill
Fill H eight
Natural Ground
25'M axim um
11:
46:
17 AM
Foundation for slopes 1:4 or flatter. Provide a 2'-0" drilled
(Max. Slope)
1
shaft projection on the high side.
Drilled
Shaft
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
ELEVATION
POLE DESIGN TABLES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
HIGH MAST LIGHTING
NO.
17502
SHEET
NO.
2 of 6
10"
11"
Shaft Diameter
Base Plate
4"
p
a
"L
2
'
2
)
.
n
Mi
(
Diameter
Handhole Ring
Bolt Circle
1
2"
Center of
x 6" Ring
1
4"
#5 Tie Bars
Drilled Shaft
Thick
Handhole
Door
Padlock Tab
CSL tube (Typ.)
1
4"
1'
-9"
10"
1'
-8"
Full Pen.
Padlock Tab
6"
Hinge Mount
(Typ.)
Anchor Bolts
Edge of
Equally Spaced.
Base Plate
4"
(See Table)
Longitudinal
Center of Drilled
Base
Partial Penetration
6" Cover
Joint
(Typ.)
Reinforcement
(See Table For
Diameter (Pole)
Shaft, Base
"
Eq. Spaced
Reinforcement)
"
3 4
=
R
3 4
Full Pen.
=
R
Plate, and Pole
FOUNDATION PLAN
(T = Wall Thickness)
SECTION A-A
HANDHOLE RING
(Anchor Bolts and Conduits Not Shown)
HANDHOLE DOOR
2 X Bolt Diameter
"
45 deg.
Wall Thk. + "

Bolt Circle
x Wall Thk.
Anchor Bolts
Base Plate
Shaft Diameter
Double Nuts, Top Nut may be half
Diameter
Nut Cover (not shown) for each bolt
1
1 4"
1" Min.
1'
-8"
6 Sp. @
Ring
Base Plate
(
Top)
4" Cover
"
4"
Handhole
Silicone Caulk
Plate Washer
5"
M in.
2'
-0"
3
8"
3"X " Backing Ring
height 'Jam' Nut. Provide individual
1" x 1" Chamfer
Base Plate
Thickness
Opening
(1) Bolt Diameter
Handhole
(Max.)
Door
Anchor Bolt
Drilled Shaft
Leveling
Base Diameter
Wire screen
Finished Grade
1: 4 Max Slope
Base Diameters
measured flat to flat
SECTION C-C
Center of Arm
Sp. @
M in.
Bolt Em bedm ent
2'
-0"
see Spec. 649-6
1'
-0" (
M ax.
)
12"
Shaft Length
Nuts
Tip Diameters or
Inside Radius
Double Nuts (Typ.)
Wall
measure center
Thickness
to flat
Seam Weld (Typ.)

(See welding note sheet 1)
11:
46:
22 AM
1"
7"
0.6 x Wall Thickness
Break Radius Typical

Min. Break Radius
12/3/2015
(Conduits Not Shown)
Spacing
BASE PLATE AND ANCHORAGE ELEVATION
# 5 Ties
= 0.25 x (Inside
Drilled Shaft
6" Cover
Radius)
(Typ.)
SECTION B-B
(Conduits Not Shown)
SECTION E-E
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
POLE FOUNDATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
HIGH MAST LIGHTING
NO.
17502
SHEET
NO.
3 of 6
Twistlock disconnect
Schedule 40 PVC conduit. Circuit conductors

and conduit size as shown In plans. (Typical).
Schedule 40
PVC conduit
with 4/0 Cu
Pigtail Cord W/Female Receptacle
bare ground
wire.
Male Inlet
Circuit Breaker Panel Box with Surge

Interrod distances must
Arrester mounted to Top of Circuit Breaker
be a minimum of 10'.
Panel Box for easy access. Service entrance

fittings shall be used on all conductors entering
Circuit Breaker Panel Box.
Attach Copper Lugs (Two-Hole,

Straight Tongue, Two-Barrel)
to winch support plate to
#6 ground
accommodate 2-4/0 and 2-#6

conductors for grounding.
4/0 ground
Schedule 80
PVC conduit
Wire Screen
see Spec. 649-6
2'
4/0 AWG stranded

CU bare ground
wire connected to
grounding lug
inside pole.
#6 Bonding Ground
expansion
2'
-6"
3
8"
joint (sealed)
12" bed of pearock or

crushed stone for drainage.
U L approved ground rod
5
8"
diameter 20' long copper clad with

approved ground connection.
4/0 Cu bare
ground wire
connected to
Minimum of
5
(6) 8"
x 20'
approved ground rods.
Schedule 40
grounding field
PVC conduit
or array.
with 4/0 Cu
bare ground
Schedule 40 PVC conduit. Circuit conductors
11:
46:
23 AM
wire.
and conduit size as shown in plans. (Typical).
NOTES:
1.
At all pull boxes and pole bases, ends of conduit shall be sealed in accordance with Section 630 of the
12/3/2015
Standard Specifications For Road And Bridge Construction.

2.
Slabs to be placed around all Poles and Pull Boxes.
3.
For Pull Boxes between Poles refer to Index 17500.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
WIRING DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
HIGH MAST LIGHTING
NO.
17502
SHEET
NO.
4 of 6
To
The contractor's attention is directed to those plan
Luminaire
sheets detailing the mounting of luminaires at the

pole top.
Particular attention is directed to

Ground to Winch
alignment of luminaire light distributions. Special

Cover
attention must be exercised in the physical alignment
Support Plate
of these luminaires to ensure that the approved

photometric layout is physically produced at each
Circuit Panel
Equipment
lighting standard in the field. A marking shall be
SPD
Ground Conductor
placed on the external face of the refractor to
Breaker
allow visual inspection of alignment. The marking

shall correspond to the 0 axis of the refractor.
Head plate
See legend for number
4/0 Ground
of luminaires, lamp wattage

and light distribution.
Lift cable sheaves
Conduit
Luminaire support ring
Grounding Array
480V Phase
#6 Bonding Ground
to Phase
Lift cables (2 minimum)
Pole cable
20' Ground
& sheaves
Pull Box
Rod
2" slip fitter

Cover
HI
GH MAST POL
E WI
RI
NG DI
AGRAM
Lift
cables
Power Cable Terminator
600 Volt rated Pole Cable.
Luminaires
Size of conductors to be determined

by luminaire load.
All hardware for mounting heavy duty

drill to pole shall be Stainless Steel.
Male Inlet
1
2"
heavy duty reversible or 1 HP
Portable Motor(1) per project.
Luminaire support ring
2" Slip-fitter Assembly
Slip clutch
Step-down transformer provided with
(equally spaced around ring)
120V. grounded receptacle for electric

drill & receptacle for supply cable.
Power Cord
(see schematic)
With Male Inlet
25' minimum remote control cable

same as Pole Cable.
ON
OFF
Remote
control
switch
Covered receptacle to power
luminaires when in the lowered
Receptacle
position with Male Inlet.
Pole Cable
High mast pole
Winch cable
off
on
Female Plug
Circuit Breaker Cable

with Female Plug
gnd.
Remote control switch
Positive drive reversible winch
11:
46:
24 AM
Hand hole
Winch
Supply cable receptacle
Lock nuts
A surge protector shall

600 Volt rated Circuit Breaker Cable.
be located in the pole with
Size of conductors to be determined
the circuit breaker. The surge
SCHEMATI
C OF REMOTE AUXI
L
I
ARY POWER UNI
T
by luminaire load.
protector shall be mounted

12/3/2015
at the front near hand hole

for easy access.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
Base plate
Base plate
LOWERING DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
HIGH MAST LIGHTING
NO.
17502
SHEET
NO.
5 of 6

10'-0"
2'-0"
Varies
Varies
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
10'
-0"
Pull Box
Slabs to be placed around all Poles and Pull Boxes. In urban areas or where
space is limited slab dimensions may be adjusted as shown in the plans.
6.
12"

5.
13"
Typ.
Concrete for slabs around poles and pull boxes shall be included
7.
1
2"
The expansion joint shall consist of " of closed-cell polyethelene foam

expansion material. The top " of expansion material shall be removed after
5'
in the price of pole or pull box.

Expansion
Joint (Sealed)
pouring the slab and sealed with an APL approved Type A sealant meeting the
requirements of Section 932.
SLAB DIMENSIONS
1
2"
Expansion Joint (Sealed)
SHAFT LOCATION
6"
L BOX
PUL
ON
OCATI
L
6"
4" SELECT MATERIAL
12/3/2015
11:
46:
25 AM
SECTION C-C
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
SLAB DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
HIGH MAST LIGHTING
NO.
17502
SHEET
NO.
6 of 6
GENERAL NOTES:
1. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide a complete service assembly
as per the plans and service specifications.
2. The service installation shall meet the requirements of the national electric code
and applicable local codes.
Concrete Pole Prestressed Type P-II, 36' Long
3. Shop drawings are not required for service equipment, unless noted in the plans.
1'
4. A Pull Box is required at each service point, see Index 17700.
1'
Clevis With Insulators
Conductor Weatherhead Height

Concrete Pole, Prestressed Type P-II, 12' Long
As Required By Power Company
Meter As Required
Height Specified
Meter As Required
By Power Company
Height Specified
By Power Company
Service Disconnect
Conductor In
8'
5'
-6" (
M ax.
)
36'
#6 AWG Insulated
Grounding Electrode
1
2"
Concrete Pad
Grade
30"
And Ground Rod
(
Typ.
)
7'
30"
Or Crushed Stone
For Drainage (Typ.)
Connection For Pole
Connection For Pole
(
Typ.
)
12" Bed Of Pearock
8'
Concrete Pad
Grade
Ground, Bond Wire,
12'
4'(
M in.
)
4'(
M in.
)
Pull Box
Ground, Bond Wire,

And Ground Rod
4'
Pull Box
Ground Rod (
Typ.
)
Steel Conduit
5'
-6" (
M ax.
)
Rigid Galvanized
6" (
M in.
) Depth To
6" (
M in.
) Depth To
Steel Conduit
5'
-6" (
M ax.
)
1
2"
4'(
M in.
)
Conductor In
Rigid Galvanized
4'(
M in.
)
#6 AWG Insulated
Grounding Electrode
Ground Rod (
Typ.
)
5'
-6" (
M ax.
)
29'
Service Disconnect
12" Bed Of Pearock

U.L. Approved Ground Rod,
5
8"
Or Crushed Stone
Dia. 40' Long Copper
For Drainage (Typ.)
DETAIL A
LB
DETAI
AERIAL FEED
UNDERGROUND FEED
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
46:
25 AM
Clad (All Service Points)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SERVICE POINT DETAILS
NO.
17504
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Keyed Notes:
1.
240/480V, Single Phase 3 Wire Electric Distribution Overhead Service Drop.
2.
Service Feeder in Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit.
3.
Meter Socket by Contractor
4.
Service Main Disconnect.
5.
Lighting Control Panel Enclosure. Dimensions as Necessary for
19
to item
4
120V Photo Electric Cell
1800VA Mercury with Surge
20 2
1 20
Protection for 2000V Peak
16
14
13
Equipment Inside. Ground Mounted Cabinet per Index 17736.
3 20
6
2 20
12
6.
Concrete Riser Pole.
7.
Weatherhead.
8.
Electrical Panel. Number and Rating of Branch Circuit Breakers shall be as

Indicated on Distribution Point Description on Lighting Plan Sheets.
9.
Branch Circuit to Roadway Luminaires.
OFF
4 20
10. " Copper Clad Ground Rod, 40' Long.
15
17
11. #6 Insulated Copper Ground Wire. Bond the Service Neutral to Ground at
11
Service Main Disconnect.

12. Fused Control Power Transformer 0.5 KVA, Single Phase, 480V Primary, 120V
10
Secondary (Part of Lighting Contactor, Shown Outside for Clarity).

13. Lightning Arrester Mounted on Outside of Enclosure.
Neutral Bar
14. Lighting Control Panel Main Breaker.
19
16. Photo Electric Switch-120V Rated.
17. Hand-off Automatic Selector Switch (Part of Lighting Contactor, Shown Outside
15. 2 Pole Electrical Lighting Contactor.
13
for Clarity).
18. Concrete Pad.
14
11
Ground Bus
19. Underground Feeder Conduit.
10
20. Mount on Riser Pole.
16
PC
(TYP.)
21. Ground BUS.

22. NEMA 4X SST Ground Mounted Storage Cabinet with Two Shelves. Only Required for
12
High Mast Lighting Systems.
15
8
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
1
1
3
3
5
5
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Circuit
Ground
9
CKT.1
CKT.2
CKT.3
CKT.4
2
2
4
4
6
6
Ground
(TYP.)
TYPICAL DISTRIBUTION POINT SCHEMATIC DETAIL
P.E. Controller
22
2"
5
11
18
11
18
Side or Back of Enclosure
21
10
Cut a 2" hole in the side of the Lighting Control Panel enclosure for the operation
11:
46:
26 AM
and mounting of the P.E. controller. Use plexiglass and a clear silicone sealant to
19
10
cover hole, install P.E. Controller.
To Electrical Service Drop
PHOTO ELECTRIC CONTROLLER DETAIL
12/3/2015
ONE LINE DIAGRAM DISTRIBUTION POINT
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
RISER DIAGRAM - TYPICAL DISTRIBUTION POINT

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SERVICE POINT DETAILS
NO.
17504
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Sign
Hanger
Hanger
Sign Face
Sign Structure Chord
Sign Structure Chord
Luminaire Support Structure

(See Sheet 2)
Caps (Typ.)
Top Hanger Pipe
Luminaire Support Structure

(See DETAIL 'A' Sheet 2)
Bottom Hanger Pipe
Zee Aluminum
Wind Beam (Typ.)
Hanger Pipe Connection

(See DETAIL 'B' Sheet 2)
Aluminum Zee
Wind Beam (Typ.)
Luminaire
Luminaire
Conduit To Extend Up Column And Along

Lower Sign Chord To Junction Boxes
BACK VIEW
2-#10 AWG THW Or
THWN In
3
4"
Galvanized
Rigid Steel Conduit.
PLACEMENT OF SIGN LIGHTS

1. This Index details a bottom luminaire support structure. For signs
Nema 3R Waterproof Enclosure With A 30

Amp Breaker, Mounted On Sign Structure
Away From Traffic. Install a Lockable
Padlock for the Enclosure. Provide The
Maintaning Agency With Four Padlock Keys.
Bond Wire To Run From Enclosure To Ground
Lug In
1
2"
requiring top luminaire support structures, the detail can be reversed.

2. Luminaire spacing and arm length is shown on Guide Sign Worksheet.
3. The Guide Sign Worksheet indicates the sign luminaire used for basis of design.
Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit.
The contractor may propose a different luminaire by submitting photometric
Ground Lug Attached

To Metal Sign Structure
6'
-0"
calculations for each lighted sign for review by the Engineer.
SIGN LIGHTING INSTALLATION

Roadway Lighting included in contract:
1. Power for the sign lighting provided from the roadway lighting circuit.
Pull Box
0" with Sidewalk
6" Otherwise
2. Indicate sign location and a pull box location for connection to the sign
lights in the lighting plans.
3. Lighting contractor installs pull box and loop 2' of lighting circuit
conductors in the pull box for connection by the signing contractor.
4. Signing contractor furnishes and installs the Luminaires, Nema 3R
enclosure, 30 amp breaker, conduit, conductors and all other electrical
equipment necessary for connection to the lighting circuit.
U.L. Approved Ground Rod
5
8"
x 20' Copper
Drilled Shaft
Clad With Approved Ground Connection To Be

Placed In Pull Box For Inspection Purposes.
Splices To Be Made With Compression Sleeves
Then Properly Insulated & waterproofed
Roadway Lighting not included in contract:

1. Signing plans include the pay item numbers to furnish and install conduit,
conductors, ground rods, pull boxes and service point equipment.
11:
46:
27 AM
2. Signing plans indicate the location of the service point equipment and
circuit runs.
SIDE VIEW
3. Signing contractor provides all electrical equipment necessary for
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
connection of the sign lights.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
EXTERNAL LIGHTING FOR SIGNS
NO.
17505
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
1
2"
Pipe Cap
1
2"
Sch. 40 Steel Pipe
3
8"
6"
Hanger
Lock Nuts (2 Bolts Req'd)
4"
3
4"
Sign Face
Sign
U-Bolt With Washers &
Structue
1
2"
6"x
Top Hanger Pipe
Chord
1
2"
Sch. 40 Pipe
(2" Sch. 40 Steel Pipe)
Aluminum Zee
1
4 4"
3
4"
Steel Plate
Drill & Tap For
See Note # 5
Wind Beam (Typ.)

PLATE 'A'
7
16"
PLATE 'A'
Bolt Circles
Hole
3
7
8"x2 8"
(Typ.)
M ax.
1
2"
3
8"
1
2"
Bolt On 5"
(2 Holes Req'd)
Pipe
PLATE 'A'
Top Hanger Pipe

Coupling
Sleeve (Typ.)
SECTION A-A
NOTES
1
2"
1. Install hanger pipe to each vertical beam crossed

with a
3
8"
Sch. 40
Steel Pipe
U-Bolt, lock washers and hex nuts. Cap
both ends of the horizontal pipe.
Varies ~ 2'
-6" M in.
2. Materials;
B. Steel Plate: ASTM A36
C. Bolts: ASTM A307
D. Hex Nuts: ASTM A563
1
2"
Plug
Tee
E. Washers: ASTM F436

Luminaire Support
3. Coating: Hot-Dip Galvanize pipes, plates, structural
Structure
shapes: ASTM A123, Fasteners and hardware:
(See DETAIL 'A')
ASTM A153.
1
2 2"
4. All pipe dimensions are NPS.
Sch. 40 Steel
Varies ~ 2'
-6" M in.
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 (Grade A or B)
1
2"
6"x
3" Sch. 40 Pipe
1
2"
Sch. 40 Pipe
Set Parallel
To Roadway
9
16"
Holes On 5"
Bolt Circle (4 Req'd)
Threaded Nipple
5. Chord O.D. + 5" (Min.)

2
1
2"
Pipe Coupling
SECTION B-B
Bottom Hanger Pipe

1
8"
Mach. Bolt &

Lock Washer;
Attach To Sleeve
A
B
A
B
With Chain
1
8"
1
8"
Hanger (Zee
1
8"
3
8"
Wind Beam (Typ.)
1
8"
3
4"
1
1
2"x1 4"
1
4"
M ax.
See Note # 5
1
2"
1
4"
1
8"
Beam Shown,
U-Bolt With Washers &
I Beam Similar)
3
8"
Lock Nuts (2 Bolts Req'd)

Bottom Hanger Pipe
4'-0" (Unless Otherwise Shown In Plans) (6'-0" Max.)

3
8"
Of Luminaire
Varries By Luminaire Type
1'
-0"
Hole Thru 3" Sleeve

1
2"
And 2
Pipe For
1
4"
1
2"
To 1
1
2"
11:
46:
27 AM
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
'
5
1
01/01/16
Sch. 40 Steel Pipe

1'-4"
DETAIL 'A'
(Luminaire Support Structure)
LUMINAIRE SUPPORT STRUCTURE
LAST
Sch. 40 Steel Pipe
9
8
Pipe (18" Min.)
REVISION
Sign
Washers & Elastic Nut
Reducing Coulpling
3" Sch. 40 Steel
1
2"
Lock Nuts
Hanger Pipe
(2" Sch. 40 Pipe)
Galvanized Bolt With Curved

1
2"
PLATE 'A'
U-Bolt With
Washers and
Bottom Or Top
5
16"
Bottom
Of
Sleeve
1
0
"
6'
'
-0" M ax.
DETAIL 'B'
(Hanger Pipe Connection)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
EXTERNAL LIGHTING FOR SIGNS
NO.
17505
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Pole
Pole
For Fixture Arm Details

see Sheet 3 (Typ.)
6" Pole top with Cast Aluminum
3'-0" or 5'-6"
Base see Sheet 4
11"
SECTION A-A
Transition zone
from round shape
to oblong shape
22'
-5"
Taper Varies
Pole H eight
40'Design M ounting H eight (

For Pole Design)
W ind Design H eight at Fixture (

For Pole Design)
to oblong shape
22'
-5"
Taper Varies
Pole H eight
40'Design M ounting H eight (

For Pole Design)

For Pole Design)
Taper Varies
Pole H eight
from round shape
4"x6" (Min.) Handhole
4"x6" (Min.) Handhole
with reinforced frame
with reinforced frame
and cover with Hex
and cover with Hex
Head screws.
Head screws.
Begin Pole Taper

7"
2'-6"
Straight
Begin Pole Taper
2'-6"
Straight
DANGER
DO NOT TAMPER
to poles on fill
Finished Grade
(See Roadway Plans)
(See Roadway Plans)
Natural Ground
Natural Ground
Line adjacent
Line adjacent
to poles on fill
to poles on fill
MEDIAN BARRIER MOUNTED ALUMINUM LIGHT POLE

ON CYLINDRICAL FOUNDATION
MEDIAN BARRIER MOUNTED ALUMINUM LIGHT POLE

ON SPREAD FOOTING FOUNDATION
12/3/2015
STANDARD ROADWAY
ALUMINUM LIGHT POLE
W/TOP MOUNT
Finished Grade
70'M ax.
25'M ax.
HIGH VOLTAGE
Line adjacent
STANDARD ROADWAY
ALUMINUM LIGHT POLE
W/ARM
Transition zone
shown in Tables.
Fill H eight
Natural Ground
ATTACHED.
2'-6" to foundation depths
Fill H eight
on Sheet 4
WITHOUT LUMINAIRE
for grades up to 1:2 add
DO NOT TAMPER
foundation see details
7"
DO NOT ERECT POLE
Grade flatter than 1:4
DANGER
2'-6" Concrete
(8', 10' or 12' only)
NOTE:
Finished Grade
HIGH VOLTAGE
Fixture Arm Length
(8', 10' or 12' only)
1'
-6"
Breakaway Transformer
Fixture Arm Length
70'M ax.
17" High Frangible/
Stainless Steel Set Screws (Typ.)
Fill H eight
see Sheet 4
Fixture M ounting H eight (

from Lighting Design Requirem ents)
Base Shoe Casting
Pole H eight
23'
-2"
, 26'
-2" and 29'
-2" for Design
Taper Varies
10" Pole Base in
M ounting H eight of 40'

, 45'and 50'respectively.
factory installed) (Typ.)

For Pole Design)
(when specified,
40'
, 45'or 50'Design M ounting H eight (
For Pole Design)
Fixture M ounting H eight (

from Lighting Design Requirem ents)
Vibration Damper
11:
46:
28 AM
Cap attached to pole with 3
See Sheet 3 (Typ.)
Fixture Arm Length
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
ELEVATIONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STANDARD ALUMINUM LIGHTING
NO.
17515
SHEET
NO.
1of 8
GENERAL NOTES
1. Poles are designed to support the following:
A. Luminaire Effective Projected Area (EPA): 1.55 SF
B. Weight: 75 lb.
2. Shop Drawings: This Index is considered fully detailed, only submit shop drawings for minor modifications not included in the Plans.
3. Materials:
A. Pole and Arm Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T6; Pole Connection Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T6 or Alloy 6061-T6
B. Bars, Plates, Stiffeners and Backer Ring: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T6
C. Caps and Covers: ASTM B-26, Alloy 319-F
D. Steel Bearing Plate: ASTM A709 or ASTM A36 Grade 36
E. Aluminum Weld Material: ER 4043
F. Transformer and Frangible Base Materials: ASTM B26 or ASTM B108, Alloy 356-T6
G. Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
a. Shoe Base Bolts: ASTM A325 Type 1
c. Washer: ASTM F436 Type 1
H. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:
b. Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade A Heavy-Hex
c. Plate Washer: ASTM A36
I. Stainless Steel Fasteners: AISI 316
J. Nut Covers: ASTM B26 (319-F)
K. Concrete: Class 1
L. Reinforcing Steel: Specification Section 415
4. Fabrication:
A. Upright Splices: Not Allowed. Transverse welds are only allowed at the base.
B. Roadway Light Pole Taper: Taper as required to provide a round top O.D. of 6 and a base O.D. of 10. Portions of the pole near
the base shoe and at the arm connections may be held constant at 10 and 6 respectively to simplify fabrication.
C. Median Barrier Mounted Light Pole Taper: Taper as required to provide a 6 O.D. round top with an 11 x 7 O.D. oblong base.
Portions of the pole near the base and at the arm connections may be held constant at 11x 7 oblong and 6 round respectively
to simplify fabrication.
D. Provide 'J', 'S' or 'C' hook at top of pole for electrical wires.
E. Equip poles located on bridges, walls and concrete median barriers/Traffic Railings with a vibration damper.
F. Perform all welding in accordance with Specification Secion 460-6.4.
G. Embedded Junction Boxes (EJB):
a. Weld all seams continuously and grind smooth.
b. Hot Dip Galvanize after Fabrication.
c. Provide a watertight cover with neoprene gasket and secure cover with galvanized screws.
H. For Median Barrier Mounted Aluminum Light Poles, the fabricator must demonstrate the ability to produce a crack free pole. The
fabricators Department-approved QC Plan must contain the following information prior to fabrication:
a. Tests demonstrating a pole with a 1#4 wall thickness achieves and ultimate moment capacity of 36 kip*ft in the strong axis
and 30 kip*ft in the weak axis.
b. Tests demonstrating a pole with a 5#16wall thickness achieves an ultimate moment capacity of 44 kip*ft in the strong axis
and 37 kip*ft in the weak axis.
c. Test results showing the pole does not buckle at the shape transition area under the ultimate moment capacity loads.
d. Complete details and calculations for the reinforced 4x 6 (Min.) handhole located 1-6 above the base plate.
I. Identification Tag: (Submit details for approval.)
a. 2 x 4 (Max.) aluminum identification tag.
b. Locate on the inside of the transformer base and visible from the door opening.
c. Secure to transformer base with 1#8 diameter stainless steel rivets or screws.
2. Pole Height
5. Coatings/Finish:
A. Pole and Arm Finish: 50 grit satin rubbed.
B. Galvanize Steel Bolts, Screws, Nuts and Washers: ASTM F2329
C. Hot Dip Galvanize EJB and other steel items including poles: ASTM A123
6. Construction:
A. Foundation: Specification Section 455, except payment for the foundation is included in the cost of the pole.
B. Frangible Base and Clamp:
a. Certify that the Clamp and Frangible Transformer Base Design are capable of providing the required capacity.
b. Certify the Base conforms to the current FHWA required AASHTO Frangibility Requirements, tested under NCHRP Report
350 Guidelines (e.g. Akron Foundry TB1-17).
C. Do not erect pole without Luminaire attached.
1/5/2016
10:
26:
38 AM
7. Payment Note: Include the cost of the EJB in the cost of the median barrier or Traffic Railing it is embedded in.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
NOTES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17515
SHEET
NO.
2 of 8
Upper Arm
1
4"
Extrusion at Base
Saddle, or Other Acceptable
of Upper Arm Only
Diameter
6"
7
8"
Fillet Weld Arm Tube to
3
8"
Wall
Thickness (Nominal)
Connection Extrusion.
Extrusion
See Arm Data Tables
Supplied
4" Min. Radius at Bend
for Weld Size.

1'
-4"
by Vendor
Vertical Axis
SECTION A-A
ARM CONNECTION DETAIL
Tapped Hole
Watertight
1
8
Connection
1
8"
3
8"
1" Min. I.D. Rubber Grommet
(Connection At Lower Arm Similar)
ARM SECTION
1
16"
1
1 2"
Dim ple (
see Detail)
Arm Data Tables
Long
at of Upper Arm for
1'
-2"
Outside
See "O.D." in
1
3
8"x2 4"
of Wiring Hole in Pole
3"
At Lower Arm
6"
Connection
Welded Cap
Lower Arm
3
16
Press on or
Side of Arms, Extruded
L 3x2x
Hole in Connection
Upper Arm &
3
16
x 3" Bar Each
High Temp
Vinyl Cap (both ends)
1
4"
Deep
Spherical
(See Cap Details)
7
8"
Provide 2" Wiring

1
2"
surface
1
1 2"
1
11 4"
long
ASTM A36 Hot Rolled Rod
2" x 12" Long Sch. 10

Aluminum Pipe ASTM
B221 Alloy 6063-T6
Pole
7
8"
Fixture Arm Length = 8', 10', 12' or 15'
3'-0"
3 x (Fixture Arm Length - 3'-0") / 4
(Fixture Arm Length - 3'-0") /4

1
3
8"x2 4"
L 3x2x
6"
DIMPLE DETAIL
Watertight
1
8
Long (Typ.)
1'-4"
3
8"
3
8"
This Point - See Arm
VIBRATION DAMPER ELEVATION
Tube Extrusion Note
1'
-0
"
Fixture Arm
Tapped Hole
O.D. Pipe Beyond
3
3
8" 1 8"
ASTM D2287
2
Upper Arm Tube
PVC Type 65500
3
8"
Tapped Hole
3
4"
Chamfer (Typ.)
3
8"
Tapped Hole
Varies
6"
Double arm configuration
3
4"
1
2"
is only for Median Barrier

1
Mounted Aluminum Light Poles
4'
-6"
M
VIEW B-B
O.D.) for
Luminaire Attachment
5'-6" (12' and 15' Fixture Arm Lengths)
3
16
See Arm
Connection
Detail
1" 1"
Slipfitter
3
(2 8"
3'-0" (8' and 10' Fixture Arm Lengths)
2"
2" Nominal Pipe Size
3"
axi
mu
m R
adi
us
Level
1
1 2"
See Arm Section Above
1
2"
As Required
2" x 12" Long Sch. 10

Aluminum Pipe ASTM
6"
1
2"
Strut - 1
ID
B221 Alloy 6063-T6
O.D. x 0.125 (Min.)
1'
-9"
A
Lower Arm Tube -
HIGH TEMP
VINYL CAP DETAIL
VIEW C-C
See Arm Section Above
ARM TABLE
WIND
ARM
SPEED
LENGTH
(MPH)
(FT)
UPPER ARM
O.D. (IN)
WELD (IN)
LOWER ARM
O.D. (IN)
WELD (IN)
Provide
1
8"
(Min.) Drain Holes in Underside

1
2"
of Arm Tubes 1
110
11:
46:
30 AM
110
8
10 & 12
2.38
0.188
2.38
0.188
3.63
0.188
3.63
0.188
110
15
4.63
0.188
4.63
0.188
130
8 & 10
3.63
0.188
3.63
0.188
130
12
4.63
0.188
4.63
0.188
Arm at
From the Base Weld
Face of Pole
ARM TUBE EXTRUSIONS NOTES:

At the pole connections, provide arm tube extrusions with dimensions as
Provide
Pole Connection Extrusion (Typical) - See
Note on Sheet 2 for Material Specification
1
2"
Stainless
Steel Bolts with Hex Nuts

1
8"
and 2-1
O.D. Flat Washers
and a Split Lockwasher Each Side
shown in the ARM SECTION and as tabulated in the ARM DATA Tables.
Uniformly transition elliptical section to a cylindrical section at the arm
connection.
The fabricator may substitute elliptical cross sections other than those
130
15
4.63
0.25
4.63
0.25
150
3.63
0.188
3.63
0.188
150
10
3.63
0.250
3.63
0.250
provide minimum wall thickness of
150
12
4.63
0.250
4.63
0.250
Association Tolerances.
150
15
4.63
0.313
4.63
0.313
of Pole where Shown.
ARM ELEVATION
tabulated, provided the section properties about the vertical axis and the
area of the section equal or exceed that of the required section, and
1
8"
nominal and within the Aluminum
3
8"
The outside diameter about the minor axis should be held at 2

*
at the
upper and lower arms.
Increase Member Wall Thickness as Necessary to Meet

Minimum Requirements of the Welding Code for the
12/3/2015
Connection Weld Sizes Shown in the Arm and Pole Tables.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
ARM & DAMPER DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17515
SHEET
NO.
3 of 8
1
'
-0
"
POLE TABLE W/ARM
Slots for 15" Bolt Circle
Slots for Cast Aluminum Base
Tie Bars *
2"
WIND
L
a
p
Shoe 13" Bolt Circle
SPEED
Tenon
3"
Pole &
Arm
(MPH)
DESIGN
ARM LENGTH
MOUNTING
(FT)
HEIGHT (FT)
POLE
UPPER
WALL (IN)
LOWER
WELD (IN) WELD (IN)
110
8, 10, 12 & 15
40 & 45
0.156
0.156
0.156
110
8, 10, 12 & 15
50
0.188
0.188
0.188
130
8, 10 & 12
40
0.156
0.156
0.156
130
15
40
0.188
0.188
0.188
130
8, 10, & 12
45
0.188
0.188
0.188
130
15
45
0.250
0.250
0.250
130
8, 10, 12 & 15
50
0.250
0.250
0.250
150
8, 10, & 12
40
0.188
0.188
0.188
0.250
8 - #7 Bars
Equally Spaced
r
ve
Co
"
)
3
p.
Ty
(
SECTION C-C
TOP VIEW
TRANSFORMER BASE
BOTTOM VIEW
TRANSFORMER BASE
TOP MOUNT TENON
150
15
40
0.250
0.250
150
8, 10, 12 & 15
45
0.250
0.250
0.250
150
8, 10, 12 & 15
50
0.313
0.313
0.313
2'-6"
Typical
Typ.
Arm
Each W ay
5
16"
45
Pole &
POLE TABLE W/TOP MOUNT

WIND
Fillet Weld Outside of Pole

to Inside of Base Shoe.
See Pole Data Tables
5
16"
for Upper Weld Size.
1'-3"
10" O.D. Shaft
Cast Aluminum
Bolt Circle
Nut Cover - Bolted
Anchor Bolts Oriented
UPPER
LOWER
HEIGHT (FT)
110
40 & 45
0.125
0.125
110
50
0.156
0.156
0.156
130
40
0.125
0.125
0.125
130
45
0.156
0.156
0.156
130
50
0.188
0.188
0.188
WALL (IN)
WELD (IN) WELD (IN)
0.125
150
40
0.156
0.156
0.156
150
45
0.188
0.188
0.188
150
50
0.250
0.250
0.250
Pole wall thicknesses shown in the POLE TABLE are nominals and
for Wall Thickness
Attachment Optional
as Shown when the
POLE
MOUNTING
(MPH)
NOTE:
Pressure Mounted
4 - Equally Spaced
VIEW B-B
DESIGN
SPEED
shall be within the Aluminum Association Tolerances. Thicker walls

are permitted and tapered walls may be used provided the
Shaft is Installed.
minimum Aluminum Association thicknesses are not violated.
Anchor Bolt, See Note
3 "
M in.
3 "
in Pole Base Elevation
Cast Aluminum
Base Shoe
See Note on
Sheet No. 2
Elbow 1" Min.

(Typ.)
1"
Fillet Weld Butt of Pole
Shoe Base Bolt with
to Inside of Base Shoe.
Nut and Washer

for Lower Weld Size
1'
-5"
Conduit with
M inim um Em bedm ent
3'
-6"
Tie Bars *
6'
-0" M inim um
(
See Pole Data Tables for Depth Required)
4"
1" Chamfer
WIND
DESIGN
TOTAL
SPEED
MOUNTING
DEPTH
(MPH)
HEIGHT (FT)
(FT) **
110
40
110
45 & 50
130
40 & 45
130
50
150
40 & 45
150
50
10
DANGER
Cast Aluminum
HIGH VOLTAGE
FOUNDATION TABLE
W/TOP MOUNT
DO NOT TAMPER
Frangible/Breakaway
Transformer Base. See
Notes on Sheet No. 2
Anchor Bolt and Washer
as Required by Approved
Double
#6 AWG Bare Ground
Nuts (Typ.)
Wire Cast in Concrete
Breakaway Transformer
Base Manufacture (Typ.)
or Placed in Conduit
POLE BASE ELEVATION

8~#7 Bars
Equally Spaced
Class I Concrete may be
4"
Cast-in-Place or Precast
11:
46:
31 AM
FOUNDATION TABLE W/ARM
WIND
DESIGN
TOTAL
SPEED
MOUNTING
DEPTH
(MPH)
HEIGHT (FT)
(FT) **
110
40
110
45 & 50
130
40
130
45 & 50
150
40 & 45
150
50
** Depths shown in table are for

*
#4 Tie Bars @ 12" centers (max.) or D10 (or W10) spiral @ 6" pitch, 3 flat
turns top and 1 flat turn bottom.
grades flatter than 1:4, for grades

up to 1:2 add 2'-6" to foundation
depths shown in table.
12/3/2015
FOUNDATION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
POLE AND BASE DETAILS FOR ROADWAY ALUMINUM LIGHT POLE

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17515
SHEET
NO.
4 of 8
1
4"
POLE TABLE
Anchor Bolt
threaded 8" min.
WIND
1
2"
top and bottom
SPEED
Stiffener Plate
1
1
2"x5"x10 2"
1
4"
& Light Pole
Min.
(2 required)
R (Typ.)
Base Plate
1
4"
Bend as shown
1
2"
DESIGN
ARM LENGTH
(FT)
(MPH)
130 (Typ.)
MOUNTING
HEIGHT (FT)
POLE
FILL HEIGHT
WALL (IN)
(FT)
110
8, 10, 12
40
0.25
Up to 70'
130
8, 10, 12
40
0.25
Up to 70'
150
8, 10, 12
40
0.25
Up to 20'
150
8, 10, 12
40
0.313
>20' to 70'
*Double Nuts
NOTE:
4"
Pole wall thicknesses shown in the POLE TABLE are nominals

1
4"
and shall be within the Aluminum Association Tolerances.
Plate Washer
Thicker walls are permitted and tapered walls may be used
STIFFENER PLATE DETAIL

2"
provided the minimum Aluminum Association thicknesses are
1
4"
1'-6"
3
4"
1
4"
1
2"
3
1
2"
1
4"
1 Bolt Dia. (Max.)
1
2"
2"
Leveling Nut
Plate Washer
3
4"
2"
not violated.
Base Plate
Galv. Coupler
permitted (Typ.)
Base Plate
Hole (Typ.)
Top of
Penetration Weld
Traffic Railing
3
4"
& Light Pole
Full
NOTE:
For locations of Bearing Plates, Base
1
4"
1
2"
Plates and Detail 'A' see Sheets 6 & 7.
Base Plate
& Light Pole
1
2
*Top nut may be
height
Jam Nut. Provide individual nut
1
2"
1
4"
8"
4
"
o
le
DETAIL 'A'
cover (not shown) for each bolt.
Backer Ring
3
4"
1
4"x3"
1
2"
1516"
Full
Stiffener Plate (see

Stiffener Plate Detail)
Hole (Typ.)
Penetration Weld
BASE PLATE PLAN
BEARING PLATE ELEVATION

1
4"x3"
Backer Ring
Pole Wall
1'-5"
Base Plate
& Light Pole
1
4"
Outer Wall of Pole
1
2"
1
4"
1'-0"
1
1
2"
1
2"
Backer Ring
1
4"x3"
1
4"
Stiffener Plate
1
2"
1'-2
2"
fillet reinforcing
1
2"
3
3
8"x 4"
3
4"
w/
7"
3"
Full penetration weld
5"
3
8"
5
16"
1
2"
1
4"
Hole (Typ.)
11:
46:
32 AM
2"
1
2"
BEARING PLATE PLAN
12/3/2015
BASE PLATE ELEVATION
Hole (Typ.)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
BASE PLATE DETAILS FOR MEDIAN BARRIER MOUNTED ALUMINUM LIGHT POLE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17515
SHEET
NO.
5 of 8
11'-0"
1'-3"
5'-6"
6"
5'-6"
Galvanized
Screws (Typ.)
(Box and Cover)
3"
Symmetrical
1'
-0"
1'
-0"
1" Conduit
about Light Pole
Cover Plate
with Gasket
7'-3"
6"
4'
-0"
2'
-0"
8'
-0"
2" Conduit
A
3"
4"
3"
4"
1"
4'
-0"
1'-4"
3"
8"
(Typ.)
3
16
FRONT VIEW
8"
VIEW A-A
11"
EMBEDDED JUNCTION BOX DETAILS
2'
-5"
Optional Const. Jt.
2" Conduit
1" Conduit
1" Conduit
Provide dowel bars

@ construction joint
PLAN
(Reinforcing steel not shown)
2'-0"
3'-0"
2'-0"
2"
Min. 10' from free end, barrier wall transition,
2'-3"
2"
5"
approach ends and guardrail.
1
2"
5"
10"
10"
1" Conduit
1'-0" x 1'-3" x 8" (Max.)
See Detail 'A'
Sheet 5
BARS 5W1
4 ~ 1" Anchor Bolts

For Base Plate
#5 Bars, 4' long (Typ.)
3
9 4"
details see Sheet 5
3"
3"
For reinforcing steel
3"
@ 8"
W all
1'
-0"
1'
-11"
1'
-10"
7"
Construction Joint permitted

See Roadway Plans
3"
16 ~ #4 Bars @ 8"
2'
-5"
2'
-9"
See Roadway Plans
Bars 4D
see Indexes 410 & 421
8"
1"
Bars 5W1
1'
-0"
Bars 5W1
3'
-7"
Bars 5R @ 8" (Typ.)
Traffic Railing
2'
-9"
above foundation
BARS 4D
Bars 5W1 @ 8"

3" Cover
5"
(Top and sides)
Bearing Plate
1" Exp. Jt.

Material with
12 ~ #4 Bars @ 8"
Bearing Plate
BARS 5R
1'
-6"
1'
-6"
(Typ.)
Rigid Pavement
1" Conduit for grounding
" x 20' Grounding Rod
4" Cover
Bars 4D
(Bottom)
@ 8"
4" Cover
(Bottom)
#4 Bar
2'
-6"
#5 Bars @ 8"
2'
-6"
11:
46:
32 AM
4"
only
12 ~ #5 Bars @ 8"
16 ~ #5 Bars @ 8"
(Typ.)
NOTE:
2" Conduit
8'-0"
For Bearing Plate Details see Sheet 5.
11'-0"
2" Conduit
12/3/2015
2" Conduit
END VIEW
ELEVATION
(For Roadway Concrete Barrier Wall reinforcing steel see Index 410)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SPREAD FOOTING DETAILS FOR MEDIAN BARRIER MOUNTED ALUMIMUM LIGHT POLE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17515
SHEET
NO.
6 of 8
2'-0"
2"
7'-3"
NOTE:
2"
5"
9"
FOUNDATION TABLE
5"
For Roadway Concrete

Barrier Wall see Index 410
Symmetrical
NOTE:
about Light Pole
DESIGN
FOUNDATION
SPEED
MOUNTING
DEPTH
(MPH)
HEIGHT (FT)
(FT)
For Base Plate Details,

Base Plate
1'-6"
WIND
1'-6"
Bearing Plate Detail
110
40
and Detail 'A' see
130
40
150
40
Sheet 5
2'-6"
Roadway Concrete
2'
-9"
foundation see Index 421
7"
3"
See Roadway Plans

1'-3"
with Rigid Pavement
1'
-6"
only
Double
Pole &
Arm
3'
-0"
25
1'
-6"
Bearing Plate
#4 Bars (Typ.)
Provide dowel bars @ construction joint
2'
-3
"
Nuts (Typ.)
1" Chamfer
1'-3"
Optional Const. Jt.
PLAN
2'-6"
Construction Joint
4"
1'
-0"
1'
-3"
2'
-0"
For reinforcing steel above
2'
-6"
3'
-7"
1'
-3"
Barrier Wall
1'
-10"
1'-3"
1"
1'-3"
6"
Min.
1'-0" x 1'-3" x 8" (Max.) Pull Box

Min. 10' from free end,
barrier wall transition,
2'-0"
3'-0"
approach ends and
2'-3"
#7 Bars
guardrail.
VIEW B-B
C
1" Conduit
4 ~ 1
See Detail 'A'

Sheet 5
1
4"
Anchor Bolts
2'-6"
8'
-3" to 9'
-3"
Varies
Tie Bars *
Foundation Depth
(
See Foundation Table)
8 - #7 Bars
Equally Spaced
2'-6"
8 #7 Bars
(equally spaced)
* #4 Tie Bars @ 12" centers (max.) or D10 (or W10) spiral @ 6" pitch,
3 flat turns top and 1 flat turn bottom.
Class I Concrete may be

Cast-in-Place or Precast
with "Flowable Fill" Backfill
4"
11:
46:
33 AM
2" Conduit
Arm
SECTION C-C
(
See Foundation Table)
Bearing Plate
Grounding Rod
Foundation Depth
" x 20'
Traffic Railing
2'
-9"
2'
-6" M in.
for grounding
Pole &
r
ve
Co
)
.
3"
n
i
M
(
1'
-0"
4"
1" Conduit
Tie Bars *
1
'
L 0"
a
p
Tie Bars *
Bars 5R @ 8" (Typ.)
NOTE:
12/3/2015
avoid cylindrical foundation.
ELEVATION
3"
Deviate 2" Conduit to
END VIEW
(For Roadway Concrete Barrier Wall reinforcing steel see Index 410)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
CYLINDRICAL FOUNDATION DETAILS FOR MEDIAN BARRIER MOUNTED ALUMINUM LIGHT POLE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17515
SHEET
NO.
7 of 8
9"
Symmetrical
about Light Pole
3"
3"
3"
Bridge Deck
7'-3"
2'
-5"
1
'
-2
"
Traffic Railing (Median 32" F Shape)
7"
5430'
2"
9"
2'
-0"
2"
7"
5" (Typ.)
1'-4"
BARS 5R
BARS 5W
Optional Const. Jt.
Bridge Deck

PLAN
1'-0" x 1'-3" x 8" (Max.) Pull Box

Min. 5' from open joint
2'-0"
3'-0"
2'-0"
2'-3"
2"
Bars 5R and 5W @ 1'-0"
Bars 5R and 5W @ 8"
2"
Bars 5R and 5W @ 1'-0"

5"
9"
5"
1" Conduit
1" Conduit
4 ~ 1" Anchor Bolts
See Detail 'A'

Sheet 5
Base Plate
2" Conduit
Bars 5S
2" Conduit
Cover
2"
M in.
1'
-10"
see Index 421
Bars 5R
7"
Bearing Plate
Construction Joint
3"
Bars 5W
Deck
8"
Bridge Deck
2'
-8"
3'
-2" M in.
Traffic Railing
2'
-8"
For reinforcing steel
Bridge Deck
6" Min.
Embedment
8"
Min.
Bars 5S (Typ.)
Bearing Plate
Bars 5R (Typ.)
ELEVATION
END VIEW
Bars 5W (Typ.)
(Longitudinal and transverse deck reinforcing steel not shown)
(Longitudinal and transverse deck reinforcing steel not shown)

11:
46:
34 AM
NOTES:
1.
For Base Plate Details, Bearing Plate Details and Detail 'A' see sheet 5.
2.
See Index 421 for details of Traffic Railing (Median 32" F Shape) and
12/3/2015
angles A and B.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DETAILS FOR TRAFFIC RAILING (MEDIAN 32" F SHAPE) MOUNTED ALUMIMUM LIGHT POLE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17515
SHEET
NO.
8 of 8
Concrete Apron
1'
-0"
1'
-0"
Concrete Apron
Conduit
(As Shown In Plans)
1'-0"
Conduit
(As Shown In Plans)
1'-0"
2" Conduit
(As Shown In Plans)
2" Conduit
(As Shown In Plans)
Ground Rod
(As Required)
Ground Rod
(As Required)
Secondary Conduit
(As Required)
Locate Wire (Typ.)
Secondary Conduit
(As Required)
Splice Box (200' Min.) Stored Fiber.

Pull Box (50' Min.) Stored Fiber.
1'-0"
Varies
6"
Varies
6"
1'-0"
1'-0"
6"
Varies
6"
1'-0"
Approved Ground
Connection
(As Required)
Approved Ground
Connection
(As Required)
Locate Wire
Locate Wire
12" Bed Of Pearock

Or Crushed Stone
For Drainage
12" Bed Of Pearock

Or Crushed Stone
For Drainage
Ground Rod
(As Required)
Ground Rod
(As Required)
PULL BOX
FIBER OPTIC BOX

Rectangular boxes are depicted. Round fiber
optic splice boxes and lids are allowed.
NOTES:
1. Boxes shall not be installed in roadways or driveways.
6. Conduit center line shall be aligned to top edge of box to

facilitate cable pulling.
10:
19:
50 AM
2. Boxes shall be on the Approved Product List (APL).

7. All boxes shall have 1'-0" wide (min) concrete apron. Concrete
3. Boxes shall be installed flush with the finished grade surface.
for concrete aprons shall be Class NS with a minimum strength

at 28 days of f'c=2.5 Ksi. Aprons shall be sloped away from box.
4. Fiber Optic splice boxes shall be provided with cable hanger
Cost of apron to be included in the cost of each box.
racks designed to support cables and splice enclosures.

Cost of racks to be included in cost of splice box.
8. Prevent the ingress of Water, Dirt, Sand, and other foreign
12/7/2015
materials into the conduit prior to, during and after construction
5. Fiber optic boxes shall contain only Fiber Optic Cable, Conduit,
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
and Locate Wire.
using a foam-sealing material, rubber plug, or other device designed

for this application and approved.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
PULL AND SPLICE BOX
NO.
17700
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Curb & Gutter
Concrete
Finished
Plus 12"
R/W
Sidewalk
Surface Of
Width Of Trench
Roadway
8"
8"
8"
6"
Plus 12"
6"
30" M in*.
Width Of Trench
Asphaltic
Finished Grade
6"
6"
Backfill And Tamp
Base
With Material
36" M in*.
Asphalt
Trench
Flowable Fill
Tamped Or
Undisturbed Material
Flowable Fill
Tamped Or
Conduit
Tamped Or
36" M in*.
Removed From
Conduit
Conduit
FOR USE IN AREAS NOT EXPOSED

TO VEHICULAR TRAFFIC
FOR USE IN ASPHALT ROADWAY ADJACENT
FOR USE IN INSTALLING CONDUIT UNDER
TO GUTTER WHEN PLACEMENT OUTSIDE OF
EXISTING ASPHALT PAVEMENT NOT ADJACENT
THE PAVEMENT IS NOT FEASIBLE.
TO GUTTER WHEN JACKING OR DIRECT BORING

IS NOT FEASIBLE.
GURE B
FI
GURE A
FI
GURE C
FI
Note:
1.
Trench not to be open more than 250' at a time
Note:
when construction area is subject to vehicular or
1.
pedestrian traffic.
Note:
1.
Sidewalk patches to match existing joints.
2.
Entire sidewalk slab must be replaced when
2.
existing pavement at 36" minimum depth.
Asphalt to be sawcut to leave neat lines at the
2.
Asphalt to be sawcut at the edges of the trench.
3.
The removal and replacement of the additional
pavement cut.
specified in the plans.

3.
3.
Rigid conduit must be used when jacking under
See note 3 Figure C.
pavement width (6") will not be required when the
Backfill and tamp with material from trench
trench can be constructed without disturbing the
except at driveways. At driveways, backfill a
asphalt surface on either side.
length of trench within the driveway entirely

with Flowable Fill.
Min. 36" Or As Directed
*May be adjusted due to field
By The Engineer
conditions upon approval of

project engineer.
Finished
Surface Of
Surface Of
Roadway
Roadway
R/W
Conduit Located In Front Of Guardrail
As Scaled From Plans
Curb & Gutter
8"
Finished Grade
8"
Slope May Vary
30" M in*.
Backfill And Tamp
Trench Depth
36" M in*.
See Note 3
M inim um 36'
'
Finished
E.
P.
Conduit Located Behind Guardrail
Conduit(s)
Tamped Or Undisturbed Material
Conduit
Drainage Pipe Beneath Roadway And / Or Utilities
Tamped Or Undisturbed Material

11:
47:
18 AM
Conduit
* Maintain 12" Minimum Vertical Clearance When Crossing Over Pipe

FOR USE INSTALLING CONDUIT UNDER
A NEW ROADWAY PRIOR TO INSTALLATION
FOR USE IN INSTALLING CONDUIT UNDER

SIDEWALK
FIGURE F
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
GURE
FI
Then Conduit Is To Be Routed Under Pipe Maintaining 12" Minimum

Vertical Clearance.
OF BASE AND PAVEMENT
GURE D
FI
And / Or Utilities. If Minimum Vertical Clearance Cannot Be Maintained,
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONDUIT INSTALLATION DETAILS
NO.
17721
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Cover
Pullbox
Conduit
Pullbox
Pullbox
30"
M in.
2"
12" Bed of pearock or crushed
Conduit
STREET
SIDE
ROADWAY
stone for drainage.
Min.
PLAN
Conduit
Curb & Gutter
36"
M in.
30"
PULLBOX ENTRY OF CONDUIT UNDER SIDEWALKS
Grade
Pullbox
M in.
Street Surface
Pullbox
M in.
Sidewalk
30"
Conduit
FIGURE A
Conduit
FIGURE C
FOR USE UNDER RAILROADS
Conduit
UNDER SIDEWALK
UNDER ROADWAY
Conduit
UNDER NONTRAFFIC
BEARING SURFACE
Note:
Ends of conduit shall be sealed in accordance
SECTION
with Section 630 of the Standard Specifications
Conduit
4'M in. *
for Road and Bridge Construction.

*
Conduit depth to be at RR
FIGURE B
requirement but not less 4'.

Conduit
(PVC)
Conduit
(PVC)
(Rigid)
4' Min.
After jacking, leave rigid conduit as a sleeve

12"
extending to RR right of way limits.
M in.
30"
3" Warning Tape

3" Warning Tape (When Required)
(When Required)
(On Top Of Class I Conc.)

Orange Insulated
6" Min
Locate Wire
12"
6" Minimum
Conduits
Varies
30" M in.
(When Required)
Orange Insulated
Locate Wire
(When Required)
GENERAL NOTES:
Structure
1. The contractor, with approval from the Engineer, may adjust

Existing Utility Or Drainage
Varies
the final burial depth of the conduit(s) in order to transverse

nonmovable object conflicts.
Drain Pipe
2. Backfill with excavated material and compact the soil until
12"
firm and unyielding. Remove rock and debris from backfill

material.
2500 PSI Class I Concrete
(When Required)
3" Wide Warning
Communications Conduits
Tape Set Over Conc.
(As Shown On Plans)
structures (e.g., drain pipes or utility lines) which are less

than 30" deep, the contractor shall encase the conduit in 2500
PSI Class I concrete for the entire length of conduit that is
installed at a depth of less than 30".
Orange Insulated
4"
Locate Wire
4. If the amount of cover over the encasement is less than 6",
Varies
the contractor shall install the conduit to pass below the
Locate Wire
underground structures (e.g., drain pipes).
12"
Orange Insulated
(When Required)
11:
47:
20 AM
3. Where conduits are to be installed over existing underground
Fiber Optic
Less
30" Or
3" Warning Tape
6" Min
Conduits
4"
Existing Utility Or Drainage
Structure
CONDUIT INSTALLATION DETAILS ACROSS

EXISTING DRAIN PIPES OR UTILITIES
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
2"
SECTION AA
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONDUIT INSTALLATION DETAILS
NO.
17721
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Pole
NOTES:
1. Work with Index 17727 for grounding and span wire details. See the Plans for clamp
Pole Top
spacing, cable sizes and forces, signals and sign mounting locations and details.
(See Sheet 3)
1'-0" (Min.)
2. Shop Drawings:
This Index is considered fully detailed, only submit shop drawings for
Clamp Spacing Based
minor modifications not detailed in the Plans.
On Sag For Longest Span

Catenary
(See Signalization Plans)
Wire Clamp
3. Materials:
Catenary Wire
(See Sheet 3)
Split-lock washers and self-locking nuts are not permitted

A. Strain Pole and Backing Rings:
a. Less than
3
16":
ASTM A1011 Grade 50, 55, 60 or 65
b. Greater than or equal to
3
16":
ASTM A572 Grade 50, 55, 60 or 65
2" Pipe For
B. Steel Plates: ASTM A36
Messenger Wire
Wire Entrance
Messenger Wire
C. Weld Metal: E70XX
(See Sheet 3)
D. Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
Clamp (Typ.)
9"
(See Sheet 3)


F. Handhole Frame: ASTM A709 or ASTM A36, Grade 36
G. Handhole Cover: ASTM A1011 Grade 50, 55, 60 or 65
H. Aluminum Pole Caps and Nut Covers: ASTM B26 (319-F)
I. Stainless Steel Screws: AISI Type 316
J. Threaded Bars/Studs: ASTM A36 or ASTM A307
K. Concrete: Class IV (Drilled Shaft) for all environmental classifications.
'
L'(
See Plans)
0.
14 in/ft Taper (
Typ.
)

E. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers:
4. Fabrication:
Pole
A. Pole Taper: Change diameter at a rate of 0.14 inches per foot.
B. Upright splices are not allowed. Transverse welds are only permitted at the base.
C. Provide bolt hole diameters as follows:
a. Bolts (except Anchor Bolts): Bolt diameter plus 116", prior to galvanizing.
b. Anchor Bolts: Bolt diameter plus 12", maximum.
D. Locate handhole 180 from 2 wire entrance pipe.
Identification Tag
E. Identification Tag: (Submit details for approval.)

a. 2x 4 (Max.) aluminum identification tag.
(See Note #4E)

Handhole
b. Locate on the inside of the pole and visible from the handhole.
Top of Finished Grade
c. Secure to pole with 18 diameter stainless steel rivets or screws.
(See Sheet 3)
(Make Drilled Shaft
Flush With Adjacent
2. Pole Type
3. Pole height
Concrete Slabs. Use
Base Plate
Appropriate Expansion
Connection
(See Sheet 2)
Joint Filler)
6. Base Wall Thickness
F. Provide a J or C hook at the top of the pole for signal wiring support (See Sheet 3).
Bottom
G. Perform all welding in accordance with Specification Section 460-6.4.
Of Plate
2'
-6"
5. Fy of Steel
H. Hot Dip Galvanize after fabrication.

5. Coatings:
0" With Sidewalk

6" Otherwise
A. All Nuts, Bolts, Washers and Threaded Bars/Studs: ASTM F2329
Wire Entry Conduit
B. All other steel items ASTM A123

6. Construction:
A. Foundation: Specification Section 455, except that payment is included in the cost of the strain pole.
B. After installation, place wire screen between top of foundation and bottom of baseplate in accordance
with Specification Section 649-6.
Foundation
(Drilled Shaft)
11:
47:
20 AM
(See Sheet 2)
12/3/2015
STRAIN POLE ASSEMBLY
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
ELEVATION AND NOTES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL STRAIN POLE
NO.
17723
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
TABLE OF STRAIN POLE VARIABLES

1
4"
POLE
POLE
TYPE
MAXIMUM
ALLOWABLE
MOMENT
(kip-ft)
PS-IV
BASE CONNECTION
SHAFT
Min.
'BC' Dia. Anchor Bolt

Pole
No.
BA
of
Bolts (in)
J
(in)
K
(in)
95.4
0.250
14
PS-V
158.9
0.313
16
PS-VI
203.6
0.313
18
BB
(in)
BC
(in)
BF
(in)
25
2.50
1 3/8
60
10
28
2.50
1 1/2
12
30
2.50
1 1/2
DA
DB
No. of
(FT) (FT) #11 Bars
Double Nuts (See Note #3)

See DETAIL 'A'
Base Plate
Base Plate
14
14
60
15
14
60
16
14
PS-VII
280.3
0.313
21
14
33
2.50
1 1/2
60
16
4.5
16
PS-VIII
338.0
0.313
23
16
35
2.50
1 1/2
60
17
4.5
16
PS-IX
400.9
0.313
25
12
39
3.00
1 3/4
60
17
18
PS-X
469.1
0.313
27
14
41
3.00
1 3/4
60
18
18
'BB' Base Plate Thickness
Base Plate
Opening
(1) Bolt
Dia. (Max.)
3
8"
Foundation
'DB'
Foundation
Plate
Washers
(Drilled Shaft)
'BA'
Leveling Nut
Base Plate Dia.

2x'BC'
'BA'-4xBC'
"DB"
POLE ASSEMBLY
Bolt Circle Dia.
SECTION A-A
'BC' Dia. Anchor Bolt Threaded
8" Min. Each End (Typ.)
(
Top)
4" Cover
5"
Drilled Shaft & Pole
1' x 1" Chamfer
Base 'K'
6~#5 Tie Bars
Spaced @ 4"
'
BF'
Center of Drilled Shaft,

Base Plate And Pole
Center Of Pole
Inside Radius
Edge Of
Base Plate
Measured
Center to Flat
'BC' Anchor Bolts

Equally Spaced
Edge Of
Foundation
Double Nuts
(Typ.)
'J' Wall Thickness

0.6 x 'J' Seam Weld (Typ.)
(See Welding
Handhole And Pole
Note Sheet 1)
Break Radius (Typ.)
Min. Break Radius =
0.25 x (Inside Radius)
'
DA'
#5 Tie Bars
Spaced @
Shaft Length
1"
PLAN
'DB'
SECTION B-B
'BA"
'BA'-4x'BC'
1'-0" (Max.)
Pole
Center of Handhole
(Details See Sheet 3)
'DB'
Pole
Shaft Diameter
p
a
L
1'
-6"
2'
-2
"
Silicone Caulk
)
n.
Mi
(
Center Of
Drill Shaft
(Wall Thk. +")
"
x Wall Thickness
45
3" X
Backing Ring
1" (Min.)
Anchor Bolts (Typ.)
Base Plate
"
Pole Wall
Thickness
Anchor Bolt
#11 Bars
6"
Co
v
er
(
Ty
p.
)
Spaced
CSL Tube (Typ.)
#5 Tie Bars
7
+ 16"
Base Plate
Foundation
7"
Equally
11:
47:
28 AM
1
4"
Opening
See Finished Grade

Base Plate
Note on Sheet 1
6" Cover
#11 Bars
(Typ.)
Wire Screen
(See Spec. 649-6)
Equally Spaced
PLAN
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
FOUNDATION
12/3/2015
BASE PLATE
JOINT WELD DETAIL
DETAIL 'A'
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
FOUNDATON AND BASE DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL STRAIN POLE
NO.
17723
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
2 ~
Pole Top
1
4"
Holes For 2 ~
3
16"x3"
Steel Passivated Cotter Pins

3"
1
4"
Catenary And
3
4"
Messenger
Pole
3
8"
Wire Clamps
Min. Bolt
Flat Washer
Automatic Compression
3
4"
Type Clamp (Feed
Wire
Clamp
1
4"
Through Deadend)
Entrance
Thick Clevis
3
16"
ASTM A709 Grade 50
Detail
Pole Cap Plate
11 Gage
Handhole
Thick
DETAIL 'B'
Cover
1
2"
Bolt With Nut, Lock

3" (Typ.)
3
4"
Nut & Flat Washers (Typ.)
10
1
2"
1
1
2"
Bent Plate With Hole &
Slot For
1
2"
(Typ.)
1
4"
(Typ.)
Bolt (Typ.)
Bolt (Typ.)
Handhole
R
=
5
16"
Hole (Typ.)
Pole
27
8"
COVER
Pole
Center Of Pole, Pole
See DETAIL 'B'
Cap And Lifting Bar
Va
ri
es
3
16"
2"
C
5"
1
4"
1
4"
Grade 50
Handhold
(See Table For

10"
Frame
POLE ASSEMBLY
TOP VIEW
Thickness)
Typ.
1
4"
1
4"
Tack Welded
Cover Clip
2"
NOTE:
Nut & Flat Washers (Typ.)
Clamps have been sized for Design Cable Loads

shown in the Table, and a Maximum Pole Diameter
at the Clamp location of 2'-1".
Pole
Full Penetration Weld
Thickness Table, and a Maximum
3"
Pole Diameter at the Clamp location
Lifting Bar
1" Min.
FRAME
5"
Head, fastened securely to the

standard pipe for each pole
1
2"
4"
location. At locations other than
10"
of 2'-1". Use one clamp per cable.
Center Of Pole,
Pole Cap And
3
16"
Lifting Bar
Hole For 2"
'J' Hook For Wiring,
(Nominal) Sch. 80
the wire entrance, the Weather
Pole
Pipe
Head face is to be left closed

to outside atmosphere. Wire
Partial
1
4"
Penetration
3. Any combination of Option 'a' or 'b'
Long,
ASTM A500 Grade B
1"
3
8
1
4"
Weld (Typ.)
1
4
Nut
Pole
1
2 2"
2. Install a properly sized Weather
entrance installed per Index 17727.
Pole Cap Plate
1"
Hex
2"
1
4"
6"
For
Head Screw (Typ.)
Overhang (Min.)
Bolt With Nut, Lock
1
2"
2"
Cable Loads shown in the Clamp
1
4"
1
2"
21
4"
R
=
Threaded Hole
1. Clamps have been sized for Design
Typ.
PLAN
(Typ.)
NOTES:
Hole
Welded To Underside Of Bar
ASTM A709
3
8"
1
16")
And Matching Nut Tack
Steel Clamp,
4"x
x 2" Lifitng Bar With
(Bolt Size +
Thick Clevis
CUT-AWAY
Bar Welded To
(Option 'a')
Inside Of Pole
Steel Clamp, ASTM A709 Grade
ASTM A709 Grade 50
Commercial
Grade Hot Rolled
50 (See Table For Thickness)
ELEVATION
may be used provided both lifting

and wiring is accommodated.
Cast Aluminum
1
4"
Thick (Min.)
Pole Cap Plate
CATENARY AND MESSENGER WIRE CLAMPS

Stainless Steel
1"
Handhole
Screws (3 Typ.)
2"
1"
Cover
CLAMP THICKNESS TABLE
Minimum
Plate
Diameter
Breaking
Thickness
(in.)
Strength (kip)
(in.)
1/2
25
7/16
18
7/8
3/8
11.5
3/4
1/4
3.15
3/8
11:
47:
29 AM
Cable
Handhold
1
4"
Frame
Pole
Weather Head
Stainless Steel
(See Note #2)
Hex Head Screw (Typ.)

Pole
Center Of Pole
1" Min.
5"
Cover Clip
45
3"
11 Gage
1"
Tack Weld
And Pole Cap
2" NPS, Sch. 40 Pipe
3
16"
'C' Hook For Wiring And

(Thru Handhole)
SECTION C-C
CUT-AWAY
1
4"
(Option 'b')
Lifting,
1
2"
Commercial
Grade Hot Rolled Bar

Welded To Inside Of Pole
(See Note #3)
HANDHOLE
POLE TOP
12/3/2015
WIRE ENTRANCE DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
ATTACHMENT DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL STRAIN POLE
NO.
17723
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
GENERAL NOTES:
1.
Work these Index drawings with the Strain Pole Schedule in the Plans.
2.
Shop Drawings:
This Design Standard is considered fully detailed and no shop drawings are necessary.
Submit shop drawings for minor modifications not detailed in the plans.
3.
4.
Materials:
A.
Concrete:
B.
Prestress Strands & Spiral Reinforcing: Specification Section 641
Class V Special or Class VI
C.
Hand and coupler cover plates:
Non-corrosive material
D.
Screws:
Round headed, chrome plated
Fabrication:
A.
Pole Taper for pole width, strands, reinforcing and void: 0.081 in/ft per face.
B.
Concrete Cover: 1 minimum
C.
Spiral Reinforcing: As shown, plus one turn for splices and two turns at both the tip and butt ends
of the pole.
D.
The design dimensions for Front Face (FF) and Back Face (BF) of the poles may vary transversely
from the section shown by to assist with removal from forms. Balance addition and subtraction
of the face widths to maintain section areas shown.
E.
Tie ground wires to the interior of reinforcing steel to prevent displacement during concreting operations.
F.
Cut the tip end of the prestressed strand first or simultaneously with the butt end.
G.
Provide cover plates and screws for hand hole and couplers. Attach cover plates to the poles using lead
anchors or embedded threaded inserts.
H.
Provide Aluminum Identification Tags on the poles with the following information:
a. Financial Project ID.
b. Pole Manufacturer
c. Standard Pole Type Number
d. Pole Length (L)
5.
Support locations are for strand release, storage, lifting and transport. Keep BF oriented downward until
final erection.
Pick-up and support locations shown may vary within a tolerance of 3.
7.
Two point attachment: provide an eye bolt hole for the messenger wire.
8.
Tether Wire: When required, field-drill the eyebolt hole prior to installation
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
47:
35 AM
6.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE POLES
NO.
17725
SHEET
NO.
1of 8
Final Grade Location

48" No. 6 Bare Copper Ground Wire
Identification Markings
1'-0"
4'-0"
24" No. 6
1'-6"
Bare Copper
Plug Void End with
Ground Wire
Butt End (Bottom)

2"
6 "
r
e
p
a
lT
a
t
o
.T
Ft
/
.
n
2I
6
1
.
0
Front Face
Min. 3" of Concrete
Tip End (Top)
Back Face
1" Cover
13 Turns @ 2" Pitch

#9 (Min.) Gauge Spiral Reinforcing
(Typ.)
20 Turns @ 6" Pitch
(Provide Additional Turn at Ends)
Support Locations
(Horizontal Pole)
Type P-IIA
Type P-IIB
68 Turns @ 6" Pitch
2'-0"
8'-O"
4'-0"
Type P-IIA
29'-O"
7'-0"
Type P-IIB
2'-0"
2'-0"
Type P-IIA
5'-6"
3'-6"
Type P-IIB
12'-0"
Type P-IIA
36'-0"
Type P-IIB
SERVICE POLE P-IIA (12 Ft.) & P-IIB (36 Ft.) ELEVATION
(Strands Not Shown)
12" No. 6
Bare Copper
2'-6"
2"
Ground Wire
1'-6"
1'-6"
1'-0"
2" Galv. Nipple (On )
Plug Void End with

1" Galvanized
Min. 3" of Concrete
Butt End (Bottom)

3"x5" Hand Hole with Cover
2"
6 "
Threaded Nipple
r
e
p
a
lT
a
t
o
.T
Ft
/
.
n
2I
6
1
.
0
Front Face
Tip End (Top)
Back Face
1" Cover
13 Turns @ 2" Pitch
(Typ.)
20 Turns @ 6" Pitch
#9 (Min.) Gauge Spiral Reinforcing

(Provide Additional Turn at Ends)
2'-0"
8'-O"
Support Locations
4'-O"
2'-0"
2'-0"
(Horizontal Pole)
12'-0"
PEDESTAL POLE P-IIC (12 Ft.) ELEVATION

NOTES:
(Strands Not Shown)
Strands shown are continuous from Tip End to Butt End.

Void & Section
Elevation view scale is exaggerated vertically for clarity.
1 " M in.
Void & Section
1 "
M in.
Front Face
1"
Min. 2"
" Chamfer (Typ.)
Front Face
1"
For final erection, tilt pole upright with single point attachment located a
2" * (Min.)
Min.
distance of 4 Ft. (for P-IIA & P-IIC) or 10 Ft. (for P-IIB) from the Tip End.
" Chamfer (Typ.)

* Dimension may vary from 2" to 3" to accommodate smaller radius of
optional stepped (PVC) void. The void diameter shall not be less than 2".
Void & Section
11:
47:
36 AM
#9 (Min.) Gauge Spiral
- Prestressed Strand:
Back Face
(Optional for
Pole P-IIA)
Void & Section
STRAND LEGEND
Circular Void
6"
Circular Void
0.5 in. ~ 24 kips Before
(Optional for
Transfer or
Pole P-IIA)
Back Face
SECTION A-A
TIP END SECTION (TOP)
Varies
6 "
2"
#9 (Min.) Gauge Spiral
(Typical Square Section)
Transfer
12/3/2015
(4 strands total)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SERVICE AND PEDESTAL POLE TYPE P-II

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE POLES
NO.
17725
SHEET
NO.
2 of 8
One Additional
One Additional
Turn at End
Turn at End
1" Cover
(Typ.)
1" Cover
13 Turns @ 2" Pitch
#5 Gauge Spiral Reinforcing
(Typ.)
6" Pitch
Varies
2'-0"
SPIRAL REINFORCING ELEVATION

(Strands, Holes, and Fixtures Not Shown)
1'-0"
3'-6"
1'-6"
24" No. 6
Bare Copper
Front Face
r
e
p
a
lT
a
t
o
.T
Ft
/
.
n
2I
6
1
.
0
2 "
7 "
Ground Wire
3"x5" Conduit
Entry Hole
Plug Void End with
Tip End
Min. 3" of Concrete
(Top)
Back Face
Varies
2'-6"
2'-6"
2" Galv. Coupler with Cover
Butt End
Pole Height Dim. H
Depth Dim. D
20% L
Support Locations
(Bottom)
20% L
(Horizontal Pole)
Pole Length Dim. L
POLE ELEVATION
(Strands and Reinforcing Not Shown)
(See Design Standard Index 17900 and Specification 744 for
Modifications to Type P-III Poles Used at Traffic Monitoring Sites)
1 " (
M in.
)
Void & Section
Void & Section
1 "
(
M in.
)
Front Face
Front Face
1"
NOTES:
2" * (Min.)
(Min.)
" Chamfer Typ.
1"
(Min.)
2"
" Chamfer (Typ.)
For final erection, tilt pole upright with single point attachment
located a distance 33.3% L from Tip End.
7 "
2 "
Varies
#5 Gauge Spiral
#5 Gauge Spiral
Void & Section
Void & Section
* Dimension may vary from 2" to 3" to accommodate

smaller radius of optional stepped (PVC) void. The void
diameter shall not be less than 2".
Circular Void
Circular Void
Back Face
7"
STRAND LEGEND
- Prestressed Strand:
Back Face

Transfer (4 strands total)
SECTION A-A
12/3/2015
11:
47:
37 AM
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC MONITORING POLES TYPE P-III

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE POLES
NO.
17725
SHEET
NO.
3 of 8
One Additional
One Additional
Turn at End
Turn at End
1" Cover
(Typ.)
1" Cover
13 Turns @ 2" Pitch

2'-0"
6" Pitch
41 Turns @ 3" Pitch
Varies
10'-0"
(Typ.)

Dim. A
9"
1'-0"
2'-6"
3'-6"
1'-6"
24" No. 6
9"
Bare Copper
2 "
8 "
Ground Wire
(One-Wire System Only)
2'-6"
(Two-Wire System Only)
Front Face (Roadway)
r
e
p
a
lT
a
t
o
.T
Ft
/
.
n
2I
6
1
.
0
3"x5" Conduit

" Hole (Two-Wire System Only)
" Hole
Plug Void End with
Tip End
Min. 3" of Concrete
(Top)
Entry Hole
Back Face
Varies
1'-0"
Butt End
Pole Height Dim. H
Depth Dim. D
15% L
Support Locations
(Bottom)
7.5% L
(Horizontal Pole)
Pole Length Dim. L
POLE ELEVATION
1 " (
M in.
)
Void & Section
1 "
(
M in.
)
Void & Section

1"
(Min.)
1"
NOTES:
(Min.)
3" *
(Min.)
" Chamfer (Typ.)

3"
" Chamfer (Typ.)
Circular
#5 Gauge Spiral
located a distance 20% L from the Tip End.
#5 Gauge Spiral
Varies
2 "
Void & Section
8 "
Void
Void & Section
Debond 2 Strands

15'-0" from Top

Circular Void
STRAND LEGEND
2"
Back Face
(Typ.)
8"
- Prestressed Strand
2"
(Typ.)

(For Dormant Strand Locations
11:
47:
38 AM
See Section A-A)
1" (Typ.)
Back Face
- Dormant Strand
0.5 in. (3 strands total)
One 24" Splice Allowed
12/3/2015
Per Strand
SECTION A-A
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
STRAIN POLE TYPE P-IV

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE POLES
NO.
17725
SHEET
NO.
4 of 8
One Additional
One Additional
Turn at End
Turn at End
1" Cover
(Typ.)
1" Cover
13 Turns @ 2" Pitch

2'-0"
6" Pitch
41 Turns @ 3" Pitch
Varies
10'-0"
(Typ.)

1'-0"
Dim. A
9"
1'-0"
2'-6"
3'-6"
2'-6"
24" No. 6
Bare Copper
Ground Wire
1'-6"
(Roadway)
r
e
p
a
lT
a
t
o
.T
Ft
/
.
n
2I
6
1
.
0
3"x5"
4"
11"

7
8"
" Hole
Hole (Two-Wire System Only)
Conduit
Varies
9"
Front Face
Entry Hole
Plug Void End with
Tip End
Min. 3" of Concrete
Back Face
(Top)
Butt End
Pole Height Dim. H
Depth Dim. D
10% L
Support Locations
(Bottom)
10% L
(Horizontal Pole)
Pole Length Dim. L
POLE ELEVATION
1 "
(
M in.
)
Void & Section
(
M in.
)
1 "
Void & Section
1"
3" *
(Min.)
" Chamfer (Typ.)
(Min.)
NOTES:
1"
(Min.)
3"
" Chamfer (Typ.)

Circular
Void
Circular
located a distance 12.5% L from the Tip End.
Void
4"
Void & Section
Varies
#5 Gauge Spiral
Void & Section
11"
#5 Gauge Spiral

Debond 2 Strands
10'-0" from Top
STRAND LEGEND
11"
11:
47:
39 AM
- Dormant Strand
2"
Back
(Typ.)
Face
1" (Typ.)

Per Strand
SECTION A-A
12/3/2015

(For Dormant Strand Locations,
See Section A-A)
2"
Back Face
(Typ.)
(
Typ.
)
2"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
STRAIN POLE TYPE P-V

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE POLES
NO.
17725
SHEET
NO.
5 of 8
One Additional
One Additional
Turn at End
Turn at End
1" Cover
(Typ.)
1" Cover
13 Turns @ 2" Pitch

2'-0"
6" Pitch
41 Turns @ 3" Pitch
Varies
10'-0"
Typ.

Dim. A
9"
1'-0"
2'-6"
24" No. 6
9"
6 "
12 "
1'-6"
Ground Wire
2'-6"
Bare Copper
3'-6"
r
e
p
a
lT
a
t
o
.T
Ft
/
.
n
2I
6
1
.
0
3"x5" Conduit

" Hole
Plug Void End with
Tip End
Min. 3" of Concrete
(Top)
Entry Hole
Back Face
Varies
1'-0"
Butt End
Pole Height Dim. H
Depth Dim. D
(Bottom)
Support Locations
(Horizontal Pole)
5% L
5% L
Pole Length Dim. L
POLE ELEVATION
1 " M in.
Void & Section
3" *
Min.
1" Min.
Front
1" Typ.
Face
" Chamfer (Typ.)
NOTES:
1"
M in.
1 "
Void & Section
3"
Min.
" Chamfer (Typ.)
Circular
Void
Circular
Void
located a distance 10% L from Tip End.
6 "
Void & Section

Circular Void
Varies
#5 Gauge Spiral
12 "
#5 Gauge Spiral
Void & Section

Debond 2 Strands
10'-0" from Top
STRAND LEGEND
2" (Typ.)
Back Face

12"
2" (Typ.)
Back Face
11:
47:
40 AM
- Dormant Strand

SECTION A-A
Per Strand
12/3/2015
See Section A-A)

LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
STRAIN POLE TYPE P-VI

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE POLES
NO.
17725
SHEET
NO.
6 of 8
One Additional
One Additional
Turn at End
Turn at End
1" Cover
(Typ.)
1" Cover
13 Turns @ 2" Pitch

2'-0"
6" Pitch
41 Turns @ 3" Pitch
Varies
10'-0"
(Typ.)

Dim. A
9"
1'-0"
2'-6"
24" No. 6
9"
6 "
14"
1'-6"
Ground Wire
2'-6"
Bare Copper
3'-6"
r
e
p
a
lT
a
t
o
.T
Ft
/
.
n
2I
6
1
.
0
3"x5" Conduit

7
8"
Hole
Plug Void End with
Tip End
Min. 3" of Concrete
(Top)
Entry Hole
Back Face
Varies
1'-0"
Butt End
Pole Height Dim. H
Depth Dim. D
(Bottom)
Support Locations
(Horizontal Pole)
2.5% L
2.5% L
Pole Length Dim. L
POLE ELEVATION
1 " (
M in.
)
1 "
(
M in.
)
Void & Section
Void & Section

1" (Min.)
3" *
Front
Min.
Face
1" (Typ.)
" Chamfer (Typ.)
1"
NOTES:
3"
(Min.)
" Chamfer (Typ.)

Circular
Void
Circular
Void
Debond 2 Strands
15'-0" from Top

Varies
6 "
Void & Section
#5 Gauge Spiral
14" or 16"
#5 Gauge Spiral
Void & Section

2" (Typ.)

Back Face
14" or 16"
- Dormant Strand
11:
47:
41 AM

2" (
Typ.
)
2"
(
Typ.
)
STRAND LEGEND

Per Strands
2" (Typ.)
Back Face
SECTION A-A
12/3/2015
See Section A-A)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
STRAIN POLE TYPE P-VII

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE POLES
NO.
17725
SHEET
NO.
7 of 8
One Additional
One Additional
Turn at End
Turn at End
1" Cover
(Typ.)
1" Cover
13 Turns @ 2" Pitch

2'-0"
6" Pitch
41 Turns @ 3" Pitch
Varies
10'-0"
(Typ.)

Dim. A
9"
1'-0"
2'-6"
3'-6"
1'-6"
24" No. 6
9"
8 "
Ground Wire
16"
Bare Copper
2'-6"
r
e
p
a
lT
a
t
o
.T
Ft
/
.
n
2I
6
1
.
0
3"x5" Conduit

" Hole
Plug Void End with
Tip End
Min. 3" of Concrete
(Top)
Entry Hole
Back Face
Varies
1'-0"
Butt End
Pole Height Dim. H
Depth Dim. D
(Bottom)
Support Locations
(Horizontal Pole)
2.5% L
2.5% L
Pole Length Dim. L
POLE ELEVATION
1 " (
M in.
)
1 " (
M in.
)
Front Face
(Roadway)
1" (Min.)
1" (Min.)
Front Face
1" (Typ.)
(Roadway)
3" *
(Min.)
" Chamfer (Typ.)
3"
NOTES:
" Chamfer (Typ.)
Circular
Void

Circular
Void
#5 Gauge Spiral
Debond 4 Strands
Varies
16"
1
2"
#5 Gauge Spiral
Void &
Void &
Section
Section

10'-0" from Top
2" (Typ.)

Back Face
16"
- Dormant Strand
11:
47:
42 AM

2" (
Typ.
)
2" (
Typ.
)
STRAND LEGEND
2" (Typ.)
Per Strand
Back Face
SECTION A-A
12/3/2015
See Section A-A)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
STRAIN POLE TYPE P-VIII

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE POLES
NO.
17725
SHEET
NO.
8 of 8
Tapped Lug For Grounding

Automatic Compression Type
Type Clamp (Feed

Through Deadend)
Clamp (Feed Through Deadend)
Eye Bolt
Catenary Wire
Catenary Wire
No. 6 Copper
No. 6 Copper Ground Wire
Ground Wire (Bare)

Clamp And Clevis
Pigtail Min. Of 12" (Bare).

Crimp Type Electrical Connector
Nut & Washer
See Index 17723

Crimp Type
Messenger Wire
Electrical Connector
NOTES:
1. With the approval of the resident engineer, the service head
hole for joint use poles may be drilled by the utility company
at an angle of 90 but not less than 45 to the face of the pole.
Eye Bolt
Messenger Wire
2. Lashing wire should normally be used for distances of 12'

or greater.
Coupling
6"
Nipple
12"
3. All hardware for signal attachment shall be stainless steel.
12"
M in.
4"
Entrance Cap
Locking Cable Ties Or

Lashing Wire
Signal Cable
Signal Cable
Eye Bolt
Wire Entrance Detail

"S" Hook
See Index 17723, Sheet 3
Tether Wire
(If Required)
1
4"
eye bolts.
5. Meet all grounding requirements of Section 620 of the

Service Head
Tether Wire
See Note No. 1
(If Required)
Split Clamp
4. Hole for eye bolt will require field reaming for 1" & 1
Automatic Compression Type Clamp
Type Clamp (Feed
"S" Hook
(Feed Through Deadend)
Through Deadend)
Reinf. Handhole Frame

With
1
2"
- 13 NC 2 Tapped
Lug Inside For Ground
Grade
No. 6 Copper Ground Wire (Bare)
Grade
Method Of Framing Corner

Strain Poles Angles 10 To 120
Eye Bolt
1
2"
PVC
Automatic Compression Type

Clamps (Feed Through Deadend)
No. 6 Copper
Conduit For
Ground Wire Min
Ground Wire
Of 4' (Bare Pigtail)

LOAD
Hole For Conduit
5
8"
5
8"
X 20'
Grounding
Grounding
Electrode
Electrode
(Copperclad)
(Copperclad)
ELEVATION
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE POLE
PLAN
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE POLE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
47:
43 AM
ELEVATION
STEEL POLE
The load face of pole shall be

perpendicular to load.
X 20'
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
SIGNAL CABLE & SPAN WIRE
DESIGN STANDARDS
INSTALLATION DETAILS
NO.
17727
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Span Wire Clamp
Detail A
Span Wire Clamp
12"
M in.
Catenary Wire
Messenger Wire
Adjustable Hanger Assembly

Extension Bar
4"
Signal Cable
8" to 12" Drip Coil Or
Drip Loop
Louvered Backplates
6" Messenger Wire Clamp
Signal Head
Disconnect Hanger
Tri-Stud Disconnect Hub
Field Drill Two 4"

Drain Holes In Bottom
Of Installed Signals To
Allow Water To Drain.
Traffic Signal
SIGNAL ATTACHMENT
Notes:
1.
With the approval of the resident engineer, the service head

hole for joint use poles may be drilled by the utility company
at an angle of 90 but not less than 45 to the face of the pole.
2.
Use only span wire mounting assemblies listed on the APL.

Tri-Stud Tether
Wire Clamp
6:
30:
00 AM
(If Required)
12/21/2015
Detail A
LAST
REVISION
12/17/15
REVISIO N
TWO POINT ATTACHMENT

DESCRIPTION:
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
INDEX
SIGNAL CABLE & SPAN WIRE

NO.
17727
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Type Clamp
Type Clamp
Thimbleye Bolt (5/8" Min)

Messenger Wire
Thimbleye Bolt (5/8" Min.)
Figure "8" Cable

4"
4"
Max.
12'
Max.
4"
Max
Max
4"
12'
Max
Max
Locking Cable
Ties Or Lashing Wire
Locking Cable Ties
Or Lashing Wire
Crimp Type Electrical
Crimp Type Electrical Connector
Aerial
Aerial
Junction
Junction
Connector
Aerial
Box
Box
Interconnect
Cable
Interconnect
Cable
No. 6 Standed Copper
No. 6 Stranded Copper
Ground Wire
Ground Wire
FIGURE A
CABLE DROP AND
TERMINATION DETAIL
AERIAL INTERCONNECT FIGURE "8"
FIGURE B
CABLE DROP AND
TERMINATION DETAIL
AERIAL INTERCONNECT MESSENGER
WIRE WITH CLAMPS
Cable Suspension Clamp

Notes:
UL Approved Split Bolt Connector
1. The messenger wire of the interconnect cables shall

be grounded to the copper ground wire of the pole or
to the external wire extending down the pole.
4"
2. When utilizing the external ground wire to the pole, a
Max.
piece of
1
2"
conduit shall extend up the pole
externally to a point 8' above finish grade

to protect the ground wire connecting the messenger
wire to the ground rod.
Locking Cable Ties Or Lashing Wire
3. Locking cable ties or lashing wire when used shall be

placed no further than 12" apart except at
the point of cable drop or terminations where one (1)
Aerial
Junction
shall be placed at the point where the cables separate

Interconnect Cable
from the messenger wire and another placed 4"

(max) from that tie. When using figure "8"
interconnect cable only the locking cable ties shall
be used.
4. If accessible the internal ground wire of the support pole
may be used to ground the messenger wire.
5. Lashing wire should normally be used for distances
No. 6 Stranded Copper
of 12' or greater.
Ground Wire
6. Meet all grounding requirements of Section 620 of the
11:
47:
45 AM
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
FIGURE C
CABLE DROP DETAIL
AERIAL INTERCONNECT MESSENGER
WIRE WITH CLAMPS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
AERIAL INTERCONNECT
NO.
17733
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Electrical Service Wire
Service Entrance
Conduit
Conduit
Conduit
Service Entrance
Conduit Strap
Conduit
Elbow
Service Entrance
Lightning
Grounding Bushing
Elbow
Service Disconnect
Ground Bushing
Arrester
See Note 1.
Ground Bushing
Conduit
Molded Bushing
Arrester
Service Disconnect
Lightning
Service Disconnect
Lightning
Arrester
Service Disconnect
See Note 1
See Note 1.
Conduit
Conduit Strap
Conduit Strap
Conduit Strap
5'
-6" M ax.
4' M in.
Molded Bushing
4'M in.
5'
-6"
Molded Bushing
5'
-6" M ax.
Lightning
Ground Bushing
ground wire in
ground wire in
1
2"
1
2"
See Note 1
Conduit Strap
ground wire
1
in 2"
rigid
(Typical)
(Typical)
Conduit
#6 AWG insulated copper
(Rigid, Galv.)
(Typical)
galvanized steel conduit.
Conduit
rigid
rigid
Arrester

Molded Bushing
5'
-6"
Ground Bushing
Size 1
1
2"
ground wire in
Min.
Conduit
Conduit
rigid
Grade
6"
M in.
Grade
Grade
M in.
Grade
6"
6"
(Typical)
M in.
6" M in.
1
2"
Grounding
Grounding
Grounding
Electrode
Electrode
Grounding
Electrode
Electrode
From
Service
AERIAL FEED
(NO METER USED)
FIGURE A
AERIAL FEED
(METER USED)
FIGURE B
UNDERGROUND FEED
(NO METER USED)
FIGURE C
TYPE "B" UNDERGROUND FEED

(METER USED)
FIGURE D
Ground Bushing
NOTES:
6" Max.
1.
3" Min.
The lightning arrester can be located on the side or bottom of the service
disconnect enclosure at the Contractor's Option.
Service
2.
Disconnect
Liquidtight flexible conduit is approved for use from the electrical disconnect
to the cabinet when both are installed on the same pole.
Lightning Arrester
Molded Bushing
3.
See Note 1.
Bond all elements together to form an Intersection Grounding Network in

accordance with Section 620 of the Department's current Standard
(Nonmetallic)
Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. The bond wire shall be run
in conduit with the Electrical Service Wire or Signal Cable.
ground wire in
Conduit
1
2"
4.
Meet all grounding requirements of Section 620 of the Standard Specifications.
5.
The Service Disconnect shall be lockable by padlock and four keys provided to
rigid

(Typical)
the maintaining agency. The door shall have a minimum of three hinges and be
lockable. No screws to be used to attach door.
6"
The Service Disconnect shall be Nema 3R or better.
M in.
6.
Grade
Grade
11:
47:
45 AM
Grounding
Electrode
From Service
From Service
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
UNDERGROUND CABINET MOUNTED

(METER USED)
FIGURE E
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ELECTRIC POWER SERVICE
NO.
17736
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
POLE SELECTION TABLE - SINGLE ARM - WITH & WITHOUT LUMINAIRE

ARM TYPE
POLE TYPE
D1
S1 & S21 Lum
D3
D5
D6
D7
S2 & S22 Lum
S3 & S23 Lum
S4 & S24 Lum
S6
POLE SELECTION TABLE - DOUBLE ARM - WITHOUT LUMINAIRE

ARM TYPE
D1 -D1
D3 -D1
D5 -D2
D6 -D2
D4 -D4
D5 -D4
D6 -D4
D5 -D5
D6 -D5
D6 -D6
POLE TYPE
S1
S2
S3
S4
S3
S4
S4
S4
S4
S5
Arm 1
is listed first
ARM DESIGN TABLE - ALL CASES

MAST ARM
ARM TYPE
ARM LENGTH
D1
36'-0"
ARM EXTENSION
ARM CONNECTION & WELDS
FA/SA
FB/SB
FC/SC
FD/SD
FE/SE
FF/SF
FG/SG
FH/SH
HT
FJ/SJ
FK/SK
(ft)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(ft)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(i
n)
(in)
(in)
36
8.99
14
0.1793
20
25
2.5
D2
36'-0"
36
9.00
14
0.1793
D3
46'-0"
36.1
8.95
14
0.1793
30
36
11.9
13.36
15
0.313
20
25
2.5
D4
46'-0"
36.1
8.95
14
0.1793
11.9
13.37
15
0.313
30
36
D5
60'-0"
35.8
7.99
13
0.1793
26.2
12.37
16
0.375
30
36
D6
70'-6"
39.1
9.52
15
0.1793
33.4
14.36
19
0.375
30
36
D7
78'-0"
40
8.47
14.07
0.1793
40
13.44
19
0.375
30
34
Arm Camber Angle = 2 degrees
POLE,CONNECTION AND SHAFT DESIGN TABLE - SINGLE & DOUBLE ARM
POLE TYPE
UA
(ft)
UC
(in)
UD
(in)
UE
(in)
UG
(ft)
UPRIGHT BASE CONNECTION
CONNECTION PLATE DATA
DRILLED SHAFT DATA
No.
BA
BB
BC
BF
HT
FJ/SJ
FL/SL
FN/SN
FO/SO
FP/SP
FR/SR
FS/SS
FT/ST
DA
DB
Bolts
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(ft)
(ft)
0.438
12
RD
RA
RB
RC
11
14
12
(in)
S1
25
12.53
16
0.375
30
2.5
1.75
36
20
25
0.75
0.438
15.5
S2
25
14.53
18
0.375
32
2.5
1.75
36
20
25
0.75
0.438
15.5
0.438
12
4.5
11
16
12
S3
25
17.53
21
0.375
37
2.5
40
30
36
0.75
0.438
22
1.25
2.5
12.5
0.438
15
4.5
11
16
10
S4
25
22.53
26
0.375
42
2.5
40
30
36
0.75
0.438
22
1.25
12.5
0.438
17
11
18
10
S5
25
23.53
27
0.375
45
2.5
2.25
45
30
36
0.75
0.438
22
1.25
12.5
0.438
18
11
18
10
S6
25
21.53
25
0.375
41
2.5
40
30
34
0.75
0.5
16.5
1.25
12.5
0.5
15
11
18
10
S21 Lum
39
10.57
16
0.375
37.5
30
2.5
1.75
40
20
25
0.75
0.438
11.5
0.438
12
11
14
12
S22 Lum
39
12.57
18
0.375
37.5
32
2.5
1.75
40
20
25
0.75
0.438
12.5
0.438
12
4.5
11
16
12
S23 Lum
39
15.57
21
0.375
37.5
37
2.5
40
30
36
0.75
0.438
15
1.25
2.5
12.5
0.438
14
4.5
11
16
10
S24 Lum
39
20.57
26
0.375
37.5
42
2.5
40
30
36
0.75
0.438
17
1.25
12.5
0.438
15
11
18
10
11:
47:
47 AM
LUMINAIRE AND LUMINAIRE CONNECTION

LA (ft)
LB (ft)
LC (in)
LD (in)
LE
LF (ft)
LG (in)
LH (in)
LJ (in)
LK (in)
40
10
0.125
0.5
0.5
0.75
0.25
0.25
LL (deg) UG (ft)
0
37.5
Notes:
Work this Index with Index No. 17745.
2.
Design Wind Speed = 150 mph with Signal Backplates.
12/3/2015
1.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
"D" MAST ARMS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STANDARD MAST ARM ASSEMBLIES
NO.
17743
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
POLE SELECTION TABLE - SINGLE ARM - WITH & WITHOUT LUMINAIRE

ARM TYPE
E1
POLE TYPE
T1 & T21 Lum
E3
E5
E6
E7
T2 & T22 Lum
T3 & T23 Lum
T4 & T24 Lum
T6
POLE SELECTION TABLE - DOUBLE ARM - WITHOUT LUMINAIRE

ARM TYPE
E1 -E1
E3 -E1
E5 -E2
E6 -E2
E4 -E4
E5 -E4
E6 -E4
E5 -E5
E6 -E5
E6 -E6
POLE TYPE
T1
T2
T3
T4
T3
T4
T4
T4
T4
T5
Arm 1
is listed first
ARM DESIGN TABLE - ALL CASES

MAST ARM
ARM TYPE
ARM LENGTH
ARM EXTENSION
ARM CONNECTION & WELDS
FA/SA
FB/SB
FC/SC
FD/SD
FE/SE
FF/SF
FG/SG
FH/SH
HT
FJ/SJ
FK/SK
(ft)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(ft)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
11
0.25
22
23
E1
36'-0"
36.0
5.98
E2
36'-0"
36.0
5.99
11
0.25
E3
46'-0"
35.1
7.09
12
0.25
30
32
2.75
12.9
11.22
13
0.313
22
23
E4
46'-0"
35.1
7.09
12
0.25
12.9
11.23
13
0.313
30
32
2.75
E5
60'-0"
34.8
6.13
11
0.25
27.2
10.22
14
0.375
30
32
2.75
E6
70'-6"
38.1
6.66
12
0.25
34.4
11.22
16
0.375
30
32
2.75
E7
78'-0"
40.0
7.47
13.07
0.1793
40
12.43
18
0.375
30
32
2.5
Arm Camber Angle = 2 degrees
POLE,CONNECTION AND SHAFT DESIGN TABLE - SINGLE & DOUBLE ARM
POLE TYPE
UA
(ft)
UC
(in)
UD
(in)
UE
(in)
UPRIGHT BASE CONNECTION
UG
(ft)
CONNECTION PLATE DATA
DRILLED SHAFT DATA
No.
BA
BB
BC
BF
HT
FJ/SJ
FL/SL
FN/SN
FO/SO
FP/SP
FR/SR
FS/SS
FT/ST
DA
DB
Bolts
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(ft)
(ft)
0.5
0.375
14
2.0
0.375
11
RD
RA
RB
RC
11
14
12
(in)
T1
25
10.53
14
0.375
26
2.5
1.5
36
22
23
T2
25
12.53
16
0.375
28
2.5
1.5
36
22
23
0.5
0.375
14
2.0
0.375
12
11
14
12
T3
25
15.53
19
0.375
35
2.5
40
30
32
0.75
0.375
19.5
1.25
2.25
12.5
0.375
12
4.5
11
16
12
T4
25
18.53
22
0.5
38
2.5
40
30
32
0.75
0.375
19.5
1.25
2.0
12.5
0.375
15
4.5
11
16
10
T5
25
18.53
22
0.5
38
2.5
40
30
32
0.75
0.375
19.5
1.25
2.0
12.5
0.375
16
4.5
11
16
10
T6
25
18.53
22
0.375
38
2.5
40
30
32
0.75
0.438
15
1.25
2.0
12.5
0.438
14
4.5
11
16
10
T21 Lum
39
8.57
14
0.375
37.5
26
2.5
1.5
40
22
23
0.5
0.375
10
2.0
0.375
11
11
14
12
T22 Lum
39
10.57
16
0.375
37.5
30
2.5
1.75
40
22
23
0.5
0.375
11
2.0
0.375
12
11
14
12
T23 Lum
39
13.57
19
0.375
37.5
35
2.5
40
30
32
0.75
0.375
13
1.25
2.25
12.5
0.375
12
4.5
11
16
12
T24 Lum
39
16.57
22
0.375
37.5
38
2.5
40
30
32
0.75
0.375
15
1.25
2.0
12.5
0.375
14
4.5
11
16
10
12
11:
47:
47 AM
LUMINAIRE AND LUMINAIRE CONNECTION

LA (ft)
LB (ft)
LC (in)
LD (in)
LE
LF (ft)
LG (in)
LH (in)
LJ (in)
LK (in)
LL (deg)
UG (ft)
40
10
0.125
0.5
0.5
0.75
0.25
0.25
37.5
Notes:
1.
Work this Index with Index No. 17745.
2.
Design Wind Speed = 150 mph without Signal Backplates.

130 mph with or without Signal Backplates.
12/3/2015
110 mph with or without Signal Backplates.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
"E" MAST ARMS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STANDARD MAST ARM ASSEMBLIES
NO.
17743
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
GENERAL NOTES
Face Of Arm Base Plate At Arm
Pole
1. Shop Drawings: This Index is considered fully detailed, only submit shop drawings
for minor modifications not detailed in the Plans.
'FA' + 'FE' - Splice
'FO'
'SA' + 'SE' - Splice
'SO'
'FE'
2. Prior to Fabrication: Verify the installed foundation elevation will result in the
Pole Top
'SE'
(See Sheet 6)
'SA'
Mast Arm Splice
3. Details for Signal and Sign locations, Signal Head attachment, Sign attachment,
Pedestrian Head attachment, and Foundation Conduit are not shown for simplicity.
Mast Arm
Pole Connection
(Single Arm See Sheet 3)
(Single Arm See Sheet 3)
(Double Arm See Sheet 4)
(Double Arm See Sheet 4)
Handhole
(See Sheet 6)
A. Poles, Mast Arms and Backing Rings:
3'
-0"
4. Materials: Split-lock washers and self-locking nuts are not permitted
)
.
p
y
T
r(
e
p
a
tT
f
/
n
4i
1
.
0
a. Less than 316": ASTM A1011 Grade 50, 55, 60 or 65
M in.
'FA'
required signal elevation and adjust the Pole height as needed.
b. Greater than or equal to 316": ASTM A572 Grade 50, 55, 60 or 65

Mast Arm
B. Steel Plates: ASTM A36
Mast Arm
Street Name
C. Weld Metal: E70XX
Extension
D. Bolts, Nuts and Washers:

Free-Swinging, Internally
Stainless Steel Set Screws
Provide
1
2"
Weep Hole
Illuminated Street Sign
Located At Bottom Of Arm.
(See Index 17748)
1'-0" From Arm Base Plate.
E. Anchor Bolts, Nuts and Washers:

F. Threaded Bars/Studs: ASTM A36 or ASTM A307
G. Handhole Frame: ASTM A709 or ASTM A36, Grade 36

H. Handhole Cover: ASTM A1011 Grade 50, 55, 60 or 65
I. Aluminum Pole Caps and Nut Covers: ASTM B26 (319-F)
Aluminum Identification Tag not to exceed 2" x 4". Secure to pole
J. Stainless Steel Screws: AISI Type 316
by 18" stainless steel rivets or screws. Fabricators to provide

details for approval. Identification Tag located on inside of pole
K. Concrete: Class IV (Drilled Shaft) for all environmental classifications.
visible from handhole, or on outside of pole inside Terminal
Compartment. Tag to be stamped with the following information:
Pole
Standard Design
Special Design
A. Pole and Mast Arm Taper: Change diameter at a rate of 0.14 inches per foot.
Financial Project ID
Handhole
B. Upright splices are not allowed. Transverse welds are only permitted at the base.
Pole Type
Manufacturer's Name
(See Sheet 6)
C. First and Second arm camber angle = 2
Arm Type
Pole Base (F
y of Steel)
Manufacturer's Name
Arm (F
y of Steel)
Pole Base (F
y of Steel)
Pole Wall Thickness (in.)
Arm (F
y of Steel)
Arm Wall Thickness (in.)
5. Fabrication:
D. Provide bolt hole diameters as follows:

a. Bolts (except Anchor Bolts): Bolt diameter plus 116", prior to galvanizing.
b. Anchor Bolts: Bolt diameter
plus 12"
'
UB'(
See Plans) (
See Note # 2)
Vented Mast Arm Cap With (3)
0.
14 in/ft Taper (
Typ.
)
b. Nuts: ASTM A563 DH Heavy-Hex
(Max.)

(See Sheet 2)
Bottom
E. Locate handhole 90 from arm on single arm poles or 90 from first arm of
Of Plate
Top of Finished Grade
double arm poles facing away from traffic or see special instructions on the
2'
-6"
Mast Arm Tabulation Sheet.

F. Provide a J or C hook at the top of the pole for signal wiring support
(See Sheet 6).
G. Perform all welding in accordance with Specification Section 460-6.4.
0" With Sidewalk
H. Hot Dip Galvanize after fabrication.
6" Otherwise
Wire Entry
6. Coatings:
Conduit
A. All Nuts, Bolts, Washers and Threaded Bars/Studs: ASTM F2329

B. All other steel items ASTM A123
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7. Construction:
A. Foundation: Specification Section 455 Drilled Shaft, except that payment is
included in the cost of the Mast Arm.
B. Install Pole vertically.
C. Place structural grout pad with drain between top of foundation and bottom of
baseplate in accordance with Specification Section 649-7.
D. Attach Sign Panels and Signals centered on the elevation of the Mast Arm.
E. Wire Access holes are 112 or less in diameter.
SHEET NO.
SUBJECT
Elevation and Notes
Foundation and Base Plate Details
Single Arm Connection and Splice Details
Double Arm Connection and Splice Details
Foundation
Luminaire Arm and Connection Details
(Drilled Shaft)
Handhole and Pole Top Details
(See Sheet 2)
11:
47:
48 AM
Single Arm Shown, Double Arm Similar

(Luminaire Arm Not Shown)
12/3/2015
MAST ARM ASSEMBLY
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
ELEVATION AND NOTES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAST ARM ASSEMBLIES
NO.
17745
SHEET
NO.
1of 6
'BA'
'BA'-4x'BC'
Street Name
Edge Of
Foundation
Center Of
Drilled Shaft,
Edge Of
Base Plate
1
4"
Base Plate
and Pole
Min.
'BC' Dia. Anchor Bolt

Pole
Mast Arm 1
Double Nuts (See Note #3)

See DETAIL 'A'
Base Plate and Anchors
Base Plate
'BC' Anchor Bolts
Base Plate
Pole
Equally Spaced
'BB'
(See Note #3)
Opening
Drain Hole
(1) Bolt
Pole and Anchor Bolt
Dia. (Max.)
( 8" Min.)
(1" Max.)
Foundation
(6 Anchor Bolts)
Structural
(Drilled Shaft)
Grout Pad
(See Spec.
Base Plate Dia.
(
Top)
4" Cover
5"
MAST ARM ASSEMBLY
Section 649-7)
'BA'
'DB'
3
8"
Foundation
Drilled Shaft & Pole
Plate
Washers
'BA'-4x'BC'
Bolt Circle Dia.
Leveling Nut
Edge Of
2x'BC'
Foundation
'
BF'
Center Of
NOTES:
#5 Tie Bars
1. The Structural Grout Pad diameter may be reduced
Drilled Shaft,
Edge Of
Base Plate
SECTION A-A
Base Plate
and Pole
6 Spaced @ 4"
where the footprint of the Grout Pad does not
Mast Arm 1
provide adequate clearance for the sidewalk and/or
accessibility considerations.
Equally Spaced
(see Note #3)
Double Nut (Typ.)
quantity of bolts.
3. The top hex nut may be substituted by a
1
2"
height 'jam' nut. Provide individual nut covers
Pole
'BC' Anchor Bolts
1"
2. See Index No. 17743 and the plans for actual
Arm/Pole
Pole and Anchor Bolt
#5 Tie Bars
'RC' Spaced @ RD"
Silicone Caulk
(8 Anchor Bolts)
(not shown) for each bolt.
'DB'
Shaft Diameter
Shaft Length
'
DA'
"
#5 Tie Bars
2'-2" Lap (Min.)
PLAN
(Wall Thick. +")
3" X
45
1
4"
Backing Ring
x (Wall Thick.)
1" Min.
"
Arm/Pole Wall
'DB'
('DB'-'BA')/2
'BA'
7
16"
Thick. +
('DB'-'BA')/2
Base Plate
'RE' Spaced @ RF"
Opening
Terminal
Compartment
(See Sheet 6)
Center Of
Drilled Shaft
JOINT WELD DETAIL
Center of
Handhole
#5 Tie Bar
(See Sheet 6)
#5 Tie Bars
Spaced @
3" (See Note #1)
12" Max.
'RB' # 'RA' Bars
DETAIL 'A'
1'
-6"
Remaining
Base Plate
Foundation
Equally Spaced
7"
11:
47:
49 AM
Opening
Structural
r
ve
Co
)
.
yp
(T
6"
CSL Tube (Typ.)
Grout Pad
6" Cover
(See Spec.
(Typ.)
'RB' # "RA' Bars
Section 649-7)
Anchor Bolt (Typ.)
Equally Spaced
PLAN
ELEVATION
ELEVATION
12/3/2015
(Back Face Shown)
FOUNDATION
BASE PLATE CONNECTION
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
FOUNDATION AND BASE PLATE DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAST ARM ASSEMBLIES
NO.
17745
SHEET
NO.
2 of 6
'FO'
'FA' + 'FE' - Splice
Pole Connection Plate

'
FL'
Of Pole
C
'FA'
'FN'
'FT'
Street Name
Arm Splice
3
4"
Arm Connection
Splice = 2'-0" (Nominal)

(See Note #1)
Threaded Bar/Stud
With Self Locking Nut

4" Wiring
Mast Arm
Hole (Typ.)
Pole and
'
H T'
'
FC'
Mast Arm
'
FF'
Extension
Conn. Plate
First Arm
Camber Angle
'
FL'
'FE'
'FP' Connection Bolt
See DETAIL 'B'
MAST ARM ASSEMBLY
ARM SPLICE
SINGLE ARM CONNECTION
'FJ'
M in.
1"
'FB', 'FF', 'UC' - Tip Diameters

'FC', 'FG', 'UD' - Base Diameters
Measured Flat To Flat
'
FS'
Hole (Typ.)
1"
1"
4" Wiring
'
FL'
'
FL'
2x'
FP'
Six 'FP' Connection Bolts

(May Vary For Special Design)
Mast Arm
'
H T'
Center Of Pole
'
FJ'
Extension
Center Of Arm Or Pole

Seam Weld (Typ.)
'
FS'
0.6 x Wall
Thickness
Wall Thickness
1"
'FD', 'FH', 'UE'
M in.
2x'FP'
2x'
FP'
Typ.
'
FL'
Inside Radius Measured

'FN'
Center to Flat
Break Radius (Typ.) Min. Break

Radius = 0.25 x (Inside Radius)
Mast Arm Extension

and 4" Wiring Hole
See DETAIL 'C'
Pole
SECTION B-B
SECTION C-C
Mast Arm Extension

Base Plate
'FT'
Opening
Edge Of Top Connection Plate

'
FL'
Edge Of Mast
Arm Extension
Backing Ring
Typ. Top And

Bottom Plates 'FT'
'
FK''
FR'
Bottom Connection Plate

(Top Conn. Plate Similar)
NOTE:
1. Install the 'Slip Joint' splice with a tight fit and no change in the Mast
Edge of Mast
Arm Extension
FP'
2X'
M in.
'FP'
Connection Bolt
'
FL'
11:
47:
50 AM
2X'
FP'
M in.
See DETAIL 'A'

(See Sheet 2)
12/3/2015
SECTION D-D
'FT'
Provide Ultrasonic Testing

For Lamellar Tearing In
Connection Plate When
'FR' Exceeds 1"

Mast Arm
Extension
Base Plate
DETAIL 'B'
Arm taper due to the splice.

2. Details shown on this sheet are for 12 sided pole sections. However,
sections with more than 12 sides and round sections are permitted
provided outside diameter and wall thickness are not reduced.
3. Match mark the Arm and Connection Plates to ensure proper assembly.
'FK''FR'
DETAIL 'C'
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SINGLE ARM CONNECTIONS & SPLICE DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAST ARM ASSEMBLIES
NO.
17745
SHEET
NO.
3 of 6
'SJ'
Center Of Second
Mast Arm Extension
3
4"
2x'SP'
Threaded Bar/Stud
Min.
Street Name
M in.
'SA'
Splice = 2'-0" (Nominal)
(See Note #1)
2x'
SP'
Pole
With Self Locking Nut

Arm Splice
Double Arm
'
SC'
'
SF'
Mast Arm
'
SS'
Connection
First Mast
'
SS'
'
H T'
Arm Extension
'SE'
E
Six 'SP' Connection Bolts
(May Vary For Special Design)
4" Wiring Hole

Offset to Avoid Side
Connection Plates (Typ.)
First Mast
Arm Extension
MAST ARM ASSEMBLY
M in.
2x'
SP'
ARM SPLICE
DOUBLE ARM CONNECTION

1" Min. (Typ.)
2" Min. (See

Note #5)
'SO'
'SA' + 'SE' - Splice
(Typ.)
Of Pole
'SN'
'SB', 'SF' - Tip Diameters
'SC', 'SG' - Base Diameters

Measured Flat To Flat
'SP' Dia. Connection Bolt

Center Of Pole
4" Wiring Hole
G
Second Mast
'SP'
e
gl
An
'(
UF
'
Arm Extension
Connection Bolt
See DETAIL 'F'
Center of Arm
'SL' Plates (Typ.)
Seam Weld (Typ.)

0.6 x Wall
Thickness
Wall Thickness
B
tw
e
'SD', 'SH'
n
e
e
Second Arm
Camber Angle
2" Min. (Typ.)

A
r
m
(See Note #5)
Inside Radius Measured
See DETAIL 'E'
s
)
(S
e
e
Break Radius (Typ.) Min. Break

Radius = 0.25 x (Inside Radius)
N
ot
e
Center To Flat
#
4)
See DETAIL 'D'

Center Of First
Arm Extension
Second Mast
Arm Extension
SECTION E-E
SECTION F-F
Mast Arm Extension

Base Plate
'SL'
Provide Ultrasonic Testing

for Lamellar Tearing in
Connection Plate when
'SR' exceeds 1"
'ST'
NOTE:
1. Install the 'Slip Joint' splice with a tight fit and no change in
'SP' Connection Bolt
Side Connection Plate
SECTION G-G
the Mast Arm taper due to the splice.
'SL'
SR'
'
SK''
Opening
See DETAIL 'A'
(Sheet 2)
Mast Arm Extension

Base Plate
Backing Ring
'ST'
Bottom Connection Plate

(Top Conn. Plate Similar)
SK'
SR''
'
Edge of Mast
Arm Extension
Full Penetration
Weld (Typ.)
2. Details shown on this sheet are for 12 sided pole sections.

However, sections with more than 12 sides and round sections
are permitted provided outside diameter and wall thickness
are not reduced.
'
FL'
SL'
'
11:
47:
50 AM
SP'
2X'
M in.
'SP' Conn. Bolt
Top And Bottom

Plates (Typ.)
(Typ.)
(
Typ.
)
Edge Of Top Plate
3. Match mark the Arm and Connection Plates to ensure proper

assembly.
4. 'UF' measured counter clockwise from First Mast Arm Extension.
SP'
X'
2
.
n
Mi
5. Adjust width of top and bottom Connection Plates to maintain
12/3/2015
minimum clearance shown.
DETAIL 'D'
DETAIL 'E'
DETAIL 'F'
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DOUBLE ARM CONNECTIONS & SPLICE DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAST ARM ASSEMBLIES
NO.
17745
SHEET
NO.
4 of 6
'LB' (15'-0" Max.)

'LB'/2
'LB'/2
First Mast Arm
Luminaire Arm
Connection
Slope 'LE'
'
LL
'(
Se
e
Thickness 'LC' Luminaire
Rise/Run
Base Diameter 0.14 in/ft

Taper To
3
2 8"
)
4
N
o
te
Luminaire
=
R
Luminaire Arm 'LD' Wall

Street Name
'
LF
'
Luminaire
O.D
'
UG'
Pole
Mast Arm Handhole
(See Sheet 6)
'
LA'
See DETAIL 'G'
Pole
Luminaire Arm
Mast Arm &

Mast Arm Handhole
Second Mast Arm
LUMINAIRE ORIENTATION
LUMINAIRE ELEVATION
MAST ARM ASSEMBLY

NOTES:
1. Luminaire type and luminaire length may be found in the Lighting Plans.
2. Align Luminaire Arm with Single Mast Arm or First Arm of Double Mast
Arm unless indicated otherwise in the plans.
3. The fabricator may substitute a
1
2"
thick bent plate with the same
flange width, height, and length as the MC 10x33.6 Channel section.

4. 'LL' measure counter clockwise from First Mast Arm.
I
'LH' Luminaire Base Plate Thickness
1
2"
Typ. for 60
1
4"
'LH' Luminaire
Base Plate Thickness
1"
Partial Penetration
3
16"
1
2"
1
2"
1"
1
2"
Weld Typ. for < 60
(Pole Dia. > 10")

(6" < Pole Dia. 10")
'LK'
Center Of Pole
'LJ'
Round Luminaire
1"
'LG' Bolt (Typ.)
Shaft 0.14 in/ft

Taper 'LD' Wall
Thickness
10"
1
2"
1
2"
6" M in.
Mast Arm and
20" M ax.
'LG' Bolt (Typ.)
H
Luminaire
Connection
Center Of Round
6" Min. Pole
Luminaire Shaft
Round Luminaire
Dia. At
'LG' Bolt (Typ.)
Shaft 0.14 in/ft
Luminaire
Pole
1
2"
11:
47:
51 AM
Connection
(
Typ.
)
(
Typ.
)
1"
MC 10x33.6
(See Note #3)
MC 10x33.6
(See Note #3)
1
4"
Thickness
1"
Taper 'LD' Wall
Connection
MC 10x33.6
(See Note #3)
'LK'
Plate Wiring Hole
Pole
12/3/2015
LUMINAIRE CONNECTION ELEVATION
SECTION H-H
DETAIL 'G'
SECTION I-I
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
LUMINAIRE ARM AND CONNECTION DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAST ARM ASSEMBLIES
NO.
17745
SHEET
NO.
5 of 6
Pole Top
3
8"
Street Name
NOTES:
Mast Arm
Min. Bolt
Flat Washer
Handhole
1. Handhole covers may be omitted when Terminal Compartment is provided.
3
16"
Pole Cap Plate
2. Terminal Compartment is optional. See Mast Arm Tabulation to see if
Thick
required and for locations.
3. Terminal Compartment Frame Height 2'-0" minimum to 2'-6" maximum.

Align bottom of Terminal Compartment a minimum of 1" below the bottom
Handhole
ISO VIEW
of the Handhole Frame.
(Option 'a')
4. Any combination of Option 'a' or 'b' may be used, provided both lifting
and wiring is accommodated.
Pole

Cap And Lifting Bar
MAST ARM ASSEMBLY
3
16"
2"
3"
1"
1
4"
Pole Wall
J
1
2"
OD x
1
4"
Wall
11 Gage Mast Arm
Weld
Tack Welded
Handhold Frame
Handhole Cover
Hole
Weld To Underside Of Bar
Penetration
1
4"
1
16")
And Matching Nut Tack
Partial
Thick Std. Mast Arm
x 2" Lifting Bar With
(Bolt Size +
Cover Clip (Typ.)
TOP VIEW
Tack Weld
11 Gage
Cover Clip
Mast Arm
(Option 'a')
Handhole
Cover
Handhold
For 14" Hex
Pole Cap Plate
Overhang (Min.)
Screw (Typ.)
Head Screw (Typ.)
1"
Stainless
Steel Hex Head
Frame
Nut
Lifting Bar
1" Min.
4"
"
Threaded Hole
1
4"
1
4"
Mast Arm
"
2
1 4
Hole (Typ.)
1
4"
=
R
=
R
5
16"
Pole
FRAME
SECTION J-J
Partial
MAST ARM HANDHOLE
Penetration
4"
3
16"

Cap And Lifting Bar
'J' Hook For Wiring,
Weld (Typ.)
1
2"
4"
Tack Weld
Pole Wall
K
1"
3
4"
5"
1"
Partial
3
8"
CUT-AWAY
Bar Welded To
(Option 'a')
Inside Of Pole
3
8"
Penetration
Cast Aluminum
Weld (Typ.)
11 Gage
Stainless Steel
Handhole Cover
Screws (Typ.)
(See Note #1)
Pole Cap Plate
1
4"
Min. Thick.
11 Gage Waterproof
Penetration
Terminal Compartment.
Weld (Typ.)
Cover Installed With

Waterproof Gasket.
11 Gage
Tack Weld
(See Note #2 And #3)
Handhole
Cover Clip
1" Min.
Pole
1"
10"
Frame
10
3
4"
3"
3
8"
4"x
Handhold
5"
1"
(3 Reqd.)
Partial
Center Of Pole
Cover
3
16"
And Pole Cap

Tack Welded
Handhold
Cover Clip
Frame
Handhold
(Typ.)
Frame
11:
47:
54 AM
R
=
5
16"
Commercial
Grade Hot Rolled
Cover Clip (Typ.)
1"
COVER
Hole (Typ.)
R
=
27
8"
1
4"
(Option 'b')
Steel Hex Head
21
Screw (Typ.)
2"
Threaded Hole
CUT-AWAY
1"
Stainless
1
4"
For 14" Hex
'C' Hook For Wiring And

Lifting, 12" Commercial
Grade Hot Rolled Bar
Welded To Inside Of Pole
Stainless
Steel Hex Head

Head Screw (Typ.)
Screw (Typ.)
Pole Wall
POLE TOP
K
1
4"
12/3/2015
COVER
FRAME
SECTION K-K
SECTION K-K
(Thru Handhole)
(Terminal Compartment)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
HANDHOLE
HANDHOLD AND POLE TOP DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAST ARM ASSEMBLIES
NO.
17745
SHEET
NO.
6 of 6
Mast Arm
Signal Heads With Back Plates
Mast Arm
Signal Heads With Back Plates
Pole
Pole
Cantilever Arm (or
Street Name
Truss) Assembly
10' Max.
Street Name
OPTION 1
OPTION 2
MAST ARM ASSEMBLY
Catenary Wire
or Steel Strain Pole
Cantilever Arm (or
NOTES:
Truss) Assembly
1. Free-swinging, internally-illuminated street signs shall only be installed on the signal pole
for span wire assemblies. For mast arm assemblies the street sign may be installed on the
Messenger Wire
arm or pole.
Street Name
2. Free-swinging, internally-illuminated street signs shall meet the requirements of Section

700 of the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
Signal Head With Back Plate
3. Pole attachments and cantilever arm (or truss) assemblies may be accepted by Contractor
certification provided the signs being supported meet the weight and area limitations
included in Section 700 for "Acceptance by Certification".

4. Pole attachments and cantilever arm (or truss) assemblies supporting signs not meeting the
weight or area limitations included in Section 700 for "Acceptance by Certification" require
the submittal of structural calculations and Shop Drawings that have been prepared by and
1:
00:
38 PM
sealed by the Specialty Engineer.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/22/2015
SPAN WIRE ASSEMBLY
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
FREE-SWINGING INTERNALLY-ILLUMINATED
DESIGN STANDARDS
STREET SIGN ASSEMBLIES
NO.
17748
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Pedestrian Signal
10
Assembly
Pedestrian Signal
Assembly
Adaptor, Post Top Center

Mount, 2 Ports 108
Concrete
Pedestal
X 10"
Anchor Bolts
4" Aluminum Pedestal
10'M ax.
3
4"
8'M in.
4" Steel Pedestal
4" Steel Pedestal

Ground Wire
Tap Bolt for
Bushing
Base
X 10"
Anchor Bolts
5
8"
3'
-0"
2'
-6"
5
8"
2'-0"
X 20'
2'-0"
X 20'
Grounding
Grounding
1'
-6"
2'-0"
3'
-0"
2'
-6"
2'
-6"
3'
-0"
Bushing
Electrode
Electrode
3'
-0"
FIGURE A
Strain Pole
Wood Pole
5
8"
1" (Rigid Galv.) Conduit
Metal Strain Pole
Pedestrian Signal Assembly,
Two-Way Adjustable
Two-Way Adjustable
X 20'
Threaded Hub With Stainless Steel
Grounding
Bands (See Notes: Number 1)
Electrode
4'
-0"
3
4"
8'M in.
Transformer
Grade
10'M ax.
Grounding

Two-Way Adjustable
1
2"
Galvanized
Nipple
1
3"
10
FIGURE B
1
2"
Arm Assembly
8'M in.
10'M ax.
8'M in.
10'M ax.
8'M in.
10'M ax.
Notes:
1.
As an option, the contractor will be allowed to install

pedestrian signals on concrete poles and pedestals
with the use of lead anchors (two bolts same size per
hub) in lieu of the stranded steel bands.
2.
Holes drilled or punched in metal poles or pedestals

shall be thoroughly reamed, cleaned of all burrs and
covered with two (2) coats of zinc rich paint as
specified in the standard specifications for road and
bridge, construction. Grommets or bushings shall be
11:
47:
58 AM
installed in holes.
3.
Meet all grounding requirements of Section 620 of the
12/3/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
FIGURE C
FIGURE D
FIGURE E
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
PEDESTRIAN CONTROL SIGNAL
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17764
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
TWISTED PAIR AND LOOP LEAD-IN

INSTALLATION WITH CURB & GUTTER
TWISTED PAIR AND LOOP LEAD-IN

INSTALLATION WITHOUT CURB & GUTTER
GENERAL NOTES
ALTERNATIVE 1
Drill A Hole Through The Curb At The Point Which The Required Saw-Cut Depth Is
Cut A Slot In The Edge Of The Roadway Of Sufficient Size And Depth To Snugly
1.
Obtained Just Prior To Cutting The Top Inside Edge Of The Curb. Slide A Section Of
Place The End Of The Flexible conduit. The End Of The Conduit Shall Be At Least
controller cabinet, continue the twisted pair to the cabinet. If the loop
Flexible Conduit At Least 6" Into The Hole From The Back Side Of The Curb But Not
6" Into The Roadway And approximately 2" Below The Top Of The Roadway Surface.
lead-in is greater than 75' continue the twisted pair to the specified
Within 2" Of The Top Of The Hole. The Conduit Shall Fit Snug Within The Drilled
The Departure Angle Of The Conduit From The Roadway Shall Be 30 To 45.
pullbox, splice to shielded lead-in wire and continue to the controller
Hole. Fill The Top Of The Hole With Loop Sealant To The Level Of The Curb Surface.
If the loop lead-in is 75' or less from the edge of the loop detector to
cabinet.
A Nonmetallic Material Should Be Used To Prevent Excessive Loop Sealant From

Entering The Flexible Conduit.
2.
The width of all saw cuts shall be sufficient to allow unforced placement of
loop wires or lead-in cables into the saw cut. The depth of all saw cuts,
except across expansion joints, shall be 3" standard with a maximum of 4".
3.
On resurfacing or new roadway construction projects, the loop wires and

lead-in cables will be installed in the asphalt structural course prior to the
placement of the final asphalt wearing course. The loop wires and lead-in
Twisted Pair Or Loop
See General
cables shall be placed in a saw cut in the structural course. The depth of
Lead-In In Saw-Cut
Note #8
the cables below the top of the final surface shall comply with note 2.
4.
A nonmetallic hold down material shall be used to secure loop wires and
lead-ins to the bottom of saw-cuts. Hold down material shall be placed at
approximately 12" intervals around loops and 24" intervals on lead-ins.
PVC
5.
Coated
30"
The minimum distance between the twisted pairs of loop lead-in wire is 6"
from the loop to 12" from the pavement edge or curb.
Flexible
Conduit
30"
6.
Splice Connections in pull boxes with UL listed, watertight, insulated

enclosures. Place one enclosure over the end of each conductor and place
a third enclosure over the exposed end of the shielded cable.
7.
As an alternate, a larger diameter enclosure that will accommodate both the

splices of the conductors and the exposed end of the shielded cable may be
x
lBo
l
o Pu
T
used.
Or Cabinet
8.
The maximum area of asphalt to be disturbed shall be 6"x 6". This area
shall be restored as directed by the Engineer.
To Pullbox
Or Cabinet
Twisted Pair Or
Loop Lead-In
Saw Cut
PVC Coated
Flexible Conduit
ALTERNATIVE 2
Drill A Hole
1
2"
To 1" Larger In Diameter Than The Rigid Conduit To Be
Used Through The Roadway Asphalt (Or Concrete) Surface And Base At An
Appropriate Angle To Intercept The Trench Or Pull Box Hole. Place A
Predetermined Length Of Rigid Conduit In The Hole And Drive The Conduit
Into The Trench Or Hole. Install A Molded Bushing (Nonmetallic) On The
Roadway End Of The Rigid, Conduit. The Top Of The Rigid Conduit Shall
Be Approximately 2" Below The Roadway Surface. Fill The Hole With
Loop Sealant To The Level Of The Roadway Surface. A Nonmetallic
Material Should Be Used To Prevent Excessive Loop Sealant From
Entering The Rigid Conduit.
NOTE:
Other alternatives may be approved by the State Traffic Operations Engineer.
Twisted Pair Or Loop
Lead-In In Saw-Cut
30"
See General
Note #8
PVC
Coated
11:
47:
59 AM
Flexible
Conduit
Rigid Conduit
NOTE:
Other alternatives may be approved by the State Traffic Operations Engineer.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
Connector
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
VEHICLE LOOP INSTALLATION DETAILS
NO.
17781
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Stop Line
Stop Line
Stop Line
2'
2'
Stop Line
Stop Line
2'
6'
Stop Line
2'
3'-6"
Variable
3'
6'
2 Turns
4'
Variable
2 Turns
20'
4 Turns
2 Turns
20'
4'
20'
20'
4 Turns
2 Turns
2 Turns
8'
6'
8'
4 Turns
3 Turns
3'-6"
3'
6'
3'
3'
6'
6'
TYPE A
TYPE B
TYPE C
TYPE D
TYPE E
TYPE F
Note:
Loop conductors must follow
saw-cut to bottom forming
3"
Pavement Joint
Double Width Cut
Loop Wires
slack section at joint.
Sealant
2"
Stop Line
3"
Soft - Setting
PLAN
VERTICAL SECTION
CONCRETE PAVEMENT EXPANSI

ON J
OI
NTS
Variable
Sealer Injected Into

Deep Section Of
Groove Over Wire
Type 'B'
Notes:
1'
1'
Variable
1. The "number of turns" indicated at the specified point on the loop refers to the number
1'
of passes of loop wires which are placed in the saw-cut forming the complete loop.
2. Loop types or details not drawn to scale.
1'
Type 'B'
3. Loop Types are centered in a single lane except Type E which is centered on two lanes.
4. The number of individual loops in the Type G loop may vary up to a maximum of four (4).
45
Shielded Lead-In
5. Lead-in may be connected to either end of loop.

6. The leading edge of loop Types A,C,D,& F may extend past the stop line a maximum of
10'. The length of these loops may be extended to a maximum of 60'. Each intersection
Variable
should be individually designed and if the modifications noted above is required it must
Loops To Pullbox.
be noted or detailed in tne plans.
Pullbox Specified
Under Separate Pay
1'
1'
Items.
Type 'B'
7. Loop lead-in wires should not be installed in the same pull box with signal power cable.
1'
11:
47:
59 AM
Variable
12/3/2015
Type 'B'
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
TYPE G
1'
L
OOP CORNER AND L
EADI
N DETAI
L
S
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
VEHICLE LOOP INSTALLATION DETAILS
NO.
17781
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Concrete Strain Pole

4" Aluminum
Metal Strain Pole
Concrete Pedestal
Pedestal
Pedestrian
Actuated Signal
Sign
Pedestrian Actuated
4" OD Galvanized
(See FIGURE D)
Signal Sign
Pipe
(See FIGURE D)
Pedestrian Actuated
Push
Pedestrian Actuated
Button
Signal Sign
Button
Pedestrian Actuated
Signal Sign
(See FIGURE D)
(See FIGURE D)
8'
-0"
Signal Sign
Button
Push
8'
-0"
Button
Push
15"
(See FIGURE D)
15" Std.
Std.
Transformer
3'
-6"
3'
-6"
3'
-6"
Max.
Button
3'
-6"
24" Max.
24"
Push
8'
-0"
Push
Base
Anchor
Grade
Grade
3'
-6"
Bolts
Sidewalk
Grade
Sidewalk
Sidewalk
Sidewalk
Sidewalk
3'
-0"
3'
-0"
Grade
2'-0"
4'
-0"
FIGURE A
POLE MOUNTED
DETECTOR STATION
2'-0"
Cap
FIGURE B
PEDESTAL STATION
DETECTOR STATION
Push Botton
Post
Pedestrian
Actuated
5'
-6"
Pedestrian
Actuated
Signal Sign
Signal Sign
O
L
PUSH
(See Fig D)
BUTTON
D
A
TO
CROSS
Push
ST.NAME
4" OD
PUSH
Aluminum
Push
Pipe
Button
3'
-6"
Concrete
TO
CROSS
ST.NAME
Grade
Notes:
Button
BUTTON
Sidewalk
Push
Push
Button
Button
Pedestrian
Strain
Actuated
Pole
1.
pedestrian detector.
2.
Signal Sign
Payment for sign is included in the price for the
Signs shall be mounted above detectors, explaining

their purpose and use.
Push
Button
3.
12"
Use FTP 25-06, or FTP 26-06, or FTP 68A-06, or FTP 68B-06
The positioning of pedestrian push button should

clearly indicate which crosswalk signal is actuated by
Lead Anchor Bolts
each push button.

4.
Concrete
Push buttons and signs are to be mounted in

accordance with Standard Specifications, section 665.
Strain Pole
5.
Conduit
Meet all grounding requirements of Section 620 of the

PLAN
PLAN
6.
PLAN
A 30"X48" maneuvering area is required on each push
12"
Pedestrian
1
2"
FIGURE C
POST DETECTOR STATION
DETECTOR STATION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
Note To Designers:
Actuated
FIGURE D
FIGURE E
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11:
48:
00 AM
button.
Signal Sign
The designer should ensure the distance to the Push Button in
(Use FTP 25-06
FIGURE A & B is maintained. This distance can vary depending
Or FTP 26-06
on post or pedestal type or whether a frangible base is used
Or FTP 68A-06
and sidewalk configuration. This is specified to meet Americans
Or FTP 68B-06)
with Disabilities Act.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR ASSEMBLY
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17784
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
panelStyle:FTP-69A-06.ssi
panelRoundCorners:0
panelStation:none
panelHeightLock:1
legendMaterial:0
panelWidthLock:1
panelQuantity:1
panelMaterial:0
panelMounting:0
panelStandard:1
panelName:name
marginAlign:9
panelStyle:R10-3bstd.ssi
panelRoundCorners:0
panelStation:none
panelHeightLock:1
legendMaterial:0
panelWidthLock:1
panelQuantity:1
panelMaterial:0
panelMounting:0
panelStandard:1
panelRoundCorners:0
panelStation:none
panelHeightLock:1
legendMaterial:0
panelWidthLock:1
panelQuantity:1
panelMaterial:0
panelMounting:0
panelStandard:1
panelRoundCorners:0
panelStation:none
panelHeightLock:0
legendMaterial:0
panelWidthLock:0
panelQuantity:1
panelMaterial:0
panelMounting:0
panelStandard:1
FLASHING
STEADY
FTP-25-06
FTP-26-06
R10-3b
(Use Only for Case I)
FTP-68A-06
panelStyle:FTP-69B-06.ssi
panelRoundCorners:0
panelStation:none
panelHeightLock:1
legendMaterial:0
panelWidthLock:1
panelQuantity:1
panelMaterial:0
panelMounting:0
panelStandard:1
panelName:name
marginAlign:9
panelStyle:R10-3e.ssi
panelRoundCorners:0
panelStyle:R10-3eStd.ssi
panelRoundCorners:0
panelStation:none
panelHeightLock:1
legendMaterial:0
panelWidthLock:1
panelQuantity:1
panelMaterial:0
panelMounting:0
panelStandard:1
08
FLASHING
08
Pole with push
Pole with push
buttons and signs.
buttons and signs.
TIMER
STEADY
landing
landing
11:
48:
01 AM
FTP-68B-06
R10-3e
(Use Only for Case I)
CASE I
POLE PARALLEL TO CURBLINE
ALTERNATE TO FIGURE E
CASE II
POLE DIAGONAL TO CURBLINE
ALTERNATE TO FIGURE E
12/3/2015
NOTE:
1. Refer to the MANUAL ON UNIFORM TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES figure 2B-26 Pedestrian
Signs, The STANDARD HIGHWAY SIGNS MANUAL (English) Sign R10-3b for Text Size, Spacing
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
and Symbol size. Also see DESIGN STANDARDS Index 17355 for details of FTP signs.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
PEDESTRIAN DETECTOR ASSEMBLY
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17784
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Lag Bolt
Conduit
Junction Box
Junction Box
Pole Clamp
Pole Plate With

Steel Band (Or
Method Approved
By The Engineer)
Pole Plate
Pole Plate With
With Steel
Steel Band Or Load
Band
Anchors and Bolts

Cabinet
Cabinet
Cabinet
Anchor
Conduit
4" Min.
Bolts
1" Chamfer
Pulling Elbow
Type LB
Pulling Elbow
9"
M in.
6"
M in.
4' M in.
M in.
Grade
18"
4'
4' M in.
4' M in.
(Rigid)
Conduit
12"
Conduit
Type LB
5
8"
When a pole mounted cabinet is

1
2"
specified the 2
hole for the
x 20'
Grounding Electrode
cabinet shall be field drilled.
METAL POLE
CONCRETE POLE
WOOD POLE
POLE MOUNTED
POLE MOUNTED CABINET
INTERCONNECT JUNCTION BOX

*
Liquidtight flexible conduit is approved for use from the electrical
BASE MOUNTED
If holes for cabinet mounting require relocation,

original holes shall be filled in with concrete or
disconnect to the cabinet when both are installed on the same pole.
covered with a noncorrosive cover plate.
Generator
Panel
Service Slab (Slope
1
4"
Cabinet
Or
To 1" For Drainage) Not
Junction
Required In Sidewalk Or
Cabinet
Box
Cabinet
Pavement Areas Or
Where R/W Is Restricted.
Transfer
1" Chamfer
Min.
Switch
4" Max.
2"
Ground Line
Cabinet
3"
6"
Ground
Or Grade
Line Or
Grade
24"
Pull Box
4' M in.
12" Min.
Ground
Line Or
Grade
Conduit
30" Max.
FRONT VIEW
Conduit
SIDE VIEW
Notes:
11:
48:
02 AM
PVC conduits shall be provided in all bases. The spares shall exit in the direction of the center rear of the cabinet
base, into a pullbox and capped with a weathertight fitting. If obstructions prevent the spare conduit from exiting to
the rear, or the rear of the cabinet is located on the R/W line, a side exit of the spare conduits will have to be
Notes:
1. Existing controller cabinets to be retrofitted shall meet
24"
FRONT VIEW
1. The number, size and orientation of conduit sweep will vary according to site condition or locations. Two spare 2"
6" Min.
the requirements of the Standard Specifications 678.
approved by the project engineer. All spare conduit sweeps shall be capped with a weatherproof fitting.
2. The signalized intersection controller cabinet retrofit
2. Meet all grounding rquirements of the Standard Specifications 620.
Grounding
installation procedures are located at: http://www.dot.
Electrode
state.fl.us/TrafficOperations/Doc_Library/Doc_Library.shtm
12/3/2015
3. New Controller Cabinet installation shall meet the requirements of the Standard Specifications 676.
LAST
REVISION
12/15/14
REVISIO N
NEW CONTROLLER CABINET
for Generator Power for Signalized Intersection
EXISTING CONTROLLER CABINET
DESCRIPTION:
PEDESTAL MOUNTED
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
18"
CABINET INSTALLATION DETAILS
NO.
17841
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Minor Street
8R
8 3
P2
P2
P8
TF 1
TF 2
TF 1
TF 2
TF 3
2+ 6
4+ 8
1+ 5
2+ 6
4+ 8
TF 1
TF 2
TF 3
TF 1
TF 2
1+ 6
2+ 5
4+ 8
1+ 5
2+ 6
TF 3
TF 4
3+ 7
4+ 8
P4
2R
2
5
1
6
6R
P4
P8
SOP 3
SOP 2
SOP 1
SOP 4
or
or
P6
7 4 4R
3
P6
Vehicle movements & signal head number

assignments are not directionally oriented
but shall maintain their relative orientation

about the intersection (I.E., movements 7 and
4 are always to the right of movements 1
and 6 etc.).
TF 1
TF 2
1+ 6
2+ 5
TF 3
TF 4
3+ 8
4+ 7
TF 1
1+ 6
TF 2
TF 3
2+ 5
3+ 7
TF 4
TF 1
TF 5
TF 1
TF 5
TF 2
TF 6
TF 2
TF 6
4+ 8
TF 3
4 + 8
TF 3
LEGEND
3 + 7
X
TF 4
4 + 8
PX
TF X
SOP 7
SOP 6
SOP 5
SOP 8
Vehicle Movement Number

Pedestrian Movement Number
Timing Function Number
Phase Number
Green Arrow (Left or Right)
Red Arrow
Yellow Arrow
E
EARANCE TABL
GNAL CL
SI
d)
e
r
i
qu
e Re
c
n
a
r
a
e
s No Cl
e
t
a
c
di
n
kI
n
a
Bl
(
REVISIO N
07/01/05
From
6
4
5
TF 1
TF 5
TF 1
TF 5
TF 2
TF 6
TF 2
TF 6
TF 3
3 + 8
TF 3
TF 7
TF 4
4 + 7
TF 4
TF 8
SOP 9
LAST
1
2
12/3/2015
11:
48:
03 AM
REVISION
or
or
To
SIG NAL IND ICATIO NS
or
SIGNAL INDICATIONS
R
WALK
DONT
WALK
G
WALK
DONT
WALK
Flash
DONT
WALK
SOP 1
0
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STANDARD SIGNAL OPERATING PLANS
NO.
17870
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
M ajor Street
TF 1
TF 2
2+ 5
TF 3
TF 1
4+ 8
2+ 6
1+ 6
TF 2
TF 3
TF 1
2 + 6 3 + 8R
2+ 5
TF 2
TF 3
2+ 6
TF 1
2+ 5
SOP 12
SOP 11
TF 1
1+ 6
TF 2
TF 3
TF 4
2+ 6 3 + 8 4 + 8
1 (A)
2 (B)
TF 1
TF 2
TF 1
2+ 6
P4
2+ 5
TF 2
3 (C)
TF 2
2+ 6
TF 3
TF 3
2+ 6 3 + 8
TF 1
3 + 8R
1+ 6
TF 2
2+ 6
TF 3
7 + 4R
SOP 15
(
DI
AMOND I
NTERCHANGE OPERATI
ON)
1 (A)
TF 4
2 (B)
TF 1
2+ 6
1+ 6
3 (C)
TF 2
TF 3
2+ 6 4+ 7
(
DI
AMOND I
NTERCHANGE OPERATI
ON)
4 (B)
TF 4
2+ 6
NOTE:
NOTE:
O
n
l
y 2 O
r 4 Us
e
d
,No
tBo
t
hT
oO
b
t
a
i
n
ABC,O
r ACB O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
.
O
n
l
y 2 O
r 4 Us
e
d
,No
tBo
t
hT
oO
b
t
a
i
n
ABC,O
r ACB O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
.
SOP 18
SOP 19
(
DI
AMOND I
NTERCHANGE OPERATI
ONS)
(MIDBLOCK)
SOP 14
4 (B)
SOP 17
SOP 16
SOP 13
(
ONE-WAY STREET I
NTERSECTI
ON)
(
DI
AMOND I
NTERCHANGE OPERATI
ONS)
HIGH VOLUME
From Normal
From Normal
To Normal
Operation
Operation
To Normal
Operation
Operation
(Track Clearance)
(Dwell)
From Normal
Operation
(Track Clearance)
(Dwell)
To Normal
2A
2A
Operation
8
4
(Dwell)
6A
6A
6A
6A
6
4
LOW VOLUME
2
8
TF 1
TF 5
11:
48:
03 AM
6A
6A
TF 2
2A
TF 6
TF 3
TF 7
POP 3
12/3/2015
POP 2
2A
1
6A
POP 1
SOP 20
LAST
REVISION
07/01/00
REVISIO N
(
DI
AMOND I
NTERCHANGE OPERATI
ONS)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STANDARD SIGNAL OPERATING PLANS
NO.
17870
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
The Distance Is Measured Along Right Edge Of Pavement

From RR Stop Bar To Sign Advance Warning Sign.
Weathertight Cap
Advance
Warning
Signal Heads Not
Two 8" Signal Heads
Active In Passive
(Yellow Lens)
Sign
Power Service
Signal Heads Flashing

Alternately In Active
State
State
Pull
Boxes
LOCATION OF THE
ADVANCE WARNING
SIGN
Slip Fit Collar
DISTANCE
(mph)
(ft)
Min.
50
30
75
40
125
50
250
55
325
1"
SPEED
4" Aluminum Pipe
R
4" Aluminum Pipe
(0.188" Wall Thickness)
Stationary Background To
RR Contol Cabinet To Contain
Form A Portion Of "STOP
Normally Closed Relay.
AHEAD" Sign In Open Mode.
(Furnished By RR)
1"
Sign Control
Wiring To Be As
Yellow
36"
Sign No. W10-1 (36")
Manufacturer
Stationary Background
Std.
Spacing
Power Service
8" Letter
To Form A Portion Of
Flasher Cabinet
Distance Message When
(Signal Flasher, Manual Test
"STOP AHEAD" sign Is
Switch; Normally Closed,
In Closed Mode.
Push Button, Control Relay)
(Series "C")
STOP
30"
2'
Pull Boxes 200' Nominal

10'
Recommended By
Advance Warning
Sign (Location May
Be Adjusted To
Folding
1' Min.
FEET
AHEAD
Fit Field Condition)
TYPICAL PLAN
Sign
Control
System
(Open)
Shoulder
Install Bushing To Protect
Grade At Edge
Wires From Chafing
Of Travel Way
Signal
Lamps
CKT 2
(Type LB) (2" ID Min.)
Com m on
CKT 1
(Closed)
4'M in.
Pulling Elbow
4'
30"
System
M in. & Std.
Folding Sign Control
Flashing
Beacon
Double
Circuit
Power
Class I Concrete
Open
Sign
Motor
Common
Closed
1. "STOP AHEAD" is standard
Cabinet
Pull Box
30"
and preferred sign message.
SIDE VIEW
Flasher
Sign
Control
Circuit
NOTE:
FRONT VIEW
Com m on
Flasher
Crushed Rock
Manual Test Switch
Another message may be

approved when appropriate
1" PVC Conduit
for specific situations.

18"
Terminate Shield To
Power
Power
Neutral
Safety Ground Service
Safety Ground At Sign

Control Circuit Only.
11:
48:
04 AM
Junction Box
Installed At RR
FRONT VIEW
ACTIVE STATE
(TRAIN CIRCUIT ACTUATED)
12/3/2015
PASSIVE STATE
(TRAIN CIRCUIT NOT ACTUATED)
Right Of Way.
From Railroad
NOTE:
Controller
Conduit and cable from the normally closed
Cabinet (Normally
relay of RR controller cabinet to the junction
Closed Relay)
box shall be furnish & installed by RR.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
ADVANCE WARNING FOR R/R CROSSING
NO.
17881
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Railroad Gate
See Index No. 560
Or Signal And
See Index No. 560
'
2
1 n.
i
M
Railroad Gate Or
Signal And Gate
Pavement Edge
'
2
1 n.
i
M
Gate
Centerline
Or Curb
Of
Travelway
Centerline
*
10' Min.
*
10' Min.
Of
M edian
Travelway
Shoulder
Pavement Edge
(Travelway)
Line
4'
*
10' Min.
4'
Median
Railroad Gate Or
in
.
'
2
1 n.
i
M
ONE-WAY
1
0
'
Signal And Gate
Pavement Edge
(Travelway)
TWO-WAY
TWO-WAY
(Mountable Curb
Undivided
Divided Multilane
Or Shoulder)
2 Or 4 Lanes
(Mountable Curb)
SIGNAL PLACEMENT AT RAILROAD CROSSING
Note:
*
10' Min.
Arrows denote direction of travel not pavement markings.
(2 - LANE DESIGN)
FIGURE 1
General Notes
Median
Railroad Gate Or
however, some form of impact
I Flashing signals
attenuation device may be specified for
II Flashing signals with cantilever
certain locations.
III Flashing signals with gate
Gate Length Requirements
in
.
Type of traffic control device
See Note 5 Sheet 3
4.
1
0
'
No guardrail is proposed for signals;
1.
'
2
1 n.
i
Signal And Gate
Note:
IV Flashing signals with cantilever and gate

2.
Advance flasher to be installed when and
Two separate foundations may be required (one for signals,
V Gate
if called for in plans or specifications.

5.
3.
one for gate), depending on type of equipment used.
Class of traffic control devices
(4 - LANE DESIGN)
Top of foundation shall be no higher
I Flashing signals-one track
than 4" above finished shoulder grade.
II Flashing signals-multiple tracks
When 10' is deemed impracticle the control device can be
III Flashing signals and gates-one track
located as close as 2' from the edge of a paved shoulder
IV Flashing signals and gates-multiple tracks
but not less than 6' from the edge of the near traffic lane.
Varies
Back-To-Back
Flasher Units
Gong Type
Back-To-Back
Highway Crossing
Flasher Units
Varies
Bell (1 Min. Per
Gong Type
Lowest Point
Gong Type
Highway Crossing Bell
Of Overhead
Highway
(1 Min. Per Crossing)
Signal Unit
Crossing Bell
Crossing)
(1 Minimum Per
Crossing)
Lowest Point
Of Overhead
Signal Unit
G
N
I
S
S
C
19'M ax.
17'
-6" M in.
Installing Agency
Gates Are Used.
12"
G
N
I
S
O
R
C
Travelway
Sides
15"
Crown Of
27"
Roadway
27"
51" Max.
10' Min. *
10' Min. *
Travelway
M ax.
Roadway
4'
-6"
Crown Of
Sheeting, Both
M in.
27"
9'
-6" M ax.
7'
-6" M in.
12"
Reflectorized
3'
-6"
Travelway
Option Of The
When Automatic
Gates Are Used.
16" Alternate
9'
-6" M ax.
Roadway
Signs Is The
TRACKS
TRACKS
7'
-6" M in.
7'
-6" M in.
Crown Of
Number Of Track
15"
15"
9'
-6" M ax.
7'
-6" M in.
9'
-6" M ax.
G
N
I
S
S
O
R
C
12"
17'
-6" M in.
19'M ax.
G
N
I
S
S
O
R
C
12"
11:
48:
05 AM
27"
Flasher Units
Back-To-Back
Red And White
*
10' Min.
Travelway
When Automatic
Approach Width
O
R
Roadway
Highway
Installing Agency
D
A
Or Part Nearest
Signs Is The
Option Of The
O
R
Edge Of Background
15"
Crown Of
L
I
A
R
Approach Width
Number Of Track
Flasher Units
O
R
1
2
Back-To-Back
O
R
L
I
A
R
Flasher Units
L
I
A
R
Back-To-Back
L
I
A
R
1
2
51" Max.
10' Min. *
2' Min.
4" Max.
Paved Shoulder
4" Max.
Paved Shoulder
Shoulder
TYPE I
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
4" Max.
Paved Shoulder
4" Max.
See FIGURE 1
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
L
Paved
TYPE II
TYPE III
TYPE IV
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
RAILROAD GRADE CROSSING
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES
NO.
17882
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
2'
2'
0'
-6'
'
2 .
1 in
M
Sidewalk
GENERAL NOTES
1.
0'
-6'
Signal And Gate
2'
Railroad Gate Or
Signal And Gate

2'
Railroad Gate Or
The location of flashing signals and stop lines shall be

established based on future (or present) installation of gate with
appropriate track clearances.
2.
Sidewalk
Where plans call for railroad traffic control devices to be

installed in curbed medians, the minimum median width shall be
12'-6".
10'
10'
3.
Location of railroad traffic control device is based on the
distance available between face of curb & sidewalk. 0' to 6' -
Railroad Gate Or
Locate device outside sidewalk. Over 6' - Locate device between
Signal And Gate
face of curb and sidewalk.
4'
4.
Stop line to be perpendicular to edge of roadway, approx. 15'

from nearest rail; or 8'
Sidewalk
2'
2'
'
2 .
1 in
M
6'M in.
6'M in.
Sidewalk
4'
5.
from and parallel to gate when present.
When a cantilevered-arm flashing-light signal is used, the

minimum vertical clearance shall be 17'-6" from above the Crown
of Roadway to the Lowest Point of the Overhead Signal Unit.
Railroad Gate Or
ACUTE ANGLE (AND RIGHT ANGLE)
OBTUSE ANGLE
Signal And Gate
(2 LANES, CURB & GUTTER)
(2 LANES, CURB & GUTTER)
As A Minimum, Position
One Flasher Unit Over
Lane Separation Lines
(More Than One Flasher
Unit If There Are More
Than 2 Approach Lanes).
Varies
Back-To-Back
Flasher Units
Back-To-Back
Flasher Units
Varies
Lowest Point
Gong Type
Of Overhead
Highway Crossing
Signal Unit
Bell (1 Minimum) Per

Crossing
Lowest Point
Gong Type Highway
Of Overhead
Gong Type
Crossing Bell (1 Min.
Signal Unit
Highway Crossing Bell

(1 Minimum)
Per Crossing)
Per Crossing
Sidewalk
L
See FIGURE 1
TYPE II
TYPE III
Travelway
4" Max.
G
N
I
S
S
O
R
C
The Installing
Agency When
Automatic Gates
TRACKS
Are Used.
51" Max.
M ax.
51" Max
2'-6"
4'
-6"
Crown Of
M in.
M ax.
M in.
4'
-6"
3'
-6"
4" Max.
7'
-6" M in. 12"
Sides
Roadway
Varies
19'M ax.
Red And White

Sheeting, Both
24"
Travelway
16" Alternate
3'
-6"
M ax.
Roadway
15"
27"
Width Min.
Reflectorized
9'
-6"
Crown Of
Approach
15"
9'
-6" M ax.
12"
27"
M in.
7'
-6"
Both Sides
17'
-6" M in.
G
N
I
S
S
O
R
C
12"
7'
-6" M in.
17'
-6" M in.
And White Sheeting,
4" Max.
Are Used.
1
2
Edge Of
27"
Part
Nearest
Highway
2'-6"
51" Max
6' Min.
L
See FIGURE 1
TYPE IV
Travelway
16"
2'-6"
Sidewalk
Min.
4" Max.
Sidewalk
4" Max.
6' Min.
TYPE V
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
TYPE I
Reflectorized Red
9'
-6" M ax.
M ax.
11:
48:
05 AM
Sidewalk
19'M ax.
G
N
I
S
S
O
R
C
12"
9'
-6"
7'
-6" M in.
24"
Automatic Gates
TRACKS
16" Alternate
15"
Agency When
The Option Of
Travelway
5' Min.
Varies
Width
Part Nearest Roadway
Travelway
Roadway
N
I
S
S
O RO
R
A
C
D
2
Edge Of Background Or
O
R
O
R
Roadway
Crown Of
Approach
The Installing
L
I
A
R
Crown Of
15"
1
2
Tracks Signs Is
O
R
Back-To-Back
Number Of
Flasher Units
L
I
A
R
Flasher Units
Back-To-Back
Tracks Signs Is
The Option Of
L
I
A
R
Flasher Units
L
I
A
R
Back-To-Back
Number Of
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17882
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
RAILROAD CROSSING AT
TWO (2)-LANE ROADWAY
RELATIVE LOCATION OF CROSSING TRAFFIC

CONTROL DEVICES
NG AT
ROAD CROSSI
L
RAI
ANE ROADWAY
L
TI
MUL
Stop Bar Perpendicular
Stop Bar Perpendicular
to Edge Of Travel Way
to Edge Of Travel Way
Or 8' From & Parallel To
Or 8' From & Parallel To
Gate When Present.
8'-0"
Gate Or
Gate When Present.
Flashing Signal
Pavement
Message
With Gates
24" White
White
24" White
Future Gate
8'
DO NOT
See Note 5
STOP
ON
TRACKS
Min.
4'
12'
6" Dbl. Yellow
6'
Stop Line
R8 - 8
8'
20'
10'
6'
-0"
10'
8'
12
'
Location
For Use Near

Signalized
Intersections
Flashing Signal
12'
6" Dbl Yellow
(If Not with Gate)

Of Lane
12'
Edge Of
Travel way
8'
10'
8'
Gate
Location
As Required
Min.
4'
Future
12'
12
'
See Note 5
10'
16"
24" White
Railroad Protection
24" White
Device Is Not To Be
Located Within 12'
Of The RR Center
24" White
Line.
20'
24" White
12"
20'
1. When computing pavement message, quantities do not include

traverse lines.
50'
20'
50'
2. Placement of sign W10-1 in a residential or business district,

6'
20'
6" Dbl Yellow
6'
NOTES:
where low speeds are prevalent, the W10-1 sign may be placed
a minimum distance of 100' from the crossing. Where street
20'
intersections occur between the RR pavement message and the

tracks an additional W10-1 sign and additional pavement
20'
message should be used.

R
W10-1
3. A portion of the pavement markings symbol should be directly

R
opposite the W10-1 sign.

4. Recommended location for FTP-61-06 or FTP-62-06 signs, 100'
W10-1
6'
urban and 300' rural. See Index 17355 for sign details.
5. Gate Length Requirements:
For Two-way undivided sections:
24" White
SPEED
(mph)
" A "
(ft)
60
400
from the gate to the center line shall be a maximum of 4'.
55
325
For one-way or divided sections:
50
250
45
175
40
125
35
100
24" White
The gate should extend to within 1' of the center line. On

multiple approaches the maximum gate length may not reach to
within 1' of the center line.
For those cases, the distance
11:
48:
06 AM
The gate shall be of sufficient length such that the distance

from the gate tip to the inside edge of pavement is a maximum
12/3/2015
of 4'.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
URBAN
4"
85 MIN.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17882
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
Red Flashing Lights
12'-5" Min.
Sidewalk
Red Steady Burn
Sidewalk
Specified Length Of Gate Arm
1'
R
C
12'M in.
3'
-6" M in.
4'
-6" M ax.
16"
16"
White
Crown Of Roadway
50'M in.
90
O
S
Red
S
I
"C"
1'
"B"
"A"
Travel Way
18"
18"
51"
27"
Varies
Max.
(Std.)
(2'-6"
Min)
PLAN
RAILROAD GATE ARM LIGHT SPACING

Type F Curb
6" Min. Height
Specified Length
Of Gate Arm
Dimension
"A"
Dimension
"B"
Dimension
"C"
14 Ft.
6"
36"
5'
MEDIAN SECTION AT SIGNAL GATES

NOTE:
15 Ft.
18"
36"
5'
16-17 Ft.
24"
36"
5'
18-19 Ft.
28"
41"
5'
For additional information see the "Manual On Uniform Traffic Control

Devices", Part 8; The "Traffic Control Handbook" , Part VIII; and AASHTO
"A Policy On Geometric Design Of Streets And Highways".
28"
4'
5'
24-28 Ft.
28"
5'
5'
29-31 Ft.
36"
6'
6'
32-34 Ft.
36"
7'
7'
35-37 Ft.
36"
9'
9'
38 And Over
36"
10'
10'
11:
48:
07 AM
20-23 Ft.
MEDIAN SIGNAL GATES FOR
12/3/2015
MULTILANE UNDIVIDED URBAN SECTIONS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
(THREE OR MORE DRIVING LANES IN ONE DIRECTION, 45 MPH OR LESS)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17882
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
20' 40'
100' Min.
DRAWBRIDGE
Of
Vehicular Traffic
RED
STOP
HERE ON
DRAW
AHEAD
BRIDGE
AHEAD
DRAW
BRIDGE
TYPE I
ON
750' *
RED
STOP
750' *
HERE
DRAW
Direction
Of
Vehicular Traffic
AHEAD
20'
DRAWBRIDGE
Direction
BRIDGE
ON
RED
STOP
HERE
AHEAD
RED
STOP
HERE ON
100' Min.
DRAW
BRIDGE
TYPICAL BRIDGE MOUNTS
TYPE II
TO BE USED WHERE BRIDGE
TO BE USED WHERE TYPE I IS NOT
OPERATORS ARE FULL TIME
APPLICABLE (USUALLY WHEN THE
OR A DAILY BASIS.
BRIDGE OPERATOR IS "ON CALL").
LEGEND:
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
Mast Arm Mounted (Off Bridge)
DRAWBRIDGE SIGN
Monotube Support Mounted (On Bridge)
DRAWBRIDGE AHEAD SIGN WITH YELLOW FLASHING BEACON
STOP HERE ON RED SIGN WITH RED FLASHING BEACONS
ENTRANCE GATE
EXIT GATE
Ground Mounted
W8-5
SLIPPERY WHEN WET SIGN
24" THERMOPLASTIC STOP BAR
See Note 11
NOTES:
1.
A bypass switch shall be installed to override each timing interval in case of a malfunction.
2.
"STOP HERE ON RED" is omitted in Type I operation and "TRAFFIC SIGNALS" are omitted in
Type II operation.
3.
The time between beginning of flashing yellow on "Drawbridge Ahead" sign and the clearance
SEQUENCE CHART
of traffic signal to red, or beginning of flashing red should not be less than the travel time
of a passenger car, from the sign location to the stop line, traveling at the 85 percentile
approach speed.
4.
SIGNAL SWITCH
Beginning of operation of drawbridge gates shall not be less than 15 seconds after steady
Time of gate lowering and raising is dependent upon gate type.
6.
Time of bridge opening is determined by the bridge tender.
7.
Each gate shall be operated by a separate switch.
8.
On each approach (Type II ), all four red signals shall be on the same two circuit flashers,
OFF
FLASHING BEACON
red or 20 seconds after flashing red (Actual time may be determined by the bridge tender.)
5.
ON
OFF
DRAWBRIDGE AHEAD SIGN

(See Note 9)
FLASHING
BLANK
BLANK
YELLOW
Per Note 7
SIGNALS & SIGNS

STOP HERE ON RED
(Type II only)
TRAFFIC SIGNALS
BLANK
BLANK
FLASHING RED
YELLOW
GREEN
RED
GREEN
(Type I only)
RAISED
ENTRANCE GATES
LOWERED
RAISED
with the two top signals on one circuit, and the two bottom signals on the alternately flashing
circuit.
GATES
LOWERED
EXIT GATES
9.
RAISED
A Drawbridge Ahead sign is required for both types of signal operation, However a flashing
11:
48:
08 AM
beacon shall be added to the sign when physical conditions prevent a driver traveling at the
85% approach speed from having continuous view of at least one signal indication for
approximately 10 seconds.
10. Requirements on gate installation are contained in Section 4I of the "Manual on Uniform
TIMING
Traffic Control Devices".
STEEL DECK BRIDGES."
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
y
s ma
n
o
i
t
i
d
n
o
dc
l
e
* Fi
f
to
n
me
t
s
u
j
d
ea
r
i
u
q
e
r
.
e
c
n
a
t
s
i
dd
r
a
d
n
a
t
ss
i
h
t
Time
Sec.
(See Note
Min.
No.3)
Normal
SLIPPERY WHEN WET SIGNS shall be placed in advance of all MOVABLE and NONMOVABLE
REVISIO N
12/3/2015
11. "In accordance with Traffic Engineering Manual (Topic Number 750-000-005) Section 2.1,
Variable
15 Sec. Min.
Variable Time
(See Note No.4)
Variable
Variable Time
Variable
Time
Bridge Open
Time
(See Note
No. 5)
(See Note
No. 6)
(See Note
No. 5)
Operation During Bridge Preemption
Operation
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES FOR
DESIGN STANDARDS
MOVABLE SPAN BRIDGE SIGNALS
NO.
17890
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
Pole Clamp With
Louvered
Wire Entrance
15"
12" Signal
Backplates
Head With Visor
15"
12"
12"
30"
Varies
12" Signal Head
With Visor
YELLOW
RED
"T" With
Cap
Backplates
Signal Control Cable
1
2"
12"
Backplates
Louvered
4" Slip
12"
17'
-6" M in.
, 19'M ax. To Bottom Of Sign
Louvered
Fit Collar
Flasher Cabinet
Nipple
Location When
Required
Signal Head
(12")
FI
GURE -C
HERE ON
Lens With Visor

1
2"
Sign No. R10-6
Nipple
Pole Mounting
Louvered
Bracket With
Backplates
"T" With
Stainless
Cap
Steel Bands
Pulling Elbow
Signal Head (12")
1
2"
Nipple
FTP-84-09
12"
MONOTUBE SUPPORT MOUNTI

NG
4" O.D. Aluminum
Pole Clamp With Wire
Pedestal, 0.188 Wall
6"
Entrance (See Grommet
Thickness, Alloy 6061-T6.
Detail in Figure-E)
RED
12" Signal Head

With Visor
7'*
9
16"
7'*
FI
GURE -A
Dia. Holes
FI
GURE -G
3
8"
1
2"
1
2"
x 2
5
16"
Cable Entry In
Angle
x 3"
Hi-Tensile
Nuts & Lock
Steel Clamps
Washer.
4'M in.
3
16"
Hex Bolt,
Lower Bracket
FI
GURE -D
1
2"
Grommet
Pull Box
3
4"
Slotted
2'
Weld
Holes In Sign
Mounting Angle
1" PVC Conduit

2'
11
16"
1" ID Rubber
24"
Bridge Mounting Details Not Shown
Pole Clamp With
11:
48:
09 AM
Wire Entrance
1
2"
12/3/2015
Crushed Rock
1'-6"
FI
GURE -B
FI
GURE -E
SI
GN PANEL MOUNTI
NG ASSEMBL
Y
SI
GNAL HEAD MOUNTI
NG ASSEMBL
Y
1'-6"
FI
GURE -F
Measured from the bottom of the sign to the near edge of the
pavement. Horizontal distance between edge of the pavement
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
and inside edge of sign will vary with condition at job site.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17890
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
12"
15"
15"
30"
12"
5' x 2'-6"
Louvered Backplates
Louvered Backplates
2" Border-4" Radius

6" Series "D" Letters
BLACK OPAQUE LEGEND AND BORDER ON REFLECTORIZED YELLOW BACKGROUND

TO BE USED WITH TYPE I OPERATION, AS SHOWN ON PREVIOUS SHEET
MONOTUBE SUPPORT MOUNTING
Edge Of
Travelway
2' Min.
Counterweights
Class I Or II
(Length Shall Be Shown On Plan Sheets)
1'-6"
Center
5'-6"
RR & Drawbridge
Arms 18' to 20'
Down
See Note 2
Position
Center Line Mast

8"
3'
-6" M in.
4'
-6" M ax.
2" Steel Railing
2'-10"
1'-0"
1'-10"
Min.
Min.
6'-0"
RR & Drawbridge
Arms 32' And Over
NOTES:
1'
-4"
Roadway
Center
Roadway
1.
12 volt flashing red lights shall be mounted on gate arm and shall
operate in the flashing mode only when gate arm is in the lower
position or in the process of being lowered. The number of lights
11:
48:
09 AM
shall vary accordingly to length of the gate arm.

3'-6"
2.
Alternating 16" pattern of fully reflectorized red and white stripes.
Min.
12/3/2015
5'-0" Min.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
GATE & ARM DETAIL
TYPICAL LAMP PLACEMENT
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17890
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
1
2"
1
2"
1
8"
9
16"
3
4"
2"
FRONT VIEW
Adjustable Shelf
3"
3"
Hole
(See Note #4)
Bracket
SIDE VIEW
1 2"
"
2
Modem
3
4"
(See Note #4)
1
2"
Bracket
Classification Unit
2"
Hole
Vehicle Speed/
Cable, (See Note #5)
Hole
1
2"
11
16"
1
5 ft. Long Equipment
3"
1"
3
8"
ISOMETRIC VIEW
J1 Recept. With Alum.

Mtg. Bracket For Lanes
1 To 4 (See Note #3)
NOTE:
Fabricate bracket out of
3
32"
1
8"
inch thick aluminum. Dimensions may vary
depending on the manufacturer of the J1 receptacle being furnished. The

cabinet manufacturer will construct the mounting bracket to fit the receptacle.
J1 MOUNTING BRACKET
NOTES:
1. Traffic monitoring site cabinet includes:
Cabinet Cable
A. One adjustable Shelf; (equipped as shown)

B. One backplane assembly; (equipped as shown)
Backplane For
Surge
Suppression
Voltage
Solar Power
Regulator
Piezo Sensor
Term inal Strip
Loop Term . Strip
Loop Term . Strip
Battery Terminal
C. One J1 receptacle with mounting bracket;
Lanes 1 To 4
D. One J1 equipment cable 5 ft. long (Reference Sheet No. 4);
(See Note #3)
E. All Associated wiring and wiring harnesses.
2. Basic backplane assembly consists of:

A. Two inductive loop terminal strips;
B. One piezo sensor terminal strip;
C. One battery terminal strip;
D. One solar panel terminal strip.
Solar Terminal
3. The contractor is responsible for contacting the TMS Manager
at the Transportation Statics Office for lane number information
and verification.
Surge Suppressors
4. Speed/Classification Unit and Modem furnished separately.
12:
44:
30 PM
10"
(Furnished Separatley)
5. Cable ends must be fabricated to fit the vehicle speed/
12 Volt
classification unit. (Reference Sheet No. 4)
Storage
11/30/2015
Battery
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
CABINET LAYOUT DETAILS (Four Lanes or Less)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TRAFFIC MONITORING SITE
NO.
17900
SHEET
NO.
1of 7
Vehicle Speed/
Classification Unit
(See Note #4)
Equipment Cables
(See Note #5)
J1 Receptacle
P1 Equipment Cable Plug
(Lanes 1 Through 4)
(Lanes 5 Through 8)
J1 Receptacle
Vehicle Speed/
5 ft. Long Equipment
Classification Unit
Cable (See Note #5)
(See Note #4)

Aluminum Bracket For J1 receptacle (Reference Detail,
Sheet No. 1) (Attach To Shelf Mounting Rail In Cabinet)
Modem
(See Note #4)
Wiring To
Backplane
Wiring To
Cable Arrangement For More Than Four Lanes Monitored
Backplane
By a Single Vehicle Speed/Classification Unit

Adjustable Shelf
J1 Recept. With Alum.
OPTION A
(Shown)
Mtg. Bracket For Lanes

1 To 4 (See Note #3)
J1 Recept. With
Vehicle Speed/
Classification Unit
For Lanes 5 To 8
(See Note #4)
(See Note #3)
Term . Strip
Veh. Sensor
Loop Term . Strip
Loop Term . Strip
Alum. Mtg. Bracket
Equipment Cables
(See Note #5)
Backplane For
Lanes 5 To 8
(See Note #3)
J1 Receptacle
(Lanes 1 Through 4)
(Lanes 5 Through 8)
J1 Receptacle
Aluminum Bracket For J1 receptacle (Reference Detail,

Sheet No. 1) (Attach To Shelf Mounting Rail In Cabinet)
Cabinet Cable
Wiring To
Backplane For
Backplane
Backplane
(See Note #3)

Voltage
Solar Power
Surge
Suppression
Regulator
Piezo Sensor
Wiring To
Cable Arrangement For More Than Four Lanes Monitored
By a Single Vehicle Speed/Classification Unit
Lanes 1 To 4
Term inal Strip
Loop Term . Strip
Loop Term . Strip
Battery Terminal
Solar Terminal
OPTION B
EQUIPMENT CABLE ASSEMBLY
NOTES:
1. Traffic monitoring site cabinet includes:
3. The contractor is responsible for contacting the TMS
A. One adjustable Shelf; (equipped as shown)
Manager in the Transportation Statics Office for lane
B. Two backplane assembly; (equipped as shown)
number information and verification.
C. Two J1 receptacle with mounting bracket;

Surge Suppressors
D. One J1 equipment cable 5 ft. long (Reference
(Furnished Separatley)
4. Speed/Classification Unit and Modem furnished separately.
12:
44:
31 PM
10"
Sheet No. 4);

E. All Associated wiring and wiring harnesses.
12 Volt
Storage
Battery
5. Cable ends must be fabricated to fit the vehicle speed/

classification unit. (Reference Sheet No. 4 for Pinout Charts,
2. Basic backplane assembly consists of:
receptacle and plug details.
A. Two inductive loop terminal strips;

B. One piezo sensor terminal strip;
C. One battery terminal strip;
11/30/2015
D. One solar panel terminal strip.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
CABINET LAYOUT DETAILS (Five to Eight Lanes)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17900
SHEET
NO.
2 of 7
To J1 Receptacle
NOTES:
1. Reference Sheet No. 1 or 2, Note #2 for items to be included with backplane.
2. All terminal strip contacts are on
9
16"
centers (Clinch 142 Series or equal)
Use insulated fork wire terminations.

3. The contractor is responsible for contacting the TMS Manager in the Transportation
Statics Office for lane number information and verification.
Loop Leads From

Lanes 3 & 4
Loop Leads From

Lanes 1 & 2
Piezo. Sensor Leads

From Lanes 1 - 4
(See Note #3)
(See Note #3)
8 in. x 24 in. x
(See Note #3)
1
8
in.
Thick Aluminum Backplane
Surge Suppressor (Typ.)
Battery Terminal
Loop
Gnd
Loop
Cnt
e. c
ond
.
Blk
Blk
Gnd
3a
1a
Wht
Wht
Veh.
Sen. 1
Jumper
Loop
Gnd
Loop
Cnt
e. c
ond
.
Blk
Blk
Gnd
3b
1b
Wht
Wht
(-)
Solar Power
(+)
Jumper
Voltage Regulator
Veh.
Sen. 2
1
8"
Ground to
8"
Backplane
Gnd
4a
Wht
Blk
Blk
Loop Gnd
Loop Gnd
2b
4b
Wht
Veh.
Sen. 4
Wht
(-)
7
8"
Wht
Sen. 3
7
8"
Loop
(+)
Gnd
2a
Solar Power
Surge
Suppressor
Veh.
Cnt
e. c
ond
.
Loop
Cnt
e. c
ond
.
Blk
Blk
3
4"
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
3
4"
(-)
3
4"
(+)
Solar Terminal
2"
2'-0"
12:
44:
32 PM
Ground
Inductive Loop Lead-In And

11/30/2015
Piezo Sensor Leads From Roadway
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
CABINET BACKPLANE DETAIL

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17900
SHEET
NO.
3 of 7
Aluminum Bracket For J1 Receptacle

(Attach To Shelf Mounting Rail In Cabinet)
J1 Receptacle (Amphenol
28-12 Recept. W/Male Pins
And MS Type Clamp, Or Equal.)
Veh. Speed/

(Amphenol 28-12 Plug W/Female Pin Slots
And MS Type Clamp, Or Equal.)
Class. Unit
Cabinet Cable
Equipment Cables
Equipment Cable
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cable
Cable
J1 EQUIPMENT CABLE PLUG
26 Recessed Male Pins
26 Female Pin Slots
Loop 1a (5a) yellow
Loop 1a (5a)
Loop 1a (5a) purple
Loop 1a (5a)
Loop 1b (5b) gray
Loop 1b (5b)
Loop 1b (5b) pink
Loop 1b (5b)
Loop 2a (6a) brown
Loop 2a (6a)
Loop 2a (6a) blue
Loop 2a (6a)
Loop 2b (6b) orange
Loop 2b (6b)
Loop 2b (6b) tan
Loop 2b (6b)
Loop 3a (7a) white
Gnd
Loop 3a (7a) green
Loop 3a (7a)
Loop 3b (7b) red
Loop 3b (7b)
Loop 3b (7b) black
Loop 3b (7b)
Gnd
Loop 3b (7b)
Loop 4a (8a) w/yellow
Loop 4a (8a)
Loop 4a (8a) w/purple
Loop 4a (8a)
Loop 4b (8b) w/gray
Loop 4b (8b)
Loop 4b (8b) w/brown
Loop 4b (8b)
Piezo 1 (5) (+) w/blue
Gnd
Piezo 1 (5) sh w/orange
Piezo 1 (5) (+)
Piezo 2 (6) (+) w/green
Piezo 1 sh
Piezo 2 (6) sh w/red
Piezo 2 (6) (+)
Piezo 3 (7) (+) w/black
Piezo 2 sh
Piezo 3 (7) sh w/red/blk
Piezo 3 (7) (+)
Piezo 4 (8) (+) red/ green
Piezo 3 sh
Piezo 4 (8) sh red/yellow
Piezo 4 (8) (+)
Gnd red/black
Piezo 4 sh
Connect To
J1 RECEPTACLE PINOUT
Electronics Unit
OPTION A
Veh. Speed/
Class. Unit
Equipment Cable
Cabinet
Cabinet
Cable
Cable
Connect To
Electronics Unit
OPTION B
NOTES:
1. The contractor is responsible for contacting the TMS Manager in the
Transportation Statics Office for lane number information and verification.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
and piezo sensor inputs. (Reference Sheet No. 1 for cabinet layout)
3. For more than four lanes and up to eight lanes of inputs, the following
Connect To
options are available:

Electronics Unit
12:
44:
32 PM
2. The equipment cable can accommodate up to four lanes of inductive loop
A. Second Vehicle Speed/Class. Unit and separate equipment cable

connecting to a second J1 receptacle; or
B. Single Vehicle Speed/Class. Unit capable of up to eight lanes of
inputs and a single equipment cable with split ends to fit two
J1 receptacles.
(Reference Sheet 2 detail)
4. Numbers in parenthesis in the pinout chart identify lane numbers when

a second backplane for lanes 5 through 8 is required.
5. Cable Ends must be fabricated to fit the vehicle Speed/Classification Unit.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17900
SHEET
NO.
4 of 7
16'-0"
16'-0"
Leading edge to leading edge
Leading edge to leading edge
1 " to 2" corners

drilled to full depth of loop
(smoothed, no rough edges)
Axle Sensor Are Centered Between

Loops, Installed " Below Final
Roadway Surface (See Detail 'C')
Inductive Loops Are 6' X 6'

And Centered In Lane (Typ.)
1" to 2" corners

drilled to full depth of loop
(smoothed, no rough edges)
Axle Sensor Are Centered Between

Loops, Installed " Below Final
Roadway Surface (See Detail 'C')
Inductive Loops Are 6' X 6'

And Centered In Lane (Typ.)
Loop And Axle Sensor Leads

Are 3" Deep. Slots Are Wide
Enough To Allow Unforced
Placement Of Leads In The
Bottom Of The Slot.
End Of Sensor
Extends Into The
Edge/Lane Stripe
2'-0"
2'-0"
TRAFFIC FLOW
TRAFFIC FLOW
2'-0"
2'-0"
2'-0"
Edge Of Travel Way
2'-0"
Edge Of Travel Way
Curb & Gutter

Loop And Axle Sensor
Leads Are 3" Deep.
Slots Are Wide Enough To
Allow Unforced Placement
Of Leads In The Bottom
Of The Slot.
PAVED SHOULDER
Sensor Lead
Exit Windows
(See Detail 'A')
Sensor Lead
Exit Windows
(See Detail 'B')
Pull Box w/ Concrete Apron
1.5" PVC Conduit
Or Non-Metallic
Flexible Conduit
Varies (see Note #9)
CURB & GUTTER ROADWAYS

1.5" PVC Conduit
Or Non-Metallic
Flexible Conduit
1'-0"
Pull Box W/Apron
Pull Box w/ Concrete Apron
1.5" PVC Or
Non-Metallic
Flexible Conduit
ROADWAYS WITH PAVED SHOULDERS
2'
-6"
Paved Shoulder
Curb & Gutter
1.5" PVC Or
Non-Metallic
Flexible Conduit
NOTES:
1. Install axle sensors and loops associated with axle sensors after placement of the friction course.
To Pull Box
4. Marking will consist of two rounds of contrasting colored tape, one color for the lane number and the second color
for the lead loop location in the lane. The first band closest to the cabinet will represent the lane number, one
round of tape will be for lane 1 and two rounds will be lane 2, etc. The lead loop in lane one would have one
round of tape and a second round of a contrasting colored tape for the lead loop in the lane. The trailing loop
would not have a second contrasting colored band of tape.
EXIT WINDOW
DETAIL 'A'
DETAIL 'B'
Axle Sensor
1
2"
3. Twist loop leads at the rate of 8 to 16 twists per foot. Loops that are within 150' of the cabinet, extend the
twisted pair loop wire directly to the cabinet. For distances over 150', #14 IMSA 50-2 shielded lead-in cable
must be spliced to the loop wire twisted pair at the first pull box to which the loop wire is pulled.
EXIT WINDOW
1"
2. Cut a 3" deep slot for the Inductive loops. Loop slots will be cut wide enough to allow unforced placement of
the wire into the bottom of the slot. Four turns of #14 AWG, place the IMSA 51-7 copper wire in the slot. Place
short pieces of backer rod (2" to 3" in length) every 18" to 24" to hold the loop wire in the bottom of the slot.
5. See Index 17700 for pull box and apron details.

6. All splices will be performed using splice kits designed for direct burial. Splice kits will include screw on wire
connectors and a housing with sufficient sealant to fully encapsulate the spliced connections. Taped splices are
not permitted.
12:
44:
33 PM
7. Use a chalk line or string and paint to layout the position of the sensor and lead-in cable slots. Ensure saw cuts
do not deviate more than 0.5 inches from the chalk line. Use a single blade or ganged blade saw wide enough to
cut the axle sensor slot at full width in a single pass. Cutting two slots and chipping out roadway material between
them is not allowed.
3
4"
END VIEW
(Axle Sensor Slot)
DETAIL 'C'
8. All sensor slots and any cuts in the roadway will be thoroughly blown out to ensure there is no dust or debris prior
to installation of sensors or leads.
11/30/2015
9. Install Exit Windows at least 2' apart.
TYPICAL FOR UP TO 4 LANES OF SENSOR LEADS PULLED TO ONE SIDE OF THE ROADWAY
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
LANE LAYOUT FOR TMS INDUCTIVE LOOP AND AXLE SENSOR

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17900
SHEET
NO.
5 of 7
M edian
Non-Intrusive Vehicle Sensor Mounting Height Must

Be Adjusted To Optimize The Unit's Coverage Area
Coverage Area
Varies
(
See Note # 3)
4" Nominal Aluminum Pole

(See Std. Spec. 646)
Cabinet
Varies
M edian
Roadway
(See Note #3)

Median
PLAN
ELEVATION
NOTES:
1. The unit must be capable of detecting up to eight lanes of traffic (in either or
both directions) when mounted perpendicular to the roadway.
2. Coverage area of the unit is affected by the roadway geometry: distance from
12:
44:
34 PM
the travel lanes, median type and width, barrier walls, etc.
3. Mounting height of the unit and offset from the roadway must be determined on
a site-by-site basis, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended guidelines.
11/30/2015
Offset of pole must be greater than or equal to minimum clear zone requirements.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
NON-INTRUSIVE VEHICLE SENSOR

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17900
SHEET
NO.
6 of 7
See Detail 'D'

Solar Panel(s)
NOTE:
1. Cabinet installed per Index 17841 except cabinet center will be 4 feet
above grade.
2. Place pole in accordance with the Standard Specification 125.4 and 125.8.2.
4" Weather Head
3. Use #10 AWG stranded copper wire for Solar Panel Array installations,
Red insulation is THHN or THWN for positive 12 volts wiring, Black
insulation is THHN or THWN for negative, 12 volts wiring, Green
insulation is THHN or THWN for ground bonding of the solar panel frame
to the
pole and earth.
Solar Panel(s)
(See Note #4)
4. Solar panel should be installed facing due south with angle of tilt equal
Varies (
see Note # 6)
to the sum of the following equation. The Latitude of the panel's location,
4" Nom. Aluminum Pole

multiplied by 0.76, plus 3.1 degrees. Equation expressed as (LAT)X(0.76)+(3.1)

5. Encase all wiring from the weather head to the solar panel in outdoor
flexible conduit.
Flexible Conduit
(See Note #5)
6. Concrete Base Requirments:

a. 4' poles: 2'-0" X 2'-0" wide, a depth of 2'-0"
DETAIL 'D'
b. 12', 15' or 20' poles: 3'-0" X 3'-0" wide, a depth of 3'-0"

c. 30' or 35' poles: 3'-0" X 3'-0" wide, a depth of 4'-0"
Type III
Cabinet
4'
-0"

Grounding
Grounding
Cabinet
Pull Box (Ref.

Index 17700)
No. 4 AWG. Solid

Bare Copper Wire
(See Detail 'E')

4'
-0"
(See Detail 'E')
Stainless Steel
#10 Screw
Washer
6" Min.
No. 4 AWG. Solid
Bare Copper Wire
Locknut
2'
-0"
6" Min.
Base
Assembly
Casing
To Roadway
#4 AWG Solid
Varies (See Note #6)

2'-0"
To Roadway
5
8"
Ground Lug
5
8"
x 40 ft. (Min.)
Bare Copper Wire

Attached To Lug
Copper Clad Ground

x 40 ft. (Min.)
Rod With Clamp
Copper Clad Ground

Varies
Rod With Clamp
12:
44:
35 PM
(See Note #6)
SOLAR POWER POLE
PEDESTAL MOUNTED CABINET
WITH POLE MOUNTED CABINET
(Portable Traffic Monitoring Sites)
DETAIL 'E'
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
(Telemeter Sites)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
17900
SHEET
NO.
7 of 7
See Note 2
24'
12'
12'
24'
Travel Lane
See Note 3
Travel Lane
12'
Existing Grade
12'
Cabinet
Shoulder
Travel Lane
Cabinet
Travel Lane
Guardrail (if shown in Plans)
TYPE A
TYPE B
1.
For location where pole foundation is lower
than roadway, mount CCTV cabinet on pole.

2.
11/30/2015
GENERAL NOTES:
Install CCTV Pole at locaton shown in Plans.
3. If included, install guardrail at location

shown in Plans and in accordance with Design
Standards Index 400.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
11:
36:
56 AM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CCTV POLE PLACEMENT
NO.
18100
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Dome Type CCTV Camera
Dome Type CCTV Camera
For Ground Mounted Cabinet
For Ground Mounted Cabinet
(See Index 18107)
(See Index 18107)
For Pole Mounted Cabinet
For Pole Mounted Cabinet
(See Index 18108)
(See Index 18108)
CCTV Cabinet
CCTV Cabinet
For Grounding (See Index 18102)
Concrete
11:
36:
56 AM
Concrete
For Grounding (See Index 18102)
CONCRETE POLE
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
STEEL POLE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TYPICAL CCTV SITE
NO.
18101
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
1
2"
1
2"
ETP Alloy 110 Copper
Air Terminal (Class II)

UL-96A Listed
2' Min

UL-96A Listed
2' Min
Bond #2 AWG Tin-Plated Bare Solid
Bond #2 AWG Tin-Plated Bare Solid
Copper Ground Wire To The Air
Copper Ground Wire To The Air Terminal.
Terminal. A Steel Pole May Be Used

As A Grounding Conductor If It Has
Bond #6 AWG Tin-Plated
Bond #6 AWG Tin-Plated
Sufficient Cross-Sectional Area To
Bare Solid Copper Wire To
Bare Solid Copper Wire To
Equal The Conductivity Of Main
Camera Support Base As
Camera Support Base As
Lightning Conductors Per NFPA 780
Required.
Required.
And A Minimum Wall Thickness

Of
3
16"
Or Greater.
#2 Wire May Be Routed Internally
Or Externally According To Project
Requirements
#2 AWG Tin-Plated Bare

Dome Type
For Concrete Poles That Do Not Have

Dome Type
Solid Copper Wire.
CCTV Camera
Embedded Ground Wire, Install #2 AWG
CCTV Camera
Tin-Plated Bare Solid Copper Wire. Clamp

To Concrete Pole @ 3' Intervals. Bond To
Air Terminal And Ground Rod With
Exothermic Welds.
1
2"
x 10' PVC Conduit Sleeve Shall Be
Provided To Protect Any External Ground

Wire From Mechanical Damage. Ensure
Conduits Are Sealed To Prevent Water
Intrusion.
Pole Mounted Cabinet
Wire Screen
8" MAX.
Finished Grade
Ground Rod A
2" MIN.
Primary Ground
8" MAX.
Rod Assembly
Ground Rod B
(See Inset A)
As Required
Ground Rod A
Primary Ground
Finished Grade
18" M in.
2" MIN.
Conduit for Grounding Conductors
Pull Box
11:
36:
57 AM
12" Min.
36" Max.
#2 AWG To Ground Rod C As Required
#2 AWG To Ground Rod D As Required
5
8"
Diameter By 20' Long
Concrete
12" Min.
36" Max.
11/30/2015
REVISIO N
07/01/14
5
8"
Copper-Clad Steel Ground Rods
Driven Into Undisturbed Earth
40' Typ.
STEEL CCTV POLE
LAST
As Required
Exothermic Weld
40' Typ.
REVISION
Ground Rod B
(See Inset A)
Pull Box
Exothermic Weld
Concrete
Rod Assembly
18" M in.
Conduit for Grounding Conductors
CONCRETE CCTV POLE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GROUNDING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
NO.
18102
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
1/2" ETP Alloy 110 Copper

2' Min
AIR TERMINAL PLACEMENT

(Lowering Device Pole)
" ETP Alloy 110 Copper
Surface Base Of 8 Square-Inch
Minimum Contact Area
Per NFPA 780-4.16.3

Per NFPA 780-4.16.3
2' Min
2' Min
2' Min
4' Min

Solid Copper Ground Wire.
Bond To Air Terminal
#2 AWG Tin-Plated Bare Solid

Copper Ground Wire. Bond To Air Terminals
Guardrail
(if shown in Plans)
Guardrail
11:
36:
58 AM
(if shown in Plans)

(Cantilever DMS)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
11/30/2015

(Span DMS)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
18102
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
"Sphere Of Influence: 120 Degree"
Ground Rod C
"Modified Sphere Of Influence: 90 Degree"
#2 AWG
Ground Rod C
#2 AWG
Primary Ground Rod A

Ground Rod B
Ground Rod D
Ground Rod D
Ground Rod B
Foundation: CCTV or DMS Pole
Foundation: CCTV or DMS Pole
GROUND ROD ARRAY PLACEMENT

(Typical)
20' RODS, 40' SPACING

(Typical Modified)
#2 AWG Tin-Plated
Bare Solid Copper
Wire Continuous To
Air Terminal
#2 AWG Tin-Plated
Bare Solid Copper
Wire To Ground
Rods B, C And D As
Required (Connections
May Be Combined)
#2 AWG Tin-Plated
Bare Solid Copper
Wire To Pole Mounted
Or Ground Mounted
Cabinet
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
11:
36:
59 AM
INSET "A"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
18102
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
"Sphere Of Influence: With Ground Ring"
Ground Rod D
#2 AWG (Typical)

Foundation: Communication Tower
Communication Tower
#2 AWG 12" Min./36" Max. From Foundation
Ground Rod B
Ground Rod C
Ground Rod F
Ground Rod E

(Communication Tower)
Tower Leg
Grounding Conductors
Ground Rod A
Ground Rod B
Primary Ground
2" MIN.
Ground Rod D
Rod Assembly
8" MAX.
(See Inset A)
18" M in.
Ground Rod E
Pull Box
Exothermic Weld
Exothermic Weld
#2 AWG
#2 AWG
#2 AWG
#2 AWG
To Ground Rod E
To Ground Rod A
To Ground Rod B
To Ground Rod D
#2 AWG
To Ground Rods C+F
Pull Box
5
8"
#2 AWG
To Ground Rods C+F
12" Min.
12" Min.
36" Max.
36" Max.
5
8"
Structure Or Device
Requiring Grounding
11:
36:
59 AM
Grounding
Conductors
40' Typ.
GROUND ROD ARRAY PROFILE

(Communication Tower)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
COMMUNICATION TOWER
40' Typ.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
18102
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
Air Vent
Dual Fans
Area To Remain Clear For

Full Width And Depth
Shelf
Ethernet Switch, Video Encoder

Preterminated Fiber Optic Patch Panel
CCTV Interface Panel
Sliding Drawer
Protection
Protection
RU
TVSS Surge
1
4"
TVSS Surge
Video
19" EIA Rack With Tapped 10-32

Threaded Holes
And Terminal Server
36"
RU
RU
RU
3
4"
1
4"
3
4"
RU
RU
RU
RU
Sliding Drawer
RU
Cabinet Front
CCTV Interface Panel
3
4"
Preterminated Fiber Optic Patch Panel
1
2"
And Terminal Server
3
4"
Ethernet Switch, Video Encoder
Shelf
3
4"
3
4"
Air Vent
TVSS Protected Outlets

For Equipment
Video
GFI Protected Convenience Outlet
Data
Data
Power
Power
For Portable Tools
Power Distribution Assembly

Service Entrance, Breaker,
3
Primary AC Power Filter,

RU
Primary AC Power Filter,
Service Entrance, Breaker,
1
4"
Ground Bussbar
(Number Of Outlets - Project Specific)
Ground Bussbar
(Number Of Outlets - Project Specific)
22"
24"
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
11:
37:
00 AM
GENERAL NOTES:
1.
Cabinet layout is for pole or base mounted installations.
2.
All dimensions and scale are approximate.
3.
The minimum CCTV cabinet dimensions shall be 36"H X 24"W X 22"D.
4.
Conduit entrances are in bottom of cabinet.
5.
There shall be front and rear doors. Both doors shall have the hinged
6.
Cabinet layout represents preferred placement of typical devices.

Project-specific designs may not include all components illustrated here.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
side next to the pole when pole mounted.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TYPICAL CCTV CABINET EQUIPMENT LAYOUT
NO.
18104
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
TVSS Protection
Power Distribution
For Equipment Power
AC Service
Assembly
Optional
Power
Supply
Local Management Port

RS-232
Optional
Power
Ethernet
Supplies
From
10/100 Base TX/RX
GFI
Electric Utility
Convenience Outlet(s)
For Portable Tools
Composite
Video
TVSS
Ethernet 100/1000 Base FX
Ethernet
Ethernet Switch
10/100 Base TX/RX
Video Encoder
Single Mode Fiber Optic
Maintenance
Cabinet
Access
RS-232/422/485
CCTV Camera
Serial Data
TVSS
Terminal Server
May Be One
Maintenance
Local Management Port
Access
RS-232
Or More Devices
11:
37:
00 AM
LEGEND
Data
Ethernet
Power
11/30/2015
TVSS
Transient Voltage
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
Surge Suppressor
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CCTV BLOCK DIAGRAM
NO.
18105
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
CCTV Cabinet
2" PVC Conduit For Routing

Cabling To Camera Between
Cabinet And Pole
1
2"
Fiber Optic Communications

Fiber Optic Pull Box
PVC Grounding Conduit
#4 AWG Ground Wire
Conduits (As Shown On Plans)
To Power
Service Assembly
Fiber Optic
Power Conduit
Communications
Conduits (As Shown
On Plans)
GENERAL NOTES:
1.
Contractor shall splice fiber optic cables in cabinet to preterminater patch panel.
2.
Furnish and install TVSS protection on all video, data, and power cabling in cabinet.
3.
Ensure that all electronic equipment power is protected and conditioned with TVSS
4.
Sizes and types of conduits and innerducts for network communications between the
pullbox and cabinet are stated in the contract documents.
5.
See Index 18102 for grounding requirements.
6.
All network communications conduits and ducts shall be sealed with approved
waterproof duct plugs and seals.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
11:
37:
01 AM
devices.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
GROUND MOUNTED CCTV CABINET
NO.
18107
SHEET
NO.
1of 1

*
(See Detail A)
Field adjust pole-mounted

cabinet height to achieve
best access for maintenance
(See Detail A)
personnel given site conditions

as directed by the Engineer.
Avoid conflicts with handhole.
1
2"
Fiber Optic Communications Conduit

RGS
(As Shown On Plans)
Power
Conduit
1
2"
PVC Conduit

1
2"
1
3'
For Grounding
Fiber Optic Communications Conduits
Fiber Optic Communications Conduits
(As Shown On Plans)
(As Shown On Plans)
Power Conduit To Power Service Assembly
RGS
1
2"
Power
PVC Conduit
For Grounding
Conduit
Power Conduit To Power Service Assembly
STEEL POLE
CONCRETE POLE
Composite
Composite
Camera Cable
Camera Cable
CCTV
CCTV
Cabinet
Cabinet
Pole Plate With

Stainless Steel Band
GENERAL NOTES:
1
1 2"
RGS Conduit Riser For
2" PVC Conduit Riser
Pole Opening For Cabinet
For Fiber Optic Drop
Entrance Shall Be Factory Installed
1. Contractor shall splice fiber optic cables in cabinet to preterminated patch panel.
2. Furnish and install TVSS protection on all cabling in cabinet.
Cable
Power Into Cabinet From

3. Furnish and install secondary TVSS protection on outlets for equipment in cabinet.
11:
37:
01 AM
Power Service Assembly

One Pulling Elbow
(2)Conduit Risers
Type LB 2" For
(1)1
Camera Composite Cable
(1)For Fiber Optic
1
2"
For Power
Communications
Conduits (As
11/30/2015
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
Shown On Plans)
4. Sizes and types of conduits and innerducts for network communications between
the pull box and cabinet are stated in the contract documents.
5. Ensure that equipment cabinet is bonded to CCTV pole grounding system.
6. All network communications conduits and ducts shall be sealed with approved
waterproof duct plugs and seals.
7. Pole mounted cabinets shall be mounted with hinges next to the pole.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/07
REVISIO N
DETAIL A
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
POLE MOUNTED CCTV CABINET
NO.
18108
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
1
2"
24'
Air Terminal Class II
Removable Top Cap

Connectors And Camera Wiring
Pole Top Junction Box
Pole Fitter
Divided Channel Arm
U-Bolt
U-Bolt
Clamps
Clamps
Cable Stop Block
Conduit To Be
Bolted Here
Disconnect
Unit Fitter
3-Way Tracking
Guide And Support
Pulley
Pulley
EPDM O-Ring Seal
CCTV Lowering Cable
Interior Conduit
Pole Details On
Contact Connector
Disconnect Unit
Lower Contact
Connector
Assembly
Socket
Separate Drawing
Ground Rod Base
Disconnect
Sealing Gasket Ring
Mount To Side Of Pole

Camera Junction Box
Unit Cover
Guide Pin
And Stabilizing Weight

Double Support Arms
Camera Connectors
Sealing Gasket
Camera Mounting Bracket
And Dome Flange
(Between Lower Contact

Assembly And Junction Box)
Dome Type CCTV

Camera (TYP)
TVSS Surge Protection

For Power, Data And Video
GENERAL NOTES:
1.
Lowering device to be shipped ready for pole attachment to include 100 ft. of composite power and signal cable
prewired to lowering device at the factory.
2.
The lowering device manufacturer shall supply both a portable lowering tool with a manual hand crank and a half-inch
chuck variable-speed reversible industrial-duty electric drill that matches the winch's manufacturer-recommended
revolutions per minute. One lowering tool per every 10 lowering devices is required.
3.
The lowering device manufacturer shall provide an on-site installation inspection and operator instruction and
certification. This ensures the product is assembled correctly and that all necessary persons are trained in the
proper, safe operation of the system. Before erecting the first pole the contractor must contact the lowering device
supplier and schedule a manufacturer's representative to be on-site.
Design camera mounting arm and connection to tenon according to FDOT Structures Manual (current edition).
5.
Camera to be mounted to camera junction box and stabilizing weight via 1
6.
Use air terminal extension when the pole top junction box is wider than top of pole.
7.
The stainless steel device lowering cable shall be installed inside the pole within a 1
8.
All communication and power cables must be neatly bundled and secured.
9.
Use a Camera Lowering Device listed on the Approved Product List (APL).
1
2"
Standard NPT Pipe Thread.
1
4"
diameter PVC conduit.
CAMERA MOUNTING WITH LOWERING DEVICE
10. See Index 18113 for concrete pole details and Index 18111 for steel pole details.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/10
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
11:
37:
02 AM
CAMERA LOWERING DEVICE DETAIL

4.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CAMERA MOUNTING DETAILS
NO.
18110
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Bond #4 AWG Tin-Plated Bare Solid Copper Ground Wire To

Camera Support Base By An Aluminum To Copper #2-#14 AWG
Pole Plate With Stainless Steel Band
Lug. Attached To Camera Base With A Stainless Steel Screw.
(Or Method Approved By Engineer)
Remove Paint Or Protective Coating Where Attaching Lug.
Bracket Design May Vary

By CCTV Manufacturer
Fixed Mounting Bracket Must Be
Strain Relief
Designed To Match Mounting
Fitting
Provisions For CCTV Camera
Camera Connector Harness

Supplied To Match Camera
A
Cabling To
Camera
Dome Type Camera

Assembly (TYP)
Cast In Place 2" Galvanized Nipple
For Concrete Poles. Hole With
Nipple Grommet For Steel Poles.
FIXED MOUNTING BRACKET DETAIL

Not To Scale
Pole Plate With Stainless Steel Band

(Or Method Approved By Engineer)
Varies (2' Max.)
1
2"
Dia.
Verify the pole type, the dimensions of the pole at the point of
1.
a
x
.)
ia
.
GENERAL NOTES:
(3
0
"
installation of the camera mount, and angle with respect to the
2.
V
a
r
ie
s
roadway before manufacturing camera mount assembly.

Design camera mounting arm and connection to the pole according to
FDOT Structures Manual (current edition).
3.
No field welding shall be permitted.
4.
Mounting bracket arm shall be level after installation.
5.
The contractor shall submit shop drawings for the proposed fixed
The Contractor Shall Coordinate

Bracket Design And Flange Connection
With CCTV Camera Manufacturer For
11:
37:
03 AM
Mounting The CCTV Camera Housing

mounting arm, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer
registered in the State of Florida, to the Engineer for review and
approval.
6.
SECTION AA
See Index 18113 for concrete pole details and Index 18111 for steel
7.
Galvanized pipe connections and conduit entry points shall be sealed in

LAST
REVISION
01/01/10
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
pole details.
CAMERA MOUNTING WITH FIXED BRACKET
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CAMERA MOUNTING DETAILS
NO.
18110
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
FOUNDATION NOTES:
1.
Concrete: Class IV (Drilled Shaft) with a minimum 4,000 psi
INSTALLATION NOTES:
POLE NOTES:
1.
1.
The pole shaft shall be round or 16 sided or more with a constant taper of 0.14
2.
Pole shaft may be either One or Two sections (with telescopic field splice).
b. Position one cable guide 2" below the handhole.
3.
Use only circumferential welds at base.
c. Position other cable guide 1" directly below the top of
4.
Up to two longitudinal seam welds are permitted.
5.
Longitudinal seam welds within 6" of circumferential welds shall be complete
Cable Supports: Electrical Cable Guides and Eyebolts.
inches per foot.
compressive strength at 28 days for all environment

a. Locate top and bottom cable guides within the pole
classifications.
aligned with each other.

2.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 Grade 60.
3.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 55 with ASTM A563 Grade

A heavy-hex nuts and plate washers. ASTM F2329
the tenon.
galvanization.
4.
d. Position Park Stands 2" below the top of the handhole.
Install Anchor Bolts in accordance with Section 649-5 of the
penetration welds. Longitudinal seam welds on female section of telescopic field

splices shall be complete penetration welds for the splice length plus six inches.
Specifications.
2.
5.
Lowering Device Installation Notes:
tube thickness.
a.
6.
All other areas, size the partial penetration welds to at least 60% of the pole
Foundation applies to slopes 1:4 or flatter.

Place the lowering cable that moves within the pole
in an interior conduit to prevent it from tangling or
The foundation for the CCTV structure shall be constructed

in accordance with Section 455 of the Specifications except
that no payment for the foundation shall be made under
6.
Welding Code (Steel) ANSI/AWS D1.1 (current edition). For additional welding
pole. Ensure that any electrical wire within the pole
requirements see AASHTO Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for
is routed securely and free from slack.
Section 455.
b.
Perform all welding in accordance with the American Welding Society Structural
interfering with any electrical wire that is in the
Mount lowering arm perpendicular to the roadway or
Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals, Section 5.15, Welded Connections.
7.
as shown in the plans. Position CCTV pole so that the
Identification tag:
Furnish each pole with a 2"x4" (max.) aluminum identification tag, secured to pole
camera can be safely lowered without requiring lane
with stainless steel screws.
closures.
Locate inside pole and visible from handhole.

Provide Financial Project ID, pole height, manufacturer's name, yield strength (Fy
c.
Coordinate all lowering device hardware requirements
of steel) and pole base wall thickness.
(including Tenon, Tenon mounting plates, parking

stands, etc.) with lowering device manufacturer.
8.
Except for Anchor Bolts, all bolt hole diameters shall be equal to the bolt
diameter plus 1/16", prior to galvanizing. Hole diameters for anchor bolts shall
3.
Pole Installation Notes:

a.
Install pole plumb.
b.
The pole shall not be erected until the foundation
not exceed the bolt diameter plus 1/2".

9.
This Design Standard is considered fully detailed and no shop drawings are
necessary. Submit Shop Drawings for minor modifications not detailed in the
plans.
concrete has achieved 70% of the minimum specified

28 day compressive strength.
4.
Refer to Index No. 18108 for conduit and cabinet
10. Pole Material Specifications:

a.
mounting details.
Pole:
ASTM A1011 Grade 50, 55, 60 or 65 (less than 1/4") or
ASTM A572 Grade 50, 60 or 65 (greater than or equal to 1/4") or
ASTM A595 Grade A (55 ksi yield) or Grade B (60 ksi yield).
b.
Steel Plates and Pole Cap: ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 50.
c.
Weld Metal: E70XX.
d.
Bolts: ASTM A325, Type 1.

Nuts: ASTM A563.
Washers: ASTM F-436.
e.
Handhole frame: ASTM A709 Grade 36 or ASTM A36.
f.
Handhole cover: ASTM A1011 Grade 50, 55, 60 or 65.
g.
Stainless steel screws: AISI Type 316.
h.
Galvanization:
Nuts, bolts and washers: ASTM F2329.
All other steel: ASTM A123.
11. Additional wire access holes not shown in this Design Standard shall not exceed
1" in diameter.
12. Verify CSL access tubes will not interfere with anchor bolt installation before
11:
37:
03 AM
excavating the shaft. When CSL access tube locations conflict with anchor bolt
locations, move the CSL access tube location two inches along the inner
circumference of the reinforcing cage. Notify the Engineer before excavating the
shaft if the CSL access tube locations cannot be moved out of conflict with
11/30/2015
anchor bolt locations.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
GENERAL NOTES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL CCTV POLE
NO.
18111
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Pole
Pole
Camera With Lowering
Interior
Camera With Fixed
Device
Mounting Bracket
Conduit
Handhole
Handhole
SHAFT DESIGN TABLE
ORIENTATION VIEW
ORIENTATION VIEW
Air Terminal
Air Terminal
(See Index 18102)
(See Index 18102)
Coordinate
Coordinate
Mounting Method
Mounting Method
Pole Overall
Height (ft)
Shaft
Diameter
Shaft Length
Longitudinal
Reinforcement
Pole Cap Plate
Pole Tenon
Pole Top Plate
50
4'-0"
10'-0"
(12)#11
55
4'-0"
10'-6"
(12)#11
60
4'-6"
11'-0"
(16)#11
65
4'-6"
12'-0"
(16)#11
70
5'-0"
12'-6"
(18)#11
5" Minimum
Inside Diameter
2'
Of Pole Raceway
For Camera
Mounting Details
See Index 18110
For Camera Mounting

Details
Diameter Of
1
2"
Handhole Shall Be 90
From The Lowering
Arm And Away From
Approaching Traffic
Of Handhole
Top Of
Drilled
Overall H eight
7" x 27"
2'
-9"
Length Section 2
Overall H eight
Splice Length
Pole Raceway
2" Hole With

Nipple Grommet
BASE PLATE AND ANCHOR BOLT DESIGN TABLE

Base Plate Base Plate
Anchor
Pole Overall
Diameter
Thickness Bolt Circle
Height (ft)
(in.)
(in.)
(in.)
7" x 27"
No.Bolts
Anchor
Bolt
Diameter
(in.)
Minimum
Anchor Bolt
Anchor Bolt
Embedment
Projection
(in.)
(in.)
1
2"
Handhole Shall Be 90
From The Lowering
Arm And Away From
Approaching Traffic
Of Handhole
2'
-9"
Inside
See Index 18110
Length Section 2
5" Minimum
Splice Length
Length Section 1
Length Section 1
Pole Top Plate
50
27
2.5
22
1.25
31
8.5
55
28
2.5
23
1.25
33
8.5
60
33
2.5
27
1.5
34
9.5
65
35
2.5
29
1.5
35
9.5
70
40
2.5
33
1.75
38
10.5
Top Of
Shaft
Drilled Shaft
Finish
Finish Grade
Grade
POLE DESIGN TABLE*

Section 1(Top)
Pole Overall
Height (ft)
11/30/2015
Joint
Length
Wall
Thickness
(in.)
Tip Dia.(in.)
Base Dia.
(in.)
Length
Wall
Thickness
(in.)
Tip Dia.(in.)
Base Dia.
(in.)
Minimum
Splice
Length (in)
---
---
---
---
50'-0"
0.25
10
17
---
50
ELEVATION
WITHOUT LOWERING DEVICE
11:
37:
04 AM
ELEVATION
WITH LOWERING DEVICE
Section 2 (Bottom)
24'-0"
0.25
10.5
13.875
28'-3"
0.25
13.031
17
21
55
30'-0"
0.25
10.781
15
27'-6"
0.3125
14.125
18
24
60
35'-0"
0.25
13.094
18
27'-9"
0.3125
17.094
21
27
65
34'-0"
0.25
14.406
19.188
34'-0"
0.3125
18.219
23
30
70
33'-3"
0.25
16.719
21.375
40'-0"
0.3125
20.375
26
33
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
POLE DESIGN TABLES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL CCTV POLE
NO.
18111
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
Pole Base Diameter
Shaft Diameter
2 X Anchor Bolt Diameter
1"
a
p(
2"L
Mi
n
2'
.
)
Anchor Bolt Circle

Edge of Base Plate
See Joint Weld Detail
1" Min.
Handhole Ring
Anchor Bolts Equally

Spaced (See Table)
Silicone Caulk
Double Nuts, Top Nut may

4"
Base Plate And Pole
be half height 'Jam' Nut.
6"
Center of Drilled Shaft,
3"X " Backing Ring

3
8"
Plate Washer
"
CSL Tube (Typ.)
Base Plate
Longitudinal
Thickness
Reinforcement Eq.
Base Plate
Opening
Spaced (See Table
#5 Tie Bars
6
"
C
(T o
y ve
p
.) r
For Reinforcement)
(1) Bolt Diameter
Anchor Bolt Circle
(Max.)
Base Plate Diameter
SECTION A-A
Center of
Drilled Shaft
FOUNDATION PLAN
Leveling Nut
(Anchor Bolts and Conduits Not Shown)
Base Plate Diameter
1"
Shaft Diameter
Projection
M in. Anchor Bolt
Anchor Bolt
Drilled Shaft
Anchor Bolts
1" x 1"
Chamfer
4"
"
45
3" x " Backing Ring
4" Cover (
Top)
1" Min.
1'
-7 "
"
Shaft Length
(Wall Thk. +")

x Wall Thk.
6 Sp. @
Silicone Caulk
Pole
Wall Thk. +"
Wire Screen
M in.
Pole
See Section 2 (Bottom)

on Pole Design Table
for Wall Thk.
1'
-0"
2'
-3"
Cover Plate
5"
SECTION C-C
Handhole Ring
Base Plate
Opening
See Spec. 649-6
JOINT WELD DETAIL

Tip Diameter or Base Diameter
Sp. @
Measured Flat to Flat
1'
-6" (
M ax.
)
M in.
1'
-0"
Em bedm ent
Anchor Bolt
Finish Grade
Center of Pole
Typ. (See Pole Notes)
Wall
0.6 x Wall
Thickness
7"
measure center
Min. Break Radius
to flat
= 0.25 x (Inside
Radius)
11/30/2015
BASE PLATE AND ANCHORAGE ELEVATION
# 5 Ties
11:
37:
07 AM
Inside Radius
Break Radius Typical

Drilled Shaft
Spacing
1"
Thickness
Double Nuts (Typ.)
6" Cover (Typ.)
SECTION B-B
SECTION D-D
(Conduits and CSL Tubes Not Shown)
(Conduits, Reinforcement, and CSL Tubes Not Shown)
(16-Sided Pole Shown, 18-Sided and Round Pole Similar)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
BASE PLATE AND FOUNDATION DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL CCTV POLE
NO.
18111
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
Pole
(8) " Holes
4"
Equally Spaced
1"
Handhole Frame
1" Plate
Pole Wall
(12) " x 3" Slots

Tenon Wall
Provide Cover Plate
Cable Guide For Wire
Working Park Stand
Steel Chain Mounted
Partial Penetration Weld
"
Tie Off
or Hinge Mounted
With Pad Lock Tab
" Tenon Plate

2"
1
4"
Stainless Steel Hex
Head Screws, Typ.
(2) Park Stands

(Inside Shaft Wall)
1"
Handhole Cover
7" x 27"
1
2"
Ensure Handhole Is
Designed For Use With The Portable
Plate
Tack Welded
3
16"
Thick
Cover Clip Typ.
Tip Dia.
6"
Lowering Tools That Are Used To

+ "
Operate The Lowering Device System
Identification Tag (See Pole Notes)
2"
1
2"
Drill & Tap Hole In Handhole
Rim. Supplied With
6"
SECTION F-F
1
2"
1'-5" (Typ.)
1'-5"
x 3" Bolt
1'-7" For 70' Pole
(2) Cable Guides For Wire Tie Off
1'-7" (Typ.)
1'-7"
1'-9" For 70' Pole
1
2"
POLE
TOP PLATE DETAIL
Nut Holder With Fastener
SECTION E-E
At 180 From Handhole

(Interior of Pole)
3
4"
1'-7" (Typ.)
HANDHOLE DETAIL
1'-9" For 70' Pole

" X 3"W X 1"H Plate
Cable Guide
1'-5" (Typ.)
" Rod with
1" Inner
" Eye Bolt
Pole Wall
2"
"
1"
1'-7" For 70' Pole
Typical
Pole Wall
with 1" Inner
similar to Cable
Wall Thickness
Guide Detail
5
1 8"
6" O.D. x " Wall x 12" (Min.)
Wall Thickness
1" Hole
1
4"
" Hole
allow 1" legs,
1
4"
Bend rod to
Long Tenon
" Thick Tenon Plate
Min.
with 5" Center Hole
ROD OPTION
EYE BOLT OPTION
"
(4) " Holes

1
2"
PARK STAND DETAIL

"
(4) " x 3" Bolt With

Typical
Hex Nut, (1) Washer,
" Plate
"
"
and (1) Lock Washer
" Rod with

Pole Top Plate
1" Inner
POLE CAP PLATE
POLE TENON ASSEMBLY DETAIL
1
8"
11:
37:
08 AM
Pole (or Tenon) Wall
(POLE WITHOUT LOWERING DEVICE)
(POLE WITH LOWERING DEVICE)
11/30/2015
5
2 16"
Note:
Install all handhole and opening covers prior to shipping.
For Poles with
Lowering Device, install Pole Cap Plate when Tenon Assembly is not installed.
CABLE GUIDE DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
POLE DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL CCTV POLE
NO.
18111
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
LOWERING DEVICE INSTALLATION NOTES:
POLE NOTES:
1.
1.
Place the lowering cable that moves within the pole in an
Pole Material Specifications:
6.
interior conduit to prevent it from tangling or interfering with
Provided a Class 3 surface finish in accordance with Specification

Section 400.
any electrical wire that is in the pole. Ensure that any
a.
electrical wire within the pole is routed securely and free
Pole: Use Class VI Concrete with 6 ksi minimum strength at

transfer.
7.
Provide a 1" minimum cover.
b.
Prestressing Strands: ASTM A416 Grade 270 low relaxation.
8.
Provide handhole and coupler cover plates made of non-corrosive
c.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 Grade 60.
d.
Spiral Reinforcing: ASTM A1064 Cold-Drawn.
e.
Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 55.
following sheets. Include the following information using inset numerals
Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade A Heavy Hex.
with 1" height or as approved in the Producers' Quality Control Program:
from slack.
2.
Mount lowering arm perpendicular to the roadway or as shown
materials. Attach cover plates to poles using lead anchors or threaded
in the plans. Position CCTV pole so that the camera can be
inserts embedded in the poles in conjunction with round headed chrome
safely lowered without requiring lane closures.

3.
plated screws.
Coordinate all lowering device hardware requirements
9.
(including Tenon, Tenon mounting plates, parking stand, etc.)

with lowering device manufacturer.
Washers: ASTM F436.
Provide Identification Markings on the poles where indicated on the
Pole Manufacturer
f.
Steel plates and Pole Cap: ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 50.
g.
Galvanization:
Bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM F2329
Pole Length
10.
Install pole plumb.
11.
Tie ground wires to the interior of reinforcing steel as necessary to
All other steel: ASTM A123

2.
The pole shall be round or 12-sided.
prevent displacement during concreting operations.
3.
Cut the tip end of the prestressed strand first or simultaneously with
12.
the butt end.
This Design Standard is considered fully detailed and no shop drawings

are necessary. Submit Shop Drawings for minor modifications not
detailed in the plans.
4.
For spiral reinforcing, one turn is required for spiral splices and two
turns are required at the top and bottom of poles.
5.
13.
Storage, Handling and Erection locations shown may vary within 3".
For Reinforcing Steel, lap splice to consist of a 3'-0" lap length at each
splice. No more than two opposing rebar to be spliced at the same
Stagger lap splices as needed.
11/30/2015
11:
37:
09 AM
cross section.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
GENERAL NOTES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE CCTV POLE
NO.
18113
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Conduit Entry Hole

C
Air Terminal (See Index 18102)
Air Terminal (See Index 18102)
Coordinate Mounting Method
Coordinate Mounting Method
Pole Tenon
Removable Cap Plate
1" Lifting Hole

1" Lifting Hole
2" Couplings
2" Coupling For Pole
Without Lowering Device
2'
-0"
Camera Plane
Camera (See Index 18110

For Mounting Details)
d
ol
M
Camera (See Index 18110 For Mounting Details)
m
ea
S
Interior Conduit for

5" Min. Inside Diameter
5" Min. Inside Diameter of Pole Raceway
Pole w/ Lowering Device
of Pole Raceway
D
2" Coupling With Cap at 90 To Handhole Box To

Provide Cable Entry Point For Camera Cables
Conduit Entry Hole

Ground Lug
Handhole Box
Pole Identification Markings
1" Lifting Hole
POLE CONFIGURATION
TOP VIEW
1" Lifting Hole
12-SIDED POLE DESIGN TABLE*
Shall be 90 From the Lowering Arm
(2) 2" Couplings With Caps

at 90 To Handhole Box
Min.Wall
Pole
Burial
Total
Void
Thickness
Thickness
Tip
Butt
Strand
Strand
Length
Height
Depth
Taper**
Taper
Tip
Butt End
Diameter
Diameter
Pattern
Diameter***
(ft)
(ft)
(ft)
(in/ft)
(in/ft)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
63
50
13
0.18
0.18
12
23.34
0.6"
69
55
14
0.18
0.18
12
24.42
0.6"
75
60
15
0.18
0.18
12
25.5
0.6"
80
65
15
0.18
0.18
12
26.4
0.6"
86
70
16
0.18
0.18
12
27.48
0.6"
Shall be 90 From the Lowering Arm

and Away From Approaching Traffic
2'
-0"
2'
-0"
and Away From Approaching Traffic
Handhole With Cover

6"
6"
Handhole With Cover
6'
-3" Typ.
6'
-3" Typ.
Min.Wall
Pole
(2) 2" Couplings With Caps

at 90 To Handhole Box
ROUND POLE DESIGN TABLE
Class NS Concrete
Class NS Concrete
Burial
Burial
Depth
Depth
Pole
Pole
Burial
Length
Height
Depth
(ft)
(ft)
(ft)
63
69
75
4'-0"
11:
37:
10 AM
55
60
ELEVATION
86
65
70
Min.Wall
Min.Wall
Total
Void
Thickness
Thickness
Tip
Butt
Strand
Strand
Taper**
Taper
Tip
Butt End
Diameter
Diameter
Pattern
Diameter***
(in/ft)
(in/ft)
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)
Option 1
0.216
0.192
3.76
12.15
25.76
0.5"
Option 2
0.18
0.172
3.5
12.0
23.34
0.5"
13
Option 1
0.216
0.192
3.83
12.15
27.05
0.5"
Option 2
0.18
0.173
3.5
12.0
24.42
0.5"
14
Option 1
0.216
0.192
3.9
12.15
28.35
0.5"
Option 2
0.18
0.173
3.5
12.0
25.5
0.5"
15
4'-0"
80
ELEVATION
WITH LOWERING DEVICE
50
Design Option
Option 1
0.216
0.192
3.96
12.15
29.43
0.5"
Option 2
0.18
0.174
3.5
12.0
26.4
0.5"
Option 1
0.216
0.192
4.03
12.15
30.73
0.5"
Option 2
0.18
0.174
3.5
13.0
28.48
0.5"
15
16
11/30/2015
** Totaltaper applies to pole,strands,and reinforcing.

*** For 12-Sided Pole and Round Pole Option 2 Stress prestressed strand to 70% of Ultimate before Transfer.
For Round Pole, Option 1 Stress Prestressed strand to 60% of Ultimate before Transfer.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
POLE DESIGN TABLES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE CCTV POLE
NO.
18113
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
1.25" Pitch
3" Pitch
1.25" Pitch
3'-0"
Varies
Burial Depth
#5 Gage Spiral
Reinforcing
* Spiral wire may be wrapped in two directions given that an equivalent

area of spiral wire is provided to that shown in this standard and the
cover requirements are met.
Of Handhole
6"
" Grd. Lug
4'-3"
1'-6"
9"
1" Lifting
Total Taper
1" Lifting Hole
4" x 12" Conduit Entry Holes

At 0 and 180 from Handhole
1'-0" Plug
Hole
1"
Drain Hole
Tip End (Top)
#2 AWG Stranded Ground Conductor
4" x 30" Handhole
" Grd. Lug Grounded

to Reinf. Cage
Butt End
(Bottom)
2" Couplings With Cap

Burial Depth
Pole Height
0.30 L
0.53 L
0.17 L
Storage and
Handling
0.30 L
0.70 L
Erection
Pole Length (L)
STRAND LEGEND
POLE ELEVATION
Prestressed Strand
(4) #5 Rebar (Shown) or

(6) #4 Rebar
9
Tip or Butt Diameter
Tip or Butt Diameter

Void & Section
Void & Section
Void & Section
Void & Section

36
ss
ne
ck
i
h
e
T
l abl
al
W eT
e
S
ss
ne
ck
i
Th e
l abl
al
W eT
e
S
ss
ne
ck
i
h
e
T
l abl
al
W eT
e
S
18
18
Strands spaced
equally around pole
Strands spaced
equally around pole
Circular Void
SECTION A-A
SECTION A-A
STRAND PATTERN 1
STRAND PATTERN 2
(12 - SIDED)
(12 - SIDED)
St
r
a
n
da
n
d Re
b
a
rL
a
y
o
u
t
ess
n
k
c
hi
lT l
l
e
a
W
ab
eT
Se
1"
Mi
n
1
"
1"
Mi
n
(
T
y
p
.a
r
o
u
n
dp
o
l
e
)
Co
v
er
Circular Void
"
Co
v
er
Circular Void
#5 Gage Spiral
Strand and Rebar

spaced equally
#5 Gage Spiral
around pole
SECTION A-A
SECTION A-A
STRAND PATTERN 3
STRAND PATTERN 4
(ROUND - OPTION 1)
(ROUND - OPTION 2)
Note:
Strands and Rebar shown are continuous from Tip End to Butt End.
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/2/2015
#5 Gage Spiral
d
an
tr
1:
04:
05 PM
#5 Gage Spiral
Circular Void
Co
ve
r
S
of
r
t
te
la
F
en
C
to
"
e
1
cl
ir
C
1"
M
i
n
1
Co
"
C
ve
i
rc Ce
r
n
l
te
e
r
to
F of
l
a
t Str
a
nd
9
1"
M
i
n
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE CCTV POLE
NO.
18113
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
Tip Dia. - 2"
Tip Dia. - 2"
( ")
( ")
Tenon Wall
Bolt Circle
Bolt Circle
(8) " x 2" Slots Equally Spaced
(4) " Holes Equally Spaced
" Tenon Plate
5
8"
" Cap Plate
1
2"
from bar to side surface
2"
of handhole (Typ. ea. side)
" R (Typ.)
1
2"
Tip Dia. ( ")
I.D.
(2) Park Stands,
O.D. Plate
"
Each Side of Handhole

(Pipe Option Shown)
Tip Dia. ( ")

O.D. Plate
SECTION B-B
CAP PLATE DETAIL
4" x 30" Handhole
" Hole
2" R
3
4"
7
8"
(4) " Nut with Flat
Tenon With 3-" x 20 Hex Head
Washer
2"
Provide Cable Guide
" Galvanized Steel Plate,
" Cap Plate
1
4"
1
4"
"
1'
-0" M in.
9"
1
4"
" Plate
Provide a Tenon Cap and Fix to the

Cap Set Screws, Equally Spaced.
1
2 2"
Bend at Three Corners
3"
6" O.D. x " Wall x 12" (Min.) Long

" x 2" Min. Insert To
Tenon
Be Cast Into Pole (See
" Hole
Note 2)
(4) " x 18" Galv. Bolts with

(4) " Nut with Flat Washer
15" Embedment, equally spaced
7
8"
(See Note 3 for alternate

(2) " Holes
connector)
#5 Bar x 5'-0" Long Centered
5
8" Tenon
TENON COVER
Plate
In Wall
HANDHOLE DETAIL
Pole
(4) " x 18" Galv. Bolts with
15" Embedment, Equally Spaced
(See Note 3 for
" Eye Bolt with
alternate connector)
" x 1" SCH. 40 Pipe
1" Inner
1
2"
TOP OF POLE DETAIL WITH LOWERING DEVICE
4
" Nut
" Nut
EYE BOLT OPTION
PIPE OPTION
Notes:
1.
Install all handhole and opening covers prior to shipping.
2.
Install " x 5" long stud with hex nut in insert before shipment.
3.
As an alternate, embed (4) " x 18" stainless steel threaded
SECTION D-D - PARK STAND DETAIL
rods with a threaded nut. At top of rod, thread a coupling nut to

attach plate w/ (4) " x 1" stainless steel bolts.
4.
Handhole frame may be Cast Aluminum 356.2.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
11:
37:
13 AM
1
2"
Pole
11/30/2015
3"
3"
TOP OF POLE DETAIL

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE CCTV POLE
NO.
18113
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
Varies
NOTES:

1. Install DMS Foundation at location shown in Plans.

2. Extend Catwalk from DMS to outer edge of paved
Per NFPA 780-4.16.3
shoulder but not less than four feet in length.
Walk-In
Dynamic
3. If included, Install guardrail at location show in
Message Sign
Plans and in accordance with Design Standards
(DMS)
Index 400.
Catwalk
Varies
Varies
Drilled Shaft
Guardrail
See Note 3
See Note 2
Catwalk
See Note 1
Shoulder (Paved)
DMS Structure
Travel Lane
Travel Lane
Note: Actual number
Travel Lane
Travel Lane
and direction of travel

lanes varies.
Travel Lane
Ground
Line
Shoulder
Travel Lane
TYPICAL ELEVATION VIEW

TYPICAL PLAN VIEW

DMS CANTILEVER SIGN STRUCTURE
" ETP Alloy 110 Copper Air
Terminal (Class II) Surface

Base Of 8 Square-Inch
Per NFPA 780-4.16.3
Varies
Drilled Shaft
Varies
Guardrail
Catwalk
Shoulder (Paved)
DMS Structure
Catwalk
Travel Lane
Note: Actual number
Varies
See Note 3
Varies
and direction of travel
See Note 3
See Note 2
lanes varies.
Travel Lane
See Note 1
See Note 1
Travel Lane
Travel Lane
Drilled Shaft
Travel Lane
Travel Lane
Guardrail
Ground
11:
37:
14 AM
Line
TYPICAL ELEVATION VIEW

SPAN SIGN STRUCTURE
11/30/2015
TYPICAL PLAN VIEW

DMS SPAN SIGN STRUCTURE
Shoulder
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
GENERAL LAYOUT
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
DYNAMIC MESSAGE SIGN WALK-IN
NO.
18300
SHEET
NO.
1of 9

Per NFPA 780-4.16.3
2-2" Threaded Couplings
2 Watertight Flexible Conduits
(2" Power And 2" Communications)
2 Watertight Flexible Conduits
Surface Base Of 8
(2" Power And 2" Communications)
Square-Inch
Per NFPA 780-4.16.3
Per NFPA 780-4.16.3
2-2" Threaded
Guardrail
(if shown in Plans)
Couplings
2-2" Threaded
2-2" Rigid Metal Conduits
Couplings
With Std Sweeps

With Std Sweeps
Guardrail
Handhole
(if shown in Plans)
Handhole
One 2" PVC Conduit
One 2" PVC Conduit
For Electrical Service
For Electrical Service
One 2" PVC Conduit
One 2" PVC Conduit
For Fiber Optic
For Fiber Optic
One Communications,
One Communications,
2" PVC Conduit Spare
2" PVC Conduit Spare
(As Shown On Plans)
(As Shown On Plans)
Conduit Exit Oriented
See Sheet 3 for Conduit
In Necessary Direction
Details and Sheet 4 Ground

Rod Details
SPAN DMS
See Sheet 3 for Conduit
EVER DMS
L
CANTI
Details and Sheet 4 Ground

Rod Details
NOTES:
1. Conductors for grounding shall be connected to steel framework
that has been cleaned to base metal by use of bonding plates
having contact area of not less than 8 square inches or by welding
or brazing. Drilling and tapping the steel structure to accept a
threaded connector is also an acceptable method.
2. If steel framework is to be drilled and tapped to accept threaded
connector, the threaded connector shall be galvanized and have at
least 5 threads fully engaged and secured with a jam nut to the
steel framework.
3. Bends in the conduit shall not be less than the minimum bending
radius for the cable contained in the conduit.
4. Catwalk and handrail design and installation shall comply with AISC,
11:
37:
15 AM
AASHTO, and OSHA requirements as applicable.

5. All data, fiber optic and power cables for the DMS shall be completely
encased within the sign structure or in conduit.
11/30/2015
6. Permanently stamp/mark foundation to conduit locations.

7. Transition conduit in foundation to underground conduit with appropriate
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
reducer outside the limits of the foundation.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
18300
SHEET
NO.
2 of 9
Two Watertight 2" Flexible Conduits
Air Ternimal
For Electrical Service And

Top Truss Chord
Communications
3
4"

Door Hinge
For Power And Communications

11 Gauge
2' Max
Access Door
Handhole Cover
DMS
NOTES:
Removable Top Plate
1.
Two J-Hooks To Support
10
3
4"
Air Terminal
7 8"
DMS Cabinet may be pole or ground mounted

Door Latch / Handle
depending on project requirements.
2
R=
Separately Power And

Communications Cable
2.
5
16"
See sheet 4 for additional conduits for

grounding. The number and placement of
Hole, Typ.
Conduit Entrance Location
Handrail
conduits are approximate.
Per DMS Manufacturer
Field adjust pole-mounted DMS cabinet height
Back Truss Chord
HANDHOLE COVER
3.
Post
to achieve best access for maintenance personnel

given site conditions as directed by the Engineer.
Avoid conflicts with stiffeners, handhole and
maintenance of anchor bolts.
Grating
1
4"
Dia. Stainless Steel
5"
Hex Head Screws, Typ.
Tack Welded
Cover Clip, Typ.
4" x
3
8"
10"
A
Catwalk
Handhole
Frame Made
21
R
=
2"
Continuous With A
Bottom Truss Chord
Pole
Mounted
Full Penetration
Cabinet
2-2" Threaded
Weld
Couplings For
2-2" Rigid Metal
Rigid Metal Conduit
Conduits With
Ground
Mounted
HANDHOLE FRAME
Std Sweeps
Cabinet
Handhole
4"
Top Of Conduits
Fiber Optic Splice Box

(See Index 17700)
Finished Grade (Varies)
Spare
Spare
Conduit
Conduit
(2" PVC)
(2" PVC)
3
8"
1'
-0"
Fiber Optic Pull Box Or
Partial Penetration Weld

See Note 3
Varies 2'
-6" to 4'
-0"
1"
Wire Screen - See Spec. 649-6
1
4"
Handhole Frame
Stainless Steel
Hex Head Screws, Typ.
Tack Welded
Cover Clip Typ.
Finished Grade (Varies)
11 Gauge Handhole Cover

Power Conduit
SECTION A-A
(2" PVC) To Power

Service Assembly
Transition Conduit Outside Foundation
(Thru Handhole)
Fiber Optic
11:
37:
16 AM
Communications
Conduit (2" PVC)
(As Shown On Plans)
Spare Conduit (2" PVC)
Fiber Optic Communications Conduit

(2" PVC) (As Shown On Plans)
2" PVC Grounding Conduits
Power Conduit (2" PVC)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
To Power Service Assembly

Grounding Conduit (2" PVC)
TYPICAL DMS CONDUIT DETAIL

CANTILEVER/SPAN SIGN STRUCTURE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
18300
SHEET
NO.
3 of 9
20' Radius Each

"Sphere Of Influence"
2' Min.

Per NFPA 780-4.16.3
4'
40'
Min.
(Typical)
Ground Rod D
Ground Rod A
Sign Structure
Foundation
Ground Rod C
Dynamic Message
Shoulder
Travel Lane
Travel Lane
Sign (DMS)
Per
Clear Zone
Requirements
Ground Rod B
#2 AWG Tin-Plated
Bare Solid Copper
Ground Wire. Bond
To Air Terminal And
Ground Rod With
Exothermic Weld
Catwalk
GROUND ROD PLACEMENT DETAIL

(TYPICAL)
#2 AWG Tin-Plated
Bare Solid Copper
Wire Continuous To
Pole
Mounted
Air Terminal
#2 AWG Tin-Plated
Cabinet
Bare Copper Wire

To Ground Rods B,
C AND D As Required
Ground
Mounted
Cabinet
Ground Wire From DMS

Cabinet To Ground Rod
#2 AWG Tin-Plated
Bare Solid Copper
Handhole
Wire to Pole
Mounted or Ground
Mounted Cabinet
INSET 'A'

Solid Copper Ground Wire
To Air Terminal
Ground Wire to DMS Cabinet
Ground Rod A
Primary Ground
Finished Grade
Ground Rod B
Power Conduit
(2" PVC) To Power
Sercive Assembly
18" M in.
As Required
Finished Grade
Rod Assembly
2" MIN.
(See Inset A)
8" MAX.
Pull Box
Exothermic Weld
Fiber Optic Communication Conduit

(2" PVC) (As Shown on Plans)
11:
37:
17 AM
Fiber Optic
Communications
Conduit (2" PVC)
(As Shown On Plans)
5
8"
12"
Min.
Power Conduit (2" PVC) To

36"
Power Service Assembly
Max.

11/30/2015
40' Min.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
TYPICAL GROUND ROD DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
18300
SHEET
NO.
4 of 9
Vertical Hanger Spacing 5'-0" (Max.)

2" Threaded Couplings (2)
Quantity And Spacing Of The Members Will Be Dictated By Locations Of

Truss Connection Plates, Splices And 5'-0" (Max.) Spacing
HANGER LOCATION DETAIL

(Cantilever Sign Structure Shown, Span Sign Structure Similar)
NOTES
1.
Design Specifications: FDOT Structures Manual (current edition) and AASHTO Standard
Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals.
2.
DMS and Hanger Design Wind Speed: 150 miles per hour. Maximum DMS weight for design:
4500 lb.
3.
Shop drawings including the DMS connection are required and fabrication shall not begin until
these shop drawings are approved.
4.
Locate the sign horizontal on the structure as shown in the plans. Vertically center the sign
enclosure with the centerline of the truss.
5.
Before erection, after both the delivery of the DMS and the steel truss, the contractor shall
carefully measure the exact locations for field drilling the " bolt holes in the vertical
hangers and horizontal mounting member attached to the sign enclosure. Field locate holes to
allow vertical hanger placement as shown on the plans with no conflicts with gusset or splice
plates.
6. All steel items shall be galvanized as follows:

All nuts, bolts and washersASTM F2329
All other steel itemsASTM A123
7.
All bolt holes shall be equal to the bolt diameter plus ", prior to galvanizing.
8. All bolts shall have single self-locking nuts, or locking nut system, installed in
11:
37:
17 AM
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

9. Cost of the installation of the DMS on truss including the vertical hanger,
associated members, and hardware shall be incidental to the cost of the sign
structure.
10. Threaded couplings shall be located on sign side of column above the sign
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
truss.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
18300
SHEET
NO.
5 of 9
Aluminum Zee
6061-T6 Structural
Aluminum Zee 4x3.13x3.58
Horizontal Member
W6x9
Attached To The Internal

Framework And Included
With The DMS Sign
ASTM A709, Gr.36 Steel W6x9
Hanger @ 5' (Max.) Spacing
2" c/c
DMS Sign Enclosure
6"
U-Bolts
Back Face Of
DMS Sign Enclosure
2-" U-Bolts
Truss Chord
B
2-" ASTM A325 U-Bolts
Galv. With Matching Lock Nuts
Truss Chord
2"
Truss Chord
2"
Holes For
" Bolts
Dia. + "
See Truss Data Sheet
Z ee Beam s Equally Spaced
SECTION A-A
Truss Chord
C
Holes For
Holes For
Holes For
" Bolts
" U-Bolts
" U-Bolts
11:
37:
18 AM
6"
SECTION B-B
SECTION C-C
Field Drill Holes And Provide

2-" ASTM A325 Bolts
Galvanized With Matching
Lock Nuts
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
END VIEW
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
18300
SHEET
NO.
6 of 9
DMS Enclosure
Lighting
AC
Service
SPD
Power
Entry
Distribution,
Breakers, and
SPD
UPS
Equipment Cabinet
SPD
GFI
Field Tech Computer
Electrical
Convenience
(Temporary Service
Breaker
Outlets
Connection)
Convenience
Equipment
Outlets
UPS
Power
With SPD
See Note 6
See Note 4
SPD
Sign
SPD
Controller
OR
OR
SPD
Managed Field
Ethernet Switch
LAN / WAN
See Note 1
SPD
Voltage, Opto,
Temp., Air Flow,
Sign Controller
Humidity And
Interface
Filter Sensors
Climate &
Display
Temperature
Modules
Control
See Note 3
Field Tech Computer

(Temporary Service
Connection)
Dial-up Telephone
and Modem (optional)
LEGEND
NOTES:
11:
37:
19 AM
Data
1.
Provide single ethernet connection from the managed field ethernet switch
to either the sign controller interface in cabinet or sign controller in sign
11/30/2015
enclosure.
2.
Locate cabinet as shown in plans.
3.
Serial data link is for communications directly to the DMS controller.
4.
Cabinet must include at least one breaker to control all cabinet power.
5.
AC service entrance may be located in cabinet or sign housing.
6.
UPS equipment location may vary. Diagram indicates functional
Ethernet
SIGN AND CABINET WIRING DIAGRAM
Power
SPD
Surge Protection Device
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
requirements that uninterrupted power must be available in cabinet and sign housing.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
18300
SHEET
NO.
7 of 9
Lifting Eyes
Lifting Eye
Reserved For Ventilation
3.
5"
Sunshields
(All Sides But Pole Side)
(As Required)
19" EIA Rack With Tapped

10-32 Threaded Holes
Light/Shelf
Switch
Managed Field Ethernet
Switch
Switch
FO Patch Panel
Document Drawer/Shelf
5.
5"
Generator Power
Connection
FO Patch Panel
1.
75"
FO Patch Panel
3.
5"
Sign Controller
46" (
Typ.
)
Sign Controller
3.
5"
Sign Controller
Light/Shelf
3.
5"
1.
75"
Light/Shelf
Generator Power
Connection
GFI Protected
Convenience Outlet
SPDs
Data
Data
12"
Main Circuit Breaker
Ethernet
For Portable Tools
Secondary
Circuit Breakers
SPD Protected
Outlets For
Service Entrance, Breakers,

Primary AC Filter, Terminal
Communications
19.75" (Typ.)
Hardware
Blocks, Ground Bussbar

Terminal Strips
24" (Typ.)
LEFT SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
POLE MOUNTED CABINET
22" (Typ.)
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
NOTES:
1. Cabinet layout is for pole or ground mounted installations.
2. All dimensions and equipment locations are approximate.
3. Conduit entrances are at bottom of cabinet.
4. Minimum number of duplex outlets is three, (2) SPD
protected and (1) GFI protected.
11:
37:
20 AM
5. Either an access controller or local access panel shall be

provided to provide full access to DMS for control, programming and
troubleshooting.
6. Load center shall be sized for connected equipment and convenience
outlets with at least one main disconnect and three circuit breakers.
8. Power Distribution Assembly component layout, orientation
CABINET LAYOUT 1
and location may vary.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
11/30/2015
7. Batteries and UPS may be located in sign housing or cabinet.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
18300
SHEET
NO.
8 of 9
Lifting Eye
2.
6"
2.
6"
Lifting Eyes
Light/Shelf
Light/Shelf
Reserved for Ventilation
Light/Shelf
Sign Controller
Managed Field
Sign Controller
Ethernet Switch
Managed Field
Ethernet Switch
FO Patch Panel
Document
Document
Drawer/Shelf
Drawer/Shelf
Power Distribution
52.
85" (
Typ.
)
Power Distribution
UPS
Batteries (varies)
See Note 8 on
See Note 8 on
SPD Protected
Sheet 8.
Sheet 8.
Outlets For
Batteries (varies)
Ethernet
Batteries (varies)
7" +/-
UPS
10" +/-
62" (
Typ.
)
FO Patch Panel
See Note 8 on
Sheet 8.
Communications
Convenience Outlet
For Portable Tools
120 VAC SPD
Data
Data
GFI Protected
Bus Bars
Power
SPD
SPDs
5.5"
1.
67"
Term inal Strips
Hardware
Load Center
19.75"
32.5" (Typ.)
24" (Typ.)
30" (Typ.)
19" EIA Rack With Tapped

10-32 Threaded Holes
FRONT VIEW
GROUND MOUNTED CABINET
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
11/30/2015
11:
37:
22 AM
LEFT SIDE VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
CABINET LAYOUT 2
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
18300
SHEET
NO.
9 of 9
BEAM NOTES
K2
K1
Front Face of
Dim. L
2. Place one (1) Bar 5K or 5Z at each location as detailed alternating the direction of the ends for each
Bearing
J
Bearing
Front Face of
J
5"
Pier or Bent
bar (see "ELEVATION AT END OF BEAM", Index Nos. 20036, 20045, 20054, 20063, 20072, 20078, 20084 and 20096).
Backwall or
3. Strands N shall be ASTM A416, Grade 270, seven-wire strands " or larger, stressed to 10,000 lbs. each.
Pier or Bent
4. For beams with ends not to be encased in permanent concrete diaphragms, after detensioning cut wedge to recess
9
0
Backwall or
Prestressing Strands at the end of the beam without damaging the surrounding concrete. See STRAND CUTTING
=90
=90
AND PROTECTING DETAIL on Sheet 2.

5. For beams with ends not to be encased in permanent concrete diaphragms, protect end of recessed strands in
Beam
5"
Edge of Flange
9
0
6. Unless otherwise noted, the minimum concrete cover for reinforcing steel shall be 2".
4M, and 5Z as shown on the Standard Details for each beam size. Welded deformed wire reinforcement
Clip Top Flange
END 1
7. At the Contractor's option, welded deformed wire reinforcement may be used in lieu of Bars 3D, 5K,
shall meet requirements of Specification Section 931.
to match skew
END 2
8. Safety Line Anchorage Devices or sleeves are required and permitted in the top flange only to accommodate fall
at Backwall only
protection systems used during construction. See shop drawings for details and spacing of any required embedments.
Dim. L
(Typ.)
9. For beams with skewed end conditions, the end reinforcement, defined as Bars 3C1, 3C2, 3D1, 3D2, 5K,
4M1, 4M2, 5Y and 5Z placed within the limits of the spacing for Bars 3C in "ELEVATION AT END OF BEAM",
CASE 1
CONDITION 1
(Standard Orientation for New Construction)
shall be placed parallel to the skewed end of the beam. Bars 3D3, 5K and 4M3 located beyond the limits
of Bars 3C shall be placed perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the beam. Fan Bars as needed to
(Dim P = 0.0)
avoid overlapping bars at the transition to Bars 3D3 and 4M3, and field cut to maintain minimum cover.
Provide additional Bars 4M1, 4M2, 3D1 and 3D2 as required; additional bars are not included in the
Bearing
Chamfer Acute Corners of Top & Bottom
K
Number Required on the "BILL OF REINFORCING STEEL". For placement locations, see "SKEWED BEAM
m.L
Di
END DETAILS". Adjust the dimensions of Bars 3C1, 3C2, 3D1, 3D2, 4M1 and 4M2 as shown on the "BENDING
m.P
Di
DIAGRAM" for skewed end conditions.
Flange for < 75 (Typ.)
10. Placement of Bars 3C1, 3D1 and 4M1 correspond to END 1, and Bars 3C2, 3D2 and 4M2 correspond to
Edge of Flange
Front Face of
END 2. END 1 and END 2 are shown on the beam "ELEVATION".
6"
Backwall or
11. For Beams with vertically beveled end conditions, place first row of Bars 3C1, 3C2, 3D1, 3D2, 5K, 5Y and
Pier or Bent
5Z parallel to the end of the beam. Progressively rotate remaining bars within the limits of Bars 5Z until
< 90
vertical by adjusting the spacing at the top of beam up to a maximum of 1". For welded deformed wire
Beam
reinforcement, cut top cross wire and rotate bars as required or reduce end cover at top of the beam
< 90
to minimum 1".
Front Face of
12. For beams with skewed end conditions, welded deformed wire reinforcement shall not be used for end
Backwall or
Pier or Bent
reinforcement (Bars 3D1, 3D2, 4M1 and 4M2) .
13. Bars 5K and 5Z shall be placed and tied to the fully bonded strands in the bottom or center row (see
"STRAND PATTERN" on the Table of Beam Variables in Structures Plans). At the Contractor's option the
Bearing
END 1
m.P
Di
length of the bottom legs of Bars 5K and 5Z may be extended to facilitate tying to the exterior strands.
m.L
Di
END 2
For welded deformed wire reinforcement, supplemental transverse #4 bars are permitted to support
Pieces K & S under the cross wires on the bottom row of strands.
14. At the Contractor's option, Bars 3D1, 3D2 and 3D3 may be fabricated as a single bar with a 1'-0"
CASE 2
CONDITION 2
(Special Orientation for Widenings)
minimum lap splice of the top legs, or the length of the bottom legs may be extended to facilitate
tying to the exterior strands.

15. For referenced Dimensions, Angles and Case Numbers, see the Table of Beam Variables in Structures Plans.
Beam
Di
m.L
Pier or Bent
Bearing
Bearing
Backwall or
Front Face of
Di
m.P
< 90
6"
< 90
Front Face of
Edge of Flange
Pier or Bent
Di
m.P
END 1
Di
m.L
END 2
CASE 3

1:
17:
08 PM
Backwall or
SCHEMATIC PLAN VIEWS AT BEAM ENDS
CONDITION 3
SCHEMATIC END ELEVATIONS OF BEAMS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
(Showing Vertical Bevel of Beam End)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TYPICAL FLORIDA-I BEAM
DESIGN STANDARDS
DETAILS AND NOTES
NO.
20010
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Bars 5K spaced along Beam
Bars 5K spaced perpendicular

1
2".
to end of beam @ 3
@ 3". Bars 4M1 or 4M2 placed
Skewed Bars 5Z, 4M1 or
with alternate Bars 5K *

Rotate and flare Bars 4M1 or 4M2 and
4M2 placed with Bars 5K *
additional Bar 4M1 or 4M2 equally as

Insert
required to maintain a 1'-0" Max. spacing
Beam
21
2"
along end of bars. Clip to maintain cover.
6" Chamfer
Bars 4M3
Face of Beam Web
PLAN SECTION THRU BEAM WEB AT

Bars 5K (Typ.)
INSERT FOR DIAPHRAGM REINFORCING

(When Intermediate Diaphragms are Required by Design)
Bars 5Z (shown
Beam
dotted, Typ.)
INSERT NOTES
1. Provide 1" , zinc-electroplated, ferrule wing nut or coil inserts, UNC
threads, 1/0 minimum gage wire, not more than 4" in depth with a minimum
ultimate tensile strength of 11,400 lbs. in 4,000 psi concrete.
2. If inserts are needed on both sides (faces) of beam webs, an assembly as
long as the thickness of the beam web, consisting of two (2) ferrule or coil
inserts attached by two (2) or more struts may be utilized. The connecting
* For number of Bars, spacing and
struts shall have a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 11,400 lbs.
placement details see Index No. 20036
3.
thru 20096. See Sheet 1 for Conventional
1 ~ Additional Bar 4M1 or 4M2
Bars 4M1 or 4M2
Reinforcement, Sheet 2 for Welded Wire
Inserts for diaphragm reinforcing are required at each end of each

intermediate diaphragm shown on the Beam Framing Plan and may be
(shown dashed)
Reinforcement.
required at the end of the beams when end diaphragms are shown. See
Superstructure and Beam Framing Plans for longitudinal location of
Welded Wire Reinforcement not permitted for Bars 4M1
Begin Welded Wire Reinforcement Option
or 4M2 in this area, for skewed beam ends
inserts for each face of beam.
when applicable, Pieces M-3 & S-1, see

Sheet 2 of Index No. 20036 thru 20096
INSERT DETAIL
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW (SHOWING TOP FLANGE)

(End 1 Shown, End 2 Similar)
(Bars 5A, 5Y & Strands N not shown for clarity)
Bars 5K spaced along Beam @

1
2".
to end of beam @ 3
3". Bars 3D1 or 3D2, 3C1 or 3C2
Skewed
placed with alternate Bars 5K *
Bars 5Z, 3D1 or 3D2, 3C1 or
1 ~ Additional Bar 3D1 or 3D2 for Skews 10 or
3C2 placed with Bars 5K *
2 ~ Additional Bars 3D1 or 3D2 for Skews > 10

(shown dashed) rotate and space equally between
last Bar 3D1 or 3D2 and first Bar 3D3 as shown
2"
21
Bars 3C1 or 3C2
Epoxy Coating
(" minimum thickness)
(See Beam Note 5,
6" Chamfer
End of
Bars 5K (Typ.)
Sheet 1)
End of
Beam
Beam
FIB
Bars 5Z (shown
" Min.
Beam
dotted, Typ.)
FIB
30
Strand Recess
(formed by cutting
or grinding)
" Min.
Recessed
Prestressing
Bars 3D1 or 3D2 (Pairs)
Bars 3D3 (Pairs)

Begin Welded Wire Reinforcement
Welded Wire Reinforcement not permitted for Bars

3C1, 3C2, 3D1 or 3D2 in this area, for skewed beam ends
Option when applicable, Pieces D-3

& S-1, see Sheet 2 of Index No.
20036 thru 20096
Strand
Strand
(size varies)
TYPICAL SECTION
TYPICAL SECTION
SHOWING CUT STRAND RECESS LIMITS
AFTER PROTECTING
1:
17:
09 PM
PARTIAL SECTION THRU WEB (SHOWING BOTTOM FLANGE)

(Bars 5Y, Strands, and Embedded Bearing Plate "A" not shown for clarity)
12/17/2015
SKEWED BEAM END DETAILS FOR WIDENING EXISTING BRIDGES
STRAND CUTTING AND PROTECTING DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
(Florida-I 36 Beam shown, others similar)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TYPICAL FLORIDA-I BEAM
DESIGN STANDARDS
DETAILS AND NOTES
NO.
20010
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
* These dimensions are
measured perpendicular
to the end of beam
Spacing Bars 5K
212"*
1
2"*
4 sp. @ 3
BAR BENDING DETAILS
S1 sp.@ V1
12 sp. @ 3"
4'-0"

Spacing Bars 4M1
Spacing Strands N
1
4 2"
3"
1'-6"
1
4 2"
1'-6"
1
2"*
2 sp. @ 7"*
Bars 4M3
6 sp. @ 6"
or 4M2
sp. @ 1'-0"
Spacing Bars 5Z
1
8"*
Strands N
Bars 4M
Strands N
(Typ.)
4M2 (Typ.)
Bars 4M3
Bars 5Y
1
2"
Strand N
Bars 5Y
Bar 5A
4"
7"
1'-5"
Intermediate
1'
-1"
312"
1
4"
1'-3" R
Cover
1
2"
Bar 3C
1'
-10
Bars 3D (Pairs)
11 (End 1)
Varies
C2
9, 10 & 11
11 (End 2)
Varies
D1
9, 10, 11 & 14
22 (End 1)
Varies
D2
9, 10, 11 & 14
22 (End 2)
Varies
D3
9 & 14
See Table
4'-3"
2, 9, 11 & 13
See Table
4'-2"
M1
9 & 10
9 (End 1)
Varies
Varies
4M1 or 4M2 for
M2
9 & 10
9 (End 2)
Skewed Ends
M3
See Table
3'-8"
Dim. L
Bars 3C
Bars 3D (Pairs
Additional Bar(s)
Typ.) Rotate as
3D1 or 3D2 for
required to clear
Skewed Ends
3
8"
3 & 4
Strand
9 & 11
12
2'-6"
2, 9, 11 & 13
10
3'-8"
BENDING DIAGRAMS
(See Note 1)
Anchor Studs
(Typ.)
5A
5Y
2 & 9)
Bars 5Z (Typ.)
6"
5 ~ Bars 3C1
bottom of bottom
3'-2"
flange only)
6 ~ Bars 3C1 or
1'-6" Max.
Bars 3D3
or 3C2 & 3D1
3C2 & 3D1 or
(Pairs) @ 1'-6"
or 3D2 (Pairs)
3D2 (Pairs) @ 6"
Max. sp.
sp. with Bars 5K
sp. (See Note 9)
BARS 5A, 4M1, 4M2, BARS 3C1 & 3C2

4M3 & 5Y
6"
5K
Embedded Bearing Plate A
3'-8"
634"
(See Insert Notes)
Chamfer (Typ.
D=3'-8"/Sin
4M3
112" Chamfer
Insert Spacing
C/2
2'-6"
4M1 & 4M2
5Z
7"
314" (Nominal)
C=(1712"/Sin )
16'-0"
9"
1" Cover
(See Notes
3
4"
16'-0"
Additional Bar
(Typ.)
2" Cover
5
9, 10 & 11
(See Note 5)
Inserts
(shown dotted)
LENGTH
(NOTE 1)
Epoxy Coating
Diaphragm
1
2"
1'-3
A
C1
Bars 5K & 5Z)
Strand N
1
7 2"
3'
-0"
7
16"
Cover
3
4"
1
2"
Bars 5K
Bars 5K
(Bundled with
1
3 2"
112"
Bars 5Z
Bars 4M1 or
NUMBER
REQUIRED
SIZE
NUMBERS
4 Bars 5A &
Device (See Note 8)
MARK
1
2"*
4 sp. @ 3
2" Cover
Safety Line Anchorage
NOTE
(See Note 9)*
412"
)
B=(15"/Sin )
1'-0" Min.
3
4"
ELEVATION AT END OF BEAM

(Flanges Not Shown For Clarity)
2'
-8"
A+B
6"
Lap
1
4"
END VIEW
3'
-212"
=90 for Bars 3D3
A=(812"/Sin
1'-1112"
Min.
BARS 5K & 5Z
3D1 & 3D2

3D3
BARS 3D1, 3D2 & 3D3
NOTES:
A. Work this Index with Index No. 20010 - Typical
Florida-I Beam Details and Notes and the
Florida-I Beam - Table of Beam Variables
in Structures Plans.
B. For referenced notes, see Index No. 20010.
C. For Dimensions A, B, C, D, L, R & V1 and
End of
Bars 5Y (shown
number of spaces S1 thru S4, see Florida-I
as (
Beam - Table of Beam Variables in Structures
Typ.)
Beam
Plans.
Dim. L = Beam Casting Length
(Overall Length of Beam along Beam including length increase as required for Beam placed
Cover
7"
1
4"
Bar 5Z
on grade and Dim. R to compensate for elastic and time dependent shortening effects)
1
2 2"*
4 sp. @
12 sp. @ 3"
1
2"*
S1 sp. @ V1
S2 sp. @ 9"
S3 sp. @ 1'-0"
S4 sp. @ 1'-6"
(6" Max.)
1:
19:
10 PM
1'-6" Max.
Spacing Bars 5K (Symmetrical

about @ top of Beam)
Bar 5K
Bar 5Z
Beam
END 1
END 2
12/17/2015
SECTION A-A FOR CONVENTIONAL REINFORCING

ELEVATION
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
(Showing Bars 5K, 5Y & 5Z Only)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FLORIDA-I 36 BEAM - STANDARD DETAILS
NO.
20036
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
9 ~ D16's @ 6" sp. = 4'-0"
D16's @ 1'-0" sp.
1"
Varies
6"
Optional W6.4
W6.4
Varies 9" Max.
1'-0" Max.
W6.4
Optional W6.4
End of
Bars 5Y (12 Required)
Wires D31 (shown
(shown as (
as (
Typ.)
Typ.)
Beam
W6.4
3'
-8"
7"
D16
Optional W6.4
D16
6"
1" extension
W6.4
(Typ.)
1
4"
Cover
Pieces K-1
Pieces K-2
1"
(Offset)
PLAN VIEW
PIECE M-1
Piece S-1, S-2,
6 ~ D25's (FF)
5 ~ D31's @
1
2"
sp. =
6"
3"
3"
1'-2"
Pieces S (Single Mat) Tied
S-3 or S-4
@ 6" = 2'-6"
FOR WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT
(2 Required)
of adjacent
to Piece K-2
1
2"
2
End of Beam
PIECE M-3
Match spacing
(2 Required)
to Strands at Beam)
S1 ~ D25's @ V1 sp. (Piece S-1 shown)
6 ~ D25's (BF)
S2 ~ D25's @ 9" sp. (Piece S-2)
@ 6" = 2'-6"
S3 ~ D25's @ 1'-0" sp. (Piece S-3)
6"
Pieces M-3
S4 ~ D25's @ 1'-6" sp. (Piece S-4)
6"
3" Offset
(Typ.)
2" Cover
Varies 9" Max.
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
3
4"
(Typ.)
3
4"
Piece M-1 ties
3
4"
5"
END VIEW
SECTION A-A
PIECES M
PLAN VIEW
258" Cover
334"
PARTIAL SECTION AT CENTER BEAM
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
Pieces K (Pairs)
3'
-2
3
4"
3
4"
Pieces M-1
Cross W ires (
W 12.
4 or W 10)
534"
W10 (Pieces K-2 & S)
D31 (Piece K-1

2" Cover
(Typ.)
214" Cover
(2" Min.)
Symmetrical)
2"
1"
5"
2" Cover
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
Beam (WWR
Cover
Pieces D
(Pairs)
4" Piece K & S
D25 (Pieces K-2 & S)
1" extension (Typ.)
PIECE K-1
PIECES K & S
(Aligned EF)
END VIEW
Piece D-1 ties
(4 Required ~
to Piece K-1
2 Pairs)
PIECE K-2
PIECE S-1, S-2, S-3 or S-4
PARTIAL BEAM END VIEW
(FF Shown Solid,
(2 Required Each Piece)
(Conventional Reinforcing Bars A, C, Y

and Strands not Shown for Clarity)
BF Shown Dashed)
(4 Required)
NOTES:
a. See Sheet 1 for placement details & Table of Beam
1
2"
5 ~ D11's @
1'-3"
1
2"
1 4"
6"
W4.4
Varies 1'-6" Max.
S4 & V1.
b. Place Conventional Reinforcement Bars 5A & 3C as
W4.4
3
4"
W4.4
in Section A-A for Welded Wire Reinforcement. Bars 5Z

will not be used with the WWR Option.
c. Pieces may be fabricated in multiple length sections.

d. For beams with skewed end conditions, Pieces D-1, D-2 &
M-1 shall not be used; Conventional Reinforcement Bars D1,
D11 (Typ. Pieces

1" extension (Typ.)
1
2"
1'-11
LEGEND:
D-1, D-2 & D-3)
PIECES D
PIECE D-1
PIECE D-2
PIECE D-3
END VIEW
(4 Required ~ 2 Pairs)
REVISIO N
07/01/10
Varies 9" Max.
W4.4
1
4"
LAST
REVISION
Variables in Structures Plans for variables S1, S2, S3,
shown on Sheet 1. Place additional Bars 5Y as shown
12/17/2015
1:
19:
11 PM
D11's @ 1'-6" spaces
sp. =
1'-2"
D11
1
2"
4"
6 ~ D11's @ 6" sp. = 2'-6"
D2, C1, C2, M1 & M2 shall be used. See Index No. 20010
EF = Each Face
Skew Details and Note 9 for placement details. Shift
FF = Front Face
Pieces K & Bars 5Y to accommodate skewed end
BF = Back Face
conditions and align with Bars C and D.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20036
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
to the end of beam
Spacing Bars 5K
212"*
1
2"*
4 sp. @ 3
BAR BENDING DETAILS
S1 sp.@ V1
16 sp. @ 3"
4'-0"

Spacing Bars 4M1
Spacing Strands N
1
4 2"
3"
1'-6"
1
4 2"
1'-6"
1
2"*
2 sp. @ 7"*
8 sp. @ 6"
Bars 4M3 sp.
or 4M2
@ 1'-0"
Spacing Bars 5Z
1
8"*
Strands N
Bars 4M
8
13 (End 1)
Varies
C2
9, 10 & 11
13 (End 2)
Varies
D1
9, 10, 11 & 14
26 (End 1)
Varies
D2
9, 10, 11 & 14
26 (End 2)
Varies
D3
9 & 14
See Table
4'-3"
2, 9, 11 & 13
See Table
4'-11"
M1
9 & 10
11 (End 1)
Varies
4M1 or 4M2 for
M2
9 & 10
11 (End 2)
Varies
Skewed Ends
M3
See Table
3'-8"
Dim. L
C1
Bars 4M3
Epoxy Coating
11"
Strand N
(Bundled with
Bar 5A
10"
1
4"
2
1
2"
Additional Bar
Bars 5K & 5Z)
Strand N
1'
-10"
Bars 5Y
1'-5"
Cover
1
2"
1'-3
7"
Strand
19'-0"
9 & 11
12
3'-3"
2, 9, 11 & 13
10
4'-5"
Bars 3C
Bars 5Y
3
8"
3 & 4
BENDING DIAGRAMS
(See Note 1)
(Typ.)
Intermediate Diaphragm
Inserts (shown dotted)
Bar 3C
Bars 3D (Pairs)
2" Cover
Bars 3D (Pairs
Additional Bar(s)
Typ.) Rotate as
3D1 or 3D2 for
required to clear
Skewed Ends
Anchor Studs
(Typ.)
5A
19'-0"
5Y
3'-3"
1
2"/Sin
C=(17
4M1 & 4M2
D=3'-8"/Sin
4M3
3'-8"
C/2
7"
BARS 5A, 4M1, 4M2,
(See Notes
Bars 5Z (Typ.)
flange only)
or 3C2 & 3D1
& 3D1 or 3D2 (Pairs)
or 3D2 (Pairs)
(Pairs) @
1'-6" Max. sp.
sp. with Bars 5K

(See Note 9)*
END VIEW
5Z
Bars 3D3
=90 for Bars 3D3

6"
Min.
A=(812"/Sin
1
2"

3'-2"
1'-6" Max.
BARS 5K & 5Z
)
B=(15"/Sin )
Chamfer (Typ.
6"
8 ~ Bars 3C1 or 3C2
5K
6"
5 ~ Bars 3C1
734"
Chamfer
3'
-5"
Insert Spacing
(See Insert Notes)
3'
-1112"
1
1 2"
bottom of bottom
BARS 3C1 & 3C2
4M3 & 5Y
2 & 9)
3
4"
634"
1" Cover
314" (Nominal)
9"
712"
2'
-0"
1'-3" R
1'-0" Min.
Lap
314"
3'
-9"
7
16"
Cover
3
4"
1
2"
Bars 5K
(Typ.)
4M2 (Typ.)
& Strands N
(See Note 5)
1
3 2"
112"
Bars 5Z
LENGTH
(NOTE 1)
9, 10 & 11
Bars 5K
Bars 4M1 or
NUMBER
REQUIRED
SIZE
NUMBERS
4 Bars 5A
Device (See Note 8)
MARK
1
2"*
4 sp. @ 3
2" Cover
NOTE
A+B
3D1 & 3D2

1
2"
1'-11
3D3
BARS 3D1, 3D2 & 3D3
NOTES:
End of
Bars 5Y (shown
as (
Typ.)
Plans.
Beam
Cover
7"
1
4"
Bar 5Z
1
2 2"*
4 sp. @
16 sp. @ 3"
1
2"*
S1 sp. @ V1
S2 sp. @ 9"
S3 sp. @ 1'-0"
S4 sp. @ 1'-6"
(6" Max.)

Bar 5K
Bar 5Z
12/17/2015
Beam
END 1
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
END 2
ELEVATION
REVISIO N
1:
19:
31 PM
1'-6" Max.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20045
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
11 ~ D16's @ 6" sp. = 5'-0"
D16's @ 1'-0" sp.
End of
1"
Varies
Optional W6.4
1'-0" Max.
W6.4
Optional W6.4
Wires D31 (shown
(shown as (
as (
Typ.)
Typ.)
Beam
W6.4
D16
7"
6"
3'
-8"
W6.4
Varies 9" Max.
Optional W6.4
D16
6"
1" extension
W6.4
1
4"
(Typ.)
Cover
Pieces K-1
Pieces K-2
1"
(Offset)
PLAN VIEW
PIECE M-1
5"
Match spacing of
(2 Required)
PIECE M-3
(2 Required)
adjacent Piece S-1,
to Piece K-2
to Strands at Beam)
S-2, S-3 or S-4

8 ~ D25's (FF) @ 6" = 3'-6"

End of Beam
5 ~ D31's @
1
2"
sp. =
6"
3"
8 ~ D25's (BF) @ 6" = 3'-6"
Pieces M-3
1
2"
3
4"
END VIEW
Piece M-1 ties
PLAN VIEW
3
4"
PIECES M
SECTION A-A
S2 ~ D25's @ 9" sp. (Piece S-2)
S3 ~ D25's @ 1'-0" sp. (Piece S-3)
3"
1'-2"
6"
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
2" Cover
S4 ~ D25's @ 1'-6" sp. (Piece S-4)
3" Offset
6"
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
258" Cover
334"
Varies 9" Max.
734"
3
4"

D31 (Piece K-1)
2" Cover
214" Cover
(Typ.)
Beam (WWR
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
Symmetrical)
2"
1"
2" Cover
5"
Pieces D
1" extension (Typ.)
PIECES K & S
PIECE K-1
PIECE K-2
END VIEW
(Aligned EF)
(FF Shown Solid, BF Shown Dashed)
Piece D-1 ties

to Piece K-1
1
2"
1
2"
(Pairs)
(4 Required)
~ 2 Pairs)
8 ~ D11's @ 6" sp. = 3'-6"
NOTES:
a. See Sheet 1 for placement details & Table of Beam Variables
6"
W4.4
Varies 1'-6" Max.

W4.4
Varies 9" Max.
in Structures Plans for variables S1, S2, S3, S4 & V1.

W4.4
3
4"
W4.4

1
4"

D11 (Typ. Pieces
1:
19:
32 PM
Cover
sp. =
1'-2"
D11
1
2"
(4 Required
5 ~ D11's @
1'-3"
1 4"
4"
4" Piece K & S
(2" Min.)
Cross W ires (
W 12.
4 or W 10)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
3'
-1134"
534"
Pieces K (Pairs)
Pieces M-1
1" extension (Typ.)
1
1'-11 2"
D-1, D-2 & D-3)
LEGEND:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
EF = Each Face
PIECES D
PIECE D-1
END VIEW
PIECE D-2
PIECE D-3
FF = Front Face
BF = Back Face

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20045
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
to the end of beam
1
2"*
212"*
Spacing Bars 5K
4 sp. @ 3
BAR BENDING DETAILS
S1 sp.@ V1
18 sp. @ 3"
4'-0"
Spacing Strands N
3"
1'-6"
1
4 2"
1'-6"
2 sp. @ 7"*
1
2"*
Spacing Bars 4M1

1
4 2"
9 sp. @ 6"
Bars 4M3
NOTE
or 4M2
sp. @ 1'-0"
1
2"*
1
8"*
Spacing Bars 5Z
4 Bars 5A
2" Cover
7
16"
Cover
Bars 5Z
Bars 5K
Bars 4M
10"
Bar 5A
Varies
C2
9, 10 & 11
14 (End 2)
Varies
D1
9, 10, 11 & 14
28 (End 1)
Varies
D2
9, 10, 11 & 14
28 (End 2)
Varies
D3
9 & 14
See Table
4'-3"
2, 9, 11 & 13
See Table
M1
9 & 10
12 (End 1)
Varies
4M1 or 4M2 for
M2
9 & 10
12 (End 2)
Varies
Skewed Ends
M3
See Table
3'-8"
Dim. L
Bars 4M3
Additional Bar
Bars 5Y
(Bundled with
10"
1
2"
2 sp. @
Strand
9 & 11
12
4'-0"
2, 9, 11 & 13
10
5'-2"
7"
Bars 5Y
5A
22'-0"
5Y
4'-0"
4M1 & 4M2
1
2"/Sin
C=(17
C/2
D=3'-8"/Sin
(Typ.)
4M3
1'-3" R
2'
-0"
(See Note 1)
Additional Bar(s)
Bars 3D (Pairs
Bar 3C
3D1 or 3D2 for
Typ.) Rotate as
Bars 3D (Pairs)
BARS 5A, 4M1, 4M2,
Skewed Ends
required to clear
2" Cover
3'-8"
4M3 & 5Y
Anchor Studs
(Typ.)
9"
1
2"
1'-3
5'-8"
BENDING DIAGRAMS
Bars 3C
1
7 2"
3
8"
3 & 4
22'-0"
634"
2'
-7"
Cover
1'-5"
3
C1
Bars 5K & 5Z)

1
4"
4'
-6"
8
14 (End 1)
(See Note 5)
Strand N
4M2 (Typ.)
Strand N
LENGTH
(NOTE 1)
& Strands N
(Typ.)
Epoxy Coating
1
3 2"
112"
1
2"
3
4"
Device (See Note 8)
Bars 4M1 or
NUMBER
REQUIRED
SIZE
NUMBERS
9, 10 & 11
Bars 5K
Strands N
MARK
4 sp. @ 3
BARS 3C1 & 3C2
1" Cover
5K
5Z
(See Notes
4'
-2"
7"
6"
(Nominal)
4'
-812"
1
4"
=90 for Bars 3D3

Chamfer
Bars 5Z (Typ.)
3
4"
6"
5 ~ Bars 3C1
Chamfer (Typ.
bottom of bottom
3'-2"
flange only)
9 ~ Bars 3C1 or 3C2
or 3C2 & 3D1
or 3D2 (Pairs)
1'-6" Max.
Bars 3D3
(Pairs) @
1'-6" Max. sp.
6"
sp. with Bars 5K
Min.
(See Note 9) *
BARS 5K & 5Z
END VIEW
412"
Insert Spacing
(See Insert Notes)
A=(812"/Sin )
B=(15"/Sin )
1'-0" Min.
Lap
314"
112"
734"
2 & 9)
A+B
1'-1112"
3D1 & 3D2

3D3
BARS 3D1, 3D2 & 3D3

NOTES:

End of
Bars 5Y (shown
as (
Typ.)
Beam
Plans.
Cover
7"
1
4"
Bar 5Z
1
2 2"*
4 sp. @
18 sp. @ 3"
1
2"*
S1 sp. @ V1
S2 sp. @ 9"
S3 sp. @ 1'-0"
S4 sp. @ 1'-6"
(6" Max.)

Bar 5K
Beam
Bar 5Z
12/17/2015
END 1
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
END 2
ELEVATION
REVISIO N
1:
19:
50 PM
1'-6" Max.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20054
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
12 ~ D16's @ 6" sp. = 5'-6"
D16's @ 1'-0" sp.
End of
1"
Varies
Optional W6.4
W6.4
Varies 9" Max.
Optional W6.4
1'-0" Max.
Wires D31 (shown
(shown as (
as (
Typ.)
Typ.)
Beam
W6.4
6"
W6.4
3'
-8"
7"
D16
Optional W6.4
D16
6"
1" extension
W6.4
1
4"
(Typ.)
Cover
Pieces K-1
Pieces K-2
1"
(Offset)
PLAN VIEW
(2 Required)
to Piece K-2
(2 Required)

to Strands at Beam)
S-2, S-3 or S-4
1
2 2"
End of Beam
adjacent Piece S-1,
9 ~ D25's (FF) @ 6" = 4'-0"

5 ~ D31's @
1
2"
sp. =
6"
3"

S2 ~ D25's @ 9" sp. (Piece S-2)
9 ~ D25's (BF) @ 6" = 4'-0"
Pieces M-3
END VIEW
PIECE M-3
Match spacing of
Piece M-1 ties
3
4"
5"
PLAN VIEW
PIECE M-1
3
4"
PIECES M
SECTION A-A
S3 ~ D25's @ 1'-0" sp. (Piece S-3)
3"
1'-2"
6"
(Typ.)
2" Cover
S4 ~ D25's @ 1'-6" sp. (Piece S-4)
3" Offset
(Typ.)
Varies 9" Max.
(Typ.)
3
4"
(Typ.)
6"
258" Cover
334"
Pieces M-1
3
4"
3
4"
4'
-8
D31 (Piece K-1)
2" Cover
(Typ.)
214" Cover
Beam (WWR
Symmetrical)
4" Piece K & S
(2" Min.)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
2"
1"
2" Cover
5"
Pieces D
1" extension (Typ.)
PIECES K & S
PIECE K-1
PIECE K-2
END VIEW
(Aligned EF)
Piece D-1 ties

to Piece K-1
(4 Required
Cover
(Pairs)
Cross W ires (
W 12.
4 or W 10)
534"
Pieces K (Pairs)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)

(4 Required)
~ 2 Pairs)
NOTES:
1
2"
5 ~ D11's @
1'-3"
1
2"
1 4"

6"
W4.4
Varies 1'-6" Max.
Varies 9" Max.
W4.4
W4.4
S4 & V1.
3
4"

W4.4
1
4"

D11 (Typ. Pieces
1:
19:
51 PM
1
2"
4"
sp. =
1'-2"
D11
9 ~ D11's @ 6" sp. = 4'-0"
1" extension (Typ.)
1
2"
1'-11
LEGEND:
D-1, D-2 & D-3)
PIECES D
PIECE D-1
PIECE D-2
PIECE D-3
END VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
EF = Each Face

FF = Front Face
BF = Back Face

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20054
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
to the end of beam
1
2"*
212"*
Spacing Bars 5K
4 sp. @ 3
BAR BENDING DETAILS
S1 sp.@ V1
22 sp. @ 3"
4'-0"
3"
1'-6"
1'-6"
11 sp. @ 6"
Bars 4M3
NOTE
or 4M2
sp. @ 1'-0"
1
2"*
1
8"*
Spacing Bars 5Z
2" Cover
Bars 4M
Strands N
7
16"
Cover
Bars 5Z
Bars 5K
Bars 4M1 or
8
16 (End 1)
Varies
C2
9, 10 & 11
16 (End 2)
Varies
D1
9, 10, 11 & 14
32 (End 1)
Varies
D2
9, 10, 11 & 14
32 (End 2)
Varies
D3
9 & 14
See Table
4'-3"
2, 9, 11 & 13
See Table
M1
9 & 10
14 (End 1)
Varies
4M1 or 4M2 for
M2
9 & 10
14 (End 2)
Varies
Skewed Ends
M3
See Table
3'-8"
Dim. L
C1
10"
K
Strand N
Additional Bar
Epoxy Coating
1
4"
Cover
1'-5"
1
2"
10"
6'-5"
Bars 5Y
9 & 11
12
4'-9"
(Bundled with
2, 9, 11 & 13
10
5'-11"
3 & 4
Strand
BENDING DIAGRAMS
5A
24'-0"
5Y
4'-9"
4M1 & 4M2
1'-312"
3
8"
24'-0"
(See Note 5)
Bars 5K & 5Z)
3 sp. @
3'
-4"
Bars 4M3
Bar 5A
LENGTH
(NOTE 1)
4M2 (Typ.)
Strand N
NUMBER
REQUIRED
SIZE
NUMBERS
9, 10 & 11
& Strands N
(Typ.)
1
3 2"
112"
1
2"
3
4"
Device (See Note 8)
5'
-3"
4 Bars 5A
Bars 5K
MARK
4 sp. @ 3
7"
(See Note 1)
1
2"/Sin
C=(17
C/2
D=3'-8"/Sin
4M3
3'-8"
Bars 5Y
BARS 5A, 4M1, 4M2,
Bars 3D (Pairs
Skewed Ends
required to clear
5Z
Typ.) Rotate as
Bars 3D (Pairs)
2" Cover
Anchor Studs
1
2"
(See Notes
2 & 9)
1
2"
Insert Spacing
Chamfer
(See Insert Notes)
6"
5 ~ Bars 3C1
Chamfer (Typ.
bottom of bottom
6"
Bars 5Z (Typ.)
11 ~ Bars 3C1 or 3C2
or 3C2 & 3D1 or
3D2 (Pairs) sp.
3'-2"
flange only)
1'-6" Max.
Min.
Bars 3D3
(Pairs) @
1
A=(8 2"/Sin
1'-0" Min.
Lap
A+B
3D1 & 3D2

1
2"
1'-11
BARS 5K & 5Z
)
B=(15"/Sin )
314"
7"
314" (Nominal)
=90 for Bars 3D3
734"
5'
-5
1" Cover
4'
-11"
(Typ.)
3
4"
BARS 3C1 & 3C2
6"
3D1 or 3D2 for

5K
Bar 3C
4M3 & 5Y
Additional Bar(s)
1
2"
712"
1'
-11"
1'-3" R
634"
Bars 3C
(Typ.)
9"
Spacing Strands N
1
4 2"
2 sp. @ 7"*
1
2"*
Spacing Bars 4M1

1
4 2"
3D3
BARS 3D1, 3D2 & 3D3
1'-6" Max. sp.
with Bars 5K
NOTES:
(See Note 9) *

END VIEW

End of
Bars 5Y (shown
as (
Typ.)
Beam
Plans.
Cover
1
2"*
4 sp. @
22 sp. @ 3"
1
2"*
S1 sp. @ V1
S2 sp. @ 9"
S3 sp. @ 1'-0"
S4 sp. @ 1'-6"
(6" Max.)
1'-6" Max.

Bar 5K
Beam
Bar 5Z
12/17/2015
END 1
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
END 2
ELEVATION
REVISIO N
1:
20:
12 PM
7"
1
4"
Bar 5Z
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20063
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
14 ~ D16's @ 6" sp. = 6'-6"
D16's @ 1'-0" sp.
End of
1"
Varies
6"
Optional W6.4
W6.4
Varies 9" Max.
1'-0" Max.
Optional W6.4
Wires D31 (shown
(shown as (
as (
Typ.)
Typ.)
Beam
W6.4
W6.4
3'
-8"
7"
D16
Optional W6.4
6"
D16
W6.4
1
4"
Cover
Pieces K-1
Pieces K-2
(Offset)
SECTION A-A
(Typ.)
PLAN VIEW
END VIEW
(2 Required)
to Piece K-2
PIECE M-3
Match spacing of
Piece M-1 ties
(2 Required)
adjacent Piece S-1,

to Strands at Beam)
S-2, S-3 or S-4
1
2 2"
11 ~ D25's (FF) @ 6" = 5'-0"

5 ~ D31's @
1
2"
sp. =
6"
3"

S2 ~ D25's @ 9" sp. (Piece S-2)
11 ~ D25's (BF) @ 6" = 5'-0"
Pieces M-3
5"
End of Beam
PLAN VIEW
PIECE M-1
3
4"
PIECES M
3
4"
1"
1" extension
S3 ~ D25's @ 1'-0" sp. (Piece S-3)
3"
1'-2"
6"
6"
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Varies 9" Max.
(Typ.)
734"
(Typ.)
2" Cover
S4 ~ D25's @ 1'-6" sp. (Piece S-4)
3" Offset
334"
258" Cover
Pieces M-1
3
4"
3
4"
5'
-5
D31 (Piece K-1)
2" Cover
(Typ.)
214" Cover
Beam (WWR
Symmetrical)
4" Piece K & S
(2" Min.)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
2"
1"
2" Cover
5"
Pieces D
1" extension (Typ.)
PIECES K & S
PIECE K-1
PIECE K-2
END VIEW
(Aligned EF)
Piece D-1 ties
1
2"
1
2"
2
1
2"
11 ~ D11's @ 6" sp. = 5'-0"
NOTES:

6"
W4.4
Varies 1'-6" Max.
Varies 9" Max.

b. Place Conventional Reinforcement Bars 5A & 3C as shown
W4.4
W4.4
3
4"
W4.4
for Welded Wire Reinforcement. Bars 5Z will not be used with

the WWR Option.
on Sheet 1. Place additional Bars 5Y as shown in Section A-A
1
4"

D11 (Typ. Pieces
1:
20:
13 PM
(4 Required)
sp. =
1'-2"
D11
5 ~ D11's @
1'-3"
1 4"
4"
(4 Required
(Pairs)
~ 2 Pairs)
to Piece K-1
Cover
Cross W ires (
W 12.
4 or W 10)
534"
Pieces K (Pairs)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
1" extension (Typ.)
1
1'-11 2"
LEGEND:
D-1, D-2 & D-3)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
EF = Each Face
PIECES D
PIECE D-1
END VIEW
PIECE D-2
PIECE D-3
FF = Front Face
BF = Back Face

Skew Details and Note 9 for placement details. Shift Pieces K
& Bars 5Y to accommodate skewed end conditions and align
with Bars C and D.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20063
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2

BAR BENDING DETAILS
to the end of beam
Spacing Bars 5K
212"*
Spacing Bars 4M1
1
2"*
5 sp. @ 3
26 sp. @ 3"
2 sp. @ 7"*
14 sp. @ 6"
S1 sp.@ V1
4'-0"
1
2"
3"
1'-6"
1
2"
or 4M2
1'-6"
Bars 4M3
Max.
sp. @ 1'-0"
1
2"*
1
8"*
Spacing Bars 5Z
1'-0"
Cover
312"
Bars 5K
Bars 4M
Bars 4M1 or
4M2 (Typ.)
Bars 5K
(Typ.)
Strands N
Bars 4M3
1
2"
Strand N
Additional Bar
1'
-4
Bar 6A
Bars 5Y
Strand N
Skewed Ends
Device (See Note 8)

Epoxy Coating
19 (End 1)
Varies
C2
9, 10 & 11
19 (End 2)
Varies
D1
9, 10, 11 & 14
38 (End 1)
Varies
D2
9, 10, 11 & 14
38 (End 2)
Varies
D3
9 & 14
See Table
4'-3"
2, 9, 11 & 13
See Table
M1
9 & 10
17 (End 1)
Varies
M2
9 & 10
17 (End 2)
Varies
M3
See Table
3'-8"
Dim. L
9 & 11
16
5'-6"
2, 9, 11 & 13
12
6'-8"
1
2"
10
7'-2"
(See Note 1)
6A
26'-0"
5Y
5'-6"
C=(1712"/Sin )
4M1 & 4M2
D=3'-8"/Sin
4M3
3'-8"
C/2
BARS 6A, 4M1, 4M2,
4M3 & 5Y
7"
Bars 3C
5Z
1
2"
(Typ.)
1" Cover
1
4"
7"
6"
Min.
(Nominal)
(See Notes
BARS 5K & 5Z
B=(15"/Sin )
5K
Skewed Ends
1
2"
3D1 or 3D2 for
Anchor Studs
5'
-8"
required to clear
=90 for Bars 3D3

A=(812"/Sin )
1'-0" Min.
Lap
314"
2" Cover
Additional Bar(s)
734"
Bars 3D (Pairs)
Typ.) Rotate as
6'
-2
2'
-0"
Bars 3D (Pairs
Bar 3C
BARS 3C1 & 3C2
6"
(Typ.)
1'
-3
"
3
4"
3 sp. @
4'
-1"
26'-0"
Cover
Bars 5Y
1
1'-3 2"
712"
Strand
BENDING DIAGRAMS
6'
-0"
3
8"
3 & 4
(See Note 5)
1
2 4"
LENGTH
(NOTE 1)
9, 10 & 11
C1
Bars 5K & 5Z)

1
2"
4M1 or 4M2 for
(Bundled with
1'-5"
NUMBER
REQUIRED
SIZE
NUMBERS
1
3 2"
112"
3
4"
Bars 5Z
Strands N
7
16"
Cover
MARK
5 sp. @ 3
4 Bars 6A &
2"
NOTE
9"
Spacing Strands N
1
2"*
A+B
3D1 & 3D2

1
2"
1'-11
3D3
BARS 3D1, 3D2 & 3D3
2 & 9)
112" Chamfer
Insert Spacing
Bars 5Z (Typ.)
(See Insert Notes)

3
4"
6 ~ Bars 3C1 or
Chamfer (Typ.
bottom of bottom
3C2 & 3D1 or 3D2

(Pairs) sp. with
3'-2"
flange only)
6"
NOTES:
13 ~ Bars 3C1 or 3C2
1'-6" Max.
Bars 3D3
(Pairs) @ 1'-6"
Max. sp.
Bars 5Y (shown
End of
as (
Typ.)
Beam

Florida-I Beam - Table of Beam Variables in
Structures Plans.
Bars 5K (See Note 9)*
END VIEW
Plans.
Bar 5Z
Cover
1
2"*
5 sp. @
26 sp. @ 3"
1
2"*
S1 sp. @ V1
S2 sp. @ 9"
S3 sp. @ 1'-0"
S4 sp. @ 1'-6"
(6" Max.)
1'-6" Max.

Bar 5K
Beam
Bar 5Z
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
2:
29:
18 PM
7"
1
4"
END 1
END 2
ELEVATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20072
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
17 ~ D16's @ 6" sp. = 8'-0"
D16's @ 1'-0" sp.
End of
1"
Varies
Optional W6.4
1'-0" Max.
Optional W6.4
Wires D31 (shown
(shown as (
as (
Typ.)
Typ.)
Beam
W6.4
W6.4
6"
3'
-8"
W6.4
Varies 9" Max.
7"
D16
Optional W6.4
6"
D16
W6.4
1
4"
Cover
Pieces K-1
Pieces K-2
(Offset)
SECTION A-A
(Typ.)
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
PIECE M-1
END VIEW
(2 Required)
to Piece K-2
(2 Required)
adjacent Piece S-1,

to Strands at Beam)
S-2, S-3 or S-4
1
2 2"
End of Beam
PIECE M-3
Match spacing of
Piece M-1 ties
13 ~ D25's (FF) @ 6" = 6'-0"

1
2"
6 ~ D31's @ 3
1
2"
sp. = 1'-5
6"
3"

S2 ~ D25's @ 9" sp. (Piece S-2)
13 ~ D25's (BF) @ 6" = 6'-0"
Pieces M-3
3
4"
1
2"
PIECES M
3
4"
1"
1" extension
S3 ~ D25's @ 1'-0" sp. (Piece S-3)
3"
6"
6"
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Varies 9" Max.
(Typ.)
3
4"
(Typ.)
2" Cover
S4 ~ D25's @ 1'-6" sp. (Piece S-4)
3" Offset
334"
258" Cover
534"
Pieces M-1
3
4"
3
4"
6'
-2
D31 (Piece K-1)

2" Cover
(Typ.)
214" Cover
Beam (WWR
Symmetrical)
4" Piece K & S
(2" Min.)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
2"
1"
2" Cover
5"
Pieces D
1" extension (Typ.)
PIECES K & S
PIECE K-1
PIECE K-2
END VIEW
(Aligned EF)
(2 Required ~ Each Piece)
Piece D-1 ties

to Piece K-1
1
2"
(4 Required
(Pairs)

(4 Required)
~ 2 Pairs)
1
2"
6 ~ D11's @ 3
1'-3"
Cover
Cross W ires (
W 12.
4 or W 10)
Pieces K (Pairs)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
13 ~ D11's @ 6" sp. = 6'-0"
NOTES:

1 4"
sp. =
D11
1
2"
W4.4
Varies 1'-6" Max.

W4.4
Varies 9" Max.

W4.4
W4.4
3
4"

the WWR Option.
1
4"

D11 (Typ. Pieces
2:
29:
19 PM
6"
4"
1
1'-5 2"
1" extension (Typ.)
1
1'-11 2"
LEGEND:
D-1, D-2 & D-3)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
PIECE D-1
END VIEW
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
EF = Each Face
PIECES D
PIECE D-2
PIECE D-3
FF = Front Face
BF = Back Face

with Bars C and D.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20072
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Spacing Bars 5K
1
2"*
1
2"*
5 sp. @ 3
S1 sp.@ V1
28 sp. @ 3"
4'-0"
1
3 2"*
Spacing Bars 4M1

Spacing Strands N
412"
3"
1'-6"
412"
1'-6"
7
16"
Cover
1
2"
Bars 5K
3
4"
Bars 5Z
1'
-0"
Bars 4M
Strands N
Cover
5 sp. @ 312"*
Bars 4M1 or
* These dimensions
Strands N
1
2"
Bars 4M3
Bars 5Y
Additional Bar
(Bundled with
4M1 or 4M2 for
Bars 5K & 5Z)
Skewed Ends
1'-5"
1
2"
Epoxy Coating
20 (End 1)
Varies
C2
9, 10 & 11
20 (End 2)
Varies
D1
9, 10, 11 & 14
40 (End 1)
Varies
D2
9, 10, 11 & 14
40 (End 2)
Varies
D3
9 & 14
See Table
4'-3"
2, 9, 11 & 13
See Table
M1
9 & 10
18 (End 1)
Varies
M2
9 & 10
18 (End 2)
Varies
M3
See Table
3'-8"
Dim. L
1
2"
Strand
28'-0"
7'-8"
9 & 11
16
6'-0"
2, 9, 11 & 13
12
7'-2"
BENDING DIAGRAMS
(See Note 1)
1
2 4"
Cover
6A
28'-0"
5Y
6'-0"
4M1 & 4M2
Bars 5Y
C=(1712"/Sin )
C/2
3'-8"/Sin
4M3
3'-8"
9"
10
4 sp. @
4'
-7"
3
8"
3 & 4
(See Note 5)
6'
-6"
LENGTH
(NOTE 1)
9, 10 & 11
Device (See Note 8)
NUMBER
REQUIRED
SIZE
C1
perpendicular to
Strand N
MARK
(Typ.)
4M2 (Typ.)
the end of beam
Bar 6A
NOTE
NUMBERS
are measured
Strand N
4 Bars 6A &
634"
sp. @ 1'-0"
Max.
1
8"*
BAR BENDING DETAILS
Bars 4M3
1'-0"
Bars 5K
2"
1
2"
15 sp. @ 6"
or 4M2
Spacing Bars 5Z
2 sp. @ 7"*
BARS 6A, 4M1, 4M2,

4M3 & 5Y
7"
Bars 3C
(Typ.)
6"
1" Cover
1
4"
7"
Min.
412"
Skewed Ends
5Z
5K
3D1 or 3D2 for
Anchor Studs
1
2"
required to clear
=90 for Bars 3D3
A=(812"/Sin )
B=(15"/Sin )
1'-0" Min.
Lap
1
4"
2" Cover
Additional Bar(s)
734"
Bars 3D (Pairs)
Typ.) Rotate as
6'
-8
2'
-0"
712"
Bars 3D (Pairs
Bar 3C
6'
-2"
(Typ.)
1'
-3
"
BARS 3C1 & 3C2
6"
A+B
1
2"
1'-3
3D1 & 3D2

1
2"
(Nominal)
1'-11
(See Notes
BARS 5K & 5Z
3D3
BARS 3D1, 3D2 & 3D3
2 & 9)
112" Chamfer
Insert Spacing
(See Insert Notes)
3
4"
Bars 5Z (Typ.)
6 ~ Bars 3C1 or
Chamfer (Typ.
bottom of bottom
3'-2"
flange only)
as (
Bars 3D3
(Pairs) @ 1'-6"
(Pairs) sp. with
(Pairs) @ 6" sp. (See Note 9)
Max. sp.
Note 9)*

Structures Plans.
C. For Dimensions A, B, C, D, L, R & V1 and number

of spaces S1 thru S4, see Florida-I Beam -
Table of Beam Variables in Structures Plans.
Typ.)
Beam
Bar 5Z
1
2"*
Cover
7"
1
4"
5 sp. @
28 sp. @ 3"
1
2"*
S1 sp. @ V1
S2 sp. @ 9"
S3 sp. @ 1'-0"
S4 sp. @ 1'-6"
(6" Max.)
1'-6" Max.

Beam
Bar 5K
Bar 5Z
12/17/2015
END 1
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
END 2
ELEVATION
REVISIO N
1:
20:
54 PM
1'-6" Max.
3C2 & 3D1 or 3D2
Bars 5Y (shown
End of
NOTES:
14 ~ Bars 3C1 or
3C2 & 3D1 or 3D2
Bars 5K (See
END VIEW
6"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20078
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
18 ~ D16's @ 6" sp. = 8'-6"
D16's @ 1'-0" sp.
End of
1"
Varies
Optional W6.4
W6.4
Varies 9" Max.
1'-0" Max.
Optional W6.4
Wires D31 (shown
(shown as (
as (
Typ.)
Typ.)
Beam
W6.4
6"
W6.4
3'
-8"
7"
D16
Optional W6.4
6"
D16
W6.4
1
4"
Cover
Pieces K-1
Pieces K-2
(Offset)
(Typ.)
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
PIECE M-1
END VIEW
(2 Required)
to Piece K-2
(2 Required)
adjacent Piece S-1,

to Strands at Beam)
S-2, S-3 or S-4
1
2 2"
End of Beam
PIECE M-3
Match spacing of
Piece M-1 tied
14 ~ D25's (FF) @ 6" = 6'-6"

1
2"
6 ~ D31's @ 3
1
2"
sp. = 1'-5
6"
3"

S2 ~ D25's @ 9" sp. (Piece S-2)
14 ~ D25's (BF) @ 6" = 6'-6"
Pieces M-3
3
4"
1
2"
PIECES M
SECTION A-A
3
4"
1"
1" extension
S3 ~ D25's @ 1'-0" sp. (Piece S-3)
3"
6"
6"
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Varies 9" Max.
(Typ.)
3
4"
(Typ.)
2" Cover
S4 ~ D25's @ 1'-6" sp. (Piece S-4)
3" Offset
334"
258" Cover
Pieces M-1
3
4"
3
4"
6'
-8
D31 (Piece K-1)

2" Cover
(Typ.)
214" Cover
Beam (WWR
Symmetrical)
4" Piece K & S
(2" Min.)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
2"
1"
2" Cover
5"
Pieces D
1" extension (Typ.)
PIECES K & S
PIECE K-1
PIECE K-2
END VIEW
(Aligned EF)
Piece D-1 ties

to Piece K-1
1
2"
(4 Required
(Pairs)

(4 Required)
and Strands N not Shown for Clarity)
~ 2 Pairs)
1
2"
6 ~ D11's @ 3
1'-3"
Cover
Cross W ires (
W 12.
4 or W 10)
534"
Pieces K (Pairs)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
14 ~ D11's @ 6" sp. = 6'-6"
NOTES:

sp. =
1 4"
D11
1
2"
W4.4
Varies 1'-6" Max.
Varies 9" Max.
W4.4

W4.4
W4.4
3
4"

the WWR Option.
1
4"

D11 (Typ. Pieces
1:
20:
55 PM
6"
4"
1
1'-5 2"
1" extension (Typ.)
1
1'-11 2"
LEGEND:
D-1, D-2 & D-3)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
PIECE D-1
END VIEW
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
EF = Each Face
PIECES D
PIECE D-2
PIECE D-3
FF = Front Face
BF = Back Face

with Bars C and D.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20078
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Spacing Bars 5K
1
2"
1
2"
5 sp. @ 3
30 sp. @ 3"
2 sp. @ 7"
16 sp. @ 6"
S1 sp.@ V1
4'-0"
Spacing Bars 4M1
Spacing Strands N
412"
3"
1'-6"
412"
1'-6"
1
3 2"
or 4M2
Cover
Bars 5K
Bars 4M
10"
Strands N
(Typ.)
NUMBER
LENGTH
REQUIRED
(NOTE 1)
SIZE
NUMBERS
21 (End 1)
Varies
C2
9, 10 & 11
21 (End 2)
Varies
D1
9, 10, 11 & 14
42 (End 1)
Varies
D2
9, 10, 11 & 14
42 (End 2)
Varies
Bars 5Y
D3
9 & 14
See Table
4'-3"
(Bundled with
2, 9, 11 & 13
See Table
M1
9 & 10
19 (End 1)
Varies
M2
9 & 10
19 (End 2)
Varies
M3
See Table
3'-8"
3 & 4
" Strand
Dim. L
Additional Bar
Bars 5K & 5Z)
4M1 or 4M2 for
Skewed Ends
1
2"
MARK
C1
1'-5"
3
NOTE
9, 10 & 11
Bars 4M3
4M2 (Typ.)
Strand N
Bar 6A
4 ~ Bars 6A &
Bars 4M1 or
1
2"
3
4"
Bars 5Z
1
2"
1
2"
5 sp. @ 3
Strands N
7
16"
Cover
1
8"
Bars 5K
2"
1
2"
sp. @ 1'-0"
Max.
Spacing Bars 5Z
BAR BENDING DETAILS
Bars 4M3
1'-0"
29'-0"
8'-2"
Device (See Note 8)
9 & 11
16
6'-6"
2, 9, 11 & 13
12
7'-8"
BENDING DIAGRAMS
(See Note 1)
C=(1712"/Sin )
10"
Cover
6A
29'-0"
5Y
6'-6"
5 sp. @
3'-8"/Sin
4M3
3'-8"
Epoxy Coating
7'
-0"
5'
-1"
4M1 & 4M2

Bars 5Y
C/2
9"
1
4"
3
4"
(See Note 5)
BARS 3C1 & 3C2
BARS 6A, 4M1,

4M2, 4M3 & 5Y
7"
5K
(Typ.)
1'
3"
R
Anchor Studs
Skewed Ends
1
2"
3D1 or 3D2 for
6"
(Typ.)
1" Cover
1
4"
7"
1
2"/Sin
)
B=(15"/Sin )
required to clear
A=(8
1'-0" Min.
Min.
Lap
314"
2" Cover
Additional Bar(s)
2'
-0"
Bars 3D (Pairs)
Typ.) Rotate as
3
4"
Bars 3D (Pairs
6'
-8"
=90 for Bars 3D3
Bar 3C
712"
5Z
6"
Bars 3C
7'
-212"
1
2"
1'-3
A+B
1'-1112"
(End)
(Nominal)
BARS 5K & 5Z
3D1 & 3D2
3D3
BARS 3D1, 3D2 & 3D3
(See Notes
2 & 9)
1
2"
Insert Spacing
Chamfer
(See Insert Notes)

3
4"
Bars 5Z (Typ.)
6 ~ Bars 3C1 or
Chamfer (Typ.
bottom of bottom
3'-2"
flange only)
as (
1'-6" Max.
Bars 3D3
3C2 & 3D1 or 3D2 (Pairs)
(Pairs) @ 1'-6"
(Pairs) sp. with
Max. sp.
Note 9)

Structures Plans.

of spaces S1 thru S4, see Florida-I Beam -
Bars 5Y (shown
End of
NOTES:
15 ~ Bars 3C1 or
3C2 & 3D1 or 3D2
Bars 5K (See
END VIEW
6"
Table of Beam Variables in Structures Plans.
Typ.)
Beam
Bar 5Z
1
2"
Cover
5 sp. @
30 sp. @ 3"
1
2"
S1 sp. @ V1
S2 sp. @ 9"
S3 sp. @ 1'-0"
S4 sp. @ 1'-6"
(6" Max.)
1'-6" Max.

Bar 5K
Beam
Bar 5Z
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
1:
21:
10 PM
7"
1
2 4"
END 1
END 2
ELEVATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20084
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
19 ~ D16's @ 6" sp. = 9'-0"
D16's 1'-0" sp.
End of
1"
Varies
Optional W6.4
W6.4
Varies 9" Max.
1'-0" Max.
W6.4
Wires D31 (shown
(shown as (
as (
Typ.)
Typ.)
Beam
Optional W6.4
6"
W6.4
3'
-8"
7"
D16
Optional W6.4
6"
D16
1
4"
W6.4
Cover
Pieces K-1
Pieces K-2
(Offset)
(Typ.)
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
PIECE M-1
END VIEW
(2 Required)
to Piece K-2
(2 Required)
adjacent Piece S-1,

to Strands at Beam)
S-2, S-3 or S-4
1
2 2"
End of Beam
PIECE M-3
Match spacing of
Piece M-1 tied
15 ~ D25's (FF) @ 6" = 7'-0"

1
2"
6 ~ D31's @ 3
1
2"
sp. = 1'-5
6"
3"

S2 ~ D25's @ 9" sp. (Piece S-2)
15 ~ D25's (BF) @ 6" = 7'-0"
Pieces M-3
3
4"
1
2"
PIECES M
SECTION A-A
3
4"
1"
1" extension
S3 ~ D25's @ 1'-0" sp. (Piece S-3)
3"
6"
6"
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Varies 9" Max.
(Typ.)
3
4"
(Typ.)
2" Cover
S4 ~ D25's @ 1'-6" sp. (Piece S-4)
3" Offset
334"
258" Cover
Pieces M-1
3
4"
7'
-1134"
D31 (Piece K-1)

2" Cover
(Typ.)
214" Cover
Beam (WWR
Symmetrical)
4" Piece K & S
(2" Min.)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
2"
1"
2" Cover
5"
Pieces D
1" extension (Typ.)
PIECES K & S
PIECE K-1
PIECE K-2
END VIEW
(Aligned EF)
Piece D-1 ties

to Piece K-1
1
2"
(4 Required ~
(Pairs)

(4 Required)
2 Pairs)
1
2"
6 ~ D11's @ 3
1'-3"
Cover
Cross W ires (
W 12.
4 or W 10)
534"
Pieces K (Pairs)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
15 ~ D11's @ 6" sp. = 7'-0"
NOTES:

sp. =
1 4"
D11
1
2"
W4.4
Varies 1'-6" Max.
Varies 9" Max.
W4.4

W4.4
W4.4
3
4"

the WWR Option.
1
4"

D11 (Typ. Pieces
1:
21:
11 PM
6"
4"
1
1'-5 2"
1" extension (Typ.)
1
1'-11 2"
LEGEND:
D-1, D-2 & D-3)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
PIECE D-1
END VIEW
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
EF = Each Face
PIECES D
PIECE D-2
PIECE D-3
FF = Front Face
BF = Back Face

with Bars C and D.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20084
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Spacing Bars 5K
1
2"
1
2"
5 sp. @ 3
S1 sp.@ V1
34 sp. @ 3"
4'-0"
1
3 2"
Spacing Bars 4M
Spacing Strands N
412"
3"
1'-6"
412"
1'-6"
Bars 5K
Cover
3
4"
Bars 5Z
1
2"
Bars 4M
1'
-0"
5 sp. @ 312"
Strands N
Bars 4M1 or
MARK
Bars 4M3
Additional Bar
Bars 5K & 5Z)
1
2"
4M1 or 4M2 for
Skewed Ends
LENGTH
(NOTE 1)
9, 10 & 11
23 (End 1)
Varies
C2
9, 10 & 11
23 (End 2)
Varies
D1
9, 10, 11 & 14
46 (End 1)
Varies
D2
9, 10, 11 & 14
46 (End 2)
Varies
D3
9 & 14
See Table
4'-3"
2, 9, 11 & 13
See Table
M1
9 & 10
21 (End 1)
Varies
M2
9 & 10
21 (End 2)
Varies
M3
See Table
3'-8"
3 & 4
" Strand
Dim. L
C1
(Bundled with
NUMBER
REQUIRED
SIZE
(Typ.)
4M2 (Typ.)
Strand N
1'-5"
NOTE
NUMBERS
Bars 5Y
Bar 6A
4 ~ Bars 6A &
Strands N
7
16"
Cover
sp. @ 1'-0"
Max.
1
8"
BAR BENDING DETAILS
Bars 4M3
1'-0"
Bars 5K
2"
1
2"
18 sp. @ 6"
or 4M2
Spacing Bars 5Z
2 sp. @ 7"
30'-0"
9'-2"
Device (See Note 8)
9 & 11
16
7'-6"
2, 9, 11 & 13
12
8'-8"
312"
BENDING DIAGRAMS
(See Note 1)
1
2"/Sin
C=(17
6A
30'-0"
5Y
7'-6"
4M1 & 4M2
C/2
9"
Cover
3'-8"/Sin
4M3
3'-8"
3
4"
1
4"
6 sp. @
Bars 5Y
8'
-0"
6'
-1"
10"
Epoxy Coating
(See Note 5)
BARS 6A, 4M1,
BARS 3C1 & 3C2
4M2, 4M3 & 5Y

1
2"
1'-3
7"
6"
(Typ.)
5Z
5K
Bars 3C
3D1 or 3D2 for
Anchor Studs
Skewed Ends
(Typ.)
6"
1" Cover
1
4"
7"
412"
1
2"
required to clear
1
2"/Sin
)
B=(15"/Sin )
1'-0" Min.
Min.
Lap
314"
2" Cover
Additional Bar(s)
3
4"
Bars 3D (Pairs)
Typ.) Rotate as
8'
-2
Bar 3C
A=(8
2'
-0"
712"
Bars 3D (Pairs
7'
-8"
=90 for Bars 3D3

1'
-3
"
(End)
(Nominal)
BARS 5K & 5Z
A+B
1'-1112"
3D1 & 3D2

3D3
BARS 3D1, 3D2 & 3D3
(See Notes
2 & 9)
1
2"
Insert Spacing
(See Insert Notes)
3
4"
NOTES:
Chamfer
Bars 5Z (Typ.)
6 ~ Bars 3C1 or
Chamfer (Typ.
bottom of bottom
3'-2"
flange only)
as (
1'-6" Max.
Bars 3D3
3C2 & 3D1 or 3D2 (Pairs)
(Pairs) @ 1'-6"
(Pairs) sp. with
Max. sp.
Note 9)

Structures Plans.
of spaces S1 thru S4, see Florida-I Beam Table of Beam Variables in Structures Plans.
Bars 5Y (shown
End of
17 ~ Bars 3C1 or
3C2 & 3D1 or 3D2
Bars 5K (See
END VIEW
6"
Typ.)
Beam
Bar 5Z
5 sp. @
34 sp. @ 3"
Cover
1
2"
S1 sp. @ V1
S2 sp. @ 9"
S3 sp. @ 1'-0"
S4 sp. @ 1'-6"
(6" Max.)
1'-6" Max.

Bar 5K
Beam
Bar 5Z
12/17/2015

ELEVATION
END 1
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
1:
21:
29 PM
7"
1
2 4"
1
2 2"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
END 2
NO.
20096
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
21 ~ D16's @ 6" sp. = 10'-0"
D16's @ 1'-0" sp.
End of
1"
Varies
Optional W6.4
W6.4
Varies 9" Max.
1'-0" Max.
W6.4
Wires D31 (shown
(shown as (
as (
Typ.)
Typ.)
Beam
Optional W6.4
6"
W6.4
3'
-8"
7"
D16
Optional W6.4
6"
D16
1
4"
W6.4
Cover
Pieces K-1
Pieces K-2
(Offset)
(Typ.)
PLAN VIEW
PLAN VIEW
PIECE M-1
END VIEW
(2 Required)
to Piece K-2
(2 Required)
adjacent Piece S-1,

to Strands at Beam)
S-2, S-3 or S-4
1
2 2"
End of Beam
PIECE M-3
Match spacing of
Piece M-1 tied
17 ~ D25's (FF) @ 6" = 8'-0"

1
2"
6 ~ D31's @ 3
1
2"
sp. = 1'-5
6"
3"

S2 ~ D25's @ 9" sp. (Piece S-2)
17 ~ D25's (BF) @ 6" = 8'-0"
Pieces M-3
3
4"
1
2"
PIECES M
SECTION A-A
3
4"
1"
1" extension
S3 ~ D25's @ 1'-0" sp. (Piece S-3)
3"
6"
6"
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Varies 9" Max.
(Typ.)
3
4"
(Typ.)
2" Cover
S4 ~ D25's @ 1'-6" sp. (Piece S-4)
3" Offset
334"
258" Cover
Pieces M-1
3
4"
3
4"
8'
-2
D31 (Piece K-1)

2" Cover
(Typ.)
214" Cover
Beam (WWR
Symmetrical)
4" Piece K & S
(2" Min.)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
2"
1"
2" Cover
5"
Pieces D
1" extension (Typ.)
PIECES K & S
PIECE K-1
PIECE K-2
END VIEW
(Aligned EF)
Piece D-1 ties

to Piece K-1
1
2"
(4 Required ~
(Pairs)

(4 Required)
2 Pairs)
1
2"
6 ~ D11's @ 3
1'-3"
Cover
Cross W ires (
W 12.
4 or W 10)
534"
Pieces K (Pairs)
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
17 ~ D11's @ 6" sp. = 8'-0"
NOTES:

sp. =
1 4"
D11
1
2"
W4.4
Varies 1'-6" Max.
Varies 9" Max.
W4.4

W4.4
W4.4
3
4"

the WWR Option.
1
4"

D11 (Typ. Pieces
1:
21:
30 PM
6"
4"
1
1'-5 2"
1" extension (Typ.)
1
1'-11 2"
LEGEND:
D-1, D-2 & D-3)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/10
PIECE D-1
END VIEW
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
EF = Each Face
PIECES D
PIECE D-2
PIECE D-3
FF = Front Face
BF = Back Face

with Bars C and D.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20096
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
BEAM NOTES
K2
K1
Front Face of
Dim. L
2. Place one (1) Bar 4K, or 5Z at each location as detailed alternating the direction of the ends for each
Backwall or
Bearing
Pier or Bent
Bearing
Front Face of
J
bar (see "ELEVATION AT END OF BEAM", Sheet 3).
Backwall or
3. Strands N shall be ASTM A416, Grade 270, seven-wire strands " or larger, stressed to 10,000 lbs. each.
4. For beams with ends not to be encased in permanent concrete diaphragms, after detensioning cut wedge to
9
0
Pier or Bent
recess Prestressing Strands at the end of the beam without damaging the surrounding concrete. See "STRAND
=90
=90
CUTTING AND PROTECTING DETAIL" on Sheet 2.

5. For beams with ends not to be encased in permanent concrete diaphragms, protect end of recessed strands in
Beam
9
0
6. Unless otherwise noted, the minimum concrete cover for reinforcing steel shall be 2".
7. At the Contractor's option, welded deformed wire reinforcement may be used in lieu of Bars 3D, 4K, and 5Z
as shown on Sheet 4. Welded deformed wire reinforcement shall meet requirements of Specification Section 931.
Edge of Flange
8. Safety Line Anchorage Devices or sleeves are required and permitted in the top flange only to accommodate fall
END 1
protection systems used during construction. See shop drawings for details and spacing of any required embedments.
9. For beams with skewed end conditions, the end reinforcement, defined as Bars 3D1, 3D2, 4K, 4Y and 5Z placed
Dim. L
END 2
within the limits of Bars 3D in "ELEVATION AT END OF BEAM", shall be placed parallel to the skewed end of
the beam. Bars 3D and 4K, located beyond the limits of Bars 3D shall be placed perpendicular to the longitudinal
CASE 1
CONDITION 1
(Standard Orientation for New Construction)
axis of the beam. For placement locations, see "SKEWED BEAM END DETAILS". Adjust the dimensions of Bars 3D1
and 3D2, as shown on the "BENDING DIAGRAM" for skewed end conditions.
(Dim P = 0.0)
10. Placement of Bars 3D1 correspond to END 1, and Bars 3C2, correspond to END 2. END 1 and END 2 are shown on
the beam "ELEVATION".
Bearing
K
11. For Beams with vertically beveled end conditions, place first row of Bars 3D1, 3D2, 4K, 4Y and 5Z parallel to the
m.L
Di
end of the beam. Progressively rotate remaining bars within the limits of Bars 5Z until vertical by adjusting the
m.P
Di
spacing at the top of beam up to a maximum of 1". For welded deformed wire reinforcement, cut top cross wire
and rotate bars as required or reduce end cover at top of the beam to minimum 1".
Edge of Flange
3"
Front Face of
12. For beams with skewed end conditions, welded deformed wire reinforcement shall not be used for end confinement
Backwall or
reinforcement (Bars 3D1 and 3D2).
Pier or Bent
13. Bars 4K and 5Z shall be placed and tied to the fully bonded strands in the bottom or center row (see
< 90
"STRAND PATTERN" on the Table of Beam Variables in Structures Plans). For welded deformed wire reinforcement,
Beam
supplemental transverse bars are permitted to support Pieces K & S under the cross wires on the bottom row
< 90
of strands or Strands N.
Front Face of
14. At the Contractor's option, Bars 3D1, 3D2 and 3D3 may be fabricated as a two-piece bar with a 1'-0"
Backwall or
Pier or Bent
minimum lap splice of the bottom legs.
15. For referenced Dimensions, Angles and Case Numbers, see the Table of Beam Variables in Structures Plans.
Bearing
END 1
m.P
Di
m.L
Di
END 2
CASE 2
CONDITION 2
Beam
Di
m.L
Pier or Bent
Bearing
Bearing
Backwall or
Front Face of
Di
m.P
< 90
< 90
3"
Front Face of
Backwall or
Pier or Bent
Edge of Flange
Di
m.P
END 1
END 2
CASE 3

1:
21:
50 PM
Di
m.L
CONDITION 3
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
DETAILS AND NOTES

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
AASHTO TYPE II BEAM
NO.
20120
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Insert
Beam
Bars 4K spaced along

Beam @ 3"

to end of beam @ 3". Skewed
Bars 5Z, placed with Bars 4K *
Begin Welded Wire Reinforcement Option

when applicable, Piece S-1, see
Face of Beam Web
2
"
Sheet 4.
PLAN SECTION THRU BEAM WEB AT

Bars 4K (Typ.)
INSERT FOR DIAPHRAGM REINFORCING

(When Intermediate Diaphragms are Required by Design)
3" Chamfer
Bars 5Z (shown
Beam
dotted, Typ.)
INSERT NOTES
1. Provide 1" , zinc-electroplated, ferrule wing nut or coil inserts, UNC
threads, 1/0 minimum gage wire, not more than 4" in depth with a minimum
ultimate tensile strength of 11,400 lbs. in 4,000 psi concrete.
2. If inserts are needed on both sides (faces) of beam webs, an assembly as
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW (SHOWING TOP FLANGE)
long as the thickness of the beam web, consisting of two (2) ferrule or coil
inserts attached by two (2) or more struts may be utilized. The connecting
struts shall have a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 11,400 lbs.
(Bars 5A, 4Y & Strands N not shown for clarity)
3.
Inserts for diaphragm reinforcing are required at each end of each

intermediate diaphragm shown on the Beam Framing Plan and may be
required at the end of the beams when end diaphragms are shown. See
Superstructure and Beam Framing Plans for longitudinal location of
inserts for each face of beam.
* For number of Bars, spacing and

placement details see Sheet 3. See
INSERT DETAIL
Sheet 3 for Conventional Reinforcement,

Sheet 4 for Welded Wire Reinforcement.
Bars 4K spaced along Beam @

3". Bars 3D1 or 3D2, placed with
alternate Bars 4K *
to end of beam @ 3". Skewed

Bars 5Z, 3D1 or 3D2 placed
with Bars 4K *
Epoxy Coating
(" minimum thickness)
2
"
(See Beam Note 5,

End of
Bars 4K (Typ.)
Sheet 1)
3" Chamfer
Bars 5Z (shown
" Min.
Beam
dotted, Typ.)
End of
Beam
Beam
30
AASHTO
AASHTO
Type II
Type II
Strand Recess
(formed by cutting
or grinding)
Bars 3D1 or 3D2 (Pairs)

Begin Welded Wire Reinforcement
Welded Wire Reinforcement not permitted for Bars
3D1 or 3D2 in this area, for skewed beam ends
Option when applicable, Piece S-1,

see Sheet 4.
" Min.
Recessed
Prestressing
Strand
Strand
(size varies)
PARTIAL SECTION THRU WEB (SHOWING BOTTOM FLANGE)
TYPICAL SECTION
TYPICAL SECTION
SHOWING CUT STRAND RECESS LIMITS
AFTER PROTECTING
1:
21:
51 PM
(Bars 4Y & Strands not shown for clarity)
12/17/2015
SKEWED BEAM END DETAILS FOR WIDENING EXISTING BRIDGES
STRAND CUTTING AND PROTECTING DETAIL
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
DETAILS AND NOTES

LAST
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
AASHTO TYPE II BEAM
NO.
20120
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4

FOR ONE BEAM ONLY
Spacing Bars 4K
2"
NOTE
S1 sp. @ V1
12 sp. @ 3"
MARK
1'-0"
2"
4"
4"
Spacing Bars 5Z
2"
Spacing Strands N
2 "
3"
Bar 5A
of Bars 5A
12'-0"
12
See Table
See Table
9, 11 & 14
12
2, 9, 11 & 13
See Table
4'-4"
DIM L+5"
Bars 5A & Strands N
LENGTH
(NOTE 1)
" Strand
3 & 5
9 & 11
2'-6"
2, 9, 11 & 13
3'-7"
Bars 4Y
(Bundled with
BENDING DIAGRAMS
(See Note 1)
7"
Bars 3D (Typ.)
(See Note 14)

1" Clear (Min.)
5Z
4K
Optional Splice
4K
5Z
3"
1'
-6"
6"
4
"
Bars 3D1 or 3D2

Bars 4Y
B/2
6"
5"
2'
-7"
2" Clear
B/2
3'
-2 "
6"
B
(See Table)
4
"
6"
of bar bend
8"
1'
-3"
3"
To outside
Bars 4K & 5Z)

Strand N
3'
-0"
9, 11 & 14
D2
Bars 4K (Typ.)
1" Clear to End
10"
6"
Bars 5Z
Strands N
2" Bars 5A
Device (See Note 8)
D1
@ 3"
Bars 4K
3 sp.
NUMBER
REQUIRED
SIZE
NUMBERS
6"
7"
BARS 3D1 & 3D2
BARS 4K & 5Z
1" Chamfer
Insert Spacing
Bars 5Z (Typ.)
(See Insert Notes)

1'-6"
3" (Nominal)
" Chamfer (Typ. bottom
6"
sp. with Bars 4K as shown
(See Notes 2 & 9)
of bottom flange only)
7 ~ Bars 3D1 or 3D2 @ 6" max.
(See Note 9)
5 ~ Bars 3D1 or 3D2

sp. with Bars 4K
5A
12'-0"
4Y
2'-5"
(See Note 9)
BARS 5A & 4Y
END VIEW
NOTES:
Work this Index with the AASHTO Type II Beam Table of Beam Variables in Structures Plans.
For referenced notes, see Sheet 1.
For Dimensions L, R, V1 thru V4 and number

of spaces S1 thru S4, see AASHTO Type II
Beam - Table of Beam Variables.
Bars 4Y (shown
as (
DIM L = Beam Casting Length
))
on grade and DIM R to compensate for elastic and time dependent shortening effects)
End of
Beam
2"
12 sp. @ 3"
S1 sp. @ V1 (6" max.)
S2 sp. @ V2
S3 sp. @ V3
S4 sp.
2"
@ V4

2"
1 "
6"
Bars 5Z
Bars 4K
Beam
1:
21:
52 PM
Bar 5Z
END 1
END 2
ELEVATION
12/17/2015
SECTION A-A
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
STANDARD DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
AASHTO TYPE II BEAM
NO.
20120
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
End of
Wires D31 (shown
(shown as (
as (
Typ.)
Typ.)
6"
1 "
Beam
1
4"
Cover
Pieces K-1
Pieces K-2
(Offset)
SECTION A-A
Match spacing
of adjacent
5 ~ D16's (FF)
Piece S-1, S-2,
S-3 or S-4
to Strands at Beam)
@ 6" = 2'-0"
3
4"
2"
End of Beam
@ 3" sp.
6"
3"
3"
= 9"
5 ~ D16's (BF)
S2 ~ D16's @ 9" sp. (Piece S-2)
@ 6" = 2'-0"
S3 ~ D16's @ 1'-0" sp. (Piece S-3)
6"
Support Wire
Permitted
S4 ~ D16's @ 1'-6" sp. (Piece S-4)
6"
(Typ.)
4 ~ D31's
3" Offset
(Typ.)
Strands N
Varies 9" Max.
(Typ.)
2" Cover
3
4"
3"

534"
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
3'
-2
3
4"
Pieces K (Pairs)
1"
5"
2" Cover
2"
Cover
Cross W ires
Cover
(2" Min.)
(
W 12.
4 or W 10)
1
4"
Strands N
W12.4 (Piece K-1)
4" Piece K & S
2"
2 "
D31 (Piece K-1
1" extension (Typ.)
PIECE K-1
PIECES K & S
(Aligned EF)
END VIEW
Piece D-1 ties
(4 Required ~
to Piece K-1
2 Pairs)
(Conventional Reinforcing Bars A, Y and

Bottom Strands not Shown for Clarity)
Beam (WWR
Symmetrical)
4 ~ D11's @
3" sp. = 9"
3"
W4.4
NOTES:
S4 & V1.
W4.4
"
3
"
4
BF Shown Dashed)
8 ~ D11's @ 6" sp. = 3'-6"
4
"
7"
(4 Required)
7"
W4.4
PIECE K-2
(FF Shown Solid,
b. Place Conventional Reinforcement Bars 5A as shown on

Sheet 3. Place additional Bars 4Y as shown in Section A-A
D11
with the WWR Option.
3"
1:
21:
53 PM
for Welded Wire Reinforcement. Bars 5Z will not be used

1'-1"
D11 (Typ. Pieces

1" extension (Typ.)
D-1 & D-2)
d. For beams with skewed end conditions, Pieces D-1 & D-2
LEGEND:
12/17/2015
EF = Each Face
PIECES D
PIECE D-1
PIECE D-2
END VIEW
FF = Front Face
BF = Back Face
shall not be used; Conventional Reinforcement Bars D1 &

D2 shall be used. See Sheet 2 Skew Details and Sheet 1
Note 9 for placement details. Shift Pieces K & Bars 4Y to
accommodate skewed end conditions and align with Bars D.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
STANDARD DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
AASHTO TYPE II BEAM
NO.
20120
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
Tangent Grade
Dim . "
D"
Dim . "
B"
Dim. "C"
Bottom of Deck
BEAM CAMBER AND BUILD-UP NOTES:

The build-up values given in the Data Table* are based on theoretical beam cambers.
The Contractor shall monitor beam cambers for the purpose of predicting
camber values at the time of the deck pour. If the predicted cambers based
Span
on field measurements differ more than +/-
1
2"
from the theoretical "Net Beam
Camber @ 120 Days" shown in the Data Table*, obtain approval from the Engineer
Top of Beam
to modify the build-up dimensions as required. When the measured beam cambers
create a conflict with the bottom mat of deck steel, notify the Engineer a minimum
Begin Span
of 21 days prior to casting.
End Span
Dim. "A" includes the weight of the Stay-In-Place Formwork.
BUILD-UP DIAGRAM FOR TANGENT SPANS
Dim. "A"
Span
End Span
Bearing
Bottom of Deck
Begin Span
Bearing
Dim. "C"
Dim . "
D"
Dim . "
B"
(ALONG BEAM) (CASE 1)
Span
Top of Beam
DEAD LOAD DEFLECTION DIAGRAM
A
Begin Span
End Span
BUILD-UP DIAGRAM FOR SAG VERTICAL CURVE & HORIZONTAL CURVE SPANS
Top Flange Width (Varies)
Sl
o
p
e = Va
r
i
e
s
Bottom of Deck
Dim . "
D"
Dim . "
B"
Dim. "C"
Bridge Deck
(Varies)
Span
Top of Beam
1
2"
Beam (Beam
Design Min.
Type Varies)
A
Begin Span
End Span
For Cases 1, 2 & 3 = DIM "C"
For Case 4 = DIM "B" or DIM "D"
BUILD-UP DIAGRAM FOR CREST VERTICAL CURVE SPANS
SECTION A-A
- CONTROL AT SPAN
BUILD-UP OVER BEAMS
(Florida-I Beam Shown

AASHTO Type II Similar)
Bottom of Deck
DIM "
D"
Dim . "
B"
Dim. "C"
A
Span
Top of Beam
1:
22:
25 PM
Begin Span
* NOTE:
End Span
Work this Index with the Build-up and Deflection

Data Table for Florida-I and AASHTO Type II Beams
12/17/2015
- CONTROL AT BEGIN OR END SPAN
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
BUILD-UP & DEFLECTION DATA FOR
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRESTRESSED I-BEAMS
NO.
20199
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Dim. L
* Dim. B
* Dim. B
Bars 5E
Bars 5K
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Dim. L
Dim. L
Dim. P
Bars 4F
* Dim. B
Bars 4F @
equal spaces
Bars 5K
Bars 4F
@ 3" (Typ.)
Bars 4F @
equal spaces
Bars 5E
(Typ.)
@ 3"
Bars 5E
Bars 5K
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bars 4F
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
9
0
Bars 4F
Bars 5L
@ 3"
Bars 5B (Typ.)
Bars 4F
(Typ.)
Bars 4C
Bars 4C
(Typ.)
Bars 4C
(Typ.)
2" Cl.
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bars 5L
Bars 5L
2
"Cl
.
2" Cl.
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
2" Cl.
(Typ.)
(
Ty
p
.
)
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
** 90
** 90
2" Cl.
Dim. P
Bars 4F
(Typ.)
Bars 5B (Typ.)
Bars 5B (Typ.)
* Dim. B
** 90
.
"Cl
2
(Typ.)
10"
10"
Bars 5K
10"
)
.
p
Ty
(
90
Bars 5K (Typ.)
Bars 5K (Typ.)
@ 3" (Typ.)
* Dim. B is 1'-6" for Florida-U 48
** Concrete face may be sloped
and 54 Beams and 2'-0" for
Bars 5K @
with a maximum 1:24 draft to
Florida-U 63 and 72 Beams.
Bars 5K
Bars 5K
@ 3"
@ 3"
* Dim. B
Dim. P
Dim. P
Bars 5K (Typ.)
* Dim. B
Bars 5K @
equal spaces
equal spaces
facilitate formwork removal.
CONDITION 1
(P = 0.0)
CONDITION 2
CONDITION 3

Front Face of
Pier or Bent
Bearing
Bearing
Front Face of
J
J
Outside Edge of Top Flange
K1
K1
K2
K1
Backwall or
Bearing
Backwall or
Pier or Bent
K2
Bearing
Bearing
Outside Edge
of Bottom Flange
Front Face of
Backwall or
Pier or Bent
Beam
75 90
Beam
Beam
75 90
Beam
75 90
=90
=90
END 2
Front Face of
Backwall or
END 2
END 1
Bearing
Outside Edge of Bottom Flange
Outside Edge of Bottom Flange
END 1
END 1
Pier or Bent
END 2
K2
1:
22:
49 PM
CASE 1
CASE 2
CASE 3

NOTE:
Work this Index with Florida-U Beam - Table
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
of Beam Variables in Structures Plans.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TYPICAL FLORIDA-U BEAM DETAILS AND NOTES
NO.
20210
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
BEAM NOTES
2. Strands N (Dormant Strands) shall be ASTM A416, Grade 270, seven-wire

strands " or larger, stressed to 10,000 lbs. each.
3. Unless otherwise noted in Structures Plans, the minimum concrete cover
for reinforcing steel shall be 2".
4. At the option of the Contractor and with the Engineer's Approval, deformed
welded wire reinforcement (WWR) may be used in lieu of Bars 6A1, 4A2, 5B, 4C, 3D,
5E, 4F, 4G, 4H, 5K, 5L and 4M except as noted below in note 7, provided the
wire sizes and spacing match those shown on the Standard Beam Detail sheets
for these bars. WWR must consist of Deformed wire meeting the requirements
of Specification Section 931.
5. Safety Line Anchorage Devices or sleeves are required and permitted in the top
flanges only to accommodate fall protection systems used during construction. See
Florida-U Beam
shop drawings for details and spacing of any required embedments.

Temporary Blocking (See
Composite Neoprene
Note 12) (Typ.)
Bearing Pad
6. For Beams with vertically beveled end conditions when "Dim. P" exceeds 1",
Bars 5E and the first Bars 4F and 5K shall be placed parallel to the end of
the beam. The remaining Bars 4F and 5K within the limits of "Dim. B" shall
be fanned at equal spaces.

7. Welded deformed wire reinforcement shall not be used for the end reinforcement
Pedestal
(Bars 5B, 4C, 3D, 5E, 4F, 5K, and 5L) for beams with skewed end conditions
or vertically beveled end conditions when "Dim. P" exceeds 1".
Pier/Bent Cap
8. Bars 5K shall be placed and tied to the fully bonded strands in the bottom
row (see "STRAND PATTERN" in Structures Plans).
9. Strand Protection at beam ends shall consist of a 2" deep recess formed
around all strands (including dormant) or strand groups. Extend recess to
face of web and bottom of flange for bottom row of strands.
After
detensioning, cut strands " from recessed surface and fill the recess with
TEMPORARY BLOCKING OF BEAM ENDS
a Type F-2 or Q Epoxy Compound in accordance with Section 926 of the
Specifications.
10. Use Size No. 67 maximum sized aggregate.
11. Use Stay-in-Place metal deck forms inside the beams.
12. Prior to deck placement, based on the deck forming system and deck placement
sequence, evaluate and provide, if necessary, temporary bracing between the U Beams.
All Sides
2"
rotations that occur during placement of the deck. Leave temporary blocking and bracing
in place for a minimum of four days after the deck placement.

Bottom Flange, Web
13. For referenced Dimensions, Angles and Case Numbers see Table of Beam Variables
& Dormant Strands
1"
(
See Note 9)
of every beam. Ensure the temporary blocking is adequate to resist movements and
End of Beam
Strands
1"
1" M in. ~ 3" M ax.
Also, prior to deck placement, provide temporary blocking under each web at both ends
1
2"
Trim Strands after

Detensioning
1:
22:
49 PM
TYPICAL STRAND BLOCKOUT DETAIL
NOTE:
12/17/2015
Work this Index with Florida-U Beam - Table
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
of Beam Variables in Structures Plans.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
TYPICAL FLORIDA-U BEAM DETAILS AND NOTES
NO.
20210
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
7'-10"
Spacing Bars 5K (In Pairs)
2'-7"
4'-3 "
3 "
1'
-9"
Bars 4C place
Bars 4M (Typ.)
Bars 6A1
Bars 5L
(See Note 9)
Bars 4F (Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bars 6A1 (Typ.)
with Bars 5L
2"
Cl
. (
Ty
p.
)
5"
(
Ty
p.
)
3"
Strand
Blockout
(See
Note 9)
Omit these Bars 4A2 only
4"
as shown (Typ.)
3"
4'
-0"
11"
Bars 4A2 ~
Bars
3D1
(Typ.)
and Strand N
(Typ.)
6"
Bars 5L
Bars 6A1, 4A2
Bars 5K (Typ.)
Bars 4A2
2 sp. @
8"
4 sp. @
Bars 4A2 (Typ.)
4 sp. @ 3"
Strand N
1'
-2"
8"
3 sp. @
Bars 5K (Typ.)
14 sp. @ 6"
7"
Bars 5K as shown (Typ.)
8 "
9"
16 sp. @ 3"
5 " 4"
Clear
Bars 5L
Spacing
3"
Bars 4M lap with
top flange only)
"
1'-6 "
14 sp. @ 6"
(In Pairs)
2 "
1"
(Typ. bottom of
Spacing Bars 4F 2 "
2'
-6"
" Chamfer
1 "
21 sp. @ 3"
Strand N Blockout
7 "
2 "
(Typ.) (See Note 5)
Bars 4C
Anchorage Device
Spacing
Safety Line
Beam
Spacing Bars A
8"
6 "
Strand N
Strand N
Spacing Bars 4M (in Pairs)
2"
3 "
1'-4"
1'
-0"
1 "
2'-7"
1'-4"
3"
as required when strands
Drain
are provided at or above
Pipe
their locations (Typ.).
and 5K as shown (Typ.)
Note: Bars A are
10" (Typ.)
shown as (
10"
Bars 3D1 lap with Bars 3D2
1 " Chamfer (Typ. bottom

Bars 3D2
* Reinforcing steel is symmetrical
Bars 5E
NOTES:
4'-8"
about Beam for Half
Bars 4C
Bars 5B
Bars 3D2
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bars 4A2
Work this Index with Index No. 20210 - Typical
Sections A-A and B-B.
* Half Section A-A
* Half Section B-B
Bars 3D1 and 3D2 ~ 12 sp. @ 6" sp. with
Florida-U Beam Details and Notes and the

Florida-U Beam - Table of Beam Variables
** Intermediate Diaphragms shall be provided:

(1)
Bars 3D1
Bars 5K as shown
1 " x 3 " Chamfer
- At midspan.
TYPICAL SECTION
(2) - At 20'-0" Max. from midspan when

For referenced notes see Index No. 20210.
beam length (L) exceeds 60 Ft.
Dim. L = Casting Length (Overall Length of Beam along Beam including length increase as required for
beam placed on grade and Dim. R to compensate for elastic and time dependent shortening effects)
Beam
A
3"
21 sp. @ 3"
14 sp. @ 6"
S1 sp. @ V1
Spacing Bars 5K
S2 sp. @ V2
S3 sp.
(Bars 4M tied to Bars 5K, not shown)
@ V3
(Symmetrical about @ top of Beam)
***
Bars 5K (Typ.)
End Face
(Typ.)
1'-0" (Typ.)
1'-6" End Diaphragm (Typ.)
Void Face (Typ.)
END 2
END 1
1:
23:
11 PM
(when required) **
Varies
(when required) **
15'-0" Min. ~ 20'-0" Max.
Spacing Intermediate Diaphragms **

*** Begin or end Bars 4M (see "ELEVATION
12/17/2015
AT END OF BEAM" above)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
ELEVATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
FLORIDA-U 48 BEAM - STANDARD DETAILS
NO.
20248
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
Fan 5 Bars 5K and 4M @
Bars 5L
Bars 5E (NS) and
Bars 4C
Bars 5B (FS)
Bars 5K
Bars 4F
Void Face
5 equal
Bars 5E
Bars 4C (Typ.)
Bars 5L (NS) and

Bars 4C (FS)
1
2"
Drain Pipe (Note 1)
End of Beam
90 (Note 2)
Drain Pipe (Typ.)
1
4"
Mesh
3
8"
1'
-3
3" Chamfer
Drain Cover with
5 sp. @
3
4"
Galv. Screen Wire
Bars 5L (NS)
4"
1
2"
4"
6" (
along of Beam )
Typ.)
1
2"
x 3
Chamfer
Stirrup Transition Z one
8"
= 2'
-8"
4 sp. @
Strand N
(Shown
as (
Bars 5B
Bars 5L
Bars A
Transition to V1 spacing
V1
Void Face
1'-9" Min. Lap

1'-4" Min. Lap
S1 sp. @
Bars 5L (
NS)
Spacing
758"
Bars 4C (
FS)
Void Face
Bars 4F (Typ.)
= 2'
-0"
3 sp. @
8"
814"
Spacing
Void Face
spaces
Beam
Bars 5K
(Typ.)
Bars 4M
(Typ.)
Bars 3D1
Bars 5K (Typ.)
(Typ.)
Beam
3"
6"
6"
Bars 5L
3" Spacing
Bars 5B and 5E
8"
and Bars 5B (FS)
9 sp. @
1'-6"
4'-8"
END VIEW AT END DIAPHRAGM
SECTION C-C
Bars 4M
1. Drains shall be placed adjacent to each web at each
be 2" Nominal Pipe Size, Schedule 80 PVC. Provide
3"
removable pipe plugs to prevent concrete entrance

during beam casting. Plugs to be removed from the
inside after casting. Galvanized screen wire shall cover
the end of the pipe and bent down around the sides of
draft to facilitate formwork removal.
3" 4 sp.
Bars 4C
2. Concrete face may be sloped with a maximum 1:24
1'
-6"
3"
@
End of
Beam
Bars 5L
Bars 5E
2 sp. @ 8" 4" 4" 2 sp. @ 8"
Bars 4F
Spacing Bars
1:
23:
12 PM
5B and 5E
Spacing Bars 5K (Along of Beam)
(Bars 4F and 4M are Paired with
3
4"
Chamfer along the
Bars 5L
End of Beam
Bars 5E
(Typ.)
75 90
Bars 4F
2" Cl.
3" 4 sp.
3"
(Typ.)
the pipe, a minimum of 1" and secured prior to casting.
2" Clear
Bars 5B
(Typ.)
ar
Cle
2"
16 sp. @
3" Chamfer (Typ.)
Void Face
Bars 5B
3"
beam end (four drains per beam). Drain Pipe shall
16 sp. @
(Typ.)
3"
Void Face
3"
Beam
(Typ.)
Bars 5K
ar
Cle
2"
Bars 4C
NOTES:
1'
-6"
5 sp. @ 8" = 3'-4"
6"
(Typ.)
8"
Spacing Bars 5E (NS)
3
4"
2 sp. @ 8" 4" 4" 2 sp. @ 8"
Spacing Bars 5B and 5E
Chamfer along the Vertical Face
of the Top Flange and Web and Underside
Bars 5K as shown)
of the Top Flange (Typ.)
Vertical Face of the Top

Flange and Web and
Underside of the Top
Flange (Typ.)
TOP VIEW OF SKEWED END DIAPHRAGM

AND STIRRUP TRANSITION ZONE
(Bars 3D2 Not Shown For Clarity)
Bars 5K as shown)
12/17/2015
TOP VIEW OF END DIAPHRAGM
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
(Bars 3D1 And 3D2 Not Shown For Clarity)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20248
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3

Beam
Bars 4G
(Typ.)
3" Chamfer
6"
FOR ONE BEAM ONLY
2" Clear
NO. REQD.
LENGTH
A1
Dim. L - 4"
A2
10
Dim. L - 4"
12
4'-1"
16
5'-1"
D1
156
1'-6"
D2
26
4'-6"
24
5'-3"
20
6'-2"
See Table
4'-0"
See Table
4'-7"
See Table
8'-0"
20
14'-0"
See Table
3'-11"
" Strand
Dim. L - 3"
6"
6"
SIZE
4'
-3"
Bars 4H
MARK
3'
-7"
Spacing Varies
(Typ.)
Bars 5K and 4M
6"
(Typ.)
Spacing Bars 4G
6 sp. @ 6" = 3'-0"
Bars 4M (Typ.)
Bars 5K (Typ.)
Bars 5B
6"
TOP VIEW OF
INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
1'-0"
Beam
Diaphragm
6"
Top Flange
4'-6"
Bars 5E
8"
Field Bend
Top of
5'-2"
Diaphragm
Bars 4G
Bars 4M
as Required
for Skew
1'-0"
Bars 4H
3" Pin
(Typ.)
3'-7"
Bars 4H
Bars A
(Shown
Top of
as (
Bottom
Typ.)
3'
-4"
(Typ.)
5"
= 2'
-0"
8"
3D2
Strand N
Intermediate
3 sp. @
L - 4" (Min. Lap Splice = 2'-7")

Bars 6A1, 4A2 and 3D2
of Beam
(Typ.)
6A1
4A2
1'
-6"
Min. Lap
Bars 4G
Top of
6"
Bars 5K
1'-4"
4"
D
Bars 5K
Bars 3D1
6"
90 (Note 2)
Bars 4C
90 (Note 2)
"
0
1
Flange
1'
-4"
of Beam
8"
Pipe Drain
6"
Drain Pipe
Bars 5K
10'
-0"
Spacing Bars 4H
(Typ.)
(Note 1)
(Typ.)
Spacing Bars 4G
10"
6 sp. @ 6" = 3'-0"
1'
-0"
Bars 4F
3" Chamfer
3'-7"
Bars 4G
Bars 4H
SECTION D-D
10"
1'-0"
4'-8"
1'-0"
3"

Field Bend
intermediate diaphragm (two drains per intermediate
5"
"
0
1
as Required
diaphragm). Drain Pipe shall be 2" Nominal Pipe Size,
for Skew
Schedule 80 PVC. Provide removable pipe plugs to
6"
NOTES:
1'
-4 "
4'
-3 "
Pin
SECTION AT INTERMEDIATE DIAPHRAGM
1:
23:
12 PM
prevent concrete entrance during beam casting.

Plugs to be removed from the inside after casting.
2. Concrete face may be sloped with a maximum
1'-0 "
3'-0"
4'-0"
1 "
1:24 draft to facilitate formwork removal.

3. Intermediate diaphragms must be cast and concrete
Bars 5K
Bars 5L
Bars 4M
12/17/2015
release strength obtained prior to removing beam
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
from casting bed.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20248
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
8'-1"
Spacing Bars 5K (In Pairs)
2'-8 "
4'-3 "
5"
1 "
1 "
1'
-9"
(Typ.)
8"
2 sp. @
5"
Bars 4F (Typ.)
2"
Cl
. (
Ty
p.
)
(
Ty
p.
)
Note: Bars A are

shown as (
3"
Strand
Blockout
(See
Note 9)
4"
3"
Bars 5L
(Typ.)
with Bars 5L
8"
Bars 6A1
Bars 6A1 (Typ.)
Bars 4A2
Bars
3D1
Bars 4C place
as shown (Typ.)
Bars 4M (Typ.)
and Strand N
Strand N
1'
-0"
Bars 5L
Bars 6A1, 4A2
Bars 5K (Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bars 4A2
1'
-8"
6"
Bars 4A2 (Typ.)
4 sp. @ 3"
(See Note 9)
4'
-6"
Bars 5L
Spacing
7 "
4 sp. @
7 "
4 sp. @
Bars 5K (Typ.)
16 sp. @ 6"
Bars 4A2
8 "
9"
18 sp. @ 3"
5 " 4"
top flange only)
"
3"
1"
(Typ. bottom of
16 sp. @ 6"
(In Pairs)
Bars 4M lap with
1'
-0"
" Chamfer
1'-6 "
Strand N Blockout
7 "
2 "
(Typ.) (See Note 5)
Bars 4C
Anchorage Device
Spacing
Safety Line
Spacing Bars 4F 2 "
2 "
Spacing Bars A
8"
6 "
Strand N
*
Beam
Strand N
23 sp. @ 3"
7"
5"
1'-4"
3'
-0"
1 "
2'-8 "
Clear
1'-4"
3"
Drain
Pipe

10"

10" (Typ.)
Bars 3D2
Bars 5E
4'-8"
NOTES:
about Beam for Half
Bars 4C
Bars 5B
Bars 3D1
Bars 3D2
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bars 4A2
* Half Section A-A
* Half Section B-B
Bars 3D1 and 3D2 ~ 14 sp. @ 6" sp. with Bars 5K as shown

** Intermediate Diaphragms shall be provided:
(1)
1 " x 3 " Chamfer
TYPICAL SECTION
- At midspan.
(2) - At 20'-0" Max. from midspan when
beam length (L) exceeds 60 Ft.

Dim. L = Casting Length (Overall Length of Beam along Beam including length increase as required for beam placed on grade and DIM R to compensate for elastic and time dependent shortening effects)
Beam
A
3"
23 sp. @ 3"
16 sp. @ 6"
S1 sp. @ V1
Spacing Bars 5K
S2 sp. @ V2
S3 sp.
@ V3
***
Bars 5K (Typ.)
End Face
(Typ.)
Void Face (Typ.)
1'-6" End Diaphragm (Typ.)
(when required) **
1'-0"
(when required) **
(Typ.)
END 2
1:
24:
32 PM
END 1
Varies

12/17/2015
15'-0" Min. ~ 20'-0" Max.

LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
ELEVATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20254
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
1'-4" Min. Lap
Bars 4C
Bars 5B (FS)
Bars 5K
Bars 4F
Void Face
Void Face
Bars 5E
Bars 4F (Typ.)
Typ.)
Bars 5L (NS) and
Bars 4C (FS)
Drain Pipe (Typ.)
Drain Cover with

" Mesh
5 sp. @
Bars 5L (NS)
1 " x 3 " Chamfer
8"
5 equal
(Typ.)
Bars 3D1
(Typ.)
Beam
Spacing Bars 5E (NS) and
5 sp. @ 8" = 3'-4"
3"
6"
6"
1'-6"
4'-8"
Bars 5L
3" Spacing
Bars 5B and 5E
8"
Bars 5B (FS)
(Typ.)
SECTION C-C
Bars 4C
Bars 4M
(Typ.)

3"

18 sp. @
3" Chamfer (Typ.)
(Typ.)
2" Clear
1'
-6"
3"
@

2" Cl.
Bars 5L
Beam
Bars 5K as shown)
Bars 5E
2 sp. @ 8" 4" 4" 2 sp. @ 8"
Bars 4F
" Chamfer along the
End of Beam
Bars 5E
(Typ.)
75 90
Bars 4F
2 sp. @ 8" 4" 4" 2 sp. @ 8"
" Chamfer along the Vertical Face


Flange and Web and
3"
3"
3" 4 sp.
Bars 4C
3"
(Typ.)
Bars 5L
ar
Cle
2"
3" 4 sp.
Bars 5B

Bars 5B
End of
1:
24:
33 PM
Void Face
3"
Beam
Void Face
18 sp. @
(Typ.)
ar
Cle
2"
NOTES:
Bars 5K
(Typ.)
Bars 4M
Bars 5K (Typ.)
4"
4"
Bars 5K
1'
-6"
8"
90(Note 2)
3" Chamfer
Galv. Screen Wire
8 "
1'
-3 "
Drain Pipe (Note 1)
End of Beam
3 "
Bars 4C (Typ.)
6"
as (
11 sp. @
7 "
= 2'
-6"
4 sp. @
7 "
= 2'
-6"
4 sp. @
(Typ.)
Strand N
(Shown
6" (
along of Beam )
Bars 5B
Bars 5L
Bars A
Bars 5E (NS) and

V1
Bars 5L
S1 sp. @
Void Face
1'-9" Min. Lap
spaces
Bars 5L (
NS)
7 "
Spacing
Bars 4C (
FS)
8 " Spacing
Beam
Void Face

Flange (Typ.)

Bars 5K as shown)
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20254
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3

6"
FOR ONE BEAM ONLY

Beam
3" Chamfer
Bars 4G
(Typ.)
MARK
SIZE
NO. REQD.
LENGTH
A1
Dim. L - 4"
A2
12
Dim. L - 4"
12
4'-7"
20
5'-3"
D1
180
1'-6"
D2
30
4'-6"
24
5'-9"
20
6'-4"
See Table
4'-6"
See Table
4'-9"
See Table
8'-6"
24
16'-2"
See Table
3'-11"
" Strand
Dim. L - 3"
6"
Bars 4H
Bars 5K and 4M
6 sp. @ 6" = 3'-0"
Bars 4M (Typ.)
Bars 5K (Typ.)
TOP VIEW OF
6"
3D2
4'-6"
of Beam
Field Bend
1'
-6"
4"
Bars 5E
Top Flange
6"
(Typ.)
Strand N
8"
Bars 4G

Bars 5K
1'-4"
Min. Lap
6A1
4A2
Diaphragm
Top of
4'
-9"
6"
1'-0"
Bars 5K
Bars 3D1
6"
Bars 5B
Beam
6"
6"
2" Clear
(Typ.)
Spacing Bars 4G
4'
-1"
Spacing Varies
(Typ.)
Top of
5'-4"
as Required
for Skew
1'-0"
Intermediate
3" Pin
5"
(Typ.)
Bars A
Bars 4H
(Shown
Bars 4C
"
0
1
Top of
Bottom
Typ.)
90 (Note 2)
90 (Note 2)
Bars 4F
Flange
of Beam
11'
-8"
1'
-4"
8"
6"
3" Chamfer
Pipe Drain
1'
-0"
as (
3'
-10"
3'-9"
Bars 4H
(Typ.)
= 2'
-6"
7 "
Bars 4M
4 sp. @
Diaphragm
Bars 4G
3'-9"
Bars 4G
Bars 4H
Drain Pipe
Bars 5K
1'-0"
(Note 1)
1'-0"
(Typ.)
Spacing Bars 4G
10"
6 sp. @ 6" = 3'-0"
3"
SECTION D-D
10"
Field Bend
"
0
1
as Required
for Skew
6"
1'
-4 "
4'-8"
5"
Pin
NOTES:
4'
-9 "
Spacing Bars 4H
(Typ.)
1:
24:
34 PM

1'-2 "
3'-0"
4'-6"
1 "
Bars 5K
Bars 5L
Bars 4M
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
from casting bed.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20254
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
8'-5 "
2'-10 "
(Typ. bottom of
Clear
1 "
Bars 5L
Spacing
1'
-9"
"
22 sp. @ 3"
17 sp. @ 6"
6 sp. @ 3"
Bars 6A1, 4A2

Bars 5K (Typ.)
5 " 4"
Bars 4M lap with
top flange only)
17 sp. @ 6"
(In Pairs)
Bars 4M (Typ.)
and Strand N
Bars 6A1
Bars 5L
(See Note 9)
Bars 4F (Typ.)
1"
" Chamfer
3"
2'-0 "
Strand N Blockout
8 "
2 "
(Typ.) (See Note 5)
Spacing Bars 4F 2 "
2"
Spacing Bars A
Bars 4C
Anchorage Device
1 "
*
Beam
Spacing
Safety Line
7"
4'-3 "
9 "
6 "
1'-4"
29 sp. @ 3"
7"
7"
Strand N
1 "
2'-10 "
11 "
1'-4"
Strand N
Spacing Bars 5K (In Pairs) 3"
Bars 4A2
(Typ.)
Bars 6A1 (Typ.)
8 "
Strand N
(Typ.)
5"
(
Ty
p.
)
Blockout
(See
3"
Note 9)
10"
Bars 5L
shown as (
Bars
Strand
Note: Bars A are
Bars 4A2 (Typ.)

6"
5'
-3"
8"
5 sp. @
2"
Cl
. (
Ty
p.
)
2'
-5"
8"
Bars 5K (Typ.)
5 sp. @
as shown (Typ.)
3'
-9"
Bars 4A2
with Bars 5L
3 sp. @
9"
9 "
Bars 4C place
3D1
(Typ.)
about Beam for Half
Drain
Pipe
3"
6"

10"

10" (Typ.)
Bars 3D2
Bars 5B
Bars 4C
provided:
(1)
Bars 5E
NOTES:
4'-8"
** Intermediate Diaphragms shall be
Bars 3D1
Bars 3D2
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bars 4A2

* Half Section A-A
- At midspan.
* Half Section B-B
(2) - At 25'-0" Max. from midspan

1 " x 3 " Chamfer
TYPICAL SECTION
when beam length (L) exceeds 70 Ft.

Dim. L = Casting Length (Overall Length of Beam along Beam including length increase as required for beam placed on grade and DIM R to compensate for elastic and time dependent shortening effects)
Beam
3"
29 sp. @ 3"
17 sp. @ 6"
S1 sp. @ V1
S2 sp. @ V2
Spacing Bars 5K
S3 sp.
@ V3
Bars 5K (Typ.)
***
End Face
(Typ.)
Void Face (Typ.)
1:
25:
05 PM
2'-0"
End Diaphragm (Typ.)
(when required) **
1'-0"
(when required) **
(Typ.)
END 2
END 1
12/17/2015
Varies
20'-0" Min. ~ 25'-0" Max.


LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
ELEVATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20263
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
V1
Bars 5B
5 equal
Bars 4F (Typ.)
S1 sp. @
Void Face
Bars 5E
Bars A
Bars 5L
(Shown
as (
(Typ.)
Typ.)
Bars 4C (Typ.)
Bars 5L (NS) and

Bars 4C (FS)
Drain Pipe (Note 1)
End of Beam
1
2"
90 (Note 2)
Galv. Screen Wire
3" Chamfer
5 sp. @
6"
Void Face
Bars 5K
Bars 4F
Strand N
Drain Cover with
Drain Pipe (Typ.)
" Mesh
3
8 8"
1'
-134"
Bars 4C
Void Face
Void Face
Bars 5B (FS)
spaces
1'-4" Min. Lap
Bars 5E (NS) and
Bars 5L
6" (
along of Beam )
8" = 3'
-4"
5 sp. @
1'-9" Min. Lap
5
8 8"
Bars 5L (
NS)
Spacing
Bars 4C (
FS)
Spacing
1
4"
8" = 3'
-4"
5 sp. @
Beam
Bars 5K
(Typ.)
Bars 4M
(Typ.)
Bars 3D1
Bars 5L (NS)
(Typ.)
5 sp. @ 8" = 3'-4"
6"
1'-0"
(Typ.)
3" Spacing
Bars 5B and 5E
8"
Bars 5B (FS)
2'-0"
4'-8"
SECTION C-C
Bars 4C
(Typ.)
Void Face
Bars 4M
(Typ.)

3"

22 sp. @
3" Chamfer (Typ.)
(Typ.)
2'
-0"
2" Cl.
3" 6 sp. @
Beam
Bars 5L
Bars 5E
Bars 4F
3" 3"
3" 6 sp. @
Bars 4C
3" 3"
(Typ.)
Bars 5E
(Typ.)
2 sp. @ 8" 4" 4" 2 sp. @ 8"
Bars 5K as shown)
" Chamfer along the
Bars 5L
End of Beam
75 90
Bars 4F
ar
Cle
2"
Bars 5B
2" Clear
End of

2 sp. @ 8" 4" 4" 2 sp. @ 8"
1:
25:
06 PM
Void Face
Bars 5B
22 sp. @
Beam
3"
NOTES:
Bars 5K
ar
Cle
2"
2'
-0"
8"
3"
12 sp. @
Beam
Spacing Bars 5E (NS) and
Bars 5L
Bars 5K (Typ.)
6"
4"
4"
1 " x 3 " Chamfer
Flange and Web and

Flange (Typ.)


Bars 5K as shown)
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20263
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3

Bars 4G
Bars 5K and 4M
2" Clear
(Typ.)
Spacing Bars 4G
6 sp. @ 6" = 3'-0"
Bars 4M (Typ.)
Bars 5K (Typ.)
SIZE
NO. REQD.
LENGTH
A1
Dim. L - 4"
A2
12
Dim. L - 4"
12
5'-4"
24
5'-5"
D1
204
1'-6"
D2
34
4'-6"
24
6'-6"
28
6'-6"
See Table
5'-3"
See Table
4'-11"
See Table
9'-2 "
28
17'-8"
See Table
3'-11"
" Strand
Dim. L - 3"
6"
5'
-6"
Bars 4H
MARK
6"
Spacing Varies
(Typ.)
6"
FOR ONE BEAM ONLY
(Typ.)
4'
-10"
Beam
3" Chamfer
6"
Bars 3D1
6"
Bars 5B
6"
TOP VIEW OF
6A1
4A2
3D2
4'-6"
Bars 5E
1'-0"
Beam
Min. Lap
Top Flange
6"
of Beam
(Typ.)
Strand N
7 "
Bars 4G
Field Bend
1'
-6"
Top of
Intermediate
Bars 4G
Bars 4M
Diaphragm
5'-6"
as Required
for Skew
1'-0"
Bars 4H
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
3'-11"
5"
Bars 4H
(Shown
as (
4'
-7"
3" Pin
Bars A
Bars 4C
Typ.)
"
0
1
Top of
90 (Note 2)
Bottom
Bars 4F
90 (Note 2)
Flange
8"
13'
-2"
1'
-3 "
of Beam
6"
3" Chamfer
Pipe Drain
1'
-0"
5 sp. @
8" = 3'
-4"
Top of
6"
Bars 5K
1'-4"
4"
D
Bars 5K
Diaphragm
3'-11"
Bars 4G
Bars 4H
Drain Pipe
Bars 5K
1'-0"
NOTES:
4'-8"
3"
SECTION D-D
10"
Pin
Field Bend
as Required
for Skew
5"
6 sp. @ 6" = 3'-0"
"
0
1
6"
10"
1'
-4 "
Spacing Bars 4G

1:
25:
07 PM
1'-0"
(Note 1)
(Typ.)
5'
-6 "
Spacing Bars 4H
(Typ.)

1'-4 "
3'-0"
4'-6"
1 "
Bars 5K
Bars 5L
Bars 4M
LAST
REVISION
01/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
from casting bed.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20263
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
8'-10"
Spacing Bars 5K (In Pairs) 3"
3'-1"
4'-3 "
9 "
(Typ. bottom of
Spacing Bars A
19 sp. @ 6"
24 sp. @ 3"
19 sp. @ 6"
6 sp. @ 3"
3"
and Strand N
5 " 4"
Bars 4M (Typ.)
Bars 6A1
Bars 5L
(See Note 9)
Bars 4F (Typ.)
7"
Bars 6A1, 4A2
Bars 5K (Typ.)
(In Pairs)
Bars 4M lap with
Bars 4A2
1'
-9"
top flange only)
"
Spacing Bars 4F 2 "
2'-0 "
Strand N Blockout
Bars 5L
Spacing
Bars 4C
Beam
11 "
" Chamfer
1 "
2 "
7 "
2 "
(Typ.) (See Note 5)
Spacing
Anchorage Device
8"
Safety Line
Strand N
*
6 "
Strand N
Clear
9 "
1'-4"
1"
1 "
3'-1"
1 "
1'-4"
31 sp. @ 3"
(Typ.)
Bars 6A1 (Typ.)
8 "
Strand N
(Typ.)
Bars 4C place
9"
Bars 4A2 (Typ.)
5"
(
Ty
p.
)
Bars 5L
Strand
Note: Bars A are

shown as (
6"
Blockout
(See
3"
Bars 3D1
6'
-0"
2"
Cl
. (
Ty
p.
)
4'
-6"
8"
7 sp. @
3'
-2"
8"
Bars 5K (Typ.)
6 sp. @
as shown (Typ.)
Bars 4A2 ~ 4 sp. @
11 "
with Bars 5L
Note 9)
(Typ.)

Drain
Pipe
4 "
3"
about Beam for Half

10"

10" (Typ.)
Bars 3D2

* Half Section A-A
- At midspan.
Bars 5B
Bars 4C
provided:
(1)
Bars 5E
NOTES:
4'-8"
** Intermediate Diaphragms shall be
* Half Section B-B
Bars 3D1
Bars 3D2
(Typ.)
(Typ.)
Bars 4A2

(2) - At 30'-0" Max. from midspan
TYPICAL SECTION
when beam length (L) exceeds 80 Ft.
1 " x 3 " Chamfer
Dim. L = Casting Length (Overall Length of Beam along Beam including length increase as required for beam placed on grade and Dim. R to compensate for elastic and time dependent shortening effects)
Beam
3"
31 sp. @ 3"
19 sp. @ 6"
S1 sp. @ V1
S2 sp. @ V2
Spacing Bars 5K
S3 sp.
@ V3
***
Bars 5K (Typ.)
End Face
(Typ.)
Void Face (Typ.)
2'-0"
(when required) **
End Diaphragm (Typ.)
1'-0"
(when required) **
1:
54:
30 PM
(Typ.)
END 2
END 1
12/21/2015
Varies
20'-0" Min. ~ 30'-0" Max.


LAST
REVISION
07/01/12
REVISIO N
ELEVATION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20272
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
Bars 5E (NS) and

Bars 5B (FS)
Beam
Bars 5K
Void Face
Bars 4F (Typ.)
Bars 5B
V1
Bars 5L
(Typ.)
Typ.)
Bars 4C (Typ.)
Bars 5L (NS) and
Bars 4C (FS)
Drain Pipe (Note 1)
End of Beam
3 "
90 (Note 2)
Galv. Screen Wire
Drain Pipe (Typ.)
3" Chamfer
5 sp. @
Drain Cover with
8 "
" Mesh
Bars 5L (NS)
5 equal
as (
6" (
along of Beam )
8" = 4'
-8"
7 sp. @
(Shown
8" = 4'
-0"
S1 sp. @
Void Face
Bars 5E
Strand N
6 sp. @
Void Face
Bars 4F
Bars A
1'
-3 "
Bars 4C
Bars 5L
spaces
Bars 5L (
NS)
Spacing
Bars 4C (
FS)
1'-9" Min. Lap
1'-4" Min. Lap
7 "
Spacing
8"
C
Void Face
Bars 5K
(Typ.)
Bars 4M
(Typ.)
Bars 3D1
(Typ.)
5 sp. @ 8" = 3'-4"
6"
1'-0"
Bars 5B and 5E
8"
and Bars 5B (FS)
2'-0"
4'-8"
SECTION C-C
Bars 4C
NOTES:
(Typ.)
Void Face

3"

3" Chamfer (Typ.)
3"
Bars 4M
(Typ.)
24 sp. @
Void Face
Beam
Bars 5B
(Typ.)
24 sp. @
Bars 5K
ar
Cle
2"
(Typ.)
3" Spacing
2'
-0"
8"
Spacing Bars 5E (NS)
3"
Bars 5L
6"
Beam
Bars 5K (Typ.)
14 sp. @
4"
4"
1 " x 3 " Chamfer
the end of the pipe and bent down around the sides
2'
-0"
3" 6 sp. @

Bars 5E
2 sp. @ 8" 4" 4" 2 sp. @ 8"

1:
54:
31 PM
(Typ.)
Bars 5L
End of Beam
75 90
2 sp. @ 8" 4" 4" 2 sp. @ 8"

2" Cl.
Beam
Bars 5L
Bars 5E
Bars 4F

End of
3" 3"
3" 6 sp. @
Bars 4C
3" 3"
(Typ.)
casting.
ar
Cle
2"
Bars 5B
2" Clear
of the pipe, a minimum of 1" and secured prior to
Bars 4F
" Chamfer along the

Bars 5K as shown)
Flange and Web and
Bars 5K as shown)
Flange (Typ.)

12/21/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20272
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3

Bars 4G
(Typ.)
FOR ONE BEAM ONLY

Spacing Varies
Bars 5K and 4M
Spacing Bars 4G
6 sp. @ 6" = 3'-0"
Bars 4M (Typ.)
Bars 5K (Typ.)
TOP VIEW OF
SIZE
LENGTH
A1
Dim. L - 4"
A2
14
Dim. L - 4"
12
6'-1"
28
5'-7"
D1
228
1'-6"
D2
38
4'-6"
6"
2" Clear
(Typ.)
MARK
6'
-3"
Bars 4H
NO. REQD.
6"
6"
(Typ.)
5'
-7"
Beam
3" Chamfer
6"
Bars 3D1
6"
24
7'-3"
28
6'-9"
See Table
6'-0"
See Table
5'-1"
See Table
10'-0"
32
19'-6"
See Table
3'-11"
" Strand
Dim. L - 3"
Bars 5B
6"
1'-0"
Beam
D
Bars 5K
Diaphragm
6"
Top Flange
of Beam
(Typ.)
4"
Min. Lap
3D2
4'-6"
Bars 5E
Strand N
Bars 4G
8"
4A2
Top of
6"
Bars 5K
1'-4"
6A1
Top of
Intermediate
Diaphragm
Bars 4M
Field Bend
1'
-6"
Bars 4G
Bars 4H
5'-9"
(Typ.)
as Required
for Skew
1'-0"
Bars A
3" Pin
Bars 4H
4'-1"
5'
-4"
as (
Typ.)
"
0
1
Top of
Bottom
Bars 4C
90 (Note 2)
90 (Note 2)
Bars 4F
Flange
1'
-4"
of Beam
8"
4'-1"
15'
-0"
3" Chamfer
6"
Pipe Drain
(Typ.)
Bars 5K
(Typ.)
Spacing Bars 4G
10"
6 sp. @ 6" = 3'-0"
Bars 4G
Bars 4H
Drain Pipe
(Note 1)
1'-0"
1'-0"
SECTION D-D
10"
3"

Field Bend
"
0
1
as Required
for Skew
6"
1'
-4 "
NOTES:
5"
Pin
4'-8"
6'
-3 "
Spacing Bars 4H
1'
-0"
(Shown
5"
6 sp. @
8" = 4'
-0"
(Typ.)
1:
54:
31 PM

1'-6 "
3'-0"
4'-6"
1 "

from casting bed.
Bars 5L
Bars 4M
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/21/2015
Bars 5K
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20272
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Tangent Grade
Bottom of Deck
Dim . "
D"
Dim . "
B"
Dim. "C"
BEAM CAMBER AND BUILD-UP NOTES:

The build-up values given in the Data Table* are based on theoretical beam cambers.
The Contractor shall monitor beam cambers for the purpose of predicting
camber values at the time of the deck pour. If the predicted cambers based
Span
on field measurements differ more than +/- " from the theoretical "Net Beam
Top of Beam
Camber @ 120 Days" shown in the Data Table*, obtain approval from the Engineer
to modify the build-up dimensions as required. When the measured beam cambers
create a conflict with the bottom mat of deck steel, notify the Engineer a minimum
Begin Span
of 21 days prior to casting.
End Span
BUILD-UP DIAGRAM FOR TANGENT SPANS

Dim. "A" includes the weight of the Stay-In-Place Formwork.
Top of Beam
A
Begin Span
Dim. "A"
Span
End Span
Span
Bearing
Begin Span
Bottom of Deck
Bearing
Dim. "C"
Dim . "
D"
Dim . "
B"
(ALONG FLANGE) (CASE 1)
End Span
BUILD-UP DIAGRAM FOR SAG VERTICAL CURVE & HORIZONTAL CURVE SPANS
DEAD LOAD DEFLECTION DIAGRAM
(ALONG BEAM)
Bottom of Deck
Dim . "
D"
Dim . "
B"
Dim. "C"
* Dimensions are along slope.
Va
r
i
e
s
Span
Top of Beam
(
Se
e Be
a
m
Left Top Flange
A
Begin Span
Sh
e
e
t
s
)
*
1
'
4
"
End Span
*
*
8
" 8
"
Va
r
i
e
s
(
Se
e Be
a
m
Sh
e
e
t
s
)
Beam
Sl
o
p
e = Va
r
i
e
s
- CONTROL AT SPAN
Right Top Flange

*
1
'
4
"
*
*
8
" 8
"

Bridge Deck
(Varies)
Bottom of Deck
1
2"
Dim . "
D"
Dim . "
B"
Dim. "C"
Design Min. (Typ.)
For Cases 1, 2 & 3 = Dim. "C"

For Cases 1, 2 & 3 = Dim. "C"
For Case 4 = Dim. "B" or Dim. "D"
For Case 4 = Dim. "B" or Dim. "D"
Span
Top of Beam
3:
17:
49 PM
Fl
o
r
i
d
a
U Be
a
m
Begin Span
End Span
A
12/21/2015
- CONTROL AT BEGIN OR END SPAN
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SECTION A-A
BUILD-UP OVER BEAMS
* NOTE:
Work this Index with the Build-up and Deflection
(LOOKING AHEAD STATION)
Data Table for Florida-U Beams in Structures Plans.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
BUILD-UP & DEFLECTION DATA FOR
DESIGN STANDARDS
FLORIDA-U BEAMS
NO.
20299
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Edge of Bottom Flange (Typ.)
Florida U-Beam (Typ.)
Varies ~ 1" Min.
NOTES:
(See Plans)
Equal Spacing
2"
1. Work this sheet with the 'BEVELED BEARING PLATE DATA TABLE'
Composite
2 Equal sp.
2 "
Holes for
2"
" Dia. Screws,
Bearing Pad
(Typ.)
5"
Backwall or
x 2" Anchor
after hot-dip galvanizing. Drill Bearing Plates A and B as an
(Typ.)
assembled unit, thread Bearing Plate A only. Drill and thread holes
perpendicular to bottom of Plate B and prior to plates being
C + D/tan
4. Provide Electroplated, Flat Countersunk Head Cap Screws in
accordance with ASTM F 835. Electroplating shall be ASTM B
K2
Skew 15
or less
5"
1"
633, SC 2, Type 1. Provide screws long enough to maintain a "

minimum embedment into Embedded Bearing Plate A and
90
Galvanized Cap. Provide steel Galvanized Caps with " Min. to 1"
Max. height and nominal 1" inside diameter.
2 "
Bearing Pad
End of Beam
galvanized (ASTM A 123).
Beam
D
90
Beam & Plate
3 Equal spaces
2 Equal spaces
or less
Bearing
5. Include the cost of Beveled Bearing Plates in the pay item for
Pad (Typ.)
Bearing
(Grade 36 or 50). Headed Concrete Anchor Studs shall conform to
B after fabrication except Galvanized Caps may be welded in place
1"
2 "
5"
Skew 15
3. Bearing plate material shall conform to ASTM A36 or ASTM A709
Specification Section 502. Hot-dip galvanized Bearing Plates A &
2"
Front Face of
"
2
Pier or Bent
"
2
or Bent
required for beams only as scheduled in the 'TABLE OF BEAM
Front Face of
90
Plate
" Dia.
Studs (Typ.)
K1
2. Beveled Bearing Plates B with Embedded Bearing Plates A are
VARIABLES' on Beam Sheets.
(See Note No. 3)
Backwall or Pier
in the plans.
Elastomeric
2 "
Varies
Face of Pier or Bent Cap
tan
5"
C +
Bearing Pad
(
See Plans)
Elastomeric
Composite
Prestressed Beams (Florida U-Beams).
5"
2"
Holes for
Face of Pier
" Dia.
or Bent Cap
Plate
(D x Varies x " Min.)
5"
7. All details and dimensions shown are along Beam for single
1"
Bearing
bearings or Plate parallel to Beam for double bearings, except
2"
for dimensions to " Dia. Screws and " Dia. x 2" Anchor Studs,
2 "
Beveled Plate B
Varies
(D x Varies x ") &
(
See Plans)
2 "
2"
2 Equal sp.
~ Embedded Plate A
TABLE' in the Structures Plans. For Dimensions J, K1 and K2, see

'TABLE OF BEAM VARIABLES' on Beam Sheets.
"
2
Screws
(Typ.)
Bearing Plates A & B
6. For Dimensions C and D, see 'BEVELED BEARING PLATE DATA
90
which are along Screws or Anchor Studs. Positive Slope shown,
Negative Slope similar.
(Typ.) (See Note 8)
8. When Skew = 0, dimensions for Embedded Bearing Plate A are

2"
" Dia. x 2"
Equal Spacing
D x C x " and for Beveled Plate B are D x C x " Min.
Varies ~ 1" Min.
Anchor Studs,
(See Plans)
C + D/tan
See Detail "A"
PLAN VIEW OF TYPICAL SINGLE BEARING
PLAN VIEW OF TYPICAL DOUBLE BEARING
PLAN
e
p
o
s Sl
s
o
Cr
(O < Skew 15 shown, Skew = 0 Similar)

Beam
or Pier or Bent
or Pier or Bent
" dia. Electro-plated, Countersunk

Flat Headed Machine Screws
with Galvanized Caps (16 Ga. Min.);
" Dia. Screws
Seal weld Cap to top of plate "A" (Typ.)
and " Dia. x 2"

D
C +
2"
Embedded
.
p
.s
2 Eq
n
i
s
(See Note 4)
n
a
2t
n
a
2t
2"
" Dia. End Welded,
C +
Anchor Studs
2"
2"
Anchor Stud
n
i
s
.
p
.s
2 Eq
Bearing Plate A
5"
5"
3 Equal spaces
See Detail "A"
2 "
D x Varies x "
Headed Concrete
5"
spacing
2 "
2 "
(Typ.)
Anchor Stud
Level Bearing
Bottom of Beam
1:
25:
43 PM
welding)
2" (
after
Seat (Top of
Substructure)
Bottom of Beam
"
1"
2 "
1"
n
i
s
n
i
s
2 "
Varies
n
i
s
Embedded
Bearing Plate A
12/17/2015
D x Varies x "
LAST
REVISION
01/01/10
REVISIO N
DETAIL "A"
J
Composite Elastomeric Bearing Pad
(Top of Substructure)
K2
Bearing
SIDE ELEVATION
Bearing
(See Note 7)
n
i
s
Composite
Varies ~ 1" Min.
Elastomeric
(See Plans)
Bearing Pad
n
i
s
K1
n
i
s
n
i
s
Level Bearing Seat
J
n
i
s
D/2
(See Plans)
Beveled Bearing Plate B
Half Elevation
Half Elevation
Showing Single Bearing
Showing Double Bearing
END ELEVATION
(Positive Cross Slope shown, Negative Cross Slope similar)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
BEVELED BEARING PLATE DETAILS -
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRESTRESSED FLORIDA-U BEAMS
NO.
20502
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Bottom Flange of
Prestressed Beam
4" Min.
Bearing
(Typ.)
*BEVELED
FIB's
3"
TYPE II
2"
3" FIB's
Face of Bent
2"
or Pier Cap
TYPE II
Pad
BEAM
BEARING PAD
BEARING PLATE
TYPE
DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS
PAD TYPE
(See Note 1)
Bearing and
90
8"
2'-8"
1'-0"
3'-0"
10"
2'-8"
1'-0"
3'-0"
10"
2'-8"
1'-0"
3'-0"
10"
2'-8"
1'-0"
3'-0"
10"
2'-8"
1'-0"
3'-0"
10"
2'-8"
1'-0"
3'-0"
1'-0"
2'-8"
1'-1"
3'-0"
10"
1'-2"
1'-0"
1'-4"
10"
1'-2"
1'-0"
1'-4"
(G=110psi)
Bearing Pad
PLAN
F
(G=110psi)
Composite
" Elastomer Cover
3 ~ 10 gage
Elastomeric
Layer (Typ.)
Steel Plates
See Detail "C"
Bearing Pad
G
(G=150psi)
H
Beam & Bearing Pad
** 4" (Without End Diaphragm, Typ. Index 20512)
(G=150psi)
J
PARTIAL PLAN (Beam & Bearing Skew = 0)
Cover (Typ.)
" Internal Elastomer

Layer (Typ.) (2 layers
Bottom Flange of
required)
Prestressed Beam
K
(G=150psi)
Face of Bent
L or W
AA
or Pier Cap
4" Min. (Typ.)
(G=110psi)
TYPICAL SECTION TYPE D, E & AA PAD
AB
Varies
TYPE II
" Elastomer
(G=150psi)
AASH TO
(
Typ.
)
"
"
2" (With End Diaphragm, Typ. Index 20511)
FLORIDA I-BEAM
(G=110psi)
(G=150psi)
" Elastomer Cover
4 ~ 10 gage
Layer (Typ.)
Steel Plates
See Detail "C"
90
Beam & Bearing
Bearing and
* Work this sheet with the appropriate type Bearing
Bearing Pad
Skew > 0
Plate Detail (See Bearing Plate Data Table) and
2 "
BEARING PAD DATA TABLE in the Structures Plans.

Varies
See TABLE OF BEAM VARIABLES and BEARING

PLATE DATA TABLE in the Structures Plans for
"
(
Typ.
)
locations where beveled bearing plates are required.

" Elastomer
Cover (Typ.)
L or W

required)
Composite
Elastomeric
Beam
Bearing Pad
** Offset to End of Beam is reduced to 2" for Type K
Bearing Pad
2" (With End Diaphragm)
Pad.
** 4" (Without End Diaphragm)
"
PARTIAL PLAN (Beam & Bearing Skew > 0) (Use Index 20511)
5 ~ 10 gage
Layer (Typ.)
Steel Plates
See Detail "C"
3 "
" Elastomer Cover
Bottom Flange of
Beam &
Prestressed Beam
Bearing Pad
"
"
TYPICAL SECTION TYPE F, G & AB PAD
Face of Bent
or Pier Cap
DETAIL "C"
BEARING PAD NOTES:
4" Min. (Skew < 15)
" Elastomer
Cover (Typ.)
L or W

1. Neoprene in Type D, E, F & AA bearing pads shall have a shear modulus (G) of
(
Typ.
)
"
2" Min. (Skew 15)
110 psi. Neoprene in Type G, H, J, K & AB bearing pads shall have a shear
Composite
required)
90
modulus (G) of 150 psi.
Elastomeric
Bearing Pad
2. Steel Plates in bearing pads shall conform to ASTM A1011 Grade 36, Type 1.
Beam
TYPICAL SECTION TYPE H PAD
Bearing
Skew > 0
3. See Bearing Pad Data Table in Structures Plans for quantities of Type D, E, F,
6 ~ 10 gage
Layer (Typ.)
Steel Plates
See Detail "C"
G, H, J, K, AA and/or AB Bearing Pads.
FI
B'
s
TY
3"
PE
I
I
2"
(
Typ.
)
"
" Elastomer
Cover (Typ.)
Pa
d
3"
2"
required)
TYPICAL SECTION TYPE J & K PAD
FI
B'
s
TY
PE
I
I
PARTIAL PLAN WITH SQUARED END BEAM (Use Index 20512)

(Beam Skew > 0; Bearing Skew = 0)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
L or W
Be
ar
i
ng
4"
**
(Ty
p.
)
1:
26:
01 PM
"
" Elastomer Cover
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
COMPOSITE ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS -
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRESTRESSED FLORIDA-I & AASHTO TYPE II BEAM
NO.
20510
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
NOTES:
1. Work this sheet with Index No. 20510 - Composite Elastomeric
Bearing Pads, and the 'BEARING PLATE DATA TABLE' in the

Structures Plans.
Face of Pier or Bent Cap
1"
Bottom Flange (Typ.)
2"
sin
sin
sin
ew
r
Sc
a.
Di
"
"
2
g
n
i
ac
p
S
C
@
p.
3s
1 "
12
"
3
Bearing
being galvanized (ASTM A 123).
ASTM F 835. Electroplating shall be ASTM B633, SC 2, Type 1.

Skew > 0
Provide screws long enough to maintain a " minimum embedment
90
into Embedded Bearing Plate A and Galvanized Cap. Provide steel
K2
Galvanized Caps with " Min. to 1" Max. height and nominal 1"
inside diameter.
"
2
ew
r
Sc
a.
Di
"
g
n
i
ac
Sp
p.
2s
"
3
@
4"
5. Include the cost of Bearing Plates in the pay item for

Prestressed Beams.
6. For Pad Type and Dimensions C, D, E, F and G, see the

'BEARING PLATE DATA TABLE' in the Structures Plans.
7. All details and dimensions shown are along Beam, except for
"
1
1'
dimensions to " Dia. Screws and " Dia. x 2" Anchor Studs,
Holes for " Dia.

Screws, (See Note No. 3)
E (Beveled
ELASTOMERIC BEARING PAD
Plate B)
E (Beveled
" Dia. x 2 " Anchor
End of
which are along Screws or Anchor Studs. Positive Slope
Beam
shown, Negative Slope similar.
(Typ.)
Plate B)
Studs, (See Detail "A")
8. When Skew = 0, F = D = 3'-0" (Florida-I Beams) or 1'-4" (AASHTO

Type II Beams) E = C, and G = 1'-1".
TYPES AA, AB, D, E, F, G, H, & J
(Along Beam)
(Embedded Plate A)
(Embedded Plate A)
9. Slope is determined along Beam at Bearing. See 'BEARING
PLAN
(Positive Slope shown;

(
Varies for skew > 0
)
holes perpendicular to Embedded Plate A and prior to plates
4. Provide Electroplated, Flat Head Cap Screws in accordance with
"
1
1'
BEVELED BEARING PLATE B FOR
corners
required in Plate A when Plate B is not required. Drill and thread
Pad
VARIABLES' in the Structures Plans.
" Dia. Screws
1
n. at
2" M i
as an assembled unit, thread Bearing Plate A only. Holes are not
Bearing
ud
St
hor
c
An
g
n
i
ac
Sp
For Dimensions J, K1 and K2, see 'TABLE OF BEAM
" Dia. Holes for
(0 < Skew 45 FIB Shown, Skew = 0 and AASHTO Type II Similar)
PLATE DATA TABLE' in the Structures Plans for Slope and Angle .
Negative Slope similar)
CROSS REFERENCE:
See Sheet 2 for Detail "A".
or Pier or Bent
or Pier or Bent
" Dia. Electro-plated, Countersunk
Flat Headed Machine Screws with

" Dia. Screws
E
" Dia. x 2 "

G
9
0
e
p
o
Sl
2"
r
o
h
c
An
4"
2 sp. @
sin
g
n
i
c
a
d Sp
u
St
.
a
"Di
.
p
.s
3 Eq
n
i
s
.
p
.s
2 Eq
n
i
s
3"
sin
End 1
Level Bearing
End 2
Seat (Top of
n
i
s
" Dia. Screws
BEVELED BEARING PLATE B FOR

ELASTOMERIC BEARING PAD
07/01/14
REVISIO N
LAST
REVISION
.
p
.s
2 Eq
n
i
s
(Typ.)
FIB's
Type II
.
a
"Di
g
n
i
c
a
w Sp
e
r
Sc
" x G x F
Plates
7 "
1'-9"
7 "
5"
6"
5"
FIB's
n
i
s
Composite
5"
5"
1'-4"
5"
5"
2"
0"
11"
0"
2"
Type II
FIB's
Type II
Elastomeric
Bearing Pad
e
p
o
Sl
n
i
s
Bottom of Beam
)
e9
t
e No
Se
(
sin
(Along Beam)
Bearing Plate A
n
i
s
Seal weld Cap to top of Plate A
g
n
i
c
a
d Sp
u
St
"
2
4"
Embedded
See Detail "A"
r
o
h
c
An
n
i
s
Bottom of Beam
"
1
" Dia. Holes for
TYPE K
.
p
.s
3 Eq
n
i
s
Beam &
Galvanized Caps (16 Ga. Min.);
(Typ.) (See Note 4)
"
1
"
1
2" Substructure)
sin
G
"
1
n
i
s
4"
"
2
Anchor Studs
g
n
i
c
a
w Sp
e
r
Sc
sin
4"
12/17/2015
"
1
"
1
s
e
i
r
Va
0
9
1:
26:
18 PM
in place after hot-dip galvanizing. Drill Bearing Plates A and B

"
1
2 "
4"
p.
2s
"
3
@
& B after fabrication except that Galvanized Caps may be welded
1"
3"
"
3
1
2"
"
1
g
n
i
c
a
Sp
ud
St
2 sp. @
2"
@
p.
3s
1 "
12
(Grade 36 or 50). Headed Concrete Anchor Studs shall conform

to Specification Section 502. Hot-dip galvanize Bearing Plates A
D = 3'
-0" (
FIB'
s)
Bearing Pad
Note 8)
2 "
Skew > 0
hor
c
An
TABLE' in the Structures Plans.
Bearing
D = 1'
-4" (
AASH TO Type II)
5"
AASH TO Type II
2 "
(
-2 "
)
)
-2 "
(
212"
Florida I-Beam
Beam & Plates
5"
corners
(
Varies for skew > 0
)
90
0
9
required for beams as scheduled in the 'BEARING PLATE DATA
K1
1
n. at
2" M i
or Pier or Bent
s
e
i
r
Va
Beveled Bearing Plates B with Embedded Bearing Plates A are
Pier or Bent
A & B (See
9
0
2. Embedded Bearing Plates A are required for all Florida-I beams.
Backwall or
Bearing Plates
Embedded Plate A (Typ.)
e
p
o
Sl
Front Face of
Bearing Pad
Clip acute corner of
Composite Elastomeric
Edge of Beam
Bearing Pad
2 "
s
5" FIB'
* " for Pad Type K
2" Type II
1"
(" Min. x E x F)
n
i
s
* 1"
1" *
n
i
s
Level Bearing Seat
1"
n
i
s
n
i
s
Bearing
SIDE ELEVATION
n
i
s
Bearing
K1
1"
1'-6" (FIB's)
1'-6" (FIB's)
8" (Type II)
8" (Type II)
1"
3'-0" (FIB's)
1'-4" (AASHTO Type II)
n
i
s
K2
n
i
s
WITH BEVELED BEARING PLATES
n
i
s
End 1
(Slopes > 2% along Beam) (See Note 7)
End 2
END ELEVATION
WITH BEVELED BEARING PLATE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
BEARING PLATES (TYPE 1) - PRESTRESSED
DESIGN STANDARDS
FLORIDA-I AND AASHTO TYPE II BEAMS
NO.
20511
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
or Pier or Bent
or Pier or Bent
1
2"
Beam &
1
8"
Dia. x 2
Plates
Anchor Studs
1 2"
1 2"
.
p
.s
3 Eq
n
i
s
Embedded
"A" (Typ.)
n
i
s
Composite
Bearing Plate A
1
2"
Level Bearing
.
p
.s
3 Eq
n
i
s
See Detail
"
1
"
1
n
i
s
5"
5"
1'-4"
5"
Florida-I Beams
5"
Elastomeric
x G x F
Bearing Pad
Bottom of Beam
Seat (Top of
e
p
o
Sl
Substructure)
Bottom of Beam
)
e9
t
e No
Se
(
1" *
1" *
n
i
s
Level Bearing Seat
n
i
s
n
i
s
1"
1'-6"
n
i
s
Bearing
K1
1"
Florida-I Beams
3'-0" (Florida-I Beams)
n
i
s
Bearing
K2
SIDE ELEVATION
n
i
s
1'-6"
n
i
s
END ELEVATION
n
i
s
WITHOUT BEVELED BEARING PLATES
WITHOUT BEVELED BEARING PLATE
(Slopes 0.5% along Beam) (See Note 7)
* " Pad Type K
or Pier or Bent
or Pier or Bent
12" Dia. x 218"
" Dia. End Welded,
Anchor Studs
1
.
p
.s
3 Eq
n
i
s
n
i
s
Embedded
n
i
s
Headed Concrete
.
p
.s
3 Eq
Anchor Stud
n
i
s
Bearing Plate A
1
2"
x G x F
2" (
after
1 2"
1"
1"
Sloped Bearing Seat

Bottom of Beam
e
p
o
Sl
See Structures Plans
welding)
G
1
1 2"
"
)
e9
t
e No
Se
(
n
i
s
1" *
1" *
n
i
s
n
i
s
Sloped Bearing Seat

H
n
i
s
n
i
s
K1
n
i
s
Bearing
Bearing
SIDE ELEVATION
Bearing Plate A
n
i
s
K2
Embedded
" x G x F
DETAIL "A"
n
i
s
CROSS REFERENCE:
See Sheet 1 for dimension H and Notes.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
1:
26:
19 PM
(0.5% < Slopes 2% along Beam) (See Note 7)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20511
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
1"
1'-1" (Embedded
Bearing Plates A & B ~
NOTES:
1"
1'-1" (Embedded
Edge of FIB
Plate A)
Plate A)
Bottom Flange (Typ.)
Embedded Plate A (" x 1'-1" x D) (Typ.)
1. Work this sheet with Index No. 20510 - Composite Elastomeric

C (Beveled
C (Beveled
& Beveled Plate B (" Min. x C x D) (Typ.)
Bearing Pads, and 'BEARING PLATE DATA TABLE' in the Structures
Plate B)
Face of Pier
Plate B)
Plans.
1"
or Bent Cap
Front Face of
Backwall or
Bearing
2. Embedded Bearing Plates A are required for all Florida-I beams.
Pier or Bent
Beveled Bearing Plates B with Embedded Bearing Plates A are
& Bearing Pad
90
Skew
> 0
" Dia. Screw Spacing
4"
2 sp.
2"
" M in. at corners
@ 3"
1"
3 sp. @ 3"
212"
Anchor Stud Spacing
1
1 2"
s
an
l
eP
Se
5"
90
(Grade 36 or 50). Headed Concrete Anchor Studs shall conform

to Specification Section 502. Hot-dip galvanize Bearing Plates A
& B after fabrication except that Galvanized Caps may be welded
1
2"
1" Anchor Stud Spacing
3 sp. @ 3"
2"
2 sp.
in place after hot-dip galvanizing. Drill Bearing Plates A and B

as an assembled unit, thread Bearing Plate A only. Holes are not
" Dia. Screw Spacing
4"
required in Plate A when Plate B is not required. Drill and thread
@ 3"
holes perpendicular to Embedded Plate A and prior to plates

Skew
90
being galvanized (ASTM A 123).
> 0
4. Provide Electroplated, Flat Head Cap Screws in accordance

90
with ASTM F 835. Electroplating shall be ASTM B633,
K2
SC 2, Type 1. Provide screws long enough to maintain a "

minimum embedment into Embedded Bearing Plate A and
Galvanized Cap. Provide steel Galvanized Caps with " Min. to
e
p
o
Sl
TABLE' in the Structures Plans.
(
-2 "
)
90
s
an
l
eP
Se
2 " 21 "
2
Beam, Plates
AASH TO Type II
Florida-I Beam s
K1
(
-2 "
)
1
2"
1
2 2"
Pier or Bent
D = 1'
-4" (
AASH TO Type II)
Backwall or
D = 3'
-0" (
Florida-I Beam )
5"
Front Face of
2 "
required for beams as scheduled in the 'BEARING PLATE DATA
1" Max. height and nominal 1" inside diameter.
5. Include the cost of Bearing Plates in the pay item for

Prestressed Beams.
End of
s
e
i
r
Va
Beam (Typ.)
1"
6. For Pad Type and Dimension C, see the 'BEARING PLATE DATA
Bearing
0
9
TABLE' in the Structures Plans. For Dimensions J, K1 and K2,

see 'TABLE OF BEAM VARIABLES' in the Structures Plans.
2" **
2 sp.
2" ***
Composite
@ 3"
Holes for " Dia.
Elastomeric
7. All details and dimensions shown are along Beam. Positive Slope
Bearing Pad
shown, Negative Slope similar.
Screws, (See Note No. 3)
Bearing Pad
" Dia. Holes for
" Dia. x 2" Anchor
" Dia. Screws
Studs, See Detail "A"
8. Slope is determined along Beam at Bearing. See 'BEARING

PLATE DATA TABLE' in the Structures Plans for Slope.
BEVELED BEARING PLATE B
PLAN
(Along Beam)
(FIB Skewed Alignment Shown, Skew = 0 and AASHTO Type II Similar)
CROSS REFERENCE:
See Sheet 2 for Detail "A"
(Positive Slope shown;

Negative Slope similar)
or Pier or Bent
or Pier or Bent
Galvanized Caps (16 Ga. Min.);
" for Pad Type K
" Dia. Screws
** 4" for Pad Type K at End 1
" Dia. x 2 "
*** 4" for Pad Type K at End 2
Anchor Studs
"
1
'
1
"
1
(See Detail "A")
"
.@ 3
p
3s
g
n
i
c
a
d Sp
u
r St
o
h
c
An
g
n
i
c
a
w Sp
e
r
.Sc
a
"Di
4"
Seal weld Cap to top of Plate A

(Typ.) (See Note 4)
"
1
'
1
Plates
g
n
i
c
a
d Sp
u
r St
o
h
c
An
"
.@ 3
p
3s
"
1
Beam &
"
1
1
7 2"
"
1
Embedded
"
. 2
p
2s
"
2
.
p
2s
g
n
i
c
a
w Sp
e
r
.Sc
a
"Di
4"
"
@ 3
Bearing Plate A
Elastomeric
"A" (Typ.)
5"
(FIB's)
(Type II)
5"
5"
1'-4"
5"
5"
(FIB's)
2"
0"
11"
0"
2"
(Type II)
Bearing Pad
Bottom of Beam
Level Bearing
1
2"
See Detail
5"
Composite
"
@ 3
e
p
o
Sl
Seat (Top of
Bottom of Beam
)
e8
t
e No
Se
(
Substructure)
L
L
1:
26:
41 PM
" Dia. Electro-plated, Countersunk

Flat Headed Machine Screws with
LEGEND:
Level Bearing Seat
1"
1'-6" (FIB's)
1'-6" (FIB's)
8" (Type II)
8" (Type II)
1"
3'-0" (FIB's)
2
"*
1
"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
"*
2
Bearing
SIDE ELEVATION
Bearing
"
1
1'-4" (AASHTO Type II)
END ELEVATION
K1
WITH BEVELED BEARING PLATES
K2
End 1
(Slopes > 2% along Beam) (See Note 7)
End 2
WITH BEVELED BEARING PLATE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20512
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
or Pier or Bent
or Pier or Bent
Beam &
12" Dia. x 218"
Plates
Anchor Studs
"
1
'
1
"
1
'
1
"
.@ 3
p
3s
"
1
"
1
"
1
Embedded
See Detail
"
1
"
.@ 3
p
3s
"A" (Typ.)
Bearing Plate A
Composite
" x 1'-1" x 3'-0"
Elastomeric
5"
5"
5"
1'-4"
Florida-I Beam
5"
Bearing Pad
Level Bearing
Bottom of Beam
Seat (Top of
e
p
o
Sl
Substructure)
Bottom of Beam
)
e8
t
e No
Se
(
Level Bearing Seat

2" *
1"
1 "
2 " *
1"
1'-6"
1'-6"
1" Florida-I Beam
3'-0" (Florida-I Beam)
J
Bearing
Bearing
SIDE ELEVATION
END ELEVATION
K2
K1
WITHOUT BEVELED BEARING PLATE
(Slopes 0.5% along Beam) (See Note 7)
* " for Pad Type K
or Pier or Bent
or Pier or Bent
" Dia. End Welded,

Headed Concrete
1
8"
Dia. x 2
Anchor Stud
Anchor Studs
"
1
'
1
"
1
'
1
"
.@ 3
p
3s
"
1
"
1
"
1
Embedded
"
1
"
.@ 3
p
3s
Bearing Plate A
" x 1'-1" x 3'-0"
Sloped Bearing Seat
welding)
1
2"
2" (
after
"
Bottom of Beam
e
p
o
Sl
)
e8
t
e No
Se
(
Embedded
Bearing Plate A
Sloped Bearing Seat
2" *
1"
1 "
2 " *
DETAIL "A"
J
Bearing
K1
SIDE ELEVATION
Bearing
K2
1:
26:
42 PM
(0.5% < Slopes 2% along Beam) (See Note 7)
CROSS REFERENCE:
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20512
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILE NOTES:

Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) "Structures Design Guidelines", current
edition.
0.7L
0.3L
L
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) "LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications", current edition.
Pick-up Point
L
0.58L
0.21L
0.21L
Tie Down and

Support Points
2-POINT SUPPORT
1-POINT PICK-UP
SPIRAL TIES:
Each wrap of spirals shall be tied to at least two corner strands.
One turn required for
spiral splices.
CONCRETE CLASS:
Concrete for all piles shall be Class V (Special) except designated High Moment Capacity Piles
0.21L
0.58L
0.21L
(Index 20631) shall be Class VI.
Concrete for the High Capacity Collar Splice shall be Class V (Special).
Pick-up Points
0.145L
0.355L
0.355L
0.145L Tie Down and

Support Points
2-POINT PICK-UP
See "GENERAL NOTES" in Structures Plans for any specific locations where the use of
Silica Fume is required.
3-POINT SUPPORT
CONCRETE STRENGTH:
The pile cylinder strength shall be 6,000 psi minimum at 28 days and 4,000 psi minimum at
0.145L
0.355L
time of transfer of the Prestressing Force. The cylinder strength for designated High Moment
0.145L
0.355L
Capacity Piles (Index 20631) shall be 8,500 psi minimum at 28 days and 6,500 psi minimum at
time of transfer of the Prestressing Force.
Pick-up Points
SPLICE BONDING MATERIAL:
0.107L
0.262L
0.262L
0.262L
0.107L
Tie Down and

Support Points
3-POINT PICK-UP
4-POINT SUPPORT
PILE PICK-UP DETAILS
STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION SUPPORT DETAILS
The material to fill dowel holes and form the joint between pile sections shall be a Type B
Epoxy Compound in accordance with Specification Section 926 and shall be contained on the
Approved Products List (APL). Use Epoxy Bonding Compound or Epoxy Mortar as recommended
by the Manufacturer. For Epoxy Mortar only use sand or other filler material supplied by
the manufacturer and in the proportions recommended.
PICK-UP POINTS:
Piles shall be marked at the pick-up points to indicate proper points for attaching handling
lines.
REINFORCING STEEL:
All reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of Specification Section 450.
TABLE OF MAXIMUM PILE PICK-UP AND SUPPORT LENGTHS
PRESTRESSING STEEL:
D = Square Pile Size (inches)
Maximum
Pile
12
14
18
20
24
30
48
52
59
62
68
87
Required Storage and
Prestressing steel shall be seven-wire strand, Grade 270, Low-Relaxation Strand (LRS).
Transportation Detail
Pick-Up Detail
CORROSION PROTECTION OF EXPOSED STRANDS:
2, 3, or 4 point
1 Point
For all pile ends exposed to the environment and not embedded under final
conditions, protect strands in accordance with Specification Section 450.
69
75
85
89
98
124
2, 3, or 4 point
2 Point
99
107
121
128
140
178
3 or 4 point
3 Point
Length
(Feet)
3"
Max.
1" Rad. or
3
4"
Chamfer (Typ.)
1
4"
1
4"
Max.
Max.
3"
Cover
Spiral Ties W4.0 (30" Piles)

W3.4 (All others)
TYPICAL PILE SHAPE
DETAIL SHOWING
FOR MOLD FORMS
TYPICAL COVER
LAST
REVISION
01/01/14
REVISIO N
12/21/2015
3:
34:
24 PM
Cover
1
4"
Max.
1
4"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
NOTES AND DETAILS FOR SQUARE PRESTRESSED
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILES
NO.
20600
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
1. For Sections D-D, E-E, & F-F see Index Nos. 20612, 20614, 20618, 20620, 20624 or 20630 for applicable concrete pile size and Pile Splice Reinforcement Details.
Prestressing strands, spiral ties and/or reinforcement are not shown for clarity.
"(
applied)
,
2.
3. In cases where pile splices are desired due to length limitations in shipping and/or handling, the "Drivable Preplanned Prestressed Precast Splice Detail" shall be used.
Mechanical Pile Splices contained on the Approved Products List (APL) may also be used.
4. When preformed dowel holes are utilized, the 1" spiral tie pitch shall be continued to 4'-0" below the head of the pile, See Index Nos. 20618, 20620 & 20624. Preformed
holes shall utilize either removable preforming material or stay-in-place corrugated galvanized steel ducts. Stay-in-place ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet
"(
final thickness)
NOTES:
Form to retain
steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A653, Coating Designation G90, 26 gauge. Ducts shall be 2" diameter with a minimum corrugation (rib) height of 0.12 in. Ducts shall
epoxy compound
be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams. Galvanizing of welded seams will not be required.
Full epoxy compound joint
Gasket
5. For tension piles where top of Prestressed Pile is less than 3 feet below Pile Cut-off Elevation, extend No. 10 Dowels into cap beyond Pile Cut-off Elevation to achieve
development as approved by the Engineer.
DETAIL A
1" Cover
Top of
Build-up section
Splice or
No chamfer,
flat surface
required
No. 10
Dowels
See
4'
-0"
Detail A
Preformed holes,
Full epoxy
compound joint
Epoxy compound
to fill hole with
dowels in place
1 " Drilled or
preformed holes
(see Splice Details)
4'-2" long, in driven

pile (see Note No. 4)
Dowel extension
10'
-6"
Dowel extension
Detail A
Driven prestressed pile
2'
-6" (
Typ.
)
See
3:
34:
41 PM
See Note 5.
Detail A
Elevation;
2'
-6" (
Typ.
)
Pile cut-off
See
Dowel extension
Dowel Em bedm ent
Cap/ Footing to
No. 10 Dowels
Dowel extension
10'
-6"
21'
-0" M inim um Splice Section
Dowels
Prestressed Pile
Extended into
Auxiliary reinforcing
steel cast with pile.
See Section F-F.
TYPICAL SPLICE
BEFORE BONDING
UNFORESEEN
NONDRIVABLE UNFORESEEN
DRIVABLE UNFORESEEN
DRIVABLE PREPLANNED
REINFORCED C-I-P
REINFORCED PRECAST
PRESTRESSED PRECAST
PRESTRESSED PRECAST
PILE BUILD-UP DETAIL
PILE SPLICE DETAIL
PILE SPLICE DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/21/2015
No. 10
"
Dowels
Plus 2"
2'
-6" (
Typ.
)
No. 10
Dowel Extension
Build-up
Build-up
Pile Build-up
C-I-P Pile
5-0" M ax.
Elevation
Full length of
Splice section
Pile Cut-off
No. 10 Dowels
10'
-6"
or Footing
21'
Bent Cap, Pile Cap
Splice section
C-I-P Concrete
4'
-0" M inim um , 21'
-0" M axim um Pile Build-up
at End
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
SQUARE PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILE SPLICES
NO.
20601
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Antenna (centered
over Top Gauge)
Prestressing Strands
(Strand pattern varies)
Tip of
Head
Pile
of Pile
Void (Typical for 30"
Tip Gauge
and larger piles)

3'-0"
2D (Min.)
2D (Min.)
2D
ELEVATION
D
D/2
Top Gauge
Antenna
Tip Gauge extension cable

(See Note 2)
10"
3"
D/2
3" Cover
(Typ.)
Void
Tip Gauge
Top Gauge
ANTENNA TOP VIEW
SECTION A-A
Face of
(Strand Pattern with odd number of strands per face)
Concrete
D/2
"
Antenna
SECTION B-B
Tip Gauge extension cable
(See Note 2)
(Showing Voided Pile,

Solid Pile Similar)
Dataport Interface
Cable (to radio
Bottom surfaces of enclosure to
module assembly)
be epoxy coated just prior to

concrete casting per manufacturer's
installation procedures.
ANTENNA SIDE VIEW
ANTENNA END VIEW
1:
26:
58 PM
D/2
3" Cover
(Typ.)
NOTES:
Tip Gauge
Top Gauge
1. For piles 18" and larger installed for bridge foundations,

provide EDC Instrumentation in accordance with
SECTION A-A
(Strand Pattern with even number of strands per face)

12/17/2015
2. Attach Tip Gauge extension cable to the underside of the

strand shown in Section A-A. Secure cable to strand with
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
nylon wire ties spaced a maximum of 6ft. along cable.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
EDC INSTRUMENTATION FOR
DESIGN STANDARDS
SQUARE PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES
NO.
20602
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
W3.4 Spiral Ties @
12"
114"
1
4"
6" pitch, full length
A
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch
6" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1
4"
1"
1"
Pile
1
4"
3"
12"
Spacing
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

Spiral Tie
3"
3" Cover
3
4"
W3.4 Spiral Ties
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 10
4 ~ No. 6 Bars
Dowels
(Full Length)
Pile
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)
SECTION D-D
A
(See Nondrivable Unforeseen Reinforced Precast Pile Splice Detail)
W3.4
12"
ELEVATION
1
4"
1
4"
Spiral Ties
Pile
114"
12"
1
4"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 10
Prestressing
Dowels
Strands
Pile
SECTION E-E
ALTERNATE STRAND PATTERNS
(See Drivable Unforeseen Prestressed Precast Pile Splice Detail)

4 ~ 0.6" , Grade 270 LRS, at 44 kips
8 ~ " (Special), Grade 270 LRS, at 25 kips
12"
8 ~ " , Grade 270 LRS, at 24 kips
PILE SPLICE REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

12"
3" Cover
NOTES:
(Typ.)
1. Work this Index with Index No. 20600 - Notes and Details for
W3.4
Square Prestressed Concrete Piles and Index No. 20601 - Square

Spiral Ties
Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices.
2. Any of the given Alternate Strand Patterns may be utilized.

See Alternate
The strands shall be located as follows:

Place one strand at each corner and place the remaining
Strand Patterns
strands equally spaced between the corner strands.
SECTION A-A
The total strand pattern shall be concentric with the nominal
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/21/2015
3:
18:
08 PM
concrete section of the pile.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
12" SQUARE PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILE
NO.
20612
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
W3.4 Spiral Ties @
14"
3
4"
A
6" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1"
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
3
4"
Spiral Tie
1"
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch
3
4"
Pile
3
4"
3"
14"
Spacing
3"
3" Cover
W3.4 Spiral Ties
3
4"
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 10
4 ~ No. 8 Bars
Dowels
(Full Length)
Pile
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)
SECTION D-D
(See Nondrivable Unforeseen Reinforced Precast Splice Detail)
W3.4
14"
ELEVATION
3
4"
Spiral Ties
3
4"
3
4"
3
4"
14"
Pile
3" Cover
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 10
Prestressing
Dowels
Strands
Pile
SECTION E-E
(See Drivable Unforeseen Prestressed Precast Splice Detail)

8 ~ 0.6" , Grade 270 LRS, at 33 kips
14"
8 ~ 12" (Special), Grade 270 LRS, at 31 kips

8 ~ 12" , Grade 270 LRS, at 31 kips
14"
3" Cover
12 ~
7
16"
16 ~
3
8"
, Grade 270 LRS, at 21 kips
(Typ.)
NOTES:
W3.4
Spiral Ties

See Alternate
Strand Patterns
SECTION A-A
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/21/2015
3:
18:
25 PM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20614
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
W3.4 Spiral Ties @

5 Turns @ 1" Pitch **

6" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
Pile
3"
1
2"
3"
1
2"
1
2"
1"
Spacing
Spiral Tie
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch
8 ~ No. 10
4 ~ No. 8 Bars
Dowels
(Full Length)
Pile
W3.4 Spiral Ties
3
4"
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)
SECTION D-D
(See Nondrivable Unforeseen Reinforced Precast Splice Detail)
ELEVATION
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
W3.4
Spiral Ties
1
2"
** See Note No. 4 on Index No. 20601
312"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
512"
Pile
8 ~ No. 10
12 ~
1
2"
(Special), Grade 270 LRS, at 34 kips
16 ~ 12" , Grade 270 LRS, at 26 kips
Strands
Pile
12 ~ 0.6" , Grade 270 LRS, at 35 kips

18"
Prestressing
Dowels
SECTION E-E
(See Drivable Prestressed Precast Splice Detail)
20 ~ 716" , Grade 270 LRS, at 21 kips

3" Cover
24 ~
3
8"
2"
18"
(Typ.)
7"
7"
W3.4
W3.4
Spiral Ties
Spiral Ties
7"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
2"
See Alternate
Pile
Strand Patterns
SECTION A-A
7"
8 ~ No. 9 Bars
(10'-6" long)
(shift as required
to clear strands)
8 ~ No. 10
Dowels
NOTES:
Prestressing
Strands
Pile
SECTION F-F
1:
42:
45 PM

(See Drivable Preplanned Splice Detail)


12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20618
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
W3.4 Spiral Ties @

5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

1"
6" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
Spacing
1"
412" 512"
Spiral Tie
3" Cover
(Typ.)
Pile
3"
1
2"
1
2"
3"
8 ~ No. 10
4 ~ No. 8 Bars
Dowels
(Full length)
Pile
W3.4 Spiral Ties

3
4"
SECTION D-D
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)
ELEVATION
512"
412"
412"
512"
W3.4
Spiral Ties
1
2"
3" Cover
412" 412"
(Typ.)
512"
Pile
Prestressing
Dowels
Strands
Pile
12 ~ 0.6" , Grade 270 LRS, at 42 kips
20"
8 ~ No. 10
16 ~ " (Special), Grade 270 LRS, at 31 kips

SECTION E-E
(See Drivable Prestressed Precast Pile Splice Detail)
7
8"
20"
3" Cover
1
8"
1
8"
(Typ.)
W3.4
Spiral Ties
W3.4
3" Cover
(Typ.)
Pile
7
8"
1
8"
Spiral Ties
See Alternate
Strand Patterns
7 "
8 ~ No. 10 Bars
SECTION A-A
(10'-6" long)
(shift as required
to clear strands)
NOTES:
1:
43:
06 PM
8 ~ No. 10
Prestressing
Dowels
Strands
Pile
SECTION F-F
(See Drivable Preplanned Pile Splice Detail)


12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20620
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
W3.4 Spiral Ties @
1"
Pile
3" Cover
1
2"
3"
1
2"
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
2"
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1"
Spacing
6" Pitch
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

Spiral Tie
1
2"
1
2"
(Typ.)
12 ~ No. 10
4 ~ No. 8 Bars
Dowels
(Full length)
3"
Pile
W3.4 Spiral Ties
3
4"
SECTION D-D
2"
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)

1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
W3.4
ELEVATION
Pile
512" 412"
2"
412"
1
2"
Spiral Ties

24"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
12 ~ No. 10
Prestressing
Dowels
Strands
Pile
16 ~ 0.6" , Grade 270 LRS, at 44 kips

20 ~ 12" (Special), Grade 270 LRS, at 34 kips
24 ~ 12" , Grade 270 LRS, at 31 kips
SECTION E-E
W3.4
3" Cover
8"
4"
4"
8"
Spiral Ties
24"
(Typ.)
12 ~ No. 10 Bars
(10'-6" long)
8"
W3.4
Spiral Ties
(Shift as required
4"
to clear strands)
4"
Pile
See Alternate
Strand Patterns
3" Cover
NOTES:
2:
34:
44 PM
(Typ.)
8"
SECTION A-A

12 ~ No. 10
Prestressing
Dowels
Strands
Pile
SECTION F-F

12/21/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20624
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
4" Pitch
16 Turns @ 2" Pitch
Spiral Tie 1"
512"
Pitch
16 Turns @ 2" Pitch
1"
4"
512"
512"
512"
4"
1
2"
1
2"
4 Turns @ 1
4 Turns @ 112" Pitch
W4.0 Spiral Ties
Spacing
@ 6" pitch, full
4"
4 ~ No. 8 Bars 6'-0" long

Conical End Fitting (Typ.)
(see Section C-C)
length
Pile
(Typ.)
1
2"
Head
Tip
3" Cover
4"
1
2"
3"
1
2"
12 ~ No. 10
4 ~ No. 8 Bars
Pile
(Full length)
3"
Dowels
SECTION D-D
1" x 1" Chamfer or
x 34" Chamfer
W4.0 Spiral Ties
3
4"
8"
1
2"
1
2"
4"
11'-0" Solid Section
W4.0
Spiral Ties
4"
8"
1
2"
(Ties not shown in Elevation)

4"
Chamfer
3"
10 Diagonal Ties @ 6"
1
2"
x 3"
1
2"
3
4"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
1
2"
ELEVATION
Pile
30"
8"
** W4.0 Diagonal Ties
Void
6" ctrs. (See Detail)
512"
18"
W4.0
W4.0
8"
8"
Prestressing
Strands
SECTION E-E
4
"
30"
"
4
3
9 4"
No. 8 Bars
Pile
Dowels
Pile
**

7
8"
1
1
678" 3 4" 3 4" 678"
478"
(Typ.)
3" Cover
DETAIL
W4.0
Spiral Ties
7
8"
(Typ.)
W4.0 DIAGONAL TIE
7
8"
(6'-0" long)
3" Cover
12 ~ No. 10
135
Spiral Ties
Spiral Ties
30"
Void
Pile &
4"
8"
512"
30"
Prestressing Strands, see
Alternate Strand Patterns
Void
Alternate Strand Patterns
Pile &
Pile
** Omit 4 ~ No. 8 Bars and Diagonal Ties
(See Pile Splice Reinforcement Details)
7
8"
SECTION C-C
Pile
in pre-planned mechanical splice.
SECTION B-B
(Typ.)
1
1
4"3 4"
Prestressing Strands, see
3" Cover
12 ~ No. 10 Bars
NOTES:
Place one strand at each corner and place the remaining strands equally spaced between the corner
20 ~ 0.6" , Grade 270 LRS, at 41 kips
24 ~
1
2"
(Special), Grade 270 LRS, at 34 kips
28 ~
1
2"
(shift as required
to clear strands)
strands. The total strand pattern shall be concentric with the nominal concrete section of the pile.
2. CONTRACTOR OPTION: The 30" pile may be cast SOLID by omitting the 18" void. In this event, the
12 ~ No. 10
Contractor shall submit calculations for approval and a proposed strand configuration that provide
net prestressing after losses equal to 1000 psi. Alternate configurations for the Diagonal Ties, to
maintain the position of the 4 ~ No. 8 Bars, may be approved by the Engineer.
1:
44:
18 PM
7
8"
(10'-6" long)
1. Any of the given Alternate Strand Patterns may be utilized. The strands shall be located as follows:
3. Work this Index with Index No. 20600 - Notes and Details for Square Prestressed Concrete Piles
Pile
Dowels
Prestressing
Strands
SECTION F-F
and Index No. 20601 - Square Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
PILE SPLICE DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
20630
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
4 Turns @ 1 " Pitch
8 Turns @ 1" Pitch

4" Pitch
16 Turns @ 2" Pitch
1"
8"
20 Turns @ 1 " Pitch
30"
8"
1" Spiral Tie

Spacing
5 "
4 ~ No. 8 Bars 6'-0"
long (see Section C-C)
1" x 1" Chamfer or
4"
11"
4"
5 " Dowel Spacing (Typ.)
3 "
18" Void
" x " Chamfer
**
No. 8 Bars (Typ.)

W4.0 Spiral Ties
Head
1 Turns
at Head
equally spaced (
Typ.
)
Tip
10 ~ No. 8 Bars
at 3" pitch
Pile Collar
36 ~ No. 8 Bars
Pile
18" Void
3" Cover (Typ.)
30" Sq. Pile
3 "
1" x 1" Chamfer or

" x " Chamfer
10 Diagonal Ties @ 6" (Ties not shown in Elevation)
3"
Prestressing Strands
8 ~ No. 10
W4.0 Spiral Ties
Pile
Dowels
11'-0"
8"
SECTION D-D
30"
SECTION THRU PILE COLLAR
** Omit 4 ~ No. 8 Bars and
ELEVATION
Diagonal Ties in pre-planned

3"
Pile Extension
mechanical splice.
30"
Per This Index
Pile Cut Off Elevation

W4.0
18"
Full epoxy compound
(Typ.)
3" Cover
DETAIL A
(Typ.)
Bottom of
Pile
Strands (Typ.)
Pile Cap
SECTION A-A
Bottom of Seal
Prestressing
30"
Strands (Typ.)
(as required)
Pile & Void
SECTION B-B
8"
"
4
Concrete
8"
135
4
"
Prestressing
(See Note 2)
**
W4.0 Diagonal Ties
9 "
Plug Form
STRAND PATTERN
SECTION THROUGH PILE AT PILE CAP
W4.0 DIAGONAL TIE

DETAIL
28 ~ 0.6" , Grade 270 LRS, at 29.5 kips
W4.0
10'
-6"
epoxy compound
Gasket
Pile Collar
W4.0 Spiral
Ties (3" Pitch)
4'
-0"
Void
Form to retain
36 ~ No. 8 Bars
" Full epoxy
compound joint
4'
-0"
3" Cover
8'
-0"
30"
Pile &
(See Detail A)
D
8 ~ No. 10 Dowels
10'
-6"
Spiral Ties
Splice section
W4.0
joint
(
4'
-0" M in.
)
30"
Pile
Pile Em bedm ent
Void
Spiral Ties
(Drill & Epoxy)
18" Void
30" Sq. Prestressed
30"
8"
**
1. After the pile is driven and cut to grade, the top 8'-0" of the 18" Void shall be filled with concrete.
Void
Prior to filling the top 8'-0" of the 18" Void with concrete, strip the cardboard form material from
18" Void
hours. Remove water to a surface-saturated-dry condition prior to making the concrete pour. In lieu
Concrete Pile Roughen

surface to " amplitude
7"
NOTES:
Pile &
1'
-0"
8"
Spiral Ties
within limits of collar.
the void and sand/water blast all interface surfaces. Seal void and fill with potable water for 4-5
No. 8 Bars
(6'-0" long)
of the cardboard form material and the surface preparation requirements described above, a
1:
44:
37 PM
3" Cover
(Typ.)
1 " (Typ.)
Pile per
this Index
8"
30"
8"
stay-in-place corrugated thin wall galvanized pipe may be used. The concrete fill material shall be
of the same type and strength as called for in the pile cap and paid for as substructure concrete.
2. Collar concrete shall reach a strength of 6,000 psi before pile driving is resumed.
3. Work this Index with Index No. 20600 - Notes and Details for Square Prestressed Concrete Piles.
Prestressing
12/17/2015
Strands (Typ.)
Pile & Void
CAPACITY 30" SQUARE PRESTRESSED PILE

-PILE SPLICE DETAIL-
LAST
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SECTION C-C
REVISION
DETAIL OF PILE COLLAR FOR HIGH MOMENT
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
HIGH MOMENT CAPACITY 30" SQUARE
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILE
NO.
20631
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
1"
Spiral Tie
1"
2" Pitch
1"
2" Pitch
2" Pitch
1"
Spacing
Epoxy Grout @
Provide one (1) 3 " vent hole (@ Pile) on two (2)
Joints (Typ.)
opposite faces of pile (Typ. each Pile Section)
Tip
Head
3'-0" (Typ.)
4'-0" Minimum Bottom Section
16'-0" Minimum Intermediate Sections as required
16'-0" Minimum Top Section
ELEVATION
NOTES
Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) "Structures Design Guidelines", Current Edition.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) "LRFD Bridge Design Specifications",
0.58L
0.21L
0.21L
Tie Down and

Support Points
2-POINT SUPPORT
Current Edition.
SPIRAL TIES:
One full
wrap of spirals is required at both the head and tip of pile.
One half turn required for spiral splices.
CONCRETE CLASS:
0.7L
0.3L
Concrete for all piles shall be Class V (Special). Concrete for pile splices shall be Class IV. See "GENERAL NOTES"
in Structures Plans for any specific locations where the use of Silica Fume is required.
CONCRETE STRENGTH:
Pick-up
The cylinder strength shall be 6,000 psi minimum at time of transfer of the Prestressing Force.
Point
L
0.145L
0.355L
0.145L Tie Down and
0.355L
Support Points
1-POINT PICK-UP
0.21L
0.58L
3-POINT SUPPORT
of the Specifications. The bonding agent used on internal pile surfaces shall be a Type A Epoxy Compound in accordance
with Section 926 of the Specifications. Epoxy Compounds used shall be contained on the Approved Products List (APL).
Use Epoxy Bonding Compound or Epoxy Mortar as recommended by the Manufacturer. For Epoxy Mortar only use sand
0.21L
The material to form the joint between pile sections shall be a Type B Epoxy Compound in accordance with Section 926
or other filler material supplied by the manufacturer and in the proportions recommended.
PICK-UP POINTS:
Piles shall be marked at the pick-up points to indicate proper points for attaching handling lines.
Pick-up
REINFORCING STEEL:
Points
0.107L
0.262L
0.262L
0.262L
0.107L Tie Down and

Support Points
PRESTRESSING STEEL:
Prestressing tendons shall be made up of two seven-wire strands. Prestressing strands shall be " (Special),
2-POINT PICK-UP
4-POINT SUPPORT
Grade 270 low relaxation, at 33.8 kips.

PILE DRIVING AFTER SPLICING:
Pile splices shall reach a minimum strength of 5500 psi before driving is resumed.
TABLE OF MAXIMUM PILE PICK-UP AND

SUPPORT LENGTHS
Maximum Pile Length

Pick-Up
Detail
119
2, 3, or 4 point
1 Point
170
2, 3, or 4 point
2 Point
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
1:
45:
06 PM
(Feet)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
54" PRECAST/POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
DESIGN STANDARDS
CYLINDER PILE
NO.
20654
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Spliced Precast/Post-Tensioned Pile Section
1'
-0"
A
1'-0" Void, open top and bottom
to allow through venting of sections
54"
54"
4 ~ Longitudinal Spacers
4 ~ Longitudinal Spacer Bars
(No. 3 Bars or W11 wire) for
Spiral Ties @ Equal Spaces
W11 Wire Spiral Ties
Roughen inside surface

10'
-6"
of 54" Pile to "
amplitude for Spliced
24 ~ No. 11 Bars
Pile Section
@ Equal Spaces
1'-0" Min.
Lap Splice
1'-0" Void
d
i
" Vo
7
3
W11 Spiral
Wire Ties
3" Min. *
Cast in
Cover (Typ.)
Place Plug
Closed No. 4 Bars or W20
No. 4 Bars or
W20 Wire Ties
Wire Ties @ 1'-0" (Typ.)

1 " Min.
3" Min. *
Full Epoxy Compound
3" Min. *
Cover (Typ.)
Cover (Typ.)
Cover (Typ.)
Joint around cylinder pile

wall only (See Detail "A")
24 ~ 1 " Formed Holes
for Tendons @ Equal Spaces
1" Formed Hole (1 tendon per hole;

2 ~ " (Spec.) strands per tendon
24 ~ No. 11 Bars
shown as ( ); Grout per Specification 938)
SECTION B-B
B
"(
applied)
Inside Pile Wall

Full epoxy
compound joint
Clean inside surface of 54" Pile
3" M in. Cover
with a high pressure water blast
(3000 psi Min.) and apply bonding
Temporary Blocking
agent for Driven Prestressed Pile
Form to retain
"(
final thickness)
10'
-6"
Driven Precast/Post-Tensioned Pile
SECTION A-A
epoxy compound
Gasket
Form to retain
epoxy compound
Outside Pile Wall

2'
-0"
Concrete Seal
1:
45:
07 PM
DETAIL "A"
* For Spun Cast Cylinder Piles, the following requirements for concrete cover apply:
1. Slightly or Moderately Aggressive Environments: The concrete cover may be reduced to 2 inches.
2. Extremely Aggressive Environments: The concrete cover may be reduced to 2 inches as long as
the concrete has a documented chloride ion penetration apparent diffusion coefficient with a
2
12/17/2015
DRIVABLE UNFORESEEN FIELD SPLICE DETAIL
mean value of 0.005 in per year or less; otherwise, a 3-inch concrete cover is required.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
(Cast-In-Place Plug)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
54" PRECAST/POST-TENSIONED CONCRETE
DESIGN STANDARDS
CYLINDER PILE
NO.
20654
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Spiral Tie
1"
24 Turns
42 Turns @ 2" Pitch
4" Pitch
@ 1.5" Pitch
Spacing
42 Turns @ 2" Pitch

* Provide one (1) 3 " vent
Provide one (1) 3 " vent hole
24 Turns
1"
@ 1.5" Pitch
hole (@ Pile) on two (2)
(@ Pile) on one (1) face of pile
opposite faces of pile (Typ.)
Head or
Head
Tip
or Tip
3 " Vent Holes at
*The 45" Void in the pile shall be positively vented to water

or air after the final pile installation.
If the
3 " vents
14'-10"
10'-2"
Head and Tip of Pile
are included in the pile cut-off section, then venting shall
ELEVATION
be provided by the use of a 1" PVC conduit through the

substructure cap or column.
NOTES
0.58L
0.21L
0.21L
Tie Down and
Support Points
2-POINT SUPPORT
Current Edition.
SPIRAL TIES:
0.7L
0.3L
One full
CONCRETE CLASS:
Pick-up
Point
0.145L
0.355L
0.145L Tie Down and
0.355L
Support Points
1-POINT PICK-UP
CONCRETE STRENGTH:
3-POINT SUPPORT
The material to form the joint between pile sections shall be a Type B Epoxy Compound in accordance with Specification
0.21L
0.58L
Section 926. The bonding agent used on internal pile surfaces shall be a Type A Epoxy Compound in accordance
0.21L
with Specification Section 926. Epoxy Compounds used shall be contained on the Approved Products List (APL).
Pick-up
Points
0.107L
0.262L
0.262L
0.262L
0.107L
Tie Down and

Support Points
2-POINT PICK-UP
4-POINT SUPPORT
PICK-UP POINTS:
REINFORCING STEEL:
PRESTRESSING STEEL:
Prestressing steel shall be 0.6" seven-wire strand, Grade 270 low relaxation, at 44.0 kips.

SUPPORT LENGTHS
Maximum Pile Length

Pick-Up
Detail
122
2, 3, or 4 point
1 Point
174
2, 3, or 4 point
2 Point
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
1:
45:
26 PM
(Feet)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
60" PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CYLINDER PILE
NO.
20660
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
1'
-0"
60"
60"
W11 Wire
W11 Wire
Spiral Ties
Spiral Ties
24 ~ No. 11 Bars
1'-0" Min.
@ Equal Spaces
Lap Splice

of 60" Pile to "
10'
-6"
Spliced Prestressed Pile Section
1'-0" Void
d
i
Vo
45"

Pile Section
No. 4 Bars or
2" Min.
W20 Wire Ties
Cover (Typ.)
Closed No. 4 Bars or W20 Wire
3" Min.
Ties @ 1'-0" (Typ.)

Cover (Typ.)
Full Epoxy Compound
3" Min.
Cast in
Place Plug
Cover (Typ.)
36 ~ 0.6" Strands
36 ~ 0.6" Strands
@ Equal Spaces
@ Equal Spaces
SECTION B-B
24 ~ No. 11 Bars
"(
applied)
Inside Pile Wall
compound joint
10'
-6"
B
Temporary Blocking
Form to retain
epoxy compound
Gasket
Form to retain
epoxy compound
3" M in. Cover
Driven Prestressed Pile
Full epoxy
"(
final thickness)
SECTION A-A

Outside Pile Wall
DETAIL "A"
1:
45:
27 PM
2'
-0"
Concrete Seal
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
(Cast in Place Plug)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
60" PRESTRESSED CONCRETE CYLINDER PILE
NO.
20660
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Dim. L1 = 30'-0" Min.
Dim. L1 = 30'-0" Min. / Cos
3"
Typical Case 1 & Case 2
Edge adjacent
Longitudinal Const. Joint (Preferred
shall match and conform with alignment
location is at edge of lane, see
of Left & Right Copings shown on
Note 3 and Detail) (Typ. Cases 1 & 2)
Dim . M 1
GENERAL NOTES
Outside edge of Approach Slab (Coping)
1. SURFACE TREATMENT:
may be permitted on the concrete portion of the riding surface. Sidewalk
Superstructure Sheets (Typ.)
to flexible
areas shall receive a broomed finish. The top surface of the concrete
beneath the asphalt overlay shall be raked.
pavement
Edge adjacent to
Gutter Line
Construction Joint
flexible pavement
Bars 5C
2. CONDUIT: If required, see Structures Plans for Conduit Details.
Gutter Line
3. When a longitudinal construction joint is necessary or allowed by the
Permitted
Begin or End Bridge
Backwall or
angle at end
Edge of Bent
of bridge
Cap
Geometric Control
Line
Line
90 (Typ.)
3"
9"
Construction Joint
Field Bend
Permitted
Limits of Asphalt
as required
Overlay
2'-0"
(Typ.)
Backwall or
Edge of Bent
Cap
Begin or End
Bridge (Front
Face of Backwall
3"
9"
4. The plan view for CASE 1 applies when the skew angle () = 0.
Relevant details also apply to CASE 2.

5. The plan view for CASE 2 applies where the skew angle () is > 0.
The slab shown represents a skew to the right for an approach slab at
begin bridge;
approach slab at the end of bridge or a left skew shall be
treated similarly.
6. Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) for the edge of Approach Slabs on

retaining walls is not included in the estimated quantity for reinforcing
steel and is considered incidental to the work. WWR must consist of Deformed
wire meeting the requirements of Specification Section 931.
7. Continue the asphalt pavement over the approach slab and match the friction
course type used on the roadway. See the Roadway Plans for asphalt overlay
and optional base details.
8. Approach slabs shown in Plan View Cases 1 and 2 represent a typical
approach slab with edge barriers and no sidewalks. Provide railings, parapets
and raised sidewalks as detailed in the Contract Plans.
if applicable)
Gutter Line
3"
*
Back Face of
Ba
r
s
5B
Ba
r
@
s
1'
5B
*
0"
@
Ma
Ba
9"
x.
r
Ma
s
(
(
5C
To
Pl
x.
p
ac
(
@
Bo
of
ed
1
t
t
'
Sl
om
be
0
ab
"M
t
we
of
)
ax
en
Sl
.
ab
Ba
(
T
op
)
r
s
of
5B
,T
Sl
ab
op
)
of
Limits of Asphalt Overlay
Sl
ab
)
Gutter Line
9"
2'
0"
Asphalt Overlay
Bars 5C @ 1'-0" Max. (Top of Slab)
M2
9" M ax. (
Bottom of Slab)
Match skew
Bars 8A2 @
1'
-0" M ax. (
Top of Slab)
Bars 5A1 @
Back Face of
Longitudinal Construction Joint Detail.
Limits of
(Typ.)
if applicable)
Geometric Control
Engineer, the transverse steel shall be extended as shown in the
*
Bars 5C
(Front Face of Backwall
Dim ension to m atch Superstructure Sheets
Limits of Asphalt Overlay
Dim . N (
M atch Superstructure Sheets)
(Typ.)
Dim .
As an option to Class 4 Floor Finish (Bridge
Floor Grooving) per Section 400 a hand tined or heavy broomed finish
Dim. L2 = 30'-0" Min. / Cos
9"

(Placed between Bars 5B, Top of Slab)
3"
CROSS REFERENCES:
Bars 5B @ 1'-0" Max. (Top of Slab)
PLAN VIEW (CASE 2)
3"
For Section B-B, Longitudinal Construction Joint
Bars 5B @ 9" Max. (Bottom of Slab)
Dim. L2 = 30'-0" Min.
Detail and Approach Slab Details see Sheet 2.
NOTE: Bars 5C are required as shown when either the

32" or 42" F-Shape Traffic Railings or the Traffic
Railing/Noise Wall are used at the edge of the
Approach Slab.
PLAN VIEW (CASE 1)
Begin or End Bridge (Front Face
30'-0" (Min.)
of Backwall if applicable)
See Structures Plans, Superstructure

Sheets for Joint Details
2'-0"
Bars 8A2
3
4"
1
3 4"
1 " (Min.) Asphalt
Cover
1
4"
Cover
Concrete thickness between
gutter lines when deck planing is
3
4"
Overlay (See Note 7)
(
M in.
)
3
4"
1'
-1
9"
1'
-0"
1'
-0"
required by the Specifications
45
Optional Base
4" Cover (except
1:
45:
48 PM
2" Cover
2" over wall panels)
(Typ.)
(See Note 7)
Bars 5A1
Construction Joint
Permitted

Roofing Paper
Bars 5B (Top
& Bottom) (Typ.)
Dowels (Billed with End Bents, see

End Bent Sheets for placement)
12/17/2015
Back Face of Backwall (Beam
SECTION A-A
or Girder Bridge) or Edge
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
of Bent Cap (Flat Slab Bridge)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
APPROACH SLABS
DESIGN STANDARDS
(FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT APPROACHES)
NO.
20900
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Traffic Railing, 32" F
Traffic Railings and
(Type varies,
Const. Joint
Asphalt Overlay
Shape shown, other
Traffic Railing
Railing similar
Required
Poured rubber or rapid
Traffic Railing or
Begin or End
cure silicone 1" deep
Bridge
Shoulder Line
Geometry of Traffic Railings,
reinforcement; see relevant
Pedestrian/Bicycle Railings, Traffic
those on adjoining bridge.
" Preformed Joint Filler - extend
Index for placement
Separators and Sidewalks to match
SECTION B-B
Bridge
Traffic Railing or
NOTE:
* Bars 5C
Approach Slab
Pedestrian/Bicycle
32" F-Shape shown)
Asphalt Overlay
STANDARD APPROACH SLAB
Bars
from Front Face of Backwall to
5A1
end of Wingwall
Top of Backwall
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Side
Bars 5B
Const. Joint
Traffic Separator
Required
of Backwall
(Type varies,
Const. Joint
Asphalt Overlay
Cheekwall
Front Face
Slope
Traffic Railing
* Bars 5C
32" F-Shape shown)
(as Reqd.)
Required
(Typ.)
Approach Slab
Bars 8A2
Optional Base
* Bars 5C
Embankment
End Bent
Beam or
Wingwall
Girder
End Bent Wingwall
SECTION THRU APPROACH SLAB
SECTION B-B
NOTE: Bars 5C are required as
VIEW C-C AT BEGIN OR END BRIDGE (BEAM
AND END BENT WINGWALL
shown when either the 32" or
BRIDGE SHOWN, FLAT SLAB BRIDGE SIMILAR)
42" F-Shape Traffic Railing
APPROACH SLAB WITH WINGWALL DETAILS
or the Traffic Railing/Noise

Wall are used at the edge
Asphalt Overlay
Const. Joint
(Typ.)
Required
and Pedestrian/Bicycle
(Type varies,
Railing similar
32" F-Shape
Bars 8A2
Asphalt Overlay
shown)
Traffic Railing or
Begin or End
Bridge
WWR 4x4 ~ W4.0xW4.0 (Min. 2'-6" wide)
45
3"
shown hatched (3" top

& " each side)

32" F-Shape shown)
Bridge
Coping)
2'
-0" (
W all
Expanded Polystyrene
9"
1'
-1"
(as Reqd.)
Approach Slab
3" M in.
Bars 5B
APPROACH SLAB WITH MEDIAN TRAFFIC RAILING
Deck
Retaining Wall Coping
Beam or
" Thick Expanded
Girder
Polystyrene
Cheekwall
Face of Retaining Wall
Retaining Wall (See Wall

5 " (Min.)
**
Sheets for Details)
5 " (Min. thickness) lug on End
Pedestrian/Bicycle
Asphalt Overlay
Polystyrene
of steel (See Sheet 1, Note 6)
* Bars 5C
SECTION B-B
" Thick Expanded
Top of Backwall
tied to the top of the bottom mat

Bars 5A1
* Bars 5C
Bridge
relevant Index for placement
shown, other Traffic Railings
Traffic Railing
Approach Slab
Railing Parapet reinforcement; see
Traffic Railing, 32" F Shape
Const. Joint
Required
Traffic Railing or Pedestrian/Bicycle
of the Approach Slab.
Const. Joint
Const. Joint
Required
Required
Railing
6"
Front Face
Bent to retain and conceal
Optional Base
**

10 "
6"
edge of Retaining Wall
Actual location & width
Back Face of
vary depending on type
**
of Backwall
6 "
Backwall
of Retaining Wall used
VIEW D-D AT BEGIN OR END BRIDGE (BEAM
AND RETAINING WALL
APPROACH SLAB WITH RETAINING WALL DETAILS
SECTION B-B
APPROACH SLAB WITH SIDEWALK
6" 2'-0"
Bars 5B may be full

Top of Retaining Wall
length or extended
3" Min.
1'-9" Min.
Const. Joint
Required
Bars 5A1
lap Reqd.
2'
-0"
Shape shown)
2'
-3"
to match superstructure sheets)
2'-0" Min.
Coping
varies, 32" Vertical
Approach Slab
Transition
CROSS REFERENCES:
Coping
Traffic Railing (Type

Raised Sidewalk (geometry & reinforcement
12"
Coping
For location of Section B-B and Longitudinal

Construction Joint see Sheet 1.
Asphalt Overlay
1:
45:
49 PM
" Preformed
Joint Filler
Bars 5B
Bars 8A2
3"
Provide Supplemental #4 Bar
with 2" Min. concrete cover
Longitudinal Const. Joint

12/17/2015
SECTION B-B
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
APPROACH SLAB WITH RAISED SIDEWALK
LONGITUDINAL CONSTRUCTION
JOINT DETAIL
COPING TRANSITION DETAIL FOR

RETAINING WALLS WITH 2'-3" COPING HEIGHT
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
APPROACH SLABS
DESIGN STANDARDS
(FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT APPROACHES)
NO.
20900
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Dim. L1 = 30'-0" + N x Tan
Outside edge of Approach Slab
Typical Case 1 &
Bars 5B1 @ 9" Max. (Bottom of Slab)
Bars 5B3 @ 9" Max.
*Bars 5C1 @ 1'-0" Max. (Top of Slab)
with alignment of Left & Right
3"
Edge adjacent
1'-0" (Top)
Bars 5B2 @ 1'-0" Max.
9"
(Coping) shall match and conform
Case 2
Varies 1'-6" Max.
Bars 5B1 @ 1'-0" Max. (Top of Slab)
9" (Bottom)
1. SURFACE TREATMENT:
6"
to begin or end bridge. See Bid Item Notes. Apply a broomed

finish to sidewalk areas.
2. CONDUIT: If required, see Structures Plans for Conduit details.
Sheets (Typ.)
pavement
3. When a longitudinal construction joint is necessary or allowed
Gutter Line
by the Engineer, the transverse steel shall be extended as
Gutter Line
*
Bars 5C1
Begin or End Bridge

(Typ.)
shown in the Longitudinal Construction Joint Detail.
Construction Joint
4. The plan view for CASE 1 applies when the skew angle
Permitted
(Typ.)
Dim ension to m atch Superstructure Sheets
*
Bars 5C1
& 306
(Typ.)
Bars 5A1 @
9" M ax. (
Bottom of Slab)
Index 305
Bars 8A2 @
1'
-0" M ax. (
Top of Slab)
2'
0"
Back Face of Backwall

or Edge of Bent Cap
Geometric
Edge adjacent to
Control Line
rigid pavement
Geometric
Control Line
90
90 (Typ.)
4 ~ Bars 5C2 @ 6"
(Top of slab)
3"
Construction Joint
Longitudinal Const. Joint (Preferred
Permitted
location is at edge of lane, see
2'-0"
Dowels per Index
Note 3 and Detail) (Typ.
No. 305 & 306 (Typ.)
Cases 1 & 2)
Gutter Line
Dim . N (
M atch Superstructure Sheets)
if applicable)
Dowels per
Apply a Class 4 Floor Finish (Grooved)
to the riding surface from begin or end approach slab joint
Copings shown on Superstructure
to rigid
GENERAL NOTES
3" Min.
M1
3"
Dim .
Dim. L1 = 30'-0" Min.
() = 0. Relevant details also apply to CASE 2.

5. The plan view for CASE 2 applies where the skew angle
() is > 0. The slab shown represents a skew to the right
for an approach slab at begin bridge; approach slab at the
end of bridge or a left skew shall be treated similarly. The
shown reinforcement shall be utilized, and Dowels shall be
provided in accordance with Index Nos. 305 and 306.
6. Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR) for the edge of Approach Slabs
on retaining walls is not included in the estimated quantity for
reinforcing steel and is considered incidental to the work. WWR
must consist of Deformed wire meeting the requirements of
7. PROFILOGRAPH: If profilograph requirements apply, planing
may be required. The permitted construction joint shown in

Section A-A will facilitate the placement of the expansion joint.
8. Approach slabs shown in Plan View Cases 1 and 2 represent

a typical approach slab with edge barriers and no sidewalks.
Provide railings, parapets, traffic separators and sidewalks
as detailed on the additional approach slab sheets.
9. See Roadway Plans for Optional Base details and quantities.
Back Face of Backwall

or Edge of Bent Cap
Begin or End Bridge
Gutter Line
3"
* NOTE:
Bars 5C1
are required as
M2
Dim .
if applicable)
shown when either the 32"

9"
Bars 5C1 @ 1'-0" Max. (Top of Slab)
or 42" F-Shape Traffic
9"
9"
Bars 5C1 @ 1'-0" Max. (Top of Slab)
9"
Railings or the Traffic
Railing/Noise Wall are

3"
Bars 5B @ 1'-0" Max. (Top of Slab)
3"
used at the edge of the
Bars 5B1 @ 1'-0" Max. (Top of Slab)
3"
Approach Slab.
Bars 5B @ 9" Max. (Bottom of Slab)
3"
Bars 5B1 @ 9" Max. (Bottom of Slab)
Dim. L2 = 30'-0" Min.
Dim. L2 = 30'-0" Min.
CROSS REFERENCES:
For Section B-B, Longitudinal Construction
PLAN VIEW (CASE 1)
Joint Detail and Approach Slab Details see
PLAN VIEW (CASE 2)
Sheet 2.
30'-0" (Min.)
Begin or End Bridge

Dowels per
Index 305
if applicable)
2'-0" (See Case 1 &
& 306
Case 2 Plan View)
1
2"
4 ~ Bars 5C2 @ 6" (Case 2
Superstructure Sheets
only, see Plan View)
for Joint Details
1'
-1
9"
1
2"
1'
-0"
Bars 8A2
Cover
(
M in.
)
(Typ.)
1:
46:
10 PM
45
2" Cover
4" Cover (except
Bars 5B (Top
(Typ.)
2" over wall panels)
& Bottom) (Typ.)

Bars 5A1
Optional Base
12/17/2015
(See Note 9)
SECTION A-A
Construction Joint
Permitted
Roofing Paper
Dowels (Billed with End Bents, see

End Bent Sheets for placement)
Back Face of Backwall (Beam
or Girder Bridge) or Edge
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
of Bent Cap (Flat Slab Bridge)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
APPROACH SLABS
DESIGN STANDARDS
(RIGID PAVEMENT APPROACHES)
NO.
20910
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Traffic Railing, 32"
F Shape shown, other

Traffic Railings and
Traffic Railing
Const. Joint
Railing similar
32" F-Shape shown)
Approach Slab
Pedestrian/Bicycle
(Type varies,
Required
Bridge
Poured rubber or rapid
Traffic Railing or
Begin or End
cure silicone 1" deep
Bridge
Traffic Railing or
reinforcement; see relevant
Geometry of Traffic Railings,
as Reqd.
those on adjoining bridge.
Top of Backwall
extend from Front Face of
* Bars 5C1
Separators and Sidewalks to match
SECTION B-B
" Preformed Joint Filler -
Index for placement
Pedestrian/Bicycle Railings, Traffic

* Bars 5C1
Shoulder Line
NOTE:
Backwall to end of Wingwall
Bars 5A1
STANDARD APPROACH SLAB
Side
Bars 5B
Const. Joint
Cheekwall
Front Face
Slope
of Backwall
Traffic Railing
Traffic Separator
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
(Type varies, 32"

Const. Joint
Required
F-Shape shown)
Approach Slab
Required
Bars 8A2
Optional Base
End Bent Wingwall
* Bars 5C1
SECTION B-B
Fill
when either the 32" or 42" F-Shape
Beam or
Wingwall
Girder
VIEW C-C AT BEGIN OR END BRIDGE (BEAM
AND END BENT WINGWALL
* NOTE: Bars 5C are required as shown
End Bent
APPROACH SLAB WITH WINGWALL DETAILS
Traffic Railing or the Traffic

Railing/Noise Wall are used at
Traffic Railing or Pedestrian/Bicycle
the edge of the Approach Slab.
Const. Joint
Const. Joint
Required
Traffic Railing
shown, other Traffic Railings
(Type varies, 32"
and Pedestrian/Bicycle
F-Shape shown)
Approach Slab
Railing Parapet reinforcement; see
Traffic Railing, 32" F Shape

Bridge
relevant Index for placement
Railing similar
Traffic Railing or
Begin or End
Bridge
Required
WWR 4x4 ~ W4.0xW4.0 (Min. 2'-6"
8A2
mat of steel (See Sheet1, Note 6)
Expanded Polystyrene
45
3"
shown hatched (3" top

& " each side)
Traffic Railing
(Type varies, 32"
Bridge
Coping)
SECTION B-B
APPROACH SLAB WITH MEDIAN TRAFFIC RAILING
Polystyrene
Approach Slab
2'
-0" (
W all
1-2 "
Bars 5B
" Thick Expanded
Top of Backwall
wide) tied to the top of the bottom

3" M in.
* Bars 5C1
* Bars 5C1
Bars as Reqd.
9"
Bars 5A1
Deck
Beam or
" Thick Expanded
Girder
Polystyrene
Cheekwall
Face of Retaining Wall
Retaining Wall (See Wall
F-Shape shown)
Const. Joint
Const. Joint
Required
Required
5 " (Min. thickness) lug on End
5 " (Min.)
**
Sheets for Details)
Pedestrian/Bicycle
Railing
6"
Bent to retain and conceal
Optional Base
**
Actual location & width
1'-0"
6"
6 "
edge of Retaining Wall
of Backwall
Back Face of
vary depending on type
**
Front Face
Backwall
of Retaining Wall used
VIEW D-D AT BEGIN OR END BRIDGE (BEAM
AND RETAINING WALL
APPROACH SLAB WITH RETAINING WALL DETAILS
SECTION B-B
APPROACH SLAB WITH SIDEWALK
Bars 5B may be full
6" 2'-0"
length or extended
Top of Retaining Wall
2'-0" Min.
lap Reqd.
1:
46:
11 PM
Required
" Preformed
Bars 5B
Bars 8A2
12/17/2015
Longitudinal Const. Joint
Joint Filler
2'
-0"
1'-9" Min.
Bars 5A1
2'
-3"
Const. Joint
3" Min.
CROSS REFERENCES:
Coping
Shape shown)
Coping
varies, 32" Vertical
to match superstructure sheets)
Approach Slab
Transition
Traffic Railing (Type

Raised Sidewalk (geometry & reinforcement
12"
Coping
For location of Section B-B and Longitudinal

Construction Joint see Sheet 1.
3"
Provide Supplemental #4 Bar
with 2" Min. concrete cover
SECTION B-B
LONGITUDINAL CONSTRUCTION
COPING TRANSITION DETAIL FOR
APPROACH SLAB WITH RAISED SIDEWALK
JOINT DETAIL
RETAINING WALLS WITH 2'-3" COPING HEIGHT
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
APPROACH SLABS
DESIGN STANDARDS
(RIGID PAVEMENT APPROACHES)
NO.
20910
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Dimension A @ 70 F
Elastomeric Seal
See Note 3
Top of Bridge
Deck or Sidewalk
5
8"
x 8" Long
diagonal Anchor Studs

spaced @ 1'-0" centers (Typ.)
3
8"
Bridge Deck
Min.
R Tooled Edge (Typ. as required)
5
M in.
)
8" (
1
4"
Right Side Skew

Angle (Varies)
x 10" Long horizontal
Rail top offset
Skew Angle
90 (Typ.)
Movement
(Varies)
to face of rail
Direction of
im
1'-0" centers (Typ.)
Left Side
0
9
(
+)
0
9
Dim . A
Anchor Studs spaced @
3"
5
8"
0
9
Expansion
Joint
Face of Edge Rails
adjustment for temperature plus 2 times
Face of Traffic
rail top offset to face of rail)
Railing, Parapet
Expansion Joint
or Post
D ire
ction
of
Stat
ionin
g
Face of Traffic Railing,

Dimension B (Dimension A plus or minus
Line
Parapet or Post
NOTE:
Perpendicular
Skew Angle and measured
to Joint
positive in clockwise direction
from a line perpendicular to the

Joint.
Expansion Joint Data Table.

Thickened Slab End
Approach Slab
MOVEMENT SCHEMATIC
TYPICAL SECTION THRU STRIP SEAL EXPANSION JOINT

(Begin or End Concrete Girder Bridge shown,
Intermediate Supports and Steel Girder Bridge similar.
Reinforcing Steel and Girder details not shown for clarity.)
5
5
16( 16)
60
Grind Flush
GENERAL NOTES:
1. Furnish Strip Seal Expansion Joint Systems in accordance with Specification Section 458.
2. Shape of Edge Rail shown is representative, minor variations depending on manufacturer
are permitted.
1:
46:
33 PM
3. Recess the Edge Rail below the concrete surface in accordance with Specification Section 458.
Seal
4. Refer to the Expansion Joint Data Table in the Structures Plans for joint movement and Dimension A.
Weld
5. Refer to Specification Section 458 for installation and fabrication requirements.
5
5
16( 16)
60
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
SHOP SPLICE DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STRIP SEAL EXPANSION JOINT
NO.
21100
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
Match Slope of Deck

Elastomeric Seal
Expansion
Face of
Face of Edge Rail
m.
Di
Dim . A
Dim . B
Phase Construction Line
Elastomeric Seal
Dim . A
Chamfer
(Typ.)
Slope Break Line or
m.
Di
3
4"
Edge Rail
Dim . B
n.
Mi
1 "
2
)
x.
Ma
"(
,4
)
.
n
Mi
(
1"
n.
Mi
1 "
2
Joint
s
e
i
r
e Va
p
o
Sl
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
Elastomeric Seal
3
4"
,
ng
i
l
i
t
Ra
os
c
i
P
f
r
af
to
Tr
e
ap
r
Pa
Skew Angle
,
ng
i
l
ai
t
os
cR
i
P
f
r
af
to
Tr
e
ap
r
Pa
n
ur
t
Up
Turn Angle =
Skew Angle/2
Skew Angle
Field Butt Joint (Seal with Caulk)
Expansion Joint Assembly
PARTIAL SECTION ALONG JOINT AT
Match Slope of Deck
Expansion Joint
Anchor Stud (Typ.)
Chamfer (Typ.)
FIELD BUTT JOINT LOCATION

(CROWNED DECK OR SLAB SHOWN)
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF JOINTS SKEWED
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF SKEWED JOINTS
GREATER THAN 6
Match Slope of Deck
Match Slope of Deck
Elastomeric Seal
Expansion
Face of Edge Rail

Face of
Chamfer (Typ.)
Skew Angle
Joint
Dim . A
Dim . B
Dim . A
Dim . B
Edge Rail
3
4"
Chamfer (Typ.)
D im . B
3
4"
Upturn
Traffic Separator (Type varies)
Construction Joint
Elastomeric Seal
Provide Blockout (shaded)
to allow unobstructed
1
2"
movement of adjacent
Min.
.
1
n
"Mi
2
Traffic Railing,
Elastomeric
Parapet or Post
Seal
Expansion Joint
Anchor Stud (Typ.)
Edge Rail
,
g
n
i
l
i
c Ra
i
f
f
a
Tr
t
s
o
P
r
o
t
e
p
a
r
Pa
Anchor Stud (Typ.)
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF NONSKEWED JOINTS
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF NONSKEWED

JOINTS & JOINTS SKEWED 6 OR LESS
PARTIAL SECTION ALONG JOINT THRU TRAFFIC SEPARATOR
Front Face of Traffic
Railing, Parapet or Post
Front Face of Traffic

Railing, Parapet or Post
Provide Blockout (shaded)
Min.
to allow unobstructed
movement of adjacent
Construction
Elastomeric Seal
Joint
1
2"
Min.
Edge Rail
Construction
Elastomeric Seal
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
4" (Trim flange
5"
1
2"
Joint
Elastomeric Seal
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
of Edge Rail)
120
(Typ.)
Upturn (See Upturn

Detail this Sheet)
Shop Splice
Expansion Joint
Assembly
3
"Ma
x
.
6"
6"
Expansion
1:
46:
34 PM
Joint Assembly
PARTIAL SECTION ALONG JOINT
WITH SLOPE 1%
(Sidewalk Cover Plate where applicable not shown for clarity)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
JOINT TREATMENT AT HIGH SIDE OF DECK
6"
6"
3
"Ma
x
.
UPTURN DETAIL
(TYPICAL AT TRAFFIC BARRIERS AND PARAPETS)
JOINT TREATMENT AT LOW SIDE OF DECK &

HIGH SIDE OF DECK WITH SLOPE < 1%
(Sidewalk Cover Plate where applicable not shown for clarity)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21100
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
of Railing
Sidewalk Cover Plate
Sleeve
Expansion Joint
Anchors (Typ.)
n.
Mi
"
n.
Mi
"
Shop Splice
" Corner Clip (Typ.)
Match Slope of Deck
Upturn
Face of Edge Rail (Typ.)
Dim . A
c
i
f
af
Tr
ng
i
l
i
Ra
Sleeve Anchors (Typ.)
" Chamfer
m.
Di
B
Dim . "
A"
Match Slope of Deck
Dim . B
Upturn
Down Grade
Match Slope of Sidewalk

Front Face
(Typ.)
wn
Do
" Min.
e
ad
Gr
Face of
Gutter
Field Butt Joint
Edge Rail
" Min.
Expansion
Line
Joint
Skew Angle
Anchor Studs (Typ.)

Elastomeric Seal
Match skew angle of
Joint as required (Typ.)
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
" Corner Clip

(Typ. all corners)
Upturn
Match Slope of Sidewalk
Match Slope of Deck
Back Face of Traffic

Railing or Post
Sleeve
Anchors (Typ.)
Sidewalk
Expansion
Cover Plate
Joint
of Parapet
Gutter
" Min.
Field
" Min.
" Max.
Blockout
Dim . A
Dim . B
Line
Down Grade
Front Face
Butt Joint
Construction
Joint
3"
Max.
" Max.
Blockout
Sleeve Anchor spacing - 6" centers Max.
r
e
v
k Co
l
wa
e
d
Si
e
t
a
Pl
3"
Max.
Elastomeric
Seal
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
Shop Splice
Traffic Railing
" Min.
" Min.
Face of
Edge Rail
Anchor Studs (Typ.)
Front Face of
Traffic Railing
Construction Joint
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF NONSKEWED JOINTS

FLUSH SIDEWALK DETAIL
" Min.
3"
Blockout
" Max.
Sleeve Anchor spacing - 6" centers Max.

Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
1'-3"
*
"
rn
tu s
Up
ie
ar
V
Max.
Gutter Line
Down Grade
e@
g
d
pe
o
lt
e
v
Be
d
n
u
o
e& r
p
o
2 Sl
:
1
Min.
e
g
d
m e
o
t
t
o
rb
e
v
o
"
8
"
1
m.
Di
s
e
i
r
Va
A
3"
k
l
wa
e
d
"Si
)
.
p
y
T
s(
u
i
d
a
"r
120
k
l
wa
e
d
f Si
po
o
T
e
t
a
r Pl
e
v
Co
Elastomeric
Seal
g
n
o
"L
" x 2
s
e
i
r
e Va
p
o
Sl
s
r
o
h
c
e An
v
e
e
Sl
Field Butt Joint
Sleeve Anchor (Typ.)
(Seal with Caulk)
1:
46:
35 PM
Construction Joints
Shop Splice
Expansion Joint
Assembly

Expansion Joint Assemblies
Sidewalk
SECTION A-A
* Distance from Sleeve Anchor to edge of concrete is 2 inches minimum, 3 inches maximum.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
Sidewalk
RAISED SIDEWALK DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21100
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
6"
Post or Parapet
Post or Parapet
Traffic Separator (Type and width
1"
Separator with Poured Joint
Poured Joint
Poured Joint Material
6"
Construction
1"
Approximate shape of Traffic
vary, see Structures Plans)
Material
Joint
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
Upturn
Angle Varies
Construction Joint
Foam Backer
Foam Backer Rod
Construction
Rod
Foam Backer Rod
Bridge Deck or
Slab or Raised Sidewalk
Joint
Approach Slab

JOINT TREATMENT AT HIGH SIDE OF
PARTIAL SECTION ALONG JOINT,
JOINT TREATMENT AT LOW SIDE OF DECK OR
DECK WITH SLOPES 1% OR GREATER
JOINT TREATMENT AT TRAFFIC SEPARATOR
HIGH SIDE OF DECK WITH SLOPES < 1%
Dim. A @ 70 F
1
4"
" or per manufacturer's
(Typ.)
recommendations, whichever
is greater.
GENERAL NOTES:
Foam Backer Rod (To be sized
for opening per Manufacturer's

recommendations)
1. Furnish and install Poured Joint With Backer Rod Expansion Joint Systems in accordance with
Specification Sections 458 and 932 using Type D silicone sealant material.
2. Refer to the Structures Plans, Poured Expansion Joint Data Table for Dim. A @ 70 F.

Slab, Raised Sidewalk
or Traffic Separator
Form Material (if present) removed
Slab, Raised Sidewalk
to accommodate joint installation
or Traffic Separator
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
1:
48:
01 PM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
POURED JOINT WITH BACKER ROD
DESIGN STANDARDS
EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEM
NO.
21110
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
3
4"
1'
-3"
70 F
Approach Slab
Corner Clip (Typ. all corners)
Anchor (Typ.)
Bridge Deck or
Dim . A
Outside Corner
F
70
1'
-3"
n.
Mi
2"
x.
Ma
3"
3
4"
Dim . "
A"
Anchor (Typ.)
70 F
Anchors (Typ.)
ng
i
l
i
Ra
m.
Di
c
i
f
af
Tr
Outside Corner
Sleeve
Down Grade
Front Face of Traffic Railing
Corner Clip
wn
Do
(Typ. all corners)

x.
Ma
Match skew angle of
1 "
2
Gutter
e
ad
Gr
Raised Sidewalk
Joint as required (Typ.)
Line
Skew Angle
Bridge Deck or Approach Slab

PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
Front Face of Traffic Railing
3
4"
Corner Clip (Typ. all corners)
Railing or Post or Front
Railing or Post or Front
Face of Parapet
Face of Parapet
Structures Plans for Sidewalk Width and Skew

1
2"
Max.
Sleeve Anchor spacing - 6" centers Max. (See Note)
3"
3"
Max.
Dim . A
Approach Slab
1'
-3"
Down Grade
Traffic Railing
70 F
Sidewalk Cover Plate Length Varies - See

Bridge Deck or
1
2"
Max.
Max.
e
t
a
r Pl
e
v
k Co
l
wa
e
d
Si
l
a
i
r
e
t
tMa
n
i
o
dJ
e
r
u
Po
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
Gutter
1
2"
Max.
Line
Sidewalk
2" Min.
Cover Plate
Construction
Raised Sidewalk
3" Max.
Construction Joint
Foam Backer Rod
Joint
Bridge Deck or Approach Slab

Front Face of
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF NON-SKEWED JOINTS
Traffic Railing
Sidewalk Cover Plate Length Varies - See
Structures Plans for Sidewalk Width and Skew
1" Min.
FLUSH SIDEWALK DETAIL

1" Min.
Sleeve Anchor spacing - 6" centers Max. (See Note)
3" Max.
3" Max.
1"
Sl
o
p
e Va
r
i
e
s
1'-3"

Gutter Line
Down Grade
Bevel top edge @
l
a
i
r
e
t
tMa
n
i
o
dJ
e
r
u
Po
Construction Joints
Sleeve Anchor (Typ.)
s
e
i
r
Va
1:2 slope & round

over bottom edge
b
r
u
fc
eo
p
a
h
es
t
ma
i
x
o
r
p
Ap
t
n
i
o
dJ
e
r
u
h Po
t
e wi
c
a
f
1
8 2"
1
16"
1
1 2"
3"
Dim. A
radius
1
k
l
wa
e
d
"Si
4
e
t
a
r Pl
e
v
Co
k
l
wa
e
d
f Si
po
o
T
s
e
i
r
e Va
p
o
Sl
3
8"
x 2
7
8"
Long
Sleeve Anchors
Raised Sidewalk
A
Foam Backer Rod
1:
48:
02 PM
See Note
Bridge Deck (shown)

Approach Slab (similar)
12/17/2015
RAISED SIDEWALK DETAIL
NOTE:
Sleeve Anchors are required at the two
outside corners of the Sidewalk Cover
Plate. Space Sleeve Anchors uniformly
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
between the corner anchors.
SECTION A-A
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
POURED JOINT WITH BACKER ROD
DESIGN STANDARDS
EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEM
NO.
21110
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Pedestal and Light Pole
Approach Slab
Gutter Line
Bars 4F1 (pairs)
2 ~ 2" Conduits
Bars 4F2 (pairs) (Typ.)
9" **
Varies
3" Cover
2" Cover
Bars 4G (Typ.)
Concrete Pedestal Surface, Sloped

Longitudinally with Profile Grade and
Transversely with Cross Slope.
Bars 4F1 (pairs)
Bar 4H (Field Bend & Tie

to Top Slab Reinforcing)
For Bars 4H & 4G,
11 "
Bridge Deck or
Cover
4F2 & 4F3 (pairs)
2 ~ 2" Conduits
2" Cover
Anchor Bolts (Typ.)
3"
1'-0"
Railing Reinforcing (Varies)
1'-1"
1" Conduit
6"
11 Spaces @ 6"
1'-0"
Traffic or Pedestrian/Bicycle
1'
-1 "
Varies
2'-6"
Railing or Curb
Bars 4G (Top) ~ 7 sp. @ 1'-0"
Light Pole
* 4'-5" Min.
(Tie to Deck Slab or Approach Slab Reinforcing)
Spacing Bars 4F1,
Coping
Spacing Bars 4F4 & 4F5 (

pairs)
* 6'-5" Min. (EJB Side)
Construction
Match Top Slab or
Joint
Sidewalk Reinforcing
Cover
1 ~ 1" Conduit
Coping
Const.Jt.
Lap (Bars
shown for clarity)
Bolt Circle
2" Cover (Typ.)
1'-1"
Bars 4G (Tie to Top Slab
Reinforcing, shift to
maintain lap with Bars 4F1)
Bars 4F4 (pairs) (Shift as required to clear Traffic
5"
*** Anchor
4G with 4F1)
Anchor Plate (dashed lines)
Railing, Approach Slab or Bridge Deck Reinforcing) (Typ.)
7 "
1'
-1 "
& Bott. of Slab)
Light Pole
Slab (Reinforcing not
required to clear Anchor Bolts)
2'
-6"
7"
Bars 4H (Top
(pairs)
(See Sheet 3 Note 6)
Bridge Deck or Approach
1'-4" Min.
Permitted
Bars 4F4
EJB
8"
2" Cover
Bars 4F5 (pairs) (Shift as
Bar 4H
TYPICAL SECTION AT LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL FOR

APPROACH SLAB OR BRIDGE DECK THICKNESS LESS THAN 1'-1" AT COPING
Bars 4F5 (pairs)
See Anchor Plate Detail
4 ~ Anchor Bolts (see Sheet 3)

Traffic Railing (Type Varies,
2'-6"
2'-6"
Coping
2'-6"
32" Vertical Shape shown),

Light Pole
* Slip Forming Method of Construction requires the Engineer's approval within the limits shown.
or Curb similar
** For Index No. 820 - Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing and concrete curb, this dimension is 3". For raised sidewalks, this dimension is 1'-0" Max.
2'-6"
*** Anchor Bolt pattern orientation shall be as shown.

1" Conduit
Traffic Railing Reinforcing (Typ.)
1'-1"
2 ~ 2" Conduits
PLAN VIEW
2" Cover
Pedestal and
Top of Traffic or
Light Pole
1 ~ 1"
Bars 4F5
Conduit
(pairs)
Bars 4F2 (pairs)
Varies (Eq. to Slab thickness)
(1'-5" Max., 1'-2" Min.)
Bars 4F4
Bars 4F3
(pairs)
(pairs)
Bars 4F3 (pairs)
Bars 4F2
Bars 4F1
(pairs)
(pairs)
Bars 4H
or Approach Slab
Bars 4G (Tie to Top Slab

1'-4" Min.
Reinforcing)

Lap (Bars
Anchor Bolts (Typ.)
Top of Bridge Deck
shown for clarity)

M in.
1'
-1 "
Riding Surface
Raised Sidewalk
M in.
(pairs)
2" Cover
2 ~ 2" Conduits
11 "
Bars 4F1 (pairs)
See Detail "A"
(See Note 6)
M in.
EJB
Bars 4F5
2 " Cover
Construction Joint
Bars 4H
4G with
4F1)
Bars 4F4 (pairs) (Shift as required

to clear Traffic Railing, Approach Slab
1'-6"
or Bridge Deck Reinforcing) (Typ.)
Bars 4F4 (pairs)
Bars 4G (Tie to Top
Anchor Plate
shown for clarity)
Slab Reinforcing)
(dashed lines)
TYPICAL SECTION AT LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL FOR

Varies
7'-6"
Varies
APPROACH SLAB OR BRIDGE THICKNESS LESS THAN 1'-5" AT COPING
3:
10:
01 PM

CROSS REFERENCE:
For Detail "A", Anchor Plate Detail and Light Pole Pedestal Notes, see Sheet 3.
12/21/2015
ELEVATION VIEW
NOTE: Anchor Bolt, Nuts, Washers and Anchor Plate are dashed for clarity.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL FOR APPROACH SLAB OR BRIDGE DECK THICKNESS LESS THAN 1'-5" AT COPING
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL
NO.
21200
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
Bridge Deck or
Bars 4G (Typ.)
Pedestal and Light Pole
Approach Slab
Gutter Line
Bars 4F1 (pairs)
2 ~ 2"
2 ~ 2" Conduits
2'-6"
1'-1"
Construction

Bars 4F1 (pairs)
Joint
Bars 4G (Tie
Cover
Varies (Eq. to
2" Cover
slab thickness)
(2'-0" Max.)
Bars 4H
Bars 4J1
Bridge Deck or Flat
(Pairs)
*** Anchor
Bolt Circle
1'-1"
2" Cover (Typ.)
8"
Bars 4J2
1'-4" Min.

to clear Traffic Railing, Flat Slab or
Lap (Bars
2'
-6"
7"
5"
Light Pole
1'
-1 "
& Bottom)
8"
7"
Bars 4H (Top
5"
(pairs)
7 "
shown for clarity)
Permitted
Bars 4F4
EJB
8"
Const. Jt.
Match Top Slab or
Reinforcing)
1 ~ 1" Conduit
Coping
For Bars 4H & 4G,
to Top Slab
6"
Conduits
1'
-0"
Varies
Railing Reinforcing (Typ.) (Varies)
2 " Cover
4F3 (pairs) & 4J2
1" Conduit
Anchor Bolts (Typ.)
2" Cover
1'-0"
(
pairs)
11 Spaces @ 6"
& 4F5 (
pairs)
1'-0"
Spacing Bars 4F1, 4F2,
Spacing Bars 4F4
Varies
Spacing Bars 4J1
(Tie to Deck Slab or Approach Slab Reinforcing)
Light Pole
Railing or Curb
Coping
Bars 4G (Top) ~ 7 sp. @ 1'-0"
Bridge Deck Reinforcing) (Typ.)
4G & 4F1)
1'-6"
TYPICAL SECTION AT LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL FOR FLAT SLAB

OR BRIDGE DECK THICKNESS AT COPING 1'-5" OR GREATER
Bars 4F5 (pairs)
Bars 4J1 (pairs)
4 ~ Anchor Bolts (See Sheet 3)
Bars 4J2 (Typ.)

2'-6"
Traffic Railing (Type Varies,

2'-6"
Coping
2'-6"
32" Vertical Shape shown),

Light Pole
or Curb similar
*** Anchor Bolt pattern orientation shall be as shown.

2'-6"
Traffic Railing Reinforcing (Typ.)
PLAN VIEW
1" Conduit
1'-1"
2 ~ 2" Conduits
Top of Traffic or
Pedestal and
2" Cover
Anchor Bolts (Typ.)
Construction Joint
Light Pole
Asphalt Overlay
2 " Cover

EJB
(See Note 6)
Bars 4F5
See Detail "A"
1 ~ 1"
2 ~ 2" Conduits
Conduit
(pairs)
Bars 4F1 (pairs)
when present
Bars 4G (Tie
to Top Slab
For Bars 4H & 4G,
Reinforcing)
Match Top Slab or

Cover
Bars 4F5
(pairs)
(pairs)
thickness) (2'-0" Max.)
Bars 4F2
(pairs)
Bars 4F3 (pairs)
Bars 4F3 (pairs)
Bars 4H
Varies
Bars 4F4
(
2'
-0" M ax.
)
Riding Surface
2" Cover
Varies (Eq. to Coping
Bars 4F4
shown for clarity)
Bars 4J1
(Pairs)
to clear Traffic Railing or Approach

Slab Reinforcing) (Typ.)
1'-4" Min.
Bars 4F2
Slab Reinforcing)
(pairs)
Retaining Wall (See Index No.

20900 & 20910, Sheet 2 &

Bars 4G (Tie to Top
Lap (Bars
Wall Sheets for Details)
4G & 4F1)
1'-6"
Bars 4F1 (pairs)

Anchor Plate
Bars 4J2 (Typ.)
Bars 4J1 (pairs)
Bars 4J2
(Typ.)
(dashed lines)
TYPICAL SECTION AT LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL
7'-6"
3:
10:
02 PM
Bars 4H
Approach Slab (Reinforcing
FOR APPROACH SLAB ON RETAINING WALL
CROSS REFERENCE:
For Detail "A", Anchor Plate Detail and Light Pole Pedestal Notes, see Sheet 3.
12/21/2015
ELEVATION VIEW
NOTE: Anchor Bolt, Nuts, Washers and Anchor Plate are dashed for clarity.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL FOR APPROACH SLAB OR BRIDGE DECK THICKNESS AT COPING 1'-5" OR GREATER
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL
NO.
21200
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Bars 4F2
thickness is less than 1'-1", Bars 4F3 shall have leg length and bar
1'-9"
length shown in parentheses.
Bars 4F3
(1'-5")
b. The number of bars shown in parentheses is for Bars 4F4 when Pedestal
(See Note a)
3'-8"
Bars 4F4
2'-11"
Bars 4F5
is attached to Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing - Index No. 820 or an 8" wide concrete

curb, and the Bridge Deck or Approach Slab thickness is less than 1'-1".
3'
-0"
8 "
3'
-0"
2'-0"
or an 8" wide concrete curb and the Bridge Deck or Approach Slab
1'-5".
F1
16
5'-8"
F2
4'-8"
F3
4'-2"
a, c
(3'-6")
4
8'-3"
b, c
(6)
2'-7"
2'-7"
2'-4"
F5
6'-7"
6'-0"
15'-8"
J1
4'-8"
J2
12
4'-0"
BAR 4H
1'
-6"
BARS 4F1, 4F2, 4F3, 4F4 & 4F5
d. Bars 4J1 and 4J2 are not required when Pedestal thickness is less than
NOTES
SIZE
F4
c. Lap Splices for Bars 4F1, 4F2 & 4F3 shall be a minimum of 1'-4".
Lap Splices for Bars 4F4 & 4F5 shall be minimum of 1'-8".
NO. REQD. LENGTH
MARK
2'
-7"
Bars 4F1
2'
-7"
a. When Pedestal is attached to Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing - Index No. 820
2'-6"
Bars 4F4 & 4F5
Bars 4F1, 4F2 & 4F3
7 "
6'-0"
Field trim height of bars to maintain cover when Pedestal
thickness is less than 2'-0". Field trim length of Bars 4J2 on Retaining
Wall Coping to maintain cover.
BAR 4G
3'-2"
Bars 4J1
2'-6"
Bars 4J2
( ) See Reinforcing Steel Note a & b.
BARS 4J1 & 4J2
e. All bar dimensions in the bending diagrams are out to out.
LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL NOTES
1'-3"
4. ANCHOR BOLT DESIGN:
1. Concrete and Reinforcing Steel required for the construction of the

Pedestal shall meet the same requirements as the Traffic Railing or
Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing the Pedestal is attached to.
Anchor Bolt design is based on the standard Roadway Aluminum Light Pole
configurations shown on Index 17515 and the following design limitations:
Load Case 1: See Table 1
Load Case 2: 150 mph Design Wind Speed, 15' arm length, 50' Design
11"
2. Light Pole Pedestal may be used with the following:
1'-1" bolt hole circle
Mounting Height with a 75' bridge deck height above natural
Index No. 420 - Traffic Railing (32" F Shape),
ground, or MLW.
Index No. 422 - Traffic Railing (42" Vertical Shape),

Index No. 423 - Traffic Railing (32" Vertical Shape),
Holes equally spaced
Index No. 424 - Traffic Railing (Corral Shape),

"
4 ~ (Bolt Dia.+ ")
Anchor Bolt Diameter: 1" (Load Case 1), 1 " (Load Case 2).
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 55.
Index No. 425 - Traffic Railing (42" F Shape),
Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade A, Heavy-Hex.
Index No. 820 - Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing,
Washers: ASTM F436 Type 1.
Index No. 821 - Aluminum Pedestrian/Bicycle Bullet Railing for

Traffic Railing (32" F Shape), or
ANCHOR PLATE DETAIL
Anchor Plate: ASTM A709 (Grade 36) or ASTM A36.

All Nuts, Bolts and Washes shall be galvanized by ASTM F2329.
Index No. 5210 - Traffic Railing /Noise Wall (Bridge).

The Contractor is responsible for ensuring the anchor bolt configuration is
3. Unless otherwise noted, Traffic Railing (32" F Shape) is shown in all
Light Pole
Views and Sections. The Pedestal details for other Traffic Railings
Wire Screen
(See Spec. 649-6)
compatible with the light pole base plate. Submit modifications of the anchor
bolt design to the Engineer for approval.
or Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing are similar.

5. Anchor Bolts must be installed plumb.
Light Pole Base
Leveling Nut
6. For Conduit, Embedded Junction Boxes (EJB), Expansion/Deflection Fitting and
Diam eter
M axim um
1 ~ Bolt
Plate (Level)
adjacent Reinforcing Steel Details, see Utility Conduit Detail Sheets.
7. PAYMENT: The cost of Wire Screen, Anchor Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Anchor Plates
shall be included in the Bid Price for Light Poles. The cost of all Labor, Concrete
Concrete Pedestal
Longitudinally with
Washer
Profile Grade and
(Typ.)
Varies
Surface, Sloped
Transversely with
Cross Slope.
Notes 4 & 5)
3:
10:
03 PM
Bottom of
Anchor Plate
Anchor Plate
CROSS REFERENCE:
For location of Detail "A" see Sheets 1 and 2.
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/21/2015
DETAIL "A"
LAST
Miscellaneous Hardware required for the completion of the Electrical System,

shall be included in the Bid Price for the Traffic Railing or Pedestrian/Bicycle
Railing the Pedestal is attached to.
TABLE 1 - DESIGN LIMITATIONS FOR

ANCHOR BOLTS (LOAD CASE 1)
WIND
ARM
SPEED
LENGTH
(MPH)
Anchor Bolts (See
REVISION
(
9 " M inim um )
and Reinforcing Steel required for the Construction of the Pedestals, EJB, and
(Ft.)
ESTIMATED LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL QUANTITIES
BRIDGE DECK HEIGHT (Ft.)*
PER LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL
DESIGN MOUNTING HEIGHT

40 Ft.
45 Ft.
50 Ft.
ITEM
UNIT
QUANTITY
110
15
75
75
75
130
8 & 10
75
75
75
130
12
75
75
70
130
15
75
75
40
150
75
75
10
150
10
75
50
**
(The Reinforcing Steel quantity shown in parenthesis is for a Pedestal
150
12
75
45
**
attached to Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing - Index No. 820 with Bridge
150
15
75
30
**
Deck or Approach Slab thinner than 1'-1 ". Add 59 Lbs. for
* Above natural ground or MLW.
Concrete Per
Pedestal Thickness
Reinforcing Steel
** See Load Case 2.
LB
0.040
195 (182)
Bars 4J1 & 4J2 when Pedestal Thickness is greater than 1'-5")
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CY/In.
LIGHT POLE PEDESTAL
NO.
21200
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
CONDUIT GENERAL NOTES:
1. Furnish and install approved Conduits and Fittings in accordance with the Specifications, this
Standard, the National Electric Code (NEC) and as directed by the Engineer.
* Reduce to 6" maximum when installed in

Pedestrian/ Bicycle Railings.
2. Furnish and install Schedule 80 PVC Conduits in accordance with Specification Section 630
and this Index. Connect Conduit and Fittings using solvent cement in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations.
3. Furnish and install Embedded Junction Boxes (EJB) with weatherproof covers sized in
locations. Omit EJB at Begin or End of Retaining Walls adjacent to Bridges unless a precast
4. Furnish and install Expansion Fittings at locations shown in the Plans. Certify that
Expansion Fittings used at a given location are rated to accommodate the anticipated
8
"
8
"
Traffic Railing with junction slab is used. Position EJB as shown.
to the Begin and End of Bridges, Begin and End of Retaining Walls, and at other required
8"
1'
-6"
accordance with NEC requirements and the maximum size limits shown. Install EJB adjacent
1'-6"
1'-6"
movement at that location: along Bridge decks see Structures Plans, Expansion Joint Data
Table; along Retaining Walls and other unspecified locations 2 minimum.
EJB "A"
EJB "B"
Double Conduit
Single Conduit
(Maximum Dimensions)
(Maximum Dimensions)
5. Furnish and install Expansion/Deflection Fittings at locations shown in the Plans. Certify
that Expansion/Deflection Fittings used at a given location are rated to accommodate a
minimum rotation of 30 degrees and the anticipated movement at that location: along Bridge
decks- see Structures Plans, Expansion Joint Data Table; along Retaining Walls and other
unspecified locations 0.7 minimum.

6. For all Conduits designated for future use, install either a #12 AWG Pull Wire or a
Polypropylene cord between every EJB and install a #12 AWG Pull Wire from the first and
last EJB in Traffic Railing or Parapet to the capped end of the Conduit.
7. For Conduit not designated for future use, see Plans for details. For Conduit designated for
future use, stub out and cap the Conduit and drive a 3-0 long (min.) diameter Steel
Pipe to be flush with the ground line adjacent to the end of the Conduit as shown on Sheets
2, 3 or 4. Provide the location of the stub out with Steel Pipe to the Engineer for inclusion
on the As-Built Plans.
8. Shift vertical Railing reinforcement symmetrically to provide 2 clearance to EJB. Space

shifted vertical reinforcement at minimum 3 centers. Cut horizontal Railing reinforcement to
provide 2 clearance to EJB and provide supplemental reinforcement as shown. To facilitate
placement of Conduit, Expansion Fittings, and Expansion/Deflection Fittings, shift reinforcing
a maximum of 1" but do not cut railing reinforcing to facilitate Conduit or Fittings. Do not
bundle Conduits, or Conduit and horizontal reinforcement.
9. Unless otherwise shown in the plans, include the cost of furnishing and installing Conduit,
Pull Cords and Wires, EJB, Expansion and Expansion/Deflection Fittings and all associated
hardware required to complete the installation in the cost of the Traffic Railing or
Railing Joint
Wrap with sponge rubber
Traffic Railing or
Pedestrian / Bicycle Railing
thick nominal
2" PVC
Conduits
Conduits
~
6" (
M ax.
)
2" PVC
3" (
M in.
)
1
4"
Railing Joint
Expansion / Deflection
Soil Concrete
Pedestrian Railing (Parapet) that the Conduit is installed in.

1
2"
thick nominal
2" PVC Conduits
3:
56:
00 PM
Fitting

Traffic Railing or
12/21/2015
Pedestrian / Bicycle Railing
Expansion Fitting
1
4"
thick nominal
(See Note 4)
Expansion / Deflection
Fitting (See Note 5)
DETAIL "A"
DETAIL "B" EXPANSION / DEFLECTION
DETAIL "C" EXPANSION / DEFLECTION
EXPANSION FITTING DETAIL
FITTING DETAIL (CONCRETE / CONCRETE)
FITTING DETAIL (CONCRETE / SOIL)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
GENERAL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONDUIT DETAILS
NO.
21210
SHEET
NO.
1of 4
Traffic Railing
Traffic Railing
(42" Vertical Shape)

Deck Expansion Joint or
EJB "B" (Single Conduit)

(1'-6" Max. x 8" Max. x 8" Max.) Traffic Railing
2 ~ 2" PVC
(1'-6" Max. x 8" Max. x 6" Max.) Parapet
Conduits
3
4"
Open Joint in Railing

Provide 3
Traffic Railing
Provide 2 supplemental
supplemental #5
(32" F Shape)
#5 Bars each 10'-0"
Bars each 10'-0" long
long centered about EJB
centered about EJB
Pedestrian/Bicycle
Railing
EJB "A" Shown
See Detail "A" or "B" as

Top of Coping
required by Structures Plans
8'-0" (Min.)
300'-0" (Max.)
EJB "A" Shown
EJB "B" Similar
6'-0" (Min.)
EJB "B" Similar
Opening on
EJB "A" Shown
non-traffic face.
EJB "B" Similar
Opening on
non-traffic face.
2 ~ 2" PVC
Opening on
Conduits
non-traffic face.
2 ~ 2" PVC
2 ~ 2" PVC
EJB Spacing
Conduits
Conduits
EJB "B" DETAIL
Bridge Deck or
Bridge Deck or
Approach Slab
Approach Slab
6"
Min.
Slab with Raised Sidewalk
SECTION THRU
SECTION THRU PEDESTRIAN /
TRAFFIC RAILING AT EJB
BICYCLE RAILING AT EJB
SECTION THRU
* 32" F-Shape Traffic Railing shown, other Traffic
Railings and Pedestrian/Bicycle Railings similar.

** EJB "A" shown, EJB "B" similar. See EJB "B" Detail.
(32" F SHAPE SHOWN,
(42" VERTICAL SHAPE SHOWN,
42" F SHAPE SIMILAR)
32" VERTICAL SHAPE SIMILAR)
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Deck
Guardrail Transition Section when called for in Plans
Bridge
in Railing *
Traffic Railing *
" Open Joint
Gutter Line
TRAFFIC RAILING AT EJB
2" PVC
Gutter Line
2" PVC Conduits
Coping
Coping

300'-0" (Max.)
See Detail "C"
all Open joints in Railings (Typ.)
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW ALONG BRIDGE

Guardrail
Post
6'-0" Min. to Railing Ends &

End Bent Wing
EJB Spacing
(
M in.
)
EJB "A" **
2'
-0"
Conduits
Edge of adjacent Slope
2'-0"
Steel Pipe,
Pavement or Rubble Riprap
(Min.)
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW ALONG APPROACH SLAB WITHOUT CONTINUING TRAFFIC RAILING
Traffic Railing *
Traffic Railing *
Guardrail Transition Section when called for in Plans
" Open Joint

in Railing *
2" PVC
EJB "A" **
Conduits
See Detail "A"

Approach Slab
by Structures Plans
Top of Coping
by Structures Plans
or "B" as required
Bridge Deck
See Detail "A"
End Bent Wing
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW ALONG BRIDGE
12/21/2015
3:
56:
01 PM
or "B" as required
2" PVC
Conduits
2'
-0" (
M in.
)
Top of Coping
See Detail "C"
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW ALONG APPROACH SLAB WITHOUT CONTINUING TRAFFIC RAILING
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
Bridge and Approach Slab with Edge Railing

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONDUIT DETAILS
NO.
21210
SHEET
NO.
2 of 4
Front Face of Backwall or

Begin or End Bridge

See Detail "A"
Approach Slab
or "B" as required
" Open Joint
Guardrail Transition Section
by Structures Plans
Field Bend Conduit to

in Railing
align with EJB (Typ.)
Bridge Deck
Gutter Line
when called for in Roadway Plans
Detail "C" *
2" PVC Conduits
8'-0" (Min.)
Horizontal placement
6'-0" (Min.)
See Note 2
6'-0" Min. to Railing Ends &

all open joints in Railings (Typ.)
as shown in Roadway Plans

Gutter Line
300'-0" (Max.)
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
See Conduit Stub-Out Detail below
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF MEDIAN TRAFFIC RAILING
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW OF MEDIAN TRAFFIC RAILING
ALONG BRIDGE
ALONG APPROACH SLAB

Field Bend Conduit Under
" Open Joint

in Railing
EJB "B" (Single Conduit)
2" PVC
(1'-6" Max. x 8" Max. x 8" Max.)
Conduits
See Detail "A"
and Over EJB (Typ.)
or "B" as required
Median Traffic
by Structures Plans
(Typ.)
Railing

when called for in Roadway Plans
2'
-0"
in Roadway Plans
Top of Bridge Deck
Top of
8'-0" (Min.)
Bridge Deck
300'-0" (Max.)
(
M in.
)
Vertical Alignment as shown
2" PVC Conduits
Approach Slab
Front Face of Backwall or
Begin or End Bridge
Detail "C" *
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW OF MEDIAN TRAFFIC RAILING
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW OF MEDIAN TRAFFIC RAILING
ALONG BRIDGE
ALONG APPROACH SLAB
Provide 2 ~ 10'-0" long supplemental
* For non-continuing Traffic Railing
#5 Bars centered on EJB
NOTES:
only.
1. Work this sheet with Index No. 421.
2" Conduits
See Chamfer Detail
See Note 3
2. Adjust Conduit horizontally and vertically as

Galvanized Steel
"
(Front Face)
Edge of Pavement or
"
without cover
(if present)
a minimum " thick galvanized steel cover.
(
M in.
)
2'
-0"
or App. Slab
Bridge Deck
3. When installed in traffic face of a

railing, use only Galvanized Steel EJB "B" with
4. Position EJB such that, with gasket and cover

plate secured and in place, plate is flush with
2'-0"
(Min.)
Steel Pipe,
"
3:
56:
04 PM
11 "
necessary to align with EJB.
4"
4"
EJB "B"
the railing face. Flush is

+" to -" measured with a horizontal
straightedge.
CONDUIT STUB-OUT DETAIL

"
12/21/2015
SECTION A-A
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
(See Notes 4 & 5)
CHAMFER DETAIL
(See Note 5)
Bridge and Approach Slab with Median Traffic Railing
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONDUIT DETAILS
NO.
21210
SHEET
NO.
3 of 4
" Open Joint at Begin
" Open Joint in Retaining
or End Approach Slab
Wall Coping only
Gutter Line
Traffic Railing *
Wall Coping & Traffic Railing *
when called for in Plans
Traffic Railing *
EJB "A" **
Begin or End of
Retaining Wall
2" PVC Conduits
2" PVC Conduits
Steel Pipe,
(See Sheet 1
See Detail "A"
See Detail "C"
(
M in.
)
See Detail "B"
2'
-0"
Note 7)
Approach Slab
2'-0" (Min.)
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW ALONG APPROACH SLAB
2'-0" (Min.)
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW ALONG RETAINING WALL
WITH CONTINUING TRAFFIC RAILING
" Open Joint at Begin
Traffic Railing *
or End Approach Slab
Traffic Railing *
Wall Coping & Traffic Railing *
6'-0" (Min.)
300'-0" (Max.)
EJB Spacing
2" PVC
EJB "A" **
2" PVC Conduits
Conduits
See Detail "B"
See Detail "A"
Top of Coping

Top of Coping
when called for in Plans
Wall Coping only

Approach Slab

2" PVC
2'
-0" (
M in.
)
Shoulder Line
Conduits
Retaining Wall Panels (Typ.)
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW ALONG APPROACH
See Detail "C"
PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW ALONG RETAINING WALL
SLAB WITH CONTINUING TRAFFIC RAILING

(Retaining Wall Mounted Traffic Railing shown,
* 32" F Shape Traffic Railing shown, other Traffic Railings and

Pedestrian / Bicycle Railing similar. (See Sheet 2)
** EJB "A" shown EJB "B" similar. See EJB "B" Detail on Sheet 2.
12/21/2015
3:
56:
05 PM
Roadway Concrete Barrier similar)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
Approach Slab and Retaining Wall with Railing

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONDUIT DETAILS
NO.
21210
SHEET
NO.
4 of 4
CGL
CGL
RFL
Ch
an
ne
l
1.
Provide Navigation Light System in compliance with Specifications Section 510.
RFL
NAVIGATION LIGHT NOTES:

RFL
Ch
an
ne
l
RFL
GCL
GCL
RFL***
RFL***
Bridge
Bridge
Bridge
RFL***
RFL***
GCL
Fender
GCL
(Typ.)
PC
Fender
(Typ.)
RFL
RFL
FROM POWER SOURCE
RFL
LC
Xmer
CGL
RFL
CGL
NOTE:
GCL
GCL
Size conduit and conductors per NEC requirements.
NAVIGATION LIGHT SYSTEM SCHEMATIC
FOR SINGLE BRIDGE WITH FENDERS
FOR DUAL BRIDGES WITH FENDERS
Do not use conduit smaller than " .
RFL or
RFL or
RFL or
RCL
RCL
RCL
CGL
CGL
RFL or
RFL or
RFL or
RCL
RCL
RCL
TYPICAL ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
Ch
an
ne
l
Ch
an
ne
l
POWER CONDUCTORS
RFL or RCL *
RFL or RCL *
GCL
GCL
DISTANCE
RFL or RCL *
RFL or RCL *
RFL **
RFL **
LEGEND
Bridge
RFL **
GCL
CONDUCTOR
TRANSFORMER
0 - 75
120
#12 AWG
N/A
75 - 500
120 or 240
#10 AWG
N/A
500-1000
240
#10 AWG
N/A
1000-2000
480
#10 AWG
2 KVA
Bridge
RFL **
Bridge
RFL or RCL *
VOLTS
(feet)
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
2000-5000
480
#8 AWG
2 KVA
5000-10000
480
#6 AWG
2 KVA
over 10000
480
#4 AWG
2 KVA
RFL or RCL *
RFL or RCL *
GCL
RFL or RCL *
LC
Lighting Contactor
PC
Photocell Control
Xmer
Transformer (If Required)
RFL
Red Pier/Fender Light (180 visibility)
1:
49:
11 PM
or
FOR SINGLE BRIDGE WITHOUT FENDERS
FOR DUAL BRIDGES WITHOUT FENDERS
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
*** RFL to be located at mid length of straight portion of fender.
LAST
Red Channel Margin Light (180 visibility)
GCL
Green Center Channel Light (360 visibility)
CGL
Clearance Gauge Light
CM
Channel Margin or Pier inner surface
Use RFL when Pier is at Channel Edge and see CFR, Title 33, part 118 for Mounting Height restrictions. Use RCL otherwise.
** Mounted only on the Pier that defines CM, otherwise does not apply.
REVISION
RCL
whichever defines Channel Edge.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
NAVIGATION LIGHT SYSTEM DETAILS
DESIGN STANDARDS
(FIXED BRIDGES)
NO.
21220
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Traffic Railing or Parapet
CROSS REFERENCES:
EJB
1. For Navigation Light System notes

and legend, see Sheet 1.
2. See Utility Conduit Detail sheets for

Embedded Junction Box (EJB) dimensions
& locations.
2 ~ 2" Conduits
Conduit Nipple
Back of Traffic Railing
Coping
Bend if
* Mounting Box
or Parapet
required
Type LB or LR Access
Fitting, " Min.
whichever applicable.
* Light Fixture
Swivel Box
GCL OR RCL MOUNTING DETAILS (SCHEMATIC)

VIEW A-A
(Traffic Railing - 32" F Shape shown, other railings similar)
32" F-Shape Traffic Railing (shown)
* Supplied by Light Fixture Manufacturer
other railings or Parapet similar
EJB
Chain
Flexible Conduit
2" Conduits
or Parapet
Traffic Railing
Service
Mounting Box
2" Conduits
Light Fixture
" Min.
Deck
Access Fitting
Bridge
Swivel Box
Bottom of Bridge Deck
Bottom of Bridge Deck
Service
Girder
Chain
Service Chain
Install Light Fixture so as to ensure visibility

2"
from an approaching vessel.
nominal
Bottom of Girder
RCL or GCL
1:
49:
12 PM
RCL or GCL
B
GCL OR RCL MOUNTING DETAILS (SCHEMATIC)
ELEVATION VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
(Traffic Railing (32" F Shape) shown, other railings similar)
SECTION B-B
TYPICAL POSITION OF RCL OR GCL
RELATIVE TO SUPERSTRUCTURES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
NAVIGATION LIGHT SYSTEM DETAILS
DESIGN STANDARDS
(FIXED BRIDGES)
NO.
21220
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
BOX GIRDER MAINTENANCE LIGHTING NOTES:

1. Submit shop drawings to the Engineer detailing the layout of the maintenance lighting system for the entire structure.
The shop drawings must include, but not be limited to, the following items:
a. Conduit layout and installation details through diaphragms, around post-tensioning (PT) ducts, lateral bracing and cross
frames as necessary.
b. Conduit access through box girder end diaphragms with minimum 1" clearance in all directions.
c. Conduit expansion fitting details.

d.
Fastener details for the interior electrical system.
e. Single line diagram showing mini power centers, switches, contactors, timers, etc.
f. Mini power center details including circuit breaker details.
g. Mini power center mounting details if required.
h.
Feeder schedule.
2. Ensure installation meets all requirements of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and local ordinances.
Install grounding in accordance with NEC Article 250. Maintain separation between 480V and 120V Conductors / Conduits
throughout.
3. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals required for a complete and functional installation.
4. Use only new, unused and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed equipment and materials for outdoor use.
5. Furnish and install polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in conformance with UL Section 651, NEC Section 347 and NEMA TC-2,
UV-resistant and schedule 80. Bend conduits as necessary to connect to loads.
6. Provide PVC sleeve 2" larger in diameter than conduit to accommodate construction tolerance.
7. Install a UL labeled expansion fitting for specified PVC conduit at all structure expansion joints. Provide certification that the expansion
fitting meets the following minimum requirements: Compatibility with the connected conduits, waterproof, UV protected and
allows longitudinal movement equal to that of the Expansion Joint.
8. Use only Alloy 316 stainless steel supporting hardware. Provide minimum " fasteners. For concrete or SIP form mounting,
provide anchor bolts (expansion, drop-in or adhesive) suitable for dynamic loading (due to vibration caused by traffic). Install fasteners
to avoid conflicts with reinforcing steel and PT ducts. For structural steel mounting, do not attach fasteners to main members, i.e. webs
and flanges.
9. Furnish power distribution at 480V AC, 1 phase, with step down transformers at regular intervals. Furnish 7.5 KVA mini
power center with eight 20A breakers as the step down transformer, feeding a maximum of 20 lamps and 20 receptacles.
Each mini power center will provide power to no more than 1000' of bridge, preferably 500' on each side of the mini power
center. 480V top feed, 120V bottom feed to maintain separation.
10. Furnish and install lighting contactors to switch the 480V AC feeding the mini power centers.
11. Furnish and install copper conductors, Type XHHW. Do not use any conductor larger than #4 AWG.
12. Provide enough slack in all interior cable terminations to allow for minor shifting of the structure.
13. Furnish and install National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Type 4X (non-metallic) surface mounted boxes sized in
conformance with the NEC.
14. Furnish and install 120V duplex receptacles (GFI, NEMA Type 5-20R), in non-metallic outlet boxes at 50' maximum on
centers. Provide each receptacle with a gasketed weather-protective outdoor plate. Maximum wire size to connect to
receptacles is #12 AWG.
15. Furnish and install surface mounted, fully enclosed, incandescent light fixtures with gasketed clear globes and wire guards at
50' maximum on centers. Provide 100 watt, 130 volt, vibration resistant and brass base incandescent lamps.
1:
49:
35 PM
16. Provide six hour reset timers for each circuit to turn off the lighting system automatically.
CROSS REFERENCES:
1. For Maintenance Light Details, see Sheet 2.
For actual bridge section, see Structures Plans.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
2.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAINTENANCE LIGHTING FOR BOX GIRDERS
NO.
21240
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Bridge Deck
Bridge Deck
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
Incandescent Light
Conduit
fixture (see Note 15)
(480V)
Conduit (480V)
Clearance
6" M in.
(if required)
Incandescent Light
fixture (see Note 15)
Mini Power Center
where required
(see Note 9)
Grout and seal to
prevent seepage
Single hole straps with
of conduit
Fitting
Conduit (120V)
6'
-0" M ax.
after installation
Expansion
fasteners (see Note 8, Typ.)
" Conduit
Channel (Typ.)
PVC Sleeve cast thru End
PVC Sleeve cast
Diaphragm, (see Note 6)
thru Backwall, (see

Note 6)
Grout after installation
Nonmetallic
Junction Box
Nonmetallic
Conduit (120V)
Conduit (120V)
PVC Conduit
To Load
Junction Box
(480V)
Girder End
Nonmetallic Outlet Box
Channel
Nonmetallic
Front face of
Diaphragm
End Bent Backwall
Outlet Box
CONCRETE BOX GIRDER BRIDGE SECTION THRU END BENTS

"
-0
1'
CROSS REFERENCE:
LIGHTING DETAILS FOR CONCRETE BOX GIRDER BRIDGE

B
Bridge Deck
Bridge Deck
Drop-In Anchors with
Nonmetallic Junction Box
1. For Box Girder Maintenance Lighting Notes see Sheet 1.
SECTION A-A
Bridge Deck
Bridge Deck
Approach Slab
threaded rods (Typ.)
Conduit (120V)
Conduit (480V)
Channel
Single hole straps

with fasteners
(see Note 8, Typ.)
Conduit
Incandescent
(480V)
Light fixture
Threaded
Channel
Channel
To Load
(see Note 15)
PVC Conduit
(480V)
Conduit (120V)
Expansion Fitting
Incandescent
Rods (Typ.)
Conduit (480V)
Conduit (120V)
(field locate)
(field locate)
Conduit (120V)
Light fixture
(see Note 15)
PVC Sleeve cast
Mini Power Center
" Conduit
where required
Nonmetallic
(see Note 9)
Outlet Box
Mounting plate
Nonmetallic Outlet Box
Mini Power Center
Conduit (120V)
Grout and seal to prevent
thru Backwall,
(field locate)
seepage after installation
(see Note 6)
of conduit
where required
(see Note 9)
Bearing Stiffener
Transverse
Stiffener Plate
Channel
Mounting plate
Cross Frame
Girder End
Diaphragm
Channel
1:
49:
36 PM
Front face of End

Transverse
Bent Backwall
Stiffener
STEEL BOX GIRDER BRIDGE SECTION THRU END BENTS

B
C
SECTION C-C
(Cross Frame section shown, other Transverse Stiffener sections similar)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/05
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
SECTION B-B
LIGHTING DETAILS FOR STEEL BOX GIRDER BRIDGE
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
MAINTENANCE LIGHTING FOR BOX GIRDERS
NO.
21240
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
7"
3'-2" Access Hatch
4"
Hatch Lock Bar

Bottom
Flange
Access
Pivot Bar
" Slot
Hatch Lock
1"
3"
" (Hatch
Box Lock Bar
Handle Bar)
Bars
Hatch Hinge Bar
Typ.
1
4
VIEW A-A
Bottom
Flange
1'
-4
Stop Angle
Edge of
Access Opening
Lock Bar
5"
6 "
3" X 3" X " X 4"
1
2"
4"
2 Hinge
Hatch
HATCH HINGE BAR DETAIL
2 ~ Box Lock Bars

Tack Weld
1'
-0"
378"
Hatch
Access
Hatch
Stop Bar
Top of Access
1"
3
8"
Bar & Slot
(Longitudinal)
Hole
& Lock Pivot Bar
"
"
3"
634"
1'
-0"
5 "
Access Opening
(
Typ.
)
2"
Detail
1'
-4
1
2"
Access Hatch
Access Opening
"
Lock Bar
"
See Hinge
Typ.
1
4
for Hatch
3"
Pipe Grab Rail
9
16"
Edge of Access Hatch
Lock
Handle Bar)
1
1 2"
5"
Typ.
" (Hatch
Typ.
Opening
1"
" Lock Bolt, Nut & Washer
& Slot
1'-6"
5
16
4"
3 "
1'-6"
1"
1 " 1 "
3'-0" Access Opening
1"
1"
Bottom Flange
Access
Hatch
1
2"
1" Ladder
Brace
1
2"
Typ.
1
2"
1
4
Lock Bolt
"
Hinge Bolts
Access Opening
234"
1'-8"
1'-8"
6"
" Weld Termination (Typ.)
1'-0"
" Hole
HINGE NOTE:
HINGE DETAIL
Orient the Access Hatch so
2"
1" 1"
Nuts & Washers
that the hinges are located
9
16"
2"
5" plus
Bottom Flange
position (shown dotted)
Pipe
3'
-0"
1
2"
9
16"
Grab Rail
1"
25
Hatch Hinge Bar
Lock
Pivot Bar
HINGE BAR DETAIL
"
Box Lock Bar &
9
16"
1"
1
2"
Box Lock
Lock Pivot Bar

3"
Bar
Min.
Hole
"
Hitch Pin
HATCH LOCK BAR DETAIL
BOX LOCK BAR DETAIL
1. All Structural Steel material in Access Hatch Assemblies shall conform to ASTM A709 Grade 36.
Lock
2. 1" Pipe Grab Rail shall be in accordance with ASTM A53 Grade B for standard weight
Pivot Bar
Hatch
Lock Bar
pipe (Schedule 40).
Stop Angle
3"
3. " Hatch Handle Bar, Hitch Pin and 1" Ladder Brace shall be in accordance with ASTM A36.
4. All bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 or A449. All nuts shall conform to ASTM A563 and all
2 ~ Box
washers shall conform to ASTM F-436.
Lock Bars
Handle Bar)
8"
Top of Bottom Flange

1:
49:
56 PM
1"
Access Opening,
thickness plus "
NOTES:
3" X 3" X " X 4"
" (Hatch
" Holes
LOCK PIVOT BAR DETAIL

2"
with Clip
Access Hatch
Bolts
Bars
5. All exposed edges of plates and openings shall be ground smooth.

6. Place Ladder Brace near the End Bents exclusively and only when the height is reasonable for
access by a Ladder.
Hatch
7. See Framing Plan sheets for locations of Access Hatch Openings.
Lock Bar
12/17/2015
Top of Bottom
1" Radius
Hole
Box Lock Bar
1
2"
2 ~ Hinge
"
Hinge
Stop Bar
Hole
Flange
(Typ.)
Bottom Flange
1" 1"
4"
thickness
3
8"
1"
1" 1"
1 "
1
2"
1" Radius
2 "
3"
down-grade.
1"
Hinge Bars
" Hinge Bolts,
1
2"
4"
1"
PLAN VIEW OF ACCESS HATCH ASSEMBLY
Access Hatch in upright
Flange
STOP BAR DETAIL
Hatch Hinge Bar
7"
Top of Bottom
4"
"
(Transverse)
Hinge
1'-5"
SECTION THRU ACCESS OPENING
1" Ladder
8. Coat structural steel in accordance with Specification Section 560.
Brace (See Note 6)
9. Include the cost of the Access Hatch Assembly and incidental items in the cost of the Steel Box
VIEW B-B
HATCH LOCK
ASSEMBLY DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
Girders. No separate payment will be made for coating structural steel.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
ACCESS HATCH ASSEMBLY
DESIGN STANDARDS
FOR STEEL BOX SECTIONS
NO.
21250
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
1"
6"
3'-2" Access Hatch
1
4"
1
2"
" Hatch
Handle Bar
Hatch
Hinge Bar
2" R
" Slide Bolt

(See Slide Bolt Detail)
Lock Bar
3"
"
Plate with
2 ~ " Bolt

2 ~ Hinge Bars
SLIDE BOLT PLATE DETAIL
9
16"
PLAN VIEW OF ACCESS HATCH ASSEMBLY

4"
7"
3"
Top of
Top of Base
1
4"
Access Hatch
1'-0"
6"
so that the hinges are
" Slot for
R
R
SLIDE BOLT DETAIL

2"
2"
6"
Access Opening, Slide
" Box
Bolt & Box Lock Bar
Lock Bar
Hatch
Typ.
Bolt Plate
Edge of
" Hitch Pin
"
Access
with Clip
Opening
Box Lock Bar
2 ~ Hinge
1
2"
Hatch
Hinge Bar
Bars
3" X 3" X " X 4"

Stop Angle
Hatch Slide
Bolt Plate
1:
50:
13 PM
3"
1
2"
1
2"
" Hatch
VIEW B-B
5"
Pipe Sleeve Hinge

1
2"
" Handle Bar for

Hatch Slide Bolt Plate
3"
1
2"
1"
Bolt Plate
Handle Bar
NOTES:
"
Hatch Slide
4"
" Hatch
Handle Bar
"
1"
1"
Stop Bar
Slot
1"
2"
" Access Hatch
& Slide Bolt
1"
Hinge Bolts
Opening
Bolt Plate &
1"
1
2"
Hatch Slide
6"
Grab Rail
position (shown dotted)
Access
6"
25
Pipe
6" Em bedm ent (

Typ.
)
1
2"
Access Hatch in upright
3'
-0"
2"
2"
1
2"
Access
Hatch Slide
located down-grade.
1
2"
STOP BAR DETAIL
Edge of
1. Orient the Access Hatch
1
2"
1
1 2"
6"
HINGE NOTE:
Hole
HINGE BAR DETAIL

Typ.
Handle Bar
6"
Plate
HATCH HINGE BAR DETAIL

" Hatch
2"
3
4"
1
2"
6"
1'-5"
1'-7"
"
1
2"
Anchors
1'-8"
"
Hole
Adhesive Bonded
(Transverse)
3"
1
2"
Access Opening
9
16"
3"
Embedment
1
2"
Hinge Bolts
3"
512"
3 "
" x 8"
1
4"
(Typ.)
112"
1
2"
1
2"
Base Plate
1"
7"
1 " 34" 112"
(Hinge Bar)
1
2"
6"
1"
1
2"
1
2"
Sch 40 Pipe
Sleeve Hinge
Cope Base Plate to
HINGE DETAIL
Handle Bar
"
3
4"
1
2"
Hinge Bolts
clear Access Hatch "
" Hatch
Hinge Bar
3
4"
Typ.
1
4
Hatch
1
4"
1
2"
3"
Stop Angle
1
2"
3" X 3" X " X 4"
4"
1'
-0"
7
8"
2 ~
X 3 " Hole
Holes (Typ)
Stop Bar
1
2"
" Hatch Lock Bar
" Base
Field Drill "
1
4
Weld Termination (Typ.)

3"
(
Typ.
)
1'
-6"
1
2"
3
4"
2"
Box
Hinge
1
4"
5"
Pipe
Grab Rail
"
6"
Plate
6"
1
2"
(Longitudinal)
1
4"
Slide Bolt
"
Access Opening
3
4"
Detail
" Hatch
Hinge
6"
2" 2"
Access Hatch
See
3"
1'
-0"
3"
"
1"
6"
2"
(Typ)
1"
Opening
1
2"
1
4"
Adhesive Anchors
" Box Lock
1
4
Access
1
2"
1'-6"
1"
5
1
4
1"
1'-6"
" x8" Bonded
1"
Bar with " Hole
Typ.
Typ.
3"
1"
1"
1"
2"
1"
3'-0" Access Opening
1"
3
4"
1" "
1"
VIEW C-C
1
4
(Hatch Lock Bar)
" Hole (for Pad Lock)
1. All Structural Steel material in Access Hatch Assemblies shall conform to ASTM A709 Grade 36.
2. 1" Pipe Grab Rail shall be in accordance with ASTM A53 Grade B for standard weight pipe (Schedule 40).
3. " Hatch Handle Bar and Hitch Pin shall be in accordance with ASTM A36.
Hatch Slide
4. All bolts shall conform to ASTM A307 or A449. All nuts shall conform to ASTM A563 and all washers shall conform to ASTM F-436.
Bolt Plate
5. All exposed edges of plates and openings shall be ground smooth.
12/17/2015
6. See Framing Plan sheets for locations of Access Hatch Openings.
SECTION THRU ACCESS OPENING
7. Coat structural steel in accordance with Specification Section 560.

8. Include the cost of the Access Hatch Assembly and incidental items in the cost of the Concrete Box Section.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
No separate payment will be made for coating structural steel.

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
ACCESS HATCH ASSEMBLY
DESIGN STANDARDS
FOR CONCRETE BOX SECTIONS
NO.
21251
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Expanded Metal Mesh
Bearing or
Diaphragm*
(
Typ.
)
Non-destructive testing of welds is not required. See Plans for details of
Dim . H /4
Dim . H /2
3" Centers Typ.
3"
1" M in.
Specification 962, any grade. Grind all exposed edges and burs smooth.
Stiffener Hinge
Bar (See Detail)
Diaphragm, Stiffeners and Top and Bottom Plates.
See Coating Note

EXPANDED METAL MESH:
Expanded metal mesh shall be " No. 16 expanded carbon steel metal mesh
Door Hinge Bar
in accordance with ASTM F 1267, Type I or II, Class 2, Grade A.
(See Detail)
Expanded Metal Mesh
Limits of
BOLTS, NUTS AND STEEL WASHERS:
Access
Opening*
1
2"
3" x 3" x
Hinge Bolt,
1
4"
Bolts shall be stainless steel hex head bolts meeting the requirements of
Door Frame
ASTM F 593, Type 316. Nuts shall be ASTM F 594, Type 316. Steel
(
Typ.
)
H inge
Nut & Washers
158" Hole cut in Door
washers shall be stainless steel compatible with the bolts and nuts.
1
4"
Weld Termination (Typ.)

PTFE WASHERS:
Typ.
Frame for Latch Bar
SECTION B-B
Typ.
for use with " or " diameter bolts as shown.

1
8"
1
16"
Thick PTFE Washer or Two
5
8"
Hole cut in
3
8"
Door Frame for

3" x 3" x
Latch Bolt & Nut
COATING:
(Extend Bolt through
Thick PTFE Washers, Stacked
Coat Access Door Assemblies after complete fabrication, including the
Stiffener and Nut and
Middle Brace
3
8"
expanded metal mesh, using an Interior Box Girder Coating System in
tack weld to prevent
3" x 3" x 14"
PTFE washers shall be " or 1" O.D. (nominal), 1/16" or 1/8" thick, sized
Typ.
One
accordance with Specification 975. Weld expanded metal mesh to the door
removal of Bolt. Install
Stop Pin tack
frame after the door frame has been abrasive blast cleaned and prior to
Bolt to allow for free
weld to Stiffener
padlock installation
1
4"
coating. Install Bolts and PTFE Washers after coating. Touch-up tack weld
movement of Latch Bar.
on Latch Bolt after welding.
See also Coating Note.)
Door Frame
Latch Bar
DOOR HINGE LOCATION:
(See Detail)
Dim . H /4
Dim . H /2
STRUCTURAL STEEL:
Stiffener*
Top Plate**
M iddle Brace & 158" H ole
Typ.
Fabricate Door Assemblies using structural steel in accordance with
Dim . H *
ACCESS DOOR NOTES:
Jacking
Bearing or
Place door hinges on the transverse downward side of the access opening.
Jacking Stiffener*
Typ.
3" x 3" x 14"
3" x 3" x
Middle Brace
Door Frame
PADLOCKS:
1
4"
Provide a suitable keyed commercial grade, weather resistant padlock with

a 2" shackle for each Access Door Assembly located at Bridge Abutments.
Key all padlocks for Access Door Assemblies and Access Hatches (if
present) on an individual bridge alike.
Bearing or
Bottom Plate**
Jacking
5
8"
SECTION C-C
Stiffeners*
3" x 3" x
Bearing or
Jacking Stiffener*
1
4"
Door Frame
Bearing or
3" x 3" x
Jacking Stiffener*
Door Frame
3" x 3" x 14"
1
4"
Hole cut in Door
Frame for Latch Bar

5
8"
Middle Brace
Hole
Dim. W*
Hinge Bolt, Nut

3
8"
& Steel Washer
Align
158" Hole
3
1 8"
Nut & Washers
Box Girder. Right Hand Door shown; Left Hand Door opposite hand)
Varies;
F
Latch Bolt,
vertical
One 18" Thick PTFE Washer or Two

3" x 3"
7
8"
Middle Brace
7
8"
End of Span or Continuous Unit*
Diaphragm*
5
8"
Hole cut in
3
8"
Stiffeners* (Typ.)
Stiffener Hinge Bar
Latch Bar
Latch Bar
padlock installation
Stop Pin
Hole with
Horizontal
Door Frame for
Hinge
Bearing or Jacking
x 14"
1
2"
Exterior Face of Diaphragm at
center of
112"
334"
Thick PTFE Washers, Stacked
1
16"
of
(See Detail)
5
8"
(See Detail)
Door Hinge Bar
VIEW D-D
3" x 3" x
Latch Bar
VIEW E-E
(See Detail)
VIEW F-F
(See Detail)
7
16"
6"
SECTION A-A
1
2"
See Plans for dimensions and details.
** See Access Door Assembly for Steel Box Girders
1
2"
Edge Adjacent
1
2"
3
8"
Hole
7
16"
Hole for
Latch Bolt
3
4"
3
4"
1
2"
Edge Adjacent
1"
to Door Frame
to Stiffener
STIFFENER HINGE BAR DETAIL
or Bar
3
4"
9
16"
1
2"
DOOR HINGE BAR DETAIL
6"
LATCH BAR DETAIL
Data Table in the Plans for Dim. H & Dim. W.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
or Bar
1
2"
3
4"
Door Frame
1
2"
3"
3" x 3"
3"
or Bar
3"
Expanded Metal Mesh
3"
2:
10:
11 PM
Top & Bottom Plates**
1
x 4"
Hole
1" 1" 1"
9
16"
1
2"
1
4"
Door Frame
Hole for Padlock

1
2"
5"
1
1 8"
1"
Holes
1
4"
(At Access Opening in End Internal Diaphragm as seen from inside the
1
2"
ELEVATION VIEW OF ACCESS DOOR ASSEMBLY
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
ACCESS DOOR ASSEMBLY
DESIGN STANDARDS
FOR STEEL BOX SECTIONS
NO.
21252
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
HOOK DETAILS
C
C
C= B
R
A
Detailing Dim.
A or G
TYPE 8
TYPE 7
TYPE 9
90
SIZE
A OR G
#3
2 "
5"
3"
6"
#4
3"
6"
4"
8"
TYPE 17
Number of B's = 2N-2

Number of C's = N-2
#7
5 "
10"
7"
1'-2"
#8
6"
11"
8"
1'-4"
#9
9 "
1'-3"
11 "
1'-7"
#10
10 "
1'-5"
1'-1 "
1'-10"
TYPE 20
R=C
#11
12"
1'-7"
1'-2 "
2'-0"
R=C
#14
18 "
2'-3"
1'-9 "
2'-7"
#18
24"
3'-0"
2'-4 "
3'-5"
TYPE 24
STYLE
B
TYPE 21
TYPE 23
TYPE 22
shall be tilted to obtain Minimum cover.

C
A or G
C
A
H
B
D
Style 6 = No Hook
TYPE 27
TYPE 26
TYPE 29
TYPE 28
TYPE 25
Spiral
B
B
R
=
R
=
R=
C
Grade 60 billet steel using either plain or
TYPE 35
TYPE 36
TYPE 37
BAR
Top and Bottom of columns
TYPE 39
TYPE 38
Splices may be accomplished by lapping
Splices shall be included in the Contract

Unit Price for Reinf. Steel (Substructure)
H
B
D
C
TYPE 40
1 "
4"
4"
#4
2"
4 "
4 "
3"
#5
2 "
6"
5 "
3 "
#6
4 "
1'-0"
8"
4 "
#7
5 "
1'-2"
9"
5 "
#8
6"
1'-4"
10 "
6"
2 "
STYLE 6 = NO HOOK
* Dimension is approximate.
Hook Styles Detailed on this sheet are for
No. of Laps = N
#3
F
D
A or G
A or G
STYLE
C
J
135 HOOKS
Number of Beams or Walls = N

Number of D's = N-1
Number of B's = 2N-1
Number of C's = N-1
45 Typical
RECOMMENDED STIRRUP & TIE HOOK DIMENSIONS
SIZE
1.5 turns. Cost of Channel Spacers and
135
STIRRUPS (TIES SIMILAR)
90 HOOKS
drawn steel wire ASTM A1064.

N = Total number of closed turns at
Outside Core
Diameter
deformed bars ASTM A615 or Cold
TYPE 34
D
d
90
B
= Spirals shall be made of ASTM A615
Threads
C = Pitch
B = Overall Height
TYPE 32
TYPE 31
TYPE 30
TYPE 33
Detailing Dim .
F
E
Threads
Detailing Dim .
F
E
C
E
C
H
10"
1'-0"
45 Typical
TYPE 19
5"
6"
Number of D's = N-1
NOTE: Type 17 Bars used in Superstructures

E
7"
8"
TYPE 18
Walls = N
i
fC
r
l
cl
e
Ha
Number of Beams or
TYPE 16
3 "
4 "
#5
#6
H ook
TYPE 15
TYPE 14
TYPE 13
TYPE 12
TYPE 1 1
TYPE 10
2:
10:
30 PM
A OR G
A or G
90 HOOKS
180 HOOKS
BAR
B
B
A or G
180
B
TYPE 6
TYPE 5
TYPE 4
R = C
TYPE 3
TYPE 2
TYPE 1
No. of Laps = N
Detailing Dim.
Hook
D
B
Illustration Only.
Actual Hook Style for any particular bar will be
TYPE 42
TYPE 41
TYPE 43
shown under A or G Heading on REINFORCING

BAR LIST sheet(s) in Structures Plans.
12/17/2015
All Dimensions are out-to-out.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
NOTE: For Bar Dimensions See REINFORCING BAR LIST Sheet(s) in Structures Plans.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STANDARD BAR BENDING DETAILS
NO.
21300
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
GENERAL NOTES:
This Standard is only applicable to the current FDOT inventory of temporary bridge components
which are manufactured in accordance with Acrow Series 300, Double Wide design.
STORAGE FACILITY:
Contact
FDOT Statewide Aluminum Shop
Work this Standard with Index Nos. 21610, 21620, 21630 and 21640.
2590 Camp Rd.
STRUCTURAL STEEL:
407-977-6520
Oviedo, Fl.
Steel Plates and Rolled Sections shall be ASTM A709 Grade 36.
For shipping weights and dimensions of Temporary Bridge elements.
Pipe piles shall be ASTM A252 Grade 2, Fy = 35 ksi.

SHIPPING WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS:
BOLTS, LAG SCREWS AND THREADED BOLT STOCK:
Furnish high strength bolts in accordance with ASTM A325. Furnish Threaded
Decking Sizes:
Stock in accordance with ASTM A36. Furnish Lag Screws in accordance with ASTM A307.
Furnish steel washers and nuts compatible with Bolts, Threaded Stock and Lag Screws.
TIMBER AND LAGGING:

Timber and Lagging shall be No. 1 Southern Yellow Pine.
BACKWALL BENT PILES:

Timber Piles:
10' Minimum Embedment into compacted backfill or into soil having a blow count greater than 6 (N>6).
Ultimate Capacity greater than 18 tons.
Type
Length
Width
Curb
5'
6'-9"
Weight (lbs.)
800
Curb
10'
6'-9"
1420
Curb
15'
6'-9"
2200
Curb
20'
6'-9"
2800
NonCurb
5'
5'-3"
650
NonCurb
10'
5'-3"
1000
NonCurb
15'
5'-3"
1600
NonCurb
20'
5'-3"
2100
Splices are not allowed on any timber piles.

Shipping weights and dimensions of other bridge components can be
H-Piles:
referenced in "Acrow Panel Bridging, Series 300, Technical Handbook".
12' Minimum Embedment into compacted backfill or into soil having a

blow count greater than 6 (N>6).
TRAFFIC RAILING NOTES:
Ultimate Capacity greater than 18 tons.
See Index 400 for component details, geometric layouts and associated notes not fully
detailed herein.
Shims admissible between backwall pile and cap.

Test piles are not required for backwall piles.
CONCRETE: Concrete for Transition Blocks shall be Class II (Bridge Deck).
EXPANSION BEARINGS:
THRIE-BEAM PANEL: Steel Thrie-Beam Elements shall meet the requirements of AASHTO
Inspect the PTFE (Teflon) layer and stainless steel plate prior to installation.
M180, Type II (Zinc coated).
Do not use bearings that have a severely damaged or unbonded PTFE layer.
Clean PTFE of all grit and grime prior to installation.
BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS: Bolts, nuts and round washers shall be in accordance with
Clean Stainless steel plate of all grit and grime prior to installation and finish to a smooth
AASHTO M180. Plate Washers shall be in accordance with ASTM A36 or ASTM A709 Grade 36.
buffed surface.
Do not drill Temporary Bridge components to attach Guardrail. Guardrail Bolts shall be
placed between Truss members as shown in Index 21640.
DISTRIBUTING BEAMS:
Longitudinal stops restraining the distributing beams may be lengthened or shortened to
COATINGS: All Nuts, Bolts, Anchors, Washers and Backer Plates shall be hot-dip galvanized
center the distributing beam bearing on the cap beam.
in accordance with the Specifications.
The longitudinal stops are to bear on the distributing beam end frame.
WOOD BLOCKS: All wood blocks, including required wedge shaped blocks shall be Pressure
EXPANSION JOINT SETTINGS:
Treated Lumber in accordance with Specifications Section 955. Bolt holes in blocks to be
Install the expansion joint considering the total continuous bridge length, location of
centered (1/4).
fixed bearings and ambient temperature at the time of installation, assume a 1" expansion
joint opening at 70 degrees F.
PAYMENT:
Temporary Detour Bridge is to be paid for under Contract Unit Price for Special Detour.
If a temporary bridge system other than that shown herein is used, the Contractor is
responsible for renting or purchasing their own system. Payment for Temporary Guardrail
work and Transition Block will be made under Pay Item Temporary Guardrail, LF.
Furnish and install Bridge Thrie-Beam Panels and all associated hardware as shown.
Payment will be made with the Temporary Detour Bridge under the Pay Item Special Detour,
LS. Turn over Bridge Thrie-Beam Panels and all associated hardware to the Department with
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
2:
10:
50 PM
the Detour Bridge components per Specifications Section 102-6.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TEMPORARY DETOUR BRIDGE
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21600
SHEET
NO.
1of 7
Shoulder Line (see Plans for width requirements, Typ.)
~
Approach Roadway
Detour Bridge
Grade Beam
1 : 1 *
Retainer Angles (Typ.)

4" x 10" Timber Lagging
5'-0" Approach Span
with Filter Fabric
1 : 1 *
AB5 or AB6 End Post (Typ.)
1 : 1 *
1 : 1 *
Backwall Bent
5'-0"
AB7 & AB8 Bearings
Begin or End
(Expansion Bearing
End Bent
Ramp Span
Detour Bridge
1
Shown Fixed
Bearing Similar)
:1
(Typ.)
Edge of Berm
1 : 1 *
1 : 1 *
AB13 Swaybrace Standard (Typ.)
Toe of Fill Slope
24'-0" Clear Roadway Width

AB3 Bracing Frame (Typ.)
AB306 Transom DW (Typ.)
2:
10:
51 PM
AB1 Truss Panels (Typ.)
1'-6"
1'-6"
25'-6"
12/17/2015
TYPICAL PLAN VIEW OF DETOUR BRIDGE

(TIMBER PILES SHOWN, STEEL H PILES AND STEEL PIPE PILES SIMILAR)
* or Flatter
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
(Thrie-Beam Panel not shown for clarity, See Index 21640)

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21600
SHEET
NO.
2 of 7
End Span 30'-0" Min. (30'-4 " to Bearing); 60'-0" Max. (60'-4 " to Bearing)
5'-0"
( Bearing to Bearing)
5'-0"
Ramp Span
2'-6"
Bearing
End Post (Typ.)

Approach Asphalt
Steel Grid Deck & Curb
Underside of Fixed Bearing
1'
-0" 1'
-10 "
5 "
2'
-9 "
Grade Beam
Underside of Expansion Bearing
2'
-8 "
4'
-9"
Pavement
AB13 Swaybrace
Standard (Typ.)
5'-0" Berm (Min.)
3" (AB306 Transom DW Light)
AB505C Distributing Beam
AB7 & AB8 Bearings (Expansion
Stop (Typ. both ends)
Bearing Shown, Fixed

Bearing Similar) (Typ.)
AB23 Distributing Beam End Frames
1 *
with Filter Fabric

1
Bottom of
Truss Panel
AB22 Distributing Beam with
4" x 10" Lagging
Riding Surface
5'
-1"
Truss Panel Depth

AB5 or AB6
3'
-7 "
Begin or End Detour Bridge
Underside of Fixed Bearing
Bearing
3'
-8 "
4 "
Underside of Expansion Bearing
2'-6"
5" Steel Grid Deck
Approach Span
Intermediate Spans 30'-0" Min. ; 60'-0" Max.
Existing Ground Line
Backwall Bent
End Bent
Typical Intermediate Bent

* or Flatter
ELEVATION VIEW
2:
10:
52 PM
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
(Thrie-Beam Panel not shown for clarity, See Index 21640)
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21600
SHEET
NO.
3 of 7
28'-6"
1'-6"
12'-9"
12'-9"
1'-6"
24'-0" Clear Roadway
Offset Block
AB2 Raker Bar
Detour Bridge
Thrie-Beam Panel
AB51 Panel Pins
(Top & Bottom Typ.)
See Index 21640.

Steel Grid Deck & Curb
AB7 & AB8 Bearings
(Expansion Bearing
shown, Fixed Bearing
similar) (Typ.)
AB13 Swaybrace Standard (Typ.)
AB505C Distributing
Contractor supplied foundation com ponents, including
Beam Stop (Typ.)
including Fixed & Expansion Bearings
FDOT supplied Tem porary Bridge Com ponents
Bearings
Bearings
AB22 Distributing Beams with AB23

Distributing Beam End Frame (Typ.)
Timber Bent shown for illustration purposes,
See Plans for actual Bent Designs, including

Pile sizes and spacing, bent cap and bracing
requirements.
TYPICAL SECTION THRU DETOUR BRIDGE AT INTERIOR BENTS (TYPICAL SECTION AT END BENTS SIMILAR WITHOUT DISTRIBUTING BEAMS)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
2:
10:
52 PM
see Paym ent Note, Sheet 1 of 7.
Trusses &
Trusses &
Guardrail and associated com ponents not included,
12'-0"
Bearing Saddle Plates, Keeper Bars & Shim s.
12'-0"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21600
SHEET
NO.
4 of 7
AB7 Bearing (2 Required for Double Truss)

AB7 Bearing
8"
AB8 Bearing
1'-5"
1'-0"
Combined AB7 & AB8 Bearing (Triple Truss)
2'-6"
6" (Typ.)
4" (Typ.)
AB7 Bearing
4" (Typ.)
" Bearing Plate
AB7 or AB8 Bearing
AB7 & AB8 Bearing
1"
2"
" Holes (Typ.)
3"
5"
7"
5"
3"
4"
10"
1'
-2"
10"
Bearing
5"
7"
4"
5"
Bearing
1"
Teflon
" x " x 6"
Truss Outside Panels

2"
2" (AB7)
1"
2"
(Guide Bars Typ.)

1"
A36
2"~4"~2@
2" sp. (AB8)

Stainless Steel Plate
4" (Typ.)
Truss Outside Panels
PLAN VIEW
AB7 Bearing
AB8 Bearing
AB7 Bearing
1"
8"
1"
Combined AB7 & AB8 Bearing
1"
2'-6"
1"
3"
3"
PLAN VIEW
AB7 & AB8 Bearing
" x " x 6"

(Guide Bars Typ.)
Stainless Steel Plate
812"
1'-5"
VIEW B-B
VIEW B-B
" Bearing Plate
Teflon (Bonded
A36
to A36 )
VIEW B-B
AB7 & AB8 Bearing
3"
AB7 & AB8 Bearing

" x " x 6"
4"
(Guide Bars Typ.)
2:
10:
53 PM
10"
" Bearing Plate
12/17/2015
VIEW A-A
VIEW A-A
DETAILS FOR FDOT SUPPLIED EXPANSION BEARINGS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
DETAILS FOR FDOT SUPPLIED FIXED BEARINGS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21600
SHEET
NO.
5 of 7
3" Max. (see Note)

Detour Bridge Superstructure (Truss and
Truss Pins
Distributing Beam, Bearing
Transom members shown dotted)
1'
-4"
Fixed Bearings
1'
-5"
Expansion Bearings
AB505C Distributing Beam Stop

(Typ. both ends)
AB584 Chord Bolts
AB23 Distributing Beam

End Frame (Typ. both ends)
A
Bottom of Bearing, Top of

Bent Cap or Shim Plate
8'-4"
Bent Cap & Bearing Plate shown dashed

Intermediate Bent (see Note)
1'-6" ( to Trusses)
Bearing &
Bearing &
Distributing Beam
ELEVATION VIEW OF DISTRIBUTING BEAM
9"
Distributing Beam
9"
(FIXED BEARING SHOWN, EXPANSION BEARING SIMILAR)

(Timber Intermediate Bent shown, Steel Intermediate Bents similar)
6 "
6 "
End
Dowels (Typ.)
AB505C Distributing
Truss Retainer Plates
B
Lateral Alignment
Frame
type vary)
Note:
Bearing may be shifted from Truss Pins
Lateral Alignment
Bracing Bolts
Dowels (Typ.)
as shown, Intermediate Bent may be shifted

from Bearing an additional 3" to allow for
pile placement tolerances.
Bracing Bolts
AB23 Distributing
AB23 Distributing
Beam End Frame
Beam End Frame
2"
2:
10:
53 PM
shown dashed
1'-0"
1'-0"
1'
-2"
(location, number and
Distribution Beam
1'
-0" Distribution
Truss Retainer Plates

AB505C Distributing Beam Stop
Beam End Fram e
Beam Stop (Typ.)
AB22 Distributing
Beam & Bearing
Block (Typ.)
2'-0"
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
VIEW B-B
END VIEW A-A

DISTRIBUTING BEAM END FRAME DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21600
SHEET
NO.
6 of 7
28'-0"
14'-0"
14'-0"
16'-0"
12'-0"
3 x 2 x x 10" (Typ.)
Grade Beam Straps (Typ.)
Rear Grade Beam Lengths
Deck Hold Down Tabs (Typ.)
1'
-7"
9 " 9 "
10" 7 "
's 5 x 5 x x 12'-3"
10" x 10" (Nominal)
10"
" Holes
2 ~ " x 1'-7" x 12'-9" Cap
Detour Bridge
Grade Beam Timbers
(Typ.)
7"
9 sp. @ 1'-3" = 11'-3"
10"
9 sp. @ 1'-3" = 11'-3"
12'-9"
12'-9"
1'-3"
Spacing " Holes for " Lag Screws
Cap Plate Lengths
1'-3"
25'-6"
16'-0"
12'-0"
Front Grade Beam Lengths
PLAN VIEW
12'-3"
1'-6"
1'-11"
1'-11"
2'-9"
Deck Hold Down Tabs (Typ.)
Lengths
12'-3"
3'-1"
1'-1"
1'-1"
3'-1"
2'-9"
1'-11"
1'-11"
1'-6"
Spacing Deck Hold Down Tabs
3 x 2 x x 10" (Typ.)
's 5 x 5 x x 12'-3"
Cap
See Detail "B"
4"
" Hole
(Centered)
1'-0"
4"
10" x 10" (Nominal)
Grade Beam Straps (Typ.)
Grade Beam Timbers
5'-0"
5'-0"
2'-0"
1'-0"
1'-0"
2'-0"
5'-0"
5'-0"
1'-0"
"
Strap Spacing
ELEVATION VIEW
* See General Notes for setting
ANCHOR PLATE DETAIL
widths other than 70 F.
5 x 5 x x 12'-3"
3"
" x 1" x 4" Deck Hold Down Tabs
2"
Approach Asphalt
Pavement
5 x 5 x x 12'-3"
3 x 2 x x 10"
" x 1'-7" x 12'-9" Cap
Steel Grid Deck Unit
10" x 10" (Nominal)
(shown dashed)
Grade Beam Timbers
(placed against Grid Deck)
" Anchor Plate
* 1" @ 70 F
1 "
"
Typ. both
(shown dashed)
ends
3"
3"
2"
(see Detail)
" Threaded Bar placed
" x 5" Lag Screws (Typ.)
@ Strap locations,
3"
Torque to 25 Lb.-Ft.
" x 6" Lag Screws (Typ.)
OPTIONAL THROUGH BOLT DETAIL

(MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF STRAPS)
2:
10:
54 PM
3"
~
" x 4" x 2'-10" Strap , field
bend to shape (center
"
DETAIL "B"
holes for Lag Screws in strap)

10" x 10" (Nominal)
12/17/2015
Grade Beam Timbers
GRADE BEAM DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/06
REVISIO N
SECTION A-A
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21600
SHEET
NO.
7 of 7
2'-10"
2'-10"
8"
" Min. x 11" x 2'-5" Shim
1'-6"
8" ~ 2x2x
Typ.
(Typ.)
Panels
" x 6" Lag

Screws (Typ.)
" x " Fixed Bearing Keeper Bar (Typ.)
" Saddle
Bearing (shift as
Plate
required within
Bent Cap
Truss
Panels
Typ.
3
Expansion Bearing Assemblies shown dashed
tolerance)
(to bear on face of Bearing Plates)
AB7 Bearing
Nom inal Cap Dim ension,
6 "
6 "
Truss
1'
-1" (
Based on 12"
5"
10"
shown dashed
5"
AB8 Bearing
Tim ber Bent Cap
" Saddle
Bearing (shift as
Plate
required within
" x 6" Lag
shown dashed
tolerance)
Screws (Typ.)
PLAN VIEW
" x " Expansion Bearing
Typ. both
PLAN VIEW
Keeper Bar (Typ.) (to bear

Typ.
3
legs
" x " Fixed Bearing
" Holes for " x 6"
Keeper Bar (Typ.)
Lag Screws (Typ.)
2"
"
Typ. both
Keeper Bar (Typ.)

8" ~ 2x2x (Typ.)
2"
4"
2"
"
Lag Screws (Typ.)
2"
" Holes for " x 6"
legs
8" ~ 2x2x
"
legs
on face of Bearing Plates)
Typ. both
4"
12" Nom inal
Bent Cap
6"
field verify & adjust)
Nom inal Cap Dim ension,
(Typ.)
6"
Shim 's
1'
-1" (
Based on 12"
7"
1'
-2"
7
8"
12" Nom inal
Tim ber Bent Cap
field verify before fabrication)
7
4 8"
" Min. x 12" x 2'-8" Shim
8"
Plate when required
Plate when required
6 "
8"
6 "
1'-6"
7"
8"
"
Typ.
both
" Saddle Plate
4"
4"
4"
10"
4"
4"
" Saddle Plate
4"
4"
4"
4"
10"
4"
4"
4"
1'-1" (Based on 12"
2'-10"
2'-10"
Nominal Cap Dimension,
Nominal Cap Dimension,
field verify & adjust)
ELEVATION VIEW OF SADDLE PLATE
7"
4"
2:
11:
19 PM
12/17/2015
EXPANSION BEARING KEEPER BAR DETAIL
FIXED BEARING DETAILS
REVISIO N
1
4"
2'-7
FIXED BEARING KEEPER BAR DETAIL
01/01/16
"
END VIEW
"
3
4"
LAST
ELEVATION VIEW OF SADDLE PLATE
2'-3
REVISION
field verify before fabrication)
END VIEW
3
8"
1
4"
legs
1'-1" (Based on 12"
EXPANSION BEARING DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
TEMPORARY DETOUR BRIDGE DETAILS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TIMBER PILE FOUNDATIONS
NO.
21610
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
38'-4"
19'-2"
19'-2"
11'-2"
16'-0"
12" x 12"
Bent & Piles
Deck Hold Down
Timber Cap
* 3 x 2 x x 1'-0" (Typ.)
1'-1"
Straps (Typ.)
1'-11"
1'-11"
Filter Fabric
Detour Bridge & Bent
12" Timber Piles (Typ.)

Cap Butt Splice Spacing
11'-2"
2'-9"
3'-1"
3'-1"
2'-9"
1'-11"
1'-11"
Spacing Deck Hold Down Straps
24'-6"
* Center 3 X 2 on
" Top Cap .
" x 1'-2" x 12'-9" Top Cap
" x 1'-2" x 12'-9" Top Cap
" x 1'-2" x 14'-0" Bottom Cap
6"
" x 1'-2" x 14'-0" Bottom Cap
7 sp. @ 5'-4" = 37'-4" (Pile Spacing)
6"
PLAN VIEW
Strap Spacing = 5 sp. @ 5'-4" (Center Strap on Pile)

" x 3" x 1'-9" Strap
(Field verify pile locations and adjust straps before welding to Bottom Cap )
(both sides of cap Typ.)
Spike (Drive Spike flush with
" Cap Butt

Splice (Typ.)
5'
-0" (
M ax.
)
top of cap Typ.)
" Bottom Cap
Deck Hold Down Strap (Typ.)
" Top Cap
12" x 12" Timber Cap
3 x 2 x x 1'-0" (Typ.)
A
Filter Fabric
Top of Berm or
1'
-0"
Existing Ground
Limits of Filter
Fabric shown
shaded
(
M in.
)
" x 2'-0" Dome Head
12" Timber Piles (Typ.)
END VIEW
2:
11:
20 PM
ELEVATION VIEW
LAST
REVISION
07/01/06
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
BACKWALL BENT DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21610
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
3"
Steel Grid Deck Units
3 x 2 x x 1'-0"
(shown dashed)
(place against grid deck)
Typ.
(shown dashed)
Deck Hold Down Strap Assembly

Typ. both
2"
ends
" x 1'-2" x 12'-9" Top Cap
"
" x 1'-2" x 14'-0" Bottom Cap
Typ.
1'
-9"
" Bolt, Nut & Washers

" Strap (Typ.)
2 "
(Cap Butt Splice Typ.)
" Strap (Typ.)
" Cap Butt Splice (Typ.)
" Holes (Typ.)
Allow " gap for
Cap Butt Splice

2"
2"
" x 6" Lag Screw (Typ.)
(Drive Spike flush with top of cap)
12" Timber Pile
1 "
" x 2'-0" Dome Head Spike

" x 6" Lag Screw (Typ.)
12" Timber Pile
1 " 1 "
STRAP PLATE DETAIL

VIEW B-B
SECTION A-A
(SHOWING END OF CAP PLATES)
1'-4"
2"
6"
6"
2"
"
10 "
"
3"
2"
"
2"
"
3"
Typ.
"
"
"
10"
PLAN VIEW
2"
1 "
" Holes (Typ.)
2:
11:
20 PM
"
"
Cap Butt Splice
ELEVATION VIEW
12/17/2015
HOLD DOWN STRAP ASSEMBLY DETAIL
CAP BUTT SPLICE PLATE DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
07/01/06
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21610
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
1'-6"
1'-6"
" Min. x 1'-2" x 2'-8"
" Min. x 11" x 2'-5" Shim
Shim Plate when required
Plate when required

Typ.
Truss
Panels
Bent Cap
AB7 & AB8 Bearings shown dashed
Truss
Bearing (shift as
Steel
required within
Bent Cap
Bearing (shift as
Panels
required within
tolerance)
" x " Expansion Bearing Keeper Bar (Typ.)
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
Shim
1'
-3" (
M in.
)
7" (
M in.
)
Bent Cap
1'
-2"
1'
-2" (
M in.
)
7" (
M in.
)
7" (
M in.
)
10"
Bent Cap
Steel
6"
7" (
M in.
)
6"
Shim
7"
7"
4"
5"
5"
Typ.
4"
tolerance)
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW

Typ. both
Typ.
legs
Typ.
Typ.
Steel
Bent Cap
Keeper Bar (Typ.)
Bent Cap
Keeper Bar (Typ.)
Steel
Bent Cap
Bent Cap
END VIEW
4"
R
1
4"
2:
12:
05 PM
2'-7
12/17/2015
01/01/16
REVISIO N
LAST
"
END VIEW
"
"
3
4"
2'-3
REVISION
"
Steel
7"
"
" x " Fixed Bearing

"
Steel
EXPANSION BEARING DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL H PILE FOUNDATIONS
NO.
21620
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
38'-3"
19'-1 "
1'-11"
19'-1 "
1'-11"
2'-9"
3'-1"
Deck Hold Down Straps (Typ.)
3'-1"
1'-1"
2'-9"
1'-11"
1'-11"
Spacing Deck Hold Down Straps
Detour Bridge & Bent
Filter Fabric
Bent & Piles
* 3 x 2 x x 1'-0" (Typ.)
HP 14 x 73
HP 14 x 73 Steel Piles (Typ.)
Steel Cap
* Center
24-6"
3 x 2
x 1'-0" on
Top (Typ.)
" x 1'-2" x 12'-9" Top Cap
7 "
" x 1'-2" x 12'-9" Top Cap
7 "
6 sp. @ 6'-2" = 37'-0" (Pile Spacing)
Pile Spacing
PLAN VIEW
" Stiffener 's
2 ~ " x 1'-2" x 12'-9"
pile location)
Top Cap
3 x 2 x x 1'-0"
Deck Hold Down Straps (Typ.)
HP 14 x 73 Steel Cap
(Typ.)
~
~
(Centered at each
" Stiffener 's
6'
-0" (
M ax.
)
" x 1'-8" x 1'-8"

Pile Cap
Filter Fabric
Top of Berm or
1'
-0"
(
M in.
)
Existing Ground
Limits of Filter
HP 14 x 73 Steel Piles (Typ.)
Fabric shown
shaded
Cap & Steel Cap
ELEVATION VIEW
3 x 2 x x 1'-0"
(shown dashed)
(place against grid deck)
Assembly
" Cap
Typ. both
ends
" x 6 " x 1'-0 " Stiffener 's
(Typ.)
"
10"
"
" Cap
12
12
"
PLAN VIEW
(Tight fit, cope inside corners)
"
Hold Down Strap Assembly
2"
Hold Down Strap
" Stiffener
"
Typ.
"
1 "
(shown dashed)
2"
END VIEW
(Typ.)
Steel Grid Deck Units
"
2:
12:
06 PM
(Typ.)
" x 1'-8" x 1'-8"

Pile Cap
" x 1'-8" x 1'-8"
Pile Cap & Steel Pile
ELEVATION VIEW
Pile Cap
HP 14 x 73 Steel Piles
HP 14 x 73 Steel Piles
"
HOLD DOWN STRAP ASSEMBLY DETAIL
12/17/2015
SECTION A-A
LAST
REVISION
07/01/06
REVISIO N
(LAGGING NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
VIEW B-B
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL H PILE FOUNDATIONS
NO.
21620
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
" (Steel Pile Cap Plate)
4"
3'-4"
1'-8"
"
"
11"
Typ.
Steel Pile Cap Assembly,
24" Pipe Pile & Stiffeners
" (Steel Pile Cap Plate)
(Stiffener Plate)
2 ~ 4" x 10" x "
11"
Stiffeners
"
4" x 1'-10" x "
1'-8"
Slotted Hole in
4"
90
(Strut Beam)
1 " Heavy Hex Bolt,
11"
HP 12 x 74
1'
-2"
Beam (Typ. each end)
2'
-4"
5'
-0" Pipe Pile Cap
HP 12 x 74 Strut
3'
-0"
1" x 3"
11"
1'
-2"
(Stiffener Plates)
Nut and Washers
4" x 10" x "
4" x 1'-10" x "
2'
-0"
"
(Stiffener Plates)
(Stiffener Plate)
1" Strut Connector

Plate (see Detail)
2'-2" x " x 5'-0"
Steel Pile Cap
Steel Pile Cap Assembly,

24" Steel Pipe Pile
PLAN VIEW STEEL PILE CAP ASSEMBLY

(Bearing Plates and Bearing Keeper Bars not show for clarity)
2'-2" x " x 5'-0"

Steel Pile Cap
24" Steel Pipe Pile (see Plans

for Pipe wall thickness)
1" Hole (Typ.)

1" Pile Tip Stiffener
PARTIAL VIEW A-A
4 "
Plates (Tight fit)

1"
3 "
1" Pile Tip Seal Plate
9"
4 "
1'-3"
4"
4"
3 "
STRUT CONNECTOR PLATE DETAIL

90
9"
(Tight fit)
Typ.
2:
12:
32 PM
1" Pile Tip Stiffener

Plates (Tight fit)
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
VIEW B-B
Typ.
Typ.
"
VIEW C-C
PILE TIP DETAIL
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
STEEL PIPE PILE FOUNDATIONS
NO.
21630
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
3'-4"
Truss Panel
4"
Truss Panel
1'-6"
Truss
4"
Panel
Typ.
" Steel Pipe Pile Cap Plate
1'
-2"
Typ.
5"
Stiffener Plates
Steel Pile Cap
5"
10"
2'
-4"
2'-2" x " x 5'-0"
AB7 & AB8 Bearings
Bent & Pipe Pile Cap
1'
-2"
24" Steel Pipe Pile
shown dashed
" Min. x 11" x 2'-5"
END VIEW
(see Note)
Note:
Use Shim Plates as required to provide
Bearing (shift as
required within
equal bearing seat elevations across the

bent. Vary thickness of Shim Plate across
the pile cap plate to provide a level bearing
tolerance)
area in the transverse direction.
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
Typ.
"
"
Keeper Bar (Typ.)
4"
"
" x " Fixed Bearing
3
4"
2'-3
Stiffener Plates
2'-2" x " x 5'-0"
Steel Pile Cap
2:
12:
32 PM
24" Steel Pipe Pile
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21630
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
3'-4"
Truss Panel
6"
Truss Panel
1'-6"
Truss
6"
Panel
Typ.

Typ.
3
Stiffener Plates
2'-2" x " x 5'-0"
2'
-4"
1'
-2"
7"
1'
-2"
7"
Steel Pile Cap
1'
-2"
24" Steel Pipe Pile
Bent & Pipe
Pile Cap
" Min. x 1'-2" x 2'-8"
END VIEW
(see Note)
Bearing (shift as

required within
tolerance)
Note:
Use Shim Plates as required to provide
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW
equal bearing seat elevations across the

bent. Vary thickness of Shim Plate across
the pile cap plate to provide a level bearing
Typ.
area in the transverse direction.
" x " Fixed Bearing
"
"
R
7"
"
Keeper Bar (Typ.)
1
4"
2'-7
Stiffener Plates
2'-2" x " x 5'-0"
Steel Pile Cap
2:
12:
33 PM
24" Steel Pipe Pile
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
ABUTMENT AND INTERMEDIATE EXPANSION BEARING DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21630
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Backwall Bent
15 Max.
Backer Plate 02
Grade Beam
Transition Block
Shoulder Line (See Plans
(see Sheet No. 6 of 6)
for width requirements)
Face of Thrie-Beam Guardrail
D
Approach
Roadway
Steel Grid Deck
End
Bent
5'-0"
5'-0"
Ramp Span
Approach Span
Limits of Payment for Thrie-Beam Panels on Bridge
Limits of Payment for Temporary Guardrail
End Span
2'-6"
5'-0"
Approach Span
6'-3" Class A
Traffic Railing - Class B (10 Gauge)
Two 12'-6" - Class A (12 Gauge)
Thrie-Beam Panels
Thrie-Beam Guardrail Panels (Nested)
412"
712"
2'-6"
12'-6" - Class A (12 Gauge) Thrie-Beam Panel
(12 Gauge) W-Beam to
W-Beam Guardrail See Index 400
Thrie-Beam Transition
3
4"
8 ~ 3'-1" Spacing
4 Sp. @ 1'-6
6'-3" Post Spacing
Bearing
W-Beam Guardrail
2'
-1"
Thrie Beam Guardrail
Grade Beam
Transition Block
12/17/2015
2:
12:
55 PM
End Bent
Backwall Bent
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
THRIE-BEAM GUARDRAIL APPROACH TRANSITION

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
THRIE-BEAM GUARDRAIL
NO.
21640
SHEET
NO.
1of 6
Backwall Bent
Grade Beam
Backer Plate 02
Approach End
Bridge
Approach End
Approach End
Bridge
Approach End
Face of Thrie-Beam Guardrail
Approach
Roadway
Steel Grid Deck
End
TWO-WAY TRAFFIC
Bent
5'-0"
5'-0"
Approach Span
Ramp Span
PARTIAL PLAN - TRAILING END

Limits of Payment for Temporary Guardrail
5'-0"
Trailing End
Bridge
Approach End
Trailing End
Bridge
Approach End
Limits of Payment for Thrie-Beam Panels on Bridge

2'-6"
End Span
Approach Span
W-Beam Guardrail See Index 400
6'-3" Class A
Traffic Railing - Class B (10 Gauge)
(12 Gauge) W-Beam to

Thrie-Beam Transition
6'-3" Post Spacing (Typ.)
Thrie-Beam Panels
412"
Bearing
W-Beam Guardrail
2'
-1"
ONE-WAY TRAFFIC
END TRANSITION APPLICATION DETAILS
2:
12:
55 PM
Grade Beam
12/17/2015
Backwall Bent
End Bent
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
PARTIAL ELEVATION - TRAILING END
THRIE-BEAM GUARDRAIL TRAILING END TRANSITION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21640
SHEET
NO.
2 of 6
Backwall Bent
15 Max.
Grade Beam
Face of Thrie-Beam
Offset
Block
Guardrail
KEY:
Steel
Staked
Approach
Grid Deck
Roadway
End
Not Staked
Bent
5'-0"
5'-0"
Ramp Span
Approach Span
PARTIAL PLAN - APPROACH TRANSITION SHOWN

(TRAILING END SIMILAR)
Limits of Payment for
Limits of Payment for Temporary Barrier Wall
Thrie-Beam Panels on Bridge

End Span
2'-6"
5'-0"
Approach Transition using Staked Type K Barrier Units
Freestanding Type K
Approach Span
Barrier Units
Traffic Railing - Class B
Two 12'-6" - Class A (12 Gauge)
(10 Gauge) Thrie-Beam Panels
Thrie-Beam Guardrail Panels (Nested)
412"
Bearing
See Index 414
1
2"
7
2'-6"
2 Sp.
Terminal Connector (Typ.)
Type K Barrier Unit
@ 1'-6"
Stakes (Typ.)
(See Index 414 for details)
Grade Beam
PARTIAL ELEVATION - APPROACH TRANSITION SHOWN
12/17/2015
2:
12:
56 PM
(TRAILING END SIMILAR)
End Bent
Backwall Bent
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
TYPE K BARRIER UNIT APPROACH TRANSITION

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21640
SHEET
NO.
3 of 6
End Span
Intermediate Spans
2'-6"
Approach
Span
Traffic Railing - Class B (10 Gauge) Thrie-Beam Panels
10'-0" 02 Spacing (Typ.)
10'-0"
10'-0"
02
Thrie-Beam Panel Connection Spacing
10'-0"
02
02
01

Thrie Beam
Top of Steel Grid Deck
2'
-1"
Top Bolt
PARTIAL ELEVATION SHOWING TYPICAL

Typical Intermediate Bent
10'-0"
End Bent
THRIE-BEAM PANEL ARRANGEMENT
10'-0"
Varies
02
01
10'-0"
Backwall Bent
10'-0"
01
02
Thrie-Beam Expansion Panel (See Detail)
Thrie Beam
Top of Steel Grid Deck
2'
-1"
Top Bolt
PARTIAL ELEVATION SHOWING THRIE-BEAM PANELS AT EXPANSION JOINT

1
2"
11'-0
1
4"
1
4"
10'-0"
Varies
3
4"
x 212"
Bolt Slots
2:
12:
59 PM
(Typ. Ea. End)
29
32"
x 118"
Splice Bolt Slots
12/17/2015
2"
29
32"
414"
Field Drill
Field Drill
1
2 2"
3
4"
Splice
Bolt Slots (Typ.)
(Typ. Ea. End)

2"
3
3 4"
Bolt Slots (Typ.)
414"
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
THRIE-BEAM EXPANSION PANEL DETAIL

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21640
SHEET
NO.
4 of 6
5
8"
Notch offset block to
3
4"
End Posts
clear pin and channel
Offset Blocks
Post Bolt
Omit Top Bolt at
& recessed nut
Thrie-Beam
End Posts Only
Thrie-Beam Top Bolt
Top Bolt
Thrie-Beam Top Bolt
02
Hole
W6x9 Post
2" 2"
Galv. Wire Rope**
4"
Notch offset block to

clear pin and channel
5
8"
Bracing Frame
1
4"
Post Bolt
5"
& recessed nut
Gusset
Steel Grid
Plates
Deck
10"
Post Bolt
& recessed nut
Bolts
01*
2'
-1"
Steel Grid
Existing
2'
-1"
2'
-1"
5
8"
5"
Deck
BACKER PLATE 01 DETAIL

3
4"
Holes
Steel Grid
11"
Steel similar)
Rotate 01 to
1
4"
Frame to bear
on Truss and
End Bent
End Post.
5"
4 ~ 78" x 7" Lag Screws (for Timber Bent Cap)

4 ~
7
8"
112" M in.
clear Bracing
5"
10"
A325 Bolts (for Steel Bent Cap)
(
Typ.
)
5
8"
(Timber shown;
Deck Unit
31316"31316"
Bent Cap
Bolts
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
Type K
Guardrail Post
5
8"
SECTION C-C
Offset Block
Type K
Barrier Unit
& recessed nut
Thrie-Beam Panel
Steel Post
Terminal Connector
Thrie-Beam
5
8"
W6x9 Post,
Thrie-Beam
Barrier Unit
Post Bolt
BACKER PLATE 02 DETAIL
& Bent Cap
(See Index 400)
Guardrail
Post Bolt
Bent Cap
& recessed nut
(Timber shown;
Match Front Face of
Steel similar)
2'
-1"
2'
-1"
along bridge
4 ~
7
8"
4 ~
Asphalt Pavement
7
8"
3
4"
A325 Bolts
Steel Post Plate
(See Detail)
(for Steel Bent Cap)
2'
-1"
Asphalt Pavement
W6x9 Post
x 7" Lag Screws
(for Timber Bent Cap)
Offset Blocks
Bent Cap
Bottom Cap Plate
Approach Span
Timber Lagging
Bent Cap
Steel Grid Deck
Top Cap Plate

Approach Span Curb
Thrie-Beam Panel
Ramp Span Deck
Approach Span
Stakes (See Index 414 for details)
SECTION E-E
SECTION F-F
VIEW G-G
(Adjacent Post and Offset Blocks not shown for clarity)
1
2"
11'-0
Post Bolt
Offset Block
3
4"
1'-0"
Galv. Wire Rope**

1
2"
1
4"
10'-0"
1
2"
x 2
Bolt Slots
(Typ. Ea. End)
(4 Req'd)
3
16"
1'
-0"
1
2"
(Min.)
1
2"
available
414"
Galvanized Wire Rope w/
2:
13:
00 PM
time use, commercially
BRIDGE THRIE-BEAM PANEL SECTION
Ferrules (or other approved
12/17/2015
tensioned as required to
3
4"
Post Plate &

W6x9 Post
wire type) positioned and
SECTION H-H
Contractor supplied, one
2"
(10 GAUGE)
1
2"
1" Hole
Thrie-Beam Panels, provide
(Typ. Ea. End)
414"
1
2"
in order to limit vibration
displacement of the
x 118"
Splice Bolt Slots

2"
1
4 2"
** As directed by the Engineer
induced vertical
29
32"
1
1 2"
1
4"
1
2"
SECTION D-D
Deck
STEEL POST PLATE DETAIL
secure the Panels.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
SECTIONS AND DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21640
SHEET
NO.
5 of 6
7'-0"
8"
Block (Typ.)
10"
Top of
1'
-6"
or Bridge Deck
1'-6"
#3 Stirrups (Field
Bend) (Typ.)
of Curb
4"
Approach Span
8"
#4 Bars
Front face
tooled top edge
1'
-0"
Transition Block
3
4"
8"
Varies
10"
Shoulder Line
& Sides)
1
ear
2" Cl
(
Top

Grade Beam
Edge of Approach Span
END VIEW A-A
(Location varies)
Existing Approach Span
1'-3"
or Bridge Deck
2'-3"
2'-3"
1'-3"
Varies
or Bridge Deck
1'
-0"

Grade Beam
A
(
Bottom )
Top of Approach Span
Bend) (Typ.)
1
ear
2" Cl
Curb
#3 Stirrups (Field
Varies
1'
-0"
Top of
(
Typ.
)
Transition Block
slope at traffic face
4"
Match curb height and
8"
4"

SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
NOTES:
REINFORCING STEEL: Reinforcing steel shall be ASTM A615, Grade 60.
ANCHOR RODS: Steel Anchor Rods shall be ASTM A36, ASTM A709 Grade 36 or ASTM A615
UNIT
QUANTITY
Concrete Class NS
CY
0.4
Reinforcing Steel
LB
61
Guardrail (Reset)
LF
12.5
Grade 60 hot-dip galvanized in accordance with Specification Section 962.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/13
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
2:
13:
03 PM
ITEM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21640
SHEET
NO.
6 of 6
I
I
High Point*
High Point*
I
3'-0"
I
I
10'-0"
Low Point
Low Point
Low Point
Max.
Profile 1
Profile 7
Profile 13
I
I
High Point*
High Point
3'-0"
3'-0"
3'-0"
3'-0"
Max.
10'-0"
Low Point
Low Point
Low Point
Max.
Profile 2
Profile 8
Profile 14
I
I
High Point*
High Point*
I
3'-0" 3'-0"
10'-0"
Low Point
Typ. Typ.
Low Point
Max.
Low Point
Profile 3
Profile 9
Profile 15
High Point*
I
High Point*
High Point*
High Point*
3'-0"
I
3'-0" 3'-0"
10'-0"
Low Point
Typ. Typ.
Low Point
Low Point
Max.
Profile 4
Profile 10
Profile 16
I
I
LEGEND:
20'
-0" M ax.
Strand or Bar Tendon

Anchorage with Inlet/Outlet**
Filler Inlet**
Low Point
Profile 5
Profile 11
Spacing
20'
-0" M ax.
Filler Outlet
Low Point
Intermediate
Direction of Filler Flow**

I
3:
23:
50 PM
I
I
12/21/2015
Low Point
Low Point
20'
-0" M ax.
Optional Filler Outlet
Filler Inlet
Inspection Location
Adjust location to coincide with the

true high point(s) of the tendon.
Vertical/
** See Specifications Section 462 for
Predominantly
vacuum assisted flexible filler
Vertical
injection requirements.
Tendon
Note: See Specifications Section 462
Low Point
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
Profile 6
Profile 12
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
for Drain location requirements.
Profile 17
POST-TENSIONING VERTICAL PROFILES
NO.
21801
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
2" Cover
Superstructure
2" Cover (Typ.) Superstructure
Bar Tendon
3" Cover (Typ.) Substructure & Integral Caps
1
4 2"
Cover Footings
2" Cover
Permanent
Transverse
(Min.)
Anchorage
Tendon
Epoxy Grout
Epoxy Grout
Flow
Filler Inlet and
Reinforcing
Cap
Pour-back
Filler
Main
Outlet to Exit
for Footing
From Top of
Permanent
MAPC or
Elastomeric
Anchorage Cap
Epoxy Grout
Coating
Pour-back (Typ.)
Footing
Filler
Pour-back
Flow
Footing
Permanent Anchorage
Concrete Cast
Cap (Typ.)
prior to
Continuous
Bursting
(0.02 Min.)
Reinforcing
Dead End
Stressing Bar
Anchor
Concrete
edge of Pour-back
Surface
Permanent
TYPE 7
Precast
Extend 12" from
edge of blockout or
Elastomeric Coating
1
2"
Deck Concrete
Anchorage Cap
Type 7 Notes:
Cover
Diaphragm or
Slope
1. Traffic or Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing not shown

for clarity.
2. Where Pour-back is not protected by Traffic or
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 8
Pedestrian/Bicycle Railing, Coat Pour-back with
Substructure (
Typ.
)
3" Cover
Plug
Superstructure (
Typ.
)
Adjacent Segment
2" Cover
High Molecular Weight Methacrylate.
Elastomeric Coating
Extend 12" beyond
Elastomeric Coating (Typ.) Extend
edge of Pour-back (Typ.)
12" beyond edge of anchor
#3 Bar or Equal
Elastomeric Coating,
Extend 12" beyond edge
Pour-back. (Except on Top of
#4 Bar or Equal
of anchor Pour-back
Top Slab Seal Concrete with High
Permanent Anchorage Cap
Epoxy Grout Pour-back
Molecular Weight Methacrylate).
Permanent
Permanent
Anchorage Cap
Block-Out
Threaded
Substructure
Anchorage Cap
3" Cover
2" Cover
Permanent
Footings
1
2" Cover
Pour-back
Integral Caps
Pocket Former
Substructure &
4"
(Min.)
3" Cover
Surface
Superstructure
Concrete
2" Cover
Anchorage Cap
Superstructure
Epoxy Grout
Plug
Concrete
Surface
4"
2" Cover
(Min.)
Threaded Plug
(Min.)
Bar Tendon
Bar Tendon

placed after permanent
TYPE 3
TYPE 9
TYPE 4
TYPE 10
tendons anchored in
adjacent segment have
been stressed
4"
1'-0" Min.
Overlap
Cover
Structural
Steel (Typ.)
Integral Caps
(Min.)
Reinforced Concrete
Permanent
4" Cover (Min.)

Structural
Integral Caps
Steel (Typ.)
Steel Cap
Pour-back Reinforcing
or Cover
(No. 4 Bar or Equal @
or MAPC Pour-back
Anchorage Cap
1'-0" O.C. or as Shown
(Seal Pour-back with
on Plans (Min.))
High Molecular
Elastomeric Coating
Weight Methacrylate)
Edge of
Extend 6" beyond
edge of anchor
Bar
Permanent
Tendon
Anchorage Cap
2:
13:
28 PM
Permanent
Threaded Plug
Anchorage Cap
Epoxy Grout Pour-back cast
Concrete
and Steel Cap or Cover
TYPE 11
12/17/2015
TYPE 5
TYPE 6
07/01/15
REVISIO N
ANCHORAGE PROTECTION FOR STRAND TENDONS
LAST
Bar
Permanent
Tendon
Anchorage Cap
between Structural Steel
Surface
REVISION
Concrete
Threaded Plug
Concrete Secondary
TYPE 12
(Shear Studs not Shown for Clarity)
Pour
(Shear Studs not Shown for Clarity)
ANCHORAGE PROTECTION FOR BAR TENDONS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
POST-TENSIONING ANCHORAGE PROTECTION
NO.
21802
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Shutoff Valve
Place Anchorage Filler Outlet/Inspection
Thread Filler Outlet with
Port at top of Anchorage. Install Threaded
Plug in Anchorage after filler injection
er
l
l
Fi
Pressure Gauge
Valve through Oversize
ow
Fl
er
l
l
Fi
ow
Fl
psi
Pipe and into Anchorage Cap
Thread Filler Pipe with Valve and

Pressure Gauge into Lower Pipe
4"
4"
Place at top of Anchorage Cap
(Min.)
(Min.)
1
2"
Threaded Rigid Filler

Pipe with Temporary
Oversize Rigid Pipe
Anchorage Cap
Cap Protection
with Temporary Cap
(
M in.
)
Filler Outlet w/ Shutoff Valve
Protection (Align
with opening in
FACE INSPECTED
Anchorage Cap)
ANCHORAGE WITH FILLER OUTLET
2"
Pressure Gauge
Shutoff Valve
psi
Place Anchorage Filler Inlet/Inspection
Segment Anchorage
Blockout
Port at top of Anchorage. Install Threaded

Plug in Anchorage after filler injection
er
l
l
Fi
ow
Fl
er
l
l
Fi
ow
Fl
Install Permanent
Anchorage Cap after
Spiral
Anchorage
stressing Tendons
Anchorage
Filler Outlet w/Shutoff Valve

Place at top of Anchorage Cap
*Pocket Former
Anchorage Cap
FACE INSPECTED
ANCHORAGE WITH FILLER INLET
INSTALLATION & SHIPPING
FILLER INJECTION
Top surface of
concrete element
Inspect Anchorage for voids through Filler
Rigid Filler Pipe with
threaded end (To be removed

after filler injection)
Inlet/Outlet. (See Filler Outlet Detail at
Final Deck
surface after planing
per Filler Outlet Detail
Install Threaded Plug
at Horizontal Surfaces
after inspection for voids
Pour Epoxy Grout

into Pipe Recess
M ax.
Epoxy Grout
1
2"
Horizontal Surfaces for procedures.)
Remove and clean as
Plug
Install Permanent
Threaded Plug
Inspection of
Anchorage Cap not
*Epoxy Grout
Required
Pour-back
Permanent
1
FILLER OUTLET CONNECTION TO DUCT
Anchorage Cap
FILLING POCKET
Anchorage
Anchorage
2" Cover
Threaded Plug
(Min.)
PROCEDURE:
1. Remove Rigid Filler Pipe.
2. Inspect Tendon for voids as necessary.
3. Vacuum inject as required. If grout is used,
3
allow grout to cure. If flexible filler is
INSPECTION
PROTECTION
used, replace filler displaced by inspection.

Remove pipe used for vacuum injecting.
4. Clean threads and rethread as required.
TOP INSPECTED ANCHORAGE WITH FILLER

INLET INSTALLATION, FILLER INJECTION,
INSPECTION & PROTECTION
5. Install Threaded Plug into Outlet to form a

2:
14:
02 PM
tight fit.
1
6. Over-ream hole ( 4" over-ream). Clean and

2
POCKET PREPARATION
roughen sides.
7. Fill Pocket with Epoxy Grout.
NOTES:
1. Holes used for the Inspection
12/17/2015
and Filler Inlets/Outlets may
* Round
Pocket Former - Gravity fed placement of epoxy grout acceptable
Modified Square
Pocket Former - Gravity fed placement of epoxy grout acceptable
be formed using tapered pipes
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
FILLER OUTLET DETAIL AT HORIZONTAL SURFACES
or mandrels.
Square
Pocket Former - Vacuum epoxy grouting required
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
POST-TENSIONING ANCHORAGE
DESIGN STANDARDS
AND TENDON FILLING DETAILS
NO.
21803
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
Filler
Filler
Flow
w
lo
F
t
r tle
le u
l
O
i
F
r
fo
Flow
Pressure
Gauge
psi
w
lo
F t
r le
le In
il
F
r
o
f
Coupler
Epoxy Grout
Threaded Plug
Outer
Filler Pipe
Filler Inlet with
Filler Outlet with
Shutoff Valve
Shutoff Valve
Rigid or Flexible
Filler Pipe
1
Bar
Bar
Tendon
Tendon
Cast Vertical
Cast Vertical
Surface
Surface
FILLER OUTLET CONNECTION TO TENDON
FILLING POCKET
PROCEDURE:
1. Remove Rigid Filler Pipe or drill Grout in
flexible pipe.
2. Inspect tendon for voids.
3. Vacuum inject as required. If grout is used,

allow grout to cure. If flexible filler is used,
Inspect Tendon
NOTE:
replace filler displaced by inspection. Remove
Anchor or Nut to allow for flow of Filler into Cap.
pipe used for vacuum injecting.
4. Install Threaded Plug into Outlet to form a

tight fit.
INLET END
1
5. Over-ream hole (
4" over-ream). Clean and
Cast Vertical
OUTLET END
Surface
roughen sides.
6. Fill pocket with epoxy grout.
FILLER INLET AND OUTLET DETAILS FOR BAR TENDONS
POCKET PREPARATION
FILLER OUTLET DETAIL AT VERTICAL SURFACES
Remove Rigid Pipe Filler Outlet, clean,

and place Epoxy Grout as per Filler
Dashed line only applicable
Dashed line only applicable
if top two (2) tendons are
if top two (2) tendons are
stressed after deck pour
Outlet Detail at Horizontal Surfaces
stressed after deck pour.
Deck Slab
Deck Slab
Tendon Duct Outlet
3"
Drains and Filler

Inlets located at
low points of
draped profile
Drain water prior
to filling and
inject filler from
Remove Rigid Pipe Filler Outlet,
Coupler - Provide
clean, and place Epoxy Grout as
Threaded Plug after
the lowest point.

Flexible Pipe Filler
removal of Rigid Pipe
per Filler Outlet Detail at
Outlet with Threaded

Plug
horizontal surfaces (Typ.)

(unless otherwise noted)
Inlet / Outlet Coupler (See Filler

Outlet Detail at Vertical Surfaces)
Flexible Pipe
Filler Outlet
Coupler
(Typ.)
I-Girder
2:
14:
03 PM
Diaphragm
HIGH POINT INSPECTION
TENDONS AT 3'
LOCATION AT FILLER OUTLET
FROM HIGH POINTS (FILLER OUTLET)
After filler injection, plug recess

with Threaded Cap
TENDONS AT LOW POINTS

(FILLER INLET / DRAIN)
12/17/2015
FILLER INLET AND OUTLET DETAILS FOR I-GIRDERS
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
Details for C.I.P. Boxes with Internal Tendons similar. Web reinforcing not shown for clarity.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21803
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
Constant Deviation Block

and Rib Width (Full Height of Box)
Pressure
Gauge
12" X 12" Block-out (Max.)

psi
Tapered
NOTES:
Block
Place tapered blocks under each Tendon to
Oversize Duct for
42" X 30" (Max.)
PT Bar / Coupler
(See Note 3)
(See Note 3)
12"
be injected to raise Duct off Tendon

2"
Strands. Center Strands within Duct before
Drain Hole
Provide Threaded
Plug after filler
injection (Typ.)
filling. Blocks shall be removed after filling

injection. Blocks shall not damage or
Lifting Hole
2"
Temporary
Access Hole
permanently deform Duct.
ELEVATION
OF FILLER INLET
TEMPORARY ACCESS HOLES
Pressure
Gauge
psi
" Continuous
Steel Pipe
Steel Pipe (Typ.)
Fi
l
l
er
Notes: Temporary Access Holes

1. Temporary access holes to facilitate access for erection,
Fl
ow
1 "
Shutoff Valve
jacking and tendon filling operations inside the box during
(
M in)
Chamfer around
construction are allowed. The access holes shall be limited to

a maximum size of 42" wide x 30" long and shall be limited
to one per span.

2. Slab block-outs for temporary / permanent longitudinal
Duct Coupler
post-tensioning bars are not allowed. Temporary/ permanent

PT bars in the top slab shall be placed in oversized ducts in
Drain Hole
Drain Hole
the slab to accommodate both the bar and coupler.
Tapered Blocks
3. In lieu of 1 ~ 42" x 30" temporary access hole, a maximum of
SECTION
2 top slab block-outs (12" x 12" (Max.)) between the webs is
allowed for construction per span. Block-outs shall be a

minimum of 12" from the nearest duct or anchor and shall be
TENDON FILLING FOR SPAN BY SPAN CONSTRUCTION
located as to prevent direct drip onto bottom slab anchors.
Notes: Repair of Temporary Access Holes,

Block-outs, and Lifting Holes
1. Form all large block-outs with tapered sides.

2. Immediately before casting the concrete, mechanically clean
the mating concrete surfaces to remove any laitance and to
expose small aggregate.

3. Repair all holes and block-outs with Magnesium Ammonium
Phosphate Concrete within 24 hours of cleaning concrete.
4. After completion of the deck planing and grooving, coat the
repaired and surrounding concrete surfaces with High
Molecular Weight Methacrylate.
5. Alternately, epoxy grout may be used to repair holes. High
Molecular Weight Methacrylate is not required with epoxy
LAST
REVISION
07/01/15
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
2:
14:
03 PM
grout.
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21803
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
GENERAL NOTES:
U.S. COAST GUARD NOTIFICATION: Notify the local office of the U.S. Coast Guard at least 30 days prior to
beginning of construction of the Fender System.
14" SQUARE PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES -
Provide 14" Square Prestressed Concrete Piles of
sufficient length to achieve a minimum embedment of 20' into soil having a blow count greater than or
equal to 6 (N 6). Pile splices and build-ups are not permitted. Use only 14" Square Prestressed
Concrete Piles with 8 - " diameter Low Relaxation Strands fabricated in accordance with Index No. 20614.
PLASTIC LUMBER AND STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER WALES: Provide only Plastic Lumber (Thermoplastic
Structural Shapes) and Structural Composite Lumber (Reinforced Thermoplastic Structural Shapes) Wales
in accordance with Specification Section 973. Wales shall be continuous and spliced only at locations shown
on the plans.
PLASTIC LUMBER DECKING FOR CATWALKS: Provide Plastic Lumber decking for catwalks when called for in the
Plans in accordance with Specification Section 973.
Install Plastic Lumber Decking according to manufacturer's recommendations using stainless steel #10 x 3"
(minimum) deck screws.
FIBERGLASS OPEN GRATING FOR CATWALKS: Provide Fiberglass Open Grating for catwalks when called for in the
Plans. Fiberglass Open Grating shall be a heavy duty design suitable for exterior installations. Maximum
gap opening on the walkway surface shall be 1". Design live loads and deflections shall be a 50 psf
FENDER SYSTEM ENERGY CAPACITY:

Energy Capacity = 38 ft-k
uniformly distributed load with a maximum deflection of " or L/120 at the center of a simple span and a
concentrated load of 250 pounds with a maximum deflection of " at the center of a simple span. Color
of Fiberglass Open Grating shall be gray or black.
Install Fiberglass Open Grating according to manufacturer's recommendations using stainless steel
hardware, screws, bolts, nuts and washers. Attach Fiberglass Open Grating to Wales and Deck Supports at a
2'-0" maximum spacing so as to resist pedestrian live loads and uplift forces from wind, buoyancy and wave
action.
CLEARANCE GAUGE AND LIGHT: Clearance Gauge to be furnished and installed by the Contractor. Clearance Gauge
width and numeral height is dependant on visibility distance. The required visibility distance shall be determined
by the United States Coast Guard District Commander. Provide and install Clearance Gauge Light in accordance
with Specification Section 510 and Index No. 21220.
NAVIGATION LIGHTS: Provide and install Navigation Lights in accordance with Specification Section 510,
Index No. 21220 and/or project specific details. Provide and maintain Temporary Navigation Lights during
construction until permanent Navigation Lights are operational.
BOLTS, THREADED BARS, NUTS, SCREWS AND WASHERS: Furnish stainless steel Bolts in accordance with ASTM F593
Type 316. Furnish stainless steel Threaded Bars in accordance with ASTM A193 Grade B8M. Furnish stainless
steel Nuts in accordance with ASTM F594 Type 316. Furnish stainless steel Screws in accordance with
ASTM F593 Type 305. Furnish stainless steel Washers compatible with Bolts, Threaded Rods and Nuts under
heads and nuts. Torque Nuts on 1" diameter Bolts and Threaded Bars to 150 lb-ft. Keep threads on Bolts,
Threaded Bars and Nuts free from dirt, coarse grime and sand to prevent galling and seizing during tightening.
SPLICE PLATES: Furnish Splice Plates in accordance with ASTM A240 Type 316.
WIRE ROPE: Provide wire rope meeting one of the following requirements:
1. diameter 6x19, 6x25 or 6x37 class IWRC Type 316 stainless steel wire rope with a minimum breaking strength
of 18,000 lbs.
2. diameter 6x19 galvanized wire rope with ultraviolet ray resistant polypropylene impregnation having an outside
diameter of 5/8 with a minimum breaking strength of 22,000 lbs.
Protect all ends with heat shrinkable end caps
12/17/2015
2:
14:
22 PM
compatible with the ropes polypropylene that provide an effective water-tight seal.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/14
REVISIO N
GENERAL NOTES
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
FENDER SYSTEM -
DESIGN STANDARDS
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES
NO.
21930
SHEET
NO.
1of 7
Survey or Construction
Bridge
Lighted Clearance
(Stationing Line)
Navigation Light
Gauge & Navigation
Navigation Light
Light
Left Fender
Left Fender
Lighted Clearance Gauge
Dimension "L"
Begin Flare
(Multiples of 16'-0")
Control Point C
Control Point D
of Stationing
Coping Line
90
Coping Line
Dimension "L"
Begin Flare
Clear Channel
Control Point B
Light
Begin Flare
Control
(Multiples of 16'-0")
Control Point C
Point D
(Typ.)
Channel
Begin Flare
Navigation
Clear Channel
Coping Line
10'-0" Min.
Direction
Coping Line
90
Begin Flare
Clear Channel
(Typ.)
Channel
Light
Control Point A
Control Point B
Navigation
10'-0" Min.
Begin Flare
Begin Flare
Clear Channel
Direction
Control Point A
of Stationing
& Navigation Light
Begin Flare
& Navigation Light
& Navigation Light
Navigation Light
Right Fender
Navigation Light
Right Fender
SCHEMATIC OF FENDER SYSTEM SHOWING TREATMENT OF
SCHEMATIC OF FENDER SYSTEM SHOWING TREATMENT OF DUAL FIXED BRIDGES WITH NONSKEWED CHANNEL
SINGLE FIXED BRIDGE WITH NONSKEWED CHANNEL
(PARALLEL DUAL FIXED BRIDGES SHOWN, NONPARALLEL DUAL FIXED BRIDGES SIMILAR)
Survey or Construction
(Stationing Line)
Navigation Light
Bridge
Navigation Light
& Navigation Light
* Channel Skew
Coping Line
Navigation
Light
Begin Flare
Control Point C
on ing
ti
n
ec
io
ir tat
S
of
Channel
Coping
Line
"
-0
'
10
n.
i
M
Begin Flare
Control
Point D
Line
Skew
90
Control Point B
90
Angle
Channel
Dimension "L" (Multiples of 16'-0")
Begin Flare
Control Point C
Right Fender
10
'
-0
"
M
i
n.
Begin Flare
Control
Coping Line
Point D
Right Fender
Navigation Light
Navigation Light
& Navigation Light
2:
14:
22 PM
* Channel
Begin Flare
90
Angle
Clear Channel
90
Coping
10
'
-0
"
M
i
n.
Clear Channel
Dimension "L" (Multiples of 16'-0")
Navigation Light
Control Point A
Control Point B
Clear Channel
Begin Flare
Begin Flare
Clear Channel
"
-0
'
10
n.
i
M
Control Point A
Begin Flare
ir
ec
ti
on
S
ta
ti
on
in
g
Left Fender
of
Left Fender
& Navigation Light
& Navigation Light
SCHEMATIC OF FENDER SYSTEM SHOWING TREATMENT OF
SCHEMATIC OF FENDER SYSTEM SHOWING TREATMENT OF DUAL FIXED BRIDGES WITH SKEWED CHANNEL
SINGLE FIXED BRIDGE WITH SKEWED CHANNEL
(PARALLEL DUAL FIXED BRIDGES SHOWN, NONPARALLEL DUAL FIXED BRIDGES SIMILAR)
CROSS REFERENCES:
* See Structures Plans, Plan and Elevation and Foundation
Layout Sheets for magnitude and orientation of Channel
Skew Angle.
For Stations and Offsets of referenced Control Points A, B, C and D,

Dimension "L" and Clear Channel Width see Fender System Table
of Variables in Structures Plans.
LAST
REVISION
07/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
For Navigation Light Details see Design Standards Index 21220.
DESCRIPTION:
LAYOUT GEOMETRY
INDEX
FY 2016-17
FENDER SYSTEM -
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21930
SHEET
NO.
2 of 7
"
-1
3'
"
-3
4'
"
"
-0
-5
'
4'
13
"
@
=
.
"
-1
sp 8'
2
-8
=
6'
@
.
sp
2
For Sections A-A and B-B see Sheet 4.
For View F-F see Sheet 5.
3"
5'
(Typ. for Straight Sections)

1'-8"
Plastic Lumber 2" x 12" Decking
1'-8"
2 sp. @ 6'-3 " = 12'-7"
2 sp. @ 6'-4" = 12'-8"
(Typ. for Straight Sections)
1'-8"
"
4
'
2
"= 1
2
'
.@ 6
p
2s
Plastic Lumber
"
8
'
1
14" Sq. Prestressed Conc. Piles,
Plastic Lumber 4" x 6"
6" x 10" Deck Support
Grating similar (Typ.)
2 & 3 Pile Clusters (Typ.)
Post Mark D (Typ.)
Mark F (Typ.)
.@
sp
"
-0
'
16
Back Face of
Fender
0"
'
16
Piles
1'
-1 "
~
Clear Channel
8"
1'
3"
12'
"=
1
6'
p.@
8"
2s
1'
Mark E shown, Fiberglass Open
3'
-3 "
= 15'-11"
"
3
'
.@ 5
p
3s
"
0
1
'
5
= 1
"
3
'
12
3 sp. @ 5'-3 "

3 sp. @ 5'-4" = 16'-0"
p.@
3s
9"
5'
= 1
"=
1
6'
5'
-5 "
Lumber Dimensions and may vary depending on Actual Lumber Dimension.
Navigation Light
Plastic Lumber and Composite Lumber Dimensions shown are based on Nominal
7'
-6 "
"
3
5'
@
.
"
sp
9
'
3
15
=
NOTE:
Gauge
Composite Lumber 10" x 10"

Control Point B
Wales Mark A (Typ.)
0"
16'
Front Face of Fender
"
0
'
6
1
Begin Flare
16'-0" (Typ. Straight Panel)
16'-0"
CROSS REFERENCES:
Pile Spacing (along Piles)
g
on
al
(
g
n
i
ac
er
t
Sp er)
us
l
t
d
C
s
n
e
Po
l
Fe
l
Pi
f
i
3
ra e o
d
c
of
an fa
H
er
ck
nt
e
ba
C
Lighted Clearance
15'-11 "
15'-7 "
15'-0 "
14'-1 "
PARTIAL PLAN VIEW (TYPICAL FLARE)

Navigation Light (See Design
(FLARE AT CONTROL POINT B SHOWN, CONTROL POINTS A, C & D SIMILAR)
Standards Index 21220 for
(HANDRAIL NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY)

Wales Mark A1, A2 or A3
Composite Lumber 10" x 10" Wales Mark A2

Mark F1, F2 or F3
Plastic Lumber 6" x 10" Mark F2 or F3
Wales Mark A1, A2 or A3
Wales Mark A3
Wales Mark A4
Wales Mark A5
Wales Mark A5
Wales Mark A6
Mark F4
Mark F5
Mark F5
Mark F6

Plastic Lumber

Mark F (Back Face, Top)
locations & Details)
Spacer Blocks
Plastic Lumber 2" x 6" Rail
4" x 6" Post
Mark B (Typ.)
Mark C
Mark D (Typ.)

Grating similar (Typ.)
Lighted
Clearance
00
Gauge
00
00
00
00
2:
14:
23 PM
00
00
Composite Lumber 10" x 10" Wales
14" Sq. Prestressed

Concrete Piles (Typ.)
12/17/2015
Mark A (along Front Face of
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
Fender) (Typ.)
EXPANDED PARTIAL ELEVATION VIEW
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
FENDER SYSTEM -
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21930
SHEET
NO.
3 of 7
#10 x 3" Stainless
2'-6"
" x 12" Stainless
Steel Decking Screws

@ 2'-0" Ctrs.
Plastic Lumber
2" x 6" Rail Mark C
" Stainless Steel
" Stainless Steel
Threaded Bars, Locking
6" x 10" Deck
Nuts and Washers (Typ.)
Washers (1 per each Rail
Support Mark F
"
B"
at 3" centers (Typ.)
" Stainless Steel Threaded Bar,

Locking Nuts and Washers (4" x 6"
14" Sq. Prestressed

Concrete Piles
(Typ.)
"
B"
minus 1'-3"
location except
Post to 6" x 10" Deck Support)
along top Wale)
Wire Rope (3 wraps)
1" Stainless Steel

SCH 80 PVC Electrical Conduit
8'
-0" M in.
Steel Wire Rope Clamps
Pile Cutoff
See
Conduit
Provide 3 Stainless
Detail
Electrical
HANDRAIL DETAIL
D
Elevation
SCH 80 PVC
at each Wale splice
312"
Detail "A"
1
2"
1
2"
bottom of Wale (Typ.
6" x 10" Mark F
5"
1'
-3"
3
Splice Plate top and
Fiberglass Open Grating

similar (Typ.)
Elevation
5"
Plastic Lumber
See
See
Pile Cutoff
1
2"
Post Mark D
D etai
l
Decking Mark E shown,
1'
-5"
1"
1'
-9"
Deck Support)
1'
-9" (
Typ.
)
(
Spa
cer B
lock)
3'
-6"
2 ~ " Stainless Steel
Bolt, Locking Nuts and
Post to 6" x 10"
Support Mark F
Spacer Block)
(Center in Post)
Plastic Lumber
Nuts and Washers (4" x 6"
6" x 10" Deck
head flush with top of
Steel Decking Screws
at each Post, centered, Typ.)
Plastic Lumber
Steel Lag Screw (Recess

2 ~ #10 x 3" Stainless
(
Typ.
)
Post Face
of Fender
3"
Front Face
Wire Rope (3 wraps)
1" Stainless Steel Threaded Bars,
Locking Nuts and Washers (Typ.)
tightly blocked and

securely wrapped
Composite Lumber
14" Sq. Prestressed
10" x 10" Wales
Concrete Piles
Mark A
" x 12" Stainless

Post Mark D (Typ.)
Steel Lag Screws
(Recess head flush
Spacer Blocks Mark B (Typ.)
with Spacer Blocks)

CROSS REFERENCES:
14" Sq. Prestressed
NHW or MHW
Elevation
SECTION C-C
For location of Sections
Concrete Piles
TYPICAL FLARED SECTION
A-A and B-B see Sheet 3.
(8 TURN SHOWN, 4 TURN SIMILAR)
SECTION B-B
For Section E-E and Detail "A"
2 ~ " Stainless Steel
see Sheet 5.
" x 12" Stainless Steel Lag
Spacer Blocks
Screw (Recess head flush with

Spacer Block)
6" x 10" Deck
Support Mark F
3"
Composite Lumber
Mark B (Typ.)
Plastic Lumber
10" x 10" Wales
1" Stainless Steel
14" Sq. Prestressed

Concrete Piles
Electrical Conduit

Turns)
8 "
2:
14:
24 PM
at 3" centers (Typ.)
"
B"
SCH 80 PVC
1" Stainless Steel
Wire Rope (3 wraps)
tightly blocked and
securely wrapped
Composite Lumber
10" x 10" Wales Mark A
Post Mark D (Typ.)
Spacer Blocks Mark B (Typ.)

14" Sq. Prestressed
Spacer Block Mark B (Typ.)
Concrete Piles (Typ.)

1" Stainless Steel Threaded Bar,
DETAIL "B" (SHOWING THREADED

BAR LOCATION/RELATIONSHIP TO PILE PRESTRESSING STRANDS)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
Steel Wire Rope Clamps
Concrete Piles
Side edge
of pile
Provide 3 Stainless
"
B"
14" Sq. Prestressed
Detail "A"
See
Detail "A"
See
See
Detail "
B"Detail "
B"
See
See
See
1'
-0"
SECTION A-A
(
All Angle
(
8 Turn)
Support Mark F
(
Typ. both piles)
10 "
9 " (
4 Turn)
8 " (
0
)
6" x 10" Deck
Elevation
Plastic Lumber
top of Spacer Block)
Detail

NLW or MLW
1'
-9" (
Typ.
)
Detail
Wales Mark A (Typ.)
(
Spacer Block)
Mark A
(
Typ.
)
SECTION C-C
SECTION D-D
TYPICAL AT INTERMEDIATE PILES
TYPICAL STRAIGHT SECTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
FENDER SYSTEM -
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21930
SHEET
NO.
4 of 7
SCH 80 PVC
Electrical Conduit
10" x 10" Wales

1'
-2 "
Ch
an
ne
l
Navigation Light
90
Washers (Typ.)
14" Sq.
Prestressed
Concrete Piles

Electrical Conduit
Bars, Locking Nuts and
Composite Lumber
Mark A
SCH 80 PVC
1" Stainless Steel Threaded
"
B"
Bracing Mark G2
Detail "A"
Detail "A"
See
See

See
Detail
& Light
"
B"
Support Mark H1
"
B"
See
Clearance Gauge
See
Clearance Gauge
Detail
Detail
Deck Support Mark F
"
B"
(Typ.)
" Stainless Steel
"(
Mi
n
.
)
See
Spacer Blocks Mark B
1'
-9" (
Typ.
)
(
| Spa
cer B
lock)
1'
-2 "
D etai
l
"
B"
See
Detail
Composite Lumber
Splice Plate top and bottom of Wale,
center plate about splice and Wale
PARTIAL VIEW F-F
(Typ. at each Wale splice location,
62
(SHOWING FENDER END; DECKING
except along top Wale)

AND HANDRAIL NOT SHOWN

Orientation line for
FOR CLARITY)
Navigation Light
14" Sq. Prestressed
SECTION E-E
Concrete Piles (do

not wrap these piles
Composite Lumber
with wire rope)
TYPICAL FLARED SECTION

(8 TURN SHOWN, 4 TURN SIMILAR)

Spacer Block Mark B
3 ~ #10 x 3" Stainless Steel,
Hand Rail Mark C
Decking Screws each end

of each Mark E

" Stainless Steel
Recess Threaded Bar " from
front face of Wale as shown

" (Min.)
turns, placed with " Min., "

Max. gap between adjacent boards)
VIEW F-F
(SHOWING FENDER END WITH CLEARANCE GAUGE)
2'-5"
See
Detail "A"

"
B"
1'
-9" (
Typ.
)
Grating similar (6" Min. width at
(
Spacer Block)
See
Detail
Provide oversized hole to

9"
1 "
14" Sq.
accept nut & washer
2"
DETAIL "A"
CROSS REFERENCES:
Prestressed
"
B"
8"
See
9"
Detail
1 "
Concrete Piles
Splice Plate top and bottom of Wale,
2:
14:
25 PM
2"
8"
3 "
center plate about splice and Wale
" Holes (Typ.)
" Stainless Steel Plate
For Navigation Lights and SCH 80 PVC Electrical
(Typ. at each Wale splice location,
Conduit Details see Design Standard Index 21220.
except along top Wale)
For View G-G and Clearance Gauge Details see
Sheet 4.
Wales Mark A (Typ.)
For Detail "B" and location of Section E-E see

Sheet 2.
SECTION E-E
LAST
REVISION
07/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
SPLICE PLATE DETAIL
For location of View F-F see Sheet 1.
TYPICAL STRAIGHT SECTION
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
FENDER SYSTEM -
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21930
SHEET
NO.
5 of 7
" Stainless Steel Bolts,

3'-6"
8" 3"
Light Support Mark H2
Locking Nuts & Washers
H
" Stainless Steel Bolts,
Locking Nuts & Washers
Light Support Mark H2
(Typ.)
2'
-3"
Orientation line for

Clearance Gauge Light
Clearance Gauge
1" Stainless Steel

Channel
Front Face of Fender
Match Pile
Minimum Clearance Sign
Plastic Lumber
Spacer Blocks Mark B
6" x 10" Mark G1

To avoid connection bolt conflicts,
spaced with Wales
(Typ.)
place and bolt Mark G2 in place prior
" x 1 " Stainless
to installation of next wale above it
Steel Lag Screws (Typ.)
3"
Elevation
90
MINIMUM
CLEARANCE
3"
Cutoff
Mark H1 (each face)
3"
2'
-0"
3"
Clearance Gauge Support
4'
-6" M ax.
F6 (Typ.)
10" x 10" Wales Mark A6
6" x 10" Mark
Plastic Lumber
3'
-0" M in.
,
Composite Lumber
Plastic Lumber
6" x 10" Bracing
" Stainless Steel
Mark G1 (Typ.)
14" Sq. Prest.

Conc. Plies
3'
-0" C.
C. (
M ax.
) Spacing
Bolts , Locking Nuts &

Washers (recess Head) (Typ.)
Plastic Lumber
6" x 10" Bracing

Mark G1 (Typ.)
" x 11" Stainless Steel
Clearance
Bolts , Locking Nuts &
Gauge
" Stainless Steel
Washers (recess Head) (Typ.)

Plastic Lumber 6" X 6" Bracing Mark G2

(align vertical faces with previous Mark G2
to insure Mark H1 will contact all Mark G2's
Bracing Mark G2 (Typ.)
Plastic Lumber
and be plumb)
4" x 4" Bracing
Clearance Gauge
Mark H1 (install
plumb)
NLW or MLW
3"
1'
-0"
Elevation
5" 5"
Clearance Gauge
Plastic Lumber
SECTION J-J
3'
-0" M ax.
Clearance Gauge H eight Varies
" x 11" Stainless Steel
3'
-0" Spacing
CROSS REFERENCES:
4" x 4" Mark H1
For Estimated Structural Composite and Plastic

Lumber Bill of Materials Quantities and Fender
Width Varies
2:
14:
26 PM
System Table of Variables see Structures Plans.
VIEW H-H
VIEW G-G
(WALES, PILES AND BRACING
For location of View G-G see Sheet 5.
(WALES, DECKING AND HANDRAIL
12/17/2015
NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
LAST
REVISION
01/01/12
REVISIO N
CLEARANCE GAUGE DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
FENDER SYSTEM -
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21930
SHEET
NO.
6 of 7
QUANTITY
10" X 10"
266.6
10" X 10"
A2
10"
LUMBER
266.6
COMPOSITE
LUMBER
32'-0"
10"
10" X 10"
A3
133.3
16'-0"
10"
10" X 10"
"
133.3
16'-0"
10"
10" X 10"
"
"
133.3
COMPOSITE
LUMBER
16'-0"
10"
10" X 10"
A6
"
COMPOSITE
LUMBER
A5
"
COMPOSITE
LUMBER
A4
"
"
133.3
COMPOSITE
LUMBER
C
Bill of M aterials Table in Structures Plans
32'-0" (STRAIGHT)
COMPOSITE
See Estim ated Structural Com posite and Plastic Lum ber
A1
MARK
** E
F1
SIZE
8" X 8"
8" (STRAIGHT)
PLASTIC LUMBER
(Trim & Miter Ends
4" X 6"
4'-4" (STRAIGHT)
2" X 12"
2'-6" (STRAIGHT)
PLASTIC LUMBER
(Miter as required, 6" Min. width)
6" X 10"
32'-0" (STRAIGHT)
PLASTIC LUMBER
F4
79.6
F6
78.8
"
"
78.4
6"
15'-8"
"
79.3
PLASTIC
LUMBER
Lumber Dimension.
"
PLASTIC
6" X 10"
are based on Nominal Lumber Dimensions and may vary depending on Actual
"
15'-9"
LUMBER
* All Plastic Lumber and Composite Lumber Dimensions and Quantities shown
160.0
15'-11"
LUMBER
F5
5.0
"
PLASTIC
6" X 10"
8.7
159.6
LUMBER
16'-0"
QUANTITY
16.0
31'-11"
PLASTIC
6" X 10"
NO.
REQD.
3.6
"
PLASTIC
LUMBER
F3
PER EACH
as required)
PLASTIC LUMBER
6" X 10"
BOARD FT.
16'-0" (STRAIGHT)
2" X 6"
PLASTIC LUMBER
6" X 10"
F2
DIMENSIONS
(NOMINAL)
Bill of M aterials Table in Structures Plans
NO.
REQD.
See Estim ated Structural Com posite and Plastic Lum ber
PER EACH
6"
DIMENSIONS
6"
BOARD FT.
SIZE
(NOMINAL)
PLASTIC LUMBER BILL OF MATERIALS
6"
MARK
STRUCTURAL COMPOSITE LUMBER BILL OF MATERIALS
6"
15'-10"
** Provide Fiberglass Open Grating in lieu of 2" X 12" Plastic Lumber when called
for in the Plans. Mounting hardware shall be Stainless Steel, install per Manufacturer's
G1
recommendations. See Structures Plans for Notes and Details.
G2
H1
6" X 6"
PLASTIC LUMBER
3'-8" (STRAIGHT)
18.3
4'-1" (STRAIGHT)
12.3
4" X 4"
PILE CUTOFF ELEV. MINUS NLW OR
1.3 PER
PLASTIC LUMBER
MLW ELEV. PLUS 5'-6" (STRAIGHT)
LF EACH
2" X 6"
PLASTIC LUMBER
1'-2" (STRAIGHT)
1.2
LAST
REVISION
07/01/11
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
2:
14:
26 PM
H2
6" X 10"
PLASTIC LUMBER
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
FENDER SYSTEM -
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
21930
SHEET
NO.
7 of 7
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILE NOTES:

Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) "Structures Design Guidelines", current edition.
0.7L
0.3L
SPIRAL TIES:
Pick-up Point
Each wrap of spirals shall be tied to at least two corner strands.

L
0.58L
0.21L
0.21L
Support Points
2-POINT SUPPORT
1-POINT PICK-UP
One turn required for spiral splices.
Tie Down and

CONCRETE CLASS:
Concrete for all CFRP & SS piles shall be Class V (Special).
See "GENERAL NOTES" in Structures Plans for any specific locations where the use of
Silica Fume is required for stainless steel reinforcing.
0.21L
0.58L
0.21L
CONCRETE STRENGTH:
The pile cylinder strength shall be 4,000 psi minimum at time of transfer of the Prestressing Force.
Pick-up Points
0.145L
0.355L
0.355L
0.145L Tie Down and
The material to fill dowel holes and form the joint between pile sections shall be a Type B
Support Points
2-POINT PICK-UP
Epoxy Compound in accordance with Specification Section 926 and shall be contained on the
Approved Products List (APL). Use Epoxy Bonding Compound or Epoxy Mortar as recommended
3-POINT SUPPORT
by the Manufacturer. For Epoxy Mortar only use sand or other filler material supplied by
the manufacturer and in the proportions recommended.
0.145L
0.355L
0.145L
0.355L
PICK-UP POINTS:
Pick-up Points
REINFORCING BARS:
0.107L
0.262L
0.262L
0.262L
0.107L
Tie Down and

Support Points
3-POINT PICK-UP
4-POINT SUPPORT
Stainless Steel: All reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of Specification Section 931
for Type 304, Grade 75.
Carbon FRP: All reinforcing bars shall be CFRP meeting the requirements of Specification Section 932.
PRESTRESSING STRAND:
Stainless Steel: Prestressing steel shall be seven-wire HSSS, UNS S32205 (Type 2205) or
UNS S31803 strand, meeting the requirements of Specification Section 933.
Carbon FRP: Prestressing strand shall be CFRP Strand meeting the requirements of
PROTECTION OF EXPOSED STRANDS:

For all pile ends exposed to the environment and not embedded under final conditions,
TABLE OF MAXIMUM PILE PICK-UP AND SUPPORT LENGTHS

D = Square Pile Size (inches)
Maximum
Pile

protect strands in accordance with Specification Section 450.
Pick-Up Detail
12
14
18
24
30
48
52
59
68
87
2, 3, or 4 point
1 Point
69
75
85
98
124
2, 3, or 4 point
2 Point
99
107
121
140
178
3 or 4 point
3 Point
Length
(Feet)
3"
Max.
1" Rad. or
3
4"
Chamfer (Typ.)
1
4"
1
4"
Max.
Max.
3"
Cover
Spiral Ties 0.3" CFRP Strand
or W4.0 SS Wire
TYPICAL PILE SHAPE
DETAIL SHOWING
FOR MOLD FORMS
TYPICAL COVER
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
2:
14:
47 PM
Cover
1
4"
Max.
1
4"
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
NOTES AND DETAILS FOR SQUARE CFRP
DESIGN STANDARDS
& SS PRESTRESSED CONCRETE PILES
NO.
22600
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
1. For Sections D-D, & E-E, see Index Nos. 22612, 22614, 22618, 22624 or 22630 for applicable concrete pile size and Pile Splice Reinforcement Details.
Prestressing strands, spiral ties and/or reinforcement are not shown for clarity.
"(
applied)
,
2.
3. In cases where pile splices are desired due to length limitations in shipping and/or handling, the "Drivable Preplanned Prestressed Precast Splice Detail" shall be used.
4. When preformed dowel holes are utilized, the 1" spiral tie pitch shall be continued to 4'-0" below the head of the pile, See Index Nos. 22618, 22624. Preformed holes shall
utilize either removable preforming material or stay-in-place corrugated galvanized steel ducts. Stay-in-place ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized sheet steel
meeting the requirements of ASTM A653, Coating Designation G90, 26 gauge. Ducts shall be 1" diameter for CFRP Bars, and 2" diameter for SS Bars with a minimum
"(
final thickness)
NOTES:
Form to retain
corrugation (rib) height of 0.12 in. Ducts shall be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams. Galvanizing of welded seams will not be required.
epoxy compound
Full epoxy compound joint
5. For tension piles where top of Prestressed Pile is less than 3 feet below Pile Cut-off Elevation, extend No. 6 CFRP Bars or No. 10 SS into cap beyond Pile Cut-off
Gasket
Elevation to achieve development as approved by the Engineer.
DETAIL A
1" Cover
4'
-6" (
CFRP Bars)
4'
-0" (
SS Bars)
Bar extension
10'
-6" (
SS Bars Only)
2'
-6" (
Typ.
)
Detail A
2:
15:
26 PM
See Note 5.
See
Bar extension
Elevation;
Detail A
Pile cut-off
2'
-6" (
Typ.
)
Cap/ Footing to
See
Bar extension
Bar Em bedm ent
Extended into
No. 6 CFRP Bars
Build-up section
Bar extension
21'
Splice or
No chamfer,
flat surface
required
No. 6 CFRP Bars

or No. 10 SS Bars
Prestressed Pile
or No. 10 SS Bars
See
Detail A
Preformed holes, 4'-2"
Full epoxy
compound joint
Epoxy compound
to fill hole with
Bars in place
1" Drilled or
preformed holes
for CFRP Bars, or
1" Drilled or
(SS Option) or 4'-8"
preformed holes
(CFRP Option) long,
for SS Bars
in driven pile (see
(see Splice Details)
Note No. 4)
Auxiliary SS reinforcing
Bars cast with pile. See
Section F-F; Not Required
for CFRP Prestressed
Pile Option.
TYPICAL SPLICE
BEFORE BONDING
UNFORESEEN
NONDRIVABLE UNFORESEEN
DRIVABLE UNFORESEEN
DRIVABLE PREPLANNED
REINFORCED C-I-P
REINFORCED PRECAST
PRESTRESSED PRECAST
PRESTRESSED PRECAST
PILE SPLICE DETAIL
PILE SPLICE DETAIL
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
or No. 10 SS Bars
"
No. 6 CFRP Bars
Plus 2"
Top of
10'
-6" (
SS Bars)
or No. 10 SS Bars
4'
-6" (
CFRP Bars)
No. 6 CFRP Bars
Bar Extension
2'
-6" (
Typ.
)
Build-up
Full length of
Splice section
Build-up
Pile Build-up
C-I-P Pile
5-0" M ax.
Elevation
or No. 10 SS Bars
10'
-6" (
SS Bars)
Pile Cut-off
No. 6 CFRP Bars
4'
-6" (
CFRP Bars)
or Footing
21'
Bent Cap, Pile Cap
Splice section
C-I-P Concrete
4'
-6" M inim um , 21'
-0" M axim um Pile Build-up
at End
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
SQUARE CFRP & SS PRESTRESSED
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILE SPLICES
NO.
22601
SHEET
NO.
1of 1
Spiral Ties @
12"
114"
A
6" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1
4"
1"
1"
Pile
1
4"
3"
12"
Spacing
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

Spiral Tie
1
4"
3"
3" Cover
3
4"
Spiral Ties
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 6
4 ~ No. 6 Bars
Bars
(Full Length)
Pile
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)
SECTION D-D
(See Nondrivable Unforeseen Reinforced Precast Pile Build-Up Detail)
12"
ELEVATION
1
4"
Spiral Ties
1
4"
Pile
114"
12"
1
4"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 6
Prestressing
Bars
Strands
Pile
SECTION E-E

8 ~ 0.6" , CFRP 7-Strand, at 24 kips
8 ~ " , CFRP Single-Strand, at 23.5 kips
12"
CFRP PILE SPLICE REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

12"
3" Cover
NOTES:
(Typ.)
0.3" CFRP Strand
Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Piles and Index No.
Spiral Ties
22601 - Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices.

See Alternate

Strand Patterns
SECTION A-A
12/17/2015
2:
15:
38 PM
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
CFRP PRESTRESSED PILE DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
12" SQUARE CFRP & SS PRESTRESSED
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILE
NO.
22612
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
W4.0 Spiral Ties @
12"
114"
1"
6" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1
4"
Spiral Tie
1"
Pile
1
4"
3"
12"
Spacing
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch
1
4"
3"
3" Cover
3
4"
W4.0 Spiral Ties
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 10
4 ~ No. 6 SS Bars
SS Dowels
(Full Length)
Pile
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)
SECTION D-D
W4.0
12"
ELEVATION
1
4"
1
4"
Spiral Ties
Pile
114"
12"
1
4"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 10
Prestressing
SS Dowels
Strands
Pile
SECTION E-E
STRAND PATTERN
8 ~ " , HSSS at 24 kips

12"
SS PILE SPLICE REINFORCEMENT DETAILS

12"
3" Cover
NOTES:
(Typ.)
W4.0 SS
Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Piles and Index

Spiral Ties
No. 22601 - Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices.
2. Any of the given Strand Patterns may be utilized.

See Strand

Pattern
SECTION A-A
12/17/2015
2:
15:
39 PM
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
SS PRESTRESSED PILE DETAILS
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILE
NO.
22612
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
Spiral Ties @
14"
3
4"
3
4"
1"
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
3
4"
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

6" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1"
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

Spiral Tie
Pile
3
1 4"
3"
14"
Spacing
3" Cover
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 6
3"
0.3" CFRP Strand Spiral Ties
3
4"
4 ~ No. 6 CFRP Bars
CFRP Bars
(Full Length)
Pile
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)
SECTION D-D
0.3" CFRP Strand
14"
ELEVATION
3
4"
Spiral Ties
3
4"
3
1 4"
3
1 4"
14"
Pile
3" Cover
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 6
CFRP Prestressing
CFRP Bars
Strands
Pile
SECTION E-E

8 ~ 0.6" , CFRP 7-Strand, at 31.5 kips
14"
8 ~ " , CFRP Single-Strand, at 30.5 kips

14"
3" Cover
NOTES:
(Typ.)
1. Work this Index with Index D22600 - Notes and Details for
0.3" CFRP Strand
Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Piles and Index D22601 -
Spiral Ties
Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices.

See Alternate
Place one strand at each corner and equally space the
Strand Patterns
remaining strands between the corner strands.
SECTION A-A
12/17/2015
2:
16:
08 PM
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILE
NO.
22614
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
Spiral Ties @
14"
3
4"
3
4"
1"
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
3
4"
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

6" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1"
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

Spiral Tie
Pile
3
4"
3"
14"
Spacing
3"
3" Cover
W4.0 Spiral Ties
3
4"
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 10
4 ~ No. 8 SS Bars
SS Dowels
(Full Length)
Pile
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)
SECTION D-D
Spiral Ties
14"
ELEVATION
3
4"
3
4"
3
4"
3
4"
14"
Pile
3" Cover
(Typ.)
4 ~ No. 10
Prestressing
SS Dowels
Strands
Pile
SECTION E-E
STRAND PATTERN
(See Drivable Unforeseen Prestressed Precast Splice Detail)

14"

14"
3" Cover
NOTES:
(Typ.)
W4.0 SS
Spiral Ties

See Strand
Pattern
SECTION A-A
12/17/2015
2:
16:
09 PM
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILE
NO.
22614
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
Spiral Ties @ 6" pitch,

full length
Spiral Tie
1"
6" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1"
512"
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch
1
2"
Spacing
3" Cover
(Typ.)
Pile
1
2"
3"
3"
9 ~ No. 6
4 ~ No. 8 CFRP Bars
CFRP Bars
(Full Length)
Pile
3
4"
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)
SECTION D-D
ELEVATION
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
Spiral Ties
312"
512"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
1
2"
Pile

9 ~ No. 6
12 ~ " , CFRP Single-Strand, at 33 kips
CFRP Bars
Prestressing
Strands
Pile
18"
SECTION E-E
2"
3" Cover
18"
(Typ.)
6"
6"
0.3" CFRP Strand
Spiral Ties
See Alternate
6 "
2 "
Spiral Ties
3" Cover
(Typ.)
Pile
Strand Patterns
SECTION A-A
6 "
8 ~ No. 6 CFRP Bars

(7'-6" long)
(shift as required
NOTES:
to clear strands)
1. Work this Index with Index 22600 - Notes and Details for
9 ~ No. 6
Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Piles and Index 22601 -
Prestressing
CFRP Bars
Strands
Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices.

Pile

2:
16:
47 PM
SECTION F-F

(See Drivable Preplanned Prestressed Precast Splice Detail)
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILE
NO.
22618
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
Spiral Ties @
Spiral Tie
1"
6" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1"
1
2"
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch
1
2"
(Typ.)
Pile
3"
1
2"
3"
3" Cover
Spacing
8 ~ No. 10
4 ~ No. 8 SS Bars
SS Dowels
(Full Length)
Pile
W4.0 Spiral Ties
3
4"
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)
SECTION D-D
ELEVATION
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
Spiral Ties
1
2"
312"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
512"
Pile
8 ~ No. 10
STRAND PATTERN
Prestressing
SS Dowels
Strands
Pile
16 ~ " , HSSS, at 26 kips

18"
SECTION E-E
2"
3" Cover
18"
(Typ.)
7"
7"
W4.0 SS
Spiral Ties
Spiral Ties
7"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
2"
See Strand
Pile
Pattern
SECTION A-A
7"
8 ~ No. 9 Bars
(10'-6" long)
(shift as required
to clear strands)
8 ~ No. 10
Prestressing
Dowels
NOTES:
Strands
Pile
10:
38:
56 AM
Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Piles and Index No.
SECTION F-F
22601 - Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices.

(See Drivable Preplanned Predtresses Precast Splice Detail)


12/23/2015

LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILE
NO.
22618
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
3
4"
1
3
6 4"
1
3 2"
1
2"
3
4"
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1"
Spacing
1
2"
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
3
4"
1"
6" Pitch
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

Spiral Tie
634"
Spiral Ties
Pile
1
2"
3"
3" Cover
3
4"
(Typ.)
16 ~ No. 6
4 ~ No. 6 CFRP Bars
CFRP Bars
(Full length)
Pile
3"
SECTION D-D
(See Nondrivable Unforeseen
Reinforced Precast Pile Build-Up Detail)
3
4"
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)
3
4"
1
3
6 4"
1
3 2"
1
2"
3
4"
SPIRAL TIE ELEVATION
3
4"
Pile
634" 312"
312" 634"
Spiral Ties

24"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
16 ~ No. 6
Prestressing
CFRP Bars
Strands
Pile
20 ~ " , CFRP Single-Strand, at 33 kips
SECTION E-E
(See Drivable Prestressed
Precast Pile Splice Detail)
134"
1
2"
3
6 4"
3" Cover
1
2"
3
4"
(Typ.)
(Shift as required
Bars (7'-6" long)
to clear strands)
Pile
1
2"
See Alternate
634"
3
4"
Spiral Ties
12 ~ No. 6 CFRP
0.3" CFRP Strand
1
2"
24"
Spiral Ties
3" Cover
Strand Patterns
(Typ.)
3
4"
SECTION A-A
NOTES:
1. Work this Index with Index D22600 - Notes and Details for
16 ~ No. 6
Prestressing
CFRP Bars
Strands
2:
17:
05 PM
D22601 - Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices.
Pile
SECTION F-F

(See Drivable Preplanned Prestressed Precast Pile Splice Detail)
12/17/2015

LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILE
NO.
22624
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
Spiral Ties @
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
2"
1"
1
2"
16 Turns @ 3" Pitch
1"
Spacing
6" Pitch
5 Turns @ 1" Pitch

Spiral Tie
1
2"
Pile
3" Cover
1
2"
3"
1
2"
(Typ.)
12 ~ No. 10
4 ~ No. 8 SS Bars
SS Dowels
(Full length)
3"
Pile
W3.4 Spiral Ties
3
4"
SECTION D-D
2"
x 3" Chamfer (Typ.)

1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
1
2"
Spiral Ties
Pile
512" 412"
2"
412"
1
2"
ELEVATION
STRAND PATTERN
24"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
12 ~ No. 10
Prestressing
SS Dowels
Strands
Pile
SECTION E-E
Spiral Ties
3" Cover
4"
8"
4"
8"
24"
(Typ.)
12 ~ No. 10 SS
Bars (10'-6" long)
8"
W4.0 SS
Spiral Ties
(Shift as required
4"
to clear strands)
4"
Pile
See Strand
Pattern
3" Cover
NOTES:
12 ~ No. 10
Prestressing
SS Dowels
Strands
Pile

10:
39:
16 AM
(Typ.)
8"
SECTION A-A
SECTION F-F

12/23/2015

LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILE
NO.
22624
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
1
2"
4" Pitch
16 Turns @ 2" Pitch
Spiral Tie 1"
512"
Pitch
16 Turns @ 2" Pitch
1"
4"
512"
512"
512"
4"
1
2"
4 Turns @ 1
Spiral Ties
Spacing
@ 6" pitch, full
4"

(see Section C-C)
length
Pile
(Typ.)
1
2"
Head
Tip
3" Cover
4"
1
2"
3"
1
2"
16 ~ No. 6
4 ~ No. 8 CFRP Bars
Pile
(Full length)
3"
CFRP Bars
SECTION D-D
3
4"
3
4"
0.3" CFRP Strand
x 34" Chamfer
Spiral Ties
8"
1
2"
1
2"
4"
Spiral Ties
4"
8"
1
2"

4"
Chamfer
3"
1
2"
x 3"
1
2"
1" x 1" Chamfer or
3" Cover
(Typ.)
1
2"
ELEVATION
Pile
30"
8"
** 0.3" CFRP Diagonal Ties
Void

0.3" CFRP Strand
0.3" CFRP Strand

8"
16 ~ No. 6
135
Spiral Ties
"
4
30"
Pile
8"
**
3
9 4"
No. 6 Bars
SECTION E-E
4"
314" 314" 7"
4"
See Alternate
Strand Patterns
Void
Strand Patterns
Pile
7"
SECTION C-C
(Typ.)
SECTION B-B
3" Cover
7"
Pile &
Spiral Ties
1
1
3 4"
4"
Pile
See Alternate
NOTES:
12 ~ No. 6 CFRP
Bars (7'-6" long)
4 "
1. Any of the given Strand Patterns may be utilized. The strands shall be located as follows:
(shift as required
to clear strands)
16 ~ No. 6
Pile
CFRP Bars
Prestressing
Strands
SECTION F-F
2:
17:
27 PM
7"
4 "
DETAIL
(Typ.)
20 ~ " , CFRP Single-Strand at 37 kips
Strands
0.3" DIAGONAL TIE
3" Cover
20 ~ 0.6" , CFRP 7-Strand at 38 kips
Prestressing
(6'-0" long)
(Typ.)
Pile
CFRP Bars
4
"
Spiral Ties
3" Cover
512"
18"
30"
Void
Pile &
4"
8"
512"
30"
3. Work this Index with Index No. 22600 - Notes and Details for Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete
Piles and Index No. 22601 - Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices.
12/17/2015
CFRP PILE SPLICE DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILE
NO.
22630
SHEET
NO.
1of 2
1
2"
4" Pitch
16 Turns @ 2" Pitch
Spiral Tie 1"
512"
Pitch
16 Turns @ 2" Pitch
1"
4"
512"
512"
512"
4"
1
2"
4 Turns @ 1
Spiral Ties
Spacing
@ 6" pitch, full
4"

(see Section C-C)
length
Pile
(Typ.)
1
2"
Head
Tip
3" Cover
4"
1
2"
3"
1
2"
12 ~ No. 10
4 ~ No. 8 Bars
Pile
(Full length)
3"
Dowels
SECTION D-D
1" x 1" Chamfer or
x 34" Chamfer
W4.0 Spiral Ties
3
4"
8"
1
2"
1
2"
4"
Spiral Ties
4"
8"
1
2"

4"
Chamfer
3"
1
2"
x 3"
1
2"
3
4"
3" Cover
(Typ.)
1
2"
ELEVATION
Pile
30"
8"
** W4.0 SS Diagonal Ties
Void
512"
18"
W4.0 SS
W4.0 SS
8"
8"
3
9 4"
No. 8 Bars
Prestressing
Strands
SECTION E-E
4
"
"
4
30"
Pile
Dowels
Pile
**

7
8"
1
1
678" 3 4" 3 4" 678"
478"
(6'-0" long)
(Typ.)
7
8"
W4.0 DIAGONAL TIE
3" Cover
DETAIL
Spiral Ties
7
8"
(Typ.)
3" Cover
12 ~ No. 10
135
Spiral Ties
Spiral Ties
30"
Void
Pile &
4"
8"
512"
30"
See Strand
Pattern
Void
Pattern
Pile &
Pile
7
8"
SECTION C-C
Pile
SECTION B-B
(Typ.)
1
1
4"3 4"
See Strand
3" Cover
12 ~ No. 10 Bars
NOTES:
(10'-6" long)
7
8"
1. Any of the given Strand Patterns may be utilized. The strands shall be located as follows:
to clear strands)
12 ~ No. 10
Pile
Dowels
Prestressing
Strands
SECTION F-F
10:
39:
36 AM
(shift as required
STRAND PATTERN
3. Work this Index with Index No. 22600 - Notes and Details for Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete
Piles and Index No. 22601 - Square CFRP & SS Prestressed Concrete Pile Splices.
12/23/2015
SS PILE SPLICE DETAILS
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE PILE
NO.
22630
SHEET
NO.
2 of 2
1"
Spiral Tie
1"
2" Pitch
1"
2" Pitch
2" Pitch
1"
Spacing
Epoxy Grout @
Provide one (1) 3 " vent hole (@ Pile) on two (2)
Joints (Typ.)
opposite faces of pile (Typ. each Pile Section)
Tip
Head
3'-0" (Typ.)
4'-0" Minimum Bottom Section
16'-0" Minimum Intermediate Sections as required
16'-0" Minimum Top Section
ELEVATION
NOTES
0.58L
0.21L
0.21L
Tie Down and
Current Edition.
Support Points
2-POINT SUPPORT
SPIRAL TIES:
One full
0.7L
0.3L
L
CONCRETE CLASS:
Pick-up
Point
L
0.145L
0.355L
0.145L Tie Down and
0.355L
Support Points
1-POINT PICK-UP
0.21L
0.58L
CONCRETE STRENGTH:
3-POINT SUPPORT
0.21L
The material to form the joint between pile sections shall be a Type B Epoxy Compound in accordance with Section 926
of the Specifications. The bonding agent used on internal pile surfaces shall be a Type A Epoxy Compound in accordance
Pick-up
with Section 926 of the Specifications. Epoxy Compounds used shall be contained on the Approved Products List (APL).
Points
0.107L
0.262L
0.262L
0.262L
0.107L Tie Down and
Support Points
PICK-UP POINTS:
2-POINT PICK-UP
4-POINT SUPPORT
REINFORCING STEEL:
Stainless Steel: All reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of Specification Section 931 for Type 304, Grade 75.
PRESTRESSING STEEL:
SUPPORT LENGTHS
Stainless Steel: Prestressing steel shall be seven-wire strand HSSS, UNS S32205 (Type 2205) or UNS S31803
strand, meeting the requirements of Specification Section 933.
Maximum Pile Length

(Feet)

Pick-Up
Carbon FRP: Prestressing strand shall be CFRP Strand meeting the requirements of Specification Section 933.
Detail
119
2, 3, or 4 point
1 Point
170
2, 3, or 4 point
2 Point
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
2:
17:
43 PM
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
54" PRECAST/POST-TENSIONED CFRP & SS
DESIGN STANDARDS
CONCRETE CYLINDER PILE
NO.
22654
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
1'
-0"
A
54"
54"
(No. 3 CFRP Bars) for
(No. 3 CFRP Bars) for Spiral
Ties @ Equal Spaces
0.3" CFRP Strand
Spiral Ties
10'
-6"
of 54" Pile to "
24 ~ No. 6 CFRP Bars
Pile Section
@ Equal Spaces
1'-0" Min.
Lap Splice
1'-0" Void
d
i
" Vo
7
3
0.3" CFRP Strand

Spiral Ties
3" Min. *
Cast in
Cover (Typ.)
Place Plug
Closed No. 4 CFRP Bars or
No. 3 CFRP Bars or

0.3" CFRP Strand
0.3" CFRP Strand Spiral
Spiral Ties
Ties @ 1'-0" (Typ.)
1 " Min.
3" Min. *
Cover (Typ.)
Cover (Typ.)
Full Epoxy Compound
3" Min. *
Cover (Typ.)


2 ~ CFRP Strands per tendon shown as
( ); Grout per Specification 938)
10'
-6"
compound joint
48 ~ 0.5" , Single-Strand, at 28 kips
48 ~ 0.6" , 7-Strand, at 29 kips
3" M in. Cover
"(
applied)
Inside Pile Wall

Full epoxy
Temporary Blocking
Form to retain
"(
final thickness)
SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A
epoxy compound
Gasket
Form to retain
epoxy compound
Outside Pile Wall

2'
-0"
Concrete Seal
2:
17:
44 PM
DETAIL "A"
2
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
CFRP POST-TENSIONED PILE DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
22654
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
1'
-0"
A
54"
54"
W11 Spiral Wire Ties

10'
-6"
of 54" Pile to "
24 ~ No. 10 Bars
Pile Section
@ Equal Spaces
1'-0" Min.
Lap Splice
1'-0" Void
d
i
" Vo
7
3
W11 Spiral
Wire Ties
3" Min. *
Cast in
Cover (Typ.)
Place Plug
Closed No. 4 Bars or W20
No. 4 Bars or
W20 Wire Ties
Wire Ties @ 1'-0" (Typ.)
1 " Min.
3" Min. *
Full Epoxy Compound
3" Min. *
Cover (Typ.)
Cover (Typ.)
Cover (Typ.)

1" Formed Holes
1" Formed Holes

2 or 3 Strands per tendon shown as (
24 ~ No. 10 Bars
See Alternate Strand Patterns; Grout per
Specification 938)
10'
-6"
B
"(
applied)
Inside Pile Wall

Full epoxy
compound joint
72 ~ " , HSSS Strands, at 21 kips (24~3 strand tendons)
3" M in. Cover
58 ~ " , HSSS Strands, at 24 kips (29~2 strand tendons)

48 ~ 0.6" , HSSS Strands, at 32 kips (24~2 strand tendons)
Temporary Blocking
Form to retain
"(
final thickness)
SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A
epoxy compound
Gasket
Form to retain
epoxy compound
Outside Pile Wall

2'
-0"
Concrete Seal
2:
17:
45 PM
DETAIL "A"
2
12/17/2015
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
SS POST-TENSIONED PILE DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
NO.
22654
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3
Spiral Tie
1"
24 Turns
42 Turns @ 2" Pitch
4" Pitch
@ 1.5" Pitch
Spacing
42 Turns @ 2" Pitch

* Provide one (1) 3 " vent
Provide one (1) 3 " vent hole
24 Turns
1"
@ 1.5" Pitch
hole (@ Pile) on two (2)
(@ Pile) on one (1) face of pile
opposite faces of pile (Typ.)
Head or
Head
Tip
or Tip
3 " Vent Holes at
*The 45" Void in the pile shall be positively vented to water

or air after the final pile installation.
If the
3 " vents
14'-10"
10'-2"
Head and Tip of Pile
are included in the pile cut-off section, then venting shall
ELEVATION
be provided by the use of a 1" PVC conduit through the

substructure cap or column.
NOTES
0.58L
0.21L
0.21L
Tie Down and

Support Points
2-POINT SUPPORT
Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) "Structures Design Guidelines", current

edition.
0.7L
0.3L
L
SPIRAL TIES:
One full wrap of spirals is required at both the head and tip of pile. One half turn required for spiral splices.
Pick-up
Point
0.145L
0.355L
0.145L Tie Down and
0.355L
Support Points
1-POINT PICK-UP
CONCRETE CLASS:
Concrete for all piles shall be Class V (Special). Concrete for pile splices shall be Class IV.
See "GENERAL NOTES" in Structures Plans for any specific locations where the use of Silica Fume is required for
3-POINT SUPPORT
stainless steel reinforcing.

0.21L
0.58L
0.21L
CONCRETE STRENGTH:
Pick-up
Points
0.107L
0.262L
0.262L
0.262L
0.107L
Tie Down and

Support Points
2-POINT PICK-UP
4-POINT SUPPORT

The material to form the joint between pile sections shall be a Type B Epoxy Compound in accordance with Specification
Section 926. The bonding agent used on internal pile surfaces shall be a Type A Epoxy Compound in accordance
with Specification Section 926. Epoxy Compounds used shall be contained on the Approved Products List (APL).
PICK-UP POINTS:
REINFORCING BARS:
Stainless Steel: All reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of Specification Section 931 for Type 304, Grade 75.
SUPPORT LENGTHS
Maximum Pile Length
(Feet)

PRESTRESSING STRAND:
Pick-Up
Stainless Steel: Prestressing steel shall be seven-wire strand HSSS, UNS S32205 (Type 2205) or UNS S31803 strand
Detail
meeting the requirements of Specification Section 933.
2:
18:
04 PM
Carbon FRP: Prestressing strand shall be CFRP Strand meeting the requirements of Specification Section 933.
122
2, 3, or 4 point
1 Point
174
2, 3, or 4 point
2 Point
LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
12/17/2015
DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
60" PRESTRESSED CFRP & SS CONCRETE
DESIGN STANDARDS
CYLINDER PILE
NO.
22660
SHEET
NO.
1of 3
1'
-0"
60"
60"
No. 3 Bars or 0.3" CFRP
No. 3 Bars or 0.3" CFRP
Strand Spiral Ties
Strand Spiral Ties

1'-0" Min.
@ Equal Spaces
Lap Splice

of 60" Pile to "
10'
-6"
1'-0" Void
d
i
Vo
45"

Pile Section
No. 4 Bars or 0.3"

2" Min.
CFRP Strand Spiral
Cover (Typ.)
Closed No. 4 CFRP Bars or 0.3"
3" Min.
3" Min.
Cast in
CFRP Strand Ties @ 1'-0" (Typ.)

Cover (Typ.)
Full Epoxy Compound
Ties
Place Plug
Cover (Typ.)
36 ~ CFRP Strands
36 ~ CFRP Strands
@ Equal Spaces
@ Equal Spaces
Full epoxy
compound joint
10'
-6"
0.5" , CFRP Single-Strand, at 39 kips
0.6" , CFRP 7-Strand, at 40 kips

Temporary Blocking
Form to retain
epoxy compound
Gasket
Form to retain
epoxy compound
3" M in. Cover
"(
applied)
Inside Pile Wall
"(
final thickness)
SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A

Outside Pile Wall
DETAIL "A"
2:
18:
05 PM
2'
-0"
Concrete Seal
12/17/2015

LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
CFRP POST-TENSIONED PILE DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CYLINDER PILE
NO.
22660
SHEET
NO.
2 of 3
1'
-0"
60"
60"
W11 SS Wire
W11 SS Wire
Spiral Ties
Spiral Ties
24 ~ No. 10 SS Bars
1'-0" Min.
@ Equal Spaces
Lap Splice

of 60" Pile to "
10'
-6"
Pile Section
1'-0" Void
)
s
d
n
a
r
44 St
d(
i
)
Vo
s
d
n
a
r
t
45"
S
36
d(
i
Vo
48"
2" Min.
No. 4 SS Bars or
2" Min.
Cover (inside)
W20 SS Wire Ties

Cover (Typ.)
Closed No. 4 SS Bars or W20 SS Wire
3" Min.
Cover (Typ.)
Full Epoxy Compound
3" Min.
Cast in
Ties @ 1'-0" (Typ.)
Place Plug
Cover (Typ.)
0.6" HSSS Strands
0.6" HSSS Strands
@ Equal Spaces
@ Equal Spaces
24 ~ No. 10 SS Bars
"(
applied)
Inside Pile Wall
compound joint
10'
-6"

44 ~ 0.6" , HSSS Strand, at 36 kips
36 ~ 0.6" , HSSS Strand, at 36 kips
Temporary Blocking
Form to retain
epoxy compound
Gasket
Form to retain
epoxy compound
3" M in. Cover
Full epoxy
"(
final thickness)
SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A

Outside Pile Wall
DETAIL "A"
2:
18:
05 PM
2'
-0"
Concrete Seal
12/17/2015

LAST
REVISION
01/01/16
REVISIO N
SS POST-TENSIONED PILE DETAILS

DESCRIPTION:
INDEX
FY 2016-17
DESIGN STANDARDS
CYLINDER PILE
NO.
22660
SHEET
NO.
3 of 3

Fy2016 17 Design Standards

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fy2016 17 Design Standards

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FY 2016-17 Design Standards

PATENTED DEVICES, MATERIALS AND PROCESSES

DISTRIBUTION OF EXEMPT PUBLIC DOCUMENTS:

FY 2016-17 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Curbs,Concrete Pavement and Sidewalks

Erosion Control and Water Quality

Curb & Curb and Gutter

Curb Return Profiles

Detectable Warnings and Sidewalk Curb Ramps

Concrete Pavement Joints

Bridge Approach Expansion Joint -Concrete Pavement

Permanent Erosion Control

Miscellaneous Utility Details

Shoulder Sodding and Turf on Existing Facilities

Concrete Slab Replacement

Structure Bottoms -Type J and P

Sight Distance at Intersections

Traffic Control Through Work Zones

GeneralInformation for Traffic ControlThrough Work Zones

Two-Lane,Two-Way,Work Outside Shoulder

Two-Lane,Two-Way,Work Within The TravelWay

Two-Lane,Two-Way,Work Near Intersection

Two-Lane,Two-Way,Work Within the TravelWay -SignalControl

Two-Lane,Two-Way,Mobile Operation,Work On Shoulder and

GuardrailTransitions and Connections for Existing Bridges

Curb Inlet Tops -Types 1,2,3 and 4

GuardrailTransitions -Existing Post& Beam Bridge Railings

Curb Inlet Tops -Types 5 and 6

Curb Inlet -Type 7

Curb Inlet -Type 8

Curb Inlet Top -Type 9

Curb Inlet Top -Type 10

Closed Flume Inlet

Median Barrier Inlets Types 1,2,3,4 and 5

Concrete Barrier WallInlet

Gutter Inlet -Type S

Traffic Railing -(Median 32" F Shape)

Gutter Inlet -Type V

Traffic Railing -(42" VerticalShape)

Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type A

Traffic Railing -(32" VerticalShape)

Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type B

Traffic Railing -(CorralShape)

Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type C,D,E and H

Traffic Railing -(42" F Shape)

Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type F and G

Crash Cushion Details

Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type J

Ditch Bottom Inlet -Type K

Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit) GeneralNote & Details

Skimmer For Outlet ControlStructures

Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit)Narrow Curb

Skimmers For French-Drain Outlets

Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit)Wide Strong Curb Type 1

Underdrain Inspection Box

Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit)Wide Strong Curb Type 2

Straight Concrete Endwalls -Single And Multiple Pipe

Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit) Intermediate Curb

Straight Concrete Endwalls -Single And Double 60"Pipe

Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit)Wide Curb Type 1

Straight Concrete Endwalls -Single And Double 66"Pipe

Traffic Railing-(Thrie Beam Retrofit)Wide Curb Type 2

Straight Concrete Endwalls -Single And Double 72"Pipe

Thrie-Beam PanelRetrofit (Concrete Handrail)